-THE- 
 
 -JOHN -FRYER* 
 -CHINESE -LIBRARY 
 
 NON-CIRCULATING 
 

OLLENDORtfFS 
 
 NEW METHOD 
 
 OF LEARNING TO 
 
 READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 
 
 zw MeiVjTtyf Lea ft nitre 
 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE: 
 
 THE LESSONS 
 
 DIVIDED INTO SECTIONS OP A PROPER LENGTH FOR D.MIA 
 
 TASKS, AND NU31ROUS CORRECTIONS, ADDITIONS, AND 
 
 IMPROVEMENTS, SUITABLE FOR THIS COUNTRY. 
 
 BY V. VALUE. 
 
 TO WHICH AR& ADDED 
 
 VALUE'S SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRONUNCIATION, 
 
 HIS GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, A NEW INDEX, 
 
 AND SHOUT MODELS OF 
 
 COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE, 
 
 NEW YOKE: 
 D. A PPL ETON AND COMPANY, 
 
 549 & 551 BROADWAY. 
 1874. 
 
MAIN LIBRARY 
 
 JOHN FRYER 
 
 CHINESE LIBRARY 
 
 Entered, accoxdiiig to the Act of Congress, m the year 165*1, by 
 D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 
 
 in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for tho Southern 
 District of New York. 
 
 NOTICE. A KEY to the Exercises of this Grammar is pub- 
 in a separate volume. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Ix undertaking to edit an improved edition of OLLENDORFF'S FRENCH 
 GRAMMAR, I may be allowed to state my personal familiarity and 
 experience with the system which I have practically taught for many 
 years. However, as the Method is called a New Method; if it deserves 
 that title, its active principle must differ from that of the old mode 
 of tuition, and consequently any one, let him be ever so talented, 
 who, without being well acquainted with its modus operandi, would 
 attempt to correct, improve, or compose a work based on that princi- 
 ple, would be as likely to fail, as an experienced stage-driver would 
 be, if he were to endeavor to take the management of a steam or loco- 
 motive engine. It is then incumbent on me to show that "I am fully 
 acquainted with the fundamental principle of that New Method. 
 
 In 1832, before the publication of OllendoriFs or Manesca's System, 
 I published a pamphlet entitled " Experience Consulted; or V. Value's 
 System for teaching Modern Languages." At page 3 of the introduc 
 tion, is this passage : 
 
 "Wo will merely notice that the principle which furnishes the stu- 
 dent with the means, from the first lesson, of forming his own sentences, 
 or, in other words, of making an immediate and continued use of the words 
 he Uarns, so as to speak, will appear new to the public, although it has 
 fore been acted upon for many years." 
 
 At page 5, will be found : 
 
 " Since the means ought always to be made subservient to the end 
 in view, and since immediate is in direct opposition to postponed use, we 
 must reverse the practice usually adopted, and consequently furnish 
 the student with words susceptible of inter-combinations, instead of 
 teaching him such as, not being combinable together, cannot be incor- 
 porated into the same sentence, and must, of course, render his efforts 
 entirely fruitless.'* 
 
 This is what Ollendorff has practically carried out; and, as I have 
 long used his system, its details are perfectly familiar to me. 
 
 The difference in the extent of the lessons cannot have escaped the 
 notice of teachers and scholars who have practically used the worn* 
 Tho 1st, 2d, and 3d are of a proper length for one recitation, 3veu 
 
 751666 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 7/ith an ordinary capacity ; but from the 4th they begin to assume o 
 Bize that makes it difficult to learn one, at a single lesson. True, a 
 part only of a lesson may be assigned as a task, but the teacher must 
 then daily ascertain the extent of the lesson, in order to portion it 
 according to the capacity of his class. With a private scholar, even 
 with a private class, that may be done without much inconvenience ; 
 but the case is different when applied to classes in schools, where 
 more regularity and uniformity are required, and where, the scholars 
 having to pass quickly from one study to another, have no time allowed 
 for measuring the fractional part they ought to have for the next reci- 
 tation. With the view of remedying this serious objection, the equali- 
 zation of the lessons was thought expedient. 
 
 To divide each long lesson into two, three, or four small ones, would 
 in a great measure have destroyed the unity whi-ch characterizes each 
 particular and successive lesson in the book. This was thought objec- 
 tionable ; and hence the idea of dividing each lesson, according to its 
 length, into two, three, or four sections, so as to obtain the equaliza- 
 tion of the parts without destroying the unity of the whole. 
 
 It is what has been accomplished, and which is. now presented to the 
 American public. '< 
 
 One of the strongest proofs that can be adduced of the superiority 
 of the principle here followed is that, in spite of the numerous faults, 
 inaccuracies, defects, omissions, and errors with which the former book 
 is teeming, scholars learn, and learn well. The half of those errors 
 would destroy the reputation of any other grammar or method, was 
 not the fundamental principle so self-efficient. Those defects are like 
 grades on a railroad: they may partially impede the way, but the 
 moving power of the engine easily overcomes them. We will notice a 
 few of them. At page 24, we find : 
 This or that ox. This or that hay. | Ce bceuf. Ce foin. 
 
 As the three words this or that are translated by ce alone, it is very 
 natural that the student should, in the fourteenth line of the 13th 
 Exercise, translate "Has the peasant this or that ox?" by "Le paysan 
 a-t-il ce bceuf?" and nothing more ; and the answer, " He has neither 
 this nor that," by " II n'a ni ce," without adding anything else. 
 
 This is one of those results that experience alone can teacn and 
 record ; and which no reasoning a priori could suggest. At the same 
 time it shows how carefully we must weigh 'and analyse the expres- 
 sions, offered to the learner. For, in this instance, the error came not 
 from any fault of his ; but solely from the combination of the three 
 words this or that being carelessly translated by ce. To obviate the 
 difficulty, say: this, that ce; this, that ox ce bceuf. And then, when 
 he comes to : this or that ox, he cannot possibly translate by ce bceuf 
 alone, but he will use Ce bceuf-ci ou celui-lti, &c. Some may consider 
 
PREFACE. ^ 
 
 this as a trifle. So it is ; but the teacher's or author's business is to 
 give right direetioiis. Below will be found a few of Ollendorff's 
 defects. 1 
 
 The e grave has purposely been placed on the e of sitye, privilege, c., 
 to conform to the pronunciation; although, from mere hat it or whim, 
 those words usually have an acute accent, (siege.) 
 
 Seme have found fault, because the feminine was not introduced 
 before the 5th Lesson; but experience proves it to be one of the hap- 
 piest innovations in the Method. 
 
 The mannsr here adopted, of forming the subjunctive present from 
 the third pereon plural of the indicative present, and of placing thftt 
 third person plural at the bead of the tense, will have a tendency to 
 make the acquisition of the tense much more easy. For instance : 
 Boivent, boive, boives, boive, being pronouncei in the same way, may 
 be considered as a single word, already known to the student, (since it 
 is the third person plural of the indicative present,) and the first and 
 second persons plural being similar to those of the imperfect, the pupil 
 has in fact nothing new to learn. He actually knows the tense before 
 he conies to it. 
 
 A great portion of the difficulties attending the subjunctive, arise from 
 the manner of presenting that mood, in the conjugations intended to teach 
 French to the Americans. It is one of the most inaccurate and deficient 
 of all grammars. From its nature, the subjunctive being subser- 
 
 1 >\' page 22, we find personne and ne separated by a hyphen (-) wrong. 
 
 30. Porte-feuille, no directions anywhere how to form the plural of 
 
 compound nouns of this class. 
 
 73. What, nominative, que : it should be qu'est-ce qvi? (A'j trifle.) 
 73. Obs. B. wrong. 60. To, with whom, for, to whose house : chezqui. 
 00. Soldier in 71st Exercise, the French given only at 160. 
 KH. Do and AM. for all persons and tenses, should be for the present 
 
 tense. 
 
 112. Obs. A. wrong, because the preposition does not belong to the se- 
 cond, but to the first verb. The list there given by Ollendorff 
 is transferred to the Synopsis, because the verbs not being 
 introduced in the exercises, uselessly encumber the lesson. 
 '13, 119. Rules on the past participles, not fully explained. The word 
 object, applied both to le, les, and en, show that the author was 
 not aware of their difference in French. 
 IIS, 141. How long. No explanation, so that the pupil is constantly at a 
 
 loss. 
 
 169. Je, me, (separated.) Wrong; they should l>e connected. 
 183. Rule on the future and note below, wrong. 199. Obs. E. defective. 
 5K)8. 5th and 6th line of Exercise : Has he already kept something from 
 you? wrongly translated by A-t-il dja gardk quelque ckose t?6 
 vous ? 
 
 245. Obs. A. not correct. 273. Obs. A. wrong. 325. Obs. A. wrong 
 389. II s'en faut beaucoup, a knotty point uselessly presented to the 
 student, who can already trans.ate in several ways tl'O ques- 
 tion* there askel, &c. &c 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 vient to, or governed by an antecedent, can separately have no speciiifc 
 meaning, and ought consequently never to be used by itself. Now, as 
 in grammars, the subjunctive is mostly given by itself, independently 
 of the governing expression, it follows that the English translation 
 attached to it, is calculated to lead into numerous errors. Let ua 
 select a few examples. In the verb, to have, avoir ; to know, savoir ; 
 to go, aller ; the subjunctive present Is in all grammars, and in Ollen- 
 dorff's also, given thus : que faie, that I may have; que je sache, that 1 
 may know; que faille, that I may go; and as the English is the 
 prototype of the French, the student must necessarily connect the 
 idea of the French subjunctive with that I may, and with no other 
 English. Hence the phrases, William says that I may have his dic- 
 tionary ;. She says that I may know my lesson; He thinks that I may 
 go ; having each the English that I may, which is intimately linked in 
 the student's mind with the French subjunctive, must inevitably lead 
 him to use that mood, and translate by, Guillaume dit que faie son 
 dictionnaire ; Elle dit que je sache ma Ie9on; II croit que faille. And 
 such translations would hardly be understood by the very authors of 
 the grammars, if unconnected with the English, Now, such modes of 
 expression abound in English : what an inexhaustible source of mis- 
 takes ! ! But this is not all ; it is only one side of the medal ; let us 
 see the reverse. The French subjunctive being connected exclusively 
 with that I may, will never be thought of, when this prototype does not 
 constitute a part of the English phrase: consequently; / must have; 
 unless I know ; he wishes me to go ; cannot by the student be translated 
 by the French subjunctive mood ; for they do not remind him of his 
 English prototype, that I may, which alone can recall the idea of the 
 French subjunctive. Here, then, is another source of innumerable 
 errors. What a sad dilemma is then presented to the student ! Both 
 the presence and the absence of his prototype mislead his steps. He 
 is in an intricate labyrinth, and there is no Ariadne to furnish him 
 with a clew to escape. 
 
 The unpleasant dilemma in which the student is involved, is avoided 
 by always presenting the subjunctive mood, as I do, in connexion with 
 the expression by which it is governed. 
 
 All those defects and many others have oeen rectified. The Gram- 
 matical Synopsis will be found to contain many useful explanations, 
 the result of experience. The Preterit, Conditionnel, Imperative, Sub- 
 junctive, the Reflected Verbs, the Negations, are new and important 
 articles. It was thought preferable to transfer into the Synopsis many 
 of the rules and directions given in the body of Ollendorff's work, so 
 as to have under the same head everything relating to the subject it 
 treats of. 
 
 V VALUE. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Preface Pago iii 
 
 System of Pronunciation . . . ix 
 
 Directions for using the Method ... xxiii 
 
 Explanation of the Signs used in thJs book . . ... xxlv 
 
 Lessons 1 to 86 25-456 
 
 Grammatical Synopsis . . 457 
 
 Recueil fipistolaire . . 539. 
 
 Index , . 547 
 
 Idiomatical Expressions .... ,575 
 
 m 
 

Directions for using V. VALUE'S SYSTEM OF FRENCH Puo 
 NUNCIATION, ~by which an accurate knowledge of the sound* 
 of that Lanyuaye may le acquired in a few Lessons 
 
 AFTER READING TIIE DEFINITION OF VOWELS. 
 
 Teacher. Please to pronounce the English word, add. 
 
 Student pronounces it. 
 
 T. "What is the sound of the letter a in that word? 
 
 S. gives it, if he can. If he does not give it correctly, the teacher 
 does it, and tells him to dwell on the sound ; as, aaaa-d, and finally 
 ai/a . . . alone, so as to abstract the sound of the vowel a. When done 
 
 T. This is the sound of the French letter a, marked 1 on the 1st 
 column, nn:i, a. 
 
 S. repeats the prolonged sound. 
 
 T. Whenever you wish to ascertain the French sound, marked 1 
 (one), you must recur to the English word add, and you cannot miss it. 
 
 S. repeats the word, prolongs the sound aaa, and abstracts it, a. 
 
 T. The sound of a (with a circunitlex accent), marked I 2 (one two, 
 to show that it is the second sound of the same letter #), is found in 
 the word far . .fmta-r . . . a. Pronounce the word, dwell upon the vowel 
 sound, and abstract it. 
 
 S. tries to do it. If he docs not succeed, the teacher must go 
 through the same process as for the a of add. When done 
 
 T. In what English word do you find the French sound marked 1 
 (one) ? S. gives it. 
 
 T. What is the sound ? S. gives it. 
 
 T. How is it represented ? S. By the letter </, in add. 
 
 T. In what word do you find I 2 (one two) ? S. gives it. 
 
 I 7 . What is the sound? S. gives it. 
 
 T. How is it represented ? S. By the letter </, with a circumflex. 
 
 T. What is the last sound in the word take ? 
 
 S. tries to give it. If he cannot, the teacher- will do it, and tell 
 him to dwell on the sound e e e ta-ke-e e e. This is in fact the sound 
 heard at the end of every English consonant sounded. The name of 
 this letter (k) is kay ; but its sound in bank, for instance, is not bankay, 
 but bank e e, ending with a prolonged mute sound, which is exactly 
 the sound of the French mute e. It is a very important sound with 
 them; it is marked 2 (little two), to indicate its faintness. 
 
 The cough sound, as I have called it (marked 2), is that heard iu 
 the French words pen, deux. If, in coughing, both teacher and pupil 
 get that sound, it will be secured ; but if they do not, then the teacher 
 
 (9) 
 
X FRENCH PRONUNCIATION 
 
 must make him pronounce either deux or pen, and make him refer th 
 sound to the word he pronounces best, and retain the word as a model. 
 
 The letter u t marked 6, represents the sound heard immediatelj 
 after s, in sweet, as it is usually pronounced by Americans. However, 
 some say sooeet. With those, the teacher must devise some way -to 
 make them pronounce the u properly. 
 
 The French nasal sounds are not difficult to acquire ; for the Ameri- 
 cans have many words in which they give to an, in, on, un, the eamc 
 sound as the French do ; but, in general, they end it by dwelling 
 separately on the n, while the French never do. "With the latter it is 
 a simple or a vowel sound ; with the former, a compound one. For 
 'instance, the English combination in is pronounced ee-n, having 
 nothing of a nasal nature at the beginning, but ending with the full 
 nasal sound of n, thus presenting two distinct parts, while the French 
 in has but one sound, as heard in the ain of faint, or en of pent. So 
 that, to pronounce the French nasal sound properly, ycu must retain 
 throughout the sound you begin with, and not dwell separately on 
 the n. 
 
 ON DIVIDING AND MARKING WORDS. 
 
 There are, at pages xv, xvi, xvii, xviii, words given to be divided into 
 syllables, and to be marked. When the pupil has learned as far as 
 the words to be divided, (page xv, a very important one,) let him, ou 
 some paper or a slate, divide the first word thus : fi-ni, saying men- 
 tally, the first syllable must be FI, in order to end in a vowel sound, and 
 because the N being followed by the vowel, I must go with it ; the second 
 syllable is ni. The vowel sound of the first is i, like the e in be, 
 marked 4, which is to be put under fi. The vowel sound of the second 
 is also 4 ; so that the word divided and marked will assume this form : 
 fi-ni. The second, me-nd, &c. 
 44 2 3 
 
 Let the pupil take but one line here at a time ; then proceed with the 
 lules at xv and xvi, dividing and marking the few words they contain 
 as examples, until he comes to the paragraph (page xvi) of words to 
 be divided and marked, then he must take one line of them, with the 
 one at page xv. When, in going through the other rules, at xvi and 
 xvii, he comes to the paragraph of words (p. xvii) to be divided, let 
 him take one line there also, with those at xv, xvi, &c. This gradual 
 progress by line is essential ; for, the words to be divided and marked, 
 although intended to exemplify the rules under particular heads, 
 contain rules belonging to other sections, which the student is thug 
 enabled to reach just in time to divide and mark them correctly. 
 
 I have said, one line at a time ; but, although the progress must be 
 gradual, it must vary according to the aptness of the class or scholar; 
 for, in some instances, two lines will hardly be enough ; while, in 
 others, three words would be too much. The teacher must be guided 
 by circumstances. 
 
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 
 BY V. VALUE 
 
 VOWELS are simple 
 ghange in the position 
 
 The Frencli 
 1 a sounds 
 I 2 ft 
 
 2 
 
 e 
 
 as e 
 
 2 
 
 eu* 
 
 as th 
 
 2 2 
 
 eu 
 
 as u 
 
 3 
 
 6 (acute) 
 
 as a 
 
 3 2 
 
 ( I (grave) | 
 \ 2 (circumflex) / 
 
 as e 
 
 4 
 
 i 
 
 as e 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 as o 
 
 5* 
 
 
 
 as o 
 
 6 
 
 i< 
 
 as 
 
 7 
 
 ou 
 
 as oo 
 
 8 
 
 an, en 
 
 as an 
 
 9 
 
 in 
 
 as air 
 
 10 
 
 on 
 
 as on 
 
 11 
 
 un 
 
 as wra 
 
 TABLE I. Vote el Sounds. 
 
 sounds, which can be lengthened without 
 of the organs that produce them. 
 
 Other combinationa. 
 as a in add it, ca. 
 
 as a in far eft. 
 
 at end of tak<?. 
 as the cough sound y cu, ocu. 
 
 in bttd 
 
 in gate 
 
 in get 
 
 in be 
 in no 
 in nor 
 in sweet 
 in good 
 in warzt 
 
 i { 
 f I eii, ecu, eu, rcu, 03. 
 
 ai, ci, (cr, ez, final.) 
 
 rai, ci, (cr, 
 
 A 1 
 
 tl ai> ai> e i. 
 
 i, y ( grec). 
 
 6, au, eau, eo, eo. 
 
 6, au, eau, eo, eo. 
 
 u, u, (eu, in avoir.) 
 
 ou, oii: 
 
 am, em, en, aon. 
 
 f im, in, aim, ain, ein, ym, 
 
 in wowt 
 in grunt 
 
 yn (EX, final.) 
 om, eon. 
 um, eun. 
 
 TABLE II. Two Irregular Diphthongs. 
 
 12. oi sounds like wa in water or (ou+a) (7-j-l 2 ) ot. 
 
 13. oin sounds like warn in quaint or (ou-J-in) (7-f-9). 
 
 They are irregular, because in those combinations the i and the <? 
 change their primitive sounds. As in regular diphthongs each vowel 
 retains its proper sound, they offer no difficulty. 
 
 * There is in pew, deux, heureux, vceux, &c., a sound of French w, au, tliat ha 
 bo representation in English, except the guttural eound heard in coughing ; heugh ! 
 hsugh! (if BO spelt.) It is between the u of budge and the final e of the sanif 
 l^ord. In French it is not guttural, and not difficult to sound. 
 
 t Rules wLl bo given to determine the sound of these combinations. 
 
 11 
 
Xll FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Every French sound having a representative in an English word, H 
 is evident that the mere recollection of the English word secures tha 
 pronunciation of the French sound, and secures it effectually ; for the 
 scholar is, expected -to be ?or.rect in the utterance of his own language- 
 (See Appendix, Note i.) , 
 
 TAIL'S III. 'French dons-oncnttS differing in Sound from the English 
 
 14. $ (with a cedilla) like s before a, o, u sa, so, su. 
 16. eh, in French words, like sh in sAow. 
 
 16. gn sounds like the gn of miywonette. 
 
 17. il, ill (when liquid), sounds like Hi, of bri^z'ant. 
 
 18. j (and g, which is ALWAYS soft before e, i, and ?/), Hie 2, in azure 
 
 19. qu like k, gu like g at the end of %. ' 
 
 20. s like z, when single and between two vowels, rose, nose. 
 
 21. th sounds ALWAYS like t alone. 
 
 92,. tij when in English they sound like sh (as in r i^on, patfent, &c.), 
 sound in French like the English word see. 
 
 TABLE IV. Consonant Letters. 
 
 Consonants have no sound without the help of a vowel. Such is the 
 definition ; yet, in the word abstract, the b, the s, the t, and the r, c., 
 are each sounded, and sounded respectively as b in tu&e; as s in base ; 
 as t in rate ; and as r in glare ; or else, as if connected with the faint 
 or mute French e, or e at the end of take. So that, any consonant 
 Bounded by itself, or at the end of a word, is supposed to be connected 
 with the mute or. faint c. 
 
 Each consonant, in French, as in English, has a SOUND differing 
 from its NAMK. This distinction is important. Although the French 
 names will be found in this table, yet the student is invited, particu- 
 larly at first, to use the English names, bee, cee, dee, &c., or else the 
 final sound of the English consonants, b, c, d, f, g, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, 
 p, qu, r, s, t, v, x, z. 
 6 (bay), as in English at the end of mob. 
 
 1 I 2 2 2 22 3- 3 2 4 o 5 2 6 7 89 10 11 12 13 
 ba, ba, be, beu, beu, be, be, bi, bo, bo, bu, bou, ban, bin ; bon, bun. ooi, bom, 
 *e (say), hard before a, o, u, as the English k in ban/r. 
 ca, ca co, co, cu, cou, can, con, cun, coi. coin, 
 
 c (say), soft, ahvays before e, i, y, like s in so. 
 
 ce, ceu, ceu, ce, ce, ci, cy, cin. 
 
 v (say), hard, as A; before a consonant or at the end of a word. Ao, 
 civ., ere, creu, creu, cl6, cle, cti, oc, cdo, ctu, clou, cran. crin, 
 clpi, cloin. 
 
 |f (with a cedilla), only before a, o, u, like s in 50, instead of k. 99^ 
 9a, ce, ceu, ce, ce, ci, 90, cu, 9ou, 9an, cin, 9on, 9im, 901, $oin. 
 
 *c, ir. fecond and its compounds, sounds like g hard segon, ^occndaire, & 
 able III. 
 
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. X1U 
 
 *t'/ (say, ash), like sh in show, cha, cha, che, cheu, cheu, ch.6, chb, 
 clii, cho, chu, chou, chan, chin, chon, chun choi, choin. 
 
 d 'day), as in English at the end of larf. Note. Mien final, it sound* 
 like t, if united to the following initial vowel ; as grand ami, pro- 
 nounced gran tami da, da, de, &c. 
 
 ( as in English in proof. Note. In nenf (9) it sounds 
 
 /(eff), \ like v, if joined with the following vowel; as neuf 
 
 fh (pay, ash), \ hoyimcs, pronounced, neu-vom ph, does not fa, .fa, 
 V, fe, feu, &c. 
 
 g (zhay,) hard, ALWAYS before a, o, u, or a consonant, like g hard in 
 the English word ba# garde, fagot, figure, gloire. Note. When 
 final, like k, if joined to the following vowel; as, rang honorable 
 pronounced, ran-kpnorable. ga, ga, go, go, gu, gou, gan, gon, 
 gun goi, goin. 
 
 *y (zhay), ALWAYS soft before e, i, y, like z in azure gea, gea, ge, 
 geu, geu, ge, ge, gi, geo, geo, geou, gean gin, gecn, geun 
 geoi, geoin. 
 
 *gn (zhay, enu), like gn in mignonette. Note. If g and n are separated, 
 they sound as in English in magna, mag-na. 
 
 *yu, like g hard. The u is usually silent. 
 
 h (ash). This letter, at the beginning of words, is called either mutt 
 or aspirated ; but it is never sounded. The word .aspirated usually 
 leads the English student to think that the h in French must have 
 the same guttural sound as in English ; but that is not the case. 
 When aspirated in French the h, without being pronounced, pre- 
 vents the elision or cutting off of the preceding vowel. For instance, 
 the h being aspirated in the French word heros (hero), you must 
 write le heros (the hero), and pronounce le ero in two words. On 
 the contrary, when the h is mute, you write Vhomme (tbe man) and 
 pronounce Z'om, in one word. But in both cases the h is entirely 
 silent ha, ha, he, heu, &c. 
 
 *j (zhee), always soft, like z in a~ure, joujou ja, ju, je, jeu, &c. 
 
 k (kah), as k in English at the e*id of pac& ka, ka, ke, c. 
 
 c/i (say, ash), when followed by a consonant, like /<, as in English 
 Christ. Note. It is usually in words of foreign origin. 
 
 I (ell), as in English, when not liquid, as in untz'Z. La, la, le, &c. 
 
 *l (ell mouille), liquid, always written il, ill, sounds like the Hi of t\ 
 English word briWzant. Examples : Ail, aille, paille, veille, fillo, 
 juillet, ceil. Ilia, ilia, ille, illeu, illeu, ille, ille, illo, illo, ilia, 
 illou, illan, illan, illin, illon, illun, illoi, illoin. 
 
 K (emm), ) as in English, when not combined with the preceding vow: 
 
 9 (enn), / sound, as in clam, din ma, me, mo, &c. 
 
 * See Table III. 
 
XIV FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 P (P a 7)> as m English in pump. Note. Silent after m, when they aid 
 
 in the same syllable, as pro??ipt, temps. Pa, pa, &c. 
 q (ku), as in English like k. 
 o[u (ku-u), like the English k, not thje English qu, as quxnd, kan ; qu^ 
 
 kee, not kwee. Do not mark qu 6, and f 4, but qui (4) ; qua, qua, 
 
 que, queu, queu, que', que, qui, quo, quo, qu, quou, quan, quin 
 
 quon, qu'un, quoi, quoin. 
 
 r (air), as in English in roar strongly articulated ra, ra, ie, &c. 
 tf (sss), hard, like s in so. 
 
 1st. At the beginning of words, as sage. 
 
 2d. When final and pronounced, as atlas, moeurs. 
 
 3d. When doubled, as passer, possession. 
 
 4th. Single and preceded by another consonant; as ccnscrvcr, 
 absolu, observation. Note. Although the English s fre- 
 quently sounds like a z, after the letter b, as in absolve, 
 observe, c., it does not in French; sa, sa, se, &c. 
 *s (ess), soft or like z, when single and between two vowels, as platsant, 
 
 rose. Note. When final, if joined to the following vowel, it sounds 
 
 like z ; as Us o?it, eelzon,-j- &c. ; asa, ase, aseu, ase, ase, asi, iso, 
 
 iso, isu, isou, esan, esin, eson, asun, usoi, u&oin. 
 t (tay), as in English in fa. ta, ta,, te, teu, teu, &c. 
 *ti (tay ee). Note. When the ti, in English, sounds like s/?, as in 
 
 nation, patient, minutix, the French ti sounds like see in English. 
 
 Examples : Naft'on, parent, minufc'e, tia, tia, tie, c. 
 *th (tay, ash), like the English initial t. Examples : Italic, Mefitre, 
 
 tha, tha, the, thcu, theu, the', the, &c. 
 
 v (vay), as in English at the end of drive va, va, ve, veu, &c. 
 w (do:ble vay), as v, or as the vowel ou (7th.) 
 
 k ks & 
 
 % (eeks), like k, ks, gz, s, z ; as ezcepter, extreme, e-rercicc, Bruzelles 
 
 (Brussels), sizieme. 
 7 (zed), as in phiz. Examples : Zone, azur, amazone. 
 
 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 
 
 This is a very important exercise, and one which should be daily 
 practised for a considerable time, and now and then renewed. 
 
 In dividing the words, attend to the combination of letters in Tables 
 I., II., III. For instance, in the word hautement, the combination au, 
 *>emg at No. 5 in Table I., take them together and mark them 5 2 . In 
 Lua, the combination ua not being in the table, separate them into t 
 ftii-i a, and mark them G and 1. So with oi, winch being in Tab!e II. 
 
 * See Table III. 
 
 f And sometimes before ra, as enthousiasme, mesmerisme 
 
 
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XV 
 
 Is marked lli, whilst to must be separated, because that combination 
 is not in the tables. Ai, in the table ; ia, not in, c. 
 
 The apostrophe (') is used to connect two words into one, and takea 
 the place of a vowel suppressed before another. L'cau sounds just 
 like lo; qu y avez-vous? like kahvayvoo. 
 
 The END OF ANY SYLLABLE must be a vowel sound. This is an aU~ 
 important direction. Note. A vowel sound may (as is the case with an, 
 en, in, on, oin, c.) end with a consonant letter. 
 
 A consonant, when final or sounded by itself, is supposed to form a 
 compound syllable with the mute or faint e. So chef is separated into 
 che-fe ; avec into a-ve-ke ; fl into fi-le ; ver into ve-re ; portc into 
 po-r-te. Hence each consonant is marked 2 from the faint e. 
 
 m or n, mm or nn, followed by a vowel, goes with it; if not, it goes 
 with the preceding. Image, separates into i-ma-gc, and not as in Eng- 
 lish (irn-age). Note, k after n is always null. Inherent separates into 
 i-nhe-rent, (the h being mute, is null in inherent;) inhumain, becomes 
 i-nhu-main ; inhumainc, i-nhu-mai-ne. 
 
 Divide and mark : Fiui, mcne, proincnc, amene, ananas. ITomme 
 
 becomes ho-mine ; donne, do-nne" ; commc, commune, commere, connu, 
 
 u6, pommc', adonna, ronde, campagnc, enfant, son, mon, pardon, 
 
 parfum, instrument, conirnun, commence, innocent, incui, inhabit^, 
 
 continental, inharmonieux, immobility. 
 
 A final consonant having no vowel connected with it, ought, from its 
 definition, to be silent. It is so in French. Hence it is united to the last 
 syllable, or to a monosyllable ; as, avant becomes a-vant the final t 
 being silent goes with van, so as to make vant ; four letters, although 
 but three (van) are pronounced. In the French word port the four 
 letters are taken, although only por are pronounced ; but porte becomes 
 vor-te, because the last e causes the t to sound. 
 
 Divide and mark: Comment, dents, prudent, prudeute, camp, 
 temps, nid, pied. (4-fr-3.) 
 
 RULE. Final consonants are silent, except c, /, Z, and r preceded by 
 ft, i, o, u. Sac, avec, lac, vif, actif, sel, miel, fil, car, par, finir, cor, 
 leur, auteur. See Appendix, Note 
 
 RULES OX FRENCH E. 
 Letters and Combinations, marked 2 (little two), and pronounced like ike e at . 
 
 the end of take.* 
 
 Any sound marked 2 (little two) is in French called mute or faint ; 
 t (without accent) is mute or faint, in the following cases. 
 Rule 1st. e 2 at the end of words, as ce, de, traite, pere, 
 
 This is the only vowel sound that is slighted or suppressed in Frencha. 
 a u, &c., h-ivo always their full sounds. 
 
KV1 FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 " Rule 2d. e, * before a single consonant not final, (except the con 
 Bonant x, which has usually a compound sound.) Venu, deran^ 
 recevoir, Fernando, redemande. 
 
 Rule 3d. c= 2 before two consonants, the second of which is I, or r; 
 as in replace, represente, secretement, repliant. 
 
 Rule 4th. es= 2 at the end of words of more than one syllable, aa 
 Bibles, * places, dites, faites. 
 
 Rule 5th. ent= 2 at the end of the third person plural of verbs ; as 
 chanted, ils jouerc^, ils disaiewZ. When immediately after a vowel, with- 
 out any intervening consonant, they merely lengthen the preceding 
 vowel sound. 
 
 R-ule 6th. 2 is placed over a consonant sounded by itself, either in 
 the body or at the end of a word, for the e mute is supposed connected 
 with it. Examples: pour, pou-r; corde, co-r-de; fil, fi-1; soldat, 
 so-l-dat. 
 
 Observation. E is null, and therefore not marked, when, WITHOUT 
 AN ACCENT, it is before a and o, as George, nageait. It is frequently 
 so in English, as George, pageant, dungeon. It is thus placed to soften 
 the g. When pronounced in French, the 6 is accented. 
 
 These constitute what the French call mute syllables. 
 
 Divide and mark: Le, me, que, tete, habite, eleve, montagne, revenu,- 
 revenant, devoir, repos, repose, reposant, celui, retire, retire, cede, 
 cede, accable, devant, replace, repla^ant, repli, replie, une, moine, 
 moins, prenant, refuse, tu refuses, vie, lui, joue*, jou^e, petit, petite, 
 il entre, ils entrent (3d pers. pi.) montagnes, ils replacent (3d), voies, 
 Sieves, ils prient (3d), ils disent (3d), poindre, mangea, mangeanres 
 Georgie, col, protocol, sel, chef, il, foin, cordial, plongea, seul, pararol 
 
 IMPORTANT REMARK ON E MUTE. 
 
 When e without accent is mute or faint, it invariably (we may evev 
 eay universally) lengthens the preceding syllable. 
 
 In French, in the following cases, it does not merely lengthen, but if 
 likewise alters the sound of the preceding vowel. 
 
 </, eft, before a mute syllable, is open and marked I 2 : male. 
 
 e, before a mute syllable, usually takes the grave or circumflex 
 accent, and is marked 3 2 or e open : pere, mere, meme. 
 
 ai, ai } ei, before a mute syllable, are marked 3 2 : aime, connaitre. 
 pcine. 
 
 0, o, au, eau, before a mute syllable, 5 2 : p^riode, cote, hawte. 
 
 <w- = 2 2 , before a mute syllable: riewse, mewte.f 
 
 The same vowel sounds, viz: a,^e, ai, c., o, &c., eu, are open and 
 marked in the same manner, before two or more consonants; as, apro, 
 
 * See AppenJix, Note 3. | See Apper Six , Note 4 
 
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XVfi 
 
 ferine, paraitre, faiblc, autre, noble, heurtc. And likewise before a 
 final consonant sounded: ver, fer, air, chef, cor, parasol, leur, seuL 
 Because, in both cases, the following consonant is supposed to be Con- 
 nected with the e mute or faint, and may be considered as forming a 
 mute syllable : ve-re, fe-re, ai-re, che-fe, co-re, &c. In these two last 
 situations (before two or more consonants and before a final consonant 
 sounded) the e takes no accent, though marked 3 2 . 
 
 Divide and mark: Changea, changeames, ane, hate, diademe, brcf, 
 plonge*, plongerent (3d), frere, nagea, nageates, leve, promene, prome- 
 fiera, supreme, rieur, rieuse, haut, haute, cote*, cote, cotes, "ose, relief, 
 ose', saut, saute, osant, gueux, gueuse, saut6, sonne, sonnd, liberte, 
 fameux, fameuse, faible, heureux, heureuse, espoir, aube, ode, odeur, 
 preneur, preneuse, sel, mer, sec, bonheur, malheur, Sieves, gloire, 
 mouvoir, 6gale, 6gales, e*gout, retirent (3d), seche, sec, compagnes, 
 tfgalera, entreprises, replantent (3d), bonnes, e*galerent, mangeates, 
 petites, pour, mer, noircir, George, lient (3d), jouent (3d), cencounr, 
 foui, fouine, neige, neigea, voient (3d), bel, beau, belle, vendent (3d), 
 vendant, content, content (3d), neigeant, plongea, replongerent'(3d), 
 diagonal, replient (3d), moindre. 
 
 Letters and Combinations marked 3, and pronounced like a in gate, or 
 (close or with acute accent.) 
 
 Rule 1st. I (with acute accent) called e close, is marked 3. 
 
 Rule 2d. e = 3 in the conjunction ct (and). The t is never sounded, 
 and never connected with the following initial vowel : un et un (un 6* 
 un) ; et enfin (d enfin). 
 
 Rule 3d. c = 3 before cc, dd, ff, or any other double consonants noi 
 followed by a mute syllable : effacer, dessin, reddition, excellent, terri- 
 toire, paresseux. 
 
 Rule 4th. e = 3 in ex followed by a vowel: ezact, mger. The a 
 sounds then like gz, egzact, egzigc. 
 
 R-ule 5th. ez = 3 when final, or taken in combination at the end of 
 words ; as avez, prenez, nez. 
 
 Rule 6th. cr=3, when final, in words of more than one syllable; 
 and then the r is never sounded, as parZer, pommier.* 
 
 Rule 7th. ai, eat, ei=B, when not followed by a mute syllable, and 
 likewise when final: J'az, aimer, to love aimons, let us love je man- 
 geai, I ate perne", grieved gai, gay. 
 
 Divide and mark the following words : Et, e'-te' ; all<5, a-lle ; e'carte', 
 horde*, chante*, repe'te', de*cide*, pile*, peignd, et, trois et un, errant, 
 erronne*, cccl6siastique, efface, errata, exage*rer, effacer, exactement, 
 easai, ^carter, (icartez, effort, bouchez, bouches, exister, cxlstez, exi^ 
 
 k See Appendix, Note 5. 
 
XVI 1 1 FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 effarouche, effarouche, exaction, carte, paresseux, paresseuse, ttj 
 dennes, effaroucher, donnas, effarouchez, donnez, donner, causal, et 
 av^c, et au, et apres, verrai, prendrai, aine', la et ici, et avant, peinai, 
 aimant, aimez, aime*, neig, neigeant, neigcr, mangeai, nous nageons, 
 d^mangeaison, raison, plaisir, peignant, plein, plpine, peigne', chez, 
 rendez-vous, prendrai, peindrai, effrene, effarouches. 
 
 Litters and Combinations marked 3 2 , and pronounced like e in get, or fe 
 (grave or open) and. e. 
 
 Hule 1st. (with a grave accent) called e open, and also e, marked 3 2 * 
 
 Rule 2 d. e=3 2 in monosyllables ending with a consonant; as ccs, 
 des, est, lea, mes, ses, tes, &c. Note. If the consonant is c, f, Z, or r, 
 it sounds after the e; as, sec, se-k; chef, che-f ; Bel, se-1; ver, ve-r. 
 
 Rule 3d. e = 3 2 before two or more consonants ; as, espe*rer, restons, 
 liberte. Note. The consonant that immediately follows the e is pro- 
 nounced separately, and of course maiked 2 : as esprer, e-s-pe'-rer: 
 xestons, re-s-tons. 
 
 Rule 4th. e=3 2 before double consonants, cc, ff, ss, rr, II, &c., when 
 the following syllable is mute : as nette, querelle, cesse, terre, richesse, 
 paresse-. 
 
 Rule 5th. e=3 2 before a sounding final consonant; as avec, relief, 
 miel, Oreb, hier,* respect; and in every monosyllable ending in er, as 
 fer, mer. 
 
 Rule Gth. ais, ait, aient y oient^ aix, et=& when final: as j'avais, il 
 (it-lit, ils 6taient, ils 6toient, paix, objet. 
 
 Rule 7th. c = 3 2 in ex, followed by a consonant ; as extreme, expe*ri- 
 ence. Note. The x is usually pronounced ks ; ekstreme, eksp<5rience. 
 
 Rule 8th. ai, eai, ei 3 2 when followed by a mute syllable ; as aime, 
 ai-je? peine, enseigne. 
 
 Divide and mark: Sdvere, scene, meme, supreme, mes, est, bref, 
 Bee, tel, mer, espoir, destitution, fermente, serment, telle, cette, quelle, 
 piece, cachette, richesse, richesses, grief, griefs, miel, fiel, j'avais, tu 
 avais, il donnait, ils portaient, elle joignait, ils jouaient (3d), fait, effet, 
 elles dtaient, objet, sujet, portefaix, ils 6taient (3d), elles priaient (3d), 
 venaient (3d), aime, sennS, seme, aiment (3d), ils semerent (3d), peine, 
 peine, peigne*, peigne, secret, men^, mene, sain, saine, ancien, ancienne, 
 le mien, les miens, les miennes, boulet, faite, Jeter, jette, baudet, cachet, 
 met> niets, paix, expres, extravagant, extraordinaire, exposerent (3d), 
 fci, ver. 
 
 * Soo Appendix, Note 5. 
 
 f 6n is the termination of tlie third person plural of the imporfoct and condi 
 Uoaal, old orthography 
 
FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XIX 
 
 VARIOUS EXPLANATIONS. 
 
 e (without accent) = 1, or sounds like French a in the combination 
 Examples : femme (pro. fam) decemment, de-ce-inmenc. (3-^-1 
 4-8.) 
 
 en at the end of words = 9. Examples: bi-en, well; rien, nothing. 
 Note. In the words composed from bicn-, the combination en, although 
 it may no longer be final, retains the ninth vowel sound. Examples : 
 bi-^n-tot, soon ; bi-e;i-fe-sant, benevolent. 
 
 en=9, in the termination iens t when s is the mark of the pluraL- 
 Examples : mien, miens ; entretien, entretiens. 
 
 <rrc = 9, in the combinations icn, tens, ient, of the verbs tenir, to hold, 
 to keep ; venir, to come, and their compounds. Examples : je vi-en- 
 irai, I shall come; je ticns, I hold; elle convient, she agrees. 
 
 en everywhere else, except in the termination ent of the third person 
 plural, (see Rule 5 on e mute, page xiv.) always=8: entends, senti- 
 ment, en. 
 
 Remarks on th& letter y. 
 
 When the letter y in any word is preceded by a vowel, it is equiva- 
 lent to i, i. The first i unites with the foregoing vowel, and must be 
 marked accordingly. The second i sounds separately, or unites with 
 what follows. Examples: ayant, ai-i-ant; citoyen, ci-toi-i-en; pays, 
 pai-is. 
 
 The diaeresis () separates two letters, which otherwise would sound 
 together. Thus, in Saul, (the apostle's name,) aw=5 2 ; but in the 
 name of the Hebrew king Saul, with the diceresis, a and u are sepa- 
 rated, and pronounced Sa-u-1. (1, G, 2 .) 
 
 Of the liquid sounds, AIL, EIL, IL, EUIL, CEIL, OUIL, AILS, EILS, &c. 
 
 Note. The sound of Hi in the English word brilliant is similar to 
 the French liquid t7, ill. 
 
 When il or Us final is liquid, the preceding vowel is pronounced 
 separately with its open sound, viz: <z = l 2 , e=3 2 , eu=2 2 , 02 =2 2 , and 
 then follows the liquid sound of il or ils = 17. Examples: ail, a-il; 
 re*veil, rd-ve-il; seuil, seu-il; fenouil, fe-nou-il. Note. ceil is pro- 
 nounced like euil. (2 2 , 17.) 
 
 Those vowels, a, e, i, c., have a long sound, because the il final it 
 tujaposed to be followed by e mute. 
 
 AILL, EILL, ILL, EUILL, CEILL, OUILL. 
 
 When followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel a, e, i, &o,, 
 sounds as it does with the final 7, as explained above. Exampleo: 
 pa-ili-e, ve-ill-e, fi-ill-e, feu-ill-e, fou-ill-e. 
 
 Wlten not followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel 10 
 
XX FRENCH PRONUNCIAT ON. 
 
 viz: ==!, 63, eu=2, ce~2. Examples: ma-ill-et, ve-ill-er, pi-iLU 
 ft-ge, feu-ill-et, fou-ill-ant, ceillet, ce-ill-et. (2, 17, 3 2 .) 
 
 CUEIL, GTJEIL, when final. 
 
 In these combinations the u serves only to make the c and the g hard: 
 the e represents the long sound of eu marked 2 2 , and the letters U have 
 the liquid sound = 17. Examples: re-cue-il, o-r-gue-il. 
 
 CUEILL, GUEILL, not final. 
 
 When followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel sounds as it 
 does with the final cueil, gueil, as explained above. Example, je rc- 
 cue-ill-e. 
 
 When not followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel is short or 
 close ; that is, e sounds like eu marked 2, and the letters ill have their 
 usual liquid sound = 17. Examples: re-cue-ill-ant, o-r-gue-ill-eux. 
 
 Stress of the voice. 
 
 The stress of the voice is placed on every vowel preceding a mute 
 syllable. The faint or mute e is the only slighted sound, all the other 
 vowels receive a full and distinct utterance. 
 
 Entre ; en, distinct ; ire, faint entreprise ; en, full ; tre, faint ; pri, 
 full ; se, faint. In communication, every syllable is distinct, and tlie 
 stress of the voice rests on the last. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 NOTE 1, (page xii.) 
 
 In this I differ totally from Mr. Charles Picot, who in his excellent 
 Bystem of pronunciation says (page C) : " The English words at, 
 father, &c., are merely given as means of comparison and association, 
 to enable the pupil to proceed from what he knows to what he is to 
 learn, and must' be dispensed with as soon as the sounds are well 
 mastered." Far from discarding those words, I strongly recommend 
 the scholar to retain them carefully as unerring guides. If they are 
 useful at first, they must ever be so, and would it not be ungrateful 
 to throw aside those that befriended us in the beginning of our career ? 
 Treasure them up, therefore. 
 
 NOTE 2, (page xv.) 
 
 In French, final consonants are not generally pronounced ; for, noi 
 being followed by a vowel, they ought naturally to be silent. Hence 
 the French words port and grand are pronounced as if written par and 
 
XXI 
 
 rrarz; but the t ai. . e pronounced :i '.-h, when spelled 
 
 a French with a final e, as porte, grande. 
 The above observation will sufficiently explain why the final conso- 
 
 i the following 
 
 sixteen vowel founds and two diphthongs, as rzpnmntod 
 at the end of words. 
 
 'o. 1. 1* ut, 
 
 8 68, is of two syllables and more,) ?n{.* 
 
 - 2 . vowel, the next consonant sounds, as boeu/, Icur, 
 
 seuZ ; but the second consonant is silent; leure, scours, : 
 
 (conjunction), ez. 
 
 8*. ;, :j (and fs in me ~), sicnt,* 
 
 1. 
 
 . aux, op, os, ot, ots, auds, auts, eaux. 
 
 e consona 
 
 sounds. Examples : fol, Jacob, soc, cor ; but the second con- 
 son: < t: socs, cors, mort, port 
 
 ta tlie verb , cut, cue, cues), 
 
 lie, oucs, oud, ouds,' oup, oups, ous, out, outs, oux. ouent* 
 8. amp, ami us, emps, ent, cnts, ans, ens. 
 
 , ainc, aincs, eii nts, 
 
 (en, cnt.)t 
 
 ons, ont, ond, ends, amb, ombs, ompt, one, ones. 
 1 1. mi--, urns. 
 
 oie, oics, ois, oit, oid, oids, < oieni.* 
 
 oing, oins, oii:r ngs. 
 
 i'agc XTi.) 
 
 The reason why is marked J and pronounced like the faint <, may 
 follows. ' 
 
 /o/;, mm friend, MY^CTI, &c., are expressions u 
 
 ie singular number. Now, as THE and MY undergo no change in th 
 lurul number, should book, friend, andjpen, be spelt and prono< 
 s before, there could be no distinction between the singular and tho 
 lural. To render that distinction sensible, an 8 is added to the end of 
 ach noun, (for the eye,) and is articulated to apprise the ear that the 
 lea of plurality is intended. In French, on the contrary, the articles 
 Mgular, Ic, la, being changed into lex for the plural, mon, ?n>i, 
 
 * Third pfrnon -plural t\f 
 
 | otnr, old nrtlice- >l >f imperfect anil eondltKNttl 
 
 t (in and n>) linn I, and in the verbs lmr, vcnir, and tlioir compoujid. 
 
KXi; FRENCH PRONUNCIATION 
 
 into mes, &c., when those words les, mes, c., are heard, they &t once 
 intimate to the ear that the plural is meant, hence the alteration of 
 the noun becomes useless; and although |Jie 5 is added, (for the eye,) 
 it is not pronounced, and of course final es is marked little 2 . 
 
 NOTE 4, (page xvi.) 
 
 The e mute or faint, marked little 2 , after a consonant, has the en"ee$ 
 of lengthening and altering the sound of the preceding vowel or syl- 
 lable, in English, as may be seen below. 
 
 hat, on account of the faint that follows, becomes hate ; 
 
 met decomes mete; bit becomes bite; 
 
 hop becomes hope ; tub becomes tube. 
 
 In French the e mute always lengthens the preceding syllable, but it 
 alters the vowel sound, when it is after a consonant, only in fcur 
 instances, instead of doing it in every case, as in English. 
 
 mal (marked 1) becomes male (marked I 2 ). 
 
 heureux (2, 2), heureuse (2, 2 2 ); ce"de (3, 3), cede (3, 2 ) ; haut (5), 
 haute (5 2 , ? ). Hence the following rule : 
 
 Silent E lengthens the preceding syllable, and when the vowel has two 
 sounds, that vowel takes the sound marked with double figures ; 2 2 , 
 o 2 , 5 2 , and likewise I 2 when there is a circumflex on the a ; not other- 
 wise. 
 
 When the faint e comes immediately after a vowel, no consonant 
 intervening, as ie, ue, de, cue, c., it lengthens that vowel without 
 altering its sound. 
 
 NOTE 5, (pages xvii and xviii.) 
 
 The r is sounded only in a few words of two or more syllables 
 Amer (1, 3 2 , 2 ), bitter; cuiller, cu-i-11-e-r (6, 4, 17, 3 2 2 ), spoon; enfer, 
 hell : fier, proud j hier, yesterday ; hiver, winter ; magister, country 
 Ecli<X'J-:cmsi(?r ; c**iccr t ether, frater, Alaer, Jupiter, Lucifer, 
 
DIRECTIONS HOW TO USE THIS METHOD 
 
 As there is now a System of Pronunciation with this Method, let tha 
 first ten or twelve lessons be devoted to acquiring a complete know- 
 lodge of that important branch of a modern language. If that ia 
 thoroughly done, the teacher will have no further trouble with the 
 pronunciation, for the pupils will be able to read correctly by them- 
 selves. 
 
 Each lesson now consists of one, two, three, c., separate vocabu- 
 laries, each followed by exercises, English at first, but French and 
 English at the Twelfth Lesson; that is, when the student's ear begins 
 to become a little familiar with French sounds. 
 
 The first vocabulary must be read by the pupils, each taking a line 
 and pronouncing aloud both the English and French, the latter being 
 divided into syllables, and distinctly uttered under the direction of the 
 teacher, who ought, as they proceed, to ask questions respecting the 
 pronunciation. This done, the students are directed: 1st, to learn 
 for the next recitation, the English and French vocabularies, so as to 
 be able to give the French when the English is mentioned, or the 
 English when the French is given out ; and, 2dly, to write down the 
 translation of the first exercise, to be handed to the teacher, who, 
 directing them to close their books, will, while correcting the errors, 
 give out the English of every question and answer, to be put in French 
 by the students. 
 
 The correction and translation ended, let the next vocabulary bo 
 read, or rather syllabled, slowly and distinctly, and explained by the 
 teacher, if need be, and so on, the vocabularies being learned and the 
 exercises translated. 
 
 As this method is simple and gradual enough for every capacity, 
 should there be pupils too young to write the translations, let them 
 prepare the exercises and recite them to the teacher, who will do well 
 to mako them spell out a number of words at each recitation. 
 
 (23) 
 
EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK. 
 
 THE irregular verbs are designated by a (*) star. 
 The figures 1, 2, 3, 4, placed after verbs, denote that they are regu- 
 lar, and indicate the conjugation to which they respectively belong. 
 Idiomatical expressions are marked thus : f. 
 The verbs taking etre (to be) as auxiliary, are marked thus ; e . 
 1 to 164 refer to paragraphs in the Synopsis, (from p. 457 tc 538'.} 
 Dir. 1, means first Direction, &c., (p. 457 to 460.) 
 R. 1, means first Rule, &c., (from p. 460 to 461.) 
 Obs. or Ob. 7, means Observation 7th, c. 
 24 1 , 24 2 , means 24th Vocabulary, first Section ; second Section 
 24 3 , N. 2 ; 24th Vocabulary, Note 2. 
 28 2 , Ob. 65 ; 28th Vocabulary, Observation 65th. 
 24 R.2,"\ 
 
 g 24 A. 2, > mean the 2d article or rule of 24th paragraph. 
 8 24-2, 3 
 
 490 3, means the article marked 3, at p. 490. 
 Pa. or p. 419, means page 419 ; 405, 6, 7, mea?i 4C5, 406, 40? 
 Sec Pro-nun. 830 System of Pronunciation. 
 
OLLENDORFF'S 
 
 FRENCH METHOD. 
 
 FIRST LESSON, 1st. Premiere Lc$on } Ire. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 Have you ? 
 Yes, Sir, I have 
 L 
 
 The. The Id. 
 
 Have you the hat ? 
 Yea, Sir, I have the bat. 
 The bread. The sugar. 
 
 The broom. The paper. 
 
 The soap. 
 
 My. Mv hat. 
 
 Your. Your bread 
 
 Have you my hat ? 
 
 Yes, Sir, 1 have your hat. 
 
 Have you your bread ? 
 
 I have my bread. 
 
 Which or what ? 
 Which hat have you ? 
 I have my hat. 
 Which bread have you ? 
 I have your bread. 
 My exercise. 
 
 VOCABULAIIIE. 1 
 
 Avez-vous ? 2 
 
 Oui, Monsieur, j'ai. 
 
 J c, (which becomes j f before a 
 
 or silent h. (See Pronunciation.^ ) 
 Le. Le chapenu. 
 
 Avez-vous le chapeau ? 
 Oui, Monsieur, j'ai le chapeau. 
 Le pain. Le sucre. 
 
 Le balai. Le papier. 
 
 Le savon. 
 
 Mon. Mon chapeau. 
 
 Votre. Votre pain. 
 
 Avez-vous mon chapeau ? 
 
 Oui, Monsieur, j'ai votre chapeau, 
 
 Avez-vous votre pain ? 
 
 j'ai mon pain. 
 
 Quel ? (before a noun.) 
 Quel chapeau avez-vous ? 
 J'ai mon chapeau. 
 Quel pain avez-vous ? 
 J'ai votre pain. 
 Mon exercice. 
 
 FIEST EXERCISE. 1st. PREMIER EXERCICE. ler. 
 
 Which exercise have you, Sir ? I have the first exercise. Have 
 pa the bread? Yes. Sir, I have the bread. Have you your bread 7 
 
 1 For the manner of teaching the lesson, see Manner of using the Method. 
 * When the verb is interrogative the French always put a hyphen (-} be- 
 tween the veib and the nominative pronoun. ( J\liud this hi wnfing.'} 
 3 (26) 
 
2G 
 
 SECOND LESS OK. 
 
 I have my bread. Have you the broom'? I have the broom.- 
 Have you the soap ? I have the soap. Have you your soap * 
 have my soap. Which soap have you ? I have your soap. Hav 
 you your sugar? I have my sugar. Which sugar have you? 
 have yoir sugar. Which paper have you ? I have my paper.- 
 Hava you my paper? I have ) r our paper. Which bread .hav 
 you? J have my bread. Which broom have you? I have yo 
 broom . Hav 3 you your exercise ? Yes, Sir, I have my exercise.- 
 Which exercicte have you? I have my first exercise. 1 
 
 Daily Salutations. 
 Good day, Miss. 
 How do you do, Madam ? 
 
 Salutations journaher es. 
 Bon jour, Mademoiselle. 
 Comment vous portez-vous, M 
 
 dame? 
 Tres-bien, merci. 
 
 Very well, thank you. 
 Ols. 1. Tres is always connected, by a hyphen, will* the following \v 
 Good evening. | Bon soir. 2 
 
 SECOND LESSON, 2d.Seconde Legon, 2de. 
 VOCABULARY. VOCABULAIRE. 
 
 5-e, before a consonant. 
 It. (Objective pronoun.) \ L , before a vowcl _ &c , Pro , lvn . y 
 
 I have. I have it. | J'ai. Je 1'ai. 
 
 Obs. 2. Objective pronouns are usually placed before the verb, 
 French. Instead of: I have it, the French say: I it have. Je Z'ai. 
 
 Have you 
 
 my hat ? 
 
 Avez-vous mon chapeau ? 
 
 Yes, Sir, 
 
 I have it 
 
 Oui, Monsieur, je 1'ai. 
 
 Good. 
 
 Bad. 
 
 Bon. Mauvais. 
 
 Pretty. 
 
 Ugly. 
 
 Joli. Vilain. 
 
 Old. 
 
 Fine, handsome. 
 
 Vieux. Beau. 
 
 My cloth. 
 
 My fine cloth. 
 
 Mon drap. Mon beau drap. 
 
 The salt. 
 
 The good salt. 
 
 Le sel. Le bon sel. 
 
 1 Pupils desirous of making rapid progress may compose a great many 
 phrases, in addition to those given in the exercises ; but they miiGt pro- 
 nounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make separate 
 Ikttsof such substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, as they meet with 
 ai the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words more 
 'eadily, when required to refer to them in writing their lessons. 
 
 2 When no daily salutations are found in some of the lessons, the tea< 
 ir.av introduce some, or else use the preceding ones. 
 
 
SKCOND LESSON. 
 
 The shot'. The >ld shoe. 
 My wood. Your pretty wood. 
 
 Your stocking The ugly stocking. 
 The thread. Your bad thread. 
 The dog. The horse. 
 
 Not. (See negations in Synopsis.) ! 
 
 I have. I have not. 
 
 I have not the bread. 
 
 No, Sir. 
 
 No, Miss. 
 
 Have you my old hat ? 
 
 No, Sir, I have it not. 
 
 Which cloth have you ? 
 
 L have the fine cloth. 
 
 What dog have you ? 
 
 I have my old dog. 
 
 Of. 
 
 The thread stocking. 
 
 Le souliei 
 Mon bois. 
 Votre bas. 
 Le fil. 
 Lc chien. 
 
 Le vicux soulier. 
 Votre joli bois. 
 Lo vilain bas. 
 Votre mauvais fil. 
 Le choral. 
 
 Ne (before), pas 'after the verb), 
 J'ai. Je n'aipas. (See Promm.* 
 .Te n'ai pas le pain. 
 Non, Monsieur. 
 Non, Mademoiselle. 
 Avez-vous mon vieux chapeau ? 
 Non, Monsieur, je ne 1'ai pas. 
 Quel drap avez-vous ? 
 J'ai le beau drap. 
 Quel chien avez-vous ? 
 J'ai mon vieux chien. 
 
 De. 
 
 Le bas de fil. 
 
 065. 3. As no noun can in French, as it is in English, be used as iu 
 adjective to another noun : the preposition, de, is always put between the 
 name of the thing and the name of the substance of which it is irade, 
 which latter, in French, is always placed last. 
 
 The paper hat, [the hat of paper.] 
 The gun. x The velvet. 
 
 The wooden gun, [the gun of wood.] 
 The velvet shoe, 
 Which gun have you ? 
 I have the wooden gun. 
 Which stocking have you ? 
 I have my thread stocking. 
 Have you my velvet shoe 
 No, Miss, I have it not. 
 Yes, Miss, I have it. 
 
 Le chapeau de papier. 
 
 Le fusil. Le velours. 
 
 Le fusil de bois. 
 
 Le soulier de velours. 
 
 Quel fusil avez-vous ? 
 
 J'ai le fusil de bois. 
 
 Quel bas avez-vous ? 
 
 J'ai mon bas de fil. 
 
 Avez-vous mon soulier de velours if 
 
 Non, Mademoiselle, je ne Pai pas. 
 
 Oui, Mademoiselle, je Pai. 
 
 SECOND EXERCISE, 2d. SECOND EXERCICE, 2d. 
 
 Good day, Miss. Good day, Sir. Good day, Madam. How do 
 you do, Sir ? Very well ; thank you, Miss. How do you do, Ma- 
 dam ? Very well, Sir, thank you. Have you my fine horse ? Yes, 
 Sir, I have it. Have you my old shoe ? No, Miss. I have it not. 
 Which dog have you ? I have your pretty dog. Have you my bad 
 paper? No, Sir, I have it not. Have you the good velvet cloth ! 
 Yes, Sir, I have it. Have you my ugly gun? No, Sir, 1 have ii 
 not. Which gun have you ? I have your fma gun. Which stock- 
 big have you ? I have the thread stocking. Have you mv thread 
 
50 THIRD LESSOR 
 
 stocking ? i have not your thread stocking. Have you my wooden 
 gun ? No, Sir, I have it not. Have you tin old bread ? I havo 
 not the old bread. Which shoe have }ou? I have the fine velvet 
 shoe. Which velvet shoe ? Your velvet shce. Which soap have 
 you? I have my old soap. Which sugar have you? I have your 
 good sugar. Which salt have you? I have the bad salt. Whicli 
 exercise have you? I have my second exercise. Have you tne 
 lirst exercise ? No, Madam, I have it not. Which hat have you'! 
 I have my bad paper hat. Have you my ugly wooden shoe? No ; 
 Sir, I have it not. What vocabulary have you ? I rV*^ the second 
 Have you the first? Yes, I have it. 
 
 THIRD LESSON, 3d. 2 rowwme Le$on } 3me. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 Something, anything. 
 Have you anything ? 
 I have something. 
 Nothing, not anything. 
 
 Obs. 4. Quelque chose (something, any thing), >s never used with a nega- 
 tion. Not.... any thing, as well as nothing, must be translated by nt 
 .'before, and) rien (after the verb), and not by ne . . .pas quelque chose. 
 
 VOCAEULAIRE. 
 
 Quelque chose. 
 
 Avez-vous quelque chose ? 
 
 J'ai quelque chose. 
 
 Ne (before), rien (after the verb/. 
 
 I have not anything. 
 I have nothing. 
 The wine. 
 My money or silver. 
 The gold. 
 
 Je n'ai rien. (Not: jc n'ai 
 
 quelque chose.} 
 Le vin. 
 Mon argent. 
 L'or. (Pronun.) 
 
 pat 
 
 Obs. 5. Le, the, becomes V before a vowel or silent h. 
 
 The string. The ribbon. 
 
 The golden ribbon. The button. 
 The coflee. The cheese. 
 
 The coat. My coat. 
 
 The silver candlestick. 
 
 Are you hungry ? 
 I am hungry. 
 I am not hungry. 
 Are you thirsty ? 
 I am thirsty. 
 I am not thirsty. 
 
 Any thing or something good. 
 Have you anything good ? 
 Nothing or not anything bad. 
 I have not anything 'nothing) gOD 
 
 Le cordon. Le ruban. 
 
 Le ruban d'or. Le bouton. 
 
 Le cafe. Le fromage, 
 
 L'habit. (Pronun.) Mon hah it. 
 Le chandelier d'argent. 
 
 t Avez-vous faim ? 
 
 t J'ai faim. 
 
 t Jc n'ai pas faim. 
 
 t Avez-vous soif ? 
 
 t J'ai soif. 
 
 t Je n'ai pas soif. 
 
 Quelque c-wse de Aon. 
 Avez-vous quelque chose da Ion 1 
 Ne .... rien de mauvais. 
 Je n'ai rien do bon. 
 
THIRI LESSON 29 
 
 Oba. 6. What t is q-j.d1 before a noun, as : Qncl fcutoji avez-vous ? but 
 qiie ? Before a verb.) 
 
 What? ~\Vliat have you ? | Que ? Qu'avez vous ? 
 
 Obs. 7. Quelque chose and ne rien require de when they are before an 
 
 adjective ; and so does \shat ? Examples : 
 
 What have you good ? 
 I have the good coffee. 
 Have you anything pretty ? 
 I have nothing pretty 
 Are you sleepy ? 
 I am sleepy. 
 1 am not sleepy. 
 
 Qw' avez-vous de bon ? 
 
 J'ai le bon cafe. 
 
 Avez-vous quelque chose tfcjoli? 
 
 Je n'ai rien de joli. 
 
 t Avez-vous BORiRieil ? 
 
 t J'ai sommcil. 
 
 t Jc n'ai pas sommeii. 
 
 THIRD EXEKOISE, 3d. TROISI&ME EXEBCICE, onie. 
 
 What have you? 1 have the third exercise. Have you your 
 second exercise, Miss? Yes, Sir, I have it Good evening, Mu 
 dam, how do you do ?- Very well, Sir, thank you. Good morning, 
 Miss. Good morning, Sir. Have you my good wine ? I have it. 
 Have you the gold ? I have it not. Have you the money ? I have 
 it. Have you the gold ribbon? No, Sir, I have it not. Have you 
 your silver candlestick? Yes, Sir, I have it. What have you? I 
 have the good cheese. T have my cloth coat. Have you my silver 
 button ? I have it not. Which button have you ? I have your good 
 gold button. Which string have you? I have Jie gold string. 
 Have you anything ? I have something. What fcave you ? I have 
 the good bread. I hs.ve the good sugar. Have you anything good 1 
 [ have nothing good. Have you anything handsome ? I have no- 
 thing handsome. I have something ugly. What have you ugly? 
 [ have the ugly dog. Have you anything pretty ? I have nothing 
 pretty. I have something old What have you old? I have the 
 old cheese. Are you hungry? I am hungry. Are you thirsty ? I 
 am not thirsty. Are you sleepy ? I am not sleepy. What have 
 you beautiful ? I have your beautiful dog. What have you bad ? 
 I have nothing bad. Which paper have you? I have your good 
 paper. Have you the fine horse ? Yes, Sir, I have it. Which shoe 
 have you? I have my old velvet shoe. Which stocking have 
 you? I have got your fine thread stocking. 
 
 Obs. 8. Always translate I have or I have got, by : J'ai. / have not or J 
 have not got, by : Je n'oi pas, 1 &c. 
 
 Salutations journalicres. To day. Aujourd'hui. 
 
 1 N. B. The use of (he word, got, is condemned by grammarians, but, 
 as it is constantly introduced in common practice, it is perhaps expedient to 
 
BO 
 
 FOURTH LESSON. 
 
 FOURTH LESSON, 4th. Qucrfram* Legon, 4m* 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 This , that, (with a noun.) 
 This , that book. 
 
 Of the (before a consonant). 
 Of the dog. Of the tailor. 
 Of the baker. Of the neighbor. 
 
 That or the one. 
 
 The neighbor's^ or that of the neigh 
 bor. 
 
 The baker's, or that of the baker. 
 
 The dog's, or that of the dog. 
 Or. 
 
 flave you my book or the neigh- 
 bor's ? 
 
 I have the neighbor's. 
 
 Have you my bread or that of the 
 baker ? 
 
 I have yours. 
 
 I have not the baker's. 
 
 Mine or my own. 
 
 Of mine or of my own. 
 
 Yours or your own. 
 
 Of yours or of your own. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sectioa. 
 
 Ce (before a consonant, $ 34.) 
 Ce livre. 
 
 Du ^genitif) avant une consorme 
 Du chien. Du tailleur. 
 
 Du boulanger. Du voisin. 
 
 Celui. ($ 35.) 
 
 Celui du voisin. 
 
 (French way to express thepos c >sivt 
 
 case.} 
 
 Celui du boulanger. 
 Celui du chien. 
 
 Ou. 
 Avez-vous mon livre ou ceki du 
 
 voisin ? 
 
 J'ai celui du voisin. 
 Avez-vous mon pain ou celui du 
 
 boulanger ? 
 J'ai le votre. 
 Je n'ai pas celui du boulanger. 
 
 Le mien. 
 Du mien. 
 Le votre. 
 Du votre. 
 
 Obs. 9. Votre, your, has no circumflex accent. Le votre, yours, has 
 one. Notre, our, has no accent. Le ?iotre, ours, has one. 
 Of ours or of cur own. | Du notre. 
 
 EXERCISE. 1st Sec. QUATRIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Have you that book ? No, Sir, I have it not. Which book have 
 you got? I have that of the neighbor. Have you my bread or the 
 baker's? I have not yours; I have the baker's. Have you the 
 neighbor's horse? No, Sir, I have it not. Which horse have you 
 got I I have that of the baker. Have you the pretty gold string of 
 my dog ? I have it not. Which string have you ? I have my srl- 
 
 insert it now and then. When entirely omitted, pupils, after learning a 
 considerable time, are frequently at a loss how to translate : Nave you got 
 my hat ? thinking that they do not know the French ol got ; while tnoy 
 would not hesitate to translate : Have you my hat ? &.c. 
 
FOURTH LESSON. 
 
 31 
 
 ver siring. Have you my gold button or the tailor's ? I have not 
 yours ; I have the tailor's. Which coffee have you ? I have the 
 neighbor's. Are you sleepy ? I am not sleepy ; I arn hungry. 
 Are you thirsty? I am not thirsty. Which stocking have you? I 
 have my own or mine. Have you your thread stocking or mine'? 
 I have not yours; I have mine. Which shoe have you? I have 
 the neighbor's wooden shoe. What have you ? I have nothing. 
 Have you anything good ? I have nothing good. Have you any- 
 thing bad ? I have not got anything bad. Are you hungry or 
 thirsty ? I am hungry. Which exercise have you got? I have the 
 fourth. Have you your neighbor's exercise ? No, Sir, I have got 
 mine. Have you our velvet ? I have it not. Have you our coffee] 
 I have not ours; I have the baker's. Have you the neighbor's golden 
 candlestick? No, Sir, I have got ours. How do you do to-day 1 
 To-day ? Yes, to-day. Very well, thank you. 
 
 r 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 
 Arc. you warm ? 
 
 I an warm. 
 
 I am not warm. 
 
 Are you cold ? 
 
 I am not cold. 
 
 Are you afraid ? 
 
 I am afraid. 
 
 I am not afraid. 
 
 The, (before a vo\ve or h mute). (See 
 
 Gbs. 5, p 28.) 
 Man. Friend. 
 
 The friend. " The man. 
 Of the, (before G. vowel or h mute). 
 Of the friend. 
 
 That, or the one, of the friend. 
 Of the man. 
 That, or the one, of the man ; the 
 
 man's. 
 Of the gold or silver. / 
 
 The stick. The thimble. 
 
 The coal. My brother. 
 
 My brother's, or that of my brother. 
 Your friend's, or that of your friend. 
 OUT gold thimble, or the silver one. 
 The wooden one. The leather one. 
 Tho leather. Of the leather. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section, 
 t Avez-yous chaud ? 
 t J'ai chaud. 
 t Je n'ai pas chaud. 
 t Avez-vous froitl i 
 t Je ri'ai pas froid. 
 "t Avez-vous peur ? 
 t J'ai peur. 
 t Je n'ai pas peur. 
 
 L', (avant vine voyelle ou un h muetV 
 
 (Voyez Obs. 5, p. SB.) 
 Homme. Ami. 
 
 L'ami. L'homme. 
 
 De 1' , (avant une vcycllc ou li muet) 
 De I'ami. 
 Cclui de I'ami. 
 De 1'homme. 
 Celui de 1'hoinmc. 
 
 De 1'or ou de 1'argent. 
 
 Le baton. Le do. 
 
 Le charbon. Mon here. 
 
 Celui de mon frere. 
 
 Celui de votre ami. 
 
 Notre de d'or, ou ce.ui d f argent. 
 
 Celui de bois. Celui de cui 
 
 Le cuir. Du cuir. 
 
FIFTH LESSON. 
 
 FOURTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. QUATIUEME EXEHCICE. 2de See. 
 
 Have you my stick, or that of my friend ? I have that of ycn;i 
 friend. Have you your thimble, or the tailor's? I have mine 01 
 my own. Have you my brother's coat or yours? I have youi 
 brother's. Have you your dog or the man's ? I have the man's. 
 Have you your friend's money ? I have it not. Are you cold ? I 
 am cold. Are you afraid ? I am not afraid. Are you warm ? I am 
 net warm. Have you my coat, or the tailor's? I have the tailorta* 
 Have you my gold candlestick, or that of the neighbor? I have 
 yours. Have you your paper or mine? I have mine. Have you 
 your cheese or the baker's ? I have my own. Which cloth have 
 you ? I have that of the tailor. Have you the old wood of my 
 brother? I have not got it. Which soap have you got? I have 
 my brother's good soap. Have you my wooden gun or that of my 
 brother ? I have yours. Have you your friend's shoe ? Yes, Sir ; 
 I have the velvet shoe of my friend. What have you pretty ? I 
 have my friend's pretty dog. Have you my handsome or my ugly 
 stick? I have your ugly stick. Have you the second exercise of 
 your good friend ? No; I have the third. Which soap have youi 
 I have ours. Have you your friend's bread? No; I have ours. 
 Have you the man's? No; I have it not. Have you the silver 
 button ? No ; I have the golden one, or that of gold. Have you tho 
 first or the second section to-day? I have the second section. 
 
 Pretty well, well enough. | Assez bien. 
 
 Obs, 10. Good day, good morning, good afternoon, good evening /and 
 good night, before bed-time), are expressed in French by : Ion jour or boy 
 
 FIFTH LESSON, 5(h.Cinquicme Leeon, 5mo. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 The merchant. 
 Of the shoemaker. 
 Ths boy. The merchant's boy. 
 
 The pencil. The chocolate. 
 Tne penknife. The boy's penknife. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section 
 Le marchand. 
 Du cordonnier. 
 
 Le garcon. Le garc.on du marchand 
 Le crayon. Le chocolat. 
 Le canif. Le canifdu garcon. 
 
 Have you the merchant's stick, or ! Avez-vous le baton du marchand, 
 
 yours ? ou le votre? 
 
 Neither. Nor. Ne . . . m. ni. 
 
 ( have neither the merchant's stick | Jc n'ai ni le baton du maicjiand u 
 
 iior mine. i le mien. 
 
FIFTH LESSOJi. 
 
 Have you the shoemaker's leather ? 
 
 Are you hungry or thirsty ? 
 
 I am neither hungry nor thirsty. 
 
 Are you warm or cold ? 
 
 I am neither warm nor cold. 
 
 Have you the bread or the wine ? 
 
 I have neither the wine nor the bread. 
 
 I have neither my thread nor that 
 
 of the tailor. 
 
 I have neither yours nor mine. 
 My boy' s thimble , [the thimble of . . .] 
 Your brother's penknife. 
 That of mine. That of ours. 
 
 Miss Rose's velvet. 
 My baker's bread, or that of yours. 
 
 Avez-vous le cuir du cordonmer I 
 
 t Avez-vous faim ou soif ? 
 
 t Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. 
 
 t Avez-vous chaud ou froid ? 
 
 t Je n'ai ni chaud ni froid. 
 
 Avez-vous le pain ou le \in ? 
 
 Je n'ai ni le vin ni le pain. 
 
 Je n'ai ni mon fil ni celui du taih'sin 
 
 Je n'ai ni le votre ni le in en. 
 Le de de mon gar9on. 
 Le canif de votre frere. 
 Celui du mien. Celui du noire. 
 Le velours de Mademoiselle Rose. 
 Le pain de mon boulanger, ou celuj 
 du votre. 
 
 FIFTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. CIXQUIEME EXERCICK. Ire Sec. 
 
 How do you do to-'lay? Pretty well, thank you. How are you 
 this evening, Miss Charlotte ? Very well, thank you. Good even- 
 ing, Sir. Are you hungry or thirsty? I am neither hungry nor 
 thirsty. Have you my shoe or the shoemaker's? I have neither 
 "yours nor the shoemaker's. Have you your pencil or the boy's? I 
 have neither mine nor the boy's. Which pencil have you ? I have 
 that of the merchant. Have you my chocolate or the merchant's? 
 I have neither yours nor the merchant's; I have my own. Which 
 penknife have you? I have my brother's penknife. Have you 
 Miss Rose's velvet? No, Madam, I have it not. Are you warm, 
 or cold ? I am neither warm nor cold ; I am sleepy. Are you 
 afraid? I am not afraid. What have you? I have Miss Charlotte's 
 fine ribbon. The velvet ribbon? No, the golden ribbon. Havo 
 you anything, Sir? I have something. What have you ? I have 
 something fine. What have you fine? I have the shoemaker's 
 fine dog. Have ; T OU my gun or yours ? I have neither yours nor 
 mine. Which gun have you? I have my friend's. Have you my 
 velvet ribbon or my brother's? I have neither yours nor youi 
 brother's, but ours. Which string have you? I have my neigh- 
 bor's thread string. Have you the book of the tailor or that of the 
 boy ? I have neither the tailor's nor the br y's. 
 
 This morning. This evening. Ce matin. Ce soir. 
 
 Are you well, Miss Clara? t Vousportez-vousbicn, Mile. Clara J 
 
 Not very well, Pas tres-bien 
 
FIFTH LSSSOK. 
 
 VOCABULARY 2d Section. 
 What have you ? (ails you ?) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 > t Qu'avez-vous ? 
 
 What is the matter with you ? 
 [ have nothing ; or 
 Nothing is the matter with me. 
 Is anything the matter with you ? 
 No. Nothing, or Not anything. 
 
 Obs. 11. When the verb is understood, nothing, or not anything, is 
 translated not by: ne . . . rien, but by: rien alone; and no, nothing, by: 
 so/i, rien. 
 
 Je n'ai rien. 
 
 t Avez-vous quelque chose ? 
 Non, rien. 
 
 Have you anything very pretty ? 
 
 Ptfo, nothing. 
 Have you anything ugly, or old ? 
 
 No, not anything. The shawl. 
 The parasol. The umbrella. 
 The dictionary. The cotton. 
 The Frenchman. Of the Frenchman. 
 The carpenter. Of the carpenter. 
 The hammer. The iron. 
 The nail. The iron nail. 
 The golden nail; that of silver. 
 
 Avez-vous quelque chose de trea- 
 joli? 
 Non, rien. 
 Avez-vous quelqt.e chose de vila'n 
 ou de vieux ? 
 Non, rien. Le chale. 
 Le parasol. Le parapluie. 
 Le dictionnaire. Le coton. 
 Le Fran9ais. Du Francois. 
 Le charpentier. Du charpentier. 
 Le marteau. Le fer. 
 Le clou. Le clou de fer. 
 Le clou d'or ; celui d'argent. 
 
 FIFTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. CINQUIEME EXEHCICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Are you well this morning? Yes, Sir, pretty well, thank you. 
 Uo\v do you do, Miss Clara? Not very well, Madam. Are 'you 
 well, Mr. Robert? Yes, Sir, this evening I am very well. Have 
 you the fifth exercise? Yes. I have it. Have you my dictionary 
 or my book ? I have neither your dictionary nor your book. Have 
 you your parasol or mine ? I have neither yours nor mine; I have 
 Clara's. Which shawl have you ? I have the neighbor's. Have 
 vou the iron or the silver nail? I have neither the iron nor the sil- 
 ver nail; I have the gold one. Have you my hammer or the car- 
 penter's? I have neither yours nor the carpenter's; I have ours. 
 Which nail have you? I have the iron nail. Which hammer 
 have you? I have the wooden hammer of the carpenter. Have 
 you anything very fine ? I have something very fine. What have 
 you? This fine shawl. Have you the Frenchman's pretty umbrella? 
 Wo, I have not the pretty one, I have the old one. The old urn- 
 hrelia 7 Yes, the old one. Have you the cotton, or the thread stock- 
 yig ? I have neither the cotton nor the thread stocking. Have yon 
 me book of the Frenchman or that of the merchant? I have nei- 
 ther the Frenchman's nor the merchant's. Which book have >ou? 
 
SIXTH LESSON. 
 
 i have ours. What is the matter with you ? Nothing. Is anything 
 the matter with you, Mr. Robert? No, Miss, nothing. Are you 
 afraid '? No, I am not afraid. Nothing ails me. Have you the cot- 
 ton, the cloth, or the shawl ? I have neither the cotton, nor the 
 cloth, nor the shawl. What have you ? I have Webster's Dictionary 
 
 I nm glad to hear it. 1 am glad of it. 
 Arid you, Sir, how are you? 
 
 J'en suisbien aise. 
 Et vous, Monsieur, comment 
 portez-vous ? 
 
 SIXTH LESSON, 6th. Sixicme Lepn, 6me. 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. VOCABULAJRE. Ire Section. 
 
 The beef, or ox. 
 Of the captain. 
 Of the cook. 
 
 The biscuit. 
 The mutton. 
 The knife. 
 
 Le Iceuf. 
 Du capitaine. 
 Du cuisinief . 
 
 Le biscuit. 
 Le mtrLton. 
 Le conteau. 
 
 Have I ? Have I it ? 
 
 You have. You have got it. 
 
 You have not. 
 
 You have not got it. 
 
 7ouhave nothing, (not got anything). 
 
 Am I afraid ? 
 
 You are afraid. 
 
 Am 1 ashamed ? 
 
 You are not ashamed. 
 
 Are you ashamed ? 
 
 I am ashamed. 
 
 Have I anything ugly ? 
 
 You have not got anything ugly. 
 
 What have I got ? 
 
 What is the matter with me ? (ails me?) 
 
 The fine ono. The ugly one. 
 
 Which, meaning which one ? 
 
 Obs, 12. Which is translated by : 
 out the noun. 
 
 Which parasol ? Which one ? 
 
 Am I afraid or ashamed ? 
 You are neither afraid nor ashamed. 
 You are neither hungry nor thirsty. 
 
 Ai-je? L'aije? 
 
 Vous avez. Vous Vavez 
 
 Vous n'avez pas. 
 
 Vous ne Vavez pas. 
 
 Vous n'avcz rien. 
 
 t Ai-je peur ? 
 
 t Vous avez peur. 
 
 t Ai-je honte ? 
 
 t Vous n'avez pas home. 
 
 t Avez-vous honte ? 
 
 t J'ai honte. 
 
 Ai-je quelque chose de vilai-i 3 
 
 Vous n'avcz rien de vilain. 
 
 Qu'ai-je? 
 
 Le beau. Le vilain. 
 
 I Lequel ? 
 
 quel, with a noun, by: lequcl, with 
 
 Quel parasol ? Lequel ? 
 
 t Ai-je peur ou honte ? 
 t Vous n'avez ni peur ni honto. 
 t Vous n'avez ni faim ni soif. 
 
 SIXTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. SIXIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Good evening, Miss; are you well? Very well, thank you. 1 
 *m glad to hear it. And you, Mr. Louis, how do you do? Not 
 very well to-day. Are you well, this evening, Madam ? Pretty 
 well, thank you. I am glad of it. I have neither the baker's dog 
 
36 
 
 SIXTH LESSON. 
 
 nor that of my friend. Are you ashamed 1 I am not ashamed. 
 Are you afraid or ashamed'? I am neither afraid nor ashamed. 
 Have you my kr.ife ? Which one? The fine one. Have you my 
 beef or the cook's ? I have neither yours nor the cook's. Which 
 (lequcl 1 ) have you ? I have that of the captain. Have I your bis 
 cuit ? You have it not. Am I hungry or thirsty ? You are neither 
 hungry nor thirsty. Am I warm or cold ? You are neither warm 
 nor cold. Am I afraid? You are not afraid. You are neither 
 afraid nor ashamed. Have I anything good? You have nothing 
 good. What have I? You have nothing. Which pencil have 1 1 
 You have that of the Frenchman. Have I your thimble or that of 
 the tailor? You have neither mine nor that of the tailor. Which 
 one have I ? You have your friend's. Which umbrella have 1 1 
 \fou have mine. Have I the baker's good bread ? You have it not. 
 Which dictionary have I? You have your own. Have you my 
 iron gun? I have it not. Have I it? You have it. Have I youi 
 mutton or the cook's? You have neither mine nor the cook's. 
 Have I your knife? You have it not. Have you it? I have it. 
 Which biscuit have 1 ? You have that of the captain. 
 
 J) 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 
 Am I hungry ? 
 
 You are hungry. 
 
 You are not hungry. 
 
 Am I wrong ? 
 
 You are wrong. 
 
 You are not wrong. 
 
 Am I right ? 
 
 You are not right. 
 
 You are right. 
 The butter. 
 
 The grocer. Our grocsr. 
 
 The grocer's butter or that :f the 
 
 cook. 
 
 Have I the boy's penknife ? 
 You have it not, (not got it.) 
 Have I Miss Clara's ? 
 You have neither Miss Clara's nor 
 
 the boy's. 
 Which one have I ? 
 You have the grocer's. 
 Have I the cook's butter ? 
 You have it not. You have nothing. 
 Have I anything bad or old ? 
 
 Vou have neither anything bad -nor 
 old (nothing^ 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2dc Section. 
 
 t Ai-je faim ? 
 
 t Vous avez faim. 
 
 1 Vous n'avez pas faun, 
 
 t" Ai-je tort? 
 
 t Vous avez tort. 
 
 t Vous n'avez pas tort. 
 
 t Ai-je raison ? 
 
 t Vous n'avez pas raison. 
 
 t Vous avez raison. 
 Le leurre. 
 
 i,' epicier. Notre epicier. 
 
 Le beurre de 1' epicier ou cclui du 
 
 cuisinier. 
 
 Ai-je le canif du gargon ? 
 Vous ne 1'avez pas. 
 Ai-je celui de Mile. Clara ? 
 Vous n'avez ni celui de Mile. Clara, 
 
 ni celui du gargon. 
 Lequel ai-je ? 
 
 Vous avez celui de 1'epicier. 
 Ai-je le beurre du cuisinier ? 
 Vous neF avez pas. Vous n'avez rien. 
 Ai-je quelque chose de mauvaia ou 
 
 de vieux ? 
 Vous n'avez rien de mauvnia n; 4<? 
 
gJEVENTH LESSOR. 
 
 ll 
 
 O6s. 13. You have neither anything bad nor o\d, being a negative sen- 
 lence, must not be translated by : Vous n'avez pas quelque chose de mauvaiu 
 ni de vieux ; but by : Vous ri uvez rien de mauvais ni de vieux. 
 
 Have you anything ugly or old ? Avez-vous quelque chose de vilain 
 
 ou de vieux ? 
 
 I have neither anything ugly, nor 
 old, nor pretty. 
 
 Je n'ai rien de vilain, ni de vieux, ni 
 
 de joli. 
 
 SIXTH EXERCISE. 2<1 Sec. SIXIEME EXEECICE. 2do Sec. 
 
 Have you the fifth vocabulary to-day? No, Miss, I hare the exer- 
 cise. Which one : the fifth or sixth ? I have the fifth to-day. Sir, 
 have I the sixth vocabulary, this evening ? No. Miss, you have it not 
 Which one have 1 1 You have the fifth vocabulary, second section 
 Which cloth have I ? You have the merchant's. Have you my 
 coffee or that of my boy 1 I have that of your good boy. Have you 
 your shawl or mine 1 ? I have neither yours nor mine. What have 
 you'? I have my brother's good candlestick. Am I right? You 
 are right. Am I wrong? You are not wrong. Am I right or 
 wrong? You are neither right nor wrong; you are afraid. You are 
 not sleepy. You are neither warm nor cold. Have I the good 
 coffee or the good sugar? You have neither the good coffee nor the 
 good sugar. Have 1 anything good or bad ? You have neither any 
 thing good nor bad. What have I? You have nothing. Whai 
 have I pretty ?- You have my friend's pretty dog. Which buttei 
 have I? You have that of your cook. Have I your parasol or the 
 merchant's? You have neither mine nor the merchant's. Which 
 chocolate htve you ? I have that of the Frenchman. Which shoe 
 have you ? I have the shoemaker's leather shoe. Which one have 
 I ? You have that of the old baker. Which one have you? I have 
 that of my old neighbor. What is the matter with you ? I am 
 afraid. Have I anything? You have nothing. 
 
 You are well, I hope ? 
 I am well, perfectly well. 
 I am not very well. 
 
 Vous vous portez bien, j'espere ? 
 Je me porte bien, parfaitement bica, 
 Jc ne me porte pas tres-bicn. 
 
 SEVENTH LESSON, lih.Septiime Le$on, 7me. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 Who ? Has. Who has ? 
 Who has the pencil-case ? 
 The man has the pencil-case. 
 The man has not this pencil-case. 
 
 VOGABULAIRE. ll'G S 
 
 Qui ? a. Qui a ? 
 Qui a le porte-crayon ? 
 L'homme a le porte-crayon. 
 L'homme n'a pas ce porte-vivon. 
 
as* 
 
 SEVEKl'H LSSOW 
 
 \Vho 7ms it 9 
 
 The farmer L&s it 
 
 The farmer has not got it. 
 
 flis or her, (always with a noun,) its. 
 The chicken. His chicken. 
 
 The chest, trunk, caffer. Her chest. 
 The waistcoat, the vest. His vest. 
 The ship, vesse'.. 
 The young man. Young. 
 
 The youth. His rice. 
 
 *lf>, (or it, nominative case.) 
 'kle has, it has. He has not. 
 
 ' Ie has got his chest. 
 
 He has not his waistcoat. 
 
 H^e has ?t. He has it not. 
 
 Has he or has it ? Has he it ? 
 
 Has he his old knife ? 
 
 'das the farmer ? 
 
 Qui I'a ? 
 
 Le/ermier I'a. 
 
 Le fermier nc Va pas. 
 
 Son, (toujours avec un nom.) 
 Le poulet. Son poulet, 
 
 Le coflre. Son coffre. 
 
 Le gilet. Son gilet 
 
 Le batimcnt, le vaisseau. 
 Le jeune homme. Jeune. 
 
 L'adolescent. Son riz, 
 
 II. 
 
 II a. II n'a pas. 
 
 II a son coffre. 
 
 11 n'a pas son gilet. 
 
 II I'a. II ne I'a pas. 
 
 A-t-il? L'a-t-il? 
 
 A-t-ii son vieux couteau ? 
 
 Le fermier a-t-il ? 
 
 Obs. 14. In French, when in the third person, a noun is the nomin&uvi 
 r subject of an interrogative sentence, begin the question with the noun, 
 md piace the pronoun, il, after the verb, as shown above. 
 
 Has our friend got ? 
 
 Has this young man ? 
 
 Has the dog got the mutton ? 
 
 06*. 15. The loner (-f-) between a and il, is inserted for the sake oi 
 euphony, and must be used whenever the verb ends with a vowel. 
 
 Notre ami a-t-il ? 
 
 Ce jeune homme a-t-il ? 
 
 Le chien a-t-il le mouton ? 
 
 He has neither . . . nor . . . 
 
 ife has neither mine nor vours. 
 
 II n'a ni . . . ni . . . 
 
 II n'a ni le mien ni le votre. 
 
 SEVENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. SEPTIEME EXERCICE, Ire Sec. 
 
 \~ou are well, I hope, Miss? Yes, Sir, I am perfectly well. And 
 y..u, Sir, how are you? Pretty well, to-day, thank you. I hope 
 y^u are well, Madam? Yes, Miss, I am very well this morning. 
 \ win very glad to hear it. Are you cold this morning ? No, Sir, I 
 am not cold. Has the youth his chicken ? He has got it. Who has 
 my waistcoat ? The ycung man has it. Has the young man his 
 preity ship ? The your.g man has it riot. Who has it ? The cap- 
 tain nas got it. Has the grocer my knife or yours ? He has neither 
 yours nor mine. Which knife has he ? Which knife or penknife ? 
 Which penknife ? He has ours. Has he it ? Yes, he has got it. 
 Has his brother got my gold ? He has not got it. Have you it 1 No, 
 I have it not. Who has got it ? You have it. Has the youth your 
 waistcoaT or mine? He has neither yours nor mine. Wnich one 
 Las her He has the tailor's. Have you his hammer or his nail ? 
 
SEVENTH LESSOM 
 
 have neither his hammer nor his nail. The carpenter has the 
 hammer, his boy has the nail. Have you his umbrella or his stick 1 
 I have neither his umbrella nor his stick. What have you 1 ? Not 
 anything. Has this farmer his horse or his dog ? He has neithei 
 this nor that. Have I the merchant's rice? Which merchant 1 
 The old one or the young one ? The young one. You have it not, 
 the old grocer has it. Has he his coffee or my sugar? He has 
 neither his coffee nor your sugar. Has the boy his dictionary, my 
 brother's, or that of the Frenchman ? He has not his dictionary noi 
 your brother's ; he has the Frenchman's. Who has my pencil-case? 
 Which pencil-case ? The gold pencil-case or the silver one ? The 
 goid one. I have it. Has the young captain the old ship of Mr. 
 Henri (Henry) ? He has net Mr. Henry's old ship : he has Mr. 
 Robert's good ship, the Helvetius. 
 
 Kow is your friend ? 
 He is not very well. 
 He is better. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 What has he ? What has he got ? 
 What ails him, or is the matter with 
 
 him ? 
 What has the farmer ? (ails him ?) 
 
 He has something. He has nothing. 
 The bird. His bird. 
 
 His or hers (without the noun.) its. 
 
 My money or his or hers. 
 
 My ha? or his. (hers.) 
 
 His bag of rice of money, 
 
 This servant. 
 
 Has his servant your trunk or mine ? 
 
 He has his own, (no noun being used.) 
 He has neither ours nor ymrs, he 
 has his own. (its own.) 
 
 Somebody, anybody. 
 
 Some one, any one. 
 Elas anybody iny book ? 
 Somebody (some one), has it. 
 Has any one got it ? 
 
 No one, nobody, not anybody. 
 >S Nobody has your stick. 
 No one has it. 
 /sany one hungry, sleepy or thirsty ? 
 
 Comment se porte votre ami I 
 II ne se porte pas tres-bien. 
 ] II se porte micux. 
 
 VOCABULATRE. 2Jc Sectioil. 
 
 > Qu'a-t-il? (Obis. 4, p. 28.) 
 
 Qu'a le fermier ? Le fermior. 
 
 qu'a-t-il ? 
 
 II a quelque chose. II n'a rien. 
 
 L'oiseau. Son oiseaii 
 
 Le sien, (sans nom.) 
 
 Mon argent ou le sien. 
 
 Mon sac ou le sien. 
 
 Son sac de riz d'argcnt. 
 
 Ce domestique. 
 
 Son domestique a-t-il son cofiro ou 
 
 le mien ? 
 II a le sien. 
 
 II n'a ni le noire rii le votre, il a le 
 sien. 
 
 Qnclqib'un, (not used with a nega- 
 tive.) 
 
 Quelqu'un a-t-il mon livre ? 
 Quelqu'un t'a. 
 Quelqu'un l'a-t-il ? 
 
 Personne ne. (Nominatif.) 
 Personne n'a votre baton. 
 Personne ne Fa. 
 Quelqu'un a-t-il faim, sommii, 03 
 
 soif? 
 
10 SEVENTH LESSON. 
 
 Quelqu'un a chaud, iroid, on fittr 
 Personne n'a honte, tort, ni raison. 
 
 Some one is warm, cold, or afraid. 
 No one is ashamed, wrong, nor right. 
 
 Obs. 16. Never translate: No one, not any one, 7iol)ody, not 
 &GS, by : Quelqu'un n'a pas but by : personne n'a. 
 
 SEVENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. SEPTIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 You are well, I hope, this evening? I am not very well, thank 
 you. And you, Sir, how are you ? I am better, thank you. How 
 is your brother ? He is perfectly well to-day. How is Mr. Robert? 
 He is better. Who has my trunk? The boy has it. Is anyone 
 thirsty? This old servant is thirsty. Is he hungry? No, he ^s not 
 hungry; he has his bread. Has he the butter ? He has not got it. 
 What has he ? He has his cheese. What has the youth ? Ho 
 has the farmer's fine chicken. Has he *he knife ? No, he has it 
 not; he has the pencil-case. Is he afraid ? He is not ah did. Is 
 he afraid or ashamed ? He is neither afraid nor ashamed. Is the 
 grocer right or wrong ? He is neither right nor wrong. Have I the 
 bag of rice ? Yes, Sir, you have it. W r ho has the farmer's rice ? 
 My servant has it. Has your servant my umbrella ? No, he has it 
 not. Has he yours? No, he has it not. Which one has he got? 
 He has neither yours nor mine. Has he his own ? He has it. 
 What has your friend's boy ? He has my old penknife. Has youi 
 baker my bird or his? He has his. Who has mine ? The carpen- 
 ter has it. Is he warm or cold ? He is neither warm nor cold. 
 Is any one cold ? Nobody is cold. Is anybody warm ? Nobody 
 is warm. Has anybody my chicken ? Nobody has it. Has that 
 servant your vest or mine ? He has neither mine nor yours. 
 Which one has he got ? He has his own. Has any one my gun 'I 
 Which gun ? The old one. No one has it. What has the youth ? 
 He has nothing. Have I your bag or that of your good friend ? No, 
 you have the larmer's bag. Who has Miss Clara's ? Nobody has 
 it. Who has her shawl ? Which shawl ? The cotton or velvet 
 one ? The velvet one. I have it. Who is afraid ? The tailor's 
 boy is (afraid). What is the matter with him? He is afraid of 
 your bad dog. Has the farmer my money ? He has it not. Hag 
 the captain got it ? He has it not. Has he anything good ? He 
 has nothing good. What has he ugly ? He has nothing ugly. 
 Has your cook his mutton ? He has it. Have I your bread or youi 
 cheese ? You have neither my bread nor my cheese. Has any- 
 one my gold button ? No one has it. 
 
 Is your friend better, his morning? | Votre ami fie porte-t-il mieux, o 
 
 matin ? 
 
 Mr. Robert is better. 
 
 Monsieur Robert se poite micux 
 
EIGHTH LESSON 
 
 EIGHTH LESSON, Sdi.Huiticme Legwi, 8me 
 
 Ire Section. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 This, that handkerchief. 
 This, that ox. This, that hay. 
 This, that friend. 
 
 Obs. 17. Get, (before a vowel or h 
 mute.) 
 
 This, that man. 
 This, that inkstand. My inkstand. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 
 
 Ce mouchoir. 
 
 Ce bceuf. Ce/om. 
 
 Get ami. (Get, always before a vowel] 
 
 Cet, (avant une voyelle ou un ii 
 
 muet). 
 Get homme. 
 Get encrier. Mon encrier. 
 
 Obs. IS. Ce, meaning: this or that : Ce livre, does not ofTer the nice 
 distinction found in English, between : this book and that look. To obtuin 
 the same degree of precision, the French say as follows : 
 
 This book. That book. ! Ce livre-ci. 
 
 This inkstand. That inkstand. 1 Get encrier-ci. 
 
 Obs. 19. Mind the hyphen (-) before ci and Id. 
 
 Th sailor. This sailor. 
 
 That tree. The tree. 
 
 His looking-glass, (or her.) This . . . 
 
 His (her) pocket-book or portfolio. 
 
 The mattress. Which mattress ? 
 
 This garden. That pistol. 
 
 The stranger, the foreigner. Our. . . 
 
 This or that glove. 
 
 Have you this or that book ? 
 
 I have this one, I have not tnat one. 
 
 This one. That one. 
 
 Ce I iv re-Id. 
 Cet encrier-ld 
 
 Le matelot. Ce matelot ci. 
 
 Cet arbre-la. L'arbre. 
 
 Son iniroir. Ce miroir-ci. 
 
 Son porte-feuille. 
 
 Le matelas. Quel matelas f 
 
 Ce jardin-ci. Ce pistolet-la. 
 
 L'etranger. Notre dtrangcr. 
 
 Ce gant. 
 
 Avez-vous ce li \re-ci ou celui-Ia 'I 
 
 J'ai celui-ci, je n'ai pas celui-la. 
 
 Cclui-ci. Celui-ld. 
 
 Obs. 20. Instead of: this or that booh, the French say: This book o? 
 that, because, that, (a true pronoun in this case) must have an antecedent to 
 agree with. (3Iind the construction, and see $ 35.) 
 
 Have I this one or that one ? 
 
 You have this one. you have not that 
 
 one. 
 Has the man this or that glove ? 
 
 (Mind the French construction.) 
 
 Ai-je celui-ci ou celui-la ? 
 
 Vous avez cclui-ci, vous n'avez paa 
 
 celui-la. 
 L'homme a-t-il ce gant-ci ou cliii 
 
 la? 
 
 EIGHTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. HUITI^ME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Good evening, Miss Clara, how do you do? I am not very well, 
 Sir, thank you. And you ; Sir, are you well? Pretty well, thani 
 you. I hope your brother is better. Yes, Sir. brother (mon f.) is 
 better. Which inkstand has the stranger? He has that of the 
 sailoi. Has the sailor my looking-glaag? He has it not: I have 
 it- Have 3*011 this pistol or that one ?- I have this one. Have you 
 
E I G H 1 H LESSON 
 
 the ioksland oi my neighbor or that of yours ? 1 have neither lha 
 of jour neighbor nor that of mine. Which one have you ? I have 
 the stranger's. Which glove have you got ? Which one ? Yes, 
 which one. I have the sailor's. You have the sailor's glove 1 
 Yes, I have it. Have you his mattress ? I have it not. Whic 
 Docket-book has the sailor ? He has his own. Who has my go 
 handkerchief ? This stranger has It. Has he got it ? Yes ; he '. 
 it. What has he ? He has my pretty handkerchief. Have I Mis 
 Victoria's handkerchief or pencil-case ? You have neither this no 
 that. What have I ? You have not anything. Who has that pis 
 tol ? The stranger's friend has it. What has your servant ? 
 has the farmer's old tree. Has he that grocer's old handkerchief 
 He has not that of the grocer; he has the sailor's. Has that ox ;h 
 hay of tnis horse ? No, it has its own. Which ox has the farmer 
 He has that of our neighbor. Have I your inkstand or his? Yo 
 have neither mine nor his; you have your brother's. Has th 
 foreigner my bird or his own ? He has got that of the captain. 
 Have you this tree ? I have it not. Are you hungry or thirsty 
 [ am neither hungry nor thirsty; I am sleepy. Has the old sailo 
 this bird or that one ? He has not this ; he has that. Has our 
 vaut this broom or that one ? He has the ugly one. Has your cook 
 this or that chicken ? He has neither this nor that ; he has his own. 
 Am I right or wrong? You are not wrong. Who is right? No 
 body. Have I this or that penknife ? No ; nobody has either th: 
 or that. 
 
 Take a seat and sit down. 
 I thank you. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 The note, the billet, the ticket. 
 The garret, the attic, 'the granary. 
 His corn, his grain, its grain. 
 This copybook. That copybook. 
 Big, bulky, thick, coarse, large. 
 Tha* big tree. 
 
 Your coarse cloth thick paper. 
 But. But not. 
 
 He has not this one, but he has that. 
 He has this one, but not that one. 
 I have that one, but not this one. 
 Clave you this or that note ? 
 (Mind the construction in French. > 
 I have not this one, but that one. 
 
 | Prenez un siege et asseyez-vous. 
 I Je vous remercie. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2dc Section. 
 Le billet. 
 Le grenier. 
 Son grain. 
 
 Ce cahier-ci. Ce c0/iier-ia. 
 Gros. 
 
 Ce gros arbre-la. 
 Votre gros drap gros papier. 
 Jttais. Mais non. Mais non pate. 
 II n'a pas celui-ci, mais il a celui-la 
 I] a celui-ci, mais non celui-lu. 
 J'ai celui-la, mais non pas celui-ci. 
 Avez-vous cc billet- ci ou celui-la ? 
 rmais j'ai eelui 
 Jc n'ai pas celui-ci, < la. 
 ' v mais eeiui h 
 
EIGHTH LESSON. 
 
 nave this one, but not that one. 
 
 Has my friend my dog or his ? 
 He has mine, but I have his. 
 That or which, (relative pronoun.) 
 
 Have I the copybook that you have ? 
 (Have I the copybook you have ?) 
 
 I have not the note which your bro- 
 ther has. (the note your, &c.) 
 
 That which, the one which. 1 
 
 [ have not that which you have. 
 
 1 have not that which he has. 
 
 Have I the glove which you have ? 
 
 You have not that which I have. 
 
 finals j 
 ui-ci, < la. 
 Cmais i 
 
 je li ai pascului- 
 J'ai celui-i 
 
 non celui-la. 
 Mon ami a-t-il mon chien cu le sien I 
 II a le mien, mais j'ai le sien. 
 Q.ue, (never understood in French, 
 
 as it is frequently in English.) 
 Ai-je le cahier que vous avez ? 
 
 Je n'ai pas le billet quo votre frere a. 
 
 Ceiui que. ($$ 35, 36.) 
 Je n'ai pas celui que vous avez. 
 Je n'ai pas celui qu'il a. 
 Ai-je le gant que vous avez ? 
 Vous n'avez pas celui que j'ai. 
 
 EIGHTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. HUITIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Good evening. Madam, you are well, I hope ? Perfectly well, 
 Sir, I thank you. I am glad to hear it. And you, Sir, how do you 
 do ? Not very well ; but take a seat and sit down. Thank you, I 
 have a seat. Have you the corn of your granary or that of mine 
 I have neither that of your granary nor that of mine ; but I have 
 that of our merchant. Have you the grocer's? No, I have it not. 
 Who has my glove ? That servant has it. What has this servant '? 
 He has the old farmer's big tree. Has the farmer this or that ox (mind 
 the French construction.') He has neither this nor that ; but he hag 
 the one which the boy has not. Which boy? The big one or the 
 good one ? The big one. Have you that young horse's corn ? I 
 have it not ; our servant has it. Has your brother my note or his .- 
 He has neither yours nor his own ; but he has that of the big sailor. 
 Have you the copybook ? Which copybook ? The big copybook. 
 The big copybook ? No, I have it not ; but Charles has it. What 
 have you got ? I have my copybook, yours, his. or hers, and the 
 grocer's. Have you the chest which I have ? I have not that 
 which you have. Which handkerchief have you? I have the ont) 
 which your brother has not. Which inkstand has our friend's bro- 
 ther ? He has that which the farmer's boy has not. What copy- 
 book have you? I have the big one which you have not. What 
 horse has the shoemaker ? He has that which our brother's farmer 
 Has not. What has the grocer ? He has the bag of rice which I 
 
 1 Translate : the one, by celui, except when the one is m apposition ^o the 
 ether. (Less. 15.> 
 
NINTH LESSON. 
 
 have not. Which waistcoat have you? I have that wli'ch 
 young friend has not got. Are you cold or hungry ? I am neitli 
 cold nor hungry; but Jean (John) is afraid. Is he afraid? Ye 
 he is afraid of that big ox. Who is sleepy 1 I am not sleepy, but 
 1 am thirsty. Have you the iron or the wooden ship 1 I have 
 neither this nor that ; but I have that which the big captain has net 
 
 T am very sorry to hear it, tor for K.)]| J'en suis bien faclie. 
 
 NINTH LESSON, 9th. Neuvieme Le$on } 9me. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. Formation du Pluriel. 
 
 As the plural of nouns, in French, is shown by the preceding article 01 
 
 attending word, we will, in the first place, give the plural of those different 
 
 expressions, 
 
 Singulier. / Plural for \ 
 
 Masculin. / both genders. 1 ^ 
 
 Le v ( The. / 
 
 Dumbr: deleft V Of the. 
 
 Obs. 21. Des, (contraction of : deles, preposition and article plural,) 
 not, [and mind it carefully] the plural of: de, which, being a preposition, i 
 invariable; but that of : du, (contraction of: de le, preposition and artic 
 bingular.) 
 
 My, ofmy.\ Mon, demon. /My, ofmy\\ Mes, 
 
 Singular. \ 
 Masculine. I 
 The. / 
 
 Of tlie.j/ 
 
 Pluriel pour 
 
 les deux genres, 
 
 Les. 
 
 Des^for : de les.)} 
 
 -- j \ 
 
 Your, of yourl Votre, de votre. 
 His, her, of his. I Son, de son. 
 Our, of our. | Notre, de notre 
 Their, of their] Leur, de leur. 
 Which ? / Quel ? 
 
 Which one ? / Lequel ? 
 This , that. -J Ce, cet. 
 
 Your, of your A Vos, 
 His, her, of her. 1 Ses, 
 Our, of our. INos, 
 Their, of their ./Leurs, 
 Which ? / Quels ? 
 
 Which ones ? / Lesqueis ? 
 
 de me 
 de vos. 
 de ses. 
 de nos, 
 de leun 
 
 1,18 
 
 : 
 
 V 
 
 These 
 
 Ces. 
 
 General Rule for the formation of the Plural. 
 
 j leura. 
 
 The plural number, is in English, is formed by adding an s to the singu 
 lar. But, in French, this rule is not only applicable to nouns, but also to 
 articles, adjectives, and pronouns. 
 
 The books. \ Les livres. 
 Of the book. \ Du livre. 
 The sticks. \Les batons. 
 
 Of the sticks. |Des batons. 
 Of the copybooksJDcs cahiers. 
 
 The good books! Les bens livres. 
 Of the books. jDes livres. 
 The good sticks. JLes bons batons. 
 The copybooks. /Les cahiers. 
 The pretty copy/ Les jolis cahiora. 
 books. J 
 
NINTH LZSSOff. 
 
 The good friends. | Les bons amis. 
 
 Our pretty shawls.] Nos jolis chales. 
 
 My penknives. / Mes canifa. 
 
 Small. _x Petit. Petits. 
 
 Which large fans have I ? 
 You have my large fans. 
 Who has the merchant's shawls ? 
 N T obody has his shawls, but some one 
 has his pretty parasols and ribbons. 
 
 Which ones ? The small ones. 
 Elave you rry leather shoes ? 
 [ have not your leather shoes, but 
 your cloth coats. 
 
 the friends.X Des amie. 
 Of our shawls. \ De nos chalee, 
 Of his penknives! De ses canifs. 
 
 iGreat, large. f Grand. Granda 
 
 ^w~ -^ 
 
 Quels grands eventails ai-je ? 
 Vous avez mes grands eventails. 
 Qui a les chales du rnarchand ? 
 Personne n'a ses chales, mais 
 
 quelqu'un a ses jolis parasols ct 
 
 ses rubans. 
 
 Lesquels ? Les petits. 
 Avez-vous mes souliers de cuir ? 
 Je n'ai pas vos souliers de cuir, maie 
 
 vos habits de drap. 
 
 NINTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. NEUVIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Good evening, Miss, I hope you are well ? Perfectly well. Sir, 
 I thank you. I am glad to hear it.- How is your father ? He is 
 well, I hope. No, Sir, not very well. I am sorry to hear it. But 
 take a seat and sit down. Thank you. Have you my gloves'? 
 Yes, Sir, I have your gloves. Have you the stranger's gloves ? No. 
 Sir, I have not his gloves. Have I your looking-glasses? You 
 have our looking-glasses. What has the little sailor? He has the 
 pretty parasols. Has he my sticks or my guns? He has neither 
 your sticks nor your guns. Who has the tailor's good waistcoats? 
 Nobody has his vests ] but somebody has his silver buttons. Has 
 the Frenchman's boy our good umbrellas? He has not our good 
 umbrellas, but our parasols. Has the shoemaker the shoes of the 
 strangers ? He has not their shoes. Has he their bags ? Which 
 bags ? Their leather bags. No, he has neither their shoes nor their 
 leather tags ; but he has the velvet shoes of the merchants. What 
 .\as the captain? He has his go^d sailors. Which brooms has our 
 servant ? He has the brooms 01 our grocer. Of the young or of 
 the old grocer ? Of the old one. Has this man those large fans . 
 He has not those large fans. Has he your copybook or your friend's? 
 He has neither mine nor my friend's; he has his own. Have you 
 three of the exercises ? Of which exercises ? Of the exercises of 
 V. Value. Yes, I have three of his exercises. Has your brother 
 the wine which I have or that which you have? He has neither 
 that which you have nor that which I have. Which wine has he ? 
 He has that of his grocer. Have you the bag which my server;! 
 has ? I have not the bag which your servant has. Have you the 
 chicken which my cook has or that which the peasant has? I have 
 neither that which your cook has nor that which the peasant lias. 
 U the peasant cold or warm ? He is neither cold nor warm. 
 
NINTH LESSON 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. VOCABULAIRE. 2dc Section* 
 
 Exceptions to the General Rule to form the Plural. 
 
 let EXCEPTION. Nouns ending in s, x, or z, admit of no variation in I 
 plural ; because those terminations are considered as plural ones. 
 
 The stockings. 
 The French. 
 The Englishma 
 Our choice. 
 The nose. 
 
 Les has. 
 Les Fran^ais. 
 L' Anglais. 
 Notre choix. 
 Le ncz. 
 
 My mattresses. "NMes matelas. 
 Their woods, forests) Leurs boie. 
 The English. /Les Anglais. 
 Our choices. / Nos choix. 
 The noses. / Les nez. 
 
 2d EXCEPTIOJW* Nouns ending in au, eu, and some in cm, 1 take x inete 
 
 The hats. 
 The place. 
 This fire. 
 That jewel. 
 
 Les chapeaux. 
 Le lieu. 
 Ce feu-ci. 
 Ce bijou-la. 
 
 a. iiau jowoi. v^o uij^u-i< 
 
 The cabbages.) Les choux 
 
 The birds. 
 The places. 
 ' Those fires. 
 These jewels.] 
 Your toys. 
 
 Les oiseaux. 
 Les lieux. 
 Ces feux-la. 
 Ces bijoux-ci. 
 Vos joujoux. 1 
 
 3d EXCEPTION. Nouns ending in al, 2 or ail, 3 change those terminatio 
 into auxy As:\ 
 
 The horses. \ Les chevaux. I /General, gener&^Generaljgener: 
 The work, laborJ Le travail. I \The works, labors jLes travaux. 
 
 Obs. 22. There are a few more exceptions in the formation of the plu 
 of nouns and adjectives, which will be separately noted as they occur. 
 
 The ships. | Les batiments tnrbatimens. 
 
 Obs. 23. According to some grammarians, nouns of more than one sylu 
 ole, (polysyllables,) ending in the singular in ntj drop t in the plural, 
 nouns of one syllable /"monosyllables) having this ending, never do. 
 The gloves.} [ Les gants. 
 
 1 The other nouns ending in ou, that take x in the plural, are : le caillou, 
 the pebble; le genou, the knee ; le hibou, the owl. All others that have 
 this termination mw follow the general rule, taking s in the plural ; as, h 
 clou, the nail, pluf les clous, the nails ; le verrou,ilie bolt, plur. les verrou 
 the bolts, &c. 
 
 2 Of the nouns ending in al, several follow the general rule, simply taki; 
 s in the plural, particularly the following : le bal, the ball ; le cal, the callo 
 sity ; lepal, the pale ; le regal, the treat ; le carnaval, the carnival, &e. 
 
 3 The nouns ending in ail, which make their plural in aux, are particularly 
 the following : le bail, the lease ; le sous-bail, the under-lease ; le corail, 
 the coral; I' email, the enamel; le soupirail, the air-hole; le travail, the 
 work ; le vantail, the leaf of a folding-door ; le ventail, the ventail. All 
 others having this termination follow the general rule, i. e. take s in the 
 plural, as, Vattirail, the train; le detail, particulars; Veventail, the fan; 
 le gouvcrnail, the rudder : leportail, the portal ; le. serai?, the seraglio ; &o 
 
NINTH LESSON. 
 
 4? 
 
 f he eye. ^ 
 
 The scissors; 
 
 Les ciseaux. 
 
 VVIiich horses have you ? 
 
 I have the fine horses of your -good 
 
 neighbors. 
 
 Have I his small gloves ? 
 You have not his small gloves, but 
 
 you have his large hats. 
 Which gloves have I ? 
 You have the pretty gloves of your 
 
 brothers. 
 Have you the large hammers of the 
 
 carpenters ? 
 I have not their large hammers, but 
 
 their large nails. 
 
 Has your brother my wooden guns ? 
 He has not your wooden guns. 
 Which ones has he ? 
 Have you the frenchmen's fine um- 
 brellas ? 
 I have not their fine umbreUas, but I 
 
 have their fine sticks. 
 
 The oxen. 
 
 Of my gardens. 
 
 Of your woods or l^rests. 
 
 Have you the trees of my gardens ? 
 
 I have not the trees of your gardens. 
 
 Of my pretty gardens. 
 
 Of my fine horses. 
 
 Les yeux. 
 Les porte 
 
 Quels chevaux .TVCZ-TOUS ? 
 
 J'ailes beaux chevaux ue vos bom 
 
 voisins. 
 
 AI-JQ ses petits gants 
 Vous n' avez pas ses petits gantg, mais 
 
 vous avez ses grands chapeaiix. 
 Quels gants ai-je ? 
 Vous avez IBS jolis gants de vo& 
 
 freres. 
 Avez-vous les grands marteaux des 
 
 charpentiers ? 
 Je n'ai pas leurs grands marteaux, 
 
 mais j'ai leurs grands clous. 
 Votre frere a-t-il mes fusils de boie ? 
 II n'a pas vos fusils de bois. 
 Lesquels a-t-il ? 
 Avez-vous les beaux parapluies dea 
 
 Frangais ? 
 Je n'ai pas leurs beaux parapluies, 
 
 mais j'ai leurs beaux batons. 
 
 Les boeufs. (in the plural, f silent.) 
 
 De mes jardins. 
 
 De vos bois. 
 
 Avez-vous les arbres de mes jardins? 
 
 Je n'ai pas les arbres de vos jardins. 
 
 De mes jolis jardins. 
 
 De mes beaux chevaux. 
 
 NINTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. NEUVIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Are you well, Miss Gertrude ? Yes, Sir, I 2.m very well, thank 
 you. And you, Sir, how do you do ? Not very well, thank you, 
 Miss. Indeed ! I am sorry to hear it. Take off your shawl and hat, 
 and sit down. Thank you, thank you. With pleasure, I will. Have 
 I your pretty pocket-books? You have not my pretty pocket-books, 
 Which pocket-books have I ? You have the small pocket-bookg 
 of your friends. Has the foreigner our good pistols'? He has not 
 our good pistols, but our old sticks. Who has our ships ? The fo- 
 reigner has our ships. Who has our fine horses ? Nobody has our 
 fine horses; but somebody has our fine oxen. Has your neighboi 
 the choice of those trees ? Our neighbor has not the choice of those 
 f /ees; but the great general has it. Who has the old jewels of Mis< 
 
 140.) For the formation of the plural of compound words. 
 
48 
 
 TENTH LESSON. 
 
 Le Noir? Her brother has her jewels. Has the little boy his tov 
 or his birds'? He has his birds ; but little John (le petit} has his play- 
 things. Has the farmer got the horses' hay? He has not their hay 
 but their corn. Has that tailor my fine gold buttons ? He has 
 your fine gold buttons; but our old silver strings. Has our frien 
 our bi pencils 1 He has not our big pencils, but he has the ug 
 dogs of the generals. Has little John the choice of those toys 
 No, he has not the choice of those toys: but little Robert has 
 Who has the merchant's fine inkstands'? Nobody has his fin 
 inkstands ; but I have his large copybooks. Who has their coan 
 handkerchiefs ? The captaiivs sailor has their coarse handkerchief; 
 Have you the grocer's coal ? No, I have it not. Have I got it 
 You have it not. Who has his coal? The servants of the genen 
 What have you? I have something bad. What have you ba 
 I have the bad chocolate. The grocer's bad chocolate ? No, j 
 old sailor's. Has your friend the small knives of our merchant; 
 He has not their small knives, but their golden candlesticks. Hav 
 you the big cabbages or the little ones? I have neither the bi< 
 cabbages nor the little ones. Which have you ? I have the farn 
 er's good cabbages. Have you the choice of the cabbages? No, 
 have it not; but my brother has it. Which choice has he ? He ha 
 the first. Who has the second choice? I have it not. What fa 
 have you? What fin have I? Yes, what fan have you? I hav 
 not yours, but mine 
 
 A sore throat. Mai de gorge. 
 
 A cold. A bad cold. Un rhumc. Un mauvais rlmn 
 
 A headache. Mai de tete. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 
 fENTH LESSON, 10th. Dixieme Le$on, lOme. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire S&ction. 
 Ceux. Ceux des generaux. 
 
 Avez-vous mes dictionnaires ou ceil 
 
 du general ? 
 
 Je n'ai pas les votres, j'ai ceux du 
 general. 
 
 Ceux que. ($ 36.) 
 Avez-vous les mouchoirs quc j'ai ? 
 
 Those. Those of the generals. 
 
 Have you my dictionaries or those of 
 
 the general ? 
 f have not yours, I have those of the 
 
 general. 
 
 Those which. 
 I Fare you the handkerchiefs which I 
 
 have ? 
 
 I have not those (which) you have. 
 The Cioak. Our cloaks. 
 
 This seat. These seats. 
 
 Has the tailor this gentleman 1 1 
 
 cloak ? 
 
 Je n'ai pas ceux que'vous avez. 
 Le manteau. Nos manteaux. 
 
 Ce siege. . Ces sieges. 
 
 Le tailleur a-t-il le manteau do 
 Monsieur ? 
 
TENTH LESS ON. 
 
 49 
 
 The gentlemen. 
 
 Ladies. Young ladies. 
 
 (Used when speaking to them.) 
 Have you my silver knives ? 
 No, I have mine, 
 
 Obs. 24. As mine refers to a pi 
 plural pronoun. Then use : les mie:is 
 f-i mini. 
 
 Les Messieurs. 
 Mesdames. 
 
 Mcsdemoiselleu. 
 
 Avez-vous ines coutcaux d'argent? 
 Non, j'ai les miens. 
 
 .iral noun, it must be translated by 8 
 , which is plural, and not the singular ; 
 
 Mine my own Of mine. 
 Yours, your own. Of yours. 
 His or hers (his or her own.) Of his. 
 Ours, our own. Of our own. 
 Theirs, their own Of theirs. 
 
 These substantives. Those nouns. 
 The article. The articles. 
 
 Which adjective ? Which adjectives ? 
 This verb. Those verbs. 
 
 The pronoun, pronouns personal, 
 namely, or viz : I, you, he, it, &c. 
 Also. The catalogue. 
 
 Singulier. Phiriel. 
 
 Le mien. Les miens, des miens. 
 
 Le votre. Les votres. des votres. 
 
 Le sicn. Les siens. des siens. 
 
 Le notre. Les notres. des not.res. 
 
 Le leur. Les leurs. des leurs. 
 
 Ces substantifs-ci..Ccs noms-Ia. 
 L' article. Les articles. 
 
 Quel adjectif? Quels adjectifs ? 
 Ce verbe-ci. Ces verbes-la. 
 
 Le pronom. Les pronoins personnels, 
 savoir : Jc, vous, il, le, ct cetera. 
 Aussi. Le catalogue. 
 
 TEXTII EXERCISE. 1st Sec. DIXIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Good day, Miss, you are well, I hope ? Very well, Sir, I thank 
 you And you, how do you do? Not very well^ this morning. 
 Indeed! I am very sorry for it. What is the matter with you? 
 I have a bad cold and a sore throat. How is the general ? (M. le 
 general?) He is pretty well. And his brother'? He is pretty well 
 also. Take a seat and sit down. Have you these or those nouns'! 
 I have neither these nor those nouns. Which ones have you? 1 
 have those which little Robert has namely, (savoir :) handker- 
 chief, iikstand, cloak, dictionary, fan, penknife, &c. Have you: 
 the eye ? Yes. I have : Vail. Have you the plural of ceil? I have it, 
 and he has got it, also. Has Charles the catalogue of the verbs 
 which you have ? He has the catalogue of those which I have and 
 that of yours, also. Have you the French of: to give? I have 
 it not; but I have that of, He is better, and that of the places. Have 
 you the horses of the French or those of the English'? I have those 
 of the English, but not those of the French. Which oxen have you ? 
 I have those of the foreigners. Have }ou the fans which I have 1 
 I hnve not those which you have, but those which your brother 
 bas. Has your brother his biscuits or mine ? He has his own and 
 mine also. Has he got yours or those of the young general ? He 
 hos neither ours nor those of the young general. Which horses has 
 
50 
 
 TENTH LESSCN. 
 
 your friend's grocer 1 He has those which the stranger has not. 
 Has your farmer my copybooks or theirs? He has neither ours n< 
 theirs, but he has those of the captain. Have I your vests or th 
 of the tailors'? You have not theirs, you have mine. Have I the 
 large cloaks ? No, you have not got the large cloaks. Which ink- 
 stands have I ? You have not ours, but those of our neighbors. 
 Have you the birds of the sailors ? I have not their birds, but their 
 fine sticks. Which jewels has this ugly boy ? He has mine. Hav3 
 I my shoes or those of the shoemakers ? You have not yours, but 
 theirs. Which paper has the man ? He has ours. Has he our 
 coffee ? He has it not. Have you our big coats, or those of th 
 strangers? I have not anything. Has your brother this or the 
 lawyer? He has that one. Have I these or those books'? Yo 
 have not anything. 
 
 I hope you are better ? 
 Much better, at your service. 
 The toothache. 
 
 J'espere que vous vous portez mieu 
 Beaucoup mieux, a votre service. 
 Mai aux dents. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 Ce mot-ci. Ces mots-la. 
 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 
 This word. Those words. 
 
 Have you these words or those ? 
 Have you these or those words ? 
 These (plural of: this one.} 
 Those (plural of: that one.} 
 I have neither these nor those. 
 Has he these or those ? 
 He has these ; he has not those. 
 You have neither these nor those. 
 YOM have neither the one nor the 
 
 other. 
 You have neither the former nor the 
 
 latter. 
 
 Obs. 25 The English phrases : the former or the latter ; the one and the 
 other, are generally expressed by: celui-ci, ceux-ci ; celui-ld, ceux-ld ; bul 
 in an inverted order : celui-ci, referring to the latter or nearest object ; UIM! 
 celui'lcty to the former or more dista?it one. 
 
 Have you my guns or yours ? | Avez-vous mos fusils ou les votrca 1 
 
 Avez-vous ces mots-ci ou ceu.x-Iii? 
 
 Ceux-ci. (pluriel de : celui-ci.} 
 Ceux-ld. (pluriel de : celui-ld.} 
 Je n'ai ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la. 
 A-t-il ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? 
 II a ceux-ci ; il n'a pas ceux-la. 
 
 Vous n'avez ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la. 
 
 I have neither yours nor mine. 
 
 I have neither the former nor the 
 
 latter. 
 
 , Have you not ? 
 
 Have you nothing ? (not anything.) 
 Nobody, (no one, not anyone) (ob- 
 jective.) * 
 Yon have nobody. 
 What have you not ? (or not go? ?) 
 
 1 Je n'ai ni les votres ni les miens. 
 Je n'ai ni ceux-la, ni ceux-ci. 
 
 N' avez-vous pas ? 
 N 'avez-vous ricn ? 
 Ne .... personne. (Regime.) 
 
 Vous n'avez personne. 
 Que ifavcz-vous pas ? 
 
TENTH LESSON. 
 
 51 
 
 Has he ? lias he not ? 
 
 Has he anything ? ,'ias he nothing ? 
 
 Has he any one ? Has he nobody ? 
 
 What has he not ? 
 
 Has not the man got ? 
 
 Has not the dog got anything ? 
 
 Have you my penknife ? 
 
 Yes, Sir, I have got it. 
 
 Have you not (got) my penknife ? 
 
 No, Sir, I have it not. 
 
 Have you not got it, Miss ? 
 
 Yes, I have it. 
 
 06s. 26. When the question is 
 affirmatively by: Si fait, instead of: 
 as usual. 
 
 Has he nothing ? No, nothing. 
 
 Yes, he has something. 
 
 Have you not your money ? 
 
 Yes, I have it. No, I have it not. 
 
 Has not the scholar his book ? 
 
 Yes, he has it. 
 
 The scholar, pupil, student. 
 
 A-t-il? N'a-t-ilpas ? 
 
 A-t-il quelque chose ? N'a-t-il rient 
 
 A-t-il quelqu'un ? N'a-t-il personnel 
 
 Que iCa-t-il pas ? 
 
 L'homme n'a-t-il pas ? 
 
 Le chien n'a-t-il rien ? 
 
 Avez-vous mon canif ? 
 
 Oui, Monsieur, je 1'ai. 
 
 N'avez-vous pas mon canif? 
 
 Non, Monsieur, je ne 1'ai pas. 
 
 Ne 1'avez-vous pas, Mademoiselle f 
 
 Si fait, je 1'ai. 
 
 asked negatively, the French answer 
 ; Oui. The negative answer remains 
 
 N'a-t-il rien ? Non, rien. 
 
 Si fait, il a quelque chose. 
 N'avez-vous pas votre argent ? 
 Si fait, je 1'ai. Non, je ne 1'ai pas. 
 L'ecolier n'a-t-il pas son livre ? 
 Si fait, il 1'a. 
 L'ecolier. 
 
 TENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. DIXIEME EXEECICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 I hope you are better this evening, Miss. I thank yon. I am much 
 better ; but my young brother has the toothache. I am very sorry 
 f or it. How is Mr. Charles ? He is riot well ; he has a bad cold. 
 Has he a sore throat 1 ? No, he has not a sore throat; but he has a 
 headache. And you, Sir, are you well? I am perfectly well, thank 
 you. I am glad of it. Has your carpenter our hammers or those 
 of the scholars, our friends ? He has neither ours nor those of tho 
 scholars. Which nails has he ? He has his good iron nails. Has 
 any one the fans or shawls of the English? No one has those of 
 the English, but some one has those of the French. Have you not 
 rqy cloak ? Yes (si fait), I have it. Have you not the hats of the 
 generals ? Yes, I have the generals 7 hats. Has not the dog tho 
 cook's chickens? Yes, it has his chickens. Has he not his large* 
 knives ? Yes, he has his large knives. Who has his cheese ? His 
 cheese' 1 He has it. Has he got it? Who has my old gun? The 
 sailor has it. Has not the shoemaker the student's old shoe ? Yes, 
 he has it. Has not our cook the stranger's money? No, he has 
 not. Have you not got that money ? Yes, I have. (1st Direction) 
 Have I anything? Yes, you have something. What have I ? You 
 have your friend's leather gloves. Has not big /ohn something 
 good 1 Ye*, he has something good. And little Charles, \\hat has 
 
TENTH LESSON. 
 
 he ? Nothing. What have you smalL? I have Lamartiue's pre 
 little bird (joli petit.) Who has our copybooks and his? I have 
 neithe v these nor those. Has the general's boy nothing? Yes, he 
 nas his lictionary of French, his inkstand, his pencil, his copybooks 
 and his little brother's toys. Have I that farmer's bags'? You hav 
 not his bags, but his corn. Has he your books or her shawls'? 
 has neither these nor those but he has the old handkerchiefs. I 
 the stranger's brother hungry ? He is not hungry, but thirsty. I 
 your friend cold or sleepy'? He is neither cold nor sleepy; but ] 
 is afraid. Is he afraid of your dog ? He is not afraid. Has not th 
 young man the brooms of our servants'? He has not their brooms 
 but their soap. Which pencils has he not? He has not mine. Ha 
 he not large eyes? Yes, he has large eyes. What eyes IK.S th 
 bird ? It has small eyes. 
 
 How is the weather ? 
 
 What kind of weather is it ? 
 
 [s it warm ? It is warm. 
 
 It is not warm. 
 
 [t is line (bad) weather. 
 
 It is cold. Is it cold ? 
 
 [s it not cold ? 
 
 I wish (or bid) you a good morning. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 3d Section. 
 Who has ? Who has not ? 
 
 Who has something ? 
 Who has nothing ? 
 Who has some one ? 
 Who has nobody ? 
 Who has not got the young bird ? 
 Has he neither this nor that ? 
 Has he neither these nor those ? 
 
 The comb. These large combs. 
 
 My glass. Their little glasses. 
 
 Have you the glasses ? I have them. 
 
 Them, (objective, $ 43.) 
 
 Elas he my fine glasses ? 
 
 He has them. [He them has.] 
 
 He has them not. 
 
 Have I got them ? (Them have I ?) 
 
 You have them. You have them not. 
 
 Have you them not ? (not got them ?) 
 
 5fts. I have them. 
 
 Has he not got it ? Yes, he has it. 
 
 Has not the sailor got my old pistols ? 
 
 t Quel temps fait-il ? 
 
 t Fait-il chaud ? II fait chaud. 
 
 II ne fait pas chaud. 
 
 t II fait beau (mauvais) temps. 
 
 t II fait froid. Fait-il froid ? 
 
 Ne fait-il pas froid ? 
 
 Je vous souhaite le bonjour. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section. 
 Qui a? Qui n'a pas ? 
 
 Qui a quelque chose ? 
 
 Qui n'a rien ? 
 
 Qui a quelqu'un ? 
 
 Qui n'a personne ? 
 
 Qui n'a pas le jeune oiseau ? 
 
 N'a-t-il ni celui-ci ni celui-la? 
 
 N'a-t-il. ni ceux-ci ni ceoix-la ? 
 
 Le peigne. Ces grands peigneb, 
 \[Vlon verre Leurs petits verres. 
 Avez-vous les verres ? Je les ai. 
 Les, (regime direct : avant le verue.i- 
 A-t-ii mes beaux verres ? 
 II les a. ($ 51, fec.) 
 II ne les a pas. 
 Les ai-je ? 
 
 Vous les avez. Vous ne les avez paa 
 Ne les avez- vous pas ? 
 Si fait, je les ai. 
 Ne l'a-t-il pas ? Si fait, il 1'a. 
 Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mfB vieus 
 pistolets ? 
 
TENTH LESSON. 
 
 He has them not. 
 
 Yes, ho has them. 
 
 Has he not got them ? 
 
 Have I it not ? Have I them not ? 
 
 Ye 3:, you have it. You have them. 
 
 H.ave I nobody ? 
 
 Yes, you have somebody. 
 
 Have I nothing ugly ? 
 
 Yes, you have something ugly. 
 
 Have I neither your gold nor your 
 
 silver thimble ? 
 Yes, you have them. 
 What have I not? 
 You have not the scissors of silver. 
 Am I neither hungry nor thirsty ? 
 This lawyer. The minister. 
 
 Has not this lawyer got ? 
 Has our cook got nothing ? 
 Has their neighbor nobody ? 
 What has not the doctor got ? 
 Is not the dog hungry or thirsty ? 
 Is Carnot neither sleepy nor afraid ? 
 Is he not right ? Yes, he is. 
 
 Is not that minister wrong ? 
 No ; that minister is right. 
 Which lawyer has the stranger ? 
 He has the minister's brother. 
 
 II ne les a pas. 
 
 Si fait, il les a. 
 
 Ne les a-t-il pas ? 
 
 Ne 1' ai-je pas ? Ne les ai-je pis ? 
 
 Si fait, vous 1'avez vous les ave*. 
 
 N'ai-je personne ? 
 
 St fait, vous avez quelqu'un. 
 
 N'ai-je rien de viiain I 
 
 Si fait, vous avez quelque chose de 
 
 viiain. 
 N'ai-je ni votre d3 d'or ni culai 
 
 d'argent ? 
 
 Si fait, vous ies avez. 
 Que n' ai-je pas ? 
 
 Vous n'avez pas les ciseauxd' ardent - 
 N'ai-je ni faim ni soif ? 
 Cet avocat. Le ministre. 
 
 Get avocat n' a-t-il pas ? 
 Notre cuisinier n'a-t-il rien ? 
 Leur voisin n'a-t-il personne ? 
 Le medecin que n'a-t-il pas ? 
 Le chien n'a-t-il pas faim ou soif ? 
 Carnot n'a-t-il ni sommeil ni peur ? 
 N'a-t-il pas raison ? Si fait. 
 Ce ministre-la n'a-t-il pas tort ? 
 Non ; ce ministre-la a raison. 
 Quel avocat 1'etranger a-t-il ? 
 II a le frere du ministre. 
 
 TENTH EXERCISE. 3d Sec. DIXIEME EXERCICE. 3me Sec. 
 
 Mile. Charlotte, I wish you a good morning. How do you do ? 
 Thank you. Sir, I am very well, but very cold. Is it cold ? Yes, it 
 is very cold. I am sorry for it. How is your young friend? I hope 
 he is better this morning. Yes, Sir, he is better. And how is Ma- 
 dame 1 Madame is perfectly well. Mile. Anne is well, I hope ] 
 No, not very well And her brother has a bad cold. Take a seat 
 and sit down. Thank yoiL Is it warm to-day? No, it is not 
 \varm. Have you my fine glasses'? I have them. Have you riot 
 the fine horses of the English'? I haVe them not. Who has them ! 
 The old minister has. (Dir. 1st.) Which sticks have you? I havo 
 those of the foreigners. Who has our small combs? My bo) r s have 
 them. Which knives has the lawyer's servant ? He has those of 
 vour friends. Which (ones) has he not ? He has not purs. Have 
 1 not your good guns ? No, you have not got them but the old 
 general has them. What has the farmer got ? He has the grocer's 
 bag of rice. Has not the pretty young man Miss Clara's beautifu-J 
 
ELEVENTH LESSON. 
 
 handkerchiefs? He has them not, I have them. Have you them? 
 Yes, I have them. I have also her velvet shawl, her gold pencil- 
 case > her silver inkstand, her small copybooks, her two large dic- 
 tionaries of French; her fans, and the toys of her friend Auguste. 
 Who has the fine cloaks of the generals'? The minister's servant 
 has them. Has the scholar the words which you have ? He has 
 them not. Has not the scholar got good dictionaries? Yes, he hag 
 good dictionaries of French. Which playthings has the grocer's 
 Little boy ? He has little Henry's playthings. Have you the noun 
 adjectives, and pronouns of the (la) ninth les&on? I have tho 
 cf the ninth vocabulary and those of the exercises. Has ti:e lawye 
 or the minister the choice of the farmer's cabbages? The lawye 
 has it. Has he not also the choice of the grocer's cheese ? Yes, he 
 has. Who has the choice of the merchant's wine? The minister, 
 ihe lawyer, or the generals? -Neither the minister, the lawyer, nc 
 the generals, but the grocer. Are you not ashamed? No, I an 
 not. Is the scholar ashamed-? Yes, he is. Is he right or wrong 
 He is not wrong, he is right. Is not the tailor ashamed of his coats 
 Yes, he is ashamed of his coats. W T ho is not cold ? I am not.- 
 Who has nothing ugly? Their brother's friend has nothing ugly.- 
 Has the youth Anne's handkerchiefs? Which handkerchiefs? The 
 email ones. No, he has them not; but he has those of her brother. 
 Who has the cook's mutton ? Nobody has it ; but the carpenter's 
 dog has. (Dir. 1st.) Has the stranger got the farmer's fine mutton 
 He has it not. Have you my pretty pistols or those of my brother 
 [ have neither yours nor your brothers', but my own. Who 
 these or those nails ? Nobody has either these or those. 
 
 I am glad to hear it. 
 
 I am glad to see you. 
 
 I am sorry to hear that you have the 
 
 toothache. 
 Out of doors. Pleasant, agreeable. 
 
 Je suis bien aise de 1'apprendre. 
 
 Je suis bien aise de vous voir. 
 
 Je suis fache d'apprendre que vou 
 
 avez mal aux dents. 
 Dehors. Agreable. 
 
 ELEVENTH LESSON, llth. Onzicme Le$on, llmt. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 They. have. They have got. 
 They have not. They have nothing. 
 They have it. They have it not. 
 They have them. 
 They have not got. them. 
 The Germans. The Turtz 9. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 
 
 Us. ont. 
 
 Us n'ont pas. 
 
 Us 1'ont. 
 
 Us les ont. 
 
 Us ne les ont pas. 
 
 Les Allemands. 
 
 Ire Section. 
 Us ont. 
 Us n'ont lien. 
 lie ne Font pau 
 
 Les Turea. 
 
FLEVFNTII LESSON. 
 
 Tlio Germans have. 
 
 The Turks have not. 
 
 Have they ? Plave they not ? 
 
 The Italians. The Spaniards. 
 
 Of the Italians. Those Spaniards. 
 
 Have the Spaniards ? 
 
 Ka*e not the Italians got ? 
 
 Have they got anything ? 
 
 Have they nothing ? 
 
 Have they got it ? Have they them ? 
 
 What have they ? The fine ones. 
 
 They have the Spaniard's line dogs. 
 
 What have they not ? 
 
 They have not the general's paper. 
 
 ARTICLE PARTITIVE OR INDEFINITE 
 
 ADJECTIVE PRONOUN. 
 Some or any. (4, $ 25.) 
 Of some, of any, from some, any. 
 Some or any wine. Bread. 
 
 Some or any butter. Milk. 
 Some or any books. Buttons. 
 Some or any knives. Men. 
 This steel. Some or any steel. 
 Some or any gold. Silver. 
 
 Some or any friends. Birds. 
 Have you any wine ? I have (some 
 
 wine). 
 
 Has that man any cloth ? 
 He has some cloth, or, He has. 
 Has the scholar any copybooks ? 
 He has (some copybooks). 
 Have they any steel ? 
 The English have steel. 
 
 No, or not any .... (before a noun.) 
 I have no wine. 
 He has no steel. 
 You have no cloaks. 
 Have they no friends ? 
 
 Obs. 27. Mind that the noun after 
 but merely de or d\ (Or, you put de 
 bou.) 
 
 Is anything the matter with them ? 
 What is the matter with them ? (ails 
 
 them ?) 
 
 Nothing is the matter with them. 
 What Is the matter with the Italians ? 
 
 Les Allemands out. 
 
 Lb* Turcs n'ont pas. 
 
 Om-ils ? N'ont-ils pas ? 
 
 Les Italiens. Les Espagnols. 
 
 Des Italiens. Ces Espagnols-la. 
 
 Les Espagnols ont-ils ? (Obs. H 
 
 p. 38.) 
 
 Les Italiens n'ont-ils pas ? 
 Ont-ils quelque chose ? 
 N'ont-ils rien ? 
 
 L'ont-ils ? Les ont-ils ? 
 
 Qu'ont-ils ? Les beaux. 
 
 Us ont les beaux chiens de 1' Espagftol. 
 Que n'ont-ils pas ? 
 Us n'ont pas le papier du general. 
 
 ARTICLE PARTITIF. 
 SiLgulier. mas. Pluriel, m. et f 
 Du. de V. Des. 
 
 De, (not de du.) De, (not dc de*.] 
 Du vin. Du pain. 
 
 Du beurre. Du lait. 
 
 Des livres. Des boutons. 
 
 Des couteaux. Des hommes. 
 Get acier. De 1'acier. 
 
 De Tor. De 1' argent. 
 
 Des amis. Des oiseaux. 
 
 Avez-vous du vin ? J'ai du vin. 
 
 (Ire Direction.) 
 Get homme a-t-il du drap ? 
 II a du drap. 
 
 L'ecolier a-t-il des cahiers ? 
 II a des cahiers. 
 Ont-ils de 1'acier ? 
 Les Anglais ont de 1'acier. 
 
 Ne pas de ($ 26.) 
 
 Je n'ai pas de vin. 
 II n'a pas d'acier. 
 Vous n'avez pas de manteaux. 
 N'ont-ils pas d'amis ? 
 a negation, takes, not : du, nor das * 
 before the noun that follows a nego 
 
 f Ont-ils quelque chose ? 
 t Qu'ont-ils ? 
 
 t Us n'ont rien. 
 
 t Qu'ont les Italiens 1 
 
ELEVENTH IKSSCW. 
 
 -. 
 
 well, 1 
 
 s? They 
 
 them.-- 
 
 s ._Hav 
 
 ELEVENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. ONZIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec 
 
 Good day, Miss Amanda, I am glad to see you. You are 
 hope? Very well, thank you: but my father is not well. Indeed 
 I am sorry to hear it. What is the matter with him ? He has a 
 bad cold. I am sorry to hear that he has a bad cold. Has he & 
 sore throat too ? No, but he has a pain in his head. Is the general 
 well ? No, but he is much better. I am glad to hear it. Is it cold 
 or warm to-day out of doors? It is neither warm nor cold; bat 
 eleasant. I am pleased at it. Sit down. With pleasure. Take 
 this seat. Thank you. Which ships have the Germans? The 
 Germans have no ships. Have the sailors onr fine mattresses? The 
 have them not. Have the cooks got them ? They have 
 Has the captain your big copybooks ? He has no copybooks.- 
 I them ? You have them not ; but I have. Has the Italian the 
 boys 7 steel inkstand ? He has it not. Have the Turks any steel guns 
 They have no steel guns. Have not the Spaniards got them? Ye 
 They have them. Has not the Spaniard the pretty umbrellas of t 
 Germans? Yes, he has them. Has he them? Yes, indeed, ho 
 has them. 
 
 Have not the two big Italians our pretty thread gloves? They 
 have not. (Dir. 1st.) Who has? The Turks have them, and they 
 have also our big paper fans. The pretty ones or the old ones ? 
 The pretty ones. Have not the tailors our cloth waistcoats or those 
 of your friends? They have neither the latter nor the former; bu 
 they have those of the general, of the lawyer, and of little John.- 
 Which coats have they ? They have the velvet coats which 
 Turks have not. Which dogs have you ? I have those which 
 body has. Have I the handkerchiefs that nobody has ? Yes, inde 
 you have those which nobody has. Have you not any wood ? Yes, 
 I have some wood. Has not your small brother got some soap? 
 No, he has no soap. Have I not some mutton ? No, you have no 
 mutton, but you have some birds and chickens. Have I no beef 
 No, you have no beef. Who has beef? Nobody has beef. Have 
 your friends any money ? They have money. Have they no milk? 
 They have no milk, but they have butter. Have I no wood ? No, 
 you have no wood, but you have some coals, (sing. in. Fr.) Haw. the 
 old merchants any cloth ? They have no cloth, but they have cotton 
 thread, ribbons, and stockings. 
 
 I wish you a good evemng, (I bid you.) 
 Uow have you been ? 
 I have been pretty well. 
 I have not been very well. 
 
 Je vous souhaite le bonsoir. 
 Comment vous eles-vous porte ? 
 Je me suis asscz bien porte. 
 Jo ne me sui? pas tres-bien port& 
 
ELEVENTH LESSON. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 Some or any (before an adjective). 
 Some or any good cheese. 
 Some or any fine velvet. 
 Some or any excellent wine. 
 Some or any excellent coffee. 
 Some or any very pretty glasses. 
 Some or any large fans. 
 
 Some or any old wine. 
 
 Some or any excellent cabbages. 
 
 No or not any .... 
 Have you any good butter ? 
 I have no good butter, but some ex- 
 cellent cheese. 
 Has not this man some good books ? 
 
 He has not any'good books. 
 
 Have the young merchants pretty 
 
 gloves and pocket-books ? 
 They have neither pretty gloves nor 
 
 pocket-books, but fine jewels. 
 
 The clerk. These clerks. 
 
 Our bookseller. 
 Their shoe-dealer. 
 Those cloth-merchants, (drapers.) 
 The milkman butter-man. 
 This wood (coal) merchant. 
 The painter. The picture. 
 
 Some coals. 
 
 What has the baker ? 
 
 What have the cloth-merchants ? 
 They have excellent clerks. 
 Are the Americans afraid ? 
 The Americans are not afraid. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 De, (not du nor des. 
 De bon fromage. 
 De beau velours. 
 D' excellent vin. 
 D'excellent cafe. 
 De tres-jolis verres. 
 De grands eventails. - 
 
 Du vin vieux. 
 
 Des choux excellents 
 
 (* 26.) 
 
 De and d' -, 
 the adjectives 
 coming before 
 the nouns. 
 Repeat it bef. 
 every noun. 
 
 } Du and des; 
 
 (the nouns be- 
 ing before the 
 adjective. 
 
 Ne .... pas de . . 
 
 Avez-vous de boi. oeurre ? 
 
 Je n'ai pas de bon beurre, maia 
 
 d'excellent fromage. 
 Get homme n'a-t-il pas de bons 
 
 livres ? 
 
 II n'a pas de bons livres. 
 Les jeunes marchands ont-ils de jolis 
 
 gants et de jolis porte-feuilles ? 
 Us n'ont ni de 'jolis gants ni de jolis 
 
 porte-feuilles, mais de beaux 
 
 bijoux. 
 
 Le commit. Ces commis. 
 
 Notre marchand de livres. 
 Leur marchand de souliers. 
 Ces marchands de drap. 
 Le marchand de lait -de beurre. 
 Ce marchand de bois de charbon. 
 Le peintre. Le tableau. 
 
 Du charbon, (always sing, in Fr.) 
 
 Le boulanger qu'a-t-il? (14 et 15 
 
 38.) 
 
 boulanger ? 
 Qu'ont les marchands de drap ? 
 Us ont d'excellents commis. 
 Les Amencains ont-ils peur ? 
 Les Americains n'ont pas peur. 
 
 rLe boulanger 
 < Obs. p. 38.) 
 \ Qu'a le boula 
 
 ELEVENTH EXEKCISE. 2d Sec. ONZIEME EXEROICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 I wish you a good evening, Mr. Charles. How have you been 1 
 I have been pretty well ; and you. Miss, how have you been ? I 
 have not been well. I am sorry to hear it. What kind of weather 
 is it out of doors'? The weather is fine enough, (pretty lineV but 
 
i 
 
 58 ELEVENTH LESSOW. 
 
 coicl. Is it very cold? Not very cold, but pleasaru, 1 hope, Mi 
 EndLe, that you are well 1 Thank you, but I am not well, I have 
 sore throat. And your friend Robert, how is he to-day? He 
 better, much better. I am very glad to hear that he is better. 
 Which exercise have the scholars to-day ? They have the eleventh, 
 the tenth, and the ninth. Which ones has the young clerk? He 
 has the fifth, first and second section. Have the English any silver' 1 
 They have no silver, but they have excellent iron. ($25.) Has the 
 grocer any good coffee ? He has no good coffee, but some excellent 
 wine. Has the bookseller no old dictionaries? Yes, he has those 
 of Boyer and Chambaud. Has he those which your brothers have? 
 No, he has not those which they have. Has the milk-man no milk? 
 Yes, he has some milk. Have the French any good gloves ? They 
 have excellent gloves. Have they no birds ? No, they have no 
 birds, but they have pretty jewels. Who has excellent chocolate ? 
 The Spaniards have excellent chocolate. Have they not some fino 
 horses? Yes, they have some very fine horses. Have not the 
 Germans got large dogs? Yes, they have large dogs and oxen. 1 
 Have the Americans large oxen? No, they have little oxen and 
 horses. 1 Has your friend's brother got some pretty little fans? 
 Yes, he has some pretty little fans, shawls, and ribbons. 1 What 
 has he not? He has neither my shoes, nor yours, nor theirs. Wh< 
 has those of the French? They have them and ours also. A 
 not the coal-merchants ashamed? No, but they are afraid. Is th 
 clerk, the lawyer, or the minister wrong? No, they are not wrong; 
 but right. Have the wine-merchants anything good ? No, they 
 have nothing good. Have not the Americans something beautiful? 
 Yes, they have the electric telegraph, (telegraphe electrique.) Has 
 the painter any umbrellas? He has no umbrellas, but he haa 
 beautiful pictures. Has he the pictures of the French, or those of 
 the Italians? \Vho? the painter? Yes, the painter, He haa 
 neither the latter nor the former. 
 
 5 
 
 he 
 
 As usual. 
 Better than usual. 
 Not BO well as usual. 
 Is he not better ? Yes, be is a little 
 better. 
 
 Comme a 1'ordinaire. 
 Mieux qu'a 1'ordinaire. 
 Pas si bien qu'a 1'ordinaire. 
 N'est-il pas mieux ? Si fait, oo 
 Pardonnez-moi, il es'; un pen mien*, 
 
 
 06s. 28. Pardonnez-rnoi, is as frequently used as : Si fait, by 
 French. (01".. 26.) 
 I present my respects to you. | J'ai 1'honneur de vous saluer. 
 
 1 Repeat the article and adioctive : (et de grands bceuis.) 
 
TWJM.FTH LESSON. 
 
 TWELFTH LESSON, 12ih. Douzieme 
 
 I2me. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 Some of it, any of it, of it, some. 
 Some or any of them, of them, some. 
 Have you any wine ? 
 I have some of it of it some I have. 
 Have you any coals ? 
 Have you no coals ? 
 I have none, not any I have not. 
 Have you not any ? Yes, I have. 
 Have you any good steel ? 
 I have some good ... or I have. 
 Have I good cloth and "velvet ? 
 You have not any good. You have not 
 Has the grocer any sugar and salt ? 
 He has sugar, but no salt. 
 He has (some). He has not (any). 
 Has he good sugar and soap ? 
 lie has (some good). Pie has not. 
 Have I any bread and butter ? 
 Have I no bread and butter ? 
 You have some bread, but no butter. 
 
 You have neither bread nor butter. 
 
 You have some. You have none. 
 
 Have you any shoes and stockings ? 
 
 [ have shoes ; I have no stockings. 
 
 1 have (some good). 
 
 [ have not (any good). 
 
 Has the farmer got good horses ? 
 
 Me has (some good ones). He has not. 
 
 Has he any pretty knives and scis- 
 sors ? 
 
 Has he no small penknives ? 
 
 Yes, he has (some small ones). He 
 has not. 
 
 Have I no gold pencil -rases ? 
 
 Yes, you have. 
 
 Who has any ? Who has none ? 
 
 The clerk has some. 
 
 The man has none. 
 
 Who has no clerk ? 
 
 The lawyer has none. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. ll'C Section. 
 
 I En, (before the verb.) $ 4, 25.) 
 
 Avez-vous du vin ? 
 J'en ai. (Ire direction.) 
 Avez-vous du charbon ? 
 N'avez-vous pas dc charbon ? ($ 36.1 
 Je n'en ai pas. 
 
 N'en avez-vous pas ? Si fait, j'en ai. 
 Avez-vous de bon acier ? 
 J'en ai de bon. 
 
 Ai-je de bon drap et de bon velours 1 
 Vo&s n'en avez pas de bon. (Ire dir.) 
 L'epicier a-t-il du sucre et du sel ? 
 II a du sucre ; mais pas de sel. 
 II en a. II n'en a pas. 
 
 A-t-il de bon si ere et de bon savor ? 
 II en a de bon. II ri'en a pas de boa. 
 Ai-je du pain et du beurre ? 
 N'ai-je pas de pain et de beurre ? 
 Vous avez du pain, mais pas de 
 
 beurre. 
 
 Vous n'avez ni pain ni beurre. 
 Vous en avez. Vous n'en avez pas. 
 Avez-vous des souliers et des bas ? 
 J'ai des souliers : je n'ai pas de bas, 
 J'en ai de bons. 
 Je n'en ai pas de bons. 
 Le fermier a-t-il de bons chevaux ? 
 II en a de bons. II n'en a pas de bons. 
 A-t-il de jolis couteaux et de jolie 
 
 ciseaux ? 
 
 N'a-t-il pas de petits canifs ? 
 II en a de petits. II n'en a pas. 
 
 N'ai-je pas de porte-crayons d ? or I 
 
 Si fait, vous en avez. 
 
 Qui en a ? ' Qui n'en a paa I 
 
 Le commis en a. 
 
 L'homrne n'en a pas. 
 
 Qui n'a pas de commis ? 
 
 L'avocat n'en a pas. 
 
 TWELFTH EXERCISE. 1st bee. DOUZIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Jo vous souhaite le bon jour, Mr. Carnot, j'espere que vous 
 portez ir.ie'ix anjourcVhui. Merci, Madame, je me porte beauconp 
 
CO r WEI r in LESSON. 
 
 niicux. -Mais vous, M. Napoleon, comment vous eles-vous poile? 
 Je ne me suis pas bien porte, comme a Pordinaire. Je suis bien 
 fache de Papprendre. Asseyez-vous. Prenez ce siege. Avez-voua 
 assez chaud? Oui, je vous remercie, je n'ai pas froid. Avez-voua 
 mai Je gorge ? Non, mais mal de tete. Votre ami se porte-t-U 
 mienx qu'a Pordinaire ? Oui, beaucoup mieux. Je suis b?er_ aiso 
 d'apprendre qu'il se porte mieux. Fait-il froid? Non, il fait agre- 
 able. Mr. Charles, avez-vous mon petit canif ? Non, M., je ne 1'ai 
 pas. Qui Pa? Votre ami Jules (Julius) Pa. Non, Jules n'a paa 
 Jte mien, il a le votre. Le mien 1 Non, je Pai. Pardonnez-moi. 
 Jules Pa. Les Espagnojs n'ont-ils pas de beaux chevaux ? Us < 
 ont de beaux. Le domestique de Pavocat qu'a-t-il? II a le vieu 
 chapeau du jeune Francais. Le commis de "Pepicier n'a-t il pa 
 mon joli petit chien ? Non ; M. il n'a pas de chien.Son frere 
 i'a-t-il pas? Pardonnez-moi, il Pa. Avez-vous peur de ce chien-ci 
 Oui ; j'en ai peur. Avez-vous peur de celui-la? Non. je n'en 
 pas peur. L'adolescent n'a-t-il pas peur de ce bceuf-la ? Pardonnez 
 moij il en a peur. 
 
 Have you any coal? I have. (1st dir.) Have you any wood 1 
 I have not. Have you any good beef? I have (some good). Air 
 young mutton ? I have not. Have you no good cloth ? No, I hav 
 none. No good paper? Yes, I have. Have I the silver ribbon 1 
 No, you have it not. Which have I ? The velvet one. Have 
 the grocer's rice ? You have it not. Have I any rice ? You have 
 (some.) Has the lawyer any thread handkerchiefs ? He has none. 
 Who has any ? Miss Rose has some very pretty ones. Has the 
 clerk any money ? He has none. What has he ? He has not 
 anything. Who ? The clerk. Has the lawyer's servant any old 
 cheese ? He has some. Have not the Spaniards the scholar's dic- 
 tionary? Yes, they have it. Have they our books? No, they 
 have them not. Who has them? Your good friend, the minister, 
 has them. Has the American any gold? He has some. Have 
 the tailors our vests? No, they have them not. Have they any 
 vests? They have some. Have the French the pictures 7 Which 
 pictures ? Those of the young painter. No, the French have them 
 not ; but the Italians have. What have they ? The young painter's 
 pictures. Has not the milkman some fine oxen ? Yes, he has some 
 fine ones. What leather has the shoemaker? He has some excel- 
 lent. Has the big general any jewels ? He t?as not any. Who nils' 
 playthings? The buitermarf $ sen has. 
 
TWELFTH LESSON. 
 
 61 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 
 The hatter. This joiner. 
 
 The apothecary. These apothecaries. 
 
 Have our friends any old cloaks ? 
 
 They have (some old ones). (1st dir.) 
 
 They have not (any old). 
 
 Have "hey not (any old ones) ? 
 
 Yes, they have (some old ones). 
 
 Have they good or bad books ? 
 
 They have some good ones. 
 
 vVhit have they good ? 
 
 Thay have good books. 
 
 Have you any good ones also ? 
 
 Have you no pretty ones ? 
 
 Has the hatter any hats ? 
 
 Has he any ugly ones ? 
 
 Has he neithsr ugly nor old ones ? 
 
 Yea, he has eld ones. 
 
 Have the joiners any hammers ? 
 
 They have (1st dir.) and the hatters 
 also. 
 
 Have not the carpenters got some ? 
 
 Yes, they have, and so have the doc- 
 tors. 
 
 Are" the Spaniards cold ? 
 
 No, they are not ; they have fire. 
 
 Have the Italians any ? 
 
 Are the Turks afraid of the Ger- 
 mans ? 
 
 No, they are not afraid of them. 
 
 Are they not afraid of the Russia?is ? 
 
 Yes, they are. (1st dir.) 
 
 Are they neither warm, sleepy, hun- 
 gry, nor thirsty ? 
 
 No, they are neither warm, sleepy, 
 hungry nor thirsty, but wrong. 
 
 Are not the hatters ashamed of their 
 velvet hats ? 
 
 N"o, they are not (ashamed of them). 
 The Russian's apothecary. 
 
 VOCABULAIBE. 2de Sectioa. 
 Le chapelier. Ce menuisier. 
 \j apothicaire. Ces apothicairts. 
 Nos amis ont-ils de vieux manteaux! 
 Us en ont de vieux. 
 Us n'en ont pas de vieux. 
 N'en ont-ils pas de vieux ? 
 Si fait, ils en ont de vieux. 
 Ont-ils de bons ou de mauvais li vreat 
 Us en ont de bons. 
 Qu'ont-ils de bon ? 
 Ils ont de bon livres. 
 En avez-vous de bons aussi ? 
 N'en avez-vous pas te jolis ? 
 Le chapelier a-t-il des chapeaux ? 
 En a-t-il de vilains ? 
 N'en a-t-il ni de vilains ni de vieux ? 
 Si fait, il en a de vieux. 
 Les menuisiers ont-ils des marteaux I 
 Ils en ont, et lea chapeliers aussi. 
 
 Les charpentiers n'en ont-ils pas ? 
 Si fait, ils en ont et les medecin? 
 
 aussi. 
 
 Les Espagnols ont-ils frcid ? 
 Non, ils n'ont pas froid ; ils ont du feu, 
 Les Italiens en ont-ils ? 
 Les Turcs ont-ils peur des AIlo 
 
 mands ? 
 
 II n'en ont pas peur. 
 N'ont-ils pas peur des Busses ? 
 Si fait, ils en ont peur. 
 N'ont-ils ni chaud, ni somrneil, ni 
 
 faim, ni soif ? ' 
 Non, ils n'ont ni chaud, ni sommeil, 
 
 ni faim, ni soif, mais ils ont tort. 
 Les chapeliers n'ont-ils pas honte cU 
 
 leurs chapeaux de velours ? 
 Non, ils n'en ont pas honte. 
 L'apothicaire du Russe. 
 
 TWELFTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. DOUZIEMB EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 M. Lamartine, j'ai Fhonneur de vous saiuer. Comment voua 
 portez-vous ce matin, et comment vous etes-vous portel Bien: et 
 vous, Mr., j'espere que vous vous portez mieux aujourd'hui. Un pen 
 mieux, a votre service. Quel temps fait-il? Fait-il chaud on froid ? 
 il ne fait ni chaud ni froid^ mais agreable. Comment so porte notre 
 
T W E L F T II L E S 6 W . 
 
 ministie? II ne se porte pas bien. Qu 7 a-t-ii? 11 ami mauvait 
 rhume et nial do gorge. A-t-il aussi mal aux dents'? Non, il n'a 
 pas mal aux dents. J'en suis bien aise. Le bon commis a-t-il les 
 eventails de nos marchands? II n'a pas d'eventails, mais il a leurs 
 gants de cuir. Avez-vous du grain du fermier? Oui, j'en ai. 
 Auguste a-t-il froid ou faim ? II n'a ni froid ni faim, mais il a chaud, 
 Le marchand a-t-il quelque chose de joli ? II n'a rien de joli. 
 N 7 a-t-il rien de beau? Non, il n'a rien de joli ni de beau. Qu'"ai-je? 
 Vous avez de bon chocolat. Avez-vous le bois du menuisier? J0 
 ne Pai pas, mais j'ai son marteau. Lequel; le grand ou le petit? 
 Pai le grand. N 7 avez-vous pas le petit ? Si fait, ou pardonnez-moi, 
 je 1'ai. J'ai celui que vous n'avez pas. Quels e.xercices ai-je ? Vous 
 avez ceux de Mr. Charles, ceux de Mr. Robert, ceux de ce Mon- 
 sieur-la, (gentleman} et les miens. Avez-vous le dixieme, le onzi- 
 erne, ou le douzieme ? Je n'ai pas ceux-la, mais le huitiemej et I 
 neuvieme. Lequel ont les Italiens ? Us ont le septieme. 
 
 Has the captain any good sailors? He has some good ones.- 
 Have the sailors any fine mattresses? They have not (1st dir. 
 Have the painters any very old pictures ? No, they have no oL 
 pictures ; but the booksellers have. Have not the minister and the 
 lawyer got some also? This one has some, that one has none. 
 Who has beautiful shawls, ribbons, and handkerchiefs? Messrs. 
 Boutilliers and Cowell have some. Has the apothecary's clerk my 
 penknife or his? He has his own penknife, but not yours. Who 
 has biscuits? The young baker of our big neighbour has. Who has 
 beautiful ribbons ? The French have. Have not the carpenters 
 some gold and silver nails? No, they have iron nails; but the 
 joiners have gold, silver, and steel nails? What is the matter with 
 their brothers? They r*:e wrong and ashamed. What is the mat- 
 ter with the foreigners ? Which? These or those? Those. Those 
 v\re afraid of the general's dogs. And these ? These ? Nothing is 
 the matter with them. They are neither cold nor warm, hungry 
 nor thirsty. Have you Miss Clara's shawl and gloves? No, I have 
 them not. Who has them ? I have some, but riot hers. Who has 
 any of the grocer's rice ? The lawyer, the general, the apothecary, 
 and the joiner have some of it. Have the painters fine pictures 
 and gardens ? They have. Have not his joiner and his carpentor 
 got some beautiful old wood ? The former has, but not the latter. 
 Have the hatters good and bad hats ? They have good and bad 
 ones. Who has no pocket-book ? The milk and butter men have 
 none. Have you none? I have none. Has your little clerk got 
 any? No, he has none. Who has any? The booksellers have 
 some leather ones. Has the apothecary anything pretty? He has 
 
 
TWELFTH LESSON. 
 
 63 
 
 not anything pretty, but he has something good. Who has yout 
 birds? The farmer has them. Has he their grain 1 He has it 
 also. 
 
 Iio\v are they at home ? 
 Ail well Everybody is well. 
 Almost all are sick. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 3d Section. 
 Fresh. 
 
 This fresh butter. Fresh bread, 
 A dry goods store. 
 A journal, daily paper, gazette. 
 To-day's paper, the paper of to-day. 
 A or an (article indefini, $ 3). 
 In, into. In a or an. Of a. 
 A horse. One horse. Of a horse. 
 Have you a book ? I have a book. 
 Have you a glass ? I have no glass. 
 
 Comment se pc/rte-t-on chez vous ? 
 Tout le monde se porte bien. 
 Prcsque tout le monde est malade. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section 
 Frais (after the noun). 
 Ce beurre/rais. Du pain frais. 
 Un magasin de nouveautes. 
 Un journal Un papier. 
 Le papier d'aujourd 'hui. 
 Un. (mas. sing, before all letters.) 
 Dans. Dans un. D'un. 
 
 Un cheval. D'un cheval. 
 
 Avez-vous un livre ? J'ai un i;vre, 
 Avez-vous un verre ? Je n'ai pas 
 
 de verre. 
 
 Obs. 29. The French use : je n'aipas de . . . in preference to ; je rfaipas un, 
 [ have one, (meaning: one of the 
 things spoken of.) 
 
 Have you a good journal \ 
 
 I have a good journal. 
 
 I have a good one two good ones. 
 
 I have two good journals. 
 
 I have three, no, four good ones. 
 
 Have I an eye ? You have an eye. 
 
 You have one. You have a large 
 
 one. 
 
 You have two large ones. 
 Has your brother a dry goods store ? 
 
 He has a dry goods store. 
 
 He has one. He has a small one. 
 
 He has twd. A large and a small one. 
 
 lie has two fine ones three fine ones. 
 
 Four five six seven eight. 
 
 Has the scholar a paper of to-day ? 
 
 He has not any (none). 
 
 Have the gentlemen five good horses ? 
 
 They have six. No ; they have seven 
 
 or eight. 
 
 Who has a fine satin umbrella ? 
 Nobody has one. Oh ! yes ; sonw 
 
 body has one. Anna has one. 
 Some or any good fresh butter. 
 
 J'en ai un, (literally: /, of them, havi 
 one. The quantity placed afki 
 the verb.) 
 
 Avez-vous un bon journal ? 
 
 J'ai un bon journal. 
 
 J'en ai un bon deux bons. 
 
 J'ai deux bons journaux. 
 
 J'en ai trois, non, quatre bons. 
 
 Ai-je un ceil ? Vous avez un ceil. 
 
 Vous en avez un. Vous en avez un 
 grand. 
 
 Vous en avez deux grands. 
 
 Votre frere a-t-il un magasin de nou- 
 veautes. 
 
 II a un magasin de nouveautes. 
 
 II en a un. II en a un petit. 
 
 II en a deux. Un grand et un petit 
 
 II en a deux beaux trois beaux. 
 
 Quatre cinq six sept huit. 
 
 L' ecolier a-t-il un papier d'aujour 
 d'hui? II n' en a pas. 
 
 Les messieurs ont-ils cinq bons die 
 vaux ? Us en ont six. Non , 
 
 ils en ont sept ou huit. 
 
 Qui a un beau parapluie de satin ? 
 
 Perscnne n' en a. Oh ! si fait ; quel 
 qu'un en a un. Anne en a un. 
 
 DC bon bcure frais, (frais, after). 
 
PELFT1I LESSON. 
 
 TWELFTH EXERCISE. 3d Sec. DOUZIEME EXERCICE. Sine -Sco. 
 
 Mr. Louis, j'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Comment se porte-t- 
 chez vons? Tout le monde se porte bien, merci. Et chez vousl 
 comment se porte-t-on ? Presque tout le monde est malade. Ma- 
 dame a mal de gorge. George a mal aux yeux. Clara a mal aux 
 dents. Le petit Jean a un vilain rhume. J ? ai un peu mal de tete. 
 En varite, tout le monde est malade. Asseyez-vous, et \>renez un 
 j,-eu vie cafe. Non, je vci^s remercie. 
 
 Have you 'any fresh butter? I have some; but I ^ave no frei 
 tread. Which bread have you? I have some old baker's bread.- 
 Have they any coffee? They have not. Who has any good win 
 The grocer has some in his store. Has the cloth merchant any go] 
 cloth? He has some silver cloth. Have I not got good sugar ? Ye; 
 you have in your chest; but the farmer has not. What has t 
 clerk got? Which one? The bookseller's. That one has nothin, 
 but mine has something good. What has he good? He has, in his 
 bag, some of the good rice of the big stranger. Have the German 
 any fresh cheese? They have none. Have not the English 
 any? Yes, they have some good fresh cheese. Which words ha 
 the scholars? They have the words of seven lessons. Who h 
 those of the eighth? The minister, the lawyer, and Robert ha 
 them. Have they also those of the ninth? No, they have the 
 not. Have you a pencil ? I have one ; and a pencil-case also. ] 
 the apothecary a young clerk? He has none. Has not the gene: 
 a fine satin handkerchief? Yes, he has, and the sailor also. 
 
 Has the old tailor a satin coat? He has three. Has the captain 
 line dog ? He has two. Have your friends two fine horses ? They 
 have four. Has the young man a good or bad pistol ? He has no 
 good one. He has a bad and ugly one in his trunk ( 18.) Have 
 you a copy-book ? I have six or eight. Has your servant a pen- 
 knife ? He has. Have I a friend ? You have an old and good 
 one. You have two old ones. He has three ugly small ones. H; 
 Mr. Cowell a dry goods store? Yes, he has a line one. Have n 
 the Germans a cloth store ? No, they have a dry goods store. Ha 1 
 his carpenter and her joiner iron and steel nails? They have, and 
 they have also a small silver hammer. Who has the youths' jour- 
 nals? Nobody has their journals; but somebody has their fans, 
 their satin vests ($ 140), velvet shoes, steel toys, cloth cloaks, and 
 .hread gloves. Has the ugly Turk a young and good cook? He 
 nastwo; one young, and one old. Have you none of his coffee? 
 Yes, I nave some, in my Mg cotton bag. 
 
 ,ve 
 
THIRTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 65 
 
 THIRTEENTH LESSON, 13th.- Treizumc Lcr.cn, 13me. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 Ifow much ? How many? (bef. a noun.) 
 How much satin ? How much steel ? 
 How many words ? How many birds ? 
 
 How much (of it) has he ? (no noun.) 
 How many (of them) has he ? 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 Combie?i de l (avant un nom. Dir. 7.) 
 Combiende satin? Combiend'acier! 
 Combien de mots? Combien d'jtt- 
 
 seaux ? 
 
 Combien en a-t-il ? (pas de nom.) 
 Combien en a-t-il ? 
 
 Of it, of them, being usually omitted, when there is :K noun! 
 
 Combien en (avant le verbe.l 
 Combien d'amis avez-vous? 
 Combien en a-t-il ? 
 Ne (avant) que, (apres le verbo.* 
 
 Wen que .... 
 
 Avant. Apres. 
 
 IV en . . . qu'un. N'en . . . que deux. 
 Je n'ai qu'un ami. 
 Je n'en ai qu'un que deuxou trois, 
 Combien de chevaux a votre frere ? 
 II n'en a qu'un que deux jeunes. 
 Beaucoup de . . . . (avec les noms.) 
 (Dir. 7.) 
 
 En .... bcaiicoup (sans nom). 
 Beaucoup de beurr^frais. 
 Beaucoup d'or. Beaucoup de mots 
 A-t-il beaucoup de choux ? 
 II en a beaucoup -II n'en a pas beau 
 
 coup. 
 N'ont-ils ni beaucoup de fer, ni 
 
 beaucoup d'acier ? 
 Trop de (avec). En .... trap (sans 
 
 nom.) 
 
 Avez-vous trop de mats ? 
 J'en ai trop. Je n'en ai pas trop. 
 II n'a ni trop de eelui-ci ni de celui- 
 
 la. 
 A-t-il beaucoup de choses? II en a 
 
 bea.ucoup trop. 
 
 -TREIZIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Obs. 30. 
 eay. 
 
 How much ? How many ? 
 
 How many friends have you ? 
 How many has he ? 
 Only, but, (with a noun.) 
 Only, but, (without a noun). 
 Before. After. 
 
 Only one (of them). But two. 
 I have but one friend. 
 I have but one but two or three. 
 How many horses has your brother ? 
 He has but one but two young ones. 
 Much, many, a good deal of, very 
 
 much, many, a great many, (with 
 
 nouns.) 
 
 Much, many, &c. (without a noun.) 
 Much fresh butter (a great deal of). 
 Much gold. Many words. 
 
 Has he many cabbages ? 
 He has (many) not (many). 
 
 iron nor 
 
 Have they neither much 
 
 steel ? 
 Too much. Too many, (with and 
 
 without noun). 
 Have you too many words ? 
 I have (too many). I have not. (Dir.l.) 
 He has neither too much of this one 
 
 nrr of that. 
 Has he many things ? He has too 
 
 many by far (a great deal too much). 
 
 THIRTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. 
 
 Comment! (How!*) Vous avez mal de gorge ? Oui, j'ai un tres- 
 oiauvais mal de gorge. Avez-vous im rhume aussi? Non ? je n'ai 
 Das do rhume. Pespere que votre jeune frere se porte tien, Ou^ 
 
 1 Cardinal numbers answer the question: Combie7i? How many 1 
 Two Deux, &c. 
 
58 TH1UTKKNTU LESSON 
 
 \\ se porte tres-bien. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous ? Personrie 
 n'est malade. Mr. j ; ai 1'honneur de vous saluer et j'espere CJUG 
 vous vous portez mieux. Je me porte beaucoup mieux. je vous 
 remercie. Fait-il chaud? II ne fait pas froid. Asseyez-vcus, pre- 
 nez ce siege-ci. NOLI msrci. Votre cuisinier se porte-t-il mieux '' 
 II se porte bin. Pen suls bien aise. 
 
 How many friends have you? I have two good friends. Have 
 you eight good trunks ? I have nine. Has our servant three brooms] 
 He has only one good one. Has the captain two line ships'? He 
 has only one. How many sailors has he? He has too many; he 
 /ias thirteen. How many hammers have the carpenter and joiner? 
 They have many. Have they too many ? They have not. (Dir. 1 .) 
 Have not the shoemakers many shoes ? Yes, they have many, but 
 :?ot too many. Has not the young man an old copy-book? Yes, he 
 has. Has the clerk ten fans? No. he has but seven; but he has 
 ten handkerchiefs, nine inkstands, eight combs, and many pencils. 
 How much money have the Spaniards ? They have not much. 
 Have they not many fine horses ? Yes, they have. Has your neigh- 
 bor much coffee ? He has some. How many bags has he 1 He 
 has only six or seven. Who has too much grain? Nobody has. 
 What has he got in his hat? He has some journals. How many 
 has he? He has three or four. Has he but three or four? No, he 
 has but three or four. 
 
 How many good generals have the Americans? They have 
 great many. What have the Russians? They have much salt: 
 but not too much. Have the farmers much fresh butter ? They have 
 some old, but none fresh. Have you brothers? I have but one. 
 What have the apothecaries got in their stores? They have man) 
 things. Have they too many ? Yes, too many by far. Has the dry 
 goods merchant any satin, cotton and thread ? He has neither satin, 
 cotton, nor thread. What has he got? He has many things. Hat* 
 he anything pretty? Yes, he has. (Dir. 1.) Has the scholar ?t 
 copybook? No, he has none. Oh ! yes, he has one in his trunk. 
 What has the grocer got in this and in that bag ? In this he has 
 some clothes. In that, he has cabbages, grain, and fresh cheese.*- 
 Has he biscuits? He has. Is the man atraid? No, he is no- 
 afraid. Are not the generals cold and hungry? No, but they an 1 
 warm and thirsty. Who is ashamed? The minister's little boy if- 
 ashamed. He is wrong. Who has the electric telegraph? Thf 
 Americans have it. Has the youth any pretty sticks? He has nt 
 pretty sticks, but some beautiful birds. What chickens has ou. 
 cook ? He has some pretty chickens. How many has he ? He ha/ 
 fcix. Has the hatter any hais? He has a good many. Has the 
 joiner much wood 7 He .ias not a great deal; but enough. 
 
 uy 
 
 
 
THIRTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 67 
 
 VOCABUJ AST 2(1 Section. 
 Flar we ? We have. 
 
 We have not. Have we not got ? 
 
 What have we ? is the matter with us? 
 We have nothing, or nothing is, &c. 
 [lave we it ? We have them. 
 ftnve we anybody ? 
 We have nobody, (not anybody). 
 Whom ? Whom have we ? 
 
 We have our young and old friends. 
 
 \ro we warm ? We are not cold. 
 
 Enough. (Dir.6.) 'Enough of it, of them. 
 VIoney enough. Enough knives. 
 We have enough (of it or them). 
 But little, only a little, not much, not 
 
 many, hut few. (Dir. 7.) 
 Who has but little money ? 
 [ have not much, or but little. 
 
 N T ot much of it, but few of thf.ni. 
 Have we not many friends ? 
 We have but few. 
 rlave I but few ? 
 you have not many. 
 Has he but little ? 
 Phe lawyers have but few 
 Who has but little ? 
 Nobody has much (many). 
 Hie merit. Some men'. 
 
 Phis lawyer has great merit. 
 Little Little merit. (Dir. 7.) 
 Little of it He has little of i' 
 
 A. little A little of it. 
 
 A. little cloth. He has a little. 
 
 Nine ten eleven twelve. 
 
 Courage. 
 
 Pepper. Some vinegar. 
 
 YOCABULAIBB. 2de Section. 
 
 Nous avona. 
 pas. N'avons-noift 
 
 Avons-nous ? 
 Nous n'avons 
 
 pas ? 
 
 Qu'avons-nous? 
 Nous n'avons rien. 
 L"avons-nj)us ? Nous les avons, 
 Avons-nous "quelqu'un ? 
 Nous n'avons personne. 
 Qui ? Qui avons-nous 1 
 
 Nous avons nos jeunes et nos vie\is 
 
 amis. 
 Avons-nous chaud ? Nous n'avone 
 
 pas froid. 
 
 Assez de (av. b nom.). En . . assez. 
 Assez d' argent. Assez de couteaux. 
 Nous en avons asse/. 
 Ne.. guere de, or J avantlenom . 
 i\e. . pas beaucoup de ) 
 Qui n'a guere d' argent ? 
 Je n'en ai guure Je n'en ai paa 
 
 beaucoup. 
 
 N'en.. guere N'cn. .pas beaucoup, 
 N'avons-nous pas beaucoup d'amis f 
 Nous n'en ayons guere. 
 N'en ai-je guere ? 
 Vous n'en avez pas beaucoup. 
 N'en a-t-il guere ? 
 Les avocats n'en ont guere. 
 Qui n'en a guere ? 
 Personne n'en a guere. 
 Le merite. Du merits. 
 
 Get avooat a un grand merite. 
 Pen de (av. le n.). Pen de merite. 
 En .... peu II en a pen. 
 Un peu de . . . . En . . . . un pen 
 Un peu de drap. 11 en a un pen, 
 Neuf dix onze douze. 
 Du cceur, (du courage). 
 Du poivre. Da vinaigre. 
 
 THIRTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. TREIZIME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 J'ai Phonneur ie vous saluer, Mle. Sophie. Monsieur, je vous 
 souhaite le bonjour Comment vous etes-vous porte ? Je vous 
 remercie, Mle., je me suis tres-bien porte, comme a Pordinaire 
 Comment se porte-t-on chez vous? Chez raoi? Tout le monde se 
 porte bien, merci Le menuisier se porte-t-il mieux ? II ne se pone 
 pas mieux. Je suis fache. de 1'apprendre. Qui a mal de telw che7 
 
08 FOURTEENTH LESSON, 
 
 voits ? Personne n ; a maJ de tete chez moi; mais mon frere a ma 
 sux dents. 
 
 Have we many notes? We have only a few. How man) r notes 
 have we ? We have only three pretty ones. Have you fresh butteJ 
 enough? We have not enough. Have our boys too many ink- 
 stands? They have not too many, but enough. Has our young 
 friend too much milk-? Ke has only a little, but enough. Who li 
 good many words ? The scholars have enough, but not too many. 
 Have they many gloves? Who? The iarmers or scholars ($ 15) 
 The farmers. They have not any. Has the cook any pepper ($ 25), 
 salt, and vinegar? He has not enough vinegar, but he has too much 
 pepper and salt. Have we much soap ? We have only a little. 
 Fas the merchant much cloth? He has a good deal. Who has 
 good deal of paper? Our neighbors have. Have these tailors 
 many buttons? They have but few. Has the painter many gar- 
 dens? He has not many. How many gardens has he? He has 
 but two. Have we the Germans' knives? We have them. Have 
 we me captain's fine horses? We have them not; the general has 
 them. Have we any good and fine ( 18) jewels? We have a 
 good many. What jewels have we? We have gold, silver, and 
 steel jewels ($ 140). What candlesticks have our friends. They have 
 \he old iron ones (les vieux de fer.) Have we not Sarah's satin ribbons? 
 No, we have them not. Have we not any ribbons? Satin ribbons? 
 Yes, satin ribbons? Yes. we have many, but not Sarah's. Has the 
 clerk any of the grocer's chocolate, sugar, coffee, vinegar, pepper, 
 salt, and biscuits ($ 140) ? He has not. Whom have you to-day? 
 We have the minister of merit. Whom has your brother? He has 
 nobody. Whom have I? The lawyer who has little merit. Who 
 
 has merit? Doctor (Docteur) M has much merit. Have we 
 
 neither gold nor silver? Yes, we have. What have they? They 
 have something fine. Have )'ou anything bad? Yes, and I arr; 
 ashamed of it. 
 
 FOURTEENTH LESSON, Uih.Quatorzieme Le$on, Ume. 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 
 
 A few Some. ($3.) 
 
 A few books. A few friends. 
 
 Have you a few ejercises ? 
 
 Some (of them). A few (of them). 
 
 A few of. . . . 
 
 They have a few of mine (some of ) ; 
 
 Have we not a few ? 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 Quelques (no de, before the noun). 
 Quelques livres. Quelques ami*? 
 Avez-vous quelques exercices ? 
 En .... quelques u n i <. 
 Quelques uns des .... 
 Us en ont quelques uns des miens. 
 N'en avons-nous pas quelquea 
 
 One or a sou. Some sous. | Un sou, Des sous. 
 
FOURTEENTH LESSOIf 
 
 69 
 
 One or a franc 
 A dollar. 
 
 Some francs. 
 Half a dollar. 
 
 Un franc. 
 Un dollar. 
 
 Quelques francs. 
 Un demi-dollar. 
 
 Ols. 31. In the United States, the French use the word : dollar ; giving 
 to the ar final, its French sound. 
 
 A one dollar note. Two dollars. 
 
 A three, five, or ten dollar note. 
 
 A two dollar one, or one of two dollars. 
 
 Oilier. One or another. Some others. 
 
 Another dollar. Some other dollars. 
 
 Have we another franc ? 
 
 Have vc some ether francs ? (some 
 
 more ? 
 We have another. We have some 
 
 more 
 y"o other horse .... horses ($ 26). 
 
 I have no other horse. 
 
 I have no other. 
 
 Havo they other horses? 
 
 They have others. 
 
 We have r.D others ($ 28). 
 
 The arm. The foot. 
 
 The heart. The month. 
 
 The work. The volume. 
 
 [ have but a few dollars. 
 
 You. have but a few (of them). 
 
 We have but a few volumes. 
 
 They have but a few. 
 
 He has but a few. 
 
 Un b.llet d'un dollar. Deux dollars, 
 Un biiiet de trois, de cinq ou de dix 
 
 dollars. Un de deux dollars. 
 Autre. Un autre. D'autros ( 26). 
 Un autre dollar. D'autres dollars. 
 Avons-nous un autre franc ? 
 Avons-nous d'autres francs ? 
 
 Nous en avons un autre (d autres). 
 
 Ne pas d'autiv ckjval d'auiret 
 
 chevaux. 
 
 Je n'ai pas d' autie cheval. 
 Je n'en ai pas d'autre. 
 Ont-ils d'autres chevaux ? 
 Us en ont d'autres. 
 Nous n'en avons pas d'autres. 
 Le bras. I/e pied. 
 
 Le cceur. Le mois. 
 
 L'ouvrage. Le volume. 
 
 Je n'ai que quelques dollars. 
 Vous n'en avez que quelques uns. 
 Nous n' avons que quelques volumes. 
 Us n'en ont que quelques uns. 
 II n'en a que quelques uns. 
 
 FOURTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. QUATOKZIEME EXERCICE, Ire Sec. 
 
 Have you many knives? I have a few. Have you many pen- 
 cils? I have only a few. Has the painter's friend many looking* 
 glasses? He has only a few. Have your boys a few sous? They 
 have a few. Have we not a few francs? Yes ; we have. (Dir. 1.) 
 How many francs have we? We have ten. Have we but ten? 
 We have but ten. How many dollars has the Spaniard? He hag 
 not many, he has only five. How many half dollars has he ? Ho 
 has ten. Who has a ten dollar note? I have a five dollar note; 
 little John has a three dollar one ; the clerks have two two dollai 
 notes ; the doctor has one of a dollar : but nobody has a ten dollar 
 one. Who has the beautiful glasses of the Italians? We havu 
 them. Have the English many ships ? They have. Has the milk- 
 man many horses ? No, he has but two. What have the Germans 1 
 They have many dollars. How many have they ? They have 
 eleven.- -Havo we the iournals of the English or those of thr GOP 
 
70 
 
 FOURTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 ose 
 iey 
 
 lf 
 
 mans? We have those of the former, but not of the latter. Huva 
 we the satin parasols of the Spaniards? We have them not, but 
 the Americans have. Has the butter man much fresh butter ? He 
 has only a little, but enough. Have the sailors the cotton mattresses 
 that we have ? They have not those which we have, but those 
 which their captains have. Has the Frenchman many francs? 
 has only a few, but he has enough. Has your servant sous enough 
 He has only a few, but he has dollars enough. 
 
 Have the Russians dollars, half dollars, francs, and so .is ? No, the; 
 have none. Who has any ? The Americans have dollars and half 
 dollars, and the French have francs and sous. Have you a ten dollar 
 bill in. your pocket-book? No, but I have two five dollar ores, am 
 a few of one and two dollars. How many feet have men ? The; 
 have two. How many has that one ? He has but one. How man 
 has that other one? Which one? The big or the tall one ? T! 
 big one. He has two. How many feet have horses, oxen, bi 
 and chickens? ( 15.) Horses and oxen have four feet, but birds 
 cUckens have but tw r o. 
 
 N. B. Let the pupil try to compose a French exercise on the words 01 
 daily salutations, as none is given here. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 What day of* the month is it ? 
 What day of the month have \ve ? 
 It is the first. The second. 
 
 We have the first. The second. 
 It is not the third ; it is but the 
 second. 
 
 VCCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 Quel jour du mois est-ce ? 
 Queljour du mois avons-nous? 
 C'est le premier. C'est le deux- 
 Nous avons le premier. Le deux. 
 Ce n'est pas le trois ; ce n'est que 1 
 
 deux. 
 
 except : 
 
 Obs. 32. The cardinal numhers are used in French for dates, though th 
 
 le premier, for the first of every mont] 
 
 C'est leonze (not Tonze). 
 Nous avons le onze. 
 N'est-ce pas le douze ? 
 N'avons-nous pas le douze ? 
 
 ordinal be used in English 
 
 It is the eleventh. 
 We have the eleventh. 
 It it not the twelfth ? 
 Have we not the twelfth ? 
 
 Obs . 33. The ordinal numbers are formed of the cardinal by adding time, 
 (and when they end in e, this is dropped.) Premier and second are irregular 
 and used for first and second, but not in compound numbers, such as : twenty 
 first, twenty-second ; which are not : vingt-premier, vingt-second ; but vingt 
 et unieme, vingt -deuxieme. 
 
 Quel volume avez-vous ? 
 
 J'ai le onzieme le trente ei uniemf 
 
 Singulier. Pluriel. 
 
 Le premier. Les premiers. 
 
 Le deuxieme, le Lesdeuxiemes, 
 
 Which volume have you ? 
 
 I have the eleventh the thirty-first. 
 
 One, 
 Two, 
 
 un. 
 deux. 
 
 The first. 
 The second. 
 
 second. 
 
 seconds. 
 
 
FOURTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 Thre;}, trois, 
 Four, quatre. 
 Five, cinq. 
 Nine, neuf. 
 Eleven, onze. 
 Twenty, ving'. 
 
 The third. 
 The fourth. 
 The fifth. 
 The ninth. 
 The eleventh 
 The twenty-hrst. 
 
 The twenty-second. 
 
 Tiiiiiy, trente, The thirty-first, 
 ffundred, cent. The hundred and 
 
 first. 
 
 The last. 
 These last exercises. His last dollar. 
 
 Le troisieme. Les trc'lsiemes. 
 
 Le quatrieme. Les quatriemea 
 
 Le cinquieme, Les cinquiemes. 
 
 Le neuvieme. Les neuviemes. 
 
 Le onzieme. Les onziemes. 
 
 Le vingt et imi- Les vingt et uni- 
 
 erne. ernes. 
 
 Le vingt-deux- Les vingt-deox* 
 
 ieme. iemes. 
 
 Le \rente et unierne. * 
 
 Le cent-uniume. Les cent-unicme*. 
 
 Le dernier. Les derniers. 
 
 Ces derniers exercices. Son dernier 
 
 dollar. 
 
 Notre dernier papier ou journal. 
 Le premier et le dernier jour du mois. 
 C'est bon. Ce n'est pas bon. 
 
 Est-ce son cahier ? 
 C'est le sien. 
 
 Let the pupil try to compose 
 
 Monday, April fourteenth, 1849. 
 
 Our last paper or journal. 
 The first and last day of the month. 
 That is right. That's not right. 
 [3 this, is that, or is it his copy-book ? 
 It is, this is, that is his. 
 
 N. B. No French exercise is given here, 
 one on the wordai&f daily salutations. 
 
 FOURTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. QUATORZIEME EXERCICE, 2de Sec. 
 
 Lundi, quatorze Avril, mil huit cent 
 
 quarante-neuf. 
 
 How many exercises have we, to-day ? We have but one. Have 
 we but one ? No, we have but one. What day of the month is it ? 
 it is the fourteenth. Is it the fourteenth, indeed? Yes, it is (the 
 14th). Have you the paper of to-day ? To-day's paper? No; but 
 the clerk has it. Has he but one ? No, he has three. Is this the 
 last journal ? Yes, it is. Is not to-day the fourteenth ? No, u m 
 only the thirteenth. Indeed ! yes, indeed ! That's right. That's 
 very well. How many stockings has the merchant? He has bur 
 few ; -but he has many shawls, gloves and ribbons. Have you any 
 other biscuits? I have no other. How many servants has that gen- 
 tleman? He has but three ; but these foreigners have five. Has 
 the general much merit ? He has. Has W. Irving's last work much 
 merit ? Yes, it has. How many arms has this man. ? He has one. 
 How many feet has the captain? He has but one. How many has 
 
 1 Let the learner write the date, before his task. Ex. L;indi, seizo 
 A.vril, mil huit cent quarante-neuf. Monday, April 16th, 1849, 
 
 Days of the week Jours de la Semaine Sunday, Dimanche ; Monday, 
 Lundi; Tuesday, Mardi ; Wednesday, Mercredi ; Thursday, Jeadi; Fri 
 f*y, Vendredi ; Saturday, Samedi. 
 
 For the names of the months, ($ 143.) 
 
FIFTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 ! 
 
 nd 
 
 the general? He has two. What heart has your boy ? He has i 
 good heart. Have you no other servant ? Yes, I have another. 
 Has your friend no other birds ? Yes, he has. How in:my ? 
 has six others. Have the Spaniards and Italians many trues in theii 
 gardens? No, they have but few 5 but the lawyer of merit has j 
 great many in his. 
 
 Which volume have you ? I have the first. Have you the second 
 volume of my work? I have it. Have you the third or fourth 
 exercise? I have neither fhe former nor the latter. Have the 
 boys the fifth or sixth volume? They have the fifth, 4nit we 
 have the sixth. Which volume has your friend? He has the 
 twenty-first. Is not to-day the eleventh of this month ? The eleventh 
 of the month? No. It is the twelfth. The twelfth! indeed! Ha 
 the youth much money ? No. but he has our gold^. Who has cou 
 rage ? The baker's little friend. Have we the nails and hammer: 
 of the joiner, or those of the carpenter? We have neither those of 
 the joiner .nor of the carpenter, but those of the grocer. Is this 
 your copy-book? Yes, it is mine. Is not this Miss Anne's velvet bon- 
 net ? Yes, it is hers. Has your clerk or mine got the good two dollar 
 note? Mine has it not. What has he? He has* the five dollar 
 one. Has the minister this or that work ? He has but that one. 
 Who has the other? Nobody has it. It has no merit. Whom have 
 we to-day ? We have our ) r oung friends and those of the farmer. 
 Have the Russians (les Russes) pepper ? They have but little pep- 
 per, but a good deal of salt. Have the Turks much wine ? They 
 have not much wine, but a good deal of coffee. W^ho has a good 
 deal of milk ? The Germans have a good deal. Have you no 
 other gun ? I have no other. Have we any other cheese ? We j 
 have some other. Have I no other pistol ? You have another. 
 
 FIFTEENTH LESSON, 15th 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 The tome (volume). The last tome. 
 Have you the first or second tome of 
 
 my work ? 
 
 Both, or both the one and the other. 
 L have both. 
 
 Have you their gold or silver ? 
 I have neither (the one nor the c ther). 
 The one and the other, (plural.) 
 Hos> your brother my glq^g&pr his ? 
 fie has (bo'h) yoim and 
 
 .. Quinzieme Lcgorij lome. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 Le tome. Le dernier tome. 
 
 Avez-vous le premier ou le deuxicme 
 
 tome de mon ouvrage ? 
 L'un et 1'autre. 
 J'ai 1'unet 1'autre. 
 Avez-vous leur or ou leur argent ? 
 Je n'ai ni 1'un ni 1'autre. 
 Les uns et les autres. 
 Votre frere a-t-il mes gants ou les 
 
 siens ? II a les uns ct les autree 
 
FIFTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 Has he theirs or those of the clerks ? 
 He has neither. (Mind Dir. 1.) 
 Have they neither ? (sing.) 
 Have they neither ? (plur.) 
 They have the one, but not the other. 
 The Scotchman. The Dutchman. 
 The Irishman. The Swiss. 
 
 Still, yet, some, or anymore, more. 
 Any more satin. Some more steel. 
 Yut eome dollars. A few more francs. 
 
 ilave you any more cloth ? 
 
 I have still some cloth. I have more. 
 
 Has IK) any more steel ? He has. 
 
 Have I yet many things ? 
 
 You have still many (many more). 
 
 Have the Dutch any more pepper ? 
 
 A-t-il les leurs ou ceux des commie f 
 II n'a ni les uns ni les autres. 
 N'ont-ils ni Tun ni 1'autre ? 
 N'ont-ils ni les uns ni les autres? 
 Us ont Tun mais non pas 1'autre. 
 L'6cossais. Le Hollandaia, 
 
 LTrlandais. Le Suisse. 
 
 Encore (affirm atif ). 
 Encore du satin. Encore de 1'acier. 
 Encore des dollars. Encore queiqucs . 
 
 francs. 
 
 Avez-vous encore du Irap ? 
 J'ai encore du drap. J'en ai encore. 
 A-t-il encore oe 1'acier? II tn a 
 
 encore. 
 
 Ai-je encore beaucoup de choses ? 
 Vous en avez encore beaucoup. 
 Les Hollandais ont-ils encore du poi- 
 
 vre ? 
 
 Us n'en ont pas ; mais nous en avona. 
 Avez-vous encore assez de vinaigre 
 
 et de sucre ? 
 Nous avons assez de 1'un ; mais pas 
 
 assez de 1'autre. 
 
 They have not, but we have. 
 Have you yet vinegar and sugar 
 
 enough ? 
 We have enough of the one, but not 
 
 enough of the other. 
 
 N. B. Let the pupil compose a French Exerciee. 
 FIFTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. QUINZIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Tuesday, April .... 1849. Write the date fully in French. 
 Which exercises have these gentlemen to-day ? We have two. 
 Which? The fourteenth and fifteenth. Have you many words'? 
 No, not many. Which volume of Cuvier's great works has your 
 brother? He has the last. Has he not the seventh, also? He has 
 it. Ho^r many tomes has that work 1 ? It has ten. (Dir. 1.) 
 ou my work Q: rny friend's ? I have both. Has the foreigner 
 ib or your knife ? He has both. Have the Dutch the fresh 
 or cheese ? They have neither the one nor the other. Have 
 [.your penknife or my friend's * You have neither. Who has them ? 
 [ have. Has the Dutchman my glass or that of this scholar? He 
 aas neither. (Dir 1.) Has the Irishman our horses or chests'? He 
 has both. What have those Irishmen ? They have some one dol- 
 lar notes. Has the Scotchman our leather shoes or cotton stockings? 
 Utt'has neither. What has he ? He has the iron guns of the Swiss. 
 What has the Swiss got ? He has the Scotchman's stick.- Have 
 ths Dutch our ships or those of the Spaniards? They have neither. 
 - Which ships have they ? They have theti^n. 
 
 Has OUT grocer any more pepper ? He hlflwie more. Has the 
 7 
 
FIFTEENTH LESSOR. 
 
 lawyers clerk any more half dollars'? He has some more. He 
 yet four or five. Has he any more jewels'? He has no jewels.- 
 Is the Swiss warm and hungry ? No, he is neither warm nor hun- 
 gry; but the Irishman is dry and sleepy. Who is ashamed? No 
 one is ashamed, but the minister is afraid of our big dog. Is not 
 the Scotchman right'? Yes, he is, and the Russian too. Are not 
 the doctor and the apothecary wrong ? No, +hey are not wrong. 
 Have the Irish anything old ? They have. Who has something 
 ugly? No one has. Have the Americans anymore salt? They 
 have, and some fresh butter, too. Have" the painters anything pretty* 
 No, to-day they have nothing. Have they not one pretty fan ? Oh, 
 yes! They have still one. How many lawyers have you? We 
 have a great many; we have also many (Dir. 7) physicians, minis- 
 ters, grocers, gentlemen, apothecaries, and merchants. Has the 
 youth Miss Anne's shawl? He has, and he has also her velvet 
 bonnet ($ 32), her gold pencil-case, satin bag, handkerchief, and 
 jewels. That's right. Is this the last journal ? No, it is that of tho 
 eleventh. Very well. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 
 VOCABULAIRB. 2de Section. 
 
 Obs. 34. More, affirmative, is encore. But with a negation, use, for : 
 Not any more, no more. No lojiger ( Ne . . .plus de, (avec un nom.) 
 any no longer any more. \ N'en. . . .plus, (sans le nom.) 
 
 I have no more fire, and he has r>o 
 
 more. 
 
 He has no more rice. He has no more. 
 Have we any more fresh butter ? 
 I have no more (no longer any). 
 We have no more (no longer any). 
 Has the wine merchant any mo*e 
 
 vinegar ? No, he has no longer any. 
 We h^ve no more of that good coffee. 
 Have the grocers no more of it ? 
 They have no more. I have no more. 
 Have they no more gold nor silver? 
 Yes, they have a little more. 
 
 Not much more, not many more. 
 
 Have you much more velvet ? (Dir. 7.) 
 I have not much more. 
 
 lias the boy many more toys ? He 
 has not many more. 
 
 One more inkstand. No more ink- 
 stand. 
 
 A fcw words. No more words. 
 
 Obe. 35. I'lus d'enc, 
 
 Je n'ai plus de feu, et il n'en a plu 
 
 II n'a plus de riz. II n'en a plus. 
 
 Avons-nous encore du beurre frais 
 
 Je n'en ai plus. 
 
 Nous n'en avons plus. 
 
 Le marchand de vin a-t-il encore < 
 vinaigre ? Non, il n'en a plus. 
 
 Nous n'avons plus de ce bon.cafe\ 
 
 Les epiciers n'en ont-ils plusf 
 
 Us n'en. ont plus. Je n'en ai f 
 
 N 'ont-ils plus ni or ni argent ? 
 
 Si fait, ils en ont encore un peu. 
 ( Ne . . . plus guere de, (avec un nom,) 
 ( N'e?i . . . .plus guere, (sans nom.) 
 
 Avez-vous encore beaucoup de ve- 
 lours ? Je n'en ai plus guere. 
 
 Le garden a-t-il encore beaucoup de 
 joujoux ? II n'en a plus guere. 
 
 Encore un encrier. Plus d'encrier 
 
 I Encore quelques mots. Plus de mots 
 Plus de mots, which seem to pignifj : more tni 
 
FIFTEENTH LESSON. 75 
 
 9land more words, is, however, in French, negainj expression. As me 
 verb: / have., he has, &,c., is understood, &o is the we, which precedes it. 
 tt 171, II. 8.) 
 
 One more cabbage. A few m 
 
 Have you a few more dollars ? 
 
 I have (a few more). 
 
 Have I still too many sous ? 
 
 You have not too many, but enough. 
 
 Encore un ciiou. Encore quelquea 
 
 uns. 
 
 How much more gold has he ? | Combien d'or a-t-il encore ? 
 
 Avez-vous encore quelques dollara \ 
 J'en ai encore (quelques uns). 
 Ai-je encore trop de sous ? 
 Vous n'en avez pas trop, mais asse?. 
 
 He has a little more (yet a little). 
 How much or how many more has he? 
 The last. The last two, three. 
 
 The general's stick and gloves. ( 32, 
 
 II en a encore un peu. 
 
 Combien en a-t-il encore ? 
 
 Le dernier. Les deux, lee trols dej> 
 
 niers. 
 
 Le baton du general et ses gants. 
 
 N. 3.) 
 
 FIFTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. QUINZIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 Wednesday, April 1849. Mercredi, Avril, 1849. 
 
 Have you one more exercise, Messrs.? We have two more. 
 Which? The last two. Has our cook much more fresh beef? He 
 has not much more. Has he many more chickens? He lias not. 
 Has the farmer much more milk? He has not much more milk ; 
 but he has a great deal more butter. Have the French many more 
 horses? They have not many more. Has our friend one more 
 umbrella ? He has no more. Has the tailor no more buttons ? He 
 has no more. Has our carpenter no more nails? He has no more 
 nails; but he has a little more wood. Has this cook no more fire? 
 Yes, he has a little more. Have those Spaniards a few more half 
 dollars? They have a few more. Have you a few more francs'? 
 We have no more francs ; but some more dollars. Have the Swiss 
 Btill vinegar enough ? They have theirs and mine. Have they ? 
 (Dir. 1.) Yes, they have. Have we any of the grocer's sugar? 
 No, we have no more. Has the joiner wood enough? He has 
 enough. Has he the stranger's wood? He has it not. Has he his 
 iron and wooden hammers ? He has them not. Have the sailors 
 got their rice ( 32), biscuits, beef, bread, and wine? They have 
 them ; but they have neither fresh butter nor cheese. 
 
 How many ships has the little Russian ? These two. Has he no 
 more ? No, he has but two. Is this to-day's paper ? No, it is not. 
 Which journals has the lawyer? He has the last three. What day 
 01 tho month is it? It is 'the sixth. How many friends have you? 
 I have but one good friend. Has the farmer's horse too much grain ? 
 Ke has not enough. Has he not much money ? Yes, he has a great 
 ino].~ Has he much iron? He ha still mi73h. Have we the cotton 
 
7G 
 
 SIXTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 or thread stockings of the Americans ? We have npither their thread 
 nor cotton stockings. Is John cold, in the garden ? No, he is not. 
 Are you very thirsty ? I am thirsty enough. Is the Irishman too 
 (trop) warm? Too warm? No ; indeed, he is not too warm. Who 
 is too warm ? Nobody is too warm but I am too hungry and 
 sleepy, What ails your young dog? Nothing ails him. What ail? 
 those Dutchmen? They are afraid of the fanner's oxen and dog 
 ($ 32 ; N. 3.) Who has my friend's book and dictionary? I have 
 them not; but we have Edward's (Edouard) penknife, copy-book, 
 and pencil. 
 
 SIXTEENTH LESSON, 16th. Seizieme Legon, 16me. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 
 Several (of them}. 
 
 Several men. Several children. 
 
 Several copy-books and pencils. 
 
 (Dir. 2.) 
 
 The father. This child. 
 
 A soil ... A caJie. Tea. 
 Has this gentleman several sons ? 
 He has several. 
 As much, as many. 
 As much ... as, as many ... as. 
 
 As much soap as sugar. 
 
 As many men as children. 
 
 Have you as much gold as silver ? 
 
 I have as much of this as of that. 
 
 I have as much of the one as of the 
 
 other. 
 
 Has he as many shoes as stockings ? 
 Me has as many of these as of those 
 
 as many of the one as of the other. 
 Quite (or just) as much, as many. 
 Quite as much . . . as, as many ... as. 
 
 Have I quite as much velvet as satin ? 
 
 You. have (quite or just as much). 
 
 Quite or just as much (of it). 
 
 They have just as much of this as of 
 
 that. 
 fngt 93 many of ihesc as of those. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 Plusieurs, (no de before the noun.) 
 En . . . plusieurs. 
 
 Plusieurs hommes. Plusieurs enfanta 
 Pluaiours cahiers et plusieurs cray- 
 
 ons. 
 
 Le pere. Get enfant. 
 
 Unfils. Un gateau. Du the. 
 Ce Monsieur a-t-il plusieurs tils ? 
 Ji en a pkisieurs. 
 Autant de, (avant un nom.) 
 Autant de . . . que de . . . (avant les 
 
 noms.) 
 
 Autant de savon que de sucre, 
 Autant d'hommes que d'enfants. 
 Avez-vous autant d'or que d'argent ? 
 J'ai autant de celui-ci que de celui-la 
 J'ai autant de 1'un que de 1'autre. 
 
 A-t-il autant de souliers que de bas ? 
 II a autant de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 
 autant des uns que des autres. 
 Tout autant de . . . (avant un nom.; 
 Tout autant de . . . que de (av. lea 
 
 noms). 
 Ai-je tout autant de velours que do 
 
 satin ? 
 
 Yous en avez tout autant. 
 En . . t tout autant. 
 Us ont tout autant ce celui-ci que da 
 
 celui-la. 
 Tout autant de ceux-ci que d 
 
 ceux-la. 
 
SIXTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 Quite as much of the one as of the 
 
 other. 
 
 uite as many of the one as the other. 
 Quite as much of the grocer's coflee 
 
 as sugar. ($ 32, N. 3.) 
 
 Tout autant de Tun v/ue de Paulre. 
 
 Tout autant des uns que des autres. 
 Tout autant du cafe de 1'epicier que 
 de son sucre. 
 
 SIXTEENTH EXERCISE, 1st Sec. SEIZIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 Thursday, April 1849. Jeudi, April, 1S49. 
 
 How many exercises have we, to-day? We have but one. 
 Which is it ? It is this. That's right. What have yea ? I have 
 several horses. Has he several coats ? He has only one. Who 
 has several looking-glasses'? My ^brother's painter has. (Dir. 1.) 
 What looking-glasses has he ? He has pretty ones. Who has our 
 good cakes ? Several boys have them. Is this your friend's child ? 
 Yes, it is (his child). Has he several children ? Yes, he has. Is 
 not this his son ? No, it is not (his son). Have you as much coffee 
 as tea ? I have. Has this stranger a son ? He has several. -How 
 many sons has he ? He has four. How many children have the 
 minister and the physician ? Have they as many, the one as ths 
 other ? No ; the first has four, and the last six. Indeed ! Yes, 
 indeed. That is a great many. Have we as much old cheese as 
 fresh butter ? You have as much of the one as of the other. Have 
 we as many shoes as stockings? We have. (Dir. 1.) Have I as 
 much good as bad paper? You have. How many small pistols 
 have the Swiss ? They have as many small ones as large ones. 
 Have you as much of your wine as of mine? I have. 
 
 Has the ugly cook as much fresh butter as beef? He has not 
 (as much of the one as of the other). Has the carpenter as many 
 sticks as nails? He has just as many of these as of those. What 
 has the hatter ? He has velvet and satin hats. Has he not as many 
 of the one as of the other ? Yes, he has just as many. Who has 
 my books, his pencils, your copy-books, Robert's inkstand and pen- 
 knife ( 32, N. 3), and many other things ? The little scholar has. 
 Have you as many biscuits as cakes? I have not as many of these 
 as of those. Have the Dutch as many horses as the Germans ? No, 
 they have not as many. What has the Irishman ? He has anothel 
 note. Has your son one more pocket-book? He has several more. 
 Have you much money? We have only a little money; but 
 enough bread, beef (repeat the prep. bef. every noun), fresh butter, 
 cheese, and old wine. Has this boy as much courage as our neigh 
 bors son ? He has just as much. Has the youth many notes ? He 
 has. Has the merchant cloth and velvet? (25.) He has cloth, 
 but no more velvet. (Obs. 35.) Have the boys your farmer's ox 
 and horse ? They have that one, but not this. 
 
SIXTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 An enemy, enemies. 
 The finger. r ?he thumb, inch, 
 
 More, (a comparative adverb.) 
 More bread, More men. 
 Than. 
 
 More bread than wine. 
 More knives than sticks. 
 More of this than of that. 
 More of the one than of the other. 
 More of these than of those. 
 More of the ones than of the others. 
 I have more of your su^ar than of 
 
 mine. 
 
 He has more of our books than of his. 
 Less, fewer, not so much or many. 
 Less satin than velvet (not so much . .). 
 Fewer penknives than pencils. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2dc SeclicQ, 
 Un ennemi, des ennemis. 
 Le doigt. Le pouce. 
 
 Plus de, (avant un nom.) 
 Plus de pain. Plus d' homines 
 Que de, (avant un nom.) 
 Pius de pain que de vin. 
 Plus de couteaux que de batons. 
 Plus de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
 Plus de 1'un que de 1'autre. 
 Plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-ia, 
 Plus des uns que des autres. 
 J'ai plus de votre sucre que du mien 
 
 II a plus de nos livres que des sicna 
 Moins de, (avant un nom.) 
 Moins de satin que de velours. 
 
 Fewer penknives than pencils. > . 
 
 Not so many penknives as pencils. { Moms de camfs ^ ue de crayons. 
 
 Less than, more than, (bef. a number.) 
 I have more than three dollars. 
 He. has not more than five francs. 
 They have not less than te~. 
 More than I, (bef. a pronoun.) 
 More than he. More than we. 
 Less than you. Less than they. 
 They. Than they. 
 
 4s much as you. Just as many as he. 
 As much as I. Quite as many as they. 
 So much, so many. So much as that. 
 Not so much. Not so many as that. 
 They have six servants. 
 Have they so many ? No, they have 
 
 not so many as that. They have 
 
 but four. 
 
 Moins de, plus de, (av. un nombre.) 
 J'ai plus de trois dollars. 
 II n'a pas plus de cinq francs. 
 Us n'en ont pas moins de dix. 
 Plus que moi, (avant un pronom.) 1 
 Plus que lui. Plus que nous. 
 Moins que vous. Moins qu'eux. 
 Eux. Qu' eux. 
 
 Autant que vous. Tout autant que lui. 
 Autant que moi. Tout autant qu'eux, 
 Tant de. Tant que cela. 
 
 Pas tant. Pas tant que cela. 
 
 Us ont six domestiques. 
 En ont-ils tant ? Non, ils n'en onl 
 pas tant que cela. Ils n'en ont quo 
 
 quatre. 
 SIXTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. SEIZI^ME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Friday, April 1849. Vendredi, Avril, 1849. 
 
 Have you three exercises to-day, Mr. Charles ? No, Miss, I have 
 not so many. How many have you 1 I have got but two. We 
 have as many as you ; but those young scholars have more than 
 we. Have they five or six? No ; they have not so many* they 
 
 TAre used in French as no-" > | 
 
 minative cases, when the . 
 1^01, I, instead of: Je.l yerb ig understood or \Lui, ho, instead of il 
 
 Toi,thcu, " tu,j separated from the pro- \Eux t they, ' i!a 
 I noun. (* 38.) J 
 
SEVENTEENTH LESSON. V9 
 
 have only four. Four ? That's a great deal. Has this lawyer more 
 friends than enemies ? He has more enemies than friends. Has 
 the farmer as many sheep (moutons) as oxen ? He has just as 
 many. Have you as many small guns as I ? I have just as many. 
 Has the ugly foreigner as much courage as \ve ? He has less than 
 we. Have our neighbors as much fresh butter as cheese ? They 
 have more of the latter than of the former. Have not your sons 
 as many books as copy-books ? They have not so many of these 
 as of those; they have fewer of the latter than of the former. 
 How many noses has that stranger? That small man ? Yes. He 
 has but one. How many ringers has he ? He has several. Has he 
 ten ? No, he has not so many. Has he not so many? No, he has 
 less than ten. How many has he ? He has but eight fingers and 
 two thumbs. How many thumbs and fingers has you young scholar? 
 He ? (mind the last note.) (Lui ?) Yes, he. He has not more than 
 seven fingers and one thumb. And I 7 how many have I? You 
 have just as many as we (nous). Very well. 
 
 Has the minister more children than the lawyer? The minister 
 has more than lie, but he. the lawyer, has more than they and we. 
 How many pistols have you? I have only one; but my father has 
 more than I and they. He has five. Has he so many, indeed? 
 Yes, he has just as many. John, have you more than seven dollars ? 
 No, I have less than that. I have not so many. Have my children 
 as much courage as yours? Yours have more than mine. Have I 
 as much money as you? You have less than I, but more than he. 
 Have you as many books as I ? I have fewer than you. I have not 
 more than nine. Have I as many enemies as your father? You 
 have fewer than he; but more than they. Have the Russians as 
 many children as we ? We have fewer than they. Have the French 
 as mauy ships as we ? They have fewer than we. Have the dogs 
 more feet than the horses? No, they have just as many. Has not 
 your bird two feet? Yes, it has two. Has not this little boy more 
 arms than feet ? Yes, he has two arms ; but he has only one foot. 
 
 What is the las? verb of the last exercise ? It is What is 
 
 (he last noun of this exercise ? It is 
 
 SEVENTEENTH LESSON, 17th. Dix-septieme Legon, 17 me. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. | VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE .-De VInJinitif. 
 
 There are in French four Conjugations, which are distinguished by the 
 vermination cf the Present of the Infinitivp, viz : 
 
80 
 
 SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 1. The first has its infinitive terminated in ER, as :^ parler, /to cpiak, 
 which will be the model of its regular verbs. \ 
 
 2 The second in IR, its model jfinir, [to finish, 
 
 ?, The third in OIR, " Irecevoz'A to receive. 
 
 4, The fourth in RE, " .J vendre, Jo sell. 
 
 Obs. 36. A verb, in French, is regular, when conjugated like the mode, 
 of its conjugation. Irregular, of course, when not conjugated like it. Each 
 verb given, hereafter, will have the number of its class. Those marked 
 with an asterisk (*) are irregular. 
 To buy. -v 
 To choose. I 
 To perceive) 
 To wait for/ 
 
 Fear, p 
 
 Wiongjtort. (Right, raison. [A mind, a desire, a wisriy envie. 
 
 Obs. 37. These seven words require the preposition (de, of,) after then, 
 whejaJoUojVied by anjrifinitive. ExajnpIc.-^Ajre _you_a_frajdjo speak 
 vous peur de parler ? 
 
 A dieter, I. 1 
 
 fTo cut, cut off. "\ t!-ouper, 1. 
 
 Choisir, 2. 
 
 [To build. 
 
 Batir, 2. 
 
 Apercevoir, 3. 
 
 I To owe. I 
 
 Devoir, 3. 
 
 Attendre, 4. 
 
 rTo render, rcstorel 
 
 Rendre, 4. 
 
 el honte.-f~ r Time, ^7e temps. Courage, le courage. 
 , Iraison. [A 
 
 To work. ~ - ^^ 
 
 Have you a mind to work ? 
 
 I have a mind to work. 
 
 Fie has not the courage to speak. 
 
 Are you afraid to speak ? 
 
 I am ashamed to speak. 
 
 Have they time to wait ? 
 
 They have neither time nor a wish 
 
 to wait. 
 
 To cut it, him. To cut them. 
 To cut some. To cut one more. 
 
 Has he time to cut the bread ? 
 He has (time to cit it). 
 Has he a mind ta cut other trees ? 
 
 Travailler, 1. 
 
 Avez-vous envie de travailler ? 
 
 J'ai envie de travailler. 
 
 II n'a pas le courage de parler. 
 
 Avez-vous peur de parler ? 
 
 J'ai honte de parler. 
 
 Ont-ils le temps d'attendrc? 
 
 Us n'ont ni le temps, ni envie d'at- 
 
 tendre. 
 
 Le couper. Les couper. 
 En couper. En couper encore un, 
 A-t-il le temps de couper le pain ? 
 II a le temps de le couper. 
 A-t-il envie de couper d'autres ar 
 
 bres? 
 He has (a mind to cut others). II a envie d'en couper d'autres. 
 
 SEVENTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. PIX-SEI>TIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Saturday April, 1849. Samedi Avril mil huit, &c. 
 
 Have you more than one exercise this morning ? We have no 
 exercise, but we have a vocabulary. Have you not more than one 
 
 1 Questions to be asked and answered in French, on the introduction of 
 a verb. Of what conjugation is it ? De quelle conjugaiso?i est-il ? Of the 
 1st, 2d, 3d, or 4th. De la Ire, 2de, 3me, ou 4me. Why ? Pourquoi? Be- 
 cause it ends in : er, ir, oir, or re. Parce qu'ilfniit en : er, ir, oir, ou re. 
 Is it regular ? Est il regulier? It is. J7 Vest. Why ? Pourquoi? Be 
 cause it is conjugated like the model: parler, Ji?nr, rccevoir, or vetulTe. 
 Parce qu'i'Z est conjugue comme le model < : parler, &c. It is net. ll ru 
 r cst pas. It is not conjugated, &c. U n'cstms conjugue, &c. 
 
SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 81 
 
 \ ocabu.a y ? No, \ve have not. (Dir. 1 .) That is not much. No, thai 
 is not much, but it is enough. Have you still a mind to buy my 
 friend's horse and sheep? ( 32, N. 3.) I have still a mind to buy 
 them ; but I have no more money. Have you time to work l 1 
 have time, but no mind to work. Has your brother time to cut 
 some beef or mutton ? He has. Is he afraid to cut any 1 He ia 
 not. but he has no mind to cut any. Has he got no knife? ($ 26.) 
 Ye?, he has one. Have you time to cut some cheese l I have. 
 Has he a desire (a mind) to cut the cabbages ? He has, but he ia 
 ashamed to cut them. Is the tailor of the minister wrong to cut 
 the coarse clolh ? He is not wrong in cutting it. Who has time to 
 jut the trees? What trees? The general's big trees. The farmer 
 has time to cut them. How many trees has he time o Cut? He 
 has only time to cut two. Who has time to cut more than two? 
 Nobody has. Are the little scholar and the little boy ashamed to 
 speak ? They are not ashamed, but afraid to speak. 
 
 Am I not right in buying as many cakes as they? Yes. y^u are 
 right in buying as many cakes as they. Is our friend right in buying 
 that ugly old horse? No, he is wrong; but we are right in buying 
 ibis pretty little dog. Has any one a mind to speak ? You, he, 
 John, and I, have (469, N. 1) a mind to speak; but we have not 
 courage enough. Have you the courage to receive those gentle- 
 men ? I have the courage and the wish to receive them. Is he 
 not wrong to receive that note ? He is right to receive it. Has that 
 sailor the courage to cut off the finger arid thumb of this little boy* 
 No, he has not ; but the doctor has. Has the cloth merchant a mind 
 to choose a few more cloaks? He has a mind to choose a fe\v 
 more, but he has no more money. Are the carpenters ashamed U 
 hvlld a ship ? They are not ashamed to build a small one ; but the 
 captain, is afraid to build a large one. What are they afraid tc 
 build? They are afraid to build a great many things. Is not the 
 lawyer of merit wrong in receiving his young friends in his garden * 
 No, he J3 not wrong in receiving them in his garden : but he is no 4 
 right in choosing those old cakes and that bad wine. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. | VOCAEULAIKE. 2cle Section, 
 
 To break. To mend, to repair. 
 
 Cazssr. Of what conjugation is it ? 
 
 Of the first. Why ? 
 
 Because it ends in : er. 
 
 (s it regular ? Yes, it is. 
 
 vVhy ? Because it is conjugated like 
 
 the model : parler. 
 To pick up. To look for, to seek. 
 
 Casser, 1. Raccommoder, 1. 
 
 De quelle conjugaison est-il ? 
 De la premiere. Pourquoi ? 
 Parce qu'il finit en : er. 
 Est-il regulicr ? Oui, il Test. 
 Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il est conjugu 
 
 comme le modele : parler. 
 Ramasser, 1. Chercher, 1. 
 
52 
 
 SEVENTEENTH LESSON, 
 
 To buy, purchase. To buy one. 
 
 To buy some moro. To buy two. 
 
 To buy one or two more. 
 
 Have you a mind to buy one more 
 horse ? 
 
 I have a mind to buy two more. 
 
 \.m I not right to pick up that beau- 
 tiful satin shawl ? 
 
 Ves, but you are wrong to break that 
 pretty paper fan. 
 
 Is he afraid to mend this cloak ? 
 
 He is not afraid to mend it. 
 
 What have they a mind to look for ? 
 
 They do not wish to look for anything. 
 
 Have those children the courage to 
 wait in the garden ? 
 
 They have (the courage). (Dir. 1.) 
 
 Is not the young scholar wrong to 
 sell his dictionary ? 
 
 No, he is not wrong in selling it, be- 
 cause it is an old dictionary. 
 
 Has the merchant more sugar than 
 tbe grocer ? He has not so much. 
 
 Acheter, 1. Enachcicrun. 
 
 En acheter encore. En acheter deu* 
 En acheter encore un ou deux. 
 Avez-vous en vie d' acheter encore 
 
 un cheval ? 
 
 J'ai envie d'en acheter encore deux. 
 N'ai-je pas raison de ramasser ce 
 
 beau chale de satin ? 
 Si fait : mais vouo avez tort de cassci 
 
 ce joli eventail ce papier. 
 A-t-il peur de raccommoder ce imn 
 
 teau-ci ? 
 
 II n'a pas peur de le raccommoder. 
 Qu'ont-ils envie de chercher ? 
 Us n'ont envie de rien chercher. 
 Ces enfanls ont-ils le courage d N dt 
 
 tendre dans le jardin ? 
 Us en ont le courage. 
 Le jeune ecolier n'a-t-il pas fort d 
 
 vendre son dictionnaire ? 
 Non, il n'a pas tort de le vendre, par- 
 
 ce que c'est un vieux dictionnaire. 
 Le marchand a-t-il plus de sucre qua 
 
 1'epicier ? II n'en a pas tant. 
 
 SEVENTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. DIX-SKPTJKME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 Monday, May 1849. Lundi, Mai, 1849. 
 
 Have we not the two exercises of the seventeenth lesson (de la)C 
 Yes, we have the seventeenth lesson. How many verbs have we 
 in our vocabularies'? We have ten. Have we not more than ten ? 
 Is it not enough? Yes, it is enough. Have we any adjectives and 
 nouns? We have several. Have we not many nouns and pro- 
 nouns? We have more of the last than of the first. Has the 
 young sailor any more biscuits or bread? He has biscuits, but 
 (06s. 35} no more bread. What has the old grocer got? He has 
 fresh cheese, but no more rice. Who has fresh butter? I have 
 some yet, the physician has a little more, but the lawyer and the 
 minister have no more. 
 
 What has our tailor a mind to mend ? He has a mind to mend 
 our old friend's (467, N. 1) coaxs and vests. Has he not a mind to 
 mend our hats and theirs? No, but the hatter has a mind to rnciVu 
 them. Has the little shoemaker time to mend our old shoes? Ho 
 has time, but he has no mind to mend them. Are you afraid to 
 look for my horse ? I am not afraid, but I have no wish to look foj 
 it. What are the carpenters right in building? They are right in 
 building vessels. Are their children afraid to pick up some nails! 
 
EIGHTEENTH LESSON 
 
 S3 
 
 they are nof. Have you a mind to break my jawel'? I have a 
 tnind lo pick it up, but not to break it. Am I wrong in picking up 
 your leather gloves'? You are not wrong in picking them up; but 
 you are wrong in cutting them. Who has a mind to break our 
 large looking-glass? Our enemy has a mind to break it. Has the 
 lawyer more merit than the minister? The one has no more merit 
 than the other. Has the big chicken more feet than this little bird? 
 No, it has ;ust as many. 
 
 EIGHTEENTH LESSON, 18th. Dix-huititme Legmi, 18m 
 
 VOCABULAIKK. Iro Section. 
 Fairc,*4. 
 Vouloir,* 3. 
 
 { Voulez-vous ? 
 
 Je vetix. 
 Vcut-il ? 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 To make, to do, to perform. 
 To be willing, to wish, to will. 
 Will you ? Do you wish ? 
 Are you willing ? Will you have? 
 I will, am willing, wish. I will not. 
 Will lie ? is lie willing ? dor.s !: 
 He will, is willing, wishes. He will 
 not. 
 
 i, are willing, wish, will have. 
 You will, are willing, wish, will have. 
 
 They will, are willing, wish, w; ill ha ve. 
 
 Who will (h:iv<s? Who does not wish? 
 
 Nobody wishes. Some one wishes. 
 
 Do you wish to have it ? 
 
 Does any one wish to make my fire ? 
 
 I am willing to make it. 
 
 I dr. not wish to make it. 
 
 Does he wish to buy your h 
 
 'ics to buy it ; dors he not 
 [9 it ?int us I say ? Is it not so ? 
 
 II vcut. 
 
 Je ne veux paa. 
 II ne veut pas. 
 
 Nous voulons. 
 Vous voulez. 
 Us veulcnt. 
 Qui vcut ? 
 
 Vous ne voulez pas 
 Veulent-ils? 
 Qui ne veut pas? 
 
 Personne ne veut. Quelqu'un vcuL 
 
 Le voulez-vous ? 
 
 Quelqu'un veut-il fairc mon feu ? 
 
 Je veux Ic fairc. 
 
 Jc ne veux pas le faire. 
 
 Veut-il acheter votrc cheval ? 
 
 II veut I 1 acheter ; n'est-cepas ? 
 
 t N'est-ce pas ? (Idiom.) 
 
 Obs. 33. (Important.} This French : N'c*t-cepas? answers to any ncga 
 live interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, as: 
 
 1. You are going tc write, ARE YOU NOT ? meaning: is it not sc f 
 
 2. You would write, WOULD YOU NOT ? meaning: is it not so f 
 
 3. They wrote, DID THEY NOT ? meaning : is it not BO T 
 
 4. He has the cloth, HAS HE NOT ? meaning : is it not eo ? 
 
 5. We were reading, WERE WE NOT ? meaning : is it not eo ? 
 
 These five negative interrogations (in the same person as the five pro- 
 seJing affirmations and immediately connected with them) are all translated 
 in French by : n* cst-ce pas ? and so arc all similar ones, in all mends, tenses, 
 und persons. 
 
EIGHTEENTH L ESS ON. 
 
 Vou have the French of: lo do, io 
 
 make ? Have you not ? 
 Yes, we have it. It is) faire. 
 You have also that off~7o be willing : 
 
 have you not ? We have it also. 
 
 To go. To be. 
 
 To, ct, or in the house *>/ 
 
 To be at the man's house. 
 
 To go to the grocer's. 
 
 To be in one's friend's house. 
 
 To go to their father's. 
 
 To be in ) . 
 
 To go to) my house ~ hls JOU3e - 
 
 To be at, to go to, our house. 
 
 To be in, to go to, your house. 
 
 To be at, to go to, their house. 
 
 To be at some one's house. 
 
 To go to no one's house. 
 
 At home.. To go home. 
 
 Will you wait at home ? 
 
 At, i?i, or to whose house ? 
 
 To whose house do you wish to go ? 
 
 I do not wish to go to any one's. 
 
 EIGHT KKXTII Kxr.r.nsK. 1st Sec. '. 
 
 Tuesday, May 1849. Mardi, .Mai, 18-19. 
 
 Have you a mind to work? Yes, I have. What will you do* 
 1 wish to do an exercise. Which .' This one. Very well. Doee 
 (he little son of the general wish to break that big slick? No, ho 
 does not wish to break it. Are you willing to look for my son? I 
 am (willing, &c.). (Dir. 1.) What do you wish to pick up? I wi:<h 
 to pick up the shawl, hat, and gloves, of Miss Clara. You wish to 
 pick up that dollar, do you not Y^es, I wish to pick it up. Will 
 you pick up that old pencil ? No, I will not. Do you wish to go to 
 that man's house? No. I wish to go to the minister's. You wish to 
 go to the physician's, do you not? No, I do not wish to go to the 
 physician's, but to the lawyer's and grocer's. Who wishes to go to 
 the doctor's? Nobody -wishes to go to his house. Does our neigh 
 bor wish to buy these or those combs? (mind the French construc- 
 tion.} He wishes to buy them. Does that fanner wish to cut youi 
 tree 2 He does not wish to cut mine, but his own. Which ? The 
 big tree. What does the shoemaker wish to mend* He wishes to 
 Iii2nd our old shoes. Does the tailor wish to mend anything? He 
 *vis,ie* to mend ($ 25) waistcoats. He wishes to mend their coats, 
 dees he not ? He does not. Do the Swiss wish to wait for your son * 
 
 Vous avez le i'raiignis do -{jo :!*,, i>) 
 
 (rpakej N'est-cc pas ? 
 Oui, nous i'avons. C'est : faire. 
 Vous avez aussi celui de : <p be wH^ 
 
 (ling): N'est-ce pas ? Nous 1'hvoiu 
 aussi. A 
 
 Aller,*!. Kt : * 
 
 Chez... . 
 Etre chei 1'homme. 
 Aller chez 1'epicicr. 
 Etre chez son ami. 
 -Aller chez leur pure. 
 Eire ) . 
 
 Aller \ cnez m01 cne/ * UI 
 Etre chez nous. Aller chez nouB, 
 Eire chez vous. Aller chez vous 
 Etre chez eux. Aller chez eux. 
 Etre chez quelqu'un. 
 N'aller chez personnc. 
 A lamaisofi. Aller a la niaison. 
 Voulez-vous attendre a la maiso/i S 
 Chez quif 
 
 Chez qui voulcz-vous aller ? 
 Je ne veux aller chez personnc. 
 
 ! Ire Sec. 
 
EIGHTEENTH LESSOR. 86 
 
 They do. What do they wish to choose? They wish to chous'j 
 lome coarse cloth. And their children, what do they wish to 
 choose ? They wish to choose some fine handkerchiefs. Who has 
 any ? The dry goods merchants have. Do they wish to sell them 1 
 
 indeed ! 
 
 Is Charles willing to wait for the lawyer's son? No, he is net. 
 Robert will wait for him ; will he not ? He ! No, he will not. Who 
 will do it? Nobody wiil do it. Are the Scotchmen willing to wail 
 for the minister at your father's or at the doctors? They will wait 
 for him neither at my father's nor at the donor's?, but at the booK 
 seller's. Am I wrong to go to the hatter's? No, you are not wrong 
 to go to his house. At whose house is their father? He is at hit 
 friend's, the apothecary. To whose house do your sons wish to 
 go)- They? They do not wish to go to anybody's house. Wih 
 to my house '? I will not go to yours, but to my broth* 
 ,ot this little child wish to go to tke cuke shop (rhex ie mar- 
 chand de gittear, . indeed, he does. (Dir. 1.) Why ' 
 
 <\s to buy two cakes. Will mn 
 
 your childi r too? No, they do not wish to bu> 
 
 any; they are not hungry. Have you the French of: a quarter of t> 
 dollar * No. I h:ive it not. Do you wih to have it? Yes, >ir. 
 It is : mi quart de dollar. Have you two quarters of a dollar ? I have 
 t\vo. How many quarters has he? lie has several quarters. Has 
 Charles his brother's pretty little stk-k and playthings? (-1GY. 
 Ho has his pp-ity li:i!e >:ii-k. but not , The ge 
 
 : are they not? No: but the cook 
 and t-h: 
 
 ction. 
 
 To burn. To warm. 
 
 T:> put, put on. 
 
 The broth. My linen clothes. 
 Beaut ii.. 
 
 Will you put on this satin vest ? 
 I will put it on ; it is beautiful. 
 
 MI: n. 2dc Secti vi) 
 r, 1. Chauffer, 1. 
 Due-hirer. Mettre*4, (17 1 , N. 1). 
 Le bouillen. Mon linge, (singular./ 
 Superbe. 
 
 Voulez-vous rnettrc ce gilet de satin ? 
 Je veux le mettre ; il est superbo.. 
 
 At W l,oso house is your brother ? j Chez <*"! est vo ! r f frt}re ? , , 
 
 ' Chez qui votre irure est-il ? 
 
 .it. ours, in ours. 
 Is he at home ? at his house ? 
 He is not at home in his house. 
 He is at or in yours. 
 Who is at or in theirs? at mine ? 
 Nobody is av theirs ; yours ; mine. 
 Are you ? I am. 
 
 Tirc*l, fatigued. Are yen tired ? 
 
 II est chez nous. 
 
 Est-il a la maison ? Est-il chcv. lui ? 
 
 II n'est pas a la maison chez lui. 
 
 II est chez vous. 
 
 Qui est chez eux ? chez moi ? 
 
 Personne n'est chez eux; vous; moi 
 
 fites-vous ? Je suis. 
 
 Fatigue. iZtes-vous fatigue? 
 
86' 
 
 EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 ( am tirea. I am not tired. 
 
 [ am a little titetl. Very tired. 
 Cs he ? He is. He is not. 
 Busy . . . He is busy ; is he not ? 
 Are we ? We are not. 
 Are they ? They ere. They are not. 
 Arc they bus;/ ? Yes, they are. 
 
 Ie is busy, and we are i:red. 
 To dzink, To drink a little more, 
 IVJicre ? Where t!o you wish to go ? 
 What do you wish to do ? 
 W"hat does your brother wish to Ho ? 
 la your father at home ? 
 What will the Swiss dr.'nk ? 
 They wish to drink some broth. 
 They wish to drink something gocd. 
 They do not wish to drink anything. 
 Do they wish to tear this old paper ? 
 They do not wish to tear, hut to 
 
 burn it. 
 All. Is it, is this, is that all ? ] is. 
 
 Je suis fatigue. Je ne suis j>as fatigufi 
 Je suis un peu fatigu -.r^s -fatigue'. 
 Est-il. II est. II tt'est pas. 
 Occupe. Ilestoroupe; n'est-cepast 
 Sommes-nous? Nous aesommes pas 
 Sont-ils ? Us sont. Us ne sont pas. 
 Sont-ils occ'apes ? Oui, ils sont oc 
 
 cupes. ( 137.) 
 
 II est occ ape et nor^s sommes fatigued. 
 Boire* . Boive encore un peu. 
 Ou ? Ou voulf z-yous aller ? 
 Quo voulez-vo'js faire ? 
 V'jtre frere qne \ r eut-il faire ? 
 Votre frere est-il a la maison ? 
 LesSuisses que veulent-ils boire 
 Jls veulen* boire du bouillon, 
 lie- veuleM boire quelque chose dc 
 
 ben. Ils ne veulent rien boire. 
 Veulen',-ils dechirer ce vieux papier ? 
 Ils ne veulent pas le dechirer, maia 
 
 le r ruler. 
 Tout. Est-ce tout ? C'est tout. 
 
 EIGHTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. DJX-HUITI&ME EXERCICE. 2cle Sec 
 
 Wednesday, May 1849. Mercredi, Mai, 1849. 
 
 You have the 18th exercise to-day ; have you not? No, we have 
 only the 18th vocabulary. Have you but the vocabulary? Yes, 
 indeed, that's all. Very well. Miss Caroline, will you put on this 
 or that hat? I will put on neither this nor that; but the other. 
 Which? This ugly old hat (vieux vilain) ? This ugly old hat! It 
 is superb. Superb! indeed. Will you not put your velvet shawl 
 on? Y r es; I will put it on, because I am cold. 'Has the young 
 painter any fi;3? He has. Does he wish to bum anything? Y r es ; 
 he has a mind to burn these old papers. What will you r^ar? L 
 will tear this coarse handkerchief. Who is busy? I am bury. 
 Who is tired ? I am not tired. Who is good ? The grocer's little 
 son. Are you busy, very busy? I am very busy. Are you not 
 tired? Yes, I am a little tired. What docs the cook wish to warm* 
 He wishes to warm our tea, and our father's coffee. Is that all ? 
 Yes, that is all. Do you wish to warm my brother's broth and 
 coffee ? I am willing to warm this, but not that. Is the farmer wil- 
 ling to put some wood in the fire ? Yes, he is. Will they put any 
 grain in the bag? No, they do not wish to put any in the bag, bu> 
 m the granary; that's all. 
 
 Is not the grocer's clerk willing f.o put your rice in his bag ? Yes, he 
 is willing to put ii in his bag. Am I not right in warming youi broth? 
 
NINETEENTH LESSON. 
 
 87 
 
 Fes, you are. Is not the merchant wrong in tearing the satin ?- Yeaj 
 ha is. Have we time to go in the garden ? No, we have not time. 
 What does Charles wish to tear? He does not wish to tear any- 
 thing; but we and they (467, N. 1.) wish to (nous t'OwZons) tear the 
 cotton bags. Is he afraid to tear your coat ? He is not ; but to burn 
 it. What are you willing to put on? I am willing to put on my 
 coat, (Dir. 2 ; ) vest, shoes, stockings, and gloves; that's all. Very 
 well; that's enough. Are you tired? I am not tired. Who is 
 tired ? My brother is tired. Has the Spaniard a mind to buy as 
 many horses as oxen ? No ; but he has a mind to buy as many 
 birds as you and I. Do you wish to drink anything? I do not. 
 How many chickens have you at home? \Ve have four; that's 
 all. Where is your father ? At his friend's house. Is the physician 
 at the lawyer's? No; but the minister is at the lawyer's. Do the 
 strangers wish to go to the American's or to the Dutchman's? They 
 \vish to go neither to the American's nor to the Dutchman's? W T here 
 do they wish to go? They do not wish to go to anybody's house. 
 Where are your little friends, Robert and John? They are at theii 
 father's. That's all. Is your friend's brother's horse sick? (} 140 ; 
 Art 3.) No, it is not sick. 
 
 NINETEENTH LESSON, 19ih 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 Are you going ? do you go ? 
 I am going. I go. I am not going. 
 Are you going to choose a book ? 
 I am going to choose a book. 
 I am nyt yet going to choose any. 
 I am not g:>ing to choose anything. 
 Are you going home ? I am (going 
 
 there). 
 
 To it, at it, in it, there, thither. 
 To go thither. To be there. 
 
 It to it, it in it, him, there, or thither. 
 To take, to carry. To send. 
 To take, to lead, to conduct him 
 
 there. 
 
 Tc take you there. To take us there. 
 To carry it there. To send him there. 
 To commence, to begin. Tc proceed. 
 Than, there, or thither. 
 Some of it, there, or thifhtr. 
 To cfi*ry them thither. 
 
 i. Dix-ncuviemc Lcron } 19mc. 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 Allez-vous ? 
 
 Je vais. Je ne vais pas. 
 
 Allez-vous choisir un livre ? 
 Je vais choisir un livre. 
 Je ne vais pas encore en choisir. 
 Je ne vais rien choisir. 
 Allez-vous chez vous? J'# vain. 
 
 Y t (avant le verbe.) ($ 47.) 
 Y aller,* 1. Y Ctrc,*4. 
 
 Z/'y, (avant le vcrbe.) ($ 57.) 
 Porter, 1. Envoyer,* 1, 
 
 Mener, 1. L'y mener. 
 
 Vous y mener. Nous y mener. 
 L'y porter. L'y envoyer. 
 
 Commencer, 1. Continuer, 1. 
 Les y, (av. lo verbe.) ($ 57.) 
 Y en, (av. le verbe.) (> CO.) 
 Les y porter. 
 
88 
 
 NINETEENTH LESSOR. 
 
 To carry some tliere or thitner. 
 Will you send him to my lather's ? 
 
 Y en porter. 
 
 Voulez-vous I'tnvoycr chjz mon 
 
 pere ? 
 
 Je vais 1 1'y envoy er. 
 Je ne vais pas encore 1'y envoyer. 
 Obs. 39. The adverb y always stands before the verb. When there is 
 pronoun like Ze, it, mm, Zes, them ; that pronoun stands immediately before 
 the adverb y ; but en, some of it, stands after the y, as may be seen above 
 
 I am going to send him there. 
 
 I am not yet going to send him there. 
 
 tQ 
 
 To come. To come to it, thither. 
 
 Are you going to come 
 
 Will you come (meaning) 
 
 Are you coming 
 
 I am coming (going to come) there. 
 
 When ? To-morrow. To-morrow 
 
 morning. 
 
 With. With pleasure. 
 
 At first, in the first place. Afterwards. 
 What are you going to do first ? 
 First, I am going to the grocer's, and 
 
 then to the apothecary's. 
 With me with him with them 
 
 nobody. 
 To study. To recite. 
 
 Venir,* 2. Y venir. 
 
 Allez-vous venir chez moi ? 
 
 Je vais y venir. 
 Quand ? Demain. 
 
 Pern am mntiu, 
 
 Avec. Avec plaisir. 
 
 D'abord. E?isuite. 
 
 Qu'allez-vous faire d'abord ? 
 D'abord, je vais chez 1'enicier, et en 
 
 suite chez 1'apothicaire. 
 Avec moi avec lui aveceux avec 
 
 personne. 
 tudier, 1. 
 
 Reciter, 1. 
 
 NINETEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. DIX-NEUVIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Thursday, May 1849. Jeudi, Mai, 1849. 
 
 Have you an exercise or a vocabulary, to-day? We have both. 
 
 Vre you going to recite the vocabulary first ? Yes, with pleasure , 
 and then the exercise: will we not? (won't we?) Very well. 
 Will you begin, Mr. Charlemagne ? Yes, Sir, with pleasure. What 
 
 is the French of: I am going? It is Is it right? Yes, or 
 
 no (according to the answer). Do you wish to go home ? I do. 
 (Dir. 1.) Does your son wish to go with you? He does. Is your 
 brother at home? He is. Where are you going, Mr. Charles? I 
 am going to the minister's. Do your children wish to come with 
 me ? They do not (wish to go with you). To whose house are 
 you going to send this note ? I am not going to send it, but I am 
 going to carry (take) it to the general's. Will your servant take my 
 note to the American's house? He has no time to take it there 
 hut little Henry will take it tliere. Will those children take the 
 Btrangerto the Russian's? They will take him there. Are you no( 
 going to take the painter to the physician's? No, but I am going to 
 Bend him there. Is the painter willing to begin that picture, to-day? 
 No, he does not wish to commence it before to-morrow. To-mor 
 
 1 When the wiil is not particularly referred to, use vais, instead of vcux 
 
NINETEENTH LESSON. 89 
 
 row morning? (demain matin?) Yes, to-morrow morning.-- What 
 tire you going to study first, to-morrow morning? To study? I am 
 not going to study anything. Are you not going to study thrt 19th 
 vocabulary? I am going to study it to-day. 
 
 Where will the son of my friend take the Swiss's large dog? Ho 
 will not take the Swiss's large dog, but the Scotchman's pretty little 
 horse. Where will he take him? He will take him to the cook ; 3 
 house. When will he take him there ? This evening or to-morrow 
 morning? Neither this evening nor to-morrow, but to-day. When 
 are you coming to my house? First, this morning; and afterwards, 
 to-ir.orrow. Will you proceed ? I have no time to proceed, but 
 Carnot has. Will he proceed? Yes, he will. Will the shoemaker 
 take the boy's shoes home, to their house? No, he will not, 
 because he is afraid of their bad dog. That old man is hungry and 
 thirsty; is he not? This one is neither hungry nor thirsty, but that 
 one is. We will first go to the Englishman's, and afterwards to tho 
 Italian's; won't we? Yes, we will; but the Dutch will not. Will 
 your son begin Thiers's work, to-morrow ? No, because he has not 
 yet got it, and because he is going to recite the last vocabulary. 
 Has he riot got it yet? No, he has not. Have you it? Yes, I have 
 it. When do the Germans wish to go in the farmer's garden? To- 
 morrow? No, they do not yet wish to go thither (or in it). Is the 
 doctor very busy? Yes, he is very busy and very tired, this eve- 
 ning. Are you going to put those trees in your son's garden ? I 
 am; but not this evening, because I am too tired and too busy. 
 What is the student going to drink ? He is first going to drink somo 
 coffee and milk, and afterwards some wine. 
 
 NINETEENTH VOCAB. ; 2d Sec. DIX-NEUVIEME YOCAEULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Somewhere, a?iywhcrc. 
 
 Are you going anywhere ? 
 
 Nowhere, not anywhere ($ 151). 
 
 I am not going anywhere (no\vhe r e > . 
 
 To write. To write tnem. Some 
 
 To translate. To correct. 
 
 To read. To copy. 
 
 Will you refid the last vocabulary ? 
 
 Does he not wish to copy anything ? 
 
 Will they translate this or that ex- 
 ercise ? 
 
 Will you not correct it ? Yes, I will. 
 
 is he going, does he go ? 
 
 He goes, (is going.) He is not going. 
 
 Who is gDing ? Nobody goes, (is 
 going,) 
 
 Quelque part, (not used with 
 (jtionj Allez-vous quelque part ? 
 Ne. . . nullepart. 
 Je IY? vais nulle part. 
 Ecrire,* 4. Les ecrire. En ecriro. 
 Traduire,* 4. Corriger, 1. 
 
 Lire,* 4. Copier, 1. 
 
 Voulez-vous lire le dernier vocabn 
 
 laire ? Ne veut-il rien copier f 
 Veulent-ils traduire cet excrcioe-ci 
 
 oucelui-la? ($37.) 
 Ne voulez-vous pas le corriger 'f hi 
 
 fait. Va-t-iL? Ois.15) 
 
 II va. II ne va pas. 
 
 Qui va ? Personne nc va. 
 
NINETEENTH LESSON 
 
 l;3 he going (o read, translate, and 
 write ? He is going neither to 
 read, translate, nor write. 
 
 What is he going to do ? 
 
 He is not going to do anything. 
 
 [s the teacher going to correct an- 
 other of our exercises ? He is 
 (going to do it). 
 
 Is he coming (going to come) to the 
 teacher's or to the minister's ? 
 
 He is coming neither to this one's 
 house nor to the other's. 
 
 The teacher, master. French teacher. 
 
 This professor. Our professor of 
 English. 
 
 At what o'clock ? 
 
 At one o'clock. At two o'clock. 
 
 EJalf. The or a quarter. 
 
 At half past one. 
 
 At a quarter past one. 
 
 At a quarter past two. 
 
 At a quarter to (or of, or before) three. 
 
 At twelve, noon. Half past twelve. 
 
 At twelve at night, or midnight. 
 
 Less. 
 
 Now, at present. Not now. 
 
 Ready. 
 
 An; we ready ? I am ready. 
 
 Ready to. They arc ready to go. 
 
 In a quarter of an hour. Before half 
 an hour. 
 
 Va-t-il lire, traduire, et ecrire? 
 
 II ne va ni lire, ni traduire, ni ecrire 
 Que va-t-il faire ? 
 II ne va rien faire. 
 Le maitre va-t-il corriger un aulr* 
 de nos exercices ? II va le fairs. 
 
 Va-t-il venir chez le maitre ou chez 
 
 le ministre I 1 
 II ne va vcrrir m chez 1'un ni chez 
 
 1'autre. 
 
 Le maitre. Le maitre de Francois. 
 Ce professeur. Notre professeui 
 
 d' Anglais. 
 A quelle heure ? 2 
 A une heure. A deux heures. 
 Demi. Le cm un quart. 
 
 A une heure et demie. 3 
 A une heure et quart (or et un quart). 
 A deux heures un quart. (Mind the a.) 
 A trois heures moins un quart. 
 A midi. Midi et demi. 
 
 A minuit. A minuit et un quart. 
 Moins, (comparative of pru, little.) 
 A present. Pas a present. 
 
 Pret. Trots, (plur.) 
 
 Sommes-nous pruts ? Je siiis pret. 
 Pret a prets a. Us sont prets a 
 
 aller. 
 Dans un quart d'ho-.m\ Avant du- 
 
 mi-heure. 
 
 DIX-NECVIEME EXERCICE. 2de Section. 
 
 Friday, Miy 1849. Vendredi, Mai, 1849. 
 
 Gentlemen, what are you going to do ? to-day I Recite the vocu- 
 oulary, translate and correct our exercises. Very well. Will you 
 
 x Va-t-il venir ? literally, is he going to come? Allez-vous venir? &c., are 
 awkward expressions in English, but much used in French, and philosophi- 
 cally so. He is writing, is never used in English for : he is goi?i<r to write. 
 Why should he is coming be substituted for : he is going to come ? [Ditto 
 of: Sortir, to go or come out, &e.] 
 
 2 Heure, hour, is a feminine noun. This class of nouns will be spoken 
 }f hereafter. For the present, the learner has only to write them as he ^eee 
 them written in thelessons. 
 
 3 The adjective demie is here in the feminine gender, agreeing with the 
 feminine noun heure. But when this adjective precedes the noun, it does 
 .lot agree with it in gender and number, as : une demi-heure, half an hour. 
 
NINETEENTH LESSOR. 91 
 
 begin, Sir'' With much pleasure. What is the French of: some- 
 where ? It is is it not? Yes ? or no (as the case may require). 
 
 Have you the French of: is he going? Yes, we have. What is 
 
 it? (qucl csi-il ?) It is it is right; is it not? Yes, or no. Is 
 
 the youth goinir, in a quarter of an hour, to the Scotchman's or to 
 the Irishman's' 4 He is going neither to the one ; s nor to the other's 
 house ; but I am going to take (conduct) him to the young Dutch- 
 man's. When are you going to take him there? Now. k he 
 ready? Xo. he is not yet ready. Very well; I will wait for him. 
 (Je vais.) Do you go to the physician's this evening? No, I do 
 not. Do you go anywhere? I go somewhere at seven o'clock. 
 Will their children go anywhere, in half an hour? No. they will 
 go nowhere, because they are tired and busy. Do you wish to go 
 anywhere ? I do not wish to go anywhere, but my brother's friends 
 _ r o to the Englishman 7 * Where is the Englishman 
 He is at home. Are his sons at home? They are there 
 row. Are you ready to write and translate ? I am ready to trans- 
 late, but not to write. I have no pencil. Has the cook any more 
 butter ? No, he has no more ; but he is going to buy some. WlnM-u 
 is he going to buy a is going to buy some at the milk- 
 
 Has he much ? He has but little now; but he is going to 
 make some this evening. At what o'clock? At eight. 
 
 When will you go with me to the booksellers? At six o'clock. 
 I am bu>y at MX o'clock. Will you go at seven ? No, not before 
 eight or half past eight. Very well. When are you coming (going 
 to come) to my house? To-day at noon? Not at twelve, but at 
 half past twelve. With whom are you coming? With nobody. 
 Is not the student going to study first, and to recite afterwards ? Yes, 
 he will (va) study first, and recite afterwards. Is he ready to com- 
 mence? No, not yet. Why is he not yet ready ? Because he has 
 but little time, not much time. Who is going to correct our exer- 
 cises? The old professor is. What is the young teacher going to 
 do ? He is going to put on his hat and gloves, and go to his father's. 
 \Vill you read, translate, and copy your French with us to-day ? 1 
 am afraid to do it. Are you ashamed also ? No, I am not ashamed , 
 f am only afraid. Who has time and courage to copy those two 
 exercises? These, or those ? Those. This little scholar has time, 
 
 ^, and a desire to copy them. When will the clerk go to the 
 iawyer's and to the teacher's, to copy something? He will go there 
 first to-day, and then to-morrow also. Does the grocer wish to buy 
 as many bags of coffee as of rice ? He is going to buy more of the 
 former tnan of the latter. We have biscuits; but have we encugh? 
 We have not too many. How many more bags have we ? We 
 
NINETEENTH LESSON. 
 
 have yet six. Have we but six? Have we not eight? Yes, wa 
 have eight- and the baker is going to send another. At wliaH 
 o'clock ? At a quarter to six or at a quarter to seven/ Very well. 
 
 TWENTIETH LESSON, 20lh. Vingtieme Le$on, 20mc. 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 1 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 To, in order to, for the purpose of. \ Pour, (avant un infinitif.) 
 
 06s. 40. In English, all prepositions (to, excepted) are usually followed 
 by the present participle, as : of coming, without havi?ig, &c. In French, 
 ull prepositions are followed by the infinitive mood, except en (in), which is 
 followed by the present participle. (Mind this Obs. Rul. 1.) 
 
 To see. In order to see him. 
 
 Have you money to buy (or, for the 
 
 purpose of buying) bread ? 
 I have^ome to buy some. 
 Are you going to your brother's to 
 
 (in order to) see him ? 
 I have no time to go there to see 
 
 him. 
 flas your servant a knife to cut the 
 
 cheese ? 
 
 He has none to cut it. 
 To be able, (can.) 
 Can you ? Are you able ? 
 I can. I am able. 
 I cannot. I am not able (unable). 
 Can you read ? Are you able to write ? 
 
 Voir,* 3. Pour le vo;r. 
 
 Avez-vous de 1' argent pour achctcr 
 
 du pain ? 
 
 J'en ai pour en acheter. 
 Allez-vous chez votre frere pour le 
 
 voir ? 
 Je n'ai pas le temps d'y aller pour io 
 
 voir. 
 Votre domestique a-t-il un couteav 
 
 pour couper le fromage ? 
 II n'en a pas pour le couper. 
 Pouvoir,* 3. 
 Pouvcz-vous ? 
 Je peux (ouje pursj. 
 Je ne peux pas (ouje ne puis). 
 Pouvez-vous lire ? Pouvez-voiu 
 
 ccrire ? 
 
 Je peux lire et ecrire (ou je puis). 
 Je ne puis ni lire ni ecrire. 
 Balayer, 1. Tuer, 1. 
 
 Saler, 1. Sucrer, 1. 
 
 Puis-je ? (never peux-je ?) 
 
 I can read and write. (Rul. 2.) 
 I can neither read nor write. 
 To sweep. To kill. 
 
 To salt. To sweeten. 
 
 Can I ? may I ? A.m I able ? 
 
 Obs. 41. Pc2ix-je ? Ne peux~je pav ? are not used interrogatively : say 
 therefore : Puis-je? Can I? Ne pms-jepas ? Can I not? (of which here 
 lifter, Lesson 28th.) 
 
 May I or can I see that picture ? 
 You can, or may. You cannot. 
 
 Can he ? may he ? 
 He can, or may. 
 Can we, may we ? 
 
 Can he not ? 
 He is not able. 
 Can we not ? 
 
 We can, are able. We cannot. 
 Gin we see the vessels ? 
 
 Puis-je voir ce tableau-la ? 
 Vous pouvez. Vous ne pouvez pas, 
 Peut-il ? Ne peut-il pa ? 
 
 11 peut. II ne peut pas. 
 
 Pouvo?is-?ious ? Ne pouvons-ncnu 
 
 pas? 
 
 Nous pouvons. Nousne pouvoiwtxrft 
 Pouvons-nous vcirles vaisseaux< 
 
TWENTIETH LESSOR 93 
 
 Are we going ? Do we go ? We do. 
 
 Do we go there ? We do. 
 
 We are mt going. We are not going 
 
 V) it. 
 
 Allons-nous ? Nous aliens. 
 Y ailons-nous ? Nous y alloua. 
 Nous n'allons pas. Nous n'y allune 
 
 pas. 
 
 Ailons-nous tuer le boDiif ? 
 Essayer. 
 
 Are we going to kill the ox ? 
 To try. 
 
 TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. YixaiiEaiE EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 Saturday, May, 1849. Samedi Mai, 1849. 
 
 A.re we going to recite our lesson now? Not now. Mr. Y. is not 
 isody. Where is he ? He is at his friend's. Is he coming (going 
 io come) ? Yes, he is coming. Very well. Can you translate to- 
 day's exercise? We can translate it. At what o'clock can we com- 
 mence ? We can commence in a quarter of an hour. Can you, 
 gentlemen, read and correct these exercises? We can commence, 
 and you can continue (or proceed). Can you cut the bread with the 
 knives that you have? We are going to try. Can you mend my 
 gloves ? You may mend them. We are going to look for, some 
 thread to mend those of the young professoi. Are you going 
 to the tailor's to look for (he old vests? We are not going 
 the> ^ to look for them. \Ve have neither the time nor tho 
 wish to do it. Can you put those shoes on? We are going to 
 try them. Will you try our scissors? No, thank you, I have mine, 
 arid mine are very good (are sharp). Can the tailor make a coat 
 to-day? No, ho cannot make any. Have we glasses to drink our 
 wine? We have glasses to drink it; but have we any wine? We 
 can send the servant to buy some. Can you drink as much coffee 
 as tea? We can drink more tea than coffee, can we not? Have 
 you any sugar to sweeten the coffee? I have some to sweeten the 
 coffee, but not the tea. Has not the young man time to see my 
 brother's child ? Yes, he has time to see him. Where is he ? He 
 is in the garden. No, not in the garden, but in the large and beau- 
 tiful vessel of the big captain. 
 
 How much money have you with you ? I have a good deal. 
 Have you a hundred dollars? I have more than that. More than 
 a hundred dollars? Why have you so much? Because I have a 
 mind to buy a horse. Which one? The general's? Will he sell 
 bis ? He will. It is not that (which) I wish to buy ; but the farmer's 
 young horse. Are we going to take any cakes home ? We are not 
 going to take any. Can we not take some ? No, we cannot. Can- 
 not the cake-merchant send them to our house ? Yes, he can send 
 them there in half an hour. That will do. (C'est Ion.) Will the 
 Swiss send his son to the painter's? No, not to the painter's, but to 
 Jio lookseller's. V T; 11 he send him there now ? No, he is not going 
 
TWENTIETH 
 
 to send him there now, but to-morrow. Is not to-morrow Saturday i 
 No, it is Sunday. What day of the month is it? It is the 18th. 
 The 18th, indeed? Who is going to read and copy the last vocabu- 
 lary ? Nobody is. Is not Mr. Lenoir wrong in going to Mrs. Ver- 
 dier's house ? Yes ; he is wrong to go there ; but he will go. Are 
 you going to put on but one glove ? No, because I have but one. 
 
 Is the servant going to buy a broom to sw r eep the store (magasin) ? 
 No, he is afraid to sweep it. Why is he afraid. to sweep it? Be- 
 cause the big Qog is there (in it). Who can sweep it? Little Robert 
 can. Has he a broom to sweep it? He has a broom to sweep it 
 Has the cook sugar enough to sweeten the cakes? He i as enough 
 to sweeten them ; but he has no more salt to salt the birth, nor the 
 beef. Is he not going to salt them ? Yes, he is ; because he is 
 going to the merchant's to buy some salt to salt them. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. ^* VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 To, at, in. 1. To the. 2. To the. A. 1. Al'. 2. Au, aux. 
 
 Obs. 42. A 1' is used before a vowel or silent h, in the sing. (Obs. 5.) 
 Au (the contraction of: d le, $ 9), is used before consonants. 
 Aux (contraction of: d les, $ 9), is the plural, before all letters 
 
 To the friend. 
 To the man. 
 To the captain. 
 To the penknite. 
 The basket. 
 This carpet. 
 His lioor. 
 My cat. 
 To mine. 
 To yours. 
 To him, to her 
 To me. 
 
 To the friends. 
 To the men. 
 To the captains. 
 To the penknives. 
 To the basket. 
 To this carpet. 
 To his floors. 
 To my cat. 
 To mine (plur), 
 To ours (plur). 
 i. '.direct object.) 
 
 To us. To you. To them. 
 Are they able? Can they? May they? 
 They can. They. cannot. 
 
 Cannot these men work ? 
 
 What can your children do ? 
 
 To speak to me. 
 
 To speak to him, (to her.) 
 
 To write to him, (to her.) To me. 
 
 To speak to the general and to his 
 
 friend. 
 
 To send the grocer a dollar. ($ 51 i.) 
 To give, give away. To lend. 
 
 Aux amis. 
 Aux hommes. 
 Aux capitaines. 
 Aux canif's. 
 Au panier. 
 A ce tapis-ci. 
 A ses planchers 
 A mon chat. 
 Aux miens. 
 Aux notres. 
 
 A 1'ami. 
 
 A rhomme. 
 
 Au capitaine. 
 
 Au canif. 
 
 Le panier. 
 
 Ce lapis-ci. 
 
 Son plancher. 
 
 Mon chat. 
 
 Au mien. 
 
 Au votres. 
 
 Lui, (regime inject av. le verbe.) 
 
 Me, (regime indirect av. le verbs, 
 
 47, &c.) 
 
 Nous. Vous. Leur. 
 
 Peuvent-ils ? 
 
 Us peuvent. Us ne peuvent paa. 
 Ces hommes ne peuvent-ils pap tra 
 
 vailler? 
 
 Vos enfants que peuvent-ils fairr f 
 Me parler. Peuvent-ils me parle* * 
 Lui parler. Us peuvent lui pane' 
 Lui ecrire. M'ecrire. 
 
 Parler au general et a son ami 
 
 Envoyer un dollar a 1'epicier. 
 Dormer. Preter." 
 
1 W XT I E T 11 LESSON. 
 
 95 
 
 Fo give you- them us. ($ 45.) 
 
 To lend a friend some money. ($ 51) 
 
 Can you write to me ? 
 
 They can write to you. 
 
 Can the clerk speak to you ? 
 
 He cannot speak to us now. 
 
 Can they not write to your brother ? 
 
 Yes, t'aey can write to him. 
 
 Vous donner. Leur donner. Nous 
 
 donner. 
 
 Preter de F argent a un ami. 
 Pouvez-vous m'ecrire ? 
 Us peuvent vous ecrire. 
 Le commis peut-il vous parler ? 
 II ne peut pas nous parler a present, 
 Ne peuvent-ils pas ecrire a votre 
 
 frere ? 
 Si fart ; ils peuvent lui ecrire. 
 
 TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. YINGTI&ME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Monday, June 1849. 
 
 Lundi, Juin, 1849. 
 
 At what o'clock are you going to recite, to-day 1 My brother 
 Marmot recite before twelve o'clock. Can they not recite at ten ? 
 No, they cannot. Will you take your big basket to my house? 1 
 will not take my basket there, but to the general's. When ? Now ? 
 No, I will take the basket there to-morrow. Do your sons wish to 
 take mine to the physician's? No, they cannot take it there. 
 Why can they not? Because they have not time enough. Is the 
 farmer going to kill anything? He is going to kill his big ox. Is 
 he going to kill it now ? Yes, he is. Can they write to me ? They 
 cannot write to you. Can they speak to you? They can speak to 
 us. Can they not wait for their friends? Yes, they can. Can they 
 not burn as much coal as wood ? No, they cannot bum so much of 
 the former as of the latter. Have we more friends than the Dutch? 
 We have more than they. Has the grocer less coffee than tea? He 
 has less tea than coffee: but we have more of that than c,f this. 
 Who has a cat? The sailors have a cat. Where is their cat? 
 Their cat is in a small basket of wood. Can the little servant 
 sweep the carpet? He can. Can he sweep the garret floor? Yes, 
 he can do it. Will you lend him a broom to sweep that floor? We 
 cannot lend any to sweep the floor, but we can lend one to sweep the 
 carpet. Who is going to write to the merchant and to the grocer? 
 The clerks can write to them. 
 
 Is the professor of English going to write a book? Yes, he is 
 going to write one. He can write a good one ; can he not ? Yes, 
 he can. He is a man of merit. ( 39, N. 3.) Are we not going to 
 Pratt's garden to-night ? No, we are not going there to-night, but 
 to-morrow, at nine or ten o'clock. Will you give a dictionary to 
 your son? Yes, I will give him a good dictionary. Will they 
 lend me their horse ? They cannot lend you their horse, because 
 the old minister has it. Are we going to lend the lawyer ( 51j) 
 anything?. We are going to lend the physician something. Are 
 
96 
 
 TWENTIETH LESSON. 
 
 you not going to lend many things? Yes, we are going to lend 
 many things. What are we going to lend ? We are going to lend 
 first, handkerchiefs, shawls, and hats; and afterwards cloaks, bags, 
 and parasols, to the friends of the lawyer. Why? Because they 
 have none. You are very good. Who is busy? The grocer and 
 his clerk, the doctor and his neighbor the minister, the captain and 
 his son, are busy. Are you not busy, also ? Yes, we are busy, but 
 Rot very busy. Are you ready to go to the garden of the Scotch- 
 man? I am ready to go, but Charles is not. Why is he not ready? 
 He is going to the grocer's to buy some good salt. Is he going to 
 buy much? He is. What does he wish to do? He will salt the 
 beef and the mutton which we have. Cannot the servants salt 
 them 1 No, they cannot, or they will not. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 3d Section. 
 
 Are they going ? Do they not go ? 
 
 They are going, or they are. They 
 go, They do not. 
 
 To the museum. To the wharf. 
 
 Are they going to the museum ? 
 
 No, they are going to the wharf. 
 
 Are the carpenters going to the ship ? 
 
 They go there to work. 
 
 They go neither to the wharf, nor 
 the museum. 
 
 Are they going to see anybody ? 
 
 They are not going to see anybody. 
 
 What are they going to do ? 
 
 They are not going to do anything. 
 
 Where are they going ? They go 
 nowhere. 
 
 Do they wish to send the good book 
 to the man ? 
 
 They are going to send it to him. 
 
 When are they going to send it to 
 him? 
 
 They are going to give it to him to- 
 morrow. 
 
 Can they lend you the old diction- 
 ary ? 
 
 They can (lend it to me) on Thursday. 
 
 Cannot your friend lend you one be- 
 fore Thursday ? No, he cannot 
 (lend me one) before Friday or 
 Saturday. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Sine Section. 
 Vont-ils ? Ne vont-ils pas ? 
 
 Ils vont. Us ne vont pas 
 
 Au musee. Au quai. 
 
 Vont-ils au musee ? 
 Non, ils vont au quai. 
 Les charpentiers vont-ils au bati 
 ment ? Ils y vont pour y travailler. 
 Ils ne vont ni au quai, ni au nrastfe. 
 
 Vont-ils voir quelqu'u 
 
 Ils ne vont voir personne. 
 
 Que vont-ils faire ? 
 
 Ils ne vont rien faire. 
 
 Ou vont-ils ? Ils ne vont nul. 
 
 " 
 
 le. 
 
 )nt nulle pait. 
 le bo7i livrt 
 
 Veulent-ils envoyer 
 
 d Vhomme ? 
 
 Ils vont le lui envoyer. 
 Quand vont-ils le lui envoyer ? 
 
 Ils vont le, lui donner demain. 
 
 
 Peuvent-ils vous preter ie vieui 
 
 dictionnaire ? 
 
 Ils peuvent me le preter, jeudi. 
 Votre ami ne peut-il pas vous CK 
 
 preter un avant jeudi ? Non, il ne 
 
 peut pas m'en preter un avani 
 
 vendredi ou samedi. 
 
 For the order in which objective personal pronouns must be invariably 
 connected in sentences, before the verb, ( $ 57), and with the partitive pro 
 noun en ($ 59 and 60). 
 
TWENTIETH LESSON. 
 
 97 
 
 Are they going to give me some 
 
 sugar? They will give you some. 
 Can he lend some money to my 
 
 brother ? Can he lend my brother 
 
 any money? (Dir. 4, 51.) 
 II o cannot lend him any. 
 Will they lend us some ? 
 They will not lend you any, but they 
 
 can lend some to them. 
 Are they going to give me the book ? 
 They are not going to give it to you, 
 
 but to lend it to you. 
 A'fQ you not going to send it to us ? 
 i am not going to send it to you. 
 Are you gcing to send it to them ? 
 We are going to send it to them. 
 Will you send the cabbages to the 
 
 cook ? 
 
 We will send them to him (to her). 
 Who is going to give the jewels to us ? 
 Our good friends are going to give 
 
 them to us. 
 
 Am I going to give them to them ? 
 Can he not lend them to you ? 
 
 TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 3d Sec. 
 
 Tuesday, June, 1849. Mardi, Juin, 1849. 
 
 Who is going to recite to-day ? We are going to recite. Can you 
 copy the vocabulary ? We cannot copy it ; we have not time to 
 topy it; but we can translate it. Will you try? With pleasure. 
 Is a le the French of: to the? No, Sir, au is the French of: to the. 
 Very well, that is right. Can you give me the Frencii of: to the 
 
 museum ? We can give it : it is is it not? (Fes, or no, as 
 
 he case mry be.") And that of: to the baskets? Have you that of: 
 Are \hey gomg to see any one? Yes, we have. What is it? It 
 
 .... Is it right? Yes, or no Who is going to the 
 
 wharf? To which wharf? To Girard wharf (au quai Girard). Our 
 
 merchant is going there to see his ship. To see what ? His ship. 
 
 Is his ship at the wharf? It is there. Has he many sailors? Ho 
 
 has more than ten. More than what ? More than ten. How many 
 
 has he ? He has twelve or thirteen. Has Jie so many ? Yes, he has. 
 
 Can you cut me some bread ? I can cut you some. Have you a 
 
 knifo to cut me some? I have one. Can you mend my gloves? 
 
 f can mend them, but I have no wish to do ii Can the tailor make 
 
 me a coat ? He can make you one. Will you speak to tne physi- 
 
 I will speak to him. Does your son wish to see me in ordei 
 
 n 
 
 Vont-ils me donner du sucrc ? 
 lis vont vous en donner. 
 Peut-il preter de i' argent a men 
 frere ? 
 
 II ne peut pas lui en prtr.er. 
 Veulent-ils nous e?t preter ? 
 Us ne veulent pas vous en preter, 
 
 mais ils peuvent leur en preter. 
 Vont-ils me donner le livre ? 
 Ils ne vont pas vous le donner, maiH 
 
 vous le preter. 
 
 N'allex-vous pas nozts Z'envoyer? 
 Je ne vais pas vous Z'envoyer. 
 Allez-vous le leur envoyer ? 
 Nous allons le leur envoyer. 
 Voulez-vous envoyer les choux au 
 
 cuisinier ? 
 
 Nous voulons les lui envoyer. 
 Qui va nous donner les bijoux ? 
 Nos bons amis vont nous les donrer. 
 
 Vais-je les leur donner ? 
 
 Ne peut-il pas vous les preter ? 
 
 EXERCICE. 3me Sec. 
 
03 TWENTIETH LESSON. 
 
 t'j speaK to me 1 He wishes to see you in order to give you a dol 
 lar. Does he wish to kill me ? He does not wish to kill you; he 
 only wishes to see you. Does the son of our old farmer wish Ic 
 kill an ox ^ He wishes to kill two. 
 
 Who has a mind to kill our cat? Our neighbors bad boy has & j 
 njind to kill it. How much money can you send me? I can send 
 you twenty francs. Will you send me my carpet! I will send it 
 to you. Will you send the shoemaker anything] (quelque chose au 
 COrdonnier?) I will send him my shoes. Will you send him you? 
 ooats? No, I will send them to the tailor. Can the tailor send mo 
 my cloak? He cannot send it you. Are your children able to write 
 to me? They are able to write to you. : Will you lend me yom 
 basket? I will lend it you. 
 
 Have you a glass to drink your wine ? I have one, but I have IK 
 wine; I have only tea. Will you give me money to buy some? 1 
 will give you some, but I have only a little. Will you give me that 
 which you have with you? I will give it you. Can you drink as 
 much wine as milk? I can drink as much of the one as of the 
 other. Has our neighbor any wood to make a fire ? (du feu ?) He 
 has some to make one, (pour cnfairc,) but he has no money to buy 
 bread and butter. Are you willing to lend him some ? I am willing 
 to lend him some. Do you wish to speak to the German ? I wish ; 
 to speak to him. Where is he? He is at the museum. Very well, 
 I am going to see him and speak to him. 
 
 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. RESUME. 
 
 L'adolescent va-t-il venir aujourd'hui? L' adolescent va venii 
 pour nous apporter de Facier et du fer. Qu'allons-nous acheter ? ' 
 Nous n'allons rien acheter que du velours. N'ai-je pas un bon ami 
 allemand ? Vous n'avez pas d'ami allemand ; mais vous en avez 
 un suisse. Les marchands de nouveautes n'ont-ils pas de chales, 
 de rubans, de gants, de bas, de velours, de drap ? Si fait, ils ont de 
 tout eel? : et c'est ce que nous allons acheter. Chez qui allez-voua 
 acheter Tout celo." 1 Quelque chose chez celui-ci; quelque autre 
 chose, chez celui-la. Qui va acheter des livres ? Ces deux ecoliers 
 vont en acheter. Le ministre et Pavocat ne vont-iis pas en acheter 
 quelques uns aussi? Si fait; mais il ne vont pas en aoheter beau 
 coup. Chez qui vont-ils les acheter? Chez Appleton. Le petit 
 gallon de Pepieier ne va-t-il pas y acheter un joli canif de bon 
 acier, un porte-crayon d'argent, un encrier de fer, du papier, et des 
 crayons ? Si fait, il va y acheter tous ces articles. Non, non, pas 
 tons ces articles (Obs. 34.) Tl ne vent ni encrier. ni canif.-- 
 
TWENTIETH LESSON. 90 
 
 M-il un canif et .in encrier 1 II a encore un encrier, mais pas de 
 canif. Pourquoi ne veut-il pas en acheter un ? Farce qiv'il a celui 
 de son frere. 
 
 Comment se porte-t-on chez le general? Tout le monde s'v 
 porte bien. Je suis bien aise de Papprendre. Et chez le ministre 1 
 Chez lui, plusieurs personnes sont malades. Qu'a Jean? Jean 
 a mal de gorge. Charles Pa-t-il aussi? Non, celui-la a mal 
 aux dents. Qu'ont les deux petits? Us ont mal de tete. Et 
 Sophie ? Sophie n'a rien. J 7 en suis bien aise. Le ministre est-il 
 malade 1 Oui, comme a l ? ordinaire. II a un mauvais rhume. 
 Comment vous etes-vous porte? Je ne me suis pas bien porte. 
 Vous vous portez bien, a Fordinaire, n'est-ce pas ? Je me 
 porte parfaitetnent a Pordinaire, mais pas ce matin. II fait s\ 
 ehaud, n'est-ce pas? Oui, il fait trop chaud. Ou allez-vous? Je 
 vais chez Fapothicaire, chez le marchand de souliers. On le 
 cordonnierj n'est-ce pas ? Non pas le cordonnier, mais le marchand 
 de souliers. Est-ce tout ? Non, je vais chez le marchand de charbon 
 et au telegraphe electrique. Je vous souhaite beaucoup de plaisir. 
 J'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Le 
 Russe se porte-t-il mieux ? Oui, un peu mieux. J'espere que votre 
 frere se porte bien? Tres-bien, je vous remorcie. Comment se 
 porte-t-on chez lui? Tout le moiide s'y porte bien. Personne n'v 
 est malade. 
 
 Votre cuisinier a-t-il assez d'avgent pour acheter du bceuf et du 
 mouton? Oui, il en a assez pour acheter Pun et Pautre. Va-t-il 
 porter autant de celui-ci que de celui-la ? II va porter plus de 
 celui-la qr.c de celui-ci. Les matelots orit-ils des billets pour acheter 
 duchocolat? Us n'ont pas de billets; mais, ils ont de For. C 7 est 
 assez bon, n"est-ce pas ? En ont-ils assez pour acheter des poulets, 
 du sel, du poivre, des biscuits, du beurre frais, du pain frais, du 
 bceuf frais, du vin, du sucre, du the, du cafe .... est-ce tout? Non, 
 ce n'est pas tout. Des choux, du vieux fromage, du vinaigre, du 
 grain, de la farine. De la farine ? Quel est Panglais de cela 1 
 N'avez-vous pas Panglais de farine ? Non, nous ne Pavons pas. 
 QuiFa? Personne ne Pa. Votre domestique a un baiai pour 
 talayer le plancher du magasin, n'est-ce pas ? Non, il ir en a pas. 
 Voulez-vous lui dormer un quart de dollar pour en acheter un? Je 
 vais lui en donner un. Je n ? en ai pas. Je n'ai que des 4emi-dol 
 :ars. N'avez-vous pas un quart de dollar? Non, je iren ai plus. 
 
 Quel est P Anglais de: fairc?- C'est: to do, to make. C'estbieiij 
 
 c'est cela. De quelle conjugaison est-il ? II est de la conjn 
 
 gaison. Pourquoi ? Farce qu'il finit en : , . , . Est41 regulier ? 
 
 Pourquoi? Farce qu-il n'ost pas conjn gue comme le modele. .... 
 
100 TWENTY FIRST LE&SOB. 
 
 (Le maitre peut faire les memes questions sur qnelques auliei 
 verbes, comme : Voir porter ecrire.) Quel est votre dernier vo 
 
 cabulaire 7 C ; est le Quelle section '\ La Y avez-voua 
 
 des verbesl Oui ; nous en avons plusieurs. Quels verbes avez- 
 vous? Les avez-vous dans votre catalogue ? Avez-vous dea 
 
 noms dans le vocabulaire ? Combien en avez-vous? Lesecoliers 
 ont-ils des adjectifs dans le leur ? En avez-vous dans le votre ? 
 L'etranger en a-t-il dans le sieu 7 Qu'avons-nous dans le notre ? 
 Prenez mon parapluie pour le preter a Robert. Ou va-t-il ? II va 
 sortir. Oui 7 mais, 011 va-t-il ? Ne va-t-il pas au musee 7 A qucl 
 musee ? Sara, Jean, et Guillaume n'y vont-ils pas aussi ? Pouvez- 
 vous sucrer mon the 1 Ne veut-il pas sucrer son cafe '\ N'allez- 
 vous pas mettre du sucre dans le chocolat 1 Nous allons y en 
 mettre. Qu'allez-vous mettre dans le vin? Je ne vais rien y 
 mettre. Pouvez-vous ecrire au commis "?. ... a l ; epicier ? . . . . aux 
 f (rangers?. . . .a nos amis ^. . . . Quelqu'un veut-il tuer Toiseau du 
 
 ^etit enfant ? Le cuisinier a-t-il tue les jeunes ou les vieux 
 
 poulets ^ 
 
 TWENTY-FIRST LESSON, 21st. Vingt et wiieme Legon, 21mo. 
 
 f 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 / For persons. Pour les personnes. 
 / Nominative. Who? Nominatif. Qui? 
 Object direct. Whom? Regime direct, 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 PRONOMS INTERROGATES. 
 
 For things. Pour les choses. 
 What ? Qu'est-ce qui ? 
 
 What? Que? Qu'? Quail 
 
 Regime indirect, avec une prepo- 
 sition. 
 jTo what ? A quoi ? 
 
 Of or from what ?^j De quoi ? 
 'With what ? (what . . with \] Avef 
 
 quoi ? 
 
 
 For what ? (What . . for ?) Pour quoi f 
 
 Qui? 
 Objcctiva with a preposition./ 
 
 I To whom ?} ^ A qui? 
 [ Of or from whom ?\ De qui? 
 
 With whom? (whom . . with?) A vec qui ? 
 
 i For whom ? (whom , .for ?n Pour qui ? 
 
 t ^ \. 
 
 Qui ? \Wlio ? has no plural, and always refers to persons, without distinct) 
 
 tion of se\; as, who: in Englislu 
 
 Que?(^ana Quoi ? \What ? have no rlural, and always relate to tlungsA 
 
 f Obs. 43. As direct object, use que before the verb in an interrogative*, 
 form ; and quoi after the verb, in an affirmative form. After a preposition ) 
 ! G*e quoi, never que. [Mind that all those pronouns are not relative, but/ 
 interrogative.] 
 
 \What have they ?/ Qw'ont-ils | What will you sa?/?> Que voulez* 
 
 What do you mean?) 
 
TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 
 
 Thej have, what?/ Us out, quoi.? 
 
 t \Vhat is he going to reply to^ A quoi 
 ' 
 
 He 
 He 
 
 will say what ? > II veut 
 means what? . y quoi? 
 
 101 
 dire, 
 
 He is going to answei what ? il vi 
 
 repondre, a quoi? 
 RJpouore, 4",,(tatv3F d 6efo r c a noun. 
 
 va-t-il repondre ? 
 'o answer, to reply to} 
 Obs. 44. Eepondre, taking d before *he hcun, coincides \vich, to reply 
 to, better than with to answer, which has no preposition after, and the 
 scholar is invited mentally to connect repondre d with to reply to, even 
 when to answer is used in the book. 
 
 Repondre a I'homme. 
 
 Repondre aux hommes. 
 
 A qui voulez-vous repondre ? 
 
 To answer the man, (to reply to.) 
 To answer the mep, (to reply to.) 
 
 hom do you wish to answer ? (reply 
 
 to?) 
 
 [ wish to answer (reply to) my brother. Je veux repondre a mon ,Tcre , 
 To answer (reply to) him, her. 
 To answer (reply to) them. 
 
 To answer (to reply to) the note. 
 To answer (reply to) it. 
 To it, to them, (usually for things.) 
 To answer the notes. 
 To answer them, (things.) 
 To ask a question of some one, some- 
 body. 
 
 Will you ask me a question ? 
 I am going to ask you one. 
 In French. In English. In German. 
 
 Can you answer me in French ? 
 
 I believe so. I believe I can. 
 
 Has he my book ? I believe he has it. 
 
 Lui repondre. ($ 47.) 
 
 Leur repondre, (pour les personneo.) 
 
 (* 47.) 
 Re'pondre au billet. 
 Y repondre. ($ 47.) 
 Y, (gdneralement pour les choses.) 
 Repondre aux billets. 
 Y re'pondre, (pour les chose?.) 
 Faire une question (fern, noun) a 
 
 quelqu'un. 
 
 Voulez-vous me faire une question ? 
 Je vais vous en faire une. 
 En Francois. En Anglais. En Al 
 
 lemand. 
 Pouvez-vous me re'pondre en Fran- 
 
 $ais ? Je crois que oui. 
 
 A-t-il mon livre ? Je crois que oui. 
 
 06s. 45. Any affirmative answer after: I believe, may be expressed by: 
 que oui. A negative answer, by : que non. (Dir. 6.) 
 
 Can they speak German well ? 
 
 I believe not. I believe they cannot. 
 
 Peuvent-ils bien parler 1' Allernand ? 
 Je crois que non. 
 
 TWENTY-FIRST EXERCISE. 1st Sec. VINQT ET UNIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Wednesday, June, 1849. Mercredi, Juin, 1849. 
 
 What are we going to try to-day ? We are going to try to recite. 
 To recite what ? To recite a vocabulary. Which ? This one. la 
 it the 20th ? No. it is not the 20th, but the last. It is the : what? 
 The last, the 21st. Very well. Will you begin? With pleasure. 
 Will you ask us questions in French or in English? I am going to 
 ask you some in English first, and in French afterwards. We are 
 Teady to answer you. Are you ready, indeed ? I believe we are, 
 ^gue ota.) Can I begin? I believe you can. To how many nofes 
 car. you reply (answer) this evening? I can reply to six or seven. 
 
7 WENT i'- FIRST LESSON 
 
 Can you answer so many? (a aidant quc cela?-} ] belie \ T u I can.-' 
 Have you as many brothers as I ? We have just as many as you 
 and more tliUu they. Up\v jruiny volumes of living's works have 
 they? They have eight. Have they so many? Yes, indeed, and 
 they are' ci:a 'to buy "n?oVe. How many more? Two more, 1 
 believe. Has Miss Clara as many cr.ic.wls as Miss Emily (Emilie) 1 
 No, Miss Clara has less of them than Miss Emily. Have you my 
 copybook? 1? No, I believe not. Has he got it? He? I believo 
 net. Who has it? I cannot tell you. Have not those children got 
 it? They? I believe not. Are you not going to give a handsome 
 fan to Miss Victoria? Yes, I am going to give her'one. 
 
 Will you write to the Italian? I will write to him. Will your 
 brother write to the English ? He will write to them, but they have 
 no mind to answer him. Will you answer your friend? I will 
 - answer him. But whom will you answer? I will answer my good 
 father. Will you not answer your good friends? I will answer 
 them. Who will write to you ? The Russian wishes to write to 
 me. Will you answer him? I will not answer him. Who will 
 write to our friends? The children of our neighbor will write to 
 them. Will they answer them? They will answer them. To 
 whom do you wish to write ? I wish to write to the Russian. Will 
 he answer you? He wishes to answer me, but he cannot. Can the 
 Spaniards answer us? They cannot answer us, but we can answer 
 them. To whom do you wish to send this note ? I will send it 
 to the joiner. From whom is this boy going to receive a hat? He 
 is going to receive one from his friend, the lawyer. For whom is 
 this coat? It is for our father. Whom are these gloves for? They 
 are for our friend's clerk. With whom are your children going to the 
 museum ? They are going there with the old professor. Are they 
 not also going to the wharf to see the merchant's beautiful vessel f 
 Yes, the)^ are going there with the young teacher, the old captain, 
 and the ^ood sailor. 
 
 VOCABULARY, 2d Section. 
 The play, the theatre. The lall. 
 To or at the play. To the theatres. 
 To the ball. To the balls. 
 
 The parlor, drawing-room. 
 The storehouse, magaziie, warehouse. 
 This counting-house. 
 The market. In, at, to the market. 
 There, thither. To go there ; to be 
 
 there. 
 To send there. To carry it there, 
 
 VOCABULAIRE, 2de Sec. 
 
 Le theatre. 
 Au theatre. 
 Au bal. 
 Le salon. 
 
 Le marchi. 
 Y. 
 
 Y envoyer. 
 
 Le bal. 
 
 Aux theatres. 
 
 Aux bals. 
 
 Le grand salon. 
 
 Au marche. 
 
 Y aller. 
 
 Yetra 
 L'y porter. 
 
TWENTY "FIRST LESSON 
 
 Will they go to the theatre ? 
 They wish to go there. 
 Will" you go there ? I will. (Dir. 1.) 
 Are you going now ? I am. 
 your cousin in the parlor ? 
 is ; or, he is there. He is not. 
 Vly cousin. This cousis. 
 
 Where is our cousin ? 
 
 9c yow &TZOM; ? I know not (do not}. 
 [>o you know the French of: to see ? 
 I do. I know it. I do know it. 
 [ know something. I know nothing, 
 
 Do you know the French of: to have ? 
 
 '. do not know it. 
 
 I will tell you (I am going to). (19 N. 1.) 
 
 To have, to get. 
 To have to. 
 
 To have got. 
 
 Veulent-ils aller au theatre ? 
 
 Us veulent y aller. 
 
 Voulez-vous y aller ? Je veux y alier, 
 
 Y allez-vous a present ? J'y vaia. 
 
 Votre cousin est-il dans le salon ? 
 
 II y est. II n'y est pas. 
 
 P.ion cousin. Ce cousin. 
 
 Ou est notre cousin? Oil notro 
 
 cousin est-il? 
 
 Savez-vous ? Je ^e sais pas. 
 
 Savez-vous le Fram;ais de : to see ? 
 Je le sais. 
 
 Je sais quelque chose. Je ne sais rien. 
 Savez-vous le Frangais de : to have? 
 Je ne le sais pas. 
 Je vais vous le dire. 
 Avoir. 
 Avoir d. 
 
 Obs. 46. When avoir, to have, expresses obligation, use the preposition 
 d, before the following infinitive, and repeat it with each verb. 
 
 What have you to do ? 
 I have to copy and translate that. 
 I have nothing to recite, nor read. 
 Have your cousins nothing to say ? 
 Yes, they have something to say. 
 What has John to answer (reply to) ? 
 
 Qu'avez-vous d faire ? 
 J'ai a copier et a tiaduirc cela. 
 Je n'ai rien a reciter, ni a lire. 
 Vos cousins n'ont-ils rien a dire ? 
 Si fait. Us ont quelque chose a dire. 
 A quoi Jean a-t-ii a rdpondre ? Jean 
 
 a a re'pondre a quoi ? 
 II a a repondre a nos questions. 
 Alors. Si, s'ii. S'il peut. 
 
 He has to answer our questions. 
 Then. If, if he. If he can. 
 
 06s. 47. The ?', of si, is cut off, only when followed by il, or Us, but. in 
 no other case. If he has, they have ; s'il a; s'ils ont s'il veut, &c. 
 We are well. | Nous nous portons bien. 
 
 TWENTY-FIRST EXERCISE. 2d Sec. EXERCICE 21ME. 2de Sec. 
 Thursday, June 1849. Jeudi Juin, 1849. 
 
 Good morning, ladies and gentlemen ! I hope you are well. 
 Yes, Sir, we are well, thank you. How is Miss Emily's cousin? 
 Is he better ? I believe he is. How is ) r our brother's cold ? His 
 cold is better, but he has the toothache. I am sorry to hear it. Do 
 you know how the general is? Yes, I know that he is well; but 
 Captain Henry is sick. I know it; but he is better; is he not? I 
 cannot tell you. What have we to do this evening? We have to 
 recite, as usual. Who is going to begin ? I and he. Why not ho 
 and I? Very well; he and I, then. I am going to ask (faire) a 
 question of the one and the other, (a Vun ct d Vautre.}--Vfi\l you 
 answer me in French? I am going to try. What have you got? 
 
[04 TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 
 
 Nothing. What have you to do? I have only to write. Whdl 
 have you to write? I have to write a note To whom? To the 
 carpenter's cousin. What have you to give him? We have to 
 give him some fresh bread and butter. Has your servant anything 
 to drink? I believe that he has to drink some tea. Are we not 
 going to drink some ; too? Yes, we are going to drink some. A1 
 what o'clock? At eight. At half past eight, you mean (vous YOU- 
 !ez dire). No, I mean at a quarter to nine. Have we to send much 
 rice to the cook of Mr. Girard's vessel? Yes, we have to send him 
 much. Has he any ? I believe that he has but little more. Then, 
 we have to send it to him to-day; have we not? Yes, indeed. 
 Who is going to take it to him ? Do you know ? Yes, I do. Who 1 
 The joiner's little boy. 
 
 When will the lawyer go to the play '< He is going only to-mor- 
 row night. When can his cousin go with him? He cannot go to 
 the play if he is going to a ball. To which ball is he going ? To that 
 of the physician. Is he going to give a grand ball ? Yes, he is, to- 
 morrow evening. Where is your son ? I believe he is at the counting- 
 room. Where are they going to take me ? To the counting-room 
 in their warehouse; Where are the cook and the grocer going? If 
 they are going anywhere, they are going to market. Can I go with 
 them? Yes, you may (Dir. 1), if you have nothing to do. To 
 which market are they going? To the large one. Are the farme: 
 and his cousin at market ? No, they are in the shoe-store. Can yon 
 come to my house to go to the wharf? I have no wish to go to your 
 house first, and afterwards to the wharf; but I am ready to go to 
 the wharf now. Have you your hat, gloves, and umbrella? Um- 
 brella? Is it bad weather? Yes, it is. Then, I will not go there 
 but to the museum, if you wish to go with me. Are they going 
 too? Yes, they, also. Very well; then we may go (y), if you are 
 ready, Is the picture of the Italian in the parlor? Yes, it is there 
 Is ine servant going to sweep the parlor? No, he cannot sweep 
 it now. Why can he not? Because I believe somebody is in the 
 parlor. Who is in it (y) ? Madam Vernet and her cousin Frede- 
 rick. Will you send them some biscuits, fresh butter, and some 
 wine ? I cannot, because the servant is not at home. If you wili 
 send them something, I can take it to them ; can I not'* Very well 
 you may, if you wish. How many biscuits have you ? I hav< 
 only six or seven j is that enough ? It is. 
 
 *h! Since. f Ah! Depuie. 
 
 riince last Sunday. I Depuis dimanche dernier. 
 
 Not quite well. j Pas tout-a-lait bien. 
 
 I am glad to see you, them, liim. I Je suis Uien aise de vous, les, le voir 
 
TWENTY-SECOND LESBOK 
 
 105 
 
 rWJSNTY-SECOND LESSON, 2 
 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 
 
 To, ai, or in the corner .... corners. 
 
 To, at, or in the hole .... holes. 
 
 In the hole. In the holes. 
 
 To, or at the bottom. 
 
 In the bottom of the bag ... of this 
 chest. 
 
 At lha corner of the fire ... of the 
 garden. 
 
 The office. The lawyer's office. 
 
 This workshop. The joiner's work- 
 shop. 
 
 To, or at the end. The road. 
 
 At the end of the road ... of the roads. 
 
 That cousin of yours, of mine, of his, 
 cf theirs, &c. 
 
 2> send for. To go for , to fetch. 
 
 To come for. To come for me. 
 
 To send for me To go for them. 
 
 Whom are you going to send for ? 
 
 I am going to send for nobody. 
 
 At what o'clock are you coming for 
 
 him ? (19 2 , N. 2.) 
 Are you going for any one ? 
 I? No. But John is going for his 
 
 cousin, who is in our office. 
 
 Is not the cat in the workshop ? Yes, 
 
 it is at the end. 
 These gentlemen are going to send 
 
 for cakes and wine ; are they not ? 
 Yes, they are going to send for some. 
 IVill your boy go for some fresh 
 
 butter and vinegar for us ? 
 
 Ele will not go for any for you. 
 
 He is very kind (or good), indeed ! 
 Are you not going to send for the 
 doctor, for the clerk who is sick ? 
 
 Yes, we are going to send for him, 
 
 He will send for my brothers. 
 No, IID has a mind to go for them. 
 
 2d. Vingt-dcuxieme Lcgoa, 22m& 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 Au coin. Aux coins. 
 
 Au trou. Aux trous. 
 
 Dans le trou. Dans les troua. 
 Au, fond. 
 Au fond du sac. Au fond de ce coflre 
 
 Au coin du feu. Au coin du jardin 
 
 Le bureau. Le bureau de PavocaU 
 Get atelier. L' atelier dumenuisier. 
 
 Au bout. Le chemin. 
 
 Au bout du chemin . . . des chcmins. 
 
 Votre, mon, son, ieur, &c., cousin* 
 ($ 108.) 
 
 Envoyer chercher. Aller chercher. 
 
 Venir chercher. Ven ir me ckercker. 
 
 M'envoyer chercher. Les aller cher- 
 cher. 
 
 Qui allez-vous envoyer chercher ? 
 
 Je nevais envoyer chercher personne, 
 
 A quelle heure allez-vous venir It! 
 chercher ? 
 
 Allez-vous chercher quelqu'un? 
 
 Moi ? Non. Mais Jean va chercher 
 son cousin, qui est dans notre bu- 
 reau. 
 
 Le chat n'est-il pas dans Patelicr ? 
 
 Si fait, il est au bout. 
 
 Ces messieurs vont envoyer chercher 
 des gateaux etduvin, n'est-cepaa? 
 
 Oui, ils vont en envoyer chercher. 
 
 Votre garcon veut-il aller cherchci 
 du beurre frais et du vinaigre pour 
 nous ? 
 
 II ne veut pas en aller chercher pom 
 vous. 
 
 II est tres-bon, en verite ! 
 
 N'allez-vous pas envoyer chercher le 
 docteur pour le commis qui cut 
 malade ? 
 
 Si fait. Nous allons Penvoyer cher- 
 cher. 
 
 II veut envoyer chercher mes freres 
 
 Non, il a en vie de les aller chercher 
 
106 
 
 TWENTY- SECOND LES8OH. 
 
 Will you send for more glasses, or 
 
 have we enough ? 
 I will send for more, because we 
 
 have only three. 
 
 Voulez-vouB envoyer chercher pltii 
 de verres, ou en avons-nous aseez 1 
 
 Je veux en envoyer chercher, parce 
 que nous n'en avons que trois. 
 
 TWENTY-SECOND EXERCISE. 1 si Sec. VINGT-DEUXI^ME EXEHCICE. Ire Sec. 
 Friday, June, 1849. Yendredi, June, 1849. 
 
 All ! Mr. Robert; I am glad to see you. How have you been since 
 last Monday? I have not been very well. Ah! indeed! I am 
 very sorry to hear it. But you are well now, I hope? Not quite 
 but much better. Thank you. How is it with you at home ? (Com 
 ment se porte-t-on chez vous ?) We are all well, at your service. It 
 is cold, is it not 1 Yes, it is. Where is Samuel going ? I am going 
 to send him for something. At what o'clock are you going to send 
 trim? At half past nine. Is it not yet half past nine ? No, not 
 quite. It is only a quarter past nine. Then he can wait a quarter of 
 an hour. What is he going for l He is going to buy sugar, biscuits. 
 and cheese, if we have no more. Who is in the garden' 1 Thf 
 children of our friends are there. Will you send for the physician^ 
 We will send for him. Who will go for him at the joiners work- 
 shop ? Little Thomas (Thomas) will go for him. Can he do it 1 
 Yes, indeed. Will you give -me my broth? Will you drink some 
 broth now ? I wish to drink a little. Where isit'* It is at the 
 corner of the fire. I will give it to you (vais). 
 
 Will you give little Thomas three sous to fetch some milk? Is 
 that enough ? It is enough. Where is he going to buy it ? He can 
 buy it at the market. Very well. I am going to give him three 
 cents to get milk, and another to buy a cake. You are very good. 
 But I have no money with me ; it is at the counting-house. Will 
 you go for it ? I am not afraid to go for it. Will you buy my Web- 
 ster's Dictionary? I cannot; I have no more money. No more 
 money (plus d') ! No, I have no more with me. Where is your 
 nat? At the bottom of the garret, in a hole. In which hole is it? 
 In its hole. Where is that old man's dog ? It is in a corner of the 
 ship Have the sailors any cats? Yes, they have. Has not the 
 servant to sweep the office and parlor ? He has to sweep them. 
 Has their cook got a good fire ? He has an excellent fire, because 
 he has to burn the coffee. Has he not to make tea? He has to 
 make it. Where is our cat ? I believe it is in Miss Sophia's basket 
 in the parlor. Is not my Fleming's Dictionary in the parlor? YeSj 
 >. is there, and Surenne's also. 
 
 Have you anything to do? I have something to do. What have 
 pou to do ? I have to mend my clothes, and go to the end of the 
 
TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 
 
 107 
 
 road. Why have you to go to the end of the road I I am going 
 to the grocer's to buy some grain for our bird and chickens. Is not 
 the professor there with his scholars, the minister, the apothecary, 
 the lawyer, and the physician T Yes, I believe they are there. 
 Can you give me as much fresh butter as bread ? I can give you 
 more of the latter than of the former. Can that cousin of youra 
 (votre) drink as much wine as coffee or tea? He cannot drink so 
 much of the former as of the two latter. Have you to speak to any 
 one ? I have to speak to several men, if I can see them at the end 
 of the road. They are in the work-shop. Very well, I will go 
 (19 2 , N. 1) there to say a few words to them. Have you not to 
 answer this young man's last note r No, we have not to answer 
 it. (y. 06. 44.) 
 
 Hier. Hier matin. 
 
 Hier soir ou hier au soir. 
 
 Entrez. 
 Quelques uns. 
 
 Car. 
 
 Yesterday. Yesterday morning. 
 Yesterday evening ; last evening, 
 
 night. 
 
 Come in, walk in, go in. For (because) 
 Some (meaning, some of us, you, 
 
 them). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 Thou. Thou ha't. Hast thou ? Thou 
 
 hast not. 
 
 Hast thou my pencil-case ? 
 Thou art. Art thou ? Thou art not. 
 Art thou not busy and in a hurry ? 
 I am busy, but not hurried. 
 Are the farmers tired ? 
 
 Obs. 48. Adjectives agree in number with the nouns or pronouns they 
 qualify. If the noun or pronoun is in the plural, the adjective takes an s. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section- 
 Tu. 1 Tu as. As-tu? Tun'apas. 
 
 As-tu mon porte-crayon ? 
 
 Tu es. Es-tu ? Tu n'es pas. 
 
 N'es-tu pas occupe et pressd ? 
 
 Jc suis occupe, mais non pas presse. 
 
 Les fermiers sont-ils fatigues ? 
 
 They are not tired but busy. 
 
 Thou wilt, thou wishest, (art willing.) 
 
 Canst thoq ! Art thou able ? Thou 
 
 canst, &c. 
 
 Art thou willing to make my fire ? 
 I am, if I can. 
 Art thou afraid ? cold or hungry ? 
 
 am not afraid., but 
 hungry. 
 
 I am cold and 
 
 Us ne sont pas fatigues mais occupes. 
 Tuveux. Veux-tu? Tuneveuxrien, 
 Peux-tu ? Tu peux. Tu ne pens 
 
 pas. 
 
 Veux-tu faire mon feu ? 
 Je veux le faire, si je peux. 
 As-tu peur ? As-tu froid ? As-tu 
 
 faim ? 
 Je n'ai pas peur ; mais j'ai froid et 
 
 faim. 
 
 1 In addressing one another the French use the second person plural, as in 
 English. The second person singular, however, is employed : 1. In sub- 
 tree or serious style, and in poetry ; 2. It is a mark of intimacy among 
 friends, and is used by parents and children, brothers and sisters, husbands 
 and wives, towards one another : in general it implies familiarity founded 
 an affection and fondness, or hatred and contempt. 
 
108 
 
 TWEHTY-SECOHB LESSON, 
 
 Art thou nei. her ashamed nor sleepy ? 
 
 Art thou going ? Thou art not going. 
 
 Dost thou go there ? Thou art go- 
 ing. Thou art not going. 
 
 Thou goest to the work-shop, dost 
 thou not ? 
 
 To be sure ; of course ; without doubt. 
 
 Immediately. Soon, VERY SOON. 
 
 To sell something to somebody. 
 
 What are you going to sell the Swiss ? 
 
 We are not going to sell him any- 
 thing. 
 
 To tell, (to say) something to 9>}*ne one. 
 
 Wilt thou say a word to TLfOKias ? 
 
 Yes, I will tell him one. 
 
 To tell .... to ... (a before the noun ; 
 de, before the infin.) 
 
 Will you tell the boy to bring some 
 coals ? 
 
 I will tell him to do it. (19 2 , N. 1.) 
 
 Thee, to thee. It to thee. Them to 
 thee. 
 
 Thy. . . . Thy thimble. Thy thim- 
 bles. 
 
 Thine. 
 
 Some to thee, thee some. I can give 
 thee some. 
 
 In the morning, (meaning) any morn- 
 ing. 
 
 In the evening, (that is) any evening. 
 
 TWENTY-SECOND EXERCISE. 2d Sec. VINGT-DEUXIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec 
 Saturday, June, 1849. Samedi, Juin, 1849. 
 
 Bonjour, Mr.j erurez, prenez un siege et asseyez-vous. Avec 
 plaisir, car je suis fatigue. Vous n'etes pas malade, j'espere ? 
 Non, je ne suis que fatigue. Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis 
 hier matin? Tres-bien, comme a 1'ordinaire. Et vous? Moi aussi. 
 Quelqu'un est-il malade chez-vous ? Non ? personne n'est malade a 
 la maison depuis dimanche dernier. Votre cousin 1'avocat est-ii 
 tout-a-fait bien ? Non ; pas tout-a-fait bien ; mais beancoup mieux. 
 J'en suis bien aise. 
 
 Who is in the joiner's workshop ? The three boys are there. 
 What have they to do ? They have a great deal to do. Can they 
 do it ? To be sure. Have they as much to do as the carpenter's or 
 ihe baker's boys ? They have just as much. Hast thou enough to 
 study? To be sure. Hast thou too much? No, riot too much, but 
 enough. Art thou going to copy thy exercise soor ? I am going to 
 
 N'as-tu rii honte ni soiv.mcil ? 
 Vas-tu? Tu vas. Tu ne vas pas 
 Y vas-tu ? Tu y vas. T a n'y vas 
 
 pas. 
 Tu vas a 1' atelier, n'est-ce pas ? 
 
 Sans doute. 
 
 Tout de suite. Bientot. 
 Vendre quelqiie chose d quelquhin. 
 Qu'allez-vous vendre au Suisse ? 
 Nous n' aliens rien lui vendre. 
 
 Dire (* 4) quelque chose d quelqu'vn. 
 Veux-tu dire un mot a Thomas ? 
 Oui, je veux lui en dire un. 
 Dire a . . . . de . . . (d, avant le nom , 
 
 dc, avant. 1'infinitif.) 
 Voulez-vous dire au garcon d'appoi 
 
 ter du charbon ? 
 Je vais lui dire de le faire. 
 Te, t'. Te le. Te les. 
 
 Ton, sing. Tes, plur. Ton de. Tbg 
 
 d<5s. 
 
 Le tien. Les tiens. 
 
 T'en. Je peux t'-en donner. 
 
 t Le matin, 
 t Le soir. 
 
TWENTY-SECOND LES3O1T. 109 
 
 copy it immediately. What will thy brother do first? He will first 
 read, tnen translate, and afterwards write. Canst thou translate 
 well? Yes, when I wish to do it. To how many corners is John 
 going? He goes only to thiee. To how many lawyers hast thou to 
 speak ? I have to speak to four. When hast thou to speak to them .- 
 This evening. At what o'clock ? At a quarter to nine. Not before ? 
 I believe not. When canst thou go to the office of the big general ? 
 I can go there only in the morning (to-morrow morning'). At what 
 o'clock ? At half past seven. When wilt thou go to the old French- 
 man's? I am going to his house immediately. Will thou not go 
 first to the hatter's store, or work-shop, to choose a hat? Oh, yes, 1 
 have to- go there first, and then to the Frenchman's. Will thou go 
 to the physician's to-morrow morning, or to-morrow evening? I will 
 go in the morning, at a quarter past ten, if it is fine weather, or at a 
 quarter of eight in the evening. 
 
 Have you to write as many notes as the Englishman? I have to 
 write fewer of them than he. Will you speak to the German? I 
 will speak to him. When will you speak to him? At present. 
 Where is he ? He is in his office, at the other end of the wood, 
 Will you go to the market? I will go thither to (pour} buy some 
 linen. Do thy neighbors not wish to go to the museum and wharf? 
 They cannot go there ; they are fatigued, and too busy to go. (y.) 
 Hast thou the courage to go to the wood in the evening? I have 
 the courage to go thither, but not in the evening. Are your children 
 able to answer my notes ? They are able to answer them. What 
 dost thou wish to say to the servant ? I wish to tell him to make 
 the fire and to sweep the warehouse, our office, and the boy's gar- 
 vet. Wilt tLou tell thy brother to sell me his horse? I will tell 
 him to sell it to thee. What do you wish to tell me? I wish to tell 
 you a word. Whom do you wish to see ? I wish to see the Scotch- 
 man. Has thou to tell him to send thee some milk? I have to tell 
 him to send me some. Will you tell your cousin to go to the gene- 
 ral's in the morning, for he wishes to see him. \Vith pleasure. 
 Which book does my brother wish to sell them? He wishes to sell 
 only thine and his own.- Thou hast the last exercise, hast thou not! 
 Yes, I have it. My young friend wishes to see me, does he not? 
 I believe he does. He has a mind to see thee, to tell thee something 
 pretty. 
 
112 
 
 LESSOR. 
 
 counting-house ? No, he is not going there. Is he going to slai 
 here ? Yes, he is. Why ? Because he has a sore thumb and finger, 
 and he cannot write. Cannot his clerk write for him ? Yes, he can; 
 and brother is going to send for him to do it. Wilt thou come foi 
 John at seven ? With pleasure. 
 
 Since I had the pleasure of seeing 
 
 you, of seeing them, him. 
 I have been perfectly well. 
 Oh ! Will vou come in and sit down ? 
 
 I can neither go in nor sit down. 
 
 Many thanks. 
 
 The heat. Too warm, too hot. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. 
 Nted. To have need of. . . . 
 To have need of it. To want it. 
 To be in want of it, To have use 
 
 for it. 
 
 I have need of that. I want that. 
 I am in want of it. I have need of it. 
 Have you need of this knife ? 
 Do you want this knife ? (in want of) 
 [ do not want it, (have no need for it.) 
 Are we in want of these scissors ? 
 I believe that you have need of them. 
 Do you want them any more ? 
 I do not want them any more. 
 Has he need of money ? 
 He has great need of it. 
 He is much in want of t. 
 Has the merchant need of any ? 
 He does not want any. 
 Who wants or has need of any ? 
 Nobody wants any. 
 They have need of it. of them, of 
 
 some. 
 
 Do John and Charles need the horses ? 
 Have J. and C. need of the horses ? 
 They do not want them. 
 Of what ? Of what have you need ? 
 I have need of all that. 
 I want nothing. 
 What is he in want of? 
 What does he want ? 
 What has he need of? 
 (He wants) nothing, that, everything. 
 To be acquainted with. To know. 
 
 Depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir da 
 vous voir, de les voir, de le voir. 
 
 Je me suis parfaitement porte. 
 
 Oh ! Voulez-vous entrer ct vom 
 asseoir ? 
 
 ue ne peux ni entrer ni m'asseoir 
 
 Je vous rends graces. 
 
 Le chaud. Trop chaud. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section 
 Besoin. Avoir Itesoin de . . . 
 
 > 
 
 > En avoir besoin. ($ 50.) 
 
 I 
 
 J'ai besoin de cela. 
 
 J'en ai besoin. 
 
 Avez-vous besoin de ce couteau ? 
 
 Je n'en ai pas besoin. 
 Avons-nous besoin de ces ciseaus \ 
 Je crois que vous en avez besoin. 
 En avez- vous encore besoin ? 
 Je n'en ai plus besoin. 
 A-t-il besoin d' argent ? 
 
 II en a grand besoin. 
 
 Le marchand en a-t il besoir ? 
 II n'en a pas besoir?. 
 Qui en a besoin ? 
 Personne n'en a U^.soin. 
 Us en ont besoin. 
 
 i Jean et Charleu *nt-ils besoin dci 
 i chevaux ? 
 
 Us n'en ont pas beboin. 
 
 De quoi ? De quoi avez-vous besoir 1 
 
 J'ai besoin de tout cela. 
 
 Je n'ai besoin de rien. 
 
 f. De quoi a-t-il besoin ? ($ 95.) 
 
 De rien. De cela. De tort, 
 Corma?tre* 4. 
 
TWENTY THIRD LESSON. 
 
 113 
 
 J*o be acquainted with (to know) a 
 man ; somebody ; a good teacher. 
 To be acquainted with nobody. 
 Of me, of thee, of him, of it. 
 Of us, of you, of them. 
 Is your father in want of me ? 
 He is in want of you. 
 Are you in want of these books ? 
 I am in want of them. 
 Is he ii; want of my brothers ? 
 
 He 13 in want of them. 
 
 Does he want that ? He does (want it.) 
 Whom do I want ? (have I need of?) 
 You want the lawyer's clerk. 
 
 W/itil else or what inore ? 
 
 Connaitre un liomnic ; quelqu'un; 
 
 un bon maitrc. 
 Ne connaitre personnc. 
 De moi, de toi, de lui, ^cn, 47.- 
 De nous, de vous, d'eux, (en.) 
 Votre pure a-t-il besoin de moi ? 
 II a besoin de vous. 
 Avez-vous besoin de ces livres ? 
 J'CTI ai besoin. 
 A-t-il besoin de mes frures? 
 II abesoin d'eux. (pour les personnea., 
 II en a besoin. (pers. et choses.) 
 A-t-il besoin de cela ? 11 en a besoiiL, 
 De qui ai-je besoin ? 
 Vous avez besoin du commis do 
 
 1'avocat. 
 Quoi encore ? De quoi encore I 
 
 TWENTY-THIRD EXERCISE. 2d Sec. VINGT-TROISIEME EXERCICJE, 2de Sec. 
 Ecrivez, en Fran9ais, le quantiemc du rnois. 
 
 1 am much pleased at seeing you. Miss Clara. Sit down; tako 
 this seat. How do you do, this morning ? I am pretty well ; better 
 than last Tuesday. I am glad of it. How is your father. 1 I do 
 not know. Father is not here, but he is coming in two or three 
 days. But you, Sir; how have you been since I had tho pleasure 
 of seeing you? I have been perfectly well, I thank ysu. Is it 
 cold or warm, out of doors'? It is warm, quite warm. Indeed ! I 
 am sorry for it. I bid you good morning, Sir. Miss, I present my 
 respects to you. Adieu ! 
 
 Is the professor going to make us recite (nous faire reciter) im- 
 mediately? No, not before a quarter of an hour or half an hour. 
 Then, I may still study my vocabulary ; can I not ? To be sure you 
 can. But do you not know it yet? Yes, I know it pretty well; but 
 not too well, (trop bien. Obs. 35.) May I go in the parlor, to study 
 there ? Can you not study here ? I can write, read, copy, ant 1 , 
 translate here ; but I can study better in a corner of the parlor. If 
 you will stay here, I can ask you (vous faire) a few questions, and 
 then you can ask me some. Very well, I am going to stay. Will 
 you begin or may I (puis-je?) ask you the first questions? Yon 
 may begin, if you are ready; for, I am ready to answer you. I am 
 *ot quite ready. I wish first to correct a word there. Now I am 
 *eady. You know the date of the monti: ; do you not? I believe 
 I do. And you; do you know it? To be sure. And he; can he 
 aay it? I believe not. Who cannot tell the date of tho nnnth! 
 
114: T WE NT Y- FOURTH LESSOR. 
 
 Robert cannot. I ? Yes, I can. Is it not the 8th of May ? Yes 
 it is (or that's it). 
 
 Are you going out? (N. 1, 19 2 .) To be sure ; have I not my hat, 
 cloak, and gloves? Yes, you have. Have you to purchase (buy) 
 anything? Yes. I nave to purchase many things. What? A large 
 shawl, for Sarah; a pretty little stick, for Henry; some gloves. 
 handkerchiefs, and velve-t, for Charlotte. Is that all? All! No, 
 Indeed ! What else (or more) ? What more ? A great many things, 
 Have you n^ to buy something for oiu little cousin, John ? Yes, 
 [ have several things to get for him. First, a wooden gun and other 
 toys; and afterwards some little books. Is that all for him ? To be 
 sure ; it is enough; is it not? Yes, indeed. Have you a catalogue 
 of those things? No, I have none; but, will you do me the favor 
 of making one for me ? Yes, with pleasure. Where is the paper, 
 where is the pencil? The paper is here, and the pencil there. 
 Have you money enough to buy all that? I believe so. What can 
 you lend me? A knife, if you have need of one. A what? A 
 knife. Thank you, I have no need of a knife. What have you 
 need of? I have need of a good gun. An iron or a steel one? A 
 steel one. Why do you want it? I want it to kill a cat, a dog, and 
 some birds. Are you in want of this picture ? Which ? Our good 
 painter's last picture. I? No; but he wants it. Who wants it ? 
 This young man does. How much will he give for it ? I do no 
 know how much. Does your brother want money ? He does noc 
 want any. Who wants sugar? Nobody wants any. Oh! yes; I 
 want some, to sweeten my tea. Has anybody need of pepper 1 
 Nobody has. Has the grocer but one eye ? No ; he has l\* D ; but 
 ho has but one thumb. 
 
 Always. ($ 170.) A moment, a little while. Toujours. Un moment, 
 un petit moment. 
 
 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON, 24th. Vingt-quatricme Legon, 24me. 
 VOCABULARY. 1st Section. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD.Indicatif. 
 THE PRESENT TENSE. Temps Present ou Present. 
 For its formation see ($ 144.) That article must be carefully studied. 
 Obs. 52. The three present tenses: 1 love, I do love, I am loving, will fa 
 the present be expressed in French by: faime. (Mind that : am loving, arfi 
 reading, &c., are never translated literally.) 
 
 To love, to like, to be fond of. I Aimer, 1. (a, avant un infmitif.) 
 
 I love. I do not love. I J'aime. Je a'aimc pas. 
 
T W E N T Y - F O U U T II I. E S S N. 
 
 115 
 
 Does he like ? He does. (Dir. 1.) 
 
 Does he not love ? He does not. 
 Are you fond of? We are (fond of). 
 Dost thou love ? Thou lovest tea. 
 Who loves to read ? They like to 
 
 read. 
 Do you like him ? . . . them ? 
 
 I do (like him, them). 
 
 I dc not (like him, them). 
 
 Wot at all. I do not like him or it 
 
 &i all. 
 
 Does he sell his horse ? He does. 
 Do you sell anything ? I do not. 
 
 Do those farmers sell cabbages ? 
 
 They do. They do not. 
 
 Do you finish your task ? 
 
 \ do. I do not (finish it). 
 
 What do the pupils finish ? 
 
 This one finishes his exercise, those 
 finish their tasks. 
 
 Whom are you waiting for ? I ex- 
 pect the boy wham he expects. 
 
 Do you receive any notes to-night ? 
 
 Yes ; as many as they receive. 
 
 Aime-t-il ? II ai^ie. 
 
 N'aime-t-il pas ? II n'aime pas. 
 Aimez-vous ? Nous aimons. 
 Aimes-tu ? Tu aimes le the. 
 
 Qui aime a Ure ? Us aiment a lire, 
 
 L'aimez-vous ? Lea aimez-vovisf 
 
 ($51.) 
 
 Je 1'aime. Je les aime. 
 
 Je ne 1'aime pas. Je ne les aime pas. 
 Pas du tout. Je ne 1'aime pas dr. 
 
 tout. 
 
 Vend-il son cheval ? II le vend. 
 Vendez-vous quelque chose ? Je ne 
 
 vends rien. 
 Ccs fermiers-la vendent-ils dea 
 
 choux ? 
 
 Us en vendent. Us n'en vendent pas. 
 Finissez-vous votre devoir? 
 Je le finis. Je ne le finis pas. 
 
 Que finissent les ecoliers ? 
 Celui-ci finit son exercicc, ceux-la 
 
 finissent leurs devoirs. 
 Qui attendez-vous ? J'attends le 
 
 gar9on qu'il attend. 
 Recevez-vous des billets ce soir ? 
 J'enregoisautantqu'ilsenrcsoivent, 
 
 TWENTY-FOURTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. VINGT-QUATRIEME Ex. Ire Sec. 
 Mettcz (put) ici le quantieme du mois en Franc/ais. 
 
 Are you going to see Mr. Charles, to-day 1 I am. How is ho 
 now? He is better, but not at all well. How is his old cousin? Ho 
 is quite well. How have you been since I had the pleasure of seeing 
 you at your friend's? I have always been well, as usual. How 
 are you all at home ? Every one is well. Is any one sick at your 
 house ? No, nobody is sick. Is not your little boy sick ? Oh ! yes ; 
 he is a little sick; but not much. Are you not coming in? Yes, I 
 am coming in (N. 1, 19 2 ), to sit down a moment. Come in, come 
 in. Take this seat. No, thank you; I will (vais) sit here. (N. 19 1 .) 
 
 Do you always speak French? No, we do not always speak it. 
 Why do you not always speak it ? Because I do not speak it 
 trery well, Jules does not speak much better, and the children do 
 not speak it at all. How many exercises do the scholars copy every 
 day? They copy two; one in the morning, the other in the eve* 
 ning. At what o'clock do they copy the morning one ? They copy 
 it at i past 9. And the evening one ; do they also copy it at past 9 } 
 
116 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSCN, 
 
 They copy it at J past 7. When do you correct them ? I correct 
 them at two or J of two. 
 
 Do you not dine (diner) at one ? No, we dine later. Whc 
 dines at one? All our neighbors do. Why do you not dine at one 
 also ? Because we like to dine later. Do your children dine, 01 
 eat dinner, when you do? No, they dine before us. Do they like 
 to eat dinner before you ? Yes, they do like to do it, because they 
 are always hungry. Do they like to drink tea or coffee ? They 
 like to drink neither tea nor coffee, out milk. Do you love 
 your brother ? I do love him. Does your brother love you ? 
 He does not love me. Dost thou love me, my good child? 
 I do love thee. Dost thou love this ugly man? I do not love him. 
 Whom do you love ? . I love my children. Whom do we love ? 
 We love our friends. Do we like any one ? We like no one. 
 Does anybody like us? The Americans like us. Do you want 
 anything? I want nothing. Whom is your father in want of? He 
 is in want of his servant. What do you want? I want the note. 
 Do you want this or that note? I want this one. What do you 
 wish to do with it? (en?) I wish to open it, in order to read it. 
 Does he .receive as many notes as I? He receives more of them 
 than you. What do you give me ? I do not give thee anything. 
 Do you give this book to my brother? I do give it him. Do 
 you give him a bird ? I do give him one. To whom do you lend 
 your books ? I lend them to those scholars. Does your friend lend 
 me a dollar? He lends you one. To whom do you lend your 
 clothes? (habits ?) I do not lend them to anybody. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. VOCABULAIRS. 2de Section. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED Le Present Continue 
 Arc you fond of, do you like beef? J Aimez-vous le bceuf ? 
 
 05s. 53. As the noun leef is here used in its general sense, the Frenoh 
 use, not the partitive, but the definite article, Ze, les, (the.) ($ 15.) 
 
 Does he like the Prussians ? 
 
 To eat. To arrange, to set in order. 
 
 Do you like to eat beef? 
 
 Aime-t-il les Prussieiis ? 
 
 Manger, 1. Arranger, ranger, L 
 
 Aimez-vous a manger du bceuf ? 
 
 O6s. 54. As the noun beef is here used to express a portion of beef, no! 
 1 the beef, the French use the partitive, du, des, (some or any.) 
 
 Does he like to eat cakes ? ($ 20.) 
 They like to eat some. 
 To eat, eating, we eat. 
 
 To change, changing, we change. 
 
 ($ 144, R. 2.) 
 I o neglect, neglecting, we neglect. 
 
 Aime-t-il a manger des gateaux f 
 Us aiment a en manger. 
 Manger, mangeant, nous mangeon& 
 Changer, changeant, nous chan* 
 
 geons. 
 Ne"gliger, nepUgeant, nous mlgli 
 
 gc.ons 
 
TWEN rV-KOURTH LESSON. 
 
 117 
 
 Do you neglect your French ? 
 We do not neglect it at all. 
 Does he send you the bajik note? 
 He does. ($ 144 3.) Pie does not. 
 I send, thousendest, he sends, they 
 
 send, who sends ? What does he 
 
 send ? 
 i sweep, thou sweepest, he sweeps, 
 
 they sweep, who sweeps ? does he 
 
 not Bweep ? 
 
 Who sweeps the parlor carpet ? 
 I do not know who sweeps it. 
 Open, to open one, opening. 
 I open, thou openest, he opens. 
 Does he open his chest ? He does. 
 Does he open his eyes ? He does. 
 
 Ndgligez-vous votre Frangais ? 
 
 Nous ne le negligeons pas du tout. 
 
 Vous envoie-t-il le billet de lanque ? 
 
 II me 1'envoie. II ne ine 1'envoie pas. 
 
 J'envoie, tu envoies, il envoic, il* 
 envoient,quienvoie? Qu envoie-t- 
 il ? 
 
 Je balaie, tu balaies, il balaie, ila 
 balaient, qui balaie ? Ne bahie-t-il 
 pas ? 
 
 Qui balaie le lapis du salon ? 
 
 Je ne sais pas qui le balaie. 
 
 Ouvrir,* 2, en ouvrir un, ouvrant, 
 
 J'ouvre, tu ouvres, il ouvre. 
 
 Ouvre-t-il son coffre ? II I'ouvre. 
 
 tOuvre-t-il les yeux ? II Ice ouvre. 
 
 Obs. 55. Use the definite article, Ze, Zes, (the,) instead of the possessive, 
 when the sense clearly indicates the possessor. Ses may be used, but let 
 is preferable. 
 
 Souffrir. Je ne peux pas le (h 
 
 souffrir. 
 
 To put away, to put by, lay up, (put Serrer, 1. 
 any article in its proper place.) 
 
 To sufier. I cannot bear it, (them.'' 
 
 Will you put away your hat, clothes, 
 money, shoes, books, pencils, &c. 
 (Dir. 2.) 
 
 To shut, to shut up the store. 
 
 Is the servant shutting up the office ? 
 
 He does not now, but he is going to 
 shut it in a moment (presently.) 
 
 This soldier. Some cider. 
 
 Has the captain more than thirty sol- 
 diers ? He has less than twenty. 
 
 Often, pretty often, (enough.) 
 
 What does the American like ? 
 
 He is very fond of coffee and tea. 
 
 To dine, to eat dinner, to eat supper. 
 The dinner, at dinner. The supper, 
 
 at supper. 
 
 Do they often change their servants? 
 We often change them. 
 To change something. 
 
 TWENTY-FOURTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. VINGT-QUATRIEME Ex 2de Sec 
 
 Mettez ici le quantieme en Fran$ais. 
 
 Ah ? Mr. Arago, I am glad to see you. You Hie well, 1 hope. 
 Tolerably well, thank you. I am glad to hear it. Do you know wlie!0 
 
 Voulez-vous serrer votre chapeau, 
 vos habits, votre argent, vos sou- 
 liers, vos livres, vos crayons, &c. 
 
 Former, 1. Fermer le magasin. 
 
 Le domestique ferme-t-il le bureau f 
 
 II ne le ferme pas a present ; mais il 
 va le fermer dans un moment, 
 
 Ce soldat-ci. Du cidre. 
 
 Le capitaine a-t-il plus de trente sol- 
 dats ? II en amoins de vingt. (16 2 . 
 
 Souve?it, assez sou vent. 
 
 Qu'aime I'Americaia ? 
 
 II aime beaucoup le cafe et le the. 
 (Obs. 53.) 
 
 Diner. Souper. 
 
 Le dmer, a dmer. Le souper, a 
 souper. 
 
 Changent-ils souvertf de domes 
 
 tiques ? Nous en changeons souvent 
 
 Changer de queique chose, (de.) 
 
118 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSOR. 
 
 Mr. Lamartine is? Yes, he is at home. Thank you. Hir. I have to 
 write to him. Well ! come in my house and sit down a little. M iny 
 thanks. I am not tired. I am, as usual, in a hurry (presse), lor I 
 want to see Mr. Rush .... who is going to Liverpool at $ past 30. 
 Adieu, then; for you have not much time. Adieu. It is warm, 
 very warm, is it not ? No ; it is not too warm for me. Not too warm 
 for you ! Then you like the heat (le chaud), indeed ! T do.- Do 
 you not like the heat? Not quite sc much as you, I believe. 
 
 Do you recite this evening at 6 or at 7 o'clock ? We recite only 
 at 1) I believe. Do you know what vocabulary we recite ? You 
 recite the last one. Which is the last one ? The ... is it not? 
 I believe not. Which, then? This one. I know these two. And 
 I also. Then, I am ready to recite. And you ? I also. What aro 
 you looking for (or, do you seek), Miss Charlotte ? Is it your shawl 
 or cloak that you seek (are looking for) ? No, Sir, I a!7\ looking fo? 
 my copy-book of French, to translate my exercise in it. 
 
 What do you eat at breakfast ? We eat a little beef or mutton, 
 bread and butter, &c. Do you like beef at breakfast ? Yes, a little , 
 but I like it very well (beaucoup) at dinner. Do you like to eat it 
 also at supper? I do not like it so much (tanf). As for me (raoz), 
 I do not like it at all. I cannot bear it. You cannot bear it ? indeed ! 
 No, indeed, I cannot. Do you eat much cheese ? We do not eat 
 much ; we do not like it ; we cannot bear it. Do you often change 
 servants (de domestiques) ? Yes, we often change them. We change 
 them every month. Does not Julius neglect his task often ? Yes, 
 he does; but we do not neglect ours. What do you neglect? 1 
 believe that we do not neglect anything. (Obs. 4.) You are good 
 scholars, then, if you neglect nothing. Thank you. What are you 
 going to fix or arrange ? When ? To-day. To-day ? We do not fix 
 anything, but these boys set their books in order (fix). Does your 
 father send you anything? He sends me all I wish. Does he send 
 you shoes, stockings, and gloves ? No, but he sends me money to 
 buy some. How much does he send you ? He sends me more than 
 ten dollars every month. Is that all ? Yes, and that is enough, 
 Will you be kind enough to tell Isaac to open the panor? He is 
 opening it now (Pouvre). Very well. Then you need not tell him 
 to open it; but you may tell him to sweep it. I will. (Je vais 16 
 faire.) (19, N. 1.) 
 
 Do you cut anything? We cut some wood. What do those mer- 
 chants cut ? They do not cut anything ; bu their clerk cuts some 
 coarse cloth. Does he not cut the fine cloth too ? No, he is afraid to 
 cut it. You mean, he is afraid to tear it, do yoi* not? Yes, T mean, 
 
TWKNT Y-FOUKTII LESSON 
 
 119 
 
 to tear it. Does he not tear the cotton ? Yes ; he tears it, and lht 
 coarse cloth too; but he tears neither the velvet nor the satin. 
 When do you receive your notes? I receive them every morning 
 when you receive yours. Does ovr neighbor, the lawyer, receive 
 his journals when we receive ours? I do not know when he receives 
 his. What does your servant carry? He carries several things in a 
 large trunk. Does he open it? He does not. Where is he carry- 
 ing it? He is carrying it home. (Obs. 52.) Are you waiting for 
 anybody? Yes, I am only waiting for the little Irishman. Do you 
 wait for him often ? Yes, I do. Every morning or every evening? 
 Morning and evening. Are you killing two birds? I am killing 
 only one. How many chickens does that old cook kill ? He does 
 not kill any. Who kills them, then ? The farmers kill then. Do 
 (the) farmers work as much as (the) sailors? They do. Who works 
 more ? You or your son ? We work as much the one as the other. 
 
 Very ill. Worse. Much worse. 
 Does the doctor hope yet ? Go (imper. 
 
 Tres-mal. Plus mal. Beaucoup p. m, 
 Le docteur espere-t-il encore ? Allez. 
 
 To rest yourself, myself. Good-by. Vousreposer,merepo. Jevoussalue 
 
 VOCABULARY. 3d Section. VOCABULAIRE. Sme Section. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED ($ 144.) Le Present Continue. 
 
 Exceptions to the general rule given in ( 144). 
 
 Ce pupitre. Le pupitre du miutre 
 
 Vos freres que font-ils ? 
 
 Us ne font rien. 
 
 Ne faites-vous pas un exercice ? 
 
 Non, nous n'en faisons pas. 
 
 Quc faites-vous dans le bureau ? 
 
 Nous y faisons le devoir que nous 
 
 avons a faire. 
 
 Me dites-vous quelque chose ? 
 Nous vous disons qu'ils veuleirt 
 
 manger. 
 
 Ne dites-vous rien ? 
 Non, rien. (* 151. A. 8.) 
 Cela peut etre. 
 
 Au coin de Walnut et de la 13mo. 
 Cela ne peut pas etre. 
 
 TWENTY-FOURTH EXERCISE. 3d Sec. VINGT-QUATRIEME Ex. SME Sec 
 
 Mettez ici le quantieme du mois, en Frangais. 
 
 Mr. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Pouvez-vous me diro 
 comment se porte votre cousin Armand? II est tres-mal. En 
 yerite ! Pen suis bien fache. Est-il plus mal que hier ? Oui, il 
 6st beaucoup plus mal. Le docteur espere-t-il encore? Oui, il 
 cspere encore, parce que Armand est jeune ; mais il est tros mal.-* 
 
 This desk. The teacher's desk. 
 
 What are your brothers doing ? 
 
 They are doing nothing. 
 
 Are you not doing an exercise ? 
 
 No, we do not do one. 
 
 What are you doing in the office ? 
 
 We do the task we have to do. 
 
 Do you say anything to me ? 
 W2 tell you that they wish to cat. 
 
 Do you say nothing ? 
 
 No, nothing. 
 
 That may be. 
 
 At the corner of Walnut and 13th. 
 
 That cannot be. 
 
120 TWENTY- FOURTH LESSON. 
 
 Prenez un siege. Asseyez-vous. Non, je ne peux pas m'asseoir a 
 present. Ne pouvez-vous pas vous asseoir un petit moment, pour 
 vous reposer? Non. je ne le peux pas; car j'ai a aller chez PapO' 
 thicaire pour acheter quelque chose. Est-ce pour Arm and ? - Oui, 
 e'est pour lui. Alors, allez, allez. Adieu! Je vous salue. 
 
 Miss Emilie, what are you waiting for ? I am waiting for the 
 scholars. Are they coming, or do tney come ? (06s. 52.) I be- 
 lieve they are coming. What are they doing? Who ? The shoe- 
 makers. They are making shoes ($ 4). Are the carpenters making 
 a ship ? No, they are not making one. What do they do ? They 
 do something, but we do not know what. Do you know where are 
 my dictionaries ? Which? The French ones. We know where 
 they are. Will you tell us where they are? No, we will not tell 
 you. You may look for them. You are very good, indeed ! Do 
 the reachers owe anything to the butter-man? They do not owe 
 him anything. ^-Do they not owe something to the tailors? They 
 owe them something. How much? Not much. Not more than 
 two or three dollars. Do they owe more to the joiner? No, they 
 do not owe him so much; for, they owe him nothing. Nothing at 
 all? No, nothing at all. 1 believe they owe him nothing at all. 
 I know they owe him something for their last desk. That may be, 
 (cela peut etre.) 
 
 Do the Messrs. Cowell & Son keep a dry goods store ? Yes, they 
 keep one. Where do they keep it? They keep it at the corner oi 
 Chestnut and Seventh (de Chestnut et de la 7me). What do they 
 keep? They keep gloves, ribbons, satin, velvet, fine cloth, and 
 many other things. Do they receive their satin, velvet, gloves, and 
 ribbons from France (France) ? No, I believe they do not receive 
 them from France ; they buy them (achetent) from cur merchants. 
 What do they receive from France ? They do not receive any- 
 thing. Do the French take much tea ? No, they do not take much. 
 They take more coffee than tea ; do they not? Yes, they take a 
 little more. Do they not take a great deal more of it? No. they 
 do not take a great deal more ; but they take more wine than either 
 tea or coffee, (que de the ou cle cafe.) \Vhat c\o the Italians and 
 Spanish drink? They drink chocolate. Do they not drink wine 
 also ? Yes, they do. Do you know that the general's old brothe/ 
 is very sick ? Yes, we know it; and we know also that he is bettei 
 this morning. We are glad to hear it. Do you say anything to 
 rue ? We do not say anything to you. Do you tell them anything ? 
 We do not say anything to them. Do you say anything pretty to 
 your good neighbor? We tell him something pretty. What do 
 you tell him pretty 7 We are not going to tell you of it, or it to you. 
 
TWENTY FIFTH LESSON. 
 
 121 
 
 Vou have been well. I believe it. 
 At the hour. Before the hour. 
 Punctual. On the way, the road, 
 
 coming. 
 
 I think. Dust, 
 
 Tt is very dusty. 
 
 Vous vous etes bien port<5. Je le croia 
 A r he ure. Avant 1'heure. 
 
 Ponctuel. En chemin. 
 
 Je pense. De la poussiere, (femi.) 
 II fait beaucoup de poussiere. 
 
 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON, 25lh.Vingt'Cinquicme Lecon, 25m* 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED. Le Present Ornate. 
 As the rule given in ($ 144), on the formation of the plural of the present 
 tense, is applicable to irregular as well as regular verbs, it remains now only 
 to point out the present tense singular of a few irregular verbs, to enable 
 the learner to use them in his exercises. They are the following: 
 
 To do, to make. Doing. 
 I do, thou dost, he dos. 
 
 To drink, drinking. 
 I diink, thou drinkest, he drinks. 
 
 To come, coming. 
 I come, thou contest, he comes. 
 
 To write, writing. 
 i write, thou writest, he writes. 
 
 To see, seeing. 
 I see, thou seest, he sees. 
 
 To say, tell, saying. 
 I say, thou sayest, he says. 
 
 To go out, going out. 
 f go out, thou goest out, he goes out. 
 
 To read, reading. 
 I read, thou readest, he reads. 
 
 To know, (to be acquainted 
 with,) knowing. 
 
 I know, thou knowest, he knows. 
 
 To put on, putting on. 
 I put on, thou puttest, he puts. 
 
 To sleep, sleeping, 
 i eleep, thou sleepest, he sleeps. 
 
 To serve, serving. 
 t serve, thou servest, he serves. 
 
 To take, taking. 
 f taxe, thou takest, he takes. 
 
 To translate, translating. 
 I translate, thou translates!, he trans- 
 lates. 
 11 
 
 Faire,* faisant. 
 
 Je fais, tu fais, il fait. 
 
 Boire,* buvant. 
 
 Je bois, t~ bois, il boit. 
 
 Venir,* venant. 
 
 Je viens, tu vicns, il vient. 
 
 Ecrire,* ecrivant. 
 
 J'ecris, tu ecris, ii ecrit. 
 
 Voir,* voyant. 
 
 Je vois, tu vois, il voit. 
 
 Dire,* disant. 
 
 Je dis, tu dis, il dit. 
 
 Sortir,* sortant. 
 
 Je sors, tu sors, il sort. 
 
 Lire,* lisant. 
 
 Je lis, tu lis, il lit. 
 
 ConnaTtre,* connaissant. 
 
 > Je connais, tu connais, il connaStt 
 \ Je sais, tu sais, il sait. 
 
 Mettre,* 4, mettant. 
 
 Je mets, tu mets, il met. 
 
 Dormir,* 2, dormant. 
 
 Je dors, tu dors, il dort. 
 
 Servir,* 2, servant. 
 
 Je sers, tu sers, il sert. 
 
 Prendre,*4, prenant. 
 
 Je prends, tu prends, il prend. 
 
 Traduire,* 4, traduisant. 
 
 Je traduis, tu traduis, il troduiL 
 
122 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 
 
 VlNGT-CINQUIEME ExERCICE. Ire Sec 
 
 Mettez (put) le quantieme, en Fran^ais, ici. 
 
 Bonsoir, Mr. Je suis bien aise de vous voir. J'espere que voui 
 vous etes bien porte depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir, 
 Tres-bien, merci. Suis-je le premier ici, ce soir? Vous etes pre- 
 mier. Vous Petes assez souvent 7 mais pas toujours. Je suis souvent 
 trop occupe pour venir toujours a Pheure. Je le crois, car vous etes 
 bien ponctuel. Oii sont les autres ecoliers? En chemin, je pense, 
 car ils sont ponctuels aussi. Mais pas tant que vous. Vonlez-vous 
 prendre un siege? Non ; je vous remercie, pas encore. Je veux 
 d'abord chercher un mot clans le dictionnaire. Quel mot ^ oulez- 
 vous savoir? Je veux savoir le Francais de: dust. Que voulez* 
 vous dire en Fran^ais? Je veux dire : it is dusty. Le Franpais de 
 it is dusty, est: il fait de la poussiere. A present, je peux vous dire 4 
 II fait beaucoup de poussiere. Oui, je le sais, et la poussiere n'ee! 
 pas agreable. Prenez un siege a present. Merci, je vais en prer> 
 dre un. 
 
 Dost thou see anything? I do not (see anything). Does yoin 
 father see our ships ? He cannot see them at all from there but we 
 see them very well from here. How many soldiers do you see? 
 We see a good many; we see more than thirty of them. The cap- 
 tain expects more soldiers, does he not ? I do not know if he expects 
 any others. Do you know the captain ? No, I believe I do not 
 know him ; but I know the general. Do you also know the general's 
 cousin? Who? that tall and handsome young man who comes 
 often to the museum to see the pictures? Yes, that one. I do not 
 know him, but I see him very often. What do these sailors and 
 soldiers drink ? They drink wine and cider. Do they drink more 
 cf the latter than of the former ? No, they drink more of the former 
 than of the latter. Do they drink wine every day? They do; but 
 they do not drink cider every day. Why not? Can they not get 
 some ? (en avoir?') No, they have not money enough to buy any. 
 What do we drink? You know that we drink tea, coffee, and 
 wine. Do we not drink chocolate too? Yes, we do. We do like 
 it as much as the Italians and Spaniards. Do we drink as much oi 
 it as they ? No, we do not, for they drink it in the morning, at din 
 ner, and supper. What art thou writing? I am not writing, I am 
 reading. Who writes ? (is writing ?) The lawyer is writing. What 
 is the Prussian doing? He does nothing. Does he not study Eng- 
 lish ? Yes, he is studying it. Does he not write it ? He does not 
 
 What dost thou say ? I say nothing. I am too sleepy to say any 
 thing. Does thy brother say anything ? He is afraid to say a word. 
 
TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 123 
 
 [lo you say any thing ? Yes, I tell our servant to go to the book 
 seller's to bring me the last work of Cooper. Do you like his last 
 >vork ? Do you not like it ? I say that I like it very much. Who 
 loes not like it? Several gentlemen whom (que) I know. ( 77.) 
 Do you tell me anything? I tell you something. Yes- but you do 
 lot tell me something pretty. Is it not pretty? No, not at all. Do 
 do (are you doing) anything for me? We do not do anything 
 br you; but those boys are (doing something for you). What are 
 hey doing for me? Do you not see it? No, I do not see it. Dost 
 hou see my shawl or gloves? (Dir. 2.) I see neither these nor 
 hat. What dost thou see ? I see nothing. Who sees them ? Who 
 sees what ? My shawl and gloves. Nobody sees them. Are they 
 lot here ? No, they are not. I see but this old cotton shawl. What 
 lo you say to the tailor and shoemaker? I do not tell them any 
 hing. What do our friends say to them? They tell the latter to 
 mend their shoes, and the former to make them some coats and 
 vests. Have they time to do it? They have time and a wish to do 
 t. What are you doing ? I am putting my gloves on. Is he put- 
 ing on his large hat? No, he puts on the old one. Do you not put 
 my sugar in your coffee ? Yes, I put some, for I have not enough. 
 3o you not put milk in it? No, I do not. Do you know those Ger- 
 mans ? I know one, but not the others. Who is acquainted with 
 his Swiss ? We know him. Does he know us ? He does. Whom 
 lost thou know? I know nobody. Does he not know you. 1 
 )elieve he does, (que si.) 
 
 3o I look sick ? You do (look sick). 
 
 You look very well. On the contrary. 
 You do not look well. You look 
 
 cold, (as if you were cold.) 
 Vliss, how have you been ? 
 
 (fern.) 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 Ai-je Tair malade ? Vous avez 
 
 1'air malade. 
 
 Vous avez tres-bon air. Au contraire 
 Vous n'avez pas tres-bon air. Voui 
 
 avez Pair d' avoir froid. 
 Mle. comment von etes-vous portee. 
 
 To give somellt'nig to do to some one. 
 Do you give anything to the dog to 
 
 cat ? Do you feed the dog ? au chien ? 
 
 Donner quclque chose d faire d qvcl 
 
 qu'un. 
 Donnez-vousquelau? chose a manger 
 
 1 give it some beef to eat. 
 I give him nothing to eat. 
 What do you give the scholars to 
 
 tranBlate ? 
 
 I give them the 25th exercise. 
 To bring. To find. 
 
 To, at the play. < Au spectacle. 
 
 Je lui donne du bceuf a manger. 
 Je ne lui donne rien a manger. 
 Que donnez-vous a traduire 
 
 e'coliers ? 
 
 Je leur donne le 25me exerf c. 
 Apporter, 1. Trouvr ) 
 
124 
 
 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Our Butcher. His sheep. 
 
 What, that which, (relative pronoun, 
 
 objective case.) 
 
 Dp you bring me what I wish ? 
 I ao not bring you- what you want, 
 
 (or what you wish.) 
 Do you find what you look for, (or 
 
 wJiat you are looking for ?) 
 I find what I look for. (am looking.) 
 He finds not what he seeks. 
 We bring what we find. 
 All, or all that, all that which. 
 
 They do not find all they look ior, 
 
 (or all that which they seek.) 
 Do you mend all I do not ? (Dir. 1.) 
 
 I mend it all. 
 
 We eat all we have. 
 
 Notre boucher. Sor; mout>n. 
 
 Ce que, (pronom relatif, reginvs 
 
 direct.) ($ 89.) 
 
 M'apportez-vous ce que je veux? 
 Je ne vous apporte pas ce que voua 
 
 voulez. 
 Trouvez-vous ce q^e vous cherchez ? 
 
 Je trouve ce que je cherche. 
 II ne trouve pas ce qu'il cherche. 
 Nous apportons ce que nous trouvon 
 Tout ce que, (pron. rel. reg. direc 
 
 <* 91.) 
 Us ne trouvent pas tout ce qu'i 
 
 cherchent. 
 Raccommodez-vous tout ce que 
 
 ne raccommode pas ? 
 Je le raccommode tout. 
 Nous mangeons tout ce que nou 
 
 avons. 
 Au lieu de. Au lieu de lire. 
 
 Instead of. Instead of reading. 
 
 Ols. 56. Instead of is in English followed by the present participle, 
 in French it is followed by the infinitive, as all other prepositions, ex 
 en. (Rule 1st.) 
 This room, apartment. 
 Put yourself, (imperative.) 
 Near. Near Miss Ann. Near the fire. 
 
 Now that I think of it. 
 
 As you think of it, he thinks of it. 
 
 Come, (imperative.) ($ 150.) Come 
 
 here. Here I am. 
 
 If you please. If he pleases. 
 
 To finish, to quit studying. 
 At least I do, or I, at least. He, at least. 
 
 Cet appartement-ci. 
 
 Mettez-vous. 
 
 Pres de. Pres de Mile. Anne. 
 
 du feu. 
 
 A present que j'y pense. ($ 50.) 
 Comme vous y pensez, il y pcnse. 
 Venez,(imper.) Venez ici. 
 
 voici. 
 
 S'il vous plait. S'il lui plait. 
 
 Finir d'etudier. 
 Moi, du moins. Lui, du moms. 
 
 VINGT-CINQUIEME ExERCiCE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Ecrivez ladateici, en Fi'angais, (the date noun fern., of which hereafter.) 
 Ah ! Mr. Charles, j'ai 1'honneur de vous saluer. Je vois que voui 
 vous portez bien. Tres-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., etes-vous ma 
 lade 1 Ai-je Vair malade? Un pen. Je suis un peu fatigue, mai 
 non pas malade. J'en suis bien aise. Vous n'etes pas le premier 
 ce soir. Non, je vois que Mile. Clara esl ici avant moi. Com* 
 merit vous etes-vous portee (fern.), Mlle. ; depuis jeudi dernier. J-f 
 me suis tres-bien portee, merci. Je n'ai-pas Pair malade, j'esperel 
 [)h! non. Au contraire, vous avez tres-bon air ; comme'a Pordij 
 Merci Mr. Comment est le rnal de gorge du general'? 
 
TWENTY -FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 125 
 
 ma* do gorge est mieux, mais non pas son rhume. Entrez, Mr, 
 Lenoir. Vous avez Pair cPavoir froid. Oui, j'ai froid. Mettez-vous 
 ici, pres du feu et de Mile. Clara. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. Voua 
 avez bon feu. Le feu est tres-agreable quand vous avez froid > n'est- 
 ce pas, Mr.? Oui ; Mile. II est alors tres-agreable. Vous avea 
 parfaitement raison. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait tres-froid.- 
 Connaissez-vous Mr. de Genlis? J'ai le plaisir de le connaitre et de 
 ie voir tres-souvent. II a Pair malade, a present, n'est-ce pas! 
 Mais, je crois que non. A present que j'y pense, je crois qu'il a mal 
 aux dents. Cela peut etre. Si cela est, j'en suis bien fachee. El 
 moi aussi. Mr. de Genlis est un homme de merite, n'est-ce pas'? Jo 
 le crois. 
 
 Do you go to the play, in the evening? I do nc< Why? What 
 have you to do ? I have to study. Does your teacher give you any- 
 thing to study in the evening ? Yes, he gives us something to do 
 then. At what o'clock do you finish studying? We finish at 9 or 
 10 oclock ; in a word (en un), we finish when we are tired, or 
 sleepy, (when we are.} Does he give you anything to write ? 
 Yes, he always gives us ( 170) the quarter or the half of an 
 exercise to write ; because he says that we know it better then. 
 J)o you know it better when you write it ? To be sure. I do (moi) 
 at least. Do you copy your father's notes in the evening ? We 
 copy them only in the morning, and afterwards we send them 
 (away). Do the scholars write all they translate ? No, they do not. 
 Do they mend all they tear? They do not. Do they find all 
 they look for? They do. Does the captain find all he looks for 1 
 No, indeed, he does not. Who finds all he looks for? Nobody 
 does. What do they wish to find? They wish to find but their 
 books. Do they not put them away? They do not. Who putn 
 them away? Nobody does. Where are they? You know; do 
 you not? No, not at all. The Swiss wants something; do you 
 bring him all he wishes? I bring it to him, when I can find it. 
 Where dost thou take me to? I take thee to the museum. Do you 
 not take me to the wharf? I have neither time nor a mind to take 
 you there, because it is bad weather. 
 
 Do not the merchants put away what they do not sell ? They 
 put away all (ney do not sell. At how much does the butcher sell 
 his beef? He sells it at ten cents, or sous. Does the butcher 
 wish to buy your sheep ? He does. What will he give you for 
 it (en) ? He will give me two dollars and a half for it. Is it 
 enough? I think not. If this butcher will not give you more than 
 that, I know another who can give you more. Have our butcher*? 
 
124 
 
 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Our Butcher. His sheep. | Notre boucher. 
 
 What, that which, (relative pronoun, Ce que, (pronom 
 
 objective case.) 
 Dp you bring me what I wish ? 
 
 I ao not bring you what you want, 
 
 (or what you wish.) * 
 Do you find what you look for, (or 
 
 what you are looking for ?) 
 I find what I look for. (am looking.) 
 He finds not what he seeks. 
 We bring what we find. 
 All, or all that, all that which. 
 
 They do not find all they look ior, 
 
 (or all that which they seek.) 
 Do you mend all I do not ? (Dir. 1.) 
 
 I mend it all. 
 
 We eat all we have. 
 
 Instead of. 
 
 Instead of reading. 
 
 Son mouM.n, 
 rclatif, regii 
 direct.) ($ 89.) 
 M'apportez-vous ce que je veux? 
 
 Je ne vous apporte pas ce que voua 
 
 voulez. 
 Trouvez-vous ce q*e vous cherchez ? 
 
 Je trouve ceque je cherche. 
 II ne trouve pas ce qu'il cherche. 
 Nous apportons ce que nous trouvons. 
 Tout ce que, (pron. rel. re.g. direct.) 
 
 (* 91.) 
 Us ne trouvent pas tout ce qu'ila 
 
 cherchent. 
 Raccommodez-vous tout ce que je 
 
 ne raccommode pas ? 
 Je le raccommode tout. 
 Nous mangeons tout ce que nous 
 
 avons. 
 Au lieu de. Au lieu de lire. 
 
 Obs. 56. Instead of is in English followed by the present participle, but 
 in French it is followed by the infinitive, as all other prepositions, except 
 en. (Rule 1st.) 
 This room, apartment. 
 Put yourself, (imperative.) 
 
 Near. Near Miss Ann. Near the fire. 
 
 Now that I think of it. 
 
 As you think of it, he thinks of it. 
 
 Come, (imperative.) ( 150.) Come 
 
 here. Here I am. 
 
 If you please. If he pleases. 
 
 To finish, to quit studying. 
 At least I do, or I, at least. He, at least. 
 
 Pr* 
 
 Cet appartetnent-ci. 
 
 J\lettez-vous. 
 
 Prcs de. Pres de Mile. Anne. 
 
 du feu. 
 
 A present que j'y pense. ($ 50.) 
 Comme vous y pensez, il y pcnsc. 
 
 Venez ici. Me 
 
 Venez, (imper.) 
 
 voici. 
 
 S'il vous plait. S'il lui plait. 
 
 Finir d'etudier. 
 Moi, du moins. Lui, du moins. 
 
 EXERCICE. 2de Sec. 
 Ecrivcz la date id, en Francais, (the date noun fern., of which hereafter.) 
 Ah ! Mr. Charles, j'ai I'honneur de vous saluer. Je vois que vous 
 vous portez bien. Tres-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., etes-vous ma- 
 lade ^ Ai-je Pair malade ? Un pen. Je suis uri peu fatigue, mais 
 non pas malade. J'en suis bien aise. Vo;is n'etes pas le premier, 
 ce eoir. Non, je vois que Mile. Clara est ici avant moi. Com- 
 ment vous etes-vous portee (fern.), Mile., depuis jeudi dernier. Je 
 me suis tres-bien portee, merci. Je n'ai pas Pair malade, j'espere, 
 Oh! non. Au, contraire, vous avez tres-bon air, comme a Pordi 
 Qaire. Merci Mr. Corr/ment est le mal de gorge du general? Son 
 
TWENTY -FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 125 
 
 ma* d gorge est mieux, mais non pas son rhume. Entrez, Mr, 
 Lenoir. Vous avez Pair d/avoir froid. Oui, j r ai froid. Mettez-vous 
 ici, pres du feu et de Mile. Clara. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. Voug 
 avez bon feu. Le feu est tres-agreable quand vous avez froid > n'est- 
 ce pas, Mr.? Oui, Mile. II est alors tres-agreable. Vous avei 
 parfaitement raison. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait tres-froid. 
 Connaissez-vous Mr. de Genlis? J'ai le plaisir de le connaitre et de 
 ie voir tres-souvent. II a 1'air malade, a present, n'est-ce pas! 
 Mais, je crois que non. A presem que j'y pense, je crois qu'il a mai 
 aux dents. Cela peut etre. Si cela est, yen suis bien fachee. El 
 inoi aussi. Mr. de Genlis est un homme de merite, n'est-ce pas? Jo 
 le crois. 
 
 Do you go to the play, in the evening? I do net Why? What 
 have you to do ? I have to study. Does your teacher give you any- 
 thing to study in the evening? Yes, he gives us something to do 
 then. At what o : clock do you finish studying? We finish at 9 or 
 10 oclock; in a word (en un), we finish when we are tired, or 
 sleepy, (when we are.) Does he give you anything to write ? 
 Yes, he always gives us ($ 170) the quarter or the half of an 
 exercise to write ; because he says that we know it better then. 
 J)o you know it better when you write it? To be sure. I do (moi) 
 at least. Do you copy your father's notes in the evening? We 
 copy them only in the morning, and afterwards we send them 
 (away). Do the scholars write all they translate ? No, they do not. 
 Do they mend all they tear? They do not. Do they find all 
 they look for? They do. Does the captain find all he looks for 1 
 No, indeed, he does not. Who finds all he looks for? Nobody 
 does. What do they wish to find? They wish to find but their 
 books. Do they not put them away? They do not. Who putfi 
 them away? Nobody does. W T here are they? You know; do 
 you not? No, not at all. The Swiss wants something; do you 
 bring him all he wishes? I bring it to him, when I can find it. 
 Where dost thou take me to? I take thee to the museum. Do you 
 not take me to the wharf? I have neither time nor a mind to take 
 you there, because it is bad weather. 
 
 Do not the merchants put away what they do not sell ? They 
 put away all mey do not sell. At how much does the butcher sell 
 his beef? He sells it at ten cents, or sous. Does the butcher 
 wish to buy your sheep ? He does. What will he give you for 
 it (en) ? He will give me two dollars and a half for it. Is it 
 enough? I think not. If this butcher will not give you more than 
 that, I know another who can give you more. Have our butcher? 
 
126 
 
 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 as many oxen as sheep? No ; they have many more of ihe lattei 
 than of the former. Do they sell as much beef as mutton ? They 
 Bell much beef, but they sell only a little mutton. What is the old 
 cook looking for ? He is looking for a young chicken, which he 
 does not find. Where can it be ? Who knows ? What is the Ger- 
 man doing in his room ? He is reading the journal and feeding hia 
 birds. What does he give them to eat? (what does he feed them 
 with?') He gives them but grain to eat, (feeds them with.} What 
 journals does he read ? He reads those which your cousin lends 
 him. Does not your father lend him some, too? He has three in 
 his desk ; which my father lends him ; but he is not ieadk:g them 
 now. 
 
 John, come here. Here I am. Come with ir>3. Where? Here, 
 near the fire. Near the fire ? No, indeed ! I am warm enough 
 where I am. Take that seat. No, I am going to take this one ; 
 that one is too big for me. Very well; take that little one, if you 
 please. Now that I think of it, go in that apartment to bring me 
 the cake which is in my desk. Which one of your desks ? The 
 French one. I am going to bring it to you, if you please. You are 
 going to give me some; are you not? Yes, to be sure. It is to 
 give you some that I tell you to bring it to me. Have you a knife 
 to cut it? I can cut you a little with my penknife. You cannot 
 cut me enough with your penknife. Do ) r ou want so much? Yes, 
 [ want a great deal; you know that I like it much. Go, then, go, 
 instead of speaking. Will you go with me to the grocer's? Here 
 I am, ready to go. Do you want a basket? Why? To put in it 
 something good, which you are going to buy ; are you not ? Yes, ! 
 am going to buy something good, but the grocer can put it in papei 
 bags. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section. 
 
 To play. To listen. 
 
 Instead of listening of playing. 
 Do you play instead of studying ? 
 I study instead of playing. 
 That man speaks instead of listening. 
 Have you a sore finger ? Thumb ? 
 I have a sore finger. Thumb. 
 
 Has your brother a sore foot ? 
 He has a sore eye. A sore nose. 
 We have They have sore eyes. 
 The elbow. The right elbow, 
 
 The right arm. The left arm. 
 The left knee. The right one. 
 The back. The dog's back. 
 
 Jotter, 1. Ecouter (sans prepcs.j 
 Au lieu d'ecouter de jouer. 
 Jouez-vous au lieu d'etudier? 
 J'&udie au lieu de joucr. 
 Get homme parle au lieu d'ecouter. 
 tAvez-vous mal au doigt ? Au poucet 
 tj'ai mal au doigt. Au pouce. 
 
 tVotre frere a-t-il mal au pied ? 
 til a mal a I'cail. Au nez. 
 tNous avons Us ont mal aux yeux. 
 Le coude. Le coude droit. 
 
 Le bras droit. Le bras gauche 
 
 Le genou gauche. Le droit. 
 Le dos. Le dos du chien. 
 
TWENTY- FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 127 
 
 Has the dog a sore back ? It has. ) 
 
 Is the dog's back sore ? It is (sore). J 
 
 Is your left arm sore ? 
 
 It is (sore). It is not. 
 
 Whose elbow is sore ? Who lias a 
 
 sore elbow? Nobody's. Nobody. 
 Are not the child's fingers sore ? 
 Has not the child sore fingers ? 
 They are He has. 
 Which of his eyes is sore ? The left. 
 IB not my right eye sore? Yes, it is, 
 
 or your right eye is sore. 
 Thifl bed. * Those beds. 
 
 Does the servant make the bed ? 
 He makes the fire instead of making 
 
 the bed. The bedstead. 
 
 To learn, to learn how, learning. 
 
 I do learn, thou learncst, he learns. 
 
 They learn. 
 
 I learn to read, how to read. 
 
 They learn to write, how to write. 
 
 Do they not learn to speak French ? 
 
 Yes, they do. 
 
 Do Arthur and his cousin go out ? 
 
 NeithcrArthur nor his cousin does. 
 
 Le chicn a-t-il mal au dos ? 
 II y a mal. 
 
 Avi'z-vous mal au bras gauche ? 
 J'y ai mal. Je n'y ai pas mal. 
 Qui a mal au coude ? 
 Personne n'y a mal. 
 
 L'enfant n'a-t-il pas mal aux doigts ! 
 
 II y a mal. 
 
 A quel ceil a-t-il mal ? Au gaucho. 
 
 N'ai-je pas mal a 1'ceil droit? Si fait, 
 
 vous y avez mal. 
 Ce lit-ci. Ces ifts-la. 
 
 Le domestique fait-il le lit ? 
 II fait le feu au lieu de faire le lit. I 
 
 bois de lit. 
 Apprendre,* 4, afrrenant, (il prend 
 
 d, avant un infinitif.) 
 J'apprends, tu apprends, il apprend 
 Us apprennent. ($ 144.) 
 J'apprends a lire. 
 Us apprennent a ecrirc. 
 N'apprennent-ils pas a parler 
 
 Frangais ? Si fait, ils 1' apprennent. 
 Arthur et son cousin sortent-ils ? 
 Ni Arthur ni son cousin ne sortent. 
 
 dient 
 
 Le dentiste. Le sofa. 
 
 Le charpentier raccommode-t-il lo 
 
 bois de lit ? 
 
 Npn, parce qu'il a mal au pouce. 
 tA quel pouce a-t-il mal ? Au droit. 
 
 Obs. 57. NEITHER, connected with nominatives, is : Ni....ni ne, 
 
 before the verb. ($ 162, II. G.) The following verb is usually in the plural : 
 
 Neither this scholar nor that one \ Ni cet e*colier-ci ni celui-la n'dtu- 
 studies enough. 
 
 The dentist. The sofa. 
 
 Does the carpenter mend the bed- 
 stead ? 
 
 No. because he has a sore thumb. 
 
 Which of hi3 thumbs h sore ? The 
 right one. 
 
 VlNGT-CINQUIEME EXERCICE. 3me Sec. 
 
 Mettez la date ici, en Frangais. 
 
 An! Mr. Letourneur, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment 
 BO porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde s 7 y porte bien. Personne 
 u'est malade a la maison ; mais chez mon voisin. le ministre, tout 
 10 monde est malade. Qu'ont ils? L'un, a mal de gorge, un autro, 
 mal de tete ; celui-ci a un rhume, celui-la mal aux dents. Alors, ils 
 .10 sont pas tres malades. Non, mais il fait si mauvais, qu'ils souf- 
 !rent beaucoup. Je suis fache d'apprendre qulls soufFrent. Celui 
 qui a mal aux dents ne peut pas dormir. Pourquoi ne va-t-il pa* 
 
128 TWENTY -FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 chez le dentiste? II a peur. En verite ! Qui est-^eJ C'e.it lu 
 jeune Arthur. II a tort d ; avoir peur. II le sait, mais il continue a 
 avoir peur. Qui a le rkume ? C'est George. Prend-il quelque chose 
 pour sonrhume? Oui, sans doute. Qu'est-ce que c'est? Je ne 
 sais pas quoi. 
 
 Does your father go out ? He does not. What does he do ? He 
 writes. Does he write a book? He does. (Dir. 1.) When does he 
 WTite it ? He writes it in the morning, in the evening, and when ho 
 has time. He is at home now, then? To be sure. Do ycu wish 
 to see him? No, because he is too busy. Does the Prussian gc 
 out? No, neither he nor the Swiss goes out. Why do * 4 hey not go 
 cut? They have sore feet. What do they do for their sore feet? 
 They do something, but I cannot tell you what. Does the shoe- 
 maker bring our shoes? He does not. Does he drink? Does he 
 not work? He does not work, because his left knee is sore. Has 
 anybody the toothache ? Yes, this youth has it. Is he not going to 
 the dentist ? No, he is not. Is he going to send for him ? He does 
 not send for him. He does not wish to have the dentist. Has any- 
 body a sore elbow? I believe so. Let me see. (} 154.) Yes, the 
 dentist has a sore elbow. Which of his elbows is sore ? The right 
 or his right, (le.) Who has a sore arm ? I have. Do you not see it ? 
 No, I do not see it. Which of your arms is sore ? The left. Does 
 the minister write now ? No, he cannot yet. Is not his right thumb 
 better? It is better, but not well. 
 
 Do you read your pretty book? 1 do not. I have a sore eye. 
 Which of your eyes is sore ? Do you not see ? My right eye ia 
 sore. Let me see it. See it or look at it. (voyez-le.) Who has sore 
 eyes? The old cooks have sore eyes. What day of the month 
 is to-day? It is the . . . And to-morrow? The . . . What. is the 
 German d Ding in his room ? He is learning to read. Does he 
 not learn to write ? Yes, he does. Does your son learn to trans- 
 late ? He learns to translate, and to copy French. Does the Prus- 
 sian speak instead of listening? He speaks instead of listening. 
 What does he do then ? Afterwards he goes to the farmer's to drink 
 milk. Does the dentist fix (arranger) the teeth of your son? Ho 
 does not. What does he? He makes teeth for the Dutchman, 
 instead of fixing my son's teeth. Who studies instead of playing? 
 A few boys study instead of pla)dng; but a great many play instead 
 of studying. Does our English teacher speak French to us instead 
 of speaking English? He does often. Do the children of the Swiss 
 drink wine in the morning, instead of drinking tea or coffee ? They 
 drink neither wine, tea, nor coffee. 
 
 Can you find the French of: to offer, in this small dictionary? I 
 
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 129 
 
 am going to look for it immediately. Very well ; take the dictionary 
 I have it. Do you find the word in it ? No, I do not. Indeed ! Lei 
 me see. I see why you cannot find it. You are looking for it in the 
 French instead of the English. What is the grocer putting in that 
 paper bag ? I believe he puts in it salt instead of sugar. Is thar 
 salt, Sir 1 ? No, it is sugar, but it looks like (a Fair de) salt, does i 
 not? Yes, it looks like it. ($ 50.) Let me, let me, I want to say 
 Let me taste it, but I do not know the French of: to taste. Will yos 
 tell me, William 7 ? To be sure; it is gouter. Gouter, very well. 
 Now I can say: Let me taste it. Do. (Dir. 1.) Take some and 
 taste it. ( / 54.) Is it sugar or salt 7 ? You are right, it is sugar. Then 
 we can sweeten what we eat and drink. Do his little friends receive 
 more books than copy-books l They receive less of the former than 
 of the latter. Do you sleep in this pretty little bed ? No, I sleep 
 in that large bed. Who sleeps in this one? Sophia does. Do the 
 joiner's boys make sofas, desks, and bedsteads'? Yes, they make 
 sofas, bedsteads, and desks. Do they work as much as the boya 
 of the carpenter? They work quite as much. 
 
 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 26th. 'ringt-sixicme Lc$on, 2(}me, 
 
 YOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 00 you learn French ? Russian ? 
 
 1 Jo. I do not. 
 
 The Polish. Russian. Turkish. 
 Latin. Greek. Arabian, Arabic. 
 Syrian, Syriac. Swedish. 
 Does your son learn Latin ? 
 No, he does not. 
 
 The Pole. The Roman. The Greek. 
 The Swede. The Arab. The Syrian. 
 To speak French. German. 
 
 Obs. 58. After the verb, parler, the 
 Fran$ais,Anglaix, &c., although it is 
 
 Who speaks Swedish ? Not I ; but 
 
 I am studying Polish. 
 This minister reads Latin well, and 
 
 translates Greek and Syrian. 
 Are you an Englishman English ? 
 
 Lc 
 
 Apprenez-vous le Fran$ais! 
 
 Russe? 
 
 Je Tapprends. Je ne 1'apprends pas. 
 Le polonais. Le russe. Le turc. 
 Le latin. Le grec. L'arabe, 
 
 Le syriaque. Le suedois. 
 Votre h'ls apprend-il le latin ? 
 Non, il ne Papprend pas. 
 Le Polonais. Le Remain. Le Grec. 
 Le Suedois. L'Arabe. Le Syrien, 
 Parler Frangais. Parler AllemancL 
 article (Ze) is usually omitted before : 
 used after ail other verbs. 
 
 Qui parle suedois ? Pas moi ; mdt 
 
 j'etudie le polonais. 
 Ce ministre lit bien le latin, t/ C 
 A traduit le grec et le syriaque. 
 Etes-vous Anglais ? 
 
 Obs. 59. Where the indefinite article is used in English to denote quaU 
 ties, the French make use of no article, ft 38, R. 2. p. 469.) 
 
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSOK. (\.\ 
 
 No, Sir, 1 am a Frenchman. (French.) 
 
 Is he a Turk, a Greek, or an Arab ? 
 
 [s your cousin a minister ? He ? 
 
 No, he is an apothecary. 
 
 Crazy, foolish. 
 
 Sure, certain. 
 
 Are they sure they have it ? They are. 
 
 To take away, pull off, throw off. 
 
 Take away, off. 
 
 Well, vsry well ! 
 
 Are you tired and sleepy ? 
 
 I am tired and sleepy. 
 Obs. 60. Change the verb when the 
 
 [ am much obliged to you, (him , them.) 
 You are welcome. It is not worth 
 mentioning. 
 
 Non, Monsieur, je sins Francis. 
 
 Est-il Turc, Grec, ou Arabe ? 
 
 Votre cousin est-il ministrc ? Lui 
 
 Non, il est apothicaire. 
 
 Fou. (plur. s. 92.) 
 
 Sur. (de avant un infinit.) 
 
 Sont-ils siirs de T avoir ? Us en HOH 
 
 surs. 
 Oter. 
 Otez. 
 Eh bien ! 
 IStes-vous fatigue et avez-vous som 
 
 meil ? 
 Je suis fatigue et j'ai sommeii. 
 
 adjective requires a different one. 
 
 Je vous (lui, leur) suis bien obligtf. 
 De ricn. 
 
 EXERCICE. Ire Sec. 
 \^ IVoulliez pas (do not forget) le quantieme en Frangais. 
 
 Quel jour du mois est-ce? C'est le.... De quel mois? Du 
 mois de ... En etes-vous siir ? Oui, j'en suis sur. N'est-co 
 pas aujourd'hui jeudi? Si fait, c'est jeudi. Eh! bien, le papiei 
 dit: jeudi le . . . . N'ai-je pas raison? Si fait, je crois que vous 
 avez raison. Je vous remercie. De rien. Vous etesbien bon. Je 
 BUIS bien aise de savoir le quantieme, parce que j'ai un billet a ecrire. 
 Avez-vous besoin de papier 7 ? Non, je vous suis bien pblige. J'er. 
 ai, je crois; mais je ne puis trouver mon encrier. Eles-vous sui 
 qu'il n'est pas dans votre pupitre ? Je n'en suis pas tout-a-fait sur, 
 mais je crois, qu'il n'y est pas. Laissez-moi voir ( 54) si je ne 
 peux pas 1'y trouver. Cherchez. ( 150.) Eh bien ! L'y trouvez 
 vous ? Non, il n 7 est pas ici. Qui peut Pavoir ? Votre cousin Arthui } 
 je pense. Car il ecrit son devoir da-ns son appartement. Puis-je 
 aller le chercher 1 ? Non; s'il en a besoin, il peut Pavoir. Je vaia 
 ecrire mon billet aveo mon crayon. 
 
 Do you go for anything? I do go for something. What do you 
 go for! I go for some cider. Does your father send fcr anything? 
 He sends for some wine. Does your servant go for some bread' 1 
 He goes for some. For whom does your neighbor send ? He senda 
 for the physician. Does your servant take off his coat in order to 
 make the fire ? He takes it off in order to make it. Do you tako 
 5ff your gloves in order to givo me money ? I do take them off in 
 ttder to give you some. Do you leam Fiench? I do learn it. 
 
TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 131 
 
 Does ycLT brother learn German? He does learn it. Who learns 
 English ? The Frenchman learns it. Do we learn Italian ? You 
 do learn it. What do the English learn ? They learn French and 
 German. Do you speak Spanish ? No, Sir, I speak Italian. Who 
 speaks Polish ? My brother speaks Polish. Do our neighbors speafc 
 Russian T They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. Do you speak 
 Arabic? No, I speak Greek and Latin. What knife have you? I 
 have an English knife. What money have you there ? Is it (est-ce) 
 Italian or Spanish money? It is Russian money. .Have you an 
 Italian hat"- No, I have a Spanish hat. Are you a Frenchman? 
 No, I am an Englishman. Art thou a Greek? No, I am n 
 Spaniard. 
 
 Are these men Germans ? No, they are Russians. Do the Rus- 
 sians speak Polish? They do not speak Polish, but Latin, Greek, 
 and Arabic. Is your brother a merchant ? No, he is a joiner. Are 
 these men merchants ? No, they are carpenters. Are you a cook ? 
 No, I am a baker. Are we tailors? No, we are shoemakers. Art 
 thou crazy ? No, I am not crazy. What is that man ? He is a phy- 
 sician. Does the son of the painter study Greek? No, he studies 
 English before Greek. He is right. Is he going to learn Greek 
 before Latin ? No, he is going to learn Latin before Greek. Does 
 the butcher kill anything to-day ? He kills oxen and sheep. Does 
 he kill some every day? He does. Why does he kill some? He 
 soils the beef and mutton in market. Do you listen instead of doing 
 your task? Yes, I do, because what you say is very pretty. Do 
 they listen also? No, they neither listen nor study, nor copy; but 
 they sleep. They do right, if they are tired and sleepy. Afterwards 
 they can work better. ($ 170.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 To wish. 
 
 I wish you a good morning. 
 
 Does he wish me a good evening ? 
 
 He does. 
 
 What do they wish me ? 
 
 They wish you much pleasure. 
 
 Souhaiter, 1. 
 
 t Je vous souhaitc le bonjour. 
 
 t Me souhaite-t-il le bonsoir ? 
 
 II vous le souhaite. 
 
 Que me souhaitent-ils ? 
 
 Us vous souhaitent bcaucoup in 
 
 plaisir. 
 
 The forehead. I Le front. 
 
 He has a large forehead ) n a le f , 
 
 His forehead is large. (06*. 55.) > 
 
 His forehead is large. (Obs. 55.) 
 He has blue eyes. His eyes are blue. 
 Blue. Black. Large. 
 
 The blue ones. A black one. 
 Round. Square Long. 
 
 II a les yeux bleuai. 
 
 Bleu. Noir. Largo. 
 
 Les blcus. Un noir. 
 
 Rond. Carr<5. Long. 
 
132 
 
 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 A great, or large Knife. A great man. 
 A. French book. An English penny. 
 
 Un grand couteau. Un grand homme. 
 Un livre Fraii9ais. Un sou Anglais 
 
 Obs. 61. Adjectives of nations, colcrs, and shapes, come after the noun, 
 
 A. square handkerchief. A square bed. 
 A round hat. A round tree. 
 
 Russian money. Italian velvet. 
 
 A good American sailor. 
 
 Do the Italians make fine black satin ? 
 
 To listen to something. 
 
 To listen to some one, to somebody. 
 
 Do you listen to what your teacher 
 
 tells you? I do. 
 
 Docs he listen to what I tell him ? 
 He does. He does not at all. 
 
 Do you listen to what I tell you ? 
 , r \> you listen to me ? I do. 
 
 Whom do you listen to ? Nobody. 
 
 Un mouchoir carre. Un lit carre. 
 Un chapeau rond. Un arbre rond. 
 De 1' argent Russe. Du velours 
 
 Italien. 
 
 Un bon matelot Ame'ricain. 
 Les Italiens font-iis de beau satin 
 
 noir ? 
 
 t ficouterquelque chose , (sans prepos.) 
 t couter quelqu'uji. 
 t Ecoutez-vous ce que votre maitrc 
 
 vous dit ? Je 1'ecoute. 
 
 t 6coute-t-il ce que je lui dis ? 
 t II 1'ecoute. II r?e 1'ecoute pas du 
 
 tout. 
 
 t EcoUtz-voufl ce que je vous dis ? 
 t M' ecoutez-vous ? Je vous ecoute. 
 t Qui ecoutez-vous? Personne, 
 
 (* 171, R. 8.) 
 
 t Ecoutez-vous mon frcrc ? 
 t Je ne V ecoute pas. 
 t N'ecoutez-vous pas les homines? 
 t Si fait, je les ecoute. 
 Le theme. Le dernier theme, 
 
 t Prendre, boirc du cafe ou le cafe, 
 t Prendre, boire le the ou du the. 
 
 Do you listen to my brother ? 
 
 I do not (listen to him). 
 
 Do you not listen to the men ? 
 
 Yes, I do (listen to them). 
 
 The exercise. The last exercise. 
 
 To take, to drink coffee. 
 
 To take, to drink tea. 
 
 Obs. 62. With the verbs, to lake and to drink, (le) or (du) may be use<? 
 mdifierantly, with tea, coffee, and chocolate, but not so with other verbs 
 and no .ins. 
 Will you eat bread ? 
 Will he take the bread ? 
 Do you take (drink) tea ? 
 I do. 
 
 Do they drink tea every day ? 
 They do take some every day. 
 My father drinks coffee. 
 The French take coffee after dinner. 
 
 Do they take it at breakfast ? 
 Does her brother take chocolate ? 
 
 Voulez-vous manger dupain ? (not le.) 
 Veut-il prendre le pain ? (not du.) 
 t Prenez-vous (buvez) du (le) the ? 
 t yen prends. Je le bois. 
 
 t Prennent-ils le the tons les jours ? 
 t Us le prennent tous les jours. 
 t Mon pere prend du cafe, 
 t Les Frangais boiveut du cafrf aprei 
 
 dine. 
 
 t Le prennent-ils a dejeuner ? 
 t Son frere prend-il du chocolat ? 
 
 1 Un grand homme means a great man, but un Jwmme grand a tall man 
 A similar distinction is made with respect to the word pauvre, poor, which 
 expresses pitiful, or a want of intellect, when before, and indigent, when 
 ifter the substantive. Ex. Un pauvre homme : a sorrowful (pitiful , miserable 
 man ; and un homme pauvre, an indigent man. 
 
TWENTY -SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 133 
 
 He drinks chocolate every morning. 
 
 Is your exercise easy to-day? 
 
 It is not very difficult, (or it is not) a 
 very difficult one, (or hard one,') but 
 it is long, of it is a long one. 
 
 t II prend le chocolat tous ies matins. 
 Votre theme est-il aise aujourd'hui? 
 II n'est pas irvs-dijficile, mais il eert 
 long. 
 
 TIIME. 2de Sec 
 N'oublicz pas lo quanticme en Fran?ais. 
 
 Mile. Victoria, j'ai Fhorineur de vous saluer, ^ous vous portC2 
 Lien. ifesl-ce pas? Oui, Mr., je me porte bien, merci. Et vous, 
 Mr., comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que j'ai eu le plaisir de 
 vous voir an musee ? Je ne me suis pas tres-bien porte, je voua 
 PHIS tres-oblige. Je suis fiiche de 1'apprendre. Mais vous etes 
 inieux, j'espere? Oui, beaucoup mieux; je peux dire: bien a pre- 
 sent. Mais, je vois M. Guillaume. II va entrer. je crois. J : espere 
 que non. Pourquoi done ? (so?) Ne 1'aimez-vous pas? Non, je 
 ne peux pas le souflrir. Je vois qu'il rrentre pas. Pourquoi ne 
 pouvex-vous pas le souffrir? II est trop ram. N'a-t-il pas raison 
 d'etre vain? N'est-ce pas un joli jeune homme ? Si fait; mais il a 
 tort d ? en etre vain. A present que j'y pense, savez-vous ou esl 
 votre ami, Edouard ? Oui, il est a Burlington, chex un de ses cou- 
 pins. Va-t-il venir ici bientot? Je ne peux pas repondre a votre 
 question \ car, je ne sais pas quand il va venir ici. 
 
 Do you wish mo anything? I wish you a good morning. What 
 does the young Prussian wish me ? lie wishes you a good evening. 
 Where are the children? They are at your father's. Why are 
 they there? To wish him much pleasure. Has the German black 
 eyes? No, he has blue eyes. Who has black eyes? The Spa- 
 niards, Italians, and Turks have black eyes. Has not that Greek 
 small feet, a large forehead, and a big nose? Yes, he has small 
 feet, a large forehead, but he has not at all a big nose. Do you 
 listen to me ? I do, with much pleasure. Does the lawyer lister 
 to the minister? He does listen to him, in order to answer hifn 
 (reply to him.') Are you going to listen to him ? No, I am going to 
 study my exercise instead of listening to him. I do not wish to 
 know what he is going to say. Have you your cousirrs note ? To 
 oe sure I have it. Have you to answer it immediately? Yes, I 
 have to answer it immediately. Are you answering it now 1 Yes 
 1 am ; but my eyes are sore, and I cannot answer it very well. 
 Answer it ( 150, Art. 8) for me; will you? With pleasure, if I 
 jan. Tell me what I have to write. Tell him first why I do not 
 answer, and then tell him that I send him his round hat, his blue coat, 
 his black satin vest, his black velvet shoes, his French fan, his 
 
134 
 
 TWENTY-SEVEKTH IESSON. (I.) 
 
 English gun. and several other articles, by (par) one of my friends 
 who goes where he is. 
 
 Listen to what the professor says, instead of speaking. Now, I 
 listen to what he says. Is the doctor a man of merit? Listen to 
 Lim, and then you can say whether (if, si) he is a man of merit. 
 Do the scholars listen to their English teacher'? Those who are 
 good, listen to him; the bad ones play instead of listening. Ara 
 your gloves French? Yes, they are French gloves. (3. 39.) 
 Do you give me English or Geiman paper?- I give you neither 
 English (repeat papier) nor German paper; but I give you some 
 fine French paper. Do you read Spanish well? ($ 170.) I do not 
 read Spanish well, but German. What book is the soldier reading? 
 He is reading a pretty French book. Do the sailors drink tea or 
 coffee, in the morning? Some take coffee, others drink tea. What 
 do j-ou drink, in the evening? I take tea, then. You take coffee 
 in the morning; do you not? No, I take tea in the morning, also. 
 Do you drink no coffee ? No, I do not drink it any more. Who 
 lakes chocolate ? The Spaniards and Italians drink a great deal of 
 it, Do the French take it also? They take some, but not so much 
 as the others. Do the Turks take tea. chocolate, or coffee ? They 
 take neither tea nor chocolate, but they are very fond of coffee. 
 
 Why so ? Then. 
 
 How goes it ? (First rate.) 
 
 Is it possible ? It is possible. 
 
 It is true, however. Is it true ? 
 la it not true ? It is not true. 
 
 t Pourquoi done ? done. 
 
 Comment va? Celavabien, tres-bien. 
 Est-il possible ? C'est possible. 
 C'cst vrai, cependant. Est-ce vrai I 
 N'est-ce pas vrai? Ce n'est pis vrai. 
 
 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 27th. Vingt-scptieme Legon, 27me. 
 YOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 To' show. 
 
 I show, do show, am showing. 
 
 He does not show. 
 
 Dost thou show ? 
 
 SJiow him the apartment. 
 
 To show something to some one. 
 
 To show one something. 
 
 Do you show me your gun ? 
 
 I do. 
 
 What do you show the man ? 
 
 [ show him my fine clothes. 
 
 Tobacco. Tobacco, (for smoking 
 
 Montr er, I. Faire* voir. 
 
 Je fais voir. Je montre. 
 
 II ne fait pas voir. II ne montre p.ie 
 
 Fais-tu voir ? Montres-tu ? 
 
 IMontreZ'lui > Uappartement. 
 
 \Faites-lui voir} ($150.) 
 
 J Montrer ) quelque chose 
 
 ( Faire voirj a quelqu'un. 
 Me faites-vous voir votre fusil ? 
 Je vous le fais voir, (le montre.) 
 Quo faites-vous voir a Phomme f 
 Je lui montre mes beaux habits. 
 Du tabac. Du tabac a Timer. 
 
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 135 
 
 Snuft: 
 
 To smoke. To snufi', take snufT. 
 
 Do you smoke or take snuff? 
 
 I neither smoke nor snuff. 
 
 You chew ; do you not ? 
 
 [ neither smoke, snuff, nor chew. 
 
 Is it possible ! It is wonderful ! 
 
 To chew. Do not chew, (imperat.) 
 
 The gardener. This valet. 
 
 That concert. To the concert of Mr. . . 
 
 To intend, to intend to. 
 
 Do you also intend to go to the ball ? 
 
 I intend to go to it, (going there.) 
 
 To know, to know how, (bef. a verb.) 
 
 Dost thou know? Dost thou not know? 
 
 Does the child know ? He does not. 
 
 To swim. Swimming. 
 
 Do you know how to swim ? 
 
 Can you swim ? 
 
 Does he read ? He does not know 
 
 how. 
 
 A cigar. A Spanish cigar. 
 To think of, [meaning, what is your 
 
 opinion of.] What do you think 
 
 of the weather ? 
 
 Dutabac en poudre, (a priscr.) 
 
 Fumcr, 1. Pre?idre* du tabac oupristr, 
 
 Fumez-vous ou prisez-vous ? 
 
 Je ne fume ni ne prise. ($ 162, A. 6.} 
 
 Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas ? 
 
 Je ne fume, ni ne prise, ni ne chique, 
 
 Est-il possible! C'est extraordinaire 1 
 
 Chiquer,!. Ne chiquez pas. 
 
 Lc jardinier. Ce valet-ci. 
 
 Ce concert-la. Au concert de M. .., 
 
 Compter, 1, (sans prepos.) 
 
 Comptez-vous aussi aller au bal ? 
 
 Je coirpte y aller. 
 
 Savoir,*3. ($ 14-J, sans prepos.) 
 
 Sais-tu ? Ne sais-tu pas? 
 
 L'enfant sait-il ? II ne sait pas. 
 
 Nager, 1. Nageant. ($ 1 -14, R. 2.) 
 
 > Savez-vous nager ? 
 Lit-il ? II ne sait pas lire. 
 
 Un cigare. Un cigare espognol. 
 
 Penser, 1, de . . . . 
 
 Que penscz-vous du temps ? 
 
 THEME. Ire Sec. 
 N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date en Francois. 
 
 Bon soir, Michel, comment vous portez-vous aujourd'hui? Jo 
 me porte tres-bien, merci. Et vous ; Mr., comment va? Cela va 
 bien, je vous remercie. Vous voyez que je fume un cigare espa- 
 gnol, en voulez-vous un? Non, je vous suis bien oblige ; mais je nc 
 fume plus. Vous chiquez, n ? est-ce pas ? Non, je ne chique pas. 
 Est-il possible ! Vous ne fumez ni ne chiquez ! C'est extraordi- 
 naire ! N'est-ce pas? Oui, en verite ! Mais vous prisez? Non, 
 je ne prise pas. Quoi ! Yous ne chiquez, ni ne fumez, ni ne 
 prisez ? Est-il possible ! C'est possible. Ce que je vous dis est 
 vrai. Mais, pourquoi est-ce extraordinaire ? Parce que tout le 
 monde fume ou prise ou chique. Non pas tout-a-fait. Que pensez- 
 vous du temps ? Je pense qu'il est super-be. Quoi ! Ne fait-il paa 
 *rop chaud pour vous? Pour moi? Non, en verite. 
 
 What does your father want? He wants some tobacco. Will 
 you go for some ? I will go for some. What tobacco does he want? 
 He wants some snuff. Do you want tobacco, (for smoking?) I do 
 not want any; I do not smoke. Do you show me anything? I 
 show you gold ribbons, (des rubans (for.) Does your father show 
 
136 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 his gun to my brother? He does show it him. Does he show hirf. 
 his beautiful birds? He does. Does the Frenchman smoke? Ho 
 does. Do you go to the ball? I go to the theatre instead of going 
 to the ball. Does the gardener go into the garden ? He goes to the 
 market instead of going into the garden. Do you send your valet 
 to the tailor? I send him to the shoemaker instead of sending him 
 to the tailor. Does your brother intend to go to the ball this eve- 
 ning? He does not intend to go to the ball, but to the concert. 
 When do you intend to go to the concert? I intend to go there this 
 evening. At what o'clock? At a quarter past ten. Do you go for 
 my son ? I do go for him. Where is he ? He is in the counting- 
 house. Do you find the gardener whom you are looking for? I 
 do. Do your sons find the gardeners whom they are looking for! 
 They do not. 
 
 Do your friends intend to go to the theatre ? They do. When 
 do they intend to go thither? They intend to go thither to-morrow. 
 At what o'clock ? At half past seven. What does the merchant 
 wish to sell you? He wishes to sell me some pocket-books. Do 
 you intend to buy some ? I will riot. Dost thou know anything? 
 I do not know anything. What does your little brother know? He 
 knows how to read and to write. Does he know French? He does 
 not. Do you know German? I do. Do your brothers know Greek? 
 They do not, but they intend to study it. Do you know English? J 
 do not, but intend to learn it. Do my children know how to read 
 Italian ? They know how to read, but not (mais.non) how to speak 
 it. Do you know how to swim ? I do not know how to swim, but 
 how to play. Does your son know how to make coats ? He does 
 not know how to make any; he is no tailor. Is he a merchant? 
 He is not, (ne Vest pas.) What is he ? He is a physician. 
 We are well. We thank you. i Nous nous portons bien. Nous voui 
 
 remercions. 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 To conduct, co7iducting. 
 I conduct, thou conductest, he con- 
 ducts. 
 
 Conduct him to his uncle's house. 
 Conduct me there also. 
 I will, willingly, with pleasure. 
 To extinguish, put out, extinguishing. 
 Do you extinguish (put out) the fire ? 
 I do not put it out. Put it out. 
 He extinguishes it. Thouputtestitout. 
 To light, to kindle, to fire. 
 
 Conduire,* 4. Conduisant. 
 
 Je conduis, ti conduis, il conduit. 
 
 Conduiscz-le choz son onde* 
 Conduisez-y-moi aussi ($ 58j 
 Volon tiers. 
 
 tei?idre,*4:, eteignant. 
 6teignez-vous le feu ? 
 Je ne 1'cteins pas. Eteigncz-le. 
 II l'e'teint. Tu I'eteins. 
 Allumer, 1. 
 
 The gas. This burner. Which ( Le gaz. Ce bec-ci. Quelbecf 
 burner ? 
 
TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 137 
 
 How many burners do you light ? 
 
 A single gas burner is enough. 
 
 Put out this burner, and light up the 
 
 other. 
 
 Often. As flflrn o.s you. ( 170) 
 As often as I. As often as we, thou. 
 
 Do you often go to the wharf? 
 As often as lie. As often as they. 
 As good as he, we, they, I, thou. 
 Not so often. Less often. 
 
 Do you frequently see my uncle ? 
 I do not see him so often as you. 
 
 X) often as I, as they. 
 Oftcner, more often. Often enough. 
 Oftener than we, than they. 
 Too often. Does he come too often ? 
 r believe he comes too often. 
 To count. To count in French. 
 The number. The numbers. 
 
 Do you know this number in French ? 
 What number ? This, 7<">. 
 
 To pronounce. 
 
 Can you pronounce my name ? 
 I can try. Well, try. VALUE. 
 f .'an T pronounce it ? Yes, pretty 
 well. 
 
 Combicn de bees aliumez-voub ? 
 Un scul bee de gaz est assez. 
 fctcignez ce bec-ci ct allumez Tautru, 
 
 Souvent. Aussi souvent quc vous. 
 Aussi souvent quo moi, quo noua, 
 
 quo toi. 
 
 Allez-vous souvent au quai ? 
 Aussi souvent que lui, qu'eux. 
 Aussi bon que lui, nous, eux, moi, toi 
 J\loins souvc?it. 
 
 Voycz-vous souvent mon oncle ? 
 Je le vois moins souvent que vous. 
 Moins souvent que moi, qu'eux. 
 Plus souvent. Assez souvent. 
 
 Plus souvent que nous, qu'eux. 
 Trop souvent. Vient-il trop souvent 1 
 Je crois qu'il vicnt trop souvent. 
 Compicr. Compter en Fran^ais. 1 
 Le nomlre. Lcs nomlres. 
 Savez-vouscenombre-cienFran$ais? 
 Quel nombre ? Celui-ci. ($ 38.) 
 Prononcer, 1. ( 144, R. 1.) 
 tSavez-vous prononcer mon nom ? 
 Je puis essayer. Eh bien ! essayez. 
 Puis-je le prononcer? Oui, assea 
 
 bien. 
 
 VlXGT-SEPTIEME TlliblE. 2 lie SeC. 
 
 N'oublicz pas d'ecrire la date ici, en Francois. 
 
 Bon jour, Messieurs, comment vous portez-vons ? Nous nous por- 
 tons bien, excepte M. le Blanc, qui n'est pas ici. Va-t-il venir? 
 Non, il ne vient pas anjourd''hui. N'est-il pas assez bien pour venir ? 
 Non, il n'est pas bien du tout. Qu'a-t-il ? Je ne sai^ pas; et le Doc- 
 <eur ne le sait pas mieux que moi, du moins, je le crois. Lui donne- 
 t-ii quelque chose a prendre ? II lui donne quelque chose. Je suis 
 bien aise, Messieurs, d'apprendre que vous vous portez bien. Nous 
 vons remcrcions. Le theme que vous avez est-il difficile ? Moi, je 
 le tronve difficile ; mais ces trois messieurs ne le trouvent pas diffi- 
 rile. O'est vrai, au contraire nous le trouvons aise. Que trouvez-vous 
 difficile ? Je ne peux pas vous le dire en Francais. Vous pouvez 
 
 1 The teacher is invited to make the pupils count in French, by the 
 minute slowly at first ; but when they pronounce the numbers well and 
 tPDinlarly, let them count as fast as they can; not for the mere satisfaction 
 of knowing whether they can count 150 or 170 in a minute, but to give east 
 ind readiness to their utterance. Pupils arc generally fond of this exerciser 
 
38 TWfcN TV- SEVENTH LESSON. ^2.j 
 
 jfisayer, n'est-ce pas? Oui ; sans doute. Ehbien ! essayez. Voiorb 
 liers. No as avons beaucoup de new mots. Ne savez-vous pas lo 
 Francais de: new? Je ne le sais pas. Ces autres messieurs le 
 savent-ils? Moi, je le sais. Nous, nous ne le savons pas. Je vaia 
 vous le dire, c'est nouveau. Pouvez-vous Pecrire ? Moi, non moi, 
 oui n, o, u, v, e, a, u. Comment formez-vcus le pluriel ? Avec x, 
 n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est vrai, vous avez raison. 
 
 Do you wish to drink some cider 1 ? I wish to drink some wine: 
 have you got any? No, I have none, but I will send for some. 
 Has not your uncle got some excellent'? Yes, he has. Conduct 
 me to his house, then. I will, or willingly. Now ? No, not now, 
 but very soon. Do you know how to make tea ? I know how to 
 make it; but I cannot make coffee. Who knows how to make 
 chocolate? I; it is not difficult. Where is your father's dentist 
 going to 1 He is going nowhere. He remains at home to fix the 
 teeth of his uncle. Dost thou conduct anybody ? I conduct no- 
 body. And you, whom do you conduct ? I conduct my son's valet. 
 Where are you conducting him ? I conduct him to the lawyer's 
 office, to show him where it is. Does your valet conduct this German 
 boy? He does. Where to? He conducts him into the garden to 
 speak to our old German gardener. Does ycmr old German gardenei 
 snuff? No, but he smokes. Does he work well ? Yes, he does, for 
 no cannot talk (parler a) with the other servants ; and he has to work. 
 
 Do we conduct any one ? We conduct our children. Where are 
 your children conducting their uncle ? They are conducting him to 
 the museum, to show it to him. Conduct me there also. Come 
 with us. Aie they going to show him the theatre? No, they have 
 no time to show it to him to-day ; they have time only to show him 
 the museum. Can you pronounce the French of : to extinguish? 
 I believe I can. Let us see, (Voyons, 150, Art. 2.) Try. Pronounce 
 
 it is it right? Not quite. Try it again is it better? It 
 
 is right now. I am very glad of it, for it is a difficult word. The 
 imperative is not easy. Do you know it? Yes, I do. Pronounce 
 it, if you please. With pleasure. . ... is it right? Not quite. Pro- 
 nounce the gn like gn, in the English word mignonette, gne 
 
 That is better. Try it again That's right now. Can you 
 
 count a little in French? Not much, but I intend to learn. Will 
 you count? Willingly. Begin. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 No, 55, 6, 7, 8. 
 No ; do not pronounce the h of huit, say: uit. Uit, 9, 10, 11, 12, &c. 
 (Let the teacher correct, in French, the mistakes as they occur, ana 
 note down the number counted in a minute, whenever this exercise 
 let lies place.) 
 
 Eteignez-vous le feu? Je ne Peteins pas, le cuisinier Peteint 
 
TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. ( /.) 139 
 
 Qui allume le feu le matin? Le cuisinier allume son feu, et nion 
 valet allume le mien. Qui allume celui de votre oncle et de votre 
 cousin? Ils n'ont pas de feu dans leurs appartements. parce qu : ilg 
 n'y restent pas. Ou restent-ils] Ils sont avec nous dans le salon 
 nuand ils sont a la maison. Sortent-ils souvent ? Oui, tres-souvent. 
 Vont-ils souvent a Fairmount? Non, pas tres-souvent. Pourquoiy 
 vont-ils? Ils y vont pour yoir la machine hydrauliqiic, (the water 
 works.) Vont-ils plus souvent au musee? Oui ; ils y vont plus sou- 
 vent. Sortons-nous aussi&myfent que nos voisins a gauche ? Nous 
 sortons moins souvent qflfeifx. L'cpicier va-t-il aussi souvent au 
 marche que mon jardinier"?* Je crois qiril y va aussi souvent. Al- 
 lumez-vous le gaz tous les jours'? Oui, nous Fallumons tous les 
 soirs. A quelle heure votre domestique Fallume-t-n"? A present, it 
 allume le premier bee a sept heures et demie et les autres plus tard. 
 A quelle heure Feteint-il ? II Feteint a dix heures et demie dans le 
 Baton, et dans nos appartements, nous Feteignons a onze heures ou 
 a onze heures et demie. 
 
 At the beginning (commencement) of 
 
 the exercise. 
 Unwholesome. It is unwholesome 
 
 weather. 
 Damp, humid. How goes the tooth- 
 
 ache ? 
 
 Since when ? It is better. Excepted. 
 Much obliged. 
 
 Au commencement du theme. 
 Malsain. C'est un temps malsain. 
 
 Humide. Comment va le mal da 
 
 dents? 
 
 Depuis quand ? II va mieux. Excepte. 
 Bien oblige. 
 
 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 28th. Vingt-huitieme Leron, 28mo. 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 Obs. 63. Do and AM, when used to interrogate, in the present tense, may 
 be rendered by EST-CE QUE, which must be used with the first person sin- 
 gular, of those verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would pro- 
 duce an unpleasant or a difficult sound. 1 (Dir. 8.) 
 
 Do 1 wish ? Am I willing ? \ Est-ce que je veux ? 
 
 Am I able ? Can I ? 
 
 Am I doing ? Do I do ? 
 
 What am I doing ? 
 
 Est-ce que je peux ? 
 Est-ce que je fais ? 
 Qu'est-ce que je fais ? 
 
 1 Verbs whose first person singular forms Dnly jne syllable, as : je sens, 
 I feel ; je prends, I take ; je tends, I tend ; jefonds, I melt : or whose last 
 syllable sounds like je, such as : je mange, I eat ; je venge, I revenge ; j* 
 *ingc, I range ; je songe, I dream : and others, such as : funis, I imito ; ji 
 .?, I permit ; j'offre, I offer ; &c., &c. 
 
140 
 
 TWENTY -EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 What do I say ? 
 
 Where am I going to ? 
 
 To whom do I speak ? 
 
 Am I going ? 
 
 Am I coming ? 
 
 You are. Are you coming ? 
 
 Do you tell or say ! 
 
 I do say or tell. He says. 
 
 What does ho not 
 
 Qu'est-ee que jc dis ? 
 
 Ou est-ce que je vais ? 
 
 A qui est-ce que je parle ? 
 
 Est-ce que je vais ? 
 
 Est-ce que je viens ? 
 
 Vous venez. Est-ce que vous venez 
 
 Dites-vous ? Est-ce que vous dites 1 
 
 Je dis. II dit. 
 
 II ne dit pas. Qu'est-ce qu'il nfl 
 
 dit pas ? 
 Qu'est-ce que nous ne disons pas f 
 
 lie does not say. 
 
 say? 
 What do we not say ? 
 
 Obs. 64. Some verbs, however, ending in c mute in the first person sin- 
 gular, present tense, may be used interrogatively in that person, but then 
 they change e mute into e with the acute accent, followed by je. 
 
 Do I speak ? J Parl ^' e ? ( P as si bon ? Me) 
 
 kst-ce que je parle ? 
 
 Do I love ? 
 
 Are you acquainted with that man ? 
 [ am not at all acquainted with him. 
 Is your brother acquainted with him ? 
 He is weR acquainted with him. 
 Do you drink cider ? 
 I begin to drink cider, but my brother 
 
 drinks milk. 
 
 To begin to (commence) bcgin?ii?ig. 
 I begin to like it. 
 Does he begin to study well ? 
 I begin to be cold -to be warm 
 He begins to be ashamed sleepy. 
 We commence to be hungry and 
 
 thirsty. 
 
 Badly, awkwardly. ($ 170.) 
 Does your uncle speak English well ? 
 He speaks it badly. 
 They both write it well. 
 A minute. In a few minutes. 
 
 , mail 
 
 Est-ce que j'aimc ? 
 Connaissez-vous cet homme ? 
 Je ne le connais pas du tout. 
 Votre frere le connait-il ? 
 II le connait beaucoup. 
 Buvez-vous du cidre ? 
 Je commence a boire du cidre, 
 
 mon frere boit du lait. 
 Commencer a, commengant. 
 Je commence a 1'aimer. (a av. 1'ini./ 
 Commence-t-il a bien etudier? 
 Je commence a avoir froid chaud 
 II commence a avoir honte sommeil. 
 Nous commengons a avoir faim et 
 
 soif. ($ 144. R. 1.) 
 
 Mai tres-mal plus mal trop mal. 
 Votre oncle parle-t-il bien Anglais ? 
 II le parle mal. 
 
 Us 1'ecrivent bien Fun et Fautre. 
 Une minute, (fern.) Dans quelqucs 
 
 minutes. 
 VINGT-HUITIEME THME. Ire Sec. 
 
 J&crivez le quantieme au commencement (at the beginning) du theme. 
 
 Que pensez-vous du temps? Nous Je trouvons tTes-desagr cable, 
 II est froid et humide. ' Je ne le trouve pas froid ; mais tres-humice. 
 C'est un temps malsain. Tres-malsain, en verite. II n 7 est paa 
 bon pour ceux qui ont des rhumes. Non, et je suis fache de vo'sia 
 dire que Louis en a un tres-mauvais. Depuis quand? Depuis 
 mercredi. J'ai Phonneur de vous souhaiter le bonsoir. Comment 
 va le mal de dents ? II va mieux, bien oblige. J'en suis bien aisu, 
 
TWENTY- EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 141 
 
 Comment se porte-t-on chez lo general ? Tout le inonde s'y porta 
 bien, excepte* le valet irlandais. QuVt-il ? Nous ne savone pas ce 
 quo c'est. Est-il trts-mal? Oui, il est oblig6 de rester dans son lit. 
 Depuis quand est-il malade ? Depuis plusieurs jours. Cependant 
 le Dr. croit qu'il est un pcu mieux. Quand est-il mieux ; le ma- 
 tin ou le soir ? II est mieux a midi ct plus mal le soir. Qu'a Henri ? 
 D a rnal a un coude. A quel ? Au droit ou au gauche ? Je crois 
 quo c'est au gauche ; mais jo n'en suis pas stir. 
 
 Do I read well ? You do. Do I speak pretty well ? You do. 
 Does my little brother speak French well ? He does. How does 
 he write German ? He writes it badly. Who writes it well ? Our 
 young minister does. Does he write it as well as the Svv'ss dentist' 1 
 They both write it well, very well. I do not know who v;rites the 
 best. Do we speak badly ? You do not. Do I drink too much . 
 You do. Am I able to make hats'? You are not; you are not a 
 hatter. Am f able to write a note ? You are. Am I doing my 
 exercise well? You are. What am I doing 1 ? You are doing 
 exercises. What is my brother doing 1 He is doing nothing. 
 U'hat do I say? You say nothing. Do I begin to speak? You 
 do begin to speak. Do I begin to speak well? You do not 
 begin to speak well, (d lien parler^ but to read well, (mais d lien 
 lire.'] Where am I going to? You are going to your friend's. Is 
 he at ho*ne ? Do I know ? Am I able to speak as often as the son 
 of our neighbor? He is able to speak oftener than you. Can I 
 work as much as he? You cannot. Do I read as often as you? 
 You do not, but you speak oftener than I. Do I speak as well 
 (aussi lien) as you? You do not speak as weil as I. Do I go to 
 your house, or do you come to mine ? You come to mine, and I 
 go to yours. When do you come to mine? Every morning, at 
 half past six. 
 
 Do you know the Russian whom I know ? I do not know the 
 one you know, but I know another. Do you drink as much cider 
 as wine? I drink less of the latter than of the former. Does the 
 Pole drink as much as the Russian? He drinks just as much. Do 
 the Germans drink as much as the Poles? The latter drink more 
 than the former. Dost thou receive anything? I do. What dost 
 thou receive? I receive some money. Does your friend receive 
 books? He does. What do we receive ? We receive some cider. 
 Do the Poles receive tobacco ? They do. From whom (de qui) 
 do the Spaniards receive money? They receive some from tho 
 (dcs) English, and from the (des) French. 
 
 Comptez-vous tous les jours en Franc, ais? Oui ; nous comptons, 
 N-aimez-voiis pns a comptor? (Let the pupil give his or her own 
 
142 
 
 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 2. 
 
 answer.) Combien comptez-vous dans une minute 'a minute) ! Jti 
 compte 125. Et vous? Moi, je ne compte pas tant. Je ne oompte 
 que 98. Et vous, et votre cousin Armandl Nous comptons 128 
 Est-ce plus que lui? Oui ; c'est plus. Combien de plus? Trois da 
 plus. (30 1 .) C'est vrai, vous avez raison. Et vous, combien comp- 
 tez-vous de moins qu ; euxl Je compte trois de moins. Combien 
 de plus que lui ? Je compte 27 de plus que lui. C'est beaucoup, 
 n 7 est-ce pas? C'est assez, du moins. 
 
 A degree, 32, zero, 75, 100, 212o. 
 Thank God. 
 
 Un degre, 32, zero, 75, 100, 213 
 Dien merci. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 Avant, (de, avant un infinitii.) 
 Parlez-vous avant <f ecouter ? 
 J'ecoute avant de repondre. 
 
 Obs. 65. As speak and listen have you for nominative, dispense with the 
 bccond you, and use the infinitive mood after the preposition. (Rule 3.) 
 
 Before, (previous to.) (R. 1.) 
 Do you speak before you listen ? 
 I listen before I answer. 
 
 Does he go to market before he 
 breakfasts ? 
 
 To Iredkfast. To eat breakfast. 
 
 He goes (there) before he writes. 
 
 Do you take oif your stockings be- 
 fore you take off your shoes ? 
 
 To depart, set out, start ; departing. 
 
 When do you intend to depart ? 
 
 I set out to -morrow for Paris. 
 
 I depart, tliou startest, he sets out. 
 
 Do they go to see their uncle before 
 they start for Charleston? They do. 
 
 To wet, to moisten, to damp, wetting. 
 
 Wet, damp, (adjectives.) 
 
 Are your shoes wet ? 
 
 Yes, they are quite wet. 
 
 Va-t-il au marche avant de dejeuner ! 
 
 Dejeuner, 1. 
 
 II y va avant d'ecrire. 
 
 Otez-vous vos bas avant d'oter voa 
 souliers ? 
 
 Partir,* 2; partant. 
 
 Quand comptez-vous partir ? 
 
 Je pars demain pour Paris. 
 
 Jepars, tupars, il part. 
 
 Vont-ils voir leur oncle avant de par- 
 tir pour Charleston ? Us y vont. 
 
 Mouiller, 1. Mouillant. 
 
 Mouille, (sing.) Mouilles, (plur.) 
 
 Vos souliers sont-ils mouille's ? 
 
 Oui, ils sont tout mouilles. 
 
 Obs. 66. Tout, quite, being an adverb is invariable, that is, does not taka 
 an s. 
 
 To dry, to get to dry. 
 
 I dry, thou driest, be dries. ($ 144, 
 
 R. 5.) 
 Dry your shoes. 
 
 Take a seat near the fire and dry 
 
 your shoes and feet. 
 It is very warm ; very cold. 
 IK use. Much, commonly, greatly, 
 
 used. 
 Almost, all, always, too much. 
 
 Se'cher, 1. Faire secher. 
 
 Je seche, tu seches, il seche. 
 
 Sechez vos souliers (better) faite? 
 
 secher, &c. 
 Prenez un siege pres du feu, et fnite 
 
 secher vos souliers et vos pieds. 
 II fait grand chaud ; grand froid. 
 En usage. En grand usage. 
 
 Fr-squc, prn.sque tout, toujours, trcp 
 
TWKNTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 143 
 
 ViN<;r-nriTiMK TIIME. 2de Sec. 
 fecrivez le jour dii niois au commencement du therne. 
 
 Mr., nous vous souhaitons le bonjour, ct nous esperons que vou* 
 T/ous portez bien. Je vous suis bien oblige, Messieurs, et je voisavec 
 plaisir quo vous avex 1'air tie vous bien porter. Nous nous portons 
 bien, Dii-u incrci, (thank God,) mais nous avons grand chaud, (very 
 wajm.) Je le crois, car, il fait grand chaud. A quel degre est le 
 tlxrmomctre ? Le mien est a 80 ; mais celui du voisin est a 82$. 
 Vo;is parlez du thermometre de Fahrenheit, n 7 est-ce pas? Oui, car 
 c'est ici le seul en grand usage. ^Si ce temps continue je ne peux 
 pas rester ici. Oil allez-vous? A Cape May. Quand partez-vous ? 
 Je pars mardi ou jeudi. Partez-vous seul? Non, je pars avec mon 
 
 in. Pourquoi part-il avec vous? Farce qu'il est malade. Qu'a- 
 t-ii? II a pour d'avoir le tic douloureux. Le tic douloureux! Je 
 
 bien fuche de Tapprendre. Nous en sommes tous fachcs. Je 
 
 led -'>nt-ils mouilles? Je crois que non. S'ils 1*> 
 
 sont, je peux vous en preter d'autres, et vous pouvez faire secher let 
 
 morci. Vous etes bien bon. II est 8j heures et Louis 
 
 pas encore ici. Ce matin il n'est pas ponctuel comme a Fordi 
 
 iidire. Mon habit est tout mouille et mon gilet aussi. Changez Ie3 
 
 et faites>les secher. Ou puis-je les faire secher? Donnez-les au 
 
 domestique pour les mettre pres du feu. Les souliers et les bas de 
 
 ce petit enfant sont motiilles. Jean, otez-les et faites-les secher; car 
 
 le pauvre enfant commence a avoir froid. Oui, Mile. 
 
 Do I receive as much Spanish money as American ? You receive 
 more of the la^er than of the former. Do I receive as many people 
 (out ant de monde} as the Doctor? You do. Who receives more 
 than he? more than \ve ? The apothecary does. From whom (de 
 qui) do your children receive books? They receive some from me, 
 (de moi,) and from their friends. Do the English receive as much 
 Turkish as American cotton? They receive more American than 
 Turkish cotton. Our New Orleans merchants receive more French 
 than English cloth, do they not? I believe they do. What gloves 
 do we receive? W r e receive French gloves. How many books 
 does your neighbor lend you? He lends me three more. (30 1 .) 
 When does the foreigner intend to depart? He intends to depart 
 to-day. Depart with him, can you not? Can I not? No, indeed; 
 and you know very well that I am not ready. But you can soon 
 be ready. Do you think so? (le?) To be sure I do. Does thfl 
 Swede depart soon ? He departs in a few minutes Does he depart 
 alone ? No, he takes a valet with him, because he does not speak 
 English well enough to go alone. He is /ight. Dost thou set ou! 
 
144 TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 to-morrow ? Dost thou intend to go with me? No, for we do cot 
 intend to depart before 10 days. Then I have to bid you adieu. 
 
 Do the Clintons (Les Clinton, ($ 140, Art. 5) answer you imme- 
 diately when you write to them? They usually answer me imme- 
 diately, when they are not sick. Well ; write to them to know if I 
 can go to their house on Saturday, and tell them to answer directly. 
 Are you not going to read the dentists' note before you answer it? 
 Yes, I am reading it now. Ah ! pardon me, (pardonner.) Does 
 this Irish servant of yours (votre domestique iiiandais, 108) sweep 
 yocr apartment before he makes your bed? No, he makes the bed 
 before he sweeps the room. Dost thou drink before thou goest out 7 
 I do. Do you like to go to market before you eat breakfast' 1 I do 
 not, for I am almost Always sick when I do it. Henry, put on your 
 shoes and stockings. No, indeed, I intend to put on my stockings 
 before I put on my shoes. Dost thou read first and translate after- 
 wards? Yes, I do so; but I translate the exercise first, and write it 
 afterwards. You do well ; that is right. Do you g~ to the Pole's 
 house before you breakfast? Yes, I do. At what o'clock do your 
 children breakfast ? They breakfast at seven o'clock. Do you take 
 snuff before breakfasting ? No, but I smoke after breakfast. Does 
 your son sjnoke also after breakfast? He does not smoke at all, and 
 I am glad of it. Does he chew or snuff? No, he does neither. 
 
 TWENTY-NINTH LESSON, 29ih.Vingt-neuvieme Logon. 29w 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 
 The French have two kinds of comparison ; that of equality, formed by 
 autant de before nouns, and aussi, before adjectives or adverbs, and qui 
 after them ; (1G 1 , 2? 2 .) and that of inequality, formed by plus or moins, 
 before, and que after the same parts of speech. The superlative is formed 
 by prefixing to the comparative, not only the defim'e article le, Ics, but any 
 of those which we have called articles ($ 1), mo?i, mes, &c. ce, eel, ces. 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 Great, greater, the greatest. 
 
 Small, smaller, my smallest. 
 
 Rich, richer, these richest. 
 
 Poor, poorer, my poorest. 
 
 Learned, more learned, the most 
 
 learned. 
 Quickly, quicker, the quickest. 
 
 Posit if. Comparatif. Superlatif. 
 Grand, plus grand, le plus grand. 
 Petit, plus petit, monpluspetit. 
 Riches, plus riches, cesplus riches- 
 Pativres. pluspauvres, mes plus pau- 
 
 vres. 
 Savant, plus savant, le plus savant 
 
 Vite, plus vite, le plus vite. 
 
 Dften, more often, most often j Souvent, pliissouvent.le plus sol- 
 vent. 
 
TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 145 
 
 Fl 18 book is small, that is smaller, 
 and this is the smallest of all. 
 
 This hat is large, but that i larger. 
 Iff yoar hat as large as mine ? 
 
 ft is larger than yours. 
 
 It is not so large as your*. 
 
 B'jlky, less bulky, the least bulky. 
 
 Fine, less fine, the least fine. 
 
 Sfowly, not so slowly, the least 
 
 slowly. 
 
 Good, not so good, the least good. 
 Are our neighbor's children as good 
 
 as ours ? (good is sage when applied 
 
 to children.) 
 
 They are better than ours. 
 They are not so good as ours, they 
 
 are the least good of all. 
 
 Ce livre-ci est petit, celui-la estplu* 
 
 petit, et celui-ci est le plus petit 
 
 dc tous. 
 Ce chapeau-ci est grand, mais cclui 
 
 la est plus grand. 
 Votre chapeau est-ii aussi grand qu 
 
 le mien ? 
 
 II est plus grand que le votre. 
 II est moins grand que le votre. 
 Gros, moins gros, le moins groa. 
 Beau, moins beau, le moins beau. 
 Lentement, moins ientement, la 
 
 moins lentement. 
 
 Sage, moins e?ge, le moms sage. 
 Les enfants de notre voisin sont-ila 
 
 aussi sages que les notres? 
 
 Us sont plus sages que les notres. 
 Us sont moins sages que les notres, 
 ce sont les moins sages de tous. 
 
 Obs. 67. To express the absolute superlative, that is, the highest degree^ 
 without comparison, the French, like the English, use one of the adverbo, 
 tres, fort, lien, very; extrcmement, extremely ; wfmimcnt, infinitely. 
 
 Un tres-beau sofa. De ires-beaux 
 
 sofas. 
 Un tres-joli couteau. Tres-bien, 
 
 fort bien. 
 
 Etre accoutume ii 
 
 Y etre accoutume. ($ 50.) 
 
 Pourquoi parlez-vous plus en Angluia 
 
 qu'en Francois ? 
 Parce que nous y sommes accou- 
 
 tume's. 
 Que sont-ils accoutumes a prendio 
 
 Je matin et le soir ? 
 Us sont accoutumes a prendre <lu 
 
 cafe, le rnatin, et du the, le soir. 
 A quoi cst-ce que je suis accoutume ? 
 II n'y est pas encore accoutume*. 
 
 A very fine sofa. Very fine sofas. 
 A very pretty knife. Very well. 
 
 To be used to .... 
 
 To be used to it. 
 
 Why do you speak more in English 
 
 than in French ? 
 Because we are used to it. (Obs. 48.) 
 
 he 
 
 What are they used to take in 
 
 morning ant. evening ? 
 They are used to take coffee in the 
 
 morning and tea in the evening. 
 What am I used to ? 
 He is not yet used to it. 
 
 VINGT-NEUVI&ME TnihiE. Ire Sec. 
 Mettez le quantieme du mois ici en Fran^ais. 
 
 Fa{;es-nous des questions anjourd'hui, s'il vous plait. Voiontiern 
 Qael temps fait-il? Qui peut me repondre ? Nous pouvons tons 
 voiis repondre. Commencez, M. Legris. Vous voulez savoir quo T 
 oernps il fait?- Ouij M., s'il vous plait. Je vais vous le dire avea 
 jrrand plaisir, le plus grand plaisir du monde. Dites-le done, (then.) 
 
146 TWENTY -NINTH LESSON, (i./ 
 
 Laisaez-mo; voir si j ? ai le Francais de unwholesome. Oh ! oui; nom 
 I'avons. Alors, il fait un temps humide et malsain. Oui, voua 
 avez raison, il fait un temps humide et malsain, depuis deux on 
 trois jours. N ; est-ce pas extraordinaire? Si fait; c'est extraordi- 
 naire, car le temps change tres-souvent. Mais il ne fait pas froid. 
 Au contraire. il fait chaud. II fait presque toujours chaud quand il 
 fkit humide, n'est-ce pas? Oui, sans doute. Ce temps humide 
 n'ost pas bon pour le rhume du petit Robert, qu en pensez-vous 1 
 Je pense que non, et j ? en suis fache, car c'est un bon petit garcon 
 Comment se porte le frere du docteur? II se porte tres-bien a pre- 
 sent. Et comment va le vieux cuisinier du general? II va mal, 
 II est presque toujours malade, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, mais ce n'est pa? 
 extraordinaire, car il est tres-vieux. 
 
 Are you taller (grand) than I? I am taller than you. Is you* 
 young brother taller than you? No ; but I believe that he is just as tall. 
 Is thy leather hat as bad as my father's? It is better, but not so 
 black as his. Are the clothes (les habits) of the Italians as line as 
 those of the Irish? They are finer, but not so good. Who muke.s 
 the finest gloves 2 The French make them. Who makes the 
 finest cloth? The French and Spanish do. Who has the finest 
 horses? Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine, but those of our 
 friends are the finest of all. Why do the French take wine at 
 breakfast ? Because they are used to it. See, those poor children 
 .have neither shoes nor stockings; are they not cold? No, indeed! 
 they are used to it. Am I used to write quick or slow ? You aro 
 used to write slowly; but your cousin is used to write very quick. 
 Who is more learned than this old Prussian ? I do not know who 
 JS more learned than he. Is the minister more learned than the 
 druggist? Yes, he is more learned than the druggist; but the law- 
 yer is the mot learned of all. Who is the richest merchant here? 
 
 Mr. is the richest. Do we read more books than the Dutch? 
 
 We read more (of them) than they, but the Prussians read (of them, 
 more than we, and the Russians read the least, (le moins.) 
 
 Hast thou a finer garden than that of our physician ? I have a 
 finer one than he. Have the Americans a finer telegraph than the 
 other nations ? They have the finest of all. Are the shawls of this 
 merchant larger and finer than those of that one ? They are larger, 
 but not so fine. Have we as fine children as our neighbors? We 
 have finer ones. Is the weather as bad as yesterday? No, it is not 
 BO bad ; but it is warmer, and I am not sorry for it. I believe it, foi 
 I know that you like the heat. Do the French speak more quickly 
 than the Erglish, Irish, Scots, and other nations? I believe not 
 Some (quelques mis) speak quickly, but others speak slowly. ( 38.1 
 
T WEN T V- N I NTH L E 3 S N. (2.) 
 
 147 
 
 * Are your clothes as wet as mine or his? Yours are more wei 
 than mine, but his are not wet at all. Do you depart for Washing- 
 ton, soon? I start to-morrow. Do you go alone? No. cousin 
 William starts with me. When do you set out? We set out at 3 
 o'clock. George, go for some cigars; these gentlemen want some 
 to smoke. Yes, Sir: but before going, I have to put my shoes on. 
 They are wet, and they are near the fire to dry. Which of these 
 two children is the better? (sage?) The one (X. pa. 43) who studies 
 is better than the one who plays. 
 
 Section. 
 
 Adjectifs Irrtguliers. 
 Bon, lu-iileur, mon mcilk-nr. 
 
 Mauvais, pire, le pire. 
 
 Petit, moindre, In moindre. 
 
 Adi-erbes Irrtgvliers. 
 Bien, mieuT, le mieux. 
 
 Irregular A'ljec'.i 
 
 Good, better, my best. 
 
 Bad, ^, the worst. 
 
 .:!, little, less, the l< 
 
 Irregular Adverbs. 
 
 Well, better, the best. 
 
 Bad, worse, the worst. 
 
 Little, the least. 
 Much, mi : the most. 
 
 Mai, pi?. 'e pis. 
 
 moins, le moins. 
 Beaucoup, plus, le plus. 
 
 Obs. C3. We may with equal correctness say : plus mauvais, plus mal 
 plus petit, but never plus bon, plus lien, plus put. 
 
 Obs. G9. Never use pire immediately before a noun. Do not say : ur 
 pire chien ; but, un plus mauvais chien. Votre chien est pire que celui-ci 
 is correct, but: plus mauvais, is to be preferred. 
 109j 
 
 , (to t/V/o/71 ?) ( 
 
 ..is? 
 It is. It is mine hers > 
 
 A qui ? (Pronomposs. non rclatif.) 
 A qui est ce chapeau-ci ? 
 C'est. C'est le mien le sien le 
 votre. ($ 104, &c.) 
 
 It is my uncle's dictionary, 
 
 It is the dictionary of my uncle. 
 
 It is my uncui's. 
 
 Whose kid gloves are those ? 
 
 They are ours thine theirs. ($ 39.) 
 
 They arc the ch'.'dren's cloaks. 
 
 Who has the besi rice ? 
 
 Whose lice is the nest ? 
 
 The grocer has it. It is the grocer's. | L'epicier 1'a. C'est celui dc I'epiciur, 
 
 Who has the smallest feet? 
 
 Whose tee' are ihe smallest ? 
 
 Miss C. has the final. cst. 
 
 Miss C.'s are. 
 
 That of my .ather is the '-.nest. 
 
 Whose ribbon & the handsomer, 
 yours or min^ ? Yours is, cso left 
 
 C'est le dictionnaire de mon oncle. 
 
 A. qui sont ces gants de chamois ? 
 Ce sont les votrcs, les tiens, les leurs* 
 Ce sont les manteaux des enfants. 
 
 Qui a le meilleur riz ? 
 
 Qui a Jeg plug petitg pieds ? 
 
 OUt.; 
 
 Mile. C. a les plus petits. 
 
 Ce sont ceux de Mile. C. 
 
 Celui de mon pere est le plus Lean. 
 
 Quel ruban est le plus beau ? L 
 
 votre ou le mien? Le 
 
 Z'est. 
 
 Okx. 70. ,SV/, m r-m.iar scmence?, whether expressed or not, is re iderod 
 Hi Fr. 
 
148 
 
 TWENTY-NINTH LESSC N, (2.) 
 
 Ce garcon lit-il micux quo I'lioinrae' 
 
 II le fait. II ne le fait pas. 
 
 Ce grain-ci est-il meilleur que la 
 
 dernier ? 
 
 II rest. II est beaucoup meilleur. 
 Les Suedois ecrivem ils moins qus 
 
 les Polonais ? 
 Ils dcrivent moins que les autre 
 
 nations. 
 Qui fait le plus d'argent ? Le bou 
 
 langer, le boucher, ou le laitier? 
 Ils en font tous beaucoup. 
 Votre jardinier est-il bon ? 
 II Test, mais son cousin ne Test pan 
 Voici. Le voici. 
 
 En voici. 
 
 Ou sont les gros couteaui ? 
 Les voici. 
 
 Does that boy read better than the 
 
 man ? 
 
 He does so. He does not (do so). 
 Is this grain better than the last ? 
 
 [t is. It is much better. 
 
 Do the Swedes write less than the 
 Polea ? 
 
 They writs less than the other na- 
 tions. 
 
 Who makes most money ? The 
 baker, ths butcher, or the milkman ? 
 
 f hey all make a great deal. 
 
 (B your gardener good, or a good one f 
 
 He is, but his cousin is not. 
 
 Here is. Here he is or it is. 
 
 Here is some. 
 
 Where are the big knives ? 
 
 Here they are. 
 
 YiXGT-Nr.uvii\ME TiiibiE. 2de Sec. 
 Ici, n'oubliez pas de mcttre le quantieme, en Frangais. 
 
 Vous avez Pair d'avoir froid. Fait-il froid dehors ? Oui, il fail 
 grand froid. A quel degre est le therm ometre ? Je ivai pas de ther- 
 mometre; je ne sais pas a quel degre il est. Mais j'ai froid, <;a, 
 ( 38 7 N. 6.) je le sais. Comment so porte le medecin ? II se porto 
 plus mal. Son rhume est-il pire? Oui, il Pe>t. Quelqivun. a-t-ii 
 mal de tete ? Moi, je Pai un peu ; avez-vous quelque chose a me don- 
 ner? Oui, j'ai quelque chose qui est tres-bon pour le mal de tete. 
 Donnez-le-moi. Je Pai dans monportefeuille. Ldissez-moi lecher 
 cher. Tres-bien, cherchez-le et donnez-le-moi. Je Pai a present. 
 Le voici. Prer.ez-le. Je Pai. Lisez le papier pour savoir comment 
 le preparer (to prepare) et le prendre. Je vous suis bien oblige. Je 
 vais le lire tout de suite pour le preparer et le prendre. Preparez-lo 
 bien. Je vais essayer. Est-ce difficile a preparer? Non. ce n'est 
 pas difficile a preparer. Adieu: je vais Parranger. Adieu, adieu. 
 
 Whose big book is this? It is mine. Whose hat is that? It ia 
 my father's. Is your baker good? (or a good one?) He is good, 
 but yours is better ; and that of the Prussian is the best of all our 
 bakers. Take some pretty velvet shoes. I have very pretty ones, 
 but my brother has still prettier ones than I. From whom (de qui) 
 does he receive them? He receives them from his best friend in 
 Paris. Is your wine as good as mine? Here is some ; taste it. anc. 
 then you may know,. and tell me. Is it better, cr as good, or worse 1 
 tt is better. Does your merchant sell good knives? He sells the 
 best. Do we not read more books than the Irish 7 Yes, we read 
 
THIRTIETH LESSOJN. (I.) 149 
 
 more than they, but the Russians read (of them) more than we, and 
 the Prussians read the most. Why do they read the most ? Because 
 they wish to be the most learned. Do the merchants sell more 
 sugar than coffee ? They sell more of the latter than of the former. 
 Does your shoemaker make as many shoes as mine? He makes 
 more of them than yours. Can you swim as well (aussi lien) as 
 my son ? I can swim better than he, but he can speak French better 
 than I. Does he read as well as you? He reads better than I. 
 Does the son of your neighbor go to market? No, he remains at 
 nome ; he has sore feet. Do you learn as well as our gardener's 
 
 .' I learn better than he, but he works better than I. Whose 
 
 gun is the finest? Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is still 
 
 : ours is the finest of all. Has any one finer children than 
 
 you ? No one has finer ones. Does your son read as often as I ? 
 
 lie i' <T than you. Does my brother speak French as often 
 
 ;is often as I. Do I write as much 
 tfl more than I. Do our neighbor's children read 
 
 :nan as often as we? We do not read it so often as they. Do 
 we Lfl they? They write oftener than we. To 
 
 whom do they write? ite to their friends. Do you read 
 
 Ki.^li.-h !< K)ka ' We read French books instead of reading English 
 
 ill. Ml LESSON, SOth. Trentiemc Lc$on, 30me. 
 urtr. Ire Section. 
 
 To believe, belli. 
 
 I believe, thou believcst, he believes. 
 
 I believe that you know it. 
 
 I believe you know nothing of it. 
 
 To put, put on. Put, put on, (impera.) 
 
 Do I put on your kid gloves ? 
 
 Croire,* 4, croyant. 
 
 Je crois, tu crois, il croir. 
 
 Je crois que vous le savez. 
 
 Je crois que vous n'en savez rien. 
 
 Mettre. (25 ! .) Mettez, (impera.) 
 
 Est-ce que je mets vos gants cle c:-a 
 
 mois? 
 
 Does he not put on ? is he not putting?! Est-ce qu'il ne met pas? Ne met-i! 
 
 pas? 
 
 He pu' He does not. 
 
 What do you put on t I put this on. 
 Do they put on anything more ? 
 
 II met. II ne met pas. 
 
 Que mettez-vous? Je mets ceci. 
 Mettent-ils quelque chose dc plus ? 
 
 Obs. 71. We saw in (Oltt. 7,) that : quelque chose; ne . . . .rien and que I 
 require dc before the following adjective ; now we add : when a noun, pro- 
 noun, number, or adjective precedes an adverb or past participle, the prepo 
 fition de (as a connecting link) must be put before the adverb. 
 
150 
 
 THIRTIETH LESSON (1.? 
 
 They put nothing more. 
 
 Do you go out 1 I do. 
 
 Do you not put on your big shoes I 
 
 Yes, I do. I do not go out vrithout 
 
 putting them on when the weather 
 
 is bad. 
 
 Without you, me, him, them, us, thee. 
 Does he go out without taking his 
 
 umbrella and his cloak ? 
 He does not go out without taking 
 
 them. 
 
 To rain. Does it rain ? It does. 
 IB the weather cloudy? It is (so). 
 Do I go out when the weather is 
 
 cloudy ? Neither you nor we go 
 
 out. 
 
 Early. Early enough. 
 
 A.S early as you, as they. 
 He goes out as early as we. 
 Too soon, too early. 
 Too little, (adv.), too small, too great. 
 You speak too little, and he too much. 
 Together. We go out together. 
 Later than you. 
 [ go out later than you. 
 Do you go to the play as early as I ? 
 
 I go thither earlier than you. 
 
 Ea'lier, (sooner.) 
 
 Does your father go thither earlier 
 
 than I ? 
 Try *o go as soon as he 
 
 Us ne mettent rien de vlu*. 
 Sortez-vous? Je sors. 
 Nemettez-vouspasvosgrossouliure,? 
 Si fait, je les mets. Je ne sors pa 
 
 sans les mcttre quand il fait mau 
 
 vais temps. 
 
 Sans vous, moi, lui, eux, nous, tci. 
 Sort-il sans prendre son parapluie tt 
 
 son manteau? (R. 1.) 
 II ne sort pas sans les prendre. 
 
 Pleuvoir* 3. Pleut-il? II plati. 
 Le lemp>s cst-il convert ? II Test. 
 Est-ce que je sors quand le temps 
 
 est couvert ? Ni vous ni nous ne 
 
 sortons. 
 
 DC boniit heure.. D'assez bonne heure. 
 D J aussi bonne heure que vous, qu'eutf . 
 II sort d'aussi bonne heure qu nous. 
 Trop lot, de trop bonne heure. 
 Trop peu, trop petit, trop grand. 
 Vous parlez trop peu, et lui trop. 
 Ensemble. Nous sortons ensembld. 
 Plus tard que vous. 
 Je sors plus tard que vous. 
 Allez-vous au spectacle d'aussi bonne 
 
 heure que moi? 
 J'y vais plus tot (de meilleure heure) 
 
 que vous. 
 
 Plus tot, (de meilleure heure.) 
 Votre pere y va-t-il plus tot que moi, 
 
 (de meilleure heure que moi ?) 
 Essay ez d'y aller aussi tot que lui. 
 
 TRENTIJ&ME TII&ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 N T oubliez pas la date ici. 
 
 Bon jour, M., rous vous portez bien, j'espere ; mais pourquoi avez- 
 vous un parapluie ? Pleut-il ? Non, il ne pleut pas encore ; maia 
 le temps est couvert, tres-couvert, et quand il Test, je ne sors pas 
 wins prendre un parapluie. Vous avez raison de le faire, car il esi 
 tres-desagreable d'etre dehors sans parapluie, quand il pleut. No 
 p!eut-il pas a. present ? Si fait, je crois qu'il commence a plenvoir. 
 Oui, c'est vrai. II commence a pleuvoir, mais pas beaucoup eneoru. 
 Moi, je suis bien aise de voir lapluie, (the rain.) car nous avons trop 
 de poussiere. C'est vrai, vous n'avez pas tort; il fait beaucoup trop 
 de poussiere. N 7 avez-vous pas mal aux yeux quand il fait de ia 
 poussieie ? Si fait, j'y ai souvent mal alors. Pas moi. Comment 
 
THIRTIETH LESSON. (1.) 151 
 
 Be porte-t-on chez vous ? Tout le monde y est ussoz bie.i. Per- 
 Bonne irest malade, excepte notre domestique. Qu'a-t-il? li a un 
 gros rhume et un peu mal aux dents. II pleut, mais il ne fait pas 
 froid ; n'est-ce pas ? C'est vrai, il ne fait pas froid, mais tres-humide 
 et malsain. Nous le croyons comme vous. Quand ii fait froid ct 
 humide, mettez quelque chose de plus. Et quand il fait cha - ad r 
 quelque chose de moins, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, c'est cela. C'est \e 
 plus prudent. 
 
 Do you put on another coat in order to go to the play ? I put on 
 my Frencli coat to go. Do you put on your kid gloves before you 
 put on your big shoes ? I put on my overshoes before I put on my 
 kid gloves. Does the lawyer put on his round hat before he puts 
 on his blue coat 7 ? He puts on his coat first, instead of putting on 
 his lound hat. Is he not right in doing so? Yes, he is. Do ycu 
 go out early, every morning V VTeSj we do. Do you go out when 
 your son does'? Yes, we go out together. Early? No, not very 
 early. \Ve breakfast first. Do you breakfast together? To bo 
 At what o'clock do you begin to breakfast? We begin at 
 half past 6. (Do you, indeed?) En verite? Then you breakfast 
 early. Do you eat dinner early, too? I think we dine earlier than 
 you, for we dine at half past one. Is it possible? Do you dine as 
 early as that? We dine then, when we are all at home; but if we 
 wait for those who are absent, (absents,) then we dine together, and 
 later. Does your uncle write before he breakfasts ? No, he does 
 not. What does he? He reads the paper. Is he fond of reading 
 the paper ? Yes, he likes it very much. When it is cloudy wea- 
 ther, does he go out without his umbrella? No, he always takes 
 it. Does he often go to the museum ? He does, often. Does he 
 go there oftener than your cousin ? No, they always go together. 
 
 Do you translate your exercise early or late ? I always 
 translate it in the morning, as early as I can. Do you translate 
 it from the book or do you read it, when you recite it to your 
 teacher ? We translate it instead of reading it, when we recite it 
 to him. Do you begin to like mutton? No, I cannot bear it. 
 Does your cousin like it ? No, he does not ; he cannot bear it. 
 But your uncle William does like it ; don't he ? He ! yes, he likea 
 it. Do you eat supper early? We do not eat supper late. At whist 
 o'clock do they take tea at the doctor's? They take tea quite late. 
 Later than you do? Yes, much later; but at the general's they 
 take it very early. Do the Pole and Russian go early to the con- 
 cert? Yes, they do. Let us go earlier than they ; will you * Will- 
 ingly. Let us go before them. At what o'clock can you be ready I 
 
 can be ready at 6 or J past 6. It is soon enough; is it not ? I 
 
THIRTIETH LESSON 
 
 believe sc for the concert does not begin before 7. Do )ou no! 
 put on something more ? No ? this is enough : I wish nothing more. 
 Do I write too much? No, but you talk (speak) too much. Do 
 I speak more than you? You do, very often, and so does youi 
 brother. Do you count quick ? Yes, in English I count pretty 
 fast. No, I mean in French. I do not count very fast in French. 
 Does he count as fast as you? Who ? This youth ? Yes, he; this 
 youth. Do I know ? How many do you count in a minute ? How 
 many does he count 1 Try. both of you. We are going to try to 
 count as fast as we can. Very well ; try to do it. Must we tp 
 anything more ? No ; nothing more, now. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 Already, yet. Is it already done ? 
 
 Do you speak already ? 
 
 Does he start already ? (depart.) 
 
 Not yet. No, not yet. 
 
 I do not speak yet. 
 
 He departs immediately. 
 
 Do you finish your exercise aiready ? 
 
 I finish it at this vcri/ moment, (time.) 
 
 Do you give us anything to do ? 
 
 Do I not always give you something 
 to do? 
 
 Dejd. Est-ce dt'ja fait ? 
 
 Parlez-vous deja ? 
 
 Part-il d'jjat 
 
 Ne . . . pas encore. Non, pas :ncort. 
 
 Je ne parle pas encore. 
 
 II part tout de suite. 
 
 P'inissez-vous deja votre theme f 
 
 Jc le finis a present mtnte. 
 
 Nous donnez-vous quelque chose a 
 
 faire ? 
 Est-ce que je ne vous donne pas 
 
 toujours quelque chose a faire ? 
 
 Obs. 72. We have seen, in the preceding lessons, that when two verha 
 are joined, the first sometimes requires no preposition 1 to connect i 
 with the second ; that sometimes it takes the preposition d ; 2 at others tic. 3 
 See lists of those verbs ($ 156), preceded by a short explanation. 
 
 The scholar was directed to form for himself lists of those verbs, of nouns, 
 adjectives, &c., ns they are presented in the vocabularies. In order to see 
 how he has performed that task, I here insert the model of a dialogue on 
 the subject, which teachers may modify according to circumstances. 
 
 Mr. Armand, have you a catalogue 
 of the verbs which govern other 
 verbs without a preposition ? Yes, 
 Sir, I have. Which is the first verb 
 on your catalogue ? It is voulez- 
 mn*9 ? That is right. But instead 
 of writing down voulez-vous ? make 
 use of the infinitive. Do you know 
 it ? Yes, Sir, I do. It is vouloir, 
 is it not ? Yes, that is it. So, your 
 first verb which governs another 
 
 M. Armand, avez-vous un catalogue 
 des verbes qui en gouvernent d'au- 
 tres sans preposition ? Our M., 
 j'en ai un. Quel 6st le premier 
 verbe snr votre catalogue ? C'est 
 voulcz-vous? C'est bien. Mais 
 au lieu d'ecrire, voules-vous ! 
 faites usage de Tinfinitif. Le *?vez- 
 vous ? Oui, M.,je lj M ; S. C'est 
 vouloir, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, cV< 
 cela. Ainsi, votre premier rerfc* 
 
 2 C2 1 2 , 25 3 .) 
 
 5 (17-, 22. 
 
THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 153 
 
 without a preposition is vouloir, is 
 it nt ? Yes, .Sir, it is that. In 
 what vocabulary is it ? I do not 
 know, but I have the folio, (page.) 
 That will do. What is the E 
 verb of your catalogue ? It is allcz- 
 ' What is its infinitive ? It 
 is aller. Very well. 
 filler, instead of allcz-vous ? On 
 what page is it ? On the .... 
 
 ;r, to understand. I i 
 I understand. I do not und 
 Do you understand me ? I do. 
 
 I understand you m part. 
 I do not understand you at all. 
 Is it possible ? Do you not understand 
 
 a single word ? No, not a single 
 
 one. 
 
 qui en gouverne un autre sans 
 preposition est vouloir, n'cst-ce 
 pas? Oui, M., c'est cela. Bans 
 quel vooabu!aire est-il ? Je ne 
 niais j'ai le fcuillet. Cela 
 tuflit. Quel est le second verbe 
 de votrc catalogue ? C'est allez- 
 rous ? Quel en est Vinfmitifl 
 ($ 31.) C'est aller. Tres-bicn. 
 Faites usage de aller au lieu dc 
 allez-vous ? A quel fcuillet est- 
 il ? Au.... 
 
 Entendre, 4. Entendant. 
 
 Tentends, Jc n'entends pa*. 
 
 M' entendez-vous ? Je vou entenda. 
 
 Je vouscntcnds en pnrtie. 
 
 Je ne vous emends pas du tout. 
 
 Est-il possible ? IN 'entendez-voua 
 pas un seul mot ? Non, pas un 
 seal. 
 
 Obs. 73. The infinitive has no preposition before it vhen it is used in an 
 absolute sense, or as a nominative case. 
 
 To eat too much is dangerous. 
 k too much is foolish. 
 <ood to those \vho have offended 
 us, is a commendable action. 
 
 ;il times. 
 -nind, wo matter. 
 
 r trop est diingcreux. 
 Parler trop est imprudent. 
 Faire du lien a ceux qui nous onl 
 
 offenses , est 747* e action lovable, 
 Quelque fois. Flusieurs fois. 
 Tfimfidrtei 
 
 THME. 2de Se'c. 
 N'oubliez pas le quantierae en Frun^ais. 
 
 incut vous etes-vous porte depuis que je n'ai eu Je plaisir do 
 vous voir? Quelque fois bien, quelque fois mal; mais vous, com- 
 ment vous etes-vous porte ? Je me suis toujours bien porte. Je le 
 crois, car vous avez tres-bon air. Le pensez-vous ? Tout le monde 
 me dit que j'ai Pair malade. Moi, au contraire, je pense que vous 
 -bon air. Mais, ce petit garcon-la n'a pas bon air. C'est 
 vrai, et je crois qu'il est un peu malade. L 7 etes-vous, mon petit 
 ami? Oui, M., j'ai un peu mal de tete. Depuis quand? Depuia 
 ce matin de bonne heure. Avant dejeuner? Oui, un peu avant. 
 Entendez-vous ce que ce petit garpon dit? Non, je ne Pentends pas 
 bien. L'entendez-vous, vous? Oui, je Pentends parfaitement, parce 
 que je suis accoutume a Pentendre. Et moi, je ne Pentends pas, 
 parce que ie n'*y suis pas accoutume. Vous avez raison. Voyez 
 vous quelquefois le cousin du vieux general? Je le vois souvent. 
 wais savez-vous qn'il part ? Pour ou ? (where to?) Pour la CaK 
 
154 THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 fornie. fcsl-il possible? Quand pan-il? Je crois qu'il est deja pft 
 a partir. Dans quel batiment part-il ? 11 part dans le . . . . Est-co 
 an bon batiment'? Je crois que oui. N'est-ce pas le batiment de 
 
 M. C ? Non, ii n'est plus a Mr. C mais a M. H 
 
 AJlons le voir. Oui, allons-y. Mais, voyez done, (see there,) il pleut. 
 N'importe. Prenonsnosparapluies. Je n'ai.pas le mien ici. N : im- 
 porte. Nous pouvons vous en prefer un. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas 
 e votre? Je ne le prends pas toujours quand le temps est couvert 
 Moi, au contraire, je ne sors pas sans prendre le mien quand le 
 temps est couvert. Vous etes plus prudent que moi. N'importe. 
 Partons. Vous faut-il un mouchoir de plus ? J'en ai un ; c'est assez. 
 
 Is my Italian hat too large ? It is neither too large nor too small. 
 Do you speak French oftener than English? I speak the latter 
 oftener than the former. Do your uncle and cousin buy much New 
 York corn ? They buy but little. Have I enough fresh bread ? You 
 have only a little, but enough. Is it late ? Why do you believe it is 
 late ? Because I begin to be sleepy, (a avoir sommeil.) You may 
 be sleepy, but it is not late. What o'clock is it? It is only half past 
 nine. Is it too late to go to your father's? W iij do you wish to go 
 to my father's? I wish to return (rcndre) him this French book. 
 [s it, (3, $ 39,) a pretty book? It is a very pretty book. Will you 
 conduct me there? Can you not find the way alone? I believe I 
 cannot in the evening. I do not wish to go there now. Give me 
 the book, I can return it to him. No; I have to jeturn it to him 
 myself. (Moi-meme, $ 41$.) Very well. Do it, then. Does the 
 young Spaniard buy an Arabian horse ? He cannot buy one. Why 1 
 [s he poor? He is not poor; he is richer than you. Why can he 
 not buy one then ? Because (?io Arabian horse can be found here) he 
 cannot find any Arabian horse here. Is this Swiss as learned as that 
 Pole ? He is just as learned, I believe ; but you are more learned 
 than they and I. Are you studying already? No, not yet. I atn 
 smoking. Do you smoke so early ^ Yes, sometimes; when I am 
 cold. 
 
 Do you understand that gentleman ? I do. Is he learned ? Ho 
 is. What is he ? A lawyer ? A minister ? An apothecary ? A mer- 
 chant? Or nothing at all? I believe he is a little of everything, (un 
 pen de tout.) Is your horse worse than mine ? It is not so bad as 
 yours. Is mine worse than the Dutchman's? It is wcrse. It is the 
 worst horse (01 s. 69) that I know, (connaisse, subjunct.) Do ycu 
 give those men less silver than paper? (Dir. 3.) I give them more 
 of the former than of the latter; for some of them cannot read, ana 
 they do not like the paper. Who receives the most money 1 The 
 English do. Cannot yostr sen write a note in French ? He cannot, 
 
1H1RT1LTI! LESSON. (2.) 155 
 
 Out he begins to read a little. Do the Americans write more than 
 \ve ? They write less than we ; but the Italians write the least. 
 Are they as rich as the American? * They are less rich than they. 
 Are your birds as line as our neighbor's? They are less fine ; but 
 never mind, ours are fine enough. Faitcs du bien ; do you under- 
 stand that, Mr. Charles] 1& it do u-cll? No, Sir, that's not it, or it 
 i<3 not that. Then I do not understand it all, Lut in part. And you, 
 Mr Durand, do you understand it? I believe I do not understand it. 
 Nevermind. Who understands it? I. What is its English? ($ 31-1.) 
 Do good. That's right. I see that yov. understand it. I believe I do. 
 
 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. RE*SUME*. 
 
 -tau a-t-il son grain? Non, il ne Pa pas. Ne le lui donnez- 
 vnns pas tons les matins? Si fait, quand j'ypense; mais aujour- 
 d'hui il n'a pus fairn, il ne mange pas, parce qu'il a mal au pied. 
 Qui a le pistolet de Petranger? Personne ne Pa. Avez-vous les 
 porte-feuilles de cuir de ces deux matelots? Je n'ai que le porte- 
 teiulle de Pun cPeux. Je ne sais pas qni a celui de Pautre. Est-ce 
 c-clui du grand et vieux que vous avez? Non, c'est celui du jeune 
 'tit que in . N'allez-vous pas le lui rendre ? Si fait, 
 
 s'il le veut; mais il dit qifil n'en a pas besoin. N'a-t-il plus d'ar- 
 gent? Je crois que non ; du moins, il n'a plus de billets. Le bceuf 
 et le cheval ont-ils leur foin ? Oui, ils ont leur foin. Mangent-ils le 
 foin que vous leur donnez? Ils le trouvent bon, car ils le mangent 
 bien. Que mangent-ils encore? Ils mangent leur grain. Qu'a ce 
 garcon? Lequel ? Le ( ,on. Lui? il a toujours quelque 
 
 .fant du tailleur a-t-il quelque chose de vieux ou 
 de vilain '. \ . il n'a iie:i de vieux ni de vilain ; mais il a un jol 
 porte-crayon d':i' 
 
 ' Rien. Qu'a M. Carnot? II n'a rien. Qu'a son 
 frere? Qui J le frere de Carnot? Oui, son frere. II n'a rien. Ce 
 jeune homme-la a-t-il faim? Non ; il n ? a pas faim, car il a du pain, 
 du fromaij'i. des biscuits, et il n'en mange pas. Pourquoi faites- 
 vonscela? Nous avons honte de vous. Quoi ! Vous avez honte do 
 ce que je fais? Nous en avons honte, pour vous. Vous etes bien 
 bon, en verite ! Ils ont soif ; avez-vous beaucoup de cafe ce soir ^ 
 leur donner? Je n'en ai guere : mais j'en ai assez pour eux. Que 
 pensez-vous de Phabit de ce garcon-la? II a trop de boutons, n'est- 
 ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison de le dire, et son giiet n'en a pas 
 nssez. Combien en a-t-il ? II n'en a que deux, je crois. Le fermiei 
 n'a-t-il pas de vieux chovanx ? Non. il n'en a que de jeunes. Nous 
 avons faim, avez-vous du pain a nous donner? Je n'ai pas de pain 
 mais yai d'excellcnts biscuits. Le jeune etranger a-t-il soif? Jecrou 
 
136 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 
 
 quo oui, car il boit souvent. (} 170.) II boit quoi ? Un j;eu de lait, 
 un peu de vin. 
 
 J'ai besoin de savon ; dites-moi ou je puis en trouver de bon 1 
 
 Vous pouvez en acheter de tres-bon chez M Ou est sort 
 
 mag-asm ? Dans la rue Chestnut, pres de la. ... Jc vous re- 
 njereie. De rien. N'avez-vous besoin de rien de plus ? Non pag 
 ce matin. Qui a le gros et grand couteau du cuisinier ? En a-t-il 
 besoin pour tuer qnelque chose ? Je ne sais pas pourquoi il en a 
 besoin; mais il le cherche. L'avez-vous? Savez-vous ou il peut 
 19 trouver ? Non, je n'en sais rien. Le Hollands's a-t-il queJque 
 chose a boire ? Pourquoi? A-t-il soif? Oui, il a soif, ct le Prussien, 
 Vlrlandais, et FEcossais ont soif aussi. Donnez-leur du vin, s'ils ont 
 Koif, et de vieux pain, s'ils ont faim. Ce Suisse n'a pas bon air ; est-i 1 . 
 malade? Je ne sais pas, et comme il ne parlc ni Anglais ni Fnmrais 
 nous ne pouvons pas parler ensemble. QuVsl-ce qu'il parlel Suisse, 
 je ponse. Quel joli oiseau Mile. Emilie :i ! QuVst-cu que e'est? 
 
 n'en sais pas le nom. Chantc-t-il ? Parle-t-il 1 N'importe. S'i) 
 li, n'est-ce pas assez ? C'est bctiucoup ; mais s'il fiit (inelquu 
 chose de plus, c'est encore incMlleur. 
 
 Madame Leblanc, je suis bieu aisc do vous voir. Comment se 
 porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde sc, portc bien, je vous remercie. 
 Kntrez; venez vous asseoir. Non, jc ifai pas le U'lnps du m'asseoir. 
 Pourquoi done ? J'ai ;\ aller chez notre Spicier pour acheter beau- 
 coup d(5 choses. Qu'avez-vous ;\ acheter ? Jc nc peux pas vous 
 dire tout, mais en voici le catalogue. Lisez-le, si vous voulez savoir 
 Co qu'il nous faut. Voyons. D'abord : dubcurre. Quoi! n'achetcz- 
 vous pus votre beurre an inarche ? Si fait, mais quand nous ne 
 pouvons pas y en trouver de bon, je vais chez cet rpicier, ou je suis 
 sure (friii.) d'en trouver de bon, d'cxccllent. C'cst bon u savoir. 
 Du sucre blanc, du poivre, des biscuits, du fromage, du vinaigre, du 
 sel, &c., &c. C'cst assez. En verite, votre catalogue est bi.cn (very) 
 long. Mais pourquoi n'achetez-vous pas tout ccla pres de chez 
 vous? N'y avez-vous pas des epiciers '.' Si fait, nous en uvons 
 mais leurs articles ne sont pas aussi bons que cenx de celui chez 
 qui je vais. 
 
 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON, 31st. Trente et unieme Legon, ?Ime. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. Du Participe Passt. 
 The Past Participle is usually placed after the auxiliaries, to have, avoir, 
 and to be, 6tre, to form the past 01 compound tenses. The past participle? 
 of regular verbs may be formed by changing the terminations of the infiri 
 
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON, (l ) 
 
 157 
 
 tive, (jr the first conjugation into with the acute accent, thus: parler 
 parle : for the second, into i. thus: fuiir -fni ; for tlie third, into ^ 
 thus : recevoir rc$u ; and for the fourth, also into u, thus : vendrc vendw- 
 Examples : 
 
 love,\ 
 weep, I 
 
 eat, / 
 begin] 
 
 P. P. 
 aime. 
 
 pi cure, 
 maii'jc. 
 commtJitt. 
 
 Qemifj 
 Blnir, 
 
 Choisir, 
 
 /to trail o\ 
 1 to sigh, \ 
 1 to bless, 1 
 \^o choose J 
 
 P.P. 
 
 Mri 
 
 Wni 
 
 choisi. 
 
 to owe, \ 
 
 r/u. 1 
 
 Vend re, 
 
 to sell, 
 
 ve'idn. 
 
 to conceive) 
 
 \conCfU. 
 
 Rendre, 
 
 to render, 
 
 rendit. 
 
 to res 
 
 
 Entendre, 
 
 to hear, 
 
 vii lend 
 
 to per 
 
 
 Dcfendre, 
 
 to defend, 
 
 dcfe-d 
 
 V.; 
 
 ttre* 
 
 > Par fait ou 1 
 
 ete. 2 
 
 ^resent Comt 
 
 
 PREMIERE COKJUGAISON. 
 
 i,,f. 
 
 Aimer, 
 Pleurer, 
 Manger, 
 Commen 
 
 TROISIE3IE CONJUGAISON. 
 
 Devoir, 
 Concevoir. 
 
 Recevoir, 
 Apercevoir, 
 
 nse. 
 
 Have you been to market ? 
 I have (been then- , I have mt. 
 have. 
 
 Ha\- 'here ? Have yon 
 
 f n there ? Has he not ? 
 Ho has been there. He has not. 
 Ever. 
 
 To the iron bridje. 
 The covered bridirr. 7' //'.* U 
 II-.v been at the bridge ? 
 
 I h::\ 
 
 been there. 
 
 lie has never been there. 
 
 Vm have never been there. 
 
 Mr. Brunei, have you a catalogue of 
 the verbs which govern other verbs 
 with the preposition a ? No, Sir, 
 I have no catalogue of them. Make 
 one, if you please. Write down in 
 French: Verbs with the preposi- 
 tion a. Have you the title now 1 
 Not quite yet, Sir. Now, I have 
 it. Read it aloud, if you please. 
 
 SECONDE CONJUQAISON. 
 
 QUATRI^ME CONJUGAISON. 
 
 P' 
 
 Avez-vous 616 au marche ? 3 
 
 J'y ai e*te. Je n'y ai pas ctr. 
 
 Y ai-je et<5 ? Vous y avez t't : . 
 
 Y avez -vous 616 ? N'y avez-TO\i 
 pas ete ? 
 
 Y a-t-il etc ? N'y a-t-il pas <V- ? 
 
 II y a etc. II n'y a pas ete. 
 
 Jama is . Ne . . . jama i* . 
 
 Un pont. Au -pout defer. 
 
 Lepont convert. Ce pont dejil defer, 
 
 Avez-vous jamais ete au pont ? 
 
 Jc n'y ai jamais etc. 
 
 Tu n'y as jamais e^e. 
 
 II n'y a jamais ete. 
 
 Vous n'y avez jamais etc. 
 
 M. Brunei, avez-vous un catalogue 
 des verbes qui en gouvernenl 
 d'autres avec la preposition at 
 Non, M., je n'en ai pas de cata- 
 logue. Faites-en un, s'il vous plait. 
 6crivez en Francois : Verbs with 
 the preposition d. Avez-vous Ic 
 titre a present ? Non pas tout- 
 a-fait encore. A present, je 1'ai 
 
 1 It will be perceived, that in the third conjugation it is not o/r, but evoir 
 vhich in the past participle must be changed fnto u.. Irregulars hereafter. 
 
 2 The pupil, in repeating the irregular verbs already given, must not full 
 V mark in his list the past participles of those verbs. 
 
 3 A 'it and did go. 
 
158 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Verbes avec la preposition a. 
 That's it. Now, what is the first 
 verb of that class which you have 
 to set down, do you know ? Not 
 yet, Sir. You may find it if you 
 look for it. Where can I find it ? 
 In some of the vocabularies. I am 
 going to loola'for it. I believe it is 
 the verb tolhave, at tfys 21st vo 
 cabulary, 21 section 
 
 it. Ibeli 
 ', at tile ! 
 ion. 
 
 Lisez-le haul, s'ii vous 
 Verbes avec la preposition d. C'ert 
 cela. A present, quel est le pre- 
 mier verbe de cette classe (fern.) 
 que vous avez a ecrire ? Le savez^ 
 vous ? Non pas encore, M. Vons 
 pouvez le trouver, si vous le 
 cherchez. X)u puis-ji le trouver ? 
 Dans queltiues uns lies vocabu- 
 laires. Je vais le chercjier. Je croia 
 
 * / que c'est le verbe Avbir, au 21mt 
 
 vocabulaire, 2de section. 
 
 TRENTE ET UNIEME THK\ME. Ire Sec. 
 N'oubliez pas le quantieme. 
 
 Bon jour, Messieurs, il fait chaud, n'est-ce pas ? Pas trop chaud 
 Pas aussi chaud qu'au commencement du mois. Vous croyez '? 
 Oui, je le crois, ou plutot (rather) j'en suis sur, car le thermometre 
 n'esta present qu'a 78 ou 79 degres, et au commencement du mois, 
 il a etc (was up) a 81 et 82. Je n'ai rien a dire a cela, vous avez 
 raison. Mais comment va ? Cela va assez bien. Se porte-t-on 
 bien chez vous ? Pas tout le monde. Qui est malade ? Jules a 
 ete malade, mais il est mieux a present, je puis dire presque bien. 
 Je Papprends avec plaisir. Jeanne a mal aupied droit, et ne pent pas 
 sortir; Victor a mal de tete depuis trois jours. Je suis bien fache 
 de cela. Ne tfouvez-vous pas la poussiere bien desagreable? Si 
 fait, mais comme le temps est convert, j'espere que nous allona 
 avoir de la pluie. Je Pespere aussi. Mes amis m'ont dit de VOUH 
 presenter Icurs compliments^ (present their compliments to you.) Je 
 leur suis tres-oblige. Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de leur pre- 
 senter les miens ? Sans doute. 
 
 Where have you been? I went to the market to Duy some fresh 
 butter. Have you been to the ball'? I have. (Dir. 1.) Did I not 
 go to the bridge with you ? Yes, you did. Hast thou been to the 
 play ? No, I have not. Has your oldest son ever been to the thea- 
 tre? He has never been there, but his young brother has (been 
 there). Hast thou already been to my large store ? I never was 
 there, (have never been.) Do you intend to go there ? I do. When 
 will you go? I will to-morrow, if I can. At what o'clock? Why 
 do you wish to know? Because I wish to be there, if you come. 
 Very well; at 12 o'clock. Has your good uncle already been in 
 my large garden ? He has not yet been there. He intends to sec 
 it; does he not? I believe he does. When can he. go there? To 
 day, may be. Have you already been to the wire bridge ? No, not 
 yt; but I have been to the covered bridge. Have you not been to 
 
THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 
 
 159 
 
 he other? Is it possible ! Np ; I have not yet; but I intend tc go 
 oon, if I have time to go. Go there early in the morning; that is 
 the best time. I have been somewhere early every morning. 
 
 Has your uncle been at the lawyer's office ? Yes, he has. Has 
 he been to the wharf and museum ? He was at the former, but ho 
 nas not yet gone to the latter. Are you not going to take your two 
 cousins there? No, they have already been there. Have they 
 indeed ! When did they go ? They went yesterday. Did they gc 
 alone; without you? They did not go alone; we went together. 
 How many went together ? Five or six. Has the Italian been to 
 the workshop of the joiner or that of the painter? He has been 
 neither in the one nor in the other, but he has been all the day with 
 the German dentist. Is not that German, or Prussian dntist in our 
 parlor now ? He has been there, but he is no longer (no more) 
 ihere. When was he (has he been) there? This morning, early. 
 Before breakfast ? Yes, before breakfast. Has the son of our 
 gardener been to market? I believe he is there now. What does 
 ne intend to do there ? He intends first to sell his cabbages and 
 several other things., and then to buy some chickens, corn, (Dir. 2.) 
 wine, cheese, and cider. Is that all he has to buy? No, he has 
 to b I other articles ; but he is going to buy them at the 
 
 grocer's. What other articles is he going to buy? Tea, coffee 
 sugar. i -ukes, and pepper. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 MI already been at the play ? 
 i y been there, and he too. 
 Vou have already been thorn, have 
 I have been there seve- 
 ral III 
 / have not yet been there. 
 
 iiou ever been there alone ? 
 i have neve.' been there alone. 
 Where have we never been ? 
 
 ve never been at the bridge. 
 A.t which bridge has he been ? 
 He was (has been) at the wire one. 
 We have not yet been there. 
 Thou hast not yet been there. 
 You have not yet been there. 
 He has not yet been there. 
 Have Julius and Lewis ever been at 
 the museum ? (Did they ever go ?) 
 They have not yet been there. 
 Never mind. They may go there 
 this evening or on Tuesday. 
 
 Avez-vous deja ete au spectacle ? 
 J'y ai deja ete, et lui aussi. 
 Vous y avez deja ete, n'est-ce pm 4 
 J'y ai doja e'te plusieurs fois. 
 
 Je n'y ai pas encore ete. 
 
 Y as-tu jamais etc seui ? 
 
 Je n'y ai jamais etc seul. 
 
 Ou n'avons-nous jamais ete ? 
 
 Nous n'avons jamais ete au pont. 
 
 A quel pont a-t-il etc* ? 
 
 II a e'te a celui de fil de fer. 
 
 Nous n'y avons pas encore e'te'. 
 
 Tu n'y as pas encore c*te*. 
 
 Vous n'y avez pas encore e't'6. 
 
 II n'y a pas encore ete. 
 
 Jules et Louis ont-ils jamaia el6 aa 
 
 miise'e ? 
 
 Us n'y ont pas encore e'te'. 
 N'importe. Us peuvent y allor, c* 
 
 soir ou mardi. 
 
160 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. 
 
 Where did ycu go this morning ? 
 [ went to (have been in) the garden. 
 Where has thy uncle been ? (Did he 
 
 go?) 
 
 He went to the store near the bridge. 
 Did he go the^e as early as 1 ? 
 
 He was there earlier than you. 
 
 Oii tf tf ez-vous et ce 
 
 J'ai Oit; an jardin. 
 
 Oii ton oncie a-t-il ete 5 
 
 II a ctd au magasin pres du t ?ont. 
 Y a-t-il 616 d'aussi bonne heure qac 
 
 moi ? 
 II y a etc* de meilleure heure que vous 
 
 Ota. 74. j/e, past participle of the verb etre, to be, is in French often 
 employed for alii, past participle of the verb aller t to go. We eay fa\ 
 6to au spectacle, when the meaning is, that I went to ihe play, and am re- 
 turned from it ; and, il est alls au spectacle, that he is gone to the play, but 
 is not yet returned. Accordingly it is better to say, in the first and second 
 persons sing, and plur. : J'y at ete t I have been there ; lit, y us etc, thou hast 
 been there; nous y avons ete, we have been there; vous y avcz ete, you 
 have been there, than, j'y suis allc, tu y cs die, nous y sonnies alles, VOUA 
 y etes allis, when motion is not particularly to be expressed. 
 
 To have, to get. Had, got. Avoir* 3. eu. 1 
 
 Have you had my book ? 
 
 I have had it. I did get it. 
 
 I have not had it. Have I had it ? 
 
 You have had it. You had it not. 
 
 Who has hnd it I You h'ul it. 
 
 I have had it, but I have it no longer. 
 
 Avez-vous eu mon livre ? 
 Je Vaieu, (not j'ai Teu, $ 52.) 
 Je ne Vai pas eu. L'ai-je eu ? 
 Vous Vavez eu. Vous ne Vavez pas eu. 
 Qui Va eu ? Vous Vavez eu. (Dir. 8.) 
 Je 1'ai eu, mais je ne 1'ai plus. 
 
 TRENTE ET UNIEME TIIME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Kcrivez la date en Fran^ais ici. 
 
 Mile. Clara, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment vnus ele- 
 vousportee (fern.) depuis mardi dernier, jour de notre le^on? Jo 
 me suis tres-b : .8ii porlec, je vous remercie. Je le crois, car vous ave/ 
 tres-bon air. Comment se porle M. Jean? Jean n'est pas bien du 
 tout. Alors je pense qu ? il ne va pas venir aujourd ; hui. Je ne sais 
 pas, car il aime beaucoup a prendre le^on. Aussi, il apprend bien, 
 car il etiulie aussi bien que possible. Les autres ecoliers vont-ili? 
 venir? l^urquoi pas? II est un peu tard, n'est-ce pas? II ireat 
 que 5 heures et 3 minutes. Est-ce tout? n'est-il pas 5 heures et 
 10? Non, j'ai 1'heure exacte. Je crois qu'ils sont ici, a present. Oui ; 
 c'est vrai, les voici. J'ai 1'honneur de vous saluer, Messieurs. Ah ! 
 M. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. II fait chaud, n'est-ce pas ! 
 Je trouve qu'il fait agreable. Nous avons un air frais (cool) et agre 
 able. Mais le soldi est chaud. M-entendez-vous? Je n'entend? 
 pas tout. J'entends une partie. Vous entendez le mot: chaud) 
 n'est-ce pas? Oui, j'entends cela. Que n'entendez-vous pas alors 1 
 
 Eu. This combination, throughout the verb avoir, sounds like Fr- 
 it. (See Pronun.) 
 
THIRTT-FIHST LESSON. (2.) 1G1 
 
 Un mot au commencement. Est-ce le mot: soleilj qje VOL s n'en 
 tendez pas'? Oui, c'est celui-la. Savez-vous si M. Louis Fentend 
 Je crois qiril ne Fentend pas. Je vais vous en dire FAnglais. C'est 
 the sun. Entendez-vous la phrase a present? Oui, parfaitement 
 Je peux vous en donner FAnglais. Faites-le, s'il vous plait. O'est 
 the sun is warm or hot. Tres-bien, c'est vrai. 
 
 Have you a mind to write, translate, or study an exercise ? I nave 
 a mind to translate and write one. (Dir. 2.) To whom do you wish 
 to write a note ? I wish to write one to my son. Does he iinrr.e* 
 diately answer )our notes, when you write to him? He does. Do 
 jour brothers answer (reply to) the Swiss's notes? No, they do 
 not. Do they not answer them? No; I tell you, no, (que non.} 
 
 Have your uncle and father already been at museum? Tho 
 
 former has, but not the latter. Why did not the latter go? Because 
 he has not had time. Has lie time to go there this afternoon? At 
 what o'clock? At 4 past 3. Xo, he has no time then; for he hag 
 an engagement (un engagement) at -1. Never mind; he may go 
 another day. When does your cousin set out? He does not set out 
 yet. When, then ? lie does not set out before Monday. Did you 
 not go to the iron K "onlay ? Yes, we went (have beon) to 
 
 the iron bridge, near the lawyer's garden. Is it not a beautiful 
 bridge? Yes, i* : - ^autiful. Do you like it as much as the wire 
 bridge ? I like ; quite as much. Did you go to the play, last 
 nil/:: >, I did not go, because I never go. Who went to the 
 
 wharf early this morning? Thomas went there before he break- 
 ;1. Did you go there together? I did not go with him ; he 
 : there alone. Why did you not go with him? Because I had 
 not time to go then. What have you had to do? I had (have had) 
 to speak to the gardener. 
 
 our neighbor been at the theatre as often as we? He has 
 been there oftener than we. Do our friend's brothers go to their 
 counting-house too early? They go too late, sometimes. Do they 
 go as late as we ? They go later than we. Has the clerk been as 
 often as you at the dentist's, to-day ? He has been (was) there 
 oftener than I. Where do your friends Charles and Thomas re- 
 main ? They remain at home, because it is very warm. Do they 
 not go out? They do not go out before i past 8 in the evening,, 
 because then it begins to be cool. Are they sick? No, but they 
 are afraid of the heat. Have you had my blue gloves? I have 
 cad them. Have you got them now? No, I have had them, but I 
 have them no longer. When had you (have had) them ? I had 
 them in the parlor, and I th'.riK they are there yet. Go and go! them 
 
162 
 
 r H I R T Y -SECOND LESSON. () 
 
 for mo, ii yo-j please. Can you not go yourself] ($ 4l.) No; dc 
 you not see that I am very busy? Very well; I am going for them 
 Hast thou had my old umbrella? I have not had it. Have I had 
 your English penknife? You had it. When had I it? (l'ai-je eu?) 
 Had you it not yesterday, in the garden, to cut a bouquet 2 Oh\ 
 yes; that's true. I had it then; but now I do not know whero it is. 
 Can it not be in your apartment? It maybe there. Who ha 
 had my Russian stick? Nobody has had it; you have had it your- 
 self. (41i.) 
 
 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON, 32d. Ircnte-deuxiemc Lccou, : 2me 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 {last thou had ? 
 Thou hast (had). 
 
 it). 
 
 lias he had ? 
 He has had. 
 
 Hast thou had it ? 
 Thou hast not (had 
 
 lias he had it ? 
 
 He has not had it. 
 Hast thou had the coat ? I have not 
 
 had it. 
 Who has had it ? The tailor has 
 
 (had it). 
 
 Somebody has had it. Nobody has. 
 Have you had anything ? 
 I have not had anything, (nothing.) 
 4ave we had ? We have not had. 
 
 Have we not had ? Yes, we have had. 
 
 We have had it. 
 Have the children had the gun ? 
 They have had it. They have not. 
 What have they had ? 
 What have you had ? 
 What was the matter with you ? 
 What has been the matter with him ? 
 What has he had ? 
 He has had a headache. 
 Has anything been the matter with 
 
 us ? What have we had ? 
 Have I had anything good ? 
 Have you had the books ? 
 
 As-tu eu ? 
 Tu as eu. 
 
 L'as-tu eu ? 
 
 Tu ne Fas pas eu. 
 
 A-t-il eu? L'n-t-il eu ? 
 II a eu. Ii no 1'a pas cu. 
 
 As-tu eu rhabit? Je ne 1'ai paa 
 
 eu. 
 Qui 1'a cu ? Le tailleur 1'a eu. 
 
 Quelqu'unracu. Personne ne I'acu. 
 Avez-vous eu quelque chose ? 
 Je n'ai rien eu. (Obs. 4.) 
 Avons-nous eu ? Nous n'avons pas 
 
 eu. 
 N'avons-nous pas eu ? Si fait, nous 
 
 avons eu. Nous 1'avons eu. 
 Les enfants ont-ils eu le fusil ? 
 Us 1'ont eu. Us nc 1'ont pas eu. 
 Qu'ont-ils eu ? 
 
 [ Qu'avez-vous eu ? 
 t Qu'a-t-il eu ? 
 II a eu mal de tete. 
 > Qu'avons-nous eu? 
 
 Ai-je eu quelque chose de bon t 
 Avez-vous eu les livres ? 
 
 Obs. 75. The French past participle, with: avoir, to have, for auxiliary 
 nust agree wir.h its direct object ($43) in number^ when that object rt^nei 
 Jirtt, tmd only then. If the object is plural, the past participle takes on s. 
 
THIRTY-SECDNr LESSON, (t.) 
 
 163 
 
 ? have had them. I have not had them. 
 dave I had them ? You had them, 
 fou have not had (did not get) them. 
 das he had them ? He had them. 
 vVhich gloves have you had ? Theirs ? 
 
 Neither he nor I have had them. 
 *Iave you had mine ? (obj. after.) 
 Neither they nor you have had them. 
 Have you had bread ? (any.) 
 I have had some. I had 1 none. 
 Have I had any ? You had some. 
 
 Je Ics ai ens. Je ne les ai pas cut. 
 Les ai-je eus ? Vous les avez cu*< 
 Vous ne les avez pas eus. 
 Les a-t-il eus ? II les a eus. 
 Qucls gants avez-vous eus ? Leo 
 
 leurs ? 
 
 Ni lui ni moi, ne les avons eus. 
 Avez-vous eu les miens? (obj. apres.: 
 Ni eux ni vous, ne les avez eus. 
 Avez-vous eu du pain ? 
 J'en ai eu. Je n'en ai pas eu. 
 En ai-je eu ? Vous en avez eu. 
 
 Obs. 76. The past participle, with avoir, never agrees with its indirect 
 object, ($ 44,) even when the object comes first. Consequently, when tho 
 pronoun en, which is an indirect oiycci, is before the past participle, the 
 latter d >es not take an s. 
 
 You have not had any. 
 
 Has lie had any ? He had none. 
 
 Have they had any ? They have. 
 
 (Dir. 1.) 
 Who has had any ? We have had 
 
 some). 
 What has he had ? He (has) had 
 
 not!.. 
 
 What did I get ? You got that. 
 We had somebody. (We have had.) 
 Von have had nobody, (had.) 
 
 Vous rCcn avez pas eu. 
 
 En a-t-il eu ? II n'en a pas eu. 
 
 En ont-ils eu ? Us en out eu. 
 
 Qui en a eu ? 
 Qu'a-t-il eu ? 
 
 Nous en avons en, 
 II n'a rien eu. 
 
 Qu' ai-je eu? Vous avez eu cela. 
 Nous avons eu quelqu'un. 
 Vous n'avez eu personne. 
 
 IT.-DEUXIEME TlllblE. ll'C SeC. 
 
 Mettez ici le quantieme du mois en Frangais. 
 
 Ah ! bon jour, M. George, comment vous etes-vous porte 
 tjue je n'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir? Merci, Mile., je me suis lort- 
 bien porte depuis ce temps-Id^ (time.) Et vous aussi, j'espere ? Moi 
 nussi, merci. Mais, avez-vous ete absent? Oui, j'a* ete absent, 
 presque dix jours. En verite ! Ou avez-vous ete ? J'ai etc a New 
 York, dans le Connecticut, et a Providence. Avez-vous eu beaucoup 
 de plaisir? Oui, beaucoup. Je suisbieri aise de 1'apprendre. Com- 
 bien de jours avez-vous ete a New York? Je n ? y ai ete que deux 
 ours. Ce n'est pas beaucoup. Avez-vous aussi ele deux jours a 
 Providence? Oui, jy ai ete un peu plus de deux jours. Qu'en 
 pensez-vous? (How do you like it?) Je Paime beaucoup. Y con- 
 naissez-vous beaucoup de monde? Oui, j ? y connais des personnes 
 
 1 //</</, alone, in English, is frequently used instead of have had ; but hi 
 French, at eu is used when the action is fully past. 
 
164 THIRTr-SECOixD LESSON. (2.) 
 
 tres-aimables. -A present que j'y pense. votre ami Jule:j y a-t-il etl 
 avec vous, comme a Pordinaire? Non, il n : y a pas ete. Qu'avez- 
 7ous eu d'agreable ? Beaucoup de choses. 
 
 Has your brother had my wooden hammer? He has. Has ho 
 had my golden, velvet, and satin ribbons ? (Dir. 2.) He has had the 
 first and the second, but not the third. Have the English had my 
 beautiful ship ? They have had it. Who has had my thread stock- 
 ings ? Your servants have had them. Have we had the iron trunk 
 of our good neighbor ? We have had it. Have we had his fmo 
 pistol? We have not had it. Have we had the mattresses of 
 the foreigners? We have not had them. Has the American had 
 my good work? He has had it. Has he had my silver knife ? Ho 
 has not had it. Has the young man had the first volume of my 
 work? He has not had the first, but (mats il a eu) the second. 
 Has he had it? Yes, Sir, he has had it. When has he had it? 
 He has had it this morning. Have you had any sugar ? I have had 
 some. Have I had any good paper ? You have not had any. Has 
 the cook of the Russian captain had any chickens? He has hau 
 some. He has had none at all. 
 
 lias the Frenchman had good old wine? He has had some, and 
 he has some yet. Hast thou had large cakes? I have. Has thy 
 orother had any ? He has not. Has the farmer's son had any fresh 
 butter ? He has had a great deal, has ho not ? To be sure, lie has. 
 Have the Poles had good Spanish segars and tobacco ? They havo 
 had some, because they are very fond of smoking and snuffing. 
 Wha/ tobacco do they usually smoke and snuff? They usually 
 smoke Turkish and Polish tobacco ; but sometimes they have the 
 best American and Spanish tobacco. What have the Spaniards 
 bad? They have had fine merino sheep, (de beaux moutons meri- 
 nos.) Who has had courage ? The American sailors and soldiers.^- 
 Have the Germans had more friends than the Scotch ? They have 
 had less. Has your little son had more toys than his big cousin? 
 He has had many more. Have the Turks had more pepper than 
 corn and tobacco ? They have had less of the former than of these.* 
 Has the Italian painter had anything? He has had nothing at all. 
 IVho has been at the garden of Carr? The garden which is near 
 the covered bridge? Yes, that one. Many of our friends have. 
 What have you had to do ? I have had to write notes. Had the 
 gardener's son to write notes also? He has had to work in hi/j 
 father's garden. Have we had to work ? No, we have had to trans- 
 late and copy. Have the boys sore feet? No, they have had sort* 
 feet, but they are well now. Who has had a sore nose? The littla 
 Russian baker. Has the tobacco merchant had sue eyes ? Hia 
 eyes are always sore. 
 
THIRrT-SECDND A.ESSON (2.) 
 
 165 
 
 YOCABULAIRE. 2Je Section 
 So. So well. Nat so often 05 .... | Si. Si lien. iYe .... pas si 
 
 Have you been hungry or cold ? 
 I have been thirsty and warm. 
 Who has been right, and who wrong ? 
 If John has been wrong, then Julius 
 
 has been right. 
 
 No, they have both been wrong. 
 Wo have been afraid to show any. 
 To take place. The ball will take 
 
 place. 
 When is the ball in honor of the 
 
 g to take place ? 
 
 Does the concert take place to-day ? ) 
 Is the concert to come oflf to-day? J 
 it takes place. It takes place this 
 
 ling. 
 
 It does not take place to-d 
 When did the grand dinner take place ? 
 It took (has taken) place yesterday. 
 It has not yet taken place, [had place.] 
 The day before yesterday. 
 Where had you a mind to po the day 
 
 before yesterday ? To Bristol. 
 How many times? Once.(orone time. 
 Twice, (two times. Thrice, (three 
 
 tin;. 
 
 Many times, a great many times. 
 Formerly. More thnn six tinna. 
 
 Has the President a bad cold ? 
 
 No, he has had one, but he is well 
 now. I am glad to hear it. 
 
 I thought he was sick. 
 
 jht you were in New York. 
 
 / thought they were Prussians. 
 
 / thought I had your hat. 
 
 Did you thi?ik you had it ? I did. 
 
 Did you think you knew your lesson ? 
 
 Did you think you knew that man ? 
 
 I thought I did, but I see that I do 
 not (know him). 
 
 Gone. To have gone. To have gone 
 there. 
 
 Did you go to the concert of V. ? 
 
 I went or did go. I did not go, 
 
 nt (there.) fie did not go (there.) 
 
 Who has gone? Who went ? Lewis 
 
 que. . . . 
 
 Avez-vous eu faim ou froid ? 
 J'ai eu soif et chaud. 
 Qui a eu raison et qui a eu tort ? 
 Si Jean a eu tort, alors Jules a ou 
 
 raison. 
 
 Non, ils ont Tun et 1'autre eu tort. 
 Nous avons eu peur d'en montrer. 
 t Avoir lieu. Le bal va avoir lieu. 
 
 t Quand le bal en honncur du P resi- 
 dent va-t-il avoir lieu ? 
 
 t Lo concert a-t-il lieu aujourd'h ji 1 
 t II a lieu. . II a lieu ce soir. 
 
 t II n'a pas lieu aujourd'hui. 
 
 t Quand le grand diner a-t-il eu lieu 
 
 t II a eu lieu hier. 
 
 t II n'a pas encore eu lieu. 
 
 Avant-hicr. 
 
 Ou avez-vous eu envie d'aller avant- 
 
 hier ? A Bristol. 
 
 Comlitn dcfois ? Unefoif. (ddv.) 
 Deux fois. Trois fois. 
 
 Bien des fois. 
 
 Autrefois. Plus de six fois. (16 2 .) 
 
 Le President a-t-il un mauvaia 
 
 rhume ? 
 II en a eu un, mais il se porte bien a 
 
 present. J'en suis bien aise. 
 Je le croyais malade. 
 Je vous croyais a New York. 
 Je les croyais Prussiens. 
 Je croyais avoir votre chapeau. 
 Croyiez-vous I 'avoir ? Je le croyais 
 Croyiez-vous savoir votre lecon ? 
 Croyiez-vous connaltre cet homme- 
 
 la ? Je croyais le co7inaitre, mais ja 
 
 vois que je ne le connais pas. 
 AlU, itre alii. y ttre altt. 
 
 Etes-vous alle au concert de V. ? 
 J'y ai etd. Je n'y suis pas alle. 
 II y a etc". 11 n'y est pas all. 
 
 Qui y cet alle ? Louis y et?t alia 
 
166 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Has he had a sore arm ? He has. | A-t-il eu rnal an bras ? II y aeu mal 
 
 What has been the matter with him ? Qu'a-t-il eu ? 
 
 He had a sore elbow, and he has it II a eu mal au coi de, et il y a iiicurc 
 
 yet. mal. 
 
 Hovv many children has the Presi- Combien d'enfantsle Presideiita-t-i^ 
 
 dent had ? (eus, because the object eus ? (eus, parce quo 1'objet e:*l 
 
 precedes.; avant.) 
 
 He has had three, I believe II en a eu trois, je crois. 
 
 That if to say, tkat is, (t. *.) C'est d dire. 
 
 TIIEXTE-DEUXIEME Tii^ME. 2de Sec. 
 Vous continuez a mettre le quantieme, n'est-cc pas ? 
 
 Quoi, Madame ! vous etes ici? Je vous croyais a Baltimore. J'/ 
 ai etc, M. ; mais je suis ici depuis deux jours. Est-il possible ! EL 
 je n'ai pas eu le plaisir de vous voir. Je pense que vous vous por- 
 tez bien, car vous avez tres-bon air. Le President a-t-il etc a Balti- 
 more ? Non, il n'y a pas ete. Ou est-il alle? II est alle a Richmona 
 pour y voir ses meilleurs amis. N'a-t-il pas ete malade ? Si fait, 
 il Pa ete, mais?res-peu. II a eu un rhume, n'est-ce pas? Oui, au 
 commencement du mois d'Avril ; mais cela n ? a pas ete grand' chow 1 
 (much expression constantly used.) Je le croyais encore malade. 
 En verite ! II ne Pest plus, et nous en sommes bien aises. N'avez- 
 vous pas eu mal de tete ? Si fait, mais cela n'a pas ete grand' chose. 
 A present, j'ai mal au pied, mais ce n'est pas grand 7 chose. Jo 
 croyais avoir votre eventail, Mile Sophie, mais je vois que voua 
 Pavez. Je Pai, mais il est a votre service. Merci. Si vons ivavex 
 plus chaud, pretez-le-moi un moment, s'il vous plait. Le voici, 
 prenez-le. II est joli et bon. Oh! ce n'est pas grand 7 chose. En 
 avez-vous besoin, a present? Non, je n'en ai pas encore besoin, 
 vous pouvez en faire usage. Votre cousin a-t-il le cheval dn fer- 
 mier? Noii, le fermier en a eu besoin, lui-me-me. ( 41^.) 
 
 Hive the English had as much sugar as tea? They have had as 
 much of the one as of the other ; but they want more sugar than 
 tea. Has the physician been cold, this evening ? No, he has been 
 warm. Has he been warm enough ? He says that he has been 
 too warm. Can that be ? Has the Dutchman been right or svrcng ? 
 He has been right or wrong. If he has been right, he has not been 
 wrong. If he has been wrong, he has not been right. I believe 
 you are right when you say that. To be sure. Have I been right 
 
 l Pas grand' chose, not much, no great thing. As chose is feminine, 
 grand 1 chose ought to be spelt : grande chose. But as, in pronouncing those 
 words, true d is not sounded, the French use the apostrophe to show thai 
 the c is suppressed and the d silent. So in : grand 1 faim, gra?id' soif, grand? 
 m?rc, &c. Grand 1 rhose is always used with a negative. 
 
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON, (l.) ! G7 
 
 in writing to my brother'? You have not been wrong in writing to 
 him. Have you had a sore finger? I have had a sore eye. Have 
 you had anything good ? I have had nothing bad. Did the bail 
 take place yesterday? It did not take place. Does it take place 
 to-day? It lakes place to-day. When does the ball take place? It 
 takes place this evening. Did it take place the day before yester- 
 day ? It did take place. At what o'clock did it take place? It 
 took place (a cu lieu) at eleven o'clock. Did you go (06s. 74) to 
 :ny brother's ? I went thither. How often have you been at my 
 friend's house ? I have been there twice. Do you go sometimes 
 to the theatre alone ? I do, many times. How many times have 
 you been at the theatre ? I have been there only once. 
 
 etimes been at the ball ? I have often been there. 
 Has your brother ever gone 10 the concert ? He has never gono 
 '.hither. Has your father sometimes gone to the museum? Ho 
 A*e*U (a I'K') there formerly. Did he go as often as you? He went 
 oftener than I. Dost thou go sometimes into the small garden? I 
 go there often ; I 1:0 every day, two or three times. Does your old 
 cook often go to the market? He does, sometimes twice in a day. 
 Does he go there oftener than my gardener? He does; for he 
 - there to li:y. and your gardener to sell. Has the great supper 
 
 : onor of (Jeneral S . taken place? Yes, it took place last 
 
 ::iesilay. ili.it is, the day before yesterday, at 6 o'clock, in the 
 great saloon of the museum. I went to it. Indeed ! I thought you 
 were at Boston OH* that day. Are you hungrysometim.es? Yes, 
 many times. Are you hungry and thirsty in the morning? lam 
 so, at noon, too. and likewise in the evening. Are you sometimes 
 iired in the evening ? I am so, when I have been very busy. Did 
 you go earlier to your office than the merchant to his counting- 
 house ? I went sooner than he ; but the painter went to his work- 
 shop (laboratory or studio) earlier than he and I. Do they translate 
 French into English as well as English into French? No, they do 
 not. 
 
 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON, 333, Trentc-troisieme Legon, 33?ne. 
 PERFECT TENSE. Parfait ou Present Compose. 
 
 Le Parfait is formed as the perfect tense is in English, viz: from th 
 present of the auxiliary and the past participle. ($ 145 to be carcfulty 
 studied.) 
 
 : On. Nt-ver translate the preposition on, when connected with a day 
 
 -1C. 
 
108 
 
 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. ( 1.) 
 
 Perfect. 1 have studied this day. 
 I have studied this month. 
 Columbus has discovered 
 
 America. 
 
 imperfect. I studied yesterday. 
 I studied last month. 
 Columbus discovered Ame- 
 rica in the year 1492. 
 To -make, to do. Made, done. 
 
 What have you done ? 
 I have done nothing bad. 
 Has that shoemaker made my shoes ? 
 He has. He has not. 
 
 He made some. He did not make any. 
 No (nominative) No man has. ($171, 
 
 R. 6.) 
 No (objective) before a noun. ($171, 
 
 R. 5.) 
 
 I have done no ill or evil. 
 I have been to no bridge. 
 Has the. tailor any of my clothes? 
 Ih; lias none. None. ($ 171, R. 5.) 
 To put, to put on. Put, pat on. 
 Have you put on your shoes ? 
 I have (put them on). 1 have not. 
 [ have put some on. I have put none 
 
 on. 
 
 Did we not take ofTour gloves ? 
 Yes. we took them off, and our vests 
 
 also. 
 
 Take off your coat if it is wet. 
 To tell, to say. Told, said. 
 
 Have you said the word ? the words ? 
 I have. 
 
 Have you told me the word ? 
 1 have told you the word. 
 I have told it to you, (or told you of it. 
 That, (meaning that thing.) 
 This, (meaning this thing.) 
 That is the very thing. 
 Has he told you that ? 
 He told me this. 
 What have you told them ? 
 Have you told them nothing ? 
 We have told them neither this nor 
 
 that. 
 
 Have they told you anything ? 
 They have told us nothing. 
 To whom have they told that ? 
 They have said it to nobody. 
 
 J'ai etudie aujourd'hui. 
 
 J'ai etudie ce mois-ci. 
 
 Colomb a decouvert I'Amerique. 
 
 J'ai etudie hier. 
 
 J'ai etudie le mois dernier. 
 
 Colomb a decouvert 1'Ai 
 
 dans 1 annee 14 ( J2. 
 Faire* fait. (3lM 
 
 Qu' avez-vous fait ? 
 Je n'ai rien fait de mal. 
 Ce cordonnicr a-t-il fait mes soulierri ? 
 II les a fails. II ne les a pas fails. 
 11 en a fait. II n'en a pas fait. 
 Aucun . . . ne (sujet.) Aucun homme 
 
 n'a. 
 Ne . . . aucun (objet.) (avant un nom.) 
 
 i Je n'ai fait aucun mal. 
 Je n'ai die a aucun pont. 
 Le taillcur a-t-il aucun de mcshabiu? 
 II n'en a u;;cun. N'en . . . aucun. 
 Met t re* J//N. $1.') 
 
 Avez-vous mis vos souliers ? 
 Je les ai mis. Je ne les ai pas mis 
 J'en ai mis. Je n'en ai mis aucun 
 
 N'avons-nous pas ote nos gants ? 
 
 Si fait, nous les avons otcs, ct noa 
 
 A gilets aussi. 
 
 Otez votre habit s'il est mouille. 
 
 Dire.* Dit. 
 
 Avez-vous dit le mot ? les mots ? 
 
 Je 1'ai dit. Je les ai dits. 
 
 M'avez-vous dit le mot ? 
 
 Je vous ai dit le mot. 
 
 Je vous 1'ai dit. 
 
 Cela. ($38, N. 4.) 
 
 Ceci. 
 
 C'est cela m'uie. 
 
 Vous a-t-il dit cela? 
 
 II m'a dit ceci. 
 
 Que leur avez-vous dit ? 
 
 Ne leur avez-vous rien dit ? 
 
 Nous ne leur avons dit iii ecci a! 
 
 cela. 
 
 Vous ont-ils dit quelque chose ? 
 Us ne nous ont rien dit. 
 A qui ont-ils dit cela ? 
 11s nc 1'ont (lit a pcrsonne. 
 
TH1KTV-THIKD LESSON. (1.) 109 
 
 TUKNTE-THOIII:MK TIIME. Ire Sec. 
 Vous continucz a mettrc le quantierne, n'est-ce pas? 
 Qu'avez-vous faitce matin? Nous avons fait noire devoir. Que! 
 devoir ave/.-vous fait ? Nous avons fait celui que vous nous avez 
 donne a. ftiiro. L'avez-vous tous fait ? Je sais que j'ai fait le mien : 
 je crois que Charles et Henri out fail les leurs, mais je ne peux pas 
 vous dire si Guillaume a fait le sien. Le lien est-il fait, Guillaume ? 
 L-e mien ? sans doute, il est fait. Tous vos devoirs sont done fails. 
 -Alors, asseyez-vous tous, el comme vous avez fait vos devoirs, 
 DOUS pouvons commencer. M. Jules, quel est le parfait du verbe: 
 donne r? C'est: j'ai donne, n'est-ce pas? C'est cela meme. Com- 
 ment 1'epelez-vous? Je ne vous entends pas, M. Quoi! vous iven- 
 tendez pas : epclcz-voiis? Non, jo ne Penten'ds pas. Kt toi, Guillaume, 
 Pentends-tu? Moi, non plus, (I neither, or neither do I, $ 162, R. 9.) 
 Kt vous. I jj ne Tentendez-vous pas non plus? (do you not 
 
 understand it cither !) Non, nous, non plus. Qui Kentem! iei? Au 
 cun do nous ne Pentend. Quoi! Aucim de vous ne sait L' Anglais 
 > On, aucun de nous ne le sait. Ne vous ai-je 
 ie: to spell? Non. ^ T .., vous ne nous 1'avex 
 encore donne. Je croyais vous 1'avoir donno Tautre jour. Non, 
 MS pas encore en. Mais vous le sayez ^ present^ n'est- 
 ce pas? Je pense que c'est le mol que vous avez dit, n'est-ce pas? 
 i mume. Prononcez-le encore, srl vous plait. Volontiers: 
 jfipclcr. De quelle conjugaison est-ii? De la premiere, parce qu'il 
 finit en cr. Trcs-bien, c'esl cela meme. Alors quel esl 1'Anglais 
 de: Comment -vous 1 C'est: how do you spell it? C'est 
 
 cela meme. A present; repondez a ma question: Comment epe- 
 : j'ai donne ? J' (apostrophe) a, i, d. o. n, n, e. avec un accent 
 '. Comment formez-vous le participe pa-.-'' do: donncr? Je 
 Mge la fcnrttnmsoii, cr, en L 
 
 Have you anything to do? I have nothing to do. What hast 
 thou done? I have done nothing. Have I done anything? You 
 have done something. What have I done? You havo lorn my 
 book s- What have youi children done ? They have torn their 
 clothes. What have we done? You have done nothing, but youi 
 brothers have burnt iheir copy-books. Has the tailor already mn.de 
 your coat? He has not yet made it. Has your shoemaker already 
 le your shoes? He has already made them. Have you some- 
 times made a hat ? I have never made one. Have our neighbor.-: 
 orer made books? They made ( ont fait) some formerly. How 
 juany blue coats has your tailor made? He has made twenty or 
 Has lie made irood or bad coats? He has made (both) good 
 
170 
 
 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 
 
 and bad. Has your father put on his coat ? He has not yet put it 
 on, but he is going to put it on. 
 
 Has your brother put his shoes on ? He has put them on. Put 
 on your shoes and stockings. (Dir. 2.) We are going to put on 
 neither, (ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la.) What has the physician taken 
 away ? He has taken away nothing. What have you taken off? 
 I have taken off my large hat. Have your children taken off their 
 gloves ? They have taken them off. When did the ball take place? 
 It took place the day before yesterday. Who has told you that ? 
 My servant has told me of it. What has your brother told you ? 
 He has told me nothing. Did I tell you that ? You did not tell me 
 of it. Has he told it you ? He has told it me. Who told your 
 neighbor of it ? The English have told him of it. Have they told 
 it to the French ? They have told them of it, Who has told it to 
 you ? (or you of it ?) Your son has (told me of it). Has he told it 
 to you ? He has told me of it. Are you willing to tell that to your 
 friends? I am willing to tell them of it. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 Have you told it to me ? (or me of it ?) 
 
 I have not. I did not. 
 
 He has told it to me, (or he told me.) 
 
 He did not tell me, (or me of it.) 
 
 Have you told (did you tell) him that ? 
 
 I have. I did. 
 
 I have not. I did not (tell him so). 
 
 What have I told you ? 
 
 You told me that John is sick. 
 
 You did not tell me anything. 
 
 Did I say so to you ? (tell you that ?) 
 
 Yes, you did. 
 
 You did not. 
 
 Did we say so to you ? (tell you so ?) 
 
 You said so to us, (told us of it.) 
 
 You did not say so to us. 
 
 What did you tell us ? (to us ?) 
 
 What did you tell him ? (to him ?) 
 
 I told you that your horse has a sore 
 
 foot. 
 
 I told them that you are here. 
 I told him but a word. 
 You have told him of it. 
 You told us of it. 
 Vou did not tell them (of it). 
 Did any one tell you of it ? 
 Homebody did 
 Nobody did. 
 
 Me 1'avez-vous dit? ($ 57., 
 
 Je ne vous 1'ai pas dit. 
 
 II me 1'a dit. 
 
 II ne me 1'a pas dit. 
 
 Lui avez-vous dit cela ? 
 
 Je le lui ai dit. 
 
 Je ne le lui ai pas dit. 
 
 Que vous ai-je dit ? 
 
 Vous m'avez dit que Jean est malade 
 
 Vous ne m'avez rien dit. 
 
 Vous T ai-je dit f 
 
 Oui, vous me 1'avez dit. 
 
 Vous ne me 1'avez pas dit. 
 
 Vous avons-nous dit cela f 
 
 Vous nous 1'avez dit. 
 
 Vous ne nous 1'avez pas dit. 
 
 Que nous avez-vous dit ? 
 
 Que lui avez-vous dit ? 
 
 Je vous ai dit que votre cheval n rial 
 
 au pied. 
 
 Je leur ai dit que vous etes ici 
 Je ne lui ai dit qu'un mot. 
 Vous le lui avez dit. 
 Vous nous 1'avez dit. 
 Vous ne le leur avez pas dit. 
 Quelqu'un vous l'a-t-il dit I 
 Quelqu'un me 1'a dit. 
 Personne ne me 1'a dit. 
 
TH1R? r-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Who told them ? 
 
 Have you told them ofit ? 
 
 I have. I did. 
 
 Have you told them the words they 
 
 wish to know ? 
 
 I did. I have (told them to them). 
 He told them to me, to us. 
 He has not told them to you, to thee. 
 Have you spoken to the men ? 
 I have spoken to them. 
 To whom did you speak ? 
 I spoke to no one. 
 
 Qui le leur a dit ? 
 
 Le leur avez-vous dit ? 
 
 Je le leur ai dit. 
 
 Leur avez-vous dit les inuts qu'ilj 
 
 veulent savoir ? 
 Je les leur ai dits. 
 
 II me les a dits. II nous les a dits. 
 II ne vous les a pas dits v/.e te les.) 
 Avez-vous parle aux homines ? 
 Je leur ai parle. 
 A qui avez-vous parle ? 
 Je n'ai parle a personm 
 
 Obi. 77. The pronoun le, which is sometimes rendered into English by 
 so, and very frequently omitted, may in French relate to a substantive, an 
 adjective, or even a whole sentence. It changes neither its gendor nor num- 
 ber when it relates to an adjective or a whole sentence. (2'J 2 , t)bs. 70.) 
 
 Are you the brothers of my friend ? Etes-vous les freres dc inon ami ? 
 
 Nous les sommes. 
 Sont-ils riches ? Us IIP. le sont pas 
 Ces homines aunt-its savants ? 
 Us le eont. Us ne le sont pas. 
 Vous et votre ami, Ctes-vous fatigues? 
 Je ne lesuis pas, moisil dit qu'il Test. 
 L'est-il, en verite ? II le dit, 
 Nos voisins sont-iis aussi 
 
 qu'ils le disent ? Us le sont. 
 Je crois qu'ils ne le sont pns. 
 Votre frere a-t-il parle hier ? 
 
 Je ne le sais pas. Ii le dit. 
 
 \Ve are. (We are so we are they.) 
 Are they rich ? They are not. 
 Are those men learned ? 
 They are. They are not. 
 
 Are you and your friend fatigued ? 
 I am not, but he says he is. 
 Is he so indeed ? He says he is. 
 Are our neighbors as poor as they 
 
 say (they are) ? They are. 
 f believe they are not. 
 Did your brother speak yesterday ? 
 I do not know. He says he did. 
 
 TllENTE-TUOISlfcME TlIKME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Mettex la date en Frangais. 
 
 Avez-vous parle a votre maitre ? Oui, je lui ai parle. O.ii est-iH 
 [1 est dai-3 son appartement. Pourquoi n'en sort-il pas ? II est ma- 
 lade. Est-il bien (very) malade? Non; mais il Pest trop poui 
 donner des lepons aujourd ; hui. Le medecin lui a-t-il donne quelquo 
 chose a prendre ? Oui, il lui a donne quelque chose. Que lui a-t-il 
 donne ? Je ne sais pas ce qu ? il lui a donne. Est-il au lit ? (in bed 1) 
 Non, il n'est pas au lit, il est dans son grand fauteuiL Son fauteuil ? 
 Qu'est-ce qiie Jest ? (What is that ?) N 7 en savez-vous pas P Anglais 1 
 Non, en verite. Votre maitre ne vous en a-t-il pas dit F Anglais 1 
 Non, je suis sur qu : il ne me Fa jamais dit. Charles, ne vons l'a-t-'" 
 pas dit? Lui, non plus. Eh! bien, je vais vous le dire. C'es- 
 arm-chair. Fauteuil : Arm-chair ? Est-il possible? C'est tres-pos 
 sible, car c'est cela meme. C'est tout-a-fait different <differonH d 
 1'Anglaw. C'est vrai, vous avoz raison 
 
172 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 
 
 Have you spoken to my father? I have. When did you? I 
 spoke to him the day before yesterday. How many times have yon 
 spoken to the captain ? To which captain ? To the French, no, no, 
 I do not mean the French, but the Greek. I have not spoken to tho 
 Greek captain ; I do not know a Greek one j bu; I have spoken to 
 the American. How many times have you spoken to him ? I spoke 
 to him many times. Have you ever spoken to his son? I have, 
 often. To which strangers has your young cousin spoken? He has 
 spoken to these and to those. To these three and those four ? Yes, 
 to them all, (d tons, ou a eux tous.) Are you the brother of that 
 handsome young man, (cc beau gar^on, is as often used as: ce bvaii, 
 jtune hommc.) Is that other young man the minister's cousin ? That 
 one or this ? That one. No, that one is not ; but this one is. I wish 
 to speak to him. Have you never done it? No, never. And I 
 neither. Are your friends as busy as they say? They are (so). 
 Are the carpenters as tired as they think? I believe they are. 
 
 Is the valet tired because he sweeps the stores? He is. Does ho 
 sweep them often ? He does it as often as he can. Has the Pole 
 money enough to buy wood or coal ? I believe he has not got any. 
 Give him this three dollar note. Is the dentist at home ? No, he 
 h;is pone to the wire bridge. Has your old cook gone to market? 
 No, he has gone to bed instead of going to market. Is he ill ? (ma- 
 lade?) He is not ill, but only tired. Is he very tired? He is. 
 because he made a great dinner in honor of the uncle of the French 
 minister. Who is ill? I do not know who is. I am not. Are you 
 as tall (grand) as I ? I am. Is your son much taller than you ? He 
 is. Are these young men clerks? They are. Are you as busy as 
 your brother ? I am more so than he. Do you know the name of 
 the English minister? No, I do not. Does Thomas know it? He 
 neither. Has not Lewis told it to you ? No, he did not. Did ha 
 not tell it to your uncle ? I do not know if he has told it to him. 
 To whom has he ta'l it? He has told it neither ($ 56, $ 64) to him. 
 nor to them, nor to you, nor to me, nor to anybody. 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section. 
 
 To write, written. 
 
 Which notes have you written ? 
 I have written these. 
 Which words has he written ? 
 He has written those which you see. 
 To drink, drunk. 
 
 To see, seen. 
 
 To read, read. 
 
 To be acquainted with. been ac- 
 quainted with. 
 
 6crire,* e'crit. (065. 75.1 
 
 Quols billets avez-vous ecrits ? 
 J'ai ecrit ceux-ci. 
 Quels mots a-t-ii ecrite ? 
 II a ecrit ceux que vous voyes. 
 Boire,* bu. 
 
 Voir,* vu. 
 
 Lire,* lu. 
 
 Connaitre,* connu. 
 
THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 
 
 ITS 
 
 Wh\cb men have you seen ? 
 
 I have seen those. 
 
 Which books have you read ? 
 
 I have read those which you have 
 
 lent me. 
 Have you been acquainted with these 
 
 men ? 1 have not. 
 
 Which ones have you known ? 
 Have you seen any sailors? 
 I have seen some. 
 I have not seen any. 
 To call, to ?iame, (not to call at, upon.) 
 To call at, upon. Call on me. 
 To throw, throw away them some. 
 Do you call me ? 
 I do not call you. 
 
 Quels hommes avez-vous VUB ? 
 
 J'ai vu ceux-la. 
 
 Quels livrea avez-vous lus 1 
 
 J'ai lu ceux que vous m'avez pretea 
 
 Avez-vous connu ces hommes ? Jo 
 
 ne les ai pas connus. 
 Lcsquels avez-vous connus ? 
 Avez-vous vu des matebts ? 
 J'cn ai vu. 
 
 Je n'cn ai vu uicun. (32 1 , 06*. 76.) 
 Appeler ,\. 
 
 Passer, 1, chez. Passez chez moi. 
 Jeter, 1. Les jeter, en jeter. 
 
 M'appelez-vous ? Je vous appelle. 
 Je ne vous appelle pas. 
 
 Obs. 78. In verbs ending in cler and etcr, as appeler, to call ; jeter, to 
 throw ; the letter / or / is doubled in all persons or tenses where it is fol 
 lowed by c r. 
 
 Who calls me ? [ Qui m'appelle ? 
 
 Your father calls you. i Votre pcre vous appelle. 
 
 Avez-vous appele les homines? 
 
 Je l<js ai appeles. 
 
 Jetez-vous votre argent ? 
 
 Je ne le jette pas. 
 
 Qui jette ses livres ? 
 
 Have you called the men ? 
 
 I have called them. 
 
 Do you throw your money away ? 
 
 I do not throw it away. 
 
 Who throws away his books ? 
 
 you thrown away anything? 
 I have thrown away my gloves. 
 Have you thrown them away? 
 
 Avez-vous jetd quelque chose ? 
 J'ai jete mes gants. 
 Les avez-vous jetes ? 
 
 THME. 3me Sec. 
 Vous mettez le quantieme ici, n'est-ce pas ? 
 
 Bon jour, mon cher Monsieur, j'espere que vous vous portez bien. 
 Ou, Dieu merci, je me porte parfaitement bien. J'en suis bien aise, 
 j'en suis ckarmc. Savez-vous que nous attendons le professeur 
 grec ? Va-t-il passer chez vous ce matin ? II va passer ici, nous 
 1'attendons a 9 heures. J'en suis charme; car, j'aigrande envie do 
 le connaitre. Ne le connaissez-vous pas encore? Non, je n'ai pas 
 encore eu le plaisir de le voir. Comment Pappelez-vous? Je na 
 sais pas son vnii nom, mais je Fappelle Miaulitz. Comment epelez- 
 vous son nom ? Je Fepelle M, i, a, u, 1, i, t, z mais je ne sais pas 
 s'il Fepelle comme cela. N'imporle, sil vous repond quand vous 
 rappelez comme-ra. Mais, a present que j'y pense, parle-t-il Fran- 
 
 1 Custom, however, does not observe this rule with regard to the verb 
 tchtt , and its compound, racheler, to re*lcem, to buy again. (25 l .) 
 
174 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 
 
 cais * Sans doule. II ]e parle bien pour un etranger. II parle aussi 
 italien, allemand, et un peu Anglais. II est done savant ? Oui ; ii 
 Pest. N'est-il pas encore neuf heures? Non, pas tout-a-fait. Je 
 pense que comme il est professeur, il est ponctuel. Je le pense 
 aussi; et comme il est pres de Pheure, je pense qu'il vient et qu'il 
 est en chemin. N ? entendez-vous pas quelqu'un? (30 2 .) Si fait, 
 j'entends quelqu'un. Est-ce lui ; croyez-vous ? Oui, c'est lui- 
 meme. (}41j.) Voyez. Ah! il est bien grand, n"est-ce pas? 
 What have you to tell me ? I have to tell you to call on Professor 
 
 C . Does he wish to see me ? He does. What does ne want 
 
 with me? (me veut-il?) I do not know what he wants with you; 
 he did not tell it to me. When? Immediately after breakfast. 
 Does he breakfast early? He finishes usually at i of 7 o'clock. 
 Which exercises has your friend written? He has written those.-^ 
 Which men have you seen at the wharf? I have seen these. 
 Which books have your children read ? They have read those 
 which you have lent them. Have you seen these strangers or those ? 
 I have neither seen these nor those. Which strangers have you 
 seen? I have seea those to whom (dqui) you have spoken. Have 
 you been acquainted with these men ? I have been acquainted with 
 them. With which boys has your brother been acquainted? He 
 has been acquainted with those of our merchant. Have I been 
 acquainted with these Frenchmen ? You have not been acquainted 
 with them. Which wine has your servant drunk? He has drunk 
 mine. Have you seen my brother's pretty little cousins? I have. 
 Where have you seen them ? I have seen them at their own house, 
 (chez cux.) Have you ever seen Greeks? I have never seen any. 
 (Obs. 76.) Has your father seen any? He has sometimes seen 
 some. Do you call me ? I do call you. Who calls your brother? 
 My father calls him. Dost thou call any one ? I call no one. Have 
 you thrown away your hat ? I have not thrown it away. Does your 
 father throw away anything? He throws away the notes which he 
 has read, if they are not important, (importants.) Have you thrown 
 away your pencils? I have not thrown them away, for I want 
 them. (23 2 .) Dost thou throw away thy book? I do not throw it 
 iway ; I want it to (pour) study French. Do you translate and write 
 three exercises every day? No; I translate and write only one but 
 I study an d Bad several. 
 
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 175 
 
 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON, 34th. Trente-quatrieme Lcfon, 34me. 
 vr.uLAiRE. Ire Section. 
 
 PARTICIPES PASSES IRREGULIEBS, 
 
 6teint. 
 
 ouvert. 
 
 conduit. 
 
 pris. 
 
 cru. 
 
 IXF1XITIFS. 
 
 To extinguish, Eteindre.* 
 
 To open, Ouvrir.* 
 
 To conduct, Conduire.* 
 
 To take, I'rendre.* 
 
 To believe, Croire.* 
 
 To be able, (can,) Pouvoir.* 
 To know, iir.* 
 
 To be willing, Vouloir.* 
 
 Extinguished, 
 
 Opened, 
 
 Conducted, 
 
 Taken, 
 
 Believe 1, 
 
 Keen able, (could,) pu. 
 
 Known, su. 
 
 illing, voulu. 
 
 NEUTER VERBS. Series Centres ou Intrausitifs. 
 See ( 158, and Art. 1, &c.) and study it carefully. 
 
 Obs. 79. Ti: V:-.-h arc conjugated with the auxiliary 
 
 re, in French, and /> /<"" , i;. ill be marked thus, e . 
 
 To set out, 1'nrtir.* 
 
 out, ;ir.* 
 
 \"enir.* 
 Has your father set out ? 
 
 y.nir InrntL .- t out ? 
 They have not set out. 
 When did your brothers go out ? 
 They went out at ten o'clock. 
 Did the men come to your father's 
 
 and to your uncle's ? 
 They did. 
 
 Which firetf have you extinguished ? 
 Which storehouses have you opened, 
 
 and which shut ? (have you.) 
 Have you conducted them to the 
 
 storehouse and to the office ? 
 I have. 
 
 Which books have you taken ? 
 How many notes have you received? 
 I received but one. 
 The same. The same jewel. 
 
 This secretary. This scrutoire. 
 The secretary of the minister. 
 Upon, on, the scrutoire (writing desk.) 
 
 Set ouv, departed, parti . 
 
 Gone out, sorti*. 
 
 Come, venu fc . 
 
 Votre pure est-il parti ? 
 
 Vos amis sont-ils partis ? 
 
 II ne sont pas partis. 
 
 Quand vos freres sont-ils sortis ? 
 
 Us sont sortis a dix heures. 
 
 Les hommes sont-ils venus chel 
 
 votre pere et chez votre oncle ? 
 Us y sont venus. 
 Quels feux avcz-vous eteints ? 
 Quels magasins avez-vous ouverts. 
 
 et lesquels avez-vous fcrmes ? 
 Les avez-vous conduits au magasin 
 
 et au bureau ? 
 Je les y ai conduits. 
 Quels livres avcz-vous pris ? 
 Combien de billets avez-vous re5us 1 
 | Je n'en ai reru qu'un. 
 Z meme. JL,ts mtmes. Le mime bijou. 
 Ce secretaire. 
 Le secretaire tin ministre. 
 Sur le secretaire. 
 Le lane. Sur ce bane-la. 
 
 The bench. Upon that bench. 
 
 TRENTE-QUATRI&ME THME. Ire Sec. 
 N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date en Franc.ais. 
 
 Quel vilain temps nous avons, n'est-ce pas? Oui ; nous avons un 
 emps tres-cJc'-sagreable. II pleut trop; il fait trop humide, et le 
 ernns est malsain. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vcus? Noil, 
 
176 THIRTY -FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Dieu Therci, tout ie monde se porte bien; mais presque tons out eie 
 malades. Qu'ont-ils eu ? Non pas le cholera, j'espere ! Non, pas 
 le cholera. Quoi done? L'un a eu le tic douloureux, I'autre mal 
 aux dents; celui-ci a eu un violent mal de tele, celui-la quelqu'au- 
 tre chose, en un mot ils ont presque tous etc malades. Je suis 
 charme d'apprendre qu'"ils se portent bien a present. Quand avez- 
 vous vu votre ami le jeune secretaire du general! Je 1'ai vu avant- 
 hier. Comment Fappelez-vous? Je 1'appelle Lucien. Lucien est 
 le nom d'un des freres de Napoleon, n'est-ce pas? Oui, ce Pest. Je 
 aais le nom a present. Est-il ici encore, ou est-il parti? Parti pour 
 ou? Je le croyais a Boston. Le general n'y est-il pas alle ? Non, 
 le general est malade, au lit. Ne sort-il pas? Non, en verite. 
 Qu'a-t-il ? Le mcdecin dit que c'est lagoutte, (gout.) 
 
 Where are your cousins gone to? They have gone to the bridge. 
 Have your friends left? (partis?) They have not yet left. When 
 do they set out? This evening. Early or late ? At what o'clock ? 
 At half past nine. When did the French boys come to your 
 brother's ? They came there the day before yesterday. Did they 
 come alone, or did their friends come also? They came also. 
 Has any one come to see us? The Swiss came. Who came to the 
 Englishman's office ? The French did. When did you drink any 
 German wine ? We never drank any. Did you not drink some the 
 day before yesterday and to-day, at the secretary's house ? Is the 
 wine that we drank there German wine? To be sure it is. Then 
 German wine is very good. Has the big servant carried my notes? 
 He has. Where did he carry them ? He carried one to the law- 
 yer's office, the other to the merchant's counting-house. Did you 
 not cany a pocket-book to the captain's? Yes, I did carry there 
 that which you gave me to carry. Which papers has the gardener's 
 son brought here? Did he bring any (aucun) here? Yes, he 
 brought here those which you lent to his father. Where has he put 
 them ? I have not seen them. I believe he gave them to Jacob, 
 who has put them in the secretary, or under it, in the parlor. 
 
 Which books has the clerk taken 7 He has taken the one which 
 you do not read, and those which you have read. Have the 
 clerks opened the stores? They have. Which did they open? 
 They opened those you have seen, under the lawyer's offices. 
 When did they open them ? They did early in the morning. Did 
 they shut them last night? No, the servants did. Do they slim 
 them every night, and open them every morning? They do. 
 Why did they not open them this morning? Because they are busy 
 on the vessel, at the wharf. Did Jacob conduct the foreigners tc 
 the museum'? He did. Did he not conduct them to the wins 
 
THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 177 
 
 bridge alss i He did not ; but he intends to conduct them iheru very 
 FOOII. Has the cock extinguished the fires? He has nol yet extin- 
 guished them. Who has extinguished the parlor fire? The Irisi^ 
 servant has. Have you received any (aucun) bench, sofa, and 
 arm-chair 1 ? We have received some. Has your brother received 
 his? He has not received them; but our friends have received 
 theirs 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 
 (jpon U The shawl is upon it. 
 Undt-.f. Under the writing-desk. 
 
 it, (underneath.) 
 Where are my velvet and satin hats ? 
 
 They are upon the sofa. 
 
 Are my kid gloves on it also ? 
 
 No, they are under. I see them. 
 
 To learn how, learned how. 
 
 Do you learn how to read and count ? 
 
 I do learn how to do fcoth. 
 
 Have you learned how to spoak ? 
 
 I have learned how, (or it.) 
 
 Gone. Have they gone ? 
 
 In the stove. In it or within. 
 
 To get or have .. .mended. Got or 
 
 had . . . mended. 
 To wash. To have . . . washed. Got 
 
 . . . washed. 
 To get... made, (bespeak,) have... 
 
 made. 
 
 To have . . . swept. Got . . . swept. 
 To get ... sold. Had . . . sold. 
 
 Dessus (adv.) Le chale est dessua 
 Sous (prep.) Sous le secretaire. 
 Dessous (adv.) 
 Oii sont mes chapcaux de velours el 
 
 de satin ? 
 
 lls sont sur le sofa. 
 Mes gants de chamois y sont-ils aus?al 
 Non, ils sont dcssous. Je les voi. 
 Apprendre* d, appris a. 
 Apprcncz-vous a lire ct a compter ? 
 J'apprends Tun et 1'autre. 
 Avex-vous appris a parler ? 
 Je 1'ai appris. 
 
 AM*. Sont-ils alles ? 
 
 Dans le poele. Dedans (adv.; 
 t Faire raccommoder. Fait racco< 
 
 mmoder. 
 Laver. t Faire laver. Fait laver. 
 
 t Faire fair e. Fait fair e. 
 
 t Faire balaycr. Fait balayer. 
 
 t Faire vendre. Fait vendre. 
 Obs. SO. The two French verbs ccme together, while the English verbs 
 are separated by some noun. 
 To get the coat mended. 
 To have it mended. 
 To get them mended. 
 To get some mended. 
 Are you getting a coat made ? (do 
 
 you order or bespeak a coat ?) 
 I am getting one made, (I order one.) 
 I have had one made. 
 Has he had his handkerchief washed ? 
 He has had it washed. 
 He did not get it washed. 
 
 I have had my shoes mended. 
 I have had them mended. 
 To wipe, wiped. 
 
 t Faire raccommoder 1' habit, 
 t Le faire raccommoder. 
 t Les faire raccommoder. 
 t En faire raccommoder. 
 t Faites-vous faire un habit ? 
 
 t J'en fais faire un 
 
 t J'en ai fait faire un. 
 
 t A-t-il fait laver son mouchoir ? 
 
 t II 1'a fait laver. 
 
 t II ne 1'a pas fait laver. 
 
 t J'ai fait raccommoder mes souliers 
 
 t Je les ai fait raccommoder. 
 
 Esfiyer, 1, essiivs ($144, R. 3.) 
 
173 
 
 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 t wipe, thou wipcst, he wipes. 
 Have you not seen my book ? 
 Yes, I have put it away for you. 
 When did you see my brother ? 
 I saw him last evening at the bridge. 
 Where did you see my cousins ? 
 I saw them at the museum. 
 
 J'essuie, tu essuies, il essuic. 
 N'avez-vous pas vu mon livre f 
 Si fait, je 1'ai serre pour vous. 
 Quand avez-vous vu mon frere ? 
 Je 1'ai vu hier soir au pont. 
 Ou avez-vous vu mes cousins ? 
 Je les ai vus au musee. 
 
 TRENTE-QUATRIEME TH&ME. 2de SeC. 
 
 Ou est le chale de velours de Mile. Clara? II est sur le sofaj 
 ri'est-ce pas ? Ne 1'y voyez-vous pas ? Ses gants de ill sont-ils des- 
 BUS aussi? Non, ils sont sous le bane. Dessous ! avez-vous ditl 
 Oui, c'est-ce que j'ai dit. Qui les a mis dessous? Je ne sais pas 
 en verite. Ramassez-les done vite, et mettez les sur le sofa avec 
 son chale. Comme son chapeau de satin est sur le grand fauteuil 
 de cuir, je vais meltre ses gants de fil dedans et son chale sur le 
 dos du fauteuil. Tres-bien, faites-le. Mes souliers sont-ils sur le 
 bane? Non, ils sont dessous. Je les ai mis dessus: Qui les a mia 
 dessous ? Moi. C'est moi qui les ai mis dessous. t Je vous remercie, 
 De rien. (26.) Le charbon est-il dans le coin ou sous le bane? 11 
 est dans le poele. Avez-vous mis du bois dedans? Oui, d'abord, 
 j'ai mis du bois dedans, ensuite j'y ai mis du feu pour Pallumer, et 
 apres cela du charbon. 13rule-t-il? Oui, le bois et le charbon bru- 
 lent bien. Nous avons bon feu. Si vous avez froid, mettez-vous 
 pres du poele. Je n'ai pas grand froid. J'ai vu un peu de bois dans 
 un coin, est-il tout dans le poele ? II est dedans et brule. Ou sont 
 mes journaux ? Je les ai otes de dessus le poele, parce que je n'ai pas 
 voulu les bruler. Les avez-vous mis sur le secretaire ? Non, ils sont 
 dessous. Avez-vous envoye votre petit garcon au marche ? Je n'ai 
 pas voulu Py envoyer. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas voulu Py envoyer 7 
 Je ir ai pas voulu Py envoyer, parce qu'il a ete un peu malade- 
 Qu'a-t-il eu ? II a eu un violent mal de tete. Avez-vous ecrit a votre 
 oncle, Papothicaire ? Je lui ai deja ecrit. Vous a-t-il repondu ? II 
 ne nra pas repondu. Vous a-t-il envoye Pargent que vous voulcz ? 
 II ne me Pa pas encore envoye. Avez-vous deja fait faire un habit 1 
 Je iren ai pas encore fait faire. Avez-vous fait faire un gilet ? Je 
 n'en ai pas fait faire. N 7 avez-vous rien fait faire ? Non, lien, parce 
 que je veux avoir mon argent avant de faire faire quelque chose. 
 
 Are you getting your floor swept ? I am. Have you had your 
 office swept? I have not yet had it swept, but I intend to have n 
 swept to-day. Have you the same servant ? The same ! No, in- 
 deed, we have not the same. We have changed several times, (en, 
 50.) But you have the same cook; have you not? Yes, \ve have 
 the same yet. Have you wiped yc;ur feet ? I have. Where did 
 
THIRTY -FIFTH L E S S N. (1.) 179 
 
 you wipe them ? I wiped them oil the old carpet. Have you had 
 your sofa*, and arm-chairs wiped? I have (had them 
 wiped). What does your little valet wipe? He wipes the big and 
 email knives. Have you :i a Syrian? I have already seen 
 
 two or three. Have you ever shown one to your cousin ? I have 
 already shown him one at the museum. Has he ever seen a Turk ? 
 lie saw one before I did, (moi.) Have you ever lent anything to 
 anybody? Y many times lent something to a 
 
 great many persons, (beaucoup de mondc.) Does the joiner's son 
 know ho, : He d<K-s. Is he learning how to write? No, 
 
 he dors not ; ho is too young yet to learn how to write. 
 
 AVi. t caucus going to take place? It has already 
 
 I>id you go? I did not. Miss Charlotte wishes to 
 
 know it' Mrs. Ji taken place? It took place last 
 
 I >id the gentlemen go to it? They did. Have we yet 
 
 the same milkman .' . the same. Wo have not 
 
 changed, (en,) <<!, and he is punctual; but 
 
 .. T the same baker, nor the same butcher, nor the 
 
 16 grocer. get his office washed? Yes, he 
 
 yours washed to-day; will 
 
 '. I cannot irct it wa>hed to-day : I am too busy, I have too 
 
 h to write. Hast tliou ever had thy shoes mended? I have 
 
 sometimes had them mended. Has the little Dutchman had his 
 
 I Ie had it sold last Wednesday. Why has he had it 
 
 gold ? He had it sold because ho is going to California. Have his 
 
 here? Yes, they have. 
 
 IT FIFTH LESSON, 35ih.Trente-cinquitme Lecon, 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 To pr.- promised. 
 
 (Prometlrc est comme son primitif, 
 
 raettre.) 
 
 To promise some one to come, 
 To compose, to compound, composed. 
 Compouiid Tenses. Thus, so. 
 
 Promctlre* 4, promis, (prend d 
 avant le nom ; de, avant 1'inf.) 
 
 Promettre d quelqu'un de venir. 
 Composer, 1, compose. 
 
 Les Temps composes. Ainsi. 
 
 Obs. 81. Les verles composes sont con]ugues comme les primitif s. Ainsi, 
 ?rom\ettre est comme metlre ; Apprendrc, comme prendrc. (24 3 , 25 1 , 
 83 1 , 34*.) 
 
 To forget, forgotten, forget, (impera.) 
 I forgot to take that to the dentist. 
 
 OuWier, 1. Oullie. Oubliez, (imp6r., 
 
 de avant 1'inf. 
 J'ai oublic dc porter cela au dentistc. 
 
180 
 
 .THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (l.J 
 
 How ? So, so. 
 
 In this manner, (way.) Like that. 
 
 Do you promise me to come ? 
 
 I do promise you. 
 
 What have you promised the man ? 
 
 I have not promised him anything. 
 
 Have you ever learned French ? 
 
 I learned it formerly. 
 
 To wear out. To spell. 
 
 11' refuse. 
 
 HJW has your brother written his 
 
 exercise ? He has written it well. 
 To put to dry, put to dry. 
 
 Do you put your vest to dry ? 
 I have already put it to dry. 
 How old are you ? 
 I am twelve years old. 
 How old is your brother ? 
 He is thirteen years old. 
 Almost, hardly ever. 
 
 He is almost fourteen years old. 
 About, about sixteen years and \. 
 I am about fifteen years old. 
 Nearly, (before numbers.) 
 He is nearly fifteen years old. 
 Hardly. Scarcely. Scarcely nine. 
 Vou are hardly seventeen years old. 
 Not quite eleven years and two 
 
 months. 
 
 . an not quite sixteen years old. 
 Art thoa older than thy brother ? 
 I am younger than he. 
 I caanot teil you how old I am. 
 There is, there are. 
 How many francs nre there in a 
 
 crown ? Three. 
 
 Thnre are five centimes in a sou. 
 There are twenty sous or a hundred 
 
 centimes in one franc. 
 A, or one hundred. 
 The centime. 
 How many francs are there in a 
 
 dollar ? 
 There are 5 francs and 7 sous. 
 
 ! Comment I ^ Comme tela. 
 
 ' t De cette maniere. Comme cda 
 Me prometlez-vous de venir ? 
 Je vous le promets. 
 Qu'avez-vous promis a rhomme f 
 Je ne lui ai rien promis. 
 Avez-vous jamais appris le Francois 
 Je 1'al appris autrefois. 
 User 1. Epeler, 1. (05s. 78.) 
 
 Refuser, 1, (de, avant i'inf.) 
 Comment votre frere a-t-il ecrit sor, 
 
 theme ? II Fa bien ecrit. 
 
 Mettre d seeker, mis d sechcr. 
 Mettez-vous votre gilet a secher ? 
 Je 1'ai deja mis a secher. 
 t Quel age avez-vcus ? 
 t J'ai douze ans. 
 t Quel age votre frere a-t-il ? 
 t II a treize ans. 
 
 Fresque, presque jamaw. 
 
 t 11 a presque quatorze ar.s. 
 Environ, environ seize ans ot demi 
 t J'ai environ quinze ans. 
 Fres de, (avant les nombres.) 
 t II a pres de quinze ans. 
 A peine. A peine neuf. 
 
 t Vous avez a peine dix-sept ans. 
 Pas tout-a-fait onze ans et dec ( 
 
 mois. 
 
 t Je n'ai pas tout-a-fait seize ans 
 Es-tu plus age que ton frere ? 
 Je suis plus jeune que lui. 
 Je ne puis pas vous dire quel age j'ai. 
 11 y a. 
 Combien de francs y a-t-ii dana uu 
 
 dcu ? Trois. 
 
 II y a cinq centimes dans un sou. 
 II y a vingt sous ou cent centimes 
 
 dans un franc. 
 Cent. . 
 Le centime. 
 Combien de francs y a-t il dans in. 
 
 dollar ? 
 II y a 5 francs et "7 sous. 
 
 TnibiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 i vous oubliez dc mettre le quantieme au commencement du tneme, vous 
 
 pouvez le mettre a la un, (end fern.) 
 
 Bon jour, mon cher ami, j ? ai re^u votre billet et je vois avec plaisii 
 ue vous TT" \)romettez de venir a notre petit concert. Je vous le 
 
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSOJT. (1.) 181 
 
 promeis ; si je me porte bicn. Je suis sitr de vous avoir, car von? 
 vous portez toujours bien. Non, je vous assure (assure you), car hier 
 j'ai eu mal de tete. Vous ai-je promis quelque chose? Vous ne 
 m'avez rien promis. Je croyais vous avoir promis d'aller quelque 
 part avec vous. Si vous me Favez promis, je Fai oublie. Qu'est-ce 
 rme mon pere vous a promis ? II a promis de nracheter un beau 
 livre. Donnez-moi ce que vous m'avez promis. Je ne peux pas 
 vous le dormer avant apres-demain. Votre ami a-t-il recu beaucoup 
 (Farg5nt? II n ? en a guere recu. Combien a-t-il recu? II n'a reQU 
 qu 7 un dollar et un ecu. Combien avez-vous donne a mon ills ? Jo 
 Jui ai donne six dollars, ce qui fait un peu plus de trente f rancs. 
 Est-ce tout ce que vous lui avez promis? Oui. c'est tout ce que 
 je lui ai promis. Avez-vous de Fargent Francais? J'en ai. Avez 
 vous des francs, des sous, et dps centimes ? Oui, j'en ai. Combien 
 <lc sous'y a-t-il (are there) dans un franc? II y en a vingt. Avez- 
 vous quelques centimes? J'en ai quelques uns. Combien de 
 centimes y a-t-il dans un sou ? II y en a cinq. Et combien y en 
 a-t-il dans un franc? Cent. Avez-vous un habit a preter a ce 
 panvre homme? A lui preter? Ou a lui dormer. J'ai un habit 
 qui est un peu use, il peut Favoir. 
 
 Are your shoes worn out? They are almost worn out, but not 
 quite. Are you going to have them mended ? The shoemaker has 
 them to mend. Have you anything to lend to cousin Charles? J 
 have. To whom have you lent your hat ? I have not lent it; I have 
 given it away, because it is almost worn out. To whom have you 
 given it away ? I have given it to a pauper, (d un pauvre.) Does 
 your little brother already know how to spell? He does. Does he 
 Fpell well ? He does. Hew old is he ? He is six years old. Let me 
 hear him. Robert, como *iere to spell. How has the doctor's little 
 boy spelt ? He has spelt so so. Is he as old as Robert ? He is 
 older. How have their children written their exercises ? They have 
 written them badly, as usual; but they are young, they are only 
 ten. Has my neighbor lent you his gloves ? He has refused to lend 
 them to me. Do you know Spanish ? No, I do not like it. I have 
 refused to learn it. 
 
 Does the secretary's son speak Italian ? He speaks it well. Does 
 he speak it with every Italian he sees? (78.) He does usually, but 
 yesterday lie refused to speak to a stranger. How old are you, my 
 \*oung boy? I am eleven nearly. How do our friends speak? 
 They do not speak badly. Do they listen to what you tell them? 
 They do almost always. How hast thou learned Italian? I have 
 teamed it in this manner. As you understand it well, I suppose it 
 
182 
 
 THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Is a gocd way, (une bonne maniere,) is it not ' I believe il is ; ai 
 Least, I like that way. Have you called me * I have not called 
 you; but I have called your brother to tell him to piepare his clothes 
 (habits) to start to-morrow for Boston. To start so soon? Yes, 1 
 want tc send some one to Boston, and he has time to go. Is he 
 come ? No, he has not yet come. Do you know where he has 
 gone i He has gone to the tailor's to bespeak a coat and a vest. 
 
 VOCABULAIKE. 2de Section. 
 
 Tb wtderstand, to comprehend. 
 
 To hear, to understand. 
 
 To wait for, to expect. To lose. 
 
 Do you understand me ? 
 
 I do. 
 
 Have you understood the man f 
 
 L have understood him. 
 
 I hear you, but I do not understand 
 
 you. 
 
 The noise. The wind. 
 
 The noise (roaring) of the wind. 
 Do you hear the roaring of the wind ? 
 [ do. I do not. 
 
 To bark. 
 What (21".) barks ? Dogs bark. ($ 15.) 
 
 The barking. Have you heard the 
 
 barking of the dogs ? 
 I have. I have not. 
 
 To wait for some one or something. 
 
 To expect some one or something. 
 
 Are you waiting for my brother ? 
 
 [ am waiting for him. 
 
 Do you expect some friends ? 
 
 I do expoet some. 
 
 How much has your brother lost ? 
 
 He has lost about a crown. 
 
 I have lost more than he. 
 
 To remain, to stay, to dwell. 
 
 mais je ne voua 
 Le vent. 
 
 Comprendre,* 4, (conjugue corume 
 
 prendre. (24 3 , 25 , 34*.) 
 Entendre, 4. 
 
 Attcndre, 4. Perdre, 4. 
 
 Me comprenez-vous ? M'entendei- 
 
 vous ? 
 
 Je vous comfends. Je vous entends. 
 Avez-vous compris 1'homme f 
 Je 1'ai compris. 
 Je vous entends, 
 
 comprends pas. 
 Le bruit. 
 Le bruit du vent. 
 Entendez-vous le bruit du vent ? 
 Je 1'entends. Je ne 1'cntends pas, 
 Aboyer. ($144, R. 3.) 
 Qu'est-ce qui aboie ? Les chiena 
 
 nboient. 
 L 1 aboiement. Avez-vous entencfu 
 
 1'aboiement des chiens ? 
 Je 1'ai entendu. je ne I'ai paa 
 
 entendu. 
 Attendre quelqu'un on quelquc 
 
 chose. 
 
 Attendez-vous mon frere ? 
 Je 1'attends. 
 
 Attendez-vous des amis ? 
 J'en attends quelques uns. 
 Combien votre frere a-t-il perdu ? 
 II a perdu environ un ecu. 
 J'ai perdu plus que lui. 
 Rester, 1, (prend plus souvent etrs 
 
 que avoir pour auxiliaire.? 1 
 
 1 This verb takes avoir when it signifies to live in, and ctrc, when it 
 (Signifies to remain.. Ex. S'ai resti sept mois a Colmar sans partir de mo 
 chambre, (Voltaire;) I remained (lived) seven months at Colmar without 
 leaving my room. Je 1'attendais a Paris, mais il est reste a Lyon, (The 
 French Academy ;) I waited for him in Paris, but he remained at Lyons. 
 
THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 183 
 
 The nobleman. I Le gentilhomme. 
 
 Noblemen. j Les gentilshommes. ($ 140 7.) 
 
 Obs. 82. Quand un mot est compose d'un nom et d'un adjectif, Tun et 
 Tautre prennent la marque (the mark) du pluriel. 1 
 
 Genteel, pretty. Gentil. 
 
 Where has the nobleman remained ? 
 He has remained at home. 
 Hove you remained with him ? 
 
 Ou le gentilhomme est-il rests' ? 
 II est reste a la maison. 
 Etes-vous reste avec lui ? 
 
 THME. 2de Sec. 
 JSi vous ne mettez pas la date ici, mettez-la a la fin du theme. 
 Ou avez-vous mouille vos habits de cette maniere ? Un des gar- 
 cons m'a mouille comme cela. N'*importe. Otez vite votre habit, 
 vos souliers, et vos bas, et mettez-les pres dufeu, a secher. Je ne le 
 peux pas, j'ai besoin d'etre a la maison a six heures et demie, et il est 
 presque six heures et quart a present, ainsi vous voyez que je n'ai 
 'pa's assez de temps pour faire secher mes habits. Vous avez raison. 
 Alors, allez chez vous, changez-y d'habit, de bas et de souliers, aus- 
 sitot que possible. Mais quel est le garden qui vous a mouille ? 
 C : est celui qui a mouille le petit Jules Pautre soir. Le meme ! Oui. 
 le meme, en verite. C'est done un mauvais garcon! Oui, je vous 
 assure. Quel age a-t-il ? II a d pcine dix ans. Me comprenez-vous ? 
 Je vous comprends. Qu ? est-ce qui a faitce bruit-la? Jepense que 
 c'est le domestique dans le salon. Quel age a notre voisin? II n ; a 
 pas tout-a-fait trente ans. Nos amis sont-ils aussi jeunes que nous? 
 I Is sont plus vieux que nous. Quel age ont-ils ? L'un a a peine dix- 
 neuf ans, et Pautre en a pres de vingt. Votre oncle est-il aussi age 
 que le mien ? Quel age a le votre ? Le notre a environ cinquante- 
 sept ans et demi. Combien le volre a-t-il ? II a a peu pres le meme 
 
 How old are you ? I am hardly eighteen years old. How old is 
 your brother ? He is about twenty-one. He is then older than you ? 
 To be sure. But as you are much taller, I thought you were older. 
 No, he is 3 years older than I, (il a 3 ans de plus que moi.) How 
 old art thou? I am not going to tell you how old I am. Do you 
 understand me ? I do. Does the Frenchman understand us ? He 
 does. Do you understand what (ce que) we are telling you ? We 
 do understand it. Dost thou understand French ? I do not yet, but 
 I am learning it. Do we understand the English? We do not un- 
 derstand them. Do theEnglish understand us? They do. Do we 
 understand them? We hardly understand them. Do you hear any 
 
 1 EKCCpt the adjective demi, half, which does not take it, (19 2 , N. 3.) 
 
184 
 
 THIRTY-SIXTH L*SO*. (1.) 
 
 1 hear nothing. Have you heard the Hjaring of the wind * 
 I iiave heard it. 
 
 What do you hear ? I hear the barking of the dogs. Whose (29 fc j 
 do^ is this? It is the dog of the Scotchman. Have you lost you! 
 atick? I have not lost it. Has your servant lost my bank-notes] 
 (billets de banque ?) He has lost them. Did you go to the ball? 
 I did not. Where did you remain ? I remained at home. Where 
 lid the noblemen remain'? They remained in the garc.en. Has 
 your father lost as much money as I ^ He has lost more than you. 
 Hew much have I lost? You have hardly lost a crown. Did 
 vour friends remain at the ball? They remained there. Do you 
 know as much as the English physician ? I do not know as much 
 as he. How many books have you read? I have hardly read two. 
 Do you wait for any one ? I wait for no one. Are you waiting 
 for the man whom I saw this morning? I am waiting for him. 
 Art thou waiting for thy book 1 I am waiting for it. Do you expect 
 your father this evening? I do. Do you expect some friends? 
 fdo. 
 
 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSOxN, 36th. Trentc-sixieme Lcgon, 36we. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 To beat, iVti/en, bu&t. 
 
 To bite. bitten, bite. 
 
 Why do you beat the dog ? 
 
 1 beat it because it has bitten me. 
 
 To owe, owed. 
 
 IJow much do you owe me ? 
 
 I owe you fifty crowns. 
 
 How much does the man owe you ? 
 
 He owes me sixty francs. 
 
 Do our neighbors owe as much as 
 
 we? 
 
 We owe more than they. 
 How much dost thou owe ? 
 Eighty francs. Two hundred crowns. 
 
 Ki^hty-three francs. 
 
 Two hundred and fifty francs. 
 
 Obs. 83. As seen above, quatre-v, 
 towed by nouns ; but they have no s 
 
 Are you to . . . . ? I am to .... 
 Where are you to go this morning 
 after breakfast ? 
 
 JSattre, 4, baliu, batlez. 
 
 Motdre, 4, mordu, mordez. 
 
 Pourquoi battez-vous le chien ? 
 
 Je le bats parce qu'il m'a mordu. 
 
 Devoir, du. 
 
 Combien me devcz-vous ? 
 
 Je vous dois cinquante ecus. 
 
 Combien 1'homme vous doit-il ? 
 
 II me doit soixante francs. 
 
 Nos voisins doivent-ils autant que 
 nous? 
 
 Nous devons plus qu'cux. 
 
 Combien dois-tu ? 
 
 Quatre-vingts francs. Deio cents 
 ecus. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-trcis francs. 
 
 Deux cent cinquante francs. 
 ingt and cent take s when they are ioi 
 when followed by another numeral. 
 
 t Devez-vo\is . . . ? t Je dois 
 
 I t Ou devez-vous aller ce 
 aprcs dejeuner? 
 
THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (I.) 
 
 185 
 
 I am to go to the store. 
 
 Is your brother to come here soon ? 
 
 He is to come here very soon. 
 
 t Je clois aller au riagasin. 
 
 t Votre Ircre doit-il venirici bicnlolt 
 
 t II doit vcnir ici bicjitot. 
 
 Obs. 84. Are you to . . . ? I am to . . ., &c., riot being used here in their 
 natural or liu-ral sense, but expressing duty, uldi^itwn ; tiie Trench translate 
 ihciii liy iht- vt rii to we, vi/.. ti< VL /-vous . . . ? Je dois . . ., il doit . . ., &c. 
 
 to come hack.) 
 :i slated by 
 
 it o'clock do you return from 
 the market ? 
 
 I return from it at twelve o'clock. 
 it, from (here, t,\- 
 the servant return early from 
 the %N 
 
 'lock m 
 morning. 
 
 At nine o'clock in tin morning. 
 
 At five o'clock > ng. 
 
 o'clock at 
 
 Revcnir,* 2, revenue (conjugufc 
 etui me son primitit", vcnir. (24 s 
 34 1 .) 
 
 A quelle heure revcnez-vous di 
 niari 
 
 Yen reviens a midi. 
 
 En. 
 
 Le domestique revient-ii de bonne 
 heure du magasin ? 
 
 matin. 
 
 t i. ncuf he HITS du matin. 
 t A ainq heures du soir. 
 t A onze heures du soir 
 
 . Ire Sec. 
 
 ! qnantieme ou (either) ici on a la fin du thi'mc. 
 mon cousin, comment va, ce matin? Bien ; el vous 
 Moi aussi. Avez-vous bien dormi, (slept.) Oui, j'ai tres-bien dor 
 mi. ; le dejeune est pret? Pret! Avez-vous deja 
 
 , ? Oui, j'ai grand-'faim, je vous assure. Tres-bien. Je vais 
 voir ..:ier est re verm du marche. Allez, et revenez vite ; ou, 
 
 plutot (rather) lai.->e/.-rnoi aller avec vous. Bien, aliens ensemble 
 voir si le r-jisinicr a eV- au marche, et s'il en est revenu, et en (at 
 the) memo I; >ir quand il peut nous donner a dejeuner. 
 
 Aliens, venez, (come, let us go.) Allez-y, mes enfants. Moi, je 
 vais compter les et les de dollars que mori vieux fermier rn'a 
 apportes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, C, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,. 14, 15 ; 16, 17, 18, 
 19, 20 20 quarts de dollar, font 5 dollars. C'est bien. A present, 
 comptons les J dollars. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 1C, 18, et 1 font 19. 
 J'ai mal compte. Comptons encore. 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, et 2 font 20. 
 ' jittte. (that's right.) Ah! vous voila, Messieurs, et bien, le 
 iniera-t-il ete au marche et en est-il revenu? Oui, il en est 
 :u;, et le dejeuner va etre pret dans un instant. J ? en suis 
 -ar ie commence aussi a avoir faim. Tenez ! (hear!) Le 
 domestique a donne le signal ; le dejeuner est pret. Aliens dejeu- 
 ner. Donnez-moi mon mouchoir qui est sur le dos du fauteuil. Lo 
 VoicL Devez-vous diner en ville'f (in town?) Oui, je dois diner 
 ftvec 1'avocat de mon ouclc. A quelle heure devez-vous y aller? 
 
J88 
 
 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON 
 
 Mon cousin et moi, nous devons y aller a 2 heures i . DoLUl y 
 aller avec vous 1 Oui 7 il doit y venir avec moi. Nous devons touu 
 deux diner avec Favocat. 
 
 Why does your neighbor beat his dog? Because it has bitten his 
 ooy. How many times did it bite him! .It has bitten him only 
 once; and that is enough, is.it not? Is your farmer returned from 
 market? He is not yet returned from it. At what o'clock did your 
 brother return from the ball ? He returned from it at one o'clock in 
 the morning. At what o'clock Hidst thou come back from thy 
 friend's? I came back (en) at eleven o'clock in the morning. 
 Didst thou remain long with him? I remained with him about an 
 Hour. How long do you intend to remain at the ball? I intend 'o 
 remain there a few minutes. How long did the Frenchman remain 
 with you? He remained with me for two hours. How long 
 did the Prussians remain in town ? They remained there during 
 three months. 
 
 Do you intend to remain long with us ? I intend to remain, with you 
 8, 10, or perhaps 15 days, (a fortnight.) HOTV much do I owe you? 
 You do not owe me much. How much do you owe your tailor ? I 
 owe him eighty francs, or about sixteen dollars. How much dost thou 
 owe thy shoemaker ? I owe him already eighty-five francs, that is. 
 about seventeen dollars. Do I owe you anything ? You owe mo 
 nothing. How much does the Englishman owe you? He owes 
 me more than you. Do the English owe as much as the Spaniards ? 
 Not quite so much. Do I owe you as much as my brother? You 
 owe me more than he. Do our friends owe you as much as we ? 
 They owe me less than you. How much do they owe you? They 
 owe me two hundred and fifty francs. How many dollars is that ? 
 How much do we owe you? You owe me three hundred francs, 
 that is, about 60 dollars. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 
 
 How long ?. During, for. 
 
 Whilst. Whilst I am here. 
 How long has he remained there ? 
 A minute. 
 An hour. 
 A day. 
 A month. 
 A year. 
 The summer. The winter. 
 
 2de Section. 
 
 Combien de temps ? Pendant.* 
 
 Pendant que. Pendant que jc suis ici. 
 
 Combien de temps y est-il reste ? 
 
 Pendant 1 une minute. 2 
 
 Pendant une hcure.* 
 
 Pendant unjour. 
 
 Pendant un mois. 
 
 Pendant une anne'e. 2 
 
 L'ete. L'hiver. 
 
 1 The adverb $ enfant, when it signifies for, may be omitted in French 
 *B well as in English. 
 9 Minute, keure, annec, and rue, are feminine nouns, of which the in 
 
THIPTY-SIXTII LJfcSSON. (2.) 
 
 1ST 
 
 Obs. 85. Lee noms des saiso?is, (seasons,) des mois, et des joiire, wnt 
 madculins, excepte Vautomne, autumn, qui est masculin ct fuminin. 
 
 During the summer. Last winter. 
 To dwell, to live, to reside, to remain. 
 Where do you live ? 
 I live in Willia::. number 
 
 twenty-five. 
 
 Where did your brother live ? 
 He lived in Rivoli street, number 
 
 forty-nine. 
 
 Dost thou live at thy brother's house ? 
 I do not live at his, but at my father's 
 
 .house. 
 
 'our friend still live where i 
 
 lived. 
 Ho lives no longer where you lived. 
 
 No longer Number, at number. 
 I law long'were you speaking to the 
 
 man ? 
 I spoke to him for two hours. 
 
 Did you remain long with my father ? 
 
 I stayed there a long time. 
 I remained with him an hour. 
 A. Jon.'j time, long. 
 
 Pendant Pete. L'hiver dernier. 
 
 J)e7neurer, I. 1 
 
 Ou demeurez-vous? 
 
 Je demeure (dans la) rue 2 Guillaumo, 
 
 (au) numero vingt-cinq. 2 
 Ou votre frere a-t-il demeure ? 
 II a demeure (dans la) rue de Rivoli, 
 
 v au) numero quarante-neuf. 2 
 Demeures-tu chez ton frere ? 
 Je no demeiH-e pas chei iui, maia 
 
 chez mon pure. 
 Votre ami demeure-t-il encore oil 
 
 j'ai dcmeurtf ? 
 II ne demeure plus ou vous avez 
 
 demeure. 
 
 Ne . . plus. Numero, au numdro. 
 Combieri de temps avez-vous parld 
 
 ;\ 1'homme ? 
 
 Je Iui ai parle pendant deux heures. 
 Etes-vous reste long-temps chez mon 
 
 pere ? 
 
 J'y suis reste long-temps. 
 J'y suis reste une heure. 
 Long-temps, (never un long-temps.) 
 
 TRSNTE-SIXIEME THME. 2de Sec. 
 
 N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme ici, ou au bout du theme. 
 Avez-vous dit qu'il y a dans le bureau quelqu'un qui veut mo 
 voir ? Oui, je vous P;ri dit. Quand est-il verm 1 ? II y a un momem 
 Qui est-ce? Le connaissez-vous ? Non ; je ne le connais pas. Je 
 ne Pai jamais vu. Je ne peux pas le voir a present, parce que jo 
 dois etre au quai a huit heures et demie, et il est deja huit heures et 
 vingt-cinq minutes. Dites-lui de revenir, cct apres-midi. Non, 
 n'importe, je vais le Iui dire moi-meme. Corabien de temps avez- 
 vons lu? J'ai lu environ trois quarts d ; heure. Combien de tempH . 
 
 definite article is une, a, one, and the definite la, whose plural (les) is tne 
 ame as that of le. Feminine nouns take, like masculine nouns, an in 
 the plural, as will be seen hereafter. 
 
 1 The verb demeurer takes avoir for its auxiliary when it neans to hvt 
 in, and ttre when it signifies to remain. Ex. II a demeure a Paris, he has 
 lived in Paris il est demeure court en haranguant le xoi, he stopped short 
 in haranguing the king. 
 
 2 Dans la before rue, and au before numdro, have been put bettvoca 
 oora.itheses, because they arc generally omitted. 
 
188 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 lo feimier a-t-il attendu? II n'a pas attendu long- temps. Jean a-*>il 
 tftudie long-temps? Non. pas tres-long-temps. Combien de temps 
 a-t-il etudie ? Presd'une demi-heure, (19 2 , N. 3.) Qu'a-t-ii fait pen- 
 dant le reste du temps 2 11 a dormi. Quoi ! II a dormi une heure 
 et demie; et il n'a etudie qu'une demi-heure 1 C'est comme je vous 
 ie dis. A-t-il fait son devoir ? II dit qu'il Pa fait. C'est bon. Cela 
 suffit. N'avez-vous pas promis a M. P. dialler a son concert? Si 
 fait, je le lui ai promis, s'il a lieu pendant que je suis ici. Partez- 
 vous bientot? Oui, dans quelques jours. Voyez-vous le scldat qui 
 est malade? Non; mais je vois celui qui Pa ete. Combien de 
 temps Pa-t-il ete ? 11 Pa ete pendant quinze jours, (a fortnight.) 
 Votre cousin ne va4-ii pas a Charleston pendant Phiver . Si fait, il 
 y va. Y reste-t-il pendant Pete ? II n'y reste pas pendant Pete. On 
 va-t-il alors? II en revient, pour roster avec nous. Combien de 
 temps avez-vous demeure dans la rue Chestnut? Nous y avons 
 demeure long-temps. Le chien est-il reste pres du feu pendant 
 deux heures? II n'y est reste qu'une heure, parce qu'il a mal au 
 dos. 
 
 How much have you given for that English horse ? I gave 220 
 dollars for it. Did not your little son give something to that poor little 
 boy ? Yes, he has given him 5 cents. Do you owe anything to 
 the grocer? No, I believe I owe him nothing. Does your neighbci 
 take bread from your German baker? He does. Does he owe him 
 anything? I believe he aoes>. Does he owe the butcher? I do 
 not know if he owes him anything. Do you see the sailor who is 
 in the ship? I do not see the one (} 87) in the ship, but the one en 
 the w^e bridge. Do you know his name ? I do not. Where are 
 you to go? I am to go to the old bridge. Is your friend's uncle to 
 come here to-day ? Hois. At what o'clock is he to come? He is 
 to come very soon. When are your sons to go to the play? They 
 are to go to-night, (ce soir.) When are they to return from it? 
 They are to return from it at half past ten. When are you to go to 
 the physician's? I am .to go at ten o'clock at night. When is 
 your son to return from (de clicz) the painter's ? He is to return at 
 live o'clock in the evening. Where do you live ? I live in Blvoli 
 street, number forty-seven. Where does your father live ? He lives 
 at his friend's house, in Walnut street, (rue Walnut,) No. 251. 
 Where do your brothers live 1 They live in William street, numbei 
 one hundred and twenty. Dost thou live at thy brother's Louse ? ) 
 live at his house. Do you still live where you did? I live there 
 still. Does your friend still live where he did? He no longer lives 
 where he did. Where does he live at present? He lives at hi* 
 lather's house 
 
T II I R T Y S E V E N T H L E S 8 O X. ( 1.) 
 
 189 
 
 THIRTY -SEVENTH LESSON, Mi\\.Trente-septiimc Igfon, 37mc 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 Till, until. 
 
 Tili, until noon, (twelve o'clock.) 
 
 Till to-morrow. Till this evening. 
 
 Till the day after to-morrow. 
 
 Till Sunday. Till Monday. 
 
 Till evening. Till morning. 
 
 l r r*:il the next day. 
 
 Until the day before yesterday. 
 
 Till to-day. 
 
 Until this moment that moment. 
 
 Till now hitherto. 
 
 Until then. 
 
 How long? Until \i-lm t 
 
 Jusque, (followed by apreposition and 
 its objective case.) Jusqu'd midi, 
 Jusqu'a demnin. Jusqu'a ce soil. 
 Jusqu'apres domain. 
 Jusqu'a dimanche a hindi. 
 Jusqu'au soir. Jusqu'au matin. 
 Jusqu'au Icndemav*. 
 Jusqu'avant hier. 
 Jusqu'a aujourd'hui. 
 Jusqu'a ce moment-ci moment la, 
 Jusqu'a present jusqu'ici 
 Jusqu'alors. 
 
 > Jusqu'd quand ? Jusques a quand ? 
 
 ll'hut lunirtWhnt period? 
 
 Obs. 86. I meaning, until what time, what hour, or period, 
 
 must be translated by jusqu'd quand. Uut when it means, How many 
 hours, days, &,c., or what length of time : (36*) translate by Combien de 
 ttinjut f or instance : How long did you stay in New York? 
 
 may '// what o'clock did you stay in New York, or in other words, 
 
 when did you leave or quit it ? The answer might then be : At six o'clock, 
 or on Tuesday, &.c. Or else it may mean, How many hours or days, &c., 
 did you stay there? The answer might then be, six hours, three days, &c. 
 Hence, when How long is used, consult the answer to know exactly the 
 meaning of the question. 
 Until what hour do you take lessons ? 
 
 We take them till one o'clock, (we 
 
 quit at 1.) 
 Tuesday, on Tuesday Wednesday. 
 
 On Thtf.-sday Friday Saturday. 
 
 Till I return, (till my return.) 
 
 Till my brother returns, (till my bro- 
 the/s return.) 
 
 Till four o'clock in the morning. 
 
 Till midnight, (till 12 at night.) 
 
 The return or coming back. 
 
 How long did you remain at my fa- 
 ther's house ? 
 
 Jusqu'a quand prenez-vous lemons ? 
 Nous les prenons Jusqu'a une heure. 
 
 Mardi. Mercredi. (On is not trans- 
 lated.) 
 
 Jeudi. Vendredi. Samedi. (32*, N. 1J 
 Jusqu'a mon retour. 
 Jusqu'au retour de mon frere. 
 
 Jusqu'a quatre heures du matin, 
 
 Jusqu'a minuit. 
 
 Le retour. 
 
 Jusqu'a quand etes-vous reste chez 
 
 N moxi pcre ? 
 
 nod at his house till eleven j J'y suis rcste jusqu'a onze hcurua 
 !; zit night. I du soir. 
 
 -an,) been able, ''could.) 
 KM tli3 boy been able to read it ? 
 
 He was aole to read it. He could not. 
 Could you Jind the word ? 
 Yes. I for. .-/I it immediately 
 
 Pouvoir,* pu. (20, 24, 34.) 
 Le garcpn a-t-il pu le lire ? ($ 148.) 
 II a pu le lire. II n'a pas pu. 
 Avez-vous pu trouver le mot ? 
 On', jo 1'ni iroi-v' tout de suite. 
 
190 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 TRENTE-SEPTIEME Tfi^ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme du mois ici ou a la fin. 
 
 Mor. cher Lucien, je suis charm e de vous voir. Je vous croyais 
 absent. Depuis quand etes-vous revenu ? Je suis revenu samedi 
 dernier, Jusqu'a quand allez-vous rester ici? (How long or until 
 what time.) Je vais y rester jusqu'au retour de mon oncle, et peut- 
 etre plus long-temps. L 7 attendez-vous bientot ? Je 1'attends dana 
 S ou 10 jours. Demeurez-vous avec votre cher cousin? Non, je ne 
 demeure plus avec lui. Avec qui demeurez-vous ? Je re demeure 
 avec personne. Je suis dans un hotel. Allez-vous y rester jusqu'au 
 jetour de votre oncle ? Je pense que oui. Laissez votre hotel et 
 venez demeurer avec nous. Je vous suis bien oblige. Jusqu'a 
 quand le commis du marchand de livres est-il reste au musee ? II 
 n'y est reste que jusqu'a midi. Pourquoi done ? (so.) Farce qu'il 
 n'a pas pu. Et pourquoi n'a-t-il pas pu y rester jusqu'a deux heurea 
 comme les autres ? II n'a pas pu, parce que son pere dine de bonne 
 hcure. Allez-vous a Lancastre cet ete ? Non, je n'y vais pas. Et 
 vous, Jules, y allez-vous? Moi non plus. Et Charlotte et son frere, 
 y vont-ils ? Eux non plus. Le professeur y va-t-il? Lui non plus. 
 Qui y va? Personne n'y va. Combien de temps etes-vous tous 
 restes a Bordeaux? Mon oncle y a demeure pendant 6 ans, mon 
 cousin pendant trois ans, moi pendant six mois; mais ces jeune* 
 garcons n'y sont restes que quelques jours. 
 
 Until what time do the carpenters work at noon ? They work till 
 twelve. When do they leave off work in the evening? (or; until 
 what hour do they work ?) Until 6 o'clock, or rather J to 6. How 
 long did I work? (or, until what? &c.) You worked till 4 o'clock in 
 the morning. Has the physician still long to wait ? (encore pour 
 long-temps ?) He has. Am I to remain long here ? You are TO 
 remain here till Sun .lay. Is my brother to remain long with you ? 
 He is to remain with us till Monday. How long (until what time) 
 are we to work ? You are to work till the day after to-morrow. 
 Have you still long to speak ? I have still an hour to speak. Did 
 you speak long? I spoke (ai parle) till the next day. Did you 
 remain Long in my counting-house ? I remained in it till this mo- 
 ment. 
 
 Have you still long to live at the Frenchman's house ? I havo 
 atill long to live at his house. How long (till what time) have you 
 still to live at his house ? Till winter. Has he swept the floor ? fie 
 has swept it. How long c"id he remain here ? Till noon, (wittfr.) 
 Does your friend still live with you? He lives with me no longsr. 
 - How long did he live with you ? He lived wnn me only a year. 
 
THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 191 
 
 How Jong (till what time) did you remain at the ball? I remained 
 ihere till midnight. How long (what time) did you reirain m the 
 ship? I remained an hour in it. Have you remained in the garden 
 till now ? I have remained there till now. 
 
 \;UE. 2de Section. 
 
 One, some or any one, people, (and they t 
 
 tc<?, yot., in an indefinite &< 
 Have they brought my shoes ? 
 They have brought them. 
 They have not brought them yet. 
 What have they said ? 
 They have said nothing. 
 What have they cione ? 
 
 nothing. 
 
 willing, been willing. 
 Has one wi.-hrd to burn my coat ? 
 :M burn it. ($148 4.) 
 
 he books? 
 i not find them. 
 i In- y do what tiiey wish ? 
 Tin 'j d / can ; but thi >/ do 
 
 . !iat they \v 
 What do tin v tay ? Nothing new. 
 
 iy new ? 
 
 Tiny say nothing n- 
 Someti . thing ncv/. 
 
 My new coat. 
 My new horse. 
 My handsome n 
 My new friend. 
 My handsome coat. 
 
 On, (pronom indefini, toujour? siiigu- 
 
 licr. $ 38.) 
 
 A-t-on apporte mes soulicrs f 
 On les a apportes. 
 On ne les a pas encore apportes. 
 Qu'a-t-on dit ? 
 On n'a rien dit. 
 Qu'a-t-on fait? 
 0?i n'a rien fait. 
 Vouloir,* voulu. (18', 24 3 , 34'.) 
 A-t-on voulu briilfi mon habit? 
 On n'a pas voulu le bruler. 
 A-t-on pu trouver les livres ? 
 On n'a pu les trouv'er. 
 Peut-07* faire ce qu'on veut ? 
 On fait ce qu'on peut ; mais on no 
 
 fait pas ce qu'o?i veut. 
 Que dit-on ? Rien de nouveau. 
 Que dit-o/i de nouveau ? (06s. 7.) 
 On ne dit ri(m do nouveau. 
 Quelque chose de nouveau. 
 Ncuf, nouveau, (before a vowel or 7t 
 
 mute, nouvel.) 1 
 Mon habit neuf. 
 Mon nouveau che /al. 
 Mon beau cheval. 
 Mon nouvel ami. 
 Mon bel habit.* 
 
 ' Nouveau (nouvel before a vowel or h mute) is used for things which wo 
 new from nature or invention, as: du vin nouveau, new wine; un nourf.au 
 commit, a new clerk ; un nouvel ami, a new friend ; un livre ?iouveau, a 
 book just published. Ncuf, on the contrary, is used of things mado by 
 men, as : un habit neuf, a new coat ; un l>vre neuf, a new book, (which haj 
 been printed long ago, but has not been used.) Thus we may say Ct 
 livre neuf est-il nouveau ? Is this new book a new publication ? N*uf 
 figuratively means inexperienced. Ex. Ce valet cst lien neuf, this valet i 
 very inexperienced. 
 
 2 Bel and nouvel are used only before masculine substantives beginning 
 wiA a vowel, or h mute, as may be seen from our examples. But in tho 
 plural the adjectives remain beau and nouveau. Ex. Ces beaux arbres, these 
 fine trees ; tnrs tmuvcaux amis, my new friends. 
 
192 
 
 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 To brush, brushed, Irush. 
 
 This fine-looking man. 
 
 These fine-looking men. 
 
 This fine tree. 
 
 Those fine trees. 
 
 My new friends. 
 
 Do they believe that ? They do. 
 
 They do not believe it. 
 
 Do they rpeak of that ? 
 
 They do speak of it. 
 
 They do not speak of it. 
 
 Brosser, 1, brossu, brosstz, (impcnt) 
 
 Ce bel homrne. 
 
 Ces beaux hommes. 
 
 Ce bel arbre. 
 
 Ces beaux arbres. 
 
 Mes nouveaux amis. 
 
 Croit-on cela ? On le croit 
 
 On ne le croit pas. 
 
 Parle-t-on de cela ? 
 
 On en parle. 
 
 On n'en parle pas. 
 
 TllENTE-SEl'TlEME TlI^ME. 2de See. 
 
 Quel est le quanticinc ? Apprenez-le et mettex-le ici. 
 
 Que faites-vous ce matin 1 Je lis. Que lisez-vous ? Le journal 
 d'aujourd'hui. Avez-vous deja vu quelque chose de nouveau? Jo 
 n'ai encore rien lu de nouveau. Je n'ai lu qu'un article. Que dit-on 
 du cholera? Pas grand' chose encore. Parle-t-on de 1'or de la Cali- 
 fornie? Je crois qu'on en parle; mais laissex-moi lire, et alors je 
 peux vous dire ce qu'on dit de nouveau. Eh ! : iez. Tni 
 
 vaille/ avant de dejeuner. Non, jc no pe;i\ pas travailler avant de 
 dejeuner. Je n'ai jamais pu. Moi, jepeux ; \ - l>ie:i ;>i>e. 
 
 George a-t-il lu et cent? 11 n'a voulu ni lire : Qu'a-t-il 
 
 fait.' 11 n'a lieu voulu faiio. CVst extraordinaire! K-t-il mahule ? 
 Non. il se porte tres-bien au contraire, car il a dejcnne. 
 
 Pounjuoi n'a-t-il pas voulu otudier com me a Fordinaire ? II a dit : Je 
 VIMIX jouer au lieu de travaillcr. A-t-ii perdu son livre ? Non, je le 
 lui ai domic; mais au lieu de 1'ouvrir, il l*a sen- itre. 
 
 Le voisin vous a-t-il prete son cheval? Non. il a refuse de me le 
 pieler. Le fermier vous a-t-ii prete le sien 1 Non, il a au 
 parce qu'il en a besoin pour aller en ville. Ah ! Mile., je suis charmu 
 d'avoir le plaisir de vous voir. Otez votre chale et votre bonnet, et 
 asseyez-vous dans ce fauteuii. Ce fauteuil de velours est trop chaud, 
 je vais prendre ce siege. Je veux voir Charlotte. Charlotte n'est 
 pas ici. En verite. Alors, je vais partir. Adieu, M. Adieu, INIlle. 
 
 Has the shoemaker been able to mend my shoes? He has not 
 been able to mend them. Why has he not been able to mend them ? 
 Because he has had no time. Have they (o) been able to find my 
 gold buttons'? They have not been able to find them. Why has 
 the tailor not mended my coat? Because he has no good thread. 
 Why have you beaten the dog ? Because it has bitten me. Win- 
 do you drink 1 Because I am thirsty. What have they wished to 
 say? They have not wished to say anything. Have 
 thing new? They have not ?niil nnyll;' 
 
THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 193 
 
 say new in the market? They say nothing new theie. Did they 
 kill any dogs this morning'? They killed more than 65. Do they 
 believe that? They do not believe it. Do they speak of that"? 
 They do speak of it. Do they speak of the man that has been 
 killed? They do not speak of him. Can people do what they 
 wish? They do what they can; but they do not. what they wish. 
 What have they brought? They have brought your new coat. Has 
 my new servant brushed my fine carpets? He has not yet brushed 
 i.L'in. Have you bought a new horse? I have bought two new 
 horses. How many iinu trees have you seen ? I have seen but one 
 fine tree. I fare ymi seen a line-looking man ? I have seer several 
 line-looking men. Have you a new friend? I have several. Do 
 you like your new friends? I do like them. 
 
 THIRTY-EIGHTH L 38th^Zhmf#JUtf* 
 
 VOCABCLAIRK. Ire Section. 
 
 38m*. 
 
 iy uncle's. 
 aa here, hither, 
 tar as there, that; thither, 
 as London. Paris. Rome. 
 r in Paris. To, at, or in Berlin. 
 
 Jusqu'oii ? (adv.) Jusqu. 
 
 Jusque clsex n:on onclc. 
 Jusqu'ici. 
 Jusque la. 
 
 Jusqu'a Londres, a Paris, a Rome. 
 A Paris. A Berlin. 
 
 Ols. 87. Mettez () avant Ics nons des villcs Le Havre, to Havre, au 
 I 12), et mcttez (en) avant ccux des pays, (countries,} To Hungary, 
 
 vn Hongrie. 
 
 To, at or in France -England. 
 
 ir as England. 
 As far as Spain. 
 As far as France. 
 As far as Italy. 
 As far as my house. 
 As far as the warehouse. 
 As far as the corner. 
 As far as the end of the road. 
 As far as the middle of the road. 
 Up flairs. Down stairs. 
 
 As far as above. As far as below. 
 Aa far as the other side of the road. 
 
 ^-ide, on this side. 
 That side, on that side. 
 Germany. In America. 
 
 Holland. Hungary, (to.) 
 
 En France en Angle tei re. 
 
 Tusqu'en Angletcrre. 
 
 Jusqu'en Espagne. 
 
 Jusqu'en France. 
 
 Jusqu'en Italic. 
 
 Jusque cnez nioi. 
 
 Jusqu'au magasin. (y 13.) 
 
 Jusqu'au coin. 
 
 Jusqu'au bout du chemin. 
 
 Jusqu'au milieu du chemin. 
 
 En haut. E*i las. 
 
 Jusqu'en haut. Jusqu'en ba*. 
 
 Jusqu'a 1'autrc cote du chemin. 
 
 De ce cotd-ci. 
 
 De ce cote-la. 
 
 L'Allemagne. En Amdrique. 
 
 Lallollande. 1 La Hongric, 1 (en. 
 
 1 In ITollande the letter h is aspirated ; therefore we say la Hollar.de. 
 17 
 
194 THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1) 
 
 Obs. 88. The names of states, empires, kingdoms, and provinces, aie 
 generally feminine when they end in e mute, and masculine, when the? 
 do not. 
 
 The middle. The well. 
 
 The cask. The castle. 
 
 To travel. 
 
 Le milieu. Le puits. 
 
 Le tonneau. Le chateau. 
 
 Voyager, 1. 
 
 Do you go to Pans ? J Allez-vous a Paris ? 
 
 Do you travel to Pans ? 
 
 I do travel (or go) thither. 
 Is ha gone to England ? 
 He is gone thither. 
 How far is he gone ? 
 How far has he travelled to ? 
 lie is gone as far as America. 
 
 J'y vais. 
 
 Eot-il alle en Angleiorre ? 
 
 II y est alle. 
 
 Jusqu'ou est-il alle ? 
 
 Jusqu'ou a-t-ii voyage* ? 
 
 II est a.le* jusqu'en Amerique. 
 
 TllKXTE-Hl'ITIEME TlI&ME. Ire SeC. 
 
 Si vous ne savcz pas le quanticme, apprenez-le et ecrivez-le ici. 
 
 Ah! vouavoild, M. Henri. Je vous croyais a voyager. Je Mils 
 revenu depuis uu mois environ. Jusqu'ou avez-vous etc ? J'ni etc 
 jnsqu'en Allemagne. Ainsi, vous avez voyage en Angleterre et en 
 Prttnoe 1 Oui, j'y ai voyage, et en Itaiie aussi. Avez-vous ete jus- 
 qu'en Hongrie? Non, je n'ai pas eu le temps d'y aller; parce que 
 j'ai reste trop long-temps a Paris. Combieu de temps y etes-voun 
 reste ? J'y suis reste un mois. Ce n'est pas grand' chose. Pardon- 
 nez-inoi, c'est beaucoup quand vous avez beaucoup de pays a voir. 
 Vous avez raison. Avez-vous voyage seul? Non, mon cher ami 
 Francois a voyage avec moi, et nous avons ete ensemble tout le 
 temps. Le pere Matthieu est-ii venu jusqu'en Amerique ? Oui, ii 
 y est venu. Qui est le pere Matthieu? Le grand champion Irian- 
 dais de la temperance. Jusqu'ou les Espagnols sont-ils alles? 11s 
 Bont alles jusqu'a Londres. Jusqu'ou ce pauvre homme est-il venu ? 
 II est venu jusqu'ici. Est-il venu jusque chez vousl II est venu 
 jusque chez mon pere. Combien a-t-il perdu? II a perdu tout 
 son argent. Mon ami est-il alle de ce cote-la? Oui, il est alle de 
 ce cote-la. Je croyais qu j il etait ( 147) alle de ce cote-ci. Non, 
 personne ivest alle de cc cote-ci. Voila votre garcon, ou etait-\\'} 
 II ctait avec moi. Et ou eticz-vous? Moi? j'etais en haut. Vous 
 ctiez eu haut, et moi j'etais en bas. Qui etait en bas avec vous 1 
 Personne n'etait eu bas avec moi, j'y etais seul. 
 
 How far did you wish to go * I wished to go as far as the wood. 
 Have you gone as far as there ? I have not gone as far as there.* 
 How far does your brother wish to go ? He wishes to go as iar as 
 llie end of that road. How far does the wine go? It goes to the 
 middle of the cask. Where art thou going? I am goiiu^ to the 
 
TH IKTV-EICII Til I.KSSON. (2.) 
 
 195 
 
 bridges.- -I I o\v far are we going? We are going as far us the thea- 
 tre. Are you going as far as the well? I am going as fur as the 
 castle. Has the carpenter drunk all the wine? He has drunk it. 
 Has your little boy torn all his clothes? He lias torn them all. 
 Why has he torn them ? Because he does not like them. How 
 much have you lost ? I have lost all my money. Do you know 
 where my lather is? I do not know. Have you not seen my 
 book? I have not seen it. Do you know how tnis word is wiitteu? 
 It is written thus. Do you travel sometimes? I travel often. 
 Whenj Jo you intend to go to, this summer? (cct cie?) I intend to 
 go to Paris. Do you not go to Italy? I do go thither. Hast thou 
 
 .otimes travelled? I have never travelled. Have your friends 
 a mind to go to Holland ? They have a mind to go thither. When 
 do they intend to depart? They intend to depart the day after to 
 
 .ow. Where is General Lewis going? He is going as far as? 
 
 Section. 
 
 To *! commit a tl. 
 
 To steal soin : ft me one. 
 
 hey stolen your hat from you ? 
 y have stolen it from me. 
 Has the man stolen the books from 
 
 thee? 
 
 If-' has stolen them from me. 
 What have they stolen from you? 
 They have stolen gloves from me. 
 
 .< y steal many ? 
 They did. 
 
 How do you spell this word ? 
 Ho.v is this word wr; 
 
 Tf> dye or colour, dyctl, dye. 
 I dye, thcu dycst, he dyes; dyeing. 
 To dye black. 
 To dye red. 
 To dye green 
 To dye blue. 
 To dye yellow. 
 
 Id that 'ih French, Ame- 
 
 rican, or English ? It is French. 
 IB not that blue velvet beautiful ? 
 
 is superb. 
 
 This round white hat. 
 Do yon dye your coat blue ? 
 I dye it green. 
 
 :'i:i ? 
 
 -, 'inipera.) 
 : ;n(Iijn J uH. 
 
 t Vous a-t-on vole votrc chapeau ? 
 t On me 1'a vole, 
 t I/homme t'a-t-il vole les livrca? 
 
 t II me les a vo! 
 t Quo vous a-t-on vole ? 
 On m'a vole des : r 
 Vous en a-t-on vole beaucoup ? 
 On ni'en a vole beaucoup. 
 Comment epelle-t-on ce mot? 
 Comment ecrit-on ce mot? 
 On 1'ecrit ainsi, (de ccttc maniere.) 
 Tcindrct* 4, tei?it, teig7iez (impera.) 
 Je teins, tu teins, il teint ; teignant. 
 t Teindre en noir. 
 t Teindre en rouge, 
 t Teindre en vcn. 
 t Teindre en bleu, 
 t Teindre en jaune. 
 Ce drap bru?i est-il Francois, AmS- 
 ricain, ou Anglais ? II est Fran^aia 
 Ce velours bleu n'est-il pas beau ? 
 Si fait, il est superbc. 
 Ce chapeau rond ct blanc. (Ols. (il.) 
 t Teignez-vous votre habit en blou? 
 t Je le teins en vrrt. 
 t Comment tcint-i son satin ? 
 
196 
 
 THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSOR'. (2.) 
 
 lie dyes it blue. 
 
 The dyer. 
 
 To get dyed, got dyed. 
 
 What colour have you had your 
 
 white nat dyed ? 
 I nave got it dyed black. 
 Red. Brown. Gray. Pink. 
 Spring. 
 List spring. 
 Clear, lig'it. 
 Light bViie. 
 
 In (in the) spring. 
 Next spring. 
 Dark, deep. 
 Dark pink. 
 
 Gray, light brown, and pink, are 
 good for spring. 
 
 TRENTE-IIUITIEME 
 
 t II le teint en bleu. 
 
 Le teinturic-r. 
 
 t faire teindre, fait tcindrc. 
 
 t Comment avez-vous fait teindr* 
 
 votre chapeau ? 
 t Je 1'ai fait teindre en noir. 
 Rouge. Brun. Gris. Rose. 
 Leprintcmps. Au printemps. 
 
 Le printemps passe prochain. 
 Clair. Fonce. 
 
 Bleu clair. Rose fonrr. 
 
 Le gris, le brun clair, et le rose, sent 
 
 bons pour le printemps. 
 
 K. 2de Sec. 
 
 Savez-vous le quantieme ? Oui, je le sais. Mcttcz-ic ici. 
 
 Achetez-vous un chapeau blanc ou noir ce printemps? JVn 
 uchete un blanc. Le noir est bon pour 1'automne. Allez-voua 
 serrer le noir? Sans doute. Votre chale est trop fonce pour le 
 printemps, n'allez-vous pas en mettre un autre ? Je n'en ai pas 
 d ; autre ici. Vous a-t-on vole une partie de votre linge ? Non, on ne 
 m'a ricn vole ; mais on a vole quelque chose a mon frere. Que lui 
 a-t-on vole ? On lui a vole son paraplnie et ses gants neufs. Ou lea 
 lui a-t-on voles ? On les lui a voles dans le bureau de son cousin. 
 Je suis bien fache de 1'apprendre. Mais si vous ir'avez pas d'autre 
 chale, Victoria peut vous en preter un plus clair. Trouvez-vous le 
 mien trop fonce ? Oui, je le trouve trop fonce. Votre chapeau est 
 beaucoup plus clair, n'est-ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison. Victoria, 
 pretez-moi un de vos chales. Lequel voulez-vous? J'en veux un 
 inoins fonce que celui-ci; en avez-vous de moins fonce? Oui, j'en 
 ai un plus clair, un peu plus clair que le votre. Laissez-moi 1'aller 
 chercher. Allons-y ensemble. Allez-vous voyager le printemps 
 prochain? Non pas le printemps prochain, mais 1'automne pro- 
 chain. 
 
 Have they stolen anything from you? They have stolen all the 
 good wine from me. Have they stolen anything from your father? 
 They have stolen all his good books from him. Dost thou steal any- 
 thing? I steal nothing. Hast thou ever stolen anything? I have 
 never stolen anything. Have they stolen your good clothes from 
 you? They have stolen them from me. What have they stolen 
 from me ? They have stolen all the good books from you. When 
 did they steal the money from you? They stole it from me last 
 tpring. Have your servants ever stolen anything from us ? They 
 have never stolen anything from us. Does your son get his white 
 vest dyed? He deep get it dyed. Does he get it dyed red? He 
 
THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 197 
 
 gets it dyed gray. What color have your friends got their coats 
 dyed? They have got them dyed green. What color have the 
 Italians had their hats dyed ? They have had them dyed light 
 brown. Have you a \vhite hat? I have a black one. What hat 
 has the nobleman T He has two hats; awhile one and a black 
 one. What hat has the American'? lie has a round black hat. 
 Have I a white hat ? You have several white and black hats. 
 I las your dyer already dyed your cloth 1 He has dyed it. What 
 color has he dyed it ? He has dyed it green. 
 
 THIRTY-NINTH LESSON, 39th. Trcntc-ncuvwne Lcgor*. 39mc. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 To be ncces?'' 
 
 Falloir,* 3 (vcrbc irregulier, deTectif, 
 I ct unipersonnel), p. passe" /aZ/w. 
 
 sit necessary? iFaut-il? No feut-51 pw t 
 
 Must I, thou, ho, ihe, we, you, they ? ) 
 It is necessary. I, thou, he, &c., must, j II faut. ll ne faut pas. 
 
 Ols. 89. All verbs expressing necessity, obligation, or want, as, to It 
 to want, to be necessary, must, are in French generally rendered by 
 falloir. 
 
 Faut-il aller au marcbe ? 
 
 II ne faut pas y aller. 
 
 Que faut-ii faire pour appre -dre le 
 
 Francois ? 
 
 II faut etudier beaucoup. 
 Que me faut-il faire ? 
 
 Obs. 90. Faut (as all unipersonal verbs) can have no other nominative 
 but i7. Hence, the English subject of must, is to be rendered in French by 
 the indirect object : ($ 47,) me, te, lui, nous, vous, or leur. 
 
 You must stay still. 
 Whither must lie go ? 
 He must go for his book. 
 What must they buy ? 
 They must buy some beef. 
 What must we read ? 
 
 Is it necessary to go to the market ? 
 It is not necessary to go thither. 
 What must be done to learn French ? 
 
 It is necessary to study a great deal. 
 What must / do ? 
 
 It vous faut rester tranquille. 
 
 Oii lui faut-il aller ? 
 
 II lui faut aller chercher son Jivre. 
 
 Que leur faut-il acheter ? 
 
 II leur faut acheter du bceuf. 
 
 Que nous faut-il lire ? 
 
 Que vous faut-il ? 
 
 What must you have ? 
 
 Obs. 91. The verb have, following in English the verb mvst, is not rcn 
 icred in French. 
 
 /must have some money. 
 Must you have a sou? 
 Must you have a great deal ? 
 /must have a great deal. 
 
 II me faut de T argent. 
 Vous faut-il un sou? 
 Vous en faut-ii beaucoup ? 
 II m'en faut beaucoup. 
 
198 i HIKTY-NINT1I LESSON. (1.) 
 
 I want only one sou. 
 Is that all you want ? 
 That is all / want. 
 
 II ne me faut qu'un sou. 
 t Ne vous faut-il que cela ? 
 t II ne me faut que cela. 
 
 Vow much must thou have ? ) Combien te faut . u ? 
 
 n.ow much qost thou want ? ) 
 
 / want only a franc. 
 
 How much must your brother have ? 
 
 He wants only two francs. 
 
 Have you what you want I 
 
 I have what /want. 
 
 He has what he wants. 
 
 They have what they want. 
 
 More. 
 
 II ne me faut qu'un franc. 
 Combien faut-il d votrefrere? 
 II ne lui faut que deux franca. 
 Avez-vous ce qu'il vous faut ? 
 J'ai ce qu'il me faut. 
 II a ce qu'il lui faut. 
 Us ortt ce qu'il Icur faut. 
 Davanlage. 
 
 Obs. 92. This adverb lias the same signification as plxi, *,vith this differ- 
 ence only, that it cannot precede a noun. 
 
 No more (of it, them). 
 Do you not want more ? 
 / do not want more. 
 He docs not want more. 
 
 JV'en pas davantage. 
 
 Ne vous en faut-il pas davantage ? 
 II ne m'en faut fas davantage. 
 II ne lui en faut pas davantage. 
 
 TRENTE-NEUVIEME THME. Ire Sec. 
 Cherchez le quanticmc et mettcz-le ici. 
 
 Faut-il envoyer an. marche? Oui, il faut y envoyer. Pourquoi 
 faut-il y envoyer? II nous faut du beurre, du bonif, et du lait. Du 
 lait? Le laitier n'en a-t-il pas apporte ce matin? Non, il nous a 
 oublies, ou il est malade. N'importe. Comme vous dites, il nous 
 faut du lait. Le cuisinier a-t-il assez d'argent pour acheter tout ce 
 qu'il nous faut? Ne lui avez-vous pas domic 1111 billet de deux dol- 
 lars ? II n'a pas voulu le prendre, et je ne lui ai donne que troia 
 quarts de dollar. S'il iva pas davantage, je crois que ce n'est pas 
 assez. Alois, il faut lui en donner davantage. Combien davantage? 
 Un demi-dollar. En avez-vous un? Oui, en voici un. Donnez-le- 
 lui. Qui fait ce bruit-la? C 7 est Francois. Qu'a-t-il? Que lui faut 
 ii? II a mal li rccil. Dites-lui de rester tranquille. II ne peut pas 
 rester tranquille. 11 lui faut rester tranquille, et dormir. Ce n'est 
 pas difficile a dire ; mais c'est plus difficile a faire. 
 
 Is it necessary to go to the market? It is not necessary to go 
 there. What must they buy ? They must buy some gloves. Must 
 I go for some salt? You must go for some. Am I to go to the ball? 
 You must go. When must I go? You must go this evening. 
 Must I go for the carpenter? You must go for him. What must 
 be done to learn Russian ? It is necessary to study a great deal. 
 Is it necessary to study a great deal to learn German ? It is. (Dir. 1.) 
 What must I do ? You must buy a good book. What is he to 
 do? He must stay still. What are \ve to do'* You must not slay 
 
THIRTY-NINTH LESSCN. (2.) 
 
 199 
 
 sul], but work. Must you work much in order to learn the Arabic 1 
 [ must work much to Irani it. Why must I go* to the wharf? You 
 must go there to bring the sailors here. 
 
 Must I go anywhere ? Thou must go into the garden. Must I 
 send for anything? Thou must send for some wine. What must I 
 do? You must write an exercise. To whom must I write a note? 
 Vou must write one to your friend. Do you not want any shoes? 
 ( do not want any. Dost them want much money? I want much 
 How much must thou have ? I must have live crowns. How 
 much does your brother want? He wants but six sous. Does he 
 not want more? He does not want more. Does your friend want 
 more? He does not want so much as I. What do you want? I 
 i:id clothes. Have you now what ;*ou want? I lave 
 what I wa:it. Has v.Kir father what he wants'!- He has what he 
 
 
 VbOABULAiBB. -Me Section. 
 
 .:i;cd to work much 
 
 to learn Frcm-h I 
 
 I have : much. 
 
 What am I to do ? 
 You must work. 
 Am I to go thither ? 
 You may go thither. 
 To be worth Iri-n worth. 
 How much may that horse be worth ? 
 It may be worth a hundred crowns. 
 Are you worth ? I am worth. 
 Thou art worth. lie is not worth. 
 We are worth they are worth. 
 How much is that gun worth ? 
 It is worth but one crown. 
 How much is that worth? 
 That is not worth much. 
 That is not worth anything. 
 This is worth more than that. 
 The one is nci worth so much as the 
 
 other. 
 
 To be litter. 
 Am I not as good as my brother ? 
 
 You are better than he. 
 
 1 am not so good as you. 
 
 To give back, to restore. 
 
 Does he restore you your book ? 
 
 He does restore it to me. 
 
 Has he given you back your glcves ? 
 
 lie has given them back to me. 
 
 Vous a-t-il fallu travailler bcauro*jj> 
 
 pour appremlrc le Frangais ? 
 II m'a fallu travailler beaucoup 
 Que dois-je i 
 Vous devez travailler. 
 Faut-il y aller ? 
 Vous pouvez y aller. 
 Valoir,* 3 vuJu. 
 
 Combien ce clicval peut-il valoir? 
 II peut valoir cent ecus. 
 Valez-vous ? Jc vaux. 
 
 Tu vaux. II ne vaut pas. 
 
 Nous valons ils valent. 
 Combien ce fusil vaut-il ? 
 II ne vaut qu'un ecu. 
 Combien cela vaut-il ? 
 Cela ne vaut pas grand* chose. 
 Cela ne vaut rien. 
 Celui-ci vaut plus que cclui-la. 
 L'un ne vaut pas autant que rautra, 
 
 Valoir micux. 
 
 Est-ce que je ne vaux pas autant qu 
 
 mon frere ? 
 
 Vous valez mieux que lui. 
 Je ne vaux pas autant que vous. 
 Rendre, 4. Rendu. Rendez 
 Vous rend-il votre livre ? 
 II me le rend. 
 
 Vous n-t-il rendu vos gants ? 
 II me les a rendus. 
 
200 
 
 THIRTY-NINTil LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Has your brother already commenced 
 his exercises ? 
 
 Not yet. 
 
 He has not yet commenced them. 
 
 The gift. The present. 
 
 Have you received a present > 
 
 I have received several. 
 
 Have you received the books ? 
 
 I have received them. 
 
 From whom ? 
 
 l^rom whom have you received pre- 
 sents ? 
 
 From my friends. 
 
 Whence ? Where from ? 
 
 Where do you come from ? 
 
 I come from the garden. 
 
 Where is he come from ? 
 
 He is come from the theatre. 
 
 Where did they come from ? 
 
 SOS 
 
 Votre-frere a-t-il dcja commenc^ 
 
 themes ? 
 Pas encore. 
 
 II ne les a pas encore commences. 
 Le don. Le present 
 
 Avez-vous rec,u un present ? 
 J'en ai re9u plusieurs. 
 Avez-vous re9u les livree I 
 Je les ai regus. 
 De qui ? 
 De qui avez-vous re^udea pr&snlHi 
 
 De mes amis. 
 
 D'ou? 
 
 D'oii venez-vous ? 
 
 Je vicns du jardin. 
 
 D'oii est-il venu ? 
 
 II est venu du theatre. 
 
 D'ou sont-ils venus ? 
 
 THME. 2de Sec. 
 N'oubliez pas d'dcrire la date ici ou a la fin du theme. 
 
 Voulez-vous sortir avec moi? Pourquoi sortez-vous? Je sora 
 pour arlieler quelque chose. Que vous faut-il? II me faut plu- 
 Meurs articles. Allons allons sortez-vous sans chapeau? Je 
 rroyais 1'avoir. Je 1'ai a present. Etes-vous pret, vous-meme'i 
 ( { -1 14-) Je crois que oui. Non, non, attendez, attendez. Je.n'ai pas 
 pris mon porleieuille. Ainsi vous n 7 avez pas d'argent. G'est.une 
 bonne maniere d 7 aller acheter. Chez qui allons-nous? D'arbord 
 chez le marchand de drap. Vous faut-il du drap pour un habit ? 
 Oui, il m'en faut. Vous en faut-il du bleu, du vert, du noir, ou du 
 gris? Je n'ai pas encore fait de choix. Nous sommes pres du 
 magasin. Entrons. Bon jour, M. Bertrand. Messieurs, j ? ai Phon- 
 neur de vous saluer. Vous faut-il quelque chose ce matin? Dr. 
 drap, du velours, du satin? Quoi? ^11 faut du drap a Monsieur. 
 Et vous, M., ne vous faut-il rien? 'Non pas aujourd'hui. Vous 
 savez qu'avant-hier j'ai achete plusieurs articles chez vous. C'est 
 vrai; vous avez raison. 
 
 What do you want, Sir? I want some cloth. How much is that 
 hat worth ? It is worth four crowns. Do you want any stockings ? 
 I want some. How much are those stockings worth? They are 
 worth two francs. Is that all you want? That is all. Has your 
 little boy received a present? He has received several. From 
 whom has he received any ? He has received some from my father 
 and from yours. Have you received any presents? I have received 
 
FORTIETH LESSON. (1 ) 
 
 201 
 
 "some. What piesents haye you received 1 I have received fine 
 presents. How much may that horse be Avorth ? It may be worth 
 five hundred crowns. 
 
 Is this book worth as much as that? It is worth more. Hov; 
 much is my gun worth ? It is worth as much as that of your friend, 
 Are your horses worth as much as those of the English ? They 
 are not worth so much. How much is that knife worth? It is 
 worth nothing. Is your servant as good as mine? He is better 
 than yours. Are you as good as your brother ? He is better than 
 I. Art ihou as good as thy friend? I am as good as he. Are we 
 as ^ood as our neighbors ? We are better than they. Is your um- 
 brella worth as much as mine ? It is not worth so much. Why is 
 it not worth so much as mine ? Because it is not so fine as yours. 
 How much is that gun worth? It is not worth much. Do you wish 
 to sell your horse ? I do wish to sell it. How much is it worth ? It 
 is worth two hundred crowns. 
 
 KOKT1KTII LESSON, 40lh. Quarantieme Lcrou, 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 After breakfast dinner supper. ! 
 
 After me, him, you, them, my friend. 
 
 After having spoken. 
 
 After having sold (selling) his horse. 
 
 After having been (being) there. 
 
 1 put away the knife after cutting (or 
 
 having cut) the beef. 
 We took tea after dining. 
 
 We ate a late supper 
 
 To pay. ($ 1443.) 
 
 To pay a man for a horse. 
 
 To pay the tailor for the coat. 
 
 Do you pay the shoemaker for the 
 
 shoes ? 
 
 I pay him for them. 
 Does he pay you for the knife ? 
 He does pay me for it. 
 I pay what I owe. 
 To ask, to ask of, to ask for. Ask for. 
 
 Apres dejeunc apres dine soupe. 
 Apres moi, lui, vous, cux, mon ami. 
 t Apres avoir parle. (Rul. 1, N. 1.) 
 t Apres avoir vendu son cheval. 
 t Apres y avoir etc. 
 t J'ai serrd le couteau aprus avoii 
 
 coupe le boeuf. 
 t Nous avons pris le the apres avoir 
 
 dine. 
 
 t Nous avons soupe tard. 
 Payer, 1, pay6, payez (irnpdra. 
 t Payer un cheval a un homme. 
 t Payer 1'habit au tailleur. 
 t Payez-vous les soulisrs au cor- 
 
 donnier*? 
 t Je les iui paie. 
 t Vous paie-t-il le couteau ? 
 t II me le paie. 
 Je paie ce que je dois. 
 Demander, 1, demandez, (impe'ra.) 
 
 Obs. 93. The English verbs : I o pay and to ask, require the preposition 
 for, before the object. In French, the object has no preposition, but thu 
 person takes a. When the verb payer, however, hag no object, do not ust 
 d before the person 
 
2 02 
 
 FORTIETH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 I have paid the tailor. 
 
 I have paid him. 
 
 Have you paid the shoemaker ? 
 
 I have paid him. 
 
 Ask Lewis for some money. 
 
 I ask my father for some money. 
 
 Ask him for some. 
 Do you ask me for your hat ? 
 I do ask you for it. 
 To a&k him for it. 
 To ask him for them. 
 What do you ask me for ? 
 [ ask you for nothing. 
 Ask (of) John if he has my pencil. 
 [ did (ask him, or ask it of him). 
 What did you ask of the clerk ? 
 
 I asked him to copy that. 
 tie does ~~t ask you to come. 
 
 I J'ai paye le tailleur. 
 Je 1'ai paye. 
 
 Avez-vous paye le cordomiier f 
 Je 1'ai paye. 
 
 t Dcmandez de 1'argent a Louia. 
 ^ Je demande de 1'argent a mon 
 
 per3. Demandez-lui-en. 
 t Me demandez-vous votre chapeau 1 
 t Je vous le demande. 
 t Le lui demander. 
 t Les lui demander. 
 t Que me demandez-vous ? 
 t Jc ne vous demande rit-n. 
 t Demandez a Jean s'il a mon crayon, 
 t Je le lui ai demande. 
 t Qu'avez-vous demande au com 
 
 mis ? 
 
 t Je lui ai demande dc copier cela. 
 t II ne vous demande pas de venir. 
 
 QUARANTINE TnfbiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Qui est la? C'est le boulanger. Lui avez-vous demande troia 
 pains? (loaves?) Non, je ne lui en ai demande que deux, comme 
 a I'ordinaire. Demandez-lui-en un autre. Je vais le lui demander. 
 ljuol pain faut-il lui demander? Un rond ou un tortillon? (rt twist 
 loaf'?) Demandez-lui un tortillon, et s'il n'en a pas, prenez-en un 
 rond. Faut-il lui payer cet antre pain? Oui, voiei cinq sons. 
 payez-le. Lc laitier est-il venu? Non, pas encore, il vient, a Fordi- 
 naire, apres le boulanger. S : il a assez de lait, achetex-en pour 3 
 BOUS de plus qu'a 1'ordinaire. II n'en a jamais assez. Alors dites-lui 
 d'en appoi-ter davantage, un peu plqs, cet apres-diner. Faut-il le 
 paver? Non, n'importe. Le marchand me demande un dollar et 
 UP quart pour ce parapluie, vaut-il cela? Je crois qu'il ne vaut pas 
 tent. Qnel age as-tu, mon enfant? Je n'ai pas encore dix ans. 
 Et ton frere, quel age a-t-il? II n'en a que huit. Appronez-vous 
 deja le Fran^ais tous deux ? Je 1'apprends deja, mais il ne 1'apprend 
 pas encore. Pourquoi done? Parce que notre pere croit qiv'il est 
 trop jeune. N 7 ecrit-il pas? Non, il n'ecrit pas. Et toi? Moi^ 
 j'ecris 
 
 Have you paid for tne new gun ? I have paid for it. Has your 
 ar.cle paid for the satin and the velvet? He has. Have I not paid 
 the tailor for the clothes? Yes, you have (paid him for them). 
 VVliat is he asking for, then? He is not asking you to pay him for 
 the clothes, but for the handkerchiefs and gloves. He is right. 1 
 hive not yet paid him for them. Have we paid for our cloaks'! 
 
FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 203 
 
 We have. Has our cousin already paid for his shoes? He has not 
 yet paid for them. Does my brother pay you what he owes you ? 
 He does pay it me. Do you pay what you owe ? I do pay what 1 
 owe. Have you paid the old baker ? I have. Has your uncle 
 paid the butcher for the beef? He has. Who has broken my 
 knife? I have broken it after cutting the bread. 
 
 I his your sou broken my pencils? He has broken them after 
 writing 1 his notes. Have you paid the merchant for the wine after 
 broking it? I have paid for it after drinking it. What did you do 
 after finishing your exercises? I went to my cousin's, in ort'er to 
 conduct him to the museum. What do you ask this man for? I 
 Ji.4; him for the money he is to pay me. What does this boy ask 
 me for? He asks you for some money. Do you ask me for any- 
 thing? I ask you for a crown. Do you ask me for the bread 1 1 
 Jo. Which man do you ask for money? I ask it of the one who 
 >7ne some. (8 2 7 N. 1.) Which merchant do you ask forg.oves? 
 k for some from tho<e who live in William stnnt. What do you 
 iie baker lor ! 1 ask him for some fresh bread. 
 
 'VocAp.ri.Aiur. 2de Section. 
 
 t Me faut-il essayer de faire ccla ? 
 Essayez de le faire et de le bien fairc 
 t II vous faut essayer de mieux faire 
 Tenir,* 2, tenu, tc7tez, (impera.) 
 Je tie?is, tu tiens, il tient, on ticnt. 
 Tenez-vous mon dictionnaire ? 
 Je le tiens. Je ne le tiens pas. 
 
 Qui tient le chcval ? .e valet le 
 
 tient. 
 Ne les tenons-nous pas ? Nous no 
 
 les tenons pas, mais ils les tiennent. 
 Us tiennent quoi ? Les eVentaile 
 
 des dames. 
 
 ("Ms. Jit. / say I here! stop! wait! there! or any interjection used to 
 tract the attention of the person one speaks to, is ... Tenez. 
 
 See ! here ! see here ! Is it what you [ Tenez ! Est-ce ce que vous cher- 
 
 chez ? 
 Non, je cherche mon de. Tenoz ! 
 
 Est-ce cela ? Non, mais tenet, le 
 
 voila. 
 
 Mon parent. Tons nies parents. 
 Mcs parents, (mean all my relation* 
 
 including father and mother.) 
 
 I try to do that? 
 
 TV to do it and to do it well. 
 You must try to do better. 
 To hold, held, hold. (24 3 .) 
 I hold, thou boldest, he holds, (one.) 
 
 i hold my dictionary? 
 I do. I do not. 
 
 Who h.)!,!s the horse ? The valet 
 
 wot hold them ? We do not, 
 but they do. 
 They hold what? The ladies' fans. 
 
 seek? 
 No, I am looking for my thimble. 
 
 Here ! Is that it ? No, but there. 
 
 that ig it. 
 
 My relation. All my relations. 
 My parents, (mean o.xrlu.-ivoly my 
 
 father and mother.] 
 A. brother of mine. ($107.) 
 A, cousin of yo lira. 
 
 t Un de mes freres. 
 t Un de vos cousins. 
 
20-1 
 
 FORTIETH 1.K890N. (2.) 
 
 A. relation oflns, (or hers.) 
 
 A friend oi'ours. 
 
 A neighbor of theirs. 
 
 He tries to see you. 
 
 Does he try to see me ? 
 
 He tries to see an uncle of his. 
 
 To try to 
 
 Tu inquire after some one. 
 
 After r/hom do you inquire ? 
 
 I inquire after a friend of mine. 
 
 They inquire after you. 
 
 I)o they inquire after me ? 
 
 Proper 1 1/. 
 
 You write properly. 
 
 They do their duty properly. 
 
 Try to do your task or duly. 
 
 W e have done it properly. ($ 170.) 
 
 A k'luss of wine. 
 
 A ' 
 
 t Un de sea pr.rentB. 
 t Un de nos amiH. 
 t Un de leurs voisins. 
 II cherche a vous voii. 
 Cherche-t-il a me voir 't 
 11 cherche a voir un de fees o: 
 ChercJter d . . . . 
 t Demander quelqu'un. 
 f Qui demandez-vous ? 
 t Je demunde un de mes amis. 
 I t On vcus demande. 
 t Me demande-t-on ? 
 Comme ilfaut. 
 Vous ecrivez comme il faut. 
 lls font leur devoir comme il laiit. 
 Chcrchez a faire votre devoir. 
 Nous 1'avons fait comme il faut 
 I'n vi ITC de vin. 
 Un morccau de pain. 
 
 QuAK.\vm;.Mi. iMe Sec. 
 
 Bon jour, Monsieur. Comment ai-jo prononce cela ' Vims n'g tojt 
 pas prononce: bon, comme il faut. I'nmiiiLMit faut-il le prononcer i 
 Comme ceci: frcw, sans continuer le son de I'n, (sound of the n.) Jo 
 vais . ;>rononcer comme il faut. Le sondeTn Fra: 
 
 ost difficile, n ? est-ce pas? Non, ce son-la n'est pas ties-ditlicile. 
 Comme je vous 1'ai dit: il ne faut pas le continuer long-temps. 
 Comment est-ce que je le prononce a present ? bon : Vous le pro- 
 noncez mieux, presque comme il faut. Comment mon cousin a-t-il 
 ecrit son theme ? Jl Pa ecrit et traduit comme il faut. Mes enfanta 
 >nt bien fait leurs devoirs, j'espere? Oui, ils les ont faits comme 
 J faut. Ce general ne fait-il pas son devoir? Si fait, il le fait ton- 
 jours comme il faut, et il ne peut pas faire davantage. Ces deux 
 jeunes soldats font leur devoir, n'est-ce pas? lls le font aussi bien 
 qu'ils le peuvent. Faites toujours votre devoir. Je le fais aussi bien 
 que je peux, c ? est-a-dire, j'essaie. 
 
 At -whose house do you dine to-day? My cousin and I (we) dims 
 at the house of a friend of mine, in Walnut street. Wi;li whom 
 did you take tea yesterday, that is to say, the day before yesterday 1 
 Must you know it ? If you will tell me. I will (N. 19 1 ) tell you. 1 
 took ea at the house of a relation of yours. The one who lias so 
 much merit. That very one, (celui-la mime ou lui-meme.) Where 
 are you going? I am going to the house of a relation of mine, 
 in order to breakfast with him. Art thou willing to hold my 
 gloves? I am willing to hold them. Who holds ir.y hat? YUUJ 
 
FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 205 
 
 eon holds it.- -Dost thou hold my stick? I do. Do you held any- 
 
 thing? See, I hold your gun. Who has held my book? YOI.I 
 
 servant has. Will you try to speak well? I will try. Has your 
 
 little brother ever tried to do exercises? He has tried. Have you 
 
 tried to make a hat ? I have never tried to make one. Whom 
 
 are you looking for? I am looking-for the man who has sold a 
 
 horse to me. Is your relation looking for any one? Ke is looking 
 
 fo: a. friend of looking for any one ? We are looking 
 
 fc: a neighbor of our?. Whom dost thou look for? I look fora 
 
 Are you looking for a servant of mine ? Nc, I am 
 
 looking for one of mine. Have you tried to speak Spanish to your 
 
 !e ? I have tried to speak Italian to him. Have you tried to see 
 
 njy father ? I have tried to see him. lias he received you? He 
 
 h:i- no:. !!;.- :::. >ur brothers ? He has. have you beer 
 
 i-.iion? I haVe not. 
 
 What did _ your exercises? I wrote my note 
 
 hem. After whom do you inquire? I inquire after 
 
 the tailor. hues this sailor inquire after any one? He inquire:! 
 
 you) They do in quire after me. 
 They do not inquire after you, but after 
 
 a frir <>u inquire after the physician ? I do inquire 
 
 after him and after the lawyer. What does your little brother ask 
 for? lie; mall piece of bread. Has he not yet breakfasted? 
 
 lie 1 !. but he is still hungry. What does your uncle 
 
 ior a glass of wine. Has he not already drunk ? 
 y drunk, but he is still thirsty. Then give him a glass 
 of \^ ive a piece of old bread or of fresh bread to my 
 
 little brother ? Give him neither a piece of old bread nor of fresh 
 bread ; but give him a small piece of the cake which the cook made 
 everr.ng. 7f he wants a glass of new milk, can I give him one ? 
 No, do not give him a glass of milk so soon after breakfast. What 
 has the clerk got there ? He has his thread gloves. Has he had them 
 dyed ? He has. How has he had them dyed ? He had them dyed 
 yellow. Light or dark? Neither light nor dark. Did you ask the 
 butcher for beef or mutton ? I asked him for beef. I do not like 
 mutton. (Ols. 53.) 
 
 K POUR LA 40ME LECOX. 
 Les chevaux ivont-ils pas assez de foin? Si fait, ils en ont 
 assez, mais nos petits oiseaux n'ont pas assez de grain. N'avons- 
 aous ni poivre. ni vinaigre 7 Nous avons du poivre, mais nous 
 n'avor.s pas do vinaigre. Le jeune etranger n'a-t-il pa& beau- 
 oi-np d 'argent ? Si fait, il en a beaucoup; mais le commis du grand 
 
E06 FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 marchaud n'en a pas beaucoup. N'avons-nous pas de lait? Si fait, 
 AOUS en avons un peu. En avons-nous assez? Nous n'en avons 
 guere, mais assez Le garden du cuisinier a-t-il le cordon de fil de 
 notre vieux voisin ? Non, il ne l ; a pas. Que n'a-t-il pas? II n'a 
 pas le cordon de fil de notre vieux voisin. Le petit garcon ira-t-il 
 pas les bas de coton ? Quels bas de coton ? Ceux du jeune avoeat. 
 II ne les a pas. Avez-vous du fromage de 1'epicier? J'en ai im 
 pcu. En avez-vous assez? Je n'en ai pas assez. Avez-vous peur 
 de ce jeune homme-la? Non, je n'en ai pas peur. Qui a soif? 
 Nous avons soif, et nous avons sommeil. Le menuisier a-t-il ^-eur 
 duchien? Non, le chien a peur du menuisier. N'avons-nous pa* 
 Je parapluie de coton du chapelier? Non, nous ne Favons pas. mais 
 nous avons les gants de fil de son ami. 
 
 Combien de bcoufs avons-nous? Nous en avons trois. Combieu 
 en a-t-il? 11 n'en a qu'un. Combten les Alleraands en ont-ils, ou, 
 Les Allemands, combien en ont-ils? Us en ont cinq. N'en ont-ils 
 pas six? Non, ils n'en ont que cinq. Qui :i du courage? N 
 jeune commis en a. Kn a-t-il trop ? Non, il n'en a pas trop, maig 
 assez. Ce petit garron-la. a-t-il du cfDiir? 11 n'en a guere. Les 
 peinlres ont-ils beaucoup d'argent? Non, ils n'en ont gucre. En 
 avex ncoup ? Je n\*n ai qu'un JUMI. Qui en a beaucoup ? 
 
 Nous rn avons beaucoup. Qn" avons-nous? Nous avons beaucoap 
 d'or i- It Kn avons-nous trop? Nous n'en avons pas trop, 
 
 mais as H^/.. l.v- dumestiques de 1'epicier corabien do verres ont- 
 ils? Us en ont sept ou Imit. N ; en ont-ils pas neuf? Si fait, il- 
 ont neuf. N'en ont-ils pas dix ? Ils n'en ont que neuf. N'en ont- 
 ils pas assez ? Parclonnez-moi, ils en ont assez. Combien d'yeux 
 i-et hommc-ci a-t-il ? 11 en a deux. Et celui-la, combien en a-t-ii ? 
 11 n'en a qu'un. N r avez-vous qu'un oiseau ? Pardonnez-inoi, j'en 
 ai deux. Ces garcons ont-ils beaucoup de batons ? Quels garcons 2 
 x-ci ou ceux-la? Ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la, mais ceux du menui- 
 sier. Ils r.'en ont pas beaucoup. 
 
 Avez-vous le dernier papier? Non, je ne Tai pas. Avez-voua 
 un papier ? Non, je n'en ai pas. Le ministre a-t-il le journal de 
 hier? II en a un. Volre frere a-t-il le parapluie du president? 
 Non, mais il a le baton du gouverneur, (governor.') Qui a le cheval 
 du gouverneur ? Notre vieux matelot 1'a. A-t-il les gants du pre- 
 sident ? Non. le president lui-meme les a. Le lieutenant-gouver- 
 neur a-t-il les billets du prefet ? 11 ne les a pas. II n'a pas quoit 
 II n'a pas les billets du prelct. Je les ai. Combien de francs le 
 president du Senat a-t-il? II n'en a pas: mais il a des dollars 
 Combien en a-t-il ? II en a beaucoup. En a-t-il trop ? 11 n'en a 
 pas trop. En avoi?s-nous assez? Nous n'en avons pas assez. Lee 
 
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 
 
 r 
 
 20T 
 
 Aineriuains n'en ont-iis ! Us n'en ont pas t;op. Qoi en a 
 
 trop ? Personne if en a trop. Le president et le vice -president out- 
 ils beaucoup d'amis ? Us en ont beaucoup: mais ie prefet'ifen a 
 guere. N : en avons-nnns pas bear.coup > <i fait, nous en avon 
 beaucoup. Qui en a pen ? Lo l\i:.-.-e en a , 
 
 , -vons quelques sous? Oui, j'en ai quelques nns. Ai-je 
 quel .' Vou.s n'en avex ] VOUfl avex des francs, et 
 
 des billets de banque. Combien en ai-je / Vons en avex dix. N'ai- 
 je pas deux billets de dix dollars? Non, vous n'en avex qu'un, 
 mais vons avex trois billets de cinq dollars. Jean a le premier 
 volume de Fouvrage de Thiers, n'a-t-il pas le second? Non. il rfa 
 que le premier. L'Anierieain ifa-t-il pas le dernier vclume ? Non, 
 sonne ne 1'a. Quelipf nn a le journal 
 
 du cinq d <-e pas? Le Kusse a celni dn six, du 
 
 . etdu hni' li du cinq. Quels j^apiers le jeune 
 
 / j)as. Les Allemands 
 
 n'ont-ils pas froid ? Non, i! , Le menuisier et 
 
 1'epicier if ont-ils pas tort? Non, ils ont raison. Notre cordonnier 
 
 n'a-t-il p:i - i(3 cnir dn ^ouverneur? II a ceux du lion- 
 
 icur. J'ai li ilonxieme exercice, mon ami Charles a 
 
 ocats ont le quatorxieme, qui a le quinxiemel 
 
 n'a le (niinxieme, mais nous avons le seixierne et le dix- 
 
 septieme. Quel e;ihier avex-vous? J'ai le mien. Le Ills de 1'ami 
 
 il iei? Non, il est a Bostor.. 
 
 H)!; 'X, 41.*t. 
 
 Vor 
 
 The one v>'io, lie who, him who. 
 vhA Tl"'y who. 
 
 perceived, perceive. 
 
 i perceive the scholar who 
 
 ::03 ? 
 
 I do perceive the one who is coming. 
 The one on ... Those in . . . ($ 87.) 
 
 I do not like the one (those) coming. 
 
 Does youf unc.c perceive the soldiers 
 who are goinjr to the covered bridge ? 
 He does not pcrrrive those who .<:;" 
 Whom do the children prrrcivo? 
 They ucrccive r.obody. 
 
 Quanintc ct inucmc Lc<-o;i : \\n\e. 
 Ire Section. 
 r.lviqui. ($40.) 
 Ceux (jui. 
 
 Apercevoir, aper$u, aperccvcz, (conjc 
 gue commc rccevoir. (24 1 , 24 3 , 31 .) 
 Apercevez-vous 1'ecolier qui vient ? 
 
 J'apercois celui qui vient. 
 
 Celui qui est sur . . . Ceux qui eont 
 
 dans . . . 
 Je n'aime pas celui qui vient, ecu* 
 
 qui viennent. 
 Votre oncle aper^oit-il les soldatsqoi 
 
 vont au pont convert ? 
 II n'aper^oit pas ceux qui y vont. 
 Qui Irs rnfaiiis a/ m>i'iv7t'-i7 9 
 Us n'apercoivent pcrsonne. 
 
203 
 
 FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 
 
 How was the weather yesterday ? ) ,. ^ , 
 
 ,, 7 , 4 . , ,. J , > T Quel temps a-t-il fait hier ? 
 
 What kind ot weather was it yest. ? $ 
 
 What weather had we yesterday ? 
 Was it fine weather yesterday * 
 It was bad weather yesterday. 
 It is fine weather this morning. 
 It is neither cold nor warm, but plea- 
 sant and dry. 
 
 Dark, obscure. Clear, light. 
 
 Dusky, gloomy. Dry. Wet, dump. 
 Is the weather damp ? 
 It is not damp, but dry. 
 The weather is too dry to be pleasant. 
 The moonlight, moonshine. The sun. 
 Is it moonlight ? It is. 
 
 Have we too much sun ? Is it too 
 
 sunny ? 
 
 It is too sunny. It is not. 
 
 This syrup. His vinegar syrup. 
 
 Have you tasted this vinegar syrup ? 
 I hrivn. I have not. 
 
 How do you like it ? 
 
 Quel temps avons-rious cu hier f 
 t A-t-il fait beau temps hier ? 
 t II a fait mauvais temps hier. 
 t II fait beau temps ce matin. 
 t II ne fait ni chaud ni froid, mais 
 
 ogreable et sec. 
 Obscur. Clair. 
 
 Sombre. Sec. Ilumide. 
 
 t Fait-il humide ? 
 t II ne fait pas humide, mm> 
 t II fait trop sec pour etre agrcnble. 
 t Le clair dc June. !< if. 
 
 t Fait-il clair de lime ? II 1; 
 
 de lune. 
 t Fait-il trop de solcii ? 
 
 t II en fait trop. II if en fait j- . 
 Ce strop. Son strop <!< 
 Avcz-vous goute ce t?irop <Je vi 
 Jc I'ai goute. Je ne 1'ai pa- 
 t Comment le trot: 
 
 0/-.S-. '.).'). Tin* Frrridi seldom use aimer in similar cases. 
 
 What do you think of it ? 
 I like it pretty well. 
 
 I do not like it at all. 
 
 To lirn ly Jmirt. Learn id by heart. 
 
 Learn every day something by heart. 
 
 I learn by heart. 
 
 What have you learned by heart ? 
 
 We learned our exsrcises. 
 
 Who likes to learn by heart ? 
 
 This fish. Do you like fish ? (06s. 53.) 
 
 t Qu'en pensez-vous? 
 
 t Je le trouve assez bon. Je i'aimc 
 
 assez. 
 
 t Je ne le trouve pas bon du tout. 
 A}>pn ndrcjKircccur. Appris pa 
 Apprenez tousles jours quelquechoso 
 
 par oceur. J'apprends par coeur 
 Qu'avez-vous appris par cceur ? 
 Nous avons appris nos themes par 
 
 coeur. 
 
 Qui aime a apprendre par coeur ? 
 Ce poisson. Aimez-vous le poisson I 
 
 ET UNIME TufhiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Comment est le temps aujourd'hui? II fait tres-beau temps. 
 A-t-il fait beau hier? 11 a fait mauvais hier. Quel temps a-t-il fa? 
 ce matin ? 11 a fait mauvais, mais a present il fait agreable. Fait-il 
 chaud? II fait tres-chaud. Le thermometre est a 81 degres et . 
 II ne fait pas froid, alors. Non, en verite, il ne fait pas froid, maia 
 tres-chaud, au contraire. Avez-vous deja ete au nouveau jardin de 
 
 M ? Non, je n'y ai pas encore ete. Pourquoi done? Parce 
 
 que nous avons eu mauvais temps. Avez-vous peur du mauvaih 
 temps? Je n'en ai pas peur quand je suis oblige de sorlir : mais ie 
 
FORTY-FIRST LKSSON. (2.) 209 
 
 if aim d pas a sortir quand il pleut. Mais il n a pas fait de pluie 
 depuis plusieurs jours. Yous avez oublie; car, il en a fait hier, 
 avar.t-hier, et le jour avant. C'est-a-dire : jendi, mercredi, et mardi. 
 Oui, on. 
 
 .0 the man who is coming? I do not perceive him. 
 
 Do yo -klier's children? I do perceive them. Do 
 
 yon perceive the men who are going into the garden ? I do not per- 
 
 ho are going into the garden, but those who are going 
 
 to the market. Docs your brother perceive the man who has lent 
 
 lie does not perceive the one who has lent him, but 
 
 one to whom he has lent some. Dost thou see the children who 
 
 are studying ? 1 do not see those who are studying, but those who 
 
 thou perceive anything? I perceive nothing. 
 
 Havv- you , < warehouses? 1 have perceived 
 
 them. Where ha. ;1 them? I have perceived them 
 
 I'll tli >;ul. 
 
 A lie. B poulet ou de ce poisson ? De ce poulet, 
 
 'il Tops plait. Je n'ai:. .-son. Qucl rnorceau voulez- 
 
 lie. Donnez-moi le premier venu. N'avez-vous paa 
 
 ;>as de choix. Tenez, voici un bon morceau ; 
 
 du i L'aimez-vooB anBsi 1 Je crois qne oui, car, je 
 
 mai t; j'aime tout. Voulez-vous un verre de vin ou un 
 
 verre de sirop? Donnez-moi un verre de sirop; mais n'y mettez 
 pas beaucoup de sirop. Mettez-1'y vous-meme. Donnez-le-moi 
 Je vais y en mettre un peu. Tenez, voila le verre. Mettez-y le 
 sirop qifil vous fa -t ce petit Monsieur? C'est mon plua 
 
 jenne fir ! Est-ce un bon enfant? Ktndie-t-ilcommo 
 
 il faut? 11 f,i Men son devoir. Aime-t-il a apprendre par 
 
 co?ur? Oui, il apprend tous les jours quelque chose par cccur. Lea 
 ecoliers n'aiment-ils pas gcneralcment (generally) a apprendre pai 
 crcur? 11 y en a qui aiment a le faire; mais beaucoup aiment a 
 etudier, mais non pas a apprendre par cocur. 
 
 Do you intend going to see the new vessel of Mr. Tessier? J 
 do. When? to-morrow, or the day after? The day after to-mor- 
 row, if the weather is fine. Is it light enough in your counting- 
 house ? It i< not liirht in it. Do you wish to work in mine? I do 
 wish to work in it. Is it light there ? It is very light there. Why 
 cannot your brother work in his warehouse? He cannot we rk there, 
 u is (i7 y fait) too dark. Where is it too dark? In hib 
 wa:. Is it light in that hole ? It is dark there. Is the w?.>a- 
 
 ther dry? It is very dry. Is it damp 7 It is not damp. It : 
 dry. Is it moonlight? It is not moonlight; it is very damp- 
 
810 
 
 FOU TV- FIRST LESSON. (2.) 
 
 what docs youi uncle speak? He speaks of the fine weather. Of 
 A'hat do those men speak ? They speak of lair and bad weather. 
 Have you tasted that wine ? I have tasted it. How do you like it ? 
 I like it well. How does your cousin like that cider? He does not 
 like it. Which wine do you wish to taste ? I wish to taste that 
 which you have tasted. Will yo r i taste this tobacco ? I have tasted 
 it already. How do you like it ? I like it well. Why do you MCA 
 taste that cider ? Because I am not thirsty. Why does your friend 
 not taste this beef? Because he is not hungry. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2dc Section. 
 
 The pupil. Once a day. 
 
 Thrice, or three times a month. 
 So much a year. So much a head. 
 
 So much a soldier. Six times a year. 
 
 Early in the morning. 
 
 We go out early in the morning. 
 
 When did your father go out ? 
 To vpcak of some owe or something. 
 
 Of whom do you speak ? 
 
 We speak of the man whom you 
 
 know. 
 
 Of what are they speaking ? 
 Tlu-y arc speaking of the wcatii 
 To be pleased, content, satisfied with. 
 
 LYICve. t Une fois par jour, 
 
 t Trois fois par mois. 
 tTantjwran. tTant par tcrc. 
 (La ttte,l\\c head, est un noni fern.'i 
 Taut par soldat. Six fois par an. 
 Le matin de Lonne heure. 
 Nous sortons le matin dc bonno 
 
 heure. 
 
 Quand votre pere est-il sorti I 
 Parlcr de quelqu'un ou de guclqi:t 
 
 chose. 
 
 De qui parlez-vous ? 
 Nous parlous Jc rhommo r .ue voiis 
 
 connaisscz. 
 De quoi parlcnt-ils? 
 Us parlent du ten 
 Eire content de . . . . 
 
 Obs. 06. To be pleased, cannot be translated literally in French ; because 
 ih ) verb p"aire is intransitive, and cannot be used in the passive form. 
 
 Are you satisfied wtth this man ? 
 
 J am pleased with him. 
 
 Are you pleased with your new coat ? 
 
 I am pleased with it. 
 
 What are you pleased with ? 
 
 Displeased, discontented. 
 
 I am displeased with him, or it. 
 
 They speak of your friend. 
 
 IX) they ? What do they say of him ? 
 
 Are they speaking of your book ? 
 
 They are. They arc not. 
 
 Not. $171, N. ?/ 
 
 The teacher and hi.* pupil have not 
 
 gone out. 
 B Miisfied with what you have. 
 
 Etes-vous content dc cet homme-ci ? 
 
 J'en suis content. 
 
 Etes-vous content dc votrc habil 
 
 neuf? 
 
 J'c;i suis content. 
 De quoi etes-vous content ? 
 Mccontent. 
 Von suis mecontent. 
 On parle de votre ami. 
 En parle-t-on ? Qu'en dit- jn t 
 Parle-t-on de votre livre ? 
 On en parle. On n'en parle point 
 Ne .... point (nearly synonymir.ji 
 
 to ... pas.) 
 Le mait re et son elcve ne scut poin. 
 
 sortis. 
 Soyez content de cc que voua avez. 
 
FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 
 
 I am not dissatisfied with it. 
 
 Do they speak of the cholera? 
 
 They do. 
 
 What do they talk of? (or about ?) 
 Nothing is spoken of. 
 IVatcr. The water. Some w:aJrr. 
 Wine and water. Syrup and water. 
 
 A glasa (or drink) of water. 
 A drink of cider. 
 A glass of wine and v. 
 ral water. 
 
 )f niiti 
 
 Je n'en suis point mecontent. 
 Parle-t-on du cholera ! 
 
 On en parle. 
 De quoi parle-t-on I 
 On ne parle de rien. 
 Eau, (feminin.) L'cau. De V tau. 
 Du vin et de 1'eau. Du sirop et do 
 
 1'eau. 
 
 ire d'cau. 
 Un verre de cidrc. 
 Un verre do vin et d'enu d'eaa 
 
 inincrale. 
 
 QUARANTE ET UN1EMK Tllfi.ME. 2de See. 
 
 Ah ! vous avez un morceau de pain et de beurre. Alle/-vciis le 
 'nanger, ou le dormer a quelqu'un? Je vais le manger, car j'a ; 
 grand : faim. Comment ! Vous avez dcja faim ? 11 n'est pas tara 
 ndant. Combien de fois mangez-vpus par jour? Nous man- 
 is quatre fois. Combien de fois vos enfarits boivent-ils par jour'? 
 11s boivent plusieurs fois. Buvez-vous aussi souvent qu'eux? Je 
 plus souvent. Combien de fois par mois allez-vous au theatre ? 
 y vais qu'une fois par mois. I-es eleves y vont-ils? Us n'y 
 vont point. De quoi parlent-ils? Us parlent de leurs lemons. Font- 
 ils irois themes par jour? Us n'en font que deux, mais ils les font 
 coin me il faut. Avez-vous pu lire le billet qu'on vous a ecrit? Je 
 n'ai pas pu le lire tout. Est-ce qu'il est mal ecrit? Oui, je vous 
 re; voyez, vous-meme. C'est vrai. Soyez le bien venii, M. 
 Allons prendre un verre d't-au minerale. J'y mets toujours du sirop 
 et vous ? Moi ; non. 
 
 Plow many times a year does your cousin go to the ball ? Ho 
 goes two or three times during the winter. Do you go there as 
 often as he ? I am not used to go. How oftei does your cook 
 go to market? He goes generally once a day; sometimes twice. 
 Then he goes every day, except (excepte) Sunday; does he 
 not? Yes, he doe?. Whom are you inquiring for? I inquire 
 for your English cousin. Is he at home? No, he is not. Do 
 you like a large hat ? I do not like a large hat, but a large 
 umbrella, What do you like to do? 1 like to write. Do you like 
 to see these little boys? I like to see them. Do you like mineral 
 watei, with syrup? I do. Does your brother like cider? Ho does, 
 What do the soldiers like? They like wine. Dost thou like tea 
 nr coffee? I like both. Do these children like to study? They 
 like to study and to play. Do you like to read and tc write? I li^- 
 to read and to write. How many times a day do you go out? I go 
 
12 
 
 FORTY-SECOND AESSON. (1.) 
 
 out as often as I need to go out. Do you often go to my uncle's? 1 
 go there six times a year. Do you understand the man who is 
 speaking to you ? I do not. Why do you not? Because he speaks 
 too badly. Does this man know French? He knows it, but I dc 
 not know it. Why do ycu not learn it l 1 have no time to learn it 
 Of whom have they (on) spoken? They have spoken of your 
 friend. Have they not spoken of the physicians? They have not 
 spoken of them. Do they not speak of the man of whom we have 
 spoken ? They do speak of him. Have they spoken of the r.c bio- 
 men ? They have spoken of them. Have they spoken of those of 
 whom we speak? They have not spoken of those of whom wo 
 speak, but they have spoken of others. Have they spoken of our 
 children or of those of our neighbors? They have spoken neither 
 of ours nor of those of our neighbors. Of which children have they 
 spoken? They have spoken of our masters. Do they speak of 
 my work ? They do speak of it. Are you satisfied with your 
 pupils? I am satisfied with them. How does my brother study? 
 lie studies well. How many exercises have you studied? I have 
 already studied forty-one. Is your master satisfied with his scholar? 
 He is satisfied with him, and with the presents he has received. 
 
 FORTY-SECOND LESSON, 42d.Quarantc-dcuxiemc I. . !2me. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 
 OF PASSIVE VERBS. Pea Verbes Passif*. 
 
 Passive verbs represent the subject as receiving or suffering from otliera 
 Jic action expressed by the verb. In French, as in English, they are con- 
 jugated by means of the auxiliary verb etrc, to be, joined to the past par- 
 ticiple of the active verb. Thus any active verb may be changed into the 
 passive voice. The past participle agrees with the nominative. ($ 159.) 
 
 Active voice. 
 
 Passive voice. 
 
 Voix active. 
 
 Voix passive. 
 
 I love. 
 
 I am loved. 
 
 J'aime. 
 
 Je suis aime. 
 
 Thou condurtst. Thou art conduct- 
 
 Tu conduis. 
 
 Tu es conduit. 
 
 
 ed. 
 
 
 
 lie praises. 
 
 He is praised. 
 
 II loue. 
 
 11 est loutj. 
 
 We hear. 
 
 We are heard. 
 
 Nous entendona. 
 
 Nous sommea 
 
 
 
 
 entendus. 
 
 you punish. 
 
 You are punished. 
 
 Vouspunissez. 
 
 Vous etes puni* 
 
 They blame. 
 
 They are blamed. 
 
 Us blament. 
 
 Us sont blamca 
 
 To praise. 
 
 praised, praise. 
 
 Louer, 1, loue, 
 
 louez, (impera.l 
 
 To punish, 
 
 punished, punish. 
 
 Punir, 2, puni, 
 
 punissez. 
 
 To blame, 
 
 blamed, blame .10 
 
 B lamer, 1, blame, 
 
 Ne lldmez pc* 
 
 
 one. 
 
 sonne. 
 
 
 
 J3y. 
 
 Par or 
 
 fa 
 
 By me, 
 
 By us. 
 
 Do or par moi, 
 
 de or par nous. 
 
rORTY-SKCONI) LESSON. (1.) 
 
 213 
 
 B) thcc, by you. 
 
 l!y h by them. 
 
 Hy whom ia tne naughty punished ? 
 
 unified by his iajhcr. 
 l>y whom is the good loved > 
 Lie is loved by everybody. 
 
 J De or par toi, 
 
 de or par M>US. 
 
 De or par lui, d' or par eux. 
 
 Par qui le mechutit est-il puni? 
 11 cst puni par son JH re. 
 Pe qui le bon est-il iW ? 
 II est atme de to at le monde. 
 
 Obs. 97. Pur is used for physical or menial actions, 
 affections of the heart or soul. 
 Which man is praised, and which is 
 
 blamed I. 
 
 Naughry, wicked. The naughty. 
 Skilful, clever. Diligent. 
 Assiduous, industrious, studious. 
 Idle, lazy. Ignorant. 
 
 The idler, the lazy fri! 
 To reward. To <. >iecm. To despiso. 
 
 DC relates to the 
 
 To ha i- ! riled. 
 
 Good, wise.) 
 
 children 01 because 
 
 .re studious and good. 
 To travel (to go) to a .... (to the.) 
 Where has he travelled to ? 
 lie has travelled to Vienna. 
 Is it good travelling ? 
 
 .rood travel! 
 
 Sad travelling. 
 In the spring. 
 It is bad travelling in the winter. 
 
 Quel homme est loue, et lequel est 
 
 bl;i!i 
 
 Mediant. Le mechant. 
 Habile. Diligent. 
 Assidu, industrieux, studieiLX. 
 Paresseux. Ignorant. 
 Le paresscux. 
 
 Denser, 1. Es irner, 1. M6- 
 
 priser, 1. 
 
 I fair,* : '. lm\. (24 1 .) 
 
 Je hais, tu hais, il hait, (le sing, est 
 
 ilicr.) 
 
 Sage, (said only of childn i.) 
 Ces enfants sont ainn's, parcc qu'il 
 
 sont studieux et sages. 
 Aller,*!, a ... (au) (avant un n^m.) 
 Ou *st-il alle ? 
 
 II etrt alle a Vienne. 
 
 t Fait-il bon voyager ? 
 
 t II fait bon voyager. 
 
 t II fait mauvais voyager. 
 
 Dans le printemps, au printemps. 
 
 II fait mauvais voyager dans 1'hiver 
 
 QuAiiANTi:-i>i-:rxiKMK THME, Ire Sec. 
 
 Do qui avez-vous parle ? Nous avons parle de vous. M^avez- 
 vous loue ? Nous ne vous avons pas loue, au contraire, nous vous 
 avons blame. Pourquol m'avez-vous "blame? Parce que vous 
 n'etudiez pas bien. Votre frere vous a parle de quoi? II a parle de 
 ses livres, de ses chevaux et de ses chiens. Pourquoi ses enfants 
 aont-ils aimes? Parce qu'ils sont bons, ils sont aimes. Sont-ils plus 
 sages que nous ? Ils n^*, sont pas plus sages que vous, mais ils sont 
 - studieux. Votre cousin est-il aussi assidu que le mien? II est 
 aussi aesidu que le votre, mais le votre est plus sage que le mien. 
 Fait-il bon voyager au printemps? II fait bon voyager au printemps 
 ot dans Pautomne ; mais il fait mauvais voyager dans 1'ete et dans 
 rhivsr. Aimez-vous a voyager? Avez-vous quelque fois voyage on 
 hivor ? J ? aime assez a voyager, et j'ai souve-nt voyage en etc muia 
 
214 
 
 FORTY -SECOND LESSON. (2.) 
 
 pas en hiver. Le general est souvent malade. vous savez qcvil a It 
 goutte. Pourquoi ne voyage-t-il pas ? II dit que le printemps est troy 
 humide, Pete trop chaud, et Fhiver trop froid. Et que dit-il de Fau 
 tomne 1 II dit qu'alors il est trop occupe pour voyager. 
 
 Are you loved'? I am loved. By whom are you loved? I am 
 loved by my uncle. By whom am I loved ? Thou art loved by thy 
 parents. By whom are we loved ? You are loved by your friends. 
 By whom are those boys loved ? They are loved by their neigh- 
 bors. By whom is this man conducted ? He is conducted, by me. 
 Where do you conduct him to? I conduct him home. By whom 
 are we blamed? We are blamed by our enemies. Why are we 
 blamed by them ? Because they do not love us. Are you punished 
 by your master? I am not punished by him, because I am good and 
 studious. Are we heard ? We are. By whom are we heard ? We 
 are heard by our neighbors. Is thy master heard by his pupils? 
 He is heard by them. Which children are praised ? Those that are 
 good. Which are punished ? Those that are idle and naughty. Are 
 we praised or blamed? We are neither praised nor blamed. 
 
 Is our friend loved by his masters? He is loved and praised by 
 them, because he is studious and good ; but his brother is despised 
 by his, because he is naughty and idle. Is he sometimes punished 7 
 He is (il Vest) every morning and every evening. Are you some- 
 times punished? I am (je ne le suis) never; I am loved and 
 rewarded by my good masters. Are these children never punished ? 
 They are (Us ne le sont) never, because they are studious and good; 
 but those are so (le sont) very often, because they are idle and 
 naughty. Who is praised and rewarded? Skilful children are 
 praised, esteemed, and rewarded, but the ignorant are blamed, 
 despised, and punished. Who is loved, and who is hated ? He who 
 is studions and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is 
 hated. Must one be (faut-il etre) good in order to be loved? One 
 must be so, (ilfaut I'etre.) What must one do (que faut-il faire) in 
 orde- to be loved? One must be good and assiduous. What njusS 
 one do in order to be rewarded ? One must be (ilfaut ctre) skilful, 
 *nd study much. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2Je Section. 
 To drive, to rids in a carriage. 
 To ride (on horseback). 
 To go on foot, to walk. 
 Do you like to ride on horseback ? 
 I like to drive. 
 
 To live, lived, tivi?ig. 
 
 \ live, rhou livcst, he .ivcs. 
 
 Aller en voiture, ) 
 Aller a cheval, > tak . C 
 Aller a pied, ) 
 
 the aux 
 iliary etre. 
 
 Aimez-vous a monter a che\al ? 
 J'aime a aller en voiture. 
 Vivre,* 4, vecn, vivant, 
 Je vis, ni vis. il vit. 
 
FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 
 
 215 
 
 Is it good living in Paris ? 
 
 Is the living good in Paris ? 
 
 It is good living there. 
 
 The living is good there. 
 
 Dear. 
 
 Is the living dear in London ? 
 
 Is it dear living in London? 
 
 The living is dear there. 
 
 Thunder. The thunder roars. 
 
 This storm. This fog, mist. 
 
 la it windy ? Does the wind blow ? 
 
 it is windy. The wind blows. 
 
 It is not windy. 
 
 It is very windy. 
 
 Does it thunder ? 
 
 Is it foggy ? 
 
 It is stormy. 
 
 It is not stormy. 
 
 Does the sun thine > 
 
 't thunders very much. 
 
 ^s soon (if, us soon us /, as //. 
 
 AS soon as I have eaten, I drink. 
 
 As soon as I have taken on" my shoes, 
 
 I take off my stockings. 
 What do you do in the evening ? 
 Do I sleep ? Thou sleepest. Who 
 
 sleeps ? 
 
 Does the child sleep ? He still sleeps. 
 Without money. Without speak in-g. 
 Without saying anything, i'a word.) 
 At last. 
 
 To arrive. Arrived. 
 
 Has he arrived at last ? 
 He has not arrived yet. 
 Is he coming at last ? To be sure, he is. 
 And then. 
 As soon as he has supped, he reads, 
 
 > t Fait-il bon vivre a Paris 1 
 
 > t II y fait bon vivre. 
 | Cher. 
 
 > t Fait-il cher vivre a Londree! 
 
 t II y fait cher vivre. 
 
 Le tonnerre. Le tonnerre grorola, 
 
 Cet orage. Ce brouillani. 
 
 t Fait-il du vent ? 
 
 t II fait du vent. 
 
 t II no fait pas de vent. 
 
 t II fait bcaucoup de vent. 
 
 t Fait-il du tonnerre ? 
 
 t Fait-il du brouillard ? 
 
 t II fait de 1'orage. 
 
 t II ne fait pas d'orage. 
 
 t Fait-il du solcil? 
 
 t II fait beaucoup de tonncrro. 
 
 Aussitot tjue, aussittt nuvmvi, yu'eu* 
 
 Aussitot quo j'ai mange, je hois. 
 
 Aussitot quo j'ai 6te mcs Bouliere, 
 
 j'ote mes has. 
 Que faites-vous le soir ? 
 Est-ce que je dors ? Tu dors. Qui 
 
 dort? 
 
 L'enfant dort-il ? II dort encore. 
 Sans argent, t Sans parlcr. (Dir. 1.' 
 t Sans rien dire, t Sans dire un mot. 
 En fin. 
 
 Arriver, 1. Arrive , (etrcpour auxiU 
 Kst-il enfin arrivd ? 
 II n'cst pas encore arrive". 
 Vient-il enfin ? Sans doute, il vient. 
 Puis, et puis. 
 Aussitot qu'il a soupe, il lit, puis \\ 
 
 dort. 
 
 and then he sleeps. 
 
 QUARANTE-DEUXIEME TllfblE, 2de Sec. 
 
 Aimez-vous ti monter a cheval le matin? Non, mais j'aime a 
 mcMiter a cheval le soir. Pourquoil Parce que le soir, il fait plus 
 frais, et vous dormez mieux apres votre retour. Je crois que vous 
 iivex raison, et cependant on monte plus a cheval le matin que le 
 soir. Votre frere a-t-il jamais monte a cheval? II n'y a jamaia 
 monle. Votre oncle monte-t-il a cheval aussi souvent que votre 
 pere ? Ils vont souvent a cheval Fun avec Tautre. Avez-vous etc 
 en voiture au pont de fil de fer 1 Oui, nous y avons etc plusieurs fois- 
 V avez-vou3 \eja ete a cheval? Non, je n'y ai jamais etc a cheval 
 
21G FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Allons-y cet apres-midi. A cheval ou en voiture ? A cheval. Norij 
 mais a pied ; si vous voulez. Aimez-vous a aller a pied ? Oui, j'aime 
 beaucoup a aller a pied, il fait trop de pcnssiere pour y aller a cheval 
 
 Have you been in London? I have been there. Is the living 
 good there ? The living is good there, but dear. Is it dear living 
 in Paris ? It is good living there, and not dear. Do you like travel- 
 ling in France ? I like travelling there, because one finds good peo- 
 ple (de bonnes gens) there. Does your friend like travelling in Hol- 
 land ? He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad 
 there. Do you like travelling in Italy ? I do like travelling there, 
 because the living is good there, and one (ct qu'on y) finds good 
 people there ; but the roads are not very good there. Do the English 
 like to travel in Spain? They do like to travel there; but they find 
 the roads there too bad. Ho\v is the weather ? The weather is very 
 bad. Is it windy? It is very windy. Was it stormy yesterday ? 
 It was very stormy, (un grand oragc.) Do you go to the market this 
 morning? I do go thither, if it is not stormy. Do you intend going 
 to France this year? (cette annee?) I intend going thither, if the 
 weather is not too bad. Do you like to go on foot ? I do not like 
 to go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (quand) I am 
 travelling. Will you go on foot ? I cannot go on foot, because I am 
 tired. 
 
 What sort of weather is it? It thunders. Does the sun shine? 
 The sun does not shine; it is foggy. Do you hear the thunder .' it 
 roars. Yes, I hear it: it roars much. Is it fine weather? The 
 wind blows hard, and the thunder roars much. What do you do in 
 the evening? I work as soon as I have supped. And what do you 
 do afterwards ? Afterwards I sleep. When do you drink ? I drink 
 as soon as I have eaten. When do you sleep ? I sleep as soon as 
 I have supped. Have you spoken to the merchant ? I have spoken 
 to him. What has he said? He has left (parti*) without saying 
 anything. Can you work without speaking? I can work, but not 
 (non pas) study French without speaking. Wilt thou go for some 
 wine ? I cannot (point) go for wine without money. Have you 
 bought any horses ? I do not buy without money. Has your father 
 arrived at last ? He has arrived. When did he arrive ? This morn- 
 ing at four o'clock. Has your cousin set out at last ? He has not 
 Bet out yet. Have you at last found a good master ? I have at last 
 found one. Are you at last learning German ? I am at last learning 
 it. Why have you not already learned it ? Because I have not beor 
 able to find a good master. 
 
V 3RTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 
 
 217 
 
 [-< ">RTY.TIIiUD LESSON, 43d. Quarante-troisiein Lcgon, 43iiw. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 OF IlEFL! VERBS. Des Vcrlcs Rijlechis ou Fro-Mtninnux. 
 
 See ($ 180), and study it carefully. 
 ,:t yourself. \ Feu* couper. I/ To cut himself\ ^ 
 
 T c 
 
 To cut myself. l Me couper. 
 
 To cut ourselves./ AMX ciper. 
 
 Do you burn yourself f 
 
 J do noi burn myself. 
 
 Hfou do not burn yourself. 
 
 1 see myself. I do noi. 
 
 Do I see myself? 
 
 Ho does not. 
 -ce ourselves. 
 
 They see themselves. They !-, not. 
 Do you wish to warm your 
 I do wish to warm m\ 
 
 warm himself? 
 He d warm himself. 
 
 To cut herself. \ ( 
 
 , ,_ \ \- sc couper. 
 
 To cut itself. I f 
 
 \To cut one's self/ ) 
 Vous brulez-vous ? 
 Je ne me briilc point. 
 Vous ne vous brulez pas. 
 Je me vois. Je ne me vois point. 
 Est-ce que je me vois ? 
 II se voit. 11 ne se voit point. 
 Nous nous voyons. 
 Us se voient. Us ne se voient point. 
 Voulez-vous vous chaufler ? 
 Je vcux'mc chaufK-r. 
 Veut-il se chaul:- 
 II veut se chaufler. 
 Us veulent se chauffer. 
 
 They .:m themselves. 
 
 To cnj,,y, to divert, to amuse myself.' ) M - am , ((J avant 
 
 I o pass or spend my time. 5 
 
 Let mo am :. Amuse your- 
 
 Enjoy yourself, but do not neglect 
 
 your duty. 
 How do you spend or pass your 
 
 time ?i I pass it in reading. 
 He passes his time in playing. 
 Each. Each one. 
 
 Each man. Each of those men. 
 
 Each man amuses himself as he likes. 
 
 Amusez- 
 
 Laissez-moi m'amuser. 
 
 vous. 
 Amusez-vous, mais ne negligcz point 
 
 votre devoir. 
 
 t A quoi vous amusez-vous ? 
 t Je m 'amuse a lire, 
 t II s 1 amuse a jouer. 
 Chaque (avec le nom.) CJiacun (sane 
 
 nom.) 
 Chaque homme. Chacun de cea 
 
 hommes. 
 Chaque homme s'amuse comrne il 
 
 veut. 
 Chacun s'arnuse de son mieux. 
 
 Le gout. Le bon gofit. 
 
 Chaque homme a son gout. 
 Le mien est d'etudier. 
 
 Each one amuses himself in the best 
 
 way he can. 
 
 The taste. The good taste. 
 
 Each man has his taste. 
 Mine is to study. 
 
 01*. 98. Translate is to, meaning, consist 8 in, by est de t (piind the prepos.) 
 
 1 Vous amusez vous ? which is much used by the French, is rendered in 
 English, not by : do you amuse yourself? but by, pass or spend your time, 
 >ve. 
 19 
 
218 FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 
 
 QUARANTE-TKOISlfcME TllfolE. Ire SeC. 
 
 Ah ! vous voila, enfin ! Je vous ai attendu long-temps. Je sail 
 fache de vous avoir fait attendra; mais je n'*ai pas pu ( 14S) venir 
 plutot. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous ? Non, mais .... N'im- 
 porte. Parlons de votre nouveau cheval. Vous plait-il ? (arc you 
 pleased ?) II ne me plait pas beaucoup. Pourquoi done ? 11 esl 
 bon, il va bien ; mais il est si grand ; si grand que j : ai Fair d'un eniant 
 quand je suis dessus. L 7 avez-vous essaye deja? Oui, deux fois. 
 Est-il difficile a monter? Non, pas du tout. Joseph. Joseph! On 
 m'appelle. Je crois que c'est mon oncle qui a besom de moi 
 Allez, alors. Adieu. Attendez. Je veux vous demancer queiaue 
 chose, "^iuoi? Voulez-vous revenir ce soir? Ce soir? Je crois 
 que non. Je suis tres-occupe. Mais vous-meme, venez me voir. 
 Et pourquoi? Si vous etes si occupe, nous ne pouvons ni parlor ni 
 nous aniuser ensemble. Vous avez raison; mais, il me faut parlir. 
 Adieu, an plaisir. An plaisir. 
 
 Who kindles your ; ; servant does. P* idle it 
 
 well? He burns himself sometimes. Does he make your co., 
 Yes, arid he does it first-rate, (excellent.) You have been in 
 land, have you not? Yes. I have. And in Ireland too! 
 would not (did not wish to) go there. Were you afrai 
 a little. How is the li. ' (y vit-oii I) S well 
 
 as in England and France. V. the living 
 
 in London 1 It is dearer in Paris, no, 1 mean in London. Do peo- 
 ple despise the 1 the wicked ? Yes, people despise thorn. 
 -What is esteemed? Merit is. Do scholars love or hate their 
 teachers? Some love and esteem them; others hate them. The 
 studious is generally esteemed, is he not? Yes, he is, by every- 
 body. Do parents punish their bad children .' Yes, they do ; when 
 these do something wrong, (mal.) 
 
 Do you see yourself in that small look 
 
 in it. Can your friends see themselves in that large looking-glass 1 
 They can see themselves therein. Why does your brother not light 
 the lire ? He does not light it, because he is afraid of burning him- 
 self. Why do you not cut your bread ? I do not cut it, because I 
 tear to cut my linger. Have you a sore finger? I have a sore finger 
 and a sore foot. Do you wish to warm yourself? I do wish to wann 
 myself, because I am very (grand) cold. Why does that man not 
 warm himself ? Because he is not cold. Do your neighbors warm 
 themselves ? They warm themselves, because they are cold. How 
 do you pass your time ? I pass it in the best way I can. How do 
 your children pass their time? They pass it in studying, writing 
 Olid play ing.- --How does your cousin spend his ' He amuses him' 
 
FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 
 
 219 
 
 self in reading good books and in writing to his friendy. What do 
 you do when you have nothing to do at home ? I go to the play, 
 and to the concert. I often say, " Every one amuses himself as ho 
 likes.'' Every man has his taste ; what is yours? Mine is to study, 
 to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, and the ball, 
 and to ride. His, is to do nothing. Theirs, is to have line dogs, 
 
 . 2dc Section. 
 
 Each of you. us, them. 
 
 The world, (the people.; Genteel 
 
 people. 
 Every one, everybody, says and be- 
 
 s so. 
 
 Everybody speaks of it, them, you, 
 &c. 
 ry one (any one) is liable to make 
 
 To be subject to (plagued with) the 
 toothache. 
 
 We are all liable to make n 
 
 To mi- 
 Do not make a mistake (impera.) 
 
 :i ? I am. 
 Is he mistaken ? lie is not. 
 
 .as cheated 
 iias cheated me 
 pea. 
 YDU cut your finger. 
 
 of a hundred 
 
 Chacun do vous, de nous, cl'eux. 
 Le monde. Le beau monde. 
 
 Tout le monde le dit et le croit. 
 Tout le monde (chacun) en parle. 
 
 Tout liomme (chaque homme) est 
 sujet a se tromper. 
 
 ijet au mal de dents. 
 
 Nous sommes tous sujets a noug 
 tromper. 
 
 , se, nous, vous tromper, 1. 
 t Ne vous trompez pas. ($ 55.) 
 t Vous trompez-vous ? Je me trompc. 
 t Se trompe-t-il ? II no se trompe 
 
 point. 
 
 Tromper, 1. 
 II m'a trompe. 
 II m'a trompe de cent francs. 
 
 Vous vous coupez le doigt. 
 
 '. When an agent performs an act upon a part of himself, the vorft 
 made reflective. 
 
 I cut my nails. 
 
 A hair. 
 
 To pull out, pluck out, extract, snatch 
 
 .!ls out his hair. 
 He cuts his hair. 
 
 The dentist extracts one of his teeth. 
 . (tear or take one's self 
 away from a place.) 
 065. 100. Je m'en vais, is equival 
 
 Are you jroin^ away ? I am. 
 
 I am not. 
 
 Is he going away ? He is not. 
 
 In lie not going away ? He is. 
 
 Am I going ? You are. 
 
 Je me coupe les ongles. 
 
 Un cheveu, (plur. x.) 
 
 Arracher, 1. 
 
 II s'arrache les cheveux. 
 
 II se coupe les cheveux. 
 
 Le dentiste arrache une de ses dunta 
 
 t M f , t', s', nous, vous en aller,* 1. 
 
 lent to : / take myself from here. 
 
 t Vous en allez-vous ? Jc m'en vaia 
 t Je ne m'en vais pas. 
 t S'en va-t-il ? II ne s'rn va point 
 t Ne s'en va-t-il point ? II s'en va. 
 t M'cn vais-je ? Vous vous m i 
 
220 FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Are we not going away ? t Ne nous en allon^-nous pas ? 
 
 Yes, we are. 
 
 Are these pupils going away ? 
 
 They are not. 
 
 To feel sleepy. 
 
 t Si fait, nous nous en allons. 
 t Ses e'leves s'en vont-ils ? 
 t Us ne s'en vont pas. 
 t Avoir envie de dormir. 
 
 Do you feel sleepy ? ! t Avez-vous envie de dormir ? 
 
 I do feel sleepy. j t J'ai envie de dormir. 
 
 To soil. Do not soil. | Salir, 2. Ne salissez pas. 
 
 T* fear, dread, feared, fear nothing, i Craindre,* 4, craint. Ne craignol 
 
 rien. 
 
 N<A to fear. (* 1717.) 
 
 I dread. He fears he has nothing. 
 
 He fears to soil his fingers. 
 
 Do you dread to go out ? 
 
 I do dread to go out. 
 
 He is afraid not to go there. 
 
 Do you fear that man ? 
 
 I do not fear him. 
 
 What do you fear ? Nothing. 
 
 Whom do you fear ? Nobody. 
 
 I fear nobody. 
 
 Nepas craindre (de av. I'lnfm.) 
 
 Je crains. II craint de ne rien avoir 
 
 II craint de se salir les doigts. 
 
 Craignez-vous de sortir ? 
 
 Je crains de sortir. 
 
 II craint de nepas y aller. 
 
 Craignez-vous cet homme ? 
 
 Je ne le crains pas. 
 
 Que craignez-vous ? Rien. 
 
 Qui craignez-vous ? Personne. 
 
 Je ne crains personne. 
 
 QUAKANTE-TROISIEME Tllfi.ME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Vous avez Fair d'avoir chaud, prenez un verre de sirop. Avez- 
 vous do 1'eau minerale ici ? Non, nous n'en avons point ; mais nous 
 pouvons en envoyer chercher, ou plutot, allons-en boire, chacun un 
 verre, chez I'apothicaire du coin. Volontiers. Allons-y. Venez 
 aussi, Frederic, ne voulez-vous pas? Non, je n'aipas soif, mais j : ai 
 faim. Ainsi, a votre retour, apportez-moi un ou deux gateaux. Ou 
 pouvons-nous en acheter? Vous pouvez en trouver chez le mar- 
 chand de gateaux. Demeure-t-il au coin? Non, il demeure au 
 milieu de la rue. De quel cote ? De ce cote-ci. N'avez-vous jamais 
 rien achete chez lui? Non, je n'achete jamais de gateaux. Pour- 
 quoi done ? Ne les aimez-vous pas? Si fait, je les aime beaucoup, 
 au contraire, mais je n'ai pas souvent faim avant diner. Avant de 
 vous en aller, pretez-moi votre canif. Pour faire quoi? (ou mieux : 
 pourquoi faire ?) Pour me couper les ongles. Ne vous coupez-vous 
 pas les ongles avec des ciseaux? Non, je ne peux pas me couper 
 les ongles avec des ciseaux. N'avez-vous pas de janif? Si fait, 
 j ? en ai un; le voici; mais il ne coupe pas assez, pour me couper les 
 ongles. 
 
 Do you cut your hair ? (les cheveux.) I do cut my hair. Doey 
 your friend, cut his hair ? He cuts his nails, but not his hair. Why 
 does that man pull out his hair? Is he crazy? Yes, he is. Why 
 does not your cousin brush his coat ? He does not brush it, Vecauso 
 
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 221 
 
 he is afraid of soiling his fingers. What does my neighboi tell 
 you? He tells me that (que) you wish to buy his horse; but I know 
 that (qiie) he is mistaken, because you have no money to buy it. 
 What do they (o?i) say at the market? They say that (que) the 
 enemy is beaten. Do you believe that? I believe it, because 
 every one says so. Why have you bought that book? I have 
 bought it, because I want it to learn French, and because every ono 
 speaks of it, and praises it. Are your friends going away ? They 
 are. When are they going away? They are going away to-mor- 
 row. When are you going away? We are going away to-day. 
 Am I going away? You are going away, if you like, (si vous vou- 
 Icz.) What do our neighbors say ? They are going away without 
 
 , r anything. How do you like this wine ? I do not like it. 
 What is the matter with you? I feel sleepy. Does your friend 
 feel sleepy? He does not feel sleepy, but he is cold. Why does 
 he not warm himself? He has no wood to make a fire. Why does 
 he not buy some wood ? He has no money to buy any. Will you 
 lend him some? If he has none I will lend him some. Are you 
 thirsty? I am not thirsty, but very hungry, (grand'faim.) Is your 
 .servant sleepy? He is sleepy. Is he hungry? He is hungry. 
 Why does he not eat? Because he has nothing to eat. Are youi 
 children hungry? They are hungry, but they have nothing to eat. 
 Have they anything to drink? They have nothing to drink.- 
 Why do you not eat? I do not eat when (quand) I am not hungry. 
 Why does the Russian not drink ? He does not drink when he 
 is not thirsty. Did your brother eat anything yesterday evening? 
 He ale a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a piece of bread. 
 Did he not drink ? He also drank. What did he drink ? He 
 drank a glass of wine and water, and some syrup and water. 
 
 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON, 44th. Quarantc-quatriemc Lccon, 44m* 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 PERFECT OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. Parfait des Vcrbes Rsjle chit 
 
 Have you cut yourself? 
 
 I have cut myself. 
 
 Have I cut myself? 
 
 You have cut yourself. 
 
 You have not cut yourself. 
 
 Hast thou cut thyself? 
 
 I have not cut myself. 
 
 Has your brother cut himself ? 
 
 Vous etes- vous coupe ? ($ 1802.) 
 
 Je me suis coupe. 
 
 Me suis-je coupe ? 
 
 Vous vous etes coupe. 
 
 Vous ne vous etes pas coupo, 
 
 T'es-tu coupe ? 
 
 Je ne me suis pas coupe. 
 
 Votre frere s'est-il coupe I 
 
222 
 
 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (I.) 
 
 He has cut himself. 
 
 Have we cut ourselves ? ($ 180 2.) 
 
 We have not cut ourselves. 
 
 Have these men cut themselves? 
 
 They have not cut themselves. 
 
 To walk, take a walk, a stroll. 
 
 To go a walking, to stroll. 
 
 To take an airing in a carriage. 
 
 The coach. A new coach. 
 
 To take a ride. 
 
 Do you take a walk ? 
 
 I do take a walk. 
 
 Does he take a walk ? He docs. 
 
 We take a walk. 
 
 Thou \vislicst to take an airing. 
 
 They wish to take a ride. 
 
 To walk a ckild. 
 
 Do you take your children a walk- 
 ing ? 
 
 I take them a walking every morn- 
 ing. 
 
 To go to led, he down. Go to bed. 
 btdt 
 
 Go to bed. Gel in bed, (impt ra.) 
 
 To get up, to rise. Get up, rise. 
 
 Do you rise early ? 
 
 t rise at sunrise. 
 
 I go to bed at sunset. 
 
 The (or at) sunrise. 
 
 The (or at) sunset. 
 
 Gentlemen, at what time did you go 
 
 to bed ? 
 
 At three o'clock in the morning. 
 At what o'clock did he go to bed 
 
 yesterday ? 
 He went to bed late. 
 
 II s'est coupe. 
 
 Nous sommes-nous coupes ? 
 
 Nous ne nous sommes pas coup5a 
 
 Ces hommes se sont-ils coupes? 
 
 II ne se sont pas coupes. 
 
 t Me, te, se, nous, vous, promener 
 
 t Aller me, te, &c., promener. 
 
 t Se promener en carrosse. 
 
 Le carrosse. Un carrosse ncuf. 
 
 t Se promener a cheval. 
 I Vous promenez-vous ? 
 , t Je me promene. ( 1444.) 
 I t Se promene-t-il ? II se prorjenc, 
 
 Nous nous promenons. 
 
 Tu veux te promener rn carrosse. 
 
 Us veulent se promener a cheval. 
 
 Promener un enfant. 
 
 Promencz-vous vos enfants ? 
 
 Je les promOne tous les matins?. 
 
 t Se coucher, 1. Couchez-vous 
 
 t Aller sc coucher, se mcttre au lit. 
 t Allez-vous couclicr. J\lettez~vout 
 
 au lit. 
 
 t Se lever, 1. Lcvez-vous. 
 
 Vous levez-vous de bonne heure ? 
 Je me leve au lever du soleil. 
 Je me couche au coucher du soleil. 
 Le (ou au) lever du soleil. 
 Le (ou au) coucher du soleil. 
 Messieurs, a quelle heure vous etes- 
 
 vous couches ? ($ 180 2.) 
 A trois heures du matin. 
 A quelle heure s'est-il couche hier J 
 
 II s'est couche tard. 
 
 QUAJlANTE-QUATRlfcME TlI^ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Je n'ai pas vu George, ce matin, ou est-il? II est alle chez le 
 dentiste. Pourquoi'? A-t-il mal aux dents? Oui, il Pa eu toute la 
 nuitj (all night.) Va-t-il se faire arracher une dent? (feminin.) Oui, 
 ei le dentiste veut Parracher. N 7 arrache-t-il pas toujours les dents 
 quand on le veut ? NonJje vous assure. Pourquoi done ? Parco 
 que quelque fois ce n'esr pas neccssaire. Avez-vous jamais eu une 
 dent arrackee ? Non, jamais encore. Que vous a dit le jardinier ? 
 II m ? a dit qivon a arrache un de ses petits arbres. En verite ! Qui 
 pent Pavoir arrache ? II n'.en salt rien. J'ai oublie de vous rendre 
 
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 223 
 
 B canif, mais le voici, tenez, prenez-le. IM'erci. C'est moi qui 
 
 vous remercie. Qu r avez-vons au doigt'* Je me suis coupe. Avec 
 
 quoi ? Avec im des couteaux du cuisinier Qu'avez-vous mis des- 
 
 ' Rieu encore. N'allez-vous riea y mettre ? Pardonnez-moi. 
 
 Cn peu d'cau dc Cologne et im morceau de lingc. 
 
 Have you cut your hair ? I have not cut it (myself), but I have had 
 
 it cut, (me Ics suis fait coupcr.} What has this child done? He haa 
 
 cut his foot. Why did they give him a knife 1 They gave him one 
 
 in (pour} cut his nails ; dud he has cut his finger and his foot. Do 
 
 you go to bed early? I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep when I 
 
 lo bed early. At what o'clock viid you go to bed yesterday? 
 
 1 went to bed at a quarter past eleven. At what o'clock 
 
 hildren go to bed? They go to bed at sunset. Do they 
 
 y ? They rise at sunrise. At what o'clock aid you rise 
 
 ' rose late, because I went to bed late yesterday 
 
 (tiicr an soir.) 
 
 your son : . for he never goes to bed 
 
 What does he do when hr /lie studies, and then 
 
 ! 'oes he not go out before he breakfasts? No, he 
 
 ; efore he goes out. What does he do after 
 
 soon ii- he has breakfasted he comes to my house, 
 
 . I)idst thou rise this morning as early as I ? I 
 
 ..an you, for I rose before sunrise. Do you often go a 
 
 \\ ai : a walking when I have nothing to do at home. Do 
 
 wish to take a walk ? I cannot take a walk, for I have too 
 
 much to do. Has your brother taken a ride? He has taken an 
 
 airi; B. Do your children often go a walking ? They 
 
 y morning, after breakfast. Do you take a walk 
 
 ; dinner I drink tea, and then I take a walk. 
 
 VOCABULAIEE. 2de Section. 
 
 To rejoice at tomtthing. 
 
 [ rejoice at your happiness. 
 At what does your uncle rejoice ? 
 I have rejoiced. 
 They have rejoiced. 
 You have made a mistake. 
 We have made a mistake. 
 ' somebody. 
 
 t Se rejouir 2 de quelque chose. 
 
 Je me rejouis de votre bonheur. 
 
 De quoi votre oncle se rejouit-il ? 
 
 Je me suis rejoui. 
 
 Us se sont rejouis. 
 
 t Vous vous etes trompe. 
 
 t Nous nous sommes trompe's. 
 
 t Faire du mal a quelqu 1 u*i. 
 
 The evil, the pain, the harm. \ Le mal. 
 Have you hurt that man ? t Avez-vous fait du mal a cot 
 
 homme ? 
 
 [ have hurt that man. 
 
 'lid you hurt that man ? 
 
 t J'ai fait du mal a cet hommo. 
 * Pourquoi avez-vouc fait du mal 
 cet homme ? 
 
224 
 
 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. '2.) 
 
 *I hate net hurt him. 
 Does thai hurt you ? 
 That hurts me. 
 To do good to anybody. 
 Have I ever done you any harm ? 
 No ; on the contrary, you have done 
 
 mo good. 
 f have never done harm to any one. 
 
 his 
 
 t .Te ne lui ai pas fait dc mal. 
 
 t Cela vous fait-il du mal ? 
 
 t Cela me fait du mal. 
 
 t Faire du bie?i d quelqu tin. 
 
 t Vous ai-je jamais fait du mal ? 
 
 t Non ; vous m'avcz an contrain 
 
 fait du bien. 
 t Jo n'ai jamais fait de mal a per 
 
 sonne. 
 
 t Vous ai-je fait mal ? 
 t Vous ne m'avez pas fai mat 
 
 :;ie fait du bien. 
 Faire de. 
 Le domestique que fait-il & 
 
 bulai ? 
 
 t II balaie le plancher avec. 
 t Quo veut-il faire de ce bois ? 
 
 II n'cn veut rien faire. 
 
 I hurt you ? 
 You have not hurt me. 
 That does me good. 
 To do with, to dispose of. 
 What does the servant do with 
 
 broom ? 
 
 He sweeps the floor with it. 
 What does he wish to make of this 
 
 wood? 
 He does not wish to make anything 
 
 of it. 
 
 Ols. 101. When a proposition has no definite subject, the English, in 
 order to avoid the pronouns they, pcojtlc, &c., use the verb in the p;i 
 voice, and say: 1 was told, instead of, Tiny told me; Ife is fluttered, 
 instead of, They flatter him ; Jl ?/</> ^irtn to wir, instrad of, They gave it to 
 me. This is always cxprc.^ MS of the indefinite pronoun 
 
 on, one. Ex. 
 
 He is Haltered, but ho is not beloved. | On le flatt-, mnis on ne 1'aimc pas 
 i am told that he is arrived. | On me dit qu'il est arrive. 
 
 QUARAKTE-QUATJU&MK Tllf.MK. 2do SeC. 
 
 Qui est cet enfant que vous louez tant? C 7 est Albart, le plus jeune 
 liis de notre epicier. Ne le connaissez-vous pas? Non ; je ne le 
 connais pas. Ne Pavez-vous jamais vu dans le magasin de Fepicier 'i 
 C'est possible. Mais pourquoi Pavez vous tant loue? On Fa loue 
 parce qu'il a bien etudie. Mais ii n ; a fait que son devoir. Faut-ii 
 le louer pour cela ? Sans doute. Je ne croyais pas cel 
 Quand on le lou?, il etudie mieux. C'est different. 
 cet autre enfant a-t-ii ete puni ? Pourquoi punit-on les enfants gem* 
 ralement? Parce c^u'ils sont mechants et paresseux. C'est pou 
 cela merne qu'or a puni cet autre. Et celui-ci, Pa-t-on recom- 
 pense ? On Fa recompense parce qu'il a bien travaille. Que faut-i 1 
 faire pour ne pas etre meprise ? II faut etre studieux, diligent, et sage. 
 Ah ! Louis, v:ms vous etes fait couper les cheveux, vous avez mis 
 un habit neuf, un joli gilet de satin noir, vous avez Pair d'un autre 
 garcon. Je vous ai a peine connu. Que pensez-vous de mon habi 
 ueuf 7 .^j le iro^ve superbe. 
 
FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) i2l2.J 
 
 What have you done with your money? I have bought a book 
 
 with it. What has the joiner done with his wood? He has made 
 
 a bench of it. What has the tailor done with the cloth which you 
 
 gave him - made clothes of it for (pour) your children, and 
 
 mine. I 1 .an hurt you? No, Sir 7 he has not hurt me. 
 
 What must one do in order to be loved? One must do good to 
 
 that have do:ie us harm. Have we ever done you harm? 
 
 on the contrary done us good. Do you do harm to any 
 
 ' I do ri" harm. Why have you hurt these children? 
 
 J have not hurt them. Have I hurt you? You have not hurt me, 
 
 but your boys have, (m j cn ontfcit.) What have they done to you? 
 
 They ha\ me. Is it (cst-cc) your brother who has hurt my 
 
 - not (cc n'cst pas) my brother, for he has never 
 
 hurt any one. 
 
 Have veil drunk that wine? I have drunk it. How did you like 
 
 it? 1 liked it very well. Has it done you good? It has done me 
 
 good. I! art yourself? I have not hurt myself. Who has 
 
 hurt hin: [y brother has hurt himself, for he has cut his 
 
 still ill, (inalade?) He is better, (mieux.) I rejoice 
 
 to hear that he is no longer ill, for I love him. Why does your 
 
 in pull out his hair? Because lie cannot pay what he owes. 
 
 Did your father rejoice to see you? He did rejoice to see me. 
 
 What did you rejoice at? I rejoiced at seeing my good friends.- 
 
 \V1:; -iir uncle delighted with, (s'cst il rcjoui?) He was 
 
 ^hted with the horse which you have sent him. What were 
 
 ; children delighted with? They were delighted with the fine 
 
 lies which I have had made for them, (que je Icur ai fait fair c.} 
 
 Voc \ omc Section. 
 
 kni; M him to cut his 
 
 tread, and he cut his finger. 
 
 er somi one. 
 
 To flat I 
 
 1 flatter one's self. 
 
 He flatters himself that he knows 
 French. 
 
 NotllinS lut. 
 
 He has nothing but enemies. 
 To become. 
 
 (DeveJiir does not take de after it.) 
 He has turned a soldier. 
 Have you turned a merchant ? 
 
 On lui a donne un couieau pour cou- 
 per son pain, et il s'est coupe Ic 
 doigt. 
 
 Flatter 1 quelqifun. 
 
 Se flatter, (takes de before the infini- 
 tive.) 
 
 t II se ilatte de savoir le Ffan^aifl. 
 
 Ne . . . que. 
 
 II n'a que des ennemis. 
 
 Devenir,* 2, p. passe* devenu e , (cou 
 
 jugue comme Venir. (25 1 , 34 ! .) 
 t II s'est fait soldat. 
 t Vous etes-vous fait marchaml \ 
 
 I have turned (become) a lawyer. I t Je me suis fait avocat. 
 
 f t Votre frcre nu'est-t7 dcvcnu ? 
 What ha> become of your brother ? \ f ^^ ^^ wtrej - rirc f 
 
226 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 What has become of him ? 
 
 I do not know what has become of 
 
 him. 
 To enlist, to enroll. 
 
 < t II s est enrole. 
 
 He has enlisted. < . T1 , 
 
 C t II s e 
 
 t Qu'est-/Z cloveim ? 
 
 t Je ne sals pas ce qu'tY csl devenu 
 
 S'enroler, 1, se faire soldat. 
 
 I cannot pay you, for I have no 
 
 money. 
 He cannot give you arjy bread, for 
 
 he has none. 
 To believe some one. 
 Do you believe that man ? 
 [ do not believe him. 
 
 I s'est fait soldat. 
 Je ne puis vous payer, car je n'ai 
 
 pas d'argent. 
 II ne peut pas vous donner do pnin. 
 
 car il n'en a pas. 
 Croire* 4 quelqu'un. 
 Croyez-vous cet homme ? 
 Je ne le crois pas. 
 
 Ohs. 102. The verb croire governs the accusative ; we s:iy, however ; 
 To believe in God. I Croire en Dieu. 
 
 I believe in God. I Je crois en Dicu. 
 
 Jlcntir,* 2; past part. mc?iti, prea. 
 
 part, mciitdut. J\Y w ri f < z pas. 
 Je mens, tu mi?ns, il mcnt. 
 Le mentcur. 
 
 To utter a falsehood, to lie. ' 
 
 Do not lie, (impera.) 
 I lie, thou liest, he lies. 
 The story-teller, the liar. 
 
 QuARANTE-QUATinfcME TiilbiE. 3me Sec. 
 
 PmnioMtv-Yous souvent vos enfants? Je les promene tous le,i 
 matins et tous les soirs, quand le temps le permet. C-'est-a-dire, 
 qnaml il fait beau temps? Non; mais quaud il ne fait pas hop 
 mauvais. Les menez-vous promener quand le temps est convert ou 
 humide? Sans doute. Et quand il pleut? Oui, s ? il ne pleut pas 
 braucoup. Qn and le tonnerre gronde? Oui, meme quand le ton- 
 ! gronde, s'il m fait pas de pluie. Allez-vous les mener proine- 
 ner ce soir? Non, il fait trop de pluie et de vent. N'enlendez-voua 
 pas le bruit du vent ? Si fait, je Fentends. Et le bruit de la pluie 
 bur la maison ? Oui, je Fentends aussi. On ne peut pas promener 
 avec plaisir pendant un orage comme celui-la. Vous avez raison, 
 je pehse comme vous. Croyez-vous ce petit garcon avec les che- 
 veux noirs ? Oui, c'est un bon petit garcon, mais cet autre-la est un 
 pram! menteur. Sait-il quand il ment? En vthite, je crois que non. 
 Pourquoi n'entrez- vous pas? Avez-vous peur d'etre mordu par 
 notre petit chien blanc? Mord-il aussi bien qiril aboie * II aboie 
 beaucoup, mais il ne mord pas. 
 
 What has become of your friend ? He has become a lawyer. 
 What has become of your cousin ? He has enlisted. Has your 
 neighbor enlisted? He has not enlisted. What has become of 
 him ? He has turned a merchant. What has become of his children '< 
 His children have become men. What has become of your son? 
 He has become a great man. Has he become learned ? He haa 
 
FORTY-FIFTH L JB S S N. (1.) 227 
 
 In-ecine learned. What has become of my book? I do not know 
 what has become of it. Have you torn ill I have not torn it. - 
 YVhat has become of our friend's son ? I do not know whai has 
 become of him. Is he in England or Italy? I cannot tell you. I 
 believe his father does not know what has become of him. Whom 
 did he go travelling with? He went with his cousin. Do they 
 know what has become of the latter? Oh! yes; he has returned, 
 and he is studying to become a doctor. It is extraordinary. Wliv 
 Joes this man rejoice so much? (tant ?) Because he flatters himself 
 ae lias good friends. Is he not right in rejoicing? He is wrong, for 
 ne has nothing but enemies. Is he not loved ? He is flattered, but 
 ;}t beloved. Do you flatter yourself that you know French? 
 [ do flatter myself that I know it; for I can speak, read, and write 
 it. I Ins the physician done any harm to your child? He has cut 
 his linger, (lid a coupe Ic doigtj) but he has not done him any harm, 
 so (ct) you are mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any 
 Why do you listen to that man? I listen to him, but I do 
 not believe him ; for I know that he is a story-teller. How do you 
 v-toller ? He does not believe in God ; and nil 
 ilo not believe in God are story-tellers. 
 
 V-F1FTI! IJ-'.SSOX, 45th. Qiiarante-cinquiemc Lcr.on, 4t>me. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 I.M1TJISONAL VERBS. Verbes Unipenonnds. 
 
 . 42 3 ,) some idiomatical expressions with faire, 
 
 rhich belong to the impersonal verbs. These verbs, having no deter 
 innate subject, are conjugated only in the third person, by means of the 
 
 , it. i;.\. 
 
 Pleuvoir,* 3. i\p\eut,past part. plu. 
 
 To rain, it rains. 
 
 o\v, it snows. 
 
 To hail, it hails. 
 
 Neiger, 1. il neige. 
 Greler, 1. il grele. 
 
 The substantives belonging to these three verbs are feminine, as will be 
 when we come to treat of feminine nouns. 
 
 :iten. 
 
 Does it lighten ? It does. 
 
 The Iihfjii7i?. Il lightens. 
 
 It does not lighten. 
 [t lightens much. 
 
 it r;iii: > It rains very liard. 
 
 /. snow ? It snows hard. 
 
 t Faire des eclairs, 
 t Fait-il des eclairs ? II en fait 
 L 1 eclair. t II fait des Eclairs, 
 
 t II ne fait pas d'eclairs. (Obs. 27.) 
 t II fait beaucoup d'eclairs. 
 t Pleut-il ? 11 pleut d verse. 
 t Neige-t-il ? II ncigc/?rf, (beau- 
 coup.) 
 
228 
 
 FORTY-FIFTH LESSON, (1.) 
 
 It hails much. 
 
 The hail. The snow. 
 
 The sun does not ishine. 
 
 The sun is in my eyes. 
 
 To thunder, it thunders. 
 
 To shine, to glitter, shining, thined. 
 
 The shutters. It hails, shut the 
 
 shutters quick. 
 Is the walking 'rood ? 
 It i good (bad) walking. 
 This country. In that country 
 
 He has made many friends in tha,t 
 
 country. 
 
 Of which, of vJiom, whosr. 
 \ see the man of whom you Bj 
 I have bought the horse of which you 
 
 spoke to me. 
 I see the man whose brother lias 
 
 killed my dog. 
 I sec the man whose dog you have 
 
 killed 
 Do you see the rhild whose father set 
 
 out yesterday ? 
 Whom have you ; 
 I have Men the mi rabani 
 
 wan-house yon h;ive taken. 
 I have spokrii to the ma:i 
 warehouse has hern burnt. 
 
 II fait beaucoup de greie. 
 
 La grtle. La ncige. (noms fen. Ji nn 
 
 t II ne fait point de solt-ii. 
 
 * Le soleil me donne dans la vue. 
 
 Tonner, 1, il tonne. 
 
 Luire,* 4, luisant, lui, (p. | 
 
 Lcs volets. 11 grOle, ferincz vite le> 
 
 volets. 
 
 t Fait-il bon marcher ? 
 t 11 fait bon (mauvais) marcher. 
 Ce pays-ci. Dans ce pays-Hi, 
 
 t II s'est fait beaucoup d'amis dara 
 
 < e pays-la. 
 
 A>///, proaom I elatif. $8f>^ 
 
 Je vois 1'honnr.e dont vous parlez. 
 
 !Il'iiVC2 
 
 Je vois rhomme, dont li; frcre a tu 
 
 nion . 
 Je vois riion. 'us avcz tu3 
 
 le chini. 
 Voyez-vous lYniant (lout le j 
 
 parti hirr ? 
 Qui ;: , 11 ? 
 
 J'ai vu le marcha: 
 
 pris le manasin. 
 J'ai parl' a rhomme dont le it 
 
 a etc Drfil i'. 
 
 QUAI Ire Sec. 
 
 Quel immvais temps il fait aiijoiird ? hiii! II plcnt 11 vorso , il fait 
 des eclairs, le tonncrre grotide. . . .Ne grcle-t-il pasaussi? Je lo 
 croyais il y a un moment, (a minute ago.) Ne vaut-il pas mieux 
 fm re for merles volets? (have. . . .shut?) Je crois qu'il vant mieux 
 les faire fermer. Car s'il grele encore, la grele peut casser nos car- 
 rcaux dc litre, (panes of glass.) Dites a Salomon de venir fermer 
 les volets. Ou est Salomon? Appelez-le, si vous ne pouvez pag 
 le trouver. Qu 7 est-ce que c : est que ce bruit? N ; est-ce pas la grele 
 qui vienfrcontre les vitres? Salomon, fermez vite ces volets. N ? y 
 a-t-il pas un carreau de casse? (30 l , Obs. 71.) Non ; M., je n ; en 
 vois pas de casse. Voici un volet de ferme. Fermez ^ r ite 1'antro, 
 car je crains pour nos carreaux. 
 
 Have you seen the gentleman from whom I have received a pro 
 sent? I have not. Have you seen the fine gun of which I spoke 
 to you? I have. Has your uncle seen the books of wnich you 
 BDoke to him ? He has. Hast thou seen the man whose children 
 
TOHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 229 
 
 have been punished'? I have not seen him. To whom have you 
 ? I have been speaking to the nmn 
 
 whose brother has killed my fine doir. Have you seen the little 'uoy 
 whose father has become (s'ctt fait) a lawyer'? I have seen him, 
 Whom havr n at the ball .' 1 saw the farmer whose horsea 
 
 you bought (88), and the men whose coach you had a mind to 
 AYlium . 1 see the man whose servant haa 
 
 broken my lo I my two panes of ulass. Have ycu 
 
 heard the Befriend] h money? I have 
 
 not. Whom have y.i heard? I ha\- French captain 
 
 thou brushed the coat of which I spcke to thee? I have 
 
 not yet brushed it. Ha 1 . wired the money which you have 
 
 Have I the brown paper of which I have 
 
 nir brother the Italian books of which 
 
 he 1: : chants whose 
 
 ' them. Have yoi/ 
 
 16 son has studied German'? I have. 
 
 Hast thou fc-r >i men wi. s have been burnt' 
 
 1 have. Hav-- ! the books which we have lent you? Wr 
 
 .-.\Vhat them? (e?i?) We say that they air* 
 
 .Do you ; r ive anything to tho children who are idle? \Vo 
 
 them no:'. ! it snow yesterday ? Yes, it did hail, lighten, 
 
 evening and all night. I am very sorry for it. Why r 
 
 we are going to have bad walking for a few days. AI-J 
 
 we : 
 
 ABULAIRK. -de Section. 
 
 I (with antecedents.) elul ^ OnL \ (ont dcs antecedent*.-. 
 . J v Ceux dont. > 
 
 S J'ai ce dont j'ai besoin. 
 
 II a ce dont il a besoin. 
 
 Avez-vous le livre dont voua avi 
 
 :itecedent.) 
 That of which. 
 Those 01' which. 
 
 I have that of which I have need. 
 I have wha/ I want. 
 He has wha,, he wants. 
 Have you the book of which you have 
 
 need ? 
 
 I have that of v-Jiich I have need. 
 Has the joiner the nails of which he 
 
 has need ? 
 
 He has those of which he has need. 
 Which men do you see ? 
 I see those of whom you spoke. 
 
 Cc dont, (n'a point d'anlecedeht ) 
 
 besoin ? 
 
 J'ai celui dont j'ai besoin. 
 Le menuisier a-t-il les clous dont il q 
 
 besoin ? 
 
 II a ceux dont il a besoin. 
 Quels hommes voyez-vous ? 
 Je vois ceux dont vous avez parlo. 
 
 Obs. 103. The relative, dont, of which, &c., being an indirect, not t 
 iirect object, (or regime,) has no influence on the past participle. (32 1 
 ->. 76.) 
 
ii30 
 
 FORTY-FIFTH LESSON (2.) 
 
 Do you see the pupils of whom I have 
 spoken to you ? I do. 
 
 To whom, (relative), to which. 
 
 I see the children to whom you have 
 given some cakes. 
 
 To which pupils do you speak ? 
 
 f speak to those to whom you have 
 applied. 
 
 Which dogs do you feed ? 
 
 Those to which you gave nothing. 
 
 Ols. 104. -1 qui t for persons only. 
 
 To apply to ^rvl'J ?<>. 
 
 Apply to the minister. 
 
 I did, (or, I applied to him.) 
 
 To meet with. 
 
 I have met with the men to whom 
 
 you have applied. 
 Of which men do you sprak ? 
 I speak of those whose childv. 
 
 been studious and obedient. 
 * >l>rdicnt, iisi>!rdicnt. 
 Kind. '.lit. Unkind. 
 
 .Vj (hut. 
 
 not pay \ 
 1 am ill, MI 
 
 Voyez-vous les eleves dont je voui 
 
 ai parle I Je lea voia. 
 
 A qui, (relatif.) aux qucls, (mas. plur.) 
 Je vois les enfants a qui vous avei 
 
 donnd des gateaux. 
 A quels eleves parlez-vous ? ($ 79.> 
 Je parle a ceux auxquels (a qui) YOU* 
 
 vous etes adresse. 
 
 A quels chiens donnez-vous a man- 
 - ger ? 
 A ceux auxquels vous n'avcz rion 
 
 donne*. 
 
 Auxquels, for persons and things. 
 
 S'ar/rcsser, 1, d . . Adrcssez-vousd. . 
 Adressez-vous au ministre. 
 
 suis adresse a iui. ($ 64.) 
 mtrer, 1, (transitif.) 
 J 'ai rencontre les homines a qui (aux- 
 quels) vous vous etes adress<5. 
 He qucls hoinnn :s parlez-vous ? 
 Je parle de ceux dont les enfants out 
 Milieux ct obi'issa'.its. 
 
 >!lt. 
 
 Complaisant. Desobligeant. 
 
 De sorte que, (conjunction.) 
 
 J'ai perdu mon argent, de sorte quo 
 
 je ne puis vous i 
 Je suis m.'ilndc, de sorte que je nc 
 
 puis sortir. 
 QUAI Sec. 
 
 Vous teue/ votre chapeau ! Mettez-lej (put it on.) Non. : 
 Alors, dunne/.-le-inoi, je vais le meltre sur le porlc-chapcau, (hat- 
 htand.) Vous etes bien complaisant. Le voila sur un fanteuil. 
 bien, que ponsox-vous du tableau dont nous avons parle hicr matin, 
 et (jtte vous avez sans doute vu hier apres-midi? (doubtless?') Jo 
 suis lache do T ous dire que je ne Tai pas encore vu. Est-il possible 1 
 Hier ? j'ai ete tres-occupe. de sorte que je n'ai pas pu le voir. Ditea 
 que vous n'avcz pas voulu le voir. Non, vous vous trompez: voua 
 avez tort do croire cela. Car, je vous assure que j'ai grande envie 
 de le voir. fites-vous encore tres-occupe ? Oui, et tres-presse, (in a 
 great hurry.) parce que mon bailment va partir (19 2 , N. 1) dans un 
 jour ou deux. Cependant, je veux essayer de voir le tableau dont 
 nous avons parle. Comme vous etes presse^ je vais m'en ailer 
 A.dieu ; au plaisir. J'ai 1'honneur de vous saluer. 
 
 Have ) r ou at last learned French' 2 I was ill, so that I coud no! 
 
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. \J.) 231 
 
 learn it. Ha.* your brother learned it ? He has not learned it, be- 
 cause he has not yet been able to find a good mastei. Do you go 
 to the ball this evening? I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to it 
 Did you understand that German ? I do not know German, su 
 that I could not understand him. Have you bought the horse of 
 which you spoke to me ? I have no money, so that I could not buy 
 it. Have your children what they want? They have what they 
 want. Of which man do you speak? I speak of the one whoso 
 brother 1: soldier. Of which children have }ou spoken? 
 
 1 have spoken of those whose parents are learned. Which new 
 ^ook liave you read ? I have read that of which I spoke to you 
 .M-day. Which paper has your cousin? He has that of which 
 lie i. Which fishes has he eaten? He has eaten those 
 
 whir, not like. 
 
 i books are you in want? I am in want of those of 
 
 which you have spoken tome. Have you need of those which I am 
 
 reading? I have not. Do you see the children to whom I have 
 
 I do not see those to whom you have given cake*, 
 
 but ; :u you have punished. To whom have you given any 
 
 oney ! 1 have niven some to those who have been skilful. 
 
 . Inch children must one give presents? One must give some to 
 
 o are good and obedient. To whom do you give to eat 
 
 and to drink? To those who are hungry and thirsty. Have the 
 
 >Mied to that man? They have refused (35 1 ) to 
 
 him; ail those to whom he applied have refused to hear 
 
 him. With whom have you met this morning? I have met with 
 
 the : \horn I am esteemed. Have you Driven any cakes to 
 
 your pup.i!.- ' They I ave not studied well, so that I have given them 
 
 : i LESSON, 4Sth. Quarante-sixicmc Lcron, 46r7u. 
 
 VOCABULAIBE. Ire Section. 
 
 OF TI1H FIRST FUTURE. Du Futiir, ou FuUr Simph'. 
 $ 14G) and study it carefully. Among the exceptions (of which \vu 
 m\\ soon treat) are the auxiliaries, and the iu'lowing : 
 
 To have. I shall or will have. I Avoir,* 3. J'aurai, ras, ra, ronu, 
 
 rez, rout. 
 
 I shall or will be. j 6tre,* 4. Jc serai. 
 
 I shall or will go. ! Aller,* 1. J'irai. ) ^ 
 To send. I shall or will scnu. ; Envoyer,* 1. J'envcrrai.) ,/,' 
 
 Shall or will lie have money? ara-t-iJ dc 1'argcnt ? 
 
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 He will have some. He will not. 
 Shall you soon have done writing ? 
 I shall (soon have done). 
 He will soon have done his task. 
 Shall we have the bird ? No, but 
 they shall have it. 
 
 11 en aura. II n'cn aura pas. 
 t Aurez-vous bientot fmi d'e'crire \ 
 J'aurai bientot fini. ($ 170.) 
 II aura bientot fini son devoir. 
 Aurons-nous I'oiscan ? Non, mail 
 ils 1'auront. 
 
 QUAIIAXTE-SIXIEME TnihiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Comment formez-vous le futur des verbes en Franc ais 1 Faut-ii 
 vous repondre en Franc, ais? Sans doute. Le puis-je ? Essayez, 
 Esf.-ce que je sais tous les mots necessaires pour cela ? Je crois que 
 oui. Ji vais essayer. Attende/. Savez-vous le Franc ais de : final? 
 Je ne suis pas sur du (about the) Francais do: final. Est-ce le 
 meme que F Anglais ? Oui, c'est le meme. Vous savez traduire: 
 changing! n'est-ce pas? C'est: changeant. C esl cela. Com- 
 mencez. Je vais repeter la question. Je pense que : repeter est to 
 repeat, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, c'est cela meme. Comment forme/- 
 vous le futur des verbes Francais * En changeant (R. 1 ), IV final do 
 la Ire et 2de conjugaison, le oir, de la 4me ; non ; je me trompe, jo 
 veux dire : de la 3me et le re de la 4me 5 en rat. C'est cela. Pou- 
 vez-vous me dire le futur de: former? .Oui, c'est: formerai. Quel 
 f-t colui do : devoir? C'est dcvoirai. Non, vous vous trompe/. Ici, 
 il faut ch;i:LM'i- oir r:i r>ii : alors c'est: dcvrai. Tres-bien. (Juand 
 vous avez la premiere personne, pouvez-vous former les autros ? Oui : 
 car If i'utur Unit toujours en: rai, ras, ra, rons, rez, rout. 
 
 Shall you have any books? I shall have some. Who will give 
 you any? My uncle will give me some. When will your cu 
 have money? He will have some next month. How much money 
 hhall you have? I shall have thirty-five francs. Who^will have 
 good friends 2 The English will have some. Will your father be 
 at home this evening '! He will be at home. Will you be there V 
 1 shall also be there. Will your uncle go out to-day? He will go 
 out, if it is fine weather. Shall you go out ? I shall go out, if it 
 does not rain. Will you love my son? I shall love him, if he 5a 
 good. Will you pay your shoemaker? I shall pay him, if 1 
 receive my money. Will you love my children ? If they are good 
 and assiduous, I shall love them; but if they are I lie and naughty, 
 I shall despise and punish them. Am I right in speaking thus'? 
 You are not wrong. Is your friend still writing? He is still 
 writing. Have you not done speaking ? I shall soon have done. 
 Have our friends done reading? They will soon have done. Whor 
 will you send me the money which you owe me ? I shall send i< 
 to you soon. Will your brothers send me the books which I have 
 lent them ? They will send them to you. When will they scud 
 them to me ? They will send them to you next month. 
 
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 233 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 
 
 To hold, keep. I shall or will hold. 
 To come. I shall or will come. 
 
 To sit down. I shall or will sit 
 
 down. 
 
 To be necessary. It will ben*v 
 To pro- I j*hall provide. 
 
 To be able. I will be able. 
 
 To foresoe. I shall or will fore- 
 
 see. 
 
 Tc know. I shall or will know. 
 
 To suspend. I shall suspend. 
 To be worth. I will be worth. 
 
 see. I shall or will see. 
 
 To be willing. I shall be willing, 
 To do. I shall or will do. 
 
 When shall you do your exercises ? 
 I will do them soon, (ere long.) 
 My brother will do his exercises to- 
 morrow. 
 
 Monday. Xrxt Tn< 
 
 Last Thu 
 month. 
 
 This month. That age, century, 
 will your son go to the bridge ? 
 lie will go next Tuesday. 
 Shall you go anywhere ? 
 
 Will he send UK? the book ? 
 He will send it you if he !: 
 
 with 
 Shall you be at home this evening ? 
 
 I sdiall be there. 
 
 1 your father be at home f 
 II<> will be there. 
 
 Will your cousins be Uiere ? They 
 will. 
 
 2dc Section. 
 Tenir,* 2. 
 Venir,* 2. 
 S'asseoir,* 3. 
 
 Falloir,* 3. 
 Pourvoir,* 3. 
 Pouvoir,* 3. 
 Pievoir,* 3. 
 
 Je tiendrai.. 
 Je viendrai. 
 Je m'asseierai or 
 
 Je m'assiorai. 
 II faudra. 
 Je pourvoirai. 
 Je pourrai. 
 Je prevoirai. 
 
 Savoir, 3. Je saurai. 
 
 Surseoir,* 3. Je surseoira:. 
 Valoir,* 3. Je vaudrai. 
 
 Voir,* 3. Je verrai. 
 
 Vouloir,* 3. Je voudrai. 
 
 Faire,* 4. Je ferai. 
 
 Quand ferez-vous vos themes ? 
 Je les ferai bicntot. 
 Mon frere fera ses themes demain. 
 
 Lundi prochain. Mardi prochain 
 
 Mercredi passe. Jeudi dernier. 
 
 t Le mois prochain. 
 
 Ce mois-ci. Ce sidde-ld. 
 
 Quand votre fils ira-t-il an pont 7 
 
 II ira mardi prochain. 
 
 Irez-vous quelque part ? 
 
 Nous n'irons nulle part. 
 
 M'enverra-t-il le livre ? 
 
 t II vous Tenverra s'il 1'a fini. 
 
 Serez-vous chez vous (a la maisonj 
 
 ce soir ? 
 J'y serai. 
 
 Votre pere sera-t-il chez lui ? 
 II y sera. 
 Vos cousins y scront-ils ? Us y 
 
 seront. 
 
 Obs. 105. (Important.) When a verb, in the future tense, is connected 
 with another by the conjunction if, si, 1 the French verb following si must 
 b in the indicative mood, present tense, although, in English, it may be in 
 :he future tense, or subjunctive mood. 
 
 Will John go to the concert ? Yes, 
 if you go, or will go, or should go. 
 
 Jean ira-t-il an concert ? 
 vous y allez. 
 
 Oui, si 
 
 1 Si. (if, meaning granting, supposijtg that.} But when si means whether^ 
 thr following verb must be in the future tense : I do not know whether h 
 *vill go or not, Je ne sais pas s'il ira ou 71 tw. 
 
234 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 QfMRAHTE-SIXIKMK EXERCICE. 2'Je See. 
 
 Allez-vous a Washington aujouid'hui? Non, je n ; ai pas le temps 
 d'y aller aujourd ; hui. Quand irez-vous ? J'irai jeudi ou sainedi 
 prochain. Aurez-vous le temps devenir nous voir? Sans doutc que 
 je Faurai. (Dir. 6.) Quand viendrez-vous? J ; irai demain. Nun, 
 je me trompe, apres-demain. Vraimcnt? Oui, vraimcnt. Enver- 
 rez-vous du tabac en France? Oui, j'y tn enverrai. Par quel bail- 
 ment 1'enverrez-vous? Je l : y enverrai par le meme que M. Lippard 
 Y en enverra-t-il ? Oui, il y en enverra. Y en enverra-t-il beau- 
 coup ? II y enverra tout ce qu'il a. Qui licndra le magasin du coin 7 
 Je no sals pas qui le tiendra. N'est-ce pas le petit marchand qui le 
 tiendra? Lui et ses "freres le tiendront. Tiendront-ils des neu- 
 veaules? Us ne tiendront que du drap. Quand Pouvriront-ils? llg 
 1'ouvriront dans quinze jours. Ne vous trompez-vous pas ? Non. 
 je vous assure. Vos cousins viendront-ils bientot? II ne viendront 
 j>as avant quinze jours. Votre oncle viendra-t*il avec eux? II 
 viendra, f?i le capitaine ne vient pas. Croyez-vous que le capitaine 
 vitMidni.' 11 vitMidru s'il n'a pas la gouttc. (iuand saurez-vous 
 votre theme? Je le saurai dans r,n (juart d'heure. Croycz-V()ii^ 
 que vous le saurez si-tot? Oui ; je le sanrai. Fri'dirric sanra-t-il le 
 .-icii ? II le sanra. Les nouveaux ccoliers saunmt-ils U\s lours? lid 
 les sauront. Nous les saurons tous. 
 
 Has the lailor inado my coat? He has not made it yet ; but he 
 will soon make i:. \Vlicn will he make it? AV 
 time. When will you do your exercises? I ?hall do them when I 
 shall have time. When will your brother do his? He will do 
 them next Saturday. Wilt thou come to me? I shall come. 
 When wilt thou come? I shall come next Friday. When I 
 you seen my uncle? I saw him last Sunday. Will your cousins 
 go to the ball, next Tuesday? They will go. Will you come to 
 my concert ?- I shall come, if I am not ill. Will you be able to 
 pay me what you owe me? I shall not be able to pay it you, for I 
 have lost all my money. Will the American be able to pay for his 
 shoes ? He has lost his pocket-book, so that he will not be able to 
 pay for them. Will it be necessary to send for the physician ? No- 
 body is ill, so that it will not be necessary to send for him. Will it 
 be necessary to go to the market, to-morrow? It will be necessary 
 to go there, for we want some beef, some bread, and some wine. 
 Shall you see your father, to-day ? I shall see him. Where will 
 he be? He will be at his counting-house. Will you go to the ball 
 Co-night? I shall not go, for I am tco ill to. go to it. Will youi 
 friend go ? He will go if you will. 
 
FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 Scctiou. 
 
 Obs. 106. (Important.) When a verb in the future tense is connected 
 *-ith another by the word t/7/i, quand ; the French verb following qnand 
 must be in they' , although tin- jin-m nt is then used in English. As, 
 
 Will he go when 
 
 lie will go when you do. 
 
 ill write it if you will. 
 He will write i: Jo. 
 
 tfonnthlg-ho 
 
 He will, it' y>u will have BO1 
 He wiii, v ant some. 
 
 you be able to pay the shoe- 
 jiiak' : . I his bill / 
 
 I will pay him when he sends it. 
 
 will hold my parasol ? 
 Give i 1 .ss, I will (hold it). 
 
 He will hold it, or thoy will. 
 Will your < 
 
 my will. 
 
 I will be there. 
 I will employ. 
 
 To ,:ill or will try. 
 
 What will you use to ci 
 I will use this. 
 
 Will you : I will. 
 
 Will he not try a 
 Yes, he will, but they will not. 
 You are mistaken, they will try also, 
 
 ;uire. I will acquire. 
 
 To run. I shall or will run. 
 
 To gather, pick. Will I gather ? 
 To die, (lose life.) Who shall not die ? 
 What will you acquire ? 1 will 
 
 acquire what I can. 
 
 Jra-t-il quand firai f 
 
 II ira quand vous irtz. 
 
 II Vecrira sivousVecrivcz. (Obs. 10.* 4 
 
 11 1'ecrira quand vous Tecrirez. 
 
 Enverra-t-il du papier blanc a mon 
 
 comptoir ? 
 
 II y en enverra ^i vous en voulez. 
 II y en enverra quand vous en vou- 
 
 drez. 
 Fourrez-vous payer le cordonnier, 
 
 s'il envoie son memoire? 
 Jc le paierai quand il 1'cnverra. 
 Qui vent tenir mon parapluie ? 
 
 h'-moi, Mile., je le tiendrai. 
 11 In ticndra, ou ils le tiendront. 
 I/ami de votre cousin viendra-t-ii ft 
 
 mon concert? 11 iri. 
 
 Y viendrez-vous ? J'y serai. 
 
 Employer. J'emploierai. > ,* ^^ ^ <. 
 
 Essayer. J'essaierai. i 
 
 Qu'emploierez-vous pour le faire ? 
 
 J'emploierai ceci. 
 
 Essaierez-vous bientol ? J'essaierai 
 
 N'essaiera-t-il pas aussi ? 
 
 Si fait, il essaiera, mais ils n'essaie- 
 
 ront pas. Vous vous trompez, ilo 
 
 essaieront aussi. 
 Acquerir,* 2. J'acquerrai. 1 
 Courir,* 2. Je courrai. 
 Cueillir,* 2. Cueillerai-je ? 
 Mourir,* 2. Qui ne mourra pas f 
 Qu'acquerrez-vous ? J'acquerrai 
 
 ce que je pourrai. 
 
 Ols. 107. If, instead o{whe?i, quand, the words what, ce que ; as soon ag, 
 aussitot que, des que ; after, apres que ; as, comme ; where, ou ; connect 
 the English verbs, use the future tense after the 2d verb in French. 
 
 Will you run as soon as he runs T 
 We will run after he has run, and 
 where he has run. 
 
 Courrcz-vous aussitdt qu'il courra f 
 Nous courronsopres qu'ilaura couru. 
 et ou il a:ira couru. 
 
 1 These 4 verbs, and the lists given in 1st and 2d sections, amounting 
 {Hie auxiliaries included) to 21, are the most important exceptions. 
 
230 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 QUARANTE-SIXIEME THEME. 3mc Sec. 
 
 Si je viens samedi prochain, votre fils viendra-t-il ? 11 viendra 
 quand vous viendrez. Fera-t-il ce que je ferai? II fera ce qu'il 
 pourra. Iront-ils ou vous voudrez ? Non, ils n'iront pas oil je vou- 
 ilrai, mais ou ils voudront. Quand cueillerez-vous mon bouquet"? 
 Je le cueillerai quand et ou vous voudrez. En cueillerez-vous aussi 
 un pour Emma? Je lui en cueillerai un aussi, cles que vous me lo 
 direz. Acquerra-t-il de Fhonneur s'il fait son devoir ? II en ae- 
 querra des qu'il fera ce qu'il a a faire. Courrez-vous si je coura? 
 Oui, ; e courrai quand vous courrez, ou aussitot que vous aurez 
 court. Comment est le vieux soldat? II est bien malade. Croit- 
 on qu'il en mourra? Oui, on croit qu'il en mourra. Et le matelot? 
 II est mieux, on espere qu'il n'cn mourra pas. Qn'acquerront cea 
 ccoliers? Ils acquerront de Hionneur. Ce jeune cheval vaudra-t-ii 
 deux cents dollars, quand il aura quatre ans? Je crois qu'il vaudra 
 nins que cela. Vraimcnt! 
 
 Will the farmer gather his corn to-day? No, he will gather il 
 only to-morrow, or the day after- Will he be ready then ? Ho will 
 be ready, we shall be ready, and our friends will also be ready. 
 Where will our young neighbors go? They will go nowhere; they 
 will remain at home, for they will have a great deal to do. What 
 will they have to do ? They will have to cut their grain and to put 
 it in their granary. You will lose your money, if you do not keep 
 your pocket-book shut up, (fcrmc.) Will your con-in keep an apo- 
 thecary store ? He will keep one. Where will he take a store? 
 He will take one near the museum. Will he be able to get one 
 there, (y en troitrcr un?) He hopes so. When will he come? Iff 
 will conic when his father gives him (06s. 106) the two thou 
 dollars which he has promised him. Will he give them to him 
 soon ? He will receive them in a few days. Will he receive any 
 money from you? Yes. 1 will lend him some. WiV he pay you 
 back? (repaiera-t-il ?) He will, for he is diligent, assiduous, and 
 he will without doubt do his duty. I hope that you are not mis- 
 taken 
 
 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 47th. Quarante-scpiicme Lr*on. 47 w 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. 
 To belong. (21 3 , 40 2 , 4G 2 .) | Appartenir* 2. (conj. commo r 
 
 Do you belong ? I do. 
 
 Does that horse belong to your bro- 
 ther? It does (belong to him). 
 
 Appartenez-vous? J'appartiens. 
 Ce cheval appartient-il a votre firere ? 
 II lui appartient. 
 
TORT Y-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 ?/37 
 
 To whom do thc?c gloves belong ? 
 
 They belong to the capta.: 
 
 Do these horses belong to the Ame- 
 rican generals ? 
 
 They will soon belong to them. ($ 170.) 
 
 To suit. Baited. 
 
 (Used principally in the 3d person.] 
 
 Did that cloth suit your brother ? 
 
 It did not. 
 
 Dd these shoes suit your children ? 
 
 They will suit them. 
 
 Does it suit you to do that ? 
 
 It will suit me to do it. 
 
 Does it suit your cousin to come with 
 us? 
 
 It will not jii.i ,iirn to yo out. 
 
 To succeed, succ< 
 
 : succeed in learning I 
 I do (succeed in it). 
 I do succeed in Icarni: 
 
 se men succeed in selling their 
 s ? If they have not yet suc- 
 d, they will succeed in it. 
 
 To succeed, succeeding, succeeded. 
 
 >u succeed in doing that ? 
 
 -; not. 
 
 in succeed ? I did. ($50.) 
 To clean. 
 
 Immediately, directly. 
 
 This instant, instantly. 
 
 I am going to clean it presently. 
 
 ' do it immediately. 
 I am going to work. 
 
 A qui appartiennent ct gante ? 
 
 Us appartiennent aux capitaines. 
 
 Ces chevaux appartiennent-ils am 
 generaux Americains ? 
 
 Ils leur appartiendront bientot. 
 
 Contettir,*2.(commevenir)convemi, 
 (aavantle nom ; de, avantl'inrini/ 
 
 Ce drap a-t-il convenu a votre ircre 1 
 
 II ne lui a pas convenu. 
 
 Ces souliers conviennent-ils a voa 
 enfants ? Us leur conviendront. 
 
 Vous convient-il de faire cela ? 
 
 II me conviendra de le faire. 
 
 Convient-il c. votre cousin de vei:ir 
 avec nous ? 
 
 II ne lui conviendra pas de sortir. 
 
 jParvenir,* 2, a. (coinmc venir) par- 
 venu*. 
 
 t Parvc i apprendre le Fran* 
 
 c.ais ? t J'y parviens. 
 
 t Je parviens a Tapprendre. 
 
 t Ces hommes parviennent-ils a ven- 
 dreleurs chevaux? S'ilsn'ysont 
 pas encore parvenus, ils y pai 
 viendront. 
 
 Riussir, 2, d. reussissant, reussi. 
 
 Reussissez-vous a faire cela ? 
 
 J'y rcussis ; mais il n'y reussit pas. 
 
 Y avez-vous reussi ? J'y ai reuaal 
 
 Nettoyer, 1. 
 
 Tout de suite. 
 
 A 1'instant, sur le champ. 
 
 Je vais le nettoyer tout a, Vhcure. 
 
 Je vais le faire tout de suite. 
 
 Je vais travailler. 
 
 QUARAXTF.-SEPTI.fcME TlllblE. IrC SeC. 
 
 .1 ai trouve cles gants. A qui appartiennent-ils? Sont-ce des 
 gants de chamois? Oui. Ce sont des gants de chamois. Ils 
 nrappartiennent alors. Donnez-les-moi. Attendez un instant, s'ii 
 >iit-ils blancsj jaunes, verts ; ou bleus ? Les m iens sont 
 plutot bruns que jaunes. Alors les voici. Ils vous apparliennent. Je 
 vous remercie. DC rtc?i, (you are welcome.) Avez-vous achete 
 quelq-ie chose? Oui. Qu ; est-ce qui (21 1 ) vous a convenu? Ceci 
 m'a convenu, et cela conviendra a mon frere. Cela lui conviendra- 
 t-il? Oui^ j'en puis stir. Le cousin de Favocat a-l-il etc au mu-<V 
 av*?<- 7 II ne lui a pas convenu d'y al! 1 'o qu'il a 
 
238 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSOK. (2.) 
 
 refuse d'y aller avec eux. Parvenez-vous a faire votre devoir 
 les jours? J 7 y parviens souvent. Le menuisier est-il parvenu a 
 raccommoder votre pupitre ? Oui, il y est parvenu tout de suite. 
 il aussi parvenu a raccommoder le secretaire? Non 7 il n'a paa 
 reussi it le faire. A-t-il micux reussi avec le fauteuil ? Cui, rl y a 
 parfaitement reussi. Qui a nettoye votre gilet de satin? Notre 
 nouveau domestique Pa nettoye. N'a-t-il pas bien reussi ? V 
 cnout, oui. Vos souliers sont-ils nettoyes? 11s le sont. Je me 
 trompe, on les a pris pour les nettoyer. 
 
 To whom does that horse belong? It belongs to th 
 taptain, whose son has written a note to you. Does this money 
 belong to you ? It does belong to me. Prom whom have you 
 received it? I have received it from the men whose children you 
 have seen. \Yho>e horses are those? They are (cc sont) < 
 ( 39, N. 3.) Have you told your brother that I am waiting for him 
 iiere 1 I have forgotten to tell him KO, (lc.) Is it (cst-cc) your 
 father or mine who is gone to Berlin ? It is mine. Have you 
 brought me the book which you promised me ? I have forgotten 
 it. Has your uncle brought you the pocket-books which he prou . 
 you ? He has to bring me them. Have you already writ- 
 
 ten to your fri IY6 not yet had time to write to him. Have 
 
 you forgotten to write to your relation? I have not. Does this 
 cloth suit you? It does not suit me ; have you no other? ! i 
 some other; but it \ :han this. Will you shov. .' I 
 
 will show it to you. Do these shoes suit your uncle ? They ito* not 
 suit him, because they are too dear. Are these (sont-cc* the sh 
 of which (Jon/) you have spoken to us? They are (cc sont) the 
 same, (les memcs.) Whose shoes are these? They belong to the 
 nobleman whom you have seen this morning in my warehouse. 
 
 VOCABULAIRK. 2de Section. 
 
 Is there ? There is. i t Y a t il ? II v a 
 
 Are there ? There are. ) 
 
 There is not. There are not. 
 
 There is nothing nobody. 
 
 Will there he ? There will he not be. 
 
 What is there ? the matter there ? 
 
 Was there, or has there been ? There 
 
 was. 
 
 Thsre has been nothing. J t II ' y rien eu. 
 
 Nothing tas taken place. ) 
 
 t II n'y a pas. II n'y a point. 
 
 t II iv y a rien personne. 
 
 i Y aura-t-il ? II y aura. II n'y 
 
 aura pas. 
 t Qu'y a-t-il la ? Qu'est ce qu'il j 
 
 a la? 
 t Y a-t-il eu? II y a cu 
 
 Is there wine ? syrup ? 
 
 There is some. There is nc moie. 
 
 Are there men of merit ? 
 
 t Y a-t-il du vin ? du sirop ? 
 t II y en a. II n'y en a plus, 
 t Y a-t-il des hommes do merito f 
 
FORTY -SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 239 
 
 Obs, 108. The interrogative : What is? followed by a preposition, if 
 
 aanslated !. 
 
 1 do ; 
 
 ball 
 
 There ar- it many. 
 
 The credit. On . > sell on 
 
 credit. 
 
 v/n. 
 Will y '-ash ? 
 
 Does it suit you to soil me on credit ? 
 To ft. 
 
 tit him. 
 
 . ' 
 
 1 fits you very well. 
 To I 
 Will ;. rse ? 
 
 ) it. 
 You must not k> 
 
 The relative: IVimt />-, by: Ce yu'il 
 
 t Qu'y a-t-il dans le hariZ / (1 mute.) 
 
 l>td y a dedans, 
 Doit-il y avoir beaucoup de monde 
 
 ,<:il ile Mine. Rush ? 
 II doit yen avoir beaucoup. 
 Le credit. A credit. Vcndre a credit 
 
 ' ml, Kn argent comp 
 
 tant. 
 
 Acheter com pi ant. 
 Vendre comptant. 
 Payer comptant. 
 Voulez-vous aehcter argent comp 
 
 tant ? 
 
 Vous convicnt-il de me verdr^ a 
 lit t 
 
 -t-il bien ? 
 t II vous va bien. 
 
 .:ipcau no va pas bien a votrc 
 
 til ne lui va pas bien. 
 
 t Ces soulicrs vous vont-ils bien t 
 
 t Us me ront bien. 
 
 t Cela vous va fort bien. 
 
 r, 1. 
 
 rez-vous le cheval ? 
 Je le garderai. 
 11 ne faut pas garder mon argent 
 
 QUA .-TifeME THME. 2de Sec. 
 
 (inand vous sorez en Europe, irez-vous en Allemagne? Je crois 
 que yirai ; du moins ; j'ai grande envie d ? y voyager. Y voyagerez- 
 vons a pied ? Non ; il ne me convient pas d'y voyager a pied; do 
 sorte que j'irai en voiture. En voiture, ou en diligence? (public 
 coach.) Quelque fois en voiture ; quelque fois en diligence. Croy- 
 e/-vous que vous aimerez a voyager en Allemagne autant qu 7 en 
 Italic? Jc n'cn sms nen, en verite, (I do not know anything about 
 it.) Lo marchand que vous connaissez a Amsterdam a-t-il beau- 
 coup de cR-dit ? Oui 7 c'est un des premiers marchands de la villo 
 Comment Papnelez-vous? On Pappelle. . . . Vous avez un habit 
 va binn ; Pavez-vons fait faire ici? Non, je ne Pai pas 
 fait fairc ici. On done? Nulle part. Je Pai achete tout fait, (rr.ndu 
 I'ui.rqufM vous pas: dejdfait? pour, alrcfidij rxi<l< .<' 
 
240 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 Parce que les Francais ne Pemploient point. Vraiment, il voug vi 
 aussi bieri que possible. Je vous ai prete mon canif, n'est-ce pas? 
 L'avex-vous garde ? Je Pai garde, et je le garderai encore, car j'en 
 aurai be^oin tout a Pheure. 
 
 Does this merchant sell on credit? He does not sell on credit. 
 Does it suit you to buy for cash? It does not suit me. Where did 
 you buy these prelty knives? I bought them at (chez) the mer- 
 chant's whose warehouse you saw yesterday. Has he sold them to 
 you on credit? He has sold them to me for cash. Do you often 
 buy for cash? Not so often as you. Have you forgotten anything 
 lere? I have forgotten nothing. Is there any wine in this barrel? 
 Fiere is some in it. Is there any vinegar in this glass 7 There is 
 none in it. Is wine or cider in it ? (dedans ?) There is neither v 
 nor cider in it. What is there in it? There is vinegar. 
 
 Are there any men iri your warehouse 7 There are some there. 
 Is there anyone in the office? There is no one there. Were 
 there many people in the theatre? There were many there. Will 
 there be many people at your ball 7 There will be many there. 
 Are there many children that will not play 7 There are many that 
 will not study, but all will play. Hast thou cleaned my trunk? I 
 have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. Do you intend buy- 
 ing an umbrella? 1 intend buying one, if the merchant sells it me 
 on rredit. Do you intend to keep mine? I intend to give it you 
 back, if I buy one. Have you returned the book to my brother 7 
 I have not yet returned it. 
 
 VOCABUI. B Section. 
 
 You had better . . . 
 
 I had better . . . 
 
 Hi- had better . . . 
 
 Instead of keeping your horse, you 
 had better sell it. 
 
 Instead of selling his hat, he had bet- 
 ter keep it. 
 
 To please, pleased, please. 
 
 L please, thou pleasest, he pleases. 
 To please some otie, (transitive.) 
 
 t Vous ferez inieux dc . . . 
 
 t Je ferai micux de . . . 
 
 t II fcra mieux de . . . 
 
 t Au lieu de garder votre cheval, vous 
 
 ferez mieux de le vendre. 
 t Au Hen de vendre son chapeau, il 
 
 fera mieux de le garder. 
 Plairc,* 4, o; p. p. plu, irnpcr. 
 
 Je plais, tu plais, il plait. 
 Plairc a quelqu'un, (intransitif.) 
 
 Obs. 109. Plaire, etant intransilif, ne pent pas tire employe au pastif. 
 Ainsi, il ncfaut pas traduire : Are you pleased with this book ? par the* 
 vous plu avec ce livre? mats par Vvnipcrsonnel. 
 
 Does this book please you ? 
 \ am very well pleased with it, but 
 he \8 not much pleased with it. 
 
 Ce livre vous plait-il ? 
 II me plait beaucoup, mai* il ne lai 
 plait guere. 
 
FOR 'I -ON. (3.) 241 
 
 ' d with it. 
 What are you so much delighted 
 
 ii ? 
 I will u please. 
 
 II plait bcaucoup a. Charles. 
 Qu'est-ce qui (Ul>) vous plait taut I 
 
 :ii cc qu'il vou? plnira. 
 
 You are pleased t foujoke.j t Cela vous plait a dire. 
 
 .Vhat is your pleasure I ) t yous , 
 
 >u want? S 
 
 : > you say ? 
 light in, to be pleased. 
 How are you pit: 
 
 -cry well pleased here. 
 
 t Plait-il ? 
 
 t Se plaire,* 4. (a, avant un infm.) 
 t Comment vous plak-ez-vous ici ? 
 t Je m'y plais heaucoup. 
 
 Obs. 110. The impe: r the singular, and 
 
 by ce sont, when followed ly a ?.d pers. plur., and only then. ( 38, N. 3,) 
 
 Whose book is this ? 
 
 e ? 
 
 It is ' :m. 
 
 It is your friends who are right. 
 
 X qui est ce livre ? C'est le sicn. 
 A qui S'jnt ces souliers? 
 
 Ce font eux qui Tont vu. 
 
 Ce sont vos amis qui out raison. 
 
 QUARASTE-SEI' i rIME. 8mc 8 
 
 -il clu soleil ce matin ? Oui, il en fait. Alors je ferai biea de 
 
 1, n'est-ce pas 7 Oui, vous ferex bien cle le pren- 
 
 ;t-il beaucoup de soleil en Angleterre ? Non ; le temps y est 
 
 oujours convert. V tonne-t-il souvent ? Non, il n ? y fait pas 
 
 .coup cle tonnerre. A\ez-vous peur du tonnerre? Non, mais 
 
 ;it chien blanc en a peur. Plait-il? Ne me comprenez-vous 
 
 uiit; mais ; je n'ai jamais vu un chien craindre le tonnerre. 
 
 peur, je vous assure. Vous plaisez-vous ici ? Oui, 
 
 coup, bcaucoup, (very much.) Cela vous plait a dire. Non 
 
 beaucoup. Que pensez-vous du dernier 
 
 age de C. J) f . Je ne Taime pas du tout. Cela vous plait 
 
 a. dire, car il plait a tout le monde. S'il plait a tout le monde, jo 
 
 vous assure qu'il ne me plait pas. Quel parapluie voulez-vous ? 
 
 ' celui-ci que je veux. Kt quels gants vous faut-il? Ce sont 
 
 .-la qu'il me faut. Que faut-il a votre cousin? II a ce dont il 
 
 <oin. Alors, vous pouvez vous en aller. Nous aliens nous en 
 
 aller dans un instant. Adieu, au plaisir. Je nren vais aussi. Au 
 
 pl;ii<ir, done. 
 
 What i.s your pleasure, Sir ? I am inquiring after (40 2 ) your father. 
 1- he at home? No, Sir, he is gone out. What do you say? 
 it-il ?) 1 tell you that he is gone out. \Vill you sit down and 
 wait till he comes back? When do you expect him? When will 
 he come back ? I do not know exactly. He may return in a quarter 
 or an hour or less; he may return only for dinner. That is, between 
 and ?, o'clock, 1 suppose, (supposcr.) Not between 2 and 
 21 
 
2-12 
 
 FORTY-EIGIITH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 3 ? as you suppose, but between 1 and 2. Never mind. I have no 
 time to wait now, so that I had better call again. As you please. 
 What name shall I tell him? Give him this note : he will find my 
 name in it. I will give it to him. Good morning. Is it our baker 
 or the doctor's, who has sold you bread on credit'? It is ours. Is 
 that your son ? He is not mine; he is my friend's neighbor's son, 
 (le fils du voisin dc mon ami. { 140 2.) Where is yours? He ha* 
 become a traveller, (voyageur ;) he is now in Paris. No, I am mis- 
 taken, in Bordeaux. Do you intend to sell your coat? I intend 
 keeping it, for I want it. Instead of keeping it, yea had better sell 
 it. Do you sell your horses ? I do not sell them. Instead of keep- 
 ing them you had better sell them. Does our friend keep his para- 
 sol? He does keep it; but instead of keeping it he had better sell 
 it, for it is worn out. Does your son tear his bi does tear 
 
 it; but he is wrong in doing so, for instead of tearing it he hud better 
 read it. 
 
 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 48th. Quarantc-kuiticmc Le 
 
 VOCABULURE. Ire Section. 
 
 \Vli< ii will you go away? (-13 2 .) 
 
 I will go soon. 
 
 By and by. 
 
 He will go away soon, (by and by.) 
 
 We will go to-morrow. 
 
 They will go to-morrow. 
 
 Thou wilt go immediately. 
 
 Wlien, (conjonction adverbiale.) 
 
 What will become of you if you lose 
 
 your money ? (44 3 .) 
 I know not what will become of me. 
 What will become of him ? 
 What will become of us ? 
 What will become of them ? 
 I do not know what will become of 
 
 them. 
 
 The turn, my turn, in his, in my turn. 
 Jn my brother's turn. 
 Each in his turn. 
 When it comes to your turn. 
 Our turn will come. 
 
 To take a turn, (a walk.) 
 He is gone to take a walk. 
 
 Quand vous en irez-vous ? 
 
 Je m'en int. 
 
 Tout u Theure. 
 
 II s'en ira tout ii 1'heure. 
 
 Nous nous en irons domain. 
 
 Us s'en iront demain. 
 
 Tu t'en iras sur le champ. 
 
 Lorsquc, (never used interrogatively.) 
 
 t Que deviendrez-voMs si vous perdez 
 
 votre argent? (Obs. 105.) 
 t Je ne sais pas ce que je deviendrai. 
 t Que deviendra-t-i7 ? 
 t Que deviendrons-7ioMs ? 
 t Que deviendront-t'Zs ? 
 t Je ne sais pas ce qu'ils deviendront, 
 
 Le tour, mon tour, a son, dmontsur 
 Au tour de mon frere. 
 Chacun a son tour, 
 t Quand votre tour vienara. 
 t Nous aurons notre tour. 
 Faire un tour. 
 
 Faire un tour de promenade. 
 II est alle faire un tour. 
 II est allc faire un tour de prnm 
 nade. 
 
FORTY-EIGHTif LESSON, (l.) 243 
 
 TO walk round the garden. 
 To run, to hurry. 
 
 i run, thou runnest, he runs. 
 u run ? I do. I do not. 
 
 Shall I run ? (4G 3 .) You shall not. 
 
 -/. behind him, them, me. 
 
 .nt.rnan gone away ? 
 lie has gone av. 
 
 t Faire un tour dc jardin. 
 
 Courir,* 2, p. passe count, (inipcra.) 
 
 courez. 
 
 Je cours, tu cours, il court. 
 Courez-vous ? Je cours. Je ne cours 
 pas. 
 
 Courrai-jo ? Vous ne courrez point. 
 Derricre, dcrricre lui, eux, moi. 
 Get homme s'en est-il alle* ? 
 II s'en est alle. 
 
 Have your brothers gone a -A ! Vos freres s'en sont-ils a!! 
 
 Tlicy have gone ;: j Us s'en sont allus. 
 They have not gone away. Us ne s'en sont pas alh's. 
 
 Have they gone away ? S'en sont-ils allos? 
 
 not willing to go away. | Us n'ont pas voulu s'en ai.'ur. 
 
 QUA :;: TII&ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Comptez-vous acheter un cheval? Je ne peux pas en aclieler un, 
 
 car je irai pas encore reru mon argent. Me faut-il aller au tli 
 
 II ne vous faut pas y aller. Cc > votre tour d'y aller, et il 
 
 faitma; Pourquoi n'allez-vouspas chezmon frcro? Ce 
 
 :on tour d'aller chez lui. Est-ce que c'est son tour de 
 
 venir vous voir? Oai, c ? est son tour, et je n'irai chez lui qu'aprc.s 
 
 hex moi. Corame il vous plaira. Le quel de ces 
 
 ! commence a parler ? Est-ce le plus grand ou le plus 
 
 petit ? Le plus age ou le plus jeune ? Ce n'est pas cela qui fait la 
 
 difference, (the difference, nom fern.) Quoi done? Celui qui est 
 
 studieux apprend et commence a parler. Et que fait celui qui ne 
 
 J'estpas? II apprend a lire eta traduirs un peu; maisnon a parler, 
 
 .ipprendra jamais, s : il ne devientpas (06s. 105) plus studieux. 
 
 J'espere qu : il le deviendra. Je Pespere aussi. 
 
 you going away already ? I am not going yet. When will 
 that man go away? He will go presently. Will you go away 
 BOOH ? I shall go away next Thursday. When will your friends go 
 away ? They will go away next month. When wilt thou go away? 
 I will go away instantly. Why has your father gone away so soon ? 
 (si tot ?) He has promised his friend to be at his house at a quarter 
 to nine, 30 that he went away early in order to keep what he has 
 Atomised. When shall we go away? We shall go away to-mor 
 row. Shall we start early? We shall start at five o'clock in the 
 morning. When will you go away? I shall go away as soon as I 
 nave done writing, When will your children go away ? They will 
 go as soon as they have done their exercises. 
 
 \Vi.l you go when (lorsquc) I shall go? I shall <ro away when 
 yon g vous TOUS en ircz.} Will our neighbors soon gc 
 
244 
 
 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 away ? They will go away when they have done speaking. What 
 will become of your son if he does not study ? If he does not study 
 he will learn nothing. What will become of you if you lose your 
 money ? I do not know what will become of me. What will be- 
 come of your friend if he loses his pocket-book? I do not know 
 what will become of him if he loses it. What has become of your 
 aon" 2 I do not know what has become of him. Has he enlisted? 
 Ho has not enlisted. -What will become of us if our friends 1^0 
 away? I do not know what will become of us if they go away. 
 What has become of your relations ? They have gone away. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. 
 A blow, a kick, a knock, a stab. 
 A chip, a ship. 
 
 you given ihiit man a blow ? 
 
 S Un coup. 
 
 un coup a eel 
 
 I have given \i\ m one . 
 A blow with a stick. 
 A kick, (with the foot.) 
 A blow with the fist. 
 
 of a knife. 
 
 I, or the report of a gun. 
 Thr shot of a pistol. 
 A glance of the eye. 
 A clap of thunder. 
 To <iivc a cut with a k 
 To give a man a blow with a stick. 
 
 To give a man a kick, (with the 
 
 foot.) 
 To give a man a bhw with the fist. 
 
 To pull, to draw. 
 
 To shoot, tojirc. $ 
 
 To fire a gun. ; 
 
 To lire a pistol. | 
 
 To fire at some one. 
 
 I have fired at that bird. 
 
 I have fired twice. 
 
 I have fired three times. 
 
 I have fired several times. 
 
 How many times have you fired ? 
 
 Mow many timej have you fired at 
 
 that bird ? 
 [ have fired at if several times. 
 
 Avez-vous domic 
 
 homme ? 
 
 Je lui en &i domu' un. 
 Un coup de baton. 
 Un coup de pied. 
 Un coup de pping. 
 Un coup de couteau. 
 Un coup de fusil. 
 Un coup de pistolet. 
 Un coup d'ccil. 
 Un coup de toni; 
 Donner un coup de coir 
 Donner un coup do baton a 
 
 houi: 
 Donner un coup de pied A 
 
 hommc. 
 Donner un coup 
 
 homme. 
 
 Tirer, 1. 
 
 t Tirer un coup de fusil. 
 
 t Tirer un coup de pistolet. 
 
 t Tirer un coup de fusL sur qual- 
 
 qu'un. 
 t J'ai tiro un coup de fusil a oct 
 
 oiseau. 
 
 t J'ai tire deux coups de fusil. 
 t J'ai tire trois corps de fusil. 
 t J'ai tire quelque coups dc fusil. 
 t Combien de coups de fusil avez 
 
 vous tires ? 
 Combien de fois avez-vous tiro sur 
 
 cet oiseau ? 
 J'ai tire" plusieurs fois sur Tui- 
 
 poing a un 
 
FORT r- EIGHTH LESSOU. (2.) 
 
 
 1 have heard a shot. 
 
 He has heard the : 
 
 We have heard a chip oi' thunder. 
 
 The ; 
 
 To cast an eye in-tut some ont or some- 
 thing. 
 
 Have you cast an eye upon that 
 book? 
 
 o upon it. 
 
 t J'ai cntendu uti coup de fusil. 
 t Jl a cntendu un coup de pistolet. 
 
 uvons cntendu un coup de 
 tonnerre. 
 Le poing. 
 
 p d'ail surquilqu'unov 
 quelque chose. 
 
 us jete un coup d'ceil eur ce 
 livre ? 
 J'y ai jete uncoup d'ceil. 
 
 Qr.v 2-le Bee. 
 
 Curnbien de fois les ennemis out- ids tire surnous? Ilsonttire 
 
 , nous. Ont-ils tue quelqu'un ? Us n'ont tue per- 
 
 Bonne. Qu'avo/.-vou.s fait de mon livre? Je Pai mis derriere le 
 
 e. Dois-je vous repondre? Vous mo repon- 
 
 votrc tour. Est-ce le tour de mou frere? Quand son tour 
 
 viendra, je lui d . a son tour. Avrz-vous fait 
 
 un tourde promenade ce matin .' J';;i i'uit un tour cle jardin. Oil 
 
 votre oncle ile se promener. DC quel cote est-il 
 
 alle ? De ce cote-hi. Vous vous trompez, il est alle du cote du 
 
 pont, i; >? Oui, ii est alle du cote ou il se promene tou- 
 
 jours. Pourtjuoi ce garcon-lii court-il si vite? II a peur de cet 
 
 iiger vcul-il lui faire du mal ? Oui, il veut lui don- 
 
 ner un coup de pied ou de poing. Pourquoi done ? Que lui a fait 
 
 le gar^on ? Le petit mechant (wicked little fellow) lui a tire led 
 
 cheveux. Uui court derriere nous? Notre chien court derriere nous 
 
 Apercevex-vous 1'oiseau qui est derriere Parbre? Je Papercois. 
 
 Does not your boy listen to what you tell him'? He does not listen 
 to it, if I do not give him a beating, (<fe coups.) Why do those 
 children not work ? Their master has given them blows with his 
 fist, so that they will not work. Why has he given them blows 
 with his fist? Because they have been disobedient. Have you 
 fired a gun ? I have fired three times. At what did you fire ? I 
 fired at a bird. Have you fired a gun at that man? I have fired a 
 pistol at him. Why have you fired a pistol at him ? Because ho 
 has given me a stab with his knife. How *nany times have you 
 fired at that bird ? I have fired at it twice. Have you killed it ? 1 
 have killed it at the second shot, (au deuxieme coup.) 
 
 Have you killed that bird at the first shot (du premier coup?) I 
 have killed it at the fourth, (du quatricmc.) Do you fire at the 
 birds which you see upon the trees, or at those which you see in the 
 gardons? I fire neither at those which I see upon the trees, nor at 
 those which I see in the gardens, but at those which I perceive on 
 
UiG FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 me castle behind the wood. Have you a wish to fire at that bird* 
 I have a desire to fire at it. Why do you not fire at those birds? I 
 cannot, for I have a sore finger. When did the captain fire ? He 
 fired when his soldiers fired. How many birds have you shot at 1 
 I have shot at all that I have perceived, but I have killed ncne, 
 because my gun is good for nothing. Have you cast an eye upon 
 that man? I have cast an eye upon him. Has he seen you ? He 
 nas not seen me, for he has sore eyes. Have you drunk of that 
 wine ? I have drunk of it, and it has done me good. Why have 
 your pupils gone away '? Why did they run so ? They went away, 
 and they have run so quickly, because they did not wish to be 
 by the man whose (} 88) dog they have killed. 
 
 FORTY-NINTH LKSSOX, 49th. Quara.\tc-ncuviemc 'me. 
 
 VOCABULAIBE. Ire Section. 
 
 To h.-:ir Ol ;:(! of. . . 
 
 1 lav.- you heard of your brother ? 
 
 I have hi-artl of him. 
 
 Is it long since you breakfasted ? 
 
 How long is it since you breakfasted f 
 
 Obs. 111. The impersonal il v a 
 there is, there arc, when it is used in 
 it since t 
 
 It 13 not long since I breakfasted. 
 
 It is a great while since. 
 It is a short time since. 
 How long is it since you heard of 
 your brother ? 
 
 It is a year since I heard of him. 
 
 ft is only a year since. 
 
 r t is more than a year since. 
 
 Obs. 112. Than, before a cardinal 
 More than nine. 
 More than twenty times. 
 It is hardly six months since. 
 
 Entendre parlerde . . . J.nu ndu par- 
 
 lerde... 
 t Avez-vous entendu porter de votro 
 
 t J'cn ai entendu par 
 
 t Y a-t-il long temps que vous avez 
 
 dt'jeund ? 
 t Combien de temps y a-t-il que 
 
 vous avez dejcunu ? 
 
 cannot be rendered into English by 
 reply to the question : Ifow long i* 
 
 t II n'y a pas long-temps que j'ai 
 
 dejeund. 
 
 t II y a trus-long-temps. 
 t II y a peu de temps, 
 t Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous 
 avez entendu parler de votre frere 7 
 
 It II y a un an que j'ai entendu par- 
 ler de lui. 
 1 II y a un an que j'en ai entondc 
 parler. 
 
 It II n'y a qu'un an. 
 t II y a plus d'un an. 
 number, is rendered by ae (1C 1 , 
 Plus fc neuf. 
 Plus de vingt fois. 
 t II y a a peine six mois. 
 
k'OUTY-NJNTII LESSON. ( 1 .) 247 
 
 . These few hours. [ t II y a quelqucs heures. 
 <nr age. Tiiis half hour, j t II y a une demi-heure. 
 
 ;_jo. These . t 11 y a deux ans. 
 
 hours and a half ago. 19 J , N. 3.) I t II y a deux heures et den. 
 
 A fortnight ago. These two weeks. 
 
 light. 
 
 you been lon^ in France ? 
 
 t II y a quinze jours. 
 
 t Quinze jours. 1 
 
 t Y a-t-il long-temps que v< 
 
 France T 
 
 ;istene.e or of action, when in its 
 
 ays expressed in the ',se, while in French it ia 
 
 expressed you been long in Prune? ! means 
 
 tfiat j :i, in French, que vous ttcs and not yue vous 
 
 ii that you are no longer at the place. 
 
 M been in Paris these three 
 
 II y a trois ans qu'il est a Paris. 
 II y a deux ans que je demeurc ici. 
 
 K-NEUVifey. Ire Sec. 
 
 -lu do joli oombien y a-t-il que vous les avv. ? 
 
 II n'y a <jue : latre jours. Y a-t-il long-temps que voas 
 
 lire? Non, il n'y a que quelques minutes. 
 
 que votre cousin est parti ? Oui, c'est depuis cela. 
 
 Combien y a-i-il qu'il est parti ? II n ? y a pas long-temps. Quand 
 
 contre mon pere ? Jo Pai rencontre il y a quinze 
 
 jours. Y a-t-il autant que cela ? Je le crois. Ne vous trompez- 
 
 vous pas ? il n'y a pas si long-temps que ca. Non, je ne me 
 
 trompe pas. II y a juste quinze jours aujourd'hui, que nous nous 
 
 sommes rencontres au pont de fer. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous 
 
 connaissez ce marchaiv. Quel marchand suisse ? Je n'en 
 
 connais aucun. II dit qu 7 il vous connait, lui. II se trompe. II y a 
 
 prer- de trois mois que votre fils est en Europe, n'est-ce pas? Trois 
 
 mois. Laissez-moi voir. Mai, Juin. Non, il n 7 y a que deux mois. 
 
 Vous a-t-il ecrit? Oui, plusieurs fois. D'ou? De Liverpool d'abord: 
 
 ensuite. de Londres, ou il est a present. Y a-t-il quinze jours qu'il 
 
 i? Oui, il y a environ 15 jours. S'y amuse-t-il ? II m'ecrit 
 
 :>lait beaucoup. Que pense-t-il de Liverpool? II ne m'en 
 
 a pas dit grand' chose ; il n'y est reste que trois ou quatre jours. 
 
 Have you heard of any one ? I have not heard of any one, for I 
 have not gone out this morning. Have you not heard of the man 
 who has killed a soldier? I have not. Have you heard of my 
 brothers ? I have not. Of whom has your cousin heard? He has 
 
 1 Literally !." tlmjg. \-.\ -j weeks there are 15 days and only 11 nights.' 
 bonce, fortnight. 
 
248 FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 heard of his fiiend who is gone to America. Is it kn^ since he 
 heard of him? It is not long since he heard of him. How long id 
 it? It is only a month. Have you been long in Paris? Thesa 
 three years. Has your brother been long in London ? He has been 
 there these ten years. How long is it since you dined ? It is long 
 since I dined, but it is not long since I supped. How long is it si 
 you supped ? It is half an hour. How long have you had these 
 books? I havo had them these three months. How long is it n 
 your cousin set out? It is more than a year since be set out. 
 
 What is become of the man v. >nt you money': I do not 
 
 know what is become of him, for it is a great while since (quc je ne) 
 I saw him. Is it long since you heard (que vous n'avcz en!- 
 varler) of the soldier who gave your friend a cut with the k; 
 It is more than a year r-ince I heard of nirn. How long : 
 been Learning French? 1 have been learning it only these live 
 months. Do you know already how to speak it : V : >ee that I 
 am beginning to speak it. Have the children of the Knirlish noble- 
 men been learning it long? They have been learning it these thren 
 years, and they do not yet begin to speak. Why dn they not know 
 how to speak it ? They do not know how to speak it, because they 
 are learninir it. badly. Why do they not learn it well ' They have 
 not a good master, so that they do not learn it well. 
 
 VOCADULAIRE. 2dc Section. 
 
 How In: ii had that : 
 
 I have had it these five years. 
 
 How long? (since what time?) 
 
 How long has he been here ? 
 
 These thrsc days. 
 
 This month. 
 
 It is six months since I spoke to him. 
 
 Combicn y a-t-il que vous 
 
 chcval ? 
 
 II y a cinq nns que je I';.i. 
 Depuis quand ? 
 Depuis quand est-il ici ? 
 Depuis trois jours. 
 Depuis un mois. 
 II y a six mois que je nc lui ai parl. 
 
 Obs. 114. The meaning of, It is 6 months since I spoke to him, 
 dently : / A.ive not spoken to hi?n these 6 months. When a negative turn may 
 be given to the English sentence, the French use KE, but suppress PAS. 
 (That is, they suppress only a part of t*hc negative, instead of suppressing it 
 altogether, as the English do. $ 145 1.) 
 
 saw you, it has rained very 
 
 often. 
 It is more than a year since I heard 
 
 of him. 
 
 To come from. To have just. 
 I come from your brother's office. 
 I nave just seen your brother. 
 
 Depuis que je ne vous ai vu, ii a plu 
 
 tres-souvent. 
 
 II y a plus d'un an qre je /i'on ai 
 
 entendu parler. 
 Venir,* de. (24 3 .) 
 
 Je viens du bureau de \otrc frere. 
 Je viens de voir votre frere. 
 
 Obs. 115. To express an action very recen.ly past, use the verb ventr 
 immediately followed by the preposition de> and an infinitive. ($ 145 3.) 
 
FORTY-NINTH LESSON. 
 
 24',) 
 
 H* has just diMie writing. 
 Tiie men 1. .. 
 
 /.ing long? 
 
 but just come. 
 
 f lilt jlift. 
 
 To do one's 
 
 I will do my best, (as well as I can.) 
 . ill do his best, (as well as be can.) 
 
 you spent to-day T 
 MS a month to live 
 
 Near f>- 
 
 I lui i 
 
 t II vient d'ecrirc. 
 
 t Lea homines vicnitent d'arriver. 
 
 il long- temps quo cet hommt 
 attend ( 
 t II ne fait tjue r/'arri\ 
 
 '/uctle, used only negatively 
 t Fuirc tie son mieux. 
 t Je : :i mieux. 
 
 :eu.x. 
 
 Dipenstr, 1. 
 Combi> aujour 
 
 d'hui? 
 II a cinquante ecus par mois ;\ do 
 
 penscr. 
 Neveu, plur. mcs ncvcus. f!) 8 .) 
 
 Par Id. 
 
 vous? (imparfuit.) J'; 
 
 > pas ? Je n'avuis pas 
 
 If Sec. 
 
 que vous 11 le jeune hominc ^m a 
 
 le iiKiitrc UVL-C lc(|uel nous Pavoi. 
 
 i'aivu({ 1-15-1.) Combieriy a-t-il (jiiu 
 
 cet nang ' 1. '; il y a quelques minutes. Com- 
 
 :-il que ces enfants ont bu? Lesquels? Ces petits-la ou 
 
 1 es grands-ci. Ceux-la ! Oh ! ils ont bu ii y a uri 
 
 i d'heurc. Ne vous trompez-vous pas? Non, je ne me 
 
 s assure' car, j ? ai vu le jeune valet donner du 
 
 laitaux uns et de Peau a Combien y a-t-il que votre u 
 
 II n ? y est pas. Je le croyai 
 
 . ou est-il done? II est a Baltimore. Depuis quand y est- 
 
 . C'est done votre cousia qui est en 
 
 Oh! c : est difTerent. II y est, c'est vrai. Combien y 
 
 qu'il y est? II y a un m^is. Y a-t-il vu notre ministre? II 
 
 1'a vu plus de dix fois. Je me trompe, je veux dire plus de vingt 
 
 : il le voit presque tous les jours. Que venez-vous de me dire'^ 
 
 Ils se voient? Oui, sans doute. Je les croyais ennemis. Ils ne le 
 
 J'en suis charmc. N'aviez-vous pas mon journal Italien 
 
 bier apres-midi? Je 1'avais alors, mais je ne Tai plus. 
 
 meet the lawyer's nephew ? I met him just now. 
 Where have you just met him? I met him close by here, (/otil 
 I'iri.) AVhorn did you see with him? I saw him alone. Did 
 any harm? He did me no (33 1 ) harm, for he is ;i 
 ..) U'hrie are my gloves? They (rn) 1 
 
250 
 
 FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 thrown them away, for they were worn out, quite. Who is th& 
 man who has just spoken to you? He is a merchant. What ha/ 
 the shoemaker Just brought? He has brought the shoes which he 
 lias made us. Who are the men that have just arrived ? They aro 
 Russians. Where did your uncle dine yesterday? He dined at the 
 hotel. How much did he spend? He spent five francs. How 
 much has he a month to live upon ? He has two hundred francs a 
 month to live upon. It is about forty dollars; is it not? Yes, a 
 little less. Do you throw your hat away ? I do not throw it away, 
 for it fits me very well. How much have you spent to-day ? J 
 have not spent much ; I have spent only two francs. Do you spend 
 every day as much as that? I sometimes spend more than that. 
 Has Unit nephew of yours (votre neveu) been waiting long? He has 
 but just come. What does he wish ? He wishes to speak to you. 
 Are you willing to do that? I am willing to do it. Shall you be 
 able (46^) to do it well ? I will do my best. Will this man be able 
 to do that ? Ho will be able to do it, for he will do his bust. llavn 
 you my yellow copy-book? I had it this morning, but I have it no 
 lonirer. I thought you had it yet. You have made a mistake. ( 13 2 , 
 44.) 
 
 VOCA Sec. 
 
 B been found ? 
 
 ; >und. 
 
 Tin- me:i have been 8CCI1. 
 Our children have been praised and 
 :-drd, because they have been 
 
 good and studious. 
 By whom have tlu y bei :i n-wardi-d > 
 Uy whom have \vc been blamed ! 
 To pa a a. To go by. Before. 
 
 Obs. lir>. fit fore is expressed in French by avant when it denotes pri 
 priiy, (\3 1 ,} and by devant , when it signifies in presence of. Ex. 
 
 Les chcvaux ont- 
 Ils ont etc trouves. 
 Les hommes ont etc vus. 
 Nos enfants ont e'te I.H: 
 
 penses, parce qu 
 
 et assidus. 
 
 Par qui ont-ils cte nVompci: 
 Par qui avons-nous etc Man: 
 Passer, 1. 1\ runt. 
 
 To pass before some one. 
 
 To pass before a place. 
 
 A plncf, this place, this line place. 
 
 I have passed before the theatre. 
 lie pissed before / did before the 
 
 museum. 
 
 V t > upend time in sornctJiifi^. 
 What do you spend your time in ? 
 I spend my time in studying. 
 What has he spent his time in ? 
 What shall we spend our time in ? 
 To miss, to fail to. 
 
 Passer devant quelqu'un. 
 Passer devant un endroit. 
 Un endroit, cet endroit, cc bel en 
 
 droit. 
 
 J'ai passe* devant le theatre 
 II a passe avant moi dcvant Id 
 
 musee. 
 
 Passer le temps d quelquechcte. 
 t A quoi passez-vous le temps ? 
 t Je passe le temps a etudier. 
 t A quoi a-t-il passtS le temps? 
 t A quoi passerons-nous le temps f 
 Manquer, 1, (de av. 1'inf.) 
 
FORTY-NINTH LESSCN. (3.) 
 
 251 
 
 Do not fail to go. Do not fail to do it, 
 
 (do not neglect it.) Mind ! (you 
 
 hear ?) 
 The merchant has failed to bring the 
 
 money. Did he ? 
 
 You have missed your turn. 
 You have failed to come. 
 Send them to me. Don't you forget 
 
 it now, (don't you fail,) mind ! 
 To be good for sontct/u 
 Of what use is that ? 
 ft is good for nothing. 
 4 good-for-nothin:: ftlloir. He is a 
 
 good-for-nothing fellow, 
 fa the gun which you have bought a 
 
 good one ? 
 
 : is good for liotl; 
 y.u thrown 
 
 thrown away what is good 
 nothing, (worth nothing.) 
 
 Ne manquez pas d'y aller. ' N'y 
 manquez pas. Entendex-vcus? 
 
 Le marchand a manque d apporter 
 
 1'argent. Y a-t-il manque ? 
 
 Vous avez manque votre tour. 
 Vous avez manque do venir. 
 Envoyez-les-moi. N'y manquez paa 
 
 entendez-vous ? 
 t tre ban a quelq-.te chose. 
 t A quoi cela est-ii bon ? 
 t Cela n'est bon a rien. 
 Un vanri* n. C'est un vauriou. 
 
 (* 39, N. 3.) 
 Le fusil que vous avez ach-fte* est-il 
 
 bon ? 
 
 Non, il nc vaut rien. 
 Avcz-vous jete quclquc chose ? 
 II a jetd co qui n'est bon a rien, (ce 
 
 qui ne vaut ri 
 
 QUARANTI: TIIME. 8me Sec. 
 
 ? On les a trouves. Ou ont-ils ete trou- 
 
 :e trouves derriere le sofa, de ce cote-ci du pupitre. 
 
 vu par quelqu'un? Je rfai etc vu par personne. Je 
 
 croyais que vous aviez etc vu par le nouveau jardiriier. Je croyais 
 
 nc pas avoir etu vu. ($ 171 7.) Attendez-vous quelqu'unt Nous 
 
 n'aUendons que notre cousin, le capitaine. Kst-il arrive? Oui, il 
 
 river. Combien y a-t-il qu'il est ici? 11 ne fait que d ; ar- 
 
 river. Envoyez-moi chercher lorsqu ; il viendia. n'y manquez pas; 
 
 -'? Ne pouvez-vous pas Pattendre'? II sera ici avant 
 
 une demi-heure. Je ne peux pas ; je suis presse dans ce moment. 
 
 5, je vous enverrai cliercher. S'il vous plait: n ? y manque/ pas, 
 
 entendex-vous ? Non, pon, soyez tranquille, (depend upon it.) Je 
 
 n'y manquerai pas. Le roi (king) a-t-il passe sur le pont de fil de 
 
 fur 7 ? Non, il a passe devant. Qu'est-ce que ce vaurien attend? Je 
 
 ne sais pas co qu ; iJ nUend. Dites-lui de s'en aller. 11 s'en va. Oil 
 
 *.re neveu? T^ne^: ; le voilfi. 
 
 Has the kin"; passed here? (p^ir ict?) He has not passed here, 
 (par id,) but before the theatre. Has he not passed before the 
 castle ? He has passed there, but I have not seen him. How do 
 you spend your time ? (A quoi . . . .) I spend :ny time in studying. 
 What does your brother spend his time it 1 He spends his time 
 in reading and playing. Does this man spend his time in work! 
 He is a good-for-nothing feilow ; he spends his time in drinl 
 and playing. What do your children spend iheir time in? Tliev 
 
252 
 
 FIFTIETH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 spend their time in learning. Can you pay me what you owe me 1 
 I cannot pay it you. for the merchant has failed to bring me my 
 money. 
 
 Why have you breakfasted without me ? You failed to come at 
 nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted without you. Has the 
 merchant brought you the gloves which you bought at his house, 
 (chzz h'A ?) He has failed to bring them to me. Has he sold them 
 to you on credit? He has sold them to me ; on the contrary, for 
 cash. Do you know those men? I do not know them; but 1 
 believe that they are (ce sont) good-for-nothing fellows, for they 
 spend their time in playing. Why did you fail to come 10 my 
 father's, this morning'? The tailor did not bring me the coat which 
 he promised me, so that I could not do what I had p: 
 
 FIFTIETH LESSON, 50th. Cinquantitmc Lcron, 5twc. 
 VOCABULAIUE. Ire Sec. 
 
 For, very far, t- niMijJi. I Am, fort loin, Hop loin, astc/ loin. 
 
 //(/' m u-htit ilistuitct ?) I Quell c distance ? 
 
 Ol>s. 117. The Impersonal il v a cannot be rendered into English bj 
 
 l/ir/v is, tin /> //< , whrii it is u.-eil in reply to thcqucs;. : r ( (Jut II* 
 
 distance f 
 
 How far is it from li- re to Paris t 
 
 Is it far In ni IK re to Paris ? 
 
 Is it far? It is not far. 
 
 How many i;;:!i s is it? 
 
 K mile. Is it ten miles? 
 
 It is more than two hundred miles 
 
 from New York to Washington. 
 It is rvsarly a hundred miles from 
 
 Berlin to Vienna. 
 From Venice, from Havre. 
 I am from Paris. 
 What countryman are you? 
 Are you from France ? 
 1 am. I am not. 
 
 The Parisian. 
 
 He is a Parisian, (from Paris.) 
 The king. The philosopher 
 The preceptor, the tutor. 
 The innkeeper, the landlord. 
 \rc you an Englishman ? 
 Whence do you come ? 
 1 come from Paris. 
 
 Quelle distance y a-t-il d'ici a Paris ? 
 
 Y a-t-il loin d'ici a Paris ? 
 
 Y a-t-il loin ? II n'y a pas loin. 
 
 Combien de milles y a-t-il ? 
 
 Un mille. Y a-t-il dix mil 1 ' 
 
 II y a phis de acux cents milles d 
 
 New York a Washington. 
 II y a environ cent milles de Berlic 
 
 a Vienne. 
 
 De Venise, du Havre. ($9.) 
 Je suis de Paris. 
 t De quel pays etes-vous ? 
 Ktes-vous de Frrjice ? 
 J'en suis. Je n'en suis paa 
 
 Le Parisien 
 t II est Parisien. 
 Le roi. Le philocphe. 
 Le precepteur. 
 L'aubergiste, 1'hote. 
 fctes-vous Anglais ? 
 D'ou venez-vous ? 
 Je viens de Paris. 
 
FIFTIETH LE880K. (1.) 
 
 253 
 
 TO fee, to fly, run av 
 Run 
 
 I run away, thou runnest a-- 
 runs ;. 
 
 I lly because I am afraid. 
 To assure. 
 
 .re you that he is arn\ 
 To hear a sound, a noise. 
 
 >ws 
 you heard nothing new ? 
 
 rd nothing i 
 
 s'enfuyant, fui. 
 
 Eniuyez-vous. Ne vous enfuycz pan 
 Je m'enfuis, tu t'cnfuis, il s'enfuiu 
 
 Pourquoi vous enfuyez-vous ? 
 Je m'enfuis parce que j'ai peur. 
 Assurer, 1. 
 
 Je vous assure qu'il est nrrivd. 
 ire un son, un bruit. 
 dre line nouvdlc (noin fi'm.) 
 t N 'avez- vous rien appris de nou 
 
 1 Je n ai rie i nppris de nouveau. 
 
 rixf.rANTife.ME TIIMK. Ire Sec. 
 
 -vous quelque part? Pourquoi me c! vous celat 
 
 ,ue vous etes pret a /. lout ce 
 
 ! fjiut pour cela. Chapr KU. (140 
 
 <>.) Vous avez raison. Jc lir pour 1 C\ nu- 
 
 ll y a rri\ V u-t-il 
 
 .ishington quc do Philadelphia a Pmvi- 
 -fait si loin. Qui c .us? Ce 
 
 iihiii. Ne craignex-vous pas ce gros cliien 
 ' Je ne le ei ;>is nit-chant; il if a jainui.-i 
 
 mordu personne. N'a-t-il pas mordu Taubergiste ? Nou, il ne lui 
 a pas fait de inal. ( } 116) vous plait tant, mon jeune 
 
 u? Ce petit chien-la. II e.-t - :;t qu ; il fait tout ce (s s 91) 
 
 N uviez-vous pas mon dictionnaire ce matin ? Si fait ; 
 je 1^ je 1'ai encore. En avez-vous eu besoin? Non, pas 
 
 is en avez besoin, je vous le rendrai. Don 
 Uvmoi. Le voici. 
 
 from Paris to London? It is nearly two hundred 
 miles Irom Paris to London. Is it far from here to Berlin? It is? 
 f ar . l s it far from there to Vienna? It is almost a hundred and 
 fifty n.iles from there to Vienna. Is it further from Paris to Blois 
 tnan from Orleans to Paris? It is further from Orleans to Paris than 
 from Paris to Blois. How far is it from Paris to Berlin? It is 
 almost a hundred and thirty miles from Paris to Berlin. Do you 
 intend to go to Paris soon? I intend to go soon. Why do you 
 \vi>h to go this time ! (ccttefois?) In order to buy good books an 
 gx>d gloves, and to see my good friends. Is it long since you were 
 O/..s-. 111.) It is nearly a year since I was there. 
 vou not go to Italy, this year (cctle annicJ} I do not go, for il 
 is too far from here to Italv. 
 
254 
 
 FIFTIETH LESSOR. (2.) 
 
 Who ire the men that have just arrived? They are phiioso 
 phers. Of what country are they ? They are from London. Whu\ 
 countryman are you? I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Ita- 
 lian. Are you from Tours'? No, I am a Parisian. How much 
 money have your children spent to-day ? They have spent but 
 little ; they have spent but one crown. Where did you dine yester- 
 day ? I dined at the innkeeper's. Did you spend much ? I spent 
 a crown and a half. Has the king passed here ? (par id ?) He has 
 not passed here, but before the theatre. Have you seen him? I 
 have seen him. Is it the first time (la premiere fois quc) you havo 
 seen him? It is not the first time, for I have seen him more than 
 twenty times. 1 thought you had seen him a few times, but I did not 
 think that you had seen him twenty times. Why does your servar t 
 rmi away? He is afraid of that ox. Why do you run away? P 
 I do not run av. 
 
 VOCABULAIKK. iMe Sec. 
 
 To JKIJIJKH. 
 
 The happiness, fortu: 
 
 The unhappincss, misfortune. 
 
 1 misfortune has hap; 
 ili- has nirt with a fjrcat misfortune 
 What has happened to you ? 
 
 . ' ' ' 
 
 I have met with your l>ro:i. 
 The poor man. 
 I have cut his linger. 
 Von have hrokea ihe man's 
 To J'itifi pitying, ]>itittl. 
 
 pity, thoa pi t lot, he pities. 
 Tity that host and his nephew. 
 I pity him with all my heart. 
 With all my heart, 
 To complain. 
 Do you complai:i ? 
 [ do not complim. 
 Do you complain of my friend ? 
 t do complain of him. 
 I do not complain of him. 
 To dare, to spoil. Damage nothing. 
 To serve, wait upon, served, t 
 Dost thou wait upon, ^scrve ?) 
 I do wait upon, (I serve.) 
 Jle waits upon, (he serves.) 
 Do you wait upon ? (do you serve ?) 
 To serve some one, to wait upon 
 
 aorne one. 
 
 -. 1. 
 
 Le bonhcur. 
 L<> malheur. 
 
 . /and malh- 
 
 t II lui cst a: ad rnalheu r 
 
 Quo vous cst-il an 
 II nc rn'est rien ar 
 J'jii rcncontrd votrc fi< 
 
 ivrc homme. 
 t Jo lui ai coupe le d< 
 
 Ivcou a Tii 
 
 '/re,* 4, plai int. 
 
 .!<' plains, tu plains, il plaint. 
 Plaignez cet hute et son neveu. 
 Je le plains de tout men conur. 
 t De tout mon cceur. 
 t Se plaindr- 
 Vous plaigner.-vo 
 t Je ne me plains pa?. 
 Vous plaigncz-vous de mon ami ? 
 Je m'en plains. 
 Je ne m'en plains pag. 
 Oser, 1. Gofer, 1. Ne gatez nc 
 .NVrt'/r,* 2, (25 1 ,) servi, serve*. 
 Sers-tu t 
 Je sers. 
 II sort 
 
 Serve z- vous ? 
 Servir quelqu ? un. 
 
FIFTIETH WESSON. (2.) 
 
 Has he been in your service ? I A-t-il etc a votre service ? 
 
 til* he served y | Vous a-t-il servi ? 
 
 ( t Combien y a-t-il qu'il vous srt t 
 How long has he i ill ser- S f Combien y a . t . H qu > U cst d votr* 
 
 vlce ? ( service ? 
 
 To ojfV r 
 
 ' I do. I ofier nothing. 
 
 Lc service. 
 
 ,*2, offert, o/rcz. 
 vous? J'^ttic. Jen'offte rieu 
 -tu? II oflre. 
 
 riEME TUMK. 2Je 
 
 vous ce bouquet? Oui, Mile.; je vous Poffre de tout 
 
 mon cuur. Vous plait-il? (47 3 , 06s. 109.) 11 me plait beaucoup, 
 
 ot j mercie de votre don, (for your present.) De rien. 
 
 nn 11 Sophie? Non, je ne lui en ai 
 
 i oflnre/-vous mi demain? Je n'y mcnqueiuS 
 
 . je vous prie. Non, je v ;e qne jo 
 
 (>us mon rve:,;ail Hollandais? Non, je 
 
 il y & un moment, 
 
 \on, je ne 1'ai pas eu. Ah! 
 
 voici. Merci. De rien. 
 
 neveu de M. Lenoir? Oh! pas grand' chose. 11 
 
 ;:n peu mal au doigt. Ne vous est-il rien arrive ? A moi? 
 
 13 que vous apprenez? J 7 ap- 
 
 ci, et ce n 7 est pas diilieile. Uu'e-t-ce que vous a vex 
 i rien appris de nouveau. On parle du 
 e la Californie ; mais ce : nouveau. 
 
 your brother heard ? He has heard of a man to 
 
 rtune has happened. Why have your scholars not 
 
 1 assure you that they have done them, and 
 
 you ; If you believe that they have not done them. 
 
 Whpt have you done with my book? I assure you that I have not 
 
 seen ? t. Has your son. had my knives? He assures me that he 
 
 irjt had them. Has your uncle arrived already? He has 
 
 not arrived yet. Will you wait till he returns? I cannot wait, for 
 
 1 hive a good deal (beaucoup} to do. Have you not heard anything 
 
 new? 1 have heard nothing new. Has the king arrived ? They 
 
 that he has arrived. What has happened to you? A great 
 
 fortune has happened to me. What? (lequcl ?) I have met with 
 
 my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow with a stick. Then 
 
 1 pity you with all my heart. 
 
 Why do you pity that man? I pity him because you have broken 
 nis neck. Why do you complain of my friend? I complain of 
 lim because he ha- cut my finger. Does that man serve you well ? 
 
256 
 
 FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 Ho does serve me well, but he spends too much. Are you wilting 
 to take this servant ? I am willing to take him, if he will serve 
 me. Can I take that servant? You can take him, for he haa 
 served me very well. How long is it since he is out of (/tors de] 
 your service? It is but two months since. Has he served you 
 long? He has served me for (pendant) six years. Do you offer ma 
 anything? I have nothing to (d) offer you. What does my friend 
 ciler you ? He offers me a book. Have the Parisians offered you 
 anything? They have offered me wine, bread, and good 
 
 VOCABULAIRB. 3mc Sec. 
 
 To confute, intrust. Trust me with it. 
 Do you trust me \viih jour money? 
 I do trust you with it. 
 I have intrusted that man with a 
 
 secret. 
 The 
 
 To keep anything secret. 
 1 havi 
 
 To take care of something. 
 
 Do you take care of your clothes? 
 
 1 do, I put them | 
 
 Will you take eare of my horse ? 
 
 
 
 I will take care of it. 
 To leave, left. Leave, let me. 
 To squander, to dissipate. . 
 
 He has squandered all his wealth. 
 To hinder prevent, keep from. 
 You hinder me from sleeping. 
 Do not kcef me from sleeping. 
 
 To shop, to purchase. 
 
 What have you purchased ? 
 
 I have purchased two handkerchiefs 
 
 and a bag. 
 
 Have you purchased anything ? 
 Most lovely, charming. 
 
 Admirably. 
 
 That hat fits you admirably. 
 That cos,; fits him very well. 
 It is charming. 
 
 Confer, 1 , ... o ... Confie/. 
 Me conficz-vous voirc argent ? 
 
 I le eonlie. 
 J'ai confic un secret a cet homme. 
 
 dc quclquc dlO80 . 
 
 Le secret. 
 
 t Carder le s 
 
 t J T en ai garde le sen 
 
 Avoir* soin 
 
 Trendre* som, 
 
 Avez-vous soin de vos habits ? 
 
 ai soin, jo les serrc. 
 Voulez-vous prendre soin de moo 
 
 cheval ? 
 
 Je veux en prendre soin. 
 Laisser, 1, laisse. Laiss. 
 Dissiper, 1. 
 
 11 a dissipe tout son bien. 
 Emptchcr, 1. (de av. 1'infini^ 
 t Vous m'empechez de dormir. 
 Ne m'empechez pas de dormir. 
 Faire emplette, (a feminine noun 
 
 takes de before the substantive.) 
 Faire des emplettes. 
 t De quoi avez-vous fait emplette ? 
 t J'ai fait emplette de deux mou 
 
 choirs, et d'un sac. 
 Avez-vous fait des emplette? ? 
 Charmant, (an adjective,) tres-bi*i\ 
 
 extremement bien, (adverbs.) 
 A merveille, (an adverb.) 
 Ce chapeau vous va a merveUte 
 Cet habit lui va tres-bien. 
 C'est charmant. 
 
FIFTIETH LKSSON. (3.) 
 
 THME. 
 Quel aller, n'est-ce pas? Oui, quelqu'im vient 
 
 de s . aller? C'e>t un A: i a 
 
 tout son lien (all his fortune. wealth' un An- 
 
 6 vous assure. Je le croyais Allemand on plutot Iloi- 
 
 vous etes trori: erre. 
 
 Pour adolescent II s'enfuit parce qu'il craint 
 
 11 craint de 1'etre par 
 
 un de ses parents, . ;m faire son devoir. A qui 
 
 com.- .e a ia banque, ou je le garde 
 
 moi-meme. ( : ;ien a ce - \\ ne peut 
 
 pas carder un secret. Je ne hii confierai rien. (Jui a soin de vos 
 
 . Qui en aura soin lorsqm; vous 
 
 votre oncle? Thomas nra pron: -oin. 
 
 my u-hitc | ,r.) Vous led 
 
 here ! there they are.) 
 
 :.eighbor ? 1 pity him ; be has 
 
 ::ant of (<i> i the man (ct 
 
 .,1 not return it to him. Do not trust this man \vith 
 
 anylhi::ir. I du :. .^n \\ith anything. Has he already 
 
 :ed you? I have never tin-led him with anything, so that he 
 
 lias ; ated me; but it is said that he has cheated many 
 
 le. Will you trust my father \vith your money'? I will trust 
 
 him with it. With what secret has my son intrusted yon? I can- 
 
 not i . with that with which lie has intrusted me, for he 
 
 iesired me (m'a prie dc) to keep it secret. Whom do you 
 
 ii your secrets? I intrust nobody with them, so thai no- 
 
 body knows them. Has your brother been rewarded? lie lias, on 
 
 the contrary, been punished; but I beg you (pricr) to keep it 
 
 secret, for no one knows it. What has happened to him ? I will 
 
 tell you what lias happened to him, if you promise me to keep it 
 
 secret. Do you promise me to keep it secret? I do promise you, 
 
 for I pity him with all my heart. Will you take care of my clothes? 
 
 I will take care of them. Are you taking care of the book which 
 
 I lent you ? I am taking care of it ; I have put it away in my 
 
 desk. Who will take care of iny servant? The landlord will 
 
 take care of him. Do you throw away your hat? I do not throw 
 
 it away, for it fits me admirably. Does your friend sell his coat? 
 
 Ho does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. Who has spoiled 
 
 my book ? No one has spoiled it, because no one has dared to 
 
 touch it, (le toucher.} Did not that little boy with black haJr touch 
 
FIFTIKTII LESSON. (3.) 
 
 it"? No, I prevented him from touching it, (his touching it.) Pro- 
 vent his touching it ; for if he does, he will soil and spoil it. 
 
 RESUME TOUR LA 50ME LECON. 
 Theme en Fran^ais. 
 
 Le chien de Fetranger a-t-il mal au dos? Oui, il a mal au 
 dos. Le jeune cheval du boucher a-t-il mal au dos ? Non, maig 
 eon vieux mouton a mal au dos. Va-t-il tuer le mouton qui 
 u mal au dos? Non, il ne va pas tuer celui-la. Lequel va-t-il 
 hier ? 11 va tuer celui qui a mal au pied. Qui a mal au 
 dos ? Je ne sais pas qui a mal au dos. Le ioli petit mouton de 
 Mile. Sara est-il dans le jardin ? Non, il est dans son appartement 
 (|uel apparlement allez-vous prendre .' Jo vais prendre celui 
 vous if aye/ plus. Aimez-vous cet appartement-la? Non, maia 
 j'aime relui-ci. Le trouvez-vous (do you think it) joli? Oui, a 
 joli. Ne le trouvez-vous pas trop petit? Non, je le trouve assez 
 grand. Quel jour allez-vous prendre votre appartement? Nous 
 allons le prendre 'e 10 de ce mois. N'est-ce pas aujourd'hui le 
 huit ? Si fait, c ? est le huit. Alors (then) vous allez prendre votre 
 a;>partement dans deux jours? Oui, nous allons le prendre dans 
 ileux jours. Avec qui allez-vous jouer? Je vais jouer avec 1. 
 du dentisle. Ou allez-vous jouer avec lui? Nous ullons jouer dans 
 i'atelier de son pere. Voulez-vous venir jouer avec nous? A 
 phiisir. Qui est dans cet appartement-la? Le petit garcon qui a 
 mal au coude et au genou. Avec qui les medecins sont-ils ? 11s sont 
 avec les enfants qui out mal aux yeux. Ne voulez-vous pas venir 
 avec nous voir le pont de iil de fer ? Si fait, avec plaisir, (i/cs, 7 
 will.) Ce bois de lit-la est-il assez grand pour Fappartement que 
 vousprenez? Celui que nous prenons n'est pas tres-grand. Pour- 
 quoi vos petits amis vont-ils chez le consul ? Us y vont pour lire 
 les journaux de France. Quels papiers de France re^oit-ii? II en 
 recoit plusieurs. En recoit-il autant que le President du conseil 
 mnutpol? (of council.) II en recoit plus que Jui. En lit-il pins 
 de dix? II en lit moins de dix. II n ? en lit que quatre ou cinq. 
 N'est-ce pas assez? Si fait. Je crois que c ? est trop. Je ne peux 
 pas en lire autant. Combien en lisez-vous? Je rrai le temps d'en 
 lire qu'un. Le boucher vous apporte-t-il ce que vous achetez au 
 marche ? II ne me Papporte pas; mais il m'envoie ce que j ? achete. 
 Vous renvoie-t-il tous les matins? Non, nous irailons au marche 
 que tons les trois jours, le mercredi et le samedi. Avez-vous deux 
 grands bois-ds-lit ? Non. J'ai un grand bois-de-lit pour moi et un 
 petit pour mon fils. 
 
 A qui est ce beau Jardin ? C ; est celui de . . . A qui sont cea 
 
FIFTY-FIKST . (1.) 
 
 beaux chevaux et ce joli carrosse, (carriage.) .1. pas a qui 
 
 lls sont. Vous etes grand ; mais je crois quo mou cousin est plug 
 grand que vous. Non, il est moms grand que moi. J'ai deux 
 pouces de plus que lui. (Ota. 71.) Les / :s envoienl-il? 
 
 plus de colon en France qu ; en Angletcrre (England) ? Non, ils en 
 unvoient beaucoup plus en Angleterro Bos- 
 
 tonir -:on? Us I'achrUMit presque toujours 
 
 a Philadi Philadelphia 1 Us la 
 
 paient S4 le tonneau ($7) ci ils le vendent 'iclo 
 
 lit-il beaucoup ! 11 ainie beaucoup a lire les ouvrages i 
 
 't Americ;: i!s les journanx tons les 
 
 inmencent tons IPS matins a les lire. Que lit votre 
 7 II ne lit rien a pn'-srnt ; il a mal aux yeux. II fait lire notre 
 > frcre pour lui. Quels ouvrages les An 
 
 e toutes les autres nations aussi bien que les 
 
 leurs. 0: v rages? Ils en font tous 
 
 les jours quelques-i; 
 
 L'ami du fils de son jardinier travaille-t-ii autant que le cousin du 
 ".le pastant que lui. Kst-il plus jeune? 
 
 Non, au contraire, il est plus ago. Combien a-t-il de plus? (Hoiv 
 
 \\ older?) 11 a 2 ans do plus. 11 est done paresseux? Oui, un 
 
 -/ de jolis souliers, qui vous les fait? Notre cordcn- 
 
 -il toujours aussi bien? Oui, si vous les faites faire. 
 
 vendex-vous ces gants, Mile.? Nous les vendons demi- 
 
 ir. Kn a\v/-vous a un quart de dollar? Oui, nous en avonsj 
 
 mais ce ne sont pas les meilleurs. Laissez-moi voir les uns et les 
 
 autrr i ceux que nous vendons cinquante sous; ils sont 
 
 superbes, comme vous voyr . ceux de 25 sous. Us sont 
 
 bons; mais ils sont moins Dons que les autres. Votre panier i 
 
 assez gr?Jid pour mettre votre marche (marketing) dedans? Je 
 
 crois que oui. Nous y meltons, du moins beaucoup de choses. 
 
 Qu'a votre cheval ? II a mai au dos et a un pied. Jules n*a-t-il pas 
 
 mul a r<cil? Si fait': il y a mal. 
 
 Y-FIRST LESSON, 51sl. Cinqaante et uniemc Lcr t on, 
 VOCABUXAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 . Will the people come soon ? 
 iS'oem, very soon, too soon, soon 
 
 enough. 
 A violin. \ piano. 
 
 Le monde viendra-t-il bientot ? 
 Bicntut, trop tot, assez tot. 
 
 Un violon. Un pmito* 
 
 To play upjn the violin. > f Jouer du vielon> 
 
 Tc play the violin. 
 
2GO 
 
 FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Obs. 118. When a musical instrument is spoken of, the verb, jouer t to 
 play, takes de, but a, when a game is spoken of, As : 
 
 To play at cards, at chess. 
 
 To play the (upon the) piano. 
 
 What instrument do. you play? 
 
 To touch. To play the piano. 
 
 Near me, near them, near the fire. 
 
 Near the trees, near the hotels. 
 
 Near going. Near breaking it. 
 
 Where do you live ? 
 
 I live near the castle. 
 
 What are you ooing near the fire ? 
 
 To dance. 
 
 T<> fall, fallen, do not fall. 
 
 Did you fall ? I did not. 
 
 To drop, (meaning to let fall.) 
 Has he dropped anything? 
 1I( has not dropped anything, 
 /o retain, to livid, keep back. 
 
 To a/>jiro<ich, to draw ; 
 
 Draw near the lire, (approach.) 
 
 Do you approach the fire ? 
 
 I do approach it. 
 
 To approach, to hare access to one. 
 
 He- is a man difficult of access. 
 
 1 go away (withdraw) from the fire. 
 To withdraw (or go away) from. 
 I jjo away from it. 
 Why does that man go away from 
 
 the fire ? 
 lie goes away from it because he is 
 
 not cold. 
 
 So much, so many. 
 I have written so many notes that I 
 
 cannot write any more. 
 Do you fear to go out ? 
 
 Jouer aux cartes, jouer aux echecu. 
 
 t Jouer du piano. 
 
 t De quel instrument jouez-vous If 
 
 Toucher, 1. Toucher le piano. 
 
 Pres de moi, pres d'eux, pres du feu 
 
 Pres des arbres, pres des hotels. ($ ! I. 1 
 
 Pros d'aller. Pres de le c^socr. 
 
 Ou demeurez-voLS ? 
 
 Je demeure pres du chateau. 
 
 Que faites-vous pres du feu ? 
 
 Danser, 1. 
 
 Tomber, 1, tombe e . Ne tombez point. 
 
 fites-vous tombe ? Je no suis paa 
 
 tombe. 
 
 Luittcr t amber. 
 
 A-t-il laisse" tomber quelque chose ? 
 11 n'a rien laiss tomber. 
 Retenir,* 2, (comme tenir, 24*, 
 
 25', 34'.) 
 
 S'approcher, 1, (dc av. un nom.) 
 Approchez-vous du feu. 
 Vous approchez-vous du leu ? 
 Je m'en approche. 
 Approchcr quelqu 
 C'est un homme qu'on no peut ap- 
 
 procher. 
 
 Je m'e'loigne du feu. 
 S'eloigner, 1, (de av. le iivtn.} 
 Je m'en eloigne. 
 Pourquoi cet homme s'eloigne-t-il du 
 
 feu? 
 II s'en eloigne parce gu'il n'a paa 
 
 froid. 
 Taut. 
 J'ai ^crit tant de billets quc je ne 
 
 puis plus en dcrire. 
 Craignez-vous de sortir ? 
 Je crains de sortir. 
 
 [ do fear to go out. 
 
 ClNQUANTE ET UNIEME TlI^ME. Ire SeC. 
 
 J'ai entendu tomber quelque chose, avez-vous rien laisse tomber? 
 Non. je crois ne rien avoir laisse tomber. Voyez, eependant. Ah! 
 voici un de d'argent ; est-ce vous qui 1'avez laisse tomber'? C'est le 
 de de Louise. Je Tai peut-etre fait tomber. Je croyais 1'avcir mis 
 dans son panier. Je Pai trouve pres du pied du fauteuii. Merci. 
 Do rien. Qui va au musee cet apres-midi ? George y va; mais je 
 crams de ne pas pouvoir y aller. Pourquoi done? Mon oncl 
 
KITTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) Oftt 
 
 Fit-lit tie me dire qu'il attend 100 sacs de cafe et qiril faut les rece- 
 voir ct les faire mettre dans le magasin. N'importe, si vous iry 
 ullez pas cet apres-midi, vous irez nne autre fois. Cela est vrai 
 Jouez-vous clu violon et du piano ? Non, je ne joue que du violon 
 En jouex-vous tous les jours ? l"n pen, pour ne pas oublier. 
 
 Do you play the violin ? I do not play the violin, but the piano. 
 Shall \ve have a ball to-nLhi .' We shall have one, in the large par- 
 lor. At what o'clock ! At a quarter to eleven. \Vhat o'clock is it 
 How? 1 1 .en, and the people will soon come. What 
 
 ixurtrument will you play ? I shall play tho violin. Jf you play lh 
 violin, I shall play upon the piano. Are there to be (doit-il y avoir } 
 47*) a great many people at our ball ? There is to be a great many. 
 Will yo : shall dance. Will your children dance? They 
 
 will dance if -?, (si ccla Icur convicnt, or si ccla Icur plait.} 
 
 How do you spend your time in this con: ..end my time 
 
 in p' tho piano, and in reading. How does your cousi:i 
 
 .cits himself in playing upon the violin.' 
 >>u play? A great many people d; 
 til to do it. (On n'y manque jamais.) 
 
 Who? At first (d'abord) our children, then our cousins, at last our 
 hbors. Do you amuse yourselves ? I assure you that we amuse 
 
 . much. 
 
 Whom do you pity ? 1 pity your friend. Why do you pity him '? 
 I pity him because he is ill. Has anybody pitied you? Nobody 
 I me, because I have not been ill. Do you offer me any- 
 I oiler you a fine gun. What has my father offered you? 
 He 1. i me a line book. To whom have you offered your 
 
 fine horses? I have offered them to the English captain. Dost thou 
 offer thy pretty little dog to these children? I offer it to them, for ! 
 love them with all my heart. Why have you given that boy a blow 
 with your list? Because he hindered me from sleeping. Has any- 
 body hindered you from writing? Nobody has hindered me from 
 writing, but I have hindered somebody from hurting your cousin and 
 nephew. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2dc Sec. 
 
 T:> recollect, (no^^r^JnJFreflclL) I Se rappeler, 1, (33,) rappelez-voug 
 
 ccla. 
 
 Do you recollect that ? j Vous rappelcz-vous cela ? 
 
 [ d."> recollect it. ! Te me le rappelle. 
 
 Docs your brother recollect that ? 
 He recollects having seen it. 
 recollect the words ? 
 I Jo recollect them. 
 
 Votre frcre se rappelle-t ii coin ? 
 II se rappelle Pavoir vu. 
 Vous rappelez-vous les mots ? 
 Je me les rappelle. 
 Vous ctes-vons rappeAe" Ics niota / 
 
202 
 
 FIFTY-l'IKST LESSON. (2.) 
 
 I have recollected them. 
 I have not recollected them. 
 Have you recollected them ? 
 You have recollected them. 
 Has he recollected them ? 
 He has recollected them. 
 We have recollected them. 
 They have recollected them. 
 I recollect (remember) coming. 
 
 TJ remember, to recollect, 'romme 
 venir,* 24 3 , 25 1 , &c.) 
 
 Do you remember that man ? 
 
 I do remember him. 
 
 Do you remember seeing him ? 
 
 I do not. 
 
 1 do remember it. 
 
 What do you remember ? 
 
 I remember nothing. 
 
 I do not remember falling down. 
 
 7\> sit down. 
 
 Sit down, (impera.) 
 
 Are you sitting down ? 
 
 I am sitting, thou art sitting down. 
 
 Is he sitting down ? He is not. 
 
 I shall or will sit down. 
 
 He sits near the fire. 
 
 He is sitting near the fire. 
 
 To run atvay, to jly. 
 
 Did you run away ? 
 
 I did not run away. 
 
 Why did that man run away ? 
 
 He ran away because he was afraid. 
 
 Who has run away ? 
 
 Je me les suis rappelds. 
 
 Je ne me les suis pas rappele*e. 
 
 Vous les etes-vous rappeles ? 
 
 Vous vous les etes rappeles. 
 
 Se les est-il rappeles ? 
 
 II se les est rappeles. 
 
 Nous nous les sommes rappeleo. 
 
 Us se les sont rappeles. 
 
 Je me rappelle etre venu. 
 
 Se souvenir* 2, de. Soavenez-vo JA 
 
 de . . . Se ressouve?iirj* 2, de. 
 
 Ressouvenez-vous-en, (de avam 
 
 le nom et av. 1'auxiliaire.) 
 Vous souvenez-vous de cct hommc T 
 Je m'en souviens. 
 Vous souvenez-vous de r avoir vu f 
 Je ne m'en souviens pas. 
 Je m'en souviens. 
 De quoi vous souvenez-vous? 
 Je ne me souviens de ricn. 
 Jc ne me souviens pas d'etre tombe. 
 t S'asgeoir,* pres. part. s'asseya?tt ; 
 
 past part. a$sis. Asseyez^ 
 Vous asseyez-vous ? 
 Je m'assieds, tu t'assi 
 
 d-il ? II ne s'assied p< 
 Je m'assii'rai, or je m'asscicrai. 
 
 S II est assis pres du feu. 
 
 I Se sauver, 1, s'enfuir,* 2. (i)0'. 
 
 Vous etes-vous sauve ? 
 
 Je ne me suis pas sanve. 
 
 Pourquoi cet homme s'est-il sauvd ? 
 
 11 s'cst sauve parce qu'il a eu peur. 
 ( Qui s'est enfui ? 
 
 Qui s'est sauve ? 
 Ho has. They have. I II s'est enfui. Us se sont sauves, 
 
 ClNQUAXTE ET UNI^ME TlI^ME. 2de Sec 
 
 Vous ivez 1'aird'avoir froid, approchez-vous du feu. Je n'ose pas 
 m'en approcher. Pourquoi n'osez-vous pas? Je crains de me 
 Druler. Cela vous plait a dire. (47 3 .) Votre neveu s'eloigne-t-il du 
 feu parce qu'il craint de se bruler? Non, mais parce qu ; il n'a plus 
 froid, je pense. Non, ce n'est pas pour cela. Et pourquoi done* 
 ll a laisse tomber un quart de dollar, et ii veut le ramasser. Tenez 
 le voila pres du sofa. Ramassez-le pour lui. De quel cote du sofa? 
 De ce cote-ci ; la, pres de votre pied. Bon, je le vois a present. Jo 
 I'ai, je vais le lui rendre. Tenez, voici votre quart de dollar. Merci. 
 He rien. Ah! M. Incien, vous rappelez-vous le nom du mcdeciu 
 
FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 
 
 265 
 
 du general ? Non, je ne me le rappelle pas. Qui s'assied sur ce 
 tauteuil ? Personne ne s'assied dessus. Alors, je vais m'y asseoir, 
 Comme il vous plaira ; il est a votre service. Pourquoi le petit 
 Jules s'eloigne-t-il ? II a honte de ne pas s'etre souvenu de voue 
 porter rnon billet. 
 
 Do you remember anything pretty ? I remember nothing at all ; 
 I am too sleepy. What does your uncle recollect ? He recollects 
 what you have promised him. What have I promised him ? You 
 have promised him to go to France with him next winter. Have 
 you not ? I intend to do so, if it is not too cold. Why do you with- 
 draw from the fire ? I have been sitting near the lire this hour and 
 a half, (il y a,) so that I am no longer cold. Does your friend not 
 like to sit near the lire ? He likes, on the contrary, much (bcaucoup) 
 it near the lire, but only (seulement? adv.) when he is cold. May 
 one approach your uncle? One may approach him, for he receives 
 everybody. Will you sit down? I will not sit down; I have to 
 does your father sit down ? He sits down near me, 
 
 in that large red velvet arm-chair, (grand faut de v. n.) Where 
 
 shall I sit down ? You may sit near me. 
 
 Do you sit down near the fire, or on the sofa? I do not sit down 
 n.-ar the lire, for I am afraid of being too warm. Do you recollect 
 my brother ? I recollect having seen him and spoken to him once. 
 Do your parents recollect their old friends ? They do recollect them. 
 Do you recollect these words ? I do not recollect them. Have 
 you recollected that ? I have recollected it. lias your uncle recol- 
 lected those words? Ho has recollected them. Have I recollected 
 my exercise ? You have recollected it. Have you recollected your 
 exercises ? I have recollected them, for I have learned them by 
 heart ; and my brothers have recollected theirs, because they have 
 k-nrned them by heart. Is it long since you saw your friend from 
 Parin ? I saw him a fortnight ago. (Obs. 114.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3inC SCC. 
 
 T> like letter, to prefer. 
 
 Do you like to stay hero better than 
 
 going out ? 
 I like staying here bettor than going 
 
 out. 
 
 He likes to play better than to study. 
 Do you like to write better than to 
 .k* 
 
 u spok better than to write. 
 HeUcr than. 
 
 Aimer mieux, (no prep. 170 2.) 
 Aimez-vous inieux reater ici quo de 
 
 sortir \ 
 J'aime mieux rester ici q^e do sortir, 
 
 (mieux comes directly after the verb.) 
 II aimo mienx jouer quo d'etudier. 
 Aimez-vous inieux ecriro que de 
 
 purler? 
 
 J'aime mieux purler quo d'ecrire. 
 Mieux ...que de, (avant un innnitif.) 
 
 y, when separated from the verb, is seulemtnt. 
 
264 
 
 FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 
 
 lie likes to do both. 
 
 I like beef better than mutton. 
 
 Do you like bread better than cheese ? 
 
 I like neither the one nor the other. 
 
 I like tea as much as coffee. 
 
 Just as much, hardly so much. 
 
 A calf, calves. Some, any veal. 
 
 Aloud. Low, too low. 
 
 Does your master speak aloud or low ? 
 
 He speaks aloud and slowly. 
 
 In order to learn French, one must 
 speak aloud and quick. 
 
 Quicker, faster. As fast as you. 
 
 Not so quick, less quirk. 
 
 lie eats quicker than I. 
 
 Do you learn as fast as I ? 
 
 I learn faster than you. 
 
 I do not understand you, because you 
 speak too fast. 
 
 To acll c/nujt. 
 
 To sell dear. 
 
 Does lie sell cln 
 
 lit 1 docs not sell dear. 
 
 He lias sold to inr VITV <iiar. 
 
 This man soils rvrryil. 
 that one cannot buy anything of 
 him. 
 
 You speak so fast that I cannot under- 
 stand you. 
 
 To buy something of some one. 
 
 I have bought it of him. 
 
 II aime a faire 1'un et 1'autre. 
 J'aime mieux le bceuf que le moutoa 
 Aimez-vous mieux le pain que la 
 
 fro mage ? 
 
 Je n'aime ni Tun ni 1'autre. 
 J'aime tout autant le the que le caf<5 
 Tout aulanl, a peine taut. 
 Un veau, des veaux. Du veuu. 
 Haul, a haute voix. Bas, trop bas 
 Votre maitre parle-t-il haul ou bas ( 
 II parle haut et lentement. 
 Pour apprendre le Fran^ais, il fan? 
 
 parler haut et vite. 
 Plus vitc. Aussi vite que \ 
 Pas si vite, mains 
 II mange plus vite que moi. 
 Apprenez-vous aussi vitc quo im>i ? 
 J'apprends plus vite que vous. 
 Je ne vous comprends pas, parre <pio 
 
 vous parlez trop vite. 
 Vend re a Ion marche. 
 Vendrc chtr. 
 Vend-il a bon ninrclu' ? 
 11 ne vend pas DTK 
 11 nf a vciulu fort . 
 Cct.homme vend tout si clu-r, qu'uu 
 
 ne peut ricn acheter chez lui. 
 
 Vous parlez si vitc que je ne pms 
 
 vous comprendre. 
 
 Acheter quclque chose a quelqu'un. 
 Je le lui ai achete. 1 
 
 ClXQUANTE ET UNI&ME TlJ^ME. 3m 6 Sec. 
 
 Ramassez le gant dc chamois de INIlle. Clara, qui vient de le laisser 
 lumber. (06s. 115.) Adrien Pa deja ramasse. Votre neveu vient 
 ilo linir son devoir, n'est-ce pas? Non, il ne 1'a pas encore fait. 
 Moi, je croyais qu'?7 I'avait (he had) fait. Vous vous etes trompe. 
 (43 2 .) Vous sortez? Passez-vous pres du musee ? Non, je passe 
 loin de-la. N ; importe. Charles, venez me voir ce soir, (come and 
 gee me. } 150 12) voulez-vous ? Je suis tres-occupe, cependant 
 j'irai, si je m/en souviens. Si vous avez tant ti faire, vous tomberez 
 
 1 Acneter a quclqu'un means to buy of or for some one. Ex. Tai achete 
 fc dicval o votre frere, I have bought^Tliat ITorse of your brother ; i. e. Je 
 r *\ ackete de lui, I have bought it of him. Tai achete un gateau a nwn 
 enfant, I have bo'flght a cake for my child : i. c. Je Tai achete pour lui, I 
 hnvo bought it for him. 
 
FlfTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 2G5 
 
 malade. Ne le craignez-vou- Moi, je ne le crains pas, mais 
 
 mon pere le craint. Pourquoi vous eles-vous sauve com me cela 
 
 hier soil ? J'etais (I was, imperfect) tres-presse. Qu'aviez-vous a 
 
 faire >n, J'avais a appiendre mes leeons. Etiez- 
 
 vous (iccre. you, imperf.) vous etiez chez le marchand 
 
 de gfiteai: ;i ' Vy i'-:uv-vous pas a on/e heures? 
 
 Je n'y t-tai.s pa-, li \v.. ( :: -es gateaux sont a peine aussi 
 
 bons que ceux ! marchands, et ils sont beaucoup plus petits. 
 
 Do your scholars like to learn by heart? They do not like to 
 
 learn by hrart : they like reading and writing better than learning 
 
 by heart. I'" you like cider better than wine? I like wine better 
 
 than cider. Does your brother like to play? lie likes to study 
 
 better than to play. Do you like veal better than mutton? I like 
 
 the ! T than the former for breakfast ; but I like the former 
 
 butter than the latter for dinner. Do you like to drink better than to 
 
 ; than to drink; but my uncle likes to drink 
 
 r than to < durum like fowl better than ii^h ? 
 
 He likes iish better than fowl. Do yon like to write better than to 
 
 ikl I like to do both. Do you like honey (miel) better than 
 
 like neither. Does your father like coffee better than tea ? 
 
 He i 
 
 von understand me? No, Sir, for you speak too fast. Will 
 you be kind enough (avoir la bonte de ne pas, $ 171 7) not to speak 
 so faust? I will not speak so fast, if you will listen to me. I am 
 ready to li>!en. Can you understand what my brother tells you in 
 French' li- : that I cannot understand him. Can 
 
 your pupils understand you f They understand me when I speak 
 .'. ly; for in order to be understood one must speak slowly. Is it 
 necessary to speak aloud to learn French ? It is necessary to speak 
 aloud. Does your master speak aloud ? He does speak aloud and 
 ef'.ow. Why do you not buy anything of that merchant? He sells 
 so dear that I cannot buy anything of him. Will you take me to 
 another? I will take you to the son of the one from whom you 
 bought last year, (I'annec passee.) Does he sell as dear as this one? 
 He sells cheaper. Do your children like learning Italian better than 
 Spanish ? They do not like to learn either; they only like to learn 
 French. Do you like mutton ? I like beef better than mutton. Do 
 your children like cake better than bread ? They like both. Has 
 Le read all the books which he bought? He bought so many (tant) 
 that he cannot read them. Do you wish to write some exercises? 
 I Ixa/e written so many that I cannot write any more. Why does 
 that lad run away so fast? Will any one touch him? hu: ! t him? 
 
266 
 
 FIFTY-SECONE LESSON. (!.} 
 
 No one will hurt him ; but he will be punished by his master for nd 
 having (pour ne pas avoir) done his task. (} 171 7.) 
 
 FIFTY-SECOND LESSON, 52d.Cinquantc-deuxitmc Lecon, 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec, 
 
 y the side of. By. 
 To pass by the side of some one. 
 I have passed by the side of you. 
 Have you passed by the side of my 
 
 broth 
 I have paayd by the side of him. 
 
 Obs. 119. Pn jio.-itions formed with a, au, or aux, and a noun, 
 the preposition dc after them ; almost all others require none. 
 
 A cote de. 
 
 Passer a cote de c uelqu'un. 
 
 J'ai passe a cote de vous. 
 
 A\V/.-YOUS passe a cote de men frere 3 
 
 i J'ai >;e de lui. 
 
 To pass by a place. 
 1 have passed by the theatre. 
 He has passed by the castle. 
 You have passed before my \v;ur- 
 house, ll'hich tray did they pass? 
 To dare. 
 
 I dare not go thither. 
 He dares not do it. 
 I did not dare to tell him so. 
 To make use of, to use. Used, use it 
 
 Do you use my copy-book ? 
 
 1 do use it. 
 
 Does your father use it ? 
 
 He does use it. 
 
 Have you used my gun ? 
 
 I have used it. 
 
 They have used your books. 
 
 They have used them. 
 
 To instruct, instructed, instruct. 
 
 I instruct, thou instructest, he in- 
 structs. 
 
 To teach. 
 
 To teach some one something. 
 
 He teaches me arithmetic. 
 
 I teach you French. 
 have taught him French. 
 
 To teach some one (how) to do some- 
 thing. 
 
 Ho teaches me (how) to read. 
 
 Vou teach them (.how) to write. 
 
 t Passer aiipres d'un cndroil. 
 t J'ai passe aup: :rc. 
 
 t II a passe aupres du chateau. 
 Vous avez passe" devant mon 
 
 sin. Par ou ont-ils passe ? 
 Oser, 1, (point de preposition.) 
 Jc n'ose pas y aller. 
 11 n'ose pas le faire. 
 Je n';; lui dire. 
 
 Se ftrvir,* 2, dc, (50 2 ) servi, serve* 
 
 vous-en. 
 
 Vous servez-vous de mon cahier f 
 Je m'en sers. 
 Votre pere s'en sert-il ? 
 II s'en sert. 
 
 Vous etes-vous servi de mon fusil ? 
 Je m'en suis servi. 
 Us se sont servis de vos livres. 
 Us s'en sont servis. 
 Instruire* 4, instruit, instruisez. 
 J'instruis, tu instruis, il instruu 
 
 Enseigner, 1. Apprendrc.* 4. 
 Enseigster quelque chose a quelqti u 
 II m'enseigne le calcul. 
 Je vous enseigne le Francois. 
 Je lui ai enseigne* le Fran^ais. 
 Apprendre a quelqu'un a faire qui^ 
 
 que chose, ou Enscig^er a .... 
 II m'apprend a lire. 
 Vous leur apprenez a ccrire. 
 
FIFT Y-SECO N D LESSON. (2.) 207 
 
 CiNQUANTi:-i>r.i XII.MK Tnfi.ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Pai ou avez-vous passe pour venir chez nous? J'ai [)asse auprea 
 
 <?u pout de fer, du quai Buena Vista, et du musee. Yous avez done 
 
 fait un grand tour, (taken a long walk.') Oui, j'aime a me promenei, 
 
 et j'aime mieux me promener de bonne heure qu'a midi. Youa 
 
 <m ; il ne fait pas si chaud alors. CVst pour cela que je le 
 
 is servez-vous de votre parapluie ? Non, je ne m'en sera 
 
 I'renez-le. Servez-vous en. Merci. De rien. Avcz-voua 
 
 rencontre le neveu de Pepicier? Non, mais j'ai passe a cote do 
 
 celui de Papothicaire. Que vous a-t-il dit? Rien. Je Pai aper<ju ; 
 
 - il ne m'a pas aperc.u, de sorte que nous avons passe a cote 
 Pun de Pautre sans nous parler. Avez-vous dit a votre cousin ce 
 
 :i a dit de lui ? Je n ; ai pas ose. Pourquoi n 7 avez-vous pas ose ? 
 je ne sais pas exactement pourquoi je n'ai pas ose ; mais je ne le 
 lui ai pas dit. Ne le lui direz-vous pas? Pourquoi lui dire ? Cela 
 
 :a pas plaisir. 
 
 t your new booi found? They have been found. 
 
 WL< 1. Is my eoat on the bed? It is under it. 
 
 your brother's stockings under the bed? They are upon it. 
 Have I been seen by anybody? You have been seen by nobody. 
 Have you pa cd by anybody? I have passed by you, and you did 
 not see me. Has anybody passed by you ? Nobody has passed by 
 me. Where has your son passed? He has passed by the theatre. 
 Shall you pass by the castle? I shall pass there. Why have you 
 not cleaned my trunk? I was afraid to soil my fingers. Has my 
 broti ant cleaned his master's guns? He has cleaned them. 
 
 he not been afraid to soil his fingers? He has not been afraid 
 to soil them, because his fingers are never clean, (propre.) Do yon 
 
 the books which I have lent you? I do use them. May I 
 ( pm*-jc) use your knife ? Thou mayest use it, but thou must not 
 cut thyself, no* spoil the knife. May my brothers use your books? 
 They may use them. May we use your gun"? You may use it, 
 but you must not spoil it. What have you done with my wood? 
 I have used it to warm myself. Has your father used my horse 1 
 He has used it. Have our neighbors used our clothes ? They have 
 not used them, because they did not want them. Who has ;:sej 
 my hat ? Nobody has used it, for nobody has dared use it. 
 
 VocAnrr.Air.K. -de Sec. 
 
 rciH-li master, (meaning the Le mattre de Francois. 
 ' r of the French lang;: 
 
 The Fr.'-nr.i master, (a Frenchman, Le maitre Francois, 
 whatever he teaches.) 
 
268 
 
 FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 
 
 To shave, to shave onts self. 
 
 To get shaved. 
 
 To dress, to undress. 
 
 To dress one's self. 
 
 To undress one's self. 
 
 Have you dressed yourself? 
 
 I have not yet dressed myself. 
 
 Have you dressed the child V 
 
 I have dressed it. 
 
 To undo, undone, undo. 
 
 To get rid of. 
 
 Arc you getting rid of your damaged 
 
 sugar ? 
 
 I am getting rid of it. 
 Did you get rid of your old ship ? 
 
 i did get rid of it. 
 
 To part with. 
 
 The design, the intention. 
 
 To intend, to have the intention of. 
 
 I intend to go thither. 
 
 We have the intention to do it. 
 
 Do you intend to part with your 
 
 horses ? 
 
 i have already parted with thorn. 
 He has parted with his gun. 
 Have you parted with (discharged) 
 
 your servant ? 
 
 I have parted with (discharged) him. 
 To get rid of some one. 
 I did get rid of him. 
 Did your father get rid of that man ? 
 
 He did get rid of him. 
 
 ClNQUAXTE-DEUXlilME 
 
 Vous etes seul ; vous vous etes enfin debarrasse de ce vaurien. Je 
 m'en suis enfin debarrasse. Pourquoi votre pere s'est-il defait de sea 
 chevaux? S'en est-il defait ? N'en savez-vous rien? Je n'en ai 
 pas entendu parler. Le maitre de Franeais vient ce matin, n'est-ce 
 pas? O'est son jour, du moins, et je pense qu'il viendra. Serez- 
 vous pret lorsqu'il arrivera? J ? ai a me raser et a m'habiller, cai 
 vous voyez que je ne suis ni rase ni habille. Eh bien ! rasez-voua 
 t habillez-vous. Qu'est-ee qui vous en empeche ? Rien ne m'eu 
 empeche, et je vais dans mon appartement pour cela. Appelez- 
 moi, s'il vient avant mon retour. Je Vy manquerai pas. Guillaumcv 
 
 Raser, 1, se raser, rasez-voui. 
 
 t Se faire raser. 
 
 Habiller, 1. Deshabiller, 1. 
 
 S'habiller, 1. 
 
 Se deshabiller, 1. 
 
 Vous etes-vous habille ? 
 
 Je ne me suis pas encore habille*. 
 
 Avez-vous habille 1'enfant ? 
 
 Je 1'ai habille. 
 
 Defaire,* 4, ddfal% defailee 
 
 (comme faire, 25 1 , 27 1 .) 
 Se dtfaire* de. 
 Vous- deTaites-vous de votre sucr 
 
 avaric ? 
 
 Je m'en defais. 
 Vous etes-vous defait de votre f iemt 
 
 vaisseau ? 
 
 Je m'en suis defait. 
 t Se defaire* de. 
 Le dessein. 
 
 Avoir dessein, (de avant un iniini./ 
 J'ai dessein d'y aller. 
 Nous avons dessein de le faire. 
 Avez-vous dessein de vous defaire 
 
 de vos chevaux ? 
 Je m'en suis dej a defait. 
 II s'est defait de son fusil. 
 Vous etes-vous defait de votre do 
 
 mestique ? 
 Je m'en suis defait. 
 Se debarrasser de quelqu^un. 
 Je me suis ddbarrasse de lui. 
 Votre pere s'est- il debarrass5 do cot 
 
 homme ? 
 II s'en est debarrasse. 
 
 2de Sec. 
 
FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 209 
 
 qu avez-vous dessein de faii*e de votre fusil Anglais ? Le maitre 
 Francais m ? a prie de (has asked me to) le lui preter. Allez-voua 
 le lui porter ? Pendant qu'il s'habille et se rase, il a envoye ce petit 
 garden, pour le chercher, (get it.) Allez-vous le confier a ce petit 
 gallon ? Croyez-vous qu'il le gatera? J'en ai peur. Alors je ferai 
 mieux de le lui porter moi-meme. 
 
 Have you shaved to-day? I have shaved. Has your brothel 
 shaved? He has not shaved himself, but he got shaved. Do you 
 shave often ? I shave every morning, and sometimes also in the 
 evening. When do you shave in the evening? When I do not 
 dine at home. How many times a day does your father shave ? 
 He shaves only once a day, but my uncle shaves twice a day. 
 Does your cousin shave often ? He shaves only every other day, 
 (de deux jours Tim.) At what o'clock do you dress in the morning? 
 1 dress as soon as 1 have breakfasted, and I breakfast every day at 
 eiidit o ? clock, or' at a quarter past eight. Does your neighbor dress 
 before he breakfasts? He breakfasts before he dresses. At what 
 o'clock in the evening dost thou undress ? I undress as soon as I 
 return from the theatre. 
 
 Dost thou go to the theatre every evening? I do riot go every 
 evening, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. At what 
 o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre ? 
 I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten 
 o'clock. Have you already dressed the child? I have not dressed 
 it yet, for it is still asleep, (dort encore.} Did you at last get rid of 
 that man ? I did get rid of him. Why has your father parted with 
 his horses? Because he did not want them any more. Has your 
 merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged sugar ? He 
 has succeeded in getting rid of it. Has he sold it on credit ? He wag 
 able to sell it for cash, so that he did hot sell it on credit. Who has 
 taught you how to read ? I have learned it with (chez) a French 
 master. Has he taught you to write ? He has taught me to read 
 and to write. 
 
 VOCABULAIEE. 3me Sec. 
 
 To wake. 
 
 To awake. 
 
 I generally awake at six o'clock in 
 
 the morning. 
 My servant generally -wakes me at 
 
 eix o'clock in the morning. 
 
 fiveiller, 1. Reveiller, 1. 
 
 S'eveillerj 1. Se riveiller. 
 
 Je m'eveille ordinairement a su 
 
 heures du matin. 
 Mon domeetique m'eveille ordinaire 
 
 ment a six heir es du matin. 
 
270 
 
 FIFTY-SECONI LESSON. (3.) 
 
 \ slight noise vakes me. 
 
 A. dream Las waked me. 
 
 J do not make a noise, in order not to 
 wake him. 
 
 A dream. 
 
 Generally. 
 
 To come, or go down. 
 
 To alight irom one's horse, to dis- 
 mount. 
 
 To conduct one's self. Behave well. 
 
 To behave. 
 
 i conduct myself well. 
 
 How does he conduct himself? 
 
 Towards. 
 
 Ho behaves ill towards that man. 
 
 lie lias behaved ill towards me. 
 
 To be worf.li while to. 
 
 Is it worth while to ? 
 
 It is worth while. 
 
 I:* it worth while to do it ? 
 
 It is not worth while. 
 
 Is it worth while to write to him ( 
 
 It is worth nothing. 
 
 Is it better? It is better. 
 
 Will it be better? It will. 
 
 It is better to do this than that. 
 
 It is better to stay here than go a 
 
 walking. 
 
 Un bruit Icger me revsille 
 
 Un songe m'a reveille. 
 
 Je ne fais pas de uruit, pour nn pas It 
 
 reveiller. ($ 1717.; 
 Un songe, un reve. 
 Ordinairement. 
 
 Descendre, 4, descendu, duacondes 
 Descendre de cheval. 
 
 Se conduire,* 4. ConduLstz-voni 
 
 bien. 
 
 Se comport cr, 1. 
 Je me conduis bien. 
 Comment se conduit-il ? 
 Enters or vers. 
 
 II se comporte mal en vers cet horn me. 
 II s'est mal comporte nivers moi 
 t Valoir la peine de. 
 t Vaut-il la peine de . . . . 
 t Cela en vaut la peine. ($ . 
 t Vaut-il la peine de le faire ? 
 t Cela n'en vaut pas la peine. 
 t Cela vaut-il la peine de lui 
 t Est-ce la peine de lui ecrire ? 
 t Cela ne vaut rien. (39-.) 
 t Vaut-il mieux? 11 vaut mieux. 
 t Vaudra-t-il micux ? II vaudra 
 
 mieux. 
 t II vaut mieux fairc ceci quo de faire 
 
 cela. 
 t II vaut mieux rester ici que de so 
 
 promener. 
 
 ClNQUARTE-DEUXIEME TH&ME. 3mC See. 
 
 Vous etes descendu seul. N'avez-vous pas dit a votre frere de 
 descendre? Non, je n'ai pas ose le lui dire. Pourquoi n'avez- 
 vous pas ose ? Parce qu'il do.t. Ne 1'avez-vous pas reveille ? Non, 
 en vt'rile. Je n'ai pas ose. Et pourquoi done? II est temps de se 
 lever, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, sans doute ; mais il m'a dit de ne jamais 
 ( 171 7) peveiller quand il dort. Et si vous Peveillez, qa ? arri- 
 vera-t-il ? 11 me battra. Est-il assez mechant pour le faire 1 II le 
 fait quand cela lui convient. Qui a appris le calcul a votro petit 
 fiere? Un maitre Francais le lui a enseigne. M 7 appelez-vous ? 
 Je vous appelle. Que vous plait-il? Pourquoi ne vous levez-voua 
 pas? Ne savez-vous pas qu'il est deja tard? Que me demandez- 
 vous? (40 1 .) J : ai perdu tout mon argent, et je viens vous frier (k 
 
FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 271 
 
 (be::) m'en preler. Quelle heure cst-il ? II est deja six heures ot 
 on quart, et vous ave/. assez dormi. Y a-t-il long-temps que voua 
 etes leve ' II y a une heure et demie que je le suis. Voulez-vous 
 faire un tour avec moi ? Je ne peux pas aller faire un tour, car j'at 
 tends mou niaiire de Fra:. 
 
 Do you rise a- 1 .' I do not know at what o'clock yon 
 
 as soon as I awake. Will you tell my servant to 
 
 wake me to-morrow, at four o'clock ] 1 will tell him. Why have 
 
 you risen so early? My children have made such a (to de) noise 
 
 that they wakened me, and hindered me from sleeping. Have you 
 
 blept well ? 1 have not slept well, for the dogs have made so much 
 
 ', and barked so loud, that I have not been able to sleep. At 
 
 what o'clock did the good captain awake? He awoke, as usual, at 
 
 :;ve in the mor:. 
 
 did my child behave.' He behaved very well. How did 
 
 I'rotherbr. He behaved very well towards 
 
 ; towards everybody. Is it worth while to 
 
 write to that man? It ith while to write to him. Is it 
 
 worth while to dismount from my horse to buy a cake? It is not 
 worth while, for it is not long since you ate. Is it worth while to 
 ill -mount from my horse to give something to that poor man? He 
 seems (parait) to want it; but you can give him something without 
 Counting from your horse. Is it better to go to the theatre than 
 to study ? It is better to do the latter than the former, (ccci que 
 cela.) 1 Is it better to learn to read French than to speak it? It is 
 not worth while to learn to read it without learning to speak it. Is 
 it better to go to bed than to go a walking? It is better to do tho 
 latter than the former. Is it better to go to France than to Germany? 
 It is not worth while to go to France or to Germany when, one has 
 no wish to travel. 
 
 FIFTY-THIRD LESSON, 53d. Cinquante-troisiemc Lec^on, 53mc. 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 To hop f, c.i _ Hope ever. I Esperer. ($ 144 5.) Espereziou']ouis. 
 
 r hjpe t tJwuhopest, he hopes, one hopes. Tespcre, tu csperes, ii espere, o\ 
 
 espere. 
 
 1 When latter and former apply to actions, translate by : ceci and cela , 
 oot by : cclm-ci and celui-ld, which refer only to definite nouns or object 
 *38, N. 5.) 
 
272 
 
 FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Do you hope ? We no longer hope. 
 
 To yield. To sell, (as a favor granted.) 1 
 I yield, thou yieldest, he yields, one 
 
 yields. 
 Will you sell me your horse ? (or, I 
 
 wish yDu would sell me, &c.) 
 I will, Ic oblige you. 
 Do you expect to find him there ? 
 I do expect it. 
 
 To change, (meaning, to exchange.) 
 To change one thing for another. 
 
 I change my hat for his, or 
 
 We exchange scats. 
 
 To change, (meaning, to put <*/. .th<r 
 
 things.) 
 
 Do you change your hat.? 
 I do change it. 
 He changes his linen. 
 They change their clothes. 
 To mix, amott", amongst. 
 I mix among the mm. 
 He mixes among the soldiers. 
 To rtct^ninc or to acknowli-. 
 
 Esperez-vjus ? Nous n'e^uoni 
 
 plus. 
 
 Cider, 1. ($144-5.) 
 Je cede, tu cedes, il cede, on cede. 
 
 Voulez-vousme ceder votre chevall 
 
 Do you recognise that man ? 
 
 It is so long since I saw him that 1 
 
 do not recollect him. 
 I have more bread than 1 can eat. 
 
 Je vous le cedtrai pour voua cl 
 
 Esperez-vous 1'y trouver ? 
 
 Je 1'espcre. 
 
 Changer, 1, (contre, pour, de.) 
 
 Changer quelque chose contre qucl- 
 
 que chose. 
 
 .isje mon chapeau pour le sien. 
 Nous changeons d 
 Changer, 1, (take.- a sub- 
 
 stantive.) 
 
 t Changez-vous de chapeau I 
 t J'en change. 
 t II change de linge. 
 t Us changent (/'habits. 
 t Se miler, 1, parmi. 
 
 t Je me mele parmi les homines. 
 t 11 ee mele parmi les soldats. 
 Reconnoitre,* 4. lieconnaissez, iuipe j 
 
 (comme Connaitrc, L'5 1 , 33 l .) 
 Reconnaissez-vous cet homme ? 
 II y a si long-temps que je ne 1'ai vu 
 
 que je ne le reconnais plus. 
 J'ai plus de pain que je n' en puif 
 
 manger. 
 
 Ols. 120. When there is a comparison between two sentences, the verb 
 which follows plus or moins, requires the negative ne. (49*, 06s. 114.) 
 
 That man has more money than he 
 
 will spend. 
 
 There is more wine than is necessary. 
 You have more money than you 
 
 want. 
 
 Cet homme a plus d'argent qu'il 
 
 n'en de'pensera. 
 
 II y a plus de vin qu'il n j en faut. 
 Vous avez plus d'argent qu'il ne voub 
 
 en faut. 
 
 ClNQUANTE-TROISI^ME TillblE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Fourquoi n'otez-vous pas votre chapeau lorsque vous etes dans la 
 pnaison ? Farce que je suis accoulume a le garder. Si vous changez 
 de cheval avec Pierre, (Peter,) esperez-vous en avoir un meilleur ? Je 
 ne sais pas si le sien vaut mieux que le mien ; mais je sais qir.'l est 
 plus joli, eto'est pour cela que je veux changer avec lui. II no vuui 
 
 1 To give up, (as a favor, in order to oblige.; 
 
MFTY- THIRD LESbON. (2.) 273 
 
 pas la peine (Ten changer, ear le sien ne vaut rien. Ou est Pierre \ 
 
 mele avec ces vauriens qui jouent tant aux cartes. (51 1 .) Est-il 
 
 .^e? II Test beaucoup; de sorte que vous le reconnaitrez a 
 
 peine quand vous le verrez. J r espere qu'il se conduira mieux lors- 
 
 que son pere sera revenu. Je Pespere aussi. II a peurde son pere. 
 
 ex-vous qu'il ne se melera plus avec ces vauriens? II n'osera 
 
 -3 meler avec e usavez plusdemiel qu'il ne vous 
 
 en faut, yespere que vous m'en cederez un peu. Oui, volontiers; je 
 
 en ceder antant que vous en voudrez. 
 
 Do you liope to receive a note to-day ? I hope to receive Jne. 
 
 i ((/f) whom ? From a friend of mine. What dost thou hop % ] 
 
 I hope to see my parents to-day, for my tutor has promised me to 
 
 take I -in. Does your friend hope to receive anything'? Ho 
 
 hope- :or he has worked well. Do you hope 
 
 to arrive early in Paris ? We hope to arrive there at a quarter past 
 
 .t, for our 1 LT for us this evening. Do you expect 
 
 home? \ it. For what have you ex- 
 
 Obs. 55.) coach, of which you have just spoken to 
 
 me? 1 1 .mged it for a fine Arabian (26 1 ) horse. Do you 
 
 xchange your book for mine ? I cannot, for I want it to 
 
 stini Why do you take your hat oil ? I take it oil because 
 
 my old master coming, (jc vois rcniY.) 
 
 ui know why that man does not eat? I believe he is not 
 hungry, for he has more bread than he can eat. Have you given 
 any money ? I have given him more than lie will spend. 
 Will B glass of cider? You need not drink cider, for 
 
 there is more wine than is necessary. Am I to sell my gun in order 
 to buy a new hat ? You need not sell it, for you have more money 
 than you want. Do you wish to speak to the shoemaker? I do not 
 wish to speak to him, for we have more shoes than we want. Why 
 do the French rejoice ? They rejoice because they flatter them- 
 es they have many good friends. Are they not right in rejoicing, 
 (de se rejouir?) They are wrong, for they have fewer friends than 
 they imagine. Did you recognise your cousin when you met him 
 at the wire bridge ? No, he has changed so much that I did not 
 recognise him at all. Did he recognise you? Instantly. He sayg 
 I have not changed at all. How long ha? your nephew had this 
 preity little bird ? He ha* had it long. It has been given to him by 
 * Greek merchant. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2(le Sec. 
 
 That man has fewer friends than he j Get hormne a moins d'amis qu'il nr 
 imagines. pense. 
 
274 
 
 FIFTY-THIRD LESSON, (2,) 
 
 To fancy. 
 
 To think. 
 
 To earn, to gain, to get. 
 
 Has your father already started ? 
 
 Me is ready to depart. 
 
 To make one s self ready. 
 
 To keep one's self ready. 
 
 To split. 
 
 To break somebody's heart. 
 
 You break that man's heart. 
 
 Whose heart do I break ? 
 
 These fine eyes will break more than 
 
 one heart 
 
 T0 spill, spread. To spread. 
 To expatiate, to lay stress upon. 
 I'hiU man is always expatiating upon 
 that subject. 
 The subject. 
 
 To stretch one's self along the floor. 
 To hang to, on or upon. 
 The wall. The garden wall. 
 1 hang my coat on the wall. 
 Ho hangs his hat upon the tree. 
 We hang our shoes upon the nails. 
 The thief has been hanged. 
 Who hung the basket on the tree ? 
 The thief. The robber. 
 The highwayman. The robber. 
 
 You are always studious, and will 
 always be so. 
 
 S : imaginer, 1. 
 
 Penser, 1. 
 
 Gagner, 1. 
 
 Votre pere cst-il deja parti ? (19 8 .) 
 
 II est pret d partir. (19 8 .") 
 
 Sepreparer, 1. 
 
 Se tenir* pret. 
 
 Fendre, 4. 
 
 Fendre le cozur d quelqu'un. 
 
 Vous fendez le coeur a cet homme. 
 
 A qui est-ce que je fends Je coeur ? 
 
 Ces beaux yeux fendront plus d'un 
 
 CGEUr. 
 
 Repandrc, 4. fctrndre, 4. 
 
 S'ctendre sur. 
 
 Cet hommc s'etend toujours sur ce 
 
 sujet. 
 Le sujet. 
 
 S'etendre sur le planchcr. 
 Pendre, 4, d ou sur. 
 Le mur. Le mur du jardin. 
 Je pends mon habit au mur. 
 II pend son chapeau a 1'arbre. 
 Nous pendons nos souliers aux clone, 
 Le voleur a 6l6 pendu. 
 Qui a pendu le panier a 1'arbre ? 
 Le voleur. 
 Le brigand, le voleur de grand che- 
 
 min. 
 Vous etes toujours studieux, et vous 
 
 le serez toujours. 
 
 Obs. 121. The personal pronouns are almost always repeated in French 
 before every verb of which they are the nominative case, whether they are 
 repeated in English or no f ; but when they are not in the nominative case 
 they must always be repeated. Ex. 
 
 Votre frere est toujours sage, et il le 
 
 sera toujours. 
 
 Un fils bien eleve ne cause jamais 
 de chagrin a son pere ; il Z'aime, 
 Z'honore, et le respecte. 
 Avait-il ? II avait. II ne 1'avait pas. 
 Saviez-vous? Je savais. Je ne 
 
 Your brother is, and will always be 
 good.' 
 
 A well-educated son never causes 
 his father any grief; he loves, hon- 
 ors, and respects him. 
 
 Had he ? He had. He had not got it. 
 
 Did you know ? I did know. I did 
 net. 
 
 savais pas. 
 
 ClNQUANTE-TROISliME TH^ME. 2(le Sec. 
 
 Saviez-vous que votre oncle est ici ? Je ne le savais pas. Ne lo 
 eanez-vous pas vraiment 7 ? Non ; je vous assure que je ne le savais 
 pas. Quand est-il arrive ? Hier soir. Je serai bien aise de le voir. 
 
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (I.) 275 
 
 A.-1 il encore le^ memes habits, ou en a-t-il change ? 11 eu a change- 
 II a un bel habit bleu an lieu du vieux brun qifil avait. Pourquo* . 
 vous en allez-vous si tot ? Ne vous amusez-vous pas ici ? Vous vous 
 trompez si vous pensez que je ne m'amuse pas ici; car, je vous 
 assure que je trouve beaucoup de plaisir a causer (converse) aveo 
 vous. Pourquoi vous en allez-vous done ? Je croyais que vous le 
 saviez. Qu'est-ce ? On m'atterid (I am expected) au concert d'un 
 de mes parents. II doit commencer a neuf heures, et vous voyex 
 qu'il est neuf heures moins un quart. Je ne savais pas cela. Adieu 
 
 Are you ready to depart with me? I am so. Does your uncle 
 depart with us? He departs with us if he pleases, (s't'J le vent.') 
 Will yon to!l him to be ready to start to-morrow at six o'clock in the 
 ' I will tell him so. Is this young man ready to go out? 
 Not yet, but he will soon be ready. Why have they hanged that 
 man .' They have hanged him because he has killed somebody. 
 Have ttmy hmnged the man who stole (38 2 ) a horse from your 
 brother * They have punished him, but they have not hanged him . 
 they hang only highwaymen in our country. What have you done 
 with my coat '. 1 have hanged it on the wall. Will yon hang my 
 hat upon the tree ? I will hang it thereon. 
 
 1 lave you not seen my shoes ? I found them under your bed, and 
 have hanged them upon the nails. Has the thief who stole your 
 j^nn been hanged? He has been punished, but he has not been 
 hanged. Why do you expatiate so much upon that subject? Be- 
 cause it is necessary to speak upon all subjects. If it is necessary 
 to (s'il faut) listen to you, and to answer you when you- expatiate 
 iipon that subject, I wiU hang my hat upon the nail, (repeat the pro- 
 noun je before each verb,) stretch myself along the sofa, listen to 
 you, and answer you as well as I can. You will do well. Your 
 nephew learns French, does he not? To be sure. How long haa 
 he been learning it? These five months. Does he know as much 
 as you ? He knows more than I. I thought you knew more than 
 he. You made mistake. He has been learning it longer than I. 
 
 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON, 54th. Cinquante-quati iime Lecon, 54?nd 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 To be well. 
 How do you do ? 
 I am well. 
 
 t Se porter Hen. 
 
 t Comment vous porte 
 
 t Je me porte bien. 
 
 . 122. The verbs to le and to do, are both expressed in French by tha 
 
270 
 
 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 reflective verb se porter, when they are used in English to inquire ufter, 61 
 to speak of a person's health. 
 
 How is your father ? I Comment se porte monsieur votre 
 
 I pere ? 
 
 Obs. 123. The qualifications of monsieur, Mr. ; madame, Mrs. ; made- 
 moiselle, Miss; usually precede the possessive pronouns in French, when 
 wo speak to a person respecting his parents, relations, or friends, and wish 
 to pay them some respect. 
 
 He is ill. 
 Your brother. 
 Your cousin. 
 Your brothers. 
 
 Obg. 124. It may be seen '.hat the plural of monsieur 
 being changed into mes. 
 
 YDiir uncles. 
 
 To doult a thing. 
 
 To ifui-stiun. anything. 
 
 Do you doubt that ? I do. 
 
 I do not doubt it. 
 
 I make no question, have no doubt 
 
 II se porte mal. 
 t Monsieur votre frere. 
 t Monsieur votre cousin, 
 t Messieurs vos freres. 
 
 | t Messieurs vos oncles. 
 > Doutcr, 1, de quelque chose. 
 Doutez-vous de cela? J'en douto. 
 
 of it. 
 
 What do you doubt ? 
 [ doubt what that man lias told inc. 
 
 Thr doubt. Without doubt, no doubt. 
 To agree to ti thing. 
 
 Do you agree to that ? 
 
 I do agree to it. 
 
 How much have you paid for that 
 
 hat ? 
 1 have paid three crowns/0r it. 
 
 06s. 125. When one of the prepositions, for, at, is used in English tc 
 expresi the price of a thing, it is not rendered in French. (40 1 , Obs. 93.) 
 
 Jc n'cn doute pas. 
 
 De quoi doutez-vous ? 
 
 Je doute de ce que cet homme m'u 
 
 dit. 
 
 Lc doute. Sans doute. 
 
 Convenir,* 2, de quelque chose, (con 
 
 jugated like its primitive, vcnir.*, 
 Convenez-vous de cela ? 
 Pen conviens. 
 t Combien avez-vous paye* ce cha- 
 
 peau? 
 t Je 1'ai pave trois e'cus. 
 
 I bought this wine at 6 dollars a bas- 
 ket. ($ 7.) 
 I bought some at $10 a basket. 
 
 J'ai achete ce vin 6 dollars le panier. 
 
 (ou a 6 dollars.) 
 Pen ai achete a $10 le panier. 
 
 CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME TidhiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Ou est M. votre oncle ? II voyage. Y a-t-il long-temps qu'il voy- 
 age? II y a deja quelques mois. Se porte-t-il bien? Oui, il so 
 porte beaucoup mieux depuis qu'il voyage. Quepense-t-il de FEu- 
 rope ? Quelques pays lui plaisent ; d ? autres ne lui plaisent pas. 
 A-t-il ete en France ? Oui, il y est passe ; mais comme il ne pane 
 pas le Frangais, il ne Faime pas beaucoup. Comment ! M. votro 
 
FIFl Y-fOURTH LESSON. (2.) 277 
 
 oncle ne parle pas Fran^ais! Non, il ne Pa jamais appris. Com 
 ment se porte-t-on chez vous l Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Et 
 chez M. votre neveu ? Le domestique dit qu'on y est malade. Qui 
 y est malade? Je ne sais pas. Comme j'ai Tintention d'y aller, ja 
 n'ai rien demande au domestique. Je doute de ce que ce valet dit. 
 Je ne le crois pas toujours. Ou avez-vous achete ce joli baton ? Le 
 trouvez-vous joli? Oui, charmant. Combien 1'avez-vous paye ? Je 
 n'oii ai donne que trois quarts de gourdes, (dollars.) Ce n'est pas 
 cher. Etes vous convenu d'aller demain a Burlington ? J'en suie 
 convenu. Prenez de notre vin a Si 2 le panier. J'en prendrai. 
 
 How is your father? (Monsieur votre perc ?) He is (only) so so. (35 1 .) 
 How is your patient? He is a little better to-day than yesterday. 
 Is it long since you saw your brothers ? (Messieurs vos freres ?) I 
 them two days ago. How art thou? I am tolerably well. 
 How Long Las your cousin been learning French? lie has been 
 learning it only eight months. Does he already speak it? He 
 already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your brother, who 
 has been learning it those two years. Is it long since you heard of 
 my uiicK' ? It is hardly a fortnight (<piinze jours) since I heard of 
 him. Where is lie .-laying now? He is staying at Berlin, but my 
 fathr ;don. Did you stay long at Vienna? I stayed there 
 
 a fortnight. How long did your cousin stay at Paris? He stayed 
 there only a month. 
 
 Has your uncle at last bought the garden ? He has not bought it, 
 tor he could not agree about the price. Have you at last agreed 
 about the price of that picture ? We have agreed about it. How 
 much hive you paid for it? I have paid fifteen hundred francs foi 
 it. What hast thou bought to-day ? I have bought two fine horses, 
 three beautiful pictures, and a fine gun. For how much hast thou 
 bought the pictures? I have bought them for seven hundred francs. 
 Do you find them dear? I do not find them dear. How much 
 nave you spent, then ? I have spent arid paid nearly four thousand 
 francs. How many dollars (gourdes) is that ? About 800. It is a 
 good deal of money. Have you already heard of your cousin who 
 is gone to Hungary ? He had agreed to write to me, but he has .^ot 
 yet done it; however, I have written to him. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2dc Sec. 
 
 The price. 
 
 Have you agreed about the price ? 
 We have agreed about it. 
 About what have you agreed ? 
 About the pric* 
 
 Le prix. 
 
 iStes-vous convenus du prix ? 
 Nous en sommes convenus. 
 De quoi etes-vous convenus ? 
 Du prix. 
 
278 
 
 FIFTY -FOUIITH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 To agret, lo compose difference. 
 To feel, feeling. Felt, feel. 
 Do you feel ? We do not. 
 I feel, thou feelest, he feels. 
 To consent, to agree lo . . . 
 
 I consent to go thither. 
 
 To wear (garments.) The garment. 
 
 Wliat garments does he wear ? 
 
 Tie wears beautiful garments. 
 
 Against my custom. 
 
 As customary. 
 
 My partner. 
 
 To observe sonMhinj. 
 
 To take nohc< of yuan f} t in: r . 
 
 Do you take notice of that ? 
 
 I do take notice of it. 
 
 Did you observe that ? 
 
 Did you notice what he did ? 
 
 I did notice it. 
 
 To expect, (to hope for.) 
 
 What do you expect ? (hope for ?) 
 
 Do you expect to receive a n<> 
 
 your uncle ? 
 I expert ir. I do not. 
 He expects it. 
 We expect it. 
 Have we expected it. 
 We have expected it ? 
 To get, (meaning to procure.) 
 
 I cannot procure any money. 
 
 He cannot procure anything to eat. 
 
 ClNQUANTE-QUATRIEME Tn^ME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Quefque chose ne vns plait pas. C'est vrai. Je nr attends & 
 recevolr un present, et il ne vient pas. Ne soy ez pas (41 2 ) impa- 
 tient, il viendra, si on vous Pa promis. Qui vous fait ce don? Lo 
 secretaire du general m-en a promis un. Le cousin de Papothi- 
 caire a-t-il consenti a vous ceder son dictionnaire Anglais et Franrais ? 
 fl n 7 y a pas encore consenti. Y consentira-t-il ? J'espere qu'il y 
 oonsentira. Qu'allez-vous porter ce printemps? Je n'ai pas encore 
 fait de choix. Je ne sais pas ce que je porterai. Moi, je porterai 
 des habits fonces au printemps, et quelque chose de clair en 
 N'aviez-vous pas un surtout clair Phiver passe? Si fait. J'rm ai 
 porte un tout Phiver Je le croyais. Moi ; je ne les aime plus claira 
 
 S'accordcr, 1. 
 
 Sentir* 2, scnlant. Senti, sentet. 
 Sentez-vous ? Nous ne sentonapao 
 Je sens, tu sens, il sent. 
 Consentir,* 2, (commc sentirf) (d 
 
 ou de av. 1'infin., a av. un nora.) 
 Je consens a (d'y) aller. 
 Porter, 1, (des habits.) Lo vetumont. 
 Quels vetemcnts porte-t-il? 
 II porte de beaux vetements. 
 Centre mon ordinaire. 
 Comme a Pordinaire. 
 Mon associd. 
 
 > t S'apcrccvoir, 3, dequcl^ite cAj>c. 
 
 Vous apercevez-vous de cela f 
 Je m'en aper^ois. 
 Vous etes-vous apercu de celu ? 
 Vous etes-vous apercu de ce qu'il 
 
 fait? 
 
 Je m'en suis apercu. 
 t tfattcndn-, 1, a av. 1'infmi.) 
 A quoi vous attendez-vous ? 
 Vous attendez-vous a recevoir un 
 
 billot dc votre oncle f 
 Jc m'y att( : 
 II s'y attend. 
 Nous nous y at ten.' 
 Nous y sommes-nous altendus? 
 Nous nous y son; us. 
 
 t .\V procurer, 1. 
 
 Je ne peux pas me procurer d'argenl. 
 Je ne puis me procurer de Panrent. 
 II ne peut se procurer de quoi m 
 
FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 279 
 
 J les ai aimes autre fois. Avez-vous vendu votre grain &, 75 cento 
 fe boisseau? (a bushel. 7.) J'en ai eu 80 cents le boisseau. 
 
 Have you agreed with your partner ? I have agreed with him. 
 Does he consent to pay you the price of the ship ! Ho consents to 
 pay me the price agreed upon, (convenu.) Do you consent to #a 
 lo France? I do. Do you too? 1 ? No. Have you seen your old 
 friend again l (rcvoir^* comme roir,* 25', 3:*'.) 1 have sec.i him 
 again. Did you recognise him? I could haul .ise him; 
 
 for, contr;: custom, he wears a large hat. How is he? Ho 
 
 7 very well. What garments does he wear? He weais beautiful 
 new garments. Have you taken notice of what you: :-oy has done? 
 I have taken notice of it. Have you (Ven) puni>lieu niin for it? 1 
 \ him for it. Has your father . rilten to you? 
 
 -.ds) to receive a note from him 
 to-da 
 
 Of what do you complain? I compl;, \:\ Mi* to 
 
 procure some money. Why do these poor plain '. '1'huy 
 
 :iiey cannot procure How are 
 
 .. (comme a ioni'iuiirc,) very well. 
 
 your unclo well ? He is better than he usually is. I hive you 
 
 :ieard of your friend who is in Germany ? 1 have already 
 
 written to him several times; IK has not answered me 
 
 Why have you punished your boy ? I did it because he broke 
 
 my I ..eu him tome syrup and water, and instead 
 
 of drinking it, he spilt it cii the new carpet, which we bought leu 
 
 I what do you think he did at ' Did ho 
 
 i iv the glass? Yes, he did," and then I gave him a few blows. 
 
 What did you pay for a yard of your new carpet? I paid dear for 
 
 1.60. 
 
 oinc Sec. 
 
 :ke fun of sonic one or some- \ 
 
 ( Se rnoquer de queiqu un ou ao quol. 
 
 To laugh at somt one or something. ) que cllose - 
 
 :it everybody. ) n ge c dc 
 
 lie criticises everybody. i 
 
 :!i at that man ? 
 , I d3 not laugh at him. 
 To stop, to stay. Stop, wait, laid on 
 you stayed long at Berlin ? 
 
 T Btaveil tin \~^ only three d 
 
 To tojoun/. 
 
 Where does your brother 
 
 present ? 
 &t present, actually. 
 
 Vous moquez-vous de cet homme? 
 Je no m'en moque pas. 
 S'arreler, 1. Arretez-vous. 
 Vous etes-vous arrete long-temps a 
 
 Berlin ? 
 
 Je ne m'y siiis arrctc que trois jours, 
 SejoiLrner, 1. 
 Ou Monsieur votre frire sejourne-t-U 
 
 actuellement f 
 Actuellement. 
 
280 
 
 FIFT Y-FOt K Til LESSON. (3.) 
 
 7'he residence, stay, abode. 
 
 P^ris is a fine place to live in. 
 
 After reading. 
 
 After cutting myself. 
 
 After dressing yourself. 
 
 After dressing himself. 
 
 After sharing ourselves. 
 
 After warming themselves. 
 
 I returned the book after reading it. 
 
 I threw the knife away after cutting 
 myself. 
 
 You went to the concert after dress- 
 ing yourself. 
 
 He went to the theatre after dressing 
 himself. 
 
 We breakfasted afier shaving our- 
 selves. 
 
 They went out after warming them- 
 selves. 
 
 The sick person, (the patient.) 
 
 Tolerably well. 
 
 It is rather late. It is rather far. 
 
 ANTE-QUA 
 
 Le sejour. 
 
 t C'est un beau sejoui quo Pans, 
 
 t Apres avoir lu. (40 1 .) 
 
 t Apres m'etre coupe. 
 
 t Apres vous etre habilld. 
 
 t Apres s'etre habille. 
 
 t Apres nous etre rases. 
 
 t Apres s'etre chaufles. 
 
 t J'ai rendu le livre apres 1' a voir lu, 
 
 t J'ai jete le couteau aprea m'etra 
 
 coupe, 
 t Vous etes al!6 au concert apres 
 
 vous etre habille. 
 t II est alle au theatre apres s'fitro 
 
 habille. 
 t Nous avons dcjeunl apres noai 
 
 etre rases, 
 t Us sont sortis aprea s'Ctre chaufles. 
 
 Le malade. 
 
 Assez bien, pacsablement. 
 
 11 est bien tard. C'est bien loin. 
 
 Sec. 
 
 Tu arrives tard, imm cher Armand, t'es-lu urretu en chemin '< Jo 
 euis ptirti mi peu tard, et je me suis arrete en chemin, (on the way.) 
 Pourquoi t'es-tu arrete 1 Je me suis arrete pour voir un voleur d 
 grand chemin qu'on a pris de bonne heure ce matin. Je crois que 
 tu as des vetements neufs? Oui ? j'ai mis ai,jourd ; hui les vetement.- 
 dontmon bon oncle m ? a fait present. Us s\nt beaux; mais je r 
 que 1'habit est un peu trop grand: qu'en ^enses-tu? Je ne peux 
 pas bien voir derriere ; devant, il va bien, n'est-ce pas ? A mer- 
 veille ; mais ici et la ; il est un peu trop largo. Comment va le gilet ! 
 Parfaitcment bien. Et les pantalons (pahialoons) comment vont 
 ils? 11s vont bien aussi. Ne sont-ils ni iiop longs ni trop larges 
 Non ; ils sont juste ce qu'il faut. 
 
 Do you like to speak to my uncle ? I liue much to speak to him; 
 Dut sometimes he laughs at me, (se moque de.) Why does he 
 laugh at you ? He laughs at me because I speak badly. Why has 
 your brother no friends'? He has none, because he criticises every- - 
 body. Why are you laughing at that man? I do not intend (jt 
 n'aipas (ksscin) to laugh at him. I beg you not (pricr de, } 171 7) 
 to do it; for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. DC, 
 you doubt what I am telling you 1 I do not doubt it. Do you doubt 
 what that man has told you? I doubt it ? for he has often told 
 stories, (mcntir,* 44 3 .) Have you at last bought the horse which you 
 
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 281 
 
 wished to buy last month? I have not bought it ; for I have not 
 been able to procure money. 
 
 What have you done with the books \\ hich the English captain haa 
 ent you? I have returned them to him, after reading them. Why 
 have you thrown away your knife? 1 have thrown it away after 
 cutting myself. When did I go to the concert ? You went after 
 dressing yourself. When did your brother go to the ball? Ho 
 *ent after dressing himself. When did you breakfast ? We bieak- 
 Ousted after shaving ourselves. When did our neighbors go out? 
 They went out after warming themselves. What did you do thia 
 morning? I shaved, after rising, and went out after breakfasting. 
 What did your father do last niirhtl (/tier soir?) He supped after 
 _C to the play, and went to bed after supping. Did lie rise early? 
 He i 
 
 A t'M'.Ft'L II: uf the Ob.-- < -n given in French, 
 
 to show the pupil that it : done. Let him now translate in 
 
 jlish he finds in the book, as a part of his daily task. 
 
 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON, 55th. Cinquantc-cinquiemc Lcccn, 55me. 
 
 VOCABULAIBE. llC Sec. 
 
 iMTK ARTICLE, FEMININE. Article Difini, Femi/iin. 
 
 Sing, and plur. The, of, from the, to the, for the. 
 
 Singulier. I. a, 1', de la, de 1', a la, a F, pour la, pour I 1 . 
 
 Piuriel. Les, des, aux, pour les. 
 
 Obs. ICC. It will be observed that the plural of the definite article is alike 
 for both genders. (*)'.) 
 
 When the definite article stands before a vowel or an h mute, in the gin 
 gular, it is also alike for both genders, viz. V . 
 
 Sing. riur. 
 
 The woman, women. 
 
 The mother. 
 
 The daughter or the girl. 
 The sister. 
 The candle. 
 The bottle. 
 The key. 
 She, it. They, (nominatives.) 
 
 . To her, to it. Of, from her. 
 Of, Irom it. 
 Them. To them. To them. Of, from 
 
 Shifrulier. Pluricl. 
 
 La femme, les femmes. 
 
 La mere, les meres. 
 
 La fille, les filles. 
 
 La sceur, les so3urs. 
 
 La chandelle, les chandelles. 
 La bouteille, les bouteilles. 
 La clef, les clefs. 
 
 Elle. Elles, ($ 38, 1 & 2.) Nominal 
 La, F. Lui, y. D'elle, en. En 
 
 (* 47.) 
 Les. Leur, (21 1 .) Y, (21'.) D'cilee 
 
 them. en. En. 
 
 Has she ? She has. lias she not? 'A-t-elle? Elle a. N'a-v-ei.o DBS? 
 
232 FIFTV-FIF'i.i LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Have they? They have, they have not. | Ont-elles? Elles ont, ellcs n'ontpaa 
 
 Of, from. To. With. 
 
 My, (ferninin singulicr ) Ma, dc ma, a. ma, avec ma 
 
 Thy. Ta, de ta, a ta, avec ta. 
 
 His, her, its. Sa, de sa, a sa, avec sa, 
 
 My, (plur. des deux genres.) Mes, de mes, a mes, avec ints. 
 
 Obs. 127. In the plural, the possessive pronouns are always alike for both 
 genders. ( ( J ! .) 
 
 The father and his son or A is daugh- 
 ter. ($ 32.) 
 The mother and her son or her daugh- 
 
 Le pore et son fils ou sa fille. 
 La nu re et son fils ou sa fille. 
 
 ter. 
 The child and its brother or its eistor. 1 L'enfant et son frcre ou sa sceur. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 SingnKer. 
 
 rinrid. 
 
 My pen, 
 
 my pens. 
 
 | Ma plume, 
 
 mes plumes. 
 
 Thy fork, 
 
 thy forks. 
 
 I Ta fourchette, 
 
 tes fourchette. 
 
 His or her nut, 
 
 his or her nuts. 
 
 Sa noix, 
 
 ecs noix. 
 
 Our hand, 
 
 our hands. 
 
 I Notre main, 
 
 nos m 
 
 Your mouth, 
 
 your mouths. 
 
 Votre bouchc, 
 
 vos bouchee. 
 
 Their door, 
 
 their doors. 
 
 | Leur porte, 
 
 leursportee. 
 
 Ota. 108. The personal pronoun leur must not be mistaken for the pos- 
 sessive leur. The lonnvr nrvtr lakes an s, while the latter does, when the 
 person or thing possessed is in the plural. Ex. Je leur parlo, I speak to 
 them ; jc vois leurs freres et leurs sosurs, I see their brothers and their si 
 
 The pretty woman. ($ SOO 4.) 
 
 The pn-tty women. 
 
 The small candle, tiie small candles. 
 
 The large bottle, Lc large bottles. 
 
 La jolie fcmme. 
 
 Les jolies fen: 
 
 La petite chandellc, 
 
 chand 
 La grande boutcillc, les grandes 
 
 boutcillo.i. 
 
 ClXQUANTE-CINQUlilME TlI^ME. JrC Sec. 
 
 Comment so porte Madame votre mere? Je vous icmercie, elle 
 Be porte passablement. Et Mesdemoiselles vos so3urs? Elles ne 
 se portent pas si bieu qira 1'ordinaire. Qu'ont-elles 1 Elles n'ont 
 Das grand 7 chose ; mais elles se plaignent un peu. Les femmea 
 aiment a se plaindre, n'est-ce pas ? Elles ne se plaignent pas plus 
 que les hommes. La fille du ministre est-elle mieux? On dit 
 qu^elle est plus mal. Mange-t-elle qnelque chose ? Non, elle a 
 trop mal a la bouche pour manger. Brule-t-on des chandellJS ou 
 du gaz chez votre socur? On y brule du gaz. On pense que ce 
 n'ost pas si cher que les chandelles. Ou, Sophie a-t-elle mis la clef? 
 La ciof de auoi ? La clef du pupitre Francais. Je rje sais pas. 
 Mai voici ma clef; elle ouvre le pupitre. N'importe. Je n'ai pas 
 Pouvnr. A-t-on apporte les bouteilles ^ Les bouteilles de 
 
FIFTY- FIFTH LKSSON. (2.} 
 
 283 
 
 quoi ? Les bouteilles de vin. Oui, les voici, (here llu-y are.) ierriere 
 IH porte. Combien ave/.-vous pave la bouteille ? J'ai pave presque 
 iiii demi-dollar la bouteille. AYC/-VOUS vu la jolie fern me qui a 
 Quand a-t-elle pas>r- f 11 y a un moment. J'etais 
 alors occr je n : ai pas pu la voir. 
 
 Ma plume d'acicr est dans n: meieuille, prene/-la ; si vous 
 
 H,i- \ ;: _rold ribbo- ::ot. What has she? 
 
 Sh-- hftfl ' ' vour mother anything? She has a line gold 
 
 fork. W: . large bottle ? Your sister has it. Do you some- 
 
 times see my mother? r ol'ten. When did you see your 
 
 . her a fortnight ago. Who has my line nuts? Your 
 
 good - them. Has she also my silver forks'? She has them 
 
 !ii? Your mother has them. What fork have 
 
 you my iron fork. 1' ul my pens? They 
 
 nut had them, but I believe that tin i have had them. 
 
 Why does your brother complain ? He complaii. his right 
 
 foot aches. Why do you complain? I complain because my left 
 
 <m country people (parmi vous mitres (4H) pens de 
 camp'"/!.':) there are many fools; are there not? a>ked (dcnandd) a 
 phili .itely, (Vautre jour,) of a peasant, (dunpaysan.) The 
 
 vered. (repondit :) " Sir, they are to be found (on en trouvc) 
 in a!. (ietut.' : ) " Fools sometimes tell the truth, (la verite,") 
 
 (dit) the philosopher. What did the philosopher ask of the 
 countryman'? lit- there were not (n'y avail pas) many 
 
 fools among country people? What did the countryman reply to 
 the philosopher ? 1 i ed that there were some in all stations. 
 
 Was the philosopher pleased with the peasant's answer? (la re- 
 ponsc, fern.) I think he was pleased with the answer. What do 
 you think of the peasant's answer ? I think it .... (L ; ecolier peui 
 linir la reponse.) Do you nol liKe that young lady's face? Yes, I 
 do; but not her hair, (plur.) Has not that young woman too much 
 tongue ? Yes, she has a little too much; at least, so they say, (<m 
 le dit.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. iMe SeC. 
 
 Which woman ? Which women ? 
 Which daughter ? Which daughters ? 
 Which, what one ? Which ones ? 
 This, that woman. 
 
 , those women. 
 This lady, those ladie?> 
 1'hat young lady, those young ladies. 
 
 Quelle femme ? Quelles femmca I 
 
 Quelle fille ? Quellca filles ? 
 
 Laquelle ? Lesquelles ? 
 
 Cette femme. 
 
 Ces femmes. 
 
 Cette dame-ci, ces dames-ci. 
 
 Cette demoiselle-la, ces dcmoi 
 
284 
 
 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSOM. (2.) 
 
 The Land, the hands. 
 
 The right hand. 
 
 The leit hand. 
 
 I have a sore hand. 
 
 La main, lea mains. 
 
 La main droite. 
 La main gauche. 
 J'ai mal a la main. 
 
 Obs. 129. Avoir mal is used with the preposition d, to express thai I 
 part of the body is aflected with illness or pain. (23 1 .) 
 
 The tooth, the teeth. 
 
 Have you the toothache ? 
 
 I have the headache. 
 
 I feel a pain in my aide. 
 
 His feet are sore. 
 
 The face. The mouth. The cheek. 
 
 The tongue. The language. 
 
 The door. The window. The street. 
 
 The town. The linen. The old woman. 
 
 La dent, les dents. 
 
 Avez-vous mal aux dents? 
 
 J'ai mal a la tete. 
 
 J'ai mal au cote. 
 
 II a mal aux pieds. 
 
 La figure. La bouche. Lajouo, 
 
 La langue. 
 
 La pone. La fenetre. La rue. 
 
 La ville. La toile. La vieille fcmme. 
 
 REMARK. From what precedes, this principle maybe deduced: Tho 
 characteristic ending of French feminine nouns and adjectives is the lol'.tT <. 
 There are, however, some adjectives which al^o have this ending in the 
 masculine, and then they are of both genders, as: 
 
 An amiable man. 
 An amiable woman. 
 The room. 
 The front room. 
 
 The back room. 
 
 1 he upper room. 
 INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE 
 
 Some, 
 
 Sing, (ll 1 **.) De la, T, 
 
 Plur. DCS, 
 
 Un horn me aimable. 
 
 Une fenimc aimable. 
 
 La chambre. 
 
 La chambre de devant, (ou du de 
 
 vant, ou sur le devant.) 
 La chambre de derriere, (ou du der- 
 
 riere, cu sur le dcrricre.) 
 La chambre d'cn naut, (ou du haut.) 
 
 PRONOUN. Article Partitif, Ftminin. 
 Of, from some. To some, With some. 
 
 de, a de la, T, avec de la, 1*. 
 
 de, a des, avec des. 
 
 Obs. 130. For the plural of this article, and when it stands before an 
 adjective, (II 1 * 2 .) 
 
 Some light. Some silk. 
 Some good soup. 
 Some good apples. 
 
 De la lumiere. De la soie. 
 De bonne soupe. 
 De bonnes pommes. 
 
 Obs. 131. Most adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on, and et, double tlioir 
 final consonant before the ^ mute of the feminine. Examples: 
 
 A cruel certitude. 
 Such a promise. 
 An old acquaintance. 
 A good truth. 
 A dumb woman. 
 
 Une cruelle certitude. 
 Une pareille promesse. 
 Une ancienne connaissar.co. 
 Une bonne ve'rite. 
 Une femme muette. 
 
 Obs. 132. In the masculine, the above adjectives would ho crucl t 
 , ban, muct. 
 
FIFTY-FIF1H LESSON. (2.) 285 
 
 INDEFINITE ARTICLE, FEMININE. Article Indejhu, Feminin. 
 A or an, of, from a, too, with a. Une, d'une, a tine, avec uuo. 
 A. virtuous woman. | Une femme vertueuse. 
 
 Ob'. 123. Adjectives ending in the masculine in x become feminine by 
 cnanging x into se as, masc. vcrtucux ; fern, vertueuse, virtuous. 
 
 \ happy young lady. | Une demoiselle heurcuse. 1 
 
 ClXQUAXTE-CIXQCIEME TllfblE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Sont-ce les Demoiselles Cavaignac ? Oui ; ce sont elles. Vonloz- 
 /OUR me presenter d dies? (introduce me to them. $ 64.) Volontiers. 
 Vene/. Attendons un moment, car vous voyez qu'elles parlent d 
 ces dames en bleu. Quelles sont ces deux dames en bleu, elleg 
 sont jolics, n'est-ce pas ? Je ne les connais pas. Approchons a pre- 
 bent. Mesdemoiselles, voulez-vous me permettve de vous presenter 
 mon ami, M. !o Montcalme ? Nous sommes bien aises, M. de 
 :calme ; de fiire votre connaissance, (acquaintance.) Mesde- 
 moiselles, tout le plaisir est de mon cote. Vous avez bien de la 
 lonte. (literally goodness, here, politeness.} Mile. Clara va-t-elle jouer 
 du piano"? Non, elle n'cn touchcra pas (will not play) ce soir, parco 
 lie a mal a la main droite. Comment s'est-elle fait du mal'? 
 Kile s'est fait du mal avec ses ciseaux. Quel bruit est cela? C'est 
 (a porte de la rue (street door) qu'on vient de fermer. Pourquoi 
 Mile. Sophie tient-elle son mouchoir sur sa joue? y a-t-elle mal? 
 Kile n'a pas mal a la joue, mais aux dents. Cette femme muette 
 est-elle heureuse 1 Oui, elle est heureuse, parce qu'elle est bonne 
 et vertueuse. 
 
 Is your sister writing N: ; Madam, she is not. Why does she 
 not? Her right hand is sore. Why does not the daughter of your 
 neighbor go out ? She does not, because she has sore feet. Why 
 does my sister not speak ? Because she has a sore mouth. Hast 
 thou not seen my silver pen ? No, but I have seen your sister's steel 
 pen. Hast thou a front room ? I have a back one, (une de der- 
 riere,) but my brother has a front one. Is it (est-ce) an upper room? 
 It is ore, (e'en csl une.) Does the wife (la femme) of our shoemaker 
 go oat already ? No, my lady, she does not go out yet, for she is 
 still very ill. Which bottle had your little sister? She had our 
 mother's, (celle Je.)-^Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's ? 
 I have eaten neither of yours (de la votrc) nor your mother's, but 
 of that of my good sister. 
 
 Have you seen the lady who was with me this morning ? No, but I 
 MIW her amiable daughter. Has your mother hurt herself? She 
 has not hurt herself. Can you write with this steel pen ? Which 1 
 
 1 From the masculine lieurtux. 
 
280 
 
 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 (la qucllc?) Sophia's' 2 Yes, Sophia's. No, but I shall wfite with 
 the golden one, (cclle d j or.) Each (chaque) woman thinks herself 
 amiable, and each (chacune) is conceited, (a de V amour propre.) 
 The same as (de meme que) men, my dear friend. Many a one 
 (lei) thinks himself (se croit} learned who is not so, (ne Vest pas,) 
 and many men (bien dcs hommes) surpass (surpasser) women in 
 vanity, (en vanite.) What is the matter with you? Nothing is the 
 matter with me. Why does your sister complain * Because she 
 has a pain in her cheek. Has your brother a sore cheek? No, bit 
 he feels a pain in his side. Where is the silk ? It has fallen from 
 the window in the street. Did this old woman pick it up ? Yes, 
 she did; but she did not pick up the linen. Did the linen fall also 
 from the window ? Yes, it did. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 An active young woman. | Une jeune personne 1 active. 
 
 Obs. 134. Adjectives ending in the masculine in /, become feminine by 
 changing / into ve, as, masc. actif ; fern, active, active. 
 
 A new gown. 
 
 An ingenuous proposal. 
 
 Have you my pen ? 
 
 No, Madam, I have it not. 
 
 Which bottle have you broken ? 
 
 Which door have you opened ? 
 
 Une robe neuve. 2 
 
 Une proposition na'i've. 3 
 
 Avez-vous ma plume ? 
 
 Non, Madame, je ne 1'ai pas. 
 
 Quelle bouteille avez-vous cassee f 
 
 Quelle porte avez-vous ouvcrte ? 
 
 Obs. 135. The past participle agrees with its direct object, (regime direct,) 
 in gender as well as in number. (32 1 , Obs. 75.) 
 
 Which windows have you opened ? 
 Which bottles has the woman broken ? 
 
 Which young lady have you con- 
 
 ducted to the ball ? 
 Which water have you drunk ? 
 Which letters have you written ? 
 This, this one. These. 
 
 That, that one. Those. 
 
 Have you this or that pen ? 
 
 I have neither this nor that. 
 
 Do you see tha woman ? 
 
 I sec her. 
 
 Have you seen my sisters ? 
 
 No, Miss, I have not seen them. 
 
 Quelles fcnetrcs avez-vous ouvertes ? 
 Quelles bouteilles la femme a-t-elle 
 
 casse'es ? 
 Quelle demoiselle avez-vous con 
 
 duite au bal ? 
 
 Quelle eau avez-vous bue ? 
 Quelles lettres avez-vous ecrites ? 
 Celle-ci. Celles-ci. 
 
 Celle-la. Celles-la. 
 
 Avez-vous cette ph'me-ci ou celle 
 
 la? 
 
 Je n'ai ni celle-ci ni celle-la. 
 Voyez-vous cette femme ? 
 Je la vois. 
 
 Avez-vous vu mes sceurs ? 
 Non, Mademoiselle, je ne les ai [>ai 
 
 vues. 
 
 1 Persojine, as a pronoun, is masculine ; as a substantive it ia 
 * From the masculine neuf 
 8 From the masculine not/, 
 
FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 287 
 
 Has he spoken to her ? He has. 
 
 To her, to him, to them. 
 
 Do you speak to my sisters ? 
 
 I speak to them. 
 
 Some coarse linen. 
 
 Some good water. 
 
 A napkin, a towel. A clean napkin. 
 
 The following double the letter /: 
 
 (before a consonant, | Beau, 
 
 Handsome. < betbre a vowel or h > ^ j 
 ( mute, i 
 
 f before a consonant, [ Nouveau 
 
 New. < before a vowel or h 
 
 ( mute, 
 
 Lui a-t-il parle ? II lui a rarKS. 
 
 Lui, leur. (Obs. 128.) 
 
 Parlez-vous a mes sceurs ? 
 
 Je leur parle. 
 
 De grosse toile. 
 
 De bonne eau. 
 
 Une serviette. Une serviette propru 
 
 ^Nouvcl, 
 
 Old. 
 Crazy loo. 
 
 Soft. 
 
 Some fine silk stockings. 
 
 The Christian. ( (M.t. i 
 
 The Jew. (Ol>s. 134.) 
 
 The negro. 
 
 A companion. 
 
 A friend. (Remark, p. 28-1.) 
 
 To celebrate, to final. 
 
 { Vieux, 
 < Vicil, 
 * Fou, 
 
 belle. 
 
 nouvelle, 
 
 vieille 
 
 > molle. 
 ) 
 
 Do IHMIIX l>as de soie. 
 Le Chretien, l : t-m. la Chrutienne 
 Le Juif. " la Juive. 
 
 Le negre. " la negresse. 
 
 Uricompagnon. " une compagne. 
 Un ami. " une amie. 
 
 Celebrer, 1, feter, 1. 
 
 CiNoiAMixi TIIME. 3me Sec. 
 
 A quelle joue ave/.-vous maH Ala droite ou a la gauche? Je 
 n'ai mal ni a la joue droite ni a la gauche. Vraiment? Je croyais 
 que vous aviez mal a 1'une ou a Pautre. A quoi cette dame s'amuse- 
 t-elle ? Elle s ? amuse a toucher du piano. Guillaume, apporte/ de 
 la lumiere, nous voulons jouer aux echecs. Voulez-vous une chan- 
 d^lle, ou allumerai-je le gaz? Apportez une chandelle, allumee. 
 N'avez-vous pas revu notre ancienne connaissance, Mme. Leroux ' 
 Non 7 je n'ai pas revu cette ancienne connaissance, mais j'en ai revu 
 une autre. Qui ? Devinez } (guess.) Vous a-t-elle fait une pareille 
 
 1 FoZ is used instead of fou before nouns beginning with a vowel. Fol 
 always precedes, and fou always follows its substantive. Ex. Un march& 
 fou, a foolish bargain; un fol espoir, a foolish hope. Suhytantively, fou 
 means a madman, and fulle a madwoman. 
 
 2 Formerly, mol was more in use than mou. The Academy writes: 
 " Unhomme mou el cffemine" a weak and effeminate man. We read, 
 however, in Button, " ^cs Chi?iois font des peiiples 7wo/.?," the Chinese arc 
 an effeminate people. 
 
388 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.J 
 
 promesse ? Oui, elle en a fait une pareille, a ma scour, a ma cousine. 
 et a moi. ($64 2.) Comment se portent Mesdemoiselles von 
 scBurs l \ Elles se portent tres-bien depuis que'lques jours. Ou demeu- 
 rent-elles ? Elles demeurent a Wilmington. Est-ce une petite ville ? 
 Oui, c'est une petite ville dans Vetat de Delaware, (the state of Dela- 
 ware.) Quel jour les Turcs celebrent-ils ? Us celebrent le vendredi ; 
 les Juifs celebrent le samedi, et les Chretiens le dimanche. Quel 
 jour est-ce que les negres celebrent ? Les negres celebrent le jour 
 da leur naissance, (their birth-day.) 
 
 Is your sister as old as my mother ? She is not so old, but she is 
 taller. Has your brother purchased anything? (fait des emplettes ?) 
 He has purchased something, (il en a fait.") What has he bought t 
 He has bought fine linen, good pens, old candles, and napkins. 
 Has ho not bought some silk stockings? He has bought some. 
 Have you a sore nose ? I have riot a sore nose, but 1 have the tooth- 
 ache. Have you cut your finger 1 No, my lady, I have "cut my 
 hand. Will you give me a pen? I will give you one. Will you 
 have this or that? I will have neither. Which (laquclle} one do 
 you wish to have ? I wish to have that which your sister has. Do 
 you wish to have my mother's good black silk (bonne sole noire) or 
 my sisters? I wish to have neither your mother's nor your sister's, 
 but that which you have. 
 
 Do you open the back window ? 1 open it, because it is too warm. 
 -Which windows has your sister opened ? She has opened those 
 of the front room. Have you been at the ball of my old acquaint- 
 ance ? I have been there. Which young ladies have you taken to 
 the ball? I took my sister's friends and companions (fern.) there. 
 Did they dance ? They danced a good deal. Did they amuse them- 
 selves? They amused themselves. Did they remain long at the 
 call ? They remained-there two hours. Is this young lady a Turk ? 
 No, she is a Greek. Does she speak French ? She speaks it. Does 
 she not speak English? She speaks it also, but she speaks Frencli 
 better. Has your sister a companion ? She has one. Does she like 
 her? She likes her very much, for she is very amiable. That 
 active young woman is ingenuous, is she not? Yes, she is (both) 
 active and ingenuous. What do you think of his sister's new silk 
 gown? Her new silk gown? Yes, the silk one. Her new silk 
 gown pleases me much. 
 
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON (1.) 
 
 
 FlFTV-SIXTil LESSON, 56th. Cinquantc-sixiemc Leron, 56m 
 
 VOCABUI.AIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 To go to the country. 
 To be pleased in the con airy. 
 To go to the bank. 
 '*o ctop at the bank. 
 To or at the oxcli 
 Tr or at the river. 
 1\> or at the kitchen. 
 r at the cellar. 
 
 ?.t church. 
 To or nt school. 
 '1 o or a*, ine French schooL 
 'I'n or at the daix . singing 
 
 ft'hool. play. 
 
 The o; 
 To go a hu:i 
 Is he a hum 
 
 To hunt. To 
 
 To go a fishing. 
 To get tired of fishing. 
 The whole day, all the day. 
 The whole morning. 
 The whole evening. 
 The whole night, all the night. 
 The whole year. 
 TLQ whole week. 
 Tfco whole society. 
 
 Aller a la campagne. 
 S'amuser a la campagno. 
 Aller a la banque. 
 
 ;cr a la banque. 
 A la bourse. 
 A la riviere. 
 A la cu 
 A la cave. 
 A I'celise. 
 A Tecole. 
 
 A Tccole de Francois. 
 A i'ecole dc danse, a I'ccole de chaut. 
 La comedie. 
 
 L'opi'ra, (a masculine noun.^ 1 
 t Aller a la chasse. 
 t Est-il a la chasse T 
 Chasser, 1. J'echer, 1 
 
 Aller a. la pCchc. 
 S'ennuycr a la peche. 
 Toute la journee. 
 Toute la matinee. 
 Toute la soiree. 2 
 Toute la nuit. 
 Toute 1'annee. 3 
 Toute la semaine. 
 Toute la socicte. 
 
 1 A'.l nouns ending in a are of the masculine gender, except sepia, sepia ; 
 an J ti'pctj a tumor, which are feminine. 
 
 * The words o'jy, TM-rnixg, and evening, are expressed by jour, matin, and 
 nuir, when we speak of a part of them, and by journie, matinee, and soiree, 
 when their whole duration is to be expressed. Ex. II vient me voir tons 
 Us jours t he comes to see me every day ; fai rcste chez moi, toute la journee, 
 i Htayed at liome all the day long ; je me promtne tons les matins pendant 
 wie heure, I take an hour's walk every morning ; il a plu toute la matinee, 
 it has been raining all the morning ; j'irai vous voir domain au soir, I shall 
 call upon you to-morrow evening ; ou passcrez-vous la soiree? where shall 
 you spend the evening ? 
 
 3 Year is expressed by an when we wisli to express one or more units 6f 
 i twelvemonth, and by annte when it is considered as a twelvemonth in ith 
 ddration. Ex. 11 y a six ans que tno?i frere ne m'a ecrit, it is six yenrs 
 since my brother wrote to me ; une annee heureuge est celle que Von passo 
 tins ennui ct sans infirmilc, a happy year is that which is spent withoiu 
 lediousness or infirmity. 
 
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. ^1.) 
 
 All at once. I Tout a la fois. 
 
 ( Tout a coup. 
 Suddenly, all of a sudden. Soudainement. 
 
 This week. 
 
 This year. 
 
 Last week. 
 
 Next week. 
 
 Every woman. 
 
 Once, one time, every time. 
 
 Every week. 
 
 Cette semaine. 
 
 Cette annee. 
 
 La semaine passce. 
 
 La semaine prochaine. 
 
 Toutes les femmes. 
 
 Une fois, toutes les fois, cliaque ibis 
 
 Toutes les semaines. 
 
 A table. This mahogany table. Une table. Cette table d' acajou. 
 CINQUANTE-SIXIME TIIME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Venez-vous cle la campagne pour aller a la banque? Oi 
 iSfcssein de changer uu billet de banque en argent. hvx-vous a la 
 bourse avant de retourner a la campagne ? Non ; rnais j'irai achete: 
 quelque chose ponr aller a la peche. Aimez-vous la peche ? .V'ajme 
 assez a prrhi'r. l ) ei. i he/-vous toute la journee? Non, nous 
 toute la matinee ou toute la soiree. Quiva a Fecole de chex < 
 Jean va a Fecole d' Anglais et de Francais, Sophie a 1't'cole de c'u.iso 
 et de chant, et Frederic ne va a aucune. Qu'allez-votU faire c 
 semaine^ la^sampagne? Nous allons couper notre graiu. 
 cousins vonl-ils en Californie la semaine prochaine ? Us n'iront que 
 dans deux semaines. Leurs femmes et leurs filles iront-elles ; 
 eu#$* If on, elles n'iront pas. N'avez-vous pa3 nettoye mes bas de 
 sole, mes jtantalons, mon habit bleu, et mon gilet blanc? Non, pas 
 encore, je ne peux pas faire tout a la fois. On ne peut pas fi 
 tout a la fois, c'est vrai; mais je croyais que vous aviez eu assr- 
 temps pour faire chaque chose a son tour. 
 
 I hear a noise in the cellar; who is in it? The old dumb V7oma:i ; 
 I suppose. What does she want from (dans) the cellar? Slie wauls 
 some wood or coal. I have your steel fork: have you mine? 1 
 have not yours, but hers, and Henry's is on the table, in the ether 
 room, Which table ? The mahogany table. Where is your mo- 
 ther? She is at church. Is your sister gone to school? She is. 
 Does your mother often go to church? She goes every morning 
 and every evening. At what o'clock in the morning does she go to 
 church? She goes as soon as she gets up. At what o'clock does 
 she get up? She gets up at sunrise. Dost thou go to school, ic- 
 day? I do. What dost thou learn at school? I learn to read, 
 write, and speak there. Where is your good mother ? She is gone 
 to shop (50 3 ) with my little sister. Do your sisters go this evening 
 lo the opera? No, Madam; they go to the dancing and singing 
 school. Do the}* not go to the French school? They go in the. 
 
 iiot go 
 
FIFTY -SI XT II I, (2.) 
 
 
 morning, but not (mais non) in the evening. Is you; father gone a 
 hunting * lie has not been able to go a. hunting, for he has a cold. 
 Do you like to go a hunting? I like to go a lishing better than a 
 hunting. Is your father still in the country] Yes, Madam, he in 
 there. What does he do there? He goes a hunting and a fish- 
 ing. Did you hunt in the country 1 I hunted the whole day. How 
 long did you stay with my mother? I stayed with her the whole 
 -Is it In; g u were at the castle ? I was there last 
 
 week. Did you iind many peop^ I found only three per- 
 
 sons there, the French teacher, his wife, and their daughter, who 
 dances so well. 
 
 MKI:. 
 
 Set 
 
 I'uur aunt. 
 
 Any IM 
 
 iic. 
 
 The heartache. 
 His sister has a violent headache. 
 
 Madame votre tante. 
 Mademoiselle votre ni 
 
 Toute pcrsonne. (55 3 , N. 1.) 
 
 t Le mal d'oreille. 
 
 t Lc inai de coeur. 
 
 t Sa soDur a im violent mal de 
 
 >ms Possessifs Absolus, Fiminui. 
 
 .' la r. 
 
 thine, his, (hers, its.) 
 
 yours, theirs. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Mine, thine, his, (hers, its.) 
 
 Ours, (0. 9, 4. 1 ) yours, theirs. 
 Were you doing ? (imperfect.) / was. 
 What were you saying ? I i 
 
 saving anything. 
 Have you my pen or hers ? 
 i was saying that I had hers. 
 What do you wish to send to your 
 
 aunt? 
 
 I wish to send her a tart. 
 Will you send her some fruit also ? 
 
 I will send her some. 
 Have you sent the books to my sis- 
 ters ? 
 1 have sent them to them. 
 
 The *che, pain. 
 Uurt, 
 
 The pencil, 
 The strawberry, 
 Tht> cherry, 
 The newspaper, 
 the gazette 
 
 la douleur. 
 ia tour'.c. 
 !-i pgchc. 
 la frai.^e. 
 la cerise. 
 
 :ilicr. 
 
 La mienne, la tienne, la sienne. 
 La noire, la votre, ' la leur. 
 
 Plurid. 
 
 Lesmiennes, les tienne.- 
 Les notres, les votres, les leurs. 
 Faisiez-vous ? (imparfait) Jefuisnis. 
 Que di Jc ne disait 
 
 rien. 
 
 Avez-vous ma plume ou la sienne ? 
 Je disais que j'avais la sienne. 
 Que voulez-vous cnvoyer a votro 
 
 tante ? 
 
 Je veux lui envoyer une tourte. 
 Voulez-vous lui envoyer aussi dea 
 
 fruits ? 
 
 Je veux 1m' en envoy ei. 
 Avez-vous envoye les livres a mea 
 
 socurs ? 
 
 Je les leur ai envoyes. 
 The aunt, ia tante. 
 
 The female cousin, la cousine. 
 The niece, la niece. 
 
 The maid-servant, la servanta 
 The female relation, la parento. 
 The female neighbor, lavoisinc, 
 Thn female cook, la cuisinicn* 
 
292 
 
 FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 The merchandise, 
 
 (goods,) la marclmndise. 
 
 What was you doing ? I was making 
 
 a cherry tart for my niece. 
 Were you telling the maid-servant to 
 
 fasten the windows ? I was. 
 
 The brother-in-law, le beau-frere. 
 The sister-in-law. la belle-sceur, 
 Que faisiez-vous ? Je faisais une 
 
 tourte aux cerises pour ma niece. 
 Disiez-vous a la servante de fermet 
 
 les fenetres? Je le lui disais. 
 
 ClNQUANTE-SIXI^ME TldblE. 2dc Sec. 
 
 Mile., votre niece est-elle a la maison? Je ne sais pas. Je vaia 
 savoyer la servante pour voir si elle est dans sa chambre. N'im- 
 porte; je n'ai pas le temps de m'arreter a present. Voulez-voua 
 avoir la bonte de lui presenter ces peches, en mon nom? Oh! 
 elles sont superbes! Je vous remercie, en son nom. Mais a pre- 
 sent que j'y pense, comment se porte Madame votre belle-sceur? 
 J'etais chez elle hier soir. Elle se porte bien, merci. Presentez-lui 
 mes compliments quand vons la reverrez. Je n'y mahquerai pas. 
 J'ai 1'honneur de vous saluer. Adieu, M. La parente du general 
 a-t-elle mal d'oreille ? Mal d'oreille ! Non, elle n'a pas mal 
 d'oreille. Pourquoi le croyiez-vous ? La cuisiniere de notre voisine 
 n'a-t-elle pas envoye une tourte aux cerises a notre petite fille, cette 
 semaine ? Si fait, elle lui en a envoye une ; non pas cette semaine, 
 mais la semaine passee. Que faisiez-vous 1'annee passee ? J'etais 
 marchand. N'etes-vous pas 1'associe de votre beau-frere ? Je n'ai 
 point de beau-frere, de sorte que je ne puis pas etre son associe. 
 On m'a dit que votre belle-scBur avail une excellente cuisiniere, 
 est-ce vrai? On en trouve a peine une bonne, mais la sienne 
 I'est. En etes-vous sure ? Oui, du moins ma belle-scour le dit. 
 
 Are these girls as good (sage) as their brothers ? They are better 
 than they. Can your sisters speak German'? They cannot, but 
 they are learning it. Have you brought anything to your mother'? 
 I brought her some good fruit and a fine tart. What has your niece 
 brought you ? She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, 
 and good peaches. Do you like peaches ? I like them much. 
 H*ow many peaches has your neighbor (fern.) given you? She has 
 given me more than twenty. Have you eaten many cherries, this 
 year? I have. Did you give any to your little niece ? I gave her 
 BO many that she cannot eat them all. Why have you not given 
 any to your good neighbor? (fern.) I wished to give her some, but 
 she would not take any, because she does not like cherries 
 
 We r e there any pears (la poire) last year ? There were not mr.r. r. 
 Has your cousin (fern.) any strawberries'? She has so many that 
 she cannot eat them all. Do you expect to see your niece, to-day ? 
 I hope to see her, for she has premised me to dine vs^iih us. 1 
 admire (admirer) that family, (in 1'r.niillt-i) for tie father is the king, 
 
FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 293 
 
 and me mother is the queen of it. The children and ll.e servants 
 are the subjects (le sujet) of the state, (I'ctat.) The tutors of the 
 children are the ministers, who share (partaker) with the king and 
 queen the care (le soin) of the government, (le gouvcrncmcnt.) The 
 good education (V education j fern.) which is given to children (Obs. 
 101 2) is the crown, (la couronna) of monarchs, (le monarquc.) 
 
 VOCABTLAIUK. OniC SCC. 
 
 Ols. 130. The three substantive* >mtrur, author , print re, painter ; 
 poet, arc ui" the masculine gender. only, and are used ibr both sexes. 
 
 She is a poetess. 
 
 Is she a painter ? 
 
 She is an author. 
 
 To hire, to let. 
 
 you already hired a W 
 
 To admit or grant at! 
 
 To confess a th: 
 
 Do you grant ti: 
 
 1 do grant it. 
 
 Do you confess your fault ? 
 
 I confess it. 
 
 T confess it to be a fault. 
 
 To confess, * ;:, to ac- 
 
 knowledge. 
 
 To confess. 
 
 So much, so many. 
 
 She has so many candles that she 
 cannot burn them all. 
 
 To catch a cold. 
 
 To make sick. 
 
 Elle est poutc. 
 Est-elle peintre ? 
 Elle est autcui. 
 Louer, 1. 
 
 MO uno chainbrc f 
 
 Convcnir* de quelque d 
 
 is de cela? 
 J'en conviens. 
 
 Convenez-vous de votrc faute ? 
 J'en conviens. 
 
 Je conviens que c'cst une faute. 
 Avouer, 1. 
 
 Confesser, 1. 
 
 Tant. 
 
 Elle a tant dc chandellcs qu'elle ne 
 
 pcut pas les bruki toutes. 
 t S'enrhumcr, 1. 
 t Rendre malade. 
 
 01m. 137. To maJic, before an adjective, must be translated by: rendre. 
 If you eat so much it will make you! Si vous mangez tant, cda vous ren- 
 
 sick. I dra malade. 
 
 Ols. 138. When the English pronoun it relates to a preceding circum 
 stance, it is translated by cela ; when to a following circumstance, by il. 
 
 Does it suit you to lend your gun ? 
 
 It does not suit me to lend it. 
 
 It does not suit me. 
 
 Where did you catch a cold ? 
 
 I 3\u^ht a cold in going from the 
 
 opera. 
 
 To have a cnU. 
 The cold, the cough. 
 \ have a cold in my head. 
 Tou have a cold on your breast. 
 The brain, tho chest. 
 
 Vous convient-il de preter votre fusil! 
 
 11 ne me convient pas de le preter 
 
 Cela ne me convient pas. 
 
 t Ou vous etes-vous enrhume ? 
 
 t Je me suis enrhume en sortanl rf 
 
 Topera. 
 
 t Etre enrhumr. 
 Lc rhume, latoux. 
 t J'd un rhume de cerveau. 
 t Vouo avcz un rhume do poitrine, 
 Lo corvcau, la poitrine. 
 
294 FIFTY* SIX Til LESSON. (3.) 
 
 Has she not a bad cough ? | N'a-t-clle pas une mauvaise tons I 
 
 Yes, she has (one). Si fait, elle en a une mau\ 
 
 ClNOJ-'ANTII-SIXIliME Tll.ME. 3mC SeC. 
 
 Avcz-vous bien dormi la nuit passee ? Non, je n'ai pas bien dorm 
 du tout. On a fait tant de bruit que eel a m'a empeche de dormir. 
 Oil avez-vous passe la soiree hier ? Je 1'ai passee chez mon beau* 
 frere. Y avez-vous vu votre belle-sanir? JeTyaivue. Comment 
 Be porte-t-elle ? Elle se porte mieux qira 1'ordinaire. Avez-vous , 
 joue ? Nous n'avons pas joue, pas memo aux echecs; mais nouo 
 avons lu de bons livrcs; car ma belle-sGDur aime mieux lire q^e de 
 jouer. Avez-vous lu la gazette de ce matin? Je 1'ai lue. Y a-t-il 
 quelque chose de nouveau dedans ? Ily atoujoursdunouveau; mai.s 
 rien de bien intercssant. Que dit-on du roi et de la reinc ? Celui-la 
 est occupe du soin du gouvernement, et celle-ci du soin de sa famille. 
 N'etait-elle pas a la campagne quand vous y etiez? Non, elle n'y 
 ('tail pas alors; mais elle y etail la semaine derniero. Sa fille esl 
 iiilrrcssanto, n'ost-ce pas? C'est ce que jr Lc cornmis di- 
 
 ^ait-il on fai-ait-il quelque chose? II disait quelque chose, mais. ii 
 no faisait rien. Qui ir .' Charlotte faisait une 
 
 jonnmnc de cerises. 
 
 Why do your sisters not go to the play? Tl go thither 
 
 Because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. Where 
 vlid they catch a cold ? Tbejcanght a cold in going from the opera 
 last night. Does it suit your sister to eat some peaches ? It does 
 not suit her to eat any, for she has already eaten a good many, and 
 if she eats so much it will make her ill. Have you already hired a 
 room? I have already hired one. Where have you hired it? I 
 have hired it in William-street, (dans la rue or rue Guillainne^ num- 
 ber one hundred and fifty-two. At whose house (chcz qui) have you 
 hired it ? At the house of the man whose son has sold you a horse. 
 For whom has your father hired a room ? He has hired one for 
 his son, who has just arrived from France. Why have you not kept 
 your promise ? (la promcsse.) Which promise ? I do not remember 
 what I promised you. Had you not promised us to take us to the 
 concert last Thursday? I confess that I was wrong in promising 
 you ; the concert, however, has not taken place. 
 
 Does your brother confess his fault ? He confesses it. Whr.t GC'.* 
 your uncle say to (dc) that note ? Ho says that it is vriittsn very 
 well, but he admits that he hns bosn wrong in cendirg it to the cap- 
 lain. Do you confess your fault now? I confess it to be a fault. 
 Where have you found my coat? I have found it in the blue roorfl 
 UD stairs. The front room or tv.c Lark rcom 1 The back room, (Ota, 
 
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 
 
 (1.) 
 
 81.) Will you hang my hat on the treo ? I will hang it thereon. 
 
 Ho . Iain not very well. What is the matter 
 
 with you . and a cold. Where did you 
 
 I caughl <>iii^ from the play. 
 
 ;r niece : lout 10 years old. 
 
 ,57m*, 
 
 To question, ion. 
 
 The 1- -ily, {> 
 
 The 1- 
 
 \Vo h 
 
 
 
 Cool v. 
 Some good A 
 
 . 
 
 -food. 
 ', to icaUcj to step. 
 
 rhrr must not be mistaken for ge promcnvr. 11'.) 
 :is to walk, and the latter to walk for pleasure. 
 
 Questiormer, 1 (2 1 1 ), la question. 
 
 :nn-, l:i maison. 
 La lettre, la famille, la pro: 
 La jamhi', la jamhe droite, la gauche. 
 
 ( ! mal li'. - 
 ;ous mul a la gorge. 
 
 la viandc salce. 
 
 De bons aliments. 
 Le mets. Les entre: 
 
 DCS mots sales. Du luitage. 
 Marcher, 1. 
 
 Tho 
 
 I have walkrd a good deal to-day. 
 I havr hrcn walking in the garden 
 
 with my moti: 
 
 .ilk or travel a mile. 
 !k or travel a league. 
 ilk a step. 
 To take a step, (meaning to take 
 
 measures.) 
 To go on a jour: 
 To make a speech. 
 A piece of business. 
 An affair. 
 
 To transact business. 
 To meddle with something. 
 What are you meddling with ? 
 I am meddling with my own business. 
 I do not attend to it any longer. 
 That traveler always meddles with 
 
 'r people's business. 
 T do not meddle with other people's 
 
 lu'.siness. 
 9< Aers, other people. 
 
 J'ai marche beaucoup aujourd'liui. 
 Je me suis promenu dans lo jardin 
 
 avec ma mere. 
 t Faire un mille. 
 t Faire une Heue. 
 t Faire un pas. 
 t Faire une demarche. 
 
 t Faire un voyage, 
 t Faire un discours. 
 
 Une affaire. 
 
 Faire des affaires. 
 
 t Se meler de quelque chose. 
 
 De quoi vous melez-vous ? 
 
 Je me mele de mes propres affaires. 
 
 Je ne m'en mele plus. 
 
 Ce voyageur se mele toujours del 
 
 affaires des autres. 
 Je ne me mele pas des affaires d'aa 
 
 trui. 
 Autrui, (indefinite pronoun, without 
 
 gender or plural.) 
 
296 FIFTY -SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Did you wish, want ? I did, (imperf.) | Vouliez-vous? (147) Jevoulaiaj (imp. 
 
 TT , i . ic . ... C T H 86 mele de peindro. 
 
 He employs himseli in painting. | J n s , occupe ^^^ 
 
 The art of painting. I La peinture. 
 
 Chemistry. The chemist. | La chimie. La chimiste. 
 
 ClNQUANTE-SEPTIEME THEME. Ire Sec. 
 
 On in'a dit que vous vouliez me questionner ? Oui, c'est vrai, 
 j'ai une question a vous faire. De qni est la lettre que vous avez 
 rcue ? La lettre que j'ai re$ue ! Ah ! c'est un secret. Que vous 
 ne voulez pas me contier, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, c'est un secret que 
 j'aime mieux garder. Eh, bien 1 gardcz-le. La voiture est devant 
 ja porte de la maison, etes-vous pret a partir? Pret; mais non, 
 je ne savais pas que la voiture allait venir sitot. Kous croyions que 
 vous le saviez. Qu'avez-vous encore a. faire ? J'ai a. mettre ma 
 cravate. C'est 1'atfuiro d'une minute. L'aifairo d'une minute ! pas 
 avec moi. J'aime & avoir une cravato bien mise, bien arranges. 
 Alors no parlez plus et faites-le vite. Eh, bien ! Laissez-inoi ; 
 allcz-vous-en, (go away.) Je vais en bas, jo descends, pour pre- 
 parer votre chapeau, vos gants, et votre parapluie. ISIon, non, 
 laissez tout cela et melez-vous de vos propres affaires. Si je me 
 mele des votres, c'est quo je vons aime. 
 
 Will you dine with us to-day ? With much pleasure. What have 
 you for dinner? (qucls mcts avcz-vous?) We have good soup, some 
 fresh and salt meat, and some milk-food. Do you like milk-food? 
 I like it better than (prefcrcr d) all other food. Are you ready to 
 dine ? I am. Do you intend to set out soon ? I intend setting out 
 next week. Do you travel alone? (seul?) No, Madam, I travel 
 with my uncle. Do you travel on foot or in a carriage ? (42 2 .) We 
 travel in a carriage. Did you meet any traveler in your last journey 
 (dans votre dernier voyage) to Berlin? We met many travelers. 
 How do you intend to spend your time (49 3 ) this summer? I intend 
 to take a short (petit) journey. 
 
 Did you walk much in your last journey? I like much to walk, 
 but my uncle likes to go in a carriage. Did he not wish to walk ? 
 He wished to walk at first, (d'abord,) but he wished to get into the 
 coach (montcr en voiture) after having taken a few steps, so that I 
 did not walk much. Does he no longer do any business? He no 
 longer does any, for he is too old to do it. Why does he meddle 
 with your business? He does not generally (ordinmrement) meddle 
 with other people's business, but he meddles with mine because he 
 loves me. Has your master made von recite your lesson to-day 1 
 He has made me recite it. Did you know it? I knew it pretty 
 well. Have you also done some exercises ? I have done some 
 but I have not Quite finished my lesson. 
 
FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 297 
 
 VoCABULAIiiE. 2de SC. 
 
 That art is easy. 
 
 The art. 
 
 Strange. 
 
 It is strange. It is a pity. 
 
 To employ f/ne's sdfi .-. 
 
 To concern some one* 
 
 To kvk at some one. 
 
 I do not Jke to meddle with things 
 
 that do not concern me. 
 That concerns nobody. 
 To care about, To care about it. 
 
 Vart. Cet art-la est facile, 
 
 Ktrange, 6tonnant. 
 
 C'est etrange. C'est dommage. 
 
 S'occuper, 1 , de or a. 
 
 Concerner 1, or regarder, 1, gud 
 qu'un. 
 
 Regarder, 1, quelqu'un. 
 
 f Je n'aimo pas me meler de cu 
 
 qui ne me regarde pas. 
 |" Cela ne regarde personne. 
 I f Se soucier, 1, de. S'en soucier. 
 
 Obs. 139. Sc soucier de, is not frequently used affirmatively. 
 
 Do you wish to go to Italy ? | Aves-vous envie d'aller en Italic ? 
 
 1 have no great wish to go. I do not 
 
 care about it. I'd rather not. 
 She used to like dancing, but ehe 
 
 cares no more about it. 
 We'd rather not sing. 
 To attract. 
 
 Loadstone attracts iron. 
 Her singing attracts me. 
 To charm. To enchant. 
 
 f Je ne m'en soucie pas. 
 
 Elle aimait ($ 147) la danse, maia elld 
 
 ne s'en soucie plus. 
 Nous ne nous soucionspasdec//an<er. 
 Attircr, 1. 
 
 L'aimant attire le fer. 
 Son chant m'attire. 
 Charmer, 1. Enchanter, 1. 
 
 J'en suis charmc, (fcm. ec.) 
 La beaute. La bonte. 
 
 I am charmed with it. 
 
 The beauty. The goodness. 
 
 Obs. 140. All nouns ending in le, and expressing properties or qi alilies, 
 are feminine. 
 
 The harmony, the voice, the power. 
 
 To repeat. 
 
 The repetition, the rehearsal. 
 
 The wisdom. Study. 
 
 The lord. Our Lord. 
 
 A.memorandiim,abill. A nightingale. 
 
 All beginnings are difficult. 
 
 To create. 
 
 The Creator, the creation. 
 
 The fear of the Lord. 
 
 The benefit. Heaven. The earth. 
 
 Solitude. The meeting. 
 
 Flour, meal. Some wheat. 
 
 The mill. Marriage. Death. 
 
 L' harmonic, 
 Eepeler, 1. 
 La repetition. 
 La sagesse. 
 Le seigneur. 
 Un memoire. 
 
 la voix, le pouvoir. 
 
 L'etude. 
 
 Notre Seigneur. 
 
 Unrossignol. 
 Tous les commencements sont diffi- 
 
 ciles. 
 Crier, 1. 
 
 Le Createur, la creation. 
 La crainte du Seigneur. 
 Le bienfait. Le ciel. La terro 
 La solitude. L'assemble'e. 
 
 La farine. Du froment. 
 
 j Le moulin. Le mariage. La wort. 
 
 ClNQUANTE-SEPTlfcME TllfolE. 2de Sec. 
 
 N'admirex-vous pas la beaute de cette dame ? Si fait, mais j'ad 
 lire encore plus ea bonte. Preft'rez-vovs la bonte a la beaul6 4 
 
 mire 
 
298 FIFTT-8ETENTH LESSON, (2.) 
 
 Sans doutc. Qui ne la prefere pas ? Beaucoup do personnes. La 
 iarino de votre boulanger est-elle bonne ? Ello cst quelque foifl 
 bonne et quelque fois sure, (sour.) Oii se tenaient leurs assem- 
 bli-cs ? Leurs assemblies se tenaient dans la solitude des bois. 
 Madamo de Beaumont va-t-elle au concert ? Non, elle a code sa 
 place a sa niece. Autrefois elle aimait le chant, a present elle no 
 e'en soucio plus. N'iront-elles pas au bal ? Non, elles n'iront ; 
 r.ir elles no se soucient plus do la danse. De quoi to soucies-tu ? 
 Je ne me soucie pas do grand' chose, (/ am indifferent to al 
 
 ./thing.) Ou est lo maitre do chant ? II est a la repetition. 
 r<unl/ieii do repetitions y a-t-il par semaino? II y en a une tons 
 les matins. L'art do peindro est-il facile ? Pcmandez a Mile. 
 Caroline, qui s'occtipv- do la peinturc. L:i \ un bienfait du 
 
 i-iol, nV-i-(v pas '{ Oui. CVst un bienfait quo le Creatcur a ac- 
 rorde a la Icrre. Avcz-vous appris le inariM.uv k- votre cousin ? 
 Oui, il ni'en a informe. C'est doinnitvge, n'cst-co pas? Je no dis 
 rien ; inais je n'en pense pas uioins. La mort ducapitaine est 
 L-I range, n'ost-oe pas? Oui, ello est trcs-etrange. 
 
 What have you been doing (f 145) at school, to-day? We have 
 bocMi Jistoninj; to our professor. What did he say new and interest- 
 ing .' Ho made a long (grand) speech on the goodness of God. 
 Alter saying (40i) " Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good 
 memory is a great benefit of God," he said, "God is the Creator ot 
 hiMYi'ii and earth; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all wis- 
 dom." What are you doing ull day in this garden? I am walking 
 in il. What is there in it that attracts you? (qu'cst-ce qui vous y 
 attire?) The singing of the birds attracts me, (nry attire.) Are 
 there any nightingales in it? There are some in it, and the har- 
 mony of their singing enchants me. Have those nightingales more 
 power over (sur) you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of 
 your tender (tcndre) mother, who loves you so much ? I confess 
 the harmony of the singing of these little birds has more power 
 over me than the most tender words (que les paroles les plus tendres) 
 ul my dearest friends. 
 
 How does your niece amuse herself (or pass her time) in her 
 solitude? She reads a good deal, she plays on the piano, she is 
 fond of painting, and she writes letters to her absent mother. How 
 does your uncle amuse himself in his solitude? He used to find 
 ( 147) much pleasure in society, in the world; but now he does not 
 care about it; he is only fond of fishing and chemistry. Why do 
 you not call on Frederick ? What is that to you? (qu'est-ce que cela 
 vous fait) I beg, (je vous prieJ) I do not generally meddle with 
 things that do not concern me; but I love yo^ so much that I con- 
 
FIFTY- EIGHTH LESSON. 
 
 299 
 
 cern myself much about (quc jc m-iniercsse bcaucoup d) what you are 
 doing. Does any one trouble his head about you? No one troubles 
 his head about me, for T am not worth the trouble, (jc n'cn VJKX p<u 
 la pcine.) 
 
 V'KTY-KIUITH LKSSON, 58th. Cinquantc-huitieme Le^on, 
 
 VOCABULAIBE. Ire Sec. 
 SECOND FUTURE. Futur Passe ou Compos*. 
 
 Tni Futur passe, like the second future, is formed from the future cf the 
 auxiliary, and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. 
 
 [ .-hall h:r. 
 Thou wilt have ', 
 
 will liavn loi 
 
 Vou will hi. 
 
 They will 1 
 
 I f\\A\\ ha\v come. 
 
 Thou wilt hi 
 
 lie will have cume. 
 
 She will have come. 
 
 ;iall have come. 
 You will have come. 
 They will have come. 
 They will have come, /<///. 
 
 U have been praised. 
 Thou wilt have been prais< <1. 
 He will have been praised. 
 She will have been praised. 
 We shall have been praised. 
 You will have been praised. 
 They will have been praised. 
 They (/cm.) will have been praised. 
 I shall have risen. 
 Thou shalt have gone to bed. 
 Shall he have undressed himself? 
 She will not have dressed herself. 
 Will any one have praised one's self ? 
 We shall have made a mistake. 
 Shall you have taken a walk ? 
 Shall they not have sat down ? 
 Shall they not have sat down ? 
 
 Ex. 
 
 J'aurai-aimd. 
 Tu auras airm'. 
 .11, elle, ou on nu r a aim'. 
 Nous aurons aimd. 
 Vous aurez ainu'. 
 11s (/em. clles) auront aim\ 
 Je serai vcnu, Fim. venue. 
 Tuserasvenu, " venue. 
 11 sera vcnu. 
 Elle sera venue. 
 
 Nous serons venus, Fern, venues. 
 Vous screz venus, " venuea. 1 
 
 Ilsseront venus. \ Onseravenu. 
 Elles seront venues. ) 
 
 J'aurai etd loud, Fcm. louce. 
 
 Tu auras dte loud, ** lou 
 
 II aura dte loue. 
 
 Kile aura etd loude. 
 
 Nous aurons e*te loues, /em. loueea, 
 
 Vous aurcz dte loues, " ouees, 
 
 Us auront dtd loues. 
 
 F'lles auront dtd louees. 
 
 Je me serai leve, /em. levde. 
 
 Tu te seras couche, " couchee. 
 
 Se sera-t-il ddshabilld ? 
 
 Elle ne se sera pas habillce. 
 
 Sc sera-t-on loue ? 
 
 Nous nous serons trompds. 
 
 Vous serez-vous promend ? (sing.)' 
 
 Ne se seront-ils pas assis ? 
 
 Ne sc seront-elles pas assises ? 
 
 1 It is hardly necessary to remark, that if one person only is spoken to, 
 I e. when the second person plural, vous, is employed instead of the second 
 person singular tu, no * is put to the past participle. 
 
00 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 To have left. 
 
 When I have paid for the horse I shall 
 
 have only ten crowns left. 
 How much money have you left ? 
 I have one franc left. 
 I have only one franc left. 
 How much has your brother left ? 
 He has one crown left. 
 How much has your sister left ? 
 Hie h;i3 only three sous left. 
 How much have your brothers left? 
 Thrv have one louis left. 
 
 * Rcster, 1. 
 
 Quand j'aurai paye le chcveL il * 
 
 me restera que dix ecus. 
 Combien d' argent vous re*te-t-ii t 
 II me reste un franc. 
 II ne me reste qu'un franc. 
 Combien reste-t-il a votre frcie ? 
 II lui reste un ecu. 
 Combien reste-t-il a votre sceur ? 
 II ne lui reste que trois sous. 
 Combien reste-t-il a vos freres? 
 II leur reste un louis. 
 
 O6.f. 111. In Kngli.-h the present (O!>*. 106, 46 s ) or the perfect is used 
 aftrr the conjunctions, vh<n, ax soon as, or after, when futurity is to be 
 ssed ; but in French the future must in such instances always li 
 employed. 
 
 CINQUANTK-II: ! i IKMI: TiiibiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 vous sere/ venue nous vor, nous irons r ous voir, car 
 vous save/ quo vous nous devez une visile. Comptez-vous les 
 visiles dp.cette maniere ? Non, c'est seulement pour vous rappeler 
 qu'il y a long-temps que nous n'avons eu le plaisir de vous voii 
 chez nous. Aussitot qu ; ils auiont cte apportes, envoyez-les-moi, 
 ontendez-vous ? Je iry manquerai pas. Quand irez-vous voir leg 
 De Courci'? ( 140 5.) Nous passerons chez eux aussitot que noua 
 eerons in formes de leur retour. Charles ira-t-il se promener a cheval 
 apres qu'il aura dine? Non, il ira faire une visile a son oncle 
 donl la femme est morte, (is dead.) Sa femme est morte, et de 
 qnoi? Elle est morte du cholera. C'est dommage. C'etait une 
 tres-bonne dame. Le marchand a-t-il envoye le baril de farine ? 
 Non ? il ne Pa pas encore envoye. Quand il Paura envoye, faites du 
 pain. Pen ferai aussitot que la farine sera venue. Saviez-vous que 
 Thomas est marie ? (married?) Non, je ne le savais pas; mais je 
 savais que Marthe est mariee, et bien mariee. Avec qui est-elle 
 mariee? Elle est mariee avec M. Dubois. Le marchand] Non, 
 Pavocat. J'en suis charmee. 
 
 Will your parents go into the country to-morrow ? They will not 
 go, for it is too dusty. Shall we take a walk, to-day ? We will not 
 take a walk, for it is soon going to rain. Will it rain cefcie 12 
 o'clock ? I believe it will. Do you see the castle of my relation 
 behind (dcrrierc) yonder mountain ? (cette montagnc-ld?) I see it. 
 Shall we go in 1 We will go in, if you like. Will you go mto thai 
 room 1 I shall not go into it, for it is smoky. I wish you a good 
 rnorning, Macam, (26 2 .) Will you not come in? Will you not si 
 dovn ? I will sit down upon that large arm-chair. Will you teL 
 
FIFTY-EIGH TH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 301 
 
 me what has become of your brother ? I will tell you. Wbere is 
 your sister ? Do you not see her? She sits upon the bench. la 
 your father seated upon the bench? No, he sits upon the sofa of 
 mahogany. 
 
 Hast thou spent all th} money 1 I have not spent all. How much 
 hast thou left * I have not much left; I have but five francs left. 
 How much money have thy sisters left? They have but three 
 crowns left. Have you money enough left to pay your tailor? ) 
 have enough left to pay him; but if I pay him I shall have but 
 little left. How much money will your brothers have left? They 
 will have a hundred crowns left. When will you go to Italy? I 
 shall go as soon as (aussitot que) I have learned Italian. When will 
 your brothers goto France? They will go as soon as they know 
 i % h. When will they learn it ? They will learn it when they 
 have found a good master. How much money shall we have left 
 when wr .,1 for our horses? When we tare paid for them, 
 
 only a hundred crowns left. 
 
 VOCAIU I.AIUK. 2de Sec. 
 
 \\ lu'ii aid the tailor, they 
 
 will have a hundred francs 1- ft. 
 \\ hrn 1 run at my aunt's, will you 
 
 . : J ? 
 
 ne writing, will you 
 take a turn wiiii 
 
 n you have finished 
 
 your exercise. 
 What will you do \\licn you have 
 
 dined ? 
 When 1 have spoken to your brother, 
 
 I shall know what I have to do. 
 
 Does it ruin ? It does. 
 
 It rains. 
 
 Does it snow ? It does not. 
 
 It snows. 
 
 Is it muddy ? 
 
 It is muddy. 
 
 Is it muddy out of doors ? 
 
 It is very muddy. 
 
 Is it dusty ? 
 
 It is very dusty. 
 
 Is it smoky? 
 
 It is too smoky 
 
 Out of doors. Out of the window. 
 
 Quand ils auront paye le taillcur, il 
 
 leur restera cent francs. 
 Quand je serai chez ma tantc, vicn- 
 
 drez-vousme voir? (0/?. 1<W>, 4fAi 
 Apres que vous uurrz fin I d'ecrire 
 
 viendrez-vous faire un tour avt- 
 
 moi ? 
 Vousjouerez lorsquc wits nnrczfini 
 
 votre theme. 
 Que fercz-vous quand vous aurez 
 
 dine ? 
 Quand j'aurai parlo a votre frere, je 
 
 saurai ce que j'ai a faire. 
 
 IDIOMS WITH FAIRE. 
 
 t Fait-il de la pluie ? II en fait. 
 
 t II fait de la pluie. 
 
 t Fait-il de la neige 1 II n T en fait pat 
 
 t II fait de la neige. 
 
 t Fait-il de la boue ? 
 
 t II fait de la boue, 
 
 t Fait-il sale dehors ? 
 
 t II fait tres-sale. 
 
 t Fait-il de lapoussiere ? 
 
 t II fait beaucoup de poussiere. 
 
 t Fait-il de la fumee ? 
 
 t II fait trop de f um^e. 
 
 Dehors. Par la fendtrc. 
 
502 
 
 FIFTY-EJ .JHTll LESSON. 
 
 To enter, to go in, to come in. 
 
 Will you go into my room ? I will 
 
 go in. 
 
 Will you go in ? 1 shall go in. 
 To sit down. 
 Cs sit, to be sealed. 
 {Jo is seated upon the large chair. 
 Sli3 ic seated upon the bench. 
 Tofill. . .vf\\\\, fill up .. . with. 
 Fiil this bottle with wine. 
 What do you fill up with water ? 
 What does he fill his purse with ? 
 He fills his purse with money. 
 The park-it. My vest pocket. 
 
 Entrer, 1, dans. 
 
 Voulez-vous entrer dans ma choir 
 
 bre ? Je veux y entrer. 
 Y entrerez-vous ? J'y cntrcioL 
 S'asseoir,* 3. (51 2 .) 
 Eire assis ; fern, asstse. 
 II est assis sur la grande chaise. 
 Elle est assise sur le bane. 
 liemplir, 2 ... de, remplissez . . . dfk 
 Remplissez cette bouteiile de vin. 
 Que remplissez-vous d'eau? 
 De quoi rcmplit-il sa bourse t 
 II remplit sa bourse d'argent. 1 
 La pochc. La poche de mon gilet. 
 
 CiNQUANTE-HUITlilMK TlI^ME. 2dc Sec. 
 
 Ou est Mile. Emilie? Elle est assise sur le bane scus le srrus 
 lubre dans le jardin. II fait tres-humide. rr'a-t-elle pas peur de s'e:> 
 rhumerl Elle craint plus la poussiere que Vhumiditc, (dampness.) 
 Que fera-t-il aussitot qu'il aura fini son theme'? jouera-t-il du violon? 
 Non, il n'en jouera pas ; car rimmidite a casse deux cordcs (strings} 
 de son vinlon. Quelles cordes sont-ce? Ce sent les deux plus 
 peti:< -il pas d ? autres cordes? Non; mais auand il aura 
 
 lini, il i,-a e:i aclieter. Jouerez-vous du piano quand il jouera du 
 violon ? Je ne me soucie pas de jouer aujourd^hui ; mais nous jouons 
 trea-aouvent ensemble. 11 fait de la pluie, appelez Mile. Emilie, on 
 elle sera mouillee. Vous vous trompex ; ce n'est pas de la pluie, 
 mais de la neige. Je crois que vous avez raison, et j'en suis bien 
 fache, car il fera tres-ale dehors, il fera tres-mauvais marcher. Je 
 commence a avoir froid; entrons dans mon bureau; il y fait plus 
 chaud. 
 
 Do you gain (gflgJier, 53 2 ) anything, by (<t) that business? I do 
 not gain much by it ; (i/ ; ) but my brother gains a good deal by it. 
 He fills his purse with money. How much money have you gained 1 
 I have gained only a little, but my cousin has gained much Dy if 
 He has tilled his pocket with money. Why does that gardener not 
 work? He is a good-for-nothing fellow, for he does nothing but eat 
 all the day long. He fills himself up with fresh and salt meat, so 
 that he will rrake himself (se rendre) ill if he continues to eat so 
 much. With what (de quoi) have you filled that bottle ? I have 
 filled it with wine. Will this man take care of my horse? He will 
 
 1 The ambiguity conveyed by: 11 remplit sa bourse d' argent, might be 
 avoided by saying : 11 remplit d'argmt sa bourse ; but the French havo nof 
 yet adopted the latter construction. Hence I have used the former. 
 
FIFTY-EIGHTH iESSON. (3.) 
 
 303 
 
 lake care of it. Who \vill take care of my servant ? The landlord 
 will take care of him. 
 
 Does your servant take care of your horses ? He does take caru 
 of them, and my cousin's. Is he taking care of your clothes'? He 
 takes care of them, for he brushes them every morning. Have you 
 ever drank French wine ? I have never drunk any. Is it long since 
 you ate French bread'.' It is almost tl. since I ate any. 
 
 Have you hurt my brother-in-law 1 I have not hurt him, but he hag 
 cut my finger. What has he cut your linger with ? With the- knife 
 which you have lent him. Is your father arrived at last .' Every- 
 body saya that he is arrived, but I have not seen him yet. -Has the 
 phy.Mciar. hurt your son ? He has hurt him, for he has cut his linger. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 8me ScC. 
 
 \ ou come quite alone ? I Etes-vous venu to-.it M-.U! ? 
 
 ..:ive brought all my in \on, j'ui arm-in; tout nxm n>on<le. 
 with me. 
 
 To lr, \ Amcncr, 1. 
 
 .'h, not !>< : r. rhi 
 
 ;lk, and the latter when it cannot. Kx, 
 
 He has brouglit al. his men along 
 
 with him. 
 
 vou brought your brother along 
 
 with you ? 
 
 I have brought him along with me. 
 Have you told the groom to bring me 
 
 the horse ? 
 The groom, the ostler. 
 
 MI bringing me my books ? 
 1 am bringing them to 
 To take, to carry. 
 
 II a amcnc* tout son momJc. 
 Avez-vous anicnu votrc frere ? 
 
 Je 1'ai amene. 
 
 Avez-vous dit au palefrenicr de m'a 
 
 incncr le cheval ? 
 Lr palefrenier, le valet dYcnric. 
 M'apportez-vous nics lr, 
 Je vous les apporte. 
 , 1. 
 
 OLs. 143. The same distinction must be observed with regard to menct 
 and porter, as with amencr and apporter. 
 
 Will you take that dog to the stable ? 
 
 I will take it thither. 
 
 Are you carrying this gun to my 
 
 father ? I carry it to him. 
 
 The cane, stick. The stable. 
 
 To come down, to go down. 
 To go down into the well. 
 To go or come down the hill. 
 To go down the river. 
 
 Voulez-vous mener ce chicn a To 
 
 curie ? 
 
 Je veux 1'y mener. 
 Portez-vous ce fusil a mon pure ? 
 Je le lui porte. 
 La canne. I/ecmic 
 
 Descendre, 4. 
 Descendre dans le puits. 
 Descendre la montagne. 
 Descendre la riv.'ere. 1 
 
 1 The verb dcscc:n1rr takes the auxiliary avoir in its compound tcnaui 
 when, as in these examples, it is construed with the accusative ; otherwise 
 
804 
 
 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 To alight from one's horse, to dis- 
 mount. 
 
 To alight, to get out. 
 To go up, to mount, to ascend. . 
 To go up the mountain. 
 Where is your brother gone to ? 
 He has ascended the hill. 
 To mount the horse. 
 To get into the coach. 
 To get on board the ship. 
 To desire, to beg, to pray, to request. 
 Ask him to do it. 
 
 Dcscendre de cheval. (52*.) 
 
 Descendre de voiture. 
 Monter, 1. 
 Monter la montagne. 
 Ou votre frere est-il alle ? 
 II a monte* la collinr. 1 
 Monter a cheval. 
 t Monter en voiturc. 
 Monter sur un vaisseau. 
 Frier, I, (de av. 1'infin.) 
 Priez-Ie de le faire. 
 
 Ask your brother to come down. Do, I Priez votre frere de descendra, jo 
 
 vousen prie. 
 
 Le Jleuve, (se jettc dans une mer.) 
 La riviere, (se jette dans un ileiive.) 
 La riviere Schuylkill se jette dans lo 
 
 fleuve Delaware. 
 La barbe. Le torrent. 
 
 Remonter la riviere. 
 
 (I beg you would,) pray. 
 The river, (if it empties in a sea.) 
 The river, (empties in another river.) 
 The river Schuylkill empties in the 
 
 Delaware. 
 
 The beard. The stream, torrent. 
 To go or come up the river. 
 
 CiXQUAXTE-liriTlfcME TlI^HE. 3me SeC. 
 
 I.c voyageur a-t-il descendu la monlagne? II a descendu la mori 
 (airiH\ et il a rcmonte le fleuve. Votre neveu est-il descendu do 
 cheval pour rainasser le gant de sa compagne? N T on, un \ 
 a eu la bonte de le ramasser et de le rendre a la demoiselle. J 
 Hail Columbia pour nous. Je ne me soucie pas de jouer a pnV 
 Ah! jouez-le, je vous en prie. (Oh! do, play it.) Je le ferai pour 
 vous obliger; mais je ne pourrai pas bien le jouer, je vous assun.-. 
 car jcnc suis pas en train. (I do not feel like it; in the humor.) Qui 
 est ce M. a la barbe bleue? C'est le ministre de notre eglise. l.f 
 palefrenier a-t-il mene le nouveau cheval a la vieille ecune? Oui ; 
 il Fy a mene. Voulez-vous amener votre scour avec vous et apportur 
 son cahier de chant? Je Famenerai, mais je irapporlerai }>a- 
 cahierde chant. J 7 ai oublie ma canne dans Fecurie; allez-Fy che;- 
 cher pour moi. Attendez-moi un instant, je reviendrai de suite. 
 
 Has the joiner's leg been cut off? (coupcr ?) They have cut it oil 
 to prevent his dying. Are you pleased (content) \vith your servant ? 
 I am much pleased with him, for he is fit for anything, (propre d 
 
 It takes ft re. Ex. Il a dcscendu la montagne, he has gone down the moun- 
 tain; die est descendue d j une famille honorable, she is descended from an 
 honorable family. 
 
 1 Monter also takes avoir when, as in *tese examples, it is construed with 
 tho accusative, and etre when otherwise. Ex. 1 1 est monte par degrit co* 
 plut hautes charges mihtaires, he has ascended by degrees to the highest 
 military employments. 
 
FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 305 
 
 lout.) What does he know? He knows ererything, (tout.) Can 
 he ride ? (montcr & chcval ?) He can. Has your brother returned at 
 last from England? He has returned thence, and has brought you 
 a line horse. Has he told his groom to bring it tc me ? He has. 
 "What do you think (quc ditcs-vous) of that horse i I think ( je dis) 
 that it is a line and good one, (qiSil est beau et ban.) and beg you to 
 irai it ir.tD the stable. How did yon spend your time yesterday? 
 I went to the concert, and afterwards (cnsuitc) to the play. 
 
 When did that laborer (ouvricr) go down into the well? He went 
 icwn into it this morning. Has he come up again already? (reman* 
 it: ?) He came up an hour ago. Where is your brother? He is in 
 loom. Tell him to come down,- pray, do, (je vous en prie.) I 
 will tell him so, but he is not dressed (52 2 ) yet. Is your friend still 
 (toujours) on the mountain? l*e has already come down. Did you 
 go down or up (remontcr) the river ? We wont down. Did my 
 cousin speak to you before he started? He spoke to me before he 
 got into the coach. Have you seen my brother? I saw him before 
 I went on board the ship. Is it better to get into a coach than to go 
 on boaid the ship? It is not worth while to get into a coach or to 
 go on board the ship, when one has no wish to travel. 
 
 FIFTY-NINTH LKSSON, 59th. Cinquantc-neuvieme Lc^on, 59m. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 <>1 TUB IMPERFECT. De VImparJait>$ 147.) 
 For its lormanon ana use sec ($ 147). That paragraph must be carefully 
 fctudied. 
 
 When I was at Merlin I often went 
 
 to see my friends. 
 When you were in I'aris yon often 
 
 went to the Champs-Elysees. 
 At the death of Lucretia Rome was 
 
 governed by kings. 
 Washington was a great man. 
 Cicero was a great orator, (used to be.) 
 Our ancestors went a hunting every 
 
 day, (used to go.) 
 
 The Romans cultivated the arts and 
 sciences, and rewarded merit. 
 
 Were you walking ? 
 1 was not walking. 
 
 Quand y etais a Berlin, fallals sou- 
 vent voir mes amis. 
 
 Quand vous etiez a Paris, vous allies 
 souvent aux Champs-Elysees. 
 
 A la mort de Lucrece Rome etau 
 gouverne'e par des rois. 
 
 Washington etait un grand homme. 
 
 Ciceron dtait un grand orateur. 
 
 Nos ancetres allaient tons les jouri 
 a la chasse. 
 
 Les Romains cultivaient les arts et 
 les sciences, et rdcompensaiei! ! 
 merite. 
 
 Vous promeniez-vous ? 
 
 Je ne me womenais uas. 
 
FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Were )ou in Paris when the king 
 was there ? 
 
 I was there when he was there. 
 
 Where were you when I was in Lon- 
 don ? 
 
 A.t what time did you breakfast when 
 you were in Germany ? 
 
 t breakfasted when my father break- 
 fasted. 
 
 Did you work when he was working ? 
 
 I studied when he was working. 
 
 Some fish. Some game. 
 
 When I lived (used to live) at my 
 father's, I rose (used to rise) earlier 
 than I do now. ($ 145 1.) 
 
 When we lived in that country, we 
 went a fishing often. 
 
 When I was ill, I kept in bed all day. 
 
 (<ast summer, when I was in the 
 country, there was a great deal of 
 fruit 
 
 6tiez-vous a Paris lorsque le roi J 
 
 etait ? 
 
 J'y etais lorsqu'il y etait. 
 Ou etiez-vous lorsque j'utais a Lon- 
 
 dres? 
 Quand dejeuniez-vous lorsque voui 
 
 etiez en Allemagne ? 
 Je dejeunais" lorsque mon pere do- 
 
 jeunait. 
 
 Travailliez-vous lorsqu'il travaiilait t 
 J'etudiais lorsqu'il travaillait. 
 Du poisson. Du gibier. 
 
 Quand je demeurais chez mon pero, 
 
 je me levais de mrilleure heuro 
 
 que je ne le fais a present. (53 1 , 
 
 Obs. 120.) 
 Quand nous demeuriona dins te 
 
 pays-la, nous allion* smivent a la 
 
 pGclie. 
 Quand j'<;tais malade, ja gardais le 
 
 lit toute la jour; 
 L'etd passe, pendant que J T ':: 
 
 campagne, il y avail be.iucoup de 
 
 fruit. 
 
 CINQUANT: i: 'IiiKMi:. Ire Sec. 
 
 Qui cherchicz-vous? Je cherphais mon petit fiere, que je ne peux 
 irouver ni en haut ni en bas. Si vous le cherchez encore, il faut 
 aller pre.s du fleuve. Que fait-il la ? II peche, assis eur le bane que 
 vous y avez fait mettre, (had or got placed.) II n'etait pas tres-bien 
 hier ; rhuinidite ne le rendra-t-elle pas malade ? J'espere que non. 
 Tl y a ii hi porte un gar(?on qui vous demande. Faites-le entrer. 
 Que me voulez-vous ? Je vous apporte vos habits. Pourquoi ne lea 
 avez-vous pas aoportes avant? Ils n'etaient pas fails, de sorte que 
 jo ne pouvais pas lesapporter; mais lesvoici. C ; estbon. Mettez- 
 les sur cette chaise. Quand je les aurai essayes, je passerai chez le 
 taiileur. Tres-bien, M. Vous avez appris votre lepon, pourquoi 
 fotre sccur ne savait-elle pas la sienne? Elle a fait uno longue 
 ^long, fern.) promenade avec notre chere mere, de sorte qu 7 elle n'a 
 pas pu 1'etudier. Ou ont-elles ete ? Elles out d'abord ete pres de la 
 riviere qui est demere noire jardin, ensuite elles ont passe devant *a 
 grande maison neuve, dont elles out fait le lour, et enfin, elles sout 
 monlees sur la monlagne. Et tout cela a pied ? Oui; mais je voua 
 Assure qu'elles etaient bien faliguees. Je le crois 
 
 Were you loved when you were at Dresden ? (Dresde?) I was 
 Uit lialed. Was ycur brother esteemed when he was in London? 
 
FIFTi'-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 307 
 
 He was loved and esteemed. When were you in Spam ? I waa 
 there when you were there. Who was loved and who was hated? 
 Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, were loved, and those 
 who were naughty, (mcchant,) idle, and disobedient, were punished, 
 hated, and despised. Were you in Berlin when the king was there? 
 I was there when he was there. Was your uncle in London when 
 I was there ? He was there when you were there. Where were 
 you when I was at Dresden? I was in Paris. Where was youi 
 father when you were in Vienna? He was in England. 
 
 At what time did you breakfast when you were in France .* 1 
 breakfasted when my uncle breakfasted. Did you work when he 
 
 orking? I studied when he was working. Did your brother 
 
 work when you were working? He played when I was working. 
 
 On -vhat (Dc quci) lived our ancestors? They lived on nothing but 
 
 li>h and game, for they went a hunting and a fishing every day. 
 
 :iding the river (Jleuve) while it rained? Yes, we 
 
 Jang it v/hile it was raining very fast; and a*> we had no 
 
 Bt Did you often go to see your friends 
 
 when at Berlin? 1 went to see them often; 5 or 6 times 
 
 k. Were you writing to John? I was writing to him, his 
 cousin Julius, and his friend Alfred. (64 2.) Did you sometimes 
 go to the Champs-Elysees when you were at Paris ? I often went. 
 
 YOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 -1 UK The same thing, 
 
 une violin. The szmejlute. 
 '. one ; it is the same ; it makes 
 no difference ; no matter, &c. 
 Such. 
 
 Such a man. Such men. 
 
 Such a woman. Such things. 
 Such. 
 Such men merit esteem. 
 
 Out. 
 
 Out of the city, (the town.) 
 Without or out of doors. Who is out ? 
 The church stands outside the town. 
 I shall wait for you before the town 
 
 gate. 
 
 The town or city gate. 
 The barrier, the lurnpike-gate. 
 Seldom, (rarely.) Some brandy. 
 The life. To get one's livelihood by. 
 I g^t my livelihood by wor! 
 He gets his living by writing. 
 
 Une chose. La memo 
 
 Le memo violon. La memo Jliitr. 
 
 t C'est egal ; c'est la meme chose ; 
 
 fa nefait ricii ; cela ne fait rien. 
 Mas. Un tcl ; fem. Une Idle. 
 Un tel homme. De tela honunr:-. 
 Une telle femme. De telles choses. 
 Pareil ; fern, pareille. 
 De pareils hommes meritenl do 
 
 1'estime. 
 Ilors de. 
 Hors de la ville. 
 
 Dehors. Qui est dehora ? 
 
 L'eglise est hors de la ville. 
 Je vous attendrai devant la porte de 
 
 la ville. 
 
 La porte de la ville. 
 La barriere. 
 
 li.-irrment. De Peau de vie. 
 
 La vie. Gagner ea vie u, 
 
 Je gagne ma vie a travail cr. 
 Jl gagne sa vie a e'crire. 
 
808 FIFTY- NINTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 I gain my money by working. 
 
 By what does that man get his live- 
 lihood ? 
 
 To proceed, to go o?i, to continue. 
 
 He continues his speech. 
 
 A good appetite. 
 
 The narrative, the tale. 
 
 The edg, the border, the shore. 
 
 The edge of the brook. 
 
 The sea-shore. 
 
 On the sea-shore. 
 
 The shore, the water-side, the coast, 
 ihi.' bank. 
 
 People or folks. 
 
 They are good folks. 
 
 Je gagne mon arge it a travail! i r. 
 A quoi cet honimt gagne-t-il eavie ? 
 
 Continuer, 1, (de or c, av. 1'inf.) 
 II continue son discours. 
 Un bon appetit. 
 Le conte, (la narration. ) 
 Le bord. 
 
 t-e bord du ruisseau. 
 Le bord de la rner. 
 rd dc la UK r. 
 -e, hi rive. 
 
 t Ce sent de bonnes gens. 
 
 Obx. 11 1. The adject i\ < s that precede gens must be feminine, those that 
 follow it, masculine. 
 
 Those people are despised. I Ces gens-lu Font rm'j 
 
 Thone wiokcd 'people are despised. I Ces mechanics gens sont nn'pr'.- 
 
 CiNQr.\NTi:-M:rvir.Mi-: TiiibiK 2de Sec. 
 
 Qui est dehors? Personne n'est dehors. Thomas, fermez les 
 poites et les volets. Lemarchand de vin a-t-il envoye l'eau-de-vie? 
 Non, il n'a pas encore pn 1'envoyer, parce que son garcon est ma- 
 lade. A-t-il bu trop d'eau-de-vie '? C'estcela meme, (the very thing.) 
 Ou serez-vous oblige d'attendre votre neveu et votre niece ? Nous 
 les attendrons : elle, a la barriere, lui, a ratelier. Les attendiez-vous 
 au musee hier? Non, je les attendais au pont couvert. Faisait-il 
 de Porage alors ? Oui, il en faisait. Le tonnerre grondait, il pleuvait 
 et il grelait. Sont-ils venus apres Porage Us ont cru que je riV 
 pas sorti. Quel conte ce voyageur vous a-t-il fait ? (did he relate ?) 
 11 m'a fait im conte auquel je n'ai riencompris; il m'aditdeschoses 
 etranges et extraordinaires. C ; est dommage que les voyageurs 
 cfagercnt (exaggerate) comme ils le font. Y aura-t-il beaucoup de 
 fruit cette annee-ci ? II y en aura beaucoup, des pommes, sunout^ 
 (especially.) Que faisiez-vous lorsque vous demouriez dans ce pays- 
 la? Quand nous y demeurions, nous allions souvent chasser sur lo 
 Dord de la mer. Quels gens aviez-vous la 1 Nous y avions co 
 bonnes gens, mais ils ne sont pas heureux. 
 
 Do you rise early ? Not so eady as you, but when I lived at my 
 nncle's I rose earlier than I do now. Did you sometimes keep in 
 bed when you lived at your uncle's? When I was ill I kept in bed 
 all day. Is there much fruit this year? I do not know; but last 
 summer, when I was in the country, there was a great deal of fruit 
 What do you get your livelihood by? I get my livelihood by work- 
 Vij. Does your friend get his livelihood by writing ? He gets it b^ 
 
SIXTIETH LESSCN. (.) 
 
 309 
 
 jpeaking and writing. Do these gentlemen get their livelihood by 
 working? They get it by doing nothing, (a ne ricn faire,) for they 
 are too idle to work. What has your nephew gained that money 
 by ? He has gained it by working. 
 
 What did you get your livelihood by when you were in England ? 
 I got it by writing. Did your cousin get his appetite by writing ] 
 He got it by working. Have you ever seen such a person? I 1 
 never seen such a one, (une parcille.) Have you already seen our 
 church? I have not seen it yet. Where does it stand? It stands 
 outside the town. If you wish to see it, I will go with you in order 
 10 shov. ; t you. What do the people live upon that live 0:1 the sea- 
 shore ? They live on fish alone. Why will you not go a hunting 
 any more '? While 1 was hunting yesterday, I killed nothing but an 
 .uat I shall not go any more a hunting. Why do you 
 not eat? Became I have not a good appetite. Why did your bu- 
 BO much? Because he had agood appetite. Do you make 
 faults in your e ' I do sometimes. You must not (il nc faut 
 
 pas en) make any. for you have all ($ 91) you want to prevent you 
 
 MXTlI'/ni LESSON, 60th. Soixantiente Lecon, 60mc. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 IMPERFECT CONTINUED. Imparfait Continue. 
 
 \ forgot, thou fDrgottest, he or she 
 for<: 
 
 rgot, you forgot, they forgot. 
 
 When we went to school we often 
 forgot our books. 
 
 When you went to church you often 
 prayed to the Lord for your chil- 
 dren. 
 
 I paid, thou paidest, he or she paid. 
 
 \\ paid, you paid, they paid. 
 
 When we received some money we 
 employed it in purchasing good 
 books. 
 
 When you bought of that merchant 
 you did not always pay in cash. 
 
 ling your sister succeeded in mend- 
 ing your cravut ? 
 She has succeeded in it. 
 
 J'oubliais, tu oubliais, il ou elle ou 
 
 bliait. 
 Nous oubltVons, vous oubh'/ez, ils ou 
 
 elles oubliaient. ($ 147 5.) 
 Quand nous allions a 1'ucolc noun 
 
 oublium* souvent nos livres. 
 Quand vous alliez a 1'eglise vous 
 
 pritez souvent le Seigneur pour voo 
 
 enfants. 
 
 Je payais, tu payais, il ou elle payait. 
 Nous payion*, vous payiez, ils ou 
 
 elles payaient. ($ 147 6.) 
 Quand nous recevions de 1' argent 
 
 nous Femployijwj a acheter de 
 
 bons livres. 
 Quand vous achetiez chez ce mar 
 
 chand vous ne payi'ez pas toujoura 
 
 comptant. 
 Votre soeur cst-elle parvenua u rac 
 
 commoder votre cravate ? 
 Elle y est parvonue. 
 
810 
 
 SIXTIETH LESSON. (l.> 
 
 Has the woman returned from 
 
 market ? 
 
 She has not yet returned. 
 Did the women agree to that? 
 
 the 
 
 La femmc est-elle revenue du mar* 
 
 che? 
 
 Elle n'en est pas encore revenue. 
 Les femmes sont-elles convenuee dtf 
 
 cela? 
 
 Elles en sont convenues. 
 Oil votre scour est-elle allee? 
 Elle est allee a 1'eglise. 
 
 They did agree to it. 
 
 Where is your sister gone to ? 
 
 She is gone to the church. 
 
 POTENTIAL, IMPERFECT. Conditional, Simple ou Pret cnt. 
 
 For its formation and use see ($ 148.) That paragraph must be well 
 studied. 
 
 I would ^o if I had time. 
 IT he knew what you have done he 
 
 would scold you. 
 To scold. Do not scold if you can 
 
 prevent it. 
 if there were any wood he would 
 
 make a fire. 
 Should the men come, it would be 
 
 necessary to give them something 
 
 to drink. 
 Should we receive our letters, 
 
 would not read them until to-mor- 
 row. 
 Not until, (meaning not before.) 
 
 J'irais si j'avais le temps. 
 
 S'il savait ce que vous avcz fait il 
 
 vous gronderait. 
 Grander, I. Ne grondcz pat 
 
 pouvez rempecher. 
 S'il y avail du bois il ferait du feu. 
 
 Si les hommes venaicnt, il faiidrait 
 leur donner quelque chose a boire. 
 
 Si nous recevions nos lettres, nous 
 ne les Hrions pas avant deniain. 
 
 Must I go ? 
 You must go. 
 You must not go. 
 To guess. 
 An acquaintance. 
 
 Pas avant, (tie av. I'lni'mi.) 
 
 Faut-il que j'aille ? 
 
 II faut que vous alliez. 
 
 II ne faut pas que vous allie/. 
 
 Deviner, 1. 
 
 Une connaissance. Une de mess . . . s, 
 
 An .... of mine. 
 
 v< 
 
 SoiXANTiiiME TII&ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Attendez-vous quelqu'un? A present? Non. J'altendais u:: 
 mvrier (workman) a six heures, et comme il n'est pas verm, je ne 
 ['attends plus. S'il venait, 1'emploieriez-vous ? ($ 144 ? } Non, si 
 cet ouvrier venait a cette heure-ci, je ne remploierais pas s'il 
 n'avait pas une excellente raison a me donner pour avoir manque 
 de venir. Vous avez raison, il n'y a rien de tel (06s. 7) que d'etre 
 ponctuel. Saviez-vous que M. N. D etait mort? Oui, je 1'avais 
 appris avant d'arriver. Etait-ce une de vos connaissances 1 Oui, 
 c' etait une de mes plus anciennes connaissances. Combien y avail- il 
 que vous le con^aissiez? II y avait environ. . . .Devinez. Deviner ! 
 Je ne peux jaiuais deviner. Dites-le moi. Eh ! bien, il y avait 
 quinze ans. 0\\faut-il que faille ? II faut qud vous alliez chez lo 
 marchand de bijoux. Chez le bijoutur? Oui, chez le bijoutier. 
 Et pourquoi faut-il que j'y aille? Je voulaie faire faire (34 2 ) quelquo 
 
SIXTIKTH LESSON. (2.) 811 
 
 chose: mais conime j'ai change d'inlention, il faut que vous aliie2 
 B pour 1'empecher de comirencer Fouvrage. 
 
 Did you use to forget anything when you went to school? We 
 
 often forgot our books. Where did you forget them? We forgot 
 
 them at the school. Did we forget anything? You forgot nothing. 
 
 Did your mother pray for any one when she went to church? Slu; 
 
 prayed for her children. For whom did we pray? You prayed 
 
 your parents. For whom did our parents pray? They prayed 
 
 for their children. When you received your money, what did you 
 
 do with it? (ijii-c ii fai*icz-vi)its ?) We employed it in purchasing 
 
 Home good books. Did you employ yours also in purchasing books '? 
 
 we employed it in assisting the poor, (a sccourir Ics pauv'ies.) 
 
 Did you not pay your tailor? We did pay him. Did you LAvays 
 
 pay in ca you bought of that merchant? We alwa) j paid 
 
 :i, for we never buy on credit. 
 
 Has your Bister succeeded in mending your stockings? SL*s has 
 succeeded in it. Has your mother returned from church? Sl.e has 
 not yet returned. She would return if it did not rain ; would she 
 not? Y- mid. Where has your aunt gone? She ha* 
 
 gone to church. Where have our cousins (fern.) gone ? They have 
 gone to the concert. Have they not yet returned from it? They 
 have not yet returned, for the carriage will go for them onl> in a 
 quarter of an hour. Would you give me something pretty if I 
 were ( 148 3) good ? If you were very good, and if you \\t-rkecl 
 well, without meddling in other people's business, I would give 
 you a fine book. Would you have money if your father %vere 
 here ? I should have enough if he should arrive. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 POTENTIAL, \>ER.FECT.Conditionncl, Passe ou Con/.**. 
 For its formation and use, see ($ 149.) That paragraph must be well 
 btudied. 
 
 If they had got rid of their old horse, , S'ils s'etaient defaits de leur vieux 
 
 they would have procured a better 
 one. 
 
 If he had washed his hands, he would 
 have wiped th< 
 
 If I knew that, I would behave dif- 
 ferently. 
 
 If I bad known that, I would have 
 behaved differently. 
 
 If llivji haclst taken notice of that, 
 tliou wouldst not have been mis- 
 taken. 
 
 cheval, ils s'en seraient procurd un 
 
 meilleur. 
 S'ii s'etait lave les molus, il so leu 
 
 serait essuydes. 
 Si je savais cela, je me Ajmporteraia 
 
 difie'remment. 
 Si j'avais su cela, je m serais com* 
 
 porte autrement. 
 Si tu t'etais aperc.u dt cela, tu nc ts 
 
 serais pas trompu. 
 
812 
 
 SIXTIETH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Apprendriez-vous le Fran^aig fii je 
 
 1'apprenais? 
 
 Je 1'apprendrais si vous 1'apprcniez. 
 Auriez-vous appris 1'Allcmand si je 
 
 1'avais appris ? 
 Jc 1'aurais appris si vous 1'aviez ap 
 
 pris. 
 Iriez-vous en France, si j'y allais 
 
 avec vous ? 
 J'irais, si vous y alliez avec moi. 
 
 Seriez-vous alle en Allemagne, si 
 
 j'y etais alle avec vous ? 
 Sortiriez-vous si je restais a la mai- 
 
 son ? 
 Je resterais a la maison ei vous sor- 
 
 tiez. 
 Auricz-vous ecrit une lettre si j'avai* 
 
 fcrit un billet ? 
 Voila mon livre. 
 Voici mon ami, ma niece, mon livre. 
 
 Le voila. La voila. 
 
 Les voila, nous voila, vous voila. 
 
 Me voici, vous voici, te voici. 
 
 En voici. En voila 2 ou 3. 
 
 Voilfi pourquoi. 
 
 Voihi pourquoi je le dis. 
 
 Une paire de gains. de.pouletd. 
 
 THME. 2de Sec. 
 Ou sont mes gants de chamois? Les voici, derriere votre cha- 
 peau. S'ils n'etaient pas ici, iriez-vous les chercher? S r ils n'a- 
 vaient pas etc ici, j'aurais ete les chercher. Je ne vous croyais pas si 
 complaisant. Vous vous trompiez. Mes cousins sont-ils en haul ? 
 Faut-il que j'aille voir? Non ; les voila. De qui parliez-vous ? 
 Devinez. Je ne puis deviner. Nous parlions de IMM. Ducomb, 
 ( 140 5,) et les voilau Ai-je des souliers propres ? Je ne sais pas. 
 11 faut que vous alliez voir. Oui, en voici. Donnez-m'en une paire 
 En voici deux. Si je vous en avais demande deux paires, vous 
 rie nren auriez montre qu'une. En voici deux, choisissez la paire 
 que vous voudrez. Ou est Thomas? Le voici. Ou? je ne le 
 rois pas. II etait ici il y a un moment mais il s ? en est alle. Faut-il 
 qu 3 j'aLle le chercher? N ? importe. Parle-t-il espagnol ? II pour- 
 rait le parler, s'il voulait. Vous voulez dire qu : il le paiierait s'il 
 pouvait. Aurcez-vous ete fi Baltimore si votre pere et votre mere 
 y av^ient etc ? Oui, ils nvy anraient menc avec eux. Ne seriez- 
 
 Would j r ou learn French if I learned 
 
 it? 
 
 I would learn it if you learned it. 
 Would you have learned German if 
 
 I had learned it ? 
 I would have learned it if you had 
 
 learned it. 
 Would you go to France, if I went 
 
 thither with you? 
 I would go thither, if you went thither 
 
 with me. 
 Would you have gone to Germany, 
 
 if I had gone thither with you ? 
 Would you go out if I remaincc at 
 
 home ? 
 I would remain at home if you went 
 
 out. 
 Would you have written a letter if I 
 
 had written a note ? 
 There is my hook. Behold my book. 
 Here is my friend, my niece, my 
 
 book. 
 
 There he or it is. There she or it is. 
 There they are, we are, you are. 
 Here I am, here you are, thou art. 
 Here is some. There are 2 or 3. 
 That is the reason why. 
 Therefore I say so. 
 A pair of gloves, of chickens. 
 
SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 313 
 
 vous pas venue plus tot, si vous aviez pu ? Si fait, je serais venue 
 avant eux si j'avais pu le faire. Oil faut-il que vous alliez ? Nullo 
 part. 
 
 Who is there ? It is I, (c'cst moi.) Wlio are those men ? They 
 ire foreigners, who wish to speak to you. Of \vhat country are 
 they ? Th ey are Americans. Where is my book ? There it is. 
 And r^y pen ? Here it is. Where is your sister? There she is. 
 Where are our cousins? (fern.) There they are. Where are you, 
 John? (Jean.) Here I am. Why do your children live in France? 
 They wish to learn French ; that is the reason why they live in 
 France. Why do you sit near the fire? My hands and feet are 
 cold ; that is the reason why I sit near the fire. Are your sisters 
 hands cold ? No, but her feet are cold. What is the matter tyjth 
 your aunt ! Hi-:- ami hints her. Is anything the matter with yea'? 
 My head hurts me. What is the matter with that woman? Her 
 ;e hurts ht 
 
 Why do you not eat ? I shall not eat before I have (a'jant d'untir) 
 a good appetite. Has your sister a good appetite ? She has a very 
 good appetite ; that is the reason why she eats so much. If you 
 read the books which I lent you, why do you not return them 
 tome? I intend reading them once more, (encore une fois;) that 
 is tli- v, hy I have not yet returned them to you; but I will 
 
 return them to you as soon as I have read them a second time, 
 (pour la secondc fois.) Why have you not brought my shoes 1 
 They were not made ; therefore I did not bring them ; but I bring 
 ihem you now ; here they are. Why has your daughter not learned 
 her exercises? She has taken a walk with her companion, (fem. ;) 
 that is the reason why she has not learned them ; but she promises 
 to learn them to-morrow, if you do not scold her. What ail* her 
 horse ? It has a sore leg ; that is why she did not ride. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 
 1 guess, 1 reckon, (so much used here.) 
 I guess you have it. 
 An atmosphere. A dry atmosphere. 
 The temperature. A u: ~ k 
 A low temperature. 
 A plate. 
 
 The son-in-law. 
 
 The step-son. Tlio husband. 
 The daughter-in-law. 
 Th3 jriep-daughter 
 The progress. 
 
 To profit. To improve. 
 
 27 
 
 A high . . 
 A mean .... 
 A soup-plate. 
 
 Je presume, Jepcnse,fose dire, que . 
 Je suis presq,ue sur que vous 1'avez. 
 Une atmosphere. Une .... seche. 
 La temperature. Une .... Slevee. 
 Une temperature basse . . . moyenne, 
 Une assiette. Une assiette a soupa, 
 Le beau-fils, le gendre. 
 Le beau-fils. Le man. 
 La belle-fille. la bru. 
 La belle-fille. 
 Le progres. 
 t Faire des pro^rcs. 
 
SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 To improve in learning. 
 The progress of a malady. 
 
 The fa;her-in-law, the step-father. 
 The mother-in-law, the step-mother. 
 Must I be ? You must be. 
 
 Must Pnot be here at 9 o'clock ? 
 
 It is not necessary for you to be here. 
 
 Where must you bo to-morrow ? 
 
 I must be in Boston. 
 
 Why must you be there ? 
 
 I must go and see Mr. Abbott. 
 
 t Faire des progres dans les dtudca. 
 
 dans les sciences. 
 Le progres or les progres d'une mala 
 
 die. 1 
 
 Le beau-pere. 
 La belle-mure. 
 Faut-ii que je sois ? II faut que voufi 
 
 soyez. 
 Ne faut-il pas que je Bois ici a 9 
 
 heures ? 
 
 II ne faut pas que vous y soyez. 
 Ou faut-il que vous soyez domain I 
 II faut que je sois a Boston. 
 Pourquoi faut-il que vous y soyez ? 
 II faut que j'aille voir M. Abbott. 
 
 SOIXANTIKMI: TIIME. 3me Sec. 
 
 Ou faut-il que vous soyez demain soir? Pour arriver a Boston, 
 apres-demain matin, il faut que je sois 11 New York demain soir. 
 Votre gendre va-t-il avec vous? J J y vais seul; sans compagnie que 
 celle du petit Joseph, qui m/'accompagne. Si votre fille n'etait pas 
 malade, votre gendre, son rnari, ne vous accompagnerait-il point? 
 Non; il ne le pourrait pas, parce que c'est la saison des affaires. 
 Ce petit garron n'a-t-il pas froid aux pieds? Pourquoi le croyez- 
 vous? Parce <ju'il a de si mauvais souliers, (such bad.) II aurait 
 froid s'ii n'y ctait pas accoutume. Qui est parti pour le Canada? 
 Le beau-pere<le 1'avocat et sa belle-mere, sa belle-scour et son beau- 
 frere sont toufj partis. N'etait-il pas parti avant eux? Lui? II n'est 
 pas encore parti. Je croyais qu'il 1'etait. N r auriez-vous point ecrit 
 a votre chere; petite co'isme et a votre grand cousin, si vous aviez su 
 que le capituine passerait a Newark? J'aurais ecrit a Tune, mais 
 non pas a Tautre. 
 
 Would you be glad if I were to lend you an interesting book? To 
 be sure I would be glad. (Dir. 6.) You know very well that I am 
 fond of reading. But have you any interesting book? What do 
 
 you think of one of W 's works? I should like very well 
 
 (beaucoup) to read his last work. Would you, indeed ! (translate 
 merely: indeed !) Then what will you give me if I lend it to you'? 
 You are jesting ; are you not ? Why do you think so ? Because I 
 think you say so only to plague me, (me tracasser, 1.) To plague 
 you ! You know that .1 do not like to plague you. You ! You do 
 not like to plague me ? You plague me every day. I would lilra 
 
 1 A11 nouns ending in ie are feminine. 
 to the English termination y. 
 
 This ending frequently ansuoya 
 
SIXTIETH LESS OK (3.) 315 
 
 to plague you; but I cannot, you are so good. Would the j jbbei 
 have been punished, if he had been taken? He would have been 
 punished, if they had been able to prove (prouvcr) that he was 
 culpable, (coupablc.) Would your cousin progress so well, if she 
 did not study so much? She does not study so much as you think. 
 She does not study as much as I (do) ; and, notwithstanding, she 
 makes more progress, (or she improves more.) How is that ? (Comr 
 ment ccla sc fait-il ?) She learns more easily (aisemcnt) than I. 
 
 POUR LA GOME 
 
 Avez-vous trouve le bracelet (bracelet) que j'ai perdu ? Avez-vous 
 perdu un bracelet? Oui, j'en ai perdu un d'or, comme celui-ci. Je 
 6i;is fache de vous dire que je n'en ai pas trouve. Y a-t-il long- 
 temps que vous Pave/ perdu? Je les ai mis tous les deux, il y a a 
 peu pres une heure, et a present je n'ai que celui du bras gauche. 
 fites-vous sortie depuis que vous les avez mis? Non, j ? ai cepen- 
 dant etc a la porte de devant, pour y accompagner une demoiselle 
 de ma connaissance qui est venue me voir. Avez-vous, depuis, 
 cherche votre bracelet-la? Oui, ii n'y est pas. Si vous n'etes pas 
 sortie, votre bracelet n'est pas perdu, il n'est qiregare (cgarer, to 
 mislay.) Egare ou perdu, c'est a peu pres la meme chose ; il n'est 
 plus sur mon bras. Vous le retrouverez, ayez patience. Tenez, je 
 suis presque sur (I guess) que vous avez cru mettre (28 2 , Obs. 65) 
 les deux bracelets, et que vous n'en avez mis qivun. Vous plai- 
 santez, (you jest,) n ? est-ce pas? Non, je ne plaisante pas. Je suis 
 presque sur que vous le trouverez en haut sur votre table ou sur 
 votre toilette. Je vais voir. 
 
 M. Saint-Cir, fait-il froid dehors? Froid ! Non, il fait un temps 
 charmant; plus frais que hier, mais agreable. Agreable, pour 
 ceux qui marchent ou qui se promenent, mais froid, pcur ceux qui 
 restent long-temps assis pour ecrire ou pour lire. Ccla sc peut 
 Quant a moi, je le trouve tres-agreable. Mais asseye/^vous done, 
 Voici un fauteuil. Non, gardez le fauteuil, vous qui avez froid; 
 moi, je vais m'asseoir ici, sur ce siege. Se porte-t-cn bien chcz 
 vous? Nous nous portons tous bien, excepte ma petite fillo 
 Qu'a-t-elle ? Je ne sais ; mais elle est malade ; aujc nrd'hui, mal 
 aux dents; demain mal de tete, une autre fois un rhune.. . .Maid 
 voici Louis. Quant a celui-la, ii n ; est pas malade, je vous assure 
 Bon jour, Louis, comment va ? Tres-b-en, M., mere i. Dormez-voua 
 fcien? Oui, je dors bien. Mangez-vous, buvez-vous, jonez-vouH 
 bien? Oui, il fait tout cela a merveille. fltudie-t-il bien? Oui, 
 o'est un bon ecolier % Tenez, je crois qu'il est venu pour me r: 
 Irer quelquo chose qivil a traduit. N ? est-ce pas, Loui 
 
510 
 
 
 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (I.) 
 
 C'est Une petite anecdote, papa. Voulez-vous lui permettre de la 
 lire? Saris doute, je serai charme de Pentendre. Cette traduction 
 (translation) n'a pas ete corrigec, de sorte qu'il peut y avoir dea 
 fautes. Que vous aurez la bonte d'excuser. Sans doute. Qui ne 
 fait pas de fautes? Li ta traduction. J'ai peur, papa. Quoi! Tu 
 as peur. Tiens, (come.) Nc fais pas V enfant, (do not be childish; 
 from: /am? 1 J enfant, to be childish.) Lis. Traduction. Un officer 
 Francais etant arrive a la cour (court) de Vienne, Pimperatrice 
 Therese lui demanda, (asked, 153 3 5 ) s'il croyait que la princesse 
 
 de N qu'il avait vue la vcille, (the day before,) etait vraiment, 
 
 comme on le disait, la plus belle femme du (in the) monde? 
 Madame, repliqua Pofficier, je le croyais hier. C 7 est bien, Louis. 
 Mais, dis-moi, comment as-tu epele le participe passe: vu? Je Pai 
 i-pele, v, itj e, feminin. Pourquoi? Parce que son regime direct, 
 QUC, est avant. C'est la regie. Tu as raison. O'est bien. 
 
 La reponse de Pofficier Franc.ais etait ingenicuse, (ingenious.) 
 On la regarde comme telle ; car chaque nation laraconte, et change 
 le lieu. Oui, c'est vrai; les Anglais la placeni a la cour d'Angle- 
 lono, sous le regne de leurreine favorite, Elizabeth; les Francais 
 11 la cour de France ; les Espagnols a Madrid, &c. &c. Les bonnes 
 aneedotes appartiennent a tout le monde. Louis, peux-tu nous 
 raconter celle du vieux monsieur et du jeune homme a Peglise ? 
 hi ne sais pas si je pourrai la dire, mais je pourrais la lire si je 
 Pavais ici. Non, non, essaie de nous la dire. Je vais essayer; maia 
 je crains de ne pas reussir. Commence, nous sommes prets a 
 t'ecoute.'. Un jeune homme etant dans une eglise, pen attentif au 
 service, et ne sachant que fiirc, (restless,) demanda ( 153 3) aun 
 vieux monsieur qui etait dans le bane voisin, (next pew,) Connais- 
 sez-vous, Monsisur, une regie sans exception ? Oui, repondit-il, un 
 homme bien eleve, (a gentleman,) se conduit toujours bien, et par- 
 ticuliercmcnt, (especially.) a 1'cglise. 
 
 SIXTY FIRST LESSON, 61st. Soixantc ct i.memc Lccon, 61me, 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 What has become of your aunt ? 
 I do not know what has become of 
 
 her. 
 
 What has become of your sisters ? 
 I cannot tell you what has become of 
 
 them 
 
 Qu'est devenue votre tante ? 
 
 Je ne sais pas ce qu'elle est devenue. 
 
 Que sont devenues vos sa;urs ? 
 Je ne peux pas vous dire ce qu'ellai 
 sont dcvenues. 
 
SIXTY-FIIIST LESSON. (I.) 
 
 317 
 
 To die (lose life), died, do not die. 
 J die, thou diest, he or she dies. 
 Shall or will you die ? I shall. 
 
 The man died this morning, and his 
 
 wife died also. 
 The man is dead. 
 The woman died this morning. 
 To be alive. 
 Wine sells well. 
 Wine will sell well next year. 
 
 That door shuts easily. 
 
 That window does not open easily. 
 
 That picture is seen far off. 
 
 Far off, from afar. From a great dis- 
 tance. 
 
 Winter clothes are not worn in sum- 
 mer. 
 
 That is not 
 
 That cannot be comprehended. 
 
 To conceive, to comprehend. 
 
 It is clear. 
 
 According to circumstances. 
 
 The circumstance. 
 
 That is according to circumstances. 
 
 It depends. 
 
 Glad of 
 
 Pleased with . . . (not plu, but 
 
 Sorry of or for . . displeased at, with . . 
 
 Must I have ? You must. 
 
 Must you not have ? 
 
 It Is 'necessary. It is not .... 
 
 J\Iourir,* 2, mort, ne niourez paa 
 Je meurs, tumeurs, ilouelle meurt, 
 Mourrez-vous ? (46 3 .) Je mourrai. 
 L'homme est mort ce matin, ct ea 
 
 fern me cst morte aussi. 
 L'bomme est mort. 
 La femme est morte ce matin. 
 Etre vivant-s, etre vivante-s. 
 t Le vin se vend bien. 
 t Le vin se vcn.dra bien 1'anneo pro- 
 
 chaine. 
 
 t Cette porte se fcrme facilement. 
 t Cette fenCtre ne s'ouvrc pas facile- 
 
 mcnt. 
 
 t Ce tableau se voit de loin. 
 De loin. De bien loir 
 
 t Les vcjements d'hiver ne se por- 
 tent pas en etc. 
 t Cela ne sc dit pas. 
 t Cela ne se conceit pas. 
 Concevoir, 3. 
 C'est clair. 
 
 t Selon les circonstancco. 
 La circonstance. 
 
 t C'est selon. 
 
 Bien aise, (de, av. 1'inf.) 
 Content (de). (47 3 , Obs. 109.) 
 Faclie* (de.) Mecontcnt (de.) 
 t Faut-il que j'aie ? II faut quo voua 
 
 ayez. 
 
 t Ne faut-il pas quo vous ayez ? 
 C'est necessaire. Ce n'est pas .... 
 
 SOIXANTE ET UN1EME TlliblE, Ire Sec. 
 
 Vous souciez-vous d'aller au musee? Oui ; je voudrais bien y 
 aller; niais il faut que j'aille a la maison. Et pourquoi done? II 
 faut que j'y sois avant 9 heures, et que j'aie fait mon devoir avaut 
 10 heures. Vous etes ponctuel, et vous faites bien. La femme qui 
 etait si mal hier au soir, est-elle morte 1 Le medecin croyait qu'elle 
 ne passerait pas la nuit; mais je presume qu'elle n^est pas morte, 
 car nous n'en avons pas entendu parler. Les medecins ee trompent 
 quelque fois aussi bien que les autres. Eh ! pourquoi ne se trom- 
 peraient-ils point? Us sont sujets a se tromper cpmme les autrea 
 personnes. Le coton se vend-il bien cetle annee f^Oui, le prix est 
 
 n 
 
 peu plus haut a Liverpool. S'est-il bien vendu f annee 
 
318 
 
 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Oui, il s'est tres-bien vendu. tes-vous contente de volre 
 paire de soulisrs? Pen suis assez contente; mais je I'aurais ete 
 davantage ; si les souliers n'etaient pas tout-a-fait si grands. Que 
 pensez-vous de Salomon, qui est sorti ce matin avec son manteau 
 d'hiver? Cela ne se concoit pas. II faut qu'il soil (he must bo) 
 malade. Lui? Non ; ce n'est que pour avoir Pair singulier. 
 
 What has become of your uncle ? I will tell you what naa 
 become of him. Here is the chair (la chaise) upon which he often 
 sat, (etre ftsszs, 51 2 .) Is he dead? He is dead. When did he die? 
 He died two years ago, (47 2 .) I am very, sorry for it. Why do 
 vou not sit down ? If you will stay with (aupres de) me I will sit 
 down ; but if you go, I shall go (along) with you. What has 
 become of your aunt? I do not know what has become of her. 
 Will you tell rne what has become of your niece? I will tell you 
 what has become of her. Is she dead ? She is not dead, but alive. 
 What has become of her ? I guess sho is gone to Vienna. What 
 has become of your sisters? I cannot toll you what has become of 
 them, for I have not seen them these two years. Are your parents 
 still alive ? They are not alive, but dead. 
 
 How long is it since your cousin (fern.) died? I guess it is six 
 months since she died. Did wine sell well, last year ? It did not 
 sell very well, (pas trop lien;) but it will sell better (micux) next 
 \ ciir, for there will be a great deal, and it will not be dear. Why 
 do you open the door? Do you not see how it smokes here ? I see 
 it, but you must (il faut) open the window instead of opening the 
 door. The window does not open easily ; that is the reason why I 
 open the door. When will you shut it? I will shut it as soon as 
 there is (58 2 ) no more smoke. Did you often go a fishing when 
 you were in that country? We often went a fishing and a hunting 
 If you will go -with us into the country, you will see my fathers 
 castle. You are very good, Sir; if I had not seen that castle, I 
 would willingly accept, (accepter ;) but I have already seen it. 
 Never mind; you must go with us. Can I? You know that 1 
 must be at home this evening, and that I have 20 miles to go. (57 1 .) 
 
 YOCABULAIKE. 2dc SeC. 
 
 Arc you rich ? I am. 
 
 Are the women handsome ? 
 They are, they are rich and hand- 
 some. 
 
 Are you from France ? I am. 
 What countrywoman is she ? 
 She is from France. 
 Would you be sorry if you were rich ? 
 
 Ete^-vous riche ? Je le suis. 
 
 Les femmes sont-elles Lien ? 
 
 Elles le sont, elles sont riches ci 
 
 belles. 
 
 Etes-vous de France ? J'en suia. 
 De quel pays est-elle ? 
 Elle est de France. 
 Seriez-vous fache si vous etiez richo I 
 
SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 
 
 319 
 
 1 should not be sorry for it. 
 To be angry with somebody. 
 To be angry about something. 
 What are you angry about ? 
 Are you sorry lor having done it ? 
 I am sorry for it. 
 
 Honest, polite. Impolite, dishonest. 
 Polite, courteous. Uncivil. 
 
 Happy, lucky. 
 Unhappy, unli: 
 Ensy, not hard. to do. 
 
 Difficult, hard. Hard to say. 
 
 Useful. il to know. 
 
 Useless. Il is useless to P 
 Is it useful to write a great deal ? 
 It is il- 
 ls it w 
 
 of ot; 
 
 It is bad, (wrong.) 
 It is not well ;rig!: 
 Well, right. L 
 Of wl. Kit I 
 
 That is of no use. 
 
 is that ? 
 1 do not know what that is. 
 
 is it ? 
 
 I do not know what it is. 
 to come ? 
 >u to come alone. 
 He does not. 
 
 I conic without ! 
 Yo i must come without her. 
 
 Je n'en serais pas fache. 
 
 Eire fachi contre quelqu'un. 
 
 Eire fdche de quelque chose. 
 
 De quoi etes-vous fache ? 
 
 Etes-vous lache de 1' avoir fait ? 
 
 J'en suis fache. 
 
 Honnete. Malhonneto. 
 
 Poli. Impoli. 
 
 Hcureux, ftm. heureuse. 
 
 Malhcureux, " malheureose. 
 
 Facile, aise. Facile a faire. 
 
 Difficile. Difficile a dire. 
 
 Utile. Utile a savoir. 
 
 Inutile. II cst inutile de le rt-petcr. 
 
 Est-il utile d'ecrire beaucoup ? 
 
 C'cst utile. 
 
 Est-il bien de prcndre le bion dca 
 
 autres ? 
 C'est mal. 
 Cc n'est pas bicn. 
 Mil; 
 
 t A quoi cela est-il bon ? 
 
 t Cela n'est bon a ririi. 
 
 t Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? 
 
 t Je ne sais pas ce que c'est que cela. 
 
 t Qu'cst-ce que c'cst ? 
 
 t Jo ne sais pas ce que c'est. 
 
 Veut-il queje vieane ? ($ 151.) 
 
 11 veut que vous venicz H-IU. 
 
 II no veut pas que vous venicz scul. 
 
 Faut-il que je viennc sans elle ? 
 
 II faut que vous veniez sans ellc. 
 
 SOIXANTE ET UXi&ME TlI^ME. 2de SeC. 
 
 filcs-vous du meme pays que cette dame-la? Non ; je suid 
 Franraise, et elle est Suisse. De quoi votre beau-fils se pl^int-il ? 
 11 se plaint de son beau-frere. Comment appelez-vous cette demoi- 
 selle-ci? Ceci est Madame de Balmont. Cette jeune personne est- 
 ell mariee ? Sans doute. Elle semble (seem) etre si jeune, quo 
 je ne le croirais pas, si vous ne me le disiez pas. Elle n'est pas si 
 jeune qu'elle semble 1'etre. Non ! Quel age a-t-elle done ? De- 
 vinez, si vous pouvez. Si je devine, je dirai seize ans. Vous n'avez 
 pas reussi a devirier. Le jeune commis n'est-il pas fache contrn 
 vous? Non, il n'est pas fache contre moi, car je ne lui ai Hen fait. 
 Centre qui est-n done fache 1 II est mecontent de vous qui avex 
 casse sa jolie petite canne. Ne Pai-je pas payee ? Si fait; mais lo 
 priy n'est pas la canne. C'est selon : quelque fois I'un vaut mieux, 
 
820 
 
 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. 
 
 (3.) 
 
 quelque fois Fautre. Dit-on: remplissez d'eau la bouteille? Non, 
 cela ne se dit pas. Que dit-on done? On dit: remplissez labou- 
 teille d'eau. 
 
 Where did you take this book from ? I took it out of (dans) the 
 loom of your friend, (fern.) Is it right to take the books of other 
 people? It is not right, I know; but I wanted it, and I hope thai 
 your friend will not be displeased, for I will return it to her as soon 
 as 'I have read it. What is your name ? My name is William, 
 (Guillaume.) What is your sisters name? Hei name is Eleanor, 
 (Leonore.) Are the ladies handsomer in Paris than in London? 
 Strangers say they are. Are the women handsome here ? Yes, 
 they are. Are they rich? Some are rich, others are poor. Are 
 they industrious ? They used to be. You seem unhappy ; are you 
 angry at any one ? Yes, I am angry at my husband, who has not 
 been willing to (or would not) take me to Boston. He is not rich 
 enough, perhaps. 
 
 Avis AUX LECTEUKS. Nous allons des aujourd : hui, (from to-day,) 
 laisser une partie des questions sans reponses, pour accoutumer 
 1'ecolier a les faire lui-meme. 
 
 What countrywoman is she? Are you, too? Would you be 
 sorry if you could go travelling ? Would you not have been pleased 
 if she had not died ? What are you mad at ? That merchant is 
 honest; people can do business with him, can they not? Whom 
 do you say is so polite ? That man and his wife are happy, are 
 they not? This young girl is very interesting; is she not happy? 
 Are your gloves easy or difficult to put on ? Does that foreigner 
 bring good wines ? What do they sell cheap ? What is useless ?- 
 What is impolite ? Is the German hard (difficult) to translate ? IP 
 it, to pronounce 1 Is it not, to speak ? If this (ceci) is useful, why 
 do you not do it ?-*-If to get up early is useful and easy, why do 
 you not get up earlier than you do? (49 2 , 06s. 114.) Is it right to 
 6pea ill of the absent? Do not fill that bottle with wine. \Vha* 
 would you fill with coffee, if you had any? Would he have 
 drunk that brandy, if I hal given it to him? What is that gootf 
 for? 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 
 What is your name ? 
 My name is Charles. 
 What do you call this in French ? 
 
 How do you express this in French ? 
 What is that called ? 
 George the Third. 
 
 t Comment vous appelez-vous ? 
 
 t Je m'appelle Charles. 
 
 t Comment cela s'appelle t-il en 
 
 Franais ? 
 
 t Comment dit-on cela en Fiaigaii I 
 Comment appelle^-on cela 2 
 George trois. 
 
SIXTY-FIRST LLSSON. (3.) 
 
 321 
 
 Ols. 145. After the Christian name of a sovereign, the French emploj 
 ihe cardinal numbers without an article, while the English use the ordinal. 
 Lewis the Fourteenth. I Louis quatorze. 
 
 Henry the Fourth. I Henri quatre. 
 
 06s. 146. First and second, however, are exceptions to this rule : for first, 
 the French use premier; and for second, either deux or second. Quint 
 instead of cinq is also used in speaking of the emperor Charles V. and of 
 the pope Sixtus V. 
 
 Henry the First. 
 
 Henry the Second. 
 
 Pope Sixtus the Fifth. 
 
 Charles the Fifth spoke several Eu- 
 
 Topean languages fluently. 
 Europe, European. 
 Fluently. 
 Jtath< r. 
 
 Rather . . . than. 
 Rather than squander my money, I 
 
 will keep it. 
 
 I will rather pay him than go thither. 
 I will rather burn the coat than wear 
 
 it. 
 
 He has arrived sooner than I. 
 A half- worn coat. 
 
 To do things imperfectly, (by halves.) 
 To reign. Does she reign ? 
 
 A foolish discourse. Infernal. 
 His, her maiesty. Their majesties. 
 
 (f>7 2 . Obs 40.) 
 
 SOIXANTE ET UXIEME TllK\ME. 3me SeC. 
 
 Qui regne en Angleterre? La reine Victoria premiere. Quelroi 
 regne en France * Aucun roi n ; y regne. Quel en etait le dernier'? 
 Louis Philippe premier. Quel a ete le dernier Charles d'Espagne ? 
 Etait-ce Charles trois ou quatre ? fJ'a ete Charles quatre. Quel a 
 ete son successeur, (successor?) (p ? a ete Ferdinand sept. Combien 
 de George y a-t-il eu en Angleterre? 11 y en a eu quatre. Y en 
 a-t-il eu en France 1 Non, il n'y en a eu aucun. Y a-t-il eu uu 
 Henri quatre dans ce dernier pays ? Oui, ii y en a eu un, qu'on 
 nomme Henri le Grand. Sans reponse. -Pouvez-vous faire dea 
 reponses en Francois? Auriez-vous pu en faire a la premioro 
 lecon ? Que faut-il que j'aie ? Veut-il que j'aille chez le bijoutier 1 
 Si vous etiez riche comme Etienne Girard 1'etait, que feriez-vous ? 
 Ne portait-il pas toujours un habit a demi-use ? Qui fait les chosen 
 kdemil Que teriez-vous plutot que d'etre marchand ? Qnel roi 
 de France a ete rcis a mort, (put to death?) Ou voulez-vous qut 
 
 Henri premier. 
 
 Henri second or Henri deux. 
 
 Le pape Sixte- Quint. 
 
 Charles- Quint parlait couramment 
 
 plusieurs langues europeennes. 
 L'Europe, europeen. 
 Couramment. 
 Plutdt . . . que. 
 Plutot . . . que de. 
 Plutot que de dissiper mon irgent, ju 
 
 le garderai. 
 
 Je le paierai plutot quo d'y aller. 
 Je brulerai plutot Thabit que de lo 
 
 porter. 
 
 II est arrive plus tot que moi. 
 t Un habit a demi-usu. 
 t Faire les choscs a dcmi. 
 Regner, 1. (28 2 .) Regne-t-clle ? 
 Un sot discours. Infernal. 
 Sa majeste, (nom/ew.) Lcurs ma 
 
 jestes. 
 
822 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 
 
 I 
 
 What did Charles V. say of European languages'? Lliarles V 
 who spoke fluently several European languages, used to say 
 (avail coutume de dire) that we should speak (qu : il fallait parlcr] 
 Spanish with the gods, Italian with our (son) friend, (fern.,) French 
 with our friend, (mas.,) German with soldiers, English with geese, 
 June oie,) Hungarian (/iongrofs) with horses, and Bohemian (bohu- 
 m:.en) with the devil, (Ic (liable.) Do you admire what Charles V. 
 said of languages? I do not, I assure you. I think, on the con- 
 trary, that it is a very foolish speech. Why do you think so ? Be- 
 cause those languages must be spoken (il faut parlcr ccs langues) to 
 the people who speak them, and not to geese, horses, and the 
 devil. I low did his majesty (sa majeste) the emperor, Charles V., 
 know that the Bohemian suited his infernal majesty ? (sa majeste 
 inieniale.) Are not all the majesties relations'? 
 
 (Questions sans riponscs. How is that called in French ? What is 
 the French of: companion? of: a female companion? of: an 
 ;< jiiaiuuuice of mine ? Do you know, or do you not know, that of. 
 a half-worn-out hat? Is that young lady called Eleanor? Is her 
 brother called Stephen? (Etienne.) Wiicre did George III. n\ 
 Was Charles the First put to death? (mcttre d wiorf ?) Was 
 tus V. a pope (papc) or a king ' Are all kin-. 'Have there 
 
 been many popes? Is it correct to say : happy M i a pope 1 
 
 Who would not rather be a farmer than a king? What must J 
 have? Where must you go? You wish me to be kind; be so 
 yourself. Does >he wi>h me to come and play at her concert 7 
 
 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON, 62d. Soixantc-dci' > :me. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire SCC. 
 
 As to, as for. As to me ; to them. I Quanta ; quant a moi; aeux, a elles 
 As to that, I know not what to say. | Quant a cela, je ne sais que dire. 
 
 Obs. 147. Ne is used without pas with the four verbs : 
 
 Cesscr, oscr, pouvoir,* . - 
 Je ne sais que faire. 
 Ne savez-vous ou aller ? 
 Elle ne sait queTeponiiix;. 
 Nous ne savons qu'acneicr. 
 Vous ne cessez de m' importuncr, 
 Elle ne cesse de se plaindre. 
 Je n'ose vous le demandei. 
 Elle n'ose vous le dire. 
 
 To cease, to dare, to be able 
 
 1 do not know what to do. 
 
 Do you not know where to go ? 
 
 She does not know what to answer. 
 
 We do not know what to purchase. 
 
 You clo not cease importnjuvg me. 
 
 Shs continually complains. 
 
 I dare not ask you for it. 
 
 fih'? dares not tell you. 
 
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 
 
 323 
 
 [ cannot go to the covered !>; 
 
 I cannot tell you, (would not know 
 
 how.) 
 
 Can you not believe it ? 
 To die of a disease, (malady.) 
 She died of the rarioloid. 
 L\d he not die of apoplexy ? 
 They died with the c/ioltra. 
 The. The yellow fever. 
 
 A chill. 
 
 ack of a. ... 
 He has a chill. He has a fever. 
 
 His fever has returned. 
 He w;is strurk wiih apopfc 
 
 ke, knock, rap, at the door. 
 
 What has !. 
 
 i'our me out a 
 
 .icd tears. 
 To pour out a drink some v. 
 
 I pour out sunn; drink for that man. 
 
 :-. our, or my 
 eyes. 
 
 Id. . acid. 
 
 Some sweet wine. A mild air. 
 A mild zephyr. A soft sleep. 
 Nothing makes life more agreeable 
 than the society of, and intercourse 
 M ith, our friends. 
 
 I THME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Alle/.-vuus vous verser a boire ? Moi, non ; mais quant a Henri, il 
 ne cesse de se verser a boire. II faut qu ; il ait soif. C'est tres proba- 
 ble. Versez a boire au jardinier. Que lui verserai-je ? De 1'eau, 
 de Teau-de-vie, ou du vin doux? Comme il a eu la fievre, versez- 
 lui un peu de vin doux. Est-ce bon pour la fievre ? On le 
 dit. Votre cidre est-il doux ou sur ? II n'est ni doux ni sur. Aime- 
 t-il le cafe doux? Non, il le prend sans sucre. Qu'est-ce qui rend 
 la vie do ice ? Mile. Clara a-t-elle encore la fievre intermittent? 
 a lievre est passee. Quel accident est arrive a Pecclesiastique? 
 
 II est tombe de cheval. et il s'est fait beaucoup de mal a la jamb 
 gauche et au pied droit. 
 
 Sans reponscs. Vous eces-vous associe avec le marchand qui 
 vend si bon marche '! A-t-on DU vous dire de qnelle maladie le 
 
 Je ne puis aller au pont couvert. 
 Je ne saurais vous le dire. 
 
 Ne sauricz-vous le croire ? 
 Mourir d'une miladie. 
 Elle est morte de la variolc. 
 N'est-il pas mort d'apoplexiet 
 Us sont morts du cholera. 
 \jQ.fie> La fievre jaune. 
 
 l, T n/ri.s\s'on. La fievre intermittent^. 
 L'apoplexie. Une attaque d'a .... 
 II a un frisson, t La fievre l*a pria 
 t II a eu la (un acces dc) rievre. 
 t La fievre 1'a repris. 
 II a ete frappe d'apoplexie. 
 ; er, 1, frapper a la portc. 
 
 > et ecclesiai? iquo ? 
 Quc lui est-il arrive ? (50*.) 
 
 vr un accident ajfreux. 
 
 r, 1. ioi a boiru. 
 
 Une larme. -er des laimee. 
 
 a boire de 1'eau. 
 t Je verse a boire a cet hominr. 
 Les larmes aux yeux. 
 
 f 
 
 Doux ; fern, douce. Sur. 
 Du vin doux. Un air doux. 
 Un doux zrphir. Un doux sommeil. 
 Rien nc rend la vie si douce que ia 
 
 societd ct le commerce de nos 
 
824 
 
 SIXTY-SECONI LESSON. (2.) 
 
 vieil ecclesiastique est mort? Cevin n ? est-il pas un peu surl- 'Cos 
 cerises sont-elles donees? Mon the est trop doux, versez-y un peu 
 d'eau et de lait. Votre fils ne craint-il pas la fievre jaune a la 
 Nouvelle Orleans, ou Pa-t-il deja eue ? Que dit le medecin 1 Croit-il 
 que cette attaque d'"apoplexie tuera le vieil epicier 1 Ne faut-il pa 
 que vous veniez ? 
 
 Of what illness did your sister die ? She died of (de la) fever. 
 How is your brother? My brother is no longer living j he died 
 three months ago. I am surprised (etonne) at it, for he was very 
 well last summer, when I was in the country. Of what did he die 1 
 He died of apoplexy. How is the mother of your friend? She is 
 not well ; she had an attack of ague, the day before yesterday, and 
 this morning the fever has returned. Has she an intermittent fever? 
 I do not know, but she often has chills. What has become of 
 the woman whom I saw at your mothers ? She died this morning, 
 of apoplexy. Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart? 
 They will rather tear them than learn them by heart. What does 
 this man ask me for? He asks you for the money which you owe 
 him. 
 
 Sans rcponscs. How do you like this wine? Shall I pour you 
 out a glass of brandy and water ? Does she not prefer a glass of 
 mineral water, with syrup? Do you not know what to eat? 
 Where must you be to-niht? How many of your cousins are 
 alive? How much syrup shall I pour out for her? Did you noi 
 hear a knock at the front door? Why does she shed tears? Has- 
 an accident happened 'S-'-What has happened to them? Does he 
 not quit (cease) speaking? How does your mother like our food 1 
 Why does she not eat any more ? 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 A case. 
 The report. 
 
 Ten cases of cholera. 
 Is the report favorable ? 
 
 To augment, increase. Diminish, 
 
 decrease. 
 To report. 
 
 Do they report all the cases ? 
 Does the cholera increase or not ? 
 It seems to be diminishing now. 
 How many cases have they reported ? 
 Only 7 for the last 24 hours. 
 
 To cry, to scream, to shriek. 
 Tohdlp, assist, some one todo a thing. 
 I help him to do it. 
 
 Un cas. 
 Le rapport. 
 
 able? 
 Augmanter, 1. 
 
 Dix cas de cholera. 
 Le rapport est-il favor- 
 
 Dimmuer, 1. 
 
 Rapporter, 1. 
 
 Rapporte-t-on tous les cas? 
 
 Le choldra augmente-t-il ou non ? 
 
 II semble diminuer a present. 
 
 Combien de cas a-t-oh rapport<5 ? 
 
 Settlement 7 pour les dernierea 24 
 
 heures. 
 Crier, 1. 
 
 Aider, 1, quelqu r un a faire une chow 
 Je 1'aide a le faire. 
 
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 
 
 325 
 
 T help you to write. 
 I will help you to work 
 
 To cry out for help. 
 
 The help. 
 
 To inquire after some one. 
 
 Whom are you inquiring after ? 
 
 Has he inquired after our residence ? 
 
 Where, when you please. 
 
 As you please, you like ; at yourplea- 
 
 sur3. 
 
 As soon as you like it. 
 To trust some one. Trust no one. 
 
 I trust nobody. 
 
 Do you trust him ? her ? them, (fern.) ? 
 
 I do trust him, her, them. 
 
 He does not trust me, them, (mat.} 
 
 We must not trust everybody. 
 
 To distrust one. mistrust. 
 
 i distrust that lawyer ? 
 iistrusts her maid- servant. 
 In your place, I would distrust him. 
 A seat, a place. A public square. 
 Make me a little room. 
 To laugh at something, laughed, 
 
 laugh. 
 I laugh, thou laughcst, he, she, one 
 
 laughs. 
 Do you laugh at that ? I do, with 
 
 all my heart, and he does also. 
 At what do they laugh ? 
 
 Je vous aide a ecrire. 
 
 Je veux vous aider a travailler. 
 
 Crier a Paide. 
 
 Appeler du secours. 
 
 L'aide, 1 le secours. 
 
 S' informer, 1, de quelqu'ur.. 
 
 De qui vous informez-vous ? 
 
 S'est-il informe de notre demeurel 
 
 Ou, quand ~\ 
 
 Comme 
 
 (46s. 065.107.) 
 Aussitotqu', desqu'./ 
 t Sejier, 1, a quelqu'un. Ne vout 
 
 fiez a personne. ($ 55.) 
 t Je ne me fie a personne. 
 t Vous fiez-vous a lui, a elle, a clles t 
 t Je me fie a lui, a elle, a elles. ( 64.) 
 t II ne se fie pas a moi, a eux. 
 t line faut pas se fier a tout le monde. 
 t Se defter de quclqiSun. 
 t Vous defiez-vous de cet avocat ? 
 t Elle se defie de sa domestique. 
 A votre place, je me dcfierais de lui. 
 Une place. Une place publique 
 Faites-moi nn pen de place. 
 Rire,* 4, de quelque chose, ri (p. p ), 
 
 riez. 
 Je ris, tu ris, il rit, elle rit, on rit. 
 
 Riez-vous de cela ? J'en ris de tout 
 
 mon cceur, et lui aussi. 
 De quoi rient-ils ? rient-elles ? 
 
 SOIXANTE-DEUXIEME TIIME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Quel est le rapport du cholera ? II cst moins favorable que hier. 
 Combien de cas dans les 24 heures? II y a eu 42 cas et 17 morts. 
 C'est plus que hier; car il n ? y avait que 35 cas et 14 morts. Cela 
 augmente un jour et diminue Pautre. II faut etre prudent ct modere, 
 (prudent and moderate.) 1 Combien de cas a-t-on rapporte a St. 
 Louis? Seulement 12. Ce n'est pas autan* que la demiere fois. 
 Aidez-vous votre cousin a faire son devoir? Seulement lorsqu'il esl 
 trop difficile. Quant a moa frere et a moi 7 nous ne nous aidons 
 jamais Tun Pautre. Pourquoi cet enfant crie-t-il^ II s'est fail du 
 mal a la jambe gauche. A quoi sert de crier? A rien; mais lea 
 enfants crient. 
 
 1 Aide, in the signification of help, ia feminine ; it is masculine when it 
 means an assistant. 
 
B26 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON, (2.) 
 
 Sai>* reponscs. Rit-elle parce que ce Monsieur est tuml^?-- 
 Riez-vous toujours quand vous voyez tomber quel^u'un? Ne con 
 naissez-vous personne qui crie alors? Vous fiez-vous a ce boucher* 
 Ne se fie-t-elle pas a sn. domestique 1 Nous pouvons nous fie; a 
 celle-ci, n'est-ce pas? Ne nous trompera-t-elle point ? Savez-vous 
 le Fran^ais de : As you please? N''avez-vous pas entendu frapper? 
 Que vous verse-t-elle ? N'appelle-t-on pas au secours? Sentez- 
 vous '3 doux zephir? Ne faut-il pas que j'ai un chapeau neuf? 
 Seriez-vous fache si je m'en allais ? Quel est le nom de votre nou- 
 velle connaissance ? 
 
 Have you inquired after the merchant who sehs so cheap? I 
 have; but nobody would 1 or could ( person ne n 7 a voulu, ou ria pit) 
 tell me what lias become of him. Never mind; y:-a will easily 
 lind another who sells as cheap. I wish I could, 2 (Jc voudrais 
 pouvoir; 2 ) for I have but little money. Did the general's nephew 
 die of a disease or of an accident? He died of the yellow fever. 
 Has not a dreadful accident happened to the apothecary's old 
 clerk? 11(3 fell and broke his arms or legs. (Dir. 2 24 2 ; Obs. 55.) 
 His arms and legs, did you say? No ; only his arms or legs. 
 Would she cry for help, if I should beat her? ( 148 3.) If you 
 should hurt her, I guess she would cry. Would they not laugh, if 
 1 was to tell them that tale? No, I guess they would be angry. 
 Must I not go for some cigars? Yes, you must go for some. Must 
 I not have the money to pay for them ! Yes. you must have it; 
 here it is. After you have paid for them, (46 3 , ()!>*. 107.) you will 
 have six cents left; yon may keep them. 
 
 Sans reponscs. What dost thou ask me for ? Will you pass me 
 the bottle, if you please? Have you not drunk enough? Shall 1 
 give you (faut-il vous vcrscr) some wine? Why do you not eat? 
 Who knocks at the door ? Why does he cry ? What has happened 
 to you? Where will you go to, this evening? Where will your 
 brothers go to ? Why do you go to town ? Will you go with me ? 
 Must I sell to that man on credit? Has he already deceived (/rom- 
 per) anybody ? Must I trust those ladies? Do those merchants 
 trust you? Whom do those gentlemen laugh at ? Why do those 
 
 1 Translate could, by: j'ai pu, il a pu, il pouvait, &c. Would, by: j'ai 
 voulu, il a voulu, je voalais, &c., when they refer to past actions instead of 
 future ones. ^ 1484.) 
 
 2 / wish, in such phrases as, I wish I could, I might, I had, &c., or any 
 other imperfect tense, where it means, I should like to, must be translated 
 oy : Je voudrai pouvoir, avoir, &c. When I wish, does not mean, I should 
 like to, but merely, 1 want, translate it by: Jeveux, &c., as: / wish t o see you, 
 It, veux ou desire vous voir. 
 
SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 
 
 327 
 
 people la. 
 
 persons who speak badiy ? What are you laughing at'? How 
 (dfptti ing it so large? (grand.} 
 
 Liugh (faui-iL . / ) at 
 
 IRE. Sine Sec. 
 
 Ton,? mall bell. 
 
 To hzar c. > 
 lie must G. 
 Where HILT: :-MC go ? 
 Do you wish him to be good or not ? 
 I wish him to be good, and 
 her also to be good. 
 
 tailor's 
 
 jrou. 
 
 Full. 
 
 \ book full of errors. 
 
 To ajl 
 
 Can you afford to buy that horse ? 
 I can afford it. 
 I cannot ailurd it. 
 
 bou< 
 
 Is it 1 It is not he. 
 
 Arc they your brothers ? (47 3 .) 
 
 It is they. It is not they. 
 Is it she ? 
 It is not she. 
 
 Are they your sisters ? 
 
 It is they, (fanin 
 It ia not they. " 
 It is I who speak. 
 
 I it they who laugh ? 
 
 It is you who laugh. 
 
 }\ ie thou who has done it. 
 
 Conner, 1. Une cloche. Une chchftte. 
 f fan tier. Liitt'itdii sonntr. 
 II faut qu'i7 aille. 
 Oii f:iut-il (\u\llc a I Hi' ? 
 Voulez-vous qu'i/ soit bon ou nonf 
 Jc YCUX qu'il soil bon, et je veux 
 
 ' bonne. ($ 151.) 
 
 Ne faut-il pas(}u'*7// un hal>it neuf? 
 11 iaut (ju'i/ / nioi chcz lo 
 
 taii! 
 
 ' u // . 
 
 Se rirc 
 
 18. (54 s . ', 
 
 Vous r V.MIS 
 
 moqn nous? (^ M7 l.l 
 
 I'n livre plein <; 
 
 re in 
 Cnitive.) 
 
 votis Ic3moycn,?d'ad 
 che>-. - a ai les moyene. 
 
 n ai pas lea moyen.s. 
 
 ; ^lll ('St 
 
 , noud, vous, toi. 
 
 Co n'etit pas lui. 
 Sont-ce vo ir'jrcn ? or, 
 Est-cc quo C3 sont vos frsres ? 
 Ce sont ei:^'. Co no sont pas eux 
 Est-cc elle ? t. elle. 
 
 Ce n'est pas el!c. 
 Sont-ce vos sccurG ? or, 
 Est-ce quo c-j sr/nt vos sonurs ? 
 Ce sont clbs. 
 Ce ne eont paa ellcs. 
 C'cst moi qui parle. 
 Sont-ce eux (elles) qui rient ? or 
 Est-ce quo cc sont eux (ellee) qai 
 
 rient ? 
 
 C'est vous qui riez. 
 C'est toi qui Tasfait. 
 
828 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 
 
 It is you. pen'l . ';?ivc faicl j C'e-jt vo 
 
 ceii. 
 
 . J&TU Frcnuh, rry brother and I. j t Men f noni 
 
 I le Fraii rtf.ia. 
 
 06*. 348. The uniting pronoun nous or tw must be placed beficrs 
 verb, when it has two or more nominatives of different '. 38.) 
 
 You and I will go into the country. t Voua et moi r. 
 You and he will stay at home. 
 'J n for, preceptor. 
 
 pagne. 
 t Vous et lui vouf : \ mai- 
 
 Instituteur. 
 
 SOLX .'.ME. 3me 
 
 N'a-t-on pas sonne ? Je crois quo st, (si au lieu do ; es- 
 
 cion est negative, 10 2 , 065. 26.) La dome.- a la 
 
 porte 1 Je ne I'ai pas entenduc. II faut <:. 'ia. 
 
 Kile n 'a ; ; as entendu la clochette. 
 
 elle qui court? Jc presume que oui. Oui, 
 le bonnet de Madame, i 
 \ ous et moi nous irons si 
 nr vous gronderait-il BI vous nr 
 devoir? Non, mais il serait 
 
 ' II ; i : . i'elle le soit i 10i heures. A qu 
 f;uit-ll (]i:e Charles vienne? II faut qu'il viennc un (juart 
 '. La voiture sera- >e? Elle sera 
 
 -nous pas ausai prendro la petite Emilie ? 
 
 I ; elle criera. Est-ce vous qui i 
 
 lie au nez do cet Stranger? De qui se moque::;-!!- .' T 
 voi>in ne se moque-t-il paa do vos enfant > 
 la nl .' ( ' 'A pas fait D 
 
 Cr. m'a dit que ^ , vo 
 
 grande maisor* de E - au coin de Hroadw: 
 
 t-ce vos ?.: .^nnent? 
 
 Is ii ^o'/.r ;- : si^r who is playing on the piano ? It m 
 (t7 fant qus ce soit die) for no other person pi. - not 
 
 hlu. for here she i - cr.i>iii.].. 
 
 *.lu\v vor .rho are com:: 
 
 libors (fern.) who -ivcre laughing at you? They are not oui 
 iibors. ^^ \v ? They are the daughters of -the cou 
 
 rt-liOM 1 brother has bought your house. Are they the ladies 
 iKive spoken of to me? They are. Shall you learn German? My 
 brother and I will learn it. Shall we go to the country, to-morrow ' 
 I shall go to the country, and you will remain in town. Shall my 
 litter and I goto the opera? You a:ul she will remain at home, 
 
SIXTY-THIRD LKSSO5. (1.) 
 
 Olid your brother will go to the opera. Wh;it ilul you 
 ' I said IK 
 y task, and he w 
 
 < ome to ii r. 
 me back the books whi \Vho ia 
 
 -\ ho hast soiled my 
 
 .rt, before to-morrow ? ( learn 
 
 o not go to I Baltimore, lint 
 
 wet-r I ? 
 
 ' (et vous?) 1 We wish we \MMO 
 -Does she not 
 
 .'.Ml. 
 
 IRE. Ire See. 
 t 6" 
 
 out of a bad $c 
 it of the scrape, 
 man always gets into bad 
 crapes, but he always gets out of 
 
 Between. Be long us, 
 
 among acquaintances 
 
 To make tome one t acquaintance. 
 To tce+ma ary ' > ne. 
 
 affaire*. 
 
 Jc me suis tire d'affaire. 
 Cct homme s'attirc toujoura <: 
 vaiscs affaires, mais il h 
 
 airs. 
 
 Entre. Entr'tMix. KntrMIr.^ 
 nous, entre connaissances. 1 
 mis. 
 
 >nnaiMiancc avet guel'j 
 
 i connaiitance de yiu I-JH' nn* 
 
 I have mode his or her acquaintance, j 
 
 I have become acquaintt .: \ fait sa connaiasanca. 
 
 or i 
 
 i 
 J 
 
 > ' 
 
 y -r ? j 
 
 1 \\'< have seen, (IS 1 , Ob. 3d,) that n cst-cc pat was used to ask a n -Dative 
 the tame perton as a preceding aflinmr 
 
 r not, is in <; ,"7t,usctha 
 
 nrcd personal pronoun. Don't rout 9 
 
 r nous? cux? I know him : 
 i ?Docs he T she T Peter, &c. : 
 my one? must 1 . i Ic connalt-il ? 
 
 know is nl ways expressed by connaitrc* wh- 
 H acquainted cr > !>:. Iknowtiiat* 
 
 tnait eet hommc. > y l-sson, Jrtait m* 
 
 ; I know what \ 
 
830 
 
 SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Jc le (la) connais. Jc nc la cormais 
 
 point. 
 
 II est do ma connaissance. 
 Elle cst de ma connaissance. 
 Co n'est pas un ami, ce n'est qu'une 
 
 connaissance. 
 Jouir, 2, de. 
 
 Jpuissez vous d'une bonne sante ? 
 ( Etre Hen portant, portantc. 
 ( &tre en "bonne sante. 
 r f Elle est bien portante. 
 3 t Elle se porte bien. 
 / f Elle est en bonne sant ; . 
 Jouit-elle d'une grande fortune \ 
 Jouit-il d'une bonne reputation? 
 S^imagincr, 1. 
 Nos semblables. 
 II n'a pas son semblid 
 t Ressembler, 1, a qudqifun. (Mind 
 
 the ss and the a.} 
 
 Cet homme ressemble a mon frerc. 
 Cette bicre ressemblc a, do 1'cau. 
 Nous nous ressemblons. 
 Us ou ellcs ne se ressemblent pas. 
 Est-il temps qua. je . . . tu . . . il . . . 
 
 file . . . nous . . . vous ... ils . . . 
 
 elles . . ., (govern the sub). 151.) 
 
 Est-il temps que nous allions, veni- 
 ons, ayons, soyons ? II est temps 
 que nous allions, que non- 
 ons, ayons, soyons. 
 
 SOIXANTE-TROISIEME THEME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Est-il temps que nous allions a, Washington pour TalTjiirc dc Fre- 
 deric? Oui, il faut que nous y soyons demain on, au plus tard, 
 Mpivs-demain. II y a une mauvaise affaire ; je ne sais comment il 
 s'en tirera. Lui ! il se fait sou vent de mauvaises affaires, mais il s'en 
 t i re tou jours. C'estvrai, ilesttres-heureux. Ne jouit-elle pasd'uno 
 fortune considerable? Si fait, son pere lui a laisse une grande for- 
 tune, dont elle jouit, et dont elle fait bon usage. Jouit-elle d'une 
 bonne sant6? Oui, pour une personne riche, elle jouit d'une tres- 
 bonnc .s:iute. Sa soeur est-elle bien portante? JSTon, il faut qu'elle 
 son souvent mo-lade, car elle n'a pas bon air. Ce monsieur, n'est-il 
 pas une de vos connaissances ? Lequel ? Celui qui est entre les 
 deux dames en jaune ? Non, celui qui est entre la table et la fene- 
 tre. Kessemblez-vous a votre soeur? Vous ressemble-t-elle ? A 
 qui ce commis ressemble4-il ? Mon frdre et moi, nous ressemblons 
 
 I ;:IM I do. I am not I do not. 
 
 He is an acquaintance of mine. 
 She is my acquaintance. 
 He is not a friend, he is but an ac- 
 quaintance. 
 To enjoy. 
 Do you enjoy good health? 
 
 To be well. 
 
 She is well. 
 
 Does she enjoy a great fortune? 
 
 Does he enjoy a good reputation? 
 
 To imagine. 
 
 Our fellow creatures. 
 
 He has not his equal or his match. 
 
 To resemble some one, to look like 
 
 some one. 
 
 That man resembles my brother. 
 That beer looks like water. 
 \Vc rcM-mble each other. 
 They do not resemble each other. 
 Is it time t/tat I ... thou . . . 
 
 she ... \\ . 
 Is it time for me ... thec ... him ... 
 
 her. . . us, &c., to . . ? 
 I s i 1 1 imo for us to go, come, have, be ? 
 It is time for us to go, come, have, 
 
 be. 
 
SIXTY- THIRD LESSON. (2.) 
 
 331 
 
 nous? Cos deux sceurs ne se ressemblent-elles pas ccmme deux 
 gouttcs d : caUj (2 drops of water?) Pourquoi cet homme s'enfuit-il 
 comme ca? II faut qu'il ait fait quelque chose de mal. ne )e croyez- 
 vjns pas? 
 
 What is the report of the health-office, to-day \ i\\i comitc de 
 ante?) The report lias increased to-day. How many cases are 
 there 7 53, and only 1 1 deaths. We must hope that it will diminish 
 oon. A certain (certain) good-for-nothing fellow liked brandy 
 much, but he found in it (/MI) two bad qualities, (une qualitc :) "If 
 I put water to it/ 7 said he, " I spoil it; and if I do not put any to it, 
 it spoils me." Does your cousin resemble you? He resembles me. 
 Do your sisters resemble each other? They do not resemble 
 each other; for the elder (Vainee) is idle and na:ighty, and tho 
 younger (la cadcttc} assiduous and good-natured towards everybody. 
 How is your aunt? > .1. Does your mother enjoy 
 
 good health? She imagine >>ys (iinmpinc jouir) good 
 
 .;h ; but I belie \ ken, for she has, these six months, 
 
 Had a cough, of which (dont) she cannot get rid. 
 
 Is it right to laugh thus at everybody? If I laugh at your coat, I 
 do not laugh at everybody. Does your son resemble any one? Ho 
 resembles no one. Why do you not drink? I do not know what 
 to d; ! like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar. If you 
 
 wi>h to have some other, I shall go down (dcsccndrc) into the cellar 
 nu some. You are too polite, Sir; I shall drink no more 
 to-day. Have you known my father long? I have known him 
 . for I made his acquaintance when 1 was yet at school. We 
 often worked for one another, and we loved each other liko 
 b /others. I believe it, for you resemble each other. When I had 
 not done my r he did them for me; and when he had not 
 
 done his, I did them fur him. 
 
 Ki'LAiuK. 2de Sec. 
 
 Each other, one another. Of each 
 other. Without one another. 
 
 The brother and the siste.* love each 
 other. 
 
 Are you pleased with each other ? 
 
 We are. 
 
 As, as well as ; as. well as we ; they. 
 
 Tha nppearance, the countenance. 
 
 To show a disposition to. 
 
 That man whom ycu see shows a 
 desire to approach us. 
 
 To look pleased with some o*te. 
 
 L'un 1'autre I'une 1'autrc. L'undo 
 1'autre. L' une sans 1'autre. 
 
 Le frcre ct la soeur s'aiment 1'uu 
 
 A 1'autre. 
 
 Etf s-vous contents Pun de 1'aulre ? 
 
 Nous le soinmes. 
 
 Ainsi que ; ainsi que nous ; qu'ejx. 
 
 La mine. 
 
 Faire mine de. 
 
 Cette homme que vous voyez tail 
 mine de nous approcher. 
 
 Faire bonne mine a quelyu'un. 
 
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON, 
 
 To Icok cross at some one. 
 
 When I go to see that mar., instead 
 
 of receiving me with pleasure, he 
 
 looks displeased. 
 A. good-looking man. 
 A bad-looking man. 
 Bad-looking people, or folks. 
 To go to see some one. 
 
 To pay some one a visit. 
 
 To frequent a place. 
 
 To frequent societies. 
 
 To associate with some one. 
 
 To look like, to appear. < 
 
 How does he look ? 
 
 He looks gay, (sad, contented.) 
 
 You appear very well. 
 
 You look like a doctor. 
 
 She seems angry, to be in a oad 
 
 humor. 
 They look pleased. They appear to 
 
 be in a good humor. 
 To look good, to appear to be good. 
 To drink to some one. 
 To drink some one's health. 
 I drink your health. 
 It is all over with me ! her ! them . 
 
 (fern.) 
 
 It is all over. 
 It is better for me, him, you, them, 
 
 us, thee : or I, he, you, we, thou 
 
 hadst better .... 
 It is better for me to do it, for us to 
 
 do it, for you to do it. (I had better 
 
 Faire mauvaise mine a quelqu'un. 
 Quand je vais voir cet homme, au lion 
 
 de me faire bonne mine, il me fait 
 
 mauvaise mine. 
 Un homme de bonne mine. 
 Un homme de mauvaise mine. 
 Des gens de mauvaise mine. 
 Aller voir quelqu'un. 
 Faire unevisite> alw 
 Rendre visite > 
 Frequenter un lieu, (endroit.) 
 Frequenter des societes, 
 t Frequenter quelqu'un. 
 Avoir Vair. 
 
 Quelle mine a-t-il ? Quel air a-t-il T 
 II a 1'air enjoue, (triste, content.) 
 Vous avez 1'air bien portant. 
 Vous avez 1'air d'un me'decin. 
 Elle a 1'air de mauvaise humeiir. 
 
 Us ont Fair content. Us ont 1'ak 
 
 d'etre de bonne humeur. 
 Avoir 1'air bon. 
 t Boire a quelqu'un. 
 Boire a la sante de quelqu un. 
 T Je bois a votre santd. 
 t C'en est fait do moi ! J'ello 
 
 d'elles ! 
 t C'en est fait, 
 t II vaut mieuxqueje, il, vous, eliea, 
 
 nous, tu, (must be followed by the 
 
 subjunctive.) 
 // vaut mieux que je le fasse, nous 
 
 le fassions, vous le fassiez. 
 
 do it, &c.) 
 
 JSOIXANTE-TROISIEME Tn^ME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Pourquoi freque itez-vous ces gens-la? Je les frequente parce 
 qu'ils me sont utiles. Si vous ne cessez de les frequenter, vouj 
 vous attirerez de mauvaises affaires, car ils ont beaucoup (Penne- 
 mis. Vous croyez? Alors je ne continuerai plus a l3s voir. U 
 vaut mieux que vous fassiez ce que vous dites. Ces gonsfont mine 
 de nous approcher. Que nous veulent-ils 1 Le leur. demanderai-je ] 
 Oui, faites-le. Que voulez-vous, mes amis ? Ils ont Pair de ne paa 
 m'entendre. II faut qu'ils soient etrangers. Quels sont ces hornmos 
 de mauvaise mine qui viennent par ici ? Si ce sont des- voleurs, 
 c'on est fait de nous. N'avez-vous pas peur? Le jeune docteur esi 
 AD homme de bonne mine, n'est-ce pas'? Qui allez-vous voir? Si 
 
SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 383 
 
 rous aviez le temps, iriez-vous rendre visite a vos cousines'? Frc- 
 quentez-vous le theatre 1 Quels endroits, quels lieux frequentenU 
 ils? Ce marchand a toujours Pair d'etre de mauvaise humeur, est-i? 
 malade ? 
 
 Why did you not crme to dinner? I have been hindered. I am 
 sorry I made you \vait. (Je suis fdclie de . . . .) } Until what time 
 did you wait ? We waited for you till a quarter past four ; and, as 
 you did not come, we dined without you. You did right. I wish 
 I had (62 2 , N. 2) sent you a boy to inform you that I could not come; 
 but I thought J could come. 1 Never mind; did you drink my 
 health ? We drank yours (d la votre) and that of your parents. , 
 How does your uncle look ? (quclle mine a ....?) He looks (a Vair) 
 very gay, (enjoue,) for he is much pleased with his children. Do 
 his friends look (ont-ils la mine) as gay as he? They, on the ccn- 
 trary, look sad, because they are discontented. My uncle has no 
 money, and is always contented, and his friends, who have a good 
 deal of it, are scarcely ever so. 
 
 Is that man angry with you ? I think he is angry with me, be- 
 cause I (de ce quc jc) do not go to see him; but I do not like to go to 
 his house, for when I do, instead of receiving me with pleasure, he 
 looks displeased. You must not believe that; he is not angry with 
 you, for he is not so bad (mechant) as he looks, (quil en a Vair.) He 
 is the best man in the (du) world ; but one must know him in order 
 to appreciate him, (pour pouvoir Vapprecier.) There is a great dif- 
 ference (la difference) between you and him, (lui;) you look pleased 
 with all who come to see you, and he looks cross at those who call 
 on him, (go to see him.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 
 To please (oblige) some one. 
 You oblige (please) her much. 
 To hurt some one's feelings, to grieve. 
 Have you hrrt that man's feelings ? 
 
 I did not. 
 
 You grieve me, (hurt my feelings.) 
 If you know a good place to swim 
 
 in, oblige me by showing it to me. 
 
 t Faire plaisir a quelqu'un. 
 t Vous lui faites grand plaisir. 
 t Faire de la peine a quelqu'un. 
 t Avez-vous fait de la peine a cat 
 homme ? Je ne lui en ai pas fait. 
 t Vous me faites de la peine. 
 Si vous connaissez un bon endroit 
 
 pour nager, faites -moi le plaisir do 
 
 me le montrer. 
 
 1 When the same nominative I, I, he, he, &c., is repeated in the second 
 member of a compound sentence, as : I am sorry / have made you wut ; 
 the French, instead of the second nominative, use an infinitive, (with or 
 without preposition.) Thus, instead of saying : Je suis fdche que je vtui 
 aifait atteiidre ; they say : Je suis fdche de vous avoir fai f attcndre. (R. 3,.) 
 (28*, Obs. 65.) 
 
834 
 
 SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 
 
 To c&perience, to undergo. 
 
 I have experienced a great many 
 
 misfortunes. 
 
 To suffer, to bear, suffered, suffer. 
 Do not suffer it. 
 
 Dost thou sufler ? I do. He suffers. 
 To feel a pain in one's head, foot. 
 1 felt a pain in my eye. 
 To neglect. 
 
 Let us never neglect our duty. 
 We must yield to necessity. 
 -T) spring, dart forward. 
 The cat springs upon the rat. 
 To leap on horseback. 
 An increase, an augmentation. 
 For more bad luck. 
 For more good luck. 
 For more bad luck I have lost my 
 
 purse. 
 
 To lose one's wits. 
 That man has lost his wits, and he 
 
 does not know what to do. 
 Otetinatdy, by all mni?is. 
 That man wishes by all means to 
 
 lend me his money. 
 To follow. 
 
 I follow, thou folio west, lie or she 
 
 follows, people follow. 
 To pursue. 
 
 Kprouver, 1. 
 
 J'ai eprouve beaucoup de malheufS 
 
 Souffrir,* 2, souffert, souffre* 
 
 Ne le souflrez pas. 
 
 SoufTres-tu? Je soufTre. Ilsouflro 
 
 t Souffrir de la tete, du pied. 
 
 t J'ai soufTert de 1'ceil. 
 
 Negliger, 1, (de, av. 1'inf. $1442. 
 
 Ne ne'gligeons jamais notre devoir. 
 
 II fcut cdder a la ne'cessite. 
 
 t S'elancer. 
 
 Le chat s'elance sur le rat. 
 
 S'elancer sur son chevaJ. 
 
 Un surcroit. 
 
 Pour surcroit de malheur. 
 
 Pour surcroit de bonheur. 
 
 Pour surcroit de malheur j'ai perdu 
 
 ma bourse. 
 Perdre la tete. 
 
 Cet homme a perdu la tete, et il ne 
 v sait quo fairc. (G2 1 , Obs. 147.) 
 A tout e force. 
 Cet homme veut a toute force me 
 
 prOter son argent. 
 >'///< -re,* 4 ; pres. part, suivant ; pa*l 
 
 part, suii-i. 
 Je suis, tu suis, il ou elle suit, on 
 
 suit. 
 Poursuivre* 4, (Is conjugated like 
 
 ttctvre.) 
 Conserver, 1. 
 
 To preserve to save. 
 
 SoixANTE-TR)isiME THME. 3me Sec. 
 
 II faut quc nous nous en allions. Pourquoi faut-il que nous nous 
 en allions'? Je n'aime pas la mine de ces gens-la. Us nous suivent, 
 je crois. Us viennent par ici, tournons par-lii. N'ayez pas peur 
 tPeux/ Quand irons-nous nager^ Nous irions a present merne, si 
 nous pouvions trouver un bon endroit. Qu'a-ce petit gar^on ? II 
 soufTre de la tete. N'a-t-elle pas souffert de la gorge 1 Ne faites- 
 vous pas de la peine a votre tanle? Ne font-ils pas de la peine a 
 leurs parents'? A qui cherchez-vous a faire plaisir? Si j'allais au 
 theatre, cela ferait-il plaisir a mon oncle? N 7 a-t-il pas fait de la 
 peine a sa belle -SGDUI ? Si un voleur attaquait (attacked) M. Ran- 
 dolph, son gros chien ne s'elancerait-il pas sur le volear? Ne crie- 
 t-elle point, parce qu'il faut ceder a la necessite ? 
 
 What is the matter with you ? It is all over witli me. Why dt 
 
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. ( 1 .) 335 
 
 you cry thus? Why Jo I cry? I have been robbed of my gold 
 "ings, (une bague d'or,) my best clothes, and all my money; that ia 
 ihe reason why 1 cry. Do not make (ne faitcs pas) so much noise) 
 Tor it is we who have taken them all. (tout cda : ) in order to teach 
 you to take better care (avoir plus de sow, 50 3 ) cf your things, 
 (affaires.) and to shut the door of your room when you go out. 
 Why do you look so sad? I have experienced groat misfortunes. 
 After having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking men; 
 and to my still greater ill-luck, I hear that my good uncle, whom I 
 love so much, has been struck with apoplexy. You must not alliict 
 yourself (s-ajfliger) so much, for you know that we must yield to 
 neces- 
 
 Do you know a uood place to swim in ? I know one, but it is 
 rather far. Where is it? If you will go with me, I will tell you. 
 1 will go if it is not too far. On that side (38 ! ) of the river, behind 
 the wood, (laforitj) near the high road, (Ic grand chcmin.) When 
 *hau ,111 ? This evening, if you like. Will you wait 
 
 for me before the city gate ? I shall wait for you there ; but I beg 
 m not to forget it. You know that I never forget my promises. 
 Where did you become acquainted with that lady? I became 
 ainled with her at the house of one of my relations. Why 
 does your cousin ask me for (40 1 ) money and books'? Because ho 
 is a fool ; of me, (car d moi,) who am his nearest relation, (son plus 
 prochc parent.) and his best friend, he asks nothing. Can you get 
 rid of that man? (o2 2 ). I cannot get rid of him, for he will a 
 lutely (d toutc force) follow me. Has he not lost his wits? It may 
 be, (ccla sc pent.) What does he ask you for? He wishes to sell 
 me a ho: - I do not want. 
 
 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON, 64th. Soixante-quatrieme Lecon, Mine 
 VOCABULAIRE Ire Sec- 
 
 Obs. 149. How, how much, how many, before an exclamation, are trans 
 Jated by que. Ex. 
 
 How good you are ! J Que us Otes bon ! 
 
 ( Que de bonte vous avez ! 
 
 How fjolioh he is, not to go ! 1 Qu'il est sot, de ne pas y aller \ 
 
 Qls. 149i. The adjective which in English follows how, stands in French 
 Mter the verb : and M hen (ue is followed by a substantive, dt must always 
 precede the latter. 
 
336 
 
 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (I.) 
 
 How foolish she is to believe him ! 
 
 How rich that man is ! 
 
 How handsome that woman is ! 
 
 How much kindness you have for 
 me ! 
 
 How many obligations I am under to 
 you ! 
 
 To be under obligations to some one. 
 
 I am under many obligations to him. 
 
 How many people ! 
 
 How happy you are ! 
 
 How much wealth that man has ! 
 
 How much money that man has 
 spent in his life ! 
 
 To be obliged to some one for some- 
 thing. 
 
 To be indebted to some one for some- 
 thing. 
 
 I am indebted to him for it. 
 
 To thank. 
 
 To thank one for something. 
 
 Qu'elle est sotte de le croirc ! 
 Que cet homme est riche ! 
 Que cette femme est belle ! 
 Que de bonte vous avez pour moi ! 
 
 t Que d'obligations je vous ai ! 
 
 t Avoir des obligations a quelqu'un. 
 
 t Je lui ai beaucoup d'obligations. 
 
 Que de monde ! 
 
 Que vous etes heureux ! 
 
 Que de richesses cet homme a ! 
 
 Que d'argent cet homme a depenstf 
 dans sa vie ! 
 
 Etre oblige a quelqu'un de quelque 
 
 A chose. 
 
 Etre redevable a quelqu'un de quel- 
 que chose. 
 
 Je lui en suis redevable. 
 
 Eemercier, 1, (has no prepos. before 
 the pers. but de before the object.) 
 
 Remercier quelqu'un de quelque 
 chose. 
 
 Voulez-vous me passer cet e'ventail ? 
 
 Ayez la bonte de me 
 
 Faites-moi le plaisir de me 
 
 Vous prierai-je de me 
 
 Veuillez (imper.) me 
 
 Obs. 150. Never use remercier before the performance of the action, but 
 one of the opposite phrases, or any of similar import. 
 
 I thank you for the trouble yov have I Je vous remercie de la pcine que 
 taken for me. vous avez prise pour moi. 
 
 SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME THME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Que ce petit garcon est sot de crier comme cela ! Que vous etes 
 impoli de 1'appeler sot! Et vous, que vous etes impertinent de 
 m/appeler impoli ! Vous a-t-il repondu ainsi, lui qui vous a tant 
 d'obligations ! II est riche, et il a oublie toutes les obligations qu'il 
 m'a. Qui n'a point d'obligations a ses semblables! Nous nous 
 devoris des secours les uns aux autres. C'est vrai. Quel est ce 
 jeune homme en habit bleu ? C'est le neveu d'un de nos premiers 
 marchands. Que d'argent ce neveu a depense ! Que Madame 
 Lewis est belle ! n'est-ce pas? Et qu'elle est aimable ! Quelqu'un 
 vous a-t-il remercie des dons que vous nous avez faits? Cela n'en 
 vaut pas la peine. Faites-moi le plaisir (I will thank you) de rre 
 tes montrer. Volontiers. Montons dans la chambre de Levant- 
 
 1 will thank you for that fan, or 
 Shall I thank you for that fan ? 
 
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 337 
 
 nous les y trouverons. -Veuillez raraasser ma plume d'acier, (Fll 
 thank you to. . . .) La voici. Je vous remercie. De rien. A qui 
 cet offieier est-il redevable de sa compagnic, (company.) II en est 
 redevable a son oncle, le general. X qui est-il redevable de sa 
 place? (situation?) 
 
 How many people there were at the ball ! Then you enjoyed 
 yourself (s'amuser) a good deal ; I presume 1 No, not at all. Why 
 so ? There was there such a multitude, that one could hardly get 
 iu. How many invitations they must have sent ! Could you 
 dance? (N. 62 2 .) No, there was not room (place) enough. I 
 bring you a pretty present, with which you will be much pleased, I 
 hope. How good you are! What is it? A silk cravat. How 
 many obligations I owe you! Where is it? I have got :t in my 
 coat-pocket. Here it is, in this paper. Shall I open it? Yes, open 
 it. Now I see the cravat. How beautiful it is! Does it please 
 you? It pleases me much, and I thank you for it, with all my 
 heart. I hope you will at last accept (accepter) something from 
 rne. What do you intend to give me ? I will not tell you, for if I 
 did, you would have no pleasure when I should give it to you. 
 
 Where do you wish me to go for you? Where do I want you to 
 For me ? It is rather far. No matter, (n'importe,) I am so much 
 indebted to you, that I will go wherever (oil) you please. (4G3, Obs. 
 107.) How kind you are! Not more than you, (pas plus.) Ho\v 
 foolish Clarissa i<. to stay at home when she could go travelling! 
 she is almost too old, but say how foolish she was not to go 
 1 ."> years ago, when she could have gone ! With whom could she 
 have gone 15 years ago ? With her cousin's family, from Virginia, 
 (laVirginie.) Had she lost her wits? Perhaps, or perhaps her 
 heart. Make haste; you and I must be at home in a quarter of an 
 hour. Come, then; I am ready. I am not, (pas moi:) for, before 
 I go away, I must have my pencils. Here they are. I am much 
 obliged, and under many obligations to you. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. iide Sec. 
 
 ] Io \v large ? Of what size is the dog ? 
 I low high? Oi what height is the tree ? 
 How deep? Of what depth is iliepond? 
 
 De quelle grandeur est le chien ? 
 De quelle hauteur ... est 1'arbre ? 
 De quelle profondeur ... est \'elang ? 
 
 Ols. 150i. When speaking of dimensions, the English use the verb 
 tf be, while the French use avoir, with the preposition de before the noun 
 or adjective of dimensions. How thick is this 1 Combien ceci a-t-il d'epais- 
 tr/r f 1 
 
 1 In general, the substantive is more elegantly used than the adjective 
 but deep cannot be expressed by de profo?id, nor thick by d'e-pais. 
 29 
 
338 
 
 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 How high is his or her ho ise ? 
 It is nearly fifty feet high. 
 Our house is thirty feet broad. 
 That table is six feet long. 
 Thai river is twenty feet deep. 
 
 The size. What is your size ? how 
 
 tall . . . 
 
 i am 5 feet 9 inches. 
 Of what size is that man ? 
 He is but 5 feet 1 inch. 
 How was that child dressed ? 
 It was dressed in green. 
 The man with the blue coat. 
 The woman with the red gown. 
 Is it true that his house is burnt ? 
 It is true ; it is but too true. 
 Is it not, (or is it not true ?) 
 1 shall perhaps go there ; but not he. 
 
 t Combien sa maison a-t-ello de 
 
 haut ou de hauteur ? 
 t Elle a environ cinquante pieda do 
 
 haut ou de hauteur, 
 t Notre maison a trente picds do 
 
 large ou de largeur. 
 t Cette table a six pieds dc long ou 
 
 de longueur, 
 t Cette riviere a vingt pieds de pro- 
 
 fondeur. 1 
 La taille. Quelle est votre taille I 
 
 t J'ai 5 pieds 9 pouces. 
 De quelle taille cet homme est-il ? 
 t II n'a que 5 pieds 1 pouce. 
 Comment cet enfant etait-il habilld ? 
 t II dtait habille de (ou en) vert, 
 t L'homme a 1'habit bleu, 
 t La femme a la robe rouge. 
 Est-il vrai que sa maison est brfileo 1 
 C'est vrai, ce n'est que trop vrai. 
 N'est ce pas, (n'cst-il pas vrai?) 
 J'irai peut-etre ; mais il n'ira pas. 
 
 Obs. 151. 
 of: aller. 
 
 Y (there), must not be used before the future and condition^ 
 
 To share, to divide. 
 
 Whose horse is this ? It is mine. (29 2 .) 
 
 It is my horse. It is mine. ($ 38, N. 3.) 
 
 It is mine, or it belongs to me. 
 
 Whose horses are these ? 
 
 Are these gloves yours ? 
 
 They are mine, or they belong to 
 
 me. 
 
 Whose house is that ? 
 It is mine, or it belongs to me. 
 Whose houses are these ? 
 They are mine, or they belong to 
 
 me. 
 
 It is not your purse : is it ? 
 These are not your notes : are they ? 
 No, they are not. 
 
 cr, 1. 
 
 X qui est ce cheval ? II est a moi. 
 C'est mon cheval. C'est le mien. 
 C'est le mien, ou il est a moi. 
 A qui sont ces chevaux ? 
 Ces gants sont-ils a vous ? 
 Ce sont lea miens, ou Us sont a moi 
 
 (47 s . 06s. 110.) 
 A qui est cette maison ? 
 C'est la mienne, ou elle est a moi. 
 A qui sont ces maisons ? 
 Ce sont les miennes, ou elles sont B 
 
 moi. 
 
 Est-ce que c* est 2 votre bourse? 
 Est-ce que ce sont 2 vos billets ? 
 Non, ce ne les sont pas. ($ 39 3.) 
 
 1 Sec note on page 337. 
 
 2 When a simple interrogation is used after a negation, as : You have not 
 my ring, hive t,ow ? The French merely use the interrogative form : Eai-ce 
 ft*. . . as: Est-ce que vous ave-z ma lague ? You may use : Avez-vous ma 
 lague f but the other corresponds better with the doubt which the English 
 mode seems to con /ey. 
 
SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 339 
 
 SoiXAXTE-QUATRlfeME Tu&ME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Avex-vous vu la nouvelle maison de Fa"ocat? Oui. je I'm vue, 
 ms, ne i : avez-vous pas encore visitee? Non, il faut quo j'aillo 
 !a voir bientot. II vaut mieux que vous alliez en voir la grandeur, 
 Combien a-t-elle de hauteur ? Elle a au vwins 56 pieds de hauteur. 
 Combien de largeur a-t-elle ? Elle j^ laissex-moi voir, les deux 
 salons ont chacun 18 pieds de largeur et le vestibule a peu pres 8,co 
 qui fait 44 pieds. et IVpaisseur (the thickness) des murs a pen pres 4 
 autres pieds. Alors le tout fait de 48 a 50 pieds de largeur, n ? est-ce- 
 pas? C'est une grande maison pour un petit homme. Quelle est 
 Ba taille ? II a environ 5 pieds 3 pouces; car j'ai au moins 6 pouces 
 dt plus que lui. Votre Ills n ? est-il pas grand ? Si fait, il a plus de 
 pieds. A qui sont ces deux beaux chevaux nbirs? Ah ! qu'ils sont 
 beaux ! Ce sont ceux du ministrc Americain. N'est-ce pas le Mon- 
 Fieur a 1'habit noir, au gilet blanc, et a la i en maxarin? 
 
 Combien cette riviere a-t-elle de profondeur? Combien cette table 
 d'acajou a-t-elle de hauteur ? N'est-il pas temps que nous ullions vuir 
 le pont-neuf ? 
 
 o houses are t:. T are mine. Do these pens belong 
 
 to you? No, they belong to my sister. Are those (sont-ce Id) the 
 pens with which she writes so well? They are the same. Whose 
 gun is this? It is my father's. Are these books your sister's ? They 
 are hers. Whose carriage is this ? It is mine. Which is the man 
 of whom you complain ? It is he (celui) who wears a red coat. 
 :e they dressed? Some were dressed in blue, some in 
 green, some in yellow, and several in red. Who are those men ? 
 The one who is dressed in gray is my neighbor, and the man with 
 the black coat the physician whose son has given my neighbor a 
 blow with a stick. Who is the man with the green coat? He is one 
 of my relations. Are there many philosophers in your country? 
 There are as many there as in yours. How does this hat fit me ? It 
 fits you very well. How does that coat fit your brother? It fits him 
 admirably. Is your brother as tall (grand) as you ? He is taller 
 ihan I, but I am older (age) than he. Of what size (de quclle taille) 
 is that man ? He is five feet four inches (un pouce) high. How high 
 is the house of our landlord? It is sixty feet high. Is your well 
 deep ? Yes, Sir, for it is fifty feet deep. "There are many learned 
 men (un savant) in Rome, are there not, (n'est-ce pas ? ;; ) Milton asko j 
 a Roman. "Not so many as when you were there," answered 
 (repondit) the "Roman. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 
 T\) mm up, run up, p. p , run vp i Accourir,* 2, account 6 , accourczvite, 
 tjutch. \ (con jug u commc Courir.} ('10 s , 48'.) 
 
34:0 
 
 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 Many men had run up ; but instead of 
 extinguishing the fire, the wretches 
 set to plundering. 
 
 To run to the assistance of some one. 
 
 To save, to deliver from da?iger. 
 
 To save anybody's life. 
 
 To plunder, (to rob.) The pillage. 
 
 To set about something. 
 
 Have they succeeded in extinguish- 
 ing the fire ? 
 
 They have succeeded in it. 
 
 The watch indicates the hours. 
 
 To indicate, to mark. 
 
 To Quarrel. 
 
 To quarrel with one. 
 
 To dispute (to contend) about some- 
 thing. 
 
 What are those officers disputing 
 about ? 
 
 They are disputing about who shall 
 go first to the attack. 
 
 To be ignorant of something, or 
 
 Not to know something. 
 
 The eve, the day before. 
 
 The day before that day was Satur- 
 day. 
 
 The daybefore Sunday is Saturday. 
 
 What day comes before Sunday ? 
 
 /* it time for me to take ? It is time 
 that you should take, we should take. 
 
 Although 1 can, thou canst, he can. 
 
 We can or may, you can or may, they 
 
 may. 
 
 For the formation of the subjunctive 
 To cue, heal. To cure one's self, j 
 
 Eeaucoup d'hommes etaiem accou 
 rus, mais au lieud'eteindre le feu 
 les misembles s'etaient mis a piller 
 
 Accourir,* 2, au secours (a 1'assist 
 ance, a 1'aide) de quelqu'un, 
 
 Sauver, 1, du danger. 
 
 Sauver la vie a quelqu'un. 
 
 Piller, 1. Le pillage. 
 
 t Se mettre* u quelque chose. 
 
 Est-on parvenu a eteindre^e feu ? 
 
 On y est parvenu. 
 
 La montre marque les heures. 
 
 Marquer, 1 ; indiquer, 1 
 
 Se quereller, 1. 
 
 t Quereller quelqu'un. 
 
 Disputer sur quelque chose. 
 
 Sur quoi ces ojjiciers dis;utent-ils f 
 
 t Ils disputent a qui ira le premier a 
 1'attaque. 
 
 Ignorcr, 1, quelque chose, (no prep.) 
 
 La veille, (de avant le nom qui suit.) 
 t La veille de ce jour-la etait un 
 
 samedi. 
 
 t La veille de dimanche est samedi. 
 Quelle est la veille de dimanche ? 
 Est-il temps queje prennc ? II eat 
 
 temps quc vous premez que noua 
 
 prenions. 
 Quoiqueje puisse, tu puisses, il 
 
 puisse. 
 Nous puissions, vous puissiez, ila 
 
 puissent.. 
 
 present, see ($ 151.) 
 Guerir, 2. Seguerir. Guerissez-voua. 
 
 SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME TH^ME. 3me Sec. 
 
 Est-il viai que votre oncle soit arrive ? Quoiqu'on m'ait dit qu'il 
 est arrive, je ne le crois pas ? je vous assure. Le ministre vous a-t-il 
 assure ce son assistance ? Oui, je vous assure que c'est vrai. N ? est-ii 
 pas temps que nous prenions le the ? Si fait, il est temps que nous 
 le prenions. Irez-vous a Passemblee ? Quoique je puisse y aller, 
 je n'irai pas ? parce que m^a mere ne desire pas que j'y aille. Com- 
 ment se trouve Emma aajourd'hui? Quoiqu^lle soit mieux, elle 
 n'est pas encore bien. Sort-elle? Oui ; qucdqu'olle ne soit paa 
 
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 3-41 
 
 guerie, elle sort. Se querellent-ils toujours ? Us se querellent , 
 mais il est temps qu'ils soient amis. Sur quoi disputez-vous? Nous 
 disputons sur le rapport du comite de same. Disputerez-vous tou- 
 jours? Pourquoi ne disputerions-nous pas? Ne vous a-t-elle pas 
 sauve d'un grand danger? L'attaque a-t-elle eu lieu? A-t-elle 
 reussi? Ou etiez-vous la veille de ce jour-la? Ignoriez-vous le 
 mariage de M. Francois? Quelle est la veille de lundi? Quells 
 est la veille du douze? N'entendez-vous pas crier au feu! (fire!) 
 au feu ! A-t-on sauve la maison? A-t-on pu sauver Pecurie? Si 
 I'on avait eu plus d'eau, la maison aurait-elle brule ? 
 
 * What is the difference (la difference) between a watch and me ?" 
 inquired (demanda) a lady of a young officer. "My lady, ;; replied 
 he, "a watch marks the hours, and, near (auprcs de) you, one for- 
 gets them/' 7 How many obligations I am under to you, my dear 
 friend ! You have saved my life ! without you I should have been 
 lost. Have those miserable men hurt you ? They have beaten and 
 robbed me, and when you ran to my assistance they were about to 
 (Us allaicnt} strip (deshalillcr) and kill me. I am happy to have 
 delivered you from the (dcs) hands of those robbers. How good 
 you are ! I shall always be indebted to you for it ! It is not worth 
 mentioning, (speaking about it.) 
 
 Why are those officers quarreling? They are quarreling because 
 they do not know what to do. Have they succeeded in extinguish- 
 ing the fire ? They have at last succeeded in it; but it is said (on 
 dit) that several houses have been burnt. Have they not been able 
 to save anything? They have not been able to save anything; for, 
 instead of extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches (les misc- 
 rablcs) who had come up, set to plundering. What has happened * 
 A great misfortune has happened. Why did my friends set out 
 without me ? They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing 
 that you did not come, they set out. What is the day before Mon- 
 day called ? The day before Monday is Sunday. Why did you not 
 run to the assistance of your neighbor whose house has been burnt? 
 I was quite (entiercment) ignorant of his house being on fire, (que k 
 feu fut a sa maison ;) for, had I known it, I would have run to his 
 assistance. 
 
 SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON, 65ih.Soixante-cinquiemc Lecon, 
 
 VOCABULAIRE, Ire JSec. 
 
 To propose. I Se proposer, I, (de before inhn.) 
 
 I propose going on that journey. | Je me propose de faire ce voyage 
 
342 
 
 SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 lie proposes joining a hunting party. 
 
 To play a game at chess, 
 
 A. game at billiards. 
 
 A. game at cards. 
 
 A. party, a soiree ; a musical party. 
 
 To succeed. 
 
 Do you succeed in doing that ? 
 
 I do succeed in it. 
 
 jib crxleavor. 
 
 I endeavor to do it. 
 
 I endeavor to succeed in it. 
 
 Endeavor to do better. 
 
 Since, seeing, considering that. 
 
 Since, you are happy, why do you 
 complain ? 
 
 To be thoroughly acquainted with a 
 thing. 
 
 To make one's self thoroughly ac- 
 quainted with a thing. 
 
 That man understands that business 
 perfectly. 
 
 I understand that well. 
 
 Since or from. From that time. 
 
 From my childhood. 
 
 From morning until evening. 
 
 From the beginning to the end. 
 
 From here to there. 
 To blow, to blow out. Strongly, hard. 
 East, the east, to the east, east wind. 
 The north, to the north, the north 
 
 wind. 
 
 The west, to the west, the west wind 
 The south, to the south, the south 
 
 wind. 
 
 The north-west. The south-east. 
 To encourage. To unroot, pull. 
 
 II se propose d'allcr a .me partio da 
 
 chasse. 
 
 t Faire une partie d'echcca. 
 Une partie de billard. 
 Une partie de cartes. 
 Une partie, cu soiree ; tine soirk 
 
 musicale. 
 
 Reussir, 2, (d before infin.) 
 Reussissez-vous a faire ccla ? 
 J'y reussis. 
 
 Tdcher, 1, (de before infin.) 
 Je tache de le faire. 
 Je tache d'y reussir. 
 Tachez de faire mieux. 
 Puisque. 
 Puisque rous etes heureux, pourqitol 
 
 vous plaigncz-vous ? 
 Etre aufait de quclquc chose. 
 
 Sc metlre an fait de quelque chose. 
 
 Get homme cst a.i fait de celte af' 
 
 faire. 
 
 Je suis au fait de cela. 
 Depuis. Depuis ce moment-la. 
 
 Depuis ma jeunesse. 
 Depnis le matin jusqu'au soir. 
 Depuis le commencement jusqu'a la 
 
 fin. 
 
 Depuis ici jusque la. 
 S-ovjJlcr, 1. Fort. 
 
 Est, i'est r a Test, le vent d'est. 
 Le nord, au nord, le vent de nord. 
 
 L'ouest, a Touest, le vent d'ouest. 
 Le sud, au sud, le vent de sud. 
 
 Le nord-ouest. Le sud-est. 
 Encourager, 1. ($144 2.) Dera 
 ciner, 1. 
 
 SOIXANTE-CINQUI^ME Tn^ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Vous proposez-vous de faire un petit voyage cet ete ? Je me pro- 
 pose de faire "jn petit tour. N 7 est-il pas temps que vous partiez ? 
 (151.) Je me propose de le faire dans quelques jours. Si vous 
 n'etes pas occupe, ailons faire une partie de billard. II y a si long- 
 temps que je n'ai jorje au billard, que vous n'auriez aucun plaisir a 
 faire une partie avec moi; mais si vous aimez les echecs, j'en ferai 
 une partie avec vous. J'aime les echecs le soir quand on est trail 
 
SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 343 
 
 rjiiilie Mais ne faut-il pas que nous allions nous preparer pour la 
 soiree de Madams Rush? Quoiqu ? elle m'ait fait 1'honnenr de m'tn- 
 viter, (to invite me.) je ne pourrai pas y aller. Tachez d'y venir. 
 Puisque vous le desire/, je tacherai d'y aller. Y jouera-t-on aux 
 cartes ? II y a toujours une partie de cartes. Ce jeune Irlandais est-~~ 
 il au fait? Votre scrvante est-elle au fait de son devoir? Ce com- 
 mia est au fait, n'est-ce pas? Vous dites que votre cousine est 
 toujours de bonne humeur, pourquoi done se plaint-elle du matia 
 jusqu'au soir 7 Quant a la danse, il est au fait, n 7 est-ce pas? Est- 
 ce qu'il s'est bien conduit depuis sa jeunesse? (64 2 , N. 2.) Quel 
 bruit est cela ? N'est-ce pas le vent qui souffle ? Oh ! Comme il 
 souffle /or / Est-ce que c'est un vent d'ouest ou ie nord? 
 
 The wind has been blowing ($145) from the east these (dcpuis] 
 three or four days, are you not astonished that we have no rain ? (subj. 
 $151.) Yes, I am; for when the wind blows from the east, we 
 generally have rain. Is your west wind warm or cold? The w- 
 wind is not very cold, but the north and the north-wet winds are 
 usually strong and very cold. Are they not cool in summer? Yes, 
 they are. I presume your south wind is warm, is it not? It is our 
 warmest wind. And the south-west ? That is pleasant. Does the 
 wind blow hard here ? It sometimes blows hard enough to unroot 
 trees, (deracincr dcs arbres.) If Miss Clara is at Mrs. M. 7 s party, 
 will you present me to her ? I will, with pleasure. Have you been 
 long acquainted with her? I have known her these 2 years. Does 
 she understand the figures of quadrilles? (Est-elle au fait des figures 
 des quadrilles ?) She knows them very well, or understands them 
 perfectly, do you? (64 2 , N. 2.) 
 
 Who won the game of chess ? I endeavored to do it, but I could 
 not (62 2 , N. 1.) Your cousins frequently play chess, do they not? 
 No, they more frequently play billiards or cards. I wish I could 
 translate my exercises without mistakes ; but, although I try to do 
 it, I cannot succeed. Try again. It is the only means to succeed. 
 Since you encourage me, I will continue. If she was not unhappy, 
 would she complain? There are people who always complain. 
 Why are you without a light? The wind blew it out when you 
 came in. What does your French master make you do? He 
 makes me read a lesson ; afterwards he makes me translate English 
 exercises into French on the lesson which he made me read; and 
 from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks French to 
 n?, and I have to answer him (il me faut lui repondre) in the very 
 iatguage (dans la langue mime) which he is teaching me. Have 
 you already learned much in that manner ? You see that I have 
 ilready learned something. 
 
3-14 
 
 SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 To reduce, abate, reduced. Reduce. 
 Dost thou reduce ? I reduce, she 
 
 reduces. 
 
 Tc translate, translated. Translate. 
 Tc introduce, to present. 
 
 TJ induce the price. 
 Reduce the price a crown. 
 To translate into French. 
 Shall I translate French into English ? 
 Translate from one language into 
 another. 
 
 I introduce him to you. 
 
 1 introduce you to him, her. 
 
 He will present us to them. 
 
 He himself has told it me. 
 
 lie has told it me, to myself, (not to 
 
 another person.) 
 One does not like to flatter one's self. 
 
 Reduire,* 4, 
 Reduis-tu ? 
 
 rcdut. 
 Je reduis, elle reduit 
 
 Traduire,* 4. Traduit. Traduisex 
 Introduire* 4, (as reuiiire.) Prf 
 
 senter, 1. 
 Reduire le prix. 
 Reduisez le prix d'un ecu. 
 Traduire en Franais. 
 Traduirai-je du Fran$ais en Anglrii>? 
 Traduisez d'une languc dans une 
 
 autre. 
 
 Je 1'introduis chez vou.s. 
 t Je vous le presente. 
 t Je vous presente a lui, a cllc. 
 t II nous prcsentera a eux, a elles. 
 II me 1'a dit lu>meme. (41 i.) 
 11 me Ta dit a moi-mCme. 
 
 On n'aimc pas a se flatter soi-mCme. 
 01>s. 152. Sometimes the word mtme is an adverb, and answers to tho 
 
 English word even. 
 
 He has not even money enough to 
 buy some bread. 
 
 We must love everybody, even our 
 enemies. 
 
 A<;nin, (anew.) 
 
 He speaks ogain. 
 
 To fall, to lower. 
 
 The price of the merchandise fairs. 
 
 To deduct 
 
 To raise, lift up, put up, rise, increase. 
 
 Is llour higher or lower ? 
 
 She has lowered the window ; raise 
 it up. 
 
 The provisions. Produce has risen. 
 
 To overcharge, to ask too much. 
 
 Not having overcharged you, I can- 
 not deduct anything. 
 
 An ell. A yard. 
 
 A metre, (measure.} 
 
 To produce, (to yield, to projlt.) 
 
 How much does that employment 
 yield you a year ? 
 
 An employment. 
 
 To permit, permitted. Permit. 
 
 II n'a pas niemc assez d'argent pour 
 
 achcter du pain. 
 II faut aimer tout le monde, memo 
 
 nos enncmis. 
 De nouvcau. 
 11 parle de nouveau. 
 Baisser, I, (tomber, 1, 5 1 1 .) 
 La marchandise baisse dc prix. 
 Rabattre, 4, (see battre, 4, 3C'.> 
 Lever, 1. ($1444.) Hausse . 
 
 La farine a-t-elle haussd ou baisse I 
 Elle a baissd la fenetre, levcz-la. 
 
 Lesdenrdes. Lesdenre'esonthaussd 
 
 Surfaire* (like/ai're.*) 
 
 Ne vous ayant pas surfait, je ne sau- 
 
 rais rien rabattre. 
 
 Une aune Une yard ou verge. 
 
 I7n metre. 
 Rapport er, 1. 
 Combien cet emploi (cctte charge' 
 
 vous rapporte-t-il (elle) par an? 
 Un emploi, une charge. 
 Fermettre,*4: (de), permis. Permutes* 
 
 (mettve.) 
 
-TXTV-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 345 
 
 SOIXANTE-CINQUIEME TflftME. 2de SeC. 
 
 A-t-il reduit le prix de son velours de sole? Non, il (Tit qiril no 
 rabattra rien. Ce marchand surfait trop. II assure qu'il ne surfait 
 pas du tout, mais que comme ses marchandises sont de la meilleure 
 qualite, il est oblige de vendre plus cher. Voulez-vous nrintroduiro 
 aunautre? Je vous introduirai avec plaisir. Qui a presente ce 
 jeune avocat au president? Le ministre le lui a presente. Le roi 
 a-t-il etc presente au ministre ? Non, mais le ministre 1'a ete au 
 roi. Puisque vous connaissez M. Martin, voulez-TOUs me le pre- 
 senter'? Je vous le presenterai. II vient par ici. Dr. Prudieu. per* 
 mcttcz moi (permit me) de vous presenter M. Martin, de Louisville. 
 Dr., je suis charm c d'avoir le plaisir de votre connaissance. C'esi 
 beaucoup de plaisir, M., que je fais la votre. Vous ] 7 a-t-il dil 
 lui-mcme ? Non, mais sa femme elle-meme me 1'a dit. Votre pero 
 vous a-t-il perrnis (from pcrmcltrc, to permit) d'acheter 3 aunes de 
 ?e drap? 11 me 1'. Leur permet-il cl .. de son 
 
 la fenetre? Le colon hausse-l-il? 
 
 What is the price of this cloth? I sell it at three crowns and a 
 half the ell. 1 think (tr outer) it very dear. Has the price of cloth 
 not fallen ? It has not fallen ; the price of all goods (la merchandise) 
 fallen, except that of cloth, (exccpte cdui du drap.) I will give 
 you three crowns for it, (en.) I cannot let you have (donner) it for 
 (a) that price, fcr it costs me (cow/cr, 1) more. Will you have the 
 to show rre some pieces (la piece) of English cloth? With 
 ii pleasure. Does this silk suit you? It does not suit me. 
 Why does it not suit you? Because it is too dear; if you will lowrr 
 the price, (en rabattrc quelque chose,) I shall buy twenty yards of it. 
 Not having a.-ked too much, I cannot take off anything. Yon 
 i French; does your master let you translate? He lets me 
 , write, and translate. 
 
 cotton risen in England, by the last news? Yes, it had 
 risen J of a penny. Then it will rise here. Probably, (proba- 
 blemcnt.) Is it true that produce and provisions are lower? I .be- 
 lieve they are the same, (au meme prix;) that they have neither 
 ri>en nor sunk, (lowered.) What is the price of a yard of your 
 eilk velvet? It is 4 dollars a yard. It is high. How beautiful it 
 is ! See ! Is flour high ? Five dollars a barrel. Will it not be 
 lower in the fall ? It may lower, fall. W r ill you permit me to use 
 your fan ? If he would reduce the price of his house, would you 
 take it for your family? Would he purchase 2 barrels of flois, if it 
 was 4$ dollars a barrel? How do you do, to-day? I am very 
 unwell, (tres-mal.) How do you like that soup? I think (trwver) 
 it in very bad; but since I have lost my appetite, (VappC'tit.) I do 
 
840 
 
 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 not like anything, (je ne trouve rien de bon.) How much dot 
 lhat employment yield to your father ? It yields him more than 
 four thousand (mille has no s in the plural) crowns. 
 
 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON, 66th. Smxante-sixitme Le$on } 66mc 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 A kind, sort, (a species.) 
 What kind of fruit is that ? 
 
 A stone (of a fruit). A plum stone. 
 A stone of a peach, an apricot. 
 Stone-fruit. Break these stones. 
 
 One must break the stone before one 
 
 comes at the kernel. 
 A kernel. 
 
 An almond. Kernel-fruit. 
 
 A sweet almond. A bitter almond. 
 It is a kernel-fruit. 
 
 licr, gathered. Gather. 
 1 ira'.hcr, iliou gatherest, lie gathers. 
 To gather fruit. 
 
 re up the soup, the breakfast. 
 To bring in the (It 
 
 The fruit. An apricot. A peach. 
 A. plum. An anecdote. Roast meat. 
 To cease, to leave off. 
 I leave olT reading. 
 She docs not leave ofF speaking. 
 To avoid. 
 To escape. 
 
 To escape a misfortune. 
 lie ran away to avoid death. 
 
 TV ft c, to take to flight, one'* Aeefc,&c. 
 
 To do without a thing. 
 
 Can you do without bread ? 
 
 I ran do without it. 
 
 There are many things which we 
 must do without. 
 
 To depend, belong to, be connected 
 with. 
 
 This* employment and the duties 
 connected with it. 
 
 That lesson and the exercises be- 
 longing to it. 
 
 Une espece. 
 
 Quelle espece de fruit cst ceia, (Q: 
 
 est-ce la?) 
 
 Un noyau. Un noyau de prune. 
 Un noyau de pechc, d'abricot. 
 Fruits a noyau. Cassez ces noyaux. 
 
 (W 
 
 II faut casser le noyau pour en avoir 
 
 1'amanjle : (a proverb.) 
 Une amande, un pepin. 
 l'i:.' amande. Fruits a pepin. 
 Une amande douce, am 
 C'cst un fruit a pepin. 
 Cucillir,* 2, cueilli. Cueillez. 
 Je cnoille, tu cueilles, il cueille. 
 
 ( 'in ill ir tlit fruit. 
 
 In foitpc, le dejeuner. 
 
 le dessert. 
 
 Le fruit. Un abricot. Une \ 
 Une prune. Uno anecdote. Du roti. 
 Cesser, 1, de. 
 Je cesse de lire. 
 Elle ne cesse de parler. (CC 1 .) 
 Kvitcr, 1, (Je before infin.) 
 fichapper, 1. 
 
 t 6chapper a un malheur. 
 II a pris la fuite pour cchapper a la 
 
 mort. 
 
 Prendre la fuite. 
 Se passer de quelque chose. 
 Pouvez-vous vous passer de pain ? 
 Je puis (je peux) m'en passer. 
 II y a bien dcs choscs dont il faut ac 
 
 passer. 
 Dependre, 4, de. 
 
 Get emploi et les devoirs qui en d<$ 
 
 pendent. 
 Cette leon et les themes qui en d6 
 
 penden* 
 
SIXTV'.-UXTll LESSON. (1.) 347 
 
 Soi ;MI; TIIKME. lreSjc. 
 
 Ain ez-vuus les amandes? Oui, je les aime douees.--L'epiciei 
 da coin vend-ii de bonnes peches seches ? Non, les peches sechea 
 qu : il vend sont sures, trop sures. C'est dommage. N ? est-il pas 
 bientot temps que nous ayons des abricots ? Des abricots? Ce n : est 
 pas encore la saison (season.) II faut que les cerises et les fraisea 
 viennent (subj. 151) avant. Nousn'avons pas encore eu ces fruits-la 
 Dans la saison des fruits j'aime beaucoup les desserts. Jean, si vouu 
 allez dans le jardin, ne cueillez pas les fruits. Non, je n'en cueillerai 
 . mais no faut-ii pas que je cueille un bouquet? Si fait, cueille? 
 i pour votre cousine Marie. Quelle espece de fruit est cela? 
 D fruit. Qu 7 est-ce done ? C'est une tomate (a tomato.) 
 Kile ressemble a un fruit, n'est-ce pas ? Dans la saison des tomates, 
 je ne peux pas m> et vous? (62 3 , N. 1.) Mon-fils ne peut 
 
 pas t-ils ? Pourquoi evitez* 
 
 vous M. Chan* _ :e bien heureuse d'echapper 
 
 a la mort. Kile a ' :it afTreux, ne le saviez-vous 
 
 pas? 
 
 You must speak, (subj.) \ .->t be afraid. I am too bashful 
 
 [timiilc] to speak. 1 shuuld like to (je voudrais bicn) know why I 
 am so bashful. You would not be so bashful if you studied better, 
 Do you think so? To be sure, I do. Have they already brought in 
 the dessert? They have brought it in. Do you like fruit? I like 
 iruit, but I have no more appetite. Will you eat a little cheese? I 
 I liitle. Shall I help you to English or Dutch cheese? 1 
 %vill eat a liitle Dutch che^r. What kind of fruit is that? It i* 
 stone-fruit. What is it called ? It is called thus. Will you wa-h 
 your hands? I should like to (je voudrais lien) wash them, but 1 
 have no towel to (pour) wipe their, with. I will let you have (fain 
 donncr} a towel, some soap, and. some water. I shall be much 
 obliged (fort oblige) to you. 
 
 May I ask you for (oscrais-jc vous dcmandcr) a little water ? Hero 
 is some, (en rozct.} Can you do without soap? As for soap, I can 
 do without it, but I must have a towel to wipe my hands with. Do 
 you often do without soap? There are many things which we must 
 do without. Why has that man run away? Because he had no 
 other means of escaping the punishment (la punitiori) which he had 
 deserved, (meritcr.) Why did your brothers not get (se procurer) a 
 better horse ? If they had got rid of their old horse, they would 
 have got a better. Has your father arrived already ? Not yet, but 
 we hope that he will arrive this very day, (aujounVkui'mcmc.) lias 
 year Hend set out in time, (d temps?) I do not know, but I 
 he has (qu^il sera, 58 1 , Obs. 141) set out in lime 
 
54-8 
 
 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. 
 
 717/1 IS- > S* 
 
 acquitter, 1, d' une commission. 
 
 VOCABULAIUE. 2de See. 
 
 Tit execute a commission. 
 To acquit o?ie > s self of 
 
 sioji, to do an errand. 
 I have executed your commission. I Je rne suis acquitte de votre com 
 
 I mission. 
 
 f Vous etes-\ous acquitte de ma com 
 Have you executed my commission ? -j mission t 
 
 [ Avez-vous fait ma commission? 
 
 I have executed it. 
 
 7t do one 1 s duty. 
 
 To discharge, to do, or to fulfil one t 
 
 duty. 
 
 That man always does his duty. 
 That man always fulfils his duty. 
 
 To rely, to depend upon somct/iim:. 
 Ue depends upon it. 
 
 1 rely upon you. 
 
 You may i cly upon him. 
 
 That is to say, (i. e.) Et cetera, (etc.) 
 My pen (quill) is better than yours. 
 They will warm the soup. 
 Dinner (or supper) is on the table, (is 
 
 served up.) 
 
 Do you choose any soup ? 
 .Shall ' help you to some soup ? 
 1 will tro.uble you for a little. 
 To xrrve up, to attend. 
 Not that 1 know of, you k/iow of. 
 
 Je m'en suis acquitte. 
 Faire son devoir. 
 /u inplir S07i devoir. 
 
 Get homme fait toujovirs son devoir. 
 
 Get homme s'acquitte toujoure de 
 son devoir. 
 
 Compter, I, sur qudque chose 
 
 II y compte. 
 
 Je compte sur vous. 
 
 Je me fie a vou&. 
 C Vous pouvez vous Tier a lui. 
 j Vous pouvez vous y fier. 
 I Vous pouvez compter sur lui. 
 
 C'est-d-dirc. Savoir. Etc&ttra, rtc.j 
 
 Ma plume cst meilleure que la votre. 
 
 On fera chauffer la soupe. 
 
 On a servi. 
 
 > t Vous scrvirai-je de la soupe T 
 
 t Je vous en demanderai un peu. 
 
 Servir. * 
 
 Pas que je sache, vous sachiez, (sub 
 
 * 151.) 
 11 est impossible que je le revived 
 
 temps. 
 Je voudrais lien savoir. Je voudrais 
 
 lien savoir pourquoi il le dit. 
 Je voudrais bien savoir si .... 
 
 It is impossible that I should receive 
 
 it in time, (for me to receive it.) 
 [should like to know. I wonder why 
 
 he says it. 
 I wonder whether, (should like to 
 
 know if. ..) 
 
 SOIXANTE-SIXIME TIIME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Que faut-il que nous fassions aujounThui ? Je vous donne a 
 etudierle vocabulaire delasoixante-sixieme le^on, seconde section ; 
 et a preparer les themes Fran^ais et Anglais qui en dependent (belong 
 to it; connected with it.) Tachez de ne point faire de fautes. 
 J'essaie toujours, mais je n'y reussis pas. Pierre (Peter) s'est-il ac 
 quitte de ma commission ? Fas que je sache. Votre ccusine parle- 
 
SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 84& 
 
 
 
 plus que votre sccur? Elle le fait; non parce qirelle parlo 
 mieux, mais parce qu 7 elle n'est pas si timicle. J'ai uno commission 
 Importante a faire. pour laquelle je compte sur vous. Vous pouvo/. 
 i-nmpter sur moi. Je iri'en acquitterai de mon mieux. Je voudrais 
 bien savoir si Ton peut compter sur notre domeslique ! Mile. Emilio 
 n : est pas encore revenue, faut-il qu'o?i tienne ( 151) la soupechaude 
 pour elle? Vous servirai-je un peu de soupe? Pourquoi n'cn 
 prenez-vous pas, si vous ne pouve/ pas vous en passer? Que voua 
 servirai-je ? Mon neve: vn, voule/.-vons qu'il y fassu 
 
 quelque commission? 
 
 Have you executed rny commission * have executed it. Has 
 your broti vd tlie commission which I gave him 1 He has 
 
 executed it. Would you (voudricz-vous) execute a commission for 
 me? I am under .-aliens to you that I will al\\ 
 
 it shall please you to give me 
 
 any. Will you a-k the rrvrchant whether (ri) lie can let me have 
 (me donner) the horse at the price (au pri.r) which I have oil. 
 him ? I am sure that he would b" if you would add a few 
 
 tore. If I were sure of that I would add a few crowns 
 more. Good morning, my children ! have you done your task / 
 always do it; or else (ou bien) we must be 
 must have a good excuse, (une excuse.) 
 
 I wonder whether you could tell me an anecdote? Will you try 
 to relate one to us? (nous en racontcrunc?) In English or in French? 
 ; but in French. It is impossible for me to relate it 
 without making n. We think so; therefore we will 
 
 excuse them, (> ) One of the valets de chambre (un dcs 
 
 valets dc chambre) of Louis XIV 7 . (de Louis XIV.) requested that prii. 
 as he wa* iroing to bed, (comme it sc mcttait ciu /*'/,) to recommend 
 (de faire rccommandcr) to the first president (d Monsieur le premier 
 president) a lawsuit (un proces) which he had against (contrc) hi.-/ 
 father-in-law, and said, in urging him, (en le prcssant :) "Alas, 
 (Helas,) Sire, (Sire.) you have but to say one word. 77 "'Well, 77 
 (Eh!) said Louis XIV., "it is not that which embarrasses me, (cc 
 n'est pas dc quoi jc suis en pcine ;) but tell me, (dis-moi.) if thou wcrt 
 in thy father-in-law's place, (d la place de. . . .,) and thy father-in-law 
 in thine, wouldst thou be glad (bien aisc) if I said that word? 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Cme Sec. 
 
 To suffice, le sujirifnt, answer. 
 Is that bread sufficient for you ? 
 _t is sufficient for me. 
 \ auffice, thou dost suffice. 
 
 Sujjire,* 4, sujfisant, sujfit, 
 Ce pain vous suffit-il ? 
 II me suffit. 
 Je sum's, tu sum's. 
 
SIXTY-SIXTH ^ESSON. (3.) 
 
 550 
 
 
 
 Will that money be sufficient for that 
 man ? 
 
 It will be sufficient for him. 
 Little wealth suffices for the wise. 
 Has that sum been sufficient for that 
 
 man ? 
 Was that man contented with that 
 
 sum ? With those three dollars f 
 lie was (satisfied with it, with them.) 
 He has been contented with it. 
 To be contented with something. 
 It would be sufficient for him if you 
 
 would only add a few crowns. 
 He would be contented if you would 
 
 only add a few crowns. 
 To add. Add nothing to it. 
 To embark, to go on board. 
 A bail. 
 To set sail. 
 To set sail for. 
 To sail for America. 
 
 To sail. 
 
 Under full sail. 
 
 To sail under full sail. 
 
 He embarked on the sixteenth of last 
 
 month. 
 
 He sailed on the third instant. 
 Thr instant, the present month. 
 The fourth or fifth instant. 
 The letter is dated the 6th instant. 
 To Ir ok at. Look at it, (him or hcr.j 
 
 SOIXANTE-SIXIEME 
 Je voudrais bien savoir quand le batiment mettra a la voile ? Le 
 capitaine ne le dit-il pas dans sa lettre du quinze du courant ? Je n,e 
 wren souviens pas. Regardez-la. II dit seulement: Mon batiment 
 iera voile tnccssammcnt, ce qui veut dire: sans delai, bientot, dans 
 quelques jours. Quelle est la date aujourd : hui ? C'est le 20 du 
 courant. Faut-il que vo^s sachiez le jour que le butiment fera voile ? 
 U est important que je lesache. ($ 151.) Ce que vous avez sur votro 
 liste de provisions sufTira-t-u"? La regarderai-je ? Ne Favez-vous 
 pus encore regardee? Non. Si je Favais regardee, je saurais si 
 30 que vous avez suffirait. Eh bien ! regardez-la. Du fromage, 
 
 Cet argent suffira t-il a cet homme* 
 
 (usually in th< '3d pers. sing. <f 
 
 plur.) 
 
 II lui suffira. 
 
 Peu de bien suffit au sage. 
 Cette somme a-t-elle suffi a cet 
 
 horn me ? 
 Cet homme s'est-il contente de cette 
 
 somme ? De ces 3 gourdes ? (fern.) 
 Elle lui a sum". Elles lui ont suffi 
 II s ? en est contente. 
 Sc contenter de quelque chose. 
 Elle lui suffirait, si vous vouliez seiile- 
 
 mcnt y ajouter quelques cu8. 
 II se contenterait, ei vous votliei 
 
 seulement y ajouter quelques ecus. 
 Ajouter, 1. N^y ajoutez rien. 
 S'embarquer, 1. 
 Une voile. 1 
 t Mettre a la voile, 
 t Faire voile pour. 
 Faire voile pour I'Amlriquc, (allci 
 
 en Ameriquc.) 
 Marcl 
 A pleincs voilos, (a toutes voiles.) 
 
 r u pleines voiles, (cingler.) 
 II s'est embarque le seize du moie 
 
 dernier. 
 
 11 a mis il la voile le trois courant. 
 Le courant. 
 
 Le quatre ou le cinq du courant. 
 La lettre est du six du courant. 
 Regarder, 1. Regardez-le, (la.) 
 
 :. 3me Sec. 
 
 1 Voile t meaning a veil, a '.over, is masculine. Ex. She J^as bought a veil. 
 Elle s'est achete un voile. 
 
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 351 
 
 du vin ; de 1'eau de vie, du biscuit, du beurre, des aiv.undes. de.i 
 pruneaux, (prunes,) des raisins sees, (raisins.) du bcDuf. Si vous 
 n'avez pas de langues saltes, (salt tongues,) il faut en ajouter. Coin 
 bien en ajouterai-je ? II faut que vous en ajoutiez au moins 5 ou 6. 
 Vous passerez-vous d'aufs ? (eggs ?) Non, ni de poulets ; car j'aime 
 beaucoup les arsis et les poulets. Ajoutez-les a la liste. 
 
 What is that vessel coming under full sail ? It is tje packet 
 ( paqVsCbot) Susquehanna, from Liverpool. How fast it sails ! Il sailed 
 from Liverpool the 3d instant. It will soon come (arrivcr) to the wbarf. 
 Let me finish looking at your list, and then we will go and see who i* 
 in the packet. The last articles are chickens and eggs. Will twelve 
 pair of chickens be sufficient? I would think so. And how many 
 
 I will you want] (uous fuudra-t-il ?) About ,*welve doxer,, (dou- 
 zuiiics,) or one hundred and fifty, will answer, (sttjjiront.} Will you 
 not want two hundred ? X<\ vi-lve do/en will bo enough. 
 
 You will do well to put them up in salt. I wi<h I had everything 
 arranged. I also. On the li<t is there any tea, suirar, eoliee. rhnro- 
 late, pepper, and vinegar I see all those articles. Have you 
 
 .' id lord /) I have already sent several chest? 
 
 full on board. We must, in going (en allant) to the Liverpool 
 paeket. see il they have been received, and where they have been 
 put. 
 
 they served up the soup? They have served it up somo 
 mini i (alors) it must be cold; I like soup only when 
 
 v will warm it for you. You will oblige me, (obliger.) 
 Shall I help you to some of this roast meat ? I will trouble you for 
 a little. Will you eat some of this mutton ? I thank you, I like fowl 
 better, but a very small piece will suffice me. May I offer you (vous 
 
 I'ai-jc) some wine? I will trouble you fora little. Is this bread 
 fciitiicient for you ? It would be sufficient for me if I was not very 
 hungry. When did your brother embark for America? He sailed 
 on the 30th of last month. Do you promise me to speak to your 
 brother ? I promise you, you may depend upon it. I rely upon 
 you. Will you work harder (micujc) for next lesson than you have 
 done for this? (53 1 , and $200.) I will work harder. May I rely 
 upon it ? You may. 
 
 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 6~t\\.Soixante-scptieme Le$on, 67m* 
 
 IRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 T) be a judge of saint-'/. | t Se comiaitre en quclque chose. 
 
 Are you a jutlgo of cloth ? I t Vous connaissez-vous en drap f 
 
852 
 
 8lXf Y-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 I am a judge of it. 
 
 I am not a judge of it. 
 
 I am a good judge of it. 
 
 I am not a good judge of it. 
 
 To draw. 
 
 To chalk, to trace, (to counter -draw, ,} 
 
 To draw a landscape. 
 
 To draw after life. 
 
 The drawing. The drawer. 
 
 Nature. Natural. 
 
 To manage, or to go about a thine. 
 
 How do you manage to make a fire 
 without tongs ? 
 
 I go about it so. 
 
 You go about it the wrong way. 
 
 I go about it the right way. 
 
 How does your brother manage to do 
 that ? 
 
 .Skilfully, handily, dexterously, cle- 
 verly. 
 
 Awkwardly, unhandily, badly. 
 
 To forbid. 
 
 1 forbid you to do that. 
 
 To lower. 
 
 To cast down one's r> 
 
 The curtain (of a theatre). 
 
 The curtain rises, falls. 
 
 The stocks have fallen risen. 
 
 The day falls. 
 
 Night comes on. It grows dark. 
 
 It grows late, it is rather late. 
 
 TO Stc M. 
 
 Je m'y connais, 
 
 Je ne m'y connais pas. 
 
 Je m'y connais tres-bien. 
 
 Je ne m'y connais pas beaucoup, 
 
 Dessmer, I. 
 
 Calquer, 1. 
 
 Dessmer un paysage. 
 
 Dessiner d'apres nature. 
 
 Le dessin. Le deseinateur. 
 
 La nature. Naturel, naturelle. 
 
 S'y prcndre. 
 
 Comment vous y preneL-vous pom 
 
 faire du feu sans pincettes ?' 
 Je m'y prends comme cela. 
 Vous vous y prenez mal. 
 Je m'y prends bien. 
 Comment votre frers s'y prend-il 
 
 pour faire cela ? 
 Adroitement. 
 
 Malatlroitement. 
 Dtfendre, 4, (de av. l**nf.) 
 Je vous defends de faire cela. 
 r, 1. 
 
 r los yeux. 
 
 Latoile (d'un theatre), le rideau. 
 t La toile (le rideau) se le ve, se baisse. 
 Le change a baissc ha 
 Le jour baisse. 
 II se fait nuit. 
 II se fait tard. 
 Se baisser. 
 
 SOIXAM: Ire Sec. 
 
 Je voudrais bien savoir (I wonder) qui se connait bien en che 
 vaux? M. Lenoir s'y connait. Etes-vous sur qiril s'y connaisse 
 bien? (} 151.) Oui, j'en suis sur; car je m'y connais moi-meme. 
 mais il s'y connait mieux que moi. Vous dessinez, je sais. Des- 
 ginez-vous d'apres nature, ou copiez-vous ? Je copie, generalement 
 Voulez-vous que je dessine quelque chose pour vous? Je vou- 
 drais avoir une copie (a copy) de ce paysage. Jean peut vous en 
 dessiner une copie. Croyez-vous qiril veuille le faire ? ( 151.) En 
 
 1 All nouns ending in Me are feminine, except the two following : un amu> 
 tstte, an amulet ; un squelette, a skeleton ; and some compounds, ag : un 
 vorte-mcuchettcs. a snuffer- stand; untire-botte, a boot-jack ; un caste-noisette 
 nut-crackers. 
 
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 353 
 
 cas qiril ne veuille pas, (In case he would not,) ne pouvez-vous pas 
 le calquer? Comment voulez-vous le calquer, lorsqu'il est sons 
 verre ? C'est vrai. Je n'y pensais pas. Ne peut-on pas Foter du 
 cadre? (frame.) Sans doute, on le peut. Comment vous y pren- 
 driez-vous pour Foter ? II faut d'abord oter les clous qui tiemienl 
 16 des du cadre. Mais pour cela ii faut que nous ayons des pin- 
 cettes. Pai une paire de pincettes. La voici. Voila un clou d'ote, 
 (3 1 , Obs. 7.) 1 En voila deux d'otes, en voila trois. Ah ! II ivy en 
 a cue trois. Alors ils sont tons otes. Mais attendez done ; ne nous 
 est-il pas defend u d'oter les gravurcs (engravings) des cadres pour 
 calquer? 
 
 Are you a judge of cloth ? I am a judge of it. Will you buy 
 =ome yards for me? (m'cn?) If you will give me the money, 1 
 will buy you some, (rows en.) You will oblige (obligcr) me. Is that 
 'leik a judge of cloth? Pie is not. How do you manage to do 
 that? I manage it so. Will you show me how you manage it? I 
 will, (je le vcux lien.) What must I do for my lesson of to-mor- 
 row '* You will copy your exercises properly, learn the next voca- 
 bulary, (vocabulaire sitivant.) and write the exercises belonging to 
 it. How do you manage to get goods (des marchandiscs) without 
 money? I buy on credit. How does your sister manage to learn 
 French without (52 1 ) a dictionary? She manages it thus. She 
 manages it very dexterously. 
 
 But how does your brother manage it? (Mais M. voirc frere com- 
 ment s'i/ prcnd-il?) He manages it very awkwardly; he reads and 
 looks for the words in the dictionary. He may (pent) learn in this 
 manner twenty years without knowing how to make a single sen- 
 tence, (une sculc phrase.) Why does your sister cast down her eyes ? 
 Is it because she is bashful? She casts them down because she is 
 ashamed of not having done her task. Shall we breakfast in the 
 garden, to-day? The weather is so fine, that we should (qu'il faut) 
 *ake advantage of it, (en profiter.) How do you like that coffee? 
 I like it very much, (excellent.) I wonder why you stoop ? I stoop 
 to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped, and in which I 
 have put some money. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec 
 
 Fo smell, to fed. 
 
 He smells of garlic ; she of musk. 
 
 To feel some one's pulse. 
 
 Se?itir* (54 2 .) 
 
 II sent Vail ; elle, le muse. 
 
 t Tater le pouls a quelqu'un. 
 
 1 After a noun, the past participle (used as an adjective, that is, without 
 an auxiliary) must be preceded by de or d'. (3 1 , Ols. 7. 30 1 , Ob*. 71.) 
 
854 
 
 aiXTY-bEVEN TH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 To consent to a thing. 
 
 I consent to it. 
 
 To hide, to conceal. To hide one 1 8 self. 
 
 The wit, the mind. Indeed. In fact. 
 
 The truth. The effect. True. 
 
 k true man. 
 
 This is the right place for that pic- 
 ture. 
 
 To think much of one, (to esteem one.} 
 T) esteem some one. 
 
 I do not think much of that man. 
 
 I think much of him, (I es.^em him 
 
 much.) 
 
 /"he flower, the bloom, the blossom. 
 ^n a level v)ilh, even with. 
 That man has his eyes on a level 
 
 with his head, (prominent eyes.) 
 To blossom, (to flourish.) 
 To grow, growing, grown. 
 I grow, thou growest, he or she 
 
 grows, one grows, people grow. 
 To grow rapidly, (fast.) 
 To grow tall or big, grown tall. 
 That child grows so fast that vt 
 
 may even s- 
 That child has grown very fast in a 
 
 short time. 
 
 That rain liar made the corn grow. 
 Corn. Indian corn. 
 
 What a fine carnation ! What a 
 
 good odor ! 
 Has mignonette a fine ocent, odor, or 
 
 smell ? does it smell good, nice ? 
 That heliotrope has a delightful scent. 
 To be witty, wrirt, talented. 
 
 Consentir* a quelque chose. (54 2 .) 
 
 J'y consens. 
 
 Cacher,!. Se cacher. Cachez-vou& 
 
 L'esprit. En verite. En efiei. 
 
 La verite. L'efFet. Vrai. 
 
 Un homme vrai. 
 
 Voila la vraie place de ce tableau. 
 
 Fatre cas de quclqu'un. Estimer, 1, 
 
 quelqu'un. 
 Je ne fais pas grand cas de eel 
 
 homme. 
 Je fais grand cas de lui, (je rcstime 
 
 beaucoup.) 
 La fleur. 
 A fleur de. 
 Get homme a les yeux a fleur de 
 
 tete. 
 
 tr, 2. 1 
 
 Croitrc,* 4, croissant, cr\t. 
 Je crois, tu crois, il ou clle croit, on 
 
 croit. 
 
 Croitrc rapidemcnt. 
 Grandi r. *J, grandi. 
 
 t Get enfant grandit a vue d'ceil. 
 
 Get enfant a bicn grandi en peu de 
 
 temps. 
 
 Cctte pluie a fait grandir les bles. 
 Du ble. Du ma'is. 
 
 Quel bel ceillet ! Queile bonne 
 
 odeur ! 
 Le reseda sent-il bon ? ou a-t-il une 
 
 bonne odeur ? 
 
 Get heliotrope a une odeur delicieusc. 
 t Avoir de 1'esprit. 
 
 Tni>iE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Quelle belle (what a fine) fleur vous avez-la! Sent-elle bon 7 
 entez-la et regardez-la. Elie est belle ; mais elle ne sent pas bon. 
 Quelle espece de fleur est-ce * Ne la connaissez-vous pas ? C'est 
 
 1 Fleurir, to blossom, is regular ; but when it means to flourish, its pre- 
 sent participle isflorissant, and its imperfect indicative florissait,jlorissatent. 
 Ex. Un empire florissant, a flourishing empire ; une armee flortssante, a 
 flourishing army; cet auteui jSj+ifittit sous so?i regne, that author flourished 
 under his reign ; les arts ti l,t v %< ces florissaie?it alors, arts ar.d sciencei 
 werr then flourishing. 
 
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 3-JO 
 
 an dahlie. Ce beurre sent Tail. L'aimez-vous quand il a le gout 
 ivail? Je ne Palme ni quand il sent Fail ni quand il en a le gout. 
 (24 2 7 Obs. 55.) Quo pensez-vous desouvrages de W. Irving'? J'en 
 tais grarui I de ceux de C. D. ? Je n'en fais pas grand ras. 
 
 II y a trop do mots dedans. Votre cuisine est-elle a lleur de terre? 
 Oui, comme presque toutes les cuisines modcrncs, ou quo Ton bath a 
 present. Les anciennes cuisines n'etaient pas a fleur de terre ; ma's 
 uu dessous. Que cachex-vous ? Quelque chose que je ne veux 
 pas que vous roi/icr, (} 151.) En vcrite ! Je suis fdche que vous le 
 'cachicz; ( 151) en avez-vous honte ? N'importe.cela me concern, 
 et ne vous concerne pas. Kn eflet, cela ne me regarde pas; mais je 
 ne croyais pas que vous en auriez fait un secret. Votre neveu grandit 
 beaucoup, n'est-ce pas? S;L BCBtU ne grandit-elle pasa vue d'ceil? 
 Qui ne grandit plus? 
 
 Which is the m city of the United Stales? (dcs Etats- 
 
 Unis?) It is New York, I think; but there are many other flourish- 
 ing cities in the U. .S., (K. U.) Which are the other flourishing 
 places? (emiroits ? ) Philadelphia, Baltimore, Boston, Cincinnati, La 
 Nouveli.- i'itt>bourg, &c. c. Does Indian corn grow well 
 
 this season ? Yes, it looks very well. The last rain we had (have 
 had) has made it grow very fast. The mind always shows itself 
 it cannot be hidden. That lawyer is witty, is he not? Yes, indeed. 
 How witty (d'esprit) is that young lady ! Truth has always a good 
 t, has it not.' No, not always; truth sometimes make us ene- 
 mies. Is your portrait ("portrait) in its right (true) place? No, the 
 light comes from the wrong (mauvais) side. Your portrait ought to 
 be on the other side of the parlor. Then it would be in its true 
 light, (jour.) Had you not better change its place ? The family will 
 not consent to it. 
 
 That engraving would be in its true place, there ; and your portrait 
 in its, here : if I were you, I would change them. It is indifferent 
 to me, and as the rest of the family have arranged it so, I will not 
 meddle with it. Do you like the smell of this little flower? It is 
 delightful. Is it not a piece of mignonette ? No, it is a piece of 
 heliotrope. Why do your sisters hide themselves? They would 
 not hide themselves if they did not fear to be seen. Whom are they 
 afraid of? They are afraid of their governess, (une institutrice.) who 
 scolded them yesterday because they had not done their tasks, (leur 
 devoir.) Have you already seen my son ? I have not seen him 
 yet ; how is he ? He is very well ; you will not be able to recognise 
 Him, for he has grown very tall in a short time. 
 
S56 
 
 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE, 3me Sec. 
 
 A cover. A shelter. A cottage, a hut. | Un gite. Un abri. Une chaumierc 
 
 To shelter one's self from something. ) _ 
 
 To take shelter from something. \ Se mettre a l abn de 1 uel( i ue cho& 
 
 Let us shelter ourselves from the 
 
 rain, the wind. 
 Let us enter that cottage in order to 
 
 be sheltered from the storm, (the 
 
 tempest.) 
 
 Everywhere, all over, throughout. 
 All over (throughout) the town. 
 A shade. Under the shade. 
 
 Ixit us sit down under the shade of 
 
 that tree. 
 To pretend. 
 
 That man pretends to sleep. 
 That young lady pretends to know 
 
 French. 
 They pretend to come near us. 
 
 Now. From, since. 
 
 From morning. 
 
 From the break of day. 
 
 From the cradle, from a child. 
 
 From this time forward. 
 
 As soon as. As soon a 
 
 As soon as I see him I shall speak to 
 
 him. 
 
 For fear of. 
 To catch a cold. 
 I win not go out for fear of catching 
 
 a cold. 
 He does not wish to go to town, for 
 
 fear of meeting with one of his 
 
 creditors, 
 fie does not wish to open his purse, 
 
 for fear of losing his nwiiey. 
 To transcribe fairly. 
 A grammar. A French grammar. 
 
 Met tons- no us a Fabri de lapluie,ds 
 
 vent. 
 Entrons dans cette chaumiere, poui 
 
 etre a couvert de la tempetc, ou 
 
 pour etre a 1'abri des injures dn 
 
 temps. 
 Partout. 
 
 Par toute la ville. 
 Une ombre. 1 A I' ombre. 
 
 Aliens nous asseoir a lYmbre docet 
 
 arbre. 
 
 Faire semblant de. 
 
 Get hommc fait semblant de dormir. 
 Cette demoiselle fait semblant do 
 
 eavoir ie Fran$ais. 
 Us font semblant de e'approcher do 
 
 nous. 
 
 JlniHtcnant. DCS. 
 
 DCs le matin. 
 DCS le point du jour. 
 DCS le berceau. 
 
 i present. 
 
 Des oue. Des que vous voudrez 
 DCS que jc le vcrrai je lui parlerai. 
 
 DC craitite on de peur de. 
 
 Prcndre froid, s' cnrhumer. 
 
 Je ne veux pas sortir, de peur de 
 
 m'enrhumer. 
 II ne veut pas aller a la ville, de peuf 
 
 de rencontrer un de ses creanciers 
 
 II ne veut pas ouvrir sa bourse, do 
 
 peur de perdre son argent. 
 Mettre* au net. (33 1 .) 
 Une gramma ire. Une gram mairo 
 Franchise. 
 
 SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME THME. ome Sec. 
 
 Le ciel est couvert, ne ferons-nous pas mieux de prendre chacr.n 
 un parapluic? Oh! non, cela n'en vaut pas la peine. S r il plect, 
 
 1 Omlre, a shadow, is feminine ; but ornbre, a kind of fish, and 2 cmtr e a 
 game at cards, are masculine. 
 
SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 357 
 
 nous trouverons quelqirabri. Sans doute, nous trouverons quelque 
 maison ou quelque chaumiere. Aliens, allons. Tenez, mainte- 
 nant il fait du soleil, et un soleil bien chaud. II faut que nous pre- 
 nions (151) le cote de 1'ombre. Oui, vous avcz raison, allons a 
 Pombre. Lorsque nous aurons passe par toute la ville, nous senti- 
 rons assez le soleil a la campagne. Passerons-nous a 1'ombre. 
 (^uant a moi, je ne m'en soucie pas. Je n'ai pas trop chaud de ce 
 note-ci, mais je ne vous empeche pas dialler a Fabri des maisons, 
 si vous avez trop chaud au soleil. Jacques (James) et moi, nous 
 allons a 1'ombre, vous autres, (47 J, 1,) faites comme vous voudrez. 
 Samuel fait semblant de ne pas (J 171 7) avoir peur du chaud, 
 cependant, il le sent aussi bien que nous autres. Tenez, (06s. 94,) 
 voyez done ! Thomas a sa grammaire Francaise ! Eh bien ! qiry 
 trouvez vous d'oxtraordinaire? Si j r ai le temps j'etudierai. J'ai 
 cU'ja rri is mes themes au net, et vous, avez- vous mis les votres an 
 Je les mettrai ce soir. 
 
 Why does that man give nothing to the poor? (aux paitvrcs ?) He 
 o avaricious, (avare ;] he does not wish to open his purse, foi 
 fear of losing hi.-; money. What sort of weather is it'? It is very 
 warm ; it is long since we had any rain; I believe we shall have a 
 storm, (un or age.) It may be, (ccla se pent bien.) The wind blows, 
 it. thunders already; do you hear it? Yes, I hear it, but the storm 
 is still far off, (encore bien loin.) Not so far as you think; see how 
 it lightens. It rains, it pours; what a shower! (qu.cllc averse!) If 
 :o into some place (quelque part) we shall be sheltered from the 
 fetorm. Let us go into that cottage, then, (done;) we shall be shel- 
 tered there from the wind and the rain. The storm has ceased. 
 We must go. 
 
 Let us thank these good people for the shelter they have given 
 us. We are much obliged to you. Adieu ! You are welcome. 
 Where shall we go now? Which road shall we take? The 
 shortest 'court) will be the best. We have too much sun, and I am 
 Flill very tired; let us sit down under the shade of that tree. Who 
 is (qucl est) that man who is sitting under the tree ? I do not know 
 him. It seems he (il parait qu'il) wishes to be alone, (seul;) for 
 when we offer (vouloir*) to approach him, he pretends to bo 
 asleep. He is like your sister: she understands French very well, 
 (fort bien;) but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends not to 
 understand me. Has not your uncle given the cleik (Dir. 3) some- 
 thing to transcribe ? Yes, he has. I wonder whether it is important 
 that he should transcribe it (} 151) immediately? Yes, it is, for 
 fear the gentleman should go without the copy, ( 151.) 
 
358 
 
 SIXTY -EIGHTH LRSSON. I.J 
 
 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON, GSih.Soixantc-huitiemc Logon, 68 ra 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 SECOND IMPERFECT TENSE. Preterit. 
 For its formation and use, see ($ 153,) and study it carefully. 
 
 INFINITIVE. IMPERFECT. PRTERIT. 
 
 fo have, Avoir, I had. J'eus, tu eus, i! eut, nous eumes, vous eutes, ils eurent 
 
 To be, Eire, I was. Je fus, fus, 
 
 Had you money enough ? I had 
 
 enough. 
 
 Had he the pleasure :f ewing her ? 
 
 No, he was deprived o ' u. (To de- 
 prive.) 
 
 Had they no soup on that day ? 
 
 They had none, but we had some. 
 
 Had I less good luck than they ? 
 You had as much as they, (fern.) 
 Wast thou happy in thy choice ? 
 J was not at all. Who was ? 
 
 We were, they were ; but you were 
 
 not. 
 
 To go, Aller, I went. J'allai, 
 To find, Trouver, I found. Je trouvai, vas, 
 To bring, Apporier, I brought. J'apportai, tas, 
 
 fut, fumes, futes, furent. 
 
 Eutes-vous asse d'argeat ? J'efi 
 
 eus assez. 
 
 Eut-ii le plaisir de la Toir ? 
 Non. il en fut Drive. (P river, 1.) 
 
 N'eurent-ilspasde soupe ce jour-la 
 Us n'en eurent pas, mais nous on 
 
 eumes. 
 
 Eus-je moins de bonheur qu'eux ? 
 Vous eri eutes autant qu'elles. 
 Fus-tu heureux dans ton choix ? 
 Je ne le fus pas du tout. Qui le fut I 
 Nous le fumes, ils le furent ; maia 
 
 vous ne le futes pas. 
 
 alias, alia, alhtmes, allates, allerer.l 
 va, vames, vatea, verent. 
 la, tames, tales, tdrcnt. 
 
 Where did you go last night ? ($ 153.) 
 I went nowhere, I stayed at home. 
 
 Who went to the minister's ball ? 
 None of the family went, but Sarah 
 
 and Fanny will go to the consul' s 
 
 ball. 
 Did not the consul give one 3 weeks 
 
 ago? 
 Not the consul, but the ambassador 
 
 and his wife gave one then. 
 
 And it was there that his wife were 
 
 her beautiful wreath, was it no f . ? 
 Di 1 you find what you were seeking ? 
 
 [ did, but after looking long for it. 
 
 Was the battle decisive ? 
 
 ft was completely so. 
 
 The year before last. The week . . . 
 
 This steamboat 'c.'unsftip. 
 
 Oil allates-vous hicr soir ? (timo 
 
 past.) 
 Je n'allai nulle part, je restai a la 
 
 maison. 
 
 Qui alia au bal du ministre ? 
 Personne ($ 153 3,) de la famille 
 
 n'y alia, mais Saraet Fanny iron! 
 
 au bal du consul. 
 Le consul n'en donna-t-il pas un il y 
 
 a trois semaines ? 
 Pas le consul, ( 1533,) mais Vam 
 
 bassadeur et son tpouse en donnu- 
 
 rent un alors. \ 
 
 Et ce fut la que son epouse porta son 
 
 superbe Landeau, n'est-ce pas? 
 Trouvates-vous ce que vous chci- 
 
 chiez ? 
 Je le troiivai, mais apres Tavont 
 
 cherch(r long-temps. 
 La batailU fut-elle decisive ? 
 Elle le fut completement. 
 Uavaut derniere annie. fecmaino 
 Ce bateau d vapcur. Un tiaiin a 
 
 vapcur 
 
SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 359 
 
 On board the steam packet. 
 Now and then, from time to time. 
 He gave it up on that account. 
 
 A bord du paquebot d vapeur. 
 
 De temps en temps . 
 
 11 Vabaudonna a caut^ de cela. 
 
 TnfoiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Que trouvates-vous dans le sac que vous xamassates ? J 7 y trouvai 
 an mouchoir, une jolie bourse et un morceau de gateau. Trouvate&- 
 7 jus, sur le mouchoir, le nom de la personne a qui il appartient? 
 Je Py trouvai. Allates-vous le lui rendre ? Je Py envoyai par la 
 domestique. L'ambassadeur eut-il beaucoup de monuo* hier? II 
 n ; eut presque personne ; il faisait trop chau^ I\estale-vous long- 
 temps a Saratoga? Je iry restai que quelques jours; mais mes 
 freres y resterent plus de 3 semaines. Eutes-vous le temps d ? y voir 
 le consul ? Non, il n'etait pas encore arrive quand je quittai Pen- 
 droit; mais mes freres eurent le temps et le plaisir de Py rencontrer 
 Jackson etait-il a la Nouvelle Orleans quand vous y arrivates? La 
 bataille du 8 Janvier fut-elle decisive? Le fut-elle aussi complete- 
 ment que celle de Waterloo? Eurent-elles de bonne musique a 
 leur concert? Ne fus-je pas complaisant? Ces petites filles ne 
 furent-elles pas obeissantes? Elles s'en allerent, n ? est-ce pas? 
 
 Did you not go last week to see the great panorama ? I was 
 unwell, so that I did not go; but almost all the family went. Were 
 you obliged to transcribe that note more than once ? I w r as obliged 
 to transcribe it three times. Did not your cousin get (avoir) the 
 yellow fever when he was in Mobile the year before last? No, he 
 did not get it; but my nephew and my niece had it. Had they a 
 light or a violent attack ? The latter had a light attack of it, but the 
 former had a violent one, and he could hardly escape death, (ce fut 
 avec peine qu'il.) Did you find your father at Burlington? I was 
 lucky enough to find him there, at the moment he was going on 
 board the steamboat. Did you both stay in Burlington then ? No, 
 he took me on board the steamboat with him and brought me here. 
 
 What steamboat was it ? (etait-ce?) It was the John Stevens. 
 Were there many persons on board ? (y avait-il ?) There were not 
 many. Did the office (employment, la charge) which your uncle 
 nad, produce much to him ? The office and all the functions which 
 Belonged to it, produced him between 1500 and 2000 dollars a year, 
 (15 cents et 2 millc gourdes.) Had he much to do ? (not past.) i r es, 
 lie had a great deal to do. Did his occupation (occupation] make 
 (use to make) him sick now and then ? Yes, now and then he was 
 'used to be) sick. Had he not, once, more to do than usual I (past.) 
 Ves, once he had a great deal more to do. Was he sick then 7 (past.) 
 Yes, he was very sick that time. Was he sick a long time ? Did 
 he give up his office on that account? Where did we go o? 1 that 
 account? Did \vc give it up on that account 1 
 
360 
 
 SIXTY- EIGHTH LESSON. (2.J 
 
 VOCABULAIEE. 2de Sec. 
 IMPERFECT CONTINUED. Preterit Continue. 
 
 INFINITIVES. IMPERFECT. 
 
 To punish^ punir, { punished^ Je punis, 
 
 To succeed, reussir, I succeeded, Je reussis, 
 
 To restore, rendre, I restored, Je rendis, 
 
 To owe,^ devoir, 4l owed^ Je dus, 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 nit, nimes, 
 
 nis, nit, nimes, nitea, n.rcM 
 
 sis, sit, simes, sites, si rent. 
 
 dis, dit, dimes, dites, dirent 
 
 dus dut, dtimes, dutes, durent. 
 
 J'avais fini de lire quand il descendit. 
 
 Avais-je trouve ma bourse quand 
 vous perdites la votre ? 
 
 I had done reading when he came 
 
 down. 
 Had I found my purse when you lost 
 
 yours ? 
 
 These examples, and some previously given, show that 
 
 THE PLUPERFECT. Le Plusqueparfait. ($154.) 
 is formed in French as in English, with the imperfect of the auxiliary and 
 the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. 
 
 We had dined when he arrived. 
 The king had named an admiral when 
 
 he heard of you. (To name.) 
 After having spoken, you went away 
 
 with the colonel. 
 After shaving, I washed and wiped 
 
 my face. 
 After having warmed themselves, 
 
 they went into the garden. 
 As soon as the bell rung, you awoke 
 
 and you rose, (got up.) 
 As soon as they called me, I got up. 
 As soon as he was ready, he came to 
 
 see me, and so did the colonel. 
 As soon as we had our money, we 
 
 agreed to that. 
 A s soon as he had his horse, he came 
 
 to show it me, and we tried it. 
 After trying several times, they suc- 
 ceeded in doing it. 
 As soon as I saw him, I obtained 
 
 what I wanted. 
 As soon as I spoke to him, he kept 
 
 his word, and did what I told him. 
 The business was soon over. 
 His word (meaning promise) of honor. 
 
 Nous avions dine lorsqu'il arnva. 
 Le roi avail nomme un amiral, quand 
 
 on luiparla de vous. (Nommcr, 1.) 
 Apres avoir parle, vous vous en al- 
 
 Idtes avec le colonel. 
 Apres m'etre rase, je me lavai et 
 
 m j cssuyai la figure. 
 Apres s'Gtre chaufles, Us alUrcnt au 
 
 jardin. 
 Des que la cloche sonna, vous vous 
 
 re veil! dies, et vous vous levdtes. 
 Des qu'ils m'appelercnt, je me levai. 
 Aussitot qu'il fut pret, il m?it me 
 
 voir, et le colonel vint aussi. 
 Aussitot que nous enmes noire ar 
 
 gent, nous conmnmes de cela. 
 Aussitot qu'il eut son cheval, il vint 
 
 me le montrer, et nous Vessaydmes. 
 Apres avoir essaye plusieurs fois, ila 
 
 parvinrent a le iaire. 
 Aussitot que je le vis, Collins ce 
 
 dont j'avais besoin. 
 Aussitot que je lui parlai, il tint sa 
 
 parole, et jit ce que je lui dis. 
 L'a'ffaire/tt* bientot faite. 
 Sa parole (not mot) d'honneur. 
 
 SOIXANTE-IIUITIliME Tfl^ME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Qne faisiez-vous quand il arriva ? Nous nous preparions a soring. 
 Fordites-vous la parlie cTechecs ? Oui, je la perdis, mais je gagnai 
 la partie de billard. Que demandates-vous an capitainc lorsque 
 vors le rencontrates au quai? Je Ini demandai si sou colonel avail 
 
81XTY-2IOHTH LESSON. (2.) 861 
 
 le voir Pambassadeur Anglais ? Repondhvil que oui ? II no me 
 repondiJ rien. C'etait tres poli ; irest>ce pas ? Je crois qu'il n'entendit 
 pas ma question. O'est different. Vous aurait-il repondu s'il voua 
 avail entendu ? Je n'en doute pas, car il est extremement poli et 
 affable. Est-il important que vous passiez chez le marchand de 
 eoie ? N ? y passerent-ils pas sans vous? Vous donna-t-elle des oouia 
 pour dejeuner? Vous en dormera-t-elle de nouveau? Nous en 
 dcnnsriez-vous si nous ne les aimions pas? 
 
 Did not Mr. N. Biddle sell his beautiful black horse tc nis sister-in- 
 IBW'* No, she did not buy it. Why did she not buy it? Because 
 Le was afraid of the price. What did he ask her for it? I was 
 tcldthat he had asked her 450 dollars for it. When did Sarah finish 
 her task ? She finished it at past 9. Did you finish yours before 
 that hour? I finished mine 1 hour before. Who arrived this morn- 
 ing by the steamboat? I do not know who arrived this morning, 
 but Julius arrived yesterday, (past,) by the steam packet. What 
 news has the steamer brought 1 It brought favorable news. 1 Cotton 
 and provisions kept up (mcintcnir) their prices, and the continent of 
 Europe was a little more quiet. 
 
 At what time does year uncle William generally get up* He 
 rises generally early. I thought so. Did he get up early to-day ? 
 No, he did not, (not past.) Did he get up early yesterday ? (past.) 
 No, he did not Why did he not get up to-day and yesterday (mind 
 the distinction to be observed in French) as early as usual? Because 
 he was a little unwell (not has 6ccn), and isyat so. Do you not take 
 your drawing lessons (lemons de dessin) early every other day? Yes, 
 we take them pretty early. Did you receive the last as early as 
 usual? No, we received it only after breakfast. Why did you 
 receive it only after breakfast? Because our teacher did not come 
 before. Did you buy your books at Appleton's, corner of Chestnut 
 and 7th? (de lalmc'*) Yes, I did: it is there that I always buy 
 books. 
 
 1 Although, speaking of Julius's arrival, the French may use the Preterit 
 ar.d say : // arriia hier, because, on his landing, there was a completion of 
 the action ; yet they cannot, speaking of the steamer, translate : It brought 
 favorable news, by : II apporta des nouvellesfavoralles, because we are not 
 yet fully acquainted with the news it brought, and, of course, there is no 
 completion of the action. This is a nice distinction, which the judicious 
 pupl must treasure up. But had the steamer been in port two or three 
 weeKS, II apporta des nouvelles favorables, might be used ; because the 
 knowledge of the news it brought might be supposed complete, and we 
 must recollect that the P*e(erit is used, o?ily, when " the event c~ action u 
 past ard finished. 11 
 81 
 
862 
 
 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON, (ff.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 SECOND PLUPERFECT Preterit Anleneur.i 
 
 For its formation and use see ($ 155.) That article must bo carefullj 
 learned. 
 
 To elucidate the two rules given in it, we here put a few examples. 
 On 1st Rule. The conjunctive adverb connected with the simple tense. 
 
 Had we not dined when he came ? 
 
 Had she finished when you called 
 her? (U55 1.) 
 
 Had we not dined when he came, or 
 used to come ? 
 
 She had finished when you were call- 
 ing her, or used to call her. 
 
 llere, the Plusqueparfait is used, whether the simple ttnse is the Parfait t 
 the Preterit, or the Imparfait. 
 
 Rule 2d. The conjunctive adverb connected with the compound tense. 
 
 N'avions-noua pas dine quand il 
 
 vint ? 
 Avait-elle nui quand vous rappelStcs, 
 
 ou 1'avez appelee ? 
 N'avions-nous pas dine quand i) 
 
 venait ? 
 Elle avait fini qviand VOL-S 1'appeJipz. 
 
 Quand Us eurent acheve de jouer, ils 
 se mirent a chanter. (Pret.) 
 
 Quand ils avaient Jini de jouer, ilfl 
 se mettaient a chanter. (Imparf.) 
 
 Quand j'ews dine, midi sonna. 
 
 Aussitot que j' 'avals dine, midi son 
 nait. (Imparf.) 
 
 II cut fini en un moment. 
 
 II avail fini en un moment 
 
 When they had done playing, they be- 
 gan to sing. ($ 155 2.) 
 
 When they had done playing, they 
 usually began to sing. 
 
 When I had dined, it struck 12. 
 
 As soon as 1 had dined, it used to 
 strike 12. 
 
 He had done in a moment, (if only 
 once.) 
 
 He had done in a moment, (if more 
 than once.) 
 
 SOIXANTE-HUITIEME Tn^ME. 3me Sec. 
 
 Que fites-vous quand vous eutes fini votre lettre? J'allai chez 
 mon frere, qui me mena au paquebot a vapeur, oil j'eus le plaisir de 
 trouver une de mes anciennes amies que je n'avais pas vue depuis 
 plusieurs annees. rQue faisait-elle des qu'elle avait fini de prendre 
 sa lee. on de chant'? Elle allait chez son. amie Jeanne, et toutes 
 deux se promenaien* dans le jardin, ou elles cueillaient, ou dea 
 fleurs pour le salon, ou des fmita pour le dejeuner. Qu'as-tu fait 
 apres t'etre leve ce matin? (not past.) Apres avoir lu les lettres du 
 comte polonais, j'ai ete voir le theatre du prince, que je n'avais paa 
 encore vu. Que fis-tu hier matin apres t ; etre leve? J'allai au 
 marche pour y acheter nos provisions, et quand je fus revenu a la 
 maison, je lus mes lettres et j'y repondis. Que faisaient vos amis 
 
 1 There is another P-eterit Anterieur, called the Prflerit Ante'riexr In 
 i, which is, however, seldom employed. 
 
SIXTV-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 3G?i 
 
 tousles matins a la campagne Pete dernier? Us prenaient lenra 
 fusils et se rendaient (se rendre, 4, to repair, to go) a Photel du 
 village pour y prendre leurs papiers et leurs lettres. 
 
 What did the colonel do when he had breakfasted, this morning * 
 He shaved and went out, (not past.) Did he shave and go out yes- 
 lerday, after breakfast, also? (past.) No, he shaved before break- 
 fast, and went out after. Had he gone out when you came in? 
 He had gone out long before. Did he read the gazette before ho 
 went otrt? No, he read something else, (quclqu'autre chose.) After 
 reading, did he do anything else before he went out? He smcked 
 a cigar. Did he use to smoke when he was in the woods? No, 
 lie did not, because he could not get good cigars, and rather thar 
 sinoke bad tobacco, he would not smoke (62 2 ; N. 1) at all. What did 
 your friend do after he had been walking? He went to the baron's 
 house. Did the baron receive him w r ell? Yes, he received him 
 as well as he had (avail) received him before. 
 
 When do you set out? I do not set out till (je ne pars que) to 
 mo'.j-ow ; for before I leave I will once more see my good friends. 
 What did your children do when they had -breakfasted ? They 
 went a walking with their dear preceptor, (preccptcur.) Where did 
 your uncle go after he had warmed himself? He went nowhere. 
 After he had warmed himself he undressed and went to bed. At 
 what o'clock did he get up? He got up at sunrise. Did you wake 
 him ? I had no need to wake him, for he had got up before me. 
 What did your cousin do when he heard of the death (la mort) of 
 his best friend? He was much afflicted, (trcs-ajfligc,) and went to 
 bed without saying a word. Did you shave before you break- 
 fasted? I shaved when I had breakfasted. Did you go to bed 
 when you had eaten supper? When I had eaten supper I wrote 
 my letters, and when I had written them I went to bed. 
 
 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON, 69th. Soixante-ncuvieme Lcron, 69mc. 
 YOCABULAIRE. Ire Sea 
 
 To get beaten, (whipped.) 
 
 To get paid. 
 
 To get one's self invited to line. 
 
 At first. 
 
 Firstlv, ($ 170.) 
 
 Secondly. 
 
 Thirdly, &c. 
 
 t Se faire ba'tre. 
 
 t Se faire payer. 
 
 t Se faire inviier a diner. 
 
 D'abord. 
 
 Premierement, en premier lieu. 
 
 Secondement, en second lieu. 
 
 Troisiemement,en troisieme lien 
 
 Is your mother at home ? \ ^ otre m ! re 68t - c , 1 ! e ? h , ez ellfl ? 
 
 ( Votre mere est-elle a la maison ? 
 
304 
 
 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 She is. She is not. 
 
 J am going to her house. 
 
 A cause, a reason. 
 
 A cause of complaint. 
 
 A cause of sadness. 
 
 She has reason to be sad. 
 
 Grief, sorrow, sadness. 
 
 Is that woman ready to go out ? 
 
 She is. Is she not ? 
 
 Notwithstanding, in spite of. 
 
 Notwithstanding that you. 
 
 In epite of him, her, them. 
 
 To contrive, to manage. 
 
 Do you manage to finish your work 
 
 every Saturday night ? 
 Do you manage to have your work 
 
 done r.vcry Saturday night? 
 Try to do that to oblige me. 
 
 I will do everything to oblige you. 
 To command, look vpon, overlook. 
 Tin- window looks into the street. 
 Tin- window looks out upon the river. 
 Th hark-door looks into the garden. 
 
 To fasten, to tic. '1 '< tii his shoes. 
 
 He \\ U fasti :i< il to :i ' 
 I'nlil you / home. ($ 151.) 
 
 Elle y eat. Elle n'> eat pern. 
 
 Je vais chez elle. 
 
 Un sujet, une raison, une cau*e. 
 
 Un sujet de chagrin. 
 
 Un sujet de tristesse. 
 
 Elle a un sujet de tristesse. 
 
 Le chagrin, la tristesse. 
 
 Cette femme est-clle prete a sortrr i 
 
 Elle 1'est. Ne 1'est-elle pas ? 
 
 J\lalgre, en depit de. 
 
 Malgre cela. En depit de vous. 
 
 Malgre lui, elle. En ddpit d'cux. 
 
 Faire en sorte de. 
 
 Faites-vous en sorte de finir votre 
 
 ouvrage tous les samedis soir ? 
 Faites-vous en sorte d' avoir fini votrc 
 
 ouvrage tous les samedis soir ? - 
 Faites en sorte de faire cela pou* 
 
 in'ohliger. 
 
 Je furai tout pour vous obliger. 
 Donner sur. 
 
 '. .line sur la rue. 
 La fcnTtrc donnc stir la rivi 
 La porte dc derricre donne sur 10 
 
 jardin. 
 
 -OS SOllliL'rS. 
 
 < >n rattai-ha a uu ar; : 
 
 : :i ia 
 
 maison. 
 Soi>. i TH^MB, Ire Sec. 
 
 Comme M. Salomon vient lard pour nous faire visile ! 11 vienl 
 pour se faire inviler a diner. Allutcs-vous chez le colonel avant- 
 hier? Non, je n'y allai pas. V etes-vous alle ce matin? Non, et 
 je n'irai pas avant sa soiree musicale. Et pourquoi pas? D'abord, 
 paree que je ne lui dois point de visile, et secondement, parce qu'ori 
 pourrait croire que je veux me faire inviter. Ce garQon ne s'est-ii 
 pas fait battre? 11 est si mechant qu'il se fit batlre deux fois la 
 
 semaine passee. M. D vous doit-il encore? Non, je me suis 
 
 fait payer. Quel sujet de chagrin cette jeune dame a-t-elle ? A-t- 
 elle perdu son mari? Non, elle a perdu son oiseau favori. Est-ce 
 la ce qui cause son chagrin? Je crois que oui. Us ne veulent paa 
 que vous fassiez cela. N'importe, je le ferai en depit d'eux. Fera- 
 t-elle en sorte de venir? Lorsqu'il sut qu'elle n r irait pas, il lit en 
 torte do s'y rendre, n r est-ce pas ? 
 
 When had you finished your task ? I had finished i* when you 
 came in. ($155- 1, 2.) As soon as Caesar (Cesar) had crossed 
 
SIXTY- NINTH LESSON. (2.) 3G2 
 
 (passer) the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate, (dilibiftr:) ho 
 was obliged (devoir) to conquer (vaincrc) or to die. An emperor (ur 
 empcreur) who was irritated at (irrite contre) an astrologer, (un astro- 
 logue,) asked him : " Wretch ! what death (de qucllc) dost tliou believe 
 thou wilt die?" "I shall die of a fever,'"' replied the astrologer. 
 " Thou liest/ 7 said the emperor, li thou wilt die this instant of a vio- 
 lent death. ;; As soon as he was seized, (saistr,) he said to the em- 
 peror, ''Sire, (Seigneur*) order some one to feel (ordonnez qiSon nit 
 tdte) 1 my pulse, (24 2 , Obs. 55) and it will be found that I have a 
 
 Tiiis sally (cette saillie) saved his life. 
 
 Do you perceive yonder house ? (ccttc nwiaon Id-bas ?) I do. Had 
 you perceived it before? I had not. Would you have perceived it 
 if I had not shown it to you? May be so, (pent ctre que OMI,) may 
 be not. But now that you have shown it to me, what kind of a 
 
 it? It is an inn, (une aiibcrgc.) If you agree, we will go 
 into it, to drink a glass of wine or cider, for I am very thirsty. Try 
 (faitcs en sortc) to keep your thirst until you get home. Itdoesnot 
 Fuit men like us to enter (dans) inns. 1 see that the inn overlooks 
 the river. And as the house is high, it commands a large portion 
 of the country. You appear sad; what cause of grief have you? 
 If you were as thirsty as I am, you would also have a cause for 
 grief. Are you always thirsty when you see an inn? I once saw 
 a small black horse that managed to stop at. every inn before which 
 he passed. Ah! ah! I guess he was thirsty too. Did the colonel 
 you last week] No, he could not. He might have done it, if 
 his nephew had not spent all his money; but he will manage to pay 
 me to-mor: 
 
 iMe Sec. 
 
 To dro'rn. I Xoycr, 1. 
 
 To dro?n a dog, a cat. I Noyer un chien, un cliai. 
 
 To be drowned, to be drowning. ) g 
 To drown one's self, to get drowned. $ 
 
 To leap through the window. 
 
 To throw out of the window. 
 
 I am drowning. 
 
 He jumped out of the window. 
 
 The cattle. 
 
 To keep warm. To keep cool. 
 
 To keep clean. 
 
 Sauter par la fenetre. 
 
 Jeter par la fenetre. 
 
 Je me noie. (144 3.) 
 
 II sauta par la fenetre. 
 
 Le betail; plur. les bestiaux 
 
 t Se tenir chaud. t Se teni 
 
 Se tenir propre. 
 
 To keep one's self up, straight. , Se tenir droit. 
 
 Keep yourself properly. . Tenez-vous comine il faut . . . 
 
 To keep on one's guard against some I t Se tenir en garde coritre quciqu un 
 one. 
 
 1 Ordontier que . . . (c*der that . . .) requires the subjunctive alter iu 
 
30(5 
 
 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Keep on your guard against that 
 
 man. 
 To take care (to beware) of somebody 
 
 or something. 
 If you do not take care of that horse, 
 
 it will kick you. 
 
 Take care that you do not fall. 
 
 To keep on one's guard against some 
 one. 
 
 To beware of somebody or some- 
 thing. 
 
 Keep on your guard against that 
 man. 
 
 Take CMIT. 
 
 A thought. An idcn. A sally. 
 
 To bo struck with a thought. 
 
 A thought strikes me. 
 
 That nrvcr crossed my mind. 
 
 To I nit' it into one $ hunt. 
 
 He took it into his head lately to rob 
 me. 
 
 What is in your head ? 
 
 t Tenez-vous en garde centre oe< 
 
 homme. 
 Prcndre garde d quelqiCun ou d 
 
 quelque chose. 
 Si vous ne prenez pas garde a cc 
 
 cheval, il vous donnera un coup 
 
 de pied. 
 T Prenez garde de tombor. 
 
 * Se tenir (etre) sur ses ganK 
 
 quelqu'un. 
 
 * Se garder de quelqu'un ou quelque 
 
 chose. 
 T Tenez-vous sur vos gardes avee 
 
 cet homme. 
 Proncz garde. 
 
 Une pensde. Yne idee. Une saillie. 
 Venir enpensce, fa 1'idt'e, a 1'eiiprit.) 
 II me vient unc p< 
 Cela ne m'cst jamais vcnu a i 
 t S'avi< 
 t II s'avisa Pautrc jo'jr dc me volrr 
 
 t DC r; 
 
 Soix 2de Sec. 
 
 Avez-vous vu ce mechant petit garcon attacher ce pauvrc peli 
 chien, le jeler dans hi riviere, et le noyer ? Si je 1'avais vu, j'auraH 
 fait en sorte de Pen empecher. J de le faire; mais je n'ai 
 
 pu y reuss'ir. La petile fille qui tomba dans Peau, de la fenetre dn 
 bateau a vapeur, se noya-t-elle ? Non, on la sauva, dans un petit 
 bateau. Le voleur fut-il pris? Non, il sauta par la fenetre et fit en 
 sorte de se sauver. Vous etes sur un bane casse ; prenez garde de 
 tomber. J'y prendrai garde. Voyez comme cette jeune demoiselle 
 aux cheveux noirs se tient bien ! Oui, c'est un plaisir de voir comme 
 elle se tient ! Si vous vous approchez trop de ce cheval, il vous don- 
 nera un coup de pied. Py prendrai garde. Faites-vous des affaires 
 avec cet homme la-bas ? Lequel ? Celui au chapeau blanc. Non, 
 j'en faisais autrefois; mais a present je me tiens sur mes gardes 
 centre lui. Ne s'avisa-t-elle pas de revenir ici Tautre jour? Ne 
 craignez rien. II ne s^avisera plus de le faire. 
 
 You appear very well satisfied ; what thought struck you 1 Some- 
 ching which had never crossed my mind before. What is it ? Should 
 I tell yon, (if I were,) you would be as wise as I. Did William 
 jump out of the window? Yes, he did. What did he do aitei 
 lumping out of the window ? After he had jumped, he first ran to 
 (he garden gate, opened it, and then ran towards the bridge Did hu 
 
SIXTY- NINTH WESSON. (3.) I>fi7 
 
 go as far as the bridge ?- No, there were some cattle in the road, and 
 
 aid ot them, so that he stopped. Are the cattle as large here 
 
 the caltie (bestiaux) are larger there than here. How 
 
 i keep mys'-lf warm ? Put on a warmer coat. Where must I 
 
 out the butter to keep it cool ? You must put it in the cellar. Who 
 
 is that little boy .' Il- is tae baker's son. I admire him, for he 
 
 himself so clean. Does your cook keep her kitchei. 
 
 , hy do the cattle go in the sha 
 
 Did Thomas dare (s'aviscr) to ask ypu for money ? Yes, he did. 
 
 Did you lend him anyl No, I was on my guard against him. 
 
 What was the cause of your quarrel with the gardener's boy? He 
 
 took it into his head (or he dared) to call me a fool. Did you not 
 
 him after he had called you so ' 1 ily, (comm :l faut.) 
 
 Why do you laugh at me ? I do not laugh at you, but at your 
 
 not look like (G3 J ) yn ( ;r> f It does not look like it, for 
 
 mine is short (court) and yours is too lo i mine is black and 
 
 - is green. Why do yi i:h (M- 1 ) that man? I 
 
 would not associate with him if he had not rendered me great ser- 
 
 jj (le service.) Do not trust him, (nc vous y ficz pas : ) for if you 
 
 are not on your guard, he will cheat (trompcr) you. 
 
 Yo( 3nie Sec. 
 
 /il.-i r hi r jiltict-. 
 ythini; in r 
 
 \round, round. All around. 
 
 We sailed around England. 
 
 They went about the town to 
 all the curiosities. 
 
 To go around the house. < 
 
 To go about the house. 
 How much does that cost yo2 ? 
 How much does this book cost you ? 
 It costs me three crowns and a half. 
 That table costs him twenty crowns. 
 A lone, ly one's self. 
 I was alone. One woman only. 
 One God. 
 
 Goa alone can do that. 
 The very thought of it is criminal. 
 A single reading is not sufficient to 
 satisfy a mind that has a true taste. 
 To kill ly shooting. 
 To blow out some one's brains. 
 
 -t ma, votrc, sn place. 
 
 II faut mettre chaquc chose a sa place. 
 
 ur. Tout autour. 
 
 Nous naviguamcs autour de 1* Angle- 
 
 terre. - 
 
 t Us allcrcnt ca et la dans la ville, 
 pour en voir toutes les curiositiio. 
 Aller autour de la maison. 
 Faire le tour de la maison. 
 Aller c.a et la dans la maison. 
 Combien cela vous coute-t-il ? 
 Combien ce livre vous coute-t-il? 
 11 me coute trois dcus et demi. 
 Cetle table lui coute vingt dcus, 
 Seul ; fem. seule. 
 J'etais seul. Une seule femrro. 
 Un seul Dieu. 
 Dieu seul peut faire cela. 
 La seule pense'e de cela est criminellc 
 Une seule lecture ne suffit pas pom 
 contenter un homme qui a da gout 
 Tucr d'un coup d j arme a feu. 
 Brulcr la cervelle a quelqu'un. 
 
368 
 
 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 To shoot one's self with a pistol. 
 
 He has blown out his brains. 
 
 He has blown out his brains with a 
 
 pistol. 
 He served for a long time, acquired 
 
 honorr, and died contented. 
 
 Se bruler la cervclle d un co'ip ;\9 
 
 pistolet. 
 
 II s'est brule la cervelle. 
 II s'est brule la cervelle d'un coup 
 
 de pistolet. 
 II servit long-temps, parvint aux 
 
 honneurs, et mourut content. 
 
 O6.i. 153'. In narratives, when the verbs are in the :.Tne tense, tlis OTO- 
 auuns of the third person are not repeated. 
 
 He arrived poor, grew rich in ashcfrt I II arriva pauvre, devin, ric)^ en pet, 
 time, and lost all in a still shorter de temps, et perdit tout en inning 
 time. I de tempe encc"e. 
 
 SoiXAXTE-XEUvifeME JntiME. 3me Sec. 
 
 A volre place je ne laisserais pas mes livres et mes papiers <;a ei 
 .a, mais je mettrais chaque cbose a sa place. Je tache do tenii 
 chaque chose a sa place ; mais je ne puis y reussir. Pourquoi a-t-on 
 mis cela autour de ce jeune arbre? Pour empecher le betail de 1 
 mordre et de le casser. Le capitaine navigua-t-il autour de Pen- 
 droit? II navigua tout- au tour dans son bateau. Ne descendit-il 
 pas 1 Si fait, il descendit. N'altacha-t-il pas son bateau a un arbre 1 
 II Py attacha. Lut-il le livre ? II le hit en un seul jour. Etait-elle 
 seule quand le voleur entra? Oui, elle etait seule. Voulut-il lui 
 bruler la cervelle d'un coup de pistolet? Oui; mais comme elle 
 allait prendre line prise de tabac, elle jeta tout son tabac dans les 
 yeux du voleur, qui lira son coup sans la -toucher. II lui vint une 
 heureuse idee, n'est-ce pas? Oui, elle cut vraiment une heureuse 
 pensee. Combien ce parapluie vous coute-t-il? Ce drap-la voua 
 a-t-il coutc 4 gourdes la verge? Cette maison lui coutera aumoins 
 15 ; 000 gourdes, n : est-ce pas ? Dieu seul connait notreJcsJijJce, (fate,) 
 n'est-ce pas ? 
 
 AVhat is th? matter \vith you ? Why do you look so melancholy ? 
 (avoir Vair mclancolique?) I should not look so melancholy if i had 
 no reason to be sad. I have heard just now (49 2 ) that one of my 
 best friends has shot himself with a pistol, and tr at one of my wife's 
 best friends has drowned herself. Where has she drownod herself 1 
 She drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. Yes- 
 terday, at four o'clock in the morning, she rose without saying a 
 word to any one, (d pcrsonne,) leaped out of the window which 
 looks into the garden, and threw herself into th ri^er, where she 
 was drowned. I have a great mind (grarde envie) to bathe (st 
 baigttfr) to-day. Where will you bathe ? In the rivr^. Are you 
 not afraid of teing drowned? Oh 5 no! I can swim.- Who taught 
 
SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 369 
 
 you 1 Last summer I took a few lessons in the swimm IT /g- school 
 & Vecole de natation.) 
 
 Were you not afraid to go into the \vater before you could s\vim^ 
 A little, but I could not have learned without going into the water. 
 You did not think like the man who said : I will go into the water 
 only when I know how to swim. There are many who, like thai 
 man, think that they will try to speak French only when they know 
 >_ v. Do they not know that if they do not try to speak they can- 
 not learn? I guess they forget it. Why do you work so much? 
 I work in order to be one day useful to my country .Would you 
 copy your exercises if I copied mine ? I would copy them if you 
 copied yours. Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I had 
 transcribed mine ? She would have transcribed it. Would she have 
 set out if I had set out? I cannot tell you what she would havo 
 done if you had set out. 
 
 SKYKNTiKTII LESSON, 70th. Soixante ct dixicmc Lcrt .1, 70me. 
 YOCABULAIUK, Ire Sec. * 
 
 As we began to use the verb in the Imperative mood from the 8th lesson, 
 and referred" to the article in the Synopsis in the (252), and all subsequent 
 lessons, 
 
 That 
 
 Till: 1.MIT.UAT1VF, 
 
 will be nothing new to the student. However, as that mood must be found 
 Fomewhere, we place it hrr r its formation and use, (*> l.'.O.) 
 
 article must be carefully studied. 
 
 Have patience. 
 
 a) attentive, patient, affable. 
 Go (ye) there. Do not go there. 
 
 Give it to me. Do not give it to me. 
 
 Send'it to him. 
 Lend it to me. 
 
 Have the goodness to hand me that 
 plate. 
 
 To borrow of or from. 
 
 I will borrow some money of you. 
 
 I will borrow that money of you. 
 
 Borrow it of (or from) him. 
 
 Do not borrow it of him. 
 
 I borrow it from him. 
 
 Do not tell him or her. Tell her. 
 
 Return it to them. ($ 150- -8.) 
 
 Ayez patience. 
 
 Soyez attentif, patient, affable. 
 Allez-y. N'y allez pas. ($ 1508.) 
 Donnez-le-moi. Ne me le donnel 
 
 pas. 
 
 Envoyez-le-lui. 
 Pretez-le-moi. 
 Ayez la bonte de me passer ce plat. 
 
 Emprunter, 1 ... d. 
 
 Je veux vous emprunter de Targem 
 
 Je veux vous emprunter cet argenu 
 
 Empruntez-le-lui. 
 
 Ne le lui empruntez pas. 
 
 Je le lui emprunte. 
 
 Ne le lui dites pas. Dites-le-iuL 
 
 Rendcz-le, (-la-)-leur. 
 
3TO 
 
 SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Do not return it to them. 
 
 Patience, impatience. 
 
 'Die neighbor. 
 
 Die snuff-box. The segar-box. 
 
 i^ood. Be not (so). ($ 1508.) 
 Know it. Do not. 
 
 Obey your masters, and never give 
 
 tl.jin any trouble. 
 
 I'M)- what you owe, comfort the af- 
 . , and do good to those that 
 have offended you. 
 Love God, and thy neighbor as thy- 
 self. 
 Ton f-y your father, 
 
 ] i tort. Comfort them. 
 To olii ml. nd no one. 
 
 ;il ways love and practise vir- 
 .nd we shall be happy both in 
 tins life and in the i > 
 To practise 
 
 'Tuscan shoot best. 
 
 riend. 
 ss your- 
 
 r> makr one'a 
 
 -tood. 
 T. MCMtOffl. 
 
 Children must < arly be ace 
 lo labor. 
 
 'a self to something. 
 
 'oincd to n : 
 \ am an istomed to it. 
 
 Ne le leur rendez pas. 
 
 La patience, 1'impatience. 
 
 Le prochain. 
 
 La tabatiere. La boite a c:gaied, 
 
 Soyez bons. Ne le eoycz pas. 
 
 Sachez-le. Ne le sachez paa. 
 
 Obeissez a vos maitres, et ne Itm 
 
 donnez jamais de chagrin. 
 Payez ce que vous devez, consolei 
 
 les malheureux, et faitesdu bicn a 
 
 ceiuc qui vous ont ofli 
 
 /. lo bon Dieu, et le ju 
 
 Consoler, 1. les. 
 
 OHenser, 1. N'ollcnscz personne. 
 Aimons et pratiquons toujours la 
 us scrons hcureux dani 
 cette vie ct dans 1'a 
 Prmlijtu 
 
 
 Erprtsi 
 Kxprimcz votre si 
 
 con 
 Accou: 
 
 S'acc< 
 
 ; ust. 
 
 SOIXANTE ET DIXI^ME Tll>: 
 
 iye d la padeocej soyez attentif, et vous 
 
 iTotre paliont ct uttentif. Si vous avezina \ 
 
 dniiiu>/-la-moi. Je YOUS Taurais dt'ja donnr iri. 
 
 HitM- ilos (]iic jo Tens finie, je la mis dans mon pupitre pour vo. 
 
 er, mais vous ne vinles pas. Faites vc> -.rquoi no 
 
 les faites-vous pas ? Mon frere n'est pas a la II ne faut pas 
 
 .]ue vous les lui fassiez faire. Je ne les lui fait pas faire, mais ii a 
 hi clef dti pupitre. Non, la voici. Ouvrcz-le, prenez votre livre, 
 votre cahier, et tout ce qu'il vous faut, et commencez. Je vai? 
 nrettre ii 1'instant. Que fait Sara? Elle lit le livre que vous lui 
 Rvez prete. Kile a tort d'etre toujours a lire. Dites-lui cle dessiner 
 ce paysage. (67 1 .) Et lorsqu'elle 1'aura fini, pourra-t-elle se mettre a 
 
SEVENTIETH LISSON. (2.) 371 
 
 In lecture ? (reading .dors faites-lui dediner (.o decline) quel* 
 
 ques noms avec des adjectifs. Comment? Comme ceci: La belle 
 pomme, de la belle pomme, a la belle pomme. Les poires mures, 
 (ripe pears.) des poi. . aux poires mures. 
 
 Have patience, in y dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadness alters 
 
 (changer) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse, (empirer le 
 
 mal.) Be not afraid of your creditors; be sure that they will do you 
 
 DO ha | ou cannot pay them yet. Pay me what 
 
 you owe me, will you '. As soon as I have money, I will pay all 
 
 .hat you nave advanced (avanccr) for me. Don't you forget! you 
 
 1 I shall not turret, you may depend npon it, for I think of it 
 
 (j'ii ay. 1 am your debtor, (lc dtbitcur,) and I shall 
 
 - r) it. What a beautiful inkstand you have there ! 
 
 it me. What do yon wi-h to do with it? I wish to show 
 
 of it, and do not break it. 
 
 What do j : my brother? I want to borrow some money 
 
 of him. Burrow some of somebody else, (d nn autrc.) If he will 
 
 not 1. will borrow some of somebody else. You will 
 
 do well. Do not wish for (sottkaitcr) what you cannot have, but bo 
 
 contented with what Providence (la Providence) has given you, and 
 
 remember that there are many men who have not what you have. 
 
 ifl short, (court,) let us endeavor (65 1 ) to make it (56 3 , Obs. 
 
 irreeable (agreablc) as possible, (qu'il cst possible.) But let 
 
 member that the abuse (Vabus) of pleasure (in the plural 
 
 merCj fern.) What must we do in order 
 
 love and practise virtue, and you will 
 
 be ha fe and in the next. 
 
 2de Sec. 
 
 ivc the habit of. 
 Ot express myself in French, 
 for I am not in the habit of speak - 
 
 You speak prop- 
 To converge, to chatter, to prate. 
 \ prattler. 
 A. chatterer. 
 
 To practise. I practise speaking. 
 To permit, to allow. 
 
 Permit me to go (there.) I do. 
 
 Avoir riiabhude dc . . 
 
 Je ne puis pas bien m'exprimer en 
 
 Fransais, parce que jc n'ai pas 1'ha- 
 
 bitude de parler. 
 Vous parlez comme il faut. 
 Carter, 1. Bavarder, 1. Ja*cr, 1. 
 Un causeur, fern, euse. 1 
 Un ja8eur,/em. euse. 
 Exercer, 1. Je m'exerce a parler. 
 Permeltrc* 2, de. (Comrr.e mettre 
 
 25', 33 1 .) 
 Permettez-moi d'y aller. Je voui 
 
 le permets. 
 
 TJne cansevtc means also a small sofa for two persons. 
 
872 
 
 SEVENTIETH 1 CSSON. (2.) 
 
 I do not permit her to go. 
 
 The permission, the permit. 
 
 Do good to the poor, have compassion 
 on the unfortunate, and God will 
 take care of the rest. 
 
 To do good to some one. 
 
 To have compassion on some one. 
 
 Compassion. Pity. The rest. 
 
 If he comes, tell him I am in the gar- 
 den, under the jasmin bower. 
 
 Je ne lui permets pas d y allcr. 
 
 La permission, le permis. 
 
 Faites du bien aux pauvres, aye 
 compassion des malheureux, fit 1 
 bon Dieu aura soin du reste. 
 
 Faire du lien d quelqu'un. 
 
 Avoir compassion de quelqu'un. 
 
 La compassion. La pitie. Le reste. 
 
 S't'Zvient, dites-luiquejesuisau jar- 
 din, sous le berceau de jasmin. 
 
 Obs. 154. The letter suffers elision in the conjunction si, if, before the 
 personal pronouns, il, he Us, they ; but not before elle or elles. (21 2 , 06s. 47.) 
 
 Ask the merchant whether he can lot | Demandez au marchand s'il peut mo 
 me have the horse at the price donner le cheval au prix quo je hn 
 
 ai ofTert. 
 j ai lu, et Von m'a raconte. 
 
 which I have offered him. 
 I read, and was told. 
 
 06s. 155. The indefinite pronoun on takes a euphonic Z' after the 
 ct, ou, ou, si, que, and qui. 
 
 There they laugh and weep by turns. 
 If they knew what you have done. 
 The country where diamonds arc 
 
 found. 
 You. have been, or will soon be told. 
 
 We say with precision what we un- 
 derstand well. 
 
 Whom do- people love ? Those to 
 whom they owe their happiness. 
 
 Can one be great without being just ? 
 
 One can be great onlf inasmuch as 
 lie is just. 
 
 On y rit et Von y pleure tour a tour. 
 Si Von savait ce que vous avez fait. 
 Le pays ou Von trouve le diamant. 
 
 On vous a dit, ou Von vous dira 
 
 bit-ntot. 
 Ce que Von concpit bien o'cnonce 
 
 clairement. 
 Qui aime-t-on ? On aime ccux u. quj 
 
 Ton doit son bonheur. 
 Peut-on etre grand sans etre juste ? 
 On ne peut etre grand qu'auiar.l 
 
 que Ton est juste. 
 
 Obs. 156. But- the euphonic Z' is omitted, when on is followed by le, la, 
 or les. Say : Je ne veux pas qu'on le tenrmente, I do not wish him to be 
 molested, and not que Von le, &c., which would be harsher than qu'on le. 
 
 SOIXANTE ET DIXI^ME TH&ME. 2de SC. 
 
 Boa jour, Mile. N . . . . Ah ! vous voila enfin. Je vous ai attendue 
 avec impatience. Vous etes une causeuse, je crois. Vous me par 
 donnerez, n'est-ce pas, ma chere ? Je n'ai pas cause, je vous assure , 
 mais je n'ai pas pu venir (N. 62 2 ) plus tot. Permettez-moi de voir 
 ce que vous avez apporte. Vous permeltre de le regarder ! Je Pai 
 apporte erpres (on purpose) pour vous le montrer. Tenez, le voila, 
 prenez-le. Je le tiens. Ah! que c'estjoli! Vous exercez-vous a 
 peindre ? Je pratique quelque fois. Mais comment se porte madams 
 votre mere 7 On dit qu : elle se porte mieux depuis qu'elle est aux emu 
 
BEVEN TV-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 378 
 
 (at the springs) et Fon croit qu'elle sera bientot guerie. Que je suis 
 charmee de 1'apprendre ! Votre pere'vous permit-il d'aller au bal 
 avant-hier? Oui, des que je lui eus demande il m'en donna la per- 
 mission. Salomon a-t-il compassion des pauvres? Lui! II n'a 
 compassion de personne. Parlons Franc, ais. Ayez la bonte de par- 
 ler, vous ; et moi, je vous repondrai en Anglais. Vous parlez tout 
 arssi bien que moi. Vous plaisantez, (plaisantei, l ; to jest.) Non, 
 jf ne plaisante pas. Vous me flattez pour me faire parler. 
 
 Since (puisquc) we \vish to be happy, let us do good to the poor, 
 and let us have compassion on the unfortunate ; let us obey our mas- 
 ters, and never give them any trouble ; let us comfort the unfortunate 
 (Ics infortuncSj) love our neighbor as ourselves, and not hate those 
 (et nc ha'issonspas ccux) that have offended us; in short, (en un mot.) 
 let us always fulfil our duty, and God will take care of the rest. My 
 son, in order to be loved you must be laborious (laborieux) and good. 
 Thou art accused (on t' accuse) of having been idle and nenliircn/ 
 (negligent) in thy affairs. Thou knowest, however, (pourtant.) that 
 thy brother has been punished for having been naughty. Being 
 lately (l-autre jour) in town, I received a letter from thy tutor, in 
 which he strongly (fort) complained of thee. 
 
 Do not weep, (pleurcr ;) now go into thy room, learn thy lesson, 
 and be a good boy, (sagc } ) otherwise (autrement) thou wilt get nothing 
 for dinner, (d diner.) I shall be so good, my dear father, that you 
 will certainly (ccrtaincmcnt) be satisfied with me. Has the little boy 
 kept his word ? (tcnir* parole?) Not quite; for after having said 
 that, he went into his room, took his books, sat>down at the table, 
 (sc mit d unc table.) and fell asleep, (s 1 cndornrit.) "He is a very 
 good boy when he sleeps," said his father, seeing him some timo 
 (qitelque temps) after. Do you understand all'I am telling you? t I 
 understand (entendre) and comprehend (comprcndre*) it very well; 
 but I cannot express myself well in French, because I am not in the 
 habit of speaking it. That will come in (avec le) time. I wish (sou- 
 hotter) it with all my heart. 
 
 SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON, 71st. Soixante-onzicme Le$on, lime. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. IrC Sec. 
 fo stind up. To remain up. I Eire debout. Hester debou 
 
 Will > T DU permit rne to go to the 
 
 market ? 
 To ha ft en, to mal\e haste. 
 
 Voulcz-vous me permettre d'aller an 
 
 marche ? 
 t Sc depfcher, 1 , de. 
 
574 
 
 SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (l.J 
 
 Wake haste, and return soon. 
 Go and tell him that I cannot come 
 to-day. 
 
 Depechez-vous, et revcLez LicAtOt. 
 Allez lui dire quo je ne puis veni,' 
 aujourd'hui. 
 
 Obs. 157. In French the yerbs alter,* to go, and venir,* to como, art 
 always followed by the infinitive instead of another tense used in English, 
 and the crnj unction and is not rendered. ($ 150 12.) 
 
 He came and told us he could not 
 come. 
 
 GJo and see your friends. 
 
 To weep, to cry. 
 
 The least blow makes him cry. 
 
 To frighten. 
 
 To be frightened, to startle. 
 
 The least thing frightens him or her. 
 
 Be not frightened. 
 
 To ho frightened at something. 
 
 What are you frightened at ? 
 
 At my expense. 
 
 At Ijis, her, ourexpct, 
 
 At other people's expense. 
 
 That man I. rybody's ex- 
 
 pense. 
 
 To depend. 
 
 That depends u;;on circumstances. 
 
 That does not drpeml upon nn-. 
 
 It depends upon him to do that. 
 
 ! yes, it depends upon him. 
 To astonish, to surprise. 
 
 To le astonish*-'!, to womlcr. 
 To lc surprised at something. 
 
 1 am surprised at it. 
 
 An extraordinary thing happened 
 which surprised everybody. 
 
 7i ttikc place, to h<i}>i> 
 
 Many things have passed which will 
 
 surprise you. 
 To surpi v<e. 
 Many days will pass before that. 
 
 A man came in wl ,D asked me how 1 
 was.- 
 
 II vint noud dire qu'il ne pouvait pat 
 
 venir. 
 
 Allez voir vos amis. 
 Pleurcr, 1. 
 
 Le moindrc *ioup le lait pleuer 
 Ejfrayer, 1. * 
 '/v/r/rr, 1. 
 L:i moindrc chose I'cflraic. 
 
 ;s cliraye/ pas. 
 S'cflraycr de quelque chose. 
 De quoi vous efirayez-vous f 
 A mes depens. 
 A ses, a nos depens. 
 Aux depens d'autrui. 
 Get hommc vit aux depens tic tout 
 
 le monde. 
 Dtpendre de. 
 Ccla <! 
 
 :is dc moi. 
 
 ::d ili- lui dc fnire ct-ln. 
 Oh ! oui, ccla depend dc lui. 
 
 v*. 
 
 S'itonncr, 1. 
 
 Lire etonne >' 
 
 J'en suis etonne. 
 
 11 arriva une < -rdinairc qui 
 
 dtonna tout le monde. 
 Se passer, 1. 
 11 s'est passe plusieurs choses qui 
 
 vous surprcndront. 
 Surprendre,* (comme prcndre.) 
 II se passera plusieurs jours avani 
 
 cela. 
 II entra un homme qui me demuida 
 
 comment je me portais. 
 
 THME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Pleure/-vous, mon petit bon homme, (a familiar expression con- 
 stantly used for: my little boy,) parce que vous etes oblige de rester 
 doJout? Oui, il y a si long-temps que je suis debout que je suie 
 tre&-fatigue. Si 1'on vous permettait de vous asseoir, seriez-vcus plua 
 
SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 
 
 sage une autre fois? Je tacherais de Tetre. Je cjmple sur votr 
 parole. Asseyez-vous la-bas, (yonder.) Si vous aviez louche cette 
 petite fille, eile aurait pleure, car elle pleure pour la moindre chose. 
 Je suis etonne < A '!t'elle (151) ne pleure pas, car je lui ai donne un 
 coup. Alors, il est vraiment etonnant qu'e\\G ne pleure pas. Aux 
 depens de qui ave/.-vous fait ces belles emplettes? A mes propret 
 depens; je n'en fais jamais aux depens d'autrui. Votre ami obtien- 
 dra-t-il 1'emploi qu'il desire ? C ? est selon : cela dependra des circon- 
 stances. Si cela dependait de votre cousin, le secretaire, 1'obtien- 
 drait-il' 1 Oui; mais cela ne depend pas de lui. Lorsque la chose 
 fut arrivee, cela iretonna-t-il pas tout le monde? Oui, chacun en 
 fut etonne. Vous surprenez tout le monde, mais votre neveir ne sur- 
 prend personne. 11 me surprend. 
 
 Can you stand one hour on one foot without mo-onir! I have 
 never tried, but I think I could. If yon were to t: . . imparf.) 
 
 you would find out you: in.) before J an hour. 
 
 Is your letter written ? No, not quite. Make haste to finish it. And 
 why should 1 make I ish i 1 ' You must make haste, ($ 151,) 
 
 to go by ; i-hip. I thought it went only (nc 
 
 mcttait d la voile, quo) on \ : ay next. (X. p. 1<>7.) That is true;- 
 
 but from Boston, not New York. And my letter must go ( 151) from 
 here to Boston by the mail, (le conrricr.) So that I must make ha 
 
 y. Go then and tell William to get ready, so as to carry it 
 
 to the post office (la poste) as soon as I finish it. Do not be afraid, 
 
 yet time enouirh. Do not speak to me, or else I shall not 
 
 . ~h it in time. 
 
 .-ui wonder at (dc) what takes place? No; now, nothing 
 .i*hes me. Everything is now so astonishing, so wonderful, that 
 nothing a. 'raordinary. Wliy does that woman weep ? J las 
 
 her child been dead long? -This little girl weeps because she has 
 t piece; have you not one to give her? Does that 
 man live at his own expense, or at that of other people ? Does it 
 depend on him to do that? Does not that marriage depend on his 
 brother-in-law ? On whom does it depend then ? I wonder whether 
 (66 2 ) the general will be elected? (Hire* 4, like lire.) Shall I go 
 and tell them to make l?ss noise ? Shall I go and buy you a bottle 
 of cologne? 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Done. 
 
 C'est pourquoi. Ennui, 1'ennui. 
 
 L'autre jour. Dernierement. 
 
 hut, illy. 
 
 Therefore. Ennui. 
 
 The other day. Lately. 
 
 In a short time. In. \ Dans peu de temps. DanSj en. 
 
 Obs. 158. When speaking of time, dims expresses tho epoch, and eii ili 
 duration. 
 
B76 
 
 SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. 
 
 He will arrive in a week, (when a 
 
 week is elapsed.) 
 It took him a week to make this 
 
 journey. 
 He will have finished his studies in 
 
 three months. 
 
 He finished his studies in a year. 
 He has applied himself particularly 
 
 to geometry and mathematics. 
 
 He nas a good many friends. 
 
 II arrivera dans huit jours. 
 
 II a fait ce voyage en huit jo'inu. 
 
 II aura fini ses etudes duns it >il 
 
 mois. 
 
 II a fini ses etudes en un an. 
 II a fait une etude particuliere de la 
 
 geometric et des mathematiques. 
 II a lien des amis. 
 II a beaucoup d'amis. 
 
 Obs. 159. The word lien is always followed by the article, and beaucm*p 
 by the preposition de. 
 
 Vous avez bien de la patience. 
 Vous avez beaucoup de patience. 
 Us out bien de 1'argent. 
 Vous avez bien du courage. 
 Faire present de quelque chose d 
 
 YJU have a great deal of patience. \ 
 
 They have a great deal of money. 
 
 You have a great deal of courage. 
 
 To make a present of something to 
 some one. 
 
 Mr. Lambert wrote to me lately, 
 that his sisters would be here in a 
 
 . short time, and requested me to 
 tell you so ; you will then be able 
 to see them, and to give them the 
 l.ooko which you have bought. 
 They hope that you will make 
 them a present of them. Their 
 brother has assured me that they 
 esteem you, without knowing you 
 personally. 
 
 To want amusement. 
 
 To get or be tired. 
 
 How could I get tired in your com- 
 pany ? 
 
 He gets tired everywhere. 
 
 Agreeable, (pleasing.) Tiresome. 
 
 To be welcome. 
 
 You are welcome everywhere. 
 
 Monsieur Lambert m'ecrivit Tautre 
 jour que mesdemoiselles ses soeurs 
 vicndraient ici dans peude temps. 
 et me pria de vous le dire. Vous 
 pourrez done les voir, et leur donner 
 les livres que vous avez achctes. 
 Elles esperent que vous leur en 
 ferez prdsent. Leur frere m'a as- 
 sure qu'elles vous estiment, sano 
 vous connaitre personnellcmcnt. 
 
 > t S'en?iuyer, 1. 
 
 t Comment pourrais-je m'ennuycr 
 
 aupres de vous? 
 II s'ennuie partout. 
 A^reable. Ennuyeux euse,/cm. 
 t Etre le bienvenu. 
 t Vous etes partout lc* bienvenu. 
 
 SoiXAXTE-OXZlfeME TllfblE. 2de See. 
 
 Voudriez-vous n'avoir rien a faire? Non, je vous assure, car je 
 m/ennuierais comme tous ceux qui n'ont pas d'occupations. Voug 
 avez bien raison. Cependant il y a bien des jeunes gens qui vou 
 draient ne point avoir d'occupation. Us ne savent pas ce qu'ils desi- 
 rent. Us s r ennuieraient s'ils n'en avaient point. Que faisait-il der- 
 aieremcnt 1 Rien, c : est pourquoi il mourait d'ennui. Le colonel 
 D'arrivera-i-i! pas dans peu de temps'? Au contraire, il va joindri 
 
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1,) 077 
 
 ion regiment f (to join his regiment.) A quel regiment apparUent-il 1 
 II appartient au cinquieme regiment. Que dessina-t-elle 1'aotre 
 jour? Quand je la vis, elle dessinait le nouveau paquebot. J'en- 
 tends tonjours Mme. G.. . . gronder sa demoiselle parce qirelle ne 
 se lient pas droit, la voila, ne trouvez-vous pas qu'elle se tient com me 
 il faut? Elle se tie/it aussi droit qu ; il le faut. Quand le capitaine 
 joindra-t-il sa compagnie ? H la joindra dans 3 jours. Combien <!e 
 jours lui faut-il pour faire le voyage ? II lui en faut 8, et commu i* 
 est en chemin depuis 5 jours, il lui en faut encore 5 pour le finir. 
 
 Will you drink a cup (line tasse) of tea? I thank you; I do not 
 like tea. Do you like coffee? I like it, but I have just (49 2 , Obs. 
 115) drunk some. Do you not get tired here? How could I get 
 tired in this agreeable society? As to me, I always want amuse- 
 ment. If you did as I do, you would not want amusement, for I 
 listen to all those who tell me anything. In this manner I learn 
 many anecdotes, a thousand agreeable things, and I have no time 
 to get tired; but you do nothing of that kind, (dc tout ccla,) that is 
 the reason why you want amusement. I would do everything liko 
 (comme) you, if I had no reason to be sad. Have you seen Mr. 
 Lambert? I have seen him; he told me that his sisters would be 
 here in a short time, and desired (prior) me to tell you so. 
 
 When they have arrived (463, Obs. 106) you may give them the 
 gold rings (la bague) which you have bought to make them a- present 
 of. Will they receive them ? Oh ! yes, for they love you without 
 knowing you personally. Has my sister already written to you? 
 She has written to me many times, and I am going to answer her, 
 for her letters are always agreeable and welcome, (bienvcnucs.) 
 Shall I (faut-il) tell her that you are here ? Tell her; but do not tell 
 her that I am waiting for her impatiently. Why have you not 
 brought (58 3 , Obs. 142) your sister along with you? Which one? 
 The one you always bring, the youngest. She did not wish to go out, 
 because she has the toothache. I am very sorry for it, for she is a 
 very good girl. How old is she ? She is nearly fifteen years old. 
 She is very tall (grande) for her age, (/'age.) How old are you ? I 
 am twenty-two. Is it possible ! I thought you were not yet twenty. . 
 
 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON, 7%ds-Soixante-douz:cmc Lccon ) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 OF NEGATIONS. Des Negations 
 
 See ($171) for the manner of using them, and consult the aitirle 
 accessary. 
 
378 
 
 8E VENT Y-f EC JND LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Have yju none of my copybooks ? 
 I have none, and I have seen none. 
 
 [lave you neither seen nor heard the 
 great lady singer ? ($ 171 4.) 
 
 No, and I shall neither see nor hear 
 her. 
 
 [ neither care about seeing nor hear- 
 ing her. 
 
 What did he do as soon as he had 
 recognised his sister ? 
 
 No eooner had he recognised her 
 than he threw himself in her arms. 
 
 Touch neither the flowers nor the 
 fruits. 
 
 [ shall touch neither these nor those. 
 
 Does that seamstress earn but two 
 
 dollars a week ? 
 That seamstress earns but two. 
 
 Would she not gain more if she was 
 a mantua-maker ? 
 
 JVavez-vous aucun de mes cahiers 1 
 
 Je n'en ai aucun, et je nen ai vu 
 aucun. 
 
 JV'avez-vous ni vu ni cntendu la 
 grande cantatrice? 
 
 Non, et je ne la verrai ni nc Fe ra- 
 te ndrai. 
 
 Je ne me soucie ni de J/i voir nC de 
 Tentendre. 
 
 Que fit-il aussitot qu'il eut reconna 
 sa sceur ? 
 
 II ne 1'eut pas plutdt reconnuc qu'il 
 sc jeta dans ses bras. 
 
 Ne touches ni les fleurs ni les fruits. 
 
 Je ne toucherai ni ceux-ci ni celles- 
 
 la. 
 Cette couturiire ne gagne-t-elle quo 
 
 deux gourdes par semaine ? 
 Cette couturiOre n'en gagnc quo 
 
 deux. 
 N'engagnerait-elle pasdavantage si 
 
 elle etait/tmeMse de robes ? 
 
 Ainsi nous voyons qu'avec les temps simples ne ae place toujours avant, 
 ct le complement, toujours apres le verbe. 
 
 Moreover, besides. Besides that. 
 Hesides what I have just said. 
 There are no means of finding money 
 
 now. 
 
 To push, shove, jog. Do not . . . me. 
 Along the road. Along the street. 
 
 All along . . 
 
 All the year round. 
 
 To enable to. 
 
 To enable John to ... 
 
 That enabled me to go. 
 
 To be able to. 
 
 He is able to do it. 
 
 To the right. On the right side or 
 
 hand. Straight on. 
 
 To the left. On the left side or hand. 
 Could you not tell me which is the 
 
 nearest way to .the city gate ? to 
 
 the bridge ? 
 
 follow (or go along) this street, and 
 when you are at t'ne end of it, 
 
 Eft outre, d'ailleurs. Outre ccla. 
 
 Outre ce que je viens de dire. 
 
 II n'y a pas moyen de trouver de 
 
 1'argent a present. 
 Pousser, 1. Ne me poussez pas. 
 Le long du chemin. Lc long do la 
 
 rue. 
 
 Tout le long de . . . 
 t Tout le long de 1'annce. 
 Melt re a meme de. 
 Mettre Jean a meme de . . . 
 Cela me mit a meme d'y ailer. 
 Etre en etat ou ctre d meme de. 
 II est en etat (a meme) de le faire. 
 A droite. Sur la droite. Tout 
 
 droit. 
 
 A gauche, Sur ia gauche. " 
 
 Ne pourriez-vous pas me dire qud 
 
 est le chemin le plus court pour 
 
 arriver a la porte de la ville f aa 
 
 pont ? 
 Suivez (allez tout le long de) ceite 
 
 rue, et quand vous serei au bout, 
 
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. 
 
 379 
 
 turn to the right, and you will find 
 a cross-way, which you must go 
 through. 
 
 And then, where shall I go ? 
 
 You will then enter a broad street, 
 which will bring you to a public 
 square, on the right you will see a 
 alley or court. 
 
 You must leave the blind alley on 
 your left, and pass under the arcsde 
 that is near it. 
 
 Then you must ask again. 
 
 An arcade. The cross- way. 
 
 A blind alley. A court. 
 
 To cross, to cross over. Let us cross. 
 
 tournez a droite, vous trjuverez uu 
 carrefour, que vous travcrserez. 
 
 Et puis, oil irai-je ? 
 
 Puis vous entrerez dans une rue as 
 sez large, qui vous munera sur uno 
 grande place publique, a droite 
 vous verrez un cul-de-sac ou uno 
 impasse. 
 
 Vous laisserez le cul-de-sac a main 
 gauche, et vous passerez sous lea 
 arcades qui sont a cote. 
 
 t Ensuite vous demanderez. 
 
 Une arcade. Le carrefour. 
 
 Un cul-de-sac. Une impasse. 
 
 Tnu'i'rscr, 1. Traversons. 
 
 SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME TlI^ME. IrO SeC. 
 
 Est-elle en etat d'aller a pied jusqu'a la promenade publique? 
 Non, elle n'est pas en etat de s ? y rendre a pied. D'ailleu.rs, ie me- 
 decin n'a-t-il pas defendu qu'elle aille (151) a pied 1 Oui ; il Pa 
 defendu ; d'ailleurs, elle ne peut plus mettre ses souliers. II faut que 
 nous ayons une voiture. Par ou passerons-nous? Nous irons tout 
 le long de notre rue, jusqu'au jardin public, la nous nous arreterons 
 quelques instants. Pour la laisser reposer. n ? est-ce pas ? Oui, et en 
 outre, pour la laisser jouir du frais, (de lafraicheur, cool, coolness.) 
 Apres cela, ne traverserons-nous pas le jardin public ? Non. Per- 
 sonne n'y passe en voiture. Ou irons-nous done ? Nous tqurnerons 
 a gauche, et nous passerons sous Parcade du coin, ou elle pourra 
 prendre le verre d'eau minerale ordonnee par le medecin. N'en 
 prendrons-nous pas aussi? Si fait; quoique le docteur ne Pait pas 
 ordonnee. De quel cote tournerons-nous ensuite ? A droite, jusqu'a 
 Pimpasse du voleur. Nous laisserons cette impasse a gauche, et 
 nous irons tout droit jusqu'a la promenade publique. La, nous 
 descend rons. La couturiere est-elle venue ? La faiseuse de robes 
 a-t-elle envoye les robes neuves? Qui est votre faiseuse de robes'? 
 
 Who pushes me so? I cannot write, if you do it any more. No- 
 body pusnea you. No, nobody pushes me now, but somebody did 
 push me a little while ago. Nobody has pushed you. You write 
 badly, and you will blame us for it. Why does that officer push that 
 man all. along the street? Because he is a good-for-nothing fellow, 
 xvho will do nothing. What is the gardener going to put all along 
 this wall ? He is going to put some trees there. Fruit-trees ? (Des 
 mbres fruitiersJ) 1 Plum-trees here, pear-trees there, further on 
 
 1 Peche, pecker, peach-tree ; pomme, pommier, apple-tree ; abricot, abri- 
 cotier. apricot-tree; hence, prunier, ceritier. amandier, rosier, (rose-bush.) 
 
K80 
 
 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. 1 2.) 
 
 peach-trees.- -Is he not going to put cherry-trees there ? No, because 
 they grow too big, (Us viennent trop gros } ) and so do apple-trees. 
 Is it difficult to get money now ? No, it is not difficult to find, bu! 
 as usual you must give a good security, (bonne securite.) Can you 
 procure me any? What security have you to give? Is not my 
 name sufficient ? A single name is not sufficient for capitalists, (tin 
 capitaliste ou rentier.) 
 
 What did you do for him? I lent him a horse, and that has 
 enabled him to join his regiment in time. Why did he not start on 
 horseback ? He di3. not, because he depended on the steamboats. 
 What has become of them? One has been burned, so that he 
 could not have continued his journey (voyage) if I had not lent him 
 a horse. Has he sent him back ? (rcnvoycr, I.) I suppose the horse 
 is on the way ; but as it requires four days for the journey, he will 
 arrive only the day after to-morrow. Did the colonel write to you by 
 mail, or did he send a message by the electric telegraph t We have no 
 electric telegraph along our roads, so that he wrote me by mail. In 
 the forests there must be (il doit y avoir) many cross-ways, (bicn dcs } ) 
 how can the mail-riders (les courriers) recognise them? They are 
 ased to them. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Dans les temps composes. ($ 171 4, 5.) 
 
 A-t-on appele aucun dcs ouvriers ? 
 On ncn a appeld aucun. 
 On n'a appele personne. 
 JVaurait-elle fmt-oue cela ? 
 Elle n'en auran fait gucrc plus, ou 
 elle 11 en aurait guere plus fait. 
 
 A-t-elle laisse mon livre quelque 
 
 part ? 
 
 Elle ne 1'a laisse nulle part. 
 t Se marier, 1. Ne vous mariez pas. 
 pouscr, 1, quelqu'un. 
 JMarier, (donncr en maria^e.) 
 Mon cousin, ayant marie sa SOBUI 
 
 dpousa Mademoiselle Delby. 
 M. votre cousin est-il marie ? 
 Non, il est encore garcon, 
 Votre niece est-elle mariee ? 
 Non, mais elle va se marier. 
 Eire garc.on. Un vieux gircon, 
 Une vieille fille. 
 Embarrasse. 
 Un embarraa. 
 
 Were any of the workmen called ? 
 Not one of them was called. 
 Nobody has been called. 
 Would she have done but that ? 
 She would have done but little more, 
 
 or, she would not have done much 
 
 more. 
 Has she left my book anywhere ? 
 
 She left it nowhere. 
 
 To get (or be) married. Do not get m. 
 
 To marry somebody. 
 
 To marry, (to give in marriage.) 
 
 My cousin, having given his sister in 
 
 marriage, marriedj|jjdj^^y. 
 Is your cousin marflJl 
 No, he is still a b 
 Is your niece marriei 
 No, but she is going to be married- 
 To be a bachelor. An old bachelor. 
 An old girl, maid. 
 Embarrassed, puzzled, at a less. 
 An embarrassment, a puzzle. 
 
SEVENTY-SECOKrf LESSON. 
 
 981 
 
 Vou embarrass (puzzle) me. 
 You puzzle (perplex) me. 
 He asks my sister in marriage. 
 The measure. 
 To take measures. 
 I shall take other measures, 
 'roocness ! how rapidly time passes 
 in your society . 
 
 The compliment. 
 
 You make me a compliment which I 
 
 do not know how to answer. 
 It is not my fault. 
 Do not lay it to my charge. 
 To lay the fault to one's charge. 
 Who can help it ? Whose fault is it < 
 
 I cannot help it. 
 
 The delay. He does it without delay. 
 I must go, (must be ofT.) I am off. 
 (.o away ! Begone ! 
 
 To jest, joke, be in fun. Do not trifle. 
 The jest, joke. 
 Vou are jesting. 
 
 Vous m'embarrassez. 
 
 Vousme mettez dans I'embarras. 
 
 II dcmande ma sceur en manage. 
 
 La mesure. 
 
 Prendre des mesures. 
 
 Je prendrai d'autres mesures. 
 
 Mon Dieu ! que le temps passe vitc 
 
 dans votre societe ! (en votre com- 
 
 pagnie.) 
 
 Le compliment. 
 Vous nie faites un compliment au- 
 
 quel je ne sais que repondre. 
 Ce n'est pas ma fauje. 
 Ne me 1'imputez pas. 
 Imputer, 1, la faute a quelqu'un. 
 A qui est la faute ? 
 
 ( Je ne sais qu'y faire. 
 \ Je n 
 
 ne saurais qu'y faire. 
 Le delai. II le fait sans delai. 
 Je me sauve. Je vais me sauver. 
 Sauvez-vous ! Allez-vous-en ! 
 Plaisanter, 1. Ne plaisantez point. 
 La plaisanterie, le badinage. 
 Vous badinez. Vous vous moquez. 
 
 Si la negation forme le nominatif, il y a un changement dans la maniera 
 de 1'employer. ($ 151 6.) 
 
 Does anything please them ? 
 
 No, since their return nothing pleases 
 
 them. 
 
 Nobody cares to have them. 
 Neither suit me. 
 Neither these nor those house3 will 
 
 sell dear. 
 
 None of my friends is going. 
 No one knows it. 
 
 Quelque chose leur plait-il ? 
 
 Non, depuis leur retour rien ne leur 
 
 plait. 
 
 Personne ne se soucie de les avoir. 
 .Z\ r tTun7iirautre7zemeconviennen-t. 
 Ni ces maisons-ci ni celles-la ne sc 
 
 vendront cher. 
 Aucun de mes amis n'y va. 
 JVwZ, (pas un) ne le sait. 
 
 SoiXANTE-DOUZLfcME TH&ME. 2de SeC. 
 
 Votre sccur, nva-t-on dit, se marie bientot. Oui, elle se mariera 
 la semaine prochaine. Ne devait-elle pas se marier le mois passe 1 
 Si fait, mais le colonel qu'elle va epouser n'a pas pu quitter son 
 regiment alors. Est-il ici pour long-temps 1 Non, il n ; y restera 
 que quelques semaines. C'est dommage (57 2 ) qiril soit oblige 
 (151) de partir si tot, n ? est-ce pas?- Je presume qu'il aura le tempa 
 de passer la lunc de mid (honey-moon) ici. En outre, s'il ne reste 
 pas, ce n ? est pas sa faute. II prendra, peut-etre, des mesures poui 
 
 ne pas partir si tot. Mile. S , ne va-t-elle pas se marier? Non y 
 
 elle a tant d'admiraleors (admirers) qu'elle eft embarrassee dans 
 
882' SEVENTY-SECOND LESION. (2.) 
 
 son choix. Qui vous blame ? Mon oncle me blame, mats je ne 
 saurais qu'y faire. Est-ce ma faute, si j'ai mauvaise memoire ? 1< 
 me faut si long-temps pour apprendre mes lecons, que je m'ennuie, 
 que je nrendors, et que je n'apprends lien. Votre oncle Jacques e&l 
 un vieux garcon, n'est-ce pas? Non, il est marie, mais il n'a pas 
 d'enfants. Votre cousine est presque vieille filk, n'est-ce pas'? Oui y 
 c'est tout-a-fait une vieille fille. 
 
 Bless me ! how rapidly time passes in your society ! You make 
 me a compliment which I do not know how to answer. Have you 
 bought your watch in Paris ? I have not bought it; my uncle has 
 made me a present of it, (en.) What has that woman intrusted 
 you with ? She has intrusted me with a secret about a (d j un) great 
 count who is in great embarrassment about the (d cause dit) manv^c 
 of one of his daughters. Does any one ask her in marriage ? The 
 man who demands her in marriage is a nobleman of the neighbor- 
 hood, (le voisinage.) Is he rich? No, he is a poor devil, (diablc : ) } 
 who has not a sou, (le sou,) and who, besides, is old and disagreea- 
 ble. You say you have no friends among your schoolfellows, (le 
 condisciplc :) but is it not your fault? You Lave spoken ill (mal parlc] 
 of them, and they have not offended you. 
 
 What are you astonished at? I am astonished to find you still in 
 bed. If you knew how (coinbicn) sick I am, you would not be 
 astonished (fern.) at it. John, (Jean!) What is your pleasure. Sir.' 
 Bring some wine. Presently, Sir. Henry! Madam? Make the 
 lire, (dufcu.) The maid-servant has made it already. Bring me 
 some paper, pens, and ink. Bring me also some sand (du sable) or 
 blotting-paper, (du papier brouillard,) sealing-wax, (de la circ d 
 cachctcr,) and a light, (de la lumierc.) I am going for the blotting- 
 paper, the sealing-wax, and the light ; but we have no sand. Never 
 mind the sand. Afterwards you will go to my sister's, to tell her 
 /lot to wait for me. Be back again before 12 o'clock, to carry my 
 letters to the post-office. Very well, Madam. Do not fail, for you 
 know that the mail closes (se fermc) at 12, and the letters must be 
 (il faut que , $151) in the post office before (avant quc, $151) the 
 hour strikes. I will not fail, Madam ; you may depend upon it. 
 
 1 Those two expressions: Mon Dicu ! and Diable, are constantly usea 
 by the French. The first is their only interjection for a host of English 
 ones, such as : Bless me ! Oh dear ! Dear me ! Gracious ! Goodness ! &c. &c. 
 The second is connected with every sort of epithets ; such as : bon diabie, 
 (good or clever fellow) ; mauvais diabie, (bad fellow,) vilain, vieux, petit, 
 grand, gros, beau, &c. &c. Whoever wishes to speak French with French 
 people, ought to become familiar with the terms, if not to use them himself, 
 at least to understand those who do. Hence, however reluctantly, we fol- 
 low the text of OllendorfT. 
 
SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON, (i) 
 
 SS3 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 
 Avec 1'infinitif. ($ 1717.) That 
 
 He likes to do nothing. 
 Has she ever promised not to touch 
 your tvatch ? No, never. 
 
 What are they afraid of? Not to 
 nave done their task in time. 
 
 Does your cousin expect many people 
 to her soiree ? 
 
 She is afraid she will have but few. 
 
 lie cannot take a joke, is no joker. 
 
 To beg someone's pardon. 
 
 To pardon. P ar do n m e . 
 
 Mir pardon. 
 The pardon. The time-piece, house 
 
 clock. 
 
 To udvunri', <ro too fust. Is it too fast ? 
 The watch goes too fast, (gains.) 
 To retard, go too slow. Is it too 
 
 slow ? 
 
 The time-piece goes too slow, (loses.) 
 My watch has stopped. 
 To go right, to stop, to go wrong. 
 Where did we stop ? 
 We left oflfat the fortieth lesson, page 
 
 one hundred and thirty-six. 
 To wind up a (town clock.) a watch. 
 To regulate a watch, a time-piece, a 
 
 clock. 
 Your watch is twenty minutes too 
 
 fast, and mine a quarter of an hour 
 
 too slow. 
 
 It will soon strike twelve. 
 Has it already struck twelve ? 
 To strike. Make the clock strike. 
 What hour is striking ? It is one. 
 
 On condition, or provided. 
 
 [ will lend you money, provided you 
 will henceforth he more economi- 
 cal than you have hitherto been. 
 
 Hereafter, for the future, henceforth. 
 The future. My prospect, fate. 
 Economical. 
 
 article must be carefully studied. 
 
 II aime a ne rien fairc. 
 
 A-t-elle jamais promis de ne paa 
 
 toucher votre montre ? Non, 
 
 jamais. 
 De quoi ont-ils peur ? De ne piu 
 
 avoir fait leur tdche a temps. 
 Votre cousine attend-elle beaucoup 
 
 de raonde a sa soiree ? 
 Elle craint de n'en avoir que ptm 
 
 (282, Obs. 65.) 
 t II n'entend pas railleric. 
 Demander pardon d quelqu'un. 
 Pardomicr, 1. Pardonnez-moi. 
 Je vous demande pardon. 
 Le pardon. Cette pendule. 
 
 Avancer, 1. Avance-t-elle ? 
 
 La montro avance. 
 
 Iietarder, 1. lletarde-t-elle ? 
 
 La pendule retarde. 
 
 Ma montre s'est arretde. 
 
 Aller bien, s'arreter. 1. aller mal. 
 
 t Ou en ctions-nous ? 
 
 t Nous etions a la lec.on quarante, 
 page cent-trente-six. 
 
 Monter une horloge, une montre. 
 
 Reglerune montre, une pendule, una 
 horloge. 
 
 Votre montre avance de vingt mi- 
 nutes, et la mienne retarde d'un 
 quart d'heure. 
 
 II va sonner midi. 
 
 Midi est-il deja sonne ? 
 
 Sonner, 1. Faitcs sonner la pendule. 
 
 Quelle heure sonne-t-il ? C'est une 
 heure. 
 
 A condition. 
 
 Sous condition. 
 
 Je vous preterai de 1'argent, a con- 
 dition que vous serez desormain 
 plus e'conome que vous n'avex 6l4 
 jusqu'ici. 
 
 Desormais, dorenavant, a 1'avenir 
 
 L'avenir. Mon avenir. 
 
 feconomo, rconomique, manager. 
 
884 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. 
 
 To renounce gambling. Renounce it. 
 To folio wad vice (counsel). Follow the 
 
 good. 
 
 You look so melancholy. 
 Adieu, farewell. 
 
 Renoncer au jeu. Renoncez-y. 
 Suivre un conseil. Suivez les bonr 
 
 Vous avcz 1'air si melancolique. 
 
 Adieu, farewell. > .,. 
 
 God be with you, good-by. > 
 
 Till I see you again. I Au plaisir dc vous revoir. 
 
 1 hope to see you again soon. | Sans adieu, au revoir. 
 
 Quand le verbo est omis (ometlre,* 4, to omit.) ($ 151 8.) Study it 
 carefully. 
 
 What is he afraid of? Nothing. 
 Whom is she afraid of? Nobody. 
 Whom does she fear ? No one. 
 Do you want five ? Not more than 
 two. 
 
 De quoi a-t-il peur ? De ricn. 
 De qui a-t-elle peur ? De personno. 
 Qui craint-elle ? Fersonne. 
 
 Vous en faut-il cinq ? Pas plus do 
 deux. 
 
 SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME TiifhiE. 3me Sec. 
 
 Quelle heure est-il? II est plus d'une heure et demie. Voua 
 dites qu'il est une heure et demie, et a ma montre, il n'est que midi 
 et demi. En moins de vingt-cinq minutes deux heures sonneront. 
 Pardonnez-moi, une heure n'est pas encore sonnee. Je vous assure 
 qu'il est deux heures moins vingt-quatre minutes, car ma montre va 
 tres-bien. Va-t-elle aussi bien qu'un chronometre ? Je crois qu'elle 
 va mieux que bien des chronometres. Elle va mieux que notre 
 horloge, qu'on est oblige de regler loules les semaines. Comment 
 va votre pendule ? Elle va super ieurcmcnt aussi. Ni ma montre ni 
 notre pendule ne varicnt (iwier, 1, to vary) d ; une minute dans six 
 mois. Elles vont toujours ensemble. Votre montre doit etre arretee 
 on derangee, (out of order.) Est-elle montee? Je 1'ai montee hier 
 soir en me couchant. A quelle condition le leriez-vous? Suivez 
 pon conseil a condition qu'il suive ($ 151) le votre. Son avenir ne 
 serait-il pas moins incertain s'il etait plus econome? Ne le serait-il 
 pas encore moins s'il renoncait au jeu ? Donnez-lui en le conseil 
 Te n'y manquerai pas. Adieu, au plaisir. Sans adieu. 
 
 Your schoolfellows have done you good, and nevertheless you 
 have quarrelled with them; why did you? Was it my fault? I 
 think it was theirs. Never mind. You must, without delay, make 
 your peace with them. Dialogue (le dialogue) between a tailor and 
 his journeyman, (le gar$on.) Charles, have you taken the clothes to 
 tho Count Narissi ? Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him. What did 
 he say ? He said nothing but (sinon) that he had a great mind to 
 give me a box on the ear, (des soufflets, plur..) because I had not 
 brought them sooner. What did you answer him ? Sir, said 1. 1 do 
 not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me; and if you do 
 
SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 
 
 385 
 
 not do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely had I said 
 jhat, when he put his hand to his sword, (porter la main d son epee,) 
 and I ran away. 
 
 Has it already struck twelve ? Yes, madam, t is already half- 
 past twelve. Is it so late? Is it possible? That 13 not late, it is 
 slill early. Does your watch go well? (bien?) No, Miss N., it is a 
 quarter of an hour too fast. And mine is half an hour too slow. 
 Perhaps it has stopped. In fact, you are right. Is it wound up ? 
 [t !e wound up, and yet (pourtant) it does not go. Do you hear? it 
 is striking one o'clock. Then I \vill regulate my watch and gc 
 homo. Pray (de grace) stay a little longer, (encore un peu !) I can- 
 not, for we dine precisely at one o'clock, (d une heure precise.) Adieu, 
 hen, till I see you again. You say you want fifty dollars; I will 
 lend them to you with all my heart, but on condition that you will 
 renounce gambling, (rcnoncer au jeu,) and be more economical than 
 you have hitherto been. I see now that you are my friend, and T 
 love yon too much not to follow your advice. 
 
 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON, 72d.Soixantc-trciziein? Lc$on : 73me 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 To last, (to wear well,) stand. A 
 
 short time. 
 
 That cloth will wear well. 
 How long has that coat .asted you ? 
 It lasted me a year. 
 That color is not a standing one. 
 
 To my, his, her, their, our liking. 
 To everybody's liking. 
 Nobody can do anything to his liking. 
 A boarding-house. A boarding-school. 
 To keep house, (a boarding-house.) 
 To board with any one or anywhere. 
 
 To be a boarder. 
 To exclaim. 
 To make uneasy. 
 To get or grow uneasy. 
 To be uneasy. 
 
 Why do yo i fret, (are you uneasy ?; 
 t do not fret, (am not uneasy.) 
 That news makes me uneasy. 
 
 am uneasy at not receiving any 
 
 D07.S. 
 
 33 
 
 Durer, 1. 
 
 Peu de temps 
 
 Ce drap durera bien. 
 
 Combien de temps cet habit \ou& 
 
 a-t-il dure ? II m' a dure un an. 
 Cette couleur n'est pas de dureo. 
 
 (II 1 , Obs. 27.) 
 
 A mon, son, leur, notre, gre. 
 Au gre de tout le monde. 
 On ne peut rien faire a son gre. 
 Une pension. 
 
 Tenir maison. Tenir pension, 
 
 fctre en pension. Se mettre en 
 
 pension. Eire penaionnaire. 
 
 S J eerier, 1. 
 Inquiet cr, 1. 
 S'inquieter. 
 
 fitre inquiet, fern, inquiete. 
 Pourquoi vous inquietez-vous ? 
 Je ne m'inquiete pas. 
 Cette nouvelle m'inquiete. 
 Je suis inquiet de ne point rocevofe 
 
 de nouvelles. 
 
886 
 
 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 
 
 She is uneasy about that affair. 
 
 Do not be uneasy. 
 
 The uneasiness, trouble. 
 
 Quiet. Be quiet, just wait, stop. 
 
 To quiet. Compose yourself 
 
 To change, alter, fade, pass away. 
 
 That man has altered a great deal 
 
 since I saw him. 
 To bt of use. 
 
 Of what use is that to you ? 
 T*nat is of no use to me. 
 Of what use is that to your brother ? 
 It is of no use to him. 
 Of what use is that stick to you ? 
 I use it to beat my dogs. 
 Of what use are those baskets to 
 
 your brother ? 
 He uses them to carry his vegetables 
 
 to market. 
 
 1 Elle est inquiete sur cette affaire, 
 Ne vous inquietez pas. 
 L'inquietude. 
 
 Tranquille. So'yez tranquillo 
 
 Tranquilliser, 1. Tranquillisez-voua 
 Changer, 1. La couleur change. 
 Get homme a beaucoup change de 
 
 puis que je re Tai vu. 
 t Servir,* 2, d quelque chose. 
 t A quoi cela vous sert-il ? 
 t Cela ne me sert a rien. 
 t A quoi cela sert-il a votre tren 1 f 
 t Cela ne lui sert fi rien. 
 t A quoi ce baton vous sert-il v 
 t II me sert a battre mes chiens. 
 t A quoi ces paniers servent-ils d 
 
 votre frere ? 
 t Us lui scrvent a porter 
 
 au marchu. 11 s'en .-rt poui 1 
 
 porter ses k'gu::M .- au niLjrcht. 
 
 SoiXAXTE-TitKiziKME TIIME. Ire Sec. 
 
 lu.'l d rap ferez-vous emplette? Je veux du drap vert; maia 
 je veux qu'il dure et que la couleur tienne ($ 151), qu-elle ne p; 
 pas Si vous voulez de bon drap, il faut aller chez les Messieurs 
 
 . Ne demeurenl-ils pas au coin de cette rue-ci .' Si fait. 
 
 la qn'ils ont leur magasin. Au dessus du (above the) magasin n'v 
 a-t-il pas une pension bien tenue? Si fait 7 il y a ce qu/on appelle 
 \ine pension d 'I a mode } (a fashionable boarding-house.) Vous con 
 naissez-vous en drap ? Oui, ass^z bien. Voulez-vous venir m'aider 
 a en choisir? Volontiers. Mais ne vous inquietez pas, soyez 
 
 tranquille ; car si vous achetez le drap chez ces MM. , il sera 
 
 bon et ]a couleur tiendra, elle ne changera pas, je vous assure. 
 Votre cousin a beaucoup change dornieremeiit, a-t-il ete malade ? 
 Son epouse est encore plus changce. Sont-ils dans une bonne pen- 
 sion 1 Combien de pensionnaires y a-t-il ? Qnel est le prix de la 
 pension? Si votre associe reste dans une mauvaise pension, a quoi 
 lui sert son argent? Est-il avare ? S'il esv marie ; pourquoi ne tient-il 
 pas maison ? La pension leur convient-elle ? 
 
 Sir, may (oser) I ask where General B lives? He lives neai 
 
 the arsenal, (arsenal, mas.,) on the other side of the river. Could you 
 tell me woich road I must (je dois) take to go there? You must go 
 ($ Irf 1) along \he shore, and at the end take a little street (quand 
 vous serez au boutj prenez une petite rue) on the right, which will 
 load you straight to his house. It is a fine house ; you will ^rid i 
 easily. I thank you, Sir. Does Captain N live here ? Yes, 
 
SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2) 
 
 387 
 
 Sir, walk in, (donnez-vous la peine d'cntrer,) if you please. Is the 
 captain at home ? I wish to have the honor (Vhonneur) to speak 
 to him. Yes, Sir, he is at home. Whom shall I have the honor to 
 
 announce? (annoncer?) I am from B , and my name is F , 
 
 Who keeps this fashionable boarding-house'? Miss P , an 
 
 old maid. 
 
 Last summer, when we were a hunting together, (ensemlle } ) 
 night grew upon us (la nuit nous surprit) at ten leagues (une lieue) at 
 least from our country seat, (la maison de campagne.) Well, (Eh 
 bicn,) where did you pass the night? I was v^ry uneasy at first, 
 but your brother, not in the least, (pas le moins du monde ;) on the 
 contrary, in his opinion (gre) it was an agreeable incident ; he tran- 
 quillized me so that I lost my uneasiness. After some time we 
 found a peasant's hut, where we passed the night. Here I had an 
 opportunity to see how clever your brother is. A few benches and 
 a truss of straw (une botte de paille) served him to make a comforta- 
 ble (commode) bed; he used a bottle as a candlestick, another bundle 
 of straw served us as a pillow, and our cravats as nightcaps. When 
 we awoke in the morning, we were as fresh and healthy (lien por* 
 iant) as if we had slept in our own beds. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE 
 
 Of what use are these bottles to your 
 
 landlord ? 
 
 They serve him to put his wine in. 
 To stand instead, to be as. 
 I use my gun as a stick. 
 This hole serves him for a house. 
 He usedj^ cravat as a nightcap. 
 
 fo araii 
 
 What avails it to you to cry ? 
 
 It avails me nothing. 
 
 Opposite to. 
 
 Opposite that house. 
 
 Opposite the garden 
 
 Opposite to me. 
 
 Right opposite. 
 
 He lives opposite the arsenal. 
 
 I .ive opposite the king's library. 
 
 To get hold of... J Seizeuponit . 
 
 JLC take possession of. ) 
 
 To witness. To show. 
 
 To give evidence against some one 
 
 . 2de Sec. 
 
 t A quoi ces bouteilleo servent-ellea 
 
 a votre hote ? 
 
 t Elles lui servent a mettre son vin. 
 t Servir,* de. *" 
 t Mon fusil me sert de baton, 
 t Ce trou lui sert de maison. 
 t Sa cravate lui a servi de bonnst d* 
 
 nuit. 
 
 t Servir,* (de before inf.) 
 t A quoi vous sert-il de plouier ? 
 t Cela ne me sert a rien. 
 Vis-a-vis de. 
 
 Vis-a-vis de cette maison. 
 Vis-a-vis du jardin. 
 Vis-a-vis de moi. 
 Tout vis-a-vis. 
 
 II demeure vis-a-vis de V arscrM,l. 
 Je demeure vis-a-vis de la biblio- 
 theque royale. 
 
 S'emparer de . .'. Emparez-vous-cn 
 
 Temoigner, 1. 
 
 Temoigner centre quelqu'an. 
 
388 
 
 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 
 
 He has shown a great deal of friend- 
 ship to me. 
 
 To turn some one into ridicule. 
 
 To become ridiculous. 
 
 To make one's self ridiculous. 
 
 To be born. 
 
 Wnere were you born ? 
 
 I was born in this country. 
 
 Where was your sister born ? 
 
 She was born in the United States of 
 North America. 
 
 Where were your brothers born ? 
 
 They were born in France. 
 
 The game. The gnme-bag, pouch. 
 
 A horse-hair. The feathers. 
 
 A pillow. A cushion, down. 
 
 A hair cushion. A down pillow. 
 
 I'lii- boarder. 
 
 The pensioner. 
 
 II in' a temoigne beaucoup d'oinii'iA 
 
 Tourner quelqu'un en ridicule. 
 
 Tomber dans le ridicule. 
 
 Se rendre ridicule. 
 
 Eire ne. 
 
 t Ou etes-vous ne ? 
 
 t Je suis ne dans ce pays-ci. 
 
 t Ou vctre sceur est-elle nee ? 
 
 t Elle cst ne'e aux tats Unis dc 
 
 1'Aim'ruiue du Nord. 
 t Oil \os frcres eont-ils nes ? 
 t Us sont ncs en France. 
 Le gibicr. La gibecieie. 
 
 Un crin. Les plumes. 
 
 Un oreiller. Un coussin, le duvet.-" 
 Un coussin de crin. Un oreiller de 
 
 duvet. 
 Le pensionnairc . .. du gouverne- 
 
 ment. 
 
 Soi.x Sec. 
 
 A 41101 lui sert dc savoir le Franrais, si elle ne le parle, ni ne le 
 lit, ni ne le pratique? ( 171 3.) II lui servira quand elle voyagera 
 pn Kurope. Se sert-il de sa gibeciere pour oreiller? Oui, lorsqu'il 
 se couche sous les arbres ;i la rampairne. A qnoi vous sert de 1 
 ailliger? Je ne peux m'empecher d'etre alllige du malheur a: 
 a mon ami. Son cheval lui sert-il a quelque chose ? 11 se promene 
 ;i i-hoval tous les jours. Qu son fils est-il ne? II est ne a Philadel- 
 phie. Sa fille y est-elle nee aussi? Oui ; elle est nee dans la 
 maison vis-a-vis. Si vous etiez ne en Ecosse, mon petit bon liomme, 
 que seriez-vous? Je serais ecossais, irest-ce pas ? ( Kt 
 
 votre strur que serait-elle, si elle y etait nee ? Elle serait ecossais 
 aussi Non pas ecossais, mais ecossaisc . De quoi le voleur s 7 est-U 
 empare? ii s'est cmpare de tout ce qu ? il a pu. Qui a temoigne 
 rontre lui? Le bijoutier qui demeurak vis-a-vis de la poste, el 
 1'aubergiste qui demeure au coin de la place ou se trouve la bibli- 
 otheque de la ville. Ne tournez personne en ridicule. Aimeriez- 
 vous a etre tourne en ridicule ? Ne ferai-je pas bien de le l^attre, s'il 
 me tourne en ridicule ? 
 
 Which is the shortest (court) way to the arsena. ? \un arsenal?] 
 Go down (suivez) this street, and when you come to the end (au 
 bout,} turn to the left, and take the cross-way, (vous tnmvercz un 
 que vous travcrscrcz :) you will then enter into a rather narrow (ttroit] 
 street, which will lead you to a great square, (Li place,} where you 
 will soe a bl>id alley. Through (par) which I must pas< ? No, for 
 
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 3S9 
 
 there is no outlet, (une issue.) You must leave it on the right, and 
 pass under the arcade which is near it. And then 1 And then you 
 must inquire, (further.) I am very much obliged to you. Do not 
 mention it, (il n j y a pas de quoi.) Are you able to translate an 
 English letter into French? I am. Who has taught you? My 
 French master has enabled me to do it. Was your French teacher 
 born in France ? No, he was not. 
 
 Your mother is wrong to fret about her eldest son; for, although 
 he is ($ 151) in the army, (dVarmee,') he knows how to get out of a 
 bad scrape. A candidate (un candidat) petitioned (dcmandc" a) the 
 king of Prussia (de Prusse) for an employment, (un cmploi.) This 
 prince asked him where he was born. "I was born at Berlin," 
 answered he. " Begone ! ;; said the monarch, (le monarque,) " all 
 -the men of Berlin (un Bcrlinois) are good for nothing/" 7 "I beg 
 your majesty's pardon,' 7 replied the candidate ; " there are some good 
 ones, and I know two." " Which are those twc ?" asked the king. 
 1 The first," replied the candidate, " is your majesty, and I am the 
 second." The king could not help laughing (ne put stemptcher de 
 rire) at this answer, and granted (accordcr) the request, (li de- 
 mande.) 
 
 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Soixant'.-quatorziemc Lcon } lime. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 To lose sight of. 
 
 The sight. My sight is good. (I 
 
 have good sigk.t.) 
 I wear spectacles because my sight 
 
 is bad, (or I have a bad sight.) (24 2 , 
 
 065. 55.) 
 
 Are you near-sighted,or iOng-sighted ? 
 I am near-sighted. 
 The ship is so far off, that we shall 
 
 eoon lose sight of it. 
 I have lost sight of that. 
 As it is long since I was in England, 
 
 I have lost sight of your brother. 
 
 Perdrr. de vue. 
 La vuc. 
 
 t J'ai bonne v* 
 
 Je porte des lunettes parce que j'ai 
 Zavuemauvaise, (oumauvaise vue.) 
 
 t Avez-vous la vue courte ou longue ? 
 
 t J'ai la vue courte. 
 
 Le bailment est si loin, que nous lo 
 
 perdrons bientot de vue. 
 J'ai perdu cela de vue. 
 Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai 
 
 et<5 en Angleterre, j'ai perdu voirc 
 
 frere de vue. 
 Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai 
 
 lude Francois, je Tai perdu de vuo. 
 
 As it is long since I have read any 
 
 French, 1 have lost sight of it. 
 
 Obs. 1GO. Ought and sliould (when it means ought) are rendered into 
 French by the condiliound ($ 148) of the verb devoir, to owe. Ought te 
 have, should have, by the conditiunnel pasfc. ($ 149.) 
 
390 
 
 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 You ought to or should do that. 
 
 He ought not to speak thus to his 
 
 father. 
 We ought to go thither earlier. 
 
 They should listen to what you say. 
 
 You should pay more attention to 
 what I say. 
 
 You ought to have done that. 
 
 2Ie should have managed the thing 
 better than he has done. 
 
 You should have managed the thing 
 differently. 
 
 They ought to have managed the thing 
 as I did. 
 
 We ought to have managed it differ- 
 ently from what they did. 
 
 You ought to have played on the flute 
 
 while I was playing on the violin. 
 I wished to do it, but my flute was 
 
 out of order. 
 
 He ought to have wished it to you. 
 A stay, a sojourn. To make a stay. 
 Do you intend to make a long stay in 
 
 the town ? 
 I do not intend to make a lon^ stay 
 
 in it. 
 
 Vous devriez faire eel a. 
 
 II ne devrait pas parler ainsi a BOC 
 
 pere. 
 Nous devrions y aller de meilleurfl 
 
 heure. 
 Us devraient e*couter ce quo Tout 
 
 dites. 
 Vous devriez faire plus d'atteation a 
 
 ce que je dis. 
 Vous auriez du faire cela. 
 II aurait du s' y prendre mieux qu T 
 
 n'a fait. 
 Vous auriez du vous y prendre d' 
 
 maniere differente. 
 Us auraient du s'y prendre comm 
 
 je m'y suis pris. 
 Nous aurions du nous y prendre 
 
 d'une autre maniere qu : ils ne s'v 
 
 sont pris. 
 Vous auriez du jouer de la flute pen 
 
 dant que je jouais du violon. 
 Je souhaitais le faire. mais ma flut- 
 
 etait derange'e. 
 
 II aurait du vous le souhaiter. 
 Un sejour. Faire un sejour, 
 Comptez-vous faire un long sej< 
 
 dans la ville ? 
 Je ne compte pas y faire un long 
 
 jour. 
 
 . 
 
 SoixANTE-QUATORZiiiMB TnfiiviE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Y a-t-il long-temps que vous n'avez vu Favocat? Oui, je 1'ai 
 perdu de vue. Voyez cet oiseau, comme il est haut ! II est presque 
 d pcrte de vue, (out of sight.) Pourquoi, lui qui a la vue courte, ne 
 porte-t-il pas de lunettes'? II ne s'en soucie pas. Vous devriez 
 faire ce que votre mere desire. Je Paurais fait, si j 'avals pu; mais 
 quoique j'aie essaye trois fois, je n ? ai pas pu reussir. Vous voila 
 deja de retour ! Vous auriez du faire un plus long sejour aupres de 
 votre vieille tante. J'y en ai fait un assez long, ne vous deplaise, 
 (please your honor.) Quei sejour y avez-vous fait? Vous croirez a 
 peine que fy ai fait un sejour de six sernaines et demie. Ce n'est 
 pas possible ! Si fait, c'est tres-possible. J'etais aupres d'elle le 14 
 Juin, et je ne Pai quittee que hier; et vous savez que c ? est aujour- 
 d'hui le 4 d'aout; ainsi comptez. Je ne me le serais pas imagine 
 Vous m'avez perdu de vue sans chagrin. 
 
 A peasant, (paysan,) having seen that old men, (le vieillard,) 
 svhose sight was bad, used spectacles to read, went to an optician 
 
SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 391 
 
 (tm opticien) and asked for a pair The peasant then took a book, 
 and, having opened it, said the spectacles were not good, (fern.) 
 The optician put another pair of the best which he could find in hia 
 shop (la boutique) upon his nose ; but the peasant being still unable 
 to read ? the merchant said to him : ' My friend, perhaps you cannot 
 read at allP "If I could," said the peasant, "I should not want 
 your spectacles." I thought that you would be thirsty; that is the 
 reason I brought you to the apothecary's shop to take a glass of 
 mineral water and syrup. Give us two glasses of mineral water. 
 What syrup, Miss? No matter which, (n'importc le quel ;) I like 
 mem all. 
 
 .1 have seen six players (le joueur) to-day, who were all winning 
 (gagner) at the same time, (en meme temps.) That cannot be, for a 
 player can only win when another loses. You would be right if 1 
 were speaking of people who play at c,rds or billiards, (06s. 118, 
 5 1 1 -) but I am speaking of flute and violin players, (de joueur s de 
 Jlute et de violon.) Do you sometimes practise (fain*) music ? (de 
 la musique?) Very often, for I like it much. What instrument 
 (Obs. 118, 51 1 ) do you play? I play the violin, and my sister plays 
 the piano. My brother, who plays the bass, (la basse.) accompanies 
 (accompagner) us, and Miss Stolz sometimes applauds (applaudir) us. 
 Does she not also play some musical instrument ? (un instrument 
 de musique?) She plays the harp, (la harpe,) but she is too proud 
 (fiere) to practise music with us. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 To suspect, to guess. 
 
 I suspect what he has done. 
 
 He does not suspect what is going to 
 
 happonto him. 
 To think of some one or of something. 
 
 Oi whom do you think ? 
 
 I tnink of my friend. 
 
 Do you think often of him her ? 
 
 I do, very often. 
 
 Of what do you think ? 
 
 To turn upon. To be the question. 
 
 It is questioned, it turns upon. 
 
 The questfon is not your pleasure, 
 
 but your improvement. 
 You play, Sir, but playing is not the 
 
 thing, but studying. 
 
 What is going on ? 
 
 Se douter, 1, (de, av. 1'inf.) 
 
 Je me doute de ce qu'il a fait. 
 
 II ne se doute pas de ce qui va lui 
 
 arriver. 
 Penser d quelqu'un ou d quelquc 
 
 chose. 
 
 A qui pensez-vous ? 
 Je pense a mon ami amie. 
 Y pensez-vous souvent ? ($50, 2.) 
 J'y pense tres-souvent. 
 A quoi pensez-vous ? 
 t S'agirde. 
 II s'agit de. 
 II ne s'agit pas de votre plaisir, mail 
 
 de vos progres. 
 Vous jouez, Monsieur, mais il no 
 
 s'agit pas de jouer, il s'agit d'etu 
 
 dier. 
 De quoi s'agit-il ? 
 
392 
 
 SEVENTY-FOURI fl LESSON. (2.) 
 
 The question 'a to know what we 
 shall do to pass the time agreeably. 
 
 On purpose. 
 
 I beg your pardon, I have not done 
 
 it on purpose, 
 
 To be silent, beingsilent, been silent. 
 Da eiient, quit talking. Hush, I say. 
 Are you silent? Do you cease talking? 
 [ am. I do. He is never silent. 
 After speaking half an hour he was 
 
 silent, he ceased speaking, &c. 
 
 II s'agit de savoir ce que nous feionn 
 poir passer notre temps agreable 
 ment. 
 
 Expres. 
 
 Je vous demande pardon, je ne 1'ai 
 pas fait expres. 
 
 t Se taire,* 4. ai?ant tu. 
 
 t Taisez-vous. Taisez-vous done. 
 
 t Vous taisez-vous? 
 
 t Je me tais. II ne se tait jemais. 
 
 Apres avoir parlc pendant une dt?mi- 
 heure, il se tut. 
 
 Ols. 1C1. Could ($149) is rendered by the r 
 be able.) Alight, by the conditionnel mod;: 
 have, might have, by the conditionnel j 
 
 Could you speak if you tried ? Pourriez-vou* parler si vi> 
 
 / mi 'lit, but I am sure he could. 
 
 Could yu ring before a large audi- 
 ence ? 
 
 / could not, but Miss B., (could,) 
 might. 
 
 (\ntld thtij han danced llie Polka? 
 
 They might, but 1 know she could 
 ilam-cd it.) 
 
 ( 'ould you have played before those 
 great musician 
 
 We could not, but Henry might have 
 played before them. 
 
 sntiitz ? 
 Sc pinirrnif . 
 
 <;u'il pourrnit. 
 
 inter dcva: 
 
 Obs. 116; une grandc audit 
 Jc ne pourrais pas, mais V 
 
 (pourrait,) poitrruit : 
 Auraicnt-ils pit danser le Polka ? 
 Ilsaurr. t 're pu, mcii - 
 
 qu'ellc I'aurait pu. 
 
 rous pu jouer devant ces 
 grands musiciens ? 
 Abu* n'aurion* pas pu, mais Henri 
 aurait pcut-etre pu jouer 
 
 SOIXANTE-QUATORZlfcME TlI^ME. 2de SeC. 
 
 Savez-vous ce qu'il aurait fait si je n'avais pas ele ici? Je mo 
 doute de ce qu'il aurait voulu faire. Aurait-il pu reussir ? II y serait 
 peut-etre parvenu. A cjui pensez-vous quand vous ne pensez a 
 lieu ? Je pense a la personne qui fait cette belle question. DC 
 quoi s'agit-i ? 11 s'agit du musicien, de Phonneur de la famille. 
 De quoi s ? agissait-in De savoir s : ii avail casse le chandelier 
 expres ou non. Moi, je crois qu ? il Tavait fait expres. Sil Pavait 
 fait expres, il ne pleurerait pas de cette maniere. Ce n 7 est que pour 
 nous faire croire qu'il ne Fa pas fait expres. Taisez-vous ; vous lu 
 impute z toujours des torts. Je ne me tairai pas pour vous. Laissons 
 cela, et racontez-nous une anecdote. Une ville assez pauvre fit une 
 depense considerable en fetes et en illuminations, a ''occasion du 
 passage ie son prince. Celui-ci en paraissar.t etonne un courtisan 
 
SEVENTY-FIFTH Lfcs^ON. ^1.) 393 
 
 (& courtier) dit, " Elle n ? a fait que ce qirelle devait a votre majesle.' 
 c< O'est vrai," reprit un autre, " mais elle doit tout ce qirelle a fait." 
 C'est tres-bien, je ne me doutais pas que vous auriez si bleu reussi 
 Je vous remercie du compliment. 
 
 A thief having one day entered a boarding-house, stole three 
 cloaks, (le manteau.) In going away he was met by one of the 
 hoarders, who had a fine laced (galonne) cloak. Seeing so many 
 cloaks, he asked the man where he had taken them. The thief 
 answered boldly (froidemcnt) that they belonged to three gentlemen 
 of the house, who had given them to be cleaned, (a degraisscr.) 
 " Then you must also clean (degraisscs done aussi) mine, for it is 
 very much in need of it, (en avoir grand besom,") said the boarder; 
 "but," added he, " you must return it to me at three o'clock." " I 
 shall not fail, (y manqucr,) Sir," answered the thief, as he carried 
 off (cmportcr) the four clonks, with which he (qu'\~) is still to return, 
 (n\i pas encore rapportes.) 
 
 You are singing, (chanter,) gentlemen, but it is not a time for (il 
 . you ought to be silent, and to listen to what 
 
 you are told. We are at a loss. What are you at a loss about? I 
 am ^-iii:ir to tell you : the question is with us how we shall pass our 
 time agreeably. Play a game at billiards or at chess. (5 1 1 .) We 
 have proposed joining a hunting-party; do you go with us? (ctes-vous 
 dcs notrcs?) 1 cannot, for I have not done my task yet; and if I 
 cct il, my master will scold me. Every one according to hid 
 liking; if you like staying at home better than going a hunting, we 
 
 raunot hinder you. Does Mr. B go with us? Perhaps. I 
 
 should not like to go with him, for he is too great a talker, (trop 
 d.) excepting that, (d cela pres } ) he is a clever man, a fine fellow, 
 (VH excellent homiic.) 
 
 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON, 75th. Smxantc-quinsieme Lcron, 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Towards, (physically,) (morally.) 
 
 He comes towards me us. 
 
 He has behaved very well towards me. 
 
 We must always behave well towards 
 
 everybody. 
 The behavior of others is but an 
 
 echo of our own. If we behave 
 
 Vers. Envers. 
 
 II vient vcrs moi nous. 
 
 II s'est tres-b'en comporte cnven 
 
 moi. 
 II faut toujours nous bien comportcr 
 
 envers tout le monde. 
 La concfuite des autres n'est qu'un 
 
 echo de la notre. Si nous nous 
 
 well towards them, they will also | comportons bien envers eux, ils BC 
 
594 
 
 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON 
 
 behave well towards us ; but if we 
 use them ill, we must not expect 
 better from them. 
 
 To treat or to use somebody well. 
 To use somebody ill. 
 As you have always used me well, I 
 will not use you ill. 
 
 \s he haa always used me well, I 
 uiways used him in the same 
 manner. 
 
 To delay, (to tarry.} 
 Do nut be long before you return. 
 1 shall not be long before 1 return. 
 / long to or for. 
 
 Obs. 1G2. The subject of the verb /</;:, must be rendered in Frenr 
 I he indirect object, me, te, lui, no; : ln/r. (:>'.)', Obs. 90.) 
 
 ng to see my brother. t H me tarde de voir mon fr< 
 
 t II lui tarde de rec< 
 t 11 nous tarde de d . 
 
 comporteront bien ou^si enveri 
 nous; mais si nous en usons mal 
 avec eux, nous ne devons pas at- 
 tendre mieux de leur part. 
 En user lien avcc quelqu'un. 
 En user mal avec quelqu'un. 
 Comme vous en avez use toujours 
 bien avec moi, je n'en usen;i pas 
 mal avec vous. 
 
 Comme il en a toujours bien use arec 
 moi, j'en ai toujours usd de la 
 ;ne maniure avec lui. 
 r, 1, (takes a av. rinf. 
 irdez pas d revenir. 
 
 irderai pas d revenir. 
 t 11 me tarde . . . (unipersont. 
 
 ve his money. 
 
 \\V Idi i jr lor dinner, bccauy 
 v hungry. 
 
 tired. 
 
 '' off. 
 
 L- t us put that oil' until to-morrow. 
 Let us put ofl'that Irsson until another 
 
 (imr. 
 
 t II leu: 
 
 ice. 
 
 fois. 
 
 SGJ.X Ire Sec. 
 
 Comment Jacques se couduit-ii envers ses parents'? II ne 
 duit j>;is biiMi i v. A-t-il des amisici? 11 i 
 
 il si* coinporte'rnal envers tout le monde. Qu'aurait-il du faire , 
 (jiril me vit? 11 aurait du s ? avancer vers moi et me souhaiter unt 
 bonne (MncC) (a : \vyear.) Ne leurtarde-t-il pasde sebaigner 1 
 
 (to bathe?) Si fait, il leur tarde beaucoup: mais 1'eau de la riviere 
 est encore trop froide. Ne vous tarde-t-il pas que lecourrier arrive? 
 ($151.) Sifait; mais il me tarderait beaucoup plus si je n'avais pas 
 eiitoiulu parlor de mon ami. Ne tardez pas a revenir, entendez- 
 vous? Je ne tarderai pag car il me tarde de partir. Rernettrons- 
 nous TalTaire a demain? Non, ne la remettons pas; car il roua 
 tarde qu'elle soit finie. ( 151.) Que voudriez-vous savoir? II r.ous 
 larde de connaitre le resultat (the result) de Selection Commerft 
 5 7 est il comporte envers sa femme? Pendant la lune de miel, il 
 s'est comporto comme il faut. Et ensuite ? Mal, comme il le faij 
 envers toutes ses connaissances. 
 
SEVENTY-FIFTH L ESSON. (2.) 
 
 395 
 
 As yoj have always used me well, I will use you in llie same 
 rummer. I will lend you the money you want, but on condition that 
 you will return it to me next week. You may depend upon it. 
 How has my son behaved towards you ? He has behaved well 
 towards me, for he behaves well towards everybody. His fathei 
 fold him often : The behavior of others is but an echo of our own, 
 If we behave well towards them, they will also behave well towards 
 js; but if we use them ill, we must not expect better from them. 
 May I see your brothers ? You will see them to-morrow. As they 
 Have just arrived from a long journey, (Ic voyage,) they long for sleep, 
 for they are very tired. What has my sister said? She said that 
 ehe longed for dinner, because she was very hungry. 
 
 I have the honor to wish you a good morning. How do you do? 
 Very well -^rvice. And how are all at home? Tc.lerably 
 
 well, thank God ! a little indisposed, (indisposce,) but 
 
 she is well, (rctablie ;) she told (charger dc) me to give you her best 
 compliments. 1 am irlad (charme) to lu'ar that she is well. As for 
 you, you are health it>elf. (la saute vicmc ;) you cannot look better, 
 s- avez la mcillcurc mine da mo-ndc.) 1 have no time to be ill 
 my business (mcs njfaircs) would not permit me. Please (donnez- 
 'vous la pcinc) to til down ; here is a chair. I will not detain (dis- 
 trairc) you from your bi; s occupations;) I know that a mer- 
 
 dia-u's urn, i> ; (qitc Ic temps cst precicux d un negotiant.) 
 
 VOGABULAIBl 
 
 fortqble, 
 
 I am very much at in} case upon 
 
 this chr.ir. 
 You are uncomfortable upon your 
 
 chair. 
 
 What can that he ? 
 Wo are uncomfortable in that board- 
 
 ing-house. 
 That man is well ofT, for he has 
 
 plenty of money. 
 That man is badly off, for he is poor. 
 
 To make o?ie's self comfortable. 
 Make yourself comfortable. 
 To be uncomfortable. 
 To inconvenience one's self. 
 To put one's self out of the way. 
 J)o not put yourself out of the \vny. 
 That man never inconveniences him- 
 self; he never does it for anybody. 
 
 . 2dc Sec. 
 Etre d sou a 
 trc mal d sou aix<-. 
 Jc suis bien a rnon aisc sur cetto 
 
 chaise. 
 Vous Ctcs mal a votre aise sur votre 
 
 chaise. 
 
 t Qu'est-ce que cela peut Otre ? 
 Nous sommes mal a notre aise dana 
 
 cette pension. 
 Get homme est a son aise, car il a 
 
 beaucoup d'argent. 
 Get homme est mal a son aise, parcc 
 
 qu'il est pauvre. 
 Se melt re d son aise. 
 Mettez-vous a votre aise, 
 
 Se gener, 1. 
 
 Ne vous genez pas. 
 Get homrne ne se gene jamais ; il he 
 se Rene jamais pour personne. 
 
96 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSOR V 2.) 
 
 Can you, without putting yourself to 
 
 inconvenience, lend me ten dollars 
 
 and your gun ? 
 To make entreaties. 
 To beg with entreaty. 
 I employed every kind of entreaty 
 
 to engage him to it. 
 To solicit, to press, to sue, to entreat. 
 Here and there, up and down, all 
 
 about. 
 
 Now and then. From time to tine. 
 Iruiillerently, (as good as bad.) 
 1 have done my composition tolerably 
 
 well. 
 
 Pouvez-vous, sans vous gSner, me 
 preter dix gourdes, et sans ir.con 
 venient me preter votre fusil ? 
 
 Faire des instances. 
 
 Prier avec instances. 
 
 Je Ten ai sollicite avec toutes les in 
 stances possibles. 
 
 Sollicitcr, 1. 
 
 Par-ci, par-la; ici ct la. 
 
 De loin en loin. I)e temps en tc mps. 
 Tant bien quc mal. 
 J'ai fait ma composition taut bien 
 quc mai. 
 
 SOIXANTE-QUJN. 2de SeC. 
 
 .J'ai perdu do vue les enfants^de Madame R . Sont-ils ehe/ 
 
 elle ? Jls sont en pension. Comment s'y trouvent-ils? i 
 
 irouve mill da : plaint, il n'yest pa 
 
 Kt les lilies, sont-elles a leur aise dans la leur? Ki !ain- 
 
 draient si dies ne s'y trouvaient : 
 
 U'tirai-r. >i \ 
 
 :<e. Ce mrderin est-il a son aise ? II n'irai: 
 
 cMait i*. Oil all-- par- 
 
 la. Qne! ' montc la rue, d'autre fois je la descent 1 
 
 al? DC temps en temps, de loin en loin. 
 
 Comment ave/.-vons fait votre tlicme '? Tant bien que mal. \A-. 
 I'ommis i! ;-;t fait-il sou devoir ? 11 le fait tant bien (me mal : 
 
 mais le nr-'H-iant r.'en est pas content. Oil sont nos messieurs? Us 
 ne se genent pas; ils sont a fumer dans le salon. Les avez-voua 
 pries d'aller fumer donors? Je les ai pries avec instances de le 
 mais ils n'ont pas envie de se gener. 
 
 Have you made your French composition ? I have made it. 
 Was your tutor pleased with it ? He was not ; for it was difficult, and 
 I made it but indifferently, (tant bien quc mal.) Are you comfortable 
 in your fashionable boarding-house ? I am. Is there not too much 
 etiquette there for you ? A little etiquette is necessary. I do not like u 
 be always with people who put themselves too much at their ease, 
 who use no ceremony, (sont sans ceremonic.) When the dog was 
 attacking you, did you not entreat them (prier avec instances de) to 
 pome to )*our assistance ? I did earnestly beg them to come, but 
 ihey would not, (time expired.) Did the dog bite and hurt you much 7 
 He bit me a little here and there. At what o'clock were they tc 
 :36 l , Obs. 84) play off that game of billiards, before they (2S 2 7 Obs. 65) 
 put it off? They were to play it at f> o r clock in the morning. Why 
 
SET ENT Y-FIf TH .LESSOR (3.) 97 
 
 did they postpone it ? They did so, because one of them was obligea 
 to go to New York, but he will return in a day or two. 
 
 Who got you that situation? Cousin James did. How do yon 
 like to be a clerk? I like it pretty well. What does it bring you ? 
 Not much now, because I am not thoroughly acquainted with tho 
 business, but when (46 3 ) I am I shall earn more. Why are you going 
 away so soon? Stay. I have nothing pressing (de presse a) to do 
 now, my courier is already despatched, (??ion courricr cst dejd cxpedie.) 
 I shall not stay any longer. I only wished in passing (en passant par 
 id) to inquire about your health. You do me much honoi. It is 
 rery fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the 
 pleasure o f seeing you again (revoir*) this afternoon, (cctte apres 
 dince,) ana if you have time we will take a little turn together. 
 With the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. I will 
 :!ome for you (vcnir prcndrc) about (vcrs) seven o'clock. Adieu, then, 
 till I see you again. I have the honor to bid yon adieu. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Gme Sec. 
 
 somebody. 
 
 mpartcd that to your 
 
 tab 
 
 I have imparted it to him. 
 To look .... to repeal;, in vain. 
 
 In vain 1 looked all anuimi. 
 neither man nr house: ii"t the 
 least sign of settlement. 
 
 A dwelling, habitation, settlement. 
 
 In vain I speak, for you do not listen 
 to me. 
 
 In vain I do my best, I cannot do 
 anything to his liking. 
 
 You may say what you please, no- 
 body will believe you. 
 
 It is in vain that they earn money, 
 they will never be rich. 
 
 "We seaich in vain, for what we have 
 .ost we cannot find. 
 
 To salute, bid adieu, good day, bow. 
 I have the honor to bid you adieu. 
 Present my compliments to him, (to 
 
 her.) 
 Remember me to him, (to her.) 
 
 Faire part dc yttclqiie chose d quel- 
 
 qu'iin. 
 
 -ou8 fait part de cela a votro 
 
 pere? 
 
 Je lui en ai fait part, 
 t Avoir beau rcgardcr . . . avoir beau 
 
 parler. 
 J'avais beau regarder tout autour de 
 
 moi, je ne voyais ni homme, ni 
 
 maison : pas la moindre apparenco 
 
 d'habitation. 
 Une habitation. 
 J'ai beaa parler, vous ne m'ecoutez 
 
 pas. 
 J'ai beau faire de mon mieux, je no 
 
 peux rien faire a son grc. 
 Vous avez beau dire, personno nc 
 
 vous croira. 
 Us ont beau gagner de F argent, lie 
 
 ne seront jamais riches. 
 Nous avons beau chercher, nous ne 
 
 pourrons pas trouver ce que noua 
 
 avons perdu. 
 Saluer, 1. 
 J'ai 1'honnem- Je vous saluer. 
 
 - Dites-lui bien des choses de ma port 
 
598 SEV ii NT Y- FIFTH LESSEN. (3.) 
 
 Pray present my compliments to 
 your sister. 
 
 Remember me (present my compli- 
 ments) to him, (to her.) 
 
 I shall not fail. 
 
 The present, (the present 'imc or 
 tense.) 
 
 The past. The future. 
 
 The loss of time. 
 
 Knjoy all the pleasures that virtue 
 permits. 
 
 Je vous prie de faire mes compli 
 mentsa Mademoiselle votre somr, 
 
 Presentez-lui mes civilite's, (mea 
 tres-humbles respects.) 
 
 Je n'y manquerai pas. 
 
 Le present. 
 
 Le passe. L'avenir, le futur, 
 
 La perte du temps. 
 Jouissez de tous les plaisirs que la 
 vertu permet. 
 
 SoiXAXTE-QUIXZlfcME Tllfc.ME. oKlC Sec. 
 
 Bon jour, Mile., j'espere que vous vous portez bien ! J'ai 1'hon- 
 neur de vous saluer, M. Je suis bien portante, je vous remercie. 
 KH effect, vows avez tres-bonne mine. Et vous, vous etes la sante 
 meme. Vous voulez-vous moquer de moi! car, je suis a demi- 
 mort. Non, vraiment, je trouve que vous avez tres-bonne mine. 
 Vous avez beau dire, Mile., je sens que je ne suis pas la saute 
 meme. Vous, M., vous avez beau dire, vous ne me ferez pas croire 
 que je n'y vois pas. Avez-vous fait part a quelqu'un de la houvelle 
 donl je vous ai fait part hier? Oui, j'en ai fait part a mon cousi 
 je me pmpo>ai> dVn fairr part a qnelqu'autre personne. Ktait-ce 
 mi secret? Non ; -rnenl. M. F. est riche, est-ii de la 
 
 honm; so Non, il a beau etre riche, on ne veut pas Fy 
 
 ad moll re. Lc Ills dn consul a p<Tvlu beaucoup de temps; rnais i! 
 pout le re pare r s'il s'applituie. Vous avo/ beau dire, la 
 temps est irreparable. Onadit.'i, perniis <i 
 
 avai-e que du tc-. 
 
 That ofd woman is always scolding, (est toujours a prouder , ; in 
 vain I do my best. No one can do anything to her likiuir. You 
 may say what you please; no one will believe you. It is true, 
 nevertheless. Can /ou, without putting, yourself to inconvenience, 
 Irnd me one hundred dollars ? As you have always used me well, I 
 will treat you in the same manner, and will lend you that sum. 
 Have you imparted to your brother what I told you to tell him 1 As 
 he was very tired, he longed to go to sleep ; so that I have postponed 
 imparting it to him till to-morrow. Will that do ? Yes, it will. 
 
 The -loss of time is an irreparable loss. A single minute cannot 
 oe recovered (sc rccouvrer) for all the gold in the (du) world. It is, 
 Chen, of the greatest importance to employ well the time, which 
 consists (consister) only of (en) minutes, of which we must make 
 good use. We have but the present; the past is no longer anything, 
 (n-fsf plus ricn.) and the future is uncertain, (incertain.) A great 
 smny people ruin themselves (se rui*ier} because they wish to 
 
SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 399 
 
 thdulge themselves too much, (a force de vouloir se fairc du bien.} 
 if most men (la plupart des hommes) knew how to content them 
 selves (secontentcr de) with what they have, they would be happy 
 but their greediness (leur aviditc) veiy often makes (rend re) them 
 unhappy. In order to be happy we must forget the past, not trouble 
 ourselves about (nc pas s'inquieter de) the future, and enjoy the 
 present. I was very much dejected (triste) when my cousin came 
 to oe, (vint me trouvcr.) " What is the matter with you ? ;; he asked 
 me. " Oh, (all !) my dear cousin," replied I, " in losing that money 
 I ha/e lost everything.' 7 "Do not fret, 7 ' said he to me; "fci I 
 have found your money. 77 
 
 STY-SIXTH LESSON, ~${\i.Soixantc-sci:iemc Lc<;on, lime. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Do you t 
 
 Are you reading ? 
 
 I do. 
 I am. 
 
 They 
 
 A.re they making a noise ? 
 
 are (making one). 
 Is she coming ? She is. 
 
 Were you scolding ? I was so. 
 
 Will he not be dressing himself? 
 
 Yes, he will. 
 To mean. 
 
 What do you mean ? 
 I mean what I was saying. 
 What does that man mean ? Nothing. 
 He means nothing. 
 What docs that mean ? 
 
 What does : " Je suis d Zi/e," mean ? 
 That means : I am reading. 
 That does not mean anything. 
 I do not know what that means. 
 To lie dost. To be particular. 
 I do not like to deal with that man, 
 for he is too particular. 
 
 To grow impatient, to J ret. 
 
 Do not fret about that. 
 
 To fit up, to watch. I nm sitting up. 
 
 I have sat up all night. 
 
 | Liscz-vous? Je lis. 
 
 Etes-vous a lire (}> 144 6.) Je suis 
 
 a lire. 
 Sont-ils ar fairc du bruit ? Us sont a 
 
 en faire. 
 
 Est-elle a venir ? Elle est a venir. 
 Edez-Youa a gronder ? J'etais a Ic 
 
 faire. 
 Ne sera-t-il pas a s'habiller ? Si 
 
 fait. 
 
 Vouloir dvre. 
 t Que voulez-vous dire ? 
 t Je veux dire ce que j'utais a dire, 
 t Que veut dire cet homme ? Rien. 
 t II ne veut rien dire, 
 t Que veut dire cela? Qu'est-co 
 
 que cela veut dire ? 
 t Que veut dire : Je suis d lire t 
 t Cela veut dire : I am reading, 
 t Cela ne veut rien dire, 
 t Je ne sais pas ce que cela veut diro. 
 t Yregarderde pres. 
 t Je n'aime pas a faire des a'ffaires 
 avec cet homme, car il y regards 
 de trop pres. 
 t S' impatient er de. 
 Ne vous impatientez pas de'ccla, 
 Veiller, 1. Je suis a vciller. 
 J'ai veille toute la nuit. 
 
too 
 
 SEVENTi'-SlXTH LESSOK. (1.) 
 
 To advise. He is advising him to ... 
 
 The dress, the costume. An elegant 
 
 dress. 
 
 To dress one's self. 
 That man always dresses well. 
 To find fault with something. 
 That man always finds fault with 
 
 everything he sees. 
 Do you find fault with that ? 
 I do not find fault witii it. 
 ,4 trick, (a turn, a round.' T: play 
 
 a trick. 
 
 To play a trick upon some one. 
 To take a turn. 
 
 I have taken a- turn round the garden. 
 He has taken n couple of turns round 
 
 the garden. 
 To take a little turn. 
 To travel through Europe. 
 More (meaning) besides. 
 
 You have given me three books, but 
 
 I wain tin' 
 
 /.- if, .Many less. 
 
 Three l<>i'. Three too many. 
 
 Co?iseiller, 1, de . . II es>. 3 le in 
 
 seiller de . . . 
 La mise. Unc mise elegante. 
 
 Se mettre,* 4. 
 
 Get homme se met toujours bien. 
 t Trouver a redire d quelque diose. 
 t Get homme trouve toujours a redirf 
 
 a tout ce qu'il voit. 
 t Trouvez-vous a redire a cela? 
 t Je n'y trouve rien a redire. 
 Un tour. Jouer un tour. 
 
 JOINT un tour aquelqu'un. 
 t Faire un tour, 
 t J'ai fait un tour de jardin. 
 t II a fait deux tours de jardin. 
 
 t Fairc un petit tour. 
 
 t Faire le tour dc 1'Europc. 
 
 DC plus. (3D 1 , Ols. 71.) (Aprcs t 
 
 ?i om ou nombre.) 
 Vous m'avez donnc trois livn 
 
 i veux trois de plus. 
 De moins. Beaucoup de moins. 
 Trois de moins. Trois de trop. 
 
 SOTXAM; Ire Sec. 
 
 Ah! vous voila. Oui, c'est moi-mc-mr. Venez-vous de faire im 
 ^etit tour ? Non, je viens du magasin de M. D. ; ou je voulais achetcr 
 dts pints dc pcau (kid) mais je n'ai pas pu. Et pourquoi done ? 
 n'tMi a-t-il pas! Si fait, il en a de superbes; mais il y regarde de 
 trop pres. Que voulz-vous dire par cela? Ce qne je veux dire ? 
 C'est tout simple, (it is plain.) Je veux dire qu ; il vend cher et qu'il 
 ne veut rieu rabattre. Je sais qu'il n'a qu r un prix; mais je ne croia 
 pas qu'il y regarde de trop pres. N'avez-vous pas trouve a redire a 
 son prix? Si fait, ei je lui ai dit qu'il demandait 12 sous et demi de 
 plus que les autres marchands. Kt vous lui avez peut-etre offert 25 
 sous de moins que son prix ? Non, mais 12 sous et demi. Alors, 
 ne vous plaignez pas : ne trouvez pas a redire a sa conduite, car 
 n ; y regardez-vous pas d'aussi pres que lui^? Moi ! y regarder d'aussi 
 pres que lui ! Jean, qives-tu a faire ? Je su:s a nettoyer mon fusil. 
 Quo fait Anne ? Ne Fentendex-vous pas? Elle est a pratiquer son 
 piano et-a chanter. Est-ce elle qui est a pratiquer? Je croyais que 
 c'etait Julie qui etait a le faire. Anne a fait beaucoup de progres 
 depuis que je ne I'ai entendue. 
 
SEVEN TY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 401 
 
 Did you mean to say that you and your cousin Henry are going 
 62 3 , Obs. 148) to make the tour of Europe? No, I meant to say 
 that he and I are going to make the tour of the United States of 
 North America. De VAmerique du rord, are four words too many, 
 United States is enough. You like to find fault; but who is that 
 young lady so elegantly dressed? (mise si elegammcnt ?} Is it not the 
 one whc was drinking a glass of mineral water at the corner ? Oh ' 
 it is not the same. She looks like her. At any rate (apres tout) she 
 has on an elegant dress. She is walking, (a marcher.) Ho\y well 
 she walks ! Now she is laughing. How pretty are her teeth ! Hush ! 
 hush ! you make me mad (vous iriimpaticntcz) with your exclama- 
 lions ! Hush yourself. You have no taste. What does that mean, 
 Sir? That means that although you dress ($ 151) well yourself, yov 
 are too particular about other people's dress. Do not play a tricl? 
 upon me. I will not play one upon you. 
 
 Why have you played a trick upon that man ? Because he alwayi 
 finds fault with even-thing he sees. What does that mean, Sir* 
 That means that I do not like *o deal with you, because you are to& 
 particular. I wonder why your brother has not done his task. I* 
 was too difficult. He has sat up all night, and has not been able to 
 L*O it, because it was too difficult. Why are you so sad ? You do 
 not know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend, (fern.) Tell me, 
 for I assure you that I share (partager) your sufferings (la pcine) a?, 
 well as your pleasures. I am sure that you feel for me, (prcndrc* 
 part d mcs peines.) but I cannot tell you now (en ce moment) what 
 makes me uneasy. I will, however, tell you when an opportunity 
 offers, (d Voccasion.) 
 
 VOCABCLAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 I^T/, his, her reach. The child's reach. 
 
 Within my reach. Out of my reach. 
 Those things are not within the reach 
 
 of everybody. 
 Within gun-shot. 
 A gun-shot, (meaning distance.) 
 Two gun-shots, ( '* .) 
 IIow many shots have you fired I 
 
 I wonder why that man makes such 
 
 a noise ? 
 So long as. 
 So long as you behave well, people 
 
 will love you. 
 To carry oft 
 
 A la portee de 
 
 Ufa, sa portee. 
 
 1'enfant. 
 
 A ma portee. Hors de ma porte'e. 
 Ces choses ne sont pas a la portee 
 
 de tout le monde. 
 A la porte'e du fusil. 
 Une portee de fusil. 
 Deux portees de fusil. 
 Combien de coups de fusil avez-vous 
 tire's ? (48 2 .) 
 Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi eel 
 
 homme fait un tel bruit ? 
 Tant que. 
 Tant quo vous vous comporterex 
 
 bien, on vous aimera. 
 , 1, 
 
402 
 
 SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 A. mouthful. A sweet mouthful. 
 
 To overwhelm, to heap, to load. 
 
 i'o overwhelm some one with joy. 
 
 Generous. 
 
 Charitable, beneficent. 
 
 You have heaped benefits upon me. 
 
 Sincere. Sincerely. 
 
 \n advantage. 
 
 The disadvantage, prejudice. 
 
 I shaii never say anything to your 
 
 disadvantage. 
 fb surrender. 
 
 i'he enemies have surrendered. 
 So prefer. 
 I prefer the useful to the agreeable. 
 
 Une bouchee. Une bonne bouche 
 
 Combler, 1. 
 
 Combler quelqu'un de joie. 
 
 Genereux, genereuse, genereusea 
 
 Biemaisant, charitable. 
 
 Vous m'avez comble de bierifaits. 
 
 Sincere. Sincerement. 
 
 Un avantage. 
 
 Le desavantage. 
 
 Je ne dirai jamais rien a votrc dii 
 
 savantage. 
 Se rendre, 4. 
 
 Lcs ennemis se sor.t rendus. 
 Preferer. 
 Je prefere Tutile a 1'agreable. 
 
 Obs. 163. All adjectives and verbs used substantively are masculine. Ex. 
 
 The drinking. 
 
 The eating. 
 
 To behold. 
 
 Rehold those beautiful flowers with 
 
 their colors BO fresh and bright. 
 The color, tho complexion. The lily. 
 The violet. The forget-me-not. 
 The rose. An emblem. 
 
 Fresh verd'ire is salutary to our eyes. 
 
 What was he doing when he was told 
 
 of his cousin's arrival ? 
 He was taking hb'iftvsic lesson. 
 
 Le boire. 
 
 Le manger. 
 
 Regarder, 1. 
 
 Regardez ces superbes fleurs au tcint 
 
 si frais et si eclatant. 
 La couleur, le teint. Le Ms. 
 
 La violette. La germandrec. 
 La rose. Un embleme. 
 
 La verdure fraiche fait du bien a nos 
 
 ycux. 
 Qu'etait-il a faire quand on vient lui 
 
 annoncer Farrivee de son cousin ? 
 II etait a prendre sa leon de musique. 
 
 2de Sec. 
 
 Je voudrais bieu saroir pourquoi cette petite fille fait tant de bruit? 
 Elle crie de cette maniere parce qu'elle veut cette tasse verte et 
 jaune, qui est hors de sa ponee. Je suis presque sur que c'est une 
 enfant tre-gatee ; car, si elle ne Petait pas tant, eile aimerait mieux 
 attendre que de crier. Mais comme la tasse est a votre portee, 
 donnez-la-lui, pour combler ses souhaits. (satisfy.) Voyez, regardez, 
 vous I 7 avez comblee de joie. Vous m/avez fait faire une action 
 charitable. Pourquoi ce petit garcon ne tire-t-il pas a Poiseau qui 
 est sur Parbre ? Ne le voi^-il pas ? II sait que Poiseau est hors de 
 la portee de son fusil; mais il est a le veiller, il s'approche pcudpeu^ 
 (little by little.) A present, regardez, il va tirer. II a touche Poiseau, 
 mais il ne Pa pas tue. L'amie de Sophie est-elle sincere ? Je la 
 crois tres-charitable et tres-sincere. Qui est genereux et bienfai&aat? 
 Parle-t-il sincerement ? A-t-il trouve quelque chose a redire a la 
 smutaite de Pavocat 2 A-t-il parle a son desavantage ? Marie vou 
 
SEVENTY -SE VENT II LESSON. (1.) 403 
 
 drait bieii savoir quiaenleve son portefeuille Francais. -Le toint do 
 cette demoiselle est superbe, n'est-ce pasl 
 
 What do you think of the man who spoke to us at the concert? 
 He is a man of much understanding, (de beaucoup d'esprit,) and not 
 at all proud (ficr) of his merit. As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me, 
 ne begins to speak English, in order to practise, and overwhelms 
 me with politeness, (d'honnetete,) so that I often do not know what 
 lo answer. His brothers do the same, (en font autant.) However, 
 they are very good people; they are not only (non seulemcnl) rich 
 And amiable, but they are also generous and charitable. They love 
 me sincerely, therefore I love them also, and consequently (par 
 consequent) shall never say anything to their disadvantage. I should 
 love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony, 
 (tant de ceremonies ;) but every one has his faults, (le defaut,) and 
 mine is to speak too much of their ceremonies. 
 
 Behold, ladies, (Mcsdames,) those beautiful flowers, with their 
 colors so fresh and bright ; they drink nothing but water. The white 
 lily has the color of innocence, (I' innocence;) the violet indicates 
 gentleness, (marque la douceur :) you may see it in Louisa's eyes. 
 The forget-me-not has the color of heaven, our future dwelling, and 
 the rose, the queen of flowers, is the emblem of beauty and of joy. 
 You see all that personified (personnijie) in seeing the beautiful Ame- 
 lia, (Amelie.) How beautiful is the fresh verdure ! It is salutary to 
 our eyes, and has the color of hope, (de Vesper ance,) our most faith- 
 ful (Jidelc) friend, (fern..) who never deserts (quitter) us, not even in 
 death, (d la mort.) One word more, my dear friefid. What is your 
 pleasure ? I forgot to tell you to present my compliments to your 
 mother. I thank you for her, (de sapart ;) I shall not fail. Fare- 
 well, then. 
 
 ?FrENTY^SEENTH LESSON. Soixante-dix-septicmc Lcron.llmc. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. IfG Sec. 
 
 A silk gown. 
 A kitchen table. 
 A mahogany table 
 A brick house. 
 A stone house. 
 A. windmill. 
 A coffee-mill. 
 
 Une robe de sole. 
 Une table de cuisine. 
 Une table d 1 acajou. 
 Une maison de brique. 
 Une maison de pierre. 
 Un moulin d vent. 
 Un moulin d cafe. 
 
 O6x. 1631. We have seen (2 1 ) that the preposition de is put Between two 
 nibstantives, the latter of which expresses the substance of which the former 
 ; 8 made ; but the preposition d is made use of when the latter expresses tha 
 
104 
 
 SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 
 
 use of the former. In both cases the order of the two substantives is 
 inverted in French when they make a compound in English. 
 
 A velvet bonnet. 
 
 A silver tankard. 
 
 A water-mi.l. 
 
 A steam-mill. 
 
 Gunpowder. 
 
 Fire-arms. 
 
 A one-horse wagon. 
 
 A four-horse carriage. 
 
 A two-wheeled wagon. 
 
 A four-wheeled carriage. 
 
 A one-story house. 
 
 A two-story house. 
 
 A. three-story house. 
 
 To exaggerate, amplify, heighten. 
 
 That man exaggerates all that- he 
 
 says and does. 
 To take the place of, to be in stead of. 
 
 That man is a father to me. 
 
 That umbrella serves him as a stick. 
 
 On a small scale. On a largo scale. 
 Thereabouts, nearly. 
 Alternately, turn by turn. 
 To c?idcavor, to strive. 
 To give one's self up to grief. 
 To melt. T melt in tears. 
 
 To shake. 
 
 Shake that tree, and the fruit will 
 fall down. 
 
 Un chapeau de Velours. 
 
 Un pot d 1 argent. 
 
 Un moulin a eau. 
 
 Un moulin d vapeur. 
 
 De la poudre d canon. 
 
 Des armts d feu. 
 
 Une voiture a un ciuwVi. 
 
 Une voiture d quatre chnvirax. 
 
 Une voiture d deux roues. 
 
 Une voiture d quatre roues. 
 ' Une maison d un etage. 
 | Une maison d deux etages. 
 i Une maison d trois etages. 
 
 Outrer, 1. Exagerer, i. 
 
 Get hommc outre tci t ce qu'-.l L< st 
 tout ce qu'il fait. 
 
 Tcnir lieu de Servir de. (?3 2 .) 
 
 t Cet homme me tient lieu de pero, 
 
 t Cet homme mo sert de pere. 
 
 t Ce parapluie lui tient lieu de canne, 
 
 t Ce parapluie lui sert de canne. 
 
 En petit. Er grand. 
 
 A peu pres. 
 
 Tour a tour. 
 
 t S'efforcer, 1, (de av. I'ini.) 
 
 5" abandonner d la douleur. 
 
 l-'ondre, 4. Fondre en larmes 
 
 Secouer, 1. 
 
 Secouez cet arbre, et les fruits cu 
 tomberont. 
 
 SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIEME TH&ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Demeurez-vous dans une maison de pieire ou de hois'? Nous 
 occupons une maison de brique. Presque toutes IPS maisons se 
 uatissent en brique dans ce quartier-ci, (quarter, district.) Voulez- 
 vous faire emplette d'un moulin a eau ou a vent ? Je prefcre les 
 moulins a eau, et je presume que j'en acheterai un. Madame, lo 
 moulin a cafe vient de se casser. Ah ! c'est uh malheur ! Avez- 
 vous moulu (to grind, moudre,^ 4) assez de cafe ? Non, Madame 
 pas encore. Envoyez la petite Marguerite empruritei {R. 2) le 
 moulin du voisin. Les voitures a deux roues ne sont plus a la 
 mode. On a partout des voitures a 4 roues. Est-il a voyager en 
 voiture? Non, il est a voyager par M route de /cr, (the railroad.) 
 Comment preferez-vous voyager ? Par le bateau a vapeur. Sophie 
 n ? C8i-elle pas a coudre (coudre,* to sew) sa robe de soie ? Elle etait 
 
SEV EJXTY-SEVENTft LESSON. (1.) 405 
 
 &. la coudre hier, mais maintenant elle doit etre d coudre* (she mul 
 bo sewing* sa robe de satin. Voulez-vous qu'elle couse quelquc 
 chose pour vous ? 
 
 Has your sister been out ^to-day ? She has been out to buy seve- 
 ral things. What has she bought ? She has bought (s'est achete) a 
 silk gown, a velvet bonnet, and a lace veil, (un voile de denielle.) 
 What have you done with (de) my silver tankard? It is on the 
 kitchen-table, together with (avcc) the oil-bottle, the milk-pot, the 
 pitcher, the mustard-pot, and the cofFee-mill. Do you ask for a 
 wine-bottle? No, I ask for a bottle of wine, and not for a wine- 
 bottle. If you will have the goodness to give me the key of the 
 wine-cellar, (la cave au rt'n,) I shall go for one. What does that 
 man want of me ? He exacts nothing ; but he will accept what you 
 will give him, for he is in want of everything. I will tell you that 
 I am not fond of him, for his behavior raises suspicions in my mind. 
 He exaggerates all that he says and does. 
 
 You are wrong in having such a bad opinion (unc opinion) of him, 
 for he has been a father to you. I know what I say. lie has cheated 
 me en a small and on a large scale, and whenever he calls he asks 
 me for something. In this manner he has alternately asked me for 
 all I had : my fowling-piece, my fishing-line, my repeater, and my 
 golden candlesticks. Do not give yourself up so much to grief, 
 else (sinan) you will make me melt in tears. Democritus and 
 Heraclitus were two philosophers of a very different character, (d'un 
 caractere bien different:) the first laughed at the follies (lafolie) of 
 men ; and the other wept at them. They were both right, for the 
 follies of men deserve to be laughed and wept at, (meritent qu'onen 
 lie et qu'on en pleure.j* 
 
 1 We have &cen (Obs. 90, 39 1 ,) that faut (must) can have no other nomi 
 native but il. If any other nominative is used, the English verb must is 
 not to be translated by faut, but by some other verb, usually by devoir. 
 Practice must, before this, have taught the student that: il faut, faut-il, 
 que faut-il, &c., always stand at the head of the sentence, and that, of 
 course, if any other nominative has been employed, the preceding direction 
 \s to be complied with. She must le sewing, the sentence above, might, 
 beginning with il faut, have been correctly rendered by : il faut qu'elle 
 soit d coudre, but, if elle is taken for subject, you Are compelled to say as 
 above : elle doit etre d coudre. 
 
 2 The follies deserve to le laughed and wept at. Les folies meritent qu'on 
 en nc, ct qu'on en pi cure. N. B. The infinitive of a passive verb coming 
 after another verb, is rendered by qu'on as nominative indefinite of the fol- 
 lowing verb, which must be put in its proper tense. He hopes not to be 
 laughed at, II espere qu'on ne se moquera pas de lui. It is very frequently 
 followed by the subjunctive, as in the exercise 
 
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 2.") 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 To give birth to, (meaning to raise, to 
 cause.) 
 
 To raise difficulties. 
 
 To cause quarrels. 
 
 To cause suspicions. 
 
 The behavior of that man raised sus- 
 picions in my mind. 
 
 To be in want of. To be short of. 
 
 To want. 
 
 That man is in want of everything. 
 
 I am in want of nothing. 
 
 To set the table, to lay the cloth. 
 
 A cover. 
 
 A table fo four persons. 
 
 A table for ten persons. 
 
 A writing-table or desk. 
 
 A dining-room. 
 
 A sleeping or bed-room. 
 
 A repeater. 
 
 An oil-bottle. 
 
 A mustard-pot. 
 
 A pitcher. 
 
 A fowling-piece. 
 
 A fishing-line. 
 
 To exact, to want of, to require 
 What do you want of me ? 
 What do you exact of me ? 
 I exact nothing of you. 
 A milk-pot. 
 
 Obs 1G3|. When the second noun is used to determine the first more pre 
 cisely, or to *how that the first contains a portion of the second, it is pro 
 ceded by au or a la for the singular, and aux for the plural. 
 
 Faire naitre. 
 
 t Faire naitre des difficultdd. 
 t Faire naitre des querelles. 
 t Faire n-aitre des soupcons. 
 t La conduite de cet homme a fail 
 
 naitre des soupons daiis man 
 
 espru. 
 
 Manquer de. 
 
 Cet homme manque de tout. 
 
 Je nc manque de rien. 
 
 t Mettre le convert. 
 
 Un couvert. 1 
 
 Une table de quatre couverta. 
 
 Une table de dix couverts. 
 
 Une table a ecrire. 
 
 Une salle a manger. 
 
 Une chambre a couchor. 
 
 Une montre a repetition. 
 
 Une bouteille a 1'huile. 
 
 Un pot a moutarde. 
 
 Un pot a Peau. 
 
 Un fusil de chassc. 
 
 Une ligne a pechcr, 
 
 Exiger, 1. 
 Qu'exigez-vous de moi ? 
 
 Je n'exige rien de vous. 
 Un pot au lait. 
 
 The rabbit-man. 
 
 The oyster-woman. 
 
 The bottle with vinegar in, (not full.) 
 
 The bottle of wine, (full of. 
 
 The bottle with wine in. 
 
 The wine-bottle, (none in.) 
 
 L'homme aux lapins. 
 La femme aux hultres. 
 La bouteille au vinaigrc- 
 La bouteille de vin. 
 La bouteille au vin. 
 La bouteille a vin. 
 
 These last three sentences express the precise distinction to be conveyed. 
 
 1 Couvert. Cover (Webster) means everything usually wanted to eat s 
 meal with. Un couvert for dinner is not the same as un couvert for break 
 fast or tea. Cups and saucers being used al the latter, and not at the former 
 meal. 
 
SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.J 407 
 
 Dainties. 
 
 He is fond of dainties. 
 At broad daylight. 
 To sit down to a meal 
 
 Les bons morceaux. 
 
 II aime les bons morceaux. 
 
 En plein jour. 
 
 Se metlre a table. 
 
 SOIXANTE-DIX-SEI J TIEME THEME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Uestez a diner avec nous. Nous avons quelques bons morceaux, 
 V T ous voulez que nous dinions (5151) avec vous, puisque vous nous 
 paries de bons morceaux. Sans doute que (Dir. 6) je le veux, 
 autrement je ne vous prierais pas de rester. Mais dinerez-voua 
 bientot ; car, j'ai bien des choses a acheter cet apres-midi. Laissez- 
 moi voir Pheure. II est une heure moms un quart. La fille doit 
 etre a meltre (must be setting, 77 2 ? N.) le convert; ainsi vous voyez 
 oue vous aurez apres diner, assez de temps pour faire vos em- 
 plettes Qu'avez-voufl a acheter ? Des bois de lit, des oreillers de 
 plume, des tables, et des toilettes d'acajou, des armoires (walnut 
 wardrobes) de noyer? Non, non, je suis a faire faire tout cela. 
 Mais nous sommes a chercher un poele pour la cuisine, un moulin 
 a cafe, des pots a 1'eau de differentes grandeurs, des cuvettes, (bowls,) 
 des cafetieres (coffee-pots) des tasses a cafe. Ne vous faut-il pag 
 aussi des tasses a the ? Non, je crois que nous ne prendrons pas de 
 the, nous ne Taimons point. Messieurs, le diner est servi. Allons, 
 ne faites point de difficultes. Venez vous mettre t\ table et gouter 
 nos bons morceaux. 
 
 Have you seen your niece ? .Yes ; she is a very wood girl, who 
 writes well, and speaks French still better; therefore, she is loved 
 and honored by everybody. And her brother; what is he doing? 
 Do not speak to me of him ; he is a naughty boy, who writes always 
 badly, and speaks French still worse; he is therefore iaussi n'est-H) 
 loved by nobody. He is very fond of dainties, but he does not like 
 books. Sometimes he goes to bed at broad daylight, and pretends 
 to be ill; but when we sit down to dinner he is .fffinerally well 
 again, (retabli.) He is to study physic, (la medecine,) but he Jias not 
 the slightest inclination for it, (aucune envie.) He is almost always 
 talking of his dogs, \vhich he loves passionately, (passj.onnc?ncnt.) 
 
 His father is extremely sorry for it. The young simpleton (un 
 imbecile) said lately to his sister, " I shall enlist as soon as a peace 
 f fapaix) is proclaimed, ( public r") My dear father and rny deal 
 another dined yesterday with some friends at the Kinjor of Spain, 
 [VEvpagnety Why do you always speak English and never French* 
 Because I am too bashful, (timide.) You are joking : is a.) English- 
 man ever bashful? I have a keen appetite, (grand apfitil ;) gum 
 me something good to eat. Have you any money"? No, Sil, 
 
408 
 
 SEVENTY -EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 Then I have nothing to give you. Will you not let me have some 
 (ne me donnez-vous pas) on credit? I pledge ( engager) my honor. 
 That is too little.- What, (comment,) Sir! What do you mean? I 
 mean what I say. 
 
 SEVENTH-EIGHTH LESSON. Soixantc-dix-huitiimc Lccon, 78me. 
 
 VOCABCLAIRE. Ire See. 
 
 I'llESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIV 
 Present du Suljonctif. 
 
 For its use and formation sec ($151.) That article is to be carefull) 
 studied. 
 
 Je tu il 
 
 parle, parle*, parle, parlion*, 
 
 They 
 Speak. 
 Finish. 
 Heccive. 
 
 Us, dies 
 parlen*. 
 
 finisseut. 
 
 II faut qu'ils 
 parlent. 
 finisseiit. 
 regoi, 
 rcndent. 
 
 vous 
 parlivz. 
 
 finisse, finisses, fttiisse, ! 
 
 'ivc, recev 
 rende, rendcs, rciule, rendi . 
 
 As the student is already acquainted with some of the persons of the 
 
 ilar ones, f.s in all, by our rule, as may be seen at $ 151,) we will at 
 
 once introduce tin in, witli some of the known antecedents. In going over 
 
 tho following, let the antecedent w person. As: 
 
 // /tint tju'il ait hi Ixjnte, &,c. ll faut yu' Us aunt la, &,C. 
 
 You must have the goodness to do 
 
 that h\ they 
 
 .Must I be here early? 
 
 Is it necessary for him to be :. 
 You must be here early. 
 
 It is not necessary that he should 
 
 come. 
 Is if the only one you know ? he 
 
 know*s? they know? 
 It is the only one I know, he knows, 
 
 they know. 
 When will it be time for us to come ? 
 
 for her ? for thee ? 
 
 It will be time for you, for her, for me 
 
 to come at 6 o'clock. 
 Do you wish me to do that ? How 
 
 do yon wish me to do it ? 
 I wisn you to do it this way ; him, 
 
 her to d^ 't. 
 
 II faut que vous aycz la bonte do 
 
 cela, iju'il ait, qu'ils ;. 
 Faut-il que je sois ici de bonne 
 
 heure ? 
 
 Faut-il qu'il soit ici ? 
 II faut que vous soyez ici de btu.iie 
 
 heure. 
 II n'est pas necessaire qu'il v 
 
 scul 'juc voussachiez? qu'il 
 
 sache ? qu'ils sachem / 
 C'est le seul que je sache, qu'il 
 
 sache, qu'ils sachent. 
 Quand sera-t-il temps que nous 
 
 venions ? qu'elle vienne ? tu 
 
 viennes ? 
 II sera temps que vous veniez, qu'elle 
 
 vienne, je vienne a 6 heures. 
 Voulez- vous que jefasse cela? Com- 
 ment votilez-vous que je le fasse ? 
 Je veux q'ue vous le fassiez commo 
 
 ceci, qu'il le fassc. qu'elle le fasse. 
 
- ENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 46$ 
 
 Although you can do it, I'd rather 
 you wourl not do it. 
 
 Is it not time for us to go to school ? 
 
 for them ? for thee ? 
 \ IB high time for us, for them, for 
 
 lli'J'J tO gO. 
 
 1 9 ho sorry I can ? we can ? she 
 cau ? thou canst ? 
 
 H j is not sorry you can, we can, she 
 can, I can. 
 
 ? she glad we are worth as much as 
 
 She is. 
 Will he do it without our wishing it ? 
 
 . my wishing it ? 
 
 lit; will not do it except you wish it, 
 . it. 
 
 Quoique vous puissiez Ic .'aire, je 
 
 ne me soucie pas*"que vous le 
 
 fassiez. 
 N'est-il pas temps que nous alliona 
 
 a. 1'ecole ? qu'ils aillent ? tu ailles i 
 II est grand temps que nous y allions, 
 
 qu'ils y aillent, que tu y ailles. 
 Est-il fache que je puisse ? Nouo 
 
 puissions? qu'elle puissc ? quu 
 
 tu puisses? 
 II n'est pas iache que vous puissiez, 
 
 nous puissions, qu'elle puisse, '* 
 
 puisse. 
 Est-elle contente ~ue nous valiona 
 
 autant qu'eux ? Elle Test. 
 Le fera t-il sans que nous le voulions ? 
 
 vous le vouliez ? je le veuille ? 
 II ne le fera pas sans que vous lo 
 
 vouliez, nous le voulions, qu'ils lo 
 
 vcuillcnt. 
 
 SoiXANTK-DIX-IIUlTlfcME TlI^ME. Ire SCC. 
 
 ()u vm;li'/-votis que j'aille? Allez chez le bijoutier. Oil voulez- 
 
 qu'il aille? Je desire qu'il aille chez le menuisier. Et, elle? 
 
 qirelle aille chez la faiseuse de robes. Oil faut-il que je 
 
 ;i liuit heures? II faut que vous soyez au magasin. Oil faut-ils 
 
 (ju'ils soient'? 11 faut que Jean, Frederic, et Marie, soient -a 1'ecole. 
 
 9 ii dix heures oil a dix heures et demie qu'il faut que nous 
 
 ;iu a vapeur? 11 faut que nous y soyons a dix heures 
 
 et demie ; inais il vaut mieux que nous y allions de meilleure heure. 
 
 - doule. Est-il necessaire que le cuisinier acliete plus cVune 
 
 livrc (a pound) de beurre? Oui, ii faut qiril en achete au molns 
 
 livres. Trois livres ! y pcnscz-vous ? (are you thinking of what 
 
 5 ou say? are you in earnest?) Faut-il dire au boulanger d'apporter 
 
 Mtits-pains? (rolls?) Oui, il faut le lui dire, car il n'en appor- 
 
 lera pas saris que nous le lui disions. Est-ce le seul medecin que 
 
 eonnziissiez? N'est-il pas temps que je traduise, que j'echvo, 
 
 et que je lise inon theme? Convient-ii (is it suitable) qu'elle receive 
 
 u? billet, qu'elle le lise, et qu'elle y reponde ? 
 
 \Vill you relate (raconter) something to me ? What do you wish 
 ;re to relate to you? A little anecdote, if you like. A little boy 
 out day at table (d table) asked for some meat; his father said that 
 it u-as not polite to ask for any, and added : ci You must wait till (jus- 
 qv.^. cc (jHCj 151) some is given to you." After a little while, tho 
 pnor boy. seeing every one eat, and that nothing was given to 
 35 
 
410 
 
 SEVENTY-EIGHTH 1ESSON. 
 
 said to his father : " My dear father, give me a lit Je salt, if you 
 please." " What will you do with it ? ;; asked the father. " I wish 
 to eat it with the meat which you will give me," replied (rcplique**) 
 the child. Everybody admired (admirer) the little boy's wit; and 
 his father, perceiving that he had forgotten him, gave him a piece 
 of meat, some salt, and vegetables. 
 
 Who was that little boy that asked for meat at table ? He was th* 
 son of one of my friends. Why did he ask for some meat? He 
 asked for some because he had a good appetite. Why did his father 
 not give him some immediately ? Because he had forgotten it. 
 Was the little boy wrong in asking for some ? He was wrong, for 
 he ought to have waited. If it was impolite to ask for meat, was it 
 not impolite also to ask for salt, or anything else ? And to be con- 
 sistent, ought not the father to have told him again : " i ou must wait 
 until some is given to you?" That may be; but although the 
 father's conduct may be called inconsistent, the child's request was 
 not the less witty, (n'en it ait pas moins spirituclle.) It is a pity 
 ($ 151) the cook did not go to market, for I am afraid that the best 
 fruit is sold by this time, (ne soit vcndu (} 151 G) a ceJe hcure-ci.) 1 
 
 . 2de Sec. 
 
 Est-il extraordinaire qu. 
 
 voulions pas ! qu'ils ne le veuill- 
 
 cnt pas ? 
 II est extraordinaire que vous nc le 
 
 voulicx iias- qu'ils ne le veuillent 
 
 pas. 
 N'est-il pas facheux qu'elle lea 
 
 perde ? que je les perdg ? vous en 
 
 perdicz ? 
 II est tres-iacheux qu'elle les perde ; 
 
 que vous les perdiez ; que j'cn 
 
 perde. 
 Est-il juste que je me leve et que 
 
 vous ne vous leviez pas ? 
 II est juste que nous nous hmons 
 
 tons deux. 
 N'est-il pas injuste que nous cu 
 
 ayons, et qu'ils n'en aient pas? 
 
 Si fait, il est injuste que vous OTI 
 receviez et qu'ils n'en rec.oivenf 
 pas. 
 
 Is it extraordinary that we do not 
 wish it ? they do not wish it ? 
 
 It is (extraordinary that you do not 
 wish it that they do not wish it). 
 
 Is it not vexing (sad) that she bses 
 
 them ? I lose them ? You lose 
 
 some ? 
 It is very sad for her to lose them ; 
 
 for you to lose them ; lor me to 
 
 lose some. 
 la it right that I should get up and 
 
 that you should not ? 
 It is right for us both to get up. 
 
 Is it not wrong that we should have 
 some, and that they should not 
 have any ? 
 
 Ves, it is wrong that you should re- 
 ceive some and they none. 
 
 1 As the student knows the subjunctive present of the auxiliaries (avoir, 
 ffr*), he can easily form the compound tenses. Although [ have been 
 Qttoique j'aic etc. 
 

 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 411 
 
 B it not surprising that they go to 
 bed ? we go to bed, so su- 
 it is not surprising that they go 
 to bed, that you go to bed so soon. 
 
 Id it not better for her to start when 
 
 her uncles start ? 
 It is better she should not start at all. 
 
 
 
 Wili it do for us to say it, or for 
 
 them ? 
 It will not do for you to say it ; but 
 
 for them, it will do. 
 Is it possible that his horses should 
 rth more than his brother's ? 
 not possible they shou! . 
 :h more. 
 
 .able that he should take 
 .rd ? 
 
 that 
 . >uld take board. 
 
 N'est-il pas surprenant qu'ils se cou 
 
 client ? que nous i:c us couchionat 
 
 si tot ? 
 Non, il n'est pas t'tonnur.t qa 
 
 couchent, que vous vous L\ 
 
 si tot. 
 Ne vaut-il pas mieux q if ell- 
 
 quand ses oncles partiront ? 
 II vaut mifi!.\ partepaadu 
 
 tout. 
 Convient-il que nous le disions, cu 
 
 qu'ils le discnt ? 
 II ne convient pas que vous le disicz, 
 
 mais il convient qu'ils le disent. 
 Est-il possible que ses chevaux vaill- 
 
 ent mieux que reux di 
 II n'est pas possible qu'ils vaillent 
 
 mieux. 
 
 sion ? 
 preniez,(iu- 
 
 Tnf>ME. 2de Sec. 
 '.enantqr,: 1 bien rallcma:. ilifestpas 
 
 Qt qu'il le sache si bien, puisque sa mere iv<t allemaude. 
 qu'on le loue 1 II aime qif on le lone, raais il ivaime ]>;i- 
 isloues. Suppo?e : t-il que nous rapprouvions(^ 151 5) 
 II suppose que vous I'approuvez, que nous 
 -Que di;i' racontais 
 
 petite anecdote en 1 Je dirais (|ue vous i'-!es au.--i aim 
 
 ['ordinaire. Un jeune prince, de sept ans ? etait adniirc- par tout 
 
 le moude a cause de son esprit. II entendit un jour un olficierj qui 
 
 parlait<le lui. ;iand les enfants ont taut (Uesprit dans leur 
 
 i!s en ont ordinairement fort peu quand ils sont avarices en 
 
 aiiisi," ditle jeune prince, "vousdevez avoij ru 
 
 iiili: dans votre enfance ! ;? Y a-t-il long-temps quo 
 
 vou- ;e anecdote ? II a fallu que je la traduise hier, (I had 
 
 TO ) Dcsire-t-on qu'elle rcussisse ou que vous reussissiez? Or 
 
 -ire pas que nous reussissions ; mais qu'elle reussisse. 
 Do you wish me to relate to you another anecdote ? You \vilj 
 greatly (bcaucoup) oblige me. Some one purchasing some gooes of 
 a shopkeeper, (un marchand) said to him: '-You ask too much 
 you must ( 151) not sell so dear to me as to another, because I am 
 u friend, (puisque je suis dcs amis de la maison.") The merchant 
 replied : " Sir, we nust gain something by (avec) our friends, for oui 
 
i!2 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 Rrieniies will never come to the shop. J7 An Englishman, on first 
 visaing France, met with a very young child in the streets of Calais, 
 who spoke tne French language with fluency and elegance, (cou- 
 rammcnt ct avec elegance.) " Good heaven, (Mon Dieu!) is it possi- 
 ble?^ exclaimed he, "that even children here speak the French 
 language with purity, (la purete.") 
 
 Let us seek (rcchercher) the friendship of the good, and avoid 
 (evitcr) the society of the wicked (le mechant ;) for bad company 
 corrupts (les mauvaises societes corrompent) good "manners, (les bonnes 
 nwmrs.} What sort of weather is it to-day ? It snows continually, 
 (toujours,) as it snowed yesterday, and according to all appearances, 
 will also snow to-morrow. Do you think it will snow ( 151 5) to- 
 morrow also ? I hope it will, for I am always very well when it is 
 very cold. And I am (et ?noz, je me porte) always very well when it is 
 neither cold nor warm. It is too windy to-day, and we shculd do 
 better if we stayed at home. Whatever weather it may be, (Qucl- 
 que temps qiCil fasse, 151 11,) I must go out; for I promised to be 
 with my sister at a quarter past eleven, and I must keep my word, 
 (tcnir* parole.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 
 See ($ 151) and study it carefully, and make a list of the antecedents ad 
 they occur. 
 
 It seems you are angry, (you appear.) I II semble 1 que voussoi/ez fache (R. 4.) 
 You appear angry, (to be angry.) I Vous semblez faclie, (etre fache.) 
 
 The -subjunctive is employed in the first sentence because il semlleis used 
 unipersonally ; but not being used so in the second, the indicative is employed. 
 
 Is it sufficient that you and I should 
 
 complain of it ? 
 Yes, it is sufficient that we complain 
 
 of it (for us to complain.) So that 
 
 neither she nor they must complain. 
 Let him come if he wishes. 
 Let them wait if they have a mind. 
 Let Julius write the btter, and you 
 
 will carry it. 
 
 Suffit-il que vous vous en plaigniez 
 
 et que je m'en.plaigne ? 
 Oui, il suffit que nous nous en plai- 
 
 gnions. Ainsi ni lui ni eux no 
 
 doivent s'en plaindre. (77 1 , N.) 
 Qu'il vienne s'il veut. ($ 150 7.) 
 Qu'ils attendent s'ils en ont envie. 
 Que Jules e'crive la lettre, et vous la 
 
 porterez. 
 
 Obs. 164. We saw ($ 150 7) that the 3d pers. sing, and plur. of the impera- 
 live were like the same persons of the present of the subjunctive, consfl 
 quently, we can now use those persons of the imperative without difficulty. 
 
 Il scnible, it seems, is also construed with the indicative when it has an 
 indirect object, as : It seems to me that you are angry ; il me semlle que roua 
 tie* fachv. It seems to thec, il te semble, \1 lui semlde, &c., to him of 
 her, &c. 
 
SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 413 
 
 Let him have the goodness to hold it. 
 
 ird. 
 
 Where do you pr buy the 
 
 candy ? Let him buy it at the 
 grocer* s. 
 Watch the bird. Take care it does 
 
 not run or liy tn 
 Let them mind it. 
 
 > tell the cook to cook 
 
 able to cook it, for 
 :nostout. ('. 
 
 I wi>' cd. 
 
 - arrived, i! 
 
 e told ao. 
 ishcs me to have pati* 
 
 li. 2.) 
 
 He complains of your hm 
 
 in . 
 1 am very sorry for your having done 
 
 should ha-. 
 o of my not going 
 ' said it. 
 
 :ng T 
 
 to drink ? 
 
 Sor 
 Sutlit-il que vous ledisiez pour qu'on le croie? 
 
 Qu'il nit la bonu' cle le 
 Que Sophie rct;u\\ 
 Oil prcitrez-vous qu'il achOtc le 
 caudi ? Qu'il 1' adit to clu-x 
 
 i'oiscau. Pronez gar<. 
 nes'enfuie, (ne s'en aille, t'envole.) 
 Qu'ils y prennent garde. 
 Priez Lisette de dire a la an; 
 
 f <iire en ire le poisson > 
 Je dou'< 
 car s 
 .at. 
 
 Je doutc qu'il soil arr. 
 Jc souhaite qu'on le lui 
 
 itc qu'il 5. -on. 
 
 Jc crains que nous n'ayons un orage. 
 II nie qu'il 
 II 86 plaint que vous rni/>z mal- 
 
 Je suis au desespoir que vous / '<n/,-i 
 
 oblig6 
 
 d'att< 
 Vous trouverez bo \ <////. 
 
 pas. 
 II a tro-; 
 
 dit. 
 Que voulez-vous 
 
 Quo voulez-vous qu'il 
 Vous attendez-vous a ce qu'il voua 
 donne ses march r ricn ? 
 
 voulez-vous que je boive ? 
 
 sufTl 
 
 eant que je le dise pour qu'on le croie? MiYitc-t-il ([u'on 1'attcndc ? 
 ({ 151 2.) S'il in i I'atteiHU' ' >ute (ju'il le mc'rilo! 
 
 --S'i! ;t p >] ' ; le feuillet. c.u'il le rctr^n-r^ (liiul it airnin.) (^u'il lo 
 
 1 The syllable re prefixed to a French verb, corresponds in English to : 
 
 ne back, porter, reporter, to 
 
 carry back or again; tron-. r, to find arain ; voir, revoir, to ecf 
 
 agaii; >ubler, r^frullcr, to redouble, dtc. ; . 
 
 liderer, reronsi Icrtr, to consider again or anew. 
 
i!4 5EVENTY-EIGH.TII LESSON. (4.) 
 
 retrouve ! c'est plus aise a dire qu'a faire. Qu ; il essaie. Tenez- 
 vous bien la flute ? Prenez garde qu'elle ne tombc. Je la tieiib 
 bien. Je prendrai garde qu'elle ne tombe. II est impossible que le 
 courrier ne soit pas encore arrive ! Pourquoi Salomon reste-t-il si 
 long-temps? II est possible que la neige ait empeche le courrier 
 d'arriver a Pheure ordinaire. II est possible que cela soit; mais 
 j'espere qu'il n'en est pas ainsi. ($ 151 2.) Je 1'espere aussi, mais 
 ayons patience jusqu'a ce que Salomon revienne. Quelque desir 
 que vous ayez d'avoir vos lettres, ot quelqu'hnportantes que les nou- 
 velles puissent etre, il faut que nous attendions avec patience. Voua 
 en parlez bien a votre aise. J'attends sans m'impatienter. 
 
 Have you corrected Louisa's exercise 1 Yes, I have. How many 
 mistakes had she ? She had but three or four. But three or four ! 
 That is a good deal for her. The exercise must nave been very 
 hard, (difficult.) (77 1 , N.) It was. She is the most attentive and 
 studious pupil I have. Are you not afraid we shall have ( j 151 6) 
 a storm ? I am afraid we shall have a violent one. See, how black 
 Uie sky is at the west ! Are you glad that I did it, and that he could 
 not do it? (62 2 , N. 1.) I am glad you did it; but I am sorry that he 
 could not do it. Let the" girl go (06s. 1G4) to the apothecary's. What 
 do you wish her to purchase ? I want her to buy some perfumed 
 soap, and to (} 151 9) put it in my desk. 
 
 What must we bring you from the country ? Is it necessary that 
 you should go? We have promised to go. Would you not be 
 astonished if we did not keep our promise? (} 148, N. 3.) You 
 come late; you have made us wait a long time. We regret that 
 you have been obliged to wait. How long have you been waiting? 
 Never mind the time we have already lost, let us lose no more; but 
 let us finish our affair quickly, so that (afin que, 151) we may go 
 home. It seems you are a little cross, (un pcu de mauvaisc humeur.) 
 It does not suit you, Sir, to find fault with me, when the fault is 
 yours. Come. Let us have done. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 4me Sec. 
 
 I believe he is in the right. 
 
 Do you believe that horse is worth a 
 
 hundred crowns ? 
 ) do not believe that it is worth a 
 
 hundred crowns. 
 I hopo he will come, 
 bo yd i hope he will come ? 
 I think he has done it. 
 Oo you think he has done it ?* 
 If you think it will be fine weather, 
 
 let us set out for the country. 
 
 Ind. Je crois qu'il a raison. 
 
 Subj. Croyez-vous que ce cnevaS 
 
 vaille cent e'cus ? ($ 151 5.) 
 Subj. Je ne crois pas qu'il vail fa cent 
 
 ecus. 
 
 Ind. J'espere qu'il viendra. 
 Subj. Esperez-vous qu'il vienr.e? 
 Ind. Je pense qu'il 1'a fait. 
 Subj. Pensez-vous qu'il I 1 ait foil ? 
 Si vous pensez qu'il fasse beau 
 
 temps, partons pour la campagna 
 
-r u; IITH LESSON. (4.) 
 
 415 
 
 MS qu'ils we 
 
 ir que vous nc parlicz de inoi 
 
 .ut-il pas quo vous n't 
 
 Craignex-vous de roflenser t 
 
 idais que vous \v : 
 
 vicnne. 
 
 Ne doutez pr\ sois toujoura 
 
 votrr 
 
 . ous no I'aycz fait. 
 
 I come. ($ 151 G.\ 
 
 II speak of me. 
 
 it you might speak 
 
 :m ? 
 
 vou would 
 
 !iat the man will 
 
 always your 
 ,1. i<>i.-' i 8.) 
 snot deny ij done it. 
 
 .> subjunctive is further governed by an a<: 
 . itre,* to be; j*ira\t 
 8 of such adjectives or paiticiples arc : 
 
 astonished. 
 
 surpr 
 
 Je suis/aVAe qu'cllc soit malade. 
 
 Je suis charm* que vous toyt ; 
 
 Je suis lien ai$c qu'il ait eu son ar 
 
 gent. 
 Ello est/icMeque vous toycz m.-n 
 
 Jo suis ctonni que vous ne io> 
 
 glad. 
 
 om sorry tin; he is ill. 
 
 it you arc li 
 id that he has rccci\ 
 
 >he is angry that you ai - 
 
 r prised that you are not more 
 y glad that your sister 
 
 afflicted that y 
 lessons. 
 {irisec* thf : you have not done 
 
 plus attt : 
 Jo suis enchant* quo votrc sojur toil 
 
 Votre pure est ujfligc que vous man* 
 
 uuifz vos lecons. 
 Je suis lurpri* que vous n'aycz pas 
 
 fait 
 
 all these instances, if de ce should be placed before 
 
 Hows. But the subjunctive, as above, is preferable. 
 
 Je suis charme de ce que vous 6tea 
 
 II est bien aise de ce que vous aver, 
 eu votre argent. 
 
 d at your being here. 
 
 fie is glad that you have received 
 yoi f 
 
 1 i certain that you ore in the wrong. 
 a certain that you are in the 
 right. (* 1514.) 
 It is probable that \\^ will i 1 
 (e it probable that he will do it T 
 rue that he is capable of it. 
 true that he is capat>!' 
 
 st certain que vous avez tort 
 I pas certain que voue 
 on. 
 est probable qu f il Ic fera. 
 
 fie qd'il le fassc! 
 I ml. II rst vrai qu'il en est r 
 
 rni'ju'il :n w)it capablo. 
 
416 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 SOIXANTE-DIX-IIUITIME TiiibiE. 4me Sec. 
 
 Cioyez-vous qu'il ait raison ou qu'elle ait raison ? Nous croyone 
 qu'ils ont tort, tous deux. Si le colonel est en ville, je crains bier 
 qu 7 ilne vienne nousvoir. Etmoi, je crains qirilne vienne pas. Croi 
 ent-ils que leur maison vaille dix mille gourdes? Qu'ils le croient 
 on non, ils en demandent ce prix-la. Elle a peur que nous ne par* 
 lions d'elle, n'esl-ce pas ? Pen lui importe, (it is of little importance 
 o her; she does not care,) r ue nous parlions d'elle ou que nous n'en 
 pariions pas. M. D - apromis de venir. n : est-co pas? Esperez* 
 TOUS qu'il vienne malgre le nauvais temps ? J'espere qu : il vicndra 
 malgre le mauvais temps, car je ne doute pas qiril ne tienne parole. 
 Nous craignonsbeaucoup que cet homme ne revienne pendant volro 
 absence. Je n'ai pas peur qu ? il revienne, ainsi no craignez rien. 
 
 You have forbidden him to go to the wharf, (voits lid avcz defends 
 de ;) do you think he went there ? ($ 151.) I do riot think he went, 
 but his sister thinks he did go. Is he not afraid that you will busy 
 yourself with it? I care very little whether he is afraid or not. (Pen 
 m j importe quc } 151.) If you think that we can go to Burlington and 
 come back in two hours, let us start. I do not think we can go and 
 return in so short a time. ({ 200.) As it is important that we should 
 see the lawyer before Tuesday, suppose we go, (should go ) Vry 
 well, let us go. Let John take care of the store during my absence. 
 John or William ? No matter which, (n'importe Icqucl,) provide.] 
 the store is taken ( 151 2) care of. 
 
 Are you not glad we have received the invitation we so much 
 desired ? I am very glad, on your account, that we have received 
 U. On my account ! How ? don't you wish to go? I care very little 
 about i* That is something new. I thought that you were as anxious 
 to go (vous aviez ant ant cnvie (Vy aller) as I. I was as anxious to go 
 as you at first ; bu f now I think I would rather not go. .It is asto- 
 nishing th?t you change so! Sarah, I am glad you are here. Are 
 you, indeed? I, for my part, am glad I am here. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) 
 Is not that clerk's uncle much afflicted that his nephew behaves so 
 badly ? No, he cares very little now, whether he behaves well 01 
 not : at first, he was very much afflicted at it. I believe he was. 
 
 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. Soixantc-dix-rcuvicmc Lc$vn., 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. Subjoi^tif Imparfait. 
 tor its formation see ($ 152.) That article is to be carefully studied. 
 After the following conjunctions use the subjunctwo ; 
 
SEVEN PY-NISTH (1.) -U 
 
 Mhat, in order tha 
 / to the end tha 
 
 
 Nonohelant qucJ fur ull tl. 
 Hiding thai 
 
 tie, 
 
 unless. 
 
 
 Post' . 
 
 suppose that. 
 
 
 if. 
 
 
 
 
 
 before. 
 
 
 Pour yue. 
 
 that, in order tha 
 
 
 though. [ ( 
 
 I 
 
 Pour i 
 
 r so little, hy 
 
 
 
 ] 
 
 
 little soever./ 
 
 
 lest. 
 
 
 ?* 
 
 , ;ivo/ha 
 
 :iSC f if. / 
 
 
 
 though... / 
 \\ ithout . . / 
 
 1, until. 
 
 Sipeuque, > fflo. 
 
 rom. 
 
 wlicther. 
 
 that. 
 
 Suppo$t que, suppose that. 
 
 can go 
 
 Afin iur, 
 
 A mointque. 
 Au cas tftie, 
 Avant que, 
 '/we, 
 
 r que, 
 que, 
 
 . 
 
 JVon j" - 
 
 i > 
 
 s back. 
 
 I sent you my bo 
 
 i it. 
 
 not go out. 
 
 .die, yet 
 
 so little a^ 
 
 was bound 
 nrt in the 
 
 -on as much as if 
 
 , 
 ing, she was nevertheless a:. 
 
 I would not have h< : 
 
 .rh she is rich, and has a great 
 deal of wit, because she is not 
 :-heartcd. 
 :-d you are my fricn-i 
 
 .11 are right or wrong. 
 
 Voulcx J 
 
 i*sc sortir avcc vous f 
 Je nortir 
 En cat que\ 
 
 Je vou - fin qu<\ 
 
 VOUS 
 -1 mains que VOUS nc I'ar 
 
 cllc ne sortira pas. 
 Bien que vos 
 
 connu 
 
 d'un autre, il fallait 
 dans 
 sa person ii- 
 
 illi-IUMM*' Ml C' 
 
 - lie r*i 
 \aisc mine, clle i. 
 
 able. 
 
 i voudrais pas pour ! 
 qnoiqiCelle soil riclie, it '/u'tllf aif 
 beaucoup d'esprit, pan-c (jii'cllo 
 
 .ous soycz dc UK - 
 je suis content. 
 
 Soil que vans ayez raison ou tort. 
 Soi.\ THME. Ire Sec. 
 
 il que je !> \"on, il ne pref^rait pas que vous Jo 
 
 ^rait-il pas que vous y allassiez ? Non, mais i\ 
 un'-fererait que ses neveux y allassent. Jerome n'ctait-il pas un 
 /. bon domestif[ue ? Si, (juoiqu'il oubliat quelque fois de fe~ 
 Ties. Niai'-il (ju'il D6 l't':':t lait .' Xon. il ne le niait pas.-- 
 i'-il (Hie v moi, no;:- \oiij 
 
t!8 SEVENTH-NINTH LESSON. ^2.) 
 
 il ne se plaignit pas que nous eussions tout mange, mais ii s'ea 
 etonna. Ne Be souciait-il pas que vous vinssiez'? II aurait, au 
 contraire, beaucoup desire que je vinsse, mais il ne se souciait pas 
 que ces enfants-la vinssent. N'exigedtcs-vovs pas (require) que 
 nous le promissions sur le champ ? Je ne m'en souviens pas. Est-ce 
 que j'exigeai que vous le promissiez? feait-il a ecrire quand 
 vous 1'appelates ? Pourquoi votre ami ne vient-il pas a cette heuro- 
 ci T 11 faut qu'il soit a etudier. 
 
 M. de Turenne would never buy any thing on credit of tradesmen, 
 (b marchand,) for fear, he said, they should lose a great part of theif 
 money, if he happened to be killed. All the workmen who were 
 employed about his house had orders (avait ordre) to bring in their 
 bills (un memoire) before he set out ($ 152) for the campaign, (se 
 metlre* en campagne,) and they were regularly paid. You will 
 never be respected (respecter) unless you forsake (abandojtner) the 
 bad company you keep. You cannot finish your work to-night, 
 unless I help you. I will explain to you (cxpliquer) every difficulty, 
 that you may not be disheartened (decourager) in your undertaking, 
 (une enterprise.) 
 
 Suppose you should lose your friends, what would become of 
 you 1 In case you want my assistance, call me ; I shall help you. 
 A wise and prudent man (un homme sage el prudent] lives with eco 
 nomy when yonng, in order that he may enjoy the fruit of his 
 labour when he is old. Carry this money to Mr. N., in order that 
 he may be able to pay his debts, (une dette.) Will you lend me 
 that money ? I will not lend it you unless you promise to return 
 (rendre) it to me as soon as you can. Did the general arrive ? He 
 arrived yesterday morning at the camp, (le camp,) weary, (/as,) and 
 tired, (harasse,) but very seasonably, (tres-d propos;) he immediately 
 gave his orders to begin the action, though he had not yet all hia 
 troops. Are your sisters happy 1 They are not, though they are 
 vich, because they are not contented. 
 
 VOCABITLAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 THE PERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE (Parfait du Sbbjonctif) is formed 
 5y the present of the auxiliary and the past participle. It requires an ante- 
 cedent. 
 
 [ must have sent them there. 
 She must have come early. 
 
 Although he has not dressed himself. 
 Don't you hope the thief has been 
 taken ? 
 
 II faut que je les y ai envoyes. 
 Il.faut qu'elle soit venue de bonne 
 
 heure. 
 
 Quoiqu'il ne se soit pas habillc*. 
 N'esperez-vous pas que le voleur &il 
 
 etc pris ? 
 
 It combines wifh the piesent and the future of the Indicative. ($ 151 12.) 
 
SEV ENT Y-NI ^SON. (2.) 
 
 419 
 
 He will not come ah hough I luive 
 invited him. 
 
 Shall (should) \v-2 go without being 
 invited? 
 
 Bhe always looks (lofikedf well, how- 
 ever little she may (might) be 
 dressed. 
 
 1 do not think he rejoiced at the good 
 ne \ received 
 
 THE PLUPERFECT o? i I (Pluy queparfail du Su 
 
 nned from the imperfect of the auxiliary and the past participle of ano- 
 \erb. ($ 151 12.) It combines with the past tenses and conditionnels. 
 
 II ne viendni pas 411014110 je l'aie 
 
 i:i\ 
 Ircns-nous (irions-nous) sans quo 
 
 nous soyons (fussions) invites ? 
 Elle a (avail) toujours bonne mine, 
 
 si pen gu'elle soit (/uO ha! 
 
 Je ne crois pas qu'il se soit rejoui do 
 la bonne nouvelle que nous avona 
 
 : ril. 
 
 re she had 
 not been ratified by the senate. 
 
 : que j'cussc aim<5. 
 Mi'elle fut panic. 
 : qu'ils s'en fussent a;' 
 Quoique vous eussiez <5te vus. 
 .iait qu'on 1'eulpuni. 
 
 les functions de consul, 
 quoique ea nomination n'eut pae 
 .sanctionnee par le senat. 
 
 . so much that.) 
 
 Except that. 
 
 us conduiscz dc fafoit 
 . do tout lemonde. 
 
 .S'i//i/. Conduise/.-vous de fafon quc 
 vous soyez airnu. 
 
 Ubs. 166. Some conjunctions govern the indicative when the sen.ence 
 nffir; the thing in question is or will be, and the subjunc- 
 
 .en it is not certain, or only wished for. They arc the following: 
 
 j it r. 
 
 /* writ- 
 
 que. 
 
 that 
 
 i are loved by everybody. 
 :ve in such a manner that you 
 
 !>e loved. 
 
 SoiXANTK-DIX-NKUVlfeME TlI^MK. 2de SeC. 
 
 ( IiiiiUuinu; r>t-il 11 lire dans sa chambre ? Non ? il etait a jouer do 
 la liuto dans le jardin avant que vous entrassiez. Qu'est-il a faire 
 maintenant ? II faut qu : il soit a se promener dans le bosquet, (grove. ) 
 Faut-il que j'aille Fappelerl Non, qu'il s'y promene; mais en 
 cas qu ? il revienne bientot, vous lui direz que je desirerais qu'il 
 B ; liabillat pour sortir avec moi. S'il eiit su (had he known) que voua 
 desiriez qu'il sortit avec vous, il se serait deja habille. Cda ne pi csse 
 pus, (there is no hurry.) II aura le temps de se preparer avant quo 
 jo sois prete rnoi-me*ne. POM?* pcu que vous eussiez attendu co 
 matin, vous auriez pu voir le general, car vous etiez a peine sorti 
 qu'il est rentre. Puis-je avoir le plaisir de le voir? Non ; il OB! 
 
420 
 
 SEVENT Y-fllNTII LESSOR. 
 
 oncore soiti. Ne vaut-il pas mieux que vous attendiez \ Si /ail 
 pourvu que vous soyez sur qu'il rentrera bientot. 
 
 Although they have a good memory ; that is not enough to learr, 
 any language whatever, (quelque langue que ce soit ;) they must make 
 use of their judgment, (le jugement.) Behold how amiable that lady 
 is; for all that she (quoiqu'elle) has no fortune, I do not love her the 
 less. Will you lend me your violin ? I will lend it you. provided 
 you return it to me to-night. Would your mother call upon me ? 
 She would, provided you would promise to (ake her to the concert 
 I shall not cease to importune (importuner) her, till she has forgiven 
 Die. Give me that penknife. I will give it you, provided you will 
 not make a bad use of it. Shall you go to London ? I will go. pro* 
 vided you accompany (accompagner) me : and I will write again 
 \recrirc*) to your brother, lest he should not have received my letter, 
 
 Where were you during the engagement'? I was #1 bed to have 
 my wourds (une blessure) dressed, (panser.) Would to God (Plut a 
 Dieu) I had been there ! I would have conquered (vaincre) or per- 
 ished, (perir.) We avoided an engagement for fear we should be 
 taken, their force being superior (supericurc) to ours. God forbid (d 
 Dicu ne plaise, with the subjunctive,) I should blame your conduc< 
 but your business will never be done properly unless you do it your- 
 self. Will you set out soon? I shall not set out till I have dined. 
 Why did you tell me that my father was arrived, though you knew 
 the contrary? You are so hasty, (prompt,) that however little you 
 are contradicted (contrarie) you fly into a passion (s'cmportcr) in an 
 instant. 
 
 YOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 
 Since you know him and are respon- 
 sible for him. ($ 1519.) 
 
 Unless you are attentive, and do 
 your task regularly, you will not 
 learn. 
 
 If your friend were here, ana would 
 
 call upon me. ( 151 10.) 
 If he loved me, and sincerely wished 
 
 my welfare. 
 If anybody come, and I should not 
 
 be at home, send h: me. 
 
 If your brother *vrites to you, and 
 you are satisfied with his letter, I 
 beg of you to let me know it. 
 
 Be industrious, that your parents 
 may be satisfied. ( 151 10.) 
 
 Ind. Des que vous le connaissez et 
 
 que vous repondez de lui. 
 Subj. A mains que vous ne soyez 
 
 attentif, et que vous nefassiez re- 
 
 gulierement votre devoir, vous 
 
 ri'apprendrez pas. 
 Si votre ami etait ici, ct qy+'il voulut 
 
 venir me voir. 
 *S"il m'aimait, et qu'il dtgirdt sincere 
 
 ment mon bonheur. 
 Si quelqu'un venait, et que jc no 
 
 /wssepas alamaieon, envcyez-raoi 
 
 chercher. 
 Si votre frere vous ecrit, et que vous 
 
 soyez content de sa lettre, jc vous 
 
 prie de m'en faire part. 
 Appliquez-vous, que vos parent! 
 
 soient contents, (afin 
 
SEVEN 11-N1NTH LESSON. (3) 
 
 Queje Use ou quefecrh e, on y trouve 
 
 toujours a red\re, (soil que.) 
 Je ne puis rien dire que tu ne k 
 
 saches, (sans que.} 
 Ne commencez pas que je ne voua 
 
 avertisse, (avant que.) 
 Jamais on ne le punit qu'il ne rait 
 
 meritCj (d mains que.) 
 Attendez que votre pere r 
 
 Whether 1 reader write, it is always 
 found fault with. 
 
 1 can say nothing without your know- 
 ing it. 
 
 Do not begin before I give you no- 
 tice. 
 
 lie is never punished unless he has 
 deserved it. 
 
 Wait till your father returns. 
 
 (jusqu'd ce que.) 
 
 SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVIEME THME. 3me Sec 
 
 Puisqne vous allez de ce cote-la, et que vous passez tic vain la 
 boutique de 1'apothicaire, arretez-vous-y et dites-lui de nous enrcyer 
 une boite de poudre minerale. Je le ferai avec plaisir. A queLe 
 heure faut-il qu'il 1'envoie ? N'importe a quelle heure, pourvu que 
 ce soit avant 1'heure du coucher, (bed-time.) Quoiqu'il n'apprit pas 
 facilement, et qu'il n'eut guere de temps, il faisait des progr.es. Oui, 
 parce qu'il etait attentif et studieux. Si vous eussiez etc aussi indus- 
 trieux que votre cousine, et que vous vous fussiez mieux applique, 
 n r eussiez-vous pas appris davantage ? Quoiqu'il fut a faire une 
 partie d : echecs, et qu'il eut presque gagne, il la quitta des qiril apprit 
 que sa soDur desirait qu'"il 1'accompagnat. Ne commencez pas que 
 je ne vous en avertisse, et que je ne vous envoie un autre crayon. 
 Je n'y manquerai pas. 
 
 Should your father not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I will 
 lend you some. I am much obliged to you. Have you done your 
 task ? Not quite ; if I had had time, and if I had not been so uneasy 
 about (de) the arrival (Varrivee) of my father, I should have done 
 it. If you would study and be attentive, I assure you that you might 
 learn the French language in a very short time. He who wishes to 
 teach an art, must know it thoroughly, (dfond;) he must give none 
 but clear (precise) and well-digested (digercr) notions (la notion) of 
 it; he must instil (faire entrer) them one by one into the minds 
 (dans Vesprit) of his pupils, and above all, (surtout.) he must not 
 overburden (surcharger) their memory with useless or unimportant 
 (insignifiant) rules. 
 
 My dear friend, lend me a louis. Here are (en void) two instead 
 of one. How much obliged I am to you, (que d' ^obligations je vous 
 ml) I am always glad when I see you, and I find my happiness in 
 yours. Is this house to be sold ? Do you wish to buy it ? Why 
 not? Do you think it is a good house, and that it is worth 7000 
 dol.ars? I do not think it is. Why was not your sister studying? 
 d etudier ?) She would have been studying if she were not always 
 
422 
 
 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 o absent, (distrait ) I like pretty anecdotes; they season (assaisci* 
 ner) conversation, (la conversation,) and amuse everybody. Pray 
 relate me some. Look, if yon please, at page 148 of the book which 
 I lent you, and you will find some 
 
 Quelque bon \\ie vous soyer. 
 Quelqu'acariatre qu'elle ait 
 
 Quelque riches qu'ils fussent. 
 Quelque riche qu'elle cut pu 
 QuelquYldgants qu'ils so crusaent. 
 
 EIGHTIETH LESSON, 80th. Quatre vingtieme Lc^on, 80mc. 
 VOCABULAIBI. Ire Sec. 
 SUBJONCTIF Continut. 
 
 Qiielquc, whatever, whatsoever, however, is connected in three 
 (*151 1L) 
 
 However good you are or may be, 
 
 (1st way.) 
 However cross (peevish) she may 
 
 have been. 
 
 Howev. re, (mijzht lic.i 
 
 However rich she might have been. 
 However elegant they thought them- 
 selves. 
 
 Whatsoever courage you may have, 
 
 is more than you. ($ 151 11.) 
 
 Whatsoever patience we may have, 
 
 wr will never have enough. 
 
 ever riches he may have, he 
 
 will soon sec the end of them. 
 Whatsoever kindness I have had for 
 
 him, I never shall have as much 
 
 as he merits. 
 Whatsoever faults you may make, I 
 
 will take care to correct them. 
 Vhatever may be the happiness 
 
 which you enjoy, I am happier 
 
 than you. ($ 151 11.) 
 Whatsoever may be the fortune 
 
 which you enjoy, you may lose it 
 
 in an instant. 
 Whatsoever may be the efforts which 
 
 you make, you never can succeed. 
 
 Whatsoever may be the pains which 
 
 you take, no one will be under 
 
 obligations to you for them. 
 WJtatever, wJiatson-cr, (meaning all 
 
 things soever.) 
 
 Quelque courage que vous 
 
 en a plus que voiid. 
 Quelque patience que nous ayoms. 
 
 nous n'cn aurons jamais assez. 
 Quelques richesses qu'il ait, il m 
 
 vcrra bientot la fin. 
 Quelque bonte que ir lui, 
 
 je n'en aurai jamais autant qu'il le 
 
 m-'rite. 
 Quelques fautes que vous fastin, 
 
 j'aurai soin de les cor; 
 
 nheur (tout vous 
 -<ier, je suisplus heureux que 
 
 vous. 
 Qiidle que soit la fortune dont vmis 
 
 jouissiez, vous pouvez la perdrc en 
 
 un instant. 
 Quels que soient les efforts que vous 
 
 fassiez, vous ne pouvez jamaia 
 
 reussir. 
 Quelles que soient lespeinesqne vous 
 
 pre?iicz, on ne vous en aura aucun? 
 
 obligation. 
 Quelque chose q;<.e, or quoi que C soil 
 
EIGHTIETH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 425 
 
 Whatsoever you may do for my fa- 
 ther, he >vill reward you for it. 
 ($ 15113.) 
 
 I complain of nothing whatsoever. 
 
 Of whomsoever you may speak, avoid 
 slander. ($151 13.) 
 
 1 know nobody who is so good as you 
 are. <$ 1515.) 
 
 I have seen nothing that could be 
 tmed in his conduct. 
 
 Whatever his projects might be, they 
 did not succeed. ($ 15111.' 
 
 Qiiflque chose qtte (or quoi que) VOUI 
 
 faseiez pour mon perc, il vous re'* 
 
 compensera. 
 
 Je ne me plains de quoique ce soit. 
 De qui que ce soit que vous j 
 
 t'vitez la mddisance. 
 Je ne connais pcrsonnc qui soit aussi 
 
 bon que vous. 
 Jc n'ai ricn vu qu'on pnisse blamcr 
 
 dans sa conduite. 
 Quels que fussent ses projots, ila 
 
 n'ont pas n 
 
 QUATIU. TH>LE. Ire S 
 
 Qtfest il a fa ire srcher? II est a faire secher se- inais 
 
 u'il prenne a le fairc, il ne re uss'ira pas do long-temps. 
 De comK 
 
 .: you possess* De deux manieres, jo crois. Quelles sont- 
 ellr- ii pas employer le suh- 
 
 ut, il faut ['employer. Alois on doit 
 
 r .-Me est la srronde 
 
 ^Uc que soit la richcsse <; X'ya-t-il 
 
 tticre ' 1'as qua ;' sache. Comment peut-on 
 
 ' fowcvcr rich you may be? Oh ! mais ce n ? est 
 
 hatever riches you possess? Non, ce 
 
 ne s- :nesmots;mai pas la meme significa- 
 
 tion ? Alors, on peut dire: c L ne vous soycz, n'e- 
 
 i:is doule. I'n peu de jugemeiit ost la seule chose qui soit 
 
 You miKt liave patience, though you have no desire to have it; 
 for I mr. ii till I receive my money. Should I (en cos que) 
 
 receive it to-day, I will pay you all that I owe you. Do not believe 
 that I have forgotten it; for I think of it every day. Or did you be- 
 lieve, perhaps, that I had already received it? I did not believe 
 that you have already received it; but I feared that your other credit- 
 ors (le cr fancier) had already received it. You wish you had more 
 time to study, and your brothers wish they did not need to learn. 
 Would to God you had what I wish you, and that I had what I 
 \vi-h. Though we have not had what we wish, yet we have almost 
 always been contented ; and Messieurs B. have almost always been 
 discontented, though they have had everything a reasonable man 
 (un hommc raisnnnable) can be contented with. Do not believe, 
 Madam, that I have had your fan, (un cventail.) Whc tells you that 
 I believe it? My brother-in-law wishes he had not had what he 
 
24 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 has had. Wherefore T He has always had many creditors, and no 
 money. I wish you would always speak French to me; and you 
 must obey, if you wish to learn, and if you do not wish to lose youi 
 lime uselessly, (inutilcment.) I wish you were more^ industnoufi 
 {asstdu) and more attentive when I speak to you. . t 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 The superlative followed by qui or que t ($ 151 3.) 
 
 are the most amiable lady I Vous etes la dame la plus aim&bls 
 
 que je connaisse. 
 
 C'est I'homme le plus extraordinaire 
 que f a ie jamais vu. 
 
 Vous etes les eleves les plus studieus 
 que faie jamais eus. 
 
 La meilleure gMrde qu'un roi puissi 
 
 know. ($ 1513.) 
 He i& the most extraordinary man 
 
 that I have ever seen. 
 You are the most studious pupils I 
 
 have ever had. 
 The best guard a king can have is 
 
 the heart of his subjects. 
 
 avoir, c'est le co3ur de sea eujets. 
 
 An ordinal number followed by qui or que. ($ 151 3.) 
 
 He is the first man who has dared to 
 
 tell me so. 
 You are the second amiable lady that 
 
 I have met with in this town. 
 
 C'est le premier homme qni ait osiS 
 
 me le dire. 
 Vous etes la deuxieme dame aimable 
 
 que faie rencontnie duns cette 
 
 ville. 
 
 The words le seul, V unique, the only one, &c. ($ 151 3.) 
 
 You are the only one upon whom I 
 
 can rely. 
 want an office the duties of which 
 
 may be easy to fulfil. ($ 151 14.) 
 I have an office of which it is easy to 
 
 fulfil the duties. 
 I aim at a situation that may be 
 
 agreeable and lucrative. 
 I aim at a situation that is an agree- 
 able and lucrative one. 
 She is the handsomest woman of 
 
 those that were at the opera. 
 I do not know any of the persons 
 
 who called on you this morning. 
 
 I hope you will say nothing of what 
 I have intrusted you with. 
 
 have read the second volume of the 
 work which you nave lent me. 
 
 May heaven ever preserve you from 
 such a misfortune. 
 
 Would to God. 
 
 Vous etes le seul sur qui je pvime 
 
 compter. 
 Je desire une place dont les fonction* 
 
 soient aisees a remplir. 
 J'ai un emploi dont il est aise do 
 
 remplir les fonctions. 
 J'aspire a une place qui soil agree- 
 able et lucrative. 
 J'aspire a un emploi qui est agre 
 
 able et lucratif. 
 C'est la plus belle des femmes qui 
 
 etaient a r opera. ($ 151 14.) 
 Je ne connais aucune des personnea 
 
 qui sont venues chez vous ce 
 
 matin. 
 J'espere que vous ne direz rien dc c 
 
 que je vous ai confie. 
 J'ai lu le second volume de 1'ouvrnpo 
 
 que vous m'avea prete*. 
 Fasse le Ciel que pareil malheur nc 
 
 vous arrive jamais. 
 Plut a Dieu. 
 Plut au Ciel. 
 
EIGHTIETH LESSON. (3.) 495 
 
 Would to God it were so ! i Plut a Dieu qu il en fut ainsi I 
 
 Would to God he had done it ! | Plut a Dieu qu'il 1'eut fait ! 
 
 QUATRE-VIXGTIEME TlIiblE. 2de SCC. 
 
 M. J. B, m'a ecrit un billet, clans lequel il me dit: Quoique 1'ar- 
 gent soil rare et qu'on n'en obtiernie que diilicilement, je vous 
 envoie un bon (check) sur la banque, pour la somme dont vous avez 
 besom. Puisqu'il en. agit ainsi, il s'ensuit qu'*il est mon ami. 
 H 151 4.) Quel est le plus beau don que Dieu ait fait a Phommel 
 L ; Evangile esi ie plus beau present que l ; hornme ait rect de Dieu. 
 Si la vie et la mort de Socrate sont d ; un sage, que peut-on dire de 
 la vie et de la mort de Jesus-Christ'? Que ce sont celles d'ur. 
 dieu. Arrive-t-il souvent qiron soit trompe par ses amis? 11 ^'ar- 
 rive pas souvent qu'on soit trompe par eux. On est souvent irompe 
 par de faux amis: niais il est rare qu'on le soit par de vrais amis. 
 
 If I were not your friend, and if you were not mine, I should not 
 speak thus to you. Do not trust (meficz-vous dc) Mr. N., for he 
 flatters you: do you think a llatterer (un Jlatteur) can be a friend? 
 You do not know him as well as I, though you see him every 
 day. Do not think that I am angry with him, because his father 
 has offended me. Oh! here he is coming, (le voild qui vient,) you . 
 may tell him all yourself. What do you think of our king ? I say 
 he is a great man, but I add, that though kings be ever so powerful, 
 (puissant,) they die as well as the meanest (v:l) of their subjects. 
 Have you been pleased with my sisters? I have; for howevei 
 plain (laidc) they may be, they are still very amiable ; and however 
 learned (savant) our neighbor's daughters may be, they are still 
 sometimes mistaken. Is not their father rich? However rich he 
 may be, he may Jose all in an instant. Whoever the enemy may 
 be whose malice (la malice) you dread, (apprihcndcr,) you ought to 
 rely (se reposer) upon your innocence; but the laws (la loi) condemn 
 (condamncr) all criminals, (un crimincl), whatever they may be. 
 Whatever your intentions (une intention) might be, you should have 
 acted differently, (differcmmcnt.) Whatever the reasons (la raison) 
 be which you may allege, (alleguei'j) they will not excuse youi 
 action, blame ible in itself. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 
 to God that all great lords | Plut a Dieu que tous les granda 
 
 loved peace! ( 151 15.) 
 Would to God we may never he 
 
 seigneurs aimassent la paix ! 
 Plut au Ciel que nous ne fussioni 
 
 more unhapy . jamais plus malheureux: 
 
 May you be happy ! 
 
 Puissiez-vous etre heureux ! 
 
 Though it cost me alJ I have, I shall Dut-il m'en coiiter tout cc .^uo jo 
 
126 
 
 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (3.) 
 
 possede, je saurai me preserve! 
 d'un semblable rnalheur. 1 
 Fussent-ils a cent lieuesd'ici. j'iraia 
 les chercher. 2 
 
 know hew to preserve myself from 
 
 such anr.sfortune. ($ 151. 15.) 
 S.iould \ey be a hundred leagues 
 
 hence, I would go for them. 
 
 06s. 166. It is essential for foreigners to observe, that in the French lan- 
 guage the construction with the infinitive is preferable to that with the sub- 
 junctive, whenever the former may be employed without ambiguity, that 
 is, when the same English subject is repeated. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) Say, there- 
 ibre : 
 
 I come (in order) to see you ; not : ( Je viens pour votis voir; and not : 
 I come that 1 may see you. t Je viens pour qne je vous voie. 
 
 {Je ne crois pas pouvoir sortit dcmaiu ; 
 and not : 
 Je ne crois pas que je puisse scrtir 
 demain. 
 
 I shall marry a woman who will 
 
 please me. ($ 151 14.) 
 I shall marry a woman who must 
 
 please me : or, the woman I shall 
 
 marry must please me. 
 fere is a book for you which you 
 
 may consult occasionally. 
 ?i ve me a book that I may be able 
 
 to consult occasionally. 
 Lend me that book, which you do 
 
 not want. 
 Lend me a book which you may not 
 
 be in want of. 
 Do not leave a place where you are 
 
 comfortable, and whence you tear 
 
 well, 
 'hoose a place where you may be 
 
 comfortable, and whence you may 
 
 hear well. 
 
 Ind. J'cpouserai une femmo qui me 
 
 plaira. 
 Subj. J'epouserai une femme qui me 
 
 plaise. 
 
 Ind. Voila un livro que vous pourtea 
 
 consulter an besoin. 
 Sulj. Donnez-moi un livre que je 
 
 puissc consulter au besoin. 
 Ind. Prctez-moi ce livre, dont vous 
 
 n'avcz pas besoin. 
 Snhj. Pretez-moi un livre dont vous 
 
 n'ayez pas besoin. 
 Ind. Ne quittez pas une place ou 
 
 vous etes commodemcnt, et d'<m 
 
 vous entendez bien. 
 Subj. Choisissez une place ou vous 
 
 soyez commodement, et d'oa vous 
 
 entendiez bien. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGTIEME Tfi^ME. 3me See. 
 
 L'homme, en general, peut-il lever un fardcau (burden) de 300 
 livres ? Quelques hommes peuvent lever des fardeaux beaucoup plus 
 pcsants (heavy) ; mais il y a peu d'hommes qui puissent en lever 
 un de 300 livres. Avons-nous du riz ? Nous en avons un peu, mais 
 ;e ne crois pas que nous en ayons assez. Faut-il que j'en achete ilh 
 i*ac ? Non 7 un boisscau (bushel) sera assez. Pensez-vous qu ? ua 
 boisseau dure jusqu'a ce que le riz nouveau paraisse 1 Je pense que 
 oui. La recolte de riz (crop) peut etre mauvaise ; ne vaudrait-il paa 
 
 1 Instead of Quand meme il devrait m* en couter tout ce qu* .;e postcdc 
 &c. Si meme il devait m'en couter, &c. 
 8 Quajid meme us seraient d cent lieues d'ici, 6/c. S J Us elaieyt 
 
EIGHTY -FIRST LESSON-, (l) 427 
 
 mieux que nous en achetassions plus (Tim boisseau ? Comme la 
 recolte de ble et celle de mais ont ete bonnes, la difference de prix 
 ne pourrait pas etre considerable, en c a .s ($151) meme que la 
 recolte de riz vint a manquer. Cependant, faites comme vous 
 voudrez. Non, je ferai comme il vous plaira, pourvu que vous mo 
 le disiez. 
 
 Whatever may happen to you in this world, never murmur (i/iur- 
 murer) against Divine Providence, (la divine providence :) for what- 
 ever we may suffer, we deserve it. Whatever I may do, you aro 
 never satisfied. Whatever you may say, your sisters shall be 
 punished, if they deserve it, and if they do not endeavor to amend, 
 (* 7 amende r.) Who has taken my gold watch ? I do not know. Do 
 not believe that I have had it. or that Miss C. has, had your silver 
 snuff-box, (la tabatiere,) for I saw both in the hands of your sister 
 when we weie playing at forfaits, (au gage touche.) To morrow 1 
 shall set out for Dover; but in a fortnight I shall be back again, 
 (revcnir,*) and then I shall come and see you and your family. 
 Where is your sister at present 1 She is at Paris, and my brother is 
 at Berlin. That little woman is said (on dit) to be going to marry 
 General (le general) K., your friend ; is it true ? I have not heard of 
 it. What news is there of our great army ? It is said to be lying 
 (etre) between the Weser (le Veser) and the Rhine, (le Rhin.) All 
 that the courier told me seeming (paraitre) very probable., (vraisem- 
 liable.) I went home immediately, wrote some letters, and departed 
 lor London. 
 
 EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON, 81st. Quatre-vingt-uwme Lcron, 81m*. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE, Ire SeC. 
 
 Just a little, ever so little. 
 
 Will you do me the favor of giving 
 
 me apiece of bread? 
 Do you wish a great deal ? 
 
 Tant s.oit pen. 
 
 Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de mo 
 
 donner un morceau de pain ? 
 En voulez-vous beaucoup ? 
 
 No, just a little. Non, tant soit pcu. 
 
 To turn to account > t Fai 
 
 > 
 
 To make the best of. 
 
 That man does not know how to 
 
 make the most of his talents. 
 That man turns his monsy to account 
 
 in trade. 
 How do you employ your money ? 
 
 t Get homme ne sait pas faire valcif 
 
 ses talents, 
 t Get homme fait valoir son argent 
 
 dams le commerce. 
 1 Comment faites-vous valoir \otrc 
 
 argent ? 
 
 I employ it in the stocks. ) t Je le fais valoir dans les fonds pub 
 
 I turn it to account in the stocks. 5 lies. 
 
428 
 
 EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (].) 
 
 la it not proper that he should claim 
 his rights ? Let him claim them. 
 
 To boast, to brag. 
 
 I do not like that man, because he 
 boasts too much. 
 
 Notwithstanding that. 
 For all that, although. 
 That man is a little bit of a rogue, 
 
 but notwithstanding he passes for 
 
 an honest man. 
 Although that man is not very well, 
 
 he notwithstanding works a great 
 
 deal. 
 Although that woman is not very 
 
 pretty, still she is very amiable. 
 
 Although that man has not the least , 
 talent, yet for all that he boasts a 
 great deal. 
 
 Although that tavern-keeper's wife is 
 rather swarthy, yet for all that she 
 turns the business to good account. 
 
 Provided you write on the 3d, and 
 put your letter in the post-office 
 before 11 o'clock, I will receive it 
 on the 5th. 
 
 To go lack, to return. 
 
 The top, the upper part. 
 Upper Canada. 
 
 The bottom, the lower part. 
 Lower Canada. 
 
 Up to the top. To the very bottom. 
 
 The eldest brother. The eldest sister. 
 
 He is the eldest. She was the eldest. 
 
 N'est-il pas apropos qu'ilfasae veloi 
 see droits ? Qu'll les fasso veloh 
 
 t Sefaire valoir. 
 
 t Je n'aime pas cet homma. pare* 
 qu'il se fait trop valoir. 
 
 > JVe laisser pas de. 
 
 Cet homme est tar.t soit pea fripon, 
 mais il ne laisse pas de passer poul 
 honnete homme. 
 
 Quoique cet homme ne soit pas bicD 
 portant, il ne laisse pas de tra 
 vailler beaucoup. 
 
 Quoique cette femme ne soit pas bien 
 jolie, elle ne laisse pas d'etre fori 
 aimable. 
 
 Quoique cet homme n'ait aucun ta- 
 lent, il ne laisse pas de se faire 
 beaucoup valoir. 
 
 Quoique la femme de cet aubergiste 
 soit tant soit peu basanee, elle no 
 laisse pas de faire valoir le bouchon. 
 
 Pourvu que \ous e'criviez le 3, et 
 c.ue \ous mettiez votre lettre a lo 
 poste avant 11 heureB,je la re 
 cevrai le 5. 
 
 lift ourner, 1. 
 
 Le haut. 
 Le Haut Canrda. 
 
 Le bas. 
 Le Bas Canada. 
 
 Jusqu'en haut. Jusqu'en bas. 
 
 Le frere aine. La sceur ainec. 
 
 C'est 1'aine. C'etait 1'ainee. 
 
 TiifhiE. Ire Sec. 
 Mon cafe n'est pas assez sucre, veuillez me donner tant soit peu 
 plus de sucre. Avec plaisir. II faut que vous aimiez votre cafe 
 bien sucre, car je crois y avoir mis deux cueillerecs (spoonfuls) de 
 Sucre. Que vous y ayez mis ($ 151 10) deux cueillerees oi non, 
 le cafe n'etait pas assez sucre. II est possible que je n'y en aie mig 
 qu'une. Serait-il etonnant que vous n'y en eussiez pas mis du tout] 
 Oui, vraiment; il serait tres etonnant que j'eusse oublie d'y en met- 
 tre. Cela ne vous arrive-t-il jamais 1 ? Pas tres-souvent, je vous 
 assure. Je le crois. Je peux dire, sans me faire valoir, que jo suis 
 au fait de ma bcsogne, (business.) Ce n'est pas d'aujourd'hui que jo 
 m'en apen;ois. Vous connaissez Mlle.Eloise, n'est-<;e pas? N'est- 
 
EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 
 
 elle pas amiable? Quoiqifelle ne soit ni jolie ni spiritualle, (witty,) 
 clie ne laisse pas d'etre tres-aimable. 
 
 Where are the two Misses Vignette ? They have not yet returned 
 from Europe. You are acquainted with them, are you not ? I know 
 the eldest only. Is it possible that you do not know both of them 1 
 When are they to return? They will not return before their com- 
 pany has visited Italy and the upper and the lower Rhine. Although 
 
 Theodore B is younger than his brother Henry, for all that he is 
 
 ai talented (a autant de talents) as his elder brother, (sonfrfre aine, 
 or simply son aine.) Whither shall you go next year? I shall go 
 to England, for it is a fine kingdom, (le royaume,) \vhere I intend 
 spending the summer on (a) my return from France. Whither shall 
 you go in the winter ? I shall go to Italy, and ihence (de Id) to the 
 West Indies, (aux Indcs occidentals , ou aux colonies,) 1 but before that 
 I must go to Holland to take leave of my friends. What country do 
 these people inhabit? (haliter?) They inhabit the south (le midi) 
 of Europe ; their countries are called Italy, Spain, and Portugal, and 
 they themselves are Italians, Spaniards, or Portuguese ; but the pooplc 
 called Ptussians, Swedes, Poles, and Hungarians (Hongrois) inhabit 
 the north and east of Europe and the names of their countries are 
 Russia, Sweden, Poland, (la Pologne,) and Hungary. France is 
 separated (separcr) from Italy by (par) the Alps, (les Mpes,) and 
 from Spain by the Pyrenees, (les Pyrenees.) 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. 
 
 To appear, to seem, seeming, seemed, 
 
 appear. Let him appear. 
 I appear, thou appearest, he appears. 
 To keep, to maintain. 
 My keeping or maintenance. 
 My keeping costs me six hundred 
 
 francs a year. 
 To drive in, to sink. 
 To converse with. 
 A conversation. 
 
 To spare, save, lay up, put by lOOOf. 
 Spare your money. 
 To get tired. 
 To be tired. 
 To handle. To lean against. 
 
 par 
 
 Paraitre,*4, paraissant, paru, 
 
 aissez. Qu ? il paraisse. 
 Je parais, tu parais, il parait. 
 Entretenir,* 2. 
 Mon entreticn. 
 Mon entretien me coute six ccn; 
 
 francs par an. 
 Enf oncer, 1. 
 S'entretenir* avec. 
 Un e-ntretien, une conversation. 
 6pargner, 1. Sauver mille francs. 
 6pargnez votre argent. 
 Se lasser, (de bef. inf.) 
 tre las ; fern, lasse, (de bef. inf.) 
 Manier, 1. S'appuyer, 1. 
 
 1 The word Colonies, is more used by the French than, Indes occidentals , 
 (West Indies,) which is the book-word; just as in New York they say the 
 North instead of the Hudson river, &c. East Indies, (book- word) Indcs 
 nnentalcs ; (colloquial) Lcs hides ou les Grandes Indcs 
 
30 
 
 EIGHTY-FIRST LfcSSON. (2.) 
 
 Lean against me. 
 
 ^ean against the wall. 
 
 To aim at. 
 
 Short. To stop short 
 
 Virtue is amiable. ( 15.) 
 
 Vice is odious. 
 
 Men are mortal. 
 
 Gold is precious. 
 
 Corn is sold at a crown a bushtl. 
 
 Beef costs four pence a pound. 
 
 The horror of vice, and the love of 
 
 virtue, are the delights of the wise 
 
 man. 
 England is a fine country. 
 
 Appuyez-vous sur moi. 
 Appuyez-vous contre la muraillc, 
 Coucher enjoue. 
 
 Court. S'arreter tout court. 
 La vertu est aimable. 
 Le vice est odieux. 
 Les hommes soat mortels. 
 L> or est precieux. 
 Le bl6 se vend un e*cu le boisseau. 
 Le bceuf coute quatre sous la livre. 
 L'horreur du vice, et 1' amour de U 
 vertu, sont les delices du scge. 
 
 L'Angleterre est u:i beau pays. 
 
 Ols. 167. The definite article is also used before the names of kingdoms, 
 countries, and provinces.- ($ 15.) 
 
 Italy is the garden of Europe. 
 The dog is the friend and companion 
 of man. 
 
 L ? Italic est le jardin de T Europe. 
 Le chien est Z'ami ct le compagnon 
 de Z'homme. 
 
 Obs. 168. The articles are repeated in French before every substantive, 
 nnd agree with it in gender and number. (Dir. 2.) 
 
 Thessaly produces wine, oranges, 
 lemons, olives, and all sorts of 
 fruit. 
 
 He ate the bread, meat, apples, and 
 cakes; he drank the wine, beer, 
 and cider. 
 
 Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are 
 valuable endowments when heigh- 
 tened by modesty. 
 
 The longer the days the shorter the 
 nights, and the longer the nights 
 the shorter the days. ($ 200 12.) 
 
 Txi Thessalie produit du vin, de* 
 oranges, des. citrons, des olivos, et 
 toute's sortes de fruits. 
 
 II a mange* le pain, la viande, les 
 pommes, et les gateaux ; ilabu lo 
 vin, la biere, et le cidre. 
 
 La beaut^, les graces, et Z'esprit, sont 
 des avantages bien precieiui, quand 
 ils sont releve's par la modcstio. 
 
 Plus les jours sont lon^ plus les 
 nuits sont courtes, et plus les nuita 
 sont longues plus leo jours sont 
 courts. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGT-UNIEME THME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Plus vous paraissez vous amuser, plus il parait s'anuiser aussi. 
 (200 12.) Le vaisseau a touche, (grounded,) n'est-ct? p?.s dom- 
 mage 1 II est dommage qu'il ait echouej (echouer, 1, to ground,) 
 mais je ne crois pas que nous courions aucun danger. Oh ! vcyex 
 comme il s'enfonce ! N'ayez aucune peur. Plus il s'enfonccra 
 dans le sable moins nous courrons danger de chavirer, (upset.) C'est 
 7ra" ; p*^s il entrera dans le sable moins il y aura de danger qu 7 >] 
 
 ' Except when preceded by en or de. Ex. JTirai en Ati>:Magne a, mo* 
 rctour de France, T shall go to Germany on riy return from Fiance. 
 
EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON, (l ) 433 
 
 chavire, a moms qu ; il ne s'enfonce entierement. Ne craignez paa 
 cela. J'ai grand 7 peur. Appuyez-vous sur moi. Je vous lasserai, 
 je vous fatiguerai. Qu'est-ce qui est aimable, la vertu ou le vice ? 
 Qu'est-ce qui estodieux? Qu'est-ce qui est precieux? Qu'est-ce 
 qui se vend un ecu le boisseau ? Vous avez visite PAngleterre , c'est 
 uu beau royaume, n'est-ce pas ? 
 
 Though the Mahometans (le Mahometan) are forbidden the use of 
 wine, (defendre quelque chose a quelqu : un,) yet for all that some of 
 them drink it. Has your brother eaten anything this morning ? He 
 has eaten a great deal ; though he said he had no appetite, yet for 
 all that he ate all the meat, bread, and vegetables, (les legumes,) and 
 drank all the wine, beer, and cider. Are eggs (un <mf] dear at pre- 
 sent? They are sold at six francs a hundred. In case they are 
 cheaper to-morrow, buy J a hundred. Do you like grapes? (ie rai- 
 sin'?) I do not only (non settlement) like grapes, but also plums, 
 (une prune,) almonds, nuts, and all sorts of fruit. Though modesty, 
 candor, and an amiable disposition (Vamabilite) are valuable endow- 
 ments, yet for all that there are some ladies that are neither modest, 
 nor candid, (candide,) nor amiable. The fear of death and the love 
 of life being natural to men, they ought to shun (fuir*) vice, (le vice,) 
 and adhere to (s'attachcr d) virtue. What does your living dost you 
 a year? Do you spend less than your eldest brother? The less 
 you will spend the more you will save ; are you not of my opinion ? 
 Are you taking aim at that small bird? Is it worth killing? 
 Was not the last scholar who recited obliged to stop several times, 
 and finally to stop short? Was it not a pity? Did he not appear 
 very modest, although he was talented ? The more I sang the lesa 
 embarrassed I felt, (ctais, ou je me scntais.) Is it so with you? 
 
 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. Quatre-vingt-deuxicme Le$on } 82m*. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 To give occasion. 
 
 Do not give him cause to complain. 
 
 To leave it to one.' 
 
 1 leave it to you. 
 
 A good bargain. 
 
 To stick or to abide by a thing. 
 
 1 abido by the offer you have made 
 
 me. 
 I do not doubi but you are my friend 
 
 Donner lieu, (dc before infin.) 
 
 Ne lui donnez pas lieu de se plaindro. 
 
 t S 1 en rapporter d quclqu'iin. 
 
 t Je m'en rapporte a voua. 
 
 Un bon marche. 
 
 t S'en tenir a. 
 
 t Je m'en tiens a 1'oflre quo <roni 
 
 m'avez faite. 
 
 Je ne doute pas que vous ne eoyoa 
 mon ami. 
 
432 
 
 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (I.) 
 
 Ota. 169. When the verb douter is negatively used, it requires Tie before 
 subjunctive. 
 
 [ do not doubt but he will do it. 
 
 To suffer, to bear. 
 
 They were exposed to the whole fire 
 
 ,of the place. 
 To examine one artfully, or to draw 
 
 a secret from one. 
 J examined him artfully, and by that 
 
 means I have made myself ac- 
 
 duainted with all his affairs. 
 To 'bear, or to put up with. 
 You will be obliged to put up with 
 
 all he wishes. 
 Thick. 
 
 A thick cloud. A thick beard. 
 A burst. A burst of laughter. 
 
 To burst out laughing. To burst out. 
 To burst out a laughing. 
 Splendor, brightness. 
 To make a great show. To light. 
 To suffer one's self to be beaten. 
 To let or to suffer one's self to fall. 
 To suffer one's self to be insulted. 
 To suffer one's self to die. 
 To let one's self be struck. 
 To send back, to send away. 
 To extol, to praise up. 
 To boast, to praise one's self, to brag. 
 
 Je ne doute pas qu'il ne Jr. fasse. 
 
 Essuyer, 1. 
 
 Us essuyerent tout le feu de la place. 
 
 Tirer les vers du nez a quelqu'un. 
 
 Je lui ai tire les vers du nez, et pat 
 ce moyen je me suis mis au fait de 
 toutes ses affaires. 
 
 En passer par. 
 
 Vous serez oblige d'en passer par 
 tout ce qu'il voudra. 
 
 6pais ; fern, dpaisse. 
 
 Un nuage epais. Une barbe epaisse, 
 
 Un eclat. Un eclat de rire. 
 
 Faire un eclat de rire. Eclater, 1. 
 
 fcclairer, 1. 
 
 e rire. 
 L'e'clat. 
 
 t Faire de 1'eclat. 
 Se laisser battre. 
 Se laisser tomber. 
 Se laisser insulter. 
 Se laisser mourir. 
 Se laisser frapper. 
 Renvoyer, 1. 
 Vanter, 1. 
 Se vanter. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGT-DEUXIEME TH&ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 11 se plaint que nous le grondions, n'est-ce pas? Oui, il s'en 
 plaint. II (lit que quelque chose qu'il fasse, on y trouve toujours a 
 redire. Quoi que ce soit qu'il fasse mal ; on y trouve a redire. Mais 
 que fait-il de bien? Est-il possible que vous ayez fait un si bon 
 marche 1 Ne vous donnent-ils pas lieu de se plaindre d'eux ? A 
 qui vous en rapportez-vous 1 Doutez-vous encore que je sois votre 
 ami 1 Doutez-vous de leur arrive 1 Doutent-ils que leur cousin 
 soit arrive ? Les Russes n'ont-ils pas essuye une perte considerable 7 
 S'il ne vous Pa pas promis, vous serez oblige d'en passer par tout 
 ce qu'il voudra, et je crains qu'il soit impossible que vous receviez 
 ?os fonds. Comme les nuages sont epais ! Ne va-t-il pas neiger ? 
 Qui a fa/'t cet eclat de rire ? Qui ? Cela peut-ii etre quelqu'autre 
 qu'Etienne? Ce jeune homme se vante toujours de pouvoir tout 
 Cairo ; il est vrai- qu'il fait bien des choses. II se laisse tomber do 
 jhcval. II se laisse insulter. meme frapper. Enfin, 1'autre jour il 
 
EJGHTV-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 
 
 438 
 
 t'est laisse baure. Les Russes ne se sont-ils pas laisse battre? Get 
 nomine n'est-il pas ivre? (drunk?) . 
 
 Will you drink a cup of coffee '? I thank you, I do not like coi- 
 fee. Then you will drink a glass of wine ? I have just drunk some. 
 Let us take a walk. Willingly, (je le veux bien:) but \vhere shall 
 we go to ? Come with me into my aunt's garden ; we shall there find 
 very agreeable society. I believe it, (je le crois bien;) but the que$- 
 iion is (Jest d saroir) whether this agreeable society will admit me, 
 (vzidra de moi.) You are welcome everywhere. What ails you, 
 iqiCavcz-vous.) my friend? How do you like that wine? i like it 
 very well, (excellent :) but 1 have drunk enough of it, (sujfwmment.) 
 Drink once more, (encore un coup.) No, too much is unwhole- 
 some, (mahaiii ;) I know my constitution, (le temperament.) Do not 
 fall. What is the matter with you ? I do not know; but my head 
 is giddy, (la tcte me tourne :) I think t am fainting, (tomber en de- 
 f alliance.) I think so also, for you look almost like a dead person, 
 (un morl.) What countryman are you ? I am an Englishman. You 
 speak French so well that I took you for a Frenchman by birth, 
 (Fran^ais de nation.) You are jesting. Pardon me; I do not jest a 
 <U1. How long have you been in France ? A few 7 days. In earnest ? 
 (Serieusemcnl?) You doubt it, perhaps, because I speak French; I 
 knew it before I came to France. How did you learn it so well'' 
 [ did like the prudent starling. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2dc Sec. 
 
 Go thither. Let us go thither. 
 
 Go thoii. Go there. 
 
 Go away. Do not go away. 
 
 Let him go thither. 
 
 Let them go thither. 
 
 Go away, begone. Let us begone. 
 
 Let him go away, let him begone. 
 
 Give me. 
 
 Give it to me. 
 
 Give it to him. 
 
 Give him some. 
 
 Get paid. 
 
 Let us set out. Let us not. 
 
 Let us breakfast. Let me dine. 
 
 Let him give it me. 
 
 Ixjt him be here at twelve o'clock. 
 
 Let him send it me. 
 
 He may believe it. 
 
 Make an end of it. Let him finish. 
 
 Lx?t him take it. Let her say so. 
 
 Allez-y. Allons-y. 
 
 Va. Vas-y. ($ 1505.) 
 
 Va-t'en. Ne t'en va pas. 
 
 Qu'ii y aille. 
 
 Qu'ils y aillent. 
 
 Allez-vous en. Allons-noue en. 
 
 Qu'il s'en ailie. 
 
 Donnez-moi. 
 
 Donnez-le-moi. 
 
 Donnez-le-lui. 
 
 Donnez-lui-en. 
 
 Faites-vous payer. 
 
 Partons. Ne partona pas. 
 
 Dejeunons. Laisser, moi dinoi . 
 
 Qu'il me le donne. 
 
 Qu'il soit ici arnidi. 
 
 Qu'il me 1'envoie. 
 
 Qu'il le croie. 
 
 Finissez. Qu'ii finisse. 
 
 Qu'il !c premne. Qu'elle le diwe. 
 
434. 
 
 EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 
 
 The starling. 
 
 If I were to question you as I used 
 to do at the beginning of our les- 
 sons, what would you answer ? 
 
 *A'o found these questions at first 
 rather ridiculous; but full of con- 
 fidence in your method, we an- 
 swered as well as the small quan- 
 tity of words and rules we then 
 possessed allowed us. 
 
 We were not long in finding out that 
 those questions were calculated to 
 ground us in the rules and to ex- 
 ercise us in conversation, by the 
 contradictory answers we were 
 obliged to make. 
 
 We can now almost keep up a con- 
 versation in French. 
 
 This phraso does not seem to us 
 logically correct. 
 
 We snould be ungrateful if we al- 
 lowed such an opportunity to es- 
 cape without expressing our live- 
 liest gratitude to you. 
 
 In all cases, at all events. 
 
 The native. 
 
 The insurmountable difficulty. 
 
 Le sansonnet. 
 
 Si je vous posais maintenant dea 
 questions comme je vous en ai 
 pose au commencement de noa 
 lecons, (comme j'avais d'abord 
 1'habitude de le faire,) que repon- 
 driez-vous? 
 
 .Nous avonsd'abord trouve ces ques- 
 tions tant soit peu ridicules ; maie 
 pleins de confiance en votre me** 
 thode, nous y avonsrepondu aussi 
 bien que la petite provision de mots 
 et de principes que nous avions 
 alors pouvait nous le permettre. 
 
 Nous n'avons pas tarde' n. nous aper- 
 cevoir que ces questions etaient 
 calculees pour nons inculquer les 
 principes et nous exeicer a la con- 
 versation, par les reponses contra- 
 dictoires que nous etions forces 
 d'y faire. 
 
 Maintenant nous savoris presque sou- 
 tenir une conversation en Fransais. 
 
 Cette phrase ne nous paralt pas 
 logiquement correcle. 
 
 Nous serions des ingrats si nous lais- 
 sions echapper une si belle occa* 
 sion, sans vous tdmoigner la recon- 
 naissance la plus vive. 
 
 En tout cas. 
 
 L' horn me ne dans le pays. 
 
 La difficulte insurrnontable. 
 
 QtJATRE-VINGT-DETJXIEME TH&ME. 2de See. 
 
 Jean veut s'en aller? Je croyais qu'il s'en ctait deja alle. Non 
 il est encore dans Pautre chambre. Qu'est-il a faire ? II est a 
 regarder les nuages. Occupation tres-instructive, vraiment! II a 
 peur qu'il pleuve, et comme il demeure loin, il voudrait savoir s'b 
 peut s'en aller. Qu'il s'en aille, s'il craint qu'il pleuve. Si vous lo 
 craignez aussi, pretez-lui un parapluie. Je n'en ai pas a lui pretcr. 
 Faut-il que je prenne le votre ? II ne faut pas que vous preniez le 
 neuf. parce que vous savez que Jean est un etourdi, (giddy boy;) 
 et il pourraitle perclre, mais prenez le vieux, et quil s'en aille bien 
 \rite, ou plulot qu'ii attende, car la pluie a commence. Est-il 
 probable que ce ne soit qivune ondee ? (shower?) II me parait que 
 ce ne sera qu'une ondee. A quelle heure faut-il qu'il soit ici ? * 
 Nefaut-il pas que je fimsse !e paysage avant de rn'en aller 1 - 
 
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 435 
 
 Qu'elle le disc on non, je n'en crois rien, et vous? N J est-il pas a 
 dejeuner? N'etaient-elles pas a coudre ? Si vous ne venez qu'a 
 cinq heures au lieude trois, ils ne pourront pas sortir avec nous, parce 
 qu' cette heure-la ils seront a reciter leurs lecons. 
 
 DIALOGUE. 
 
 The Master. If I were now to ask you such questions as I did in 
 the beginning of our lessons, vij. (telles que :) Have you the liat 
 which my brother has ? am I hungry ? has he the tree of my brother's 
 garden 1 &c. What would you answer 1 
 
 The Pupils. We are obliged (etre force) to confess that we found 
 these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of confidence in 
 the method you follow, we answered as well as the small quantity 
 of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were, in 
 fact, not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to 
 ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the 
 contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we 
 can almost keep up a conversation in the beautiful language which 
 you teach us, we should answer: It is impossible that we should 
 have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons cannot 
 have one and the same thing. To the second question we should 
 answer, that it is impossible for us to know whether you are hungry 
 or not. As to the last, we should say : that there is more than one 
 tree in a garden ; and in asking us whether he has the tree of the 
 garden, the phrase does not seem to us logically correct. At all 
 events we should be ungrateful (ingrat) if we allowed such an op- 
 portunity to escape, without expressing (temoigncr) our liveliest gra- 
 titude to you for the trouble you have taken. In arranging those 
 wise combinations, (la combinaison,) you have succeeded in ground- 
 ing us almost imperceptibly (impcrceptiblenient) in the rules, and 
 exercising us in the conversation, of a language which, taught in 
 any other way, presents to foreigners, and even to natives, almosl 
 insurmountable difficulties. 
 
 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSOR .Quatre-vingt-troisieme Lccon, 83m* 
 "VocAEULAiRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 It lacks a quarter. 
 
 It lacks a half. 
 
 How much does it want \ 
 
 It daes not want much. 
 
 j t II s'en faut cTun quart, 
 t II s'en faut de la moitic. 
 Combien s'en faut-il ! 
 II ne s'en faut pas beaucoup. 
 
 It want 3 but a trifle. ' II sYn faut de peu de chose. 
 
436 
 
 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 
 
 It lacks but an inch of my being as 
 
 tall as you. 
 It lacked a great deal of my being as 
 
 ricli as you. 
 
 In a foolish manner, at random. 
 il3 talks at random like a crazy man, 
 
 a fool, or a drunkard. 
 To resort to violence. 
 A fact. It is a fact. 
 
 Else, or else. To make fun of. 
 
 To contradict, to give one the lie. 
 Should he say so, I would give him 
 
 the lie. 
 
 His actions belie his words. 
 To scratch. 
 To escape. 
 1 fell from the top of the tree to the 
 
 bottom, but I did not hurt myself 
 
 much. 
 I escaped with a scratch. 
 
 The thief has been taken, but he 
 will escape with a few months' 
 imprisonment. 
 
 By dint of. 
 
 By dint of labor. 
 
 By too much weeping. 
 
 You will cry your eyes out. 
 
 I obtained of him that favor by dint 
 
 of entreaty. 
 That excepted. 
 That fault excepted, he is a good 
 
 man. 
 
 II s'en faut d'un pouce qne je eoli 
 
 aussi grand que vous. 
 II s'en fallait de beaucoup que je 
 
 fusse aussi riche que vous. 
 t A tort et d travers. 
 II parle a tort et a travers ccmrne un 
 
 fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne, 
 En venir aux voies de fait. 
 Un fait. C'est un fait. 
 
 Ou lien. Se moquer de. 
 
 Dementir quelqu'un. 
 S'il disait ccla, je le demenlirars. 
 
 Ses actions dementcnt ses paroles. 
 
 Kgratignerj 1. 
 
 t En etre quitte pozr. 
 
 J'ai tombe duhaut de Tarbre en bja, 
 mais je ne me suls pas fait beau- 
 coup dc mal. 
 
 J'en ai ctu quitte pour .me egra- 
 tignure. 
 
 Le voleur a ete pris, mais il en serm 
 quitte pour quclques mois de pri- 
 son. 
 
 t A force de. 
 
 t A force de travail. 
 
 t A force de pleurer. 
 
 t A force de pleurer, vous perdrez 
 les yeux. 
 
 t J'obtins de lui cette faveur a force 
 de prieres. 
 
 t A cela pres. 
 
 t A ce defaut pres, c'est un bou 
 homme. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGT-TROISIME TiiihiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 Avez-vous toute la somme ? II s'en faut d'un quart que ju ne 
 I'aie. D'un quart, avez-vous dit ? II s'en fiiut presquo de la moitie. 
 Seriez-vous salisfait de la J de ce que je possede ? Ce que j'ai et la 
 J de ce que vous possedez, me rendraient riche. Vous ne pensez 
 pas a ce que vous dites, y pensez-vous ? Est-ce que je parle 
 comme un fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne'? Pour peu que vous soyez 
 ivre, vous parlez comrne un sot ou comme un fou. Je vous remercie 
 du compliment. Vous etes le bienvenu, car vous le rneritez autant 
 que qui que ce soil. Croyiez-vous etre aussi grand que Rochamp r i 
 Otij je le croyais, mais Tautre jour, quand je me tirsdebout aupres 
 de lui, ie vis qne j'etais de beancoup plus petit. De oombien do 
 
RIGHT Y-TillllD LESSON. (2.) 437 
 
 pouces eles-vous plus petit 1 ? II s-en faut de trois pouces au nioins 
 quo je ne sois aussi grand que lui. Ne querellez plus avec lui 
 autrement vous en viendrez aux voies de fait. Si vous ne voiilez pas 
 que je me querelle avec lui, il faut Pempecher de se moquer de moi. 
 Je tacherai de le faire. 
 
 Do you not often contradict Henry when he relates something 1 
 [ do only when he says incredible, (incroyable.) inconsistent, (incon- 
 stant.) or false things. ( $ 2007.) What do you think of Mrs. A 1 
 Her company, her conversation, is agreeable enough; only, she 
 exaggerates too much ; that excepted, she is a pleasant lady. Your 
 uncle will not grant what you want. I hope he will, by dint of 
 entreaty. You will entreat in vain, (beau pricr ;) you will not obtain 
 it. Never mind, I will ask whether I obtain it or not. 
 
 Will you be my guest'? (manger avec quclqu'un.) I thank you; a 
 friend of mine has invited me to dinner: he has ordered (faire pre- 
 parer) my favorite dish, (nn mets favor i.) What is it? It is a dish 
 of milk, (du laitagc.) As for me, I do not like milk-meat : there is 
 nothing like (il rfy a ricn tcl qu" 1 ) a good piece of roast beef or veal. 
 What has become of your younger brother? He has suffered 
 shipwreck (faire naufrage) in going to America. You must give rne 
 an account of that, (raconter quelque chose.) Very willingly, (volon- 
 ticrs.) Being on the open sea, (en pleine raer,) a great storm arose. 
 The lightning struck the ship and set it on fire, (le mil en feu.) The 
 crew (Vequipage) jumped into the sea to save themselves by swim- 
 ming. My brother knew not w r hat to do, having never learned to 
 ewirn. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2de SCC. 
 
 To vie with each other. 
 
 Those men are trying to rival each 
 other. 
 
 Clean. 
 
 Clean linen. 
 
 The more as. 
 
 The less as. 
 
 I am the more discontented with his 
 conduct, as he is under many obli- 
 gations to me. 
 
 I am the less pleased with his con- 
 
 t A Veuviej (Vun de Vautrc.) 
 
 t Ces hommes travaillent a 1'cnvic, 
 
 (1'un de 1'autre.) 
 Propre. 
 
 Du linge propre ou blanc. 
 D'autant plus*que. 
 D'autant moins que. 
 Je suis (Vautant plus mecoritent de 
 
 sa conduite, qu'il m'a beaucoup 
 
 d'obligations. 
 Je suis d'autant moins satisfait de sa 
 
 duct, as I had more right to his | conduite, tfwej'avais plus de droitt 
 
 friendship. a son amitie 
 
 1 wish that, I should like ... I Je voudrais que . . . ($ 15112.) 
 
 I wish that house belonged to me. > t Je voudrais quo cetto maison tut 
 1 ehouJd like to own that house. 5 a moi. 
 
438 
 
 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 
 
 To muse, to I'hiiik. 
 
 [ thought a long time on that affair. 
 
 To be naked. 
 
 To have the head uncovered. 
 
 To have the feet uncovered. 
 
 Never, 1, (a before noun./ 
 
 J'ai reve long-temps a cette affaire 
 
 Etre nu nue. 
 
 t Avoir la tete nue. 
 
 t Avoir les pieds nus. 
 
 06s. 1691. The adjective nu, like demi, (19 2 , N. 3) is indecliz;able before 
 (he noun, but declinable after. 
 
 To be barefooted. 
 To be bareheaded. 
 To ride barebacked. 
 
 Etre /m-pieds. 
 
 Etre 7iw-tete. 
 
 t Ailer a poil. 
 
 t ]\Ia?iquer ou penser. 
 
 To have like to, or to think to have. 
 
 Obs. 169?. J\la?iquer takes de before the infinitive, but penser dees not, 
 
 I had like to have lost my money. 
 
 [ thought I had lost my life. 
 
 We had like to have cut our fingers. 
 
 { J'ai manque de perdre mon argent. 
 ( J'ai pense perdre mon argent. 
 
 Je pensai perdre la vie. 
 
 Nous avons manque de nous coupei 
 
 les doigts. 
 
 II a manque* de tomber. 
 II a manque d'etre tut;. 
 II a pense etre tue. 
 Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'ait e*te tu& 
 II a pense mourir. 
 A vos trousses. 
 L'ennemi est a nos trousses. 
 t Tomber. 
 
 La foudre est tombee. 
 La foudre tomba sur le vaisseau. 
 
 fie was very near falling. 
 
 He was within a hair's breadth cf 
 being killed. 
 
 He had liked to have died. 
 
 At, on, or upon your heels. 
 
 The enemy is at our heels. 
 
 To strike, (in speaking of lightning.) 
 
 The lightning has struck. 
 
 The lightning struck the ship. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGT-TROISI&ME TflfblE. 2de SeC. 
 
 J'ai plusieurs bons ecoliers dans cette classe. Est-ce qu'ils etudient 
 k 1'envie Tun de 1'autre ? Oui, ils etudient a Fenvie. N&vez-voua 
 pas auSsi des ecolieres qui etudient a Tenvie 1'une de 1'autre ? Si 
 fait, j'en ai qui etudient a 1'envie les unes des autres. Etes-vous 
 satisfait (are you pleased) de la maniere dont Leopold se conduit? 
 Non, j'en suis d'autant moins satisfait qu'il avait promis davantage. 
 Ne sorit-ils pas etonnes qu'elle ait agi de cette maniere? Si fait, 
 ils en sont tres-etonnes, et ils sont d'autant plus mecontents, (so much 
 the more displeased,) qu'elle connaissait parfaitement leur opinion. 
 Que pensez-vous de mon proces? Je ne m'en suis pas encoro 
 occupe. Je voudrais que vous y revassiez un peu. Je suis a y 
 rever. Mais vous voyez que je suis nu-pieds; il faut que je me 
 chausse, (chausser, 1, to dress one's feet, to put on what is to go on the 
 feet as a part of dres*,) que je finisse de m/habiiler, et j'y reverai. Jo 
 vousenavertis, je serai a vos trousses jusqu'a ce que vous vous en 
 aocupiez serieusement. Savez-vous que Montcalme a rtanqti 
 
EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 
 
 43S 
 
 d'etre tue ? Non, je n'en savais rien. Quel accident lui est-il 
 arrive ? Comment a-t-il manque d'etre tue ? II est tombe de cheval. 
 
 I wish that umbrella was mine. Have you none 1 No, I wish I 
 had one. (62 2 .) Can you not afford to buy one! No, I cannot; for 
 I was robbed, and was near being killed. How so ? The robbers 
 upset our carriage, and we were all very near being killed. (Pen 
 s'm estfallu que nous rfayons tous ete tues.) When were you so near 
 being killed'? It was last week that we were so nearly killed, 
 Were you all robbed ? Yes, but I was the only one who had much 
 money. My companions had only a few dollars each. I entreated 
 very hard, but it was in vain. (J'ai eu beau prier, f 'a ete en vain.) 
 
 My brother reflected in vain ; he found no means to save his life. 
 He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining en 
 all sides. He hesitated no longer, and jumped into the sea. Well, 
 (eh Men.) what has become of him'? I do not know, having not 
 heard from him yet But who told you all that? My nephew, who 
 was there, and who saved himself. As you are talking of your 
 nephew, d propos dc ,) where is he at present 2 He is in Italy. 
 Is it long since you heard from him ? I have received a letter from 
 him to-day. What does he write to you ? I will tell you by and by. 
 
 VOCABULAIHE. 3me Sec. 
 The half, the third, the fourth. I La moitie, le tiers, le quart. 
 
 Obs. 170. These are irregularly formed, but from le cinqvifime, the fifth, 
 all others are regular. 
 
 What is the half of 6 ? It is 3. 
 
 What is the I of 7 ? It is 3 and . 
 What is the third of 9 ? It is 3. 
 What is the I of 10 ? It is 3 and *. 
 
 That of 1 1 ? 
 What is is the 
 That of 13 ? 
 That of 14 ? 
 That of 15 ? 
 
 It is 3 and f . 
 
 of 12? It is 3. 
 
 It is 3 and *. 
 
 It is 3 and i. 
 
 It is 3 and *. 
 
 The t of 12 are 8. The * of 12 are 9. 
 
 While my brother was on the open 
 sea, a violent storm arose unexpect- 
 edly ; the lightning struck the ship, 
 which it set on fire, and the whole 
 crew jumped into the sea to save 
 themselves by swimming. 
 
 He was struck with fright when he 
 saw that the fire was gaining on 
 all sides. 
 
 Quelle est la moitie de 6 ? C'est 3. 
 
 Celle de 7 ? C'est 3 et demi. 
 
 Quelle est le tiers de 9 ? C'est 3. 
 
 Quel est le I de 10? C'estSetun 
 tiers. 
 
 Celui de 1 1 ? C'est 3 et deux tiers (f .) 
 
 Quel est le quart de 12 ? C'est 3. 
 
 Celui de 13? C'eotSetunquart (i.) 
 
 Celui de 14 ? C : est 3 et demi (.) 
 
 Celui de 15 ? C'est 3 et trois 
 
 quarts (*.) 
 
 Les f de 12 sont 8. Les I de 13 ^ 
 sont 9. 
 
 Mon frere 6tant en pleine mer, il sur- 
 vint une grande tempete ; la foudro 
 tomba sur le vaisseau, qu'elle mit 
 en feu, et tout r equipage ee jeta 
 dans la mer, pour se sauver a la 
 nage. 
 
 II fut saisi de frayeur, voyant quo !c 
 feu gagnait de tons les cotea, 
 
440 
 
 EIGHTY -THIRD LESSON. (3.) 
 
 He did not know what to do. 
 
 He nesitated no longer. 
 
 I have not heard of him yet 
 
 An angel. 
 
 A masterpiece 
 
 Masterpieces. 
 
 I t II ne eavait quel part\ prendra. 
 II ne balan^a plus, 
 t Je n'ai pas encore cu de ses nou 
 
 vellns. 
 Un ange. 
 Un chef-d'csuvre. 
 DCS chefs-d'oeuvre. 
 
 Obs. 171. Of a word compounded by means of a preposition, 
 it understood, the firet ^ord only takes the mark of the plural. 
 
 Four o'clock flowers. 
 His or her physiognomy. 
 His or her shape. 
 Tho expression. The look. 
 Contentment. Respect. 
 
 Admiration. Grace, charm. 
 
 Delightfully. Fascinating. 
 
 Thin, (slender.) Uncommonly well. 
 His or her look inspires respect and 
 admiration. 
 
 Des belles-de-nuit. 
 Sa physionomie. 
 Sa taille. 
 L' expression. 
 Le contentement. 
 L' admiration. 
 A ravir. 
 
 l.i aspect. 
 Le respect. 
 Les graces. 
 Engageant. 
 
 Svelte. Superieurement bien. 
 
 Son aspect inspire du respect et de 
 I'admiration. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGT-TROISIME THME. 3me Sec. 
 
 Avez-vous eii des nouvelles de votre ami, 1'avocat, depuis qu'il 
 cst parti pour la Caliiomie? Oui, j'en ai eu. Sa lettre doit etre 
 interessante ! quedit-il? 11 dit que Tor y est abondant; que ceux 
 qui ont du bonheur, le ramassent en quantitc ; que ceux qui out dti 
 malheur, travaillent beacoup et ramassent peu. Du nombre des quels 
 est-il 1 De ceux des heureux ou des malheureux ? Des heureux, jo 
 presume, quoiqu'il se plaigne un peu. Avez-vous vu le chef-d'oeuvre 
 de Power, le sculpteur? Son esclave Grecque? Oui, cela meme. 
 Oui, je Pai vu ce chef-d'oeuvre. Cette esclave ressemble a un ange. 
 Cette statue moderne sera placee parmi les chefs-d'oeuvre des sculp* 
 teurs anciens. Quand les belles-de-nuit s : ouvrent-elles ? Ellea 
 s'ouvrent a quatre heures, quand le soleil commence a baisser. 
 Quelle odeur aimez-vous le mieux, celle des Jleurs d'orange ou des 
 iubereuscs ? Je n'ai pas de choix. Plus je sens la fleur d 'orange plus 
 j'en aime 1'ocleur et plus 1'odeur de la tubereuse irappe mon odorat, 
 (sense of smell,) plus je voudrais la sentir. Quelle physionomie 
 agreable et quelle taille admirable cette demoiselle a ! 
 
 My nephew, in his letter, which is an interesting one. writes to 
 me that he is going to marry a young woman who brings him (qui 
 lui apporte\ a hundred thousand crowns. Is she handsome ? Hand* 
 Borne as an angel; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiog 
 nomy is mild and full of expression ; her eyes are the finest in the 
 {du) world, and her mouth is charming, (et sa bouche est mignonnc.} 
 She is neither too tall nor too short; her shape is slender; all hei 
 
EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. Ql.) 
 
 441 
 
 actions are full of grace, and her manners are engaging. Her look 
 inspiieo respect and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit 
 she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings 
 delightfully. My nephew finds in her (lui trouve) but one defect, 
 (un defaut.)An& what is that defect? She is affected, (avoir des 
 ptetcntions.) There is nothing perfect in the world. How happy 
 you are ! you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a fine 
 house, and all you wish. Not all, my friend. What do you desire 
 more ? Contentment ; for you know that he only is happy who is 
 contented. 
 
 EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. Quatre-vingi-qitatriemc Lc$on } 
 VOCABTLAIUK. Ire Sec. 
 
 To unriddle, to disenta?iglc. 
 
 To find out. 
 
 fo disentangle the hair. 
 
 To unravel difficulties. 
 
 t have not been able to find out the 
 
 sense of that phrase. 
 A quarrel. 
 To have differences (a quarrel) with 
 
 somebody. 
 To lake good care, to slmn, to be- 
 
 ware. 
 
 I will take good care not to do it. 
 Mind you do not lend that man 
 
 money. 
 He takes good care not to answer 
 
 the question which I asked him. 
 To ask a question. 
 If you take it into your head to do 
 
 that, I will punish you. 
 To become, to fit weJ. Fitting well. 
 
 I Demvler, 1. 
 
 Demeler les cheveux. 
 
 Demeler des difficultes. 
 
 Je n'ai pas pu demeler le sens de 
 
 cette phrase. 
 Un demele. 
 Avoir des demeles avcc quelqu'un 
 
 Se garder de. 
 
 Je me garderai bien de le faire. 
 Gardez-vous bien de prcter votre 
 
 argent a cet homme. 
 II se garde bien de repondre a la 
 
 question que je lui ai faite. 
 t Faire une question. 
 Si vous vous avisez de le faire, je 
 
 vous punirai. 
 Seoir,* 3. Seyant or scant. 
 
 Obs. 172. This verb is used only in the third person, singular and plural 
 
 Does that become me ? 
 
 That does not become you. 
 
 It does not become you to do that. 
 
 That fits you wonderfully well. 
 
 Her head-dress did not become her. 
 
 it does not become you to reproach 
 
 me with it ! 
 To fast. To be fasting. 
 
 Cela me sied-il ? 
 
 Cela ne vous sied pas. 
 
 II ne vous sied pas de faire cela. 
 
 Cela vous sied a merveille. 
 
 Sa coiffure lui seyait mal. 
 
 II vous Fied bien de me le reprocher 
 
 (an irorical expression.} 
 J tuner 1. 6tre ajeun. 
 
M2 EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (I.) 
 
 To gi73 notice to. ^ 
 
 To let anybody know. > Avertir quelqu'un de quelque chogflf 
 
 To warn some one of something. ) 
 
 Give notice to that man of his bro- I Avertissez cet homme du retoiir di 
 ther's return. I son frere. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGT-QUATRIEME TH&ME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Un certain roi devant, un jour, faire son entree dans une villc & 
 deux heures de 1'apres-midi, le senat envoya quelques deputes 
 ( deputies) pour le complimenter. Celui qui devait porter la parole, 
 n ; etant pas accoutume a parler en public, ccmmenca ainsi: " Alex- 
 andre le Grand, le Grand Alexandre," et s'arreta tout court. Le 
 roi, qui avait grand'faim, (32 2 ,) dit: " Ah ! mon ami, Alexandre le 
 Grand avait dine, et moi, je suis encore a jeun." Ayant dit ces 
 paroles, il continua son chemin vers Photel de ville, ou on lui avait 
 prepare un diner magnifique. 
 
 Savez-vous deviner les enigmes (enigmas?) Je ne les devine pas 
 tres-aisernent. cependant, il m'arrive quelque fois de le faire. Vou 
 lez-vous que je vous en disc une courte ? Voyons, dites-la. La 
 voici. Plus il y en a moins fa pese. Plus il y en a moins ca peso. 
 Qu'est-ce que cela peut etre ? Je ne peux m'imagii.er ce que c'est. 
 Vous rendez-vous? (do you give it up ?) Oui, je me rends. Et 
 moi aussi. 
 
 The emperor Charles the Fifth (Charles-Quint) being one day out 
 a hunting lost his way in the forest, and, having come to a house, 
 entered it to refresh himself. There were in it four men, who pre- 
 tended to sleep. One of them rose, and approaching the emperor, 
 told him he had dreamed he should take his watch, and took 
 it. Then another rose and said he had dreamed that his sur- 
 tout fitted him wonderfully, and took it. The third took his 
 purse. At last the fourth came up, and said he hoped he would 
 not take it ill if he searched him, and in doing it perceived around 
 the emperor's neck a small gold chain to which a whistle (un 
 sijflet) was attached, which he wished to rob aim of. But the em- 
 peror said : " My good friend, before depriving me (privcr quelqu'un 
 dc quelque chose) of this trinket, (le bijou,) I must teach you its virtue/' 
 Saying this he whistled, (sifflerj 1.) His attendants, (scs gens,) who 
 seeking him, hastened to the house, and were thunderstruck 
 e cVetonncmcnt) to behold his majesty in such a st^te. But the 
 emperor, seeing himself out of danger, (hors dc danger.) said : "These 
 men (void dcs hommes qui) have dreamed all that they likeJ. I 
 wish in my turn also to dream." And after having mused a 
 few seconds, he said : " I have dreamed that you all four deserve 
 
JLIGHTY-FOUU 111 LESSON. (2.) 
 
 443 
 
 to be hanged:" which was no sconer spoken than executed before 
 he house. 
 
 VOCABULAIRE. 2ie Sec. 
 
 To follow from it. 
 
 It follows from it that you should not 
 
 do that. 
 How is it that vou have come so late ? 
 
 I do not know low it is. 
 
 How is it that ne had not his gun ? 
 
 I do not know how it happened. 
 
 To clear, to elucidate, to clear up. 
 
 The v/eather is clearing up. 
 
 To refresh. 
 
 Refresh yourself, and return to me 
 
 immediately. 
 
 To whiten, to bleach. To blacken. 
 To turn pale, to grow pale. 
 To blush, to redden. 
 To grow old. To grow young. 
 To make merry. Gay, merry. Mirth. 
 To make one's self merry. Cheer up. 
 He makes merry at my expense. 
 To feign, counterfeit, dissemble, 
 
 pretend. Never pretend. 
 
 I feign, thou feignest, he feigns. 
 lie knows the art of dissembling. 
 To procrastinate, to go slow about. 
 I do not like to transact business 
 
 with that man, for he always goe? 
 
 very slow about it. 
 A proof. This is a proof. 
 
 To stray, to get Icxt, to lose one's) 
 
 self, to lose one's v&y. ) 
 
 Through. 
 The cannon-ball went through the 
 
 wall. 
 
 ran him through the body. 
 
 S'cnsuivrc,* 4. 
 
 II s'ensuit que vous ne devriez pas 
 
 faire cela. 
 t Comment se fait-il que vous soyez 
 
 venu si tard ? 
 
 t Je ne sais pas con.ment cela se fait, 
 t Comment se faisait-ii qu'il n'eut 
 
 pas son fusil ? 
 t Je ne sais pas comment cela so 
 
 faisau 
 
 ficlaircir, 2. 
 Le temps s'eclaircii. 
 Rafraichir, 2. 
 RafraTchissez-vous, ct revenez tout 
 
 de suite. 
 
 Blanchir, 2. Noircir, 2. 
 
 Palir, 2. 
 Rougir. 
 
 Vieillir, 2. Rajeunir, 2. 
 
 gayer. Gai. La gaiete. 
 S'egayer, 1. -frgayez-vous. 
 
 II s'egaie a mes depens. 
 Feindre,* 4, feignant, feint. Ne 
 
 feignez jamais. 
 Je feins, tu feins, il feint. 
 II possede 1'art de feindre. 
 t Trainer les choses en longueur. 
 Je n'aime pas a faire des affaires avec 
 cet homrne, parce qu'il traine tou 
 jours les choses en longueur. 
 Une preuvc. C'est une preuve. 
 
 S'cgarer, 1. 
 
 A travers Ic, or Au travers de. 
 
 Le boulet a passe a travers la mu- 
 
 raille. 
 Je lui ai passe mon epec au travcra 
 
 du corps. 
 
 QUATRE-VINQT-QUATRIEME TllihlE. 2de Sec. 
 
 Un bon vieillard. etant fort malade, fit appeler son epouse, qm 
 fttait encore fort jeune, et lui dit: "Ma chere, vous voyez que ma 
 derniere heure s'approche, et que je suis force de vous quitter. C'est 
 pourquoi; si vous voulez que je meure en paix, il faut que vous mo 
 
444 
 
 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 
 
 fassiez ime grace. Vous etes encore jeune, et sans doute vous von* 
 remarierez ; je le sais ; mais je vous prie de ne pas prendrc M. Louis 
 car j'avoue que j'ai toujours ete tres-jaloux de lui, et que je le suig 
 encore. Je mourrais done desespere, &i vous ne me promettiez paa 
 eela. 77 La femme repcudit: "Mon coeur, je vous supplie, que cela 
 ne vous empechs pas de mourir en paix; car je vous assure que 
 quand meme je voudrais Fepouser, je ne le pourrais pas, etant deja 
 promise a un autre/ 7 
 
 It was customary with Frederick the Great, whenever a ne^ 
 soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three questions ; viz. "Hov, 
 old are you? How long have you been in my service? Are you 
 satisfied with your pay and treatment?'' 7 It happened that a young 
 soldier, born in France, who had served in his own country, desired 
 to enlist in the Prussian service. His figure caused him to be im- 
 mediately accepted; but he was totally ignorant of the German dia- 
 lect; and his captain giving him notice that the king would question 
 him in that tongue the first time he should see him, advised him 
 at the same time to learn by heart the three answers that he was to 
 make to the king. Accordingly he learned them by the next day; 
 and as soon as he appeared in the ranks Frederick came up to inter- 
 rogate him: but he happened to begin with him. by the second ques- 
 tion, and asked him, "How long have you been in my service?" 
 "Twenty-one years," answered the soldier. The king, struck with 
 his youth, which plainly Indicated that he had not borne a musket 
 BO long as that, said to him, much astonished, " How old are you 7" 
 "One year, an't please your majesty, (rfen deplaise d Votre Majcs- 
 <<?.") Frederick, more astonished still, cried, " You or I must cer- 
 tainly be bereft of our senses. 77 The soldier, who took this for the 
 third question, replied firmly, (avec aplomb,) "Both, an't please your 
 majesty. 77 . 
 
 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. Quatre-vingt-cirujuieme Lc^n, 85me. 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 To double. The double. 
 
 Your share, your part. 
 
 That merchant asks twice as much 
 
 aa he ought. 
 You must bargain with him ; he will 
 
 give it you for the half. 
 You have twice your share. 
 
 Doubler, 1. Le double. 
 
 Votre part, (fern..} 
 
 t Ce marchand surfait du double 
 
 t II faut que vous marchandiez avw 
 
 lui ; il vous rabattra la moitie. 
 Vous avez double part. 
 
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 445 
 
 You have three times your share. 
 
 To renew. To stun. 
 
 Wild, giddy. Open, frank, real. 
 
 To shake somebody's hand. 
 
 I told him yes. 
 
 I told him no. 
 
 To squeeze, press. 
 
 To lay up, to put by. 
 
 Put your money by. 
 
 Aa soon as I have read my book I 
 
 pat it by. 
 I do not care much about going to 
 
 the play to-night. 
 To satisfy one's self with a thing. 
 
 I have been eating an hour, and I ^ 
 cannot satisfy my hunger. 
 
 To be satisfied. 
 
 To que?ich one's thirst. 
 
 I have been drinking this half hour, 
 
 but I cannot quench my thirst. 
 To have one's thirst quenched. 
 To thfTst for, to be thirsty or dry. 
 That is a blood-thirsty fellow. 
 
 Vous avez triple part. 
 Renouveler, 1. tourdir, 2. 
 fitourdi e. Franc franchc. 
 
 Serrer la main a quelqu'un. 
 t Je lui dis qu'oui. 
 t Je lui dis que non. 
 
 Serrer. 
 
 Serrez votre argent. 
 
 Aussitot que j'ai lu mon livre, je If 
 
 serre. 
 Je ne me soucie pas beaucoup d'aLcr 
 
 a la comedie ce soir. 
 t Se rassasier, 1. 
 f II y a une heure que je mange, el 
 
 je ne puis me rassasier; or, 
 t Je mange depuis une heure, ct je 
 
 ne peux pas me rassasier. 
 Eire rassasie. 
 t Se desalterer, I. 
 II y a une demi-heure que jc boia 
 
 maisje ne puis me desalterer. 
 Ktre desalterc. 
 Etre alt ere. 
 t C'est un homme altere de sang. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGT-CINQUIEME THME. Ire Sec. 
 
 Un homme a-vait deux fils : Fun aimait a dormir la grasse ma 
 tinee, et Faulre etait tres-laborieux, et se Icvait toujours de tres-bonne 
 heure. Celui-ci etant un jour sorti de grand matin, trouva une 
 bourse remplie d'argent. II courut a son frere, lui faire part de sa 
 bonne fortune, et lui dit : " Voyez-vous, Louis, ce qu 7 on gagne a se 
 lever de bonne heure ? ;; " Ma foi," repondit son frere, " si celui a 
 qui elle appartient ne s'etait pas leve de meilleure heure que mci, 
 il ne Faurait pas perdue." 
 
 On demandait a un jeune faineant, ce qui le faisait rester au lit si 
 long-temps. "Je suis occupe/ ; dit-il, "a tenir conseii tous lea 
 matins. Le travail me conseille de me lever, la paresse de rester 
 couche ; et ils me donnent ainsi vingt raisons pour et contre. C'est 
 a moi d'entendre ce qu 7 on dit des deux parts; et a peine la cause 
 est-elle entendue que le diner est pret. ;7 
 
 It was a beautiful turn given by a great lady, who, being (on ?- 
 tonte un lean trait (V ) asked where her husband was, when he lay 
 concealed (etre cache) for having been deeply concerned in a con- 
 spiracy, (pour avoir trempe dans une conspiration,) resolutely (coura- 
 geuscvmnt) answered, she had hid him. This confession (un aveu) 
 
446 
 
 EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 drew her before the king, who told her, nothing but her discovering 
 where her lord was concealed could save her from the torture, 
 (qu'elh ne pouvait echapper d la torture qu'en decouvrant la retraite 
 de son tpoux.) " And will that doP (suffiref*) said the lady. " Yes," 
 says the king, " I will give you my word for it. ?? "Then," says 
 she, " I have hid him in my heart, where you will find him." 
 Which surprising answer (cette reponse iidmirabic\ charmed ho* 
 enemies. 
 
 VOCABUI.AIRE. 2de 8cc 
 
 On both sides, on every side. 
 
 On afl sides. 
 
 Allow me, my lady, to introduce to 
 
 you Mr. G., an old friend of our 
 
 family. 
 I am delighted to become acquainted 
 
 with you. 
 I shall do all in my power to deserve 
 
 your good opinion. 
 
 Allow me to introduce to you Mr. B M 
 whose brother has rendered such 
 eminent services to your cousin. 
 
 flow happy \vc are to see you at our 
 house ! 
 
 it is the prerogative of great men to 
 conquer envy ; merit gives it birth, 
 and merit destroys it. 
 
 De part et d'autre. 
 
 De toutes parts. 
 
 Permettez, Madame, que je vous pre- 
 
 sente Monsieur de G., commo an 
 
 c'.vn ami de notre famille. 
 Je sais charmee, Monsieur, de fa;'ro 
 
 votre connaissance. 
 Je ferai tout ce qui seraenmonpou- 
 
 voir, pour me rendre digne de vos 
 
 bonnes grace. 
 Mesdames, permettez que je vous 
 
 presente M. de B., dont le frere a 
 
 rendu de si eminents services a vo 
 
 tre cousin. 
 Ah ! Monsieur, que noussommesen- 
 
 chantees de vous recevoir chez 
 
 nous! 
 C'est le privilege des grands hommes 
 
 de vainere 1'envie ; le merite la 
 
 fait naitre, le merite la fait mou- 
 
 rir. 
 It is the finest country in Europe. C'est le plus beau pays defEuropo, 
 
 Obs. 173. The preposition in. connected with a relative superlative, ia 
 rendered in French by : de. 
 
 Candia is one of the most agreeable 
 islands in the Mediterranean. 
 
 He lives in his retreat like a real 
 philosopher. 
 
 Candie est uno ties lies les plus ogrea 
 
 bles de la Mediterranee. 
 II vit dans sa retraite en ^rai philo 
 
 sophe. 
 
 Obs. 174. Like is rendered by en when it means equal to. fix 
 
 You live like a king. 
 He acts like a madman. 
 To behave like a blunderbuss. 
 Who, where I am, knocks as if he 
 were master ? 
 
 Vous vivez en roi. 
 
 II agit en furieux. 
 
 Se conduire en 6tourdi. 
 
 Qui frappe en maitre ou je euio? 
 
EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 447 
 
 QUATRE-VIXGT-CINQUIEME TH&ME. 2de Sec. 
 
 Quel est le pays le plus etendu, dans lequel, exactement le meme 
 langage est employe par la masse de la nation? Ce sont les Etats- 
 Unis. Y parle-t-on le meme langage depuis le Nord jusqu'au sud, 
 et de Pest a Fouest 1 Oui, la masse de la langue est la meme, ce- 
 pendant il y a des mots caracteristiques de presque toutes les locali- 
 tes. Les habitants du Nord peuvent-ils comprendre sans difficulte, 
 le langage de ceux du midi, qui demeurent quelque fois a 2500 
 milles? Oui, ils le comprennent tout de suite; mais ils ne laissent 
 pas de reconnaitre immediatement la partie des Etats-Unis ou Fin- 
 dividu qui leur parle, a recu son education. En est-il de meme en 
 Europe? Non, pas a beaucoup pres, (far from it.) Chaque pro- 
 vince, chaque comte, chaque district presque, a son langage parti- 
 culler, que les voisins n'entendent pas plus que nos indiens ameri- 
 cains ne s'entendent les uns les autres. Nos indiens ne s'entendent- 
 ils pas tous? Non, chaque tribu a sa langue exclusive, et ces tribus 
 different autant par le langage que par le costume, (dress.) 
 
 Cornelia, the illustrious (illustrc) mother of the Gracchi, (des Grac- 
 ques,) after the death of her husband, who left her with twelve 
 children, applied herself to (sc vouer d) the care of her family, with 
 a wisdom (la sagesse) and prudence that acquired for (acquerir*) 
 her universal esteem, (Vestime univcrsclle.) Only three out of 
 (d'entre) the twelve lived to years of maturity, (Vdge mur ;) one 
 daughter, Sempronia, whom she married to the second Scipio Afri- 
 canus; and two sons, Tiberius and Caius, whom she brought up 
 (elcver) with so much care, that, though they were generally ac- 
 knowledged (savoir generalemcnt) to have been born with the most 
 happy dispositions, (la disposition.) it was judged that they were still 
 more indebted (etre rcdcvablc) to education than nature. The answer 
 she gave (faire*) a Campanian lady (une dame de Campanie) con- 
 cerning them (d leur sujet) is very famous, (famcux se ; ) and includes 
 in it (renfermer) great instruction for ladies and moihers. 
 
 That lady, who was very rich, and fond of pomp and show, 
 (ctrc passionne pour le faste etl'eclat,) having displayed (etaler) her 
 diamonds, (le diamantj) pearls, (la perle,) and richest jewels, earnestly 
 desired Cornelia to let her see her jewels also. Cornelia dexterously 
 (adroitement) turned the conversation to another subject, to wait the 
 return of her sons, who were gone to the public schools. When 
 ihey returned, and entered their mother's apartment, she said to the 
 Campanian lady, pointing to them, (monircr :) "These are my 
 ewels, and the only ornaments (Za parure) I puze, (priser.") And 
 such ornaments, which are the strength (la force) and support (It 
 
448 
 
 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 
 
 wulicn) of society, add a brighter lustre (un plus grand lustre) to 
 fair (la becute) than all the jewels of the East, (de V Orient.) 
 
 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON, 86th. Quatre-vingt-sixieme Ler<y,i, 8me 
 
 PRESENT OR ACTIVE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Participe present. 
 
 For its use and formation, sec ($ 156). Study it carefully. 
 VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. 
 
 The house being built, we occu- 
 pied it. 
 
 Having studied, I recited well. 
 
 Not having studied, my cousin did 
 not recite as well as I did. 
 
 Not knowing the name of the gentle- 
 man, I could not write it. 
 
 The note becoming due on Sunday, 
 it must be paid on Saturday. 
 
 His brother-in-law's coat fitting him, 
 he put it on. 
 
 Understanding the language they 
 spoke, I learned their secret. 
 
 How did you find it out ? 
 
 By listening to their conversation. 
 
 Where did you find her purse ? 
 
 In the bushes, while looking for birds' 
 eggs. 
 
 We saw the fire while crossing. 
 
 How is the plural of nouns and of 
 adjectives formed ? 
 
 By adding an s to the singular. 
 
 How is the present participle formed ? 
 
 By changing the ons of the first per- 
 son plural into ant. 
 
 How can they improve their writing ? 
 By copying good copper-plate 
 models. 
 
 How does it happen that . . . ? 
 
 How does it happen that he is so 
 small, his parents being so tall ? 
 
 Il is one of tnose facts we see, but 
 
 for which we cannot account. 
 Aa mesmerism, I suppose. 
 
 La maison etant batie, nous 1'occa 
 
 pames. 
 
 Ayant etudie, je recitai bien. 
 jy'ayant pas etudie, mon cousin, ne 
 
 recita pas aussi bien que moi. 
 Ne sachant pas le nom du M., je nu 
 
 pus pas 1'ecrire. 
 Le billet edieant dimanche, ii faut 
 
 le payer samedi. 
 L'habit de son beau-frere lui scant, 
 
 il le mit. 
 Comprenant la langue qu'ils par- 
 
 laient, j'appris leur secret. 
 Comment le decouvrites-vous? 
 En ecoutant leur conversation. 
 Ou trouvates-vous sa bourse ? 
 Dans les buissons, en cherchant des 
 
 O3ufs d'oiseaux. 
 
 Nous vTmes le feu en traversanl. 
 Comment forme-t-on le pluriel des 
 
 noms et des adjectifs ? 
 En ajoutant s au singulier. 
 Comment forme-t-on le participe 
 
 present ? 
 En changeant le ons de la premiere 
 
 personne du pluriei en ant. 
 Comment peuvent-ils bonni/lcr leur 
 
 ecriture ? En copiant de bcr.s 
 
 modeles graves. 
 
 Comment se fait-ii que . . . ? ($ 151.* 
 Comment se fait-il quM soil si 
 
 petit, son pere et sa mere etant i 
 
 grands ? 
 C'est un de ces faits qu'on voit, 
 
 mais qu'on ne peut expliquer. 
 Comme le mesme'nsme, je siippoeo 
 
EIGHTY-SIXTH LKSSOK. (1.) 
 
 445 
 
 The more you study the more you 
 learn. 
 
 Po not people learn by studying ? 
 
 Yes, the more one studies the more 
 one learns. 
 
 Go up stairs and get me a silk hand- 
 kerchief. 
 
 Will you choose a good steel pen and 
 write a letter to Julia ? 
 
 Plus vousetudiez plus vousapprenez 
 
 ]X'apptend-on pas en etudiant? 
 
 Si fait, plus on etudie plus on ap- 
 
 prend. 
 Allez en haut me chercher un 
 
 mouchoir de soie. 
 Voulez-vous choisir une bonne plunio 
 
 d'acier pour ecrire a Julie ? 
 
 QuATRE-viNGT-sixiiiME TiiibiE. Ire Sec. 
 
 La venture etant cassee, que nous faut-il faire? II nous faut 
 atlendre qu'*elle soil raccommodee. Plus nous attendrons plus nous 
 nous reposerons, et je vous assure que j'ai grand besoin de repos, 
 car je suis tres-fatiguee ; ne 1'etes-vous pas? Non, je ne le suis pas 
 du tout. Comment se fait-il que vous ne le soyez pas? Je ne sais 
 pas comment cela se fait; mais, je ne me sens pas fatiguee, pas le 
 moins du monde. II parait que plus vous voyagez, moins vous 
 souffrez, et moi, au contraire, plus je voyage, plus je souffle. C'est 
 peut-etre, parce que vous aviez peur des derniers chevaux que nous 
 avons eus. C ; est vrai, j'en ai eu peur; ils etaient vigoureux et 
 fringants, (frisky.) et je craignais qu'ilsne prissent lemors aux dents, 
 (would run away.) Moi, je les ai trouves beaux, etvoilatout. J'ai 
 trouve qu'ils allaient vite, mais je n 7 ai pas eu la moindre peur. Quoi ! 
 N'avez-vous pas eu peur quand ils ont pris le galop? (began to 
 gallop.) Non; ce n'etait que le petit galop (hand-gallop or canter.) 
 Votre peur vous a plus fatiguee que le voyage. 
 
 The more I look at her, the more I admire her, don't you? (62 3 , 
 N. 1.) No, on the contrary, the more I look at her, the less I admire 
 her face, her manners and voice; but whose handsome carriage is 
 this? Which one do you mean? for I see several. That dark 
 green carriage, with the driver's seat (le siege du cocher) in white 
 cloth. I see it now, you are right, it is elegant; but I do not know 
 whose it is. Do you see it, Theodore? Yes, I do. Whose is it? 
 I do not know. Do you, Aletta? I neither. ( $ 171 9.) Does your 
 cousin Eloise ? She neither. Does any one? (62 3 , N. 1.) No, no- 
 body here knows it. It looks like a new carnage, and is very tasty, 
 (d'un gout cxquis.) I came down without my parasol; I must go 
 back for it. No, no, cousin, I will go up and get it for you, (montei 
 .e chercher.) Where shall I find it? I had it in my hand, so that 1 
 must have left it cither on the bed, the bureau, the toilet, or a chair; 
 vou will certainly find it somewhere in the room. I shall be back 
 in a minute. 
 
 I carrot play that new polka. You will learn it by practising. 
 
450 EIGHTY -SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Can you speak while playing on the piano ? Yes, I can speak whilu 
 playing a tune I know. Could you not speak while playing on the 
 violin'? No, I cannot; but I have seen a good many persons that 
 could. Ladies can generally talk while playing the piano, can they 
 not? Yes, as they frequently sing while playing; they do not find 
 it moro llfficult to speak than to sing. 
 
 QuATRE-viNGT-sixiisiME THME, 2de Sec. 
 
 POLITENESS. 
 
 When the Earl of Stair was at the court of Louis XIV. his man- 
 ners, address, and conversation, gained much on the esieem ana 
 friendship of that monarch. One day, in a circle of his courtiers, 
 talking of the advantage of good breeding and easy manners, the 
 king offered to lay a wager he would name an English nobleman 
 that should excel in those particulars any Frenchman of his court. 
 The wager was jocularly accepted, and his majesty was to chooso 
 his own lime and place for the experiment. 
 
 To avoid suspicion, the king let the subject drop for some months, 
 till the courtiers thought he had forgotten it ; he then chose the fol 
 lowing stratagem : he appointed Lord Stair, and two of the most 
 polished noblemen of his court, to take an airing with him after the 
 breaking up of the levee ; the king accordingly came down the 
 great staircase at Versailles, attended by those three lords, and corn- 
 ing up to the side of the coach, instead of going in first, as usual, he 
 pointed to the French lords to enter; they, upon this unusual 
 ceremony, shrunk back, and submissively declined the honor; he 
 then pointed to Lord Stair, who made his bow, and instantly sprang 
 into the coach : the king and the French lords followed. 
 
 When they were seated, the king exclaimed: " Well, gentlemen, 
 I believe you will acknowledge I have won my wager.' 7 "How 
 so, sire V " Why," continued the king, " when I desired yov both 
 to go into the coach, you declined it: but this polite foreigner (point- 
 ing to Lord Stair) no sooner received the commands of a king, though 
 not his sovereign, than he instantly obeyed/ 7 The courtiers hung 
 down their heads in confusion, and acknowledged the justness of 
 his majesty's claim. 
 
 I cannot see the justness of that decision. The French lords, by 
 refusing the honor proffered by the king, (que le roi leur of rait,) dis- 
 played (monlrerent] 'ess obedience, but more politeness. 
 
 MILDNESS. 
 
 The mildness of Sir Isaac Newton's temper through the coo so oi 
 bis lifo, commanded admiration from all who knew him ; but in nc 
 
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON (C) 451 
 
 one instance, perhaps, more than the following. Sir Isaac nad a 
 favorite dog, which he called Diamond ; and being one day called 
 out of his study into the next room, Diamond was left behind. When 
 Sir Isaac returned, having been absent but a few minutes, he had 
 the mortification to find that Diamond having thrown down a lighted 
 candle among some papers, the nearly finished labor of many years 
 was in flames, and almost consumed to ashes. This loss, as Sir 
 Isaac Newton was then very far advanced in years, was irretrieva 
 bio ; yet, without once striking the dog, he only rebuked him with 
 this exclamation : " ! Diamond ! Diamond ! thou little knowest the 
 mischief thou hast done/' 
 
 Zeuxis entered into a contest of art with Parrhasius. The former 
 painted grapes so truly, that birds came and pecked at them. The 
 latter delineated a curtain so exactly, that Zeuxis, coming in, said : 
 " Take away the curtain, that we may see this piece. ' 7 And finding 
 his error, said : " Parrhasius, thou hast conquered : I only deceived 
 birds, thou an artist. ;; 
 
 Zeuxis painted a boy carrying grapes; the birds came again and 
 pecked. Some applauding, Zeuxis flew to the picture in a passion, 
 and saying, " My boy must be very badly painted/ 7 daubed his face, 
 (lui barbouilla la figure.) 
 
 The inhabitants of a great town offered to Marshal de Turenne 
 a hundred thousand crowns upon condition that he should take 
 another road, and not march his troops their way. He answered 
 them : " As your town is not on the road I intend to march, I cannot 
 accept the money you offer me." 
 
 A corporal of the life-guard of Frederick the Great, who had a 
 great deal of vanity, but at the same time was a brave fellow, wore 
 a watch-chain, to which he affixed a musket-bullet instead of a watch, 
 which he was unable to buy. The king, being inclined one day to 
 rally him, said : " Apropos, corporal, you must have been very frugal 
 to buy a watch : it is six o'clock by mine ; tell me what it is by 
 yours?' 7 The soldier, who guessed the king's intention, instantly 
 drew out the bullet from his fob, and said: "My watch neither 
 marks five nor six o'clock; but it tells me every moment, that it is 
 my duty to die for your majesty." " Here, my friend, 77 said the king, 
 quite affected, "take this watch, that you may be able to tell the 
 hour also. 77 And he gave him his watch, which was adorned with 
 brilhants. 
 
 AN AFFECTING NARRATIVE OF THE RECOVERY OF EYESIGHT. 
 
 The operator, Mr. Grant, having observed the eyes of his blind 
 patient, and convinced his friends and relations, among others the 
 
1:52 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 Rev. Mr. Kerswell, that it was highly probable he should bo able tc 
 remove the obstacle which prevented the use of his sight; all who 
 knew and had any regard for the young man, or curiosity to be pro- 
 sent when one of full age and understanding received a new sense, 
 assembled themselves on this ocasion. Mr. Kerswell, being particu- 
 larly interested, desired the whole company, in case the blindness 
 should be cured, to let the patient make his own observations, with- 
 out enabling him to discover his friends by their voices. Among 
 several others, the mother, brother, sisters, and a young lauy for 
 whom he had a passion, were present. The work was performed 
 with great skill and dexterity. When the patient first received the 
 dawn of light, there appeared such an ecstasy in his action, that he 
 seemed ready to swoon away in the surprise of joy and wonder. 
 The surgeon stood before him with his instruments in his hands. 
 The young man observed him from head to foot, after which he 
 surveyed himself as carefully, and seemed to compare himself, and 
 think they were exactly alike, except the instruments, which ho 
 took for part of his hands. When he had continued in mis amaze- 
 ment some time, his mother could no longer bear the agitations of 
 go many passions, but fell upon his neck, crying out, " My son, my 
 eon." The young man knew her voice, and could speak no more 
 fhan, "Oh! me, are you my mother?" and fainted. 
 
 The whole room were, you will easily conceive, busily employed 
 in recovering him, except the young lady who was attached to him, 
 whose agitation was so great that she shrieked in the loudest man- 
 ner; that voice seemed to have had a sudden effect upon him, as he 
 recovered ; and he showed a double curiosity in observing her, as 
 she spoke and called to him, till at last he exclaimed : " What has 
 been done to me ? Whither am I carried 1 Is all this about me ? 
 The thing I have so often heard of, is this the light? Is this see- 
 ing ? Were you always thus happy, when you said you were glad 
 to see each other? Where is Tom who used to lead me? But I 
 could /iOW, methinks, go anywhere without him." He offered to 
 move, but seemed afraid of everything around him. He was told 
 ihat for some time he must suffer his eyes to be covered, and Tom 
 to lead him as usual, which he consented to with great reluctance. 
 
 He was at last prevailed on to have his eyes bound, in which 
 situation they kept him in a dark room, until it was judged proper 
 to let the organ receive its objects without further precaution. During 
 the lime of this darkness, he bewailed himself in the most distress- 
 ful manner,, and accused all his friends, complaining that some 
 incantation had been wrought on him, and some strange magic used 
 to deceive him into an opinion that he hid enjoyed what they Called 
 
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 453 
 
 sight. He added, that the impression then let in upon his soul, 
 would certainly distract him, if he were not so at that present time. 
 
 After some days, it was thought proper to take the bandage from 
 his eyes, and the young lady whom he loved was instructed to do it, 
 as well to endear herself to him by such a circumstance, as to 
 moderate his ecstasies, by the persuasion of a voice which had so 
 much po-^er over him as hers ever had. 
 
 When this beloved object began to take off the binding from hi* 
 eyes, she spoke to him as follows : 
 
 " My dear William, I am nrw taking the binding off, though, 
 when I consider what I am doin<<, I tremble with the apprehension, 
 chat though I have from my very childhood loved yot dark as you 
 were, and though you have conceived so strong a love for me, yet 
 you will find there is such a thing as beauty, 'vhich may ensnare you 
 into a thousand passions of which you are innocent, and take you 
 from me for ever: but before I hazard this, tell me in what mailer 
 the love you always professed to me entered into your heart, for 
 its usual admission is at the eyes. 77 
 
 The young man answered " Dear Lydia If I am to lose by sight 
 jhe soft emotions which I have always felt when I have heard your 
 voice ; if I am no more to distinguish the step of her I love when 
 she approaches me, but to change that sweet and frequent pleasure 
 for such an amazement as I knew the little time I lately saw ; or, if 
 I am to have anything besides which may take from me the senso 
 I have, of what appeared most pleasing to me at that time, the sight 
 of you, pull out these eyes, before they lead me to be ungrateful to 
 you, or undo myself. I wished for sight only to behold you; pull 
 them out if they are to make me forget you/ 5 
 
 With these assurances. Lydia was well satisfied. In all his con 
 versation with her he showed but very faint ideas of anything which 
 had not been received at the ears. 
 
 INTERESTING NARRATIVE. 
 
 The following is an extract from a letter written by a young mar- 
 ried lady in India, to her mother in England, and must be consi- 
 dered as a beautiful specimen of affection, fortitude, and piety. 
 
 " About three o'clock we left Rose farm, and at half past five saw 
 the ship coming towards us with many sails set; but before I pro- 
 ceed to say another syllable, I must caution you strongly, and par- 
 ticularly, my dear mamma, against giving way to your feelings, but 
 continually bear in mind that all is past, and I am, thank God, now 
 safe and well, as is my dear brother Frank. The story 1 must relate 
 is certainly disastrous, and might have been dreadful; but for the 
 
454 EVGHTY-SIXTH LESSOR. (2.) 
 
 mercy of Providence, who in this instance appears to have stretched 
 forth his omnipotent arm to rescue us from a precipitate and shock- 
 ing end (namely, a watery grave), almost miraculously. The cir- 
 cumstances were nearly, as the terrible agitation I underwent would 
 permit my memory its exercise, as follows : The ship was going with 
 a fine breeze at the rate of four miles an hour over (or against) a 
 strong ebb tide running nearly at the same rate ; and, as it was ia 
 our favour, we soon came close to the ship, and the officer, keeping 
 watch on deck, seeing who it was, ordered a rope to be thrown, 
 which our boatman caught and fastened to a part of the boat, in 
 order that the men in the ship (as is customary) might pull us to the 
 side ; but Frank, when they began to do so, finding the tide too 
 ftrong, and the progress the ship was making against it, too great 
 for it to be accomplished with facility, called to his chief officer, Mr 
 G., to request the pilot to let fly some particular sail, which request 
 after a little hesitation, was complied with ; but Frank, perceiving 
 the difficulty of our coming along side continuing to exist, ordered 
 Mr. G. again to tell the pilot to back the topsails; Mr. G. returned 
 for answer, " The pilot won't, Sir/' 7 Brother then called out to the 
 pilot, John, to whom he personally repeated his request, adding, " For 
 God ; s sake comply, for there is a lady in the boat, and you will 
 certainly pull us under water. j; I, through the Venetian, saw the pilot 
 shake his head, and heard Frank call out to let go the rope, which had 
 been thrown from the ship to us ; but the men not executing imme- 
 diately their order, what he had foretold actually occurred; we were 
 dragged under water. Oh ! what a dreadful moment ; no words 
 can express the feelings such a moment creates, and no one, excepi 
 those who have been placed in a similar situation, can conceive the 
 agony, the horror of it. The boat we were in is called a boleah ; it 
 is a large boat with a thing like a house on the top of it; therefore, 
 instead of the cabin being below, as in English pleasure yachts, il 
 is on the deck. When the accident happened I was alone in the 
 cabin with all the baggage, beds, &c. ; my maid was sitting near 
 the door, and brother was at the further extremity of the boat. He, 
 when under water, let go the rope which fastened us to the ship, 
 and by this means saved every soul but one from perishing, for the 
 boat, instead of sinking, upset and floated with the bottom upwards. 
 Poor Frank with great difficulty (he cannot swim), from the in- 
 cumbrance of a great coat, got above water, and held on to the 
 bottom of the boat. My proceedings inside were attended with more 
 difficulty. I possessed during the whole time entire presence of 
 mind ; which, though it saved me, adde'l trebly to the dreadfulness 
 
EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 453 
 
 of iny situati :m. I was as composed as I am at this moment. 1 
 felt death to be ineritable, and resigned myself to the mercy of 
 God. I saw my poor servant sink (I thought for ever), and heard 
 with firmness, though with agonized despair, her last faint exclama 
 tion of Oh Ma, Oh Ma, the funeral or death cry of the natives. The 
 boxes, &c., in the cabin had fallen to the ceiling, which had of 
 course, from the situation of the boat, become the undermost part; 
 they feu lonunaibly without injuring me; and I stood on the same 
 Uoor with them, and made an effort to open the door, but, from the 
 unusual position, n resisted my attempt. The water now began to 
 cusn through the Venetians all round into the cabin, and I felt thai 
 1 was consuming fast the air of which any further supply was totally 
 impossible; therefore, two dreadful deaths presented themselves^ 
 drowning and suffocation. Perfectly sensible and collected, I made 
 another more violent attempt to open the door, in which I succeeded, 
 and the prospect before me made my fate appear more certain even 
 than before, and undoubtedly more dreadful ; for the ceiling the 
 boat made over my head, rendered it only sufficiently light for me 
 to behold the dismally dark green of the water all round. Even in 
 this horrible state my recollection never failed me for an instant; 
 indeed, the effect was contrary, for my memory was almost cruelly 
 retentive ; and actually while I was deliberating which course to 
 take, or rather which death to die, I thought of you all, of my home, 
 my country, my husband; and indeed every circumstance of my 
 life passed in review before me. Beginning to gasp a little, I found 
 the horrors of drowning diminish, and being perfectly aware that 
 cither way my sufferings would soon be over, I again commended 
 myself to the Almighty, and placing my h?jids close down to my 
 sides (not a drop of water had yet touched /ne), I resigned myself 
 to that element, knowing that the tide would soon carry me from 
 underneath the boat, and that there was a possibility of my being 
 able to get at the top of it. From my perfect composure, even 
 when immersed, I was convinced that any action of my body would 
 counteract the buoyant effect of the water, therefore I remained oer- 
 tectly still ; my eyes were open, and I soon perceived, from the color 
 of the w r ater becoming lighter, that I was rising. When my head 
 came above, I saw I was only a few yards from the boat, to which 
 the tide carried me ; and, with an effort so natural to a drowning 
 wretch, endeavored to seize it : but the bottom was coppered and 
 go perfectly smooth that I only could hold by pressing my extrnded 
 hands, arms, and cheek, to its slippery surface * this was no hoi/* and 
 the noxt wave carried me off again with my head the second time 
 
458 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 
 
 under water. Though nearly exhausted, my presence of mind never 
 forsook me ; I was buoyed up again, and reached the boat as before 
 and as I now saw Frank's head above water, with some of the dan- 
 dies (boatmen), I increased my efforts to hold on, for the desire of 
 life was become stronger, though struggling with the water. I 
 called out, " Frank, I am safe, do not be alarmed." At this moment 
 he got on the top of the boat, and, crawling to the place where I 
 was holding on, entreated me to give him my hands that he might 
 pull me up ; but I knew the impossibility of his doing so, and felt 
 that even to quit my precarious hold would be ruin, for my strength 
 was too much exhausted to permit me to use any further exertion 
 of body : my mind was as vigorous as at first. Danger levels all 
 distinction. A poor dandy rose near me; and, partly to support 
 myself and save him, I grasped his hand, and at the same time got 
 a finger through a small hole which was bored for the purpose of 
 letting the water off the deck of the boat; these holds were better, 
 and I kept them for a considerable time, though up to my throat in 
 water. In short, my woman was saved, and, with the boatman, 
 like brother, got on the top. The ship meanwhile was going on, 
 and, the tide drifting us in a contrary direction, we were soon three 
 or four miles apart. Frank's officers were much concerned, as were 
 his men, of whom all the best, headed by the Syrang, jumped over- 
 board, and swam on shore. Shame to say. the ship was not pro- 
 vided with one boat fit for use ; that which they lowered down 
 sunk immediately, and the second officer, who had got into her, was 
 saved by a rope thrown to him from the ship. The men who swam 
 on shore had three or four miles to run before they came to the spot 
 where we were, therefore imagine our situation. Brother, when 1 
 could hold no longer, seized my hands, and with herculean strength 
 pulled me up, and seated me near him. We now began the mourn- 
 ful task of numbering our people, and found only one man missing; 
 all the remainder (twelve souls, including ourselves) being seated at 
 the top of the boat. Night was fast approaching, and the melancholy 
 cry of the poor creatures, in this perilous situation, of " Oh Ma, Oh 
 Ma, ?; uttered at regular intervals, increased the wretchedness of the 
 scene. Frank, in a state of distraction on my account, hallooed 
 repeatedly for assistance, but none came till quite n?"ght, and 
 for more than three hours were we in this miserable Condition, 
 when boats came, and brother's ship's crew appeared on the shore. ; 
 
V. VALUE'S 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 GRAMMAIRE SYNOPTIQUE. 
 
 DIRECTIONS. 
 
 DIRECTION 1. The pupil must be informed that, in English, to the ques- 
 tion : Have you read the book ? ho may answer, Yes, Sir, / have ; ' No, 
 Miss, / have not. To the question : Would they buy the paper? he may 
 answer: Yes, they would, or No, they would not. But the same liberty ia 
 not allowed in French, and he must then either stop after Yes, or Yes, Sir, 
 Oui,or Oui, M., or Non, or Non, Mllo. ; otherwise he must give an answer 
 containing the subject, the verb, and the objective. To the first question : 1 
 have it, or I have not got it ; to the second, They would buy it, or they would 
 not buy it. 
 
 Do you see tire fans ? I do. 
 
 Voyez-vous les cventails ? Je lea 
 
 vois. 
 
 Les a-t-il pris ? II ne les a pas pris 
 Les auriez-vous achetes ? Je 
 
 1'aurais fait. 
 
 Has he taken them ? He has not. 
 Would you have bought them ? I 
 would. 
 
 Dm. 2. Every attending word, whether article or pronoun, showing the 
 gender and number of nouns, must be repeated before every noun in the 
 eame sentence. 
 
 He received a hat, a sword, pistols, &c. 
 
 We saw the man, woman, children, 
 
 and servants. 
 This grammar, this inkstand, and 
 
 these pencils are mine. 
 
 II reut un chapcau, une epee, des 
 
 pistolets, &c. 
 Nous vTmesZ'homme, la femme, les 
 
 enfants, et les domcstiques. 
 Qette grammaire, cet encrier, et ces 
 
 crayons sont a moi. 
 
 And likewise the preposition governing several nouns or verbs must be 
 repeated before evory one of them, although it is not in English. 
 
 He speaks of his brother, sister, and 
 cousins. 
 
 fie likes to write, read, and play. 
 
 Tell the cook to go to market, to buy 
 eggs, to bring them here, and to 
 make an omelet with them. 
 
 89 
 
 II parle de son frere, de sa sosur, et tip 
 
 ses cousins. 
 
 II aime d ecrire, d lire, et d jouer 
 Dites au cuisinier <f aller au marche. 
 
 oTy acheter des ceufs, de les ap- 
 
 porter ici, etd'en faire une omelette 
 
 ($ 4, 20, 25.) 
 
 (457) 
 
458 GRAMMATICAL STNOPSI8. 
 
 Dm. 3. On Objective Pronouns. The French word LLI, translating, 
 sometimes, to him, to her. and sometimes merely him or hrr, is a source of 
 constant difficulty. Should to him or to her be always used, when implied, 
 in English, the difficulty would, in a great measure, be removed ; for, il 
 would be easy to remember that, send an apple TO HIM, and send an apph 
 ro HER, are both translated by, envoyez-im une pomme. But, instead of 
 using the preposition to, the Americans usually suppress it, and say : Send 
 HIM an apple ; send HER an apple. Hence arises the difficulty. As HIM, 
 unconnected with the preposition, is translated by LE, and HER, by LA, the 
 loonier is induced, whenever the preposition is omitted, (as in the last two 
 Ex.) to use LE or LA instead of LUI, and very naturally too. One way 
 to overcome this difficulty, is to examine mentally whether the preposition 
 could be used in English ; for instance, if, instead af send HIM an apple, 
 it would be correct to say: send an apple TO HIM. If so, then LUI must 
 be used. 
 
 But a still better dependence is to be placed on the French verb .(self. 
 If it requires the preposition a to govern its indirect object, lui must be used, 
 not otherwise. How is this to be ascertained? By consulting the list of 
 verbs, ( 1565.) 
 
 N. B. The same direction applies to the indirect pronoun LEUR, which 
 translates both THEM, and TO THEM. 
 
 The other objective pronouns do not present the same difficulty, because 
 they are the same, whether direct or indirect, (me, te, nous, vous, $47.) 
 
 DIR. 4. On Objective Nouns. The preposition connected with an objec- 
 tive pronoun, is sometimes suppressed, or at least connected with the pro- 
 noun so as to form a single word. Ex. Me, is used for a moi, to me. Lui, 
 for a lui, a elle, to him, to her, &c. and then both in English and French 
 there is an inversion or change in the position of the pronoun ; which, in 
 English, is placed before the objective case ; while, in French, it is put still 
 nearer the beginning of the sentence, viz : before the verb. Will you give 
 u pencil to me? is the grammatical construction, which, by the ^suppression 
 of the preposition to, and the inversion it necessitates, becomes will you 
 give me a pc?icil ? in which me and pencil appear in an inverted order. 
 Voulcz-vous me donner un crayon, is the only way the French have to trans- 
 late both the grammatical and inverted construction ; because the sup- 
 pression of the preposition a, which necessarily takes place, (there being 
 only one object, 51,) forces the pronoun me to be placed before the infinitive 
 donner. But mark this carefully. The preposition connected with the 
 objective noun is never suppressed in French, although it is frequentl) 
 done in English by means of an inversion. ($51i.) The phrase : Give Alan, 
 an apple, in which there is an inversion, is more used than give an appl* 
 to Mary, although the latter is the true grammatical construction. But ir 
 French it is only the last order that is to be translated, and ?iever the former 
 Donncz une pomme a Marie ; and never : donnez Marie une pomme. 
 [ will send John the knife, (the knife ! J'enverrai le couteau a Jean. 
 
 to John.) 
 3hc wrote her mother a letter, (a let- E'.le dcrivit une lettre a sa mere 
 
 *er to her mother.) 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 450 
 
 Fhow Sarah the piusent I made you. 
 
 1'ell Andrew the French of: His 
 horse. 
 
 Montrez a Sara le present quo je 
 
 vous ai fait. ^ 
 
 Dites a Andre le Francois de : Ilia 
 
 horse. 
 
 Whenever you meet with a similarly constructed sentence, give it its full 
 grammatical extent and translate it. 
 
 DIR. 5. When you do not know the infinitive of a verb, find it in a dic- 
 tionary, and any of its persons may be formed by the rules given for the for- 
 mation of the different tenses. 
 
 DIR. 6. A simple sentence consists of a verb and its nominative ; I ad- 
 mire, is a simple sentence. You do so well, is another. A compound sentence 
 consists of two or more simple sentences, connected by a conjunction or a 
 relative pronoun. I admire what you do so well ; I suppose that you know it. 
 He speaks and writes eloquently. In English, the conjunction that, and the 
 rrlativ3 pronouns whom, which, that, are usually omitted, as: 1. I believe 
 you know it, (that omitted.) 2. I know the person you call, (whom left out.) 
 3. I read the book he has written, (which.) 4. He learns the lesson you 
 gave him, (that.) In French, neither the relative pronoun nor the conjunc- 
 tion is omitted. Hence, translate the four sentences above by: 1. Je crois 
 QUE vous le savez. 2. Je connais la personne QUE vous appelez. 3. Je lis 
 le livre qu'il a ecrit. 4. II apprend la lecon QUE vous lui avez donnee. 
 Avez-vous mon couteau ? Je crois QUE oui ; que is used because oui is 
 equivalent to : j'ai votre couteau ; which, being a simple sentence, must be 
 connected by que with the former, je crois, to form the compound sentence 
 Je crois que fai votre couteau, or je crois que oui. (21 1 .) 
 
 DIR. 7. Much, many, enough, little, &c., are called adjectives in English, 
 wnen connected with nouns. In French, combien, beaucoup, assez, pcu, 
 trop, autant, plus, moms, guere, un peu, &c., are considered as adverbs of 
 quantity ; and as such, having no affinity with nouns, they require a con- 
 necting link, which is the preposition de. Hence, always use de after beau- 
 coup, combien, &c., before the following noun, and repeat it before every 
 one. When the noun is left out, the partitive pronoun en, placed before 
 the verb, and repeated before every one, takes its place and that of the pre- 
 ' position de. (47, N. 4. 12 1 . 2 &c.) 
 
 DIR. 8. In English, to form an interrogation with the verbs to be and to 
 have, the pronoun nominative is placed after the verb ; for instance, I have, 
 affirmation; by transposition becomes have I? interrogation. You hare, 
 have you ? I am ; am I ? You are ; are you ? &c. 
 
 This way of forming the interrogation tallies with the genera, rule in 
 French, which is to put the pronoun nominative after the verb, not only 
 with the two verbs avoir, to have, and tire, to be ; but with every other 
 verb. So : J'ai, becomes ui-je ? Je suis, suis-jc ? Je dois, d?is-je ? Jf 
 refoig, regois-je? &c. 
 
 Should the Americans use the same mode of interrogation with olhe* 
 verbs as they do with to have and to be, students would meet with no diffi- 
 culty; but instead of transposing the pronouns, they retain the affirmative 
 form and use auxiliaries, such as do, did, shall, &c. For instance : 1 owe, 
 Joco not become interrogative !>y saying : owe I ? but by putting ^ be for* 
 
460 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 I owe, as, do I owe? do I receive f &c., for the present tense. Did I au? ( 
 did I receive? for the imperfect. Shall and will, for the future tense , 
 should, would, &c., for the potential, &c. So that when the student wishej 
 to form an interrogation, in French, he naturally looks out for a word cor- 
 responding to the auxiliary, do, or did, or shall, &c., and feels much disap- 
 pointed when told there is none. It is for a long time with him a source of 
 perplexity. When he discovers that do is sometimes translated by fait, he 
 is constantly using fait wherever does occurs ; when told it is wrong, he 
 naturally feels dispirited. It is hoped that the full explanation, here given, 
 will convince the learner that the principal use of do, did, &c. is to form 
 interrogations and negations in English, 1 and that since he can, with the 
 verbs to have and to be, interrogate without using do, did, &c., so he can in 
 all French verbs. If he is once convinced of this idea, a great cause of per- 
 plexity will be removed. 
 
 The French, however, have another mode of interrogating, which consists 
 inputting: EST-CE QUE (28 1 ) before the affirmative form of every person, 
 which can be used interrogatively. Ex. J'ai, I have. Est-ce que j'ai? 
 have I ? Tu es, thou art. Est-ce que tu es ? art thou ? II lit, he reads. 
 Est-ce qu'il lit ? does he read ? Nous devons, we owe. Est-ce que nous 
 devons ? do we owe ? Vous savez, you know. Est-ce que vous savez ? 
 do you know ? Us aiment, they love. Est-ce qu'ils aiment ? do they love ? 
 From these examples it is evident that this mode of interrogation may be 
 used in every case, but it must be employed in the first person singular of 
 some verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would produce a diffi- 
 cult or an unpleasant sound. 1st. When that first person is a monosyllable, 
 as : je sens, je prends, je tends, jefonds. 2d. When the last syllable sounds 
 like je, such as: je mange, je range, &c. ; and others, such as : j'unis, je 
 pe.rmetStj'ojfre, &c. 
 
 DIR. 9. The student may easily notice that the parfait is formed by 
 merely adding the pas: participle to the well known expressions fai, jr. 
 Vai, je nel'aipas, je n'ai rien, fen ai, je Ics ai, &c. As je 1'ai eu, (31 2 ) 
 je ne 1'ai pas eu, je n'ai rien eu, j'en ai eu, je les ai eus, &c., and so of any 
 other past participle. Je 1'ai vu t je les ai donnes, j'en ai envoy i, &c. 
 
 KULES. 
 
 RULE 1. Every preposition governs the infinitive mood, except the pre- 
 oosition en (in) which governs the present participle. (20 1 .) 
 
 Note 1. Apres, (after) like every other preposition, (except e?i,} must be 
 followed by the infinitive mood in French, but there is this peculiarity 
 respecting apres, that it can be followed only by the infinitive of the auxi- 
 liaries avoir or etre ; as, Apres avoir, parle, after having spoken. Apres 
 etre parti, after having departed. Apres vous etre leve, after having 
 
 i To form a negative, do, did, &c., are invariably used, for instance; 1 go, does 
 r.ot become negative by saying : / go not ; but by : I d o not go. / icent is not / went 
 not, but I did not go, &c., &c. As the French form their negations in a different 
 way, the student must not loo'-- for anything corresponding to do, did, &c., in tha 
 French nog alive;? 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 461 
 
 iaen. Now, although in English you may omit the auxiliary havi?ig, and 
 ay: after speaking ; after departing ; after rising ; it cannot be done in 
 French. (40 l .) 
 
 R. 2. When two verbs come together, the second is in the infinitive mood 
 voulez-vous faire, (IS 1 ,) if the first is neither to have (avoir) or to be (etre) 
 used as auxiliary of a past tense. Of course, if the two verbs are connected 
 by a preposition, such as : d, to, de, of, from, &c., it governs the second verb in 
 the infinitive, according to R. 1., and the preposition must be repeated before 
 every verb. (20 1 .) 
 
 R. 3. Do you speak before you listen ? There are in this sentence two 
 verbs, speak and listen, connected by a preposition and having the same nomi- 
 native, you. Whenever that is the case, the French dispense with the second 
 nominative by using the infinitive mood after the preposition, (R. 1,) and 
 pay : Parlez-vous avant d'ecoutcr ? which corresponds to : Do you speak befort 
 listening ? (28 2 , 06s. G5.) 
 
 R. 4. When the nominatives are different, as: He writes after yaa have 
 spoken, the French use the English construction, and say : 11 ecrit aprcs que 
 vous avez parle. They, of course, insert the conjunction que, left out in 
 English, but never omitted in French. 
 
 Note. After that conjunction que the verb is frequently in the subjunc- 
 tive mood. ( 151.) 
 
 R. 5. When two or more nouns, two or more adjectives, or two or more 
 verbs govern a noun or a verb, they must govern it without any preposition, 
 or with the same. 
 
 If they require different prepositions, see ($ 140 9.) 
 
 R. 6.-~Every French preposition precedes the word it governs, is never 
 separated from it, and v, repeated before every word. ($ 117, 163, &c.) 
 
 ARTICLES. 
 
 $ 1. ARTICLES are used in French to show the gender and number of 
 nouns. Although French grammarians admit of but one article, viz : the 
 definite, le, la, les, (the), two others are usually introduced in English- 
 French grammars, i. e. the indefinite, un or unc, a, an, 1 and the partitive, 
 du, de la, dcs, some. 
 
 It seems to me that the name of Article might appropriately be given to 
 il! the words which point out the gender or number of nouns. Accordingly 
 we might call : 
 
 1. Mon, ma, mes, my, ($29,) &c., possessive articles, (because, besides 
 
 1 And likewise the following : 
 
 Aucun, tout, any, &c. Indefinite Articles. Tout homme J peu t le faire. 
 
 Toute femme > 
 Avez-vous aucun ami (aucune connaissauce,) a Paris ? 
 
&G2 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 showing the gender and number, they indicate possession,) instead ol namlig 
 them possessive adjective pronouns. 
 
 2. C'e, cet, cette, ces, this, these, &c., demonstrative ai tides or adjectives, 
 instead of demonstrative adjective pronouns. ($ 36.) 
 
 3. Quel ? quels ? quelle ? quelles ? which ? interrogative articles, instead 
 of interrogative adjective pronouns. 
 
 4. Deux, trois, &c., numeral articles. 1 
 
 $#. In English, articles are not, as in French, used to show the gender 
 and number, but to limit the signification of the noun. From this funda- 
 mental distinction arises the great difference in the use of the articles rn 
 the two languages. 
 
 INDEFINITE ARTICLE. Article Iniifan. 
 
 & 3. Singular. A or an, (12 3 ,8i, &c.) 
 
 For a, with a, of a, to a. 
 Plural. Some, any, a few. 
 For some. For a few. 
 
 With some. To a few. 
 
 Of, or from some, or a few. 
 
 Singulier. Un, masculm. Une, 
 
 feminin. 
 
 Pour un, avec une, d'un, a uno. 
 Pluriel. DCS. Quelques (14 1 .) 
 Pour des. Pour quelques. 
 
 Avec des. A quelques. 
 
 De quelques. 
 
 And so it unites with every other preposition, both in the singular and 
 oloraL 
 
 $4. Some, any, a few, arc frequently understood or left out in English, 
 but never in French. Ex. 
 He admires some modern authors. II admire quelques auteurs modernes. 
 
 We have friends in town. 
 Have you received letters ? 
 
 Nous avons des amis en ville. 
 Avez-vous reu quelques lettres ? 
 
 $5. In the singular it is generally used alike in both languages, and re- 
 peated before every noun, so as to mark its gender. As : 
 He has a pencil, a ruler, and a book. | II a un crayon, une regie, et un livre. 
 
 $ 6. 1st Exception. Cent, (14 a ,) a .lundred ; mille, a thousand ; long-tempt 
 i.36 2 ,) a long time ; beaucoup, (13 1 ,) a great deal, a great many, in French have 
 no article. 
 
 $7. 2d Exception. Before a noun of weight, measure, and number 
 connected with its price, use the definite le, la, les, not the indefinite 
 article. 
 
 Butter sells at twenty cents a pound. 
 
 This cloth is worth three dollars a 
 
 yard ; the metre (65 2 .) 
 Coal sells at five dollars a ton. 
 
 Le beurre se vend vingt cents la 
 
 livre. 
 Ce drap vaut trois dollars la verge ; 
 
 le metre. 
 Le charbon se vend cinq dollars le 
 
 tonneau. 
 
 1 This classification may )e new in anEnglisa-French grammar, although .ong ago 
 thought of by some of the lest French grammarians. See Gram, dog Giam. <>a 
 trticlcs. Note 234. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 463 
 
 ARTICLE DEFINITE. 
 
 $8r--The. Smgular masculine before a consonant le. 
 
 Singular feminine before a consonant : la. 
 
 Singular mas. or fern, before a vowel or h mute : Z'. 
 Plural mas. or fern, before vowels or consonants : les. 
 For the, Pour le, pour la, pour 1', pcur Ice. 
 
 Before the, Avant le, la, T or les. 
 
 And so on with every preposition, except de, (of or from,) and d, (to, at, 
 &c. ; and every preposition ending with de and a. These two prepositions, 
 in their connexion with the definite article, present an exception which ia 
 easily explained and understood, but which much practice alone c&ji enablo 
 ihe student to use with accuracy. 
 
 Of the, from the, sing, fern., is de la, (the preposition and article remain- 
 ing separated before a consonant.) 
 
 Of, from the, sing. mas. or fern., before a vowel or h mute u : .le V 
 Thus far the connexion is formed regularly, as in English, that is, the : re- 
 position de and the article la or V remain separate : de la, ds ?' But it ia 
 different with the masculine singular. 
 
 Of, froin the, sing, mas., regularly, would be de le, but those two words 
 are, before a consonant, always contracted into du. 1 
 
 Of, from the: plur, mas. or fern., instead of de leg, is contracted into 
 Jet. 1 
 To the, fern, sing., remains in two words : (regular") d la. 
 
 mas. or fem. before a vowel or h mute, is (regular} a V . 
 
 mas. sing, instead cf : a le in two words, contracts irregularly into au* 
 
 plur. mas. and fem. instead of dies, contracts irregularly into aux. 2 
 
 $ 9. The contraction du, being the union of the preposition de and the 
 article le, ought never to be used when that article is not required. Then, 
 translate of my friend, by de mon ami, and never by du man ami, which 
 would be equivalent to de le mon ami, of the my friend, in which the 
 article le is unnecessarily introduced. But, translate of yours, by du votre, 
 because, yours without article in English, being le votre, with the article, 
 in French, of yours becomes de le vore, or its contraction, du votre. And 
 BO it must be, whenever the article le is admitted by the French construc- 
 tion, although it may be rejected from the English. 
 
 Near being pres de.. near the becomes pres de le, or, contracted, pres du. 
 Near the castle, is then pres du chateau. 
 
 The very same process applies t2 des, which is the contraction of de 
 
 . W s .en in trench you meet vith : de le, de let, jt is as a preposition and a pro- 
 cotm objective : II parle de le faire, he speaks of doing t* il parle de les faire, ho 
 upeaks if doing them; and not a preposition and article. In the lat'.er case, de le y 
 singular, before a consonant, de les, plural, are never t.sed, bn their contractions, 
 iu, des. II parle du capitaine, des capitaines. He speaks Ofthe captain, of tht 
 Captains. 
 
 2 When you meet with a le, d les, it is as a preposition and pronoun objective : II 
 ponse d le faire, d les faire ; he thinks of doing it, of doing them; and not as a pre- 
 position and article. Instead of d le, use au. Instead of d les, use aux. II par'* 
 tiu capitaine, nr.x capitaines; he speaks to the captain, to the captains. 
 
464 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 les. Then, of my friends, (plur.,) must not be des mes cmis, \\hich would 
 be equivalent to of the my friends ; but de mes am:s. 
 
 $10. Des (contraction of de les, preposition and article plural) is not, 
 [and mind it carefully] the plural of de, which, being a preposition, is inva 
 riable ; but that of du (contraction of de le, preposition and article masculine 
 singular.) 
 
 $ 11. Near the, pres du, pres de la, pres de V , pres des. Let this be the 
 model for every preposition ending with dc, when it is to be connected with 
 he definite article, but not otherwise. (51 M 
 
 $32- To the, for the masculine, should be d le, but it js always COB- 
 iracted into au, before a consonant. To the dictionary, au dictionna : -re. To 
 my dictionary, is not au mon dictionnaire, which would be equivalent to 
 a le mon diciiojinaire, to the my dictionary; but d mon dictionnaire, 
 leaving out the article. To mine, must be VM mien; because mine, is le 
 mien, &c. 
 
 $13. A* far as, being : jusqu'a ; as far as the, will be jusqu'au, jusqu'a 
 la, jusqu'd V , jusqu j aux. As far as the castle, literally jusgu'd le chateau, 
 which, contracted, becomes JUSQU'AU chateau. Takejtttgtt'atc, &c., as the 
 model of every preposition ending with a, in its connexion with the definite 
 article, but not otherwise. (38 1 .) 
 
 To the, in the plural, should be a les, but it is always contracted into aux. 
 To the childre?i ; aux enfants. To my children, should be d mes enfants, 
 and not aux mes evfants, which would be equivalent to d les mes enfants, 
 (to the my children.) 
 
 $ 14. The function of the article being to show the gender and ?ntmler 
 if French nouns, and not merely to limit their signification, ( 2,) we deduce 
 from it these general principles. 
 
 $15. The definite article must be placed before every noun, if that noun 
 is not determined by some other qualifying, determining, or limiting word. 
 (14 1 , Ex ) See ($ 1406) for an exception. 
 
 $ 16. Proper names of countries require a French gender or number ; 
 hence the article that accompanies each one. Le Bresil. La France. Les 
 Etats-U,;:s. Those ending in e mute are mostly feminine, all others mas 
 culine. ($ 140 8.) Exceptions among nouns. 
 
 $ IT. Proper names of individuals, pointing out their own gender, requiie 
 no article. Alexandre, Jeanne, Philadelphie. 
 
 $ 18. When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, the article 
 is not repeated before each. The old and brave soldier. Le vieux et brave 
 eoldat. Le vieux et le brave soldat, would indicate that there are two ; one 
 old and one brave. 
 
 PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 
 
 A. though there is in English grammars no article so called, yet, as the 
 English -French grammars have it, and as it has some or any for correspond- 
 ent in English, we insert it here. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 465 
 
 $19. FIRST PARTITIVE, before a noun. 
 
 Some or any, before sing. mas. beginning with a consonant : du. 
 
 " sing. fern. " " " de la. 
 
 " " " sing. m. or f. " " a vowel: del 1 . 
 
 " " the plural " " " des. 
 
 2 20. It has exactly the same form as the definite article connected with 
 die preposition de. And it is repeated before every noun. 
 
 $ 21. For some or any. Pour du. I With some or any. Avec de la. 
 Before some or any. Avant de V. \ To some or any. A du, a des. 
 
 $ 22. When connected with of or from, as : 
 Of, or from some, it is (not de du, de de la, de des, -.tit) simply de. 
 Of some authors. Dictionaries. | D'auteurs. De dictionnaires. 
 
 $23. Some or any. 
 
 For some. With some. 
 
 Of, from some. To some. 
 
 $21. Near some. I Pres du (sing.) Pres de quclquc. 
 
 (Model for the prepositions with de.) I Pres de (plur.) Pres de quelques. 
 
 $25. Obs. Some or any, is frequently omitted in English, but never 
 in French. 
 
 Nous avons de la soupe et du boeuf 
 
 pour diner. 
 
 Nous avons de Tor de Californie. 
 Avez-vous mangd des chataigncs, 
 des pommes, et des noix ? 
 
 . SECOND PARTITIVE ARTICLE, before an adjective, or after allegation. 
 
 Quelque, sing. Quelques, plur. 
 
 Pour quelqtie. Avec queltfues. 
 
 De quelques. A quelque. 
 
 We have soup and beef for dinner. 
 
 We have California gold. 
 Have you eaten chestnuts, apples, and 
 nuts ? 
 
 De or d' , (not des, mind it.) 
 Nous avons du pain, (1st partitive.) 
 Nous avons de bon pain, de bonno 
 viande, de bons poulets. (2d partit., 
 II a du pain, il n'a pas de bcurre. 
 II a d'aimables enfants. 
 
 Some or any : Mas, fern. sing. plur. 
 
 We have some bread. 
 
 We have some good oread, good 
 
 meat, good chickens. (II 2 .) 
 fie has bread, he has no butter. (II 1 .) 
 He has amiable children, (some, a 
 
 few.) 
 
 $ 27. N. B. If the adjective is placed after the noun,' instead of the 2d, 
 use the 1st partitive article. JIc has amiable children, may be translated in 
 French by : 
 
 II a d'aimables enfants. 2d partitive, the adjective being before. 
 
 II a des enfants aimables. 1st partitive, the noun being before. 
 
 $28. I have some more, orothers. | J'cn ai d'autre, ou d'autres; 
 not des autres, because the partitive comes immediately before the adjective. 
 
 529. POSSESSIVE ARTICLES, OR ADJECTIVES, USUALLY 
 CALLED POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. ($1.) 
 
 $30. The following words arc usually classed among pronouns, but a, 
 Ul English as well as in French, they merely refer to nouns; as they arf 
 
66 GRAMMATICAL SYNCF31S. 
 
 always prefixed to them, and never take their pla?c; the term Possessive 
 Articles, instead of Possessive Pronouns, does not seem inappropriate. 
 
 31. Before a consonant. Before a vowel Before all 
 
 
 
 
 or h mute. 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. Mas. 
 
 Sing. Fern 
 
 M. $ F. 
 
 Plur. M. f 
 
 P 
 
 My 
 
 mon 
 
 ma 
 
 mon 
 
 mes. 
 
 
 Thy 
 
 ton 
 
 ta 
 
 ton 
 
 tes. 
 
 
 His, her, its 1 
 
 son 
 
 sa 
 
 son 
 
 scs. 
 
 
 Our 
 
 notre 
 
 notre 
 
 notre 
 
 nos. 
 
 
 Your 
 
 votre 
 
 votre 
 
 votre 
 
 vos. 
 
 
 Their 2 
 
 leur 
 
 leur 
 
 leur 
 
 leurs. 
 
 
 As its function is to show'the gender and number : 
 
 32. RULE. The Possessive Article, in French, agrees with the object 
 possessed, and not with the possessor, as it does in English. Or else : 
 
 It agrees with the noun to which it is prefixed, not that it refers to; ami 
 .t must be repeated before every noun. 
 
 The father, his son, and daughter. 
 The mother, her son, her daughter, 
 and friends. 
 
 Le pere, son fils, et sa fille. 
 La mere, son fils, sa fille, et 
 
 amies. 
 
 1 What is ITS infinitive? is translated ty: Quel EN est L'infinitif? because the 
 words, ITS infinitive, can be changed to: THE infinitive OK IT, corresponding to tho 
 French: EN est tfinfinitif. Hence this rule. (302.) 
 
 ITS is not translated by son, sa, ses, but by LE, LA, ou LES . . . EN, when it can b 
 I'lmnged to: THE... or IT. 
 
 Ex 1. I like Philadelphia; ITS markets i J'aime Philadelphie; LES marches EN 
 nre excellent. I sont excellents. 
 
 When that inversion cannot be made without destroying the sense, use: son, sa, 
 les. Ex.2. The country has ITS delights, mast be translated by: La campagne a 
 IBS agrtments, because the sentence does not admit of the inversion : the country has 
 'he delights of it. 
 
 2 THEIR, is not translated by leur or leurs, but by le, la, les . . .en, when their 
 ran be changed to : the . . .of them. 
 
 These languages are copious; I admire ' Cos langues sont copieuses ; j 'EX admire 
 
 THEIR beauties (the . . . of them). ' LES beautes. 
 
 tint use leur or leurs, when the inversion is inadmissible. 
 
 ' Those languages have THEIR beauties. As we cannot say : have the beauties of 
 them, wo must use leurs, and say: Ces langues ont LZURS beauts. 
 
 The above rule being derived from the English cor.struct.ion, will be founu more 
 practical than the rule of French Grammarians, which is: When the possessor is 
 nominative of the sentence in which ITS or THEIR is used, translate by: son, sa, sea, 
 or leur, leurs. If the possessor is not the nominative, translate by: le, la, les ... 
 &a. (See examples above.) 
 
 Exception. AVhen the thing possessed is governed by a preposition, use: son, sa, 
 WB } leur, leurs. 
 
 The Philade.phia water-works are admi- 
 rable; everybody wonders at their sim- 
 p.icity. 
 
 Les machines hydrauliques de Philade.- 
 phie sont admirables; tout lo monde 
 s'etonnede leur simplicite. 
 
 But if you employ a verb that requires no preposition, the rule must be used. An 
 lout le monde en admire la simplicite. This (brim an exception to both rules. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 467 
 
 My cousin's brother and sister. 1 I Le frere de mon cousin et sa soeur. 
 My cousin's sister and brother. I La sceur de mon cousin et son frere, 
 
 $33. DEMONSTRATIVE ARTICLES OR ADJECTIVES. 
 $ 34. Always prefixed to a noun, and repeated before everyone. (See $ 30.} 
 Masculine. Singular. Femmine. 
 
 This, that. \ C- b K ef re a consonant or h aspirated. ) Cet(e 
 
 C Get, before a vowel or h mute. 5 
 
 These, those. Ces, for the Plur. Mas. and Fem. before all letters. 
 
 Before a consonant, This hat, that hat. Ce chapeau. Mas. Sing. 
 
 Be/ore h aspirated. This hero, that hero. Ce heros. 
 
 Before a vowel. This, that child. Get enfant. 
 
 Before a silent h. This, that man. Get homme. 
 
 Before all letters. This, that table. Cette table. Fen . Sing. 
 
 <4, 8 1 , 9 2 , 10 1 .) This, that needle. Cette aiguille. 
 
 These, those men. Ces hommes, Mas. Plur. 
 
 These, those women. Ces femmes. Fem. Plur. 
 
 But when much precision is required, -ci and -la are added ; as: 
 
 This hat. (8 1 .) Ce chapeau-ci. 
 
 This child. Get enfant-ci. 
 
 This table. Cette table-ci. 
 
 These men. Ces hommes-ci. 
 
 That hat. Ce chapeau-la.. 
 
 That child. Get enfant-la. 
 
 That table. Cette table-la. 
 
 Those women. Ces femmes-la. 
 
 $35. When one says : If you read this book, I will read that or that one, 
 it is evident that the word this connected with book, takes the place of no 
 other word previously expressed, and that, consequently, it is not a pronoun, 
 but a mere attendant on the noun book, to limit its signification, in the same 
 manner as the article does ; and that it may then be considered as a demon- 
 strative article or adjective, but not a pronoun. In every similar case, it 
 must be translated by : ce, or cet, cette, ces. 
 
 It is also evident that the word that, or that one, takes the place of a 
 noun previously named, viz : book, and that, of course, it is not an article or 
 adjective, bu a true pronoun demonstrative, ($ 36,) to be translated by : celui- 
 la. &c. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 $36. DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Masc. Sing. 
 
 This, this one. > ^ , . . 
 r,, > Celin-ci. 
 
 The latter. $ 
 
 That, that on 
 The former. 
 
 That, that one. ) ~ . .'" 
 > Celui-la. 
 
 Mate, ftur. 
 These. Ceux-ci. 
 
 Those. Ceux-la. 
 
 t My cousin's brother and sister, is an ellipsis for my cousin's brother and my cou- 
 0m' sister ; which in French would be : Le frere de mon cousin et la sceur de mon cou- 
 wr>; but instead of putting the second noun in the possessive case, use a poseossivp 
 article ($ 31), and say : Lefrfre de mon cousin et sa saur. ( 140.) 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 Obs. -Ci and -la are omitted when other words (such as: de, of; qut, 01 
 e, which ;) are added to complete the sense. 
 
 Of 
 
 I Celle-ci. 
 
 Henrietta's, those Ceux deHemieUe. 
 
 of H. 
 
 Those which are . . Ceux qui sent . .. 
 Fern. Plur. 
 
 These, 
 
 Those. 
 
 Those rf.... 
 Those which . 
 
 Celles-ci. 
 
 Celles-la. 
 
 Celles de . . 
 Celles qae . 
 
 Henry's, that of H. Celui de Henri. 
 The one which I Celui que j'ai. 
 
 have. 
 
 Fern. Sing. 
 This, this one, 
 The latter. 
 
 That that one. ) Celle _ Ia . 
 The former. ) 
 
 That of, the one of. Celle de . . 
 That, the one Celle qui . 
 
 which 
 
 37. Obs. As these are pronouns, they always come after a i tntecedeni 
 noun to which they refer and with which they agree. And therefore when 
 you have an English sentence like : this or that book, the noun, in French, 
 must be put in the first part of the sentence, to serve as an antecedent to the 
 pronoun (flat) which follows. This book or that . . . Ce livre-ci ou celui-lt. 
 Celui-la referring to : book ; whilst ce, cet, cette, (this or that, same Eng- 
 lish as above), ces (these or those), are always placed before the neun of which 
 they point out the gender and number, witho.ut referring to anything pre- 
 viously mentioned. 
 
 $38. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. NOMINATIVES. 
 Pronoms Personnels. Nominatifs. 
 
 2d CLASS. 2de CLASSE. 
 Separated from the verb, in French. 1 
 
 Singulier. 
 
 I. Moi.2 
 
 Thou. Toi. 
 
 He, she. Lui, elle. 
 
 1st CLASS. Ire CLASSE. 
 Connected with the verb, in French .1 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I. Jc,j'. 
 
 Tncj'i. Tu. 
 
 He, she, it. II, elle il, elle. 
 
 One, some or any one. On. (Always connected with a verb of the 3d 
 pers. sing., although liie English pronoun may be plur. See below, 3d plur.; 
 
 1 The negative ne, ri 1 , and any objective pronouns, le, me, &c., ( 47,Vinay intervene 
 between a nominative of the 1st class and the verb, without destroying the connex- 
 ion; but no other word. As: il donne, lime donne, il ne donne pas, il ne me le 
 donne pas, donne-t-il? But to translate: he who gives, do not say: il qui donno; 
 tut : lui qui donne, because who separates he, and gives : He ! Can he do it ? Lui ! 
 ^ut-il lefaire? Can he do it ? He ! Peut-il le faired Lui ! 
 
 2 The separated nominative is frequently left out in English, or, if expressed, it i 
 &y as for me, as to me, &c. The French moi, tot, &c., is evidently an abridgment- 
 of as to me, and, consequently, is nothing but the objective case used as a 
 nominative : 
 
 As for me, I do not know anything about j Quant a moi, or simply moi! jo i 
 
 He / He did not do it. (As to him. ) 
 
 <)idst thou go ? 
 
 We believe it. (As to us.) 
 
 sais rien. (Je n'en sais rien, 'moi /) 
 Lui ! il ne 1'a pas fait. 
 Y as-tu 6te, toi ! 
 Nous! nous le croyora. Nous le orosr 
 
 ons. nous. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 469 
 
 Plural. i 
 
 We. Nous. 1 We. 
 
 Vou or ye. Vous. 1 Ye or you. 
 
 They. Us, m. elles,/. I They. 
 
 People, they, we, you. On. People seek happiness. 
 
 Pluriel. 
 Nous. 
 Vous. 
 
 Eux, m. Elles,/, 
 On cherche le bonheur. 
 
 In the 3d pers. sing, and plur. may be classed the following expressions, 
 which remain the same, whether connected with, or separated from the 
 verb. 
 
 Singulier. 
 
 fie, she, it. Ce, c'. 2 
 
 This, that, it. 4 Ceci, cela, 5 c.a, ce, 
 
 Pluriel. 
 
 They, (it). 4 Ce. 2 Ce. 3 
 
 These, those, Ces choses-ci. Caa 
 they. choses-la. 
 
 1 The uniting pronoun ncus or vous, must be placed before a verb, when it has 
 two or more nominatives of different persons. Ex. at (171 Exercise.) 
 
 2 Instead of: il, elle, Us, elles, use ce or c' with the verb to be, when it liaB a nomi- 
 native predicate, as some grammarians say, or two nominatives according to others. 
 As: He, is an Englishman; Jest un Anglais: because Englishman, un Anglais, ii 
 used as a predicate noun to he. But you must translate he is English, by il est 
 Anglais, and not : c'est Anglais ; because, English is then used a HH adjective, and 
 not as a second nominative or a noun predicate. (2Gl, Obs. 59.) 
 
 She is an English girl. 
 She is English. 
 They are Frenchmen. 
 They are French. 
 
 C'est une Anglaise. 
 Elle est Anglaise. 
 Ce sont des Francais 
 Us sont Francais. 
 
 3 $39 J*?s, is translated by ce sont; is it? by sont-ce? (20 ', Obs. 59.) only 
 when followed by a 3d person plural. As : Is it they who sell those beautiful shawls ? 
 Sont-ce eztz qui vendent ces beaux chales? Yes, it is they. Oui, ce sont eux. But 
 it is we who have that; is rendered by C'est nous qui avons cela; not ce sont nous, 
 because, we, although plural, is not a 3d person, (473, Obs. 110.) 
 
 4 When you say: take this, pointing to an object without naming it, or without 
 applying the word this to a noun previously mentioned, it is evident that, in such a case, 
 the word this means this thing, or this object, or this article, and that, of course, it 
 is used as the name of the object itself, or as a noun, (although usually called a 
 demonstrative adjective pronoun.) In every similar case, translate as above. 
 Hence, ceci, cela, ceux-ci, ceux-ld, should never be connected with nouns, although 
 thisj that, these, those, in English, can be used witn f r without a noun. This admi- 
 nistration, is, Cette administration, not ceci ou cela administration. (243, 302.) 
 
 5 When former and latter apply to actions, translate by cela and ceci, not by celui- 
 *d and celui-ci, which refer only to definite nouns or objects. As : Have you my book 
 ani his ? I have the former, but not the latter, (here former and latter apply to tlft 
 noun book,) then say : J'ai celui-ld, mais non pas celui-ci. Have you taken my booK 
 and torn his ? I did the former, but not the latter, (they 1 ere apply to actions,) thou 
 nay : J'ai fait cela, mais non pas ceci. (N. pa. 271.) 
 
 6 Ce, cannot be used immediately before an objective pronoun. It is not correct 
 to translate it pleases me, by ce me plait, but by cela me plait, ca ou ceci mt 
 pla\i. Ce is mostly used with the verb to be, seldom with others. It is suitable, 
 t'est 3onvenable; but, it suits, must be cela convient, not ce convient. It is suffi- 
 cient, &-est suffisant, or else, cela suffit, and not ce suilit. (473, CG3 ) 
 
 Thin IB gool, that is, or it is good, 
 i'hat s it, it is that. C'est cela. 
 
 '4 is a cnnfaction of cela. 
 
 Ceei est bon, cela ou c'eat ben. 
 That's not ifr, 'tis not so. Ce a'Ost pat 
 eeJu. 
 
470 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SKrtOPSCS. 
 
 Smguher. 
 
 This one, that one. Celui-ci, celui-la.m 
 The latter, the for- Celle-ci, celle-la./. 
 mer. 
 
 This one.. That one. Celui-ci . . cet autre 
 The one who, that, Ceiui qui, celle qui. 
 
 which. 
 
 Some one, any one. Quelqu'un. 
 Nobody, not anyone. Personne ne. 
 No one, not anyone. Nul ne, nulle ne. 
 None, no one. Aucun ne, aucune 
 
 ne. 
 
 Each one, every one. Chacun, chacune. 
 The one or the other. L'un ou 1'autre. 
 
 Plume*. 
 
 These, those, some, ^ 
 The latter, the for- J Ceux-ci, ceux-U.m, 
 
 mer, (some do, f Celles-ci, cellee-lA../ 
 
 some do not.) J 
 
 Some .. . others. 
 
 Ceux-ci . . d'autres. 
 
 Those who, that, 
 
 Ceuxqui,celles<jui 
 
 which. 
 
 
 Some, a few. 
 
 Que.ques uns. 
 
 j 
 
 
 All. 
 
 Tous 
 
 The one and the L'un et 1'autro. 
 other, both. 
 
 
 
 
 / Some . . . others. 
 
 Les uns . . lei 
 
 jautrga. 
 
 The one., the other. 
 
 L'un...!' 
 
 autre. 
 
 ) Both. 
 
 Tous deux, 
 
 ton tea 
 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 be deux. 
 
 
 Nt'.ther. 
 
 Ni 1'un ni 
 
 1'autre, 
 
 
 Neither of them. 
 
 Ni les uns, 
 
 ni lets 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 autres. 
 
 
 Neither this one nor Ni celui-c 
 
 i ni celui- 
 
 Neither these nor 
 
 Ni ccux-ci n 
 
 i coux 
 
 that one. 
 
 la. 
 
 
 
 those. 
 
 la. 
 
 
 Nothing, not any. 
 
 Rien ne . . 
 
 
 
 All. 
 
 Tous. 
 
 
 Who (pour les pers.) 
 
 Qui. Quie 
 
 st-cequi 
 
 7 
 
 (the t of qui is nev< 
 
 5r cut off.) 
 
 
 What ? (pour les 
 
 ^tt'est-ce qui? 
 
 A few,some .. others 
 
 Quelques uns .... 
 
 choses.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 d'autres. 
 
 
 N. K. The nominative case and the verb are frequently left out in 
 English. As: This, when followed by . . ., Those, where preceded by . . ., That, 
 9n the side-board ; My gloves, in my pocket, &c. In all similar sentences, 
 ihc pronoun and verb must be expressed in French : Ceci, quand il est . , . 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Pronoms Personnels. 
 
 Separated from the verb. 
 
 
 $ 4O. NOMINATIVES. NOMINATIFS. 
 
 $ 41. OBJECTIVES. REGIMES, 
 
 I who, I that. Moi qui. 
 
 I whom, I that. Moi que. 
 
 Thou who, thouthat. Toi qui. 
 
 Thou whom. Toi que. 
 
 He who he that. Lui qui. 1 
 
 J 
 
 He whom, he that, 
 
 g Lui que. 1 
 
 Celui qui, 2 
 
 p 
 
 
 | Celui que. 2 
 
 She who, she that. Elle qui, 1 
 
 o 
 
 She whom, she that 
 
 | Elle que. 1 
 
 Celle qui, 2 
 
 ? 
 
 
 | Celle que. 2 
 
 i Lui,4lle, apply not to people in general, but to particular persons, and require 
 no complement. 
 
 Who is called the Father of his Country ? 
 
 He (pointing to Washington) . 
 Bhe (Miss D.) who writes so well. 
 
 Qui est appele le Pere de sa Patrio 9 
 
 Lui (montrant Washington) 
 Elle (Mile. D.) qui ecrit si bien. 
 
 The plurals, eux, elles, apply to particular persons. 
 
 They (the kings) who had promised so 
 
 much. 
 They (the Misses R.) who speak French 
 
 so prettily. 
 
 Eux (les rois) qui avaient tant promu-. 
 
 Elles (les Demoiselles R.) qui parlontsi 
 joliment le Franc/ais 
 
 Lut, elle, eux, &c., apply only to persons, not to things. 
 
 2 Celui, celle. ceux, celles, apply to nouns having a general sense,. Dr to nouns thfcf 
 require complements 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 471 
 
 NOMINATIVES. OBJECTIVES. 
 
 The person who. La pcrsonne qui. i The person whom. La personno 
 
 Plural. 
 
 PlurieL 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plurm 
 
 We who, we that. 
 You who, you tha'.. 
 They who, they 
 that. 
 
 Nous qui. 
 Vous qui. 
 Eux qui. 1 
 
 We whom, that. 
 You whom. 
 They whom, that. 
 
 Nous que. 
 Vous que. 
 Eux que. 1 
 
 Those who, that. 
 They who, that. 
 Those who, that. 
 John and Louis 
 
 Ceux qui. 2 
 Elles qui. 1 
 Celles qui. 2 
 Jean c*. Louis 
 
 Those whom, that. 
 They whom, that. 
 Those whom, that. 
 J. and L., whom. 
 
 Ceux que. 2 
 Elles que. 1 
 Celles que. a 
 Jean et Louis 
 
 who. 
 
 qui. 
 
 
 que. 
 
 *. COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Myself, 
 
 Thyself, 
 
 Himse.f, 
 
 Herself, 
 
 Itself, 
 
 NOMINATIVES AND OBJECTIVES. 
 
 Oneself, 
 
 Ourselves, 
 
 Yourself, 
 
 Yourselves, 
 
 Themselves, 
 
 moi-meme, 
 
 toi-memc. 
 lui-mCmc. 
 elle-mcme. 
 lui,elle,soi-meme. 
 
 soi-meme. 
 
 nous-memes. 
 
 vous-mSme. 
 
 vous-memes. 
 
 eux-memes. 
 
 elles-memes. 
 
 Among compound pronouns may be included : 
 We, (nom.,) among us, (ohj.) i Nous autres. 
 
 You, (nom.,) among you, (obj.) I Vous autres. 
 
 When objectives, they unite with every preposition. 
 
 The French use them frequently in familiar discourse ; but only in the 
 1st and 2d per. plur. 
 
 We citizens like country air. 
 Among you merchants are there no 
 
 rogues ? 
 
 Nous autres citoyens nous aimone 
 
 1'airde la campagne. 
 Parmi vous autres marchands n'y 
 
 a-t-il pas de fripons ? 
 
 * 42. OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 $ 43. The Frencn have two kinds. 1st. Those which are immediately 
 governed by the verb, and called DIRECT OBJECTIVES, or REGIMES 
 DIRECTS. They correspond to the objective case of an English verb. 
 
 $ 44. 2d. Those which are governed by a preposition, and called INDI- 
 RECT OBJECTIVES, or REGIMES INDIRECTS. These correspond to the objec- 
 tive case of an English preposition. The latter are subdivided into two 
 classes. 
 
 He (any one) who practises virtue is \ Celui qui pratique la vertu est heurenx. 
 happy. 
 
 Celles qui etudient le Frangais . . . 
 
 They (a.l ladies) who study French 
 I have the book of him who is firk. 
 
 1 Soo note 1, preceding page. 
 
 2 Seo note a, preceding page 
 
 J'ai le livre de celui qui est mnladt. 
 
472 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, ' 
 
 $ 45. The 1st class includes those which, in a single word, express both 
 the preposition and the pronoun. Ex. : To him, is expressed in French by 
 ihe single word lui, (Dir. 2) ; to her, by the same word, lui ; to them, by 
 \he single word Icur ; of it, of them, by ($47) en, &c. 
 
 $ 46. The 2d class includes those that are attended by a preposition 
 expressed. Ex. : For her, pour elle ; with them, avec eux, avec dies ; with 
 out me, sans moi ; to me, a moi ; of me, de moi. 
 
 *47 .OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS. Protum* Objectifs ou Regimes, 
 
 MONOSYLLABLES. 
 
 BEFORE THE VERB, except with the Imperative commanding. 
 Direct objectives. Regimes directs. Indirect objectives. Regimes inUirects 
 
 1. Me, me, m'. To me, me, in' 
 
 2. Thee, te, t'. To thee, te, t'. 
 j.tfz.llim, le, P. To him, /. of, from him, m. lui, en. 
 
 /.Her, la, 1'. To her, of, fromher(porsoiig), /. lui, en. 
 
 n. It, le, ln,l'. Toit,there.ofit,fromit(thin$rs), n. y. en. 
 
 1. Us, nous. To us, nous. 
 
 2. You, vous. To you, vous. 
 
 3. m. Them, les. To them, of them, m. leur, en. 
 /.Them, les. To them, from them, /. leur, en. 
 n. Them, les. To them, of them (things), n. y, en. 
 
 47. Pronouns having, by themselves, a definite signification, ought 
 never to represent a noun taken in an indefinite sense, that is, a noun used 
 without article or without some limiting word. 
 
 When, then, the question, Parlez-vous Fran$ais? is answered by,je h 
 parle, that le relates to a word used without any limiting article ; hence, the 
 answer seems incorrect. It is correct, however; but the question ought to 
 be, Parlez-vous le Fransais ? using the article after parlez-vous, in the same 
 manner as it is used after etudiez-vous, apprenez-vous, lisez-vous, &c. 
 Custom, nevertheless, rejects le after the verb parler. (26 l .) 
 
 $48. AFTER THE VERB. APRES LE VERBE. 
 
 In the Imperative commanding. A Tlmperatif commandant. 
 
 Direct objectives. Regimes directs. Indirect objectives. Regimes indirect** 
 
 1. A. T e, moi. To me, moi. 
 J. Thes, toi. To thee, toi. 
 
 3. *n. Him, le. To him, of him, lui, en 
 
 /. Her, la, To her, of her, lui, en. 
 
 n. It, le, la. To it, of it, y, en. 
 
 t. Us, nous. To us, nous. 
 
 2. You, vous. To you, vous. 
 
 3. m. Them, les. To them, of them, leur, en. 
 /. Them, les. To them, of then:,, leur, en. 
 n. Them, les. To them, of them, y, en. 
 
 $49. Any objective pronoun followed by a verb in the infinitive mocxi. 
 S2ir. : I wish you to come, must be turned to / wish that you would comt, 
 requiring, in French, the subjunctive nood : Je desire que vous vcniez. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 473 
 
 $ 50. When the English objective pronoun it or them, alone, or governed 
 Dy in, with, of, or any other English preposition, is to be translated by a 
 French verb requiring the preposition o, use?/. II y repond ; he answers 
 it : il y reussit ; he succeeds in it : ii y pense ; he thinks of it. The 
 verbs ripondre, reussir, penser, requiring o, the English pronoun it, by 
 taelf, or with any English preposition, must be translated by y. ($48.) 
 
 And by en, if the French verb requires the preposition de. II en cet 
 faclie ; he is sorry for it: on Yen blame; he is blamed for it; on * 
 dome ; they doubt it. ($ 48.) 
 
 We have seen (I 1 , &c.) nouns connected with the definite article; to 
 replace them, when used in the objective case, they require a definite pro- 
 noun ; in English it or them; in French, le, la, les. I have it; je 1'ai: I 
 have them ; je les ai. ($48.) 
 
 We have seen (12 1 , 2 , $4, &c.) nouns connected with the indefinite or par- 
 titive article ; to replace them, when used in the objective case, they require 
 an indefinite or partitive pronoun ; in English, some, or any of it, of them, 
 in French, en, meaning, of the thing or things, person or persons spoken of. 
 As, in French, the article is never left out, neither is the pronoun en ever 
 omitted. 
 
 PLACE OF THE OBJECTIVES. PRONOUNS. 
 
 The direct and indirect of a single word, or monosyllable. 
 
 $ 51. RULE 1st. When the verb has but one regime direct, or indirect 
 ($47,) or else one double regime, ($57,) that -cgime goes before the verb 
 except in one mood, ($$ 54, 64.) 
 
 When it has several objectives, ($56.) 
 
 I give. I give you. 
 
 I see my friend. I see him. 
 I have given an apple away. 
 I have given an apple to her. 
 He is devoted to her. 
 
 Je donne. Jc vous donna. 
 
 Je vois mon ami. Je le vois. 
 J'ai donne une pom me., 
 Je lui ai donne' une pomme. 
 II lui est devoud. 
 
 $ 51i. The objective noun is always placed after the verb, as in Eng- 
 lish ; but not the pronoin. And the preposition which governs the noun ii 
 never understood in French, although it is frequently left out in English. 
 As : Give John an apple ; for, Give an apple to John. Donnezune pomme 
 Jean. Follow this last construction. (Dir. 4.) 
 
 $ 52. When the verb to have, or to le, is used as auxiliary, the objec- 
 tive pronoun is always placed before it; never after: that is, not imme- 
 diately before the past participle. Ex. : translate / have seen you, by: Je 
 vous ai vu (1 you have seen}, placing vous before ai, and not by fai vous vu, 
 vous being wrongly placed after ai, and immediately before the past part, 
 vu. I have had it ; Je Tai eu ; not J'ai I 'en. 
 
 He spoke to them, (he to them spoke.) 
 He has spoken to them, (lie to them 
 
 II leur parla. 
 
 II leur a parle, (not il a leur purle".) 
 
 has.) 
 
 $ 53. HINT. He spoke to them (English imperfect tense), may be trans 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 loted by il Itui parla, the Fi erica preterit, ($ 153,) or else by il leuraparle 
 French parfait, ( 145,) corresponding to the perfect tense of the English con 
 jugation. The latter is the tense generally used in colloquial intercourse 
 by the French. 
 
 Vous le preta-t-il ? on rnieux, 
 
 Vous Z'a-t-il prete ? 
 
 II me le preta; ou il me l'a pr3to. 
 
 Did he lend, it to you ? (you it did 
 
 he ? &c.) 
 
 He lent it to' me, (he to me, &c.) 
 I will not speak to them, (I not to 
 
 them, &c.) 
 U you want the book, I must not 
 
 keep it any longer. 
 He was afraid I would not lend it to 
 
 him, (I not it to him, &c.) 
 He amuses himself. 
 It is impossible for me to go, (it to me.) 
 
 Je ne leur parlera" pas. 
 
 Si vous voulez le livre, ii ne faut pas 
 que je le garde plus long-temps. 
 
 II avait peur que je ns le lui pre- 
 tasse pas. 
 
 il se divertit. 
 
 II m'est impossible d'y allcr. 
 
 $ 64. 2d. The objective pronouns are placed after the imperative mood, 
 commanding or used affirmatively, except in the 3d person sing, and plur. 
 
 Give me. 
 Let me speak. 
 
 Give it to me. 
 Let me see. 
 
 Ex.: Donuez-mot. Donne z-7e-root'. 
 Laissez-moi parler. Laissez 
 moi voir. 
 
 ?r-e, un. 
 
 Let him give it to me. 
 Let them speak to them. 
 
 Let us send them one. 
 Dress thyself. Boast of it. 
 
 But, in the 3d person, place it Ixtfore : 
 
 Qu'it me le donne. 
 Qu'ils leur parlent. 
 
 Exception. When two imperatives are joined by the conjunction and, 
 the objective pronoun connected with the second verb is frequently 
 placed before it, although the mood is affirmative ; as : Cherchez macanne, 
 et me Z'apportez, instead of: et apportez-la-moi. Look for my cane, and 
 bring it to me. Both ways are correct, ($ 150 12.) 
 
 $ 55. But when the imperative mood forbids or is used negatively, the) 
 are placed before, according to Rule 1st. 
 
 Do not give me. Do not give it to j Ne me donnez pas. Ne me le don 
 
 me. 
 
 Let us not send them away. 
 Let me not speak. 
 Do not dress thyself. DC not ooost 
 
 of it. 
 
 Do not take them. Ne ies prenez pas. 
 
 Do not (thou) distuib me Ne me derange pas. 
 
 Send her but two. Ne lui en envoyez que deux 
 
 Bend them nothing. | Ne leur envoyez rien 
 
 Do not trust to it. j Ne vous y fiez pas. 
 
 Do not boast of it. ! Ne vous en vantez pas 
 
 Do not deceive yourself. ! Ne vous trompez point. 
 
 nez pas. 
 
 Ne Ies envoyons pas. 
 Ne me laissez pas parler. 
 Ne t'habille pas. Ne t'en vanfe oaa 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 475 
 
 And in the 3d person, also before. 
 
 Let him not give it to me. I Qu'il ne me le dohne pas. 
 
 Let them not speak to her. I Qu'ils ne lui parlent pas. 
 
 $ 56. 3d. When the French objective pronoun is attended with a preposi- 
 tion expressed, they both (that is, the preposition and the pronoun) go after 
 the verb, and the preposition must be repeated before every pronoun. Ex. : 
 
 Come with me. 
 
 I cannot go without you. 
 
 He speaks of him, you, and them. 
 
 We speak of her and her sister. 
 
 Does he not speak of them too ? 
 
 Yes, he speaks of him, her, them, you, 
 
 and of me also. 
 Do you think of me or him ? 
 Do not apply to her nor to him, but to 
 
 me. ($642.) 
 I will apply neither to his, nor to him, 
 
 but to you. 
 
 Venez (or viens) avec moi. 
 
 Je ne peux y aller sans vous. 
 
 II parle de lui, de vous, et d'euz. 
 
 Nous parlons d'elle et de sa soeur, 
 
 Ne parle-t-il pas d'eux aussi ? 
 
 Si fait, il parle de lui, d'clle, d'cux< 
 
 de vous, et de moi aussi. 
 Pensez-vous a 7/101 ou a lui ? 
 Ne vous adressez ni a elle, ni c lu\, 
 
 mais a moi. 
 Je ne m'adresserai ni a elle, ni a lui, 
 
 mais a vous. 
 
 DOUBLE OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS Doubles Regimes. 
 
 Regimes directs et indirect s. 
 $ 57. MONOSYLLABLES. AVANT LE VERBE. $ 58. APRES L'IMPERATIF 
 
 /t to me, me it, then to me. 
 It to thee, thee it, them to 
 
 thee. 
 It to him, 
 
 It to her, 
 It to UB, 
 
 them to him. 
 them to her. 
 
 It to you,yofc it,them to you. 
 It to them, them to them. 
 
 flVIe le, me la, me 1', me lea. 
 |Te le, te la, te I', te les. 
 
 Le lui, la lui, les lui. 
 Le lui, la lui, les lui. 
 fNous le, nous la, 1', nous 
 
 les. 
 f-Vous le, vous la, 1', vous 
 
 les. 
 Le leur, la leur, les leur. 
 
 -le-moi, -la-moi, -les-moi 
 -te-le, -te-la, -te-les. 
 
 le-lui, -la-lui, -les-lui. 
 -Je-lui, -la-lui, -tes-lui. 
 le-nous, -la-nous, -les- 
 
 -le-leur, -la-leur, -les-leur 
 
 BEFORE THE VERB. AVANT LE VBREE. 
 
 Singular. Singulier. 
 
 Me t3 it, there, m'y. 
 
 Thee to it, there, t'y. 
 
 Him to it, there, 1'y. 
 
 Her to it, there, 1'y, 
 
 It to it, there, 1'y- 
 
 Joan there, to it, y . . . . Jean 
 
 Plural. Pluriel. 
 
 Us to it, there, nous y. 
 
 You to it, there, vous y. 
 
 Them to it, there, les y. j 
 
 My friends there, y . . . . mes amis. ] 
 
 N. B. When the pronouns are both of the 3d person, as : It to him, item 
 to him, it to them, them to them, they have the same order in French, viz : 
 lo lui, les lui, le leur, les leur ; but when the pronouns are of different 
 persons, 1st and 3d, or 2d and 3d, reverse the English order, and instead of: 
 it to mtj it to you, <fcc., say: to me it, to you it, &c., me le, vous le, &c. 
 
 AFTER THE VERB. 
 
 APRES LE VERBE, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Singulier. 
 
 
 Me to it, there, 
 
 y moi. 
 
 
 Him to it. there, 
 
 1'y. 
 
 
 Her to it, there, 
 
 1'y. 
 
 
 It to it, there, 
 
 1'y. 
 
 
 John there, to it 
 
 y Jean. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Pluriel 
 
 
 
 lous y. 
 
 
 
 vous y. 
 
 
 
 les y. 
 
 
 
 y mes ami 
 
 is. 
 
476 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 . PERSONAL AND PARTITIVE. Personnels ct Partitifs. 
 
 BEFORE AND AFTER AVAN1 ET APRES 
 THE VERB. LE VERBE. 
 
 Singular. Singulier. 
 
 Mo, some, or any, ($ 62,) \ 
 Some to me, or any to > m'en. 
 
 me, ) 
 
 Thee some, some to thee, t'en. 
 Some to him, him some, lui en. 
 Some to her, her some, lui en. 
 John some, some to John, en (the verb) a 
 
 
 Jean. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Pluriel. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Pluriel. 
 
 Ijcine to us, us some. 
 
 nous-en. 
 
 Us some there, 
 
 ; ncus-y-en, y-en- 
 
 
 
 some to us, 
 
 > nou 
 
 Von some, some to you, 
 
 vous-en. 
 
 You some there, 
 
 vous-y-en. 
 
 $ 60. AVANT $ til. 
 
 LE VERBE. 
 
 Sing. Sing. 
 
 Me some there, ) m , 
 Some to me, ) 
 
 >*- no i 
 
 Thee some there t'y en. 
 
 Him some there, lui y en, y en iiL , 
 
 Her some there, lai y en, y en iai. 
 
 Some to J . there, y en .... a Jeau. 
 
 Them some, somo to them, leur-en. Them come there, leur-y-en, y-on-leur 
 
 $ 62. Some, in English, is used for the affirmation, and any for tin 
 interrogation and negation ; and consequently en corresponds both to sonu 
 and any.' 
 
 Ex : I have some, (of a thing referred | Ex.: Fen ai. 
 
 to.) 
 Have you any ? He has not 
 
 given me a?iy. 
 
 En avez-vous ? 11 ne m'en a 
 pas donne. 
 
 * 63. OB JECTIVE PRONOUNS; 
 With a preposition always placed after the verb, as in English 
 
 To me. 
 To theft, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 from me, of me, near me. 
 from or of thee, far from thee. 
 
 of him, from him, without him. 
 of, from her, for her. 
 To one's self, of one's self, towards one. 
 
 To him, 
 To her, 
 
 Singulier. 
 A moi,(61i ; )de moi, (64 ',)pres Jemo;. 
 
 A toi, de toi, loin de toi. 
 
 A lui, de lui, sans lui. 
 
 A elle, d'elle, pour e le. 
 
 A soi, de soi, envers soi 
 
 To it, of it, from it, with it, are not translated after the verb. 
 
 Pluriel. 
 
 A nous, de nous, avec nous. 
 
 A vous, de vous, avant vous. 
 
 A eux,(^ 64*,) d'eux, apres eux. 
 A elles,($ GIZjjd'elles, au milieu d'el'ca 
 
 To us, 
 To you, 
 To them, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 from or of us, with us. 
 of, from you, before you. 
 from, of them, after them. 
 To them, from, of them, in the midst of 
 
 them. 
 
 A eux, a elles, &c., apply to persons, not to things. 
 64. 1. Moi, toi, lui, elle, &c., connected with the two oreposition? d 
 and de, are only used after some verbs, such as : 
 Presenter a, To introduce to. 
 
 Penser a, (74 2 ,) 
 \ccourir a, (64 3 :/ 
 Se fier a, (62 2 ,) 
 Se souvenir de, (5 
 
 Me thinks of me. 
 She hastened to us. 
 Do you mist them ? 
 He remembers you. 
 
 Quand me presenteroa 
 
 vous a lui ? 
 il pense a moi. 
 Elle accourut a nous. 
 Vous fiez-vous a eux f 
 II se souvicnt de voua 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPilS 
 
 477 
 
 In other instances, to me, to him, &c. : of me, of them, &c., mist be trans 
 cd as directed ( 54). 
 
 Renoncer a S'en temr a 
 
 Compter sur. 
 
 Se souvenir de 
 
 Se ressouvenir de . . . . 
 Penser a .... 
 Accourir a .... 
 Se fier a . . 
 
 S'en rapporter a ... 
 Se mefier de . . . 
 
 Se de'fier de 
 
 S'adress^r a 
 
 Se plaindre de . . . . 
 
 2. When there are two or more objective case? connected with the same 
 verb. Do you speak to me? Me parlez-vous ? Ne is placed before, 
 Decause there is but one objective case; but, as in the following answer, 
 there are more than one object, say : I speak to you, to him, and his brother ; 
 je parle a vous, d lui, et a son fret i. The three objective cases coming 
 after the verb, the preposition a must be used and repeated before each, 
 
 $ 65. But when the preposition is expressed in French, whether it be ;, 
 de, sans, avec, &c., both the preposition ancl pronoun come after the verb, 
 (I 56.) ' 
 
 $6G. REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. (43 1 .) 
 
 Fully to explain this subject, we will give it a new form. The French 
 Reflective Verbs, Verbes Reflechis, may be divided into three classes. 
 
 $ 67. 1st CLASS. Those that admit of one direct, but of no indirect 
 objective. Ex. : I dress myself. 
 
 $ 68. 2d CLASS. Those which, beside the direct, admit also of an indi- 
 rect objective, governed by the preposition d. Ex.: I apply myself to 
 study. 
 
 $ 69. 3d CLASS. Those in which the indirect objective is governed by 
 the preposition de. Ex. : I blame myself for that action. 
 
 70. Observe that when the indirect objective is a noun, it goes after 
 the verb, as in English ; but, when the indirect objective is the pronoun 
 it or them, that pronoun is incorporated with the French preposition a or 
 de, and both are expressed by a single word, placed as directed ($ 50, $ 54, 
 rnd following.) Hence there are three classes of 
 
 * 71. REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. Pronoms Rljltchis. 
 
 1st CLASS. No indirect objective. 
 
 Myself, me, m'. 
 Thyself, te, t'. 
 HimseSf, se, s'. 
 Herself, se, s'. 
 Dursel^eS; nous. 
 
 To cure myself, me guerir. 
 To cure thyself, te guerir. 
 To cure himself, so guerir, 
 To cure herself, se guerir. 
 To cure ourselves, nous guerir. 
 
 To dress mys., m'habiller 
 To dress thys., t'habi.ler. 
 To dress hiins., s'habiller 
 To dress hersf. s'habi.Jer. 
 To dress ours., nous ham. 
 ler. 
 
 ?''rarE3lv?E, vous. 
 
 To cure yourselves, vous guerir. 
 
 To dress yours. .vous halnl 
 
 
 
 ler. 
 
 Themselves, PC. s'. 
 One-b Bolf, so. s'. 
 
 To cure themselves, se gu&rir, 
 To cure cue's self, Re gut-rir, 
 
 To dress thems..8 ! hab;}ier. 
 To dress one's, s''nai>iller. 
 
478 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 $ 72 2d CLASS. With the preposition a. When the object! e pronoun 
 it, or f/ie/ft, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be trans- 
 lated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition d, translate on 
 follows : 
 
 Mjrself to it, m'y. 
 
 (Thyself) into .t, -'y. 
 (Himself) toit,tliein,s ! y 
 
 it > , 
 with them, J s y> 
 
 it, 
 
 to them, 
 to it, 
 
 to it, 
 is them. 
 
 nousy 
 vousy 
 nousy 
 
 I apply myself to it. 
 Thou glidest into it. 
 He opposes it, them. 
 She understands it. 
 She is acquainted wi'.h 
 
 them. 
 
 We expect it. 
 Go to them. 
 Let us submit to it. 
 They retired to it. 
 They withdrew in then. 
 
 Je m'y applique. 
 Tu t'y glisses. 
 II s'y oppose. 
 
 Elle s'y connait. 
 
 Nous nous y attendone 
 
 Rendez-vous-y. 
 
 Soumettons-nous-y. 
 
 Us s'y retirerent. 
 
 $ 73. 3d CLASS. With the preposition de. When the objective pro. 
 noun it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to bo 
 translated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition de, trans- 
 late as follows: 
 
 Myself of it, m'en. 
 at it, t'en. 
 at it, i 
 
 with them, \ s en ' 
 
 it, them, sVn. 
 
 upon it, nous en. 
 
 at it, vous en. 
 
 about it, s'en. 
 
 to it, e'en. 
 
 I assured myself of it. 
 Thou wilt wonder at it. 
 He takes offence at it. 
 He is displeased w 
 
 them. 
 
 She remembers it, them. 
 We can seize upon it. 
 
 ith I 
 
 Do you laugh at it ? 
 They do not care about it. 
 They attend to it. 
 
 Je m'en assurai. 
 Tu t'en etonneras. 
 
 II s 'en offense. 
 
 Elle s'cn souvient. 
 Nous pouvons nous o 
 
 saisir. 
 
 Vous en moquez-vous? 
 Us ne s'en soucient pas. 
 Elles s'en occupent. 
 
 $ 74. It is evident, from the examples aboVe, that the use of Jie French 
 pronouns m'y, t'y, &c., m'en, t'en, &c., does not depend on the English pre- 
 position used, but on the French one, which is incorporated with the pronoun. 
 When the French verb requires a, you must use, m'y, t'y, &c. When it 
 requires de, use m'en, t'en, &c. But no such incorporation takes place, if 
 the French preposition is avec, pour, sans, &c., instead of de or a. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Pronoms Relatifs. 
 
 $ 75. NOMINATIVES. Wb.3, that, 
 
 which, whoever. 
 The man who speaks. 
 The lady that smiles. 
 The hat which becomes you. 
 Whoever (who) studies, improves. 
 
 NOMINATIF. Qui. 
 
 L'homme qui parle. 
 
 La dame qui sourit. 
 
 Le chapeau qui vous convier.f. 
 
 Qui etudio, fait des progres. 
 
 $ 76. The nominative relative pronoun is never understood in English 
 aor in French. 
 
 $77. OBJECTIVE, Without a pre- i R^GIMC. Sans proposition. 
 
 position. 
 Whom, that, which ($81.1 ' Quo, qu'. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 479 
 
 $ 78. The objective relative pronoun is frequently left out in English, 
 but never in French. 
 
 The gentleman (whom) you call. 
 The girl (that) he admires. 
 The history (which) you relate. 
 
 $ 70. OBJECTIVE. With a prepo- 
 sition. 
 
 of which. 
 
 <)f whom, 
 whom. 
 
 To whom, 
 whom, 
 
 For whom 
 
 to which, 
 to which, 
 for which. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 S. 
 
 From whom, from which. 
 With whom, with which. 
 
 P. 
 
 S. 
 f. 
 
 S. 
 
 p. 
 
 S. 
 
 p. 
 
 Le monsieur que vous appelei. 
 La fille qu'il admire. 
 L'histoire que vous facon /ez. 
 
 REGIME. Avec une preposition. 
 
 De qui, dont, duquel, de laquellc, 
 
 desqueis, desquelles. 
 A qui, huquel, a laquelle. 
 
 auxquels, auxquelLes. 
 Pour qui, pour lequel, pour laquelle, 
 
 1 ' pour lesquels, pour lesquellea. 
 De qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle. 
 
 desqueis, desquelles. 
 Avec qui, avec lequel, avec laqueHe. 
 " avec lesquels, avec lesquellea 
 
 $ 80. Although the pronoun can be omitted, and the preposition trans- 
 posed, in English, it cannot be in French. 
 
 The man of whom we speak, or f L'homme de qui nous parlons, ou 
 
 1'homme dont nous parlons, ou 
 
 1'homme du quel nous parlons. 
 
 La femme de qui, ou dojit, ou d 
 
 the man whom we speak of, or 
 the man we speak of. 
 The woman we speak of. 
 
 The employer she works for. 
 
 laquelle nous parlons. 
 Le patron pour qui (ou lequel) eiio 
 travaille. 
 
 81. When the relative whom, or that, or which, is immediately pre- 
 ceded by its antecedent, it is never translated by lequel, laquelle, &c., bm 
 by que. In this case, it may be omitted in English, but never in French. 
 
 The cases (which) you have men- Les cas que vous avez mentionnds. 
 
 tioned. 
 
 The ideas he has suggested. 
 The statesmen (whom) he employed. 
 
 Les idees qu'il a suggere"es. 
 
 Les hommes d'etat qu'il employa. 
 
 $ 82. But, when which is separated from its antecedent, translate by 
 lequel, laquelle, &.c. ; not by que. 
 
 II me dit lequel il voulait. 
 Je sais laquelle lui conviendra. 
 Je sais lequel elle prefere. 
 C'est une plante trouvee en Amfl 
 rique, laquelle merite attention. 
 
 He told me which he wanted. 
 I know which will suit him. 
 I know whom she prefers. 
 This is a plant found in America, 
 which is worthy of attention. 
 
 $ 83. In this case, which means which one, and cannot be omitted, eve 
 in English. 
 
 $ 84. Except in similar sentences, the French words lequel, laquelle, 
 &,c., which, which one, are interrogative, and not relative pronouns, if 
 gtiiployed without a preposition. 
 
480 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, 
 
 $ 85. Qui, nominative, relates to persons and things. 
 A qui, de qui, pour qui, &c. (or qui, with any preposition,) relates to 
 persons only. 
 
 The man (the book) which suits him. | L'homme (le livre) qui lui convient. 
 Without whom are you going ? I Sans qui allez-vous ? 
 
 $ 86. Dont, duquel, de laquelle, &c., relate to persons and things. 
 
 The child (the dog) whose name you 
 
 know. 
 The grammar you spoke to me of. 
 
 L'enfant (le chien) dont (duquel) vous 
 
 savez le nom. 
 La grammaire dont (de laquelle) vous 
 
 avez parle. 
 
 WHICH, meaning which one, or the one which, is translated by: 
 Celui qui, (nom.) celui que, (obj.) Ceux qui, (nom.) celles que, (obj.) 
 Celle qui, celle que. Celles qui, celles que. 
 
 I know which one he speaks of. 
 I spoke to her he admires. 
 He sees the one you speak to. 
 
 Je sais celle dont il parle. 
 Je parlai a celle qu'il admire. 
 11 voit celui auquel vous parlez. 
 
 $ 87. 1. The one in the garden : which is is evidently understood, but n 
 /iiust be expressed in French. Then say, Celui qui est dans le jardin, nevei 
 Celui dans, &,c. 
 I know which is first, (that is, which f Je sais celui qui est premier. 
 
 one, or the one which.) ( Je snis celle qui est premiere. 
 
 (Jo sais celui que 
 Je sais celle que 
 Je sais ceux que 
 Je sais celles que 
 
 you will choose. J Je sais ceux que 
 
 (Jo sais celui que 
 Je sais celle que I 
 
 vous choisirez. 
 
 Speaking of a house : 
 Can you guess which will suit me ? 
 
 C^n you guess which I have taken \ 
 
 Pouvez-vous devinei celle qui me 
 
 convienclra ? 
 Pouvez-vous deviner celle que j'ai 
 
 prise ? 
 
 2. The otic, OY those, followed by a preposition or present participle, generally 
 means, that which is, (sing.,) those which are, (plur.) The one. on the table 
 Here, the one evidently means that which is, and must be translated by: 
 
 celui qui est. 1 The one coming, celui qui vient. 
 Those in the vessel, ceux qui sont . . I Those speaking, ceux qui parlent. 
 
 3. When a nominative case is immediately followed by a preposition or par 
 (iciple, as the relative pronoun and verb are then understood in English, they 
 must be supplied in French. ( 39, N. B.) 
 
 The broom on the floor. The man 
 
 sweeping. 
 '1 he boy caught is innocent (who has 
 
 Le balai qui est sur le plancher. 
 
 L'homme qui balaie. 
 Le gargon qui a ete pris est innocent. 
 
 been.) 
 
 4. What tV, (that which is,) as relative, when followed by a preposition, is 
 translated by, ce qu'il y a, (47 2 , Obs. 108,) or any other tense of the earnc 
 
G U A M M A T ; : A i SYNOPSIS, 4&1 
 
 1 know what is in that trunk. Je sais ce qu'il y a dans cette malle. 
 
 Where is what was in niy desk? Oii est ce qu'il y avait dans mon 
 
 | pupitre ? 
 
 $ 88. DONT. French relative, indirect object, is followed by a nomina- 
 tive case in French, whether it is so in English or not. 
 The country whose government 1 Le pays dont le gouvernement voua 
 
 pleases you. 
 The country whose government you 
 
 admire. 
 
 I know her (the one} he spsaks of. 
 ! do not trust the man whose horse 
 
 you have borrowed. 
 
 plait. 
 
 Le pays dont vous admircz le gou- 
 vernement. 
 
 Je connais celle dont ii parle. 
 
 Je ne me fie pas a I'homme dont vona 
 avez emprunte Is chcval. 
 
 And not, dont le cheval vous avez emprunte. 
 The construction would be the same, if, in English, of whom was used 
 instead of whose. As : The man of whom you have borrowed the horse. 
 
 $89. The compound relative pronoun WHAT, without a preposition. 
 What is called a compound relative pronoun when it means that which, 
 and is translated by, cc qui, when nominative, and ce que, when objec- 
 tive. Ex.: 
 
 I know what will suit, I Je sais ce qui conviendra. 
 
 I know what you say. I Je sais ce que vous dit.es. 
 
 $90. IVhich has sometimes a clause of a sentence for its antecedent ; in 
 such a case the French consider it as equivalent to the compound relative 
 what, and translate it as above, by ce qui or ce que. Ex. : 
 fie went away, which grieved us. I II s'en alia, ce qui nous chagrina. 
 The law is such, which you know. I La loi est telle, ce que vous savez. 
 
 91. All that, or the single word all, meaning all that which, is often used 
 as a relative pronoun, and translated all that by tout ce qui, (nom.) and 
 generally all by tout ce que, (obj.) 
 
 You know all that which is wanted. 
 1 know all that will suit. 
 I know aT. you say. 
 
 Vous savez tout cequi est necessaire, 
 Je sais tout ce qui conviendra. 
 Je sais tout ce que vous dites. 
 
 After all, the word which, or that which, may be omitted in English, aa 
 shown above, but ce qui or ce que must always be expressed in French. 
 
 $92. WHAT, governed by a preposition, when that preposition can be 
 transposed. 
 
 For what or what fcr. Pour quoi . . . ce pour quoi. 
 
 Of what or what (is he speaking) ot. De quoi ce dont. ( 93.) 
 
 To what or what to. A quoi ce a quoi. 
 
 f rom what or what from. De quoi ce dont. ( 93.; 
 
 In what or what in. Dans quoi . . . ce dans quoi. 
 
 W.'th what or what with. Avec quoi . . . ce avec quoi. 
 
 393. When the prep-jsition of, governing what is rendered in French I y 
 dt, ce dont is more generally used ilnn dc quoi. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 I know what he speaks of. 
 
 He knows what 1 have need of. 
 Tell me what you are thinking of. 
 Does he know why I do not go there ? 
 I will tell you what I am going to do 
 it with. 
 
 Je sais de quoi, imieux) C6 dont '0 
 
 parle. 
 
 II sait ce dent j'ai besoin. 
 Dites-moi ce a quoi vous pense?-. 
 Sait-i\ pourquoi je n'y vais pas'? 
 Je vais vous dire ce avec quoi je vrJa 
 
 le faire. 
 
 $94. In the third example, the preposition of, connected with the parti- 
 ciple thinking, is not translated by tne French picposition de, but byd, 
 because the verb penser requires- d and not de, (and, as we have already 
 noticed, ($50,) it is the French preposition that must be attended to, and not 
 the English.) Accordingly, ce dont cannot be used, but ce d quoi, as in the 
 example. 
 
 It will easily be noticed that when what is governed by any other prep> 
 flition than de, that preposition is placed between ce and quoi. Ex. : 
 This is what he applies to. . j C'est ce d quoi il s'applique. 
 
 We -know what he is running after. \ Nous savons ce aprcs quoi il court. 
 
 $ 95. English grammarians say that the preposition ought not to be sepa- 
 rated from the. pronoun it governs, and that in, I know what he speaks of, 
 the preposition of or.ght to be placed before what , instead of being placed at 
 the end of the sentence, and that the correct expression is, I know of what 
 he speaks. 
 
 Yet general custom disregards that rule, and the preposition usually ends 
 the sentence as exemplified here. In French, however, the preposition 
 cannot be transposed : it must always precede the pronoun, as shown in the 
 above examples. 
 
 $96. WHAT, connected with the preposition of or to, changes its meaning 
 according to the place of the preposition. 
 
 $97. Of what, meaning of that which, de ce qui, (nominatif,) de ce quc t 
 (reg.) (The English preposition cannot be transposed.) 
 He speaks of what was found. \ II parle de ce qui fut trouvij. 
 
 It would not be correct to say, what was found of. 
 He speaks of what I know. | 11 parle de ce que je sais. 
 
 $98. To what, meaning, to that which, d ce qui. (nom.,) d ce que, !r%. 
 No transposition in English. 
 
 You appiy to what is useful. i Vous vous appliquez d ce qui est utile, 
 
 Attend to what I tell you. j Faites attention d ce queje vous dis. 
 
 $ 99. What ...of, meaning that of which, ce dont . .. ce de quoi. 
 
 Ce dont -vous parlez n'cst pas juste. 
 
 (ce de quoi.) 
 
 Vous ne savez pas ce dent je Pin- 
 formal. 
 
 you speak of is not just. 
 
 You do not know what I informed 
 him of. 
 
 $ 100. IVJiat . . . to, meaning that to which, ce d quoi, d quoi. 
 
 I see what he pretends to. 
 
 Who knows who! he applies himself 
 to. 
 
 Je vois ce d quoi il pretend, (:u, 
 
 quoi.) 
 Qui sait d quoi (on ce fi qu >i; il a f aj> 
 
 plique. 
 
GR1MMATICAL SYNOPS1I. 
 
 483 
 
 1.. -What of it? is an irregular expression, translated by Qu*tm 
 resulte-t-il ? 
 What of his opinion ! j Qu'importe son opinion ! 
 
 102 PERSONAL PRONOUNS CONNECTED WITH THB 
 RELATIVES, governed by prepositions. 
 
 I to whom, I whose. 
 
 Thou of whom, thou whose. 
 
 He of whom, he whose. 
 
 She from whom. 
 
 He or the one without whom. 
 
 She or the one without whom. 
 
 The person of whom, (from whom.) 
 
 The thing of which. 
 
 The object for which. 
 
 Julius after whom. 
 
 Clara after whom. 
 
 We to whom. 
 
 You of whom, or whose. 
 
 They from whom, (m.) 
 
 They from whom. (/.) 
 
 They for whom, (m.) 
 
 They near whom. (/.) 
 
 Those in the midst of which, (m.) 
 
 Those, far from which. (/.) 
 
 Moi a qui, moi auquel, moi a laquellc. 
 Toi de qui, toi dont, toi duquel, toi do 
 
 laquelle. 
 
 Lui de qui, lui dont, lui duquel. 
 Elle de qui, elle don% elle de laquelle. 
 Celui sans qui, celui sans lequel. 
 Celle sans qui, celle sans laquelle. 
 La personne de qui, dont, de laquelle. 
 La chose de laquelle. 
 L'objet pour lequel. 
 Jules apres qui, apres lequel. 
 Clara aprus qui, apres laquelle. 
 Nous a qui, nous auxquels, auxquelles. 
 Vous de qui, vous dont, desquels, &c. 
 Eux de qui, eux dont, eux desquels. 
 Elles de qui, elles dont, elles desquellea. 
 Ceux pour qui, ceux pour lesquels. 
 Celles pres de qui, pres desquelles. 
 Ceux au milieu de qui, desquels. 
 Celles loin de qui, loin desqnelles. 
 
 $103. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 They arc generally divided into two classes : 1st. Those which are always 
 connected with nouns, viz : my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their. As these 
 never take the place of nouns, they will be found under the head of Posses- 
 sive Articles. ($ 30, 31, 32.) 
 
 $ 104. 2d. Those wrich, taking the place of nouns, are properly called 
 
 pronouns. 
 
 Whose thimble is this ? 
 
 It 
 
 Mine, 
 Thine, 
 His, 
 Hers, 
 
 Its, 
 Ours, 
 Yours. 
 Theirs, 
 
 le mien, 
 le tien, 
 le sien, 
 le sien, 
 le sien, 
 le notre, 
 le votre, 
 le leur, 
 
 is mine. A qui est ce de ? 
 
 la mienne, les miens, 
 les tiens, 
 les siens, 
 les siens, 
 les siens, 
 les notres, 
 les votres, 
 
 The priest's, celui dupretre, 
 The friend's, celui de 1'ami, 
 Mr. Petit's, celui de M. P., 
 To mine, au miefi, 
 
 la tienne, 
 
 la sienne, 
 
 la sienne, 
 
 la sienne, 
 
 la notre, 
 
 la votre, 
 
 la leur, les leurs, 
 
 celle dupretre, ceux dupretre, 
 
 celle de 1'ami, ceux de 1'ami, 
 
 celledeM. P., ceuxdeM. P., 
 
 a la mienne, aux miens, 
 
 C'est le mien, 
 les miennes. 
 les tiennes. 
 les siennes. 
 les siennes. 
 les siennes. 
 les notres. 
 les votres. 
 les leurs. 
 celles du p. 
 celles de 1'ami 
 celles de M. P 
 aux niicnncs. 
 
484 
 
 GRAMMATICAL S V T N ? S I B. 
 
 If, from mine, du mien, de la mienne, des miens, des miennes. 
 
 With mine, avec le mien, avec la mienne, avecles miens, avec les miennea 
 Near mine, pres du mien, pres de la m., pres des miens, pres des m. 
 As to mine, quant au mien, quant a la m., aux miens, aux mienneg. 
 
 $ 105. The above pronouns are used as objectives and nominatives with 
 every verb, and even after the verb tire, to be, when the personal pronoun 
 ce is nominative before. 
 Give me mine. 
 Yours looks well. 
 Where is his, theirs, ours ? 
 Ours are here, and his also. 
 It is theirs, (ce being nom. before.) 
 It was not mine, but thine. 
 Is it hers, yours, mine, or theirs ? 
 
 Donnez-moi le mien. 
 
 Le votre a bonne mine. 
 
 Ou est le sien, le leur, le notre ? 
 
 Le notre est ici, et le sien aussi. 
 
 C'est le leur. ($39.) 
 
 Ce n'etait pas le mien, mais le tien. 
 
 Est-ce le sien, le votre, le mien, le 
 
 leur? 
 Are they yours or ours ? ($ 39.) Sont-ce les votres ou les i.otres ? 
 
 $ 106. But when etre, to be* has for its nominative either a noun or the 
 pronoun t7, elle, Us, elles, the French do not use the above pronouns, but 
 the following : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Mine, a moi. Thine, a toi. 
 
 His, a lui. Hers, a elle. 
 
 John's, a Jean. Whose, a qui. 
 Whose book is this ? 
 It is mine. 
 Whose pen is that ? 
 It is thine. 
 
 Whose gloves are these ? 
 They are hers. 
 Whose boots are those ? 
 They are his. 
 Are they Mr. Lebon's ? 
 No, they are not his. 
 Whose are they ? 
 I do not know whoc they are. 
 Is this yours ? 
 That is mine. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ours, a nous. Yours, a vous. 
 Theirs, a eux. (TO.) Theirs, aejles. (/. 
 My brothers'. A mes freres 
 I A qui est ce livre ? 
 I II est a moi. 
 
 A qui est cette plume-la ? 
 
 Elle est a toi. 
 
 A qui sont ces gants? 
 
 Us sont a elle. 
 
 A qui sont ces bottes-la ? 
 
 Elles sont a lui. 
 
 Sont-elles a M. Lebon ? 
 
 Elles ne sont pas a lui. 
 
 A qui sont-elles ? 
 
 Je ne sais pas a qui elles sont. 
 
 Ceci est-il a vous ? Est-ce a vous \ 
 
 Cela est a moi. C'est a moi. 
 
 $ 107. The expression a book of mine, a friend ot hers, &c., is frequently 
 used in English. The French do not use this phraseology, but say, 
 
 One of her friends. Unede ses amies, 
 A pen of ours. Une de nos plumes 
 
 A ... of vours. Une de vos 
 
 A ... of theirs. Une de leurs 
 
 Un des amis de Jean, or 
 Une des amies de Jean. 
 $108, When, instead of a book of mi"e, the English use, this, thatt ' 
 
 One of my books. Un de mes livres. 
 A book of mine. Un de mes livres. 
 A. book of thine. Un de tes livres. 
 A. book of his, hers. Un de ses livres. 
 A friend of John's, is expressed by 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 485 
 
 Those pills of his cure the headache. 
 
 e, or those, saying, this book of mine, those gloves of hers, &c., no 
 regular French can be given of them , except using the possessive article. ($ 31. N 
 
 This book of mine is spoiled. \ * Ion . livre est & i6 ' 
 
 ( Ce livre, qui m apparlicnt, est gate. 
 
 Ces pilules, de son invention, gucria- 
 
 sent le mal de tete. 
 Ses pilules gueVissent le mal de tete, 
 
 $ 109. WHOSE, possessive pronoun, requires a particular explanation* 
 It is used in English in two different ways. 1st. When it means io 
 translate by d qui. 
 1. I, whose horse this is, means, i, to 
 
 whom this horse belongs. 
 
 Whose book is this ? or, to whom does 
 
 this book belong ? 
 2. I, whose horse you have. 
 Here, whose means not I, to w/iom, but 
 
 I, of whom you have the horse. 
 f Vkose opinion do you adopt ? 
 
 Moi, d qui ,-c dieval est ou appar- 
 tient. 
 
 A qui est ce livre ? ou A qui ce IITT 
 
 appartient-il ? 
 Moi, dont vous avez le cheval. 
 
 Moi, de qui vous avez le cheval 
 De qui adoptez-vous 1'opinion ? 
 
 $ 110. 2d. WHOSE, governed by a preposition. 
 
 Of whose title, or the title of whom. 
 
 To whose name, to the name of 
 
 whom. 
 From whose race, from the race of 
 
 whom. 
 
 In whose states. 
 For whose daughter. 
 Through whose hands. 
 Under whose protection. 
 
 Du titre de qui, duquel, de la 
 
 quelle, &c. 
 Au nom de qai, duquel, desquel.* 
 
 &c. 
 De la race de qui, duquel, dc? 
 
 quelles. 
 
 Dans lesetatsde qui, de laquelle,&c 
 Pour la fille de qui, &c. 
 Par la main de qui. 
 Sous la protection duquel, de la 
 
 quelle, &c. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 $ 111. lWo ? (nom.) Whom ? (obj.) I Qui ? (nom.) Qui ? (regime.) (21*.) 
 Who is good ? Whom do you see ? I Qui est bon ? Qui voyez-vous ? 
 
 Qui never loses its f, say then, qui y va ? not Qu'y va ? Who goes there f 
 Qui aimez-vous ? Whom do you like ? and not Qu'aimcz-vous, which means 
 VVha-; do you like ? 
 
 . WHAT or WHICH ? 1st. When connected with a noun ex- 
 pressed, is translated by the interrogative articles or adjectives, ($ 1,) 
 quels, quelle, quelles. 
 IVhat government do you prefer ? 
 What is the authority of the mayor ? 
 What or which articles has he sent? 
 Wliat or which plants do you prefer ? 
 
 Quel gouvernement preferez-vous ? 
 Quelle est i'autorite du maire ? 
 Quels articles a-t-il envoyes ? 
 Quelles plantes prcfrez-vous? 
 
 $113. 2d. WHAT, interrogative, meaning what thing, when not con 
 
iS6 
 
 GHAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 nected with ano^n, but with a verb, (2i,) is translated by que, qu\ or 
 chose. ( 114.) It is then objective to the verb, and placed before it. ($ 1)5. 
 
 What (what thing) do you prefer ? Que preferez-vous ? 
 What does the mayor ? Que fait le maire ? 
 
 What (what things) has he sent ? Qu'a-t-il envoye ? 
 
 $ 114. Or else by qu'est-ce que ? (28 1 .) 
 
 What do you prefer ? i Qu'est-ce que vous preferez ? 
 
 What does the ma^r ? ' Qu'est-ce que le maire fait ? 
 
 What has he sent ? Qu'est-ce qu'il a envoye ? 
 
 Then the verb retains the affirmative form, because the interrogation ie 
 found in Qu'est-ce que . . . ? 
 
 $ 115. When placed after the verb, it is translated, not by qu?, but 
 by quoi, (21 1 ,) and the verb retains, as in English, the affirmative form. 
 
 What does the mayor ? 
 The mayor does what ? 
 What does he say ? He says what ? 
 What has he sent ? He has sent 
 what ? 
 
 Que fait le maire ? 
 Le maire fait quoi ? 
 Que dit-il ? II dit quoi ? 
 
 Qu'a.-t-i\ envoye ? II a envoys 
 
 quoi ? 
 
 116. 3d. WHAT, when nominative to a verb, is translated by: 
 Qu'est-ce qui ? 
 
 IVJiat pleases you ? 
 What is agreeable ? 
 What makes you laugh ? 
 What grieves that child ? 
 
 117. 4th. Wliat, unconnected with a noun, and governed by a prepo 
 sition, is expressed by QUOI. (R. 6.) 
 
 Wlat is he speaking of? That is : 
 
 Of what is he speaking ? (21 1.) 
 fF?.Oi is she going to draw with ? 
 What docs the child cry for ? (for 
 
 what ?) 
 
 What is she thinking of? (of what?) 
 To what does he apply ? He applies 
 
 to reading, writing, and arithmetic. 
 There is in it something pleasing. 
 I have enough (wherewith) to live upon, 
 
 It is sufficient (enough) to frighten 
 him. 
 
 Qu'est-ce qui vous plait ? 
 Qu'est-ce qui est agreable ? 
 Qu'est-ce qui vous fait rire ? 
 Qu'est-ce qui chagrine cet enfant ? 
 
 De quoi parle-t-il ? 
 
 Avec quoi va-t-elle dessiner ? 
 Pourquoi 1'enfant crie-t-il ? 
 
 .A quoi pense-t-elle ? 
 A quoi s'applique-t-il ? II s' applique 
 d la lecture, d 1'ecriture et au calcul 
 II y a unje ne sais quoi qui plait. 
 J'ai de quoi vivre. 
 lly ade juoi 1'efTraycr. 
 
 $ 118. 5th. WHAT, in the collocations, (47 2 ,) what is, what was, wkc.t 
 will be, &c., followed by in, on, or any other preposition, is expressed by : 
 Qu'y a-t-il dans . . . . ? Qtf "y avait-il dans . . . . ? Qu'y aura-t-il dans . . . - \ 
 
 What is on the table ? Qu'y a-t-il sur la table ? 
 
 What may le (may there be; for mo ? Qvepeut-il y avoir pour moi ? 
 What was under it ? I Qu'y avait-il dessous ? 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 487 
 
 $ 119. WHAT, expressing admiration ; as : What can be more agreeable 
 What can there be more agreeable ! or, What more agreeable ! is trans 
 ated by que, with the verb; as: Quz peut-il y avoir de plus agreable, 
 Dy quoi de ! without the verb ; as : Quoi de'plus agreable ! 
 
 Que peut-il y avoir de plus doux ! 
 
 What can be (there be) sweeter ! (64 *.) 
 What sweeter ! 
 
 Quoi de plus doux ! 
 
 $ 120. 6th. WHAT, when a compound relative pronoun, is translated b 
 cc q ui, (nom.,) ce que, (obj.) 
 
 v 121. WHAT, interjection, is: Quoi! Comment! 
 What ! he is not here ! | Quoi ! (Comment !) il n'est pas ioi . 
 
 $ 122. WHICH, in the same manner as what, when connected with a 
 noun, is used as an adjective, or an article, and translated by quel, qucllc, 
 'fuels, quclles. 
 
 IVhich dictionary 
 Which grammar 
 
 Which dictionaries MO you prefer ? 
 Which grammars J 
 
 Quel dictionnaire -^ 
 Quelle grammaire 1 
 Quels dictionnaires j ' 
 Quelles grammairesj 
 
 And likewise when it is governed by a preposition. (R. 6.) 
 
 A quel dictionnaire donnez-voua la 
 preference ? 
 Pour quelle grammaire avez-vous 
 
 donne un dollar ? 
 
 Avcc quel crayon avez-vous ecrit ? 
 De quelles montagnes venez-voua ? 
 Pres de quelle rue demeurez-vous ? 
 
 To which dictionary do you give the 
 
 preference ? 
 For which grammar did you give a 
 
 dollar ? 
 
 Which pencil did you write with? 
 Which mountains do you come from ? 
 Near which street do you live ? 
 Which candidate will you vote for? 
 
 Pour quel candidat voterez-vous ? 
 
 $123. When which becomes a pronoun, and takes the place of the noun, 
 or, in other words, when which means which one, which of them, it must bo 
 translated not by quel, &c., alone, but by lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les- 
 quelles, the article Ze, la, les, being used, in French, before the pronoun, to 
 translate the word one, or of them, placed after, in English, or understood. 
 So, in French, the expression is, the which, instead of which one, which of 
 them. 
 
 Thei 3 are several candidates ; 'VHICH 
 (or which one, or which of them,} do 
 you prefer , 
 
 Which of these ladies is your cousin ? 
 
 Among these young men, which learn 
 
 French ? (which ones ?) 
 Among these young ladies, which 
 
 learn French ? (which ones ?) 
 
 II y a plusieurs candidats ; LEQUEI 
 (not quel mi] preferez-vous ? 
 
 Laquelle de ces. dames est votre cou- 
 
 sine ? 
 Parmi ces jeunes gens, lesquelt ap- 
 
 prennent le Franc.ais ? 
 Parmi ces demoiselles, lesquelles ap- 
 
 prennent le Franc.ais ? 
 
 $12-1. N. B. Although sne, or of them, may not be expressed aftej 
 which, as is us^illy the case ; tianslate as above, whenever it is implied. 
 
tss 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 Which is tiie Erst? (that is, which 
 
 one ?) 
 
 Which is the last ? 
 Which are the best ? (speaking of 
 
 boys.) 
 Which am the best? 'speaking of 
 
 girls,) 
 
 1?5. To which, meaning to which one, to which of them, ia eyprcssed i?i 
 .iuj'.tel, d taquelle, auxquels, auxquelles. 
 
 Leqncl est pren ier ? (6*.) 
 
 Laquclle est derniere ? 
 Lesqutls sont les meiiieurs ? 
 
 Lesquelles sont les rneilleures ? 
 
 De ces trois hotels, auqucl iret 
 vous ? 
 
 Of these three hotels, to which (one) 
 
 will you go ? (or which will you go 
 
 to?) 
 Of the four seasons, to which (one) 
 
 does he give the preference ? (or 
 
 which to ?) 
 
 Of all those gentlemen, to which 
 
 (ones) shall we send invitations ? 
 To which of them (ladies) will you 
 
 send presents ? (or which .... to ?) 
 
 $ 126. OF WHICH one, or ones, OF WHICH of them, duquel, de toquclle 
 Jesqucls, dcsquelles. 
 Which do you speak of? (which 
 
 one ?) 
 
 Which do you speak of? (one lady?) 
 Which do you speak of? (boys.) 
 Which ones do you speak of? (girls.) 
 
 De laquelle parlez-vous ? 
 Desquels parlez-vous ? 
 Desquelles parlez-vous ? 
 
 $ 127. WITH WHICH of them, is avcc lequel, avec laquelle, &c. 
 
 Des quatre saisons, d laqnelle don- 
 ne-t-il la preference? 
 
 De tous ces messieurs, auxquels en- 
 verro;is-nous des invitations ? 
 
 Auxquelles enverrez-vous des pr5 
 sents ? 
 
 Duquel parlez-vous ? 
 
 Avec laquelle de ces demoiselles al- 
 Icz-vous chanter ? 
 
 Which of these young ladies are you 
 
 going to sing with ? 
 
 And so, of every other preposition. 
 
 $ 129. N. B. Forget not that the preposition, in French, must always 
 precede the word it governs, although it may be separated from it in Eng- 
 lish. ($95.) 
 
 IVltich are you going to apply to ? \ Auquel allez-vous vous adresser ? 
 Which did you come through ? (road.) I Par laquelle etes-vous venu ? (route.) 
 
 $ 130. When WHICH is a relative, not an interrogative pronoun, it is 
 sometimes translated by lequel, laquelle, &c., ($82,) when anything inter- 
 venes between the antecedent and pronoun. 
 
 I can see which (one) you prefer. 
 This is the history of W. S., which 
 contains so many fictions. 
 
 Je peux voir ler t uel vous prdferez. 
 ("est 1'histoire de W. S., *aqueiifi 
 contient tant ie fictions. 
 
 OF THE FRENCH PRONOUN ON. 
 
 $ 131. The pronoun ON (3T 2 ) invariably governs the 3d person singu r; 
 Whatever may be the English by which it is represented. ($38.) 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 489 
 
 2. 1. That pronoun corresponds to any English pronoun taken in an 
 Indefinite sense, as one, any o?ie, some o?ie, we, they, people, men, &c., 
 whether singular or plural. (442.) 
 
 $ 133. 2. It corresponds also to the passive verb, expressing an idea by 
 au indefinite manner. (44 2 .) 
 
 Silver is found everywhere, is general in its acceptation, and translated by 
 on trouve V argent vartout. for it means one finds, or people find, or men 
 tind silver everywhere. But when we say : Silver is found by the Peruvians^ 
 there is evidently a restriction, which causes the rejection of on, and the 
 French is, L'argent est trouve par les Peruviens. or still better, Lea Peru- 
 vicns trouvent 1'argent. A naval asylum is to be established. As it is nol 
 eaid by whom, on becomes the nominative of the active phrase. People 
 will establish, &c., translated by on etablira un hopital de marine. But 
 if the sentence is, A naval asylum is to be established by government, then, 
 government becoming nominative of the active phrase Goyernment will 
 establish, &c., on is rejected, and the translation is; Le gouvcrnement 
 etablira un hopital de marine. 
 
 $ 134. By the above examples, it will be seen that whenever ON is used 
 the sentence must assume the active form. It is said that a cwnct is seen 
 Now, instead of translating literally, by il est dit qiCune comcle est vue, the 
 French change the construction, and say: 
 
 People say they see a comet. 
 Gold is found ; turn, one finds gold. 
 He was told to come : One told him . . 
 What is said ? What do people say ? 
 
 On dit qu'on voit un come.t. 
 0?i trouve Tor. 
 On lui a dit de venir. 
 Que dit-on ? 
 
 A bridge is to be made over the river.) Qn doit fairc un 6m svf , a r[v[ ^ 
 1 hey are to make a bridge .... ) 
 
 $135. L'on is used instead of on for the sake of euphony, after the 
 words ce que, si, oil, ou, ct, que, qui. That Z has no particular meaning, 
 and is not to be translated. 
 What you were told is not true. Ce que Von vous a dit, n'est pas vrai. 
 
 If I am wanted, call me. (70 2 .) 
 
 It is a place where everyV)dy is seen. 
 
 We do not like to see those to whom 
 we owe so much. 
 
 Si Von me veut, appelez-moi. 
 C'est un lieu ou Von voit tout le 
 
 monde. 
 On n'aime pas a voir ceux a qui Z'oji 
 
 doit tant. 
 
 You are seen and heard. ' i On vous voit et Von vous entend. 
 
 $136. The student should be exercised to turning the English passivo 
 ^hrase into the active before he translates. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 $137. 1. Adjectives have a plural like nouns, (9 1 , 2 ,) and form il in tha 
 52me manner. 
 
 The Jlne horse. The fine horses, i Le beau cheval. Lcsleaux chevaux 
 My new friend. My new friends. I Mon nouvcl ami. Mcsjiouveaux amis 
 
^ GRAIKMA.TICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 2 Much, many, more, less, little, too much, how much, hra) miny, &c. 
 considered as adjectives in Cnglish, are adverbs in French, and require b 
 connecting link when they are united to a noun ; that connecting link is the 
 preposition de. (13 1 .) 
 
 More than, no* separated by a noun, is expressed by plus que, except before 
 a number, it is tnen plus de. More than you, plus que vous ; More than 
 'wo, plus de deux. (16 2 .) 
 
 3. Cardinal numbers are used for dates and the designation of sovereigns: 
 Charles quatre ; Le 31 Mai. 
 
 4. Adjectives agree in number with the noun or pronoun they qualify. 
 (IS 2 , 22 2 ,) and also in genders. (55 2 .) 
 
 5. All adjectives, without exception, end in e mute in the feminine An- 
 gular, and in es in the feminine plural. Young, sing, jeune, piur. jcur"^. 
 Small, petit, petite, petites. 
 
 6. Two or more masculine nouns, require the adjcc!:vp to be rnasculinn 
 plural. 
 
 The father and son are polite. | Le pure et le fils sont pulis. 
 
 7. Two or more feminine nouns require the adjective to be feminine plural 
 The mother and daughter are polite. | La mere et la fille sont polics. 
 
 8. Two or more nouns of different genders, require the adjective to IMS 
 masculine plural. 
 
 The preceding lessons and exercises. Les lecons et les exercicespriccdenls. 
 His mouth and eyes open. Sa bouche et ses yeux ouverts. 
 
 As the adjective must be masculine, the ear requires the substantive 
 masculine to be put last, as above, instead of: Ses yeux et sa bouche ouverts. 
 
 9. The adjective cannot be separated by an article from the noun it quali- 
 fies ; therefore the article placed after the adjective in English, comes before it 
 in French. Except tout, which admits the article after it. 
 
 Such a man, (59 2 ,) such men. 
 
 Sach a woman, such women. 
 
 All his time. all the day (a day.) 
 
 Un tel homme (not tcl un}, de tel* 
 
 hommes. 
 
 Une telle femme, de telles femmes. 
 Tout son temps, tout Zejour (w7tjour.) 
 
 10. If with such there is another adjective, as, such a good look, the French 
 io not use tel, but say, un si lin livre, the same as so good a book. So kind 
 friend, such a kind friend. Un si bon ami (never un tel bon ami.) 
 
 REMARK 1. Adjecl'ves form their feminine in various ways, viz . 
 i. The following double the last consonant : 
 
 Masculin. Feminin. 
 
 Low. 
 
 . Thick. 
 Express. 
 
 Genteel, gentle, pretty. 
 Fat. 
 Big. 
 
 Weary. . 
 No, none. 
 Initiated. 
 
 Bas, basse. 
 
 ISpais, epaisse. 
 
 Expres, expresse. 
 
 Gentil, gentille. 
 
 Gras, grasse. 
 
 Gros, grosse. 
 
 Las, lasse. 
 
 Nul, . nulle. 
 
 Profes, prolessOt 
 
 Silly, foolish. Sot, sotte. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 491 
 
 Masculin. 
 
 I 1 en 
 
 Deceitful, (eur euse.) 
 
 Trompeur, . 
 
 trompeuse. 
 
 Lying, " " 
 
 Menteur, 
 
 menteuse. 
 
 Talkative, 
 
 Parleur, 
 
 parleuse. 
 
 Executing, (cur rice.} 
 
 Exdcuteur, 
 
 executrice. 
 
 Persecuting, " " 
 
 Pcrsecuteur, 
 
 persecutrice. 
 
 Enchanting; {eur eresse.) 
 
 Enchanteur, 
 
 enchanteresso. 
 
 Sinning, " ' 
 
 Pecheur, 
 
 pecheressc. 
 
 Avenging, Vengeur. 
 
 vengeresse. 
 
 i lie following form their leminine quite irregularly : 
 
 
 Absolved. f Absous, 
 
 absoute. 
 
 Benign. 
 
 Benin, 
 
 bdnigne. 
 
 Declining. 
 
 Caduc. 
 
 caduque. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Sec, 
 
 seche. 
 
 False. 
 
 Faux, 
 
 fausse. 
 
 Favorite. 
 
 Favor i, 
 
 favorite. 
 
 Free. 
 
 Franc, 
 
 Tranche. 
 
 Fresh. 
 
 Frais, 
 
 fraiche. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 Grec, 
 
 grccque. 
 
 Long. 
 
 Long, 
 
 longue. 
 
 Public. 
 
 Public, 
 
 publiquc. 
 
 Red. 
 
 Roux, 
 
 rousse. 
 
 Sweet. 
 
 Doux, 
 
 douce. 
 
 Third. 
 
 Tiers, 
 
 tierce. 
 
 Traitorous 
 
 TraTtrc, 
 
 traitresse. 
 
 Turkish. 
 
 Turc, 
 
 Turque. 
 
 White. 
 
 Blanc, 
 
 blanche. 
 
 Wicked. 
 
 Malin, 
 
 nialigne. 
 
 2. The plural of adjeclives informed like that of the substantives, (9, 10,) 
 Of the following twenty-eight adjectives, the first eighteen have no plural 
 for the masculine, the last ten may form it by adding an s, but it is lx>ttor 
 to avoid using them in the plural for the masculine gender. 
 
 Austral, 
 
 southern. 
 
 Sentimental, 
 
 sentimcntaL 
 
 Beneficial, 
 
 beneficiary. 
 
 Vocal, 
 
 vocal. 
 
 B^rdal, 
 
 northern. 
 
 Zodiacal, 
 
 zodiacal. 
 
 Brumal, 
 
 brumal. 
 
 
 
 Canonial, 
 
 canonical. 
 
 
 
 Diametral, 
 
 diametrical. 
 
 Amicorl 
 
 friendly, 
 
 Experimental, 
 
 experimental. 
 
 Fatal, 
 
 fatal. 
 
 Labial, 
 
 labial. 
 
 Filial, 
 
 filial. 
 
 Lingual, 
 
 lingual. 
 
 Final, 
 
 final. 
 
 Lustral, 
 
 lustral. 
 
 Frugal, 
 
 frugal. 
 
 Matinal, 
 
 early. 
 
 Glacial, 
 
 frozen. 
 
 Mddical, 
 
 medical. 
 
 Jovial, 
 
 jovial. 
 
 Mental, 
 
 mental. 
 
 Naval, 
 
 naval. 
 
 ft**!, 
 
 natal. 
 
 Pascal, 
 
 pascal. 
 
 Patron a!, 
 
 patronal. 
 
 Virgina-, 
 
 virghai 
 
192 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 $138. 1. The comparative of equality is formed by <ii<.tunt /< .... qut 
 . . ., as much. .. as. . . , with nouns; aussi. ..que. . . , as.. . as. . . , wi.n adjec- 
 tives and adverbs, (16 ', 27 2 .) That of inequality, by plus . . . qae, more . . . 
 than ; mains . . . que . . . , less . . . than . . . , with adjectives and adverbs, (29 1 , 2 ,) 
 and plus de . . . que de . . . , moins de . . . que . . . de . . . , with nouns. Not so 
 much ... as, with nouns, is expressed by we ... pas tant de . . . que de ; not 
 so . . . as . . . ; with adjectives and adverbs, by ne . . . pas si . . . que. 
 
 I have not so much pride as he. | Je ?i'ai pas tant d'orgueil que lui. 
 
 I am not so proud as he. I Je ne suis pas si orgueilleax que lui 
 
 2. The more . . . the less is expressed by : plus . . . moins without the 
 article, although it is used in English; because the addition of the article 
 LE to plus, would make at a superlative, while more remains a comparative, 
 even when it is preceded by the. 
 
 The more you study, the more you j Plus vous etudioz, plus vous appro 
 
 learn. nez. 
 
 The more he plays, the less he learns, j Plus il joue, moins il apprend. 
 The greener the fruit, the less healthy 
 
 it is. 
 
 The nominative, in French, follows plus or mom*. Then you must not 
 say : Plus vert est le fruit moins sain il est ; but as it is above. 
 
 3. In comparisons of inequality, formed by plus, more ; moms, less ; 
 autrc, autrement, otherwise, differently, &c., if the part of the sentence 
 which precedes que (than) is affirmative, NE must be used before the verb 
 coming after que. ($ 53 1 , 06s. 120.) 
 
 J'ai plus de pain que je n'en peux 
 
 manger. 
 
 II etudie moins que je ne le fais. 
 Louis ecrit mieux qu'il ne parle. 
 Us s"e comportent autrement que 
 
 Plus le fruit est vert, moins il est 
 sain. 
 
 I have more bread than I can cat. 
 
 He studies less than I do. (492.) 
 Louis writes better than he speaks. 
 They behave otherwise than you 
 think. 
 
 vous ne pensez. 
 
 4. But do not use NE after que, than, if the first part of the sentence is 
 negative or interrogative. 
 
 He does not study less than I do. 
 Louis does not wite better than he 
 
 speaks. 
 They do not behave otherwise than 
 
 you think. 
 Can I eat more bread than I have ? 
 
 II ?i'etudie pas moins que'} 'etudie. 
 Louis 71^ cent pas mieux qu'il parle. 
 
 Us ne so comportent pas autrement 
 
 que vous croyez. 
 Puis-je manger plus de pain que j'en 
 
 ai? 
 
 In comparisons of equality, expressed by autant, as much ; tant, so 
 much ; aussi, as ; si, so, &c. : NE is never used after que, (as.) 
 
 I have as much bread as I can eat. 
 
 He does not study so much as I do. 
 Loci* writes as well as he speaks. 
 They do not behave so well as you 
 think. 
 
 J'ai autant de pain que je peux CB 
 
 manger. 
 
 II n'etudie pas tant que j'etudie. 
 Louis ecrit aussi lie?i qu'il parle. 
 Us ne se comportent pas si lieji qvt 
 
 vous croyez. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 493 
 
 . PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. The following are placed before the noun. Note that when tho posi- 
 tive goes before, so do the comparative and superlative. Premier, first 
 second, second ; and other adjectives of number. 
 
 Beau, bel, m. 
 
 Belle,/. 
 
 Bon, bonne, 
 
 Grand, 
 
 Gros, grossr , 
 
 leuno. 
 
 Joii, 
 
 Mauvais, 
 
 Me'chant, 
 
 A pretty little dog. 
 
 fine. 
 
 handsome. 
 
 good. 
 
 great, tall. 
 
 big, bulky. 
 
 young. 
 
 pretty. 
 
 bad. 
 
 wicked. 
 
 Meilleur, 
 
 Meme, 
 
 Moindre, 
 
 Petit, 
 
 Plusieurs ; 
 
 Saint, 
 
 Tout, 
 
 Vieux, vicil, m.) , 
 
 Vr- MI / ' f ol 
 
 Vieille,/. 5 
 
 Un joli petit chien. 
 
 better. 
 
 same. 
 
 less. 
 
 little, small. 
 
 several. 
 
 holy. 
 
 2. But if any of these adjectives is connects with another that carinoi 
 be placed before the noun, both go after, joined by a conjunction. 
 
 A handsome, amiable woman. 2 
 A good, complaisant husband. 
 A young, rich, and virtuous woman. 
 
 Une femme aimable ct belle. 
 Un mari bon et complaisant. 
 Une demoiselle, jeune, richc, ct vcr* 
 
 tueuse. 
 3. Adjectives of nations, color, and shape, follow the noun. (2C 2 , Obs. 61.) 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 140. 1. NOUNS in French not being, as in English, used as an adjective 
 to another noun, as, a cloth coat, a preposition is used to show the relation 
 between the two nouns, the second of which in English becomes the first 
 in French. 
 
 De is used between the name of the thing and that of the substance of 
 which it is made: Un habit de drop; un chandelier d'arge?it. If several 
 nouns are ised as adjectives, the French construction is the same; the last 
 in English becomes first in French. Silver, gold, and steel jewels ; de* 
 bijoux d 1 argent, d j or, et deader. 
 
 2. De shows also the possession marked in English by 's. John's book. 
 The French construction remains the same : Le livre de Jean. 
 The boy has a stick : is it the gene- i Le garc.on a un baton : est-ce celui du 
 
 raVs, the lawyer's, or the doctor's ? \ ge?itral, de Vavocat, ou du docteur ? 
 
 1 The adjective cher, dear, also stands before the noun, except when it denotes th 
 price of a thing. Ex. Mon cher ami, my dear friend ; ma chere sceur, iny dear eis- 
 tor; but un fusil cher, a dear gun ; une table chere, a dear table. 
 
 2 In tho following examples, the peculiarity with respect to the place of the adjec 
 ttve should be observed : Un grand homme meass a great man, and un homme grand 
 a tali man; une grosse femme, a fat woman, and une femme grosse, a woman will 
 child; une sage-femme, a midwife, and une femme sage, a wise or modest woir.an 
 in qaJant homme, a isw.n of honor, and un homme galant, a courtier. 
 
94 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 The child's and the laker's dog. 
 
 The grocer's butter, biscuits, and cof- 
 fee. 
 
 The grocer's butter, his biscuits and 
 co flee. 
 
 Le chien du ga.rc.on et du boulanger. 
 Li beurre, les biscuits, et le cafi <fc 
 
 Vipicier. 
 Le beurre de 1'epicier, sea biscuits, 
 
 et son cafe, ($ 32, N., at page 467. 
 
 To translate a double possessive case, take the last noun in English foi 
 the first in French, and then retrograde regularly. 
 
 My brother's friend's book. 
 
 The grocer's clerk's father's horse. 
 
 Le livre de Vami de mon frere. 
 Le cheval du pere du commis 
 
 1'epicier. 
 
 3. De is also used 'n French to translate of, placed in a like situation in 
 English. 
 
 A. barrel of flour. i Un baril de farlne. 
 
 A. bag of rice. I Un sac de riz. 
 
 4. A is used when the last French noun expresses the uso of the first. 
 \ coffee-mill. Un moulin a cafe. (77 1 .) 
 
 Gunpowder. 
 A flour-barrel. 
 
 De la poudre a canon. 
 Un baril a farine. 
 
 A la, d V, au, aux, are used, when the first French noun contains a por- 
 tion of the second. 
 
 The barrel with flour in (but not full.) 
 The bottle with vinegar in. 
 The bag with apples. 
 
 Le baril d la farine. (77 2 .) 
 La bouteille au vinaigre. 
 Le sac aux pommes. 
 
 5. Proper names, used as such, have no plural. 
 
 Your friends, the Clintons, are here. Vos amis, les Clinton,' son.1 id. 
 
 But if used as common nouns, they take an s. 
 Washingtons are rare. | Les Washingtons sont rarea. 
 
 6. In an enumeration, nouns are frequently used without articles. 
 
 You have what you want to eat with, Vous avez ce qu'il vous faut pour 
 
 a knife, fork, plate, napkin, &c. 
 
 manger, coutcau, fourchette, &c. 
 
 You may likewise say, un couteau, une fourchette, une assiette, &c. f 
 repeating the article before every noun, if placed before the first ; but it is 
 better not to use it. 
 
 Men, women, children, were out. I Hommes, femmes, enfa?its, ctaient 
 
 I dehors. 
 
 7. Compound nouns are formed by connecting: 
 
 A noun with a noun : as, un chou-fieur, a cauliflower ; dcs choux-jleuis. 
 
 A noun with an adjective : as, une basse-taille, a bass-voice ; des basses- 
 tallies. 
 
 In such nouns, both the substantive and adjective become plural. 
 
 A 'noun with a verb : as, un porte-crayon, a pencil-case ; des porte-crayona. 
 
 In such nouns, the substantive alone becomes plural, if the idea admits 
 of plurality. The case may have one or two pencils in. 
 
 A noun with a noun by a preposition : as, un chef-d'oeuvre, a master-piece 
 dee chefa-d'wuvre. 
 
 Here, the first substantive alone becomes plural, if the idea admits of 
 nlnralhv. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 495 
 
 A compound noun, formed from a verb, preposition, or adverb, is invariable! 
 because its component parts are themselves invariable. Un passe-partout^ 
 tt dead-latch key ; des passe-partout. 
 
 8. The feminine of substantives ending in eris regularly formed, by add- 
 ing an e to the masculine, and changing the e mute into e grave. As : 
 
 A milkman. 
 A baker. 
 A merchant. 
 
 A milkwoman. 
 A baker woman. 
 A female merchant. 
 
 Un laitier. 
 Un boulanger. 
 Un marchand. 
 
 Une laitiere. 
 Une boulangere. 
 Une marchande. 
 
 As there are many nouns and adjectives, (200,) which, although incor- 
 porated in the Vocabularies, are not used in the Exercises, contrary to oul 
 fundamental principle, viz: to make an immediate and, continued, uge of 
 expressions introduced, I place in the Synopsis an English alphabetical list 
 jf them, which may be consulted when necessary. 
 
 The following substantives have a distinct form for individu; Is of the 
 'em ale sex : 
 
 Masculine. 
 un abbe, 
 un accusateur, 
 un acteur, 
 un ambassadeur, 
 un apprenti, 
 un baron, 
 un berger, 
 un bienfaiteur, 
 un chanoine, 
 un chanteur, 
 un chasseur, 
 un chasseur, 
 un comte, 
 un danseur, 
 un dieu, 
 un due, 
 un dlecteur, 
 un empereur, 
 un fondateur, 
 un jouvenceau; 
 un lion, 
 un paien, 
 un paon, 
 un paysan, 
 un prieur, 
 un prince, 
 un protecteur, 
 un roi, 
 
 An abbot, 
 An accuser, 
 An actor, 
 An ambassador, 
 An apprentice, 
 A baron, 
 A shepherd, 
 A benefactor, 
 A canon, 
 A singer, 
 A hunter, 
 
 , (in puetry,) 
 
 A count, 
 1 dancer, 
 A god, 
 A duke, 
 An elector, 
 An emperor 
 A founder, 
 A lad, 
 A lion, 
 A heathen, 
 A peacock, 
 A peasant, 
 A prior, 
 A prince, 
 A protector.. 
 A king, 
 
 9. When a noun is the object of two or more verbs, those verbs mut r 
 govern that noun, without preposition, or with the same preposition. 
 
 Femiilint. 
 une abbesse. 
 une accusatrice. . 
 une actrice. 
 une ambassadrice. 
 une apprentie. 
 une baronne. 
 une bergere. 
 une bienfaitrice. 
 une chanoinesse. 
 une chanteuse. 
 une chasseuse. 
 une chasseresse. 
 une comtesse. 
 une danseuse. 
 une deesse. 
 une duchesse. 
 une electrice. 
 ?.^.ne imperatrice. 
 une fondatrice. 
 une jouvencelle. 
 une lionne. 
 une paienne. 
 une paonne. 
 une paysanne. 
 une prieure. 
 une princesse. 
 une protectrice. 
 une reine. 
 
JL96 GRAMMATICAL SYKOP8I8. 
 
 He buys and sells cloth, (no vrcp.} 
 We promise and give to the people, (a.) 
 
 She speaks and boasts o/her beauty. 
 
 II achete et vend du drap. 
 
 Nous promotions et donnuns aux 
 
 gens. 
 Elle parle et se vantc dc sa bcautd. 
 
 But in French the sense cannot be suspended after a preposition as in 
 English ; for instance, you must not say, Rien n'est plus agreable que die 
 converser avec et que de jouir de la societe de nos amis, Nothing is more 
 agreeable than to converse with and to enjoy the company of our friertde. 
 The sense cannot be suspended after the French preposition avec, as it can 
 be after the English preposition with. Hence we have this rule : When the 
 two verbs require different prepositions, do not suspend the sense, but make 
 the nftun the regime ($ 44) of the first preposition (or regime indirect of the 
 first verb}, and place an objective pronoun ($ 48) with the second verb. 
 The above sentence is translated thus : Rien n'est plus agreable one dc 
 co?iverser avec nos amis et que de jouir deleur societe. 
 
 10. The nouns of multitude, in French, noms collcctifs, are divided by 
 them into two classes. 1st CLASS. Collectif general, when it represents the 
 entire collection. La foule des hommes est vouee au malheur, the bulk 
 of mankind is doomed to misfortune. The following verb is in the singular, 
 and agrees with the collective. 2d CLASS. Collectif partitif, when it repre- 
 sents only a part of the collection. Une foule de pauvres re$oivent nos 
 gecours, a crowd of poor receive our assistance. A crowd of poor, contains 
 but a portion of all the poor. The verb is in the plural, and agrees with the 
 noun that follows the collective. 
 1st CL. The army. of the Americans. I L'armee des Americains est .... 
 
 The multitude of the stars. I La multitude des etoiles est 
 
 2d CL. A troop of robbers. ' Une troupe de voleurs sont .... 
 
 A multitude of stars. i Une multitude d'etoiles sont .... 
 
 11. Of the farmer's hay, cabbages, 
 butter, and cheese. 
 
 Du foin du fermier, de ses choux, de 
 son beurre, et de son fromage. 
 
 This is an elliptical expression for the hay of the farmer, the callage of thf 
 farmer, the butter of the farmer, &c. ; but instead of using the noun in the 
 possessive case a second time, the French use a possessive pronoun. ($ 32, N. 
 page 367.) 
 
 12. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PROPER NAMES OF PERSONS 
 
 TAKEN FROM THE LATIN AND GREEK. 
 
 1. Proper names of men ending in English in a are the same in both lan- 
 guages ; but those of women and goddesses having that ending become 
 French by changing the final a into e mute. 
 
 Caligula. Dolabella. 
 
 Cleopatra. Diana. Julia. 
 
 Caligula. Dolabella- 
 
 Cleopatre. Diane. Julie. 
 
 2. Most proper names ending in English in as or es become French bv 
 changing these Snals into e mute. 
 Eneas. Pythagoras. 6nee. Pythagore. 
 
 Ulysses. Socrates. 
 
 Ulysse. Socrate. 
 
R A M M A T 1 C A L S V N O P S I 3. 
 
 497 
 
 3. Piopcr riar.ics ending in o change it in French inlo on. 
 Cicero. Dido. | Cicercn. Didon 
 
 4. Most proper names ending in us are the same in both languages when 
 they have but two syllables ; but when they are composed of three or moro 
 syllables, they become French by changing it into e mute. 
 
 Cyrus. Venus. I Cyrus. Venus. 
 
 Camillus. Orpheus. I Camille. Orphee. 
 
 5. Most of those ending in al or is are the same in both languages. 
 Jsvenal. Sesostris. ] Juvenal. Sesostris. 
 
 6. Those ending in English in under change it in French Lito andre. 
 Alexander. Lysander. | Alexandre. Lysandre. 
 
 REMARK. The proper names of kingdoms, provinces, and towns, ending 
 in English in a, become French by changing the ending a into e mute, and 
 those of towns ending in lurg, change it into lourg. 1 
 Arabia. Asia. I L' Arabic. L'Asie. 
 
 Friburg. Hamburg. | Fribourg. Hambourg. 
 
 - CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 NOT A Ires 
 {Jardiiiaitx. 
 
 Un, m. une,/. 
 
 Deux (2) 
 
 Trois 
 
 Ouatre ~ 
 
 Cinq 
 
 v'-nal 
 inters. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 Sept. ~ 7. 
 
 Huit ~ 8. 
 
 Neuf 9. 
 
 Dix 10. 
 
 Onze 11. 
 
 Douze. ..12. 
 
 Treize ~ ^ 1C- 
 
 Quatorzo 14 . 
 
 C^uinzo - 15. 
 
 A 'ombres Gfil'rnal 
 
 Ordmaux. M '.unbent 
 
 Premier, in. premiere, f. . - lot. 
 
 Deuxieme, second, seconde 9d. 
 
 Troisieme ^~ . . .-;<}. 
 
 Quatneme - 4th. 
 
 Cmquiemo ~ 5th. 
 
 Sixieme .-.^. 6th. 
 
 Septieme ~. ~ . 7th. 
 
 Huitieme ^^. 8th. 
 
 Neuvieme . ^ 9th. 
 
 Dixieme _ loth 
 
 Onzieme -...-, , lltJi 
 
 Douzieme 12th 
 
 Treizieme.^ ^ 13th 
 
 Quatorzieme 14tS 
 
 Quinzierne 15th 
 
 1 Suck proper names as deviate from this rule are either separately noted, or ar 
 the same in both languages. 
 
 From 2 to 10 there is an irregularity in the pronunciation of the numbers, wh:ca 
 it ia well to notice. 
 
 At the end of a sentence. Before a consonant 
 
 Deux iz pronounced deu, x silent. deu 
 
 Trois " troi, s silent. troi. 
 
 Cinq ' cinq, q sounded. ein. 
 
 Six 
 
 f-opt 
 Huit 
 Neuf 
 Dix 
 
 troi, s silent, 
 cinq, q sounded, 
 sis, x like s. 
 seot, t sounded, 
 nuit, t sounded, 
 neuf,/ sounded, 
 ills, x like s. 
 
 si. 
 
 EC. 
 
 Jim. 
 neu. 
 di. 
 
 Before a vowel. 
 
 deu-z amis, 
 troi-z amis, 
 cin-q amis, 
 si-z amis. 
 se-t amis. 
 nui-t amis, 
 neu-v nmia. 
 c-i-z auus. 
 
 And in the same manner wherever they occur, 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 Nmnfirc* Cz.T.!inal 
 
 tlGminaux, Numbers 
 
 Seize - 1G. 
 
 Dix-sept 17 
 
 Dix-huit - :3. 
 
 Dix-neuf - 19. 
 
 Vingt(i) 20. 
 
 Viugt et ur - 21. 
 
 Vingt-deux - - 22. 
 
 Vingt-trois '. 23. 
 
 Vingt-quatre v. . 24. 
 
 Vingt-cinq - 25. 
 
 Vingt-six 20. 
 
 Vingt-sept 27. 
 
 Vingt-huit 28.. 
 
 Vingt-neuf 29. 
 
 Trente 30. 
 
 Trente et un -. 31. 
 
 Trente-deux ~~ . 32. 
 
 Trente-trois 33. 
 
 Quaranto 40. 
 
 Quc.ranto et un. . .. ~.... 41. 
 
 CJuarante-deux 42. 
 
 Quanmte-trois 43. 
 
 Cinquante 50. 
 
 Cinquante et u' 51. 
 
 Jinquante-deux . .. . - 52. 
 
 Soixante ^ 60. 
 
 Soixante et un . Gl. 
 
 Soixante-deux G2. 
 
 Soixante et dix 70. 
 
 Soixante-onze 71. 
 
 Soixante-douze 72. 
 
 Soixanto-treize 73. 
 
 Soixante-quatorze 74. 
 
 Soixante-quinze. 75. 
 
 Soixante-seize -... .-. 70. 
 
 Soixante-dix-sept 77. 
 
 Soixante-dix-huit 78. 
 
 Soixante-dix-neuf 79. 
 
 Quatre-vingts( 2 ) , .^ . 80. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-un 81. 
 
 Quatre-vmgt-deux 82. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-dix - 90. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-onze 91. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-douze .- 92. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-treize 93. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-quatorze 94. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-quinze... 95. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-seize 9G. 
 
 Quatro- vingt-dix-sept 97. 
 
 Quatre vingt-dix-huit 98. I 
 
 k^uatre vingt-dix-neuf 99. 1 
 
 Nom I/res Or J i raJ 
 
 Ordiiiaux, Number* 
 
 Seizierne , 16th 
 
 Dix-septieme - 17th 
 
 Dix-huitieme 13th 
 
 Dix-neuvieme - 19th 
 
 Vingtieme 20th 
 
 Vingt et unieme 21s 
 
 Vingt-deuxierae - - 22cL 
 
 Vingt-troisieme . .. . . ~ .^ ...... 23d. 
 
 Vingt-quatrieme 24 tk 
 
 Vingt-cinquieme ~~~~ 25th 
 
 Vingt-sixieme ..^.^^, 26tli 
 
 Vingt-septieme 27th 
 
 Vingt-huitieme 2Slh 
 
 Vingt-neuvieme - . - ~ - 29th 
 
 Trentieme. ^ - 30th 
 
 Trente et unieme 31st 
 
 Trente-deuxieme ~ 32d. 
 
 Trente-troisieme 33<J. 
 
 Quarantieme.., - 40th 
 
 Quarante et unieme .. .. 4 1st 
 
 Quarar.to-deuxieme - 4'2d. 
 
 Quararite-troisieino 43d. 
 
 CinqnantiOme . ,- 50th 
 
 Cinquante et unidme 51st 
 
 Cinquante-deuxieme ^^..^ 52d. 
 
 &Jixantieme 60th 
 
 Soixante et unieme Gist 
 
 Soixante-deuxieme G'Jd. 
 
 Soixante et dizieme . 7()th 
 
 Soixante-onzieme ....... 71st. 
 
 Soixante-douzieme ~ 72tl. 
 
 Soixante-treizieme 73d. 
 
 Soixante-quatorzieme 74 tlj 
 
 Soixante-quinzieme 75tli 
 
 Soixante-seizieme . 76th 
 
 Soixante-dix-septieme. ~ . . ... 77th 
 
 Soixante-dix-huitieme.. 78th 
 
 Soixante-dix-neuvieme 79th 
 
 Quatre-vingtieme 80th 
 
 Quatre-vingt-unieme 81st. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-deuxieme 82d. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-dixieme - .^ 90th 
 
 Quatre-vingt-onzieme ~. ^^. 91st. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-douzieme . . .^ 92d 
 
 Quatre-vingt-treizieme 93d, 
 
 Quatrc- vingt-quatorzieme 94 th 
 
 Quatre-vingt-quinzieme 95th 
 
 Quatre-vingt-seizieme .- ^ _ 96th 
 
 Quatre-vingt-dix-septieme ^ 97th 
 
 Quatre-vingt-dix-huitieme 98th 
 
 Quatre-vingt-dix-neuvieme 99lS 
 
 1 In vingt the t is silent, but sounded in vingt et un, vingt-deux to 
 
 2 In quatro-vingts the / ^a never sounded. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 499 
 
 Membra 
 dtrdinaux. 
 
 Cent un (not cent et un) 
 C^nt deux 
 
 Cardinal 
 
 Numbers. 
 
 - . 100. 
 
 101. 
 
 102. 
 
 Ccnttrois. .................... - ., 103. 
 
 Cent dix ................... . ..... - 
 
 Cent onze ........................ 
 
 Cent vingt ........................ 
 
 Cent vingt et un .................. 
 
 200. 
 '201. 
 
 Deux cents 
 
 Deux cent un ............ 
 
 Mille (not dix cents) ............. 1000. 
 
 Mille un ........................... 1001. 
 
 Mille deux. &c .................... 1002. 
 
 Mille cent (onze cents) ........... 1 100. 
 
 Mille neuf cents (dix-neuf cents) 1900. 
 
 NomLres 
 Ordinauf. 
 
 Centieme 
 Cent-unieme 
 Cent-deuxieme . ~ ...... - 
 
 Number* 
 
 - 100th 
 101st. 
 102d. 
 
 Cent-troisieme ............... . . 103d. 
 
 110. Cent-dixieme . ,. 110th 
 
 111. Cent-onzieme lllth. 
 
 120. Cent-vingtieme ... 12G1.1. 
 
 121. Cent vingt et usicme 121st. 
 
 Deux centiemc 200th. 
 
 Deux cent-unieme 201st. 
 
 Millieme 1000th 
 
 Mille-unieme 1001st. 
 
 Mille-deuxieme, &c 1002d. 
 
 Mille-centieme, (onzo-eontieme 1100th. 
 Mille-neuf-ceatieme, (dix-neuf- 
 
 centieme ~ ~ ... ^. 1900th. 
 
 After which the French do not count any more by hundreds, as the English 
 do. They do not say : Vingt, vingt et un, vingt-doux, &c., cents ; twenty, 
 twenty-one, twenty-two, &c., hundred, but : 
 
 Deux mille 2000. 
 
 Deux mille cinq cents . ~. 2500. 
 
 Un million ~~ 1,000,000. 
 
 Deux millieme 2000th 
 
 Deux milJe cinq-centieme 2500th. 
 
 Millionicme millionth. 
 
 In dates, Mille is spelt Mil. Mil sept cent soixante-seize, 1776. 
 Mil huit cent quarante-neuf, ou Dix-huit cent quarante-neuf, 1849. 
 
 llic whole. A part. 
 
 The half. The third, I. 
 
 The two-thirds, f. The three-thirds. 
 The fourth part, the i. The f . 
 The fifth part, the 1-5. The 4-5. 
 
 The sixth part, the 1-5, and so forth, 
 
 by adding ieme to the cardinal. 
 What is the half of 4 ? It is 2. 
 What is that of 5 ? It is 2 and a naif. 
 
 What is the ! of 6 ? It is 5 and 
 
 i, 51. 
 Which is the fourth of 11 ? It is 2f. 
 
 The | are 8*. 
 
 fc 142. The seasons of the year are : 
 The spring. The summer. 
 
 The autumn, or fall. The winter. 
 
 . Names of the months of the 
 year. 
 
 The first month is January. 
 18 not the second month February ? 
 The thin' is March. 
 
 Le tout, 1' unite. Une partie. 
 
 La moitie, la demie. Le tiers, |. 
 Lesdeux-tiers, f. Les trois-tiere. 
 Le quart, le . Les trois quarts, I, 
 Le cinquieme, 1<3 1-5. Les 4 cin- 
 
 quiemes. 
 Le sixieme, le 1-6, et ainsi de suite, 
 
 en ajoutant ieme au cardinal. 
 Quelle est la moitie de 4 ? C'eet 2. 
 Quelle est celle de 5? C'est 2 et 
 
 demi. 
 Quels sont les f de 8 ? C'est 5 cl 
 
 un tiers, 5y. 
 Quel est le quart de 11 ? C'est 2 ov 
 
 f . Les | sont 8*. 
 
 Les saisons de 1'annee, sont : 
 
 Le printemps, (382.) L'e'te, (3$!,) 
 
 L'automr.e. L'hiver. 
 
 Noms des mols de 1'annee. 
 Le premier mois est Janvier. 
 
 Le second n'est-il pas Fevricr ? 
 
 Le troisieme est Mars. 
 
600 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 April May. June. 
 
 Jul*. August. September. 
 
 October. November. December. 
 Next January. Last January. 
 
 The coming February. Last March. 
 In April. On the first of May. 
 
 On the 4th of July, 1776. 
 New Year's day. On New Year. 
 I wish you a happy New Year. 
 Christmas day. On Christrias. 
 
 fs not June the 6th month ? 
 STes, it is ; and September is the 9th. 
 [low many days are there in July ? 
 
 There are 31. 
 
 How many are there in August ? 
 Are there as many in October ? 
 There are just as many, 
 lias September as many ? 
 No, it has but 30, the same as April, 
 
 June, and November. 
 The shortest month is February, 
 
 which, in common years, has but 
 
 28 days, and 29 in leap (bissextile) 
 
 years. 
 
 Avril. Mai. Juin. 
 
 Juillet. Aout. Septembre 
 
 Octobre. Novembre. jDecemDic. 
 Janvier pro chain. Janvier (lcrntjr 
 Fevrier qui vient. Mars dernier. 
 En Avril. Le premier Jc I 
 
 Le quatre de Juillet, 1776. 
 Le jour de 1'an. Le premie/ de I* an 
 Je vous souhaite une bonno annce. 
 Le jour de Noel. 
 Juin n'est-il pas le 6me mois? [9i 
 Si fait, ce Test; et Septemue est 
 Combien de jours y a-t iJ Jans 
 
 Juillet ? II y en a 31. 
 Combien y en a-t-il en Aofu \ 
 Y en a-t-il autant en Octobic 
 II yen a tout autant. 
 Septembre en a-t-il autant ? 
 Non, il n'en a que 30, de m6me que 
 
 Avril, Juin, et Novembre. 
 Le mois le plus court est Fevrier, qui, 
 
 dans les annees communes, n'a 
 
 que 28 jours, et 29 dans les annees 
 
 bissextiles. 
 
 iicr. 
 
 * 
 
 Tan 
 
 aee. 
 
 ^H 
 
 1 
 
 VEEBS. 
 
 
 $ 144. INDICATIVE PRESENT. IndicattJ Present. 
 
 To find the present tense of a verb, its present participle must be known, 
 as it serves to form the three persons plural. It always ends in ant : and, 
 as all grammars and dictionaries give it, it is easily learned. 1 The first, 
 second, and third persons plural, of the present tense, are formed by 
 changing the termination ant, of the present participle, into ons, for the 
 first person ; into ez, for the second, and into ent, for the third. 2 Ex. : 
 
 1 The formation of the indicative present from the infinitive, although it would be 
 preferable, presents too many exceptions, and is cuusequently too difficult for 
 beginners. 
 
 * The second person singular always ends in 5.* In trie first conjugation, tLc 
 third person singular ends in e, and is the same as the first person ; in the second and 
 third conjugations, it ends in t ; first and second have s. In th fourth conjugation, 
 it adds nothing to the root,* 
 
 * Except in the imperative of the first conjugation, and of some verbs of tact 
 second, where the 5 is dropped. Ex.-: Parle, speak, (thou.) When the imperative 
 however, is followed by one of the pronouns, en, T/, the letter s is not dropped; as. 
 Jonnes-en, a ton frere> give some to thy brother; portes-y :es livres, take thy books 
 ihither. 
 
 f By root we understand iJiai part of the verb which precedes the terminationn er, 
 V, oir, rt t of the infinitive : far esamule, in the verb finir, to finish, Jin in the rooi 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 501 
 
 FIRST CON.UGATION. 
 
 Infinitive. Present participle. 
 
 TJ epeak. Speaking. 
 
 Present tense. 
 
 We speak, you speak, the) speak. 
 speak, thou speakest, he speaks. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 I\> fmisli. Finishing. 
 
 We finish, you finish, they finish. 
 
 [ finish, thou finishest, he finishes. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 To receive. Receivi?ig. 
 
 We receive, you receive, they receive. 
 
 [ receive, thou receivest, he receives. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGAIEON. 
 
 To sell. Selling. 
 
 We sell, you sell, they sell 
 I sell, thou sellest, he sells. 
 
 PREMIERE COJS JUG ALSO Jf. 
 
 Infinitif. Participe present* 
 
 Parler. Parlant. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Nous parlons, vout rarlez, ils parlent. 
 Je parle, tu paries, il parle. 
 
 SECONDE CONJUGATION. 
 
 Finir. Finis s ant. 
 
 Nous finissons, vous finissez, ils fi 
 
 Je finis, tu finis, il finit. [nissent. 
 
 TROISIEME CONJUGAISON. 
 
 Recevoir. Recevaid. 
 
 Nous recevons, vous recevez, ils re- 
 
 Te re9ois, tu regois, il regoit. [oivent. 
 
 QUATRIEME CONJUGAISON. 
 
 Vendre. Vendant. 
 
 Nous vendons, vous vendez, ils veil- 
 
 Je vends, tu vends, il vend. [ denU 
 
 HINT. From the third person plural, the scholar can easily learn the 
 Bingular. 
 
 For the first conjugation, change the pronouns, but pronounce the verb 
 just like the third person plural: Ils parlent, je parle, tu parle, il parle. 
 
 For the second, third, and fourth conjugations, drop the last mute sylla- 
 ble of the third person plural ; then the remainder will be the sound of the 
 singular. 
 
 llsfinissent, jefaii, tu fini, ilfini. 
 
 Us regoivcnt, je re$oi, tu regoi, il regoi* 
 
 llsvendent, jeven, tuven, il ven. 
 
 The scholar haa only the sounds here ; the correct spelling is to bo 
 learned by the written directions in ($ 144, N. 2), and by translating the 
 exercises. This answers for the regular conjugations, and many of the irre- 
 gular ones. 
 
 (* 144.) 
 
 ( Etre,* etant. 
 
 Nous sommes, vous etes, ils sent. 
 
 Exceptions to the general rule 
 
 To be, being. 
 
 We are, you are, they are. 
 
 To have, having. 
 
 We have, you have, they have. 
 
 To know, knowing. 
 
 We know, you know, they know. 
 To do, make, doing. 
 You do, they do. 
 To say, tell, saying, telling. 
 You say, tell. 
 
 Avoir,* ay ant. 
 
 Nous avons, vous avez, ils ont. 
 S avoir,* sachant. 
 
 Nous savons, vous savez ils savant, 
 Faire,* faisant. 
 
 Ire reg. vous faites, ils font. 
 JDire,* disant. 
 
 Ire reg. vous dites. 3me reg 
 
 1 Tlic third person plural of the third conjugation offers, as may bo noon, nn 
 don ; us tho present p.'irtirip'a ;'* changed to le^oivent. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 In ($114, N. i,j it was observed, that the third person plural of the 
 conjugation "was irregularly formed ; so it is with the following conjugations* 
 
 1st. 
 
 Alter, 
 
 to go; 
 
 allant : 
 
 Us vonl, 
 
 they go. 
 
 2d. 
 
 Venir, 
 
 to come ; 
 
 venant : 
 
 Us viennent, 
 
 they come. 
 
 
 Tenir, 
 
 to keep, hold 
 
 tenant : 
 
 Us tiennent, 
 
 they hold. 
 
 
 Acquerir 
 
 to acquire ; 
 
 acqueraji 
 
 t : Us acquit rent, 
 
 they acquire. 
 
 
 Dlourir, 
 
 to die (lose life) 
 
 ; mourant 
 
 Us meurent, 
 
 they die. 
 
 3d 
 
 Recevoir . 
 
 to receive ; 
 
 recevant 
 
 its regoivent, 
 
 they receive. 
 
 
 Devoir, 
 
 to owe ; 
 
 deviant : 
 
 Us doivext, 
 
 they owe. 
 
 
 Mouvoir, 
 
 to move ; 
 
 mouvant 
 
 Us meuvent, 
 
 f hey move. 
 
 
 Pcuvoir, 
 
 to be able ; 
 
 pouvant 
 
 ih peuvent, 
 
 they can. 
 
 
 Couloir, 
 
 to be willing ; 
 
 voulant 
 
 Us veulent, 
 
 they will. 
 
 till 
 
 Boire, 
 
 to drink ; 
 
 buvant : 
 
 Us boivent, 
 
 they drink. 
 
 
 Prendre, 
 
 to take ; 
 
 prenant 
 
 Us prennent, 
 
 they take. 
 
 1. In recevoir, or any other verb in which the c is soft in the infinitive, the, 
 c must remain so throughout, hence, it takes a cedilla (5), when followed 
 by a, o, u. Ex. Je regois, I receive ; re$u, received ; forcer, to force ; 
 forgant, forcing, &,c. (24 1 .) 
 
 2. In verbs ending in ger, the letter e, for the softening of the sound, ia 
 retained in all those persons where g is followed by a or o. (24 2 .) 
 
 3. In verbs ending in ayer, oycr, uycr, the letter y is changed into i, in 
 all persons where it is followed by e mute. (24*.) 
 
 4. In verbs having e(mute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive, 
 the letter e has the grave accent (e) in all persons, where the consonant 
 immediately after it, is followed by e mute, as in mener, to guide, to take ; 
 promener, to walk ; achcver, to finish, &.c. As : 
 
 I buy, thou buyest, he buys. 
 I lead, thou leadest, he leads. 
 Do you take him to the play ? 
 I do take him thither. 
 N. B. 
 
 J'achete, tu achctes, il achete. 
 Je mene, tu menes, il mene. 
 Le menez-vous au spectacle ? 
 Je 1'y mene. (25 1 .) 
 
 Except with the terminations eler, eter, in which the consonant 
 
 is doubled. (333.) 
 
 5. In verbs having e (acute) in the last syllable but one of th infinitive, 
 that e becomes e (grave) \vhen followed by a mute syllable. As, secher, to 
 dry ; je scche, I dry ; Us sechent, they dry. Ceder, to yield ; il cede, he 
 yields, &c. (28 2 .) 
 
 .6. The English present tense, expressed (24*) in three ways, I love, I do 
 love, I am loving, is translated by only one French expression : faitne, 
 Hence, Je Us, corresponds to, I read, I do read, I am reading. The French 
 have, however, another way much used by them, although unnoticed in 
 grammars. The true, the real present in English is 1 am reading ; the 
 corresponding French is je suis a lire. It consists of two parts. The 1st 
 93 in English is the verb to be., (etre,) in all its persons ; the 2d is, not the p re 
 
 1 Ard aL ir. eve<r t na 3/j<?r<revotr, to perceive; conceioir, to concelv^ & *. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SVWOPSIS. 503 
 
 sent participle, (reading,} but the preposition a, followed, of course, by the 
 infinitive, (Z*>e ;) for recollect RULE 1st. Every preposition, except en, 
 governs the infinitive. Then je suis d lire corresponds exactly to / am 
 reading, although, if translated literally, it would mean, I am to read, which 
 signifies a very different thing. But never mind the literal sense, take* only 
 the common acceptation attached to the expression, (76 1 ,) viz : 
 I am reading. [ read. I Je suis a lire. Je lis. 
 
 We are reading. We read. | Nous sommes a lire. N. lisons, 
 
 The component parts of this expression are quite familiar to the student, 
 ani bnt little practice will enable him to use them with ease. This modfc 
 of forming the present applies to every other tense. 
 
 Were yju reading ? I was. 
 
 Was he writing ? He was. 
 
 When they will be eating. 
 Call us, even if we were taking tea, 
 
 (even should we be, &c.) 
 Will they not be playing ? Yes, they 
 
 will. 
 
 8Kc is travelling, is she not ? 
 Vhev are not travelling, are they ? 
 
 Etiez-vous a lire ? J'et^.s a lire. 
 Etait-il a ecrire ? II etait a ecriio. 
 Quand ils seront a manger. 
 Appelez-nous quand memo nous 
 
 serions a prendre le the. 
 Ne seront-ils pas a jouer ? Si fait, 
 
 ils seront a jouer. 
 Elle est a voyager, n'est-ce pas ? 
 Est-ce qu'ils sont a voyager ? 
 
 (642, N. 2.) 
 Vnoa art listening, art thou not ? I Tu es a ecouter, n'est-ce pas ? 
 
 PARFAIT 1 ou PRESENT COMPOSE. 
 
 Study carefully the article, and the example at (33 1 , 53.) 
 
 $145. The English Perfect invariably conveys an allusion to the present , 
 the Parfait not only conveys an allusion to the present, but also refers tc 
 actions past at a time wholly expired, or to actions expressed by the English 
 imperfect. Hence, it corresponds to the English perfect and imperfect tenses. 
 The French use it- to express the daily occurrences of life. 
 
 1. How long is it since you tasted coffee? It is three monlJis since I tasted 
 any. Since I wrote to him, France has become a republic. ( 49 2 .) In 
 these sentences, and all similarly formed, although no negative is used, one 
 is evidently implied, or, at least, a negative turn may be given to them, for 
 the first means, You have NOT tasted coffee for how long a time ? The second 
 means, I nave NOT tasted any these three months. And the third, 1 have NOI 
 written to him for some time, during which France has become a republic 
 It is evident that the same negative turn cannot be given to, How long 
 is it since your co&sin set out ? since you dined ? you cannot say, has not set 
 out, you did not dine. Consequently, as no negative is implied, say, without 
 the NE, Combien y a-t-il que votre cousin est parti? que vous avez dlnet 
 
 In translating the sentences in which a negative is implied, but not ex 
 
 1 Frequently called Preterit Indlfini. J3ut as the word is foreign to the Enpliah 
 conjugation, it has no definite sense for the American pupil, while the word Par/ate 
 UHTOoponding to his own Perfect, offers at once a clear idea. 
 
! 7*t; 
 
 a 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 pressed, the French use NE, but suppress PAS (that is, they suppress 
 part of the negative, instead of suppressing it altogether as the English do. 
 Hence, the first is translated by Combieny a-t-il que vous N'avez goute de 
 cafe ? The second, by II y a trois mois queje N' en ai goute. The third, by 
 Depuis que je NE lui ai ecrit, la France est devenue repuUiqne. This con- 
 struction takes place only after il-y a and depuis que, followed by a definite 
 period of time, and when the French verb is in the parfait, (English perfect 
 tense.) In the present tense, PAS is used : as, II y a troia mois que je 
 goute PAS de cafe, It is three months since I taste no coffee, or, I have tastei 
 no coffee these three months. Depuis que je ne lui ecris PAS, la France 
 &C. Since I do not write to him, France has, &c. (49 2 , 06s. 114.) 
 
 2. The English perfect, formed from the present of the auxiliary and the 
 past participle, as, I have spoken ; We have written letters ; He has exa- 
 mined your cloth ; is the only one usually given in grammars; but there is 
 another, formed by the verbs to have and to be, prefixed to the present par 
 ticiple ; as, / have bee?i speaking ; we have been writing letters ; he has been 
 examining your cloth ; which, although not commonly found in grammars 
 and not quite synonymous with the other perfect, is, nevertheless, constantly 
 used in conversation. Some grammarians have introduced it, and call it 
 the compound form of the perfect. As the French have no tense similarly 
 constructed, they use the parfait, and say: Taiparle ; nous avons ecrit des 
 lettres ; il a examine votre drap. 
 
 3. The English say, 1 come from my store, to express that the act'-on ot 
 coming has just taken place. But, when any other verb is used, such as, 
 to speak, to write, &c., instead of saying, I come from speaking, from 
 writing, &c., they change it to, I have just spoken, written, &c. The French 
 say : Je viens de mon magasin, to signify that the action of coming has jnst 
 been performed, and they apply the same mode of expression for any other 
 action. Hence, they say: Je viens deparler, d'ecrire, &c. (49 2 , 06s. 115.) 
 
 Jt is hoped that this brief explanation will remove a difficulty, which, in 
 this case, the great difference of construction presents to many pupils. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. Futur. 
 
 $ 146. 1. The Future Tense, in all French verbs, ends as follows: roi, 
 ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. Therefore, as soon as we know one person, we also 
 know the others. (46 1 .) 
 
 2. The first person singular is formed from the infinitive by changing the 
 final r of the first and second conjugations; the ot;-, of the third, and the 
 rf of the fourth, into rat. Ex. : 
 
 (njiiiitive. 
 To love, 
 l\> finish, 
 To receive, 
 To restore, 
 
 Future. 
 
 I shall or will love. 
 I shall or will finish. 
 I shall or will receive. 
 I shall CT will restore. 
 
 Infnitif. Futur. 
 
 1st Conj. Aimer, j' aimer ai. 
 
 2d " Finir, je finirai. 
 
 3d " Recevoir, je recevral 
 
 4th " Rendre, je rendrai. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 505 
 
 Futurs. 
 Tu aimeras. Tu finiru?. 
 
 II aimera II finira. 
 
 Nous aimer<?ws. Nous fmirons. 
 
 Vous aimeres. Vous finirez. 
 
 Us aimeront. Us fimro?it. 
 
 Tu recevras Tu rendras. 
 
 II recevra. II rendra. 
 
 Nous recevrons. Ncus remb-ons, 
 
 Vous recevrez. Vous rendrez. 
 
 Us reccvro?it. (4G 1 .) Ils rcndro?if. 
 
 Thau shall or wilt love, ihou shall or 
 
 wilt finish. 
 He shall or will love, he shall or will 
 
 finish. 
 We shall or vs ill love, we shall or will 
 
 finish, 
 You shall cr will love, you shall or 
 
 will finish. 
 They shall or will love, they shall or 
 
 will finish. 
 Thou shalt or wilt receive, thou shalt 
 
 or wilt restore. 
 He shall or will receive, he shall or 
 
 will restore. 
 We shall or will receive, we shall or 
 
 will restore. 
 You shall or "will receive, you shall 
 
 or will restore. 
 They shall or will receive, they shall 
 
 or will restore. 
 
 The future tense is sometimes connected with if; sometimes with when, 
 
 3. In English, you may say: I will go, if he lends me his horse; or, If In 
 will lend me his horse. In the first: if he lends me, &c., lends is in the 
 present. In the second : If he will lend me, &c., will lend, appears to be 
 in the first future tense, although it is actually in the present ; for, will lend, 
 in that case, does not mean shall lend, but is willing to lend, or agrees to 
 lend. Scholars are very apt, in similar sentences, to take the word will aa 
 a sign of the future, and to use that tense in French, while they should use 
 the present. / will go if he lends me his Jiorse, is readily and correctly 
 translated by: J'irai s'i'Z me prtte son cheval. But, 1 will go if he will 
 lend me his horse, is as readily but incorrectly translated by : Tirai s'il me 
 pretera son cheval. It ought to be : J'irai s't'Z veut me prefer son cheval ; 
 using the present tense of vouloir. Si, in all similar phrases, must be fol- 
 lowed in French by the present tense, never by the future. (4G 2 , Obs. 105 
 and N.) 
 
 N. B. Translate if he, if they, by s't'Z and s'ils. In no other case is titf 
 i of si cut off by an apostrophe. 
 
 4. On the contrary, the verb following quand, when, must be in the future 
 tense, although the English present is then used; as, I will go when you 
 do, (or when you go.) J'irai quand vous irez, (not vous allez.} 
 
 II Pecrira si vous Vecrivez. 
 
 lie will write it if you do. 
 
 lie will write it when you do. 
 
 I will tell you of it, if you are here. 
 
 I will tei. you of it, when you are 
 
 here. 
 
 5. If, instead of 
 
 4:? 
 
 II Tecrira quand vous Ticrirez. 
 
 Je vous le dirai, si vous ctcs ici. 
 
 Je vous le dirai, quand vous se^ot 
 
 ici. (46 2 , Obs. 106.) 
 , quand, the words what, ce qui, cc quc, as *(*m a* 
 

 506 GRAMMATICAL SYKOP3I8. 
 
 Riissitot que, des que, after apres quo ; as, commc, u<keie, ou, arc used, l.hs 
 French future must be employed. 
 
 She will sing what you please. (46*, 
 
 06*. 107.) 
 He will return as soon as you start. 
 
 W<a will do it after you have done it. 
 
 Ho will put it where you please. 
 Ho will do it as you wish. 
 
 Eile chantera ce qui vous plaira, 
 Elle chantera ce que vous voudrez. 
 II reviendra aussitot que vous par- 
 
 tirez. 
 Nous le ferons apres que vous Fan 
 
 rez fait. 
 
 II le mettra ou vous voudrez. 
 II le fera comme vous le souhaiterez 
 
 $147. OF THE IMPERFECT. De VImparfait. 
 
 1. The Imperfect of the Indicative, in all French verhs, ends as fellows 
 
 ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient. (59 1 .) 
 
 Hence, as soon as one person is known, all the others may be formed. 
 
 2. The first person singular is formed from the present indicative bj 
 changing the final ons of the first person plural to ais. As : 
 
 Nous 
 
 JYJe 
 
 tu 
 
 il, elle, on 
 
 nous 
 
 vous 
 
 ils, elles 
 
 Avons, 
 
 avafc, 
 
 avais, 
 
 avait, 
 
 avions, 
 
 aviez, 
 
 avaient.(') 
 
 Croyon5j 
 
 croyafc, 
 
 croyais, 
 
 croyait, 
 
 croyions, 
 
 croyiez, 
 
 cryaicnt. 
 
 Bisons, 
 
 disafc, 
 
 disais, 
 
 disait, 
 
 disions, 
 
 disiez, 
 
 disaient. 
 
 Faisow5,(2) 
 
 faisai5,(2) 
 
 faisais, 
 
 faisait, 
 
 faisions, 
 
 faisiez, 
 
 faisaient. 
 
 from : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fesons,(2) 
 
 fesafc,( 2 ) 
 
 fesais, 
 
 fesait, 
 
 fesions, 
 
 fesiez, 
 
 fesaient. 
 
 We have begun with those verbs, because the scholar already knows soric 
 of their persons ; the four regular conjugations are as follows: 
 
 PRESENTS. 
 
 IMPERFECTS. 
 
 
 IMPARFAITS. 
 
 
 T .V "mis 
 
 ( I was speaking, 
 
 > Je parlais, 
 
 jiarlais, 
 
 parlait. 
 
 speaK, parlons 
 
 ( used to speak. 
 
 ) parlions, 
 
 parliez, 
 
 parlaient. 
 
 r 
 
 < I was finishing, 
 
 1 Je finissais, 
 
 finissais, 
 
 iinissait. 
 
 ' 
 
 ( used to finish. 
 
 J finissions, 
 
 finissiez, 
 
 finissaient 
 
 recci- >, recevons 
 
 ( I was receiving, 
 ( used to receive. 
 
 ) Je recevais, 
 ) recevions, 
 
 recevais, 
 receviez, 
 
 recevait. 
 recevaient. 
 
 sell, vendons 
 
 ( I was selling, 
 ( used to fell. 
 
 ) Je vendais, 
 ) vendions, 
 
 vendais, 
 vendiez, 
 
 vendait. 
 veudttient 
 
 3 The only exception to this rule 
 
 is: 
 
 
 
 We are. 
 
 I was, or 
 
 ) J' eta is, 
 
 ttais, 
 
 etait. 
 
 Nous sommes. 
 
 iisevl to be. 
 
 ) etions, 
 
 etiez, 
 
 e latent. 
 
 1 The orthography of the first and second persons singular, and of the third persoL 
 singular and plural, of the imperfect, was formerly je parlois, tu parlois, il parloil, 
 ils parloient. Some authors still persist in this way of spelling, but they ought no! 
 to be imitated. The orthography w* f ollow was first proposed in 1675, by a lawyai 
 of tho name of Berain, and has since oeen adopted by the generality of French au 
 thors. According to the ancient orthography, the conditionals, and other words, a* 
 j'aimerais, paraitre, disparaltre, faible, monnaie, Anglais, Francais, Hollandais, 
 Tflandais, &c., were written: j^aimerois, paroltre, disparoltre, foible, monnoic* 
 Anglois, Francois, Hollandois, Irlandois, &c. 
 
 2 Faisais, fesais, whether spelt fat or fe, the first syllable in the plum! of tn 
 present, in all the imperfect future, and conditionnel, is pronounced fe., tho e beivj< 
 mutn 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 507 
 
 4. The imperiect expresses an action begun, but not ended at the psu* 
 lime spoken of or else as yet going on. 1 was writing at noon, means, i 
 Had begun to write, Init I had not finished at noon. I used to ride when I was 
 in the country, means, I continued to ride, &c. The English given above, 
 corresponds to the French imperfect, and if it were always employed, there 
 would be no difficulty in the use of the French tense ; but the other form 
 of the English imperfect, viz : 1 spoke, I finished, I received, 1 sold, is fre- 
 quently used ; and thence the difficulty arises ; for, 1 spoke, I finished, &c., 
 mu; be translated by the French imperfect, only when they mean I was 
 f peaking, or used to speak ; was finishing, or used to finish, &c. (59 1 , &c.) 
 
 5. Wh3n the first person plural of the present indicative ends in ions, aa 
 n3ua oublions, we forget ; nous rions, we laugh ; nous prions, we pray ; 
 the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, have- 
 double i. (GO 1 .) Ex. Nous oubliions, nous riions, &c. 
 
 6. When the same person plural ends in yons, put an i after :he y. As, 
 Nous croyo?is, we think ; nous croyions, we were thinking ; nous employons, 
 use ; nous employions, were using. And likewise, nous nous asscyions, 
 nous e?ivoyio?is, essayions, and fuyio?is , voyions, &c. (60 1 .) 
 
 $ 118. POTENTIAL, IMPERFECT. Conditional. 
 
 1. In every French verb it ends in : rais, rais, rait, rions, riez, raieni. 
 
 2. Its first person singular is formed by adding s to the first person singulai 
 of the French futur. (See 46 1 , 2 , &c. 146.) Futur, rai; conditionnel, rais. 
 J aurai, j'aurais. Consequently the conditionnel is irregular when the 
 future is. ($ 146.) 
 
 I should have, thou wouldst have, he 
 
 or she would have. 
 We should have, you would have, 
 
 they would have. 
 
 1 should be, thou wouldst be, he or 
 
 she would be, 
 We should be, you would be, they 
 
 would be. 
 t should speak, thou wouldst speak, 
 
 he or she would speak. 
 We should speak, you would speak, 
 
 they would speak. 
 
 3. As its name implies, the conditionnel is always connected with a con- 
 dition either expressed or understood. When si (if) accompanies it, that 
 si must be followed by the French imperfect, 1 regardless of the English 
 ic rise. 
 
 i TV e have already seen (402. Qbs. 105) that si, (if, meaning granting, that^^s.', 
 Connects \\iefutur and present. Now, we add, that si connects the condition-Mi 
 and, 4tnnarfa.it. When si, however, means whether, it is followed by the condi- 
 lionnel. f do not know if (whether) I would go, even if (supposing that) I ttrora 
 tarited. J'e ne sais pas 51" j'irais (cond.) moine gj j'ctais (imparf ) invite. 
 
 J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurait. 
 
 Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils on 
 elles auraient. 
 
 Je serais, tu serais, il on elle serait. 
 
 Nous serions, vons striez, ils ou ellea 
 
 seraient. 
 Je parlerais, tu parlerais, il ou elle 
 
 parlerait. 
 Nous parlerions, vous parleriez, ila 
 
 ou elles parleraient. 
 
608 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 If I had money I would ha,ve a new 
 
 coat. 
 r f thbu Qouldst do thi'3 thou wouldst 
 
 do that. 
 
 If he could lie would. 
 if he would he could. 
 
 Si j' avals de Taigent j'aurais ua 
 
 habit neuf. 
 Si tu savais faire ceci tu voudfoia 
 
 faire cela. 
 
 S'il pouvait il voudrait. 
 S'il voulait il pourrait. 
 
 4. COULD and WOULD, connected with the potential, always allude to a 
 future action r and are then translated by the conditio?mel or by the imper 
 feet after si. But COULD and WOULD, alluding to a past, instead of a future 
 action, are not to be rendered by the conditionnel, but by a past tense. 1 
 COULI, by fai puje pouvais, &c. I WOULD, by fai vouhi -je vou- 
 
 MlSj &C. 
 
 f wDuld go if I could. 
 
 Did John and his sister go to the 
 
 party last night ? No ; John could 
 
 not go, consequently she would 
 
 not go. (62 2 , N. at page 326.) 
 
 J'irais, (cond.) si je pouvais. (in pa.) 
 
 Jean et sa so3ur sont-ils alles a la 
 
 partie hier soir ? Non ; Jean ne 
 
 pouvait pas y aller, consequem- 
 
 ment elle n'a pas voulu y aller. 
 
 5. When I wish is followed by the English imperfect, it usually means. 
 I should like to, and must be translated by je voudrais, (G2 2 , N. 2.) 
 I wish I knew it I had it. Je voudrais le savoir 1'avoir. (R. 3.1 
 
 (28 2 , 065. 65.) 
 I wish he knew it. ( 15112.) Je voudrais qu'il le sut. 
 
 $ 149. POTENTIAL MOOD, PERFECT TENSE. Condiltonn 
 
 Compose. 
 
 1. This is formed from the present of the conditional of the auxiliary, an 
 the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. (60 2 .) 
 
 I should, thou wouldst, he or she 
 
 would have spoken. 
 We should, you would, they would 
 
 have spoken. 
 
 I should, thou wouldst, j 
 
 he or she would > departed. 
 
 have ) 
 
 We should, you) 
 
 would, they would S departed. 
 
 have ) 
 
 If I had received my money, I would 
 
 have bought new shoes, 
 ?.f you had risen early, you would 
 
 not have caught a cold. 
 
 If oho had come, would you have 
 
 gone ? 
 
 c Tad he been seen, ha would have 
 been taken. 
 
 J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurau 
 
 parle. 
 Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils 
 
 elles auraient parle. 
 
 Je serais, tu serais,) parti ; 
 il ou elle serait \ fern, partie. 
 
 " 
 
 Nous serions, votis) pi. max. partis; 
 seriez, ils ou elles > pi. fern, par- 
 seraient ) ties. 
 
 Si j'avais re$u mon argent, j'aurais 
 
 achete des souliers neufs. 
 Si vous vous etiez leve de bonno 
 
 heure, vous ne vous seriez pas en- 
 
 rhume. 
 Si eLe etait venue, seriez-vous parti \ 
 
 S'il ivait eto vu, il aurait gte pria 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 509 
 
 2. With the conditifltmel compose, si, (if,) is generally followed by thf 
 pluperfect, as seen fibove. 
 
 3. Although grammarians usually give the imperfect of the potential 
 with its four signs, would, could, should, might, as a translation of the con- 
 ditionnel, students must not infer that the single French expression corre- 
 sponds accurately to the four English ones. Would usually stands for the 
 conditionnel, and so does should, when it does not mean ought to; bat 
 could and might ought always to he expressed by ihe French verb pouvoir. 
 
 I would or should go, if I could. 
 
 I should or ought to go, if I could. 
 
 I could go, if I would. 
 
 I might go, if I would. 
 
 1 ought to write, if I could. ($ 14C.) 
 
 J'irais si je pouvais. 
 Je devrais y aller si jc pouvais. 
 Je pourrais y aller si je voulais. 
 Je pourrais peut-etre y aller, &c. 
 Je devrais ecrire si je pouvciis. 
 
 Let these be models of those different acceptations, and for the compost : 
 
 I would or shou'.a have gone, if I had 
 
 been able. 
 I should (ought to) have gone, had I 
 
 been able. 
 
 I could have gone, if I had wished. 
 I might have gone, if I had wished. 
 
 J'y serais alle sifavais pu. 
 J'aurais du y aller sifavais pu. 
 
 Vaurait pu y aller si j'avais voulu. 
 J'aurais peut-etre pu y aller si j' avals 
 voulu. 
 
 4. When I wish is followed by the English pluperfect, i.t means I should 
 have liked, and must be translated by faurais voulu . . . 
 
 I wish I had been able to go. 
 
 1 wish I had known it. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) 
 
 We wish she had been able to go. 
 
 \ r ou vt '?b we had known it sooner. 
 
 J'aurais voulu pouvoir y aller. 
 J'aurais voulu le savoir. (R. 3.) 
 Nous aurions voulu qu'elle peut y 
 
 aller. 
 Vous auriez voulu quo nous le 
 
 sussions plus tot (que nous Veu*- 
 
 sions su.) 
 
 $150. OF THE IMPERATIVE. De Vlmperatif. 
 
 1. In English, by omitting tho nominative you of the second person 
 of the indicative mood, present tense, you obtain the second person plural 
 of the Imperative. As : Indicative present, you come, imperative, come ; 
 you go, go; you write, write, &c. It is the same in French. Hence, 
 from vous venez, by omitting the nominative, vous, you obtain vcncz for tha 
 imperative, second person plural. From vous allez, allez ; from vous 
 icrivez, ecrivez, &c. 
 
 How do you obtain the 2d person plu- Comment obtencz-vous la 2do per- 
 
 ral of the imperative I sonne plur. de 1'imperatif ? 
 
 By omitting, as in English, the nomi- En omettant, comme en Anglais, 
 
 native, you, of the present indi- le nominatif vous de I'indicatif 
 
 cative. present. 
 
 Are there any excepttcns to this rule 1 Y a-t-il des exceptions a cctfo regie f 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 Yea ihere are four in French, viz: Oui, il y en a quitre en Fran gals 
 
 savoir : 
 
 INDICATIF. IMI>ERATIF. 
 
 Vcus avez, you have. -Ayez, have. 
 Vr>us savez, you know. Sachez, know. 
 
 INDICATIF. 
 Vous ttes, you are. Soyez, be. 
 
 Vous voulez, you will. Veuillez, b r / 
 
 willing. 
 
 N, B. In reflective verbs there are two pronouns, vous, of the same per 8 
 Bon, a nominative and objective one ; Vous vous habillez, you dress your- 
 self. When, to form the imperative, yov omit the nominative vous, you^ 
 the objective vous, yourself, remains with the verb, viz : habillez-t'OM?, 
 dress yourself ; amusez-vous, enjoy yourself. (43 1 .) 
 
 HINT. We have in this article put a few questions and answers in 
 French, to show the teacher and student how easily it can be done, and to 
 induce them to attempt it. 
 
 2. The first person plural is in French obtained by dropping the nomi- 
 native nous, we. Hence, nous venons, we come, becomes venous, let us 
 come ; nous allons, we go : allons, let us go ; nous ecrivons, we write ; 
 Kcrivo?is, let us write, &c. 
 
 Comment obtenez-vous la Ire per- j En omettant le nominatif nous du 
 sonne pluriel de i'impcratif ? I present de 1'indicatif. 
 
 3. Ayons, let us have ; soyons, let us be ; sachons, let us know ; veuillons, 
 'ct us be willing, are the four exceptions to this rule. 
 
 4. Let me, lojssez-moi, followed both in English and French by an infini- 
 ti"e, as, Let me see, laissez-moi voir ; let me go, laissez-moi oiler ; let me 
 be, laissez-moi etre / let me have, laissez-moi avoir ; let me read, laissez- 
 moi lire, &c., may be considered as the first person singular of the impera- 
 tive. This is an innovation, I know, therefore I merely suggest its adoption. 
 If introduced in the imperative of every verb, the expression, let me, laissez- 
 moi, so frequently used in both languages, will soon become perfectly 
 familiar. But if not placed there, as it has no other appropriate situation; 
 it is usually overlooked and not learned. 
 
 What can be considered as the first 
 person singular of the imperative ? 
 
 Let me, followed by the infinitive of 
 the verb to be conjugated. 
 
 Let me do it tell it to them. 
 
 Que peut-on considerer comme la 
 Ire pers. sing, de 1'imperatif ? 
 
 Laissez-moi, suivi par 1 infinitif du 
 verbe qu'on conjugue. 
 
 Laissez-moi le faire le leur dire. 
 
 5. The second person singular is obtained, in all French verbs, from the 
 first person singular of the indicative, by omitting the pronoun je, I 
 
 Present. Imperative. I Present Imperat. 2d pers. sixg. 
 
 I speak, speak thou. I Je parle, parle. 1 
 
 i When the second person singular of the imperative ends in e, it takes s after it, 
 Before tho relative pronouns en, y. Ex. Offrts en a to, stzur, offer some to thy sister, 
 portes-y tes livres, carry thy books thither. But when en is a preposition, the impe- 
 rative takes no s. Ex. Donn*, en cctte occasion, des preuvcs de ton zele ; Give, o 
 this otnasion, proofs of thy zeal. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 511 
 
 Imperative. 
 come thou. 
 perceive thou. 
 take ihou. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je viens, 
 J'aj.er5ois, 
 Je prends, 
 
 Imperat. %d pera. sing. 
 viens. 
 
 prends. 
 
 I come, 
 I perceive 
 I take, 
 
 The five following verbs must be excepted from this rule : fai, I have , 
 imperat. aie, have thou ; je suis, I am ; sois, be thou ; je vais, I go va, go 
 thou ; je sai's, I know ; sache, know thou ; je vcux, I am willing ; veuille, 
 be thou willing. 
 
 The imperative va takes s, when it is followed by the relative pronoun y. 
 x. Vas-y, go thou thither ; but when there is another verb after the pro- 
 noun y, va must be written without an s. Ex. Va y donner Vordre, go 
 thither to give the order ; va y faire un tour, go thither to take a turn. In 
 the expression va-t'en, go away, an apostrophe must be placed ^after the 
 letter t, and not a hyphen, as it is not here the euphonic t, but te, an apos- 
 trophe supplying the place of c before a vowel. 
 
 6. The third persons singular and plural are like the same persons of tho 
 subjunctive present, ($ 151 1,) omitting the antecedent which governs that 
 mood, but retaining the que, and the pronouns il, Us, die, elles, on. Tho 
 other persons admit of no pronouns before them. Let him go, qu'il aille ; 
 ibt them come, quails mcnnent ; let anyone speak, qu'on parle ; come, 
 eiens ; let us see, voyons ; know, saclicz. 
 
 7. Imperative of the five irregular verbs : 
 
 Let me have, have (thou), 
 
 et him have. 
 
 Laissez-moi avoir,aie, qu'il ait. 
 
 Let us have, have (ye), 
 
 et them h. 
 
 Ayons, aycz, qu'ils aiont. 
 
 Lot me be, "be (thou), 
 
 et him be. 
 
 Laissez-moi ctre, sois, qu'il soil. 
 
 Let us be, be (ye), 
 
 et them bo. 
 
 Voyons, soyez, qu'ils soient. 
 
 Let me go, go (thou), 
 
 et her go. 
 
 Laissez-moi allcr, va, qu'elle aille. 
 
 Let us go, go (ye), 
 
 et them go. 
 
 Allons, allez, qu-elles aillent. 
 
 Let me know(thou), 
 
 e tone know. 
 
 L.-rnoi savoir, sache, qu'on sache. 
 
 know, . 
 
 
 
 Let us k., know (ye), 
 
 et all know. 
 
 Sachons, snchez, quetoussachent 
 
 Let me be be willing, 
 
 et him will. 
 
 Laissez-moi veuille, qu'il veuille. 
 
 willing, 
 
 
 vouloir. 
 
 Let us be w., be willing, 
 
 et them will. 
 
 Veuillons, veuillez, qu'ils veuillent 
 
 8. Examples for the regular verbs : 
 
 Present 
 
 Le f me 
 Laissez-ir- i parler, 
 finir, 
 recevoir, 
 perdre, 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 You 
 
 apeak, 
 
 finish, 
 
 receive 
 
 lose, 
 
 vous 
 
 parlez, 
 
 finissez, 
 
 recevez, 
 
 perdez, 
 
 thou 
 parle, 
 
 finis, 
 
 recois, 
 
 perds, 
 
 Let us 
 
 parlons, 
 finissons, 
 recevons, 
 perdons, 
 
 you 
 
 parlez. 
 
 finissez. 
 
 recenez 
 
 perdez 
 
 Let me not 
 break, 
 build, 
 owe, 
 
 i eetore , 
 
 NEGATIVELY. 
 
 Nemelaissezpas Do (thou) not 
 
 casser, no casse pas, 
 
 batir, ne batis pas, 
 
 devoir, 
 rondre, 
 
 ne dois pas, 
 ne rends pas, 
 
 NEGATIVEME^I. 
 
 Let us not.... Do (you) not 
 ne cassons pas, ne casse? pas. 
 nebatissons pas, ne batisa*zpa 
 ne devons pas, ne devez pas. 
 ne rendons pas, K9 rendez pas 
 
512 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 Affirmatively, the objective pronouns arc placed alter : (V5 54, 55, 
 
 Let me 
 took for it, 
 punish them, 
 perceive some, 
 eel? ft to yon, 
 go there, to it, y aller, 
 take him there, 1'y mener 
 
 Laissez-moi Do (thou) ... 
 
 le chercher, cherche-le, 
 
 les punir, punis-moi, 
 
 en apercevoir, apercois-en, 
 
 vousle vencre, vends-le lui, 
 
 vas-y, (O6.at5 ) allons-y 
 menes-v-moi, menons-v-en 
 
 Let us~. . . Do.- .. 
 
 cherchons-le, chercliez-l'y. 
 punissons-les, puriissez-nous, 
 apercevons-en, apercevez-en-uu 
 vendons-la-leur, vendez-nouH w 
 allez-y. 
 
 inenez-nous-v 
 
 Negatively, the objective pronouns are placed before. 
 
 Let me not Ne me laissez pas 
 
 Do not 
 
 Let us not.... 
 
 Do not. ... 
 
 bring it, 
 
 Papporter, 
 
 ne les apporte 
 
 ne leur appor- 
 
 n'en apportaa 
 
 
 
 pas, 
 
 tons rien, 
 
 plus. 
 
 jo there, to it, 
 
 y aller, 
 
 n'y va pas, 
 
 n'y allons pas, 
 
 n'y allezplus. 
 
 lend him any, 
 
 lui en preter, 
 
 ne" m'en prete 
 
 ne le lui pretona 
 
 ne a leur pretci 
 
 
 
 pas, 
 
 plus, 
 
 pas. 
 
 awe them, to 
 
 les leur devoir, 
 
 ne lui dois rien, 
 
 ne leur en de- 
 
 ne la lui devea 
 
 them, 
 
 
 
 vons pas, 
 
 pas. 
 
 Imperalif des Verbes 
 
 Rejleclds. 
 
 
 Let me 
 
 Laissez-moi 
 
 thyself, 
 
 ourselves, 
 
 yourself-ves. 
 
 dress myself, 
 
 m'habiller, 
 
 habilie-toi, 
 
 habillons-nous, 
 
 habillez-vous. 
 
 cure myself, 
 
 me guerir, 
 
 gueris-toi, 
 
 guerisgons-nous, 
 
 guerissez-voua. 
 
 eit down, 
 
 m'asseoir, 
 
 assie<ls-toi, 
 
 asseyons-nous, 
 
 asseyez-voug. 
 
 put myself, 
 
 mo rnettre, 
 
 mets-toi, 
 
 mettons-nous, 
 
 mettez-vous. 
 
 go away, 
 
 m'en aller, 
 
 va-t'en,(N. B. at i.) allons-nous-en, 
 
 allez-vous-en. 
 
 NEGATIVEMENT. 
 
 Let me not No mo laissez pas Do not Let us not Do not 
 
 go to bed, me coucher, ne te touche ne nous cou- ne v. couchezp 
 
 pas, chons pas, 
 
 runaway, m'enfuir, ne t'enfuis pas, nenousenfuyons ne v. enfuyez p. 
 
 pas, 
 
 laugh at. me rire de ne te ris pas de, ne n. rions p. de, nev.riezp.de 
 
 go away , rii'en aller, ne t'en va pas, nen.enallonsp. ne v.enallezpas 
 
 9. Let himhave, qu'il ait, Let us have, ayons, having always been used in 
 English-French grammars, is it not strange, that let me have, should not 
 have been introduced ? 
 
 10. Let me may also be translated by the second person singular, viz : 
 laisse-moi aller, let (thou) me go ; laisse-moi prendre, let (thou) me 
 take, &c. 
 
 11. Let him have it, may be translated in two ways: first, by qu j il Vait, 
 as it is generally in grammars, or, secondly, by laissez-le T avoir. Let us 
 write them ; may be rendered, first, by ecrivons-les, or laissez-nous les icrire. 
 These expressions, however, are not synonymous. The first, meaning, 
 we must set about writing them, the second, requesting leave to do it. 
 
 12. Come and see me, do. Take your pencil and write, are expressions 
 frequently used in English. The French sometimes translate them literally 
 and say : prenez votre crayon et ccrivcz ; but they more frequently put the 
 ieeond verb in the infinitive mood instead of the imperative, as : Prenez 
 rotre crayon pour ecrire ; venez me voir, je vous en prie, &c. ($ 54, Except. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 513 
 
 * 151. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Mode Subjonctif. 
 PRESENT TENSE. Present. 
 
 \. In all French verbs, it ends in e, es, e, tores, iez, cut. 
 
 To form it, attend to this Rule : 1. 
 
 1st part. The THIED person plural is exactly like that of the FRESEOT 
 INDICATIVE ; from which, by dropping the nt, you obtain thcjirst and third 
 persons singular. An 5 added to either, 'gives the second. 
 
 2d part. The first and second persons plural are exactly like those of the 
 inperfsct. 
 
 The following are regularly formed : 
 
 They ils quoiqu'ils je 
 
 tu 
 
 il 
 
 AOUS 
 
 vous 
 
 come, viennent, viennent 
 
 , vienne, 
 
 viennes, 
 
 'ienne, 
 
 \cnionc. 
 
 venicz. 
 
 drink, boivent, boivent, 
 
 boive, 
 
 boives, 
 
 Doive, 
 
 ouvions, 
 
 uvioz. 
 
 Exceptions, eight in all : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 . It is time for them to go ; 
 
 mo to go, 
 
 thee to go, 
 
 him to go, 
 
 us to go, 
 
 you to go 
 
 II est temps quails aillent; 
 
 j'aille, 
 
 tu ailles, 
 
 il allies, 
 
 n.allions, 
 
 v. alliez. 
 
 2. Although they can; 
 
 I can, 
 
 thou canst, 
 
 he, 
 
 \ve, 
 
 you can. 
 
 (Juoiqu'ils puissent ; 
 
 puisse, 
 
 puisses, 
 
 puisse, 
 
 puissions, 
 
 puissie2 
 
 3. In case they are worth ; 
 
 I am, 
 
 thou art, 
 
 he is, 
 
 we are, 
 
 you are 
 
 En cas qu r ils vaillent;' 
 
 vaiile, 
 
 vaiile?, 
 
 vaiile, 
 
 valions, 
 
 valiez. 1 
 
 1. He wishes them to have ; 
 
 me to, 
 
 thee to, 
 
 her to, 
 
 us to, 
 
 you tc. 
 
 II vent qu r \\s aient ; 
 
 aie, 
 
 aies, 
 
 ait, 
 
 ayons, 
 
 ayez. 
 
 5. On condition they will : 
 
 I, 
 
 thou, 
 
 he, her, 
 
 we, 
 
 you. 
 
 A condition qu'ilsvemUent ; 
 
 veuillo, 
 
 veuilles, 
 
 veuille,' 
 
 voulions, 
 
 voulicz. 
 
 B. Not that they know of; 
 
 I know of, 
 
 thou, 
 
 he, she, 
 
 we, 
 
 you. 
 
 Pas qu'ils sachent; 
 
 sache, 
 
 saches, 
 
 sache, 
 
 sachions, 
 
 sac h iez. 
 
 T. Without their b&ing so ; 
 
 my, 
 
 thy, 
 
 his, her, 
 
 our, 
 
 your. 
 
 Sans quails le soient ; 
 
 lo sois, 
 
 le sois, 
 
 lo soil, 
 
 le soyons, 
 
 le soyez. 
 
 8. They had better do it ; 
 
 I had, 
 
 thou, 
 
 he, 
 
 we. 
 
 you. 
 
 11 vaut mieux gu'ils le fassent ; 
 
 le fasse, 
 
 le fasses, 
 
 le fasse. 
 
 fassipns. 
 
 fassiez. 
 
 2. The use of the subjunctive mood (as its name implies) depends in 
 French, on some antecedent, ending with que or qui, which antecedent 
 governs that mooo. The antecedent rray be a verb or a conjunction. 2 As 
 the indicative is the mood of affirmation, the subjunctive is the mood of 
 indecision, of doubt. If then the verbal antecedent affirms with precision, with 
 positive-ness , the indicative must be used after que or qui ; but if the verbal 
 antecedent expresses indecision, doubt, then the subjunctive is to be used 
 after the connecting word que or qui. For instance, when we say : [know 
 he is here, I am certain that he is here, a positive affirmation is expressed, by 
 the antecedent, and on that account no other turn could be given to the 
 second verb, is ; it would be contradictory to say: / am certain lie may be 
 here. Hence, the indicative is used after; and *ve must say: Je sain, ji 
 
 1 Prevaloir,* to prevail, is regular in the present of the subjunctive, and forrrood 
 from prevalent, they prevail. 
 
 2 The conjunction if (si) is the most frequent attendant of the English subjunc- 
 CITO ; but in French that mood is seldom governed by si, which is, we know, ug-jally 
 acnnectad w.Uh the present nnd imperfect indicative, (462, Qbs. 105$ 1-18, N. 1.) 
 
5J4 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 mis certain qu'il est id. But when you say : It is possible, il is doubtful 
 ihat he is here, indecision, doubt, is expressed by the antecedent, and another 
 urn may be given to the second verb, such as : It is passible he may fe 
 here, for him to be here It is doubtful whether he is here or not ; his being 
 here is doubtful, and consequently the subjunctive must be used after it. 
 ll est possible, il est douteux, qu'il soit id. Certainty or uncertainty is then 
 the great theoretical criterion by which the use of the subjunctive is deter- 
 mined or ascertained. This, however, does not apply to the antecedents 
 that always require the subjunctive, but merely to some particular cases 
 that will be further explained. 
 
 Grammarians have given rules based on the signification of verbs, saying 
 that the subjunctive is to be used if the antecedent expresses surprise, de- 
 spair, complaint, admiration, will, wish, consent, forbidding, hindrance, 
 doubt, fear, ignorance, apprehension, order, command, and they generally 
 wind up this comprehensive enumeration by the very definite expression, or 
 u7iy affection of the mind. To find the true sense of a verb, requires a gram- 
 matical acumen, not generally possessed by pupils ; therefore, as something 
 more practical is desirable, let pupils attend to the following Rule, as calcu- 
 lated, in most cases, to direct them accurately. 
 
 RULE 2. When the verb in the second part is connected with 
 1. May, 2. should, 3. whether, \ or, if not connected, can 
 
 4. forme to be, thee to be, or any other infinitive, (be turned to any of them, 
 
 5. my being, thy being, or any other present par- f as shown above, then 
 
 ticiple or noun ; ) that second part must be 
 
 in the subjunctive mood in French ; but in the indicative, if no such alteration 
 can be made. As a further illustration, let us examine the following sen- 
 tences. 
 
 f The second part, to be laughed at, 
 1. 1 deserve to le laughed at. 1 be dhcred but mark the di(rer . 
 
 8. I hope to be laughed at. j ence ; n ^ ahcralion . 
 
 1. I deserve that people should laugh at me. 
 
 2. I hope that people will (not should) laugh at me. 
 
 The word will gives to the second sentence a decisive, a precise meaning, 
 which is not conveyed by the \vord should in the first. Hence the second 
 is translated in French by ihe future of the indicative, the first by the sub- 
 junctive present. 
 
 1. Je merite qu'on se moque de moi. (sub.)) Do the two verbs, I de&erv 
 
 2. J'espere qu'on se moquerade moi. (ind.)f and I hope, express affections 
 of the soul or not ? How inadequate are those wholesale rules ! And how 
 perplexed must the student be when he has no other guide ! 
 
 As a first corollary to Rule 2, we say that, after a French verb, followed 
 by que or qui, if the fourth or fifth English form above is to be translated, it 
 mu3t be by the French subjunctive. He wishes me to laugh, il vest qusj* 
 rie. He is pleased at our speaking, il est content que nous parlions. 
 
 Asa second corollary, that, after a French verb followed by que or qui s 
 the infinitive of a passive verb, that can be changed to should, must be trana 
 lated by the French subjunctive, with the indefinite pronoun o?i as a nomf- 
 tiatlve, as in the example, / deserve to be laughed at. (77 1 , Note.) 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 515 
 
 3. When the antecedent is a superlative, or a word having a superlative 
 flio.'ining; such as le seul, V unique, the only one; le premier, the first, 
 le dernier, the last, and any ordinal jiumber, deuxiime, &,c., the subjunctive 
 follows. 
 
 The gospel is the finest present that 
 
 God has made to man. 
 Il is the f-rst, the last, the only 
 VD ume that we have. 
 
 L'vangile est le plus beau present 
 
 que Dieu ait fait aux hommes. 
 C'est le premier, le dernier, le seid 
 volume que nous ayons. 
 
 4. When the antecedent is a unipersonal verb, or used unipersonally :-- 
 
 lie must come. 
 
 It is suitable he should do it. 
 
 It is right for him to know it. 
 
 II fa ut qu'il vienne. 
 
 II convient qu'il le fasse. 
 
 II est juste qu'il le sachc. 
 
 Except: 11 s'ensuit, it follows; il resulte, it results; il arrive, there 
 happens, and il est, accompanied by an adjective denoting evidence, certainty, 
 probability; such as ; cZair, clear; certain, certain ; evident, evident ; vrai, 
 true ; probable, probable, &c., which govern the indicative, when affirma- 
 tively used, brt follow, when interrogative, negative, or conditional. 
 
 It follows from it that you are my 
 
 friend. 
 It often happens that one is deceived. 
 
 II s'ensuit, il resulte, que vous etea 
 
 mon ami. 
 II arrive souvcnt qu'on est trompe. 
 
 5. When the antecedent is .interrogative, negative, or conditional. (The 
 words peu, little ; d pcine, hardly, having a negative meaning, come under 
 this rule.) 
 
 I believe we have some. 
 
 Do you believe we have any? 
 
 I do not think that we have any. 
 
 but few men who 
 
 a scholar who can 
 
 Je crois que nous en avons. 
 Croyez-vous que nous en ayons ? 
 Je ne crois pas que nous en ayons. 
 Nous avons peu d'hommes qui puis- 
 
 sent le faire. 
 II a a peine un dcolier qui puisse le 
 
 traduire. 
 
 is: *S'il est vrai que vous Vayez ; while 
 is : S'il est vrai que vous 1'avez ; the in- 
 
 We have 
 
 do it. 
 He has hard!; 
 
 translate it. 
 
 If it be true that you havr it, 
 If it is true that you have it, 
 dicative is used because there is no supposition, no condition implied, the 
 meaning being positive, Sines you have it, and not conditional, as in the 
 first sentence, which means : Should you have it. 
 
 It is not certain, true, sure, that you 
 
 be my friend. 
 
 Ore i<3 not frequently deceived by 
 one's friends. 
 
 II tt'est pas certain, vrai, sur quo 
 vous soyez mon ami. 
 
 II n'arrive pas souvent qu'on soil 
 trompe par ses amis. 
 
 6. Any verb expressing fear, such as craindre, to fear ; avoir peur, to 
 be afraid ; when used affirmatively, governs the subjunctive with ne before 
 it. But ne is not used if the phrase is interrogative, negative, or condi- 
 tional. (78 1 .) 
 
 7. When the verbs mentioned at 6 are used negatively, they govern the 
 subjunctive without nc. (78 4 .) 
 
616 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 8. The \erbs douter, to doubt, and ?iier. to deny, when negative, requiia 
 ne before the subjunctive. (78 4 .) 
 
 9. The conjunction que employed in the second member of a sentence 
 to avoid the repetition of a conjunction used in the first, governs the same 
 mood as the word it stands for. (78 3 .) 
 
 10. Tho word que, used to avoid the repetition of si and of ether con- 
 junctions such as ajin que, soit quc, sans que, avant que, &c., governs th 
 ub*unctive. (78 3 .) 
 
 1... Quelque, whatever, wnatsoever however, is connected Li threo ways 
 and aiways governs the subjunctive. 
 
 1st WAY. Quelque (before an adjective, used \vithout a noun) is indecli 
 nablc. (80 1 .) 
 
 2d WAY. Quelque before a noun (accompanied or not by an adjectivet 
 agrees with that noun. (80 1 .) 
 
 3d WAY. Immediately before a verb, whatever, whatsoever, isrendeied, in 
 French, by two words, quel and que. And then, que? t alone, agrees with 
 the subject of the verb que is invariable. (80 1 .) 
 
 12. As the antecedent belongs to the indicative mood, it is necessary to 
 give rules for the correspondence of the tenses of the indicative and sub 
 junctive. 
 
 1. If the antecedent is present or future, it governs the present or perfect 
 of the subjunctive. 
 
 You must come. 
 
 You will have to come, (be necessary 
 
 for you.) 
 You must have come when 1 was out. 
 
 Ilfaut que vous veniez. 
 llfaudra que vous veniez. 
 
 11 faut (ilfaudra) que vous soycz 
 
 venu quandfetais dehors. 
 It a condition is annexed, then use the imperfect and pluperfect. 
 
 I do not think you would do it if you 
 
 were not compelled. 
 I do not think you would have done it 
 
 had you not been compelled. 
 
 Je ne crois pas que vous le fissiet. 
 
 si Von ne vous y contraignait. 
 Je ne crois pas que vous I'eussies 
 
 fait si Ton ne vous y eut contraint. 
 
 2. The imperfect, the past tenses.) mi / , -\ ^ r + 
 
 , , ,1 . J ' J . ' S Ihe imperfect and pluperfect. (79*.) 
 
 id the condiiwnnels require \ 
 
 and 
 
 I was not certain you would come. 
 I was not sure you would have come. 
 
 I wish you had more fortitude. 
 (62 2 , N. 2.) 
 
 Je iielais pas sur que vous vinssiez. 
 Je n'etais pas sur que vous fussies 
 
 venu. 
 
 Je voudrais que vous eussiez plus de 
 fermete. 
 
 13. Whatever or whatsoever (meaning all things soever] is generally ex- 
 pressed by quelque chose que ou quoi que, quoi que ce soit que, when at the 
 beginning of a sentence, and only by quoi que ce soit oufut, after a verb. 
 The subjunctive follows that French antecedent. (80 1 .) 
 
 Whoever, whomsoever, qui que ce soit, qui que ce fut, also governs ihe 
 flibmnctive. (80 1 .) 
 
GRAMMATICAL 6 If NO PS IS. 517 
 
 14. h the verb which follows yui, que, do?it, de ce, ou } expresses doul)l t 
 Wicertaijity, &c., use the subjunctive. If not, the indicative. (80 2 .) 
 
 15. The subjunctive is employed at the beginning of a sentence, tc 
 express surprise, a desire, or an imprecation ; and also instead of quaw! 
 memc, though, or si, if, suppressed. (SO 2 .) 
 
 IMPERFECT. Imparfait. (79 } .) 
 
 V >1&2. The Imperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the prottnl, 
 69 1 , $ 153,) by changing the final ai into asse, for the verbs of the first con- 
 jugation, and by adding se to those of the other three conjugations. As 
 the preterit has four sets of terminations : ist, ai; 3d, is; 3d, us; 4th, 
 ins ; this imperfect has also four. The first set, as with the y.retdrit, 
 'DO longs exclusively to the first conjugation. Those sets are : 
 
 1st set, asse, nsses, at, assions, nssiez, atscnt. 
 
 3d " isse, isses, it, issions, issiez, isscnL 
 
 3d " usse, usscs, fit, ussicms, ussiez, ussent. 
 
 Uh u insse, insses, int, mssions, inssiex. inssent 
 
 Connecting them with verbs, we will have 
 
 1st. A.though I spoke, quoique jc yarlasse, (from parlai ) 
 
 Cu parlasscs, il parlat, nous parlassions, vous parlasstez, Us parlassent. 
 
 2d. I had to say, to tell, il fallait que jo disse, (from dis.) 
 
 Tit dii>ses, iltfit, nous dissions, vous dissiez, Us dissent. 
 
 3d. Whether I had, soit que j'eusse, (from j'tus.} 
 
 Tu eusses, il eut, nous eusssions, vous eussiez, Us eussent. 
 
 4th. Provided I held, I kept, pourvu que je tinsse, (from tins.) 
 
 Tu tin&ses, il tint, nous tinssions, vous tinssiez, Us tinssent. 
 
 No exception. Attend to your list of antece'dents. 
 
 This imperfect is used after the indicative imperfect, all past tenses, and 
 the conditionuds. ($ 151 2.) 
 
 Perfect, (page 418.) 
 Pluperfect, (p. 419.) 
 
 Parfait. 
 Plusqueparfait. 
 
 153. INDICATIVE, SECOND IMPERFECT. 1 Preterit* 
 The Priterit of the indicative mood has, for regular verbs, three sets of 
 
 1 Lindley Murray defines it thus : " The imperfect tense represents the action 01 
 svcnt, either as past and finished, or as remaining unfinished at a certain timo past 
 as, " I loved her for her modesty arffl virtue," " They were travelling post when he 
 met them. n The French Preterit corresponds only to the first clause, viz: to the 
 uction or event past and finished, or to R. C. Smith's definition, which is: The im- 
 perfect tense expresses what took place in tinre nsst, however distant: as, "John 
 Jicd." 
 
 I merely use the word Prtrit'xitlif,\ii i\o adjective dtfini (usually added) be- 
 cause the pupil will more easily distinguish the two tenses; one being the Pret&rit^ 
 another the Preterit antgrieur, (G8 3 ). If those terms, definite and indefinite, wero 
 npyUei to the English tenses, it would be advisable, perhaps necessary to retain 
 <hem in French, but as they are new to the American student, they are moie per- 
 f-lexing than useful. The French themselves, in speaking of that tense, call it more 
 frequently Prt6rit, than Pr6t6rit dtfini. After all, as the adjective defini would 
 cor.vuy hnt an indefinite, idea to the pupil, its use may be indefinitely postponed 
 
S18 GI^MM .s^ICAL S7NCPSIS. 
 
 terminations, formed from tneir past participles. By changing, foi the nr* 1 
 conjugation, e to 
 
 at, as, a, antes, dies, ercnt, you have the firs't set. 
 For the second and fourth conjugation?, i and u to 
 
 is, is t it, imes, ites, irent, you have the second set. 
 for the third conjugation, u te 
 
 US) us, ut, umes, utei, urent, you have the third set. 
 
 The preterit of all regular verbs, without exception, may be formed b? 
 \&e rules given above. The firo* set belongs exclusively to the first conju 
 gallon. There is a fourth set, viz: ins, ins, i?it, t?imes, intes, inrent, 
 which belongs exclusively to the irregular verbs tenir, venir, and thei*. 
 compounds. 
 
 EXAMPLES FOP. THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Infin. Part. Preterits. 
 
 Passes. Je tu il, on nous vous ite, ellcs 
 
 Parler, parlt*. parlai, parlas, parla, parlawies, parltffes, parleren*, 
 
 Tinir, fini. finis, finis. finif, finzmes, fnn/es, tinirent, 
 
 Recevoir, recw. recws, recus. rocut, resumes, reciitcs, recurent, 
 
 Venclre, vendw. vendis, veuUf.s, vendt^, vendzwes, vendi^s, vendirenr. 
 
 1. These rules even apply to many of the irregular verbs, by premising 
 that their past participles in t, is, it, take the second set, viz : "s, is, it, &c., 
 while those ending in u take the third set, viz : MS, us, ut, &,c., if not 
 (bund in the list we will give of irregular formations. 
 
 EXAMPLES FOR IRREGULAR VERBS FORMED BY THE RULES. 
 In fin. Part. Pr6t6rits of the second set, (de la 2de sirie.) 
 
 Passes. Je tu il,on nous vous ils, elles 
 
 Sentir,* senti. sentis, sentis, sentit, eentimes, sentitcs, sehtirent. 
 Mettre,* mis. mis, mis, mit, &c. 
 
 Prendre,* pri*. pris, P 8 * P r it, &c. 
 
 Dire,* dit dis, dis, dit, &c. 
 
 Pr&tirits de Ia3me strie. 
 
 Counr,* couru. courus, courus, courut, courumes, courutes, coururent 
 Connaitr^* connu. connus, connus, eonnut, &c. 
 Vivre,* vecu. vecus, &c. 
 
 Fourth set, exclusively for tenir, venir, and their compounds 
 Tenir,* tenu. tins, tins, tint, tinmes, tintes, tinrent. 
 
 Venir,* venu. vins, vins, vint, vinmes. vintes, vinrent. 
 
 The following irregular verbs are exceptions to the rules : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 Preterit Definite. 
 
 Couvrir,* 
 
 to cover, 
 
 couvsrt. 
 
 Je couvris, 
 
 is, it, 
 
 lines, 
 
 ites, irent 
 
 Orfrir,* 
 
 to offer, 
 
 offert. 
 
 J'offris, 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 (( U 
 
 Ouvrir,* 
 
 to open, 
 
 ouvert. 
 
 J?ouvris, 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 '.: it 
 
 Bouffrir,* 
 
 to suffer, 
 
 souffert 
 
 Je souffris, 
 
 u 
 
 U 
 
 ti i> 
 
 Mourir,* 
 
 to die, 
 
 mort. 
 
 Je mourus, 
 
 US, Ut, 
 
 umos, 
 
 (ites, u rent 
 
 Vetir,* 
 
 to clothe, 
 
 vetu. 
 
 Je vetis, 
 
 is, it, 
 
 Imes, 
 
 I tea, irer.1 
 
 tfoir,* 
 
 to see. 
 
 vu 
 
 Je vis, 
 
 tt 
 
 if 
 
 4 
 
 u 
 
 Prevoir,* 
 
 to foresee, 
 
 prevu. 
 
 Je previs. 
 
 n u 
 
 U 
 
 i 
 
 it 
 
 Ceindre,* 
 
 to gird, 
 
 ceint. 
 
 Je ceignis. 
 
 c( u 
 
 '* 
 
 1 
 
 (4 
 
 A-stremdre,* 
 
 to restrain, 
 
 astreint 
 
 f J'astreignis 
 
 tt tt 
 
 tt 
 
 1 
 
 (i 
 
 Craina o,* 
 
 to fear. 
 
 craint 
 
 Je craignia, 
 
 it ^ 
 
 U 
 
 1 " 
 
G R A M 31 A T 1 C A L SYNOPSIS. 
 
 519 
 
 Infinitive . 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 P reteii l Definite. 
 
 Emjpreindre/ 
 
 to imprint, 
 
 empreint. 
 
 J'erapreignis, is, it, 
 
 fmes, ites, 
 
 lHOttl 
 
 Enfriendre,* 
 
 to infringe, 
 
 enfreint. 
 
 J'enfreignis, " , 4 
 
 a tt 
 
 M 
 
 Epreindre,* 
 
 to squeeze, 
 
 epreint. 
 
 J'epreignis, " " 
 
 ti n 
 
 II 
 
 Feindre,* 
 
 to feign, 
 
 feint. 
 
 Je feignis, " * 4 
 
 tt n 
 
 tt 
 
 Joindre,* 
 
 to join, 
 
 joint. 
 
 Je joignis, " " 
 
 tt u 
 
 1 
 
 Oindre,* 
 
 to anoint, 
 
 oint. 
 
 J'oignis, " " 
 
 ( n 
 
 I 
 
 Teinire,* 
 
 to paint, 
 
 peint. 
 
 Je peignis, " " 
 
 tt 
 
 ' 
 
 Plaindre,* 
 
 to lament, 
 
 plaint. 
 
 Je plaignis, a " 
 
 t u 
 
 I 
 
 Restreindro.* 
 
 to restrain, 
 
 restreirt. 
 
 Je restreignis, " " 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 Toindre,* 
 
 to dye, 
 
 teint. 
 
 Je teignis, u ' 
 
 Cl 
 
 (f 
 
 Cuiro,* 
 
 to cook, 
 
 cuit 
 
 Je cuisis, ' 
 
 * " 
 
 l 
 
 Conduire,* 
 
 to conduct- 
 
 conduit. 
 
 
 
 
 Gonstruire,* 
 
 to construct, 
 
 construit. 
 
 Je construisis, ' < 
 
 < tt 
 
 * 
 
 Detruiro,* 
 
 to destroy, 
 
 detruit. 
 
 Je detruisis, < ( 
 
 I tt 
 
 u 
 
 Euduire,* 
 
 to lay over, 
 
 enduit. 
 
 J'enduisis, " { 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 Ittuiro,* 
 
 to induce, 
 
 :"nduit. 
 
 J'induisis, :< ' 
 
 ' 
 
 " 
 
 Instruire,* 
 
 to instruct, 
 
 instruit. 
 
 J'instruisis, " ' 
 
 t it 
 
 (1 
 
 Introduire,* 
 
 to introduce, 
 
 introduit. 
 
 J'introduisis, '* ' 
 
 i f 
 
 I 
 
 Keduire,* 
 
 H;duire,* 
 
 to reduce, 
 to seduce, 
 
 reduit. 
 seduit. 
 
 Je seduisis, " u 
 
 ii ti 
 
 t 
 
 Traduiro,* 
 
 to translate, 
 
 traduit. 
 
 Je traduisis, u " 
 
 it it 
 
 t 
 
 Luire,* 
 
 to shine, 
 
 .ui. 
 
 Je .uisis, u " 
 
 
 
 Nuire,* 
 
 to hurt, 
 
 ml. 
 
 Je nuisis, ' " 
 
 a it 
 
 1 
 
 Coudre,* 
 
 to sew, 
 
 cousu. 
 
 Je cousis, u u 
 
 ti tt 
 
 i 
 
 Ecrirc,* 
 
 to write, 
 
 ecrit. 
 
 J'ecrivis, 
 
 it it 
 
 t 
 
 Etro,* 
 
 to be, 
 
 etc. 
 
 Je fus, fus, tut, 
 
 umes, fites, 
 
 urent. 
 
 Faire,* 
 
 to do, 
 
 fait. 
 
 Je fis, fis, fit, 
 
 fimes, fites, 
 
 firont. 
 
 Naitre,* 
 
 to bo born, 
 
 no. 
 
 Je naquis, is, it, 
 
 imes, ites, 
 
 irent. 
 
 Vaincre,* 
 
 to vanquish, 
 
 value u. 
 
 Jo vainquis, u " 
 
 tc u 
 
 u 
 
 REMARK. 
 
 The learner will remark, that in the above list some irregular verbs follow 
 the conjugation of others ; thus we see three verbs conjugated exactly like 
 couvrir, to cover, viz: ojfrir, to offer; ouvrir, to open; 'sowjfrir, to suffer : 
 venir, to come, we see conjugated like tenir, to hold; twelve verbs after 
 ceindre, to gird ; ten after cuire, to bake, to cook ; and one after luire, to 
 shine, viz : nuire, to hurt. Now this is not only the case with respect to the 
 preterit defini of these verbs, but for all the other tenses. It would therefore 
 be of essential importance to the learner to commit them to memory in the 
 'order we have given them, as by their help the greatest difficulties of the 
 irregular verbs are almost overcome. 
 
 USE OF THE PRTRIT. 
 
 2. We saw (33 ') that the parfatt not only conveys an allusion to the pre- 
 sent, but also refers to actions past at a time wholly expired. Now the 
 Btudent must be informed that the preterit has no connexion with the 
 present, but only refers to " actions and events past andfaiished :" (Murray/ 
 It cannot bo used in connexion with this century, this year, this month, thit 
 day or to-day, this morning, because the time is not wholly expired ; but it 
 maybe used in connexion with last century, last year, &c. and with yester- 
 day, because the time is then wholly past. Hence, yesterday, limits tit 
 approach to the present. Accordingly we may say : JE LE vis Z'ume'e der- 
 
520 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS- 
 
 nitre 1 1 SAW HIM last year ; le mois dernier, last month ; il y a quinzt JQWl, 
 it fortnight ago ; hier, yesterday ,' and there stops the use of the preterit- 
 To express, I saw him to-day, this morning, this week, &c., say : Je Va\ 
 vu nujourd'hui, ce matin, cette semaine, &c., and not je le vis ; because 
 the time is not fully past. 
 
 In colloquial intercourse, when the time is wholly past, the preterit and 
 par/ait may be used the one for the other, that is : I saw him last week- 
 Caesar conquered Gaul ; may be translated either by : Je le vis ou je Z'ai 
 vu la semaine passee Cesar conquit ou a conquis la Gaule. But when the 
 time is unexpir^d, the priterit cannot replace the parfait. So, 1 sold my 
 house this year, must be rendered by fai vcndu ($145) ma maison cette 
 ULimee-ci, (time unexpired,) and not by je vcndis ($153) ma maison cette 
 annee-ci. 
 
 3. On the other hand, in narrating events long past, or historical facts, 
 the preterit is the tense to be used, to the exclusion of the parfait. As 
 soon as he saw his enemy, he drew his sword and began with him, &c. 
 Desqu'il vit (not a vu) son cnnemi, il tira son epee et commcn$a avec lui, 
 &.C. ($ 153.) 
 
 N. B. The French, to give more animation to the narration, frequently 
 use the present tense instead of the preterit, and say: Des qu'il voit sou 
 ennemi, il tire son ep<5e et commence avec lui, &c. It is in English usually 
 translated by the imperfect, although they, themselves, use the present 
 tense for the same purpose. 
 
 $ 1M. PLUPERFECT (GQ^Plusqueparfait. 
 
 Is formed from the imperfect of the auxiliary with the past participle, and 
 
 used pretty much like the English pluperfect. 
 
 Had you not spent your money when N'aviez-vous pas depense votre ar- 
 
 you asked me for some ? gentquandvous m'endemandatesf 
 
 Besides the plus queparf ait (682) formed by the French imparfait and past 
 participle, there is another tense formed by the preterit and past participle, 
 called Preterit Anterieur, (anterior,) viz: J'eus fini, I had finished ; Nous 
 eumes dine, we had dined. As the English have no tense corresponding to 
 it, they have to translate both this tense and the plusquepa.rfa.il exactly 
 in the same way ; consequently, the American student is frequently at a 
 loss, to know which of the French tenses he is to select. We will try, by 
 explanations and examples, to lessen the difficulty. 
 
 The imparfait (59 1 ) expresses an action begun but not ended, or, as going 
 on at the past time spoken of. The preterit, (68 1 ,) on the contrary, refer* 
 to an action or event past and finished, or of which the time is fully expired. 
 It is this distinction of the simple tenses, which, passing into the compound, 
 must be kept in view, and which, in many instances, will enable the learnei 
 10 choose the proper French tense. 
 
 As there is no English tense corresponding to the French, I offer 
 
 S 155,- The 2d PLUPERFECT. Preterit Anterieur. 
 
 The Preterit Anterieur (68 3 ) is formed by the preterit of the auxilia 
 the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. 
 
OR A MM A TIC A I. SYNOPSIS. 521 
 
 i expresses an action quickly or instantaneously done, and is selilora 
 i, except after the Adverbial conjunctions, 
 Ad Boon as, Aussitot, or shot que, des que, 
 
 d'abord que. 
 Apres que. Lorsque, quand, 
 
 ter. When. 
 
 v so one-. Scarcely. 
 
 Pas plutot. A peine. 
 
 lie has done in a moment. 
 
 sis soon as 1 had done my work, I 
 
 Tarried it to him. 
 Wkcnl had dressed myseJf, I went out. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 II cut fini en un moment (inslanler.) 
 Aussitdt que feus fini mon ouvrage, 
 
 je le lui portai. 
 Qua?id je me f:ts JiabilU, je sortis. 
 
 Tor its practical use, the student may be governed by the following plain 
 airections. In similar sentences, there are usually two tenses, one pimple 
 and one compound. 
 
 RULE 1. If the adverbial conjunction, when, as soon as, &c., is befon 
 the simple tense, the compound tense is necessarily the plusqvtjvrfait. (68 2 . 
 
 RULE 2. If the conjunctive adverb is before the compound tense, tha\ 
 compound tense must again be the plusqueparfait, provided the simple tense 
 is an imparfait, but should the simple tense be a preterit, then the compound 
 tense must be the preterit anterieur. (G8 3 .) 
 
 $ 158. INFINITIVE. ^jmi-*y. 
 
 1. Prepositions, in English, govern the present participle, .except to, 
 which governs the infinitive. On the contrary, the infinitive is governed by 
 every French preposition, except the preposition en, which governs the 
 present participle. 
 
 He speaks of coming. 
 
 We like to walk, after we have done 
 
 our duty. 
 
 After coming, he rested. 
 After dressing, wo went out. 
 
 times. 
 
 Remark that the French preposition apres is always followed by the infi- 
 nitive of the auxiliary avoir or tire ; while in English the present participle 
 of those auxiliaries having and being, are usually left out and replaced by 
 the present participle of the following verb. For instance, instead of 
 After having drunk his tea, he felt I Apres avoir bu son the, il se trcuva 
 
 better ; I mieux ; (40 1 ), (R. 1, N. 1.) 
 
 You may say : After drinking his tea, &c. ; but the French cannot be con 
 tracted. 
 
 2. When two verbs come together, Without being joined by a conjunction, 
 -.he latter is governed by the former in the infinitive, sometimes with and 
 sometimes without a preposition. 
 
 IMPORTANT REMARK. If the verb has no preposition, it may receive any 
 nnc the sense requires ; but, if it has a particular one, tlal particular on* 
 rejects evcru olher, and must w variably attend the verb T * '" so in English 
 
 II parle de venir. 
 
 Nous aimons a promener, apres avail 
 
 fait notre devoir. 
 Apres etre arrive, ii se reposa. 
 Apres nous etre habilles, nous $01 
 
522 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 as well as in French. For instance, as the ^erbs will, dare, let, &c., hart 
 no preposition, we must say without preposition, / Mill say, 1 dare say, J 
 >et go ; and not with the preposition to, or any other, 1 will to say, &c. O 
 the contrary, to like, to have, &c., requiring the preposition to, we musi 
 say, / like to see, 1 have to write, &c., and not, without any, I like see, J 
 have write, &c. It is the same in French. The verbs vouloir, oser, laisscr, 
 &c., requiring no prepositi&n, we must way, je veux dire, fose dire, ju 
 laisse aller ; and not je veux a dire, f ose pour dire, &,c. On the contrary, 
 aimer, avoir, &c., taking d, we must say, f aime d voir, fai d ecrire, &c,, 
 and notj'aime votr,fai ecrire, &c. 
 
 3. Sometimes the English verb requires no preposition, while the French 
 has one To answer, ripondre d, (21 ! .) Sometimes the English has one, and 
 the French none To listen to, ecoutc , (25 3 .) At other times the English 
 has of, and the French d To think oj, penser d, (532.) Then the English 
 has to, and the French de To permit to, permettre de, (G5 2 .) But in every 
 case each Englu\ and each French verb retains its own particular struc- 
 ture. ($50.) 
 
 4. FRENCH VERBS that govern.others without a preposition: 
 
 Aimer mieux; 
 
 J'aime mieux le/atre.l 
 
 1 would rather do it 
 
 Aller; 
 
 Allans nous promener. 
 
 Let us go to take a walk. 
 
 Apercevoir ; 
 
 Je I'aperpois mouvoir 
 
 I perceive it move. 
 
 Assurer ; 
 
 11 assure I'arotr fait. 
 
 He asserts to have done it 
 
 Croire ; 
 
 11 croit me tromper. 
 
 He thinks to deceive me. 
 
 C ampler ; 
 
 11 compte partir BOUS peu. 
 
 lie purposes to go soon. 
 
 Daigner ; 
 
 Daignez me dire quand. 
 
 Deign to tell me when. 
 
 Declarer;' 
 
 11 declare le savoir. 
 
 He declares he knows it. 
 
 Devoir ; 
 
 11 doit me Venvoyer. 
 
 He is to send it to me. 
 
 Entendre ; 
 
 Je l'entendspar/er. 
 
 I hear him speak. 
 
 Envoyer ; 
 
 Envoyez-le chercher. 
 
 Send for it, or to fetch it. 
 
 Esperer / 
 
 J'espere le rencontrer. 
 
 I expect to meet him. 
 
 Faillir ; 
 
 11 a failli me voir. 
 
 lie missed seeing me. 
 
 Faire ; 
 
 Qu'avez-vons fait venir ? 
 
 What did you send for? 
 
 Falltir; 
 
 11 faut lui aider. 
 
 It is necessary to help him. 
 
 ' Imaging ; 
 
 Je m'imagine y ctre. 
 
 I fancy myself to be there. 
 
 Laisser ; 
 
 Laissez-le dire et fairs. 
 
 Let him say and do. 
 
 Nier; 
 
 11 me I' avoir. 
 
 He denies having it. 
 
 Oser; 
 
 Jl n'ose 1'afoKcr. 
 
 He dares not confess it. 
 
 Faraitre ; 
 
 II parait V entendre. 
 
 He seems to understand it. 
 
 Penser; 
 
 II a pense tomber. 
 
 He had like to have fallen. 
 
 Pr&tendre; 
 
 Pretend-il lefaire? 
 
 Does he pretend to do it ? 
 
 Pouvoir ; 
 
 11 n'a pas pu me le dire, 
 
 He could not tell it me. 
 
 Reconnoitre ; 
 
 Je reconnais Vavoir dit. 
 
 I acknowledge to have said if 
 
 Regarder ; 
 
 Je vous regardey"aire. 
 
 I am looking at you doing it. 
 
 Retourner ; 
 
 Elle retourna la voir. 
 
 She returned to see him. 
 
 Savoir ; 
 
 11 sait ou la trouver. 
 
 He knows where to find her. 
 
 Sembler ; 
 
 Elle semble avoir peur. 
 
 She seems to be afraid. 
 
 Souhaiter ; 
 
 Je souhaite la voir.2 
 
 I wish to see ier. 
 
 Aimer mieux, valff'.r mieux followed by another ve,rb in the infinitive, requiro :' 
 tefore the second infinitive ; as, 
 
 I would rather stay than go. I J'aimerais mieuz rester quo d'y aller. 
 
 It is bolter to go than stay alone. 1 II vaut mieux y aller que dc rester sevl. 
 
 * JVvhaitor may also be used will) cle; as, Je souhaite de voir, r- Jo /j x*oir, 
 r^ *eo him. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 523 
 
 Sovtenir ; 
 Valoir rrjcux, 
 Venir ; 
 Voir; 
 Vottloir ; 
 
 II soutient 1 'avoir vu. 
 II vaut mieux Jui 6crireA 
 Viendrez-vous ino voir. 2 
 Je vois venir votre sojur. 
 Elle ne veut pas rester. 
 
 lie maintains he ias seen it. 
 It is better to wrjte to her. 
 Will you come to see me! 
 I see your sister coming. 
 She will not stay. 
 
 5. FRENCH VERBS and ADJECTIVES that govern the following infmitiva 
 !>y means of the preposition a. 
 N. B. This usually takes place after nouns, used in a partitive senoe ; OB : 
 
 He haa pleasure in scemg her. 
 
 11 a du plaisir a 
 
 la voir. (2 1 2 , 25 2 .) 
 
 la ihere vanity in 
 
 thinking so ? 
 
 Y a-t-il de la vanite a le penser ? 
 
 a'Abaisser d, 
 
 Stoop to. 
 
 Desagreable d,(/e 
 
 ,3 Visagref.able to 
 
 Accoutumer d, 
 
 .dccwsfom to. 
 
 Destiner d, 
 
 Destine to. 
 
 Admettre d, 
 
 Admit to. 
 
 Determiner d, 
 
 Resoli'e upon. 
 
 Admirable d, d*e,3 
 
 Wonderful to. 
 
 Difficile d, de,3 
 
 Difficult to. 
 
 Affroux d, c/e,3 
 
 Dreadful to. 
 
 Diligent d, 
 
 Diligent to 
 
 Agreable d, </e,3 
 
 Agreeable to. 
 
 Disposer d, 
 
 Dispose to. 
 
 Aider d, 
 
 Jfe/p to. 
 
 Donner d, 
 
 GVre to. 
 
 A'iner d, 
 
 Lifce to. 
 
 s'Echauffer d, 
 
 Jfea to. 
 
 Aise a, 
 
 .Easy to. 
 
 s'KfT;>rcer d, 
 
 Spend one's se//fc y jn 
 
 Amuser d. 
 
 .^//zuse to, with. 
 
 Effroyable d,rfe,3 
 
 Frightful to. 
 
 Animer d, 
 
 Animate to. 
 
 Employer d, 
 
 Employ to, Z/*e to, 
 
 A'Appliquer d, 
 
 Apply to. 
 
 Encourager d, 
 
 Encourage to. 
 
 Apprendre d, 
 
 .Learn to. 
 
 Enclin d, 
 
 Inclined to. 
 
 * Appreter d, 
 
 Cre* ready to. 
 
 Engager d, 
 
 Induce to. 
 
 Aspirer d, 
 
 Aspire to. 
 
 Enhardir d, 
 
 Embolden to. 
 
 Assidu d, 
 
 .4SSU/MOUS tO. 
 
 Enseigner d, 
 
 Teac/i to. 
 
 e'Attaclier d, 
 
 S^'cA; to. 
 
 s'Etudier d, 
 
 S/wrfy to. 
 
 Autoriser d, 
 
 Authorise to. 
 
 Etre d, 
 
 ^e to. 
 
 Avoir d, 
 
 Jfat % to. 
 
 Exact d, 
 
 J?arac to. 
 
 Beau d, de,3 
 
 .F/ne to. 
 
 Exercer d, 
 
 Exercise to. 
 
 Bon d, de,3 
 
 Good to. 
 
 Exciter d, 
 
 Excite to. 
 
 Charmant d, 
 
 Charming to. 
 
 Exposer d> 
 
 Expose to. 
 
 Chercher d, 
 
 Seefc to. 
 
 Facile, d, de,3 
 
 .Easy to. 
 
 Condamner d, 
 
 Condemn to. 'se Fatiguer c, 
 
 Ger a'raZ with. 
 
 Condescendre d, 
 
 Condescend to, 
 
 Forcer d, rfe,i 
 
 .Force to. 
 
 Consister d, 
 
 Consist to, in. 
 
 Gagner d, 
 
 Gain to. 
 
 Contraindre d, de^ Crmpel to, 
 
 Habile d, 
 
 C/erer to. 
 
 Contribuer d,4 
 
 Contribute to. 
 
 Habituer d, 
 
 Accustom to. 
 
 Demander d, 
 
 .A5& tO. 
 
 Hesiter d, 
 
 Hesitate to. 
 
 Depenser d, 
 
 Spend to ; in. 
 
 Horrible d, o"e,3 
 
 jrtorrid to. 
 
 Dernier d, 
 
 .Las* to. 
 
 Inciter d, 
 
 /nctfe to. 
 
 1 See Note 2, page 522. 
 
 2 7ent> used for *o 6e ywsf, ^o /ictre j'wsi, requires rfe before the following inf nilive j 
 ttiul in the sense of Jo happen, it requires d; as : 
 
 I have just seen her. I Je riens DE la voir. 
 
 If she should happen to know it. I Si elle venait a le savoir. 
 
 3 These adjectives require d, when the verb which precedes them has a personal 
 nominative; they require c/e, when the nominative is impersonal: Ex. 
 
 Cela est agreable, ion, beau, a i-oir, a rfi're, afaire. Th;*t is agreeable, fine fo SG3. & c 
 II est agrgatle, bon, beau, de rot'r, de c/tre, de/azre. It is agreeab'e, fine to Be, A o 
 
 4 I?e or d, as it sounds best, in the active sense; always de in the passive; 05, 
 Dn m'a oblig6 de or a lefaire. \ They have obliged me to do it. 
 
 j'at ttt oblige de /e /af're. [ I have been obliged to do it. 
 
524 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, 
 
 Ingenieux d, Ingenious to. 
 
 Prfeparer d, Prepare tiy. 
 
 Inviter d, Invite to". 
 
 Pret d, Ready to. 
 
 Laid d, Ugly to. 
 
 Prompt d, Quick to. 
 
 Lent d, SJoto to. 
 
 Propre d, Ft? to. 
 
 Manquer a, Oraif to. 
 
 Recommencer a, Begin again to 
 
 10 Mettre d, Se a&owi to 
 
 Renoncer d, Renounce to. 
 
 Montrer d, Show to. 
 
 Resoudre d, Resolve to. 
 
 Obliger a, de,i Oblige to. 
 
 Rester d, 5iay to. 
 
 s'Obst nor d, Obstinate to. 
 
 Reussir d, Succeed to, in 
 
 Occupe a, J55y to. 
 
 Servir d, Serve to. 
 
 s'Opiniatrer d, Obstinate to. 
 
 Soigneux ^, Careful to. 
 
 Parvcnir d, Arrive to. 
 
 Souger d, T/imfc of. 
 
 Passer d, Spend in. 
 
 Sujet d, Subject to, A} t fc 
 
 Ponser d, T/u'nfc of. 
 
 Tachor d, Aim at. 
 
 Perclre d, Lose in. 
 
 Tarder d, De^ay to. 
 
 Persister d, Persist in. 
 
 Tendre d, Tend to. 
 
 uePlaire d, Delight in. 
 
 Terrible d, de,2 Terrible to 
 
 Porter d, Induce to. 
 
 Travailler d, Work to. 
 
 Premier d, JFtrsr to. 
 
 Venir d, Cowe to. 
 
 6. FRENCH VERBS and ADJECTIVES which govern -he following infinitive 
 
 by means of the preposition de. 
 
 N. B. This usually happens after nouns used in a definite sense. 
 
 He has the pleasure of seeing her. 
 
 11 a le plaisir <Ze la voir. 
 
 She lias the vanity to think so. 
 
 Elle a la vanite dc le croire. 
 
 a'Abstenir de, Abstain from. 
 
 Decourager de, Discourage wi* i 
 
 Accuser de, Accuse of. 
 
 Defend re de, Forbid to. 
 
 Achever de, Finish to. 
 
 seDepecher de, Make haste to. 
 
 Affecter de, Affect to. 
 
 Desesperer de, Despair to. 
 
 Afflig& de, Afflicted to. 
 
 Desirer de, irt'5/i to. 
 
 Aise de, Glad to. 
 
 Determiner de, Determine to. 
 
 Apprehender de, Pear to. 
 
 Detourner de, Divert from. 
 
 B'Attcndre, de, d,3 Expect to. 
 
 Differer de, De/er to, De/ay * 
 
 Aveftir de, Warn to. 
 
 Dire de, Tell to. 
 
 s'Aviser de, Bethink to. 
 
 Discontinuer de, Discontinue to 
 
 Blamerde, Blame to. 
 
 Disconvenir de, Disown to. 
 
 Capable de, Capable of, to. 
 
 Dispenser de, Dispense with. 
 
 Cesser de, Cease to. 
 
 Dissuader de, Dissuade from. 
 
 Charsr?r de, Charge to. 
 
 Doux de, Pleasant to. 
 
 Charm6de, Ravi de. Delighted with 
 
 Ecrire de, TFrite to. 
 
 Commander de, Command to. 
 
 s'Effbrcer de, Endeavor to. 
 
 Commencer de, d, 3 Begin to. 
 
 Enjoindre dt,, Enjoin to. 
 
 Conjurer de, Entreat to. 
 
 Empecher de, Prevent to. 
 
 Conseiller de, Advise to. 
 
 K'Empresser de^ Eager to. 
 
 Consoler de, Console for. 
 
 Knnuye de , Tired of. 
 
 Content de, Content to. 
 
 Enrage de, Enraged at. 
 
 Continuer de, d,3 Continue to. 
 
 Entreprendre de, Undertake to 
 
 Convaincre de, Convince of. 
 
 Essayer de, ,3 Try to. 
 
 Convenir de, Agree to 
 
 Etonnede, Astonished si 
 
 Craindre de, Pear to. Eviter rfe, .4t'oitffc. 
 
 Curieux de, Curious tc. Excuser de, .Excwj* to 
 
 1 Soo Note 4, page 523. -2 See Note 3, page 52,3. 
 
 3 AB it sounds best, i. o. ; / to avoid the sound of several d, and i to avoid l&t 
 of ooveral d 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 525 
 
 Exempter de, Exempt from. 
 
 Exhorter de, rl,i Exhort to. 
 
 Fache de, Sorry to. 
 
 Feindre de, Feign to. 
 
 Fitir de, Finish to. 
 
 a Flatter de, Flatter to. 
 
 wGarder de, Tafce care to. 
 
 Grander de. Scold for. 
 
 scHaterde, Ifasteto. 
 
 Heureux de, Happy to. 
 
 Impossible de Impossible to. 
 
 Incapable de, Incapable of. 
 
 Inppirer ds, Inspire to. 
 
 Jugor a propos de, TAwA; proper to. 
 
 Jurer de, Swear to. 
 
 Juste i?0, JUS* tO. 
 
 Lassii dt, Tired of, with. 
 
 Libre de, At liberty to. 
 
 Mander de, Send u>ord to. 
 
 Manquer de, Fail to. 
 
 Menacer de, Threaten to. 
 
 Meriter de, Deserve to. 
 
 Necessaire de, Necessary to. 
 
 Negliger de, Neglect to. 
 
 Offrir de, Offer to. 
 
 Omettre dc, Omtf to. 
 
 Ordonner de, Order to. 
 
 Oublier de, Forget to. 
 
 Pardonner de, Forgive for. 
 
 Permettro de, Permit to. 
 
 Persuader de, Persuade to. 
 
 BePiquer de, Pretind to. 
 
 7. The French infuiitive preceded 
 present participle after the verb to be. 
 Am I writing ? You were reading. 
 Wilt thou be working ? 
 We would be walking. 
 Who can be ringing? 
 They may be sleeping. 
 People might be fishing. 
 Let her be doing no ma'ter what, 
 
 she must come. 
 Sho must be practising. 
 
 Plaindre de, 
 Possible de, 
 Prescrire de, 
 Presser de, 
 Prier de, 
 Promettre de, 
 Proposer de, 
 
 Pity to, for. 
 Possible to. 
 Prescribe to. 
 Press to. . 
 Request to. 
 Promise to. 
 Propose to. 
 
 Recommandei :7e, Recommend lo, 
 
 Refu|er de. Refuse to. 
 
 Regretter de, Regret to. 
 
 se Rejouir de, Rejoice to 
 
 Remercier de, Thank for. 
 
 se Repentir de. Repent of, to. 
 
 Reprocher de, Reproach for. 
 
 R6soudre de. Resolve to. 
 
 Risquer de, Risk to. 
 
 Rougir de, L lush to. 
 
 Satisfait de, Satisfied to, witft. 
 
 Solliciterde, Solicit to. 
 
 Somraer de, Summon tc . 
 
 seSoucierde, Care to. 
 
 Soulmiter de, Wish to. 
 
 Soupconner de, Suspect to. 
 
 se Souvenir de, Remember to. 
 
 Suffire de, Sufficient to. 
 
 Suggerer de, Suggest to. 
 
 Supplier de, Entreat to. 
 
 Sur de, Sure to. 
 
 Surpris de, Surprised to. 
 
 Tacher de, Endeavor to. 
 
 Tarder de, Long- to. 
 
 seVanter'de, jB^asfof. 
 
 by a, is used to translate the English 
 (76 l , ^1446.) 
 
 Suis-je d ecrire ? Vous eticz a lire. 
 
 Seras-tu d travailler ? 
 
 Nous serions d nous promener. 
 
 Qui peut etre c sonner ? 
 
 Us peuvent etre a dormir. 
 
 On pourrait etre a pecher. 
 
 Qu'elle soit d faire n'importe quot, 
 il faut qu'elle vienne. 
 
 II faut qu'elle soit d pratiquer. 
 
 $ 157. PAST PARTICIPLE Participe Passe. 
 
 1. At (31 1 ) we saw that the Past Participle, (Participe Passe,) was usually 
 placed after the auxiliaries AVOIR, to have, ETRE, to be, to form the pust 
 or compound tenses. [Young pupils, attend carefully to this direction.] 
 
 I have seen. Jladst thou given ? \ J'at vu. As-tu donne* ? 
 Ho shall have written. (58 1 .) \ II aura ecrit. 
 
 See Note 3, page 521. 
 
52G 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 She may have left. 
 We would have gone out. (60 2 .) 
 They would have arrived sooner. 
 Would you have dressed yourselves ? 
 
 Elle peu.t avoir laisse. 
 
 Nous serions sortis. 
 
 Us seraient arrives plus toi, 
 
 Vous seriez-vous habiiles ? ,41 
 
 $ 1602.) 
 Ces demoiselles se seraienl ap 
 
 pliquees a la musique. 
 Quoiqu'elle se soit trompee. 
 II faut que tu aies eu peur. (79 2 .) 
 II ne croyait pas que vous eussiez 
 
 parle si bien et si long-temps. (7S 2 .) 
 
 Those young ladies would have ap- 
 plied themselves to music. 
 
 Although she made a mistake* 
 
 Thou must have been afraid. 
 
 He did not think you would have 
 epoken so well and so long. 
 
 2. Since the past participle is connected sometimes with tire, sometimes 
 with avoir, we must give rules on the subject. 
 
 When connected with etre, the jarticipe passe is considered as an adjec 
 tive, and agrees with the nominative or subject of the verb etre, to be. Thai 
 takes place in passive verbs, (42 1 ,) and in the neuter verbs that take etre foi 
 an auxiliary, (34 1 .) In passive verbs, 
 
 A gentleman must translate 1 am known, by Je suis counu. 
 
 A lady must translate I am known, by Je suis connue. 
 
 Boys must translate We are praised, by Nous sommes louts. 
 
 Girls must translate We are praised, by Nous sommes loueen 
 
 With neuter verbs having etre for auxiliary, say : 
 
 Elle est nee. 
 
 Ces dames sont neea. 
 
 Jean, seras-ui revenu a 9 heures? 
 
 lie was born. She was born. II est ne. 
 
 They were born, (?.) These ladies Us sont nes. 
 
 were born. 
 John, wilt thou have returned by 9 
 
 o'clock ? 
 She would not have died so soon. Elle ne serait pas morte si tot. 
 
 3. Connected with avoir, the parlicipe passe agrees, not with the nomi- 
 native or subject, but with the direct object (regime direct, $43) of thapar-. 
 ticipe, when that regime precedes the participe, but not when it comes after. 
 
 The regime indirect ( 44) has no influence on the part-tape. 
 
 Have you received my letters ? | Avez-vous re$u mes lettres ? The 
 
 regime, mes lettres, coming after rc$u, the participe does not change. But, 
 in: The letters which you have received, the regime, which, preceding the 
 participe, the latter must agree with the former, and be feminine plural. 
 Hence the French phrase s : Les lettres que vous avez regues. 
 
 Nous avons corrige les themes quo 
 
 vous avez ecrits et envoy es. 
 Combien de coups avez- vous tires ? 
 
 We have corrected the exercises 
 
 that you have written and sent. 
 How many shots did you fire ? 
 
 Combien de coups, the regime, being before, the participe is declinable. 
 f have fired six. | J'en ai tire six. 
 
 Here the regime is s?> ; and as it comes after the participe, the latter is 
 Undeclinable. (31 1 .) 
 
 4. The objective pronoun en may be regime direct ($43) or indirect* 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 527 
 
 (J44,) hat the parlicipe is never declinable after it ; because en has neithei 
 gender nor number, and consequently, when regime direct, it cannot 
 change the participe. As regime indirect, it has no influence on it. 
 
 Have you gathered any flowers? 
 I have gathered some. 
 He has not answered the two letters 
 he has received from them. 
 
 Avez-vous cueilli des fleurs ? 
 yen ai cueilli. ($43.) 
 II n'a pas repondu aux deux lettrea 
 qu^\\ en a revues. ($ 44.) 
 
 Here the participe is regues, fern, plur., not on account cf e?i, regime indi- 
 rect, but of que, its regime direct, which precedes, and with which it must 
 iigree, independently of en. 
 
 5. The rule given at 3 is easily observed in plain and ordinary cases in 
 which the regime direct is easily distinguished ; but there are sentences, in 
 which even grammarians can hardly decide. Without presenting those 
 knotty points to the student, I will give him the principle by which he ia to 
 be guided, and leave the rest to his judgment. 
 
 Sometimes after the participle, preceded by an object, thei is a verb in 
 the infinitive ; then it ia necessary to consider whether the object is governed 
 by the participle, or by the infinitive which follows it. 
 
 If the object is governed by the participle, the participle must be of the 
 same gender and number as that object. Ex. : 
 The letter I have given him to copy. ] La lettre quo je lui ai donnico, copier. 
 
 If the object is governed by the infinitive which follows the participle, tho 
 participle has no agreement with the object. As : 
 The letter I have told him to copy. | La lettre que je lui ai dit de copier. 1 
 
 The participles phi, pleased ; du, owed, ought ; pu, been able, and voulu, 
 been willing ; do not agree with the object that precedes them, because the 
 infinitive of the foregoing verb is understood after them. Ex. : 
 I have done him all the services that I Je lui ai rendu tous les services qu 
 
 I have been able, (to do understood.) I que j'ai^w, (lui rendre understood.) 
 
 $ 157^. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Particle Present. 
 
 The Present Participle in English is used after every preposition except 
 the preposition to, and it enters in the formation of every tense of almost 
 every verb, as : I am speaking, I was, have been, had been, shall be, shall 
 have bee?i, &c. &c., speaking ; while in French, it is excluded from thoso 
 tenses, and is much used only in connexion with the preposition en, tho 
 
 I If you are uncertain whether the object is governed by the participle, or by tho 
 mfiniti/e which follows it, transpose the words, and see after which the object may 
 rnors properly be placed. 
 
 If the object can be placed after the participle, as in the first instance, The lettei 
 I have given him to copy, which may be turned, I have given him the letter to ccpy* 
 the participle given governs the object letter, and it must agree with it. 
 
 If the object comes more properly after the infinitive, as in tho second iastanco, 
 Thit letter I have told him to copy, which might be turned, I have told him to copf 
 ike letter, (not, the letter to copy,) the object letter is governed by the infinitive 1* 
 copy, and tke 'xr-tieiple has no agreement with it. 
 
B28 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 only one which in that language governs the present participle. In conse 
 quence of that radical difference, it was thought inexpedient to direct the 
 attention of the pupil to that part of the verb, for fear that its knowledge 
 should lead him into constant errors, whilst a want of it could not be felt, 
 since the French construction does not require it. But now that he has gone 
 through the various portions of the verb, and that the same danger is not to 
 be apprehended, we proceed to its introduction. As the present participle 
 always ends in ant, and is invariable, it is attended with no difficulty. 
 
 1. It is formed from the first person plural of the present indicative, by 
 changing its termination o?is into ant. 
 
 Ire Conj. We speak, Nous parlons. Speaking, Parlant. 
 
 2do Conj. We finish, Nous finissons. Finishing, Finissant. 
 
 3me Conj. We receive, Nous recevons. Receiving, Recevant. 
 
 4me Conj. We sell, Nous vcndons. Selling, Vendant. 
 
 2. The five following verbs form exceptions to this rule : 
 
 To have, 
 To be, 
 
 To become due, 
 To know, 
 To become, 
 
 having, 
 being. . 
 becoming due. 
 knowing, 
 becoming. 
 
 Avoir, 
 
 tre, 
 
 fichoir, 
 
 Savoir, 
 
 Seoir, 
 
 ayant. 
 
 dtant. 
 
 echeant. 
 
 sachant. 
 
 suant. 
 
 3. It is used when an agent performs two actions at the same time, as in 
 the following examples : 
 The man eats while running. 
 I correct while reading. 
 I question while speaking. ' 
 You speak while answering me. 
 I improve by reading. 
 Take exercise by walking, (walk for 
 
 exercise.) 
 
 Let us go leisurely to the store. 
 When must he do it ? In going, (as 
 
 he goes.) 
 
 Call there as you come. 
 Do they sing while dancing ? 
 People ruin themselves by gambling. 
 
 L'homme mange en courant. 
 
 Je corrige en lisant. 
 
 Je questionne en parlant. 
 
 Vous parlez en me repondant. 
 
 Je m'instruis en lisant. 
 
 Prends de 1'exercice en marchant. 
 
 Allons au magasin en promenant. 
 Quand faut-il qu'il le fasse ? En 
 
 s'en allant. 
 Passez-y en venant. 
 Chantent-ils en dansant ? 
 On se ruine en jouant. 
 
 4. En being the only French preposition which governs the present par 
 ticiple, as we have said, (R. 1,) it follows that, whatever may be the Eng 
 lish preposition connected with the present participle, it can be translated 
 only by EN, if the French participle is used. 
 
 While digging the foundation, they 
 
 found a skeleton. 
 The house being built, we occupied 
 
 it. 
 Waving studied, I recited well. 
 
 En creusant les fondements, :>n trouva 
 
 un squelette. (67 1 , N. 1.) 
 La maison etant bade, n6us 1'occu- 
 
 pames. 
 Ayant etudid, je recitai bien. 
 
 1 In speaking of a lease, or n given portion of time. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 529 
 
 5. The present participle qualifying a noun, is considered as an adjeclive t 
 iKnglish, participial adjective ; French, adject if verbal,) and agrees with the 
 noun in gender and number. 
 
 A. charming man. 
 A charming woman. 
 Charming men. 
 
 Un homme charmant. 
 Une fcrnme charmante. 
 Des hommes charmants. 
 
 Charming women. j Des fcmmes charmantes. 
 
 6. The English present participle, showing the action of a nominative 
 case, is translated in French by the present participle, which is of course 
 invariable. 
 
 This actor, dancing gracefully, is 
 
 much admired. 
 Those actresses, dancing gracefully, 
 
 are much admired. 
 
 Cet acteur, dansant avec graces, est 
 
 tres-admire. 
 Ces actrices, dansant avec graces, 
 
 sont tres-admirees. 
 
 7. The English present participle, relating to an objective case, may be 
 translated by the French present participle, but the indicative is preferable. 
 
 I found her coming here. 
 See those children playing in the 
 shade. 
 
 Je la trouvai qui vcnait ici. 
 Vois ces e?ifants se jouant (ou qui 
 jouenf) sous I'ombrage. 
 
 8. The English present participle, governed by a ve5 or a preposition, (en 
 excepted,) is translated by a French infinitive. 
 
 I see her reading, and I am tired of I Je la vois lire, ct je suis fatigue de 
 waiting for her. I Vattendre. 
 
 9 The English present participle, used as a nominative in a general sense, 
 is never translated by the French present participle, but by an infinitive, or 
 a noun, if there is one synonymous to the verb. 
 
 Playing is tin delight of children. I Jouer est le delice des enfants ; or, 
 
 j Le jeu est le delice des enfants. 
 
 10. If not taken in a general sense, use a noun ; or, if no synonymous 
 noun can be found, give the sentence another -turn. 
 
 He gives all his time to studying. 
 Their singing was much admired. 
 Is that the cause of his being poor ? 
 What is the reason of your coming so 
 
 II donne tout son temps a V etude, 
 Leur chant fut fort admire. 
 Est-ce la cause de sa pauvretc ? 
 Pourquoi venez-vou* si tard ? 
 
 latt) ? 
 
 11. Tho present particinle, after to be, is translated by the infinitive. (See 
 $ 150- -7.) 
 
 $ 158. NEUTER VERBS. Verbes Neutres. 
 
 1. in neuter verbs the action is intransitive, that is, it remains in tin; 
 u.^cnt. They are conjugated like the active. The latter, however, always 
 form their past tenses with the auxiliary avoir,* to have ; on the contrary, 
 j~me neuter verbs take etre,* to be, and others avoir,* for their auxiliary, 
 others again take sometimes avoir,* and sometimes itrc* according as action 
 
530 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 2. When conjugated with etre, their past participles agree with the nomi 
 native of that verb. But, when conjugated with avoir, their past participlea 
 are invariable, for they have no regime direct with which they can agree. 
 
 3. Verbs which without being reflective, take etre, to be, as auxili 
 ary. (34 1 .) 
 
 To I To 
 
 arrive, happen, arriver. 
 attain, parvenir. 
 
 be born, naitre. 
 
 become, devenir. 
 
 comq, venir. 
 
 come bacx, revenir. 
 
 come in, entrer. 
 
 decay, dechoir. 
 
 die, mourir. 
 
 | die, 
 disagree, 
 fall, 
 
 go. 
 
 go out, 
 happen, come to 
 
 pass, survenir. 
 
 intervene, intervenir. 
 
 set out, partir. 
 
 deceder. 
 discon venir. 
 tomber. 
 aller. 
 sortir. 
 
 $159. PASSIVE VERBS. Verbes Passifs. 
 
 1. Those verbs, although extensively used in English, are not so m 
 French. In both languages they are formed, as taught (42 1 ), by means ot 
 the auxiliary verb to be, etre, joined to the past participle of any active verb. 
 
 2. The past participle being then used as an adjective, agrees with the 
 nominative or subject of the verb to be. 
 
 The boy is praised by his friends. 
 The girl is praised by them. 
 The boys are all blamed. 
 Are not these girls admired ? 
 
 Le gargoji est lone par ses amis. 
 Lafdle est louee par eux. 
 Les gar$ons sont tons blames. 
 Cesjilles ne sont-elles pas admirees ? 
 
 3. The French, instead of the passive voice, use the active form with on 
 for nominative, or else the reflective verb. The student should then be able 
 to change any one form to another with ease. 
 
 Active voice. / shut the door. 
 Passive voice. The door is shut by 
 
 Jeferme la porte. 
 
 La port e est fermee par moi. 
 
 The preposition by and the pronoun it governs are frequently left out ; foi 
 example, the passive voice of, people say, is, it is said, without adding by 
 the people. People know, it is known. They believe, it is believed. 
 
 It is advisable to exercis.e the scholar on these alterations, principally from 
 the English passive to the French active form with the pronoun on ; as : 
 
 Is it expected ? Is it believed ? 
 We are told. On nous dit. 
 
 And to the reflective form. As 
 The church will be opened soon. 
 Their house was sold yesterday. 
 Water i* carried everywhere. 
 
 Le croit-on ? 
 It will be seen. 
 
 On verra. 
 
 L'dglise s'ouvrira bientol. 
 
 Leur maison se vendit hier. 
 
 L'eau se conduit partout. 
 4. The infinitive of a passive verb coming after another verb, is rendered 
 z>y oTi, as nominative indefinite of the following verb, which must be put in 
 its proper tense. (77 1 , N. B.) 
 
 I fear to be laughed at. (Subj.) I Je crains qu'oTi ne se moque de moi. 
 
 He is certain to be laughed at. (Ind.) I II est certain qu'cra se mocuerade lui 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 55i 
 
 $160 .-REFLECTED VERBS. Verbes Rijlichis, 
 
 1. Wnen the action falls upon the agent, and the objective case refers to 
 the same person as the nominative, the verb is called Reflective. The 
 French use nearly all their active verbs under a reflective form. They are 
 as fond of that kind of verbs as the English are of the passive form, ($ 159,) 
 und frequently translate the latter by *t. 
 
 2. In reflective verbs, the pronoun of the object is of the same person as 
 that of the subject. Each person is therefore conjugated with a double 
 personal pronoun. One is nominative ; the other objective, or rejlective. 
 ($71, &c.) 
 
 We . . . ourselves. Nous nous. 
 
 You . . . yourselves. Vous vous. 
 
 They. . . themselves. Ilsse... 
 
 They. . . themselves. Elles se. [se. 
 
 The men . . themselves. Leshommea 
 
 The girls . . themselves. Les filles se. 
 
 I . . . myself, 
 Thou . . . thyself, 
 He ... himself, 
 She . . . herself, 
 It ... itself, 
 
 One ... one's self, On 
 
 N. B. The third' person reflective is always se for both genders and numbers. 
 
 3. In the imperative there is but one pronoun, the reflective or objective 
 one. ($ 150, N. B.) Habillez-vows, dress yourself. Ne te trompe pas, do 
 not make a mistake. Allons-7ious-en, let us go away. (En, there, means 
 from here, from there.) 
 
 4. In French, all reflective verbs form their compound tenses with the 
 auxiliary verb tire, while, in English, they take to have. As, in this case, 
 the verb to be is used in place of to have, the past participle of a reflective 
 verb does not, as in neuter verbs, (34 1 , $ 158,) and passive verbs, (42 1 , $ 159,) 
 agree with the subject, but with the direct object, when that object is before, 
 in the same manner as when to have (avoir) is the auxiliary. (32 1 , Obs. 75.) 
 Hence the French write, Nous nous sommes coupes ; the past participle 
 taking an s, because nous, its direct object, is before ; but in Nous nous 
 Bommes coupe les doigts, the participle coupe has no s, because its object (les 
 doigts) comes after. 
 
 5. Most passive verbs having an inanimate object for their nominatives 
 are reflected in French ; as, Les mauvaises nouvelles se rcpandent plua 
 prornptement que les bonnes, Bad news is sooner spread than good. On 
 8 1 'etonne do 1'accroissement rapide des fitats-Unis, People are astonished at 
 iho rapid increase of the United States. ($ 1593.; 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 $ 161 , 1. ADVERBS qualifying verbs, are on that account placed as near thcj 
 ?erb as possible. The French say : Vaime, mieux le bosuf que le mouton ; not 
 'faime le noeuf mieux, because the adverb mieux qualifies the verb j' aims, 
 ird not the noun, bceuf. (51 3 .) 
 
 2. Adverbs, expressed in a single word, are usually placed after the verb, 
 in a simple tense, and between the auxiliary and the participle, in a com 
 
532 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 He writes well. \ II ecrit lien. 
 
 He has written well 
 lie has written badly. 
 
 II a bien ecrit. 
 II a mal ecrit. 
 
 
 3. If the adverb is expressed in two or more words, if gu-f-. alt :r the 
 verb, whether the tense is simple or compound. 
 
 He writes properly. 
 
 lie will write tolerably well. 
 
 SJu Bang well, as usual. 
 
 II dent comme il faut. 
 
 II ecrira passablevient lien. 
 
 Elle a bien chante, comme a Vordv 
 
 naire. 
 
 4. Combien, how much, many ? ne . . , quc only, but ; trop, too much, &c. ; 
 beaucoup, much, many; assez, enough ; ne . . . guere, b^t little, are called 
 ?>v the French adverbs of quantity. (Dir. 7 13 ! .i 
 
 In English, to form adverbs from adjectives, .he final ly is added ; as, 
 wise, wisely. In French, that final is ment. 
 
 5. Adjectives which end in a vowel, become adverbs by adding ment to 
 it ; as, sage, poll, inginu, adjectives ; sagement, poliment, ingenument, 
 adverbs. 
 
 6. Adjectives ending in nt, change that final to mme?it ; as, constant, pru- 
 <1 ait , patient , adjectives; constamment, prudcmmcnt, patiemment, adverbs. 
 
 7. Adjectives which end neither in a vowel, nor in nt, become abvcrbi 
 by adding ment to their feminine termination ; as, grand, doux, heureux, 
 adjectives masculine ; grande, douce, heureuse, adjectives feminine ; gra?ide' 
 ment, greatly ; doucemcr.t, softly, slowly, sweetly; hcureusement, happily 
 luckily, adverbs. 
 
 NEGATIONS. 
 
 $102. LA connaissance quo nous avons dt'ja de la negation nous met a 
 nicine de dcduire les neuf articles euivants: 
 
 ART. 1. La negation est gencYalement en deux mots, dont Tun cst inva- 
 riablement ncou n', et 1'autre un compleme?it, qui change scion les circon- 
 stances. 1 
 
 2. Ne se place toujours avant le verbe, e: avant les pronoms ohjectifa, 
 s'il y en a. 
 
 3. Dans les temps simples, ne est avant, et le complement aprus le verbe. 
 
 4. Dans les temps composes, le compliment se place quelque fois avant Io 
 participe passe* : Je ne 1'ai pas vu. 
 
 5. Quelque fois aprea. Je ?i'ai vu personne. 
 
 6. Le complement se met avnut ne et tous deux avant le verbe dans lei 
 temps simples et avant 1'auxiliaire dans les composes, quand la negation 
 forme le nominatif. Ricn ne le d^courage, nothing discourages him. 
 
 i The word complement n^cnnR here completing the wnw. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 533 
 
 7. Avant i'infmitif ne et son complement sont jo'ims, ct se placcnt gene* 
 ilcment avant : Ne rien avoir. 
 
 8. Quand le verbe est omis, Ic complement seul exprime la negation : Pat 
 ii, not he. 
 
 9. Neither, non plus. 
 
 ART. 3. Ne, avant, le complement apres. Liste alphabe'tique dez uega- 
 ons avec les temps simples : 
 
 Ne .... quo . . . 
 
 Ne .... guere, pas beaucoup, qu an 
 pou. 
 
 Ne ni ni. 
 
 Ne ni ne ni ne. 
 
 Je rt'ecris, ne lis, ni ne traduis 
 I'Allemand. 
 
 Ne jamais. 
 
 Ne .... jamais plus, cr plus jawais 
 
 Ne jamais rien. 
 
 . . pas de, point de. 1 
 . . pas un, pas unc. 
 . . aucun, aucunc. 
 . . nul, nulie. 
 
 lut, only. (13 1 .) 
 
 lut little, only a little. (13>.) 
 
 Neither . . . nor . . (before nouns. (5 1 .) 
 Neither . . . nor . . (before verbs, sim- 
 ple tenses.) 
 
 fever. (31.) 
 N"ever any more. 
 N T ever anything. 
 
 No, not any. (2 1 .) 
 
 Nobody, no one, no person, not any- 
 body. 
 
 No longer, no more, not any longer, 
 more. 
 
 No longer, anything, nothing more, 
 fee. 
 
 None, not any. 
 
 In no manner, no wi?o, by no means. 
 
 No sooner. (682, $ 1 ;>:>.) 
 
 Not. 
 
 Not anything, nothing. (3 1 .) 
 
 Not anywhere, nowhere. (1C 2 .) 
 
 Not at all, not in the least. 
 
 Not in the least. 
 
 Not much more, not many more, only 
 a little more. 
 
 Nothing but. 
 
 Only a little, not much. (13 1 .) 
 
 Only a little more, a fev* **ore. 
 
 . . . personne. (72.) 
 Ne . . . . plus. (3G 2 .) 
 Ne .... plus rien. 
 
 N'en . . pas, point aucun, no, 
 Ne .... d'aucune maniere. 
 
 Nc pas plutot. 
 
 Ne .... pas ou point. 1 
 Ne .... rien. 
 
 Ne nulle part. 
 
 Ne pas du tout, point du tou 
 
 Ne pas le moins du monde. 
 
 Ne guere plus plus guere, 
 
 Ne .... que rien quo. 
 
 Ne .... qu'un peu, guere, pas beau 
 
 coup. 
 Ne guere, pas beaucoup, qu'un 
 
 peu, plus. 
 
 l Purists find out some difference between pas and point. There is some, but it ir 
 obly ono well acquainted with Hie language that could find use for the distinction 
 Ueo at pleasure, the one or the other, merely consulting euphony. (412 ) 
 
534 
 
 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 NEGATIONS AVEC LES TEMPS COMPOs. 
 
 4. hiate des rogations, dont le comple'ment est place avant le 
 passe*: 
 
 Je n'en ai guere vu. (31 ! .) 
 But a little, only a little. 
 
 Neitncr, 
 Never. 
 Never . . 
 
 , nor . . nor . . (before verbs.) 
 
 more or any more. 
 
 Never . . . anything. 
 
 No. 
 
 No longer, no more, not any longer, 
 
 &c. 
 
 No longer, anything, &c. 
 None, not any. 
 No sooner. 
 Not. 
 Nothing, not ... anything. 
 
 Not much more. 
 
 None at all, not . . . the least bit. 
 
 Je 7t'en ai pas beaucoup vu. 
 
 Je n'en ai pas vu beaucoup. 
 
 Je 7te 1'ai ni vu, ni entendu. 
 
 Je ne Vaijamais vu. 
 
 Je ne I'aijamais plus (OTljrfusjafrifcfJJ 
 
 vu. 
 
 Je 7ie lui aijamais rien Jit. 
 Je ne lui ai pas donne d'argcnt. 
 Je ne lui en ai plus donne'. 
 
 Je 7ie lui ai plus rien donne. 
 
 Ne lui en ai-je pas donn ? 
 
 II ne 1'eut pas plutot dit qu'il . . . 
 
 Ne le lui avez-vous pas donnd ? 
 
 Ne leur avez-vous rien dit ? 
 f Je ne lui en ai gucre plus donne. 
 < Je 7ie lui en ai pas donne beaucouji 
 ( plus. 
 
 J Je ne lui en ai pas du tout donne. 
 \ Jei 
 
 ! ne lui en ai poijit donne du tout. 
 5. Liste des negations dont le complement est placd apres le participe. 
 
 But, only. 
 
 J*ut a little, only a little. 
 
 Neither . . . nor . . . nor . . . 
 
 No, not any. 
 
 Nobody, no one, not . . any onfi, &c. 
 
 In no manner, nowise, by no means. 
 
 Nowhere, not . . . anywhere. 
 
 Nothing Irut. 
 
 Only a little more. 
 
 Not ... in the least ... not ... o bit. 
 
 Je n'ai vu yweccla. 
 JV'en a-t-il pris qu'un pcu ? 
 JV^a-t-il vu ni Tun ni 1'autre ? 
 N'en avez-vous appris aucun ? 
 Qui 7i'a vu personne ? 
 Je ne Tai fait d'aucune manicre. 
 Ne Tavons-nous laisse nulle part ? 
 II n'a fait yue chanter, (rien que.} 
 Je n'cn ai apportd yu'un peu plus. 
 11 ne Ta point change le mains du 
 monde. 
 
 6. Negations employees comme nominatifs ou sujets. 
 Le complement se met avant ne et tous deux avant le vcrbc dans let 
 temps simples et avant 1'auxiliaire dans les composes. 
 
 J\ T i 1'un ni 1'autre ne lui conviennent 
 
 Ni 1'un 72t 1'autre rt'ont pu lui con- 
 venir. 
 
 Personne ne le fera. 
 
 Personne ne 1'a fait. 
 
 Aucun Ti'ira. Nulle 7i'ira. 
 
 Nul ri'y a etc. Aucune n'y eat a!i(5o 
 
 Neither : 
 
 Nobody: 
 None, not one: 
 
 Neither suit him. 
 Neither could suit her. 
 (past.) 
 No one will do it. 
 Nobody did it. 
 None will go. 
 Not one went. 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 Nothing : Nothing displeases 
 
 him. 
 
 Nothing disturbed her. 
 Nothing over : Nothing ever pleases 
 
 him. 
 Nothing ever pleased 
 
 her. 
 
 Nobody ever pleased 
 her. 
 
 Ricn ne lui deplait. 
 
 Rien ne Pa derangee. 
 Jumais rien ne lui plait. 
 
 Eien jamais ne lui a plu. 
 Jamais persojine ne lui a plu. 
 
 7, Avcc 1'inftnitif. Ne et son compleme?it son joints et places avant. 
 He likes to do nothing. I II aime a ne ricn faire. (43 2 .) 
 
 He fears he shall have none. I II craint de ne pas en avoir. 
 
 II y a quelques exceptions, que nous aliens presenter. 
 
 II a envic de n'en prendre qu'un. 
 II a penr de n' en avoir aiLCun. 
 Dites-lui de ft'inviter personne. 
 II a envie de 7i'aller nullepart. 
 
 He fears he can never get it. 
 
 He has a mind to take but one. 
 He is afraid to have none. 
 Tell him to invite nobody. 
 He has a mind to go nowhere. 
 
 Les autres suivent la 7me r<Vle generale. II est essentiei cependau 
 d'ajouter que tres-souvent l'infinitif peut se mettre entre ne et le comple- 
 ment. 
 
 ( II craint de ne jamais F avoir. 
 ( II craint dc ne 1' avoir jamais. 
 
 H. Quand le verbe est omis, (omitted or understood,) ne, se trouvant avant 
 vissi ; consuqucmmcnt le complement eeul cxprimc la negation. 
 
 Veut-il du pain et du fro mage ? II vcut du pain, mais pas de fromage, 
 ino cheese.) Lc verbe veut etant omis ; t'Z ne, qui sont avant, le sont ausbi. 
 Qu'a-t-il ? Ric7i. Quand viendra-t-il? Jamais? Qui aimez-vous? Personne. 
 Que leur faut-il ? Ricn de plus. 
 
 9. *Vc have seen that neither . . . nor, was translated by ne . . . ni . . . m, 
 (5 : , $ 162 3, 4, 6.) When neither is unconnected with nor, translate it by 
 non plus, which means no more, not any more. (Page If/J.) 
 
 I neither. Neither do I. 
 
 Thou neither. Neither do you. 
 Lui non plus. Elle non plus. 
 Ceci non plus. Cela non plus. 
 Lc gendral non plus. 
 
 J\loi ?ioji plus. Nous non plus. 
 Toi non plus. Vous non plua. 
 Eux non plus. Elles non plus. 
 Ceux-ci non plus. Celles-la non plus, 
 Les generawx non plus. 
 
 . PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 $ 163. 1. French prepositions, except en, govern the infinitive of verbs, 
 while in English they govern the present participle. (Rule 1.) 
 
 They speak of coming without wri- 
 ting to you, and before sending the 
 present. 
 
 We improve bv reading and medita- 
 ting. 
 
 Us parlent de venir sans VOUB ecriro 
 et avant d'envoyer le present. 
 
 On s'instruit en lisant .ct c\ medi 
 tant. (H57i.) 
 
51)6 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 
 
 2. In French the preposition is always placed before the word it governs, 
 and must be repealed before every one. In English, on the contrary, the 
 preposition is placed either before or after, and need not be repeated. 
 
 With whom were you speaking ? 
 Whom were you speaking with ? 
 [ come from France, Italy, and 
 Spain-. 
 
 Avec qui parL'ez-vous ? never 
 Qui parliez-v^us avec ? 
 Je viens de France, d' Italic 
 d'Espagne. 
 
 3. The preposition, and the verb it governs, may be separated by any 
 negation or objective pronoun. 
 
 I arri sorry I did not know it. 
 lias he sold the house without telling 
 you of it ? 
 
 Je su!s fache dene pas -V avoir su. 
 A-t-il vendu la maison sans vous en 
 avertir ? 
 
 REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 4. OF, FROM; DE. We have noticed ($8, &c.) the conn-action of J 
 with the definite article le, les, into du, des ; and refer to those paragraphs. 
 
 5. To, AT, IN ; A. We have seen ($$ 8, 12, &c.) how d, connected with 
 le, les, contracts into au, aux, and refer to those paragraphs. 
 
 G. As FAR AS. Jusqu'a. ($ 13.) 
 
 7. AT, IN, TO, relating to a person's residence, is CHEZ. (18 1 .) 
 I must go to my sister's. I II faut que j'aille chez ma scour. 
 
 They live at or in our house. I Us demeurent chez nous. 
 
 CHEZ, means to, in or at the house of, consequently, its complement must 
 be an objective personal pronoun, instead of the English possessive, and tho 
 word maison, house, is not used. 
 At my house, (turn, to the house of me.} Chez moi. 
 
 To his, our, your, thy, her, their, 
 
 house. 
 
 From a person's house, my house. 
 To Hv3, stay with somebody. 
 
 Chez lui, nous, vous, toi, cllc, cux, 
 
 dies, soi. 
 
 Dechez quelqu'un, de chez moi. 
 Rester chez or avcc quelqu'un. 
 
 CHEZ sometimes relates to the character of a person, and means in. 
 This virtue is a vice in you. ] Cette vertu est chez vous un vice. 
 
 CHEZ, applied to nations, is translated by among. 
 Among the Greeks and Romans. | Chez les Grecs ct chez les Remains. 
 
 8. FROM ; DE LA PART. " From, with the verbs to go, to come, not fron: 
 tnc house, but from a person, is de la part, de la part de. 
 
 Go from me to my friend's. 
 
 Whom do you come from ? Who 
 
 Allez de ma part chez mon ami. 
 De la part de qui venez-vous ? 
 
 sent you ? 
 
 9. BEFORE; A VANT, DEVANT. A vant relates to time or order, and is tht 
 opposite of apres, after. Devant relates to situation, and is the opposite ot 
 derriere, behind. (49 3 .) 
 
 If you arrive before me, I will arrive 
 
 after you. 
 Walk before^lic will walk behind 
 
 Si vous arrivez avan r . moi, j'arrivera* 
 
 apres vous. 
 Marchez devant , il marchera derriera 
 
GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 537 
 
 N. B. -Without an object, before is auparavant. 
 i had bought it before. | Je 1'avais achete auparavant. 
 
 10. BY ; PRES DE, A COTE DE. In the sense of near, by is prts de* J5t 
 the, Pres de /', pres de la, pres die. $$ 9, 11.) 
 
 He was sitting by me. i II dtait assis d cote de moi, (pres de.) 
 
 We passed by them. Nous passames pres d'eux, (dcoted'j 
 
 N. B. By, joined to myself, thyself, &c., is equivalent to alone, and is 
 expressed by the adjective seul. 
 Was she by herself? | tait-elle seule ? (31*.) 
 
 11. Iw, INTO ; DANS, EX. Dans is usually followed by a definite noun. 
 i nave read that in the Bible. | J'ai lu cela dans la Bible. 
 
 We saw that in Racine. I Nous avons vu cela dans Racine. 
 
 En is followed by an indefinite noun. 
 There are many in France. | II y en a beaucoup en France. 
 
 12. IN ; DANS, EN. Speaking of time, in is expressed by dans, to denote 
 fhe time after which an action will be performed. 1 will answer you tn 
 'hrcednys, that is, after three days, Je vous repondrai dans trois jours. (71 2 .) 
 
 1'l.v, the time that will be employed in performing it. 
 
 We shall be at Washington in 6 I Nous serons a Washington en 6 
 hours, (shall be G hours going.) \ heures. 
 
 13. AT, IN, TO; A, EN. Before a city, d; before a country, en. (38 1 .) 
 
 He goes to Madrid, in Spain. 
 She resides in Ireland, at Dublin. 
 
 11 va ;i .Madrid, en Espagne. 
 Elle reside en Irlande, a Dublin. 
 
 14. IN, ON, not translated before nouns denoting any part of the day or 
 before the names of the days, or before dates. 
 In the morning. In the evening. I Le matin. Le soir. (22 2 .) 
 On Tuesday in the evening. . I Mardi soir. (S2 2 .) 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 . 1. We have seen that the subjunctive mood ($ 151 2) required 
 an antecedent which was frequently a conjunction. See at (79 1 ) a list of 
 those which govern the subjunctive mood. Of course the others govern tho 
 indicative. 
 
 A moins que, de crainte que, de pair que, require NE before the verb 
 which they govern. ($ 151 6). 
 
 Jusqu'd, being a preposition, is used before nnoun or pronoun, but not be- 
 fore a verb. Until to morrow,^*?^??^ demain, (37 1 .) 
 
 Before a vcrb,jusqu'd ce que, the conjunction, is to be used. 
 Until he come, (should come.) J Jusqu'd ce qu'il vienne, (79 1 .) 
 
 2. When a conjunction governs several verbs, it is placed before the first 
 verb only, and que is used before the other verbs, and governs the samfl 
 mood as the conjunction does. 
 
638 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
 
 As he is diligem and takes pains. 
 Unless he be diligent and take pains. 
 
 Comme il est diligent et qu'i\ prend 
 
 de la peine. 
 A moins qu'il ne soil diligent et gu'il 
 
 ne prenne de la peine. 
 
 3. When si, if, governs two verbs, instead of repeating si before the 
 second verb, use que, and after it the subjunctive, although the verb which 
 follows si, may govern the indicative. 
 
 You will learn if you are diligent and I Vous apprendrez si vous etes diligent 
 take pains. et que vous preniez de la peine. 
 
 4. In (Dir. 6) we have seen that the conjunction THAT is frequently used 
 to form two simple sentences into one, and that, although frequently omit- 
 ted in English, it was always expressed in French. We here repeat it. 
 
 I know he intends writing one. . | Je sais qu'il compte en ecrire un. 
 
 5. WHETHER, used in the sense of if, is translated by si with the following 
 verb in the indicative. As: 
 
 Does she know whether he will go ? | Sait-elle s'il ira ? 
 
 WHETHER, in the sense of let, is translated by que, or soit que, with the 
 "ollowing verb in the subjunctive. As : 
 IVJwther she comes or not, or let her I Soit qu'eUe vienno ou non, nous 
 
 come or not, we will go. | irons, Qu'clle vienne ou non, &c. 
 
 6. BUT FOR, WERE IT NOT FOR, correspond to sans, and so does if it had 
 nut. been. As : 
 
 But for his friends. 1 
 
 Uad it not been for his friends, he f-^uns eea amis, il await etd renvoyfc. 
 would have been dismissed. ) 
 
 $170. See ($ 161, &c.) 
 $ 171. See (* 162, &c.) 
 $180. See (1160, &c.) 
 * 200 See (\ 137 fcc.) 
 

 
 533 
 
 AVE 
 
 
 tc hare. 
 
 
 ti '.in-.'wi 
 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 AM**. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Ayan: 
 
 
 
 had. 
 
 
 
 
 too. 
 
 
 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 
 / have. 
 
 
 /Ar: 
 
 
 CAM AM!. 
 
 Tu as en. 
 
 .",,-u has! Air,.'. 
 
 
 AAM. 
 
 
 
 
 r< 
 
 
 M AMI L'i' 
 
 
 /, ' .r.-. 
 
 
 
 
 they hace. 
 
 
 iAry A 
 
 
 MPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 
 / | '. 
 
 
 /A/rrf. 
 
 
 thou kadtt. 
 
 
 
 
 ' v:..'. 
 
 
 A Aflrf hail. 
 
 
 r. | . 
 
 
 we had had. 
 
 
 
 Vf 1TWJ 1 H 
 
 M u Ud MA 
 
 
 IMJ AM; 
 
 
 f Ary Aa4 AaJ. 
 
 PRKTI 
 
 
 PRRTERI 
 
 r ANTERIOR. 
 
 
 M '. 
 
 
 
 
 <Am A//jr. 
 
 
 * /Aim A4*l A^ 
 
 
 A /i , 
 
 
 /. r ,'imi 'tml 
 
 
 M MA 
 
 
 MAM*AM\ 
 
 
 
 OU, 
 
 you fcufAW. 
 
 
 AM; 
 
 !;- -:.i. r,: MI 
 
 /.'i.y Aii.^ AiM/. 
 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 i .:- 1 
 
 
 
 Ithn 
 
 
 I shall have haa. 
 
 
 (A A4/f Aar*. 
 
 
 WtMMlUul. 
 
 
 he hall have. 
 
 
 !tf f>i>ut A/irr A/I//. 
 
 
 tee thaJl have. 
 
 
 tee f halt h< 
 
 
 yon thail Anrr. 
 
 
 
 
 tryh*ll 
 
 lla aur 
 
 they ghaU hace had. 
 
 
 
 COND1T 
 
 IONAL PAST. 
 
 
 /AM 
 
 
 llkoHtdh, 
 
 
 kM - A. '!*:.... 
 
 . 
 
 ikon *houid*t have had. 
 
 
 MMMtf AM. 
 
 11 aur 
 
 he 9 hottidl.n 
 
 
 
 
 wet/. 
 
 
 iratt A<M^<f Artrr. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1." sin 
 
 f A/-y jAut^'4 Aa r. Us auraici . 
 
 arid have had. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 have 
 
 that I may hare. 
 
 that he m : - 
 that we may han . 
 
 that they may hare, i; 
 
 trier. 
 
 ' 
 
 ; !, that than mi^ 
 that he mi<: 
 
 i-jht hare. 
 
 that A 
 cii, that we may hni 
 
 that they i/< 
 t'EUFECT. 
 
 ' ' 
 
540 
 
 CONJUGATION OF ETKE 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ETRE t TO BE. 
 
 fit, 
 
 EUint, 
 Et6, 
 
 PRESENT. 
 PAST. 
 
 INFINITIVE rMooo. 
 
 to be. \ Avoir 6 16, 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 being. \ 
 
 Ayant C16. 
 Z>ccn. J 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 to have bcrr\ 
 
 having been. 
 
 FBKSK5T. 
 
 Jo suis, 
 
 Tu cs, 
 
 51 est, 
 
 Nous "oinmes, 
 
 Vousetes, 
 
 Ils sont, 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 .1' eta is, 
 Tu 6tais, 
 II 6tait, 
 Nouselions, 
 Vous 6tie/, 
 Ils 6 talent, 
 
 FRET Eh IT DEFINITE. 
 
 Je fits, 
 
 Tu fus, 
 
 11 tut, 
 
 Nous fumes, 
 
 Vous f files, 
 
 Us furent, 
 
 / am. 
 
 /tou ar. 
 
 he in. 
 
 toe arc. 
 
 yea arc. 
 
 they are. 
 
 I was. 
 
 than wast. 
 
 he was. 
 
 we were. 
 
 11,1:1 in n . 
 they were. 
 
 1 was. 
 
 thou wast. 
 
 he was. 
 
 ice were. 
 
 I, 'iiy wen: 
 
 / shall b,: 
 
 Tu s.eras, t'l-itt n halt In: 
 
 !l sera, Ac sAa// r. 
 
 Nonas---- ice shall be. 
 
 Vous sei tfZi ?/ sAtt// Z>c. 
 
 Us seront, .-//// //<. 
 
 "'NDITIONAL PRK: 
 
 .!c serais. / should be. 
 
 Tu serai-*, fAM shon' 
 
 II t-crait, /e should be. 
 
 Nous serious, ?rr .i.'muld be. 
 
 Vous scriex, ?/M should be. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 JVi 6t6, / /iflt-c fcecn, 
 
 Tu as etc, thou hast been. 
 
 II a 6tf, Ae Aa* *ec. 
 
 Nous avons <* K:, tee have ice?*, 
 
 Vous av you hane been. 
 
 Ils ont ett. 1 , tAf Aauc ACC/J, 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 J'avsiis I had In- n. 
 
 Tu avals 6t6, than hadxt 
 
 II avail ({-, he had been. 
 
 Nous avious 'tc ?rr Ar/ /> f r. 
 
 Vousavii-x dr, you // 
 
 Ils avaient dr, ///< // //(7</ iecrt. 
 
 PRLTKSUT ANTKRIOR. 
 
 J'eas 616, Ihadbrcn. 
 
 Tu cus et6, f/;6- /<//.*/. /ur. 
 
 II cut 6t6, /.T // 
 
 Nous eumes /T //// /,-,-. 
 
 \'ous ci:: / ////-/I. 
 
 Ils curt-He f//f ?/ AJ been. 
 i i r r 
 
 .T'aurai 6t6, 
 Tu aur.. 
 11 aura 616, 
 
 Nousain 
 
 \')i!S :ili!' 
 
 ILs auront 616, 
 
 CONDITIONAL PAST. 
 
 / should have bcm, 
 Tu aurais 6t6, t/um s/ioiiln'st h 
 
 lie should In; 
 WC shoil/d /id!', 
 
 {/HI should have bcni. 
 
 1 shall liavc been, 
 t/iou shalt have been. 
 he shall have been, 
 ire shall km- 
 you, shti/l h tn- 
 ih cy shall have been. 
 
 IMPEKATI 
 Soyez, 
 
 SOBJL'NCT 
 HMCSKKT, 
 
 Quo je Pols, that I may lie. 
 
 Quo lu sois, that thou mayst be. 
 
 Qu'il soit, that, he may be. 
 
 Que nous soyons, that we may be. 
 
 Que vous soyez, that you may be. 
 
 Qu'ila soient, that they may be. 
 
 IMI'EUFKCT. 
 
 Que jo fusse, t hat I might be. 
 
 Que tu fusses, that thou mightst be. 
 
 Qu'il flit, that he might be. 
 
 Que nous fussior.s, that we might, be. 
 
 Que vous fussiez, that you might be. 
 
 Qu'ila fusscnt, that they might be. 
 
 11 auruit et6, 
 Nous aurions 6t6, 
 Vous auriex. 
 
 Ils aui'aicu* etc, t!i y should have I 
 
 VE MOOD. 
 
 be (lho-ii.\ 
 ii t > //'. 
 be (you.) 
 IVE .MOOD. 
 
 I'RETEniT. 
 
 Quo j'ai- that I may hacc 3<m, 
 
 Qiu; tu aies j>c, t/iat thou mayst have been. 
 Qu'il ait 6t6, that he may have been. 
 
 Que nous ayons 6t6, that we may havt been. 
 Que vous ayez6t6, that you may have been, 
 Qu'ils aient etc, that they may /tact been, 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Que .fensse <', , that I might} 
 
 Que tu cusses Cte, that thou mightst g 
 Qifil cut 6te, that he might I ^ 
 
 Que nous eussions 6t6, that we might f * 
 Que vous eussiez 6te, that you might I ' 
 Qu'ils dissent etc, that they mirktj "* 
 

 641 
 
 I.1FIIIITIVE ' 
 
 Parier, 
 
 to speak. 
 
 
 
 PARTICU-: 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 speaking. \ 
 
 
 PA8T. 
 
 kaviuff fp9\en, 
 
 
 /:. 
 
 
 
 v'D. 
 
 
 
 ; HIT ISDEFi 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 /A tt speaker '. 1 ; :> j -r! , thnn liast . 
 
 
 hi- fjffiii'. ?. 11 :i jMiir, fo llOS 
 
 
 ire apeak. N.UH jivon-* ]';.:, Iff , 
 
 
 
 Utey 
 
 
 
 
 
 / r<w *peakif. J*avals ; 
 
 
 l!nu tcast tpcakinf. 1 Tu tiTais narld, ' " ''<;/-; .-'./ 
 
 
 A :. 
 
 
 icr icrre epeaJti* ice had spakfu. 
 
 
 yam were *{< 
 
 wom /:>n! If '. '.'. 
 
 
 they wen tpe*ki*g. 
 
 tkfj 
 
 
 TCRir PCMMTB. 
 
 PRETERIT A.M>.;> 
 
 
 
 .I'.-:- |..ir'.'. 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 kc tpoke. \ I) eul pjirle, 
 
 
 s ve tpoke. Nous 
 
 
 l^ / u yy..-. . \ ,. > '!'.'- ji.i: i . 
 
 
 tAry tpoke. 
 
 
 
 
 
 / th,dl speak. 
 
 
 
 than shall tpcak. 
 
 
 
 ke tluUl speak. 
 
 ' 
 
 
 i-' Ufa 1 .<:' '.. 
 
 
 
 i,v* tkall - 
 
 '. 
 
 
 ^Ao// speak. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I *hvu!<l speak. 
 
 / sHon 
 
 
 '.otddat ipcak. 
 
 '* jKirte, thuu t/iou. 
 
 
 ke fbnud speak. 
 
 kc ghon 
 
 
 .. . we should speak. 
 
 . 
 
 
 tpeak. 
 
 
 
 
 OD. 
 
 
 
 
 peak. 
 
 
 speak or do speak (you.) 
 
 
 JLNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 tk-if .-peak. 
 
 Qu'ii 
 
 may ( * 
 
 
 
 
 Ini 
 
 that n : 
 
 Ihr.! 
 
 Mat 
 
 
542' 
 
 KEfjv) N D CO NJ Uo A 1 lU N IR. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATIONiN IR. 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Finir, to finish. 
 
 Avoir fini, .(c have finished^ 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 FiniflMitt'-, finishing 1 . 
 
 PAST. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Ayant ftni-, having finished, 
 
 Fini, finished. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRKTEniT INDEFINITE. 
 
 Jo flnis, I finish. 
 
 J'ai fiiii, I have finished 
 
 Vu finis, ihou finis/test. 
 
 Tu as fini, thou. hast fini shed. 
 
 11 finit, he fin ishfy. 
 
 11 a flni, he has finished. 
 
 Nous finiasons, we finish. 
 
 Nous avons fini, we have finished. 
 
 Voiisliii, you finish. 
 
 Vousavex, lini, 1/011 have finished. 
 
 Us finissent, .Jifij finish. 
 
 Us out lini, they hace finished. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 ,' ( fit i i - I wag fin is!: ing . 
 
 .ravnis lini, I had finish nf. 
 
 Tu linissais, /A vast finishing. 
 
 Tu avais fini, thou hadst finished. 
 
 *1 flnissaiU Ac was fi n is/i mg. 
 
 II avail fini, he had finished. 
 
 N'oiislin:- we were fin 
 
 Nous avions fini, we had'jhn'shed. 
 
 V'oiis linissic/, /rxi were finishing. 
 
 Vousaviox fini, you. had finished. 
 
 men!, EMf were finishing. 
 
 :it fini, / had finished. 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 ,'c finis, / finished. 
 
 l\-us fini, I had finished 
 
 'I'll finis, fA'/w tinishedst. 
 
 Tu t-.is lini, (!imt. hadst finished 
 
 1 Mini I, ///xAn/. 
 
 11 i-iit lini. lie had finished. 
 
 Nous Jiii : we finished. 
 
 Nous cu Mies fini, trr had finished. 
 
 Vous linili -, yn finished. 
 
 X'otis cutrs fini, you hadfinishnl. 
 
 Us linhvm, they j 
 
 rit fini, they kadfi 
 
 JT ! 
 
 PAST i-M.'TlJKK. 
 
 '( finiraU 1 shit" 
 
 T^aurai fini, / shall hare finished. 
 
 Vu tin.. *Am/ sh,i/f 
 
 Tu auras lini, i/n-* shall have finished 
 
 \\ linira, Ac f hall finish. 
 
 11 aura lini, 
 
 .Nous Ihiirons, n-c shall finish. 
 
 Nous aiirons lini. 
 
 Voiisl;:. /"// shall finish. 
 
 Vous auiv/ fini, n<nt shall hare finished 
 
 Us finironl, 
 
 Us iiurunt fini, r 
 
 CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 
 
 (( IOWAL 1'AST. 
 
 Jo finirais, / shmifd finish. 
 
 ."aura is fini. .'.'</] -^ 
 
 Tu finirais, f /.VM shoti/dst finish. 
 
 Tu aurais lini, /..// A/.-- r -c 
 
 11 finirai!. Ar should finish. 
 
 11 aurait fini, './ ! ^' 
 
 NOUK finiri(ns, tec tkmUdJhusM. 
 
 Nous aurions fini, >nld ( ' 
 
 \'ous liniric/,, vt should finish. 
 
 Vous aurii-z lini, //,. *ln>uld \ 
 
 n liieirak-n' (/<-// sfumJa 1 finish. 
 
 Us auruient lini, .*/</ J ^ 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Finis .tfw/sA (rAou.) 
 
 K'uiissons, //'i us finish. 
 
 ritiissc/, finish (you.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 FRKSKNT. 
 
 PRKTKRIT 
 
 V^ue je finis>'. M<;< I may finish. 
 
 Quo j'aie fini, that I may ) -5' 
 
 Que tu Jinissr.-i, tAol //*<M nt<n/st finish. 
 
 Quo tu aios lini, that than imn/st 
 
 Qu'il linisi-f, ?An Ae may finish. 
 
 Qifil ait fini, thai he ii'iay i '| 
 
 '..>;u- i ous liiii^sioMS, /Aflt rre may finish. 
 
 Que nous ayons fini, that ice may [ <* 
 
 Quo vous fuiissk-/., r//t ?/ may finish. 
 
 Que vous ay ez iini, that y<m may i; 
 
 Qu'ils finissi-at, (Aaf fAn/ may finish. 
 
 Qu'ils aieut fini, that they may] .| 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PM.-PKRFKCT. 
 
 Quo je finisso /A I might finish. 
 
 Qucj'eusse fini, that I might ] - 
 
 Que tu finisscs, fArtt fA migktstjinish. 
 
 Que tu cusses lini, that f/tau inightst \ 4! 
 
 Qu'il finit, tAni Ac might finish. 
 
 Qu'il cut fini, that he might ( -3 
 
 Que nous finissk'\s, f A/i t w:e /?/ />// r j/ // /.<// . 
 Que vous fini?aoz, that you might jlnis!i. 
 
 Que nous cushions fini, that ire might ( & 
 Quo vous eussiez fini, that yti. mi : -rht g 
 
 3u'ils flnisseii'., fAflf they might 'finish. 
 
 Qu'ils eussent fini, Uiat they jmg/tt ) g 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION OIR. 543 
 
 Reccvoti 
 
 H;IK: -IN OIR. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 BENT. PAST. 
 
 t-> receive. \ Avoir to have received, 
 
 PARTICIP: 
 
 i-.iL, reec< 
 
 PAST 
 
 K/c^u, received. 
 
 having rectivtd. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT IMiKFIMTK. 
 
 
 ;u, Ifinr, \ 
 
 thou receivest. 
 
 tAou hatt r 
 
 
 11 a r- he h* 
 
 we r 
 
 in 
 
 
 
 tin y rt cure. 
 
 r*-; u, ' thry have r 
 
 IMPERFECT. fr 
 
 PLUPEHI , 
 
 / / 
 
 / had ' 
 
 thou wast n i 
 
 
 he wot rec. 
 
 
 Iff \rrrr nr> r r .-.-. 
 
 
 
 
 
 they hud r, 
 
 >ITB. 
 
 PRETERIT A .NTKKIOK. 
 
 / r 
 
 / had ' 
 
 thin: 
 
 
 
 
 we r 
 ij0u received, 
 
 rvoi, 
 
 
 they had r. 
 
 
 ft \ : ; i 
 
 I shall 
 
 :-<-ri|, 1 sh>< 
 
 r,,', ,r< . 
 
 t/iou sh'. 
 
 
 i, TC shall /> 
 
 you . \ VOUB aurcz reu, you shall 
 
 
 1, f//M/ 5//r; 
 
 
 OHAtTIOKAL PAST. 
 
 I should receive. 
 
 / should . 
 
 thtu should* 1 
 
 ;, /Atn/ shout ti 
 
 he .</ 
 
 h>; shon 
 
 r! * 
 
 ; "CU, ire *At/i// 
 
 
 M xlioultl hnr> 
 / should hare received, 
 
 OD. 
 
 Rt>r r*o 
 
 /ct Kf reo 
 
 reccir, i //,///.) 
 
 SUL: ; OOD. 
 
 BUT. 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 that f may r 
 .' thutt jnay+t 
 
 ;u. f/ta I ni<nj*\ ^ 
 > n, f/^;i f//im mmist. ( ^ 
 
 that he may / 
 
 Qu'il .lit nTii," ^/iat /t // I C 
 
 that we m<r 
 
 ifl rcru, that we may f Z 
 
 
 (inc votis aye/, n-ru, //< yon may 
 
 Uu'il.-s rvcoivciit, that t: 
 
 Qif ils iiient re^u, ^/mt tAq/ 7y j ^ 
 
 tKECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Ciue je re^uaeo, that I ^ 
 t\at thou \ ^ 
 ^u'il r that htt { 'i 
 
 .-'^.u, that Tmiiffit.} ~* 
 (i>i" In cusses rcru, fAf thoumiff/itxt i 
 (iu'il cut rc<;u, ' Hint, ]< 
 
 f//fl we. ( ^ 
 V-nt, i//rtf tkrij] ^ 
 
 (iucnous (ii>iol)srcru, ////;/. irr 7iii<rf!t ( ** 
 Um- \> ' '/'i, ///'/- ?/<'U iniif/tf u 
 a-rii, ' /// thnj mi^ht } j 
 
544 
 
 FOUK'IH CONJUGATION- -KK. 
 
 Voudre, 
 
 IOU11TH CONJUGATION IN RE 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 to sell. \ Avoir vendu, 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 to hi 
 
 Vendanl, 
 
 Mttoy. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 PAST 
 
 
 Ayjmt vcndu, having scltL 
 
 Vendu, 
 
 sold. 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFiNIFE. 
 
 Je vends. 
 
 / sell. 
 
 .I'ai veiutu, I have sold 
 
 Tu vends, 
 
 tllOII .11'llttL. 
 
 Tu as vendu, thou. hast sold. 
 
 II Vend, 
 
 he sells. 
 
 II (i vundu, he has sold. 
 
 Nous vend on*. 
 
 we sell. 
 
 Nous avuiis vcn'Iu, we have sold. 
 
 Vou.s vend* 1 /, 
 
 you. sell. 
 
 Vous avez vendu, you have sold. 
 
 Us vendent, 
 
 thcii sell. 
 
 Us out vendu, thnj have sold. 
 
 IMPKRFE 
 
 CT. 
 
 + PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Jo vondais, 
 
 / was filling. 
 
 J'avais vendu, / had f,?lil. 
 
 I'u vendais, 
 
 f/nni irtitt selling. 
 
 Tu avals vendu, ///.// ; 
 
 11 vendait. 
 
 lie was selling. 
 
 1! avail vendn, he had sold. 
 
 odions, 
 
 we wn-r, selling. 
 
 Nous avioos vendu, ire had ?<>!<!, 
 
 Vous vendioz, 
 
 ,rrrc selling. 
 
 Vous avie/ vendu, you /i<i<! a<>,'il. 
 
 11- vendaienl. 
 
 they were sell ing. 
 
 ll.s uvaient vendu, thnj had tmtd. 
 
 I'lU.TKUI r U 
 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 Jr vendis. 
 
 I sold. 
 
 .I'c'i- vendu, / /a; 
 
 Tu veji 
 
 Hunt #<>l(le.<t. 
 
 Tu eus vendu, thtm // 
 
 II vi-nilil, 
 
 lie sold. 
 
 11 cut vendu, he hut/ fold. 
 
 Nous vendimes, 
 
 we sold. 
 
 N.'iidil, 
 
 VollS \ -ndlle>, 
 
 'i $ol<l. 
 
 ndn. 
 
 !:relit, 
 
 / sold. 
 
 :>ut vendu, tiieij had told. 
 
 II 11 1 
 
 
 RE. 
 
 .! vendrai. 
 
 I shall tell. 
 
 .raurai vendu, 7 gha/l har 
 
 'I'll VCIl 
 
 
 Tu auras vendu, tfnui shall IK 
 
 II vendra, 
 
 lie shall ad'. 
 
 11 aura ven<lu, til IKUT. .fn/if. 
 
 Nous vendrons, 
 
 ire 
 
 Nous aurons vendu. 
 
 VolM Vi '!, 
 
 >/, in fl 
 
 N'ous aure/. vendu, i/<nt ahnll ! 
 
 Us vendrotlt, 
 
 'mil sell. 
 
 \\A auronl vendu. tiny shall . 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 v u KM; NT. 
 
 fl HiTIONAL PAST. 
 
 Je vendra is, 
 
 / Sinn, 
 
 J'aurais vendti, 7 thoiild Ittirr 0U. 
 
 Tu ven; Ira is, 
 
 than shuiUdst sell. 
 
 Tu aurais vendu, thuu shtmldstl ' 
 
 11 vendrait, 
 
 
 II aurait veiuju, he xhuultl h 
 
 Nous vend:-ioii>. 
 
 ire s/ninld sell. 
 
 Nous aurions vendu, ire shnn.'d 
 
 Vous vendrie/.. 
 
 sfi,'ii!d sell. 
 
 .-/ui/fZ hare sold. 
 
 Us vendraient, 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 Hue jo vende, 
 line lu ven-i- 
 Qu'il vende, 
 Clue nous vendions, 
 Hue vous veiulie/, 
 Qu'ils vendent, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Vends, sell (tfuni.i 
 
 Vendoilftt let us sell. 
 
 Vende/, sell (i/tni.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRKTKRIT. 
 
 that I nay sell. Que j'aie vendu, that 1 may 
 
 ihut than mayst sell, 
 that he may sell, 
 that ice maij *'<'" 
 that you may sell, 
 that they may sell. 
 
 IMPKRFKCT. 
 
 Quo jo vend that I might aell. 
 
 Uuo tu vendisses, that t/:u wufkttt .<^V. 
 QuMl vendit, that he mtfkt self. 
 
 Quc nous vemlissions, tJtat we mi<rht sell. 
 Quo vous vendis^ie/, that yuu //, 
 liu'ils vcudisecnt, that they might sell. 
 
 Uuo tu aies vendu, that thou mayst I ^ 
 Ciu'il ait vendu, that he may I 
 
 <->ue nous ayons vendu, that we viav j ^ 
 Uuevousayez vendu, that you may | j 
 Uu'ils aient vendu, that they may , 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Quo j'eusse vendu, that I might} 
 
 UiH'tu eusses veiulu, that thou inighlst ^ 
 Qu'il cut vendu, that he might i ^ 
 
 Que nous eussions vend u, thaticcmight [ g 
 Quo vous eussie/. vendu, that you in iyht j 
 Uifils eus.fcnt vendu, that Lhry might I ** 
 

 
 515 
 
 : OF A K 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 to ri. . 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 to have ristm* 
 
 
 
 
 
 rising. \ PAST. 
 
 having mm 
 risen, \ 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRETERIT 
 Jo mt 
 
 l-.'ves, 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 s 1CV6, / ha>: 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 . 
 id risen. 
 
 PRETERIT AN 
 
 
 I rite, 
 thou 
 
 he rises, 
 we rise. 
 you rtS6 
 they rise. 
 : ECT. 
 
 thou vast 
 
 . 
 
 WC Krr 
 
 . 
 I'K /<><. 
 
 we rose. 
 
 ym r*M, 
 they rose. 
 
 I sh 
 
 he shall rise, 
 we shall rise, 
 you shall rise, 
 they shall rise. 
 
 '" ///.o.lv rite, 
 we sh": 
 
 . 
 they should 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 rise (thou.) 
 < x rise. 
 
 -voug, rise 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 FRET F.KIT. 
 that I may r 
 that Hum in 
 
 that he may rise. 
 :t we may ri.e. 
 that yon 
 that they may rise. 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 that I 
 tnat th, 
 
 
 
 
 NDEFINITE. 
 
 / /tar e rtscn. 
 thou hast risen, 
 ht: has risen. 
 
 you hn re risen, 
 
 tflllU 111!' 
 
 tec //.. 
 you h 
 tlitij It 
 
 II 80 flit 
 
 I 
 
 Us 86 fuival i 
 
 IT FUTURE. 
 
 J shall har. 
 thou shalt If. 
 
 \\ 80 sen he shall Inn- 
 
 *, ve shall hnr 
 
 . 
 
 lls 80 8Cr. t.'iry shall hu i 
 
 CONDITIONAL I' A 
 
 / should " . 
 
 he should { ' 
 ' -s we shi'i 
 
 'it/il | '% 
 tluy should J * 
 
 
 that r\ 
 nat thou % 
 that he \ ' 
 that we (^ 
 \Jiat you } -^ 
 that they) ft 
 
 - leve, 
 
 Qui- tu that thou J 
 
 that he I 
 . t.'nit ire | 
 
 (hat you 
 Qu'ils so soiiMi; that they } 
 
 PLUPERVECT. 
 
 Quc jo ir.e fu?-- /A 7 
 
 Quetu ; , tiflt thou. 
 
 that he 
 
 :, ///rtf WC 
 
 'i'li- vims vo:i- : . that you 
 
6 1C 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 PRIMITIVE TENSES. 
 
 1RREGULAB 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT 
 OF THE 
 
 FIRST 
 
 INFINITIVE. PRESENT. 
 
 TAsj r 
 
 
 Alter, 
 
 t) go. 
 
 Allant. 
 
 Alle. 
 
 Je vais. 
 
 J'allai. 
 
 Envoyer, 
 
 to send. 
 
 Fnvoyaut. 
 
 Envoy c. 
 
 J'envoic. 
 
 J'onvoyiii. 
 
 Acquerir, 
 
 to acquire. 
 
 Acqu6ract. 
 
 
 J'acquiera 
 
 rteqttta, 
 
 Booinir, 
 
 Courir, 
 
 Ooefflir, 
 Dormir, 
 
 Faillir, 
 Fuir, 
 JMnitir, 
 
 to boil, 
 o run. 
 
 it <r nt In r. 
 
 frit. 
 
 <> i/,-. 
 
 Huuillanl. 
 Courant. 
 
 Ciifillant. 
 .M- : nlaiit. 
 
 Uouilli. 
 Couru. 
 
 Ctioilli. 
 Donni. 
 
 l-'l'ii. '* 
 Mfiiti. 
 
 JO 1)' 
 
 Jecoun*. 
 
 Je cu'.'illo. 
 If dors. 
 .If laiix. 
 Jo fiiis. 
 
 JO 11! 
 
 Jo bouillis. 
 Jo couru.-. 
 
 iiii^. 
 mis. 
 
 .If I'ailli.s. 
 MtlB. 
 
 ftlourir, 
 
 to (in-. 
 
 Mom 
 
 Mort. 
 
 T e meurs. 
 
 
 OlFrir, 
 
 Ouvrlr, 
 
 I'arlir, 
 Sorlir, 
 
 to ujj'cr. 
 tn njirii. 
 
 to get out. 
 to feel, 
 to go out. 
 
 < UTraiit. 
 OiiM-ant. 
 
 S-ntant. 
 
 Bortanft. 
 
 Oflert. 
 
 Paitt. 
 
 J'OUTTS, 
 
 Jo pare. 
 Je aura. 
 
 Jc p.: 
 
 Tenir, 
 
 to hold. 
 
 Tfiiant. 
 
 Trim. 
 
 Jc t 
 
 
 Tressaillir, 
 
 O ttart. 
 
 TreoBailltuit. 
 
 : 
 
 
 Je tressaiili.j. 
 
 Venir 
 
 to come.. 
 
 
 \Vrn-. 
 
 
 Jo vins. 
 
 Veth; 
 
 to elotlu 
 
 Vfitant. 
 
 n*. 
 
 Jo veto. 
 
 Jo v^tia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 THIRD 
 
 Falloir, 
 
 to be necessary. 
 
 
 I-'al iu 
 
 UfmiU 
 
 11 fallut. 
 
 Mouvoir, 
 
 to move. 
 
 Mouvaut. 
 
 Mu. 
 
 Jo Mcus. 
 
 Je inua. 
 
 Pleuvoir, 
 Pourvoii, 
 
 to rain, 
 to provide. 
 
 PleuvanU 
 
 Tourvoyant. 
 
 IM.i. 
 Pourvu. 
 
 II pleut. 
 Je pourvois. 
 
 11 pint. 
 Jc ix>urT-ia 
 
 Pouvoir, 
 Privaloir, 
 
 to be able, 
 to prevail. 
 
 Pouvaut. 
 Prevalant. 
 
 Pu. 
 
 Pr6valu. 
 
 Je peux or je 
 
 puis. 
 
 Je prevaux. 
 
 Jo pus. . 
 Je prtvalui 
 
 tfnauoir, 
 
 to sit down. 
 
 S'aaseyant. 
 
 Aasis. 
 
 Je ro'aasiedfl. 
 
 Jo ,.-!. 
 
 Oavoir, 
 
 to know. 
 
 Sachant. 
 
 Su. 
 
 Je bais 
 
 Josuj. 
 
IRREGULAR VKRBS. 547 
 
 DERIVED T 
 
 NOTB. J'crsflns regularly formtd arc in Itc~i:t 
 
 OCWJ! 
 
 \ I'rff. t. . Vi:, ils vont. f'wf. J'nai, 
 
 '-i'!C 
 
 i ailk-s, qu'il aillo, i/uc noiu utiiuius, yuc r-nis attic:, qu'ils aillrnl. 
 Fut. J'envrrrai, til envcrras, etc. Cvnd. JV;< \i-iTais, i-tc. 
 
 \ M (. \Tlo\. 
 
 fv/r'/v:, ils ao 
 . in nc'iurrr;: j-icrniK lu siojiu'ir 
 
 . >iu'il ;u-.|Ui. ; 'jutrwiu,(ju4 
 
 I " nl. 
 
 i courras, etc. ConJ. Jo courrais, tu r 
 
 , etc. tinu/. Je cuciller&e, tu ciu-illrra, 
 
 .'.! ini-tuv, quc nous nwun 
 
 , 
 
 :ie, qae nou* tcnwns, qttc vous tt/i .iKitl. 
 
 . Je treasailJcrai, etc. Cond. Jo IruasaUlerais, . 
 
 < Tritons^ nous rm/-:, ils vicnncn 
 
 .''/. U'ui 
 
 , ie tu vieniH ns^ quc vtnu Venn 
 
 ..-MI. 
 
 I. faudru. I'-ond. 11 fuudniit. Prcs.subj. Qu'il faille, (no pnrticij- 
 
 1 Prcs. ind. Je irt< 
 
 ^ VM. ive, r/uc nous mvu< 
 
 f / 
 
 ( I -r ;> [>uis, tit ]>rns* i! \n-ut. in>u* pnuvons, nous pnu r>--. \\ pouvrnt, 
 
 ' f'r. .! pourrai, tu pour >,l. Je pourrais, tu j>ourrui.s, etc. Prcs. tuhj. 
 
 ( Qi: ie tu puisses, etc. 
 
 Like vidoir, exwpt \hepre*. ubj^ which is regular 
 
 iv-T/x i:* 
 . etc. They say aim: .) u. 
 nu, tu faKM-ienus do. ( ;>nd. .) D Ul t'assterais, etc.; or, jo m'uaseir. 
 
 f rrcs. ind. .//- . // suit* noiis .sivtii-. fiit.--/m7>. W. Jt 
 
 ? savais. -irai, in saiints t-tc. CV/?i/. Jo Siiuraia, tu Baurahs * 
 
 ( Imp. Sadie, saclums, .^ 
 
54$ 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 IRREGULAR 
 
 PRIMITIVE TENSES. 
 
 PRKRKNT OF THE PAUTICIPLK PARTICIPLE 
 INFINITIVE. PKKSENT. PAST. 
 
 OP THK RIT. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 I'uloi", 
 
 to be worth. 
 
 Valanl. 
 
 Valu. 
 
 J( vaux. 
 
 Je valua. 
 
 Voir, 
 
 to see. 
 
 Voyant. 
 
 VlL 
 
 Ji' \oia. 
 
 Je via. 
 
 " 'ouloir, 
 
 to be w/- 
 
 Vouhint. 
 
 Voulu. 
 
 
 Jr \oulll8. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FOURTH 
 
 
 to also 1 re. 
 
 !vaiL. 
 
 Ahsous. 
 
 J'jllr 
 
 
 BattiBJ 
 
 to strike. 
 
 Hattaiit. 
 
 Battu. 
 
 
 Jc battitJ. 
 
 Hoi re, 
 
 to drill/;. 
 
 I>uvant. 
 
 Bo. 
 
 Jc bois. 
 
 Jc bud. 
 
 Braire, 
 
 to brny. 
 
 
 
 11 bniit. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kisaiit 
 
 
 
 
 .'ii|V, 
 
 to shut. 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 'oiirltirc, 
 
 to conclude. 
 
 CoiK-ltiaJit. 
 
 Oooota. 
 
 DCtalL 
 
 
 ( 'ondrc, 
 
 
 .ill. 
 
 
 Is. 
 
 
 ( Irnire, 
 
 t.i tn : 
 
 < rii\aiit. 
 
 
 
 
 Croilic, 
 
 to .rn.10 /. 
 
 
 Orik. 
 
 Je croia. 
 
 
 Dfce, 
 
 to say. 
 
 
 D.t. 
 
 
 
 r.-!<>rc 
 
 to hatch. 
 
 
 
 
 
 fccriVBt 
 
 In irriti-. 
 
 1 !!lt. 
 
 
 
 
 I AC! urc 
 
 to < jr 
 
 nut. 
 
 
 
 ftOBi 
 
 I'airc, 
 
 to in j/.r, to do. 
 
 mi 
 
 r,i. 
 
 
 
 Joimlrc, 
 
 
 JdilTM 
 
 lohH. 
 
 
 
 Lira, 
 
 to read. 
 
 
 1,11. 
 
 
 
 
 to shin p. 
 
 mi 
 
 I.tii. 
 
 
 
 Mettre, 
 
 to put. 
 
 Mrltant. 
 
 
 li- UK-:--. 
 
 
 Moudre, 
 
 to jjriiid. 
 
 -Mitiilant. 
 
 
 
 Jc IHOltlllS. 
 
 Kaltre, 
 
 to be born. 
 
 Naissant. 
 
 
 
 Jc naiiiiis. 
 
 Nuire, 
 
 to harm. 
 
 Nuisani. 
 
 Nui. 
 
 
 
 pnodre, 
 
 to take. 
 
 Bit 
 
 
 Jc preiula. 
 
 Je pns. 
 
 Ropondrv, 
 
 to ansircr 
 
 xlant. 
 
 Repondu. 
 
 ;"tnds. 
 
 nli 
 
 Reaoudro, 
 
 to rcsoivc. 
 
 Irani. 
 
 
 Je n-sous. 
 
 -.ilua. 
 
 Riro, 
 
 t(> ItUKjll. 
 
 Riant 
 
 Ri. 
 
 Je ris. 
 
 Je ris. 
 
 Ivompre, 
 
 to brink. 
 
 Kitnipant. 
 
 Hoinpu. 
 
 Jc romps. 
 
 Je rompi?. 
 
 Bofflre, 
 
 to suffice. 
 
 Boflfc 
 
 Baft, 
 
 Jc suflis. 
 
 Je ^uflis. 
 
 BuivrBi 
 
 to follow. 
 
 Sui\;'iit. 
 
 Baifl 
 
 Jesuis. 
 
 
 Be taint 
 
 to be silent. 
 
 -ant. 
 
 Tu. ' 
 
 Je !!! tais. 
 
 Je me 
 
 Traire, 
 
 to milk. 
 
 Tray ant. 
 
 Trait. 
 
 Je Irai.s. 
 
 
 vSn^ 
 
 to vanquish, 
 to lief* 
 
 Vaicqoani, 
 
 Vivaiit, 
 
 V.iincu. 
 Vecu. 
 
 Je vairics. 
 Je >1a. 
 
 Jc \ainqul* 
 Je vecua. 
 
.-LiULAR VERBS. 549 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 DERIVED TENSES. 
 
 :-:. Persons rtgulnrly furmed arc in italics. 
 
 \ t '-aiix. tu 7-nHr, iV ratit^ nous ratoiifi row* ra/>:, t7* talent. Fitt. Jo 
 
 . 1C. No uiijxr. r, 
 f Uueje vuillf, quo tu vailk-s, (ju'il vaiiU', //<. /,>* i-a/u-:, (ju'ils vail lout. 
 
 - il vriit, N| ',:. ils vrulcnt. J-'M/. Jo 
 
 , VO'. . .-itihj. 
 
 uli'jns. yuc vuii* coulicz, qu'ilri 
 { veu . 
 
 OOVJUGATJON. 
 
 
 
 ^ / su6/. 
 
 . r;i/e rtjf ir</ :, qu'iUs 
 
 . ut. 
 
 nouj diton . 
 
 ike roiw /., .-,;, tnw 
 
 i'T |.'T>oji-, ;:n,l i, :. 
 
 ; 
 
 . jp ' 
 
 ' , it prnid) nnii* J>r IN IirCllHOl 
 
 CPrcf.4 I , qoetd prvnsi'-*. (pi'il i-ri-nnc, y</c Ml <jit& 
 
 neot 
 
 /Vw. ind. ./c vainr.*, tu value*, il vainc, w,.5 -oainquonX) vans vainfjur:, ?/.< r 
 
 :.;>uncl verbs arc conjugated in all moods and tense's like the reros from %v isi -t. 
 Iboy nr r, repartir^ container^ promcttre, &c., arc conjugat'xl like 
 
 mroyfr, pnrtir, mincre, tnettre^ &C, 
 
 With tho aid of !>- ;M 141 and 1 
 
 French vrrb vi hirli tin- Irnnior will not i 
 
ftECUEIL EPISTOLA1RE.. 
 
 Da Style Epislolaire. 
 
 LES lettres ont pour objet de cominuniquer scs pense'es et ses aeufl 
 t.s u, dcs personnes absentes ; elles sent dictees par Tamiti^, la con- 
 nance, la politesse, ou 1'interet. C'est uno conversation par font: 
 i le ton dcs lettres ne doit differer de cclui dc la conversation ordi- 
 naire, quo par un peu plus de choix dans les objets, de correction dans 
 le style, et une plus grande precision. Le naturel et 1'aisance forment 
 done lo caractere essentieldu style (jpistolaire ; la prevention al'esprit 
 
 ;e y sont insupportables. 
 
 philosophic, la politique, les arts, les anecdotes, les bons-raots, 
 peut entrer duns les lettres ; mais avcc 1'air d'abandon, d'aisance, 
 .0 premier mouvement qui distingue la conversation des goua 
 rit. 
 
 u'une lettre ct sa rdponse ne sont qu'une conversation entro 
 
 /., comine vous leur purlcricz s'ils 6taient la, c'est-a-diro 
 
 avec il, cette facilite, cet agrment meme quo demande un en- 
 
 tretien familier. Quelle doit etre une conversation? claire et simple ; 
 
 ce sout-la aussi les deux qualities du style (jpistolaire. 
 
 DU CEIIKMOMAL DES LETTRES. 
 
 Madame, Monsieur, Mademoiselle, se placent au-dessus de la premiere 
 ligne d'une lettre lorsqu'on dcrit a quclqu'un quo Ton veut traiter avec 
 heaucoup dY'gards ou de politesse. La distance se mesure ordinaire- 
 meni sur le degre* de respect qu'on lui porte. Dans les lettres plug 
 families ces qualifications viennent dans la ligne apres les premiera 
 mots: iTaireru, monsieur; je suis lien reconnaissant, madame; permet- 
 tez, mademoiselle, $c. 
 
 Lorsque la personne cst ducore*e d'un titre, d'une dignitd, ouremplit 
 
 uue charge honorable, &c., il estd'usage de les repe'ter une ouplusieurs 
 
 fois suivant 1'etcndue de la lettre, monseigneur (en parlant a un6veque 
 
 a un ministre, &c.,) monsieur le marshal, madame la duchess e, monsieur le 
 
 lent, $c. 
 
 Dtins les lettres d'affaires, d'6gal i dgal, entre amis, la date se place 
 nu haut dc la page La placer au bas est une marque de deTlrence on 
 de rcppect 
 
652 RECUEIL EPISTO;,AIRE. 
 
 Lcs Icttrcs so terminent ordinaircmcnt par I'expression cTun set tf- 
 inent de respect, dc reconnaissance, d'attachement, dont voici quelques 
 exemples : 
 
 Rccevcz madame, avcc bontd 1' assurance de mon rcspectueux attacne 
 ment. 
 
 Agruez, madame, 1'hommage de mon respecl. 
 
 Les sentimens que vous m'avez inspires, monsieur, sont aussi sincere? 
 que durables. 
 
 Ccrnptsz a jamais, monsieur, sur la reconnaissance et 1'attachement do 
 Sic. 
 
 Mon tendre et respectueux attachement ne finira qu'avec ma vie. 
 
 Adieu, je vous embrasse comme je vous aime, et c'est de tout rnon cceur 
 
 Agrecz, monsieur, 1'hommage des sentiments distingues que je vous ai 
 v<> Jos et que vous mdritez si bien, &c. 
 
 J'ai 1'honncur d'etre, monsieur, avec un respect infini. 
 
 Agrcez, je vous prie, mademoiselle, mcs sentiments les plus respectuoux. 
 
 J'ai I'lioiineur d'etre, monsieur, avec des sentiments remplis de respect et 
 sidcration. 
 
 /, je vous prie, les assurances de la haute consideration avec lu 
 qurlle j'ai 1'honncur d'etre, monsieur, &c. 
 
 Lcs expressions ci-dcssus sont suivics dc la formule d'i; 
 
 Votrc trcs-humblc et trt-~ ;'vouec, on tiv 
 
 t'umnc scrviteur, &c., pour un homrae. 
 
 tivs-humlilc (.-> -:..'c, ou trcs-affcc- 
 
 timiiK-e Fcrvantc, &c., pour unc fcinme. La signature se place immc- 
 di at omcnt au-dcssous. 
 
 11 cst bon d'obscrvcr que le choix parmi ccs locutions ct bcaucoup 
 d'nutrcs, que nous aurions pu dgalemcnt donncr, ck'pcnd, en gun 
 de la nature dcs liaisons ct ;..rts cntrc les pcrsonncs qui 
 
 - cut. 
 
 . COMMERCE. 
 
 Lr.s MtiTs des r.t'jrooiants ct dcs marchands 1 doivcnt Gtrc concisoa 
 ct clairos. l>:ins les expressions dcs ordrcs et avis, ou doit plutot 
 observer bcaucoup de circonspection ct d'cxactitude, qu'un Inn 
 (floqueht ct flcuri. Les c<Sr<-nionies et les complimens en doivcnt 
 Otrc bannis, ou du nioins on doit s'en servir tres-pcu ; parce quo 
 d\us les affaires de negoce, on nc doit envisager que 1'utile : ct, 
 d'ailleurs, le ndgociant qui a bcsoin de yon temps le doit manager, 
 tt 1'cniploycr avantngeusement. 
 
 Quand on a plusieurs sujets a trailer, il est bon de commcnc 
 
 1 O.i appelie, on Fr;incais, nfgoeiants ceux qui ne font le commerce que p-:i 
 puys ctrany;ei's; ot Ten nomine marchan.-ls ccnx aui ne Inific 'icnt. 
 i/t?)il. nuo rI:niK IVinlroit on ils r'.-- ; 
 
R E C L' E I L E P I S T I, A I R E. 553 
 
 oouvelle lignc a chaquc cbangement clc matiere : car cet usage est 
 -commode pour les personnes a qui on ccrit 
 
 rociant qui ecrit dans les pays Strangers doit i-trc tres-re*servd 
 Kiir ies nouvcllcs, ct particulicrcment cellos d'etat, dans ses lettrcs ; 
 ie pour dc s'attircr dc mauvaiscs aliaircs, ct dc faire, duns les paya 
 denpotiques, arreter ou ses lettres on ses correspopdantB. 
 
 Un corrcspondant ou factcur, qui rcyoit une lettre, doit etro fort 
 exact a repohdre clairement, article par article, a tout ce qu'cllc cou- 
 UcLt, te de prejudicier son commerce, en y omettant quelqueo 
 
 fan. ou en y laissant la moindre ambiguitC-. 
 
 .rchanrl d un ftfarfkand t?i 'sros. 
 
 ; Sur la recominandution d'un voisin, (jui s'cst beaucoup 
 
 la yur votre r< : putat;:)ii, je crois devoir, en entrant dans le commerce, 
 
 Hi'iui MS, pour vuiij; pricr de m't nvoy< r uric- <' naine quantite* do 
 
 .'landises coiivenalili-s a un jeune honiinu qui coininenco, de la prr- 
 
 aux prix les plus raisonnables : * u: crois d'autant 
 
 plus : Pavuiir tonics les aHaires 
 
 nt an comptant. Je suis. monsieur, &c. 
 
 Gros. 
 
 fi riionncur de la vutrc du 6 du cuurant, je vous 
 
 enverrai {>ar un roulicr (jui part clemain une petite partie des articles que je 
 is commets comme un Jchantillon de leur qualite ct de la 
 moderation de leur p: >\i$ plaisait dc renouveler votre commande, 
 
 je fi ; qu'il d^pendrait de moi pour me montrer digne de votro 
 
 bienveillance. Je su . sinceres pour vos succes, votre 
 
 recoi: : ;r. 
 
 . 
 
 - Nous venons dc : ivis de IVr! deux bal- 
 
 lots dans cettc i! '> "ous allons les retircr, et par In prochain courrier 
 
 vous en dirons notre sentiment ; ct mCmc, si la (jualite de la mare-ban- 
 
 que nous 1'esperons, nous pourrons vous envoycr io 
 
 comptc ci Xuus n'avons rien autre ehosc a vous dire pour le 
 
 Ni/; vos tres-huiubles et tres-o[jeissants sc; 
 
 Pour donncr avis de la vente de Marchandises. 
 
 ballot, numero cinq, est deja vendu, ct nous auriona 
 ;e qui nous reste, plus avantageusement, si nous avions voulu 
 iccorder truis mois de terme pour le payement : mais nous^ n'avons i>aa 
 j'Jgc le r : iire sans votre participation. Vous rccevrcz ci-inclus 
 
 l/j compte de vente, montant a mL'ie francs, dont nous vous avons creditus, 
 \^ UT vous en faire remise par nos premieres. Le prix que nous en avona 
 ux pour le temps: il nous donne lieu d'cspercr que 
 fruts de re prrrnier cssai, et que \ous nous contliv.i 
 ;-nnes Iree-parfaifenu' 
 
554 RECUE1L EPISTOLAIRB. 
 
 Wun Commis a son Negotiant. 
 
 MONSIEUR : Presumant que la prolongation de votre sejour a la cam- 
 pagne est occasionnee par quelque affaire impre~vue, je creis de mon devon 
 dc m'informer de votre sante, et en meme temps de vous assurer que Ton 
 donne ici a vos affaires de commerce toute 1' attention et tout le soin qu'elles 
 exigent. Si done votre absence peut vous procurer quelque avantage, 
 coyez sur que vous pouvez la prolonger sans danger, quoiqu'au surolua 
 votre retour soit ardernment desire par votre fidule serviteur 
 
 Riponse du Negotiant d son Commis. 
 
 MONSIEUR : Vous avez conjecture juste ; des evenements mattendus onl 
 rclardd mon depart d'ici : mais je suis convaincu de votre fidelite et de votre 
 vigilance. Je suis, graces a Dieu, en bonne sante, ct j'espere me mettr* 1 
 bientot en route pour revenir en ville. Votre, &c. 
 
 Tf un Negotiant d un autre pour prendre des Informations sur un Commis. 
 MONSIEUR: Mr. L. m'a fait la demande d'une place qui se trouve vacanic 
 dans ma maison. II me parait honnete ; mais 1'apparence n'etant pas uno 
 caution suffisante, je prends la liberte de vous demander franchement votre 
 opinion sur sa probitd et sur ses talens. II m'a dit avoir etc employe quel- 
 que temps dans votre maison, et je desirerais savoir particulierement pour- 
 quoi vous vous etes quitlcs. Comme il doit venir la semaine prochaine, si 
 vous me faites reponse avant ce temps vous obligerez infiniment votre trcs- 
 humblc serviteur. 
 
 Riponse. 
 
 MONSIEUR : La pe.-sortne dorit vous me parlez dans votre iettre est rdelle- 
 ment digne et dc votre confiance et de votre bienveillance. II travaillah 
 BOUS moi lorsque j'etais associe avec Mr. F. ; mais cette societe dissoute, 
 j'ai dt6 obligd de reformer plusieurs commis, pour diminuer mes depenses, 
 et nous avons toua deux cprouvc le plus grand regret de cette separation. 
 
 Je suis votre trtls-humble serviteur. 
 
 De Crifiit, } pour tin Kt ranker. 
 
 Mr. T , :\ Paris. 
 
 A BOSTOX, 10 Avril, 1849. 
 
 MONSIEUR: Vous rccevrez cclle-ci des mains de Monsieur T. Nelton, 
 Americain, que ses parents font voyager dans divers dtats de 1'Europe. Je 
 voiie prie de le munir de lettres de recommandation sur differentes places 
 de France, d'Allemagne, et d'ltalie. Son dessein etant de se rendre d'ici 
 en aroiture dans votre ville, j'ai cru ne pouvoir inieux faire que de voua 
 le recommander, d'autant que c'est une personne aussi distinguee par sa 
 umiesance que par son merite personnel : ayez done la bonte de lui faire tout 
 Paccueil qui dependra de vous, pendant le sejour qu'il doit faire dans votra 
 
 1 LOB icttros qu'un banquierou negociant donne h quelqu'un pour recevoir on 
 I'argsnt do sos correspondents, en des lieux eloignes, s'appellent iti'trfs de credit. 
 Quoique cos lettres soient di/Drentes des httres dc change, olios ont d-pen-prcs .et 
 
RJtCUEIL EPISTOLAIRE. 
 
 rilio, etde lui n.Mdre tous Ie3 services possibles. Vous lui fournirez sur 
 MS doubles re$us tout 1'argent dont il pourra avoir besoi.i jusqu'ii la concur- 
 rence de dix millc francs, dont vous pourrez vous rcmbourser sur in- 
 
 .isant passer un de ces re^us. J'ai 1'honm i plus pur 
 
 10 Avril, 1849, 
 
 R: Cc (]; st la copie d'ur: vona 
 
 ecra r cur T. Nelton, Anu'ncain. ire obligcr 
 
 .ui je suis en liaison ; et pour qui j'ai accepte*, av 
 
 1'occasion de lui etre utile, en lui fournissant quclqucs let:: ;it et 
 
 nandation sur difierentes places, je vous supp ';un- 
 ;ueje lui ;n 
 
 Vous lui fournirez, s*. '. pour ses besoins, jusqu'a dix inrllc lr: 
 
 DO double q lont vous i 
 
 Sours des avanccs quo vous lui nun-/ 
 i signature, aim (juc voua puissiez la reconn 
 
 a conscqu* ,'ie vous me san: 
 
 , rr^r 
 ideation. J'ui I'honrn 
 
 ngf, 
 
 Mr. 1* . i Hoston. 
 
 A PARIS, le 26 Jum, 1849. 
 
 , ur de la votre du 10 d'A\ 
 
 dc crddit et derecommnnd 
 
 (MMT 
 
 '.iris. Je me for le lui rcndre tous les services qu. 
 
 pendront <! coBur quo de vous temoigner par des 
 
 n je fais cas de tout ce qui me peir 
 
 ' victitude dans les < 
 a cstime, avcc hqtielle j'ai 1'hoi. 
 do ni- Monsieur, votre, &,c. 
 
 ;i.r a li I tcrecci-dessus. 
 
 >>n. 
 
 A PAKIS, ie 4 Aoiit, I 
 
 Me' Votre leftrc du 10 d' Avril me fir r ;nr Moi.- 
 
 T. N 'To viiir. J'ous le plaii/r 
 
 da l'a\ '. moi le m6me jour, ct d'npprendre j>ar moi-:r. 
 
 pnr la po?te : la signature do la peraAnnequi OH! 
 aliarfto"* ! , mo de <l < 
 
 go 1 **) 
 
5jG UKCUEILEPISTOLAIRV:. 
 
 quu vous ne m'avez fait qu'une legerc peinture de son men to. qui, d c que 
 j'en puia juger, va au-delade tout ce qu'on en peut dire. Soyez persuodrf 
 que ce sera avec le plus grand plaisir du monde que je m'empresseraide hj. 
 etre utile, et de lui rendre tous les service? qui seront en mon pouvoir, pen 
 dant eon sejour dans cette ville. J'ai 1'honneur dc me dire, avec une par- 
 foite tuTectiun, 
 
 Monsieur, votre, &c 
 
 DES BILLETS. 
 
 TLS supposcnt une sortc defamiliarite entreceuxcui se Icsenvoicnt. 
 On en corit aussi it ses inferieurs; on n'en re9oit point d'eux. Ilg 
 different d'une lettre en ce qu'ils n'exigent aucim ceremonial, qu'ilg 
 sont plus courts, qu'ils ne portent qu'un simple nom pour adresse, 
 que, jusqu'ii la maniere tortille*e ou bizarre de les plier, ils bravent 
 toute etiquette, qu'cnfin ils ne s'emploient.guere que pour faire uno 
 invitation, accompagner un petit present, annonccr uu c^jnement de 
 soci<it3, so donner memo une simple marque de souvenir, t-t tcnir lieu 
 d'une visite. 
 
 Lorsqu'tm mot agrdablc .ou ingenieux se place naturellemcnt dang 
 un billet, il y ajoute quelque prix. 
 
 *' Les affaires et les ennuis continuant Ti me tourmenter. Je vous 
 ittends a diner aujourd'hui ; venez jetcr quclques fleurs sur ma vie." 
 
 Voltaire invita 1'auteur de I' Art iV Aimer a souper chcz M;i<l;ime du 
 riifitelct par cc quatrain si connu : 
 
 AU nom du Pirulo et de Cy there 
 Gentil Bernard est averti, 
 Que 1'art d'aimer doit samedi 
 Venir souper chez 1'art de plaire. 
 
 On ccrit commum(?ment les billets en se servant dc la troisieme per- 
 Bonne, et sous ce rapport, ils demandent beaucoup d'attention pour no 
 pas Gtre amphibologiques. Par exemple : M. A * * * prie Mr. B * * * 
 de vouloir bien diner chez LUI. Chez qui ? II j a evidemment ici une 
 Equivoque au moins grammatical. Madame D*** previent Madame 
 G*** qu'dle a aujourd'hui sa loge ti V Optra. A laquelle des deux se 
 rapportent eels pronoms elle et sa ? 
 
 II est facile d'imaginer d'autres manieres de tourner sans amphibo. 
 logic ces billets qu'on nomme du matin. Par exemple : Madame d 
 M*** aura samedi au soir, un ou deux violons et quelques danseurs ; 
 elle s'estimerait lieurcuse, si Madame et Mademoiselle de L***, 
 venaient cmbcllir sa petite fete ainsi qu'ellc a 1'bonncur dc les cu 
 prier. 
 
R E C U K II. F. P 1 S T O L A I R K. 
 
 Mis * a aujourd'hui sa logo aux Frnnc.ais. l r clu spec 
 
 tacle sera double pour cllc si tile pcu: 
 4iime le 1'***, a qui elle oflre unc ou niCme deux pla. 
 
 M. de *** scrait bien aimablc s'ilpouvaitaujourd'hu; 
 L., qi. instance ct lui dit mille choses honnetes. 
 
 Madame S*** cnvoie savoir des nou>elles de la migraine de 
 aclle F***, a qui elle fait les plus tendres compliments. Kile es; ru ru-< 
 cc-ttc indi.-; ira pas de suites, et que la deesse de lasai: 1 
 
 rira i>as sc brouiller avec les graces. 
 
 fivants et leurs rdponses relatives aur circonstancea lea 
 plus ordinaires de la socidt^, peuvent 
 
 . 
 
 sentesespliis sincercscompliin* 
 . i permission de 1'accompagncr d 1'asscmlii 
 
 C. pour son oilre obi; 
 o pouvoir accepter, etant t 
 
 tin. 
 
 rnir cc soir prcndrc 1 
 
 rue. 
 
 licures du ;/ 
 lie so fait -. 
 
 .npliments de la ; .luharnais a .Mi; 
 
 i sesjeunes demoiselles: elle csperc qu'elles sont an 
 aaris acriii son, et parfaitcment remises des fatigues de la der- 
 
 niere F 
 
 '/,, d : ! . 
 
 lilcs. de Ste. A. sont Bensibles a I'intcret que 1 
 Mme. de B. ; clles sont arrivees saines et sauves, et se portent toutes 
 t i' exception de Josephine, qui a attr, 
 
 Mt n 
 
 Mille compliments de Mmc. de Segur a IMlle. le Compte : cllc la prie de 
 ^ii accordcr le plaisir de sa societu a diner Dinianchc prochain. On M 
 mcttra a table a cinq h> 
 
 _ ; ___ 
 ' Nom du principal thfeatre dc Pane. 
 
558 IxlCCUEIL KPISTOLAIRE. 
 
 Reports e. 
 
 Mille compliments de Mile, le C.; elle ne manquera pas de e rcndre i 
 I'invitaUon dc Mme. de S. 
 * 
 
 Lundi, 4 Novembre, 1849 
 
 Devant donner une lecture, Jeudi prochain a 8 heures du soir, dans mon 
 grand salon d'e'tude, sur la litterature Fransaise, je prends la liberte de vout 
 unvoyer un billet d'admission pour vous et votre aimable famille. Jc tache- 
 rai de ne pas erre ennuyeux. 
 
 AlardimatiJi, 5 Kov., 
 Noua acceptons avec reconnaissance 1'invitation a votre lecture sur la lit 
 loraturc Franchise. C'est un sujet pour nouy si attrayant que je vous defio 
 u'etre ennuyeux. J'y mcnerai un ou deiis amis. 
 
 LETTRES DE CHAN 
 
 Bon pour 1000 francs. 
 . I-RKS, le 4 Dcccmbrc, 1849. 
 
 MONSTEUR: A vue il vous plaira payer, par ccttc premiere de change, a 
 Monsieih R , la somme de mille francs, pour valcur rc^ue de lui, et pas- 
 en, compte, comme par avis de 
 
 Votrc trcs-humble serviteur, C 
 
 Monsieur D , N5gociant a Bordeaux. 
 
 Pour en donner 
 
 \ LONDRES, ce 4 Decembre, 149. 
 MONSIKTR: Jc vous ai tire ce jourd'hui mille francs, payablcs a vue a 
 
 .Monsieur R , pour valcur regue de lui. Je vous prie d'y faire honneur, 
 
 i-t do m'en donner debit, dans mon compte; ce qu'espc'rant de votre ; 
 tualit6, je suis, Monsieur, votre., &c. 
 
 A BOSTON, ce 18 Nov., 1849. 
 
 MONSIEUR: A huit jours dc vue, il vous plaira payer, par cette ecule 
 lottro de change, a Monsieur N , ou a son ordre, la sommc de deua 
 cents piastres, pour valeur rec.ue de lui en marchandises, rue vous passerei 
 r.i compte, comme pav* avis de 
 
 Votre tres-humble serviteur, D -. 
 
 Bon pour 200 pias:~cs. 
 
 A Monsieur E , Negociant, a Charleston. 
 
 BORDEREAU. 
 J/r. Frtdtric VouiUc, 
 
 Doit d Jean 31arcl t 
 
 18-49. 5 Sept. Pour une paire de bottes, cuir fin, . . f3C. 
 Pour acquit, JEAN MA ROT. 
 
TNJ)EX. 
 
 A, 
 
 A, $12. 1633, to, at, in, $ 163, 
 13; used before the name of a city, 
 :3:i8.) with. 
 
 , $16310, by, by the 
 Bid* 
 
 A LA, A L', AU, ATX, $8, to the. 
 ;,LE, $ 79, to whom, 
 
 ALE. ; what they mean. 
 
 !'!. to mine. (See 
 
 -J, mi- 
 
 LUI, ELLE, &C., 
 
 him, iirr. 
 
 re, $ 106, mine, thine, &c. 
 A QUI, $ 79, to whom ; for persons 
 only. 
 
 A, A-. 
 
 tic! :sed before 
 
 '. a hundred; long-trmps, a long 
 
 time ; millc, a thous:md ; btuucouji, 
 
 -at many. 
 
 A FEW, SOME, $3, t7r.7, yuclqucs ; 
 never omitted iii French. 
 
 A GRKAT MArv, $6, leaucovp. 
 
 VDRE\ $6, CC7t. 
 oXGTIME, $6, lons-ttmps. 
 
 A ; ' 6, mt'ZJe. 
 
 ABIDE, (to ) by, $64, s'en few/r o. 
 ABL-, (to be,) pouvoir, 92, 175; 
 t*re en ctat, tire a mCme de, 378. 
 ABOUT, 189, environ. 
 ABOVE, UP STAIRS, en haut. 
 ACCENTS : e (mute] changed to e 
 grave) in certain verbs, $ 144- -4. 
 
 ACCENTS: e (aci^c] ui jrave ifl 
 others, $ 1445. 
 
 ACCORDING TO, selon ; according 
 to circumstances, scion Ics circon* 
 stances ; that is, according tr circum- 
 stances, it depend //, 317. 
 
 ACCOURIK, $64, to rim to, up. 
 
 ACCUSTOM, (to,) accoutumr.r. To 
 be accustomed to a thing, etrc cccvu- 
 : qucli/ac chose, 370. 
 
 ACHE, (the,) Icmal; the ( 
 le mal d'orcillc; the hcartaclie, It 
 
 cceurj &c., 291. 
 
 ACQUAINTED (to be) with, connai- 
 tre ; been acquainted with, connu ; 
 to become acquainted with some- 
 body, to make some one's acquaint- 
 ance, fnirc ronnaissance de, (avec,) 
 n ; I have become acquaint- 
 ed witlrhim or her, fat fail sa CU-JL 
 'c, 329 ; to be thoroughly ac- 
 quainted vrith a thing, <'trc uu fait. 
 d'une diose ; to make one's self 
 thoroughly acquainted with a thing, 
 se mettre an fait d'une chose, 342. 
 
 ADIEU, adieu, farewell, God be 
 with you, good-by. Au plaisir de 
 vans rcuoir, (au revoir,) till I see you 
 again, I hope to see you again soon, 
 384. 
 
 ADJECTIVES : agree with their noun 
 in number, 107 ; in gender, 466, 284. 
 Feminine adjectives, 284; their for- 
 mation from masculine adjectives 
 286, 287. Adjectives that have no 
 plural for the masculine gender, 491. 
 Comparison of adjectives, 490, 491. 
 Adjectives that are irregular in the 
 formation sf their comparatives and 
 
SCO 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 superlatives, 144. Adjectives sub- 
 sta.ntively used, 402. Place of the 
 adjective with regard to the substan- 
 tive, 132. The adjective which in 
 English follows 7*0u?,sfcmds m French 
 after the verb, 335. 2d partitive ar 
 tide before adj., (<7e,)$26. 1st par 
 titive, if adj. is after the noun, $27, 
 28. Two adject, qualify /ng the same 
 noun, do not take two articles, $ 18; 
 have a plur. and agree with the noun, 
 $ 137 4 ; end in e mute in the feinin. 
 * '. when they require a masc. plur. 
 -6; 8; when a fern. 7; such a 
 man, 9; 10; formation of femin. 
 and plur. of irreg. adj., (p. 400, 491 ;) 
 their place, $ 129123. 
 
 ADRESSER (s') a, $64, to apply to. 
 
 ADVERBS, $ 161. Advcrbcs; of place. 
 88, 193, 200 ; quality and manner, 
 26, 140, 180; of number, 165, 363; 
 nf time, 90, 107, 108, 110, 189; 
 comparative, 66, 77, 78, 137; com 
 parison of, 145 ; irregularly formed, 
 147. Their places, $161, 2, 3 
 how much, too much, &c. ; a*: 
 in French, a:l i Ingli^h, 1. 
 
 How formed from adjectives, 5, 6, 7. 
 KD (to\ avoir las moyens, 327. 
 i;,(Ruk' 1, N. 1,)460, gpres ; 
 after them ($ 63,) aprc* 
 
 \rn:u\VAKi>s, cnsnite, 88. 
 
 AGREE, (to), to athing/omtrcftirrfe 
 yuclque chose, 276 ; consentir a, 354. 
 
 AGAIN, (anew), de nouveau, 344. 
 
 AIMER a, to like to, &c., 114; aimer 
 micux, to like better, to prefer, 263. 
 
 AINSI, thus or so, 152 ; ainsi que, 
 us, as well as, 331. 
 
 AISE, lien aise dc, glad, 317; itre 
 d so-:i aisc, to be comfortable, well 
 off, at one's ease ; etre mal d son 
 vise, lire gene, to bo uncomfortable, 
 895. 
 
 ALTGIIT, (to,) from ^ne's horse, to 
 dismount, descendre dc chcvul, -70 ; 
 fc voiture, 30'J. 
 
 ALL, every, tout , tons, tcufc, tuxtcs. 
 110; nil at once, all of a midden, &c. ; 
 
 tout d coup, lout d la fois, soudiiinc 
 ment, 287; all that which, all which, 
 all, $ 91. Never omitted in French, 
 lout ce qui, ce que. 
 
 ALLER, to go, 84 ; 'alii, gone, 165; 
 present tense, 88 to 96 ; etc, pasl 
 participle of itre, with the auxiliary 
 avoir u<td for allc, past participle of 
 alter, which is always connected 
 with etre as auxiliary, 160 ; alln ci\ 
 voiture a cheval, a pied, 214; alter, 
 to travel to a place, 213 ; aller bie?i, 
 to fit, to go right, 239. Aller and 
 venir, followed by infinitive, 374. 
 S'en aller, to go away, 219, 242, 243 
 
 ALMOST, presque, 180. 
 
 ALONE, by one's self, seul, e, 367. 
 
 ALONG, le long du, de la, &c. f 378. 
 
 ALOUD, Jiaut, d haut> 
 
 ALREADY, dejd, 
 
 ALWAYS, toujours, I 
 
 ;:, (to,) ojie's self, (to t-njoy 
 to divert, *amuscr d, 217. 
 
 AN, ANNKE, year, their difli 
 289, N. 3. 
 
 ANECDOTES : Witty answer of a 
 young prince, 411. The French lan- 
 guage, 412. A shopkeeper's answer, 
 411. The Emperor Charles V 
 The entrance of a king into a town, 
 
 442. The last request of an old man, 
 
 443. The three questions, 444. An- 
 swer of a lazy young man, 41." 
 Hearing counsel, 445. Noble answct 
 of a lady, 445. Cornelia, 447. Po- 
 liteness, 450. Mildness, 447. The 
 contest of art, 451. Zeuxis, 451. The 
 corporal of Frederick the Great, 451. 
 Marshal de Turenne, 451. An affect- 
 ing narrative, 451. Interesting nar- 
 rative, 453. 
 
 ANGRY (to be) with somebody, ttrt 
 fdche contre quelqu* un ; about same- 
 thing, de quclque chose, 319. 
 
 ANY, some, (before a noun,) <Ju 
 de la, des, 55, 281 ; before an adjee- 
 ive, de, 57, 281. See SOME. $62, en, 
 
 ANYBODY, somebody, any one 
 some one, quelqu'un, 39. 
 
INI 
 
 561 
 
 ANYTHING, something, 
 Chose, 28 ; good, de ban, 28. 
 
 APPEAR, (to,) to look like, avoir 
 fair, la mine ; she looks angry, ap- 
 pears to be angry, die a fair fdche, 
 332 
 
 APPLY, (to,) $64, s'adresser d. 
 f.s, $ 63, after ; always fol- 
 !y the infinitives avoir or ct re. 
 YOU HUNGRY, 28 ; thirsty, 28 ; 
 -,29. 
 
 ARTICLES, 461. Their distinction ; 
 
 general obs., 463 ; difference in the 
 
 use of the article in French and 
 
 'i, $2, 5; INDEFINITE, from 
 
 7 ; when the definite /r. 
 
 tor the English indefinite, $ 7. 
 
 OKFINITE, $8; their functions, $ 14; 
 
 y noun, &c., $ 15 ; 
 
 ;. roper names of countries, 
 
 $ 1<~> ; not of individuals, $ 17 ; when 
 
 re adjectives qualify the 
 
 .same noun, do not repeat the article, 
 
 icforc nouns, 
 
 $ 19 to 25; 2o PARTITJ-. 
 
 /e or after a negation, $ 26 to 
 ., $29, 
 
 :u ; i ' 
 
 res. 
 
 . jiitqu a, d .' 
 f 13. 
 
 1, auturit 
 
 ' 138 1 ; ai/5.vi . . . </j/r. 
 .:ough ; $ 161 
 4. 
 AT, to, in, $ 1G3 5, a, 7 ; 1 
 
 ;i city, 13 ; en, before a country. 
 Au, $8 ; aux, a la, &c., to the. 
 
 [EN, a la miemic, a?/./ 
 a?;* rr.uiuics, 104 ; to mim\ 
 
 Au MILIEU D'EUX, $63, in tnt> midst 
 of them. 
 
 AUCUN, aucuite, none, not any, 
 i 162. 
 AUPARAVANT, ^ 163 9 ; before. 
 
 AUTANT DE . . ., &C. See As MUCH. 
 
 AUQUEL, $79; to whom, which, 
 , auxquclles, $ 125. 
 
 AUTRE, d'autres, $ l>8. 
 
 AUXILIARY. Verbs which in Eng- 
 lish generally take to have ibr their 
 auxiliary, while in French they taka 
 ct re, $ 1583. 
 
 A VANT, before, takes de before thfl 
 infinitive, 142; pas avant, not until, 
 310. 
 
 r.c, w:'th, $63. 
 
 AVOIR, to have ; cit, had, 160, 162, 
 Ot>s. 75. Avoir beau, in vain, 397. 
 When speaking of dimension we use 
 in French avoir when the English 
 use to be, 338. 
 
 IL Y A, there is, there are, 180, 238, 
 246, -J 17, 248, 338. 11 y a cannot be 
 rendered into English by there is 
 - used in reply to 
 the question, ll.iw Innjj is it 
 246 ; nor when it is nsnl in reply to 
 the question, How far ^ <.jitdle din- 
 lance f 
 
 ., to ache, to in 1 a pain 
 
 AWAKE, (to,) re veil /cr, sc rt> 
 269. 
 
 V, N. 2, 3 
 
 157 (0/Ac. 74s 160; to bo at homo. 
 ilre d In jnnisoH, M ; to bo in tht 
 
 f d la cam].-: 
 
 IB, is rendered by (I<i-oir, \\-\\ci. 
 sscs obligation, 185. 
 
 To BE, translated by avoir. Arc 
 you hungry? Aviz-vous faim ? I 
 am thirsty, fai soif, 28 ; <n 
 sonnndl? sleepy, L". ) ; ch <i a d , ^ fro id 
 pcur, warm, cold, afraid, 31. What 
 is the matter? Qu\rrcz-ro; 
 Am I afraid, ashamed? Ai-jcpeur't' 
 honte? 45. Am I right, wrong? Ai- 
 je raiso?i ? tort ? 36. How old are 
 you? Qucldgeavcz-vous ? 180. How 
 high is his house ? Combien sa maison 
 a-t-elie de haul ou de hauteur ? It IB 
 nearly fifty feet high , elle a e/it-rrori 
 cingttanto picds de ftaKt, 338. 
 
 To DE under obligations tc 8om0 
 

 r a 08 1 
 
 >no, <m ,r de cbltgatwrji d ottd 
 fu'tm, 336. My feet are cul : 
 
 I uux pied* ; her handa ore cold, 
 die afroiil nux main*, 110. 
 
 ant of, avoir leioin de, 
 
 T: BE, translated by te porter, 
 
 '}, tranalated by FAIKE. la it 
 
 // du vent? It in 
 
 Homy t il fait deVorage. la it foggy I 
 
 fail-i/ /* brouillard I 208, 215, 301. 
 
 SeeWBATHER, WARM, COLD, DARK, 
 
 itc.) la it good travelling f 7 
 
 lea i /,;", r f 'ji:;. 07, Ml 
 
 BE, (to,) followed by a present par- 
 
 >, ia tranalated by fre with a 
 
 ind an infinitive; I am reading, jc 
 
 * 1567. 
 
 BEAU, W, fine, handaome; bow 
 heae two worda mutt be employed, 
 192, 287. Avoir btan, in Tain, 397. 
 BRAUCOUP de, much, many, a 
 good deal of, very much, 65. 
 
 7459, * \ew 
 
 aay mi beavcoup, a great many. 
 
 ^0, 187. 
 
 BECOME, (to,) devenir* What has 
 / /ctf-il dc9***t 
 
 225. What will become of him? 
 QIM darirmdra+Ut 242. What baa 
 become of your aunt r Q'et 4t*e- 
 niie votr* tantef 316. To become 
 ubua, tomkcr dmm U ridicmlt, 
 
 BEFORE, OMM< tfe. Do you apeak 
 before you listen f Parto-ttut OWM< 
 iT<i- re.JtMMJ.afct. 
 
 ::>0. The day before, U *, 
 the day before Sunday, la **UU de 
 tfiaianc**, 340. ^MHl t Jnxmf, an- 
 jMravcml, their difference, * 1639. 
 
 BRO, (to,) prier de, 304. To beg 
 wme one'a pardon, demonder pa Am 
 i Vr/vu'iii t 383. 
 
 BCHATR, (to,) Sf comport* 
 S93. 
 
 BSMEVE, (to) croirr.* 1 
 
 BELOW, or down tftaira, U &BJ, 
 
 BESIDES, cut re; bcaidea that, *w 
 t-9 cela; beaidea, i moreover, '* 
 outre, 378. 
 
 BETTER than, micuxqur 
 To be better, taloit atioir. . ' . 1. 
 it better f i 
 
 BETWSBV V art**, 999, 
 
 BiRif, well, 140, 147, 319. 
 well, a great deal, a great mat 
 always followed by the partitive ar- 
 ticle, but bcaufoup ia followed by the 
 preposition de, 1 
 
 Buurrdr, aoon, abortly, 185 ; aooii, 
 very aoon, 259. 
 
 Blow, (a,) coup, 244. 
 
 BLOW, (to,) to blow out, fot&er. 
 342; to blowout one'a brains, br*. 
 / - la certclli d q*<l<]*'*n ; be lioi 
 blown out his brains, i/ 'r>t LruU la 
 
 BOARD, (to,) with any one or any- 
 where, fire en pcntiom, 99 mettre en 
 
 ; ' *:..-.. / -.. 
 
 BoARDiao-nouaR, (a,) a boarding- 
 school, **e pension; to keep a board 
 ing -house, four* pention, 385. 
 
 BOAST, (to,) to brag, r/ai> ra/0i>, 
 428. 
 
 BOIRE,* to drink ; lu, Jru 
 
 Bov, good, 26,284; H re bonded- 
 f*e ckote, to be good for aomething. 
 A q**t cela e*t-il bo* r Of what use 
 ia that? Cela neit bo* d run. it n 
 good for nothing, 2: . bom 
 
 i n < ii I' .-it ' Is it : I IIYU i iM 
 Paris? 
 
 BoRJl, (to be,) it re **, nee ; wher* 
 were you born? Oi ite*-\ou ni 
 (nee?} 388. 
 
 BEI.XG, apporter, amener ; differ - 
 ence between theae two v . 
 
 BURST, (a,) n 
 
 laughter, vn Mat de rire ; to burst 
 out, Mater ; to burst out laugh 
 Mater de rire,fairc vn iclat de 
 
 ! 
 
INDEX. 
 
 UM if . transact business, 
 
 -/; 
 bare but one friend; je n'. 
 
 . <tcque. lie 
 has no- .. s, H na que 
 
 /OK, had it not been, were it 
 
 Got for, $ 164 <>, tans. 
 
 v. (to purchase. 
 
 
 
 ! y rendered by de, 
 
 use of the POMIVO voice 
 
 230. By, anprrf* de ; to paw .by 
 place, patter awprit fun m 
 i.j of, 4 rffrf /<. 3$6. 
 BY MYSELF, thyself, dec.. * lf.310 
 
 Srttl, trtih, trnlr. irulf*. 
 
 in I faction of crla, t: 
 
 ', 6. 
 here and there, about, 
 
 all that : 
 Comment eela *'*pjx 
 
 .umber*. $ 1374, used 
 ales and aorereigna, % 14 1 . 
 
 JO, 80. ID- 
 
 CARRY, to,) to take, porter, me- 
 itstinction, 303. 
 
 ' comptant ; to buy for 
 cash, odbefer comptant, 239. 
 CAST (to) down, laitter ; to caat 
 
 1 one's eyes, laitter Irt ytux, 
 
 hat, these, those. ' 
 
 T A'hen 
 be used, (N. 6, p. 
 
 469 : 
 
 Id. f : 
 
 what, or the thing which, 181 
 that is to Ear, 
 pouryuoi, then 
 375. 
 
 CE, $38, be, ei. n wad 
 
 instead of i 
 
 . that, $38, N.5i 
 use cert, cr/a, to translate tho 1 r 
 the former, when they apply not to 
 nouns, but to action* 
 
 this one; crlui-ld,e,: 
 one. Cct autrf, that i -;MI, 
 
 who i: 
 
 \ 5-n, these ; cr*r-/4, cell - 
 those; cmxyui. 
 30,46, 886,207, $6- 
 
 huvr n,,nr. -ITt*. N. 1, -J. 
 
 CEDILLA, (Milled its use, p. 509 
 1. 
 
 CELA. that, (meaning that thing,) 
 
 I English ; 
 ooun it relates to a preceding 
 
 when to a following, 1 
 Cti.ri DU, de 7a, </. 
 /, &.r., $ 104, that of, or the pos- 
 
 a hundred, takes an 
 plural and not followed by another 
 numeral, 184. Never preceded by 
 lowed by 
 HO oysters, $6, p. 
 462. 
 
 CEFEJCDAXT, however, J34. 
 CE QU'IL Y A, $87 I 
 
 what is. 
 CE QUE, ce qui, $89, what ; $90, 
 
 i. Cepouryuoi, $92, 
 for what ; ce d 91*01, dang < 
 qnoi, 6tc., $93, 94. Ce qr 
 $ 1?0, what, that N-. 
 Cctrx. (SeeC- 
 Cni' 
 
 \I*OE, (to,) men: 
 
 \ other things, changer. Do you change 
 "rs- 
 
504 
 
 INDEX, 
 
 CHAQUE, each ; chayuc homme,each 
 man, 217. 
 
 CHEZ, 84, 3G3, $ 1637, at, in, to. 
 
 CINQUIEME, 1-5, $ 141, fifth. 
 
 CoLD,/roiJ. It is cold, ilfaitfroid, 
 $2, 207. To have a cold, tire en- 
 rkume, 293. To catch a cold, pren- 
 drefroid, s 1 cnrJiumcr, 356. I have a 
 rcold, fai un rhuine de cerveau, 293. 
 (See J3r, translated by avoir.} 
 
 COLLECTIFS, (w>ms,)$140 10. (See 
 NOUNS.) 
 
 COMBIEN de? 65, $1372, how 
 much ? how many ? $ 1614. 
 
 COME, (to,) rrwir, 175. (See VE- 
 
 N1B.) 
 
 I:.NT! inter]., $121, what ! 
 
 COM! nlilV, tutluni 
 
 de . . . que tic . . . , / 
 $138 1 ; of inc-: 
 yuede . .. , moins de. . 
 plus . . . qu< . que. 
 
 COMPARISON of ndj. an-i . . Ill: 
 irreg., 1 17. 
 
 COMI'AS 
 
 COM ri f/, 254. 
 
 COMPOUND form of iho : 
 $ 1452. 
 
 Coan ul, 182. 
 
 COMI rcomp- 
 
 fc/.-f, to In,; 
 
 COMPTER, (no prepos.,) to inimd, 
 .iifiit-r sur, to depend on, $ 64. 
 
 CON i ^148. (See 
 
 POTENTIAL.) Compose, $1 19. (See 
 POTENTIAL.) 
 
 CONDUCT, (to,) conduirc, 136 ; con- 
 ducted conduit, 17.'>; one's self, *e 
 conduire, 270. 
 
 CONJI <onjugaison*,144, 
 
 let, 2d, 3d, 4th. 
 
 CONJUNCT; w. (See 
 
 at (79 1 ) a list of those that govern the 
 ubj. ; all others govern the indicat.) 
 A moins que, de crainte que t &c., 
 require ne. Jusqu'd, jusqu'd ceque, 
 their dillorenre, ^164 1. When a 
 Conjunct, governs several verbs, 2 ; 
 fi, if, governs tv.o verbs, 3 j 
 
 que, that, not omitied in French 
 whether, '; whether, soil %uc, ho 
 used, 4 ; but for, were it not for, 
 had it not been for, sa?is, 5. Conj 
 with preterit antcrieur, 521. 
 
 CONI/AITRE, to be acquainted \vith, 
 (to know,) 112, 140, 172, 329. 
 
 CONSENT, (to,) co?ise?itir, 278. I 
 consent to it,fy consent, 'J>. 
 
 CONSENTIK, to consent, 27S, 334. 
 
 CONVENIR, to suit, 237; de, to 
 agree to, L". 
 
 CONVERSE (to) wit!/. 
 avcc, i 
 
 COT, d co/6 J t, : side of, 
 
 266. De ce cotc-c:, &,c., tl. 
 !'J3. 
 
 Cou> 
 
 ixtyi ites-vou* ? 2 
 
 Cour, (tin,) a l!o\v. a : 
 knock, a stab, a shot, a ^ 
 a slap, 244. 
 
 CBAINDRE, to fc !, &,c., 
 
 220, 260. 
 
 CREDIT, (on,) a credit, 239. 
 
 CROIRE, to believe, 111. 
 
 CROITRE, to grow, croissn, 
 
 '.MR, tO \' 
 
 fruit. 3 
 
 CURTAIN, 
 the cur 
 
 se laisse, 352. 
 
 CUT, (to,) couper, 80; one's self 
 secoupcr, 217, 21'.'. 
 
 D. 
 
 63, 105 i>: 
 ^163 11 U. 
 
 DARK, sombre, obscur, 208. Il 
 grows dark, t7 sefaittard, nut 
 
 DAVANTAGE, more, never precedes 
 a noun, 198. 
 
 DE, (partitive,) some or any, 57, 
 2S4. Of, from, $8; dt, between 
 nouns, 27, 404 ; locutions that re- 
 quire de before an infinitive," SO. \\2. 
 228; dc JM, of, from whom, $79. 
 
J7: DK.X. 
 
 565 
 
 Pr 
 
 A)CFAIRE, to undo; se de/ 
 1 of, 268. 
 
 v 64. 
 
 M tardfz pas a revenir, 
 
 .;, to dwell, 
 
 ^-3, 187, 
 
 DEMI, f, half, moitii t $11! 
 
 rompter gur, 
 v 64. 
 
 tanding, 
 
 res nc before 
 1)4. 
 
 y, $3; i* 
 
 ir. of de, $ 10. 
 
 '/tie, as 
 
 eoon as, governs the pn'u'rit ante- 
 
 'dt t &,c.,of, from 
 
 ::, to go, to i 
 
 DEV. 
 
 to beconi' 
 
 IR (see Pi <> owe, 
 
 ro you to? drvez-rout? 184, 
 
 between a master and 
 his pupils, 435. 
 
 7. (See MOURIR.) 
 . to tell, say; <7 
 170. 
 
 a verb, 
 
 1. On short English 
 iniwtTe, ! 
 
 DIR t attending 
 
 words, articles, proi.ouns, &,c., 457. 
 
 DIR. 3. On the ohj. pron. ZMI, to 
 him, t,> her : . them. 
 
 458. 
 
 DIR. 4. On obj. nouns. The pro 
 pos. m N ;ood. 
 
 DIR. 
 
 tionary, and t":T.n the tenses 
 rules, 459. 
 
 ! cuinjwund 
 
 , 459. 
 
 DIR. 7 :iouph,&v. 
 
 adverb? 
 
 rogations, -> 
 
 DIR. 9. Formation of the ; 
 
 .USTf (to,) fi 
 
 Do, (to,) to in; 
 made, fait, Ifc. 
 
 dc son mieux, 249; <> 
 , ton devoir, 348; good to 
 somebody, du lien d quclqu'i; 
 372. Shall you BOOH 
 writing? AM 
 
 writing 
 
 do \sithout, tepasffrdi. 
 translated by se porter, 275. 
 
 
 
 . that of which, 2J- . 
 past particip!- nt dooa 
 
 a it, 229. 
 
 y the iiDininntivr of :!. 
 verb. 
 DORMIR, to sleep, 121. 
 
 f o undrcse ; 
 dedabiller, 269, 338, 400. 
 
 DRINK, (to,) loire, 86, 121, 172 
 332 ; coffee, prcndre le (du) cafe, 132. 
 
 to ride. >See A 
 214. 
 
 DRY, srr ; il fait sec, 208. 
 Du, some, any, ^ 
 Duqr: 
 86, 87, 
 
66 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 DUTY, devoir, 348. 
 DYE, (to,) to color, ieindre, <en 
 uoir,) 195. 
 
 E. 
 
 E (mute) changed to e (grave) $ 144 
 4 ", e (acute) to grave, $ 144 5. 
 
 EACH, chaque, each one ; chacun, 
 E17, $ 38, 
 
 EACH OTHER, Vun Vautre,&,c., 331. 
 
 EA.RLY, de bonne heure, earlier, de 
 meilleurc hcure, plus tdt, 150. 
 
 CR:RE, to write, ccrit, written, 
 tcrivez, write, 89, 111, 121, 172. 
 
 ELLE, she, $ 38. When ce must 
 replace elle, N 2; elle-meme, her- 
 self, $4H, &c., tfelle, of, from her, 
 n, $ 47, 48$ 63. .EMe requires no 
 complement. Possessive-, d elle, &c., 
 U06. 
 
 ELSE (what), ^wo? encore, otherwise, 
 <.wtrement, 113. 
 
 EN, some, any of it, of them, 59, 
 51, 63, "$62. Yen, 87, 88. Its place 
 wirli personal pronouns, 96 ; of him, 
 &c., en, 113. Past participle does 
 not agree with en, 162, Obs. 76 ; from 
 it, them, &c., 185, $47, 48; $50. 
 
 EN, in, at, to, 375, 407, before the 
 name of a country. ($ 163 11 to 13.) 
 
 ENCORE, still, yet, &c., some, any 
 more, 73. 
 
 ENCRIER, inkstand, 41 ; ecritoire, 
 (fern in.) 
 
 .ENDEAVOR, (to,) tdcher, 342. S'ef- 
 forcer, 404. 
 
 ENS* TIR ( S '), to fly, run away, 253 ; 
 262. 
 
 ENLIST, (lo,)sefaire soldat, s'en- 
 rtler^ 226. 
 
 E^NUYEII (s'), to want amusement, 
 576. 
 
 ENSUITE, afterwards, 88. 
 ,ENTRER, (to,) dans, to go in, come 
 in, &c., 302. 
 
 EJMTRETENIR, to Keep, s'entretenir 
 vt>ec, to converse with, 29. 
 SPICIER, grocer, 36. 
 
 ET, and, 35; 372, 374. 
 
 ETEINDRE, to extinguish, 175. 
 
 ETRE, to be 5 etv, been, 84, 157, 
 160. Ou en etions-nous ? where did 
 we stop ? 383. Verbs that take etrt 
 as auxiliary, 530 ; past 'part, agrees 
 with nomin., 530. C'est, ce sont, it 
 is, &c., 241, 327, 338, 348; elm 
 followed by the preposition d and an 
 infinitive, corresponds to the verb t(* 
 be followed by a present participle 
 $ 1567. (3ee Is IT NOT ?) 
 
 &VENTAIL, fan, eventaiU, 45. 
 
 EVER, jamaw, 157. 
 
 EVERY, all, tout, toute, &c. 110, 
 289, 219, 356. 
 
 Eux, $ 38, they ; more than t\cy, 
 73. 
 
 EUX-MEMES, themselves, $4H; 6 
 eux, to them, $63, d'eux, deux, theirp 
 $106. 
 
 F. 
 
 FAIRE, to make, to do ; faisant, 
 fait, 83, 131, 168; you had better, 
 240 ; it is all over with me, 332 ; the 
 soup will be warmed, 348 ; I cannot 
 help it, 381 ; it grows dark, 352; to 
 think much of one, 354 ; to do one's 
 best, 249. FAIT, (si,) yes, 51, Obs. 26. 
 
 FALL, (to,) tombcr,-270. Baisser. 
 The day, stocks fall, lejour Itaisse, It 
 change baisse, 352. 
 
 FALLOIR, to be necessary, must. 
 All verbs expressing necessity, obli- 
 gation, or want, are in French trans- 
 lated by PALLOIR, 197. 
 
 FAR, loin. How far ? Quelle din 
 tance ? 252 ; far off, de loin, 317 ; from 
 thee, detoi, $63. 
 
 FARMER, fermier, 38. 
 
 FAULT, la faute. Whose fault is 
 it ? A qui est la faute ? 381 ; to find 
 fault with . . . trouver d redire a ... 
 400. 
 
 FAVOR, (a,) un plaisir. Faire un . . 
 110. 
 
 FEAR, (to,) craindre, 220. 260. For 
 'bar of, de craintc (peur) d?, 356 ; rfrf 
 crainle (peit ) qnc . . ne, 417 $ 104 1 
 
INDEX. 
 
 567 
 
 FEEL, (to,) scntir, 278. Tu feel a 
 pain, souffrir dc, 334; sleepy, avoir 
 . cnvie de dormir, 220. 
 
 FEW, (a,) books, quelgues livres ; a 
 few (of them,) en . . quelques uns, 69. 
 
 FIER (se) a, to trust to, 64. 
 
 FIFTH, 1-5, cinquieme,.$14l. 
 
 FILL, (to..) remplir, 302. 
 
 FIRE, (to,) tircr ; a gun, a pistol, 
 sw coup de fusil, de pistolct ; to some 
 one, d (sur) quelqu'un, 244. 
 
 FIRST, 1st, premier, ler, 70; 
 d'abordj 88. 
 
 FIRSTLY, Istly, premierement ,lmi rJ . 
 3<J3, $ 1617. 
 
 FIT, (to,) flZ/er &*>;*, 239. (See 
 ALLSR.) 
 
 FLEURIR, to blossom, is regular ; to 
 flourish, irregular. 
 
 ENTLY, couramment, 321. 
 . (to,) to run away, s'enfuir, 
 162. 
 
 Full, car, 107; during, pendant, 
 i-or and at, when used to ex- 
 press the price of a tiling, not ren- 
 i French , 276 ; rendered by de, 
 276 ; by pour, for more bad luck, pour 
 surcroit de malheur, 334. For what, 
 what for, pourquoi, cc pourquoi, $ 92. 
 ;:R, cclui-ld, $ 36 ; ceZa,when 
 applied to actions, 469, N. 5. 
 
 FORMERLY, autrcfois, 155. 
 
 FORTNIGHT, (a,) quinze jours ; a 
 fortnight ago, il y a quinze jours, 247. 
 
 FRIGHTEN, (to,) effrayer, s' effrayer; 
 In moindre chose V effraie, 374. 
 
 FROM, de, 252, 318 ; des, 356 ; de 
 temps en temps, 356. From the, du, 
 18. 
 
 FUTURE, (1st,) futur, $ 146 ; its 
 terminations. Not used after ', if, 
 but the present is, 3 ; used after 
 quand, when, $ 146 4 ; ce qui, ce 
 quc, aussilot que, &c., -5; 2d fut., 
 its formation, 299. 
 
 G. 
 
 GAME, ,'a,) unc pa-rtie, at chess; 
 tehees ; at billiards, de billard ; at 
 
 cards, de cartes . faire une partu 
 de . ^ , 342. 
 
 GENER, (se,) to inconvenience onw'e 
 self, 395. 
 
 GATHER, (to,) cueillir, 346. 
 
 GENERAL, general, generaux, 4G. 
 
 GET, (to,) one's livelihood by, 
 gagjier sa me a, 307 ; made, /aire 
 faire ; dyed, fain, tcindre, 177, 196 ; 
 beateflj (whipped,) se faire battre ; 
 paid, payer ; one's self invited to 
 dinner, invitcr d di?ier, 363 ; rid of 
 something, se defaire de quelquc 
 chose; of somebody, se dcbarrasser 
 dc quelqu'un, 268. 
 
 GIVE, (to,) donner, 94; rise to 
 difficulties, quarrels, suspicions, fa /re 
 naitredes dijjlcultes, des querelles, dts 
 soup$ons, 406 ; up, renonccr d, $ 64. 
 
 Go, (to,) alhr, 84, 165 ; there, y 
 aller, 102, 165 ; round the house, 
 autour de la maison, faire le tour, 
 &c., 367; down, alight, desce?idre, 
 303 ; on foot, aller d pied, 214 ; on a 
 journey, faire un voyage, 295 ; to 
 bed, aller se couchcr, semettreau lit, 
 220 ; to the country, a la campagne, 
 289 ; to some one's house, chez quel- 
 qu'un, 84; to see some one, voir 
 quelqu'un, 332 ; a walking, seprome- 
 ner, 222; to go away, s'c;i aller; 
 vous en allez-vous ? 219, 242, 243 ; to 
 go for, aller chercher, 105 ; go out, 
 sortir, 110, 121, 150, 175; to bo 
 going to, aller, (see it.) Are you 
 coming ? Allez-vous ve?iir? 90, N. 1. 
 Je vais, used instead of je veux, 88, 
 N. 1. 
 
 GROCER, tpicicr, 36. 
 
 GROW, (to,) croitre, 354. It gnowa 
 dark, late, il sefait nuit, tard 352. 
 
 H. 
 
 HABILLER, to dress, 269. 
 HAD it not been, 164, sans. 
 HAIL, (to,)greler, 228. 
 HAIR, to hate, 213. 
 HALF dcmi, demie. (Sec DEMI, 
 * 1-11.) 
 
508 
 
 I N D K X , 
 
 EN, (to,) arrivcr, takes &re, 
 254. 
 
 HARDLY, a peine, 180. 
 
 HAUT, (en,) abcve, up stairs ; en 
 Das, below, down stairs, 193. 
 
 HAVE, (to,; avoir, had, eu, 160; a 
 uold, un rhurne, 293 ; sore linger, 
 mal an doigt, aux ycur, a V&il, a la 
 main, aux de?ils, d la tite, 126, 234; 
 d la gorge, au cote, 295, 284. To 
 have just, venir de, 249, $ 145 3. 
 
 HEALTH, sanli, 332. 
 
 HEAR, (to ... of,) entendre parlcr 
 dc, 246 ; apprcndre, 253. 
 
 HE, il, ce, lui; who, qui, that, quc, 
 $38- 
 
 HER, son, sa, ses, 38, 44, 282,$ 31 ; 
 la; to her, lui, $47, 48; herself, 
 elle-mcmc, $41,} ; it, (them,) to her, 
 Ic, la, Zes lui ; -It-lui, -la-lui, -les- 
 fot", $58; her there, Z'y, $57, 58; 
 her some, airy, lui en, $59; her any 
 there, lui y en, ^ GO. To her, a die, 
 )f, from her, d* die, &c., $63; her- 
 self, (reflective,) se, s'y, $71; hers, 
 le sien, la siennc, &c., $ 104 ; a die, 
 , $ 106. 
 
 HERE, id, (y,) 110. Here and 
 there, 3%. Here is, void, 312. 
 
 HEURE. (See HOUR.) 
 
 HIM, lui, being the masculine of 
 her, see the same paragraphs. 
 
 HOME, (at,) a la inaison, 84. 
 
 HORS de, out ; out of the city ; dc- 
 hors, out of doors, 301, 307. 
 
 HOUR, (the,) Ihcure, at what 
 o'clock, at one o'clock, at half past 
 one, d une heure ct identic, 90. At 9 
 in the morning, in the evening, d neuf 
 heures du matin, du soir, 185. Early, 
 earlier, sooner, 150. To ask the 
 hour, 110. 
 
 How, how much, many, before an 
 exclamation, quc. How good you 
 are ! que vous 5tes bo?i ! &c., 335. 
 Flow far, jusqii'ou, 193, 252. How 
 long, coinbien de temps, 246 ; since 
 what time, depuis quand ? 248 ; 
 fuaqu'd quand, 189 How much, 
 
 many, cctnbic/i de, 65. How 
 times, how often? combien de foist 
 Once, une fois, deux fois, plusieurt 
 fois, 165, $137, 2; $1614. 
 
 HOWEVER, cependant, 134; quel- 
 que . . .qKe, quel quc . . . , quels que . . . , 
 que, &c., 422, 516. 
 
 HUNDRED, cent, 184. (See CENT.; 
 
 HURT, (to,) somebody, faire du mal 
 dquelqu'un, 223, 224; one's feel- 
 ings, faire de la peine d quelqu j un t 
 333. 
 
 I. 
 
 l t je, f t 5, 469. I who, that, moi 
 qui, que, 470. 
 
 Ici, (y,} here, 110. 
 
 IDIOMS, after INDEX. 
 
 IF, si, 107; when it loses the x, 
 372, $1463; when followed by 
 the present tense, 233, 06s. 105 ; by 
 the imperfect, 507, N. 1 ; when it 
 governs two verbs, 538, $ 164 3. 
 
 IL, Us, he, it, they, $38; whqn 
 replaced by cc, 469, N. 2. 
 
 IMMEDIATELY, tout de suite, sur le 
 champ, 237. 
 
 IMPART, (to,) faire part de quilyue 
 chose d quelqu'un, 397. 
 
 IMPERATIVE, imperatif, 509, $ 150 ; 
 its formation, 1 to 6 of $ 150. Five 
 irregular ones, 7; regular ones, with 
 objectives and negation, 8. How 
 to translate, Come and see me, &c., 
 12. 
 
 IMPERFECT (the) of the Indicative, 
 506, $147. Translated by French 
 parfait and preterit. Its terminations, 
 1 ; how formed, 2; regular verbs, 
 exceptions, 3 ; when used, 4 ; 
 when it ends in iions, 5 ; in yions, 
 6 ; used after si, 507, $ 148 4 ; of 
 the POTENTIAL, Conditionnd, its ter- 
 minations ; its formation, 507. Could, 
 would, how to translate them, 508 
 4. I wish, when it is, je voudrats, 
 5. SECOND IMPERFECT, Preterit, 
 its terminations, 517, 518, $ 153 ; re- 
 gular and irregular verb, list of the 
 
I If P E * 
 
 5G9 
 
 alter: use of the preterit, 519, 520: 
 z>f the subjunctive, its formation ; its 
 terminations, 416, 517. Impersonal 
 verbs govern the subjunctive, 515, 
 1514. 
 
 IMPROVE, (to,) to profit, faire dcs 
 prog res, 313. 
 
 I.N, dans, 63, 105; in, dans, en, 
 
 ihcir difference, 375. IN, translated 
 
 by iS, 242, 367, 2S9 ; by de, 338 ; by 
 
 r a superlative ; c'est le plus 
 
 iys de V Europe, 446. In this 
 
 manner, de cctte maniere, 180. In a 
 
 short time, dans pcu de temps, 375. 
 
 to, by a, 535, 163 5; not 
 
 -11. In the midst 
 
 of . . ., ttu milieu dc . . . , 476, $ 63. 
 
 INDEFINITE, (article,) never omitted 
 in the plural; when not used in tiie 
 singular ; when replaced by the defi- 
 nite, 462. 
 
 INDICATIVE, Indicatif. Present, 
 500, $144; Imperfect, 507, $147; 
 Second Imperfect, Prettrit, 517, 
 Pluperfect, 520, $154; Se- 
 rond Pluperfect, Preterit antvricur, 
 $ !.".") ; conjunctions after which it is 
 Jl, (see those tenses;) Fu- 
 ture, 504; Second Future, . 
 
 I.M'ii i LUI:NTLY, tant lien quemal, 
 3S6. 
 
 INDIRECT (regime) objective of a 
 preposition, $43. 
 
 INFINITIVE, 79 ; words which re- 
 quire it, with the preposition de, 80. 
 
 INFINITIVE, with its 4 terminations, 
 79, 80; words requiring it with the 
 preposition de, 80 ; governed by every 
 preposition except en, 521, $ 156 1 ; 
 remark on apres, after, Infinitive 
 governed by another verb, 2; im- 
 portant remark on it ; different prepo- 
 sition in English and French ; verbs 
 that govern it without a preposition, 
 ~-4 ; adj. and verbs that take a, 5 ; 
 t.hose that take dc, 6. After a, 
 the French infinitive translates the 
 present participle coming after the 
 verb to he, 399, 502, $ 144 . 
 
 INQUIRE (to; after some one, dn- 
 ma?tder quriqit'un ; qui dmmndcz- 
 vou8 ? 204. 
 
 INSTANTLY, d V instant, fur It 
 champ, (this instant,) 237. 
 
 INSTEAD of, au lieu de, 124. 
 
 INSTRUIRE, to instruct, instruisc.iit 9 
 instruit, 266. 
 
 INTRODUCE, (to,) presenter a, in- 
 troduire a, 476, $64. 
 
 IT, le, V, 26; it, nomin., il, cll>\ 
 ce, $38; it is, c'est, ce sont, 469, 
 N. 2, 3; them,Zes, it, (to it, to them,) 
 y, 101 ; it, them, (of, from,) en, $47, 
 48, 50; it to me, before the verb, 
 me, le, la, &c., te le,.la ; le lui, hi 
 lui, &c., $57; after the verb, -/<- 
 moi, -la-moi, &c. f $58; it to it, 
 there, Z'y, $57, 58; to it, of it, with 
 it or with them, applying to things, 
 are not translated after the verb, 
 $ 63 ; it, (with reflective verbs,) 
 Cen, s en, nous cn y vous en, m'en, 
 478, $ 73. 
 
 ITS, son, sa, *cs. What is its in- 
 finitive ? Qucl en csi V infinitif ? 466, 
 $31, N.I. 
 
 J. 
 
 J A.MAIS, ever ; nc . . .jamais, never 
 157. 
 
 JE, I, and before a vowel or h 
 mute,_;', 25. 
 
 JEST, (to,) plaisanlcr, badiner, roun 
 vous moqucz, you are jesting, lie i.s 
 no joker, il n'entcjid pas raillert'c, 
 381. 
 
 JETER, to throw, throw away, 173, 
 Ols. 73. 
 
 JOHN some, en . . . d Jean, 476, 
 $59. 
 
 JOUR, day, en pleinjour, in broad 
 daylight, 407. 
 
 JOUR, JOURNEE, their difference 
 283, N.2. 
 
 JOUER, to play, takes de when au 
 instrument, and a when a game in 
 spoken of, 259; vn tour, to play 
 trick, 400 
 
570 
 
 JUDGE (to be a) of something, se 
 toiwaitre en -juelque chose, 351. 
 
 JUSQUE, up to, as far as, 189, 193 ; 
 jusqu'd ce quc, until, 537, $ 164. 
 
 JUST, (to have,) venir de. He has 
 out just come, il ne fait que d'ar- 
 river, 249, 504, $ 1453. 
 
 K. 
 
 KEEP, \'to,) garder, 239; tenir, 
 274. To keep warm, cool, clean, 
 BI>, tenir chaud, frais, propre, 365 ; 
 one's self ready, pret, 274; on one's 
 guard against one, en garde centre 
 yuelqu'un, 366 ; to maintain, entrc- 
 tenir, 429 ; keep a boarding-schcol, 
 house, tenir pension, 385. 
 
 KILL, (to,) tuer, 92; to ; <ill by 
 ehooting, tuer tfun coup d^arme a 
 feu, 367. 
 
 KNOW, (to,) savoir, connaitre, 112, 
 140, 172; how to swim, nagcr, 13.5. 
 Difference of savoir and coruiailre, 
 329, N. 1. 
 
 L. 
 
 LA, (article feminine,) the, 281, 463. 
 LA, (objective pronoun,) her, it, 281, 
 472. LA, (y,) there, 110. 
 
 LAQUELLE, (relative,) which, 479, 
 $82; (interrogative,) $34. 
 
 LAST, dernier, ere, 71. 
 
 LATE, tard; too late, troptard, 110. 
 
 LATELY, the other day, Vautre 
 jour, dermercment, 375. 
 
 LATTER, cdui-ci, 468, $36; ccci, 
 when applied to actions, 469, N.5. 
 Former, celui-ld ; cela. 
 
 LAUGH, (to,) rire, 325. (See RIKE.) 
 
 LAY (to) to one's charge, imputerd 
 guelqu'ufi ; ne me V imputes pas, 381. 
 
 LE, the, T, before a vowel or silent 
 ft, 25, 463. 
 
 LE, him, it, so, 168, 472; le lui, 
 Ics lui, it, them to him ; -le-lui, -les- 
 lui, 475. Lc, relating to a noun, an 
 sdjective, or even a whole sentence, 
 is rendered by so, and frequently 
 frinittedin English, 171, 173. 
 
 LKAGJE, (a,) une lieue ; to walk 
 or travel a league, faire une lime 
 295: 
 
 LEAKN, (to,) apprcndre, 127, 179 
 le Fran^ais, 129 ; by heart, par cceui 
 208. 
 
 LEFT, to, on the left side or hand 
 d gauche, sur la gauche, 378. 
 
 LEFT, (to have,) rester. When J 
 have paid for the horse, I shall huvo 
 only ten dollars left, quand faurci 
 &c. They have one louis left, il leu 
 restc un louis, 300. 
 
 LE MIEN, la mienne, &c., 484, 
 $ 104 to 109 ; mine, used even after 
 etre when ce is nominative, $ 105. 
 
 LEQUEL ? which one ? lesqucls, 
 35, 44, 230, 283, 488. 
 
 LESS, moins, the last, le moinx, 
 147; less, fewer, moins, 272. (See 
 MOINS.) 
 
 LEST, for fear, de peur (c ruin ft-} 
 que... ne, 537, $ 164. 
 
 LEUR, s, their, 44, 282 ; le (la] latr, 
 les leurs, theirs, 49, 291. When it 
 must be translated by en . . . I 
 N. 2. 
 
 LEUR, them, to them, for persons, 
 282, O6s.l28,472. Leur, (le, la, les,} 
 it or them, to them, 475, $ 57. Leur 
 en, them some, 476, $ 59. Leur y en, 
 some to them, there, $60. 
 
 LEVEL (on a) with, even with, c 
 fieur de, 354. 
 
 LIEU (au} de, instead of, 124 ; lenir 
 lieu de, 404. 
 
 LIGHTEN, (to,) faire des iclaires t 
 227. 
 
 LIKE, (to,* aimer; I like fish, 
 faime le poisson ; to like, trouver ; 
 how do you like that wine ? comment 
 trouvez-vous ce vin? I like it well, 
 je le trouve Ion, 208. As yo^a liko, 
 comme il vous plaira, 325. 
 
 LIKE better, (to,) orefer, aimt' 
 mieux, 263, 264; to my liking, c 
 man gre, 385. 
 
 LIRE, to read, lisant, lu. licez. 1 10, 
 121, H8, 172. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 571 
 
 LITTLE,, small, petit, 47; little, 
 peu, 347, peude ; a little, un peu de, 
 57; but or only a little, ne . . . gucre 
 dc, 67 ; just a little, taut soipeu, 427. 
 
 LIVE, (to,) demeurer, 187, N. 3. 
 
 LONG, (to,) tarder de. ; I long to 
 see my brother, il me tarde de voir 
 mon frtre, 394. 
 
 LONG, (so,) as, tant que, 401. How 
 long ? combien, combicn de temps ? 
 1246. How long since? (since what 
 time?) depuis quand? 248. How 
 long ? jusqu'd quand ? 189. 
 
 LONG-TEMPS, (never un long- 
 temps,) a long time, 462, $6. 
 
 LOOK, (to,) upon, donner sur ; the 
 window looks upon the street, lafc- 
 ivtre donne sur la rue, 361. (^ec 
 A.FPEAR.) To look pleased with 
 somebody, faire bonne mine a quel- 
 IILUII ; displeased -with, ma:.vaise 
 -nine d, 332 ; avoir Vair ; to look 
 sad, avoir Vair triste, 384. 
 
 LOKSQUE, quand, when, 242 ; used 
 .vith the preterit antcritur, ">01. 
 [Lorsque is never used to ask a 
 question.) 
 
 LOSE, (to,}perdre, 182; one's wits, 
 pcrdre la tcte, 334 ; sight of, perdre 
 de vue, 389. 
 
 LTIRE, to shine, glitter, l:*isant, 
 'in, 228. 
 
 M. 
 
 MA, my, mon, mes, 282, 466, 31. 
 
 MAIS, but, 42. 
 
 MAISON, (a /a,) home ; (see it.) 
 
 MAKE, (to,) do faire, faisant, 121 ; 
 fafas, 134; made,/ai, 168. Faire 
 present dequelque chose a quclqu'un, 
 376. To make sick, rendre malade, 
 293 ; one's self understood, se faire 
 compre?idre, 370; comfortable, se 
 mettre d son aise, 395. To make 
 entreaties, faire. des instances, 396. 
 
 MAL, bad ; worse, pire, the worst, 
 le pirey 147 ; badly, 140 : wrong, 
 bad, 319, (See HURT.) 
 
 MANASE, (to,1 to go abaut a thing, 
 
 s'y prc?idrt, 3.52; faire en svrte Je, 
 364. 
 
 MANY, (much,) leaucoup de, 65 
 not many, ne . . . : gucre de, 11 en . . . ; 
 guere, 67, 459. 
 
 MARCHER, to march, walk, step, 
 go, must not be mistaken for se pro- 
 me?ier, 295. 
 
 MATIIN, matifiee, morning, their 
 difTerence, 289. 
 
 ME, me, m\ ^47; mot. 48. It or 
 them to me, me le, la, les, 57. Me 
 to it there, m'y, 57; -y-moi, 58. 
 Me some, mien, 59. Me some there, 
 m'y en, 60. Me, (to me,) o mot ; 
 from me, demoi; near me, prcs de. 
 moi, 63; me, (reflective,) myself, 
 71 ; m j en, myself of it, 73. 
 
 MEAN, (to,) vouloir dire. What do 
 you mean ? que voulez-vous dire ? 
 399. 
 
 MEDDLE (to) with a thing, se mt- 
 ler de quelque chose. De quoi vous 
 milez-vous ? what are you meddling 
 with ? 295. 
 
 MEFIER, (se.) dc, to mistrust, 476, 
 477, 64. 
 
 MI*ME, mimes, sell, selves; moi* 
 mime, myself; eux-mvmcs, elles-mc- 
 mm. themselves even, (adv.,) 344, 
 471. 
 
 MENER, to take, to lead, not to be 
 used for porter, 303. 
 
 MENTIR, to utter a falsehood, to 
 lie, mcntant, menti, ne mentcz vas. 
 226. 
 
 METTRE, to put, put on ; mcttant, 
 mis, mettez, 149, 168 ; an net, to 
 transcribe fairly, 356 ; d meme dc, to 
 enable, 378 ; se mettre d table, to sit 
 down to a meal, 407 ; d quelque chose, 
 to set about a thing. 340 ; d Vahri dc. 
 to shelter one's self from, 3f>6. 
 
 MIDST (in the) of them, au miLtu 
 d'elles, 476. 
 
 MIEUX, better, j%7. Lemon, ton, 
 son, &c., mieux, in tne best way 1, 
 thou, he, &c., can, 217, 249. (See 
 BETTER.) ' 
 
572 
 
 MIGHT, iiow translated, 509, $ 119. 
 
 MILE, (a,) un mille. To walk or 
 travel a mile,/aire un mille, 295. 
 
 MILIEU, (le,) the middle ; au mi- 
 lieu. (See MIDST.) 
 
 MILLE, a thousand ; rot wi mille, 
 462, 6. 
 
 MIEN, (le,} la mienne, &,c., mine, 
 30, 49, 291. 
 
 MINE, le mien, la mienne, &,c., 30, 
 49, 291, 483, 484, 104 to 110. A 
 brother of mine, 203, 484. 
 
 MISTAKE, (to,) to be mistaken, se 
 tromper, vous vous trompez, 219. 
 
 MISTRUST, (to,) se mefier de, se de- 
 fter de, 477. 
 
 Moi, I, 38; me, to me, 47; 
 moi-mime, myself, 41; moi qui, I 
 who ; moi que, I whom, 470; dmoi, 
 de moi, always used after certain 
 verbs, 476. A moi, mine, 484, 106. 
 
 MOINS, less, serves to form the 
 comparative and superlative of in- 
 equality, 146. Aloins de, less, fewer, 
 (before a noun,) 78, 490, 492. When 
 there is a comparison between two 
 pentences, the verb which follows 
 plus or moms, requires the negative 
 ne. Cet liomme a mo ins d'amis <jit/ il 
 ne pense, 272. The less . . . the less, 
 moins . . . moins, 492. 
 
 MOITIIO, (/a,) the half, 499 ; demi. 
 
 MON, ma, mcs, my, 25, i 
 466. 
 
 MONTER, to go up, mount, ascend ; 
 takes avoir and tire as auxiliaries, 
 304, N. 1. 
 
 MOONLIGHT, clair de lune. It is 
 moonlight, il fait clair de lune, 208. 
 
 MONTH, (a,) un mois ; their names, 
 499, 143. 
 
 MORE, plus ; more . . . than, (be- 
 lore an objective, )plus de . . . que de ; 
 plus de (before a number) ; plus que, 
 (before a nominative,) 78. One more 
 book, encore un livre ; a few books 
 more, encore quelquei livres, 73. 
 More, pi its ; the most, le plus, 146. 
 More, davantag-j, 198. The more . . . 
 
 the less, plus. . . . moins, 492. $ 13H 
 2. 
 
 MOUCHOIR, (le,) the handkerchief, 
 41. 
 
 MOURIR, to die, (lose hfe,) mou- 
 rant, mort. L'hommeest mort, safem* 
 merest pas morte, 317; d'une ma- 
 ladie, of a disease, 323. 
 
 MUCH, many, a good decl very 
 much, leaucoup de, (before a noun,) 
 Much of it, en . . . beaucoup ; not 
 much, ne . . .guere de, 65, 376, 490. 
 Much more, encore leaucoup, lean- 
 coup plus. So much, tant, 78, 210, 
 293. Dir. 7, 459. 
 
 MULTITUDE, (nouns of.) (.See 
 NOUNS, 49610.) 
 
 MUST, falloir, (see it.) 11 being 
 its only nominative, see 197, Obs. 90. 
 
 MY. (See MON.) Myself, moi- 
 meme,471. Myself, (reflective,) me, 
 m\ 478, 71; myself to it, m'y, 
 72 ; myself of it, m'en, 73. 
 
 N. 
 
 NAIVIE, nom ; proper names, noms 
 prnjirrs, 496, 497. Names of the 
 months, noms dci mois, 499. What 
 is your name? Comment vous appe- 
 lez-vous ? Je m'cppelle Charles, 320, 
 
 NATIVE, (the,) I'homme ne dans It 
 pays, 423. 
 
 NE, part of the French negative, 
 532, 3 ; 4, 5, 162, an important sec- 
 tion. Ne is used without pas, with 
 the verbs cesser, to cease ; oeer, to 
 dare ; pouvoir, savoir, to be abb, 
 322. Ne . . . guere de, ri 1 en . . . gusrc 
 ne . . . pas leaucoup de, n'en . . pc 
 leaucoup ; ne . , . que pcu de, but li.' 
 tie, only a little, not much, &c., G"> 
 Ne. . . ni, neither, ni, nor ; Je n'u 
 ni cclui-ci ni celui-ld, 32. Ne . . . 
 nulle part, nowhere, not anywhere, 
 89. Ne . . . pas, ne... point, not 28- 
 Ne. . .pas encore, not yet, 352. Nt 
 . . . plus, no longer, no more, not any 
 more, 74, 187. Ne . . . plus guor* 
 de . . , (ri*en . . . plus eitere ) not 
 
INDEX. 673 
 
 much, many, more, 74. Ne . . . que, 
 only, but, Je n j ai quun ami, je ri en 
 m qu'un, 65 ; ne . . . que. nothing but, 
 225. Ne . . . rien, nothing, not any- 
 thing, 28, requires de before an ad- 
 jective, 29, 065. 7. When the verb 
 understood, use rien without ne, 
 ..eit out with the verb, 34. Ne, when 
 u*ed without pas, in comparison of 
 inequality, 492, $1383; when not 
 nsed, $138 4; and when implied, 
 503, $ 1451. It is used when the 
 negation is implied, 503, $ 145 1 ; 
 248, 06*. 114. (See NEGATIONS.) 
 
 NEAR, pres de ; near me, pres de 
 moi, 124; near six, pres de six, 180 ; 
 near going, pres d' alter, 260. 
 
 NEARLY, pres de, 180 ; therea- 
 bouts, d pen pres, 404. 
 
 NEGATIONS, negations, 532, 3, 4, 
 5, $162; its formation, 1; place of 
 ne and its complement, 2, 3, 4, 5 ; 
 when nominative, 6 ; with the in- 
 finitive mood, 7; when the verb is 
 omitted, 8. Neither, non plus, 9. 
 List of negations and examples for, 
 j; 4 ; 5, 6; 7; 8 and 9. 
 
 NEITHER . . . nor, ne . . . ni . . . ni 
 . . . , 32. Ni Vun ni Vautre ; ni Ics 
 uns ni les autrcs, $162. I, neither, 
 moi non plus, $ 162 9. 
 
 NEUF, nouveau, nouvcl, new. Their 
 difference, 191, N. 1. 
 
 NEUTER VERBS, verles neulres, 
 529, $158; what they are, and how 
 formed, 1 ; take etre and avoir, 
 2. Verbs that take etre, 3. 
 
 NEVER, ne. . .jamais, 157, 533. 
 
 NEW, neuf, nouveau, (nouvel, be- 
 fore a vcwel or k mute, 191,) N. 1. 
 
 NIER, to deny, takes ne before 
 disjunctive, $ 516 8. 
 
 No, not any, ne...pas de, 55. 
 None, not any, ne . . . aucun, pas un. 
 No one, nobody, ne . . . personne, 422. 
 Nobody, not anybody, (nominative,) 
 personne ne ; nul ne, &c., 39. No 
 'onger, ne . . .plus, 187, Na sooner 
 pus jihituf, 521. 
 
 Noi : ne . . .pas, ne . . .point, 377, 
 378. IS ot any more, no more, ne . . . 
 plus de. Not much more, ne . . . 
 plus guere de, 74. Not quite, pat 
 tout d fait, 180. Not until, pas 
 avant, 310. Not yet, ne...pas en- 
 core, 152. Not so much . . . as, ne . . . 
 pas tant de . . . que de. Not so ... 
 
 as, ne...pas si... que, 492, $13^' 
 I 
 
 NOMS, nouns, names. Les noma 
 des mois, of the months, 499. (See 
 NAME.) 
 
 NOMINATIVE, nomrjatif; 1st class, 
 with the verb ; 2d, separate: d from 
 it, 468, $ 38. Nominative frequently 
 left out in English ; not in French, 
 470. N.B.,480, $871. 
 
 NOTHING, ne . . . rien, (jobjective,) 
 422, 533; rien ne, (nominative,) 535. 
 Rien de Ion, 29, Obs. 7. Nothing 
 but, Tie ... que, ne . . . rien . . . que, 
 225. 
 
 NOTRE, plural, nos, our, 44, 282. 
 
 NOTRE, (le, la,) les ndtres. ours, 
 30, 49, 291, 483. 
 
 NOTWITHSTANDING, malgrd ; not- 
 withstanding that, malgre cela, 364 ; 
 for all that, although, ns laisser pat 
 de : 11 ne laisse pas de passer pour 
 ho?mete homme, 428. 
 
 NOUNS, noms, suT)sta?itifs, 493, 
 $ 140. Not used as adjectives, and 
 connected by some preposition, 
 $ 140 1 ; functions of de, c, &c., 
 2, 3, 4 ; no plural to proper names, 
 except when used as common, 5; 
 articles left out in enumerations, 6 ; 
 formation of compound nouns, 7 ; 
 of the feminine, 8, 495 ; when a 
 noun is the object of two or three 
 verbs, 9 ; nouns of multitude, 
 10; possessive case, 11. Proper 
 names from the Greek and Latin , 
 of kingdoms, provinces, &c., 496, 
 497. Cardinal and ordinal numbers, 
 &c., with Notes and 06*., 497 to 49'J, 
 Names of the seasons, of rr. 
 499. 
 
574 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Nous, \ve, us ; nous qui, we who ; 
 nous que, we whom, 459, 470 ; nous- 
 mtones, ourselves; nous autres, we, 
 among us, 471 ; nous, us, to us, 472 ; 
 nous le, la, les\ it, them to us, 475 ; 
 nous en, some, any to us, 59; 
 nous y en, us some there, $ GO ; d 
 iwus, to us ; de nous, of, from us, 
 $63, 476; nous, (reflective,) our- 
 selves, $ 71 ; nous y, (reflective,) our- 
 selves, (it,) $ 72 ; nous en, ourselves 
 at it, $ 73, 478 ; a nous, (possessive,) 
 ours, 484, $ 106. 
 
 Now, maintenant, d present, 356 ; 
 now and then, de loin, en loin, 396. 
 
 NUMBERS, nombres, (cardinal,) 65, 
 N. 1, 4 C J7; when used, 70, 065. 32; 
 321, Obs. 146, 426 ; (ordinal,) 70, 06s. 
 33. Adverbs, prcmierement, en pre- 
 mi< ; lint, first, firstly, &c., 363, 426. 
 
 O. 
 
 OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS, rt 
 471, $43 to 47. Objective pronouns 
 before infinitives are turned into the 
 subjunctive, 472, $49; their places, 
 $48 to 65; one exception, $51; 
 double objectives, it to me, to thee, 
 &c., me le, la ; te le, la, &c., always 
 before auxiliaries, 473, $52; when 
 attended by a preposition, go after 
 verbs, 475, 36 ; N. I>. on their or- 
 der, 57. Personal and partitive, 
 me some, thee any, &c., m'en, t'en, 
 fec. ; me some there, m'y en, &c., 
 $ 59 to 61. Objective pronoun, with 
 a proposition, goes after the verb, 
 $63 to $66, 476; two or more ob- 
 jective cases, with a verb, go after, 
 $64 2. Reflective, me, tc, se ; 
 nous, vous ; rti^y, i*y, s'y, &c. ; m'en, 
 t'en, sJen, &c., 477, $71, 72, 73. 
 
 OBJECTIVE NOUNS, their place ; 
 the preposition never omitted before 
 them, and it is repeated before every 
 Dne, 473, $5U. 
 
 OBLIGED, (to be,) or indebted to 
 some one for ... it re. oblige, (rcJcw 
 Wt',) d qucl(]u un de .... 33<^ 
 
 (EiL. (Z',) the eye; les yeux, tht 
 eyes, 47. 
 
 OF, de ; of, from the, du, 27, 82 
 112, 204, 229, 403. A book of mine ; 
 turn, one of my books, un de, me* 
 livres, 203, 484, $ 107, 108. 
 
 OFFRTR, to oiler ; off rant, c/ert 
 offrez, 255. 
 
 OFTEN, souvent ; as often as, aueai 
 souvent que ; not so often as, mo\n& 
 touvent <jue ; oftener than, pl-us sou* 
 vent que, 337. 
 
 OMBRE, (une,} a shadow ; d Z'om- 
 bre de . . . , under the shade of, 356,, 
 
 ON, upon, sur ; upon it, dessus, 
 175. On a small scale, en petit ; 
 large scale, en grand, 404. Not 
 translated. On, not translated before 
 dates, &c., 537. 
 
 ON, one, the people, they; any 
 one, 191 ; when used, 224, Obs. 101 ; 
 when it takes V before et, ou, ou, i, 
 que, &c., 372, 488, 489. 
 
 ONCE, une fois ; once a day, unt 
 fois par jour, 210. 
 
 ONE, (people,) they or any one, 
 1; one, un ; the one, cilui, 
 30; both, Vun et Vautre, 72. Never 
 translate theoneby Vun, except when 
 it is connected with the other; as, 
 the one and the other. 
 
 ONE'S SELF, soi-mtme, 471 ; one's 
 self, (reflective,) se, 531 ; to one's 
 self, d soi ; from one's self, dc soi, 
 476. 
 
 ONLY, but, ne . . . que, 65 ; seule- 
 mcnt, 324 ; not only, non scnhuunt. 
 
 OPPOSITE vis-d-vis de, 387. 
 
 OR, ou, c'O; or people, on Von, 
 372. 
 
 ORDINAL, (numbers,) tiombres or 
 dinaux, 497 to 499. 
 
 OTHER, autre ; anotner dollar, w, 
 autre dollar; some other dollars, 
 d* autres dollars. No other, nc . . . 
 pas d' out re. I have no other, jt 
 i' 7 en at pas d' 'autre, 69. Other? 
 jthcr people, autrui, 295. 
 
 OTHERWISE, else, autrfmeut. 113 
 
573 
 
 Ou <xr, 30 ; ou V on, or people 
 172. 
 
 Ou, where, whither, whereto, 86, 
 184. D ou, whence, where from, -00, 
 252. 
 
 OUGHT and SHOULD, (I,) rendered 
 by the conditionnel ut devoir, je 
 vrais, &c., 372, 509. 
 
 OUR, noire, nos, 44, 282; 466, 
 131, 32. 
 
 OURS, le, la nvtre, les notres, 30, 
 4J, 291. 
 
 Our, hors de ; out of doors, de- 
 \ort, 301, 307. 
 
 OUTRE, besides; outre cela, be- 
 nides that; en outre, moreover, 37ti. 
 
 OUVRIK, to open, alterant, ouvcrt, 
 imcrtz, 117", 17.K 
 
 P. 
 
 PAIN 284. 
 
 PAR, by, 210, 212, 211); par-ci, 
 par-Id, here and there, 396. 
 PARAITRE, to appear, to seem, 
 
 PAKCE QUE, because, 80, 187. 
 
 PAKFAIT, Perio .e latter 
 
 word.) 
 
 PARFAIT orpristnl compose. (See 
 the latter.) 
 
 PARLERPra/ifaKSto I] 
 I 47*. 
 
 PARMI, among. 
 
 PART, (de la.. . de,) from, 536 8. 
 Faire part de, to impart, 397. 
 
 PARTICIPIAL ADJECT! VE, ailjcctif 
 verbal, 5295. 
 
 PARTICIPLE past, parlicipt passe, 
 us formation, 157, 257; when used, 
 156, 525 ; when connected with tire, 
 it agrees with the nominative, 212, 
 530; with avoir, it agrees with the 
 direct object, &c., 162, Obs. 75, 212, 
 286, 299, 556. It does not agree 
 with the pronoans en and dont, be- 
 cause they are not direct objects, 163, 
 Obs. 76 | 229, Obs. 103, 526. Serves 
 co form the passive voice, 212. Some 
 difficulties explained, 527^-5. 
 
 PARTICIPLE, (present,) p^rticipc 
 ]>rcsc}it, its iJimation and excep- 
 tions, 528. Diilerence in its use in 
 English and French, 527 ; en alona 
 governing it, what follows, 528 4; 
 when it qualities a noun, 529 5; 
 when translated by a present parti- 
 ciple, 6 ; when by the indicative, 
 7 ; by the infinitive, 8, or by ft 
 noun, 9, 10; after to fe, 11. 
 How the present participle ia to bo 
 translated, 20'1, - 
 
 PARTICULAR, (to be,) y regarderdt 
 pres, 399. 
 
 PARTIR, to depart, to set oui, par- 
 tant, parti, 142, 175. 
 
 PARTITIVE, (article,) article parti- 
 tif : 1st, before a noun, 465, $ 19 to 
 25 ; 2d, before an adjective or after a 
 negation, $26 to 28. 
 
 PARVENIR. to succeed, 237. 
 
 PAS, with ne before the verb, not, 
 27; pas tout, not all; pas du tout, 
 not at all, 115. 
 
 PASSER, (se . . . de,) to do without 
 346. 
 
 PASSIVE VERBS, verbes passifs, 
 how formed, 212; not so much used 
 as in English, 530, $ 159 ; past par- 
 ciple agrees with nominative, 2 ; 
 on, as nominative, 3 ; the infini- 
 tive rendered by on, 4. 
 
 ;o) for, payer ; to pay a man 
 for a horse, payer mi clitval d un 
 homme, 201, Obs. 293. To pay some 
 one a visit, faire une msite (rcndr* 
 visitc) d quelqu'un, 332. 
 
 PEINE, (a,) scarcely, with preterit 
 anlerieur, 521. 
 
 PENDANT, during, for, 186. 
 
 PENKNIFE, canif, 32. 
 
 PENSER d, to think of, 476 ; y pen- 
 ser. 
 
 PENSION, boarding- house, achool, 
 385. 
 
 PEOPLE, they, one, on, 468, $38; 
 488, 489. 
 
 PERFECT tense ot the indicative, 
 oorfait or present compose, (see tliu 
 
57C> 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Utter ;) of the subjunctive, its forma- 
 tion and use, 418. 
 
 PERFECT, parfait, 503, $145 ; when 
 ne is to be used, 1 ; compound 
 form of the perfect, 2 ; I have 
 just, Je viens dc . . . , 3. 
 
 PERMETTRE, to permit, to allow, 
 371. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS, pronoms 
 personnels, 4G8, $ 38 : 1st class, with 
 the verb, jc, lu, il, &c. ; 2d class, 
 separated from the verb, mot, toi, 
 lui, &c. 
 
 PEF.SONNE ne, nobody, (nomina- 
 tive,) 39, 468 ; ne . . . personne, (ob- 
 jective,) 422. Personne as a pronoun 
 is masculine ; as a substantive, it is 
 feminize 286, N.I. Ne .. .personne 
 VT/?, qur, nobody who, that, governs 
 the subjunctive, 515 5. 
 
 PEU, little, 147, 400 ; pen de, (be- 
 fore a noun,) G7 ; tin pen de, a little, 
 67; d pen prcs, thereabout, nearly, 
 4()1. 
 
 Pi:ri;, fear, afraid. Are you afraid ? 
 Avez-vous peur? 31. De peur que . . . 
 NC..., (governs subjunctive,) for 
 fear, lest, 537, $164. 
 
 PLACE, o ma, votre, sa plarr, in 
 my, your, his or her place, 367; of 
 objective pronouns, 473 to 477; of 
 adjectives, 493 ; of adverbs, 531, 532. 
 
 PLATWRE, to pity; plaignant, 
 plaint ; se plaindre, to complain, 
 SM, '176. 
 
 PLAIRE, to please, to be pleased, 
 plaisant,plu; se plaire, 2-10, Obs.109. 
 
 PLAISANTER, (badiner,)to jest, 381. 
 
 PLAISIR, (avec,) with pleasure, 47, 
 48. 
 
 PLAY, (to,) joucr, 126 ; upon an 
 instrument, d'un instrument ; at 
 cards, aux caftes, 259 ; a trick on 
 some one, un tour a quelqiCun, 400. 
 
 PLEASE, (to,) plaire, se plaire; 
 K.;?ie one, a quelqii'un. How are 
 jnou pleased here ? Comment vous 
 plaisez-vous id? 241. If you please, 
 'i7 vous plait, 325. 
 
 PLEASED WITH, content dt, 317. 
 
 PLEASURE, to give pleasure, /atfc 
 plaisir, 110. 
 
 PLEASURE, (with,) avzcplaisir, 4V, 
 88. 
 
 PLEUVOIR, to rain; il plcut, it 
 rains, 227. 
 
 PLUPERFECT (the) of the indica- 
 tive its formation and use, 360, 
 520; Df the subjunctive, its forma 
 tion and use, 4'16 to 419: 2d pluper- 
 fect, pretirit a?itirieur, (see it,) 520. 
 $155. 
 
 PLUPERFECT of the subjunctive, 
 plusque parfait, its formation, &,c., 
 419. 
 
 PLURAL, its formation in nouna 
 and adjectives, 44, 46, 4Y, 107, N. 1. 
 
 PLUS, more, serves to torrn the 
 comparative of inequality of adjec- 
 tives and adverbs ; leplus, the most, 
 forms the superlative, 144. Differ- 
 ence between plus and davantagc t 
 198. Plus de, more, (before a noun,) 
 78. When there is a comparison 
 between two sentences, the verb 
 which follows plus or moins requires 
 7V//.S de, plus quc, when 
 used, 490. 
 
 PLUT a Dicu, plat au del, would to 
 God, require the subjunctive, 424. 
 
 PLUTOT que, rather ; plutot quede, 
 rather than, 321; pas plus idt, no 
 sooner, 521. 
 
 PONT, bridge, 157. 
 
 PORTE-CRAYOIT, pencil-case, 37* 
 porte-feuille, pocket-book, 41 ; their 
 plural, 494, $ 1407. 
 
 PORTER, to carry, to take ; not to 
 be mistaken for metier, 303, Obs. 143. 
 
 POSSESSIVE articles or pronouns, 
 my, thy, &c., mon, ton, &,c., 44, 
 108; ma, la, &c., 282; 466, mine, 
 thine, &c., le mien, le tien, &c. 483 
 Possessive case of nouns, 30, 32; 
 493, $140211. 
 
 POTENTIAL, (imperfect,) condition- 
 nel, 507, $ 148, ends in rain, rais, 
 rait, rious, riez* raicnl, $148- Ij 
 
INDEX. 
 
 577 
 
 how formed, 2 ; after *i, if, use the 
 imperfect instead of the conditionnel, 
 3. Potential, (perfect,) conditionncl 
 compose, 508, 149 ; its formation, 
 1 ; with it si, if, is followed by 
 oluperfect, 2 ; how to translate 
 would, should, could, might, 3 ; I 
 wish I knew it, je voudrais le sa- 
 eri>; I wish I had known h,faurais 
 &3iilu le savoir. 
 
 POTENTIAL. (.See IMPERFECT.) 
 
 POUR, to, in order to, 92, 364. 
 
 POUR (to) out, verser ; to pour out 
 Oinc drink fur, versi-r a boire a . . , 
 . 
 
 PCUKQUOI, . v/hy? 81, 184; for 
 uhat, or what . . . for? 481. 
 
 PUUKSI-IVKC, to purcue, 344. 
 
 PouvoiR,to be able, (can, )pouvant, 
 pit, 92, N. 1, 175; puitje? not 
 peux-je? can 1 ? 
 
 HER, ler, first, lot, 70; pre- 
 mifrtuu t.t, t?i premier lieu,, 363, $ 161 
 7. 
 
 PKEXDRE, to take, prenant, pris, 
 . 1152, 173, 352, 366; prcndrc, 
 to drink, 132; soin, care, i^56 ; la 
 fuite, to make one's escape, to ru-n 
 away, &c., 346 ; s'y prenire, to ma- 
 nage, to go about a thing, 352. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS govern the infinitive 
 in French, except en, which governs 
 the preseit participle, 92, 201, 215, 
 460, 535. The English preposition 
 for, with Jie verbs to ask, demander, 
 to pay, payer, is not rendered in 
 French, 201, 06s. 93. At and for 
 not translated when used to express 
 the price of a thing, 276. Prepositions 
 formed with a and a noun take de 
 after them ; almost all others have 
 no preposition, 266. Use of d, 100, 
 193, 404, 406, 464 ; use of de, 27, 
 403, 404 ; place of the preposition in 
 the- sentence : always before the word 
 it governs, (488, "$J29,) 536; not 
 aa/jsposed in French, 482, 95 ; pre- 
 positkns never omitted before objec- 
 tive nouns 4M 473, t)ir. 4 : d and 
 40' 
 
 de, connected with reflected verbs, 
 variously translated, 477, ($ 71 to 74;* 
 not transposed in English, when of 
 what means of that which, de ce qui, 
 que, 482, 97; to what, meaning te 
 that which, d ce qui, que, $ 98, may be 
 separated by the negation or objec- 
 tive pronoun, 536, $ 163 3 as far as, 
 jusqu'd, 464,536; at, in, to, chez 
 84, 536 ; from, de la part de ; before, 
 avant, devant, auparavant, 536 ; by, 
 pres de, d cote de ; by myself, seul, 
 e, &c. ; in, into, dans, en; at, in, to, 
 a, en ; in, on, not translated before 
 dates, &c. 
 
 PRES DE, near, 260, 46i, 537. 
 
 PRESENT (the) tense, indicative 
 its formation, 500, $ 144 ; three Eng- 
 lish present tenses expressed by one 
 in French, 114; verbs that take a 
 cedilla under the, (<,) 502, 1441 ; 
 those that take e after #, 2 ; those 
 that change y into t, when it is fol- 
 lowed by e mute, 3; e mute 
 changed to e grave, 1 ; excepting 
 the terminations eler, eter, N.B., <? 
 (acute) into (grave), 5 ; true pre- 
 sent tense explained : I am reading, 
 je suis d lire, 6. Do and am, &c., 
 used to interrogate, may be translated 
 by est-ce que. In some verbs, est-c* 
 que must be used, 139, N. 1, (459, 
 Dir. 8.) PRESENT COMPOSE or Par-' 
 fait, English perfect, its formation, 
 *167 ; its use, 168 ; 503, 145. When 
 ne, without pas, is used with it, 60S, 
 504 ; it translates the compound form 
 of the perfect, viz : I have been 
 reading, fai lu. I have just written, 
 is not rendered by the parfait, but 
 by je viens d'ecrire. PRESENT 3V 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE, (78j,) 408, 5] 3. 
 $ 151 ; its terminations ; its formation 
 and exceptions, $ 151 1 ; its use, 
 2, 513 to 515; different ante?* 
 dents that require the subjunctive, 
 515 to 517. In English, the state of 
 existence or of action, when in its 
 duration, is always expiesM,tl by the 
 
578 
 
 INDEX 
 
 compound perfect, while the French 
 use the present tense. He has been 
 a Pans these three years, il y a trois 
 ans qu'il esi a Paris, 274. Present 
 used after si, in connexion with the 
 future, (233, Obs. 105,) 505, $ 1463. 
 
 PRESENTER d, to present to, intro- 
 duce, 476, $64. 
 
 PRESENTLY, tout a Vheure, 237. 
 
 PRETEND, (to,) faire semblant dc, 
 356. 
 
 PRETERIT, (le,} English second im- 
 perfect, 358. (See IMPERFECT.) 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIEUR, second plu- 
 perfect, its formation, 520, $ 155 ; its 
 use ; conjunctions after which it is 
 used; practical rules, 362, 521. 
 
 PRIER^C, to desire, beg, pray, re- 
 quest, 304. 
 
 PROMENER, (?e.) to take an airing, 
 a walk for plcasuiv ; allcr se prome- 
 ner, to go walking ; en carrosse, to go 
 in a carriage ; d chcval, to ride on 
 horseback, to take a ride, 2 
 
 PROMETTRE de, to promise, 171). 
 
 PRONOUNS, (possessive or articles,} 
 my, thy, &c., 466, $31; rule for 
 their use, $ 32 ; demonstrative, $33 ; 
 al ;vays prefixed to a noun and repeat- 
 ed, $ 34 ; true demonstrative, $ 36, 
 37. PERSONAL, 468, $ 38 to 40 ; no- 
 fc minatives, separated from the verb, I 
 who, mot qui, thou who, toi qui, &c. 
 Objectives the same, followed by 
 que, 470, $40, 41. COMPOUND PER- 
 SONAL, myself, moi-meme, &c., 471, 
 $41. OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS, $ 42 to 
 50; their place, $51 to 56, Dir. 4. 
 Double objective pronouns, $57 to 
 63 ; examples at p. 94, &c. ; with a 
 preposition, d moi, ds toi, &c., $63 
 to 66. REFLECTIVE, 1st class, 477, 
 $67,71; 2d class, $68, 72; 3d class, 
 ft 69, 73, 74. RELATIVE, qui, who, 
 nominative, never omitted either in 
 French or English, 478, $75, 76. 
 Objective que y whom, that, which, 
 *** to 80 ; personal, connected with 
 relatives, 4S3, $ 102. POSSESSIVE, 
 
 whose, d qui? $103, mine, thine. 
 &.C., le mien, le tien, &c., used witD 
 every verb, even etre, when ce is no- 
 minative, 484, $ 104, 105 ; but when 
 il, elle, Us, elles, are nominatives, use 
 the following : d moi, a toi, &c., a 
 ces Messieurs. A book of mine, 
 turn to, one of my books, $ 107. IN- 
 
 TERROGATIVE, who ? qui / whom ? 
 
 qui? 485, $111. Qui never losee 
 its i. What ? quel, quelle, &c., que, 
 qu'est-ce que ; after the verb, by 
 quoi? $112,115. What? nomina- 
 tive, qu'cst-ce qui? 486, $116; go- 
 verned by a preposition, quoi? d 
 quoi, $ 117. What is in ? &c. Qu'y 
 a-t-il dans . . ,$ 118 ; see to $ 130. IN- 
 DEFINITE, on, one, people, &c. 488, 
 489; examples at 87, 94, 281, 107, 
 328, 38, 44, 108, 281, 30, 48, 276, 44, 
 283, 41, 43, 100, 283, 229, 39. 
 
 PROPER NAMES, ?wmspropres,494 l 
 496, 497. 
 
 PROPERLY, comme ilfaut, 204. 
 
 PROPOSER (se) de, to propose, in- 
 tend ; je me propose de faire ce voy- 
 age, I propose going on that journey, 
 341. 
 
 PROVERBIAL forms of expression, 
 (at the end of INDEX.) 
 
 PULL, (to,) tirer, 2-14 ; to pull out, 
 arracher, s'arracher ; he pulls out hia 
 hair, il s'arrache les cheveux, 219. 
 
 PURCHASE (to) anything, faire em- 
 plctte de quclque chose, faire des em- 
 pit-ties, 256. 
 
 PUT, (to,) to put on, mcttre, 168 ; to 
 put off, postpone, rcmettre d, 394 ; to 
 inconvenience one's self, sc gtner, 
 395. 
 
 Q. 
 
 QUAND, lorsque, when, 88, 242 
 with the preterit a?itericur, 523 
 Quand meme, though, followed by 
 conditionnel, 425, 517. 
 
 QUANT d, as to, as for; quciit o 
 noi, as to me, 322. 
 
 QUATRE-VINGTS, Cl^hty, [OSCS Kf 
 
INDEX. 
 
 579 
 
 when followed by another numeral, 
 184. 
 
 QUE, that, which, (relative pro- 
 noun,) 43 ; que de, than, (before a 
 noun,) 78 ; que, qui, take a euphonic 
 
 1 before o?i, 372; que, used to avoid 
 the repetition of a conjunction, go- 
 verns the same mood as that conjunc- 
 tion; when the conjunction is si, 
 vkc., que governs the subjunctive, 
 51C. Qu'est-ce que c* est que cela? 
 tvlia; is that ? Je ne sais pas ce que 
 'est que cela, 319. Qu'est~ce que 
 cela peut-vtret what can that be? 
 395. Que! exclamation! what! how! 
 335, 487. 
 
 QU'EST-CE QUE C'EST ? what is it ? 
 1:39, 171. 
 
 QUEL? what, which? (interroga- 
 tive,) 25; quehj 44; quelle, &c., 
 286, 485, 487. 
 
 QUEL que, quelle que, whatever, 
 in two words, govern the subjunc- 
 tive, 422, 516, 3d way. Quelque, 1st 
 way, however ; 2d way, whatever, 
 govern subjunctives, 422, 516. 
 
 QUELQUE, s, some, any, a few, 68. 
 
 QUELQUE CHOSE, some, anything ; 
 de Ion, good, 88, 462, (takes de be- 
 fore an adjective.) Que^ue chose que, 
 what3ver, governs the subjunctive, 
 423, 51613. 
 
 QUELQUE TAUT, some, anywhere, 
 89, Obs. 
 
 QUELQU'"X, sorv.e, anybody, 39. 
 
 QUELQUES UNS, (en...,) a few, 
 some, 68. 
 
 QUESTION, (to be the,) to turn 
 ipon, s'agir de : the question is, il 
 t'agit de, 391. Qu'cn resulte-t-il? 
 wruat of it ? 483. 
 
 Qui, who ? 100, 470, 230. A qui, 
 whose? 147, 483; to whom? 230, 
 f . B. The i is never cut off. 
 
 Qui QUE CE SOIT, whoever, governs 
 he subjunctive, 422, 516 13. 
 
 QUICK, fast, vite, 264. 
 
 QUITE (just) as much, as many, 
 
 tout autant, 74, 76; Lanl de.,.qttc. 
 so much ... as, 78. 
 
 Quoi, (after the verb or a preposi* 
 tion,) que, (before,) what ? 100. Quoi; 
 admirative, what ! 487. Quoi encore I 
 what else, more? 113. 
 
 QUOIQUE, whatever, 422 ; though, 
 417, governs the subjunctive. 
 
 R. 
 
 RAIN, (to,) pleuvc r, 227. Dooc il 
 rain? pleut-il? fail-il de la pluie? 
 301. 11 pleut d verse, it rains very 
 hard, it pours, 227. 
 
 RAPPELER, (se,) to recollect. Vous 
 rappelez-vous cela ? do you recollect 
 that ? I do, je me le rappelle, 261. 
 
 RATHER THAN, plutut que de, 321. 
 
 READ, (to,) lire, lu, 172. (See 
 LIRE.) 
 
 RECOLLECT, (to,) se rappeler, si 
 souvenir, se ressouvenir, 262. 
 
 RECONNAITKE, to recognise, to 
 acknowledge, 272. 
 
 REDUIRE. to reduce, rcduisant, re- 
 duit, 344. 
 
 REJOUIR (se) dc quclque chose, to 
 rejoice at something, 223. 
 
 RELY, (lo,) sefterd; you may rely 
 upon him, vous pouvez vous fier d lui. 
 &c., 348. 
 
 REMAIN, (to,) restcr, 182, N.I, 
 demeurer, 187, N. 1. 
 
 REMETTRE d, to poutp.vie, put off, 
 394. 
 
 RENDRE, to return, give back, re 
 store, 80, 199 ; rendre visile, to pay 
 a visit, 332. 
 
 RESTER. to remain, stay, 110, 
 takes avoir and utre as auxiliary, 182, 
 N. 1. Hester, to have left, 300. 
 
 RESTORE, rendre. (See it.) 
 
 RETENIR, to hold back, retain, re- 
 tenant, relent retcnez, 260. 
 
 RETURN, to give back, restore; 
 rendre, 80, 199. Retourner, to go 
 back, 428 ; revcnir, to come backJS/X 
 
 REUSSIR d, to succeed, 34?,. 
 
580 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 REVENIK, to come liack, to return, 
 185. 
 
 RIDE (to) on horseback, aller (mon- 
 ler) a cheval, 214. To take a ride, 
 ee promc?ier d cheval, 222. 
 
 RIEN, (ne...,) qui, que, nothing 
 that, governs the subjunctive, 423. 
 
 RJSIIT, (to be,) avoir raison, 36. 
 To the right, on the right side or 
 'land, d droite, sur la droite, 378. It 
 j'e right ; c'est lien, 319. 
 
 RIRE, to laugh, riant, ri, ricz. Se 
 rire (moquer) de quelqu'un, to laugh, 
 to deride one ; rire au ncz de quel- 
 7w'?m, to laugh in a person's face, 
 32- r >. 
 
 ROOM, (the,) lachambre; the front 
 room, la chambrededevant, surle de- 
 vunt ; the back room, de derricre, 
 sur le derriere ; the upper room, du 
 haut, (Ven haul, 284. 
 
 RULES: 1. All prepositions govern 
 the infinitive, N.I, on Aprcs , after, 
 460. 
 
 R. 2. Of two verbs, the second is 
 in the infinitive, &c., 461. 
 
 R. 3. Do you speak before you 
 ii.Mcn ? Parlez-vous avant d'c 
 The French dispense with the second 
 nominative, when it is the same ns 
 the first, 461. 
 
 the nominatives are 
 ths English construc- 
 
 Jn two or more nouns, 
 ia noun or a verb, they 
 _ i it without any preposi- 
 
 t.jn or with the same, 461. 
 
 K. 6. Every French preposition 
 precedes the word it governs, is never 
 separated from it, and is repeated be- 
 inre f.vcry word 461. 
 
 S. 
 
 Si, *on f ges, his, her, 2S2, 466, 
 *32. 
 
 SAIL, (a,) une voile. To set sail, 
 mciire c la voile, 350, N.I To se! 
 
 sail for,/aire voile pour ; umlu fulr 
 sail, marcher dpleines voiles, 3c>0. 
 
 SALT, (to,) sa/er, 92. 
 
 SALIK, to soil, dir*y, 220. 
 
 SALUTATIONS, (daily,) salutationi 
 journalieres. At pp. 26, 29, 32, 33 t 
 35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 48, 50, 52, 
 54, 56, 58, 63, (N. B. On composing 
 an exercise on daily salutations, 70, 
 71, 73,) 104, 107, 112, 114, 119, 121, 
 123, 130, 134, 136, 139, 142. 
 
 SAME ; the same thing, la menu 
 chose; the same man, le mime 
 homme ; ' it is all one, (the same, 
 c'est egul, c'cst la mime clw? 
 307. 
 
 SANS, without, 215 ; sans doutc, 
 without doubt, to be sure, 108. 
 
 SAKTE, (la,) the health, 31 
 
 SAVOIR, to know ; sachant, 
 
 v.es no preposition after it, 
 135, 17.-). 
 
 SATISFIED (to be) with some one or 
 something, itre content de yuclqu' un 
 ou de quelque chose, 210. 
 
 SCARCELY, dpiinc, 521. 
 
 SEASONS, (the,) Ics snison*, -1 '.!. 
 
 SECOND, second, e, 70. Secondly 
 2J, secondement, 363, 5327 . 
 
 SEE, (to,) voir, voi/mit, rw, 172. 
 
 SI:EM, (to,) para it re, semLltr. 
 
 SELF, selves, meme, mime* ; my 
 sell, moi-meme ; themselves, eux- 
 mimes, eUes-mimes ; one's self, tsoi- 
 mtme, 154, 471. 
 
 SELON, according to ; selon In 
 circonstanccs ; c'est felon, it depends, 
 
 sr. 
 
 SENTIR, to feel ; sentant, scnti. 
 278 ; to smell, 353. 
 
 SERVIR, to serve, wait upon, ser- 
 vant, servi, 254 ; se servir de, to 
 make use of, to use, 266 ; servir la 
 soupe, le dessert, to serve up the 
 soup, the dessert, 348. To be of 
 use. d quoi cela vous sert-il ? of what 
 use is that to you ? Servir de, tc 
 star.d instead, to be as ; moiifusilm* 
 
INDEX. 
 
 581 
 
 ert de baton, I use my gun as a 
 stick ; servir de, to avail ; a quoi 
 vous sert-il de pleurer? what avails 
 you to cry ? cela ne me sort d rien, it 
 avails me nothing, 386. On a servi, 
 the meal is on the table, (is served 
 up;) vous servi rai-je de la soupe? 
 shall I help you to some &oup ? do 
 you choose any soup ? 
 
 SET (to) out, to depart, leave, par- 
 tir, 142, 175. 
 
 SEUL, e, alone, by one's self, 137, 
 159, 3G7; seulement, noh seulement, 
 not only, 324. 
 
 SHAWL, (a,) vn chdle, 34. 
 SHORTLY, (soon,) bicntdt , ! 
 SHOULD or Ought. (See OUGHT.) 
 SHOW, faire voir, montrer, 134. 
 To show a disposition to, faire mine 
 dc, 331 ; the show, (splendor, bright- 
 ness,) V eclat ; to make a great show, 
 fuirc del' eclat, 432. 
 
 Si, if; the t is cutoffbcfore il, iJs, 
 but nowhere else ; after ti, the pro- 
 noun on takes Z', 372. Si usually 
 attends the conditionnel, and is fol- 
 lowed by the imparfait, 310, 507. 
 Que, used to avoid the repetition of 
 ri, governs the subjunctive, 51G 10. 
 .S'/\ meaning granting, connects the 
 future with the present, 233, Obs. 105. 
 Si, so ; si lien, so well, 165. 
 SIEN, (le,) la sicnnc, &c., his or 
 hers, 39, 49, 291, 483 ; d lui, d elle, 
 484. 
 
 SIDE, cote , by the side of, a cote 
 de, 266 ; this side, de ce cote-ci ; on 
 that side, de ce wle-ld, 193. 
 
 SILENT, (to be,) to stop spetiking, 
 setaire, 392. 
 
 SINCE or FROM, depuis ; from that 
 time, depuis ce moment ; my child- 
 hood, majeunesse; from here there, 
 depuis id jusque Id. Since, (consi- 
 dering,) puisque, 342. 
 
 SIT (to) down, s j asseoir, 262; to 
 be seated, eire ass is, assise, 302. 
 SLEEP, (to,) dormir, 121 ; 215. Are 
 
 you sleepy ? avcz-vous sommeil ? 2U 
 To feel sleepy, avoir cnvie de dor 
 jnir, 220. 
 
 SLOW, slowly, lentemcnt, 2$4. 
 
 SNOW, (to,) neiger, 227; it snowo 
 ilfait de la neige, 301. 
 
 So, (it,) le, 171, Obs. 77; so, thus.. 
 ai?isi; so, so, comme cela; so that. 
 de sorte quc, 230 ; so much, tant de ; 
 so much as, tant que, 77, 210, 260. 
 
 SOIR, soiree, evening, their difld* 
 ence, 289, N. 2. 
 
 SOME or ANY, (before a noun,) du t 
 de la, des ; 'before an adjective or 
 after a negation,; de, 55, 284. Some of 
 it, of them, en, before the verb, 59 ; 
 some or any more, encore, used affir- 
 matively; encore du vin, encore dcs 
 boutons, 75. N. B. (Encore is placed 
 immediately after the verb.) Some- 
 thing, quelque chose ; anything good, 
 quelque chose de bon, 29, 191 ; some- 
 times, quelque fois, 153 ; some, any- 
 where, quelque part ; nowhere, not 
 anywhere, ne . . . nullepart, 89. 
 
 So much, many, tant, 77, 210, 260, 
 
 SON, sa, ses, his or hers, 38, 44, 
 282, 466, $ 32. 
 
 SOON, very soon, bientot, 108, 185. 
 Aussitdt que, as soon as, aussitdt que, 
 215. No sooner, pas plus tot, with 
 prttirit anterieur, 521. 
 
 SORE, vial ; a sore ^^^^H an 
 pied, 110. 
 
 SORTIR, tO gO OUt, 
 
 110, 121, 150 175. 
 
 SOUDAINEMENT, suddenly, H 
 sudden, 290. 
 
 SOUFFRIR, to suffer, souffrant, 
 sou/ert, 334. 
 
 Sous, under ; dcssous, under it 
 177. 
 
 SOUVENIR (se) de, se ressouveuif 
 de, to remember, to recollect, 262. 
 
 SOUVENT, often ; awsi swtvtJd 
 que, as often as ; plus sowssiit qve, 
 oftener than ; moins souvent quc, not 
 so often as, 137. 
 
682 
 
 r N D a x 
 
 SPEAK (to) French. (See FARLER.) 
 
 SPEECH, (a,) un discours. To make 
 a speech, faire un discours, 295. 
 
 SPEND (to) time at something, pas- 
 ser le temps a quelque c7i0se, 250. 
 
 SPITE, (in ... of,) en depit de, 346. 
 
 STEEL, acier, 55. 
 
 STEP, (a,) unpas. To walk a step, 
 faire unpas; to take a step, (mea- 
 iiires,) faire une demarche, 295. 
 
 STORE, store-house, magasin, 63. 
 
 STRIKE, (to,) / rapper, 323. To be 
 struck with a thought, venir en 
 pensce,d Videc, dl 1 esprit. A thought 
 strikes me, il me vient une pensce, 
 366. 
 
 SUBJECT. (See NOMINATIVE.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE, subjonctif. (See 
 PRESENT, IMPERFECT, &c., 408.) 
 Present ; how it ends, 513, $ 151 1 ; 
 how it is formed, 2 ; eight excep- 
 tions, its use, 2; important ob- 
 xervationon it. When the antecedent 
 is a superlative, 3; when imper- 
 sonal, 4 ; interrogative, negative, 
 or conditional, 5 ; it expresses/ear, 
 &c., takes ne, 6, 7 ; doutcr, nier, 
 take ne, 8 ; what, que, governs, 
 9, 10; whatever, however, 11, 
 quelque que, &c. ; its connexion with 
 indicative, 12; whatever, whatso- 
 ever, 12 ; quelque chose que, quoi 
 que,-quoique ce soil; whomsoever, 
 qui que ce soil ; when it must follow 
 qui, que, dont, &c., 14; when it 
 must begin the sentence, 15. Im- 
 perfect, 517; its formation. Per- 
 fect, (p. 418,) parfait. Pluperfect, 
 (p. 419,) plusque parfait. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES, substan'.ifs, noms, 
 formation of plural, 44. Exceptions, 
 46, N. 1, 2, 3, 281. Feminine, 281. 
 Genders, 194 ; 402, 06s. 163 ; 187, 
 Obs. 85; 297, 06s. 140; 314; 239, 
 N. 1 ; 284 ; 356. Compound siib- 
 Btantives, 47, N. 1, or 4S4 7; 183, 
 Oli. 82; 440, 06s. 171. De is put 
 between the name of the thing and 
 that of the substance of which it is 
 
 made, 27, 403, 493; d, when the lat- 
 ter expresses the use of the former 
 404, 494 ; a la, au, aux, to determine 
 it more precisely, 406, 494. Sub- 
 stantives having a distinct form foi 
 the feminine, 495; used for both 
 sexes, 298. 
 
 SUCCEED, (to,) parteuir a. Have 
 you succeeded in learning it*? cles* 
 vous parvenu a ^Vapprendre ? 237. 
 reussir a ; avc~-vous reussi a Z'op- 
 prc?iuie? 237, 3-12. 
 
 SUCH, un tcl, une idle, pareil t 
 pareille, 307, 4909, 10 ; un si bon 
 livre. 
 
 SUFFER, (to,) souffrir, 334 ; to suffer 
 one's self to be beaten, se laisger 
 battre ; to let one's self fall, selaisser 
 tomber ; to suffer one's self to be m 
 suited, se laisser insulter, 432. 
 
 SUFFIRE a, to suffice, be suffi 
 cient, sHjfisant, sujjl., 349. 
 
 SUIT, (to,) convenir a, 237. 
 
 SUITE, (tout de,) immediately, 237. 
 
 SUIVRE, to follow; suivant, suivi, 
 334. Suivre un conaeil, to follow 
 advice, 384. 
 
 SUN, (the,) le soleil. We have iuu 
 much sun, il fait trop de soleil, 208. 
 
 SUPERLATIVE, superlatif, a nev 
 explanation on its formation, 144 5 
 followed by que or qui, requires the 
 subjunctive, 515 3. 
 
 SUR, on, upon, 175 ; dcssus, upon 
 it, 177. 
 
 SURFAIRE, to overcharge, ask too 
 much, 344. 
 
 SURPRENDRE, to surprise, 374. 
 
 SURPRISE, (to,) etonncr. To bo 
 surprised at, s'etonner de, 374. 
 
 SWEET, doux, douce, 491. 
 
 SWEETEN, (to,) sucrer, adoucir, 92, 
 
 T. 
 
 TA, ton, tcs, thy, 282, 108, 466. 
 
 TAIRE, 'e,) to hold one's tongue 
 be silent, taisant ; tu ; taisez-WM\ 
 be silent, 392. 
 
 TAKE (to) place, avoir lieu, 165 
 
INI EX. 
 
 caro of something, prcndre (avoir) 
 soix de quelque chose, 256 ; of some 
 one, to beware of one, prcndre garde 
 d quelqu'un, 366 ; an airing in a car- 
 riage, se prom??ier en carrosse, 222. 
 
 TANT, so much; par an, a year; 
 partete, a head, 210, 293 ; tant que, 
 BO long as, 401 ; tant soi pcu, just a 
 little, ever so little, 427 ; tant lien 
 gc mal, indifferently, 396 ; tant que 
 cx?H voudrez, so, as long as you 
 plraoe, 401, 492. 
 
 TAXDEK, to delay. (See the latter.) 
 
 TASTE, (to,) gouter, 129, 208; the 
 taste, le gout ; each man has his 
 i.aste, chaque homme a son gout , 217. 
 
 TE, thee, to thee, te le, les, 108, 
 47-. T J e7i, thee some; t j y en, thee 
 some there. Te, t'en, t'y, (reflective,) 
 478, $71, 72, 73. 
 
 TEACH, (to,) enseigner ; to teach 
 some one something, cnseigner quel- 
 quc chose d quelqu'un; some one to 
 do something, apprcndre a quclqu'un 
 tifairc quclque chose, 266. 
 
 TT.AK, (;i,) une larmc ; to shed 
 tears, verser des larmes ; with tears 
 in his, her, our, &c., eyes, les larmes 
 -r.r, 323. 
 
 TE INDIE, to dye, color; teignant, 
 tjcint; en zoir, en rouge, to dye black, 
 red, 195. 
 
 TEL, tclle, tcls, tellcs, such ; un tcl 
 komme, une tellefenime, such a man, 
 woman ; de tels hommes, de telles 
 femmes, such men, women, 307. 
 Tel is not used with another adjec- 
 tive. Such a kind friend, un si ban 
 ami, 4909, 10. 
 
 TELL, (to,) to say, dire ; told, dit, 
 168. 
 
 TENTH, to hold ; tenant, tenu ; te- 
 nez. Tenez, the imperative, is used 
 aa an exclamation, 203, 06s. 94. Se 
 lenir pret, to keep one's self ready, 
 274, Tenir pension, keep a boarding- 
 house, school, 385. Licude, to take 
 the place of, be instead of, 404. (See 
 
 KEEP.) S'cn tenir a, to abide by, 
 477. 
 
 TENSES, (the,) les temps. Present, 
 114, 500 to 503, including true pre- 
 sent, je suis d lire, 502. Perfect, 
 167, 503, 504. First future, 231, 
 504 to 506 ; second future, 299. .Im- 
 perfect, ?Q5, 506. Imperfect of tho 
 potential, condilionnel, 310, 507, 
 508. Perfect of the potential, 311, 
 508, 509. Imperative, 369, 509 to 
 513. Subjunctive present, 408, 513 ; 
 subjunctive imperfect, 416, 517. Per- 
 fect, 418. Pluperfect, 419. Prete- 
 rit or second imperfect of the indica- 
 tive, 368, 517 to 520. Pluperfect ot 
 indicative is formed like the English 
 tense, by the imperfect of the auxi- 
 liary and past participle of the verb 
 to be conjugated, 520. Examples 
 after the 59th lesson, p. 305. Second 
 pluperfect, preterit anter'n r, 362, 
 520, 521. Infinitive, four jrmina- 
 tions of it, 80; explanations, 521 to 
 525. Past participle, 156, 525 to 
 527. Present participle, 114, 448, 
 500. 
 
 TUAN, que de, (before nouns,) 78. 
 Than, before a number, is rendered 
 by de, and not by que ; more than 
 nine, plus dc ncuf, 246. 
 
 THAT or Which, que, (relative,) 
 43, 478. That, (meaning that thing,) 
 ccla, 168, 467, 469, N. 4. That, (the 
 one,) cdui, plural, ceux, celle, celles, 
 30, 48, 286, 467. That which, the 
 one which, those which, celui que, 
 ceux que, &c., 43, 48, 286, 467, 468. 
 That which, (the thing which,) ct 
 que, (objective,) ce qui, (nomine 
 tive,) 124, 481. That book of mine, 
 485. . 
 
 THE, le, la, les, 25, 44, 281 ; iti 
 connexion with prepositions, 463. 
 
 THEIR, leur, leurs, 44, 282; when 
 it must be translated by en . . . les, 
 4r,6, N. 2. 
 TIIEIKS, le (fa) leur, leg leurs, 49 
 
584 
 
 INDEX . 
 
 891, 483 ; after il, die, &c., a eux, a 
 elles 484. 
 
 THEM, to them, leur. (Sec it.) 
 
 THEMSELVES, eux-mtmes, elles- 
 mvmes, 471 ; (reflective,) se, s'y, s'en, 
 477, 478. 
 
 THEN, alors ; until then jusqu'* 
 Qfors, 189. 
 
 THERE, to it, at it, in it, 87, 101. 
 To go, to be, there, y aller, y itre, 
 87. There, Id, y, 110. There is, il 
 y a, 180, 238, 246, 7, 8,^338. There 
 \&, (behold,) voild ; there it is, le 
 voild, la voild ; they arc, les voild, 
 (here is, void,) 310, 312. 
 
 THINE, letie?i, latienne, &c., 108, 
 291,483; after il, die, &c., d toi, 
 484. 
 
 THINK (to) of, pcnser d, 470. 
 
 THIRD, troisieme, 70; tiers, 499. 
 Thirdly, troisiemcment, 363 7. 
 
 THIS, THAT, these, those, ce, cet, 
 cette, ccs. This one, that one, these, 
 those, celui-ci, cdui-ld, &c., 30, 41, 
 44, 50, 286. 
 
 THOU, tu, 107. 
 
 THOUGH, quoique, (see it,) 417. 
 
 THOUSAND, (a,) mille, does not 
 take u?i, 462. 
 
 THROW, (to,) jcter, 173, 502, N. B. 
 
 THUNDER, le tonnerrc. It thun- 
 ders very much, il fait leaucoup de 
 tonnerre, 215. 
 
 THUS, So,ai?isi, 179. 
 
 THY, ton, ta, tes, 108, 282, 466. 
 
 THYSELF, toi-meme, 471 ; (reflec- 
 tive,) te, t'y, 4,'en, 477, 478. 
 
 TIEN, (le,) la tienne, les tiens, les 
 liennes, thine, 108, 291, 483; d toi, 
 484. 
 
 TILL, until, jusque ; till noon, 
 iusqu'a midi, 189; not until, pas 
 avant de, 310. 
 
 TIRED, (to be,) ct re las, lasse, 429 ; 
 to get tired, s'c?inuyer, 376. 
 
 TIRER, to pull, draw, shoot, fire, 
 844. 
 
 To, a, 101, 102; to the, au, a la, 
 &c., 463 ; in order to, pour, 92. 
 
 1 01, thou ; ioi qui t yue, 4C8, 470 
 d td, to thec, 476 ; d loi, thine, 484 
 
 TON, *, fes, thy, 108, 282, 466. 
 
 Too, trop, 150; too much, many 
 trap, 66, 67; too late, trop tard ; 
 soon, early, Jrop *5; large, great, 
 trop grand; little, trop peu ; too 
 small, trop petit, 150. 
 
 Tccii A TO'JR, alternate^ by 
 turns, 404. 
 
 TOUT, tons, all. Tout Le vin ; 
 tons les livres, 110. Toitt autant, 
 quite (just) as much, 76. Tout dt 
 suite, immediately, 108 ; pas du tout. 
 not at all, 115. Tout d coup, all at 
 once, 290. 
 
 TOWARDS, envers, vers, 270, 393. 
 
 TRAVEL, (to,) voyager, 194, 213; 
 through Europe, faire le tour Jd 
 V Europe, 400. 
 
 TREAT, (to ) use somebody well, 
 (ill,) en user lien, (mal,) avec quel- 
 qu'un, 394. 
 
 TRICK, (to play a,) jouer un tour, 
 400. 
 
 TROMPER, to deceive, cheat; se 
 tromper, to make a mistake, 219. 
 
 TROP, too, too much, many, 65, 
 150. 
 
 TRUST (to) one, sejicr d quclqu'un; 
 to distrust one, se defer de quel- 
 qu'un, 325. 
 
 TRUTH, (the,) la veritv ; in truth, 
 indeed, en verite ! 47, 105. 
 
 Tu, thou, 107, N. 1. 
 
 TURN, (to,) a soldier, se faire sol- 
 datj 225 ; to account, (make the best 
 of,) faire valoir t 427 ; one into ridi- 
 cule, tourner quelqu'un en ridicule, 
 388. Turn, (the,) le tour. To take 
 a turn, (a walk,) faire un tour, 242, 
 400. 
 
 T'Y, thee to it there, 475 ; t'y en, 
 thee some there, 476 ; t'y, (rcflec* 
 tive,) thyself, 478. 
 
 U. 
 
 UN, une, a, fn, one, 63, 68, 70^ 
 285, 129 ; not used before cent, &c 
 
INDEX. 
 
 585 
 
 462. Pas un qui, que, not one that, 
 governs the subjunctive, 515 5. 
 L'un I'autre, Vvae Vaulre, each 
 other; etes vous contents Vun de 
 I'autre? are you pleased with each 
 other ? Nous le sommes, we are, 331. 
 The one, (when not in apposition to 
 the other,) not Vun, but celui, 43. 
 
 UNDER, sous; under it, dessous, 
 177. 
 
 UNDERSTAND, (to,) comprendrc, 
 compris, 182; to make one's self 
 understood, sefaire comprendrc, 370. 
 
 UNIPERSONAL VERBS govern the 
 subjunctive, 515 4. 
 
 UNLESS, a mains que . . . ne . . . , 
 govern the subjunctive, 537. 
 
 UNTIL, jusqiCd ce que, governs the 
 subjunctive, 537; jusqu'alors, 189. 
 
 UP, to get up, (to rise,) se lever, 
 '2-22. To go up, monter, 304, N. 1 ; 
 to stand up, ctre debout ; to remain 
 up, Tester debout, 373. Up stairs, en 
 laut, 193. Up to the lop,jusqu'en 
 kaut, 428. 
 
 ;, sur ; upon it, dessus, 175. 
 
 Us, nous, d nous. See Nous. 
 
 USER, to wear out, 180. En uter 
 lien (mal)avcc quelqu'un. To tr:at 
 one well, (ill,) 394. 
 
 V. 
 
 VALOIR, to be worth ; volant, valu, 
 valoir mieux, to be better, 199 ; la 
 peinc, to be worth while. Cela en 
 vaut-il la peine ? Is it worth while ? 
 270. Faire valoir, to turn to account, 
 427. 
 
 VEILLE, (Za,) the day before, 340. 
 
 VENIR, to come, venant, venu, 88, 
 121, 175. Vcnir de, to have just, 
 248, 504 3. Venir en pensce, (d 
 Videe, d V esprit,} to have a thought, 
 366. Venir and aller, are in French 
 followed by an infinitive, and the 
 conjunction and is not rendered, 374, 
 51212. 
 
 VERBS, verbes. The four conjuga- 
 tions, 80. Compound and derivative 
 
 verbs are conjugated like theii primi- 
 tives, 179. Auxiliaries, See AVOIR, 
 ETRE. Verbs requiring it re, to be, aa 
 auxiliary, 175,530. Active verbs, 167. 
 Neuter, 175, 530. Passive, 212, 530. 
 Reflective, 217, 531. Always conju- 
 gated with the auxiliary ttre, 4 
 They always have two pronouns of 
 the same person, 2. Impersonal, 
 227. They usually govern the sub- 
 junctive, 5154. Do, am, &c., when 
 used to interrogate, may be rendered 
 by cst-ce que? With some verbs 
 est-ceque must be used, 139. When 
 ne is used without pas, 322; clre 
 connected by d with an infinitive 
 expresses the present tense, as Je 
 suis d lire, I am reading, 399, 502 6. 
 Most passive verbs may be made 
 reflected, 5315. 
 
 VERS, envers, towards, 270 ; the 
 former is used physically, the latter 
 morally, 393. 
 
 VIS-A-VIS de, opposite to, 387. 
 
 VIVRE, to live, vivant, vecu, 214; 
 Fail-il Ion vivre d Paris ? Is thb 
 living good in Paris ? 315. 
 
 VOILA, there is ; void, here is 
 voild pourquoi, that is the reasoi, 
 why; voild pourquoi je ledis, there 
 fore I say so, 312. 
 
 VOILE, (un,) a veil, is masculine ; 
 wie voile, a sail, feminine, 350, N. 1 
 A pleines voiles, (d toutes voiles,} un 
 der full sail, 350. 
 
 VOIR, to see, voyant, vu, voycz^ 92, 
 121, 172. 
 
 VOTRE, plural vos, your, 25, 44, 
 282, 466. 
 
 VOTRE, (le, la.) les votres, yours, 
 30, 291, 483. 
 
 VOULOIR, to be willing, to wish. 
 voulant, voulu, 83, 175. 
 
 Vous, you, 25, 409. Vous qui f 
 you who, vous-meme, s, yourself, 471. 
 Objective vous, you, to you, 472; 
 vous y, you there, 475 ; vous en, you 
 some, vous y tn, you some there ; d 
 vous, to you. 476 ; vous (reflect.) lei 
 
586 
 
 IND SX- 
 
 clasp, 477, vous y ; 2d class, nous en ; 
 3d c3ass, yourselves, 478 ; a vous, 
 yours, 484, $ 106. 
 
 VOYAGER, (to travel,) 194, voya- 
 gcant, 5022. 
 
 W. 
 
 WAKE, (to,) eveiller, reveiller, 369. 
 
 WALK, (to,) marcher, 295 ; to take 
 a walk, se promener ; to go walking ; 
 viler se promener, 222. To walk or 
 Iravel a mile,/aire un mille, 295. 
 
 WANT, (to,) to be in want of, f o 
 have need of, avoir besoin de, 112; 
 falloir, ilfaut, 197, 06s. 89; vouloir, 
 83. 175. 
 
 WARM, cliaud. Are you warni ? 
 avez-vous chaud ? 31. Is it warm ? 
 fait-il chaud ? 53. 
 
 WAY, chemin, 105 ; on the way, 
 en chemin, 121 ; in this way, de cctte 
 maniere, 180 ; about asking the way, 
 378. 
 
 WE, nous, 67, 409; we, nous au- 
 :;v.s', 471. 
 
 WEATHER, (the,) le temps. How 
 is the weather ? what weather is it ? 
 qucl temps fait-il ? 53, 208. 
 
 WELCOME, (to be,) etre le lien 
 vcjiu, 376. 
 
 WELL, lien, 26, 147, ?19. To be 
 well, clre lien portant, e, etre en lonne 
 stints ; she is well, die est bien por- 
 tante, clle se porte bien, elle est en 
 bonne santc, 330. 
 
 WET, damp, humide. Is the wea- 
 ther damp ? Fait-il humide ? 208. 
 
 WHAT? que? (before a verb,) 29; 
 alter verbs and prepositions, quoi? 
 100; que, quoi, qu'est-ce que? what, 
 nominative, qu'est-ce quit what is, 
 w&s, &c., (interrogative,) followed by 
 a preposition, qu'y a-t-il...? qu'y 
 avait-il? 486. What, (or the thing 
 which,) ce qui, ce que, 124, 481 , $ 89 ; 
 what is, (relative,) followed by a pre- 
 position, ce qifil y a. 4804. What ? 
 yiiest -cc que ccst ? qu'cst-ce que c'est 
 
 que ccla? .129, 171. What! 
 quoi! 487. 
 
 WHATEVER, whatsoever, 
 quelque, quelleque,&LC., quelquechnni 
 que, quoique, quoi que ce soit, 422, 
 423, 516. 
 
 WHEN, quand, lorsque, 88, 242; 
 used with the preterit anterieur, 521. 
 When connects two future tenses, 
 235, 06s. 106. 
 
 WHERE? ou ? 86. Where fiumi 
 whence? d'oit? 200, 252. Where 
 did we stop? ou en eiions-nousl 
 Somewhere, anywhere, quelqucpart; 
 nowhere, not anywhere, nulle pan, 
 89. 
 
 WHICH or WHAT? quel? quelst 
 &c., 25, 27, 45, 386, 485, 486. Of 
 which, dont, 228, 481. Which one ? 
 Lequel, laquelle? &c., 36, 45, 386. 
 Which, having a part of a sentence 
 for antecedent, is translated by cs 
 qui, ce que, 481, $ 90. (See THATJ 
 
 WHO ? qui ? whose ? d qui ? dont, 
 de qui, 100, 147; d qui, aux quels ? 
 230. Whom? qui? 478; whom, 
 (relative,) que, 479. 
 
 WHOEVER, qui que ce soit, 422, 
 516. 
 .WHY? pourquoi? 81, 184. 
 
 WIPE, essuyer, 184, 502 3. 
 
 WISH, (to,) souhaiter, vouloir, dc 
 sirer, 83, 131. I wish I had it, ji 
 voudrais Vavoir, 508. I wish I hau 
 been able to go,faurais voulu pou 
 voir y allcr, 509. 
 
 WITH, avec, 88. With, rendered 
 by de, 224, 254, 210, 303 ; by d, 338, 
 Vhomme d Z' habit bleu. 
 
 WITHDRAW, (to,) go away from, 
 s'eloigner de. I go from the fire t% 7 
 m'cloigne dufeu, 260. 
 
 WITHOUT, sa?is ; without ipeak 
 ing, sansparler, 215, 
 
 WORD, (the,) le mot, 50, 172, 
 Words used with the preposition de 
 before an infinitive, 80. When a 
 word is composed of a noun and an 
 
ID1OMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 587 
 
 adjective, both take the mark of 
 the plural, 183. Compound words, 
 494. 
 
 WORTH, (to be,) valoir, 199. To 
 be worth while, valoir la pei?ie, 270. 
 
 WOULD TO GOD, plut d Dieu, au 
 r.tcl, 424. How would must be trans- 
 lated, 508. 
 
 WHITE, (to,) ecrire, ecrit, 89, 121, 
 172. 
 
 WRONG, tort, 36. (See To BE.) 
 
 Y. 
 
 Y, to it, in it, 87. Y, there, (stands 
 before tho verb.) Y aller, to go 
 there ; y vtre, to be there. Its place 
 with the personal pronouns, and en, 
 87, Obs. 102, 110. F, (id,) here; y, 
 
 (Id,) there, 110. Yregarder depres, 
 to be particular, 399. Y a-t-il ? ia 
 there? 180. (See THERE is.) Y 
 translates the English objective pro- 
 noun it ; when by itself, or governed 
 by a preposition, (in, with, &c.,) it is 
 connected with a verb requiring the 
 preposition d, 473, 50. 
 
 YES, OMI, 25. Si FAIT, 51, Obs. 26. 
 
 YESTERDAY, hier ; the day before 
 yesterday; avant-Jiier, 107. 
 
 You, vous, 25, 409. (See Vous.) 
 
 YOUR, votre, vos, 25, 44, 282, 466. 
 
 YOURS, le, (la) v6tre, les votres, 
 30, 291,483; d vous, 484. 
 
 YOURSELF, yourselves, vous-mwne. 
 voiis-memes, 471; (reflected,) vous, 
 vous y, vous C2i, 477, 478. 
 
 IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS, 
 
 She does everything gracefully. 
 These are very beautiful pictures. 
 
 The German interest was contrary 
 
 to the Russian. 
 Cheer up, soldiers; the day is ours. 
 
 To Bleep very late. 
 
 To be on the brink of rum. 
 
 To cast a mist before one's eyes. 
 
 To fret and fume. 
 
 To share the prorit. 
 
 To put somebody to the sword. 
 
 To meet with one's match. 
 
 What day of the month is it ? 
 
 Ali blessings come from God. 
 
 la that your opinion ? Do not ques- 
 tion it. 
 
 Are those your servants ? Yes, they 
 are. 
 
 Madam, are you the mother of that 
 child ? Yes, I am. 
 
 Ladies, are you the strangers that 
 
 Elle a if ela g race dans tout cc qu'clle 
 
 fait. 
 Voila des tableaux d'une grande 
 
 beaut 6. 
 L'interet de V Alhmagne etait op 
 
 pose a celui de la Russie. 
 Courage, soldats ; la victoire eat u 
 
 nous. 
 
 Dormir la grass e matinee. 
 Etre d deux doigts de sa perte. 
 Jeter de la poudre aux yeux. 
 Jeter feu et famine. 
 Partager le gateau. 
 Passer quelqu'un auf.1 de Tepee. 
 Trouver son maitre. 
 Quel quantiome du mois avons-nous ? 
 Tons les biens nous viennent de Dieu 
 Est-ce la votre opinion ? Ne doatex 
 
 point que ce ne la soit. 
 Sont-ce la vos domcstiques ? Oui, 
 
 ce les sont. 
 Madame, etes-vous la mere dc cet 
 
 enfant ? Oui, je la suis. 
 Mesdames, etes-vous Zes clrange-cs 
 
588 
 
 IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 have been announced to me ? 
 Yes, we are. 
 
 Ladies, are you pleased with that 
 music ? Yes, we are. 
 
 Madam, are you a mother ? Yes, 
 
 am. 
 Madam, are you ill ? Yes, I am. 
 
 been 
 
 Madam, how long have you 
 married ? A year. 
 
 *e it long since you arrived ? A fort- 
 night. 
 
 Although that woman shows more 
 resolution than the others, she is 
 nevertheless not the least afflicted. 
 
 That woman has the art of shedding 
 tears, even when she is least 
 afflicted. 
 
 That woman proposed herself as a 
 model for ker children. 
 
 He (or she) has not succeeded in that 
 stratagem. 
 
 To be free and open. 
 
 To be full of business. 
 
 To take fire presently. 
 
 The dry weather we had in the spring 
 has destroyed all the fruit. 
 
 To put to the vote. 
 
 Life is at stake. 
 
 My honor is concerned in it. 
 
 That is understood. 
 
 To act deliberately. 
 
 To go fuU speed. 
 
 Shall you go to the opera fh:'s even- 
 ing ? Yes, I shall. 
 
 Would you cheerfully go to Rome ? 
 Yes, I would. 
 
 qu'ou m'a annoncees ? Oui, noua 
 
 les sommes. 
 Mesdames, etes-vous contentca d* 
 
 cette musique ? Ou, noui I* 
 
 sommes. 
 Madame, etes-vous mere I Oui, je 
 
 le suis. 
 Madame, etes-vous malade ? Oui, 
 
 je le suis. 
 
 Madame, depuis quel jemps etes- 
 vous mariee ? Je le suis depuifl 
 
 un an. 
 Y,a-t-il long-temps que vous etes 
 
 arrivee ? Je le suis depuis quinzc 
 
 jours. 
 Quoique cette femme montre plus do 
 
 fermete que les autresj elle n'esi 
 
 pas pour cela la moins affligee. 
 Cette iemme a 1'art de repandre dea 
 
 larmes dans le temps meme qu'ella 
 
 est le moins ajjligte. 
 Cette femme s'est proposee pour 
 
 module a ses enfants. 
 Cette ruse ne lui a pas rcussi. 
 
 Avoir le comr sur les levres. 
 Avoir des affaires par-dessus lea 
 
 yeux. 
 
 Avoir la tete pres du bonnet. 
 La secheresse qu'il y a eu au prin- 
 
 temps a fait perir tous lee fruits. 
 Aller aux voix. 
 II y va de la vie. 
 II y va de mon honneur. 
 Cela va sans dire. 
 Aller pas a pas. 
 Aller a bride abattue. 
 Irez-vous ce wr a i'opera ? Oui, 
 
 firai. 
 Iriez-vous avrc plaisir a Romef 
 
 Oui, firais. 
 
 3- 
 
 THE END. 
 
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any 
 University of California Library 
 
 or to the 
 
 NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station 
 University of California 
 Richmond, CA 94804-4698 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 2-month loans may be renewed by calling 
 (510)642-6753 
 
 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing 
 books to NRLF 
 
 Renewals and recharges may be made 4 
 days prior to due date. 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 APR 11 2000 
 
 JUL 1 5 2002 
 
 12,000(11/95) 
 
BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 
 / '874 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY